National Testing Agency [NTA]

National Eligibility cum Entrance Test

[NEET - 2024]
PHYSICS
Chief Editor
A.K. Mahajan
Compiled By
Er. Ravi Prakash Vishwakarma[MNNIT] & Er. Shiv Sunder Singh [MNNIT]
Writers
Er. Shubham Vishwakarma, Er. Siddharth Mishra, Ms. Jaya Dwivedi,
Mr. Anshuman Tiwari, Mr. Akhilesh Kumar, Er. Shubham Kumar Singh
Computer Graphics By
Balkrishna Tripathi & Ashish Giri
Editorial Office
12, Church Lane Prayagraj-211002
Mob. : 9415650134
Email : [email protected]
website : www.yctbooks.com/ www.yctfastbooks.com
 All Rights Reserved with Publisher
Publisher Declaration
Edited and Published by A.K. Mahajan for YCT Publications Pvt. Ltd.
and printed by Om Sai Offset. In order to Publish the book,
full care has been taken by the Editor and the Publisher,
still your suggestions and queries are welcomed. Rs. : 895/-
In the event of any dispute, the judicial area will be Prayagraj.
 NEET/AIPMT Physics
Class- XI
1: Units and Measurements ........................................................................ 13-31
1.1 Units .................................................................................................................................................13
1.2 Measurements .................................................................................................................................13
1.3 Accuracy, Precision of Instruments and Errors in Measurement .....................................................15
1.4 Significant Figures ...........................................................................................................................18
1.5 Dimensional Analysis and its Applications .....................................................................................19
1.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ............................................................................................................29
2: Motion in Straight Line ......................................................................... 32-56
2.1 Position, Path Length and Displacement..........................................................................................32
2.2 Average Velocity and Average Speed ...............................................................................................34
2.3 Instantaneous Velocity and Instantaneous speed ...............................................................................38
2.4 Kinematic Equation for Motion .......................................................................................................43
2.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems ............................................................................................................55
3: Motion in a plane ..................................................................................... 57-74
3.1 Scalars and Vectors...........................................................................................................................57
3.2 Relative Velocity ..............................................................................................................................62
3.3 Projectile Motion..............................................................................................................................64
3.4 Uniform Circular Motion .................................................................................................................69
3.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems ............................................................................................................72
4: Laws of Motion ...................................................................................... 75-113
4.1 Newton's Law of Motion..................................................................................................................75
4.2 Impulse, Momentum & Collision ....................................................................................................85
4.3 Force Equilibrium ...........................................................................................................................97
4.4 Circular Motion ................................................................................................................................99
4.5 Friction ...........................................................................................................................................105
4.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems .......................................................................................................... 111
5: Work, Energy and Power ................................................................... 114-134
5.1 Work ............................................................................................................................................... 114
5.2 Kinetic Energy ............................................................................................................................... 118
5.3 Potential Energy .............................................................................................................................121
5.4 Law of Conservation of Energy .....................................................................................................124
5.5 Power ............................................................................................................................................127
5.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems .......................................................................................................129
6: System of Particles and Rotational Motion ....................................... 135-165
6.1 Centre of Mass ...............................................................................................................................135
6.2 Moment of Inertia .........................................................................................................................139
6.3 Angular Velocity and its Relation with Linear Velocity.................................................................147
6.4 Torque and Angular Momentum ...................................................................................................151
6.5 Rolling Motion ..............................................................................................................................158
6.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems .........................................................................................................154
1
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
7. Gravitation .......................................................................................... 166-189
7.1 Kepler's Laws .................................................................................................................................166
7.2 Universal Law of Gravitation .......................................................................................................168
7.3 Acceleration due to Gravity ..........................................................................................................170
7.4 Gravitational Potential Energy & Kinetic Energy..........................................................................175
7.5 Orbital velocity & Escape Velocity ................................................................................................182
7.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................186
8: Mechanical Properties of solids ........................................................ 190-197
8.1 Stress and strain .............................................................................................................................190
8.2 Elastic Behaviour of solids ...........................................................................................................191
8.3 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................194
9: Mechanical Properties of Fluids ....................................................... 198-206
9.1 Pressure ..........................................................................................................................................198
9.2 Streamline Flow .............................................................................................................................199
9.3 Bernoulli's Principle .......................................................................................................................200
9.4 Viscosity .........................................................................................................................................201
9.5 Surface Tension ..............................................................................................................................203
9.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................205
10 Thermal Properties of Matter ............................................................ 207-227
10.1 Measurement of Temperature.........................................................................................................207
10.2 Thermal Expansion .......................................................................................................................207
10.3 Calorimetry ....................................................................................................................................209
10.4 Heat Transfer (Conduction, Convection & Radiation) ..................................................................210
10.5 Newton's Law of Cooling ..............................................................................................................222
10.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................225
11 Thermodynamics ................................................................................. 228-245
11.1 Thermodynamic Processes .............................................................................................................228
11.2 Zeroth & First Law of Thermodynamics ......................................................................................233
11.3 Second Law of Thermodynamics & Entropy.................................................................................238
11.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................243
12: Kinetic Theory ..................................................................................... 246-262
12.1 Introduction & Behaviour of Gases ..............................................................................................246
12.2 Kinetic Theory of Gases.................................................................................................................249
12.3 Mean free Path ..............................................................................................................................259
12.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems .........................................................................................................260
13: Oscillations ........................................................................................... 263-291
13.1 Periodic and Oscillatory Motions ..................................................................................................263
13.2 Simple Harmonic Motion ..............................................................................................................268
13.3 Free, Forced Oscillations and Resonance .....................................................................................286
13.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................288
2
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
14: Waves .................................................................................................... 292-319
14.1 Transverse and Longitudinal Waves .............................................................................................292
14.2 Progressive Wave, Travelling Wave & Standing Wave..................................................................293
14.3 The Principle of Superposition of Waves & Reflection of Waves .................................................298
14.4 Sound and Beats .............................................................................................................................300
14.5 Doppler Effect ................................................................................................................................313
14.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................317
Class -XII
15 Electric Charges and Fields- .............................................................. 320-337
15.1 Electric Charge ...............................................................................................................................320
15.2 Coulomb's Law ..............................................................................................................................321
15.3 Electric Field ..................................................................................................................................324
15.4 Electric Flux and Gauss's Law .......................................................................................................328
15.5 Electric Dipole ..............................................................................................................................331
15.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................335
16: Electrostatics Potential and Capacitance .......................................... 338-359
16.1 Electrostatics Potential & Electrostatics Potential Energy ............................................................338
16.2 Dielectrics and Polarisation ..........................................................................................................346
16.3 Capacitors and Capacitance ..........................................................................................................348
16.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................358
17: Current Electricity ............................................................................. 360-410
17.1 Electric Current .............................................................................................................................360
17.2 Drift of Electrons ...........................................................................................................................361
17.3 Resistance & Resistivity ...............................................................................................................362
17.4 Heating effect of Current ...............................................................................................................369
17.5 Combination of Resistors- Series and Parallel ..............................................................................377
17.6 Cells, EMF, Internal Resistance .....................................................................................................390
17.7 Combination of Cells - Series and in Parallel ...............................................................................395
17.8 Kirchhoff's Rules............................................................................................................................397
17.9 Wheatstone Bridge, Meter Bridge & Potentiometer ......................................................................399
17.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems
........................................................................................................................................................408
18: Moving Charges and Magnestism ..................................................... 411-441
18.1 Magnetic Force .............................................................................................................................. 411
18.2 Motion in Electric and Magnetic Fields .........................................................................................415
18.3 Biot - Savart Law ..........................................................................................................................424
18.4 Magnetic Field on the Axis of a Circular Current Loop ................................................................429
18.5 Ampere's Circuit Law ....................................................................................................................430
18.6 The Solenoid and Toroid ...............................................................................................................431
18.7 Force between two parallel Currents, the Ampere .........................................................................435
3
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
18.8 Torque on current Loop, Magnetic Dipole .....................................................................................435
18.9 The Moving Coil Galavanometer ..................................................................................................438
18.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems .........................................................................................................440
19: Magnetism and Matter ....................................................................... 442-451
19.1 The Bar Magnet .............................................................................................................................442
19.2 The Earth's Magnetism ..................................................................................................................445
19.3 Magnetisation and Magnetic Intensity .........................................................................................447
19.4 Magnetic Properties of Materials ..................................................................................................447
19.5 Permanent Magnets and Electromagnets ......................................................................................449
19.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................450
20: Electromagnetic Induction ................................................................ 452-464
20.1 Magnetic Flux ................................................................................................................................452
20.2 Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic Induction.................................................................................453
20.3 Lenz's Law and conservation of Energy ........................................................................................456
20.4 Motional Electromotive Force .......................................................................................................456
20.5 Eddy Currents ...............................................................................................................................459
20.6 Inductance .....................................................................................................................................460
20.7 AC generator ..................................................................................................................................462
20.8 NCERT Exemplar Problems .........................................................................................................462
21: Alternating Current ........................................................................... 465-484
21.1 AC Voltage Applied to a Resistor ..................................................................................................465
21.2 Representation of AC Current and Voltage by Rotating Vectors - Phasors ...................................467
21.3 AC Voltage Applied to an Inductor ...............................................................................................468
21.4 AC Voltage Applied to a Capacitor ...............................................................................................469
21.5 AC Voltage Applied to a series LCR Circuit..................................................................................471
21.6 Power in AC Circuit: The Power Factor ........................................................................................479
21.7 LC Oscillations ..............................................................................................................................480
21.8 Transformers ..................................................................................................................................480
21.9 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................483
22: Electromagnetic Waves ...................................................................... 485-496
22.1 Displacement Current ....................................................................................................................485
22.2 Electromagnetic Waves ..................................................................................................................485
22.3 Electromagnetic Spectrum .............................................................................................................492
22.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................494
23: Ray Optics and Optical Instruments ................................................ 497-532
23.1 Reflection of Light by Spherical Mirrors .......................................................................................497
23.2 Refraction ......................................................................................................................................499
23.3 Total Internal Reflection ...............................................................................................................503
23.4 Refraction at spherical surfaces and by Lenses .............................................................................505
23.5 Refraction through a Prism ............................................................................................................516
4
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
23.6 Some Natural Phenomena due to Sunlight .....................................................................................521
23.7 Optical Instruments .......................................................................................................................523
23.8 A Plane Mirror................................................................................................................................527
23.9 The Human Eye..............................................................................................................................527
23.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................528
24: Wave Optics ........................................................................................ 533-547
24.1 Huygens Principle .........................................................................................................................533
24.2 Coherent and Incoherent Addition of Waves..................................................................................535
24.3 Interference of Light Waves and Young's Experiment .....................................................................536
24.4 Diffraction .....................................................................................................................................541
24.5 Polarisation.....................................................................................................................................544
24.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................546
25: Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter ............................................... 548-574
25.1 Electron Emission ........................................................................................................................548
25.2 Photoelectric Effect .......................................................................................................................549
25.3 Particle and Wave Nature of Light .................................................................................................562
25.4 Davisson and Germer Experiment ................................................................................................571
25.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................572
26: Atoms .................................................................................................... 575-592
26:1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................575
26.2 Alpha - Particle Scattering and Rutherford's Nuclear Model of Atom ..........................................576
26.3 Bohr Model of the Hydrogen Atom ..............................................................................................576
26.4 The Line Spectra of the Hydrogen Atom ......................................................................................586
26.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................591
27: Nuclei .................................................................................................... 593-619
27.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................593
27.2 Atomic Masses and composition of Nucleus .................................................................................594
27.3 Size of the Nucleus ........................................................................................................................595
27.4 Mass- Energy and Nuclear Binding Energy ...................................................................................597
27.5 Nuclear Force .................................................................................................................................601
27.6 Radioactivity .................................................................................................................................601
27.7 Nuclear Energy .............................................................................................................................615
27.8 NCERT Exemplar Problems ..........................................................................................................617
28: Semiconductor Electronics: Materials, Devices and Simple Circuits ............ 620-656
28.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................620
28.2 Intrinsic & Extrinsic Semiconductor..............................................................................................624
28.3 P- N Junction & Diode ...................................................................................................................626
28.4 Digital Electronics and Logic Gates ..............................................................................................637
28.5 A Junction Transistor .....................................................................................................................645
28.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems .........................................................................................................654
5
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
NEET Exam Pattern & Syllabus
As per the NEET exam pattern, the questions in the Section A 35 140
medical entrance examination will be divided into two Botany
Section B 15 40
sections: Section A and B. Section A will contain 35
questions while Section B will have 15 questions. Of Section A 35 140
Zoology
these 15 questions in Section B, candidates will have to Section B 15 40
answer 10 questions. Total Marks 720
NTA will conduct the NEET exam in pen and paper-
based mode for a 3 hours 20 minutes duration, where
PHYSICS
Physical World and Measurement
candidates must answer Multiple Choice Questions
• Physics: Scope and excitement; nature of physical
(MCQs) from Physics, Chemistry, and Biology subjects
laws; Physics, technology and society.
as per the given NEET syllabus. Aspirants seeking more
• Need for measurement: Units of measurement;
information regarding the NEET exam pattern can check
systems of units; SI units, fundamental and derived
the article below to know the level of the exam, types,
units. Length, mass and time measurements;
and the number of questions, marking schemes, and all
accuracy and precision of measuring instruments;
other relevant information. errors in measurement; significant figures.
Factors in Exam Pattern Details • Dimensions of physical quantities, dimensional
Pen and Paper-based. analysis and its applications.
Candidates will be Kinematics
Mode of NEET Question given an OMR sheet to • Frame of reference, Motion in a straight line;
Paper mark the answers with Position-time graph, speed and velocity. Uniform
a black or blue and non-uniform motion, average speed and
ballpoint pen instantaneous velocity. Uniformly accelerated
Duration of the NEET exam 3 hours and 20 minutes motion, velocity-time and position-time graphs, for
English, Hindi, uniformly accelerated motion (graphical treatment).
Assamese, Bengali, • Elementary concepts of differentiation and
Gujarati, Marathi, integration for describing motion. Scalar and vector
Language/Medium quantities: Position and displacement vectors,
Tamil, Telugu, Oriya,
Malayalam, Kannada, general vectors, general vectors and notation,
Punjabi and Urdu equality of vectors, multiplication of vectors by a
Multiple Choice real number; addition and subtraction of vectors.
Question Type Relative velocity.
Questions (MCQs)
• Unit vectors. Resolution of a vector in a plane-
A total of 200
rectangular components.
questions will be asked
• Scalar and Vector products of Vectors. Motion in a
Total Number of Questions out of which
plane. Cases of uniform velocity and uniform
candidates will have to
acceleration- projectile motion. Uniform circular
answer 180 questions motion.
Total marks in NEET 720 Marks Laws of Motion
4 marks will be • Intuitive concept of force. Inertia, Newton’s first law
awarded for each of motion; momentum and Newton’s second law of
NEET Marking Scheme correct answer & 1 motion; impulse; Newton’s third law of motion. Law
mark will be deducted of conservation of linear momentum and its
for each wrong attempt applications.
NEET Exam Sections and Total Marks • Equilibrium of concurrent forces. Static and Kinetic
Section- friction, laws of friction, rolling friction, lubrication.
Number of
Subjects Sections wise • Dynamics of uniform circular motion. Centripetal
Questions
Marks force, examples of circular motion (vehicle on level
Section A 35 140 circular road, vehicle on banked road).
Physics Work, Energy and Power
Section B 15 40 • Work done by a constant force and variable force;
Section A 35 140 kinetic energy, work-energy theorem, power.
Chemistry • Notion of potential energy, potential energy of a
Section B 15 40
spring, conservative forces; conservation of
3
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
mechanical energy (kinetic and potential energies); • Kinetic theory of gases: Assumptions, concept of
nonconservative forces; motion in a vertical circle, pressure. Kinetic energy and temperature; degrees of
elastic and inelastic collisions in one and two freedom, law of equipartition of energy (statement
dimensions. only) and application to specific heat capacities of
Motion of System of Particles and Rigid Body gases; concept of mean free path.
• Centre of mass of a two-particle system, momentum Oscillations and Waves
conservation and centre of mass motion. Centre of • Periodic motion-period, frequency, displacement as
mass of a rigid body; centre of mass of uniform rod. a function of time. Periodic functions. Simple
• Moment of a force,-torque, angular momentum, harmonic motion(SHM) and its equation; phase;
conservation of angular momentum with some oscillations of a spring-restoring force and force
examples. constant; energy in SHM –Kinetic and potential
energies; simple pendulum-derivation of expression
• Equilibrium of rigid bodies, rigid body rotation and
for its time period; free, forced and damped
equation of rotational motion, comparison of linear
oscillations (qualitative ideas only), resonance.
and rotational motions; moment of inertia, radius of
• Wave motion. Longitudinal and transverse waves,
gyration. Values of M.I. for simple geometrical
speed of wave motion. Displacement relation for a
objects (no derivation). Statement of parallel and
progressive wave. Principle of superposition of
perpendicular axes theorems and their applications. waves, reflection of waves, standing waves in
Gravitation strings and organ pipes, fundamental mode and
• Kepler’s laws of planetary motion. The universal harmonics. Beats. Doppler effect.
law of gravitation. Acceleration due to gravity and Electrostatics
its variation with altitude and depth. • Electric charges and their conservation. Coulomb’s
• Gravitational potential energy; gravitational law-force between two point charges, forces
potential. Escape velocity, orbital velocity of a between multiple charges; superposition principle
satellite. Geostationary satellites. and continuous charge distribution.
Properties of Bulk Matter • Electric field, electric field due to a point charge,
• Elastic behavior, Stress-strain relationship. Hooke’s electric field lines; electric dipole, electric field due
law, Young’s modulus, bulk modulus, shear, to a dipole; torque on a dipole in a uniform electric
modulus of rigidity, poisson’s ratio; elastic energy. field.
• Viscosity, Stokes’ law, terminal velocity, Reynold’s • Electric flux, statement of Gauss’s theorem and its
number, streamline and turbulent flow. Critical applications to find field due to infinitely long
velocity, Bernoulli’s theorem and its applications. straight wire, uniformly charged infinite plane sheet
• Surface energy and surface tension, angle of contact, and uniformly charged thin spherical shell (field
excess of pressure, application of surface tension inside and outside)
ideas to drops, bubbles and capillary rise. • Electric potential, potential difference, electric
• Heat, temperature, thermal expansion; thermal potential due to a point charge, a dipole and system
of charges: equipotential surfaces, electrical
expansion of solids, liquids, and gases. Anomalous
potential energy of a system of two point charges
expansion. Specific heat capacity: Cp, Cv-
and of electric diploes in an electrostatic field.
calorimetry; change of state – latent heat.
• Conductors and insulators, free charges and bound
• Heat transfer- conduction and thermal conductivity,
charges inside a conductor. Dielectrics and electric
convection and radiation. Qualitative ideas of Black polarization, capacitors and capacitance,
Body Radiation, Wein’s displacement law, and combination of capacitors in series and in parallel,
Green House effect. capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with and
• Newton’s law of cooling and Stefan’s law. without dielectric medium between the plates,
Thermodynamics energy stored in a capacitor, Van de Graff generator.
• Thermal equilibrium and definition of temperature Current Electricity
(zeroth law of Thermodynamics). Heat, work and • Electric current, flow of electric charges in a
internal energy. First law of thermodynamics. metallic conductor, drift velocity and mobility, and
Isothermal and adiabatic processes. their relation with electric current; Ohm’s law,
• Second law of the thermodynamics: Reversible and electrical resistance, V-I characteristics (liner and
irreversible processes. Heat engines and non-linear), electrical energy and power, electrical
refrigerators. resistivity and conductivity.
Behaviour of Perfect Gas and Kinetic Theory • Carbon resistors, colour code for carbon resistors;
• Equation of state of a perfect gas, work done on series and parallel combinations of resistors;
compressing a gas. temperature dependence of resistance.
4
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
• Internal resistance of a cell, potential difference and and its applications optical fibres, refraction at
emf of a cell, combination of cells in series and in spherical surfaces, lenses, thin lens formula, lens-
parallel. maker’s formula. Magnification, power of a lens,
• Kirchhoff’s laws and simple applications. combination of thin lenses in contact combination of
Wheatstone bridge, metre bridge. a lens and a mirror. Refraction and dispersion of
• Potentiometer-principle and applications to measure light through a prism.
potential difference, and for comparing emf of two • Scattering of light- blue colour of the sky and
cells; measurement of internal resistance of a cell. reddish appearance of the sun at sunrise and sunset.
Magnetic Effects of Current and Magnetism • Optical instruments: Human eye, image formation
• Concept of magnetic field, Oersted’s experiment. and accommodation, correction of eye defects
Biot-Savart law and its application to current (myopia and hypermetropia) using lenses.
carrying circular loop. • Microscopes and astronomical telescopes (reflecting
• Ampere’s law and its applications to infinitely long and refracting) and their magnifying powers.
straight wire, straight and toroidal solenoids. Force • Wave optics: Wavefront and Huygens’ principle,
on a moving charge in uniform magnetic and electric reflection and refraction of plane wave at a plane
fields. Cyclotron. surface using wavefronts.
• Force on a current-carrying conductor in a uniform • Proof of laws of reflection and refraction using
magnetic field. Force between two parallel current- Huygens’ principle.
carrying conductors-definition of ampere. Torque • Interference, Young’s double hole experiment and
experienced by a current loop in a magnetic field; expression for fringe width, coherent sources and
moving coil galvanometer-its current sensitivity and sustained interference of light.
conversion to ammeter and voltmeter. • Diffraction due to a single slit, width of central
• Current loop as a magnetic dipole and its magnetic maximum.
dipole moment. Magnetic dipole moment of a • Resolving power of microscopes and astronomical
revolving electron. Magnetic field intensity due to a telescopes. Polarisation, plane polarized light;
magnetic dipole (bar magnet) along its axis and Brewster’s law, uses of plane polarized light and
perpendicular to its axis. Torque on a magnetic Polaroids.
dipole (bar magnet) in a uniform magnetic field; bar Dual Nature of Matter and Radiation
magnet as an equivalent solenoid, magnetic field • Photoelectric effect, Hertz and Lenard’s
lines; Earth’s magnetic field and magnetic elements. observations; Einstein’s photoelectric equation-
• Para-, dia-and ferro-magnetic substances, with particle nature of light.
examples. • Matter waves- wave nature of particles, de Broglie
• Electromagnetic and factors affecting their strengths. relation. Davisson-Germer experiment (experimental
Permanent magnets. details should be omitted; only conclusion should be
Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating explained).
Currents Atoms and Nuclei
• Electromagnetic induction; Faraday’s law, induced • Alpha- particle scattering experiments; Rutherford’s
emf and current; Lenz’s Law, Eddy currents. Self model of atom; Bohr model, energy levels,
and mutual inductance. hydrogen spectrum. Composition and size of
• Alternating currents, peak and rms value of nucleus, atomic masses, isotopes, isobars; isotones.
alternating current/ voltage; reactance and • Radioactivity- alpha, beta and gamma particles/ rays
impedance; LC oscillations (qualitative treatment and their properties decay law. Mass-energy
only), LCR series circuit, resonance; power in AC relation, mass defect; binding energy per nucleon
circuits, wattles current. and its variation with mass number, nuclear fission
• AC generator and transformer. and fusion.
Electromagnetic Waves Electronic Devices
• Need for displacement current. • Energy bands in solids (qualitative ideas only),
• Electromagnetic waves and their characteristics conductors, insulators and semiconductors;
(qualitative ideas only). Transverse nature of semiconductor diode- I-V characteristics in forward
electromagnetic waves. and reverse bias, diode as a rectifier; I-V
• Electromagnetic spectrum (radio waves, characteristics of LED, photodiode, solar cell, and
microwaves, infrared, visible, ultraviolet, x-rays, Zener diode; Zener diode as a voltage regulator.
gamma rays) including elementary facts about their Junction transistor, transistor action, characteristics
uses. of a transistor; transistor as an amplifier (common
Optics emitter configuration) and oscillator. Logic gates
• Reflection of light, spherical mirrors, mirror (OR, AND, NOT, NAND and NOR). Transistor as a
formula. Refraction of light, total internal reflection switch .
5
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
NEET (UG) /AIPMT AND AIIMS EXAMINATION PAPER ANALYSIS CHART
No. of
S. No. Examination Question Paper Exam Date/ year
Question
1. RE-NEET - Manipur 06.06.2023 50
2. NEET (UG) 07.05.2023 50
3. RE-NEET 04.09.2022 50
4. NEET (UG) 17.07.2022 50
5. NEET (UG) 12.09.2021 50
6. NEET (UG) 14.10.2020 Phase 2 45
7. NEET (UG) 13.09.2020 45
8. NEET (UG) (Odisha) 20.05.2019 45
9. NEET (UG) 05.05.2019 45
10. NEET (UG) 06.05.2018 45
11. NEET (UG) 07.05.2017 45
12. NEET (UG) 24.07.2016 Phase 2 45
13. NEET (UG) 01.05.2016 45
14. AIPMT 25.07.2015 Re-Exam 45
15. AIPMT 03.05.2015 45
16. AIPMT 06.05.2014 45
17. NEET (UG) 05.05.2013 45
18. NEET (UG) (Karnataka) 18.05.2013 45
19. AIPMT 2012 Mains 30
20. AIPMT 2012 50
21. AIPMT 2011 Mains 30
22. AIPMT 2011 50
23. AIPMT 2010 Mains 30
24. AIPMT 2010 50
25. AIPMT 2009 50
26. AIPMT 2008 50
27. AIPMT 2007 50
28. AIPMT 2006 50
29. AIPMT 2005 50
30. AIPMT 2004 50
31. AIPMT 2003 50
32. AIPMT 2002 50
33. AIPMT 2001 50
34. AIPMT 2000 50
35. AIPMT 1999 50
36. AIPMT 1998 50
37. AIPMT 1997 50
38. AIPMT 1996 50
39. AIPMT 1995 50
40. AIPMT 1994 50
41. AIPMT 1993 50
42. AIPMT 1992 50
43. AIPMT 1991 50
44. AIPMT 1990 50
45. AIPMT 1989 50
46. AIPMT 1988 50
47. AIPMT 1987 50
48. NCERT EXEMPLAR Class - XI 127
49. NCERT EXEMPLAR Class - XII 96
Total 2448

Note- After the analysis of the above question papers, a total of 2448 (Repeated questions + similar nature questions)
questions related to Physics have been placed below the name of the original questions, so that the examinees can
understand the nature of repetition of questions.
 Topic wise Trend Analysis of NEET/AIPMT Previous Question Papers
PHYSICS
S. Topic NEET AIPMT AIPMT AIPMT NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET NEET Re NEET NEET Re NEET
2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2022 2023
No. 2013 2014 2015 2015 2016 2016 2017 2019 2020 2023
Phase- Phase- Manipur
(Re) Phase- Odisha
II II
I

1 Modern Physics 5 6 5 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 7 5 5 5 5 4 5

2 Thermal Physics 6 5 6 5 6 5 5 5 4 4 5 5 2 3 3 5 2
(Thermal
Expansion,
Calorimetry, Heat
Transfer, KTG&
Thermodynamics)

3 Current Electricity 3 4 3 3 2 2 2 4 3 2 5 4 4 4 4 3 4
and Effect of
Current

4 Semiconductor and 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 4 3 3 3 3 3
Digital Electronics

5 Magnetic Effect of 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 4 3 4 3 4
Current and
Magnetism

6 Ray Optics and 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 1 4 3 3 2 3 5

Optical Instruments

7 Rotational Motion 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 4 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2

8 Electrostatics 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 3 3 4 3 2 2 3
Join Telegram: @apna_library

9 Gravitation 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2

10 Kinematics 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 2 4 2

11 Wave Motion and 3 3 1 2 3 2 2 2 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 1

Doppler's Effect
12 Properties of matter 2 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 2
and Fluid
Mechanics

13 Wave Optics 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 0
(Nature of Light,
Interference,
Diffraction &
Polarization)

14 Alternating Current 1 0 1 1 2 3 0 1 0 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 4

15 Laws of Motion and 2 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 0 3 3 1

Friction

16 Electromagnetic 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 0 2 2 2 1 1 0
Induction

17 Collisions and 1 1 2 3 0 3 0 1 1 2 1 1 0 2 1 1 2
Centre of Mass

18 Oscillations (SHM, 0 1 2 1 0 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
Damped and Forced
Oscillations &
Resonance)

19 Until, Dimension & 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 4 2 1 2

Measurements

20 Circular Motion 0 0 0 1 4 1 1 1 3 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

21 Work, Energy & 1 0 3 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 2 1 1 2 1

Power

22 EM Waves 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 0

23 Capacitors 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
Join Telegram: @apna_library

24 Basic Mathematics 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
& Vectors.
Total 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 50 50 50 50 50
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1.
Units and Measurements
3. The unit of permittivity of free space ε0 is :-
1.1 Units cegòeâ DeekeâeMe kesâ efueS hejJewÅegleebkeâ ε0 keâe cee$ekeâ
nesiee:-
1. The unit of thermal conductivity is: 2 2
(a) Newton metre2/ Coulomb2/vÙetšve-ceeršj /ketâuee@ce
T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee keâe cee$ekeâ nw : 2
(b) Coulomb2 /Newton metre2/ketâuee@ce /vÙetšve-ceeršj
2
(a) J m–1 K–1 (b) W m K–1
(c) Coulomb2/ (Newton metre)2
(c) W m–1 K–1 (d) J m K–1 2 2
/ketâuee@ce /(vÙetšve-ceeršj)
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (c) : Thermal conductivity is the amount of heat (d) Coulomb/Newton metre/ketâuee@ce/vÙetšve-ceeršj
that flows per unit time through a unit area with a AIPMT-2004
temperature gradient of one Kelvin per unit length. Ans. (b) : By coulomb's law the electrostatic force
Q  ∆T  1 qq
= kA   F= × 12 2
t  l  4πε 0 r
Where k = thermal conductivity
1 q1q 2
Q.l Joule.m ε0 = ×
k= = 4 π F r2
∆T.At 2
K.m .s
Substituting the unit for q,r and F,
k = Wm –1K –1 Coulomb × Coulomb
ε0 =
2. The density of a material in CGS system of Newton × (Metre)2
3
units is 4 g/cm . In a system of units in which
( Coulomb )
2
unit of length is 10 cm and unit of mass is 100g,
the value of density of material will be/cee$ekeâeW ε 0 =
Newton × (Metre) 2
keâer CGS heæefle ceW efkeâmeer heoeLe& keâe IevelJe 4 g/cm nw~
3

cee$ekeâeW keâer Skeâ heæefle efpemeceW uecyeeF& keâer FkeâeF& 10 4. Tesla is the unit of
šsmuee cee$ekeâ nw-
cm leLee õJÙeceeve keâer FkeâeF& 100g nw, lees heoeLe& kesâ
IevelJe keâe ceeve nesiee- (a) electric field/efJeÅegle #es$e
(a) 0.04 (b) 0.4 (c) 40 (d) 400 (b) magnetic field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 (c) electric flux/efJeÅegle heäuekeäme
Ans. (c) : The density of material in CGS system, d = (d) magnetic flux/ÛegcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme
4g/cm3 AIPMT-1997, 1998
In other system of units- Ans. (b) : The international system of unit of field
1 unit of mass =100g intensity for magnetic field is Tesla (T). One Tesla (1T)
1 is defined as the field intensity generating one Newton
1g = unit of mass
100 (N) of force per ampere (A) of the current per meter of
1 unit of length = 10 cm conductor.
1 cm =
1
unit of length B = 1 N A–1 m–1 = 1 Tesla.
10 The unit of electric field is V/m.
4g The unit electric flux is V-m.
So, density =
cm 3 The unit of magnetic flux Weber.
 1 
4 
=  3
100 1.2 Measurements
1
  5. A screw gauge gives the following readings
 10 
when used to measure the diameter of a wire-
4 1000 Skeâ m›etâiespe peye Skeâ leej kesâ JÙeeme keâes ceeheves kesâ efueS
= × = 40 units
100 1 ØeÙegòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees efvecveefueefKele hee"Ùeebkeâ oslee nw :
Physics 13 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Main scale reading : 0 mm 8. The main scale of a vernier callipers has n
cegKÙe hewceeves keâe hee"Ùeebkeâ = 0 efceueerceeršj divisions/cm. n divisions of the vernier scale
Circular scale reading : 52 divisions coincide with (n – 1) divisions of main scale.
Je=òeerÙe hewceeves keâe hee"Ùeebkeâ = 52 Keeves The least count of the vernier callipers is,
Given that 1 mm on main scale corresponds to efkeâmeer JeveeaÙej kewâueerheme& kesâ cegKÙe hewceeves hej n Yeeie Øeefle
100 divisions on the circular scale. The mesvšerceeršj nQ~ JeveeaÙej hewceeves kesâ n Yeeie cegKÙe hewceeves kesâ
diameter of the wire from the above data is (n – 1) YeeieeW kesâ mebheeleer nw~ JeveeaÙej kewâueerheme& keâe
efoÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ cegKÙe hewceevee hej 1 efceueerceeršj, Je=òeerÙe Deuheleceebkeâ nw–
hewceevee kesâ 100 KeeveeW kesâ mebiele neslee nw~ GheÙeg&òeâ efoS
1 1
ieÙes Øes#eCeeW mes leej keâe JÙeeme nw : (a) cm cm (b)
n ( n + 1) ( n + 1)( n –1)
(a) 0.052 cm (b) 0.52 cm
(c) 0.026 cm (d) 0.26 cm 1 1
(c) cm (d) 2 cm
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 n n
Ans. (a) : Here, Pitch of screw gauge = P = 1mm NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
No. of circular divisions, n = 100 Ans. (d) : n main scale divisions (MSD) = 1 cm
1 l
Thus, least count (LC) = P/n = = 0.01mm 1 MSD = cm
100
n
= 0.001cm
n vernier scale division VSD = (n – l) MSD
Diameter of wire = MSR+(CSR×LC)
 n −1
Where, MSR = Main scale reading, CSR = Circular l VSD =   MSD
scale reading.  n 
= 0 + (52×0.001 cm) = 0.052 cm  n −1  l
l VSD =   × cm
6. The angle of 1' (minute of arc) in radian is  n  n
nearly equal to/1 (Ûeehe kesâ keâesCe) kesâ keâesCe keâe n −1
jsef[Ùevme ceW ceeve neslee nw ueieYeie l VSD = 2 cm
n
(a) 1.75 × 10–2 rad (b) 2.91 × 10–4 rad Least Count (L.C.) = 1MSD – 1VSD
(c) 4.85 × 10–4 rad (d) 4.80 × 10–6 rad l n −1
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II = − 2
n n
º
 1  1 π n − ( n − 1)
Ans. (b) : 1 minute =   = × radian =
 
60 60 180 n2
1min = 2.91×10−4 radian n − n +1
=
n2
7. A screw gauge has least count of 0.01 mm and
there are 50 divisions in its circular scale. 1
L.C. = cm
The pitch of the screw gauge is : n2
efkeâmeer m›etâ ies]pe keâe Deuheleceebkeâ 0.01 mm nw leLee
9. A student measured the diameter of a small
Fmekesâ Je=òeerÙe hewceeves hej 50 Yeeie nQ~ steel ball using a screw gauge of least count
Fme m›etâ ies]pe keâe ÛetÌ[er Devlejeue (efheÛe) nw: 0.001 cm. The main scale reading is 5 mm and
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm zero of circular scale division coincides with 25
(c) 1.0 mm (d) 0.01 mm divisions above the reference level. If screw
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 gauge has a zero error of –0.004 cm, the correct
Ans. (b) : Screw gauge: A gauge is an instrument that diameter of the ball is
is used to find the diameter of the wire or thin sheet. efkeâmeer Úe$e ves Fmheele keâer ueIeg ieWo kesâ JÙeeme keâer ceehe
Given that : L.C of screw gauge = 0.01 mm 0.001cm Deuheleceebkeâ Jeeues m›etâ iespe Éeje keâer ~ cegKÙe
no. of divisions of circular Scale = 50 hewceeves keâer ceehe 5mm Deewj Je=òeerÙe hewceeves keâe MetvÙe meboYe&
Pitch uesJeue mes 25 Yeeie Thej nw~ Ùeefo m›etâ iespe ceW MetvÙeebkeâ $egefš
L.C. =
No.of division on circular scale
-0.004 cm nw, lees ieWo keâe mener JÙeeme nesiee
Pitch (a) 0.521 cm (b) 0.525 cm
0.01mm =
50 (c) 0.529 cm (d) 0.053 cm
Pitch = 0.5mm NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Physics 14 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): The least count of screw gauge is 0.001 cm 11. The errors in the measurement which arise due
The main scale reading of the screw gauge is, to unpredictable fluctuations in temperature
MSR = 5 mm = 0.5 cm and voltage supply are :
Circular scale reading CSR = n × least count leehe leLee Jeesušspe œeesle ceW DeØelÙeeMeer Gleej ÛeÌ{eJe kesâ
Where, n = number of divisions coinciding = 25 keâejCe ceeheve ceW $egefšÙeeB nQ :
Zero error in the screw gauge = –0.004cm
Observed reading of the screw gauge (a) Random errors/ ÙeeÂefÛÚkeâ $egefšÙeeB
= MSR + CSR = MSR + n × least count (b) Instrumental errors/ Ùeb$eiele $egefšÙeeB
= 0.5 + 25 × 0.001 = 0.5 + 0.025 = 0.525cm (c) Personal errors/ JÙeefòeâiele $egefšÙeeB
Actual reading = reading of screw gauge – zero error
(d) Least count errors / Deuheleceebkeâ $egefšÙeeB
= 0.525 – (–0.004)
= 0.525 + 0.004 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
= 0.529 cm Ans. (a) : The error in the measurement which arise due
to unpredictable fluctuations in the temperature and
1.3 Accuracy, Precision of voltage supply are random error.
Instruments and Errors in 12. The percentage error in the measurement of g
Measurement 4π 2 L
is: (Given that g = , L = (10 ± 0.1) cm,
T2
10. A metal wire has mass ( 0.4 ± 0.002 ) g , radius T = (100 ± 1) s)
( 0.3 ± 0.001) mm and length ( 5 ± 0.02 ) cm. The g kesâ ceeheve ceW ngF& ØeefleMele $egefš nw:
2
maximum possible percentage error in the 4π L
(efoÙee nw g = , L = (10 ± 0.1) cm,
measurement of density will nearly be: T2
Skeâ OeeeflJekeâ leej keâe õJÙeceeve (0.4 ± 0.002) g, T = (100 ± 1) s)
ef$epÙee (0.3 ± 0.001) mm leLee uebyeeF& (5 ± 0.02) cm (a) 2% (b) 5%
nw~ IevelJe kesâ ceeheve ceW DeefOekeâlece mebYeJe $egefš ueieYeie (c) 3% (d) 7%
nesieer : NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
(a) 1.4% (b) 1.2% Ans. (c) : The percentage error in the measurement of g
(c) 1.3% (d) 1.6% is –
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
4π2 L
Ans. (d) : Given that : m = (0.4 ± 0.002) g g =
T2
r = (0.3 ± 0.001) mm Since errors are always added then,
l = (5 ± 0.02)cm
∆g ∆L ∆T
The volume of the wire is given by – × 100 = × 100 + 2 × 100
g L T
V = πr 2 L
The density of the wire is –  0.1   1 
=  × 100  + 2  × 100 
m  10   100 
ρ= 2
πr L ∆g
×100 = 1 + 2 = 3%
∆ρ ∆m ∆r ∆L g
× 100 = × 100 + 2 × 100 + × 100
ρ m r L
13. Time intervals measured by a clock give the
0.002 0.001 0.02 following readings :
= × 100 + 2 × × 100 + × 100
0.4 0.3 5 efkeâmeer IeÌ[er Éeje ceehes ieS meceÙe DeblejeueeW kesâ hee"Ùeebkeâ
2 2 2 veerÛes efoÙes ieS nQ~
= + +
4 3 5
1.25 s, 1.24 s, 1.27 s, 1.21 s and 1.28 s
30 + 40 + 24 What is the percentage relative error of the
=
60 observations?
=
94 Fve Øes#eCeeW keâer Deehesef#ekeâ ØeefleMele $egefš keäÙee nw?
60 (a) 1.6% (b) 2%
∆ρ (c) 4% (d) 16%
× 100 = 1.56% = 1.6%
ρ NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Physics 15 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Arithmetic mean of given value is taken as Substituting these values in equation (i) we get
true value. ∆X 1 1
× 100 = 2 (1% ) + ( 2% ) + ( 3% ) + 3 ( 4% )
t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 + t 5 X 2 3
tmean =
5 = 2% + 1% + 1% + 12% = 16%
1.25 + 1.24 + 1.27 + 1.21 + 1.28 15. In an experiment four quantities a, b, c and d
tmean =
5 are measured with percentage error 1%, 2%,
tmean = 1.25 sec 3% and 4% respectively. Quantity P is
| ∆t1 | + | ∆t 2 | + | ∆t 3 | + | ∆t 4 | + | ∆t 5 | calculated as follows
∆ tmean =
5 a 3b 2
P=
|1.25−1.25| + |1.24−1.25| + |1.27 −1.25| + |1.21−1.25| + |1.28−1.25| cd
=
5 % error in P is :-
0 + 0.01 + 0.02 + 0.04 + 0.03 0.1 efkeâmeer ØeÙeesie ceW Ûeej jeefMeÙeeW a, b, c leLee d kesâ ceeheve
= = (veeheves ) ceW ›eâceMe: 1%, 2%, 3% leLee 4% keâer $egefš
5 5
∆t 0.1× 100 nesleer nw~ Skeâ jeefMe P keâe ceeve efvecveefueefKele ™he mes
% error = mean =
t mean 5 × 1.25 a 3b 2
heefjkeâefuele efkeâÙee peelee nw P = lees P kesâ ceeheve ceW
cd
% error = 1.6%
(%) $egefš nesieer -
14. In an experiment, the percentage of error (a) 4% (b) 14%
occurred in the measurement of physical (c) 10% (d) 7%
quantities A, B, C and D are 1%, 2%, 3% and NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
4% respectively. Then the maximum
percentage of error in the measurement X, Ans. (b) : Percentage error in a, ∆a × 100 = 1%
1 a
A2B 2
where X = 1 , will be ∆b
C 3 D3 Percentage error in b, × 100 = 2%
b
efkeâmeer ØeÙeesie ceW Yeeweflekeâ jeefMeÙeeW A, B, C Deewj D keâer ∆c
ceehe ceW nesves Jeeueer $egefš keâer ØeefleMelelee ›eâceMe: 1%, Percentage error in c , × 100 = 3%
c
2%, 3% Deewj 4% nw~ leye X keâer ceehe, peyeefkeâ X =
∆d
A2B 2
1 Percentage error in d , × 100 = 4%
, nw, ceW DeefOekeâlece ØeefleMele $egefš nesieer- d
1
C 3 D3 a 3b2
(a) 16% (b) –10% P =
cd
 3 Percentage error in P
(c) 10% (d)   %
 13  ∆P
×100 = 3
∆a
×100 + 2
∆b
×100 +
-∆c
×100 +
-∆d
×100
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 P a b c d
1 =3×1+2×2+3+4
A2B 2
Ans. (a) Given X = 1 =3+4+3+4
C 3 D3
=14%
The percentage error in X is given by
16. A student measures the distance traversed in
∆X  ∆A  1  ∆B 
× 100 = 2   × 100 +   free fall of a body, initially at rest, in a given
X  A  2 B  time. He uses this data to estimate g, the
1  ∆C   ∆D  acceleration due to gravity. If the maximum
×100 +   × 100 + 3   × 100 …(i) percentage errors in measurement of the
3 C   D 
distance and the time are e1 and e2 respectively,
∆A the percentage error in the estimation of g is
Here, × 100 = 1%
A Skeâ Jemleg ØeejcYe ceW efJejece DeJemLee ceW nw~ Skeâ efJeÅeeLeea
∆B Fme Jemleg kesâ cegòeâ heleve ceW, efkeâmeer efoÙes ieÙes meceÙe ceW
×100 = 2%
B leÙe keâer ieF& otjer veehelee nw Deewj Fmekeâe GheÙeesie ieg®lJeerÙe
∆C lJejCe g keâe ceeve %eele keâjves ceW keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo otjer leLee
× 100 = 3%
C meceÙe keâer ceeheeW ceW DeefOekeâlece ØeefleMele $egefš ›eâceMe:
∆D e1 leLee e2 nes lees, g keâe ceeve %eele keâjves ceW ØeefleMele
×100 = 4%
D $eg efš nesieer –
Physics 16 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) e2 - e1 (b) e1 +2 e2 Percentage error in volume
(c) e1 + e2 (d) e1 - 2e2 ∆V ∆r
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 × 100 = 3 × × 100
V r
Ans. (b) : From second equation of motion- % error in volume = 3 × % error in radius
1 2 =3×2
S = ut + at
2 =6%
Where S = h and a = g 18. The error in measurement of radius of a sphere
g is acceleration due to gravity. is 0.1% then error in its volume is
Now initial velocity is zero ( u = 0) efkeâmeer ieesues kesâ ef$epÙee ceeheve ceW 0.1 % keâer $egefš ngF& nes,
1 2
lees ieesues kesâ DeeÙeleve kesâ heefjkeâueve ceW $egefš nesiee
then h = gt (a) 0.3% (b) 0.4%
2
(c) 0.5% (d) 0.6%
2h AIPMT-1999
g= ...(i)
2
t Ans. (a) : We know that,
By taking natural logarithm on both sides in the above 4 3
Volume of sphere, V = πr
equation (i) we get. 3
 2h  Then error in its volume–
ln ( g ) = ln  2  ∆v ∆r
t  =3
V r
a
Using property, log = log a − log b = 3 × 0.1 = 0.3%
b Method II
ln ( g ) = ln ( 2h ) − 2ln ( t ) We Known
Differentiating 4
Volume of Sphere, V = πR 3
3
∆g ∆h ∆t
= + −2 × Differentiate the Expression of volume w.r.t radius,
g h t dV 4
For maximum Permissible error = π.3R 2
dR 3
 ∆g   ∆h   ∆t  4 dR
 g × 100  =  h × 100  + 2 ×  t × 100  dV = πR 3 .3
  max     3 R
According to problem, N 4
[Multiply by R in∴ V= πR 3 ]
∆h ∆t D 3
× 100 = e1 and × 100 = e 2
h t dV 3dR
=
Therefore, V R
∆g dV  dR 
⇒ × 100 = 3  × 100 
× 100 = e1 + 2e 2 V  R 
g
% Error in measurement of volume
17. If the error in the measurement of radius of a = 3×0.1%
sphere is 2% then the error in the = 0.3%
determination of volume of the sphere will be –
19. The density of a cube is measured by
Ùeefo efkeâmeer ieesues kesâ ef$epÙee ceeheve ceW 2 % keâer $egefš ngF& measuring its mass and length of its sides. If the
nes, lees ieesues kesâ DeeÙeleve kesâ heefjkeâueve ceW $egefš nesieer :- maximum error in the measurement of mass
(a) 8 % (b) 2 % and lengths are 3% and 2% respectively, the
(c) 4 % (d) 6 % maximum error in the measurement of density
AIPMT-2008 would be/ Skeâ Ieve keâe IevelJe Fmekesâ õJÙeceeve leLee
Ans. (d) : Given: Error in measurement in radius of Yegpee mes ceehee peelee nw~ Ùeefo õJÙeceeve leLee Yegpee ceeheves
sphere = 2% ceW DeefOekeâlece $egefš ›eâceMe: 3% leLee 2% nes, lees IevelJe
∆r ceW DeefOekeâlece $egefš nesieer
i.e. × 100 = 2%
r (a) 12% (b) 14%
4 (c) 7% (d) 9%
Volume of sphere V = πr 3 PMT-1996
3
Physics 17 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that, Skeâ efheC[ keâe õJÙeceeve 22.42 «eece leLee DeeÙeleve 4.7
 ∆m  Ieve mesceer nw~ Fmekesâ õJÙeceeve kesâ ceeheve ceW 0.01 «eece
Maximum error in the mass,   = 3%
 m  leLee Ieve kesâ ceeheve ceW 0.1 Ieve mesceer keâer $egefš nw, lees
 ∆L  IevelJe ceW DeefOekeâlece $egefš nesieer:
and in the length ,   = 2%
 L  (a) 22% (b) 2%
We know that, (c) 0.2% (d) 0.02%
mass ( m ) AIPMT-1991
Density of cube =
volume ( V ) Ans. (b) : Given that,
mass of body (m) = 22.42 g
m
ρ= ∵ volume (V) = L3 volume of body (V) = 4.7 cc
L3
Possible error measurement in mass of body (∆m) =
Taking log on both sides above, 0.0lg
⇒ ln ρ = ln m – 3 ln L
and error in volume of body (∆V) = 0.1 cc
Differentiating the above equation,
We know that,
∆ρ ∆m ∆L mass (m)
= + −3 Density (ρ) =
ρ m L volume (V)
∆ρ ∆m ∆L for maximum error,
× 100 = × 100 + 3 ×100
ρ m L ∆ρ  ∆m   ∆v 
= + 
= 3 + 3 (2) ρ  m   v 
=3+6
 0.01   0.1 
Maximum error in the measurement of density, =  + 
 22.42   4.7 
 ∆ρ 
 ρ  = 9%  1   1 
  =  + 
 2242   47 
20. Percentage errors in the measurement of mass
= 0.0217
and speed are 2% and 3% respectively. The
error in the estimate of kinetic energy obtained So the maximum error in the density will be
by measuring mass and speed will be = 2.17%  2%
õJÙeceeve leLee Jesie keâes ceeheves ceW ØeefleMele $egefš ›eâceMe:
2% leLee 3% nw~ ieeflepe Tpee& keâes ceeheves ceW ØeefleMele 1.4 Significant Figures
$egefš nesieer:
22. The diameter of a spherical bob, when
(a) 8% (b) 2%
measured with vernier calipers yielded the
(c) 12% (d) 10%
following values :3.33 cm, 3.32 cm, 3.34cm,
AIPMT-1995 3.33cm, and 3.32 cm.
Ans. (a) : Given that, The mean diameter to appropriate significant
( ∆m ) figures is:
Percentage errors in mass = 2%
m Skeâ ieesueekeâej yee@ye keâe JÙeeme, peye Jeefve&Ùej kewâueerheme& mes
∆v ceehee peelee nw, lees efvecveefueefKele ceeve Øeehle nesles nw:
and in speed, = 3%
v 3.33 mesceer, 3.32 mesceer, 3.34 mesceer, .3.33 mesceer Deewj
1 3.32 mesceer~
We know that, kinetic energy (KE) = mv2
2
GheÙegòeâ meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW ceW Deewmele JÙeeme nw:
Error is estimated in kinetic energy as
∆ k.E ∆m ∆v (a) 3.33cm/3.33 mesceer (b) 3.32cm/3.32 mesceer
So, × 100 = × 100 + 2 × 100 [ taking log
k.E m v (c) 3.328/3.328 mesceer (d) 3.3cm/3.3 mesceer
and differentiating the kinetic energy's equation] RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
= 2% + 2 (3%) Ans. (a) :
= 8% 3.33 + 3.32 + 3.34 + 3.33 + 3.32
21. A certain body weights 22.42 g and has a Mean diameter = 5
measured volume of 4.7cc. The possible error
= 3.328 cm
in the measurement of mass and volume are
0.01 g and 0.1 cc. Then maximum error in the Mean diameter = 3.33 cm
density will be (by taking appropriate significant figure)
Physics 18 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
23. The area of a rectangular field (in m2) of length 26. Match List-I with List-II
55.3 m and breadth 25 m after rounding off the metÛeer-I keâe metÛeer-II kesâ meeLe efceueeve keâjW:
value for correct significant digits is
List-I/metÛeer-I List-II/metÛeer-II
55.3 m uecyeeF& SJeb 25 m ÛeewÌ[eF& Jeeues DeeÙeleekeâej
(A) Gravitational (i) [L2T–2]
#es$e kesâ #es$eheâue (m2 ceW) keâe ceeve, efvekeâšlece hetCeeËkeâ
constant (G)/ieg®lJeerÙe
yeveeves kesâ yeeo mener meeLe&keâ Debkeâ kesâ efueS nw:
efmLejebkeâ (G)
(a) 14 ×102 (b) 138 ×101 (B) Gravitational (ii) [M–1L3T–2]
(c) 1382 (d) 1382.5 potential
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 energy/ieg®lJeerÙe
Ans. (a) : Given efmLeeflepe Tpee&
Length = 55.3 m (C) Gravitational (iii) [LT–2]
Breadth = 25 m potential/ieg®lJeerÙe
We know that efJeYeJe
Area = Length × Breadth
(D) Gravitational (iv) [ML2T–2]
= 55.3×25
intensity/ieg®lJeerÙe
= 1382.5
= 14×102
leer›elee
Resultant should have 2 significant figure. Choose the correct answer from the options
given below
24. Taking into account of the significant figures,
what is the value of 9.99 m – 0.0099 m? veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW ceW mes mener Gòej ÛegveW:
meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW keâes cenòJe osles ngS 9.99 m – 0.0099 m (a)
(A) - (iv), (B) - (ii), (C) - (i), (D) - (iii)
(b)
(A) - (ii), (B) - (i), (C) - (iv), (D) - (iii)
keâe ceeve keäÙee nw?
(c)
(A) - (ii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (i), (D) - (iii)
(a) 9.98 m (b) 9.980 m (d)
(A) - (ii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (iii), (D) - (i)
(c) 9.9 m (d) 9.9801 m NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 Ans. (c) : Option (a) Gravitational constant (G),
Ans. (a) : Let X = 9.99 m -0.0099m = 9.9801 m Gm1 m 2
But our answer, should have same no. of significant F=
r2
figure as least accurate number.
So, X = 9.98m Fr 2  MLT −2   L2 
G= =
m1m 2  M 2 
1.5 Dimensional Analysis and its G =  M −1 L3 T −2 
Applications Option (b) Gravitational potential energy,
1
25. The mechanical quantity, which has U = mgh =  M 1L2 T −2 
2
dimensions of reciprocal of mass (M -1) is
Option (c) Gravitational potential,
Jen Ùeebef$ekeâ jeefMe, efpemekeâer efJeceeSb õJÙeceeve kesâ JÙegl›eâce 2 −2
(M-1) nesleer nw- Work  ML T 
= = =  L2 T −2 
(a) Torque/ yeue DeeIetCe& Mass [ M ]
(b) Gravitational constant/ieg™lJeekeâ<e&Ce efmLejebkeâ Option (d) Gravitational intensity, I =
Force
(c) Angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe ieefle mass
1 −2
(d) Coefficient of thermal conductivity/T<ceerÙe = 
 L T 
Ûeeuekeâlee keâe iegCeebkeâ 27. The physical quantity that has the same
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 dimensional formula as pressure is:/Yeeweflekeâ jeefMe
Ans. (b) : Dimension of torque = [M1L2 T-2] efpemekeâe, oeye kesâ meceeve ner efJeceerÙe met$e nw, Jen nw;
dimension of Gravitational constant = [M-1 L3T-2] (a) Force/yeue
dimension of angular momentum = [ ML2T-1] (b) Momentum/mebJesie
dimension of coefficient of thermal conductivity
(c) Young's modulus of elasticity
= [ MLT-3θ-1]
ØelÙeemLelee keâe Ùebie iegCeebkeâ
From above it is clear that the gravitational constant is
mechanical quantity which has dimensions of reciprocal (d) Coefficient of viscosity/MÙeevelee iegCeebkeâ
of mass (M-1). NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022

Physics 19 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c):  ML2T −2 I−2  [ L]
−2
 MLT  µo =
=  2  =  ML−1T −2 
Force L2
Pressure =
Area L  µ o =  MLT −2 I −2  or  MLT −2 A −2 
Stress So option (d) is the correct answer.
Young' modulus (Y) =
Strain 30. If E and G respectively denote Energy and
E
F Gravitational constant, then has the
 MLT −2  G
Y= A = =  ML−1T −2  dimension of-
∆L  L2  Ùeefo E leLee G ›eâceMe: Tpee& leLee ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce
L
Hence, the young's modulus of elasticity has the same efveÙeleebkeâ keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjles nQ, lees E keâer efJecee nesleer
dimensional formula as pressure. G
nw :
28. Plane angle and solid angle have
meceleueerÙe keâesCe SJeb Ieve keâesCe ceW neslee nw: (a) [M2] [L–2] [T–1] (b) [M2] [L–1] [T0]
–1 –1
(c) [M] [L ] [T ] (d) [M] [L0] [T0]
(a) Both units and dimensions/cee$ekeâ SJeb efJecee oesveeW NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
(b) Units but no dimensions/cee$ekeâ hej keâesF& efJecee veneR Ans. (b) :
(c) Dimensions but no units [E] = ML2T–2
efJecee uesefkeâve keâesF& cee$ekeâ veneR
F × r 2  MLT –2 L2  –1 3 –2
(d) No units and no dimensions [G] = =   =M LT
vee keâesF& cee$ekeâ vee keâesF& efJecee m m
1 2  M 2

NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 E ML2 T –2
∴  = = [M2L–1T0]
arc  G  M –1L3T –2
Ans. (b) : Plane angle = , has radian as unit but
radius 31. If Force [F], Acceleration [A] and Time [T] are
area chosen as the fundamental physical quantities.
No - dimensions. Solid angle = 2 , has streradian as
r Find the dimensions of energy.
unit but No - dimensions. Ùeefo yeue [F], lJejCe [A] leLee meceÙe [T] keâes cegKÙe
29. The dimensions [MLT–2A–2] belong to the Yeeweflekeâ jeefMeÙeeB ceeve efueÙee peeS, lees Tpee& keâer efJecee
efJeceeSb [MLT–2A–2] mecyeefvOele nQ: %eele keâerefpeS~
(a) Electric permitivity/JewÅegle efJeÅegleMeeruelee (a) [F][A–1][T] (b) [F][A][T]
(b) Magnetic flux/ÛegcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme (c) [F][A][T2] (d) [F][A][T–1]
(c) Self inductance/mJe-ØesjkeâlJe NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
α β γ
(d) Magnetic permeability/ÛegcyekeâerÙe heejiecÙelee Ans. (c) : Energy = F A T
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 M1L2T–2 = (MLT–2) α (LT–2)β (T)γ
γ
Ans. (d) : Solve by option M1L2T–2 = MαLα+βT – 2α – 2β +
(a) dimension of electric permitivity is M–1L–3T4I2 Equating the power constants of M, L and T on
option (b) Magnetic flux LHS & RHS
F α=1
φ = B.A = A
il α+β = 2 ⇒ β = 1
−2
 MLT   L 
2 –2α–2β+γ = –2 ⇒ γ = 2
= ∴ Energy = F1A1T2
[ IL] 32. Dimensions of stress are :
2 −2 −1
=  ML T I  Øeefleyeue keâer efJeceeSB nQ:
option (c) self inductance (a) [ML2T–2] (b) [ML0T–2]
–1 –2
Q (c) [ML T ] (d) [MLT–2]
L= NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
l
2 −2 −2
=  ML T I  Ans. (c) : Stress =
Force
option (d) Magnetic permeability Area
µ N2A  MLT −2 
L= o =
l  L2 
Ll
µo = 2 Stress =  ML−1T −2 
N A

Physics 20 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
33. A physical quantity of the dimensions of length Ans. (a) :
e2
that can be formed out of c, G and is • Dimension of planck's constant h-
4πε 0 h = λ × mv
[c is velocity of light, G is universal constant of L   ML2 

[ h ] = L × M × = ---- (i)
T   T 
2
e 
gravitation and e is charge] /c, G leLee mes
4πε 0
• Dimension of gravitational constant G-
yeveves Jeeueer Skeâ Yeeweflekeâ jeefMe keâer efJeceeÙeW Jener nQ pees
uecyeeF& keâer nw~ (peneB c - ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie, G - F × r2
G=
meeJe&ef$ekeâ ieg®lJeerÙe efmLejebkeâ leLee e DeeJesMe nw) Ùen m1m 2
Yeeweflekeâ jeefMe nesieer:  MLT −2  ×  L2   L3 
1 1
[G ] =  = 2
---- (ii)
1  e2  2  e2  2  M 2   MT 
(a) G  (b) c 2 G 
c2  4πε0   4πε0  • Dimension of Velocity c-
1

[c] =  
 e2  e2 L
1 2 1
G ------ (iii)
(c)   (d) T
c2  G4πε 0  c 4πε0
 ML2   L3 
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 [ hG] =   2
e2  T   MT 
Ans. (a) : Given, C, G,
4 πε 0  L3 
z [ hG] =  L2  ×  3
 e2  T 
So, [L] = [C]x [G]y  
 4πε 0  [ hG ] =  L2  × C 3 
x y z
[L] = LT −1   M −1L3T −2  ML3T −2  [ hG ]
i.e  L2  = 3
= Lx+3y+3z M–y+z T–x–2y–2z  C 
On comparing we get
x + 3y + 3z = 1 hG hG
–y + z = 0 L= ⇒ L = 3/ 2
C3 C
–x – 2y – 2z = 0
On solving we get Hence, option (a) is correct.
1 1 35. If energy (E), velocity (V) and time (T) are
x = – 2, y = , z= chosen as the fundamental quantities, the
2 2
1/ 2 dimensional formula of surface tension will be:
 e2 
Thus L = [ C ] [G ]
−2 1/ 2
  Ùeefo Tpee& (E), Jesie(V) leLee meceÙe (T) keâes cetue jeefMeÙeeB
 4πε 0  ceevee peeÙe lees, he=‰leveeJe keâer efJecee nesiee:
1/ 2
1  Ge  2 (a) [EV–1T–2] (b) [EV–2T–2]
L=   (c) [E–2V–1T–3] (d) [EV–2T–1]
C2  4πε0 
AIPMT-03.05.2015
34. Planck's constant (h), speed of light in vacuum
(c) and Newton's gravitational constant (G) are Ans. (b) : From the question
three fundamental constants. Which of the S = Ea V bT c ........... (1)
following combinations of these has the
dimension of length?/Ùeefo hueebkeâ efmLejebkeâ (h)  MT  =  ML T   LT  [T ]
−2 2 −2 a −1 b c

efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie (c) leLee vÙetšve keâe ieg¤lJeerÙe  ML0T −2  =  M a L2a +b T −2a − b + c 
efmLejebkeâ (G) leerve ceewefuekeâ efmLejebkeâ neW, lees    
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmekeâer efJecee Jener nesieer pees uecyeeF& Comparing powers on both sides, we get
⇒ a =1
keâer nesleer nw ?
⇒ 2a + b = 0 ⇒ 2 × 1 + b = 0 ⇒ b = −2
hG hG
(a) 3/ 2 (b) 5/ 2 ⇒ −2a − b + c = −2 ⇒ −2 × 1 − ( −2 ) + c = −2
c c
⇒ c = −2
hc Gc
(c) (d) On putting these values in eqn (1), we get
G h 3/ 2
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
[S] =  EV −2T −2 
Physics 21 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
36. If force (F), velocity (V) and time (T) are taken ε0 = permittivity of free space
as fundamental units, then the dimensions of Dimension of µ0 = [MLT–2A–2]
mass are. ε0 = [M–1L–3T4A2]
Ùeefo yeue(F), Jesie(V) leLee meceÙe(T) keâes cetue cee$ekeâ 1
ceeve efueÙee peeÙe lees, õJÙeceeve keâer efJeceeÙeW neWieer:- c2 =
 MLT −2 A −2  M −1L−3T 4 A 2 
(a) [F VT-1] (b) [F VT-2]
-1 -1
(d) [F V-1T] 1
(c) [F V T ] c2 = −2 2
AIPMT-06.05.2014 L T 
Ans. (d) : c2 = [L2T–2]
We know that the dimension of force (F) = [MLT–2] c = [LT–1]
and velocity V = [LT–1] where, c = speed of light
F unit of c = meter/second
∴ M=
LT −2 c=
L
F F T
M= −1 −1
= = [FV–1T] c = [LT–1]
VT −1

1 2
LT T

∈0
E
2
37. The pair of quantities having same dimensions 39. The dimension of where ∈0 is
is
permittivity of free space and E is electric field.

1 2
(a) Young's modulus and Energy

∈0
E
2
(b) Impulse and Surface Tension , keâer efJecee, peneB ∈0 efveJee&le keâer
(c) Angular momentum and Work
(d) Work and Torque efJeÅegleMeeruelee Je E efJeÅegle #es$e nw, nesieer –
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka (a) ML2T–2 (b) ML–1T–2
Ans. (d) : Dimensions formula (c) ML2T–1 (d) MLT–1
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
F MLT −2
Young's modulus = = =  ML−1T −2  1 q1q 2
A L2 Ans. (b) : We know that F =
4π ∈0 r 2
Energy = mc2 = [ M ]  L2 T −2  =  ML2 T −2 
1 q 1q 2
∈0 =
Impulse = F.t. =  MLT −2  [ T ] =  MLT −1  4 πF r 2
−2
Dimensional formula will be-
F  MLT 
Surface Tension = = =  ML0 T −2  [ AT ][ AT ]
L [L] ∈0 =
 MLT −2   L2 
Angular momentum
r r Dimensions of ∈0 = [M–1L–3T4A2]
= r × p = [ L ]  MLT −1  =  ML2 T −1 
−2
F  MLT 
Work = F.d. =  MLT −2  [ L ] =  ML2 T −2  we know electric field E = =
q [ AT ]
Torque = F1d. =  MLT −2  [ L ] =  ML2 T −2  Dimensions of E = [MLT–3A–1]
Option (d) is correct. Work and Torque have same 1
Dimensions of εoE2 = [M–1L–3T4A2] [M2L2T–6A–2]
dimensions. 2
38. The dimensions of (µ0ε0)–1/2 are = [ML–1T–2]
(µ0ε0)–1/2 keâer efJecee nesleer nw~ 40. If the dimensions of a physical quantity are
given by [M aLbTc], then the physical quantity
(a) [L T–1] (b) [L1/2T1/2] will be:/Ùeefo efkeâmeer Yeeweflekeâ jeefMe keâer efJeceeSb
(c) [L1/2T–1/2] (d) [L–1T] [M aLbTc] mes metefÛele keâer ieF& neW, lees Ùen:
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
(a) Force if /yeue nesiee Ùeefo a = 0, b = –1, c = –2
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(b) Pressure if /yeue nesiee Ùeefo a = 1, b = –1, c = –2
Ans. (a) : Speed of light is given by
(c) Velocity if /yeue nesiee Ùeefo a = 1, b = 0, c = –1
1
c= (d) Acceleration if /yeue nesiee Ùeefo a = 1, b = 1, c = –
ε 0 µ0 2
where, µ0 = permeability of free space AIMPT-2009

Physics 22 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given ⇒ Ma Lb Tc 42. Dimensions of resistance in an electrical circuit,
m in terms of dimension of mass M, of length L,
Force = ma = kg 2 = MLT -2 ⇒ a = 1 , b = 1, c = –2 of time T and of current I, would be:
s
õJÙeceeve (mass) keâer efJecee M, uecyeeF& (length) keâer
F MLT -2
Pressure = = = ML-1T -2 ⇒ a = 1, b = –1, efJecee L, meceÙe (time) keâer efJecee T Deewj Oeeje keâer efJecee
A L2
I ceeveles ngS efkeâmeer JewÅegle heefjheLe ceW ØeeflejesOe keâer efJeceeSB
c = –2 (satisfied the option)
neWieer:-
Displacement s m
Velocity = = = = LT–1 ⇒ a = 0, (a) ML2T–3I–2
(b) ML2T–3I–1
time t sec
(c) ML2T–2
(d) ML2T–1I–1
b = 1, c = –1
AIPMT-2007
velocity LT -1 Ans. (a) : We know voltage V = IR
Acceleration = = = M0L1T–2 ⇒ a = 0,
time T V
so resistance R =
b = 1, c = –2 I
41. Which two of the following five physical Work done w
where V = =
parameters have the same dimensions ? Ch arg e q
efvecve heeBÛe Yeeweflekeâ jeefMeÙeeW ceW mes keâewve meer oes Skeâ pewmeer  ML2 T −2 
efJeceeÙeW jKeleer nw? =
[ IT ]
(a) Energy density/Tpee& IevelJe
(b) Refractive index/ DeheJele&veebkeâ =  ML2 T −3 I −1 

(c) Dielectric constant/ [eFFuewefkeäš^keâ efmLejebkeâ  ML2 T −3 I −1 

∴Resistance [ R ] =
(d) Young’s modulus/ Ùebie keâe iegCeebkeâ [ I]
(e) Magnetic field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e =  M L2 T −3 I −2 
1

(a) (a) and (d)/ (a) Deewj (d)

43. The velocity v of a particle at time t is given by
(b) (a) and (e)/ (a) Deewj (e) b
v = at + , where a, b and c are constants.
(c) (b) and (d)/ (b) Deewj (d) t +c
(d) (c) and (e)/ (c) Deewj (e) The dimensions of a, b and c respectively:-
AIPMT-2008 meceÙe t hej Skeâ keâCe keâe Jesie v meceerkeâjCe
b
Ans. (a) : Energy density =
Energy v = at + Éeje efoÙee peelee nw peneB a, b leLee c
volume t+c
=
efveÙeleebkeâ nQ~ a, b leLee c keâer efJeceeSB ›eâceevegmeej neWieer-
2 −2 (a) LT–2, L and T (b) L2, T and LT2
dimension of energy  ML T  2
(d) L, LT and T2
= = [ML–1T–2] (c) LT , LT and L
dimension of volume  L3  AIPMT-2006
Young modulus = b
Ans. (a) : Given velocity v = at +
t+c
 ML−1T −2 
= 
stress
=  ML−1T −2  Displacement
strain No dimension  Q Velocity (v) =
Time
Magnetic field B = ∴ Dimension of velocity 'v' = [M0LT-1]
 MLT −2  Now,
= 
Force
=  MT −2 A −1  Dimension of velocity = Dimension of at
charge × velocity [ AT ]  LT −1  
[LT-1] = a [T]
speed of light in medium1 a = [LT-2]
Refractive index µ = b
speed of light in medium2 Again, Dimension of v = Dimension of
t+c
So, refractive index has no units, no dimensions.
b
Permittivity of the object
-1
[LT ] = ...(i)
Dielectric constant = t+c
Permittivity of free space. Q 'c' is added to 't', therefore dimension of c & t
So, dielectric constant is ratio of two same quantity will be same.
therefore, it has no unit, no dimensions. [c]= [T]

Physics 23 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, from (i) ML2 T -2
b h=
[LT-1]= T -1
[T] ∴ h = ML2 T-1
[b]=[L] ∴ Dimensional formula of planck’s constant h is
44. The ratio of the dimension of Planck's constant [ML2 T–1]
and that of the moment of inertia is the Angular Momentum
dimension of : It is the rotational equivalent of linear momentum
hueebkeâ efveÙeleebkeâ Deewj peÌ[lJe kesâ DeeIetCe& keâer efJeceeDeeW ∴ L = I × ω
keâe Devegheele meceleguÙe nesiee FveceW mes efkeâme keâer efJeceeDeeW ∴ L = r × p [Q P = m.v ]
keâe :- L = angular momentum
(a) Velocity/Jesie ω = angular velocity
(b) Angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie I = moment of Inertia
(c) Time/meceÙe r = distance
(d) Frequency/DeeJe=efòe P = linear momentum
-1
AIPMT-2005 Dimensional formula for L= [L] [MLT
2 -1
]
L = [ML T ]
Ans. (d) : We know that E = hν
Physical Quantity Dimensional formula
Where, h = Planck's constant
E Energy [ML2 T-2]
Planck's constant, h =
ν Momentum [M1L1T–1]
 ML2 T −2  Power [ML2 T-3]
dimension of h = =  ML2 T −1  − − − −(i)
[T ]
−1
46. Which pair have not equal dimensions :
Moment of inertia, I = mr 2 efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee Ùegice Demeceeve efJecee jKelee nw –
dimension of I = [ML2] -------- (ii) (a) Energy and torque/Tpee& Je yeue DeeIetCe&
On dividing equation (i) by equation (ii) , we get (b) Force and impulse/yeue Je DeeJesie
2 −1 (c) Angular momentum and Planck's constant
h  ML T 
= keâesCeerÙe mebJesie leLee hueebkeâ efmLejebkeâ
I  ML2 
(d) Elastic modulus and pressure
h T −1 ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ leLee oeye
=
I 1 AIPMT-2000
h 1 Ans. (b) :
i.e. = T-1 = = dimension of frequency For option A:
I T
Energy = kg m2s2 = [ML2 T-2]
45. The dimension of Planck constant equals to Torque = kg m2s2 = [ML2 T-2]
that of :
For option B:
Hueebkeâ efveÙeleebkeâ keâer efJecee efkeâmekesâ meceeve nw- Force = kg × m/s2 = [MLT-2]
(a) Energy/ Tpee& Impulse = kg m/s = [MLT-1]
(b) Momentum/ mebJesie For option C:
(c) Angular momentum/ keâesCeerÙe mebJesie Angular momentum = kg m2/s = [ML2 T-1]
Planck's constant = kg m2/s = [ML2T-1]
(d) Power/Meefòeâ
For option D:
AIPMT-2001
Elastic modulus = N/m2 = [ML-1T–2]
Ans. (c) : Planck’s constant : It is a physical constant Pressure = N/m2 = [ML-1T–2]
that is quantum of electromagnetic action. It relates the
47. The dimensions of universal gravitational
energy carried by a photon to its frequency by E = hv
constant are
E meeJe&ef$ekeâ ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efveÙeleebkeâ keâer efJeceeSB nQ:
∴h =
ν
(a) [ M–1L3T–2 ] (b) [ ML2T–1 ]
E = Energy, v = frequency & h = planck’s constant
Dimensional formula of energy (E) = [ML2 T -2] (c) [ M–2 L3T–2 ] (d) [ M–2 L2T–1 ]
Dimensional formula of frequency (ν) = [T-1] AIPMT-2004,1992
Physics 24 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Universal gravitational constant- It can be Ans. (a): We know that, dimensions of time is [T].
defined as the constant relating the force exerted on the So, we check the option,
objects to the mass and distance between the objects. Dimension of Inductance (L) = [ML2T–2A–2]
The gravitational constant is equal to the numerical Dimension of Resistance (R) = [ML2T–3A–2]
value of the attracting force when two unit masses are Dimension of Capacitance (C) = [M–1L–2T4A2]
separated by a unit distance. ML2 T –2 A–2 [ ]
L
• The value of the universal gravitational constant (G) is (a) = = T
R ML2T –3 A–2
6.673×10–11 N m2/kg2.
C M –1L−2 T 4 A 2 [ –2 –4 6 4 ]
F.r 2 (b) = = M L T A
G= L ML2 T –2 A –2
m1.m2
(c) LC = [ ML2 T –2 A –2 ] [ M –1 L–2 T 4 A 2 ]
F = m×a
= [T2]
kg − m
= R ML2 T –3 A –2 [ –1 ]  1 
sec 2 (d) = = T = 
F = [M L T–2] L ML2 T –2 A –2 T
[ MLT ][ L ]
–2 2 So, from the given option (a) has same dimension as
Now, G = that of time.
[ M ][ M ]
50. The dimensions of RC is/RC keâer efJeceeSB nw:
G = [ M –1L3T –2 ] (a) square of time/meceÙe keâe Jeie&
• So, the dimension of the gravitational constant is (b) square of inverse time/meceÙe kesâ Jeie& keâe JÙegl›eâce
 M –1 L3 T –2  . (c) time/meceÙe
48. The dimensions of impulse are equal to that of (d) inverse time/JÙegl›eâce meceÙe
DeeJesie keâer efJeceeSB efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekeâer efJeceeDeeW kesâ AIPMT -1995
meceeve nw? Ans. (c) : Dimensions of RC =
(a) pressure/oeye We know that, R is Resistance and its dimension is
(b) linear momentum/jwefKekeâ mebJesie
[ ML2T –3I –2 ] and C is capacitance and its dimension is
(c) force/yeue
[ M–1L–2T4I2 ]
(d) angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie So, dimensions of RC = [ ML2 T –3I –2 ] [ M –1L–2T 4 I 2 ]
AIPMT-1996 = [T]
Ans. (b) : Impulse- It is used to describe the effect of [T] is dimension of time.
force acting over time to change the momentum of on So, dimension of RC is time.
object. It is represented by symbol 'J' and its unit is 51. Which of the following has the dimensions of
Newton second or kg m/sec. pressure?/ oeye keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nesiee-
J = F.∆t (a) [ MLT –2 ] (b) [ ML–1T –2 ]
Dimension of F = [MLT–2]
(c) [ ML–2T –2 ] (d) [ M –1L–1 ]
Dimension of time (∆t) = [T]
AIPMT -1994, 1990
J = F×∆t
Ans. (b) : Pressure- It is the amount of force applied
= [MLT–2] [T] perpendicular to the surface of an object per unit area.
J = [MLT–1] –2
F [MLT ]
Momentum = m × v P= = 2
= [ML–1T–2]
= [M] [LT ] –1 A [L ]
= [MLT–1] 52. Of the following quantities, which one has
• So, impulse is equal to the change in linear dimensions different from the remaining three?
momentum of the body. ef vecve Ûeej ceW mes efkeâme jeefMe keâe efJeceerÙe met$e DevÙe leerveeW
49. Which of the following dimensions will be the mes efYeVe nw?
same as that of time?/efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekeâer efJecee (a) Energy per unit volume/Tpee& Øeefle Skeâebkeâ DeeÙeleve
meceÙe keâer efJecee kesâ meceeve nw? (b) Force per unit area/yeue Øeefle Skeâebkeâ #es$eheâue
L C (c) Product of voltage and charge per unit
(a) (b) volume/Jeesušspe Deewj DeeJesMe keâe iegCeveheâue Øeefle
R L
R Skeâebkeâ DeeÙeleve
(c) LC (d)
L (d) Angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
AIPMT-1996 AIPMT -1989

Physics 25 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): From the given options, 54. According to Newton, the viscous force acting
Energy [ ML T ] 2 –2 between liquid layers of area A and velocity
(a) Energy per unit volume = =
Volume [ L3 ] gradient ∆V/∆Z is given by F = ηA
∆V
, where
= [ ML–1T –2 ]
∆Z
η is constant called coefficient of viscosity. The
(b) Force per unit area
dimensional formula of η is
Force [ MLT –2 ]
= = =  ML–1 T –2  vÙetšve kesâ Devegmeej oes hejleeW kesâ yeerÛe ueieves Jeeuee MÙeeve
Area [ L2 ]
∆V
(c) Product of voltage and charge per unit volume yeue F = ηA mes efoÙee peelee nw, peneB A =
Voltage × ch arg e ∆Z
= #es$eheâue leLee ∆V/∆Z Jesie-ØeJeCelee nw~ MÙeevelee iegCeebkeâ
Volume
Work η keâer efJecee nesieer:
=
volume
(a) [ MLT –2T–2 ] (b) [ M0 L0T0 ]
∵ voltage × charge = work
[ ML2T –2 ] (c) [ ML2T–2 ] (d) [ ML–1T –1 ]
So, = [ ML–1T –2 ]
[ L3 ] AIPMT -1990
(d) Angular momentum- The property of any rotating Ans. (d) : Given that, F = ηA ∆V
object given by moment of inertia times angular ∆Z
velocity. It is denoted by 'L' where, F = Viscous force = [MLT–2]
L = Iω = r × P A = Area = [L2]
Where, I = inertia
∆V [ LT –1 ]
ω = angular velocity and = velocity gradient =
∆Z [L]
r = radius
F ∆ Z
P = linear momentum = mv So, η (coefficient of viscosity) =
L = mvr A ∆V
= [M] [LT–1] [L] [ MLT –2 ] [ L]
= .
where, m = mass and v = velocity
2 –1
[ L2 ] [ LT –1 ]
= [ML T ]
So, from the given options angular momentum has the =  ML−1T −1 
dimensions different from the remaining three.
55. Dimensional formula of self inductance is
53. The dimensional formula of permeability of
free space µ0 is
mJeØesjCe iegCeebkeâ keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nw:
ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee µ0 keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nw: (a) [ MLT –2 A–2 ] (b) [ ML2T –1A–2 ]
(a) [ MLT –2 A–2 ] (c) [ ML2T –2 A–2 ] (d) [ ML2T –2 A–1 ]
(b) [ M0 LT
1 ] AIPMT -1989
(c) [ M0 L2T –1A2 ] Ans. (c) : Self inductance- It is a form of
electromagnetic inductance. It can be defined as the
(d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
property of current carrying coil that resists or opposes
the change of the current flowing through it.
AIPMT-1991
di
Ans. (a) : Permeability- The property of the material emf (ε) = L .
which supports the formation of magnetic flux when dt
passed through a magnetic field is known as Where L = coefficient of self inductance.
permeability. dt
L = ε .....(i)
• The permeability of the material is defined as the ratio di
of flux density to the field strength of a material. It is work (W)
denoted by 'µ0' which is equal to the 4π × 10–7 ∵ Voltage/ emf (ε) = ch arg e (Q)
Henry/meter. It is also measured in Newtons per
Ampere square (N/A2). W dt
eqn (i) ⇒ L = . and charge = current × time
Newton Q di
µ0 =
Ampere 2 [ ML2 T –2 ] [T ]
= .
[ MLT ]–2
[ AT ] [A]
= = [ MLT –2 –2 ]
A
[A ]
2 2 –2 –2
= [ML T A ]

Physics 26 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
oer ieÙeer meceerkeâjCe  P + 2  = b , ceW P = oeye, V
56. The dimensional formula of torque is a θ
DeeIetCe& keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nw:  V  V
(a) [ML2T–2] (b) [MLT–2] = DeeÙeleve, θ = hejceleehe leLee a, b efveÙeleebkeâ nQ, lees a
(c) [ML–1T–2] (d) [ML–2T–2] keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nesiee:
AIPMT - 1989
(a) [ML–5T–1]
Ans. (a) : Torque- It refers to the twisting force that
(b) [ML5T1]
causes motion. It is the measure of the force that can
(c) [ML5T–2]
cause an object to rotate about an axis.
(d) [M–1L5T2].
Torque (τ) = Force × distance
AIPMT- 1996
=  MLT −2  [L]
Ans. (c) : Given that,
=  ML2 T −2   a  θ
P+ 2  = b
 v  v
57. If C and R denote capacitance and resistance, 3
the dimensional formula of CR is Where, V is volume [L ]
Ùeefo C Oeeefjlee leLee R ØeeflejesOe keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjles neW P is pressure [ML–1T–2]
lees CR keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nesiee: and θ is absolute temperature [K]
According to the principle of Homogeneity dimensions
(a) [M0L0T1] of each of the terms of a dimensional equation on both
0 0 0
(b) [M L T ] sides should be the same.
(c) [M0L0T–1]
a bθ
(d) not expressible in terms of MLT/MLT kesâ heoeW So, P= 2 =
V V
ceW JÙeòeâ veneR efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw~ a = P.V2
AIPMT -1988 = [ML–1T–2] [L3]2
Ans. (a) : = [ML5T–2]
Q 60. Which of the following is a dimensional
CR = × R
V constant ?
It efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee efJeceerÙe efveÙeleebkeâ nw?
= ×R
V (a) Relative density/Deehesef#ekeâ IevelJe
It V (b) Gravitational constant/ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efveÙeleebkeâ
= × = t = [T] =  M 0 L0 T1 
V I (c) Refractive index/DeheJele&veebkeâ
58. The dimensional formula of angular (d) Poisson's ratio/heeÙemeve Devegheele
momentum is
keâesCeerÙe mebJesie keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nw AIPMT- 1995
2 –2 –2 –1
(a) [ML T ] (b) [ML T ] Ans. (b) : Dimensional constant- The physical
(c) [MLT–1] (d) [ML2T–1] quantities which have dimensions and have a fixed
AIPMT -1988 value are called dimensional constant. For example
Gravitational constant (G), Planck constant (h), and
Ans. (d) : Angular momentum- The angular
electrostatic force etc.
momentum of a rigid object is defined as the product of
Gravitational constant (G)- It is the proportionality
the moment of inertia and the angular velocity. It is
constant used in Newton's law of universal gravitation.
analogous to linear momentum.
The value of 'G' is equal to 6.67×10–11 Nm2/kg2.
Angular momentum (L) = I × ω
Relative density- It is defined as the density of a
Where, I = moment of Inertia substance divided by the density of water. Therefore
ω = angular velocity relative density is dimensionless.
L = mvr Refractive index- It is defined as the relative speed at
= [M] [LT–1] [L] which light moves through a material with respect to its
= [ML2T–1] speed in vacuum. It is also a dimensionless quantity.
 a  θ Poisson's ratio- It is defined as the ratio of the
59. An equation is given here  P + 2  = b transverse contraction of a material to the Longitudinal
 V  V extension strain in the direction of stretching force.
where P = Pressure, V = Volume and θ = Lateral strain
Absolute temperature. If a and b are constants, µ (Poisson's ratio) = .
Linear strain
the dimensions of a will be
Physics 27 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
61. Turpentine oil is flowing through a tube of [a] [T2] = 1
length l and radius r. The pressure difference 1
between the two ends of the tube is P. The a= = [T–2]
[T 2 ]
P (r 2 – x 2 )
viscosity of oil is given by η = where 63. P represents radiation pressure, c represents
4vl speed of light and S represents radiation
v is the velocity of oil at a distance x from the energy striking per unit area per sec. The non
axis of the tube. The dimensions of η are zero integers x, y, z such that PxSycz is
leejheerve lesue Skeâ šŸetye kesâ Éeje yenlee nw efpemekeâer dimensionless are
uecyeeF& l leLee ef$epÙee r nw~ šdÙetye kesâ oesveeW efmejes kesâ P = oeye, c = ØekeâeMe Jesie, S = Øeefle Skeâebkeâ #es$e Øeefle
yeerÛe keâe Delebj P nw leLee MÙeevelee iegCeebkeâ nw meskeâC[ efJeefkeâjCe Tpee& nw, lees Px Sy cz keâer keâesF& efJecee
P (r 2 – x 2 ) veneR nesieer, Ùeefo
η= peneB šŸetye kesâ De#e mes x otjer hej lesue
4vl (a) x = 1, y =, z = 1
kesâ Jesie v nw~ η keâer efJeceeÙeW nQ: (b) x = –1, y = 1, z = 1
(c) x = –1, y = 1, z = –1
(a) [M0L0T0] (b) [MLT–1]
(c) [ML2T–2] (d) [ML–1T–1] (d) x = 1, y = 1, z = –1
AIPMT- 1993 AIPMT-1992
Ans. (d) : Given that, Ans. (c) : Given that,
Px Sy cz is dimensionless
P (r2 – x2 )
η= Where, P is radiation pressure and its dimensions is
4vl [ML–1T–2]
Where, P = pressure difference and its dimensions is C is speed of light and its dimensions is [LT–1]
[ML–1T–2] S is radiation energy per unit area and per sec.
r = radius and its dimension is [L]
energy / area [ ML2 T –2 ] / [ L2 ]
x = distance and its dimension is [L] So, S = = = [MT–3]
second [T ]
v = velocity and its dimension is [LT–1]
l = length and its dimension is [L] As per question,
Dimensions of η (viscosity of oil) [Mº Lº Tº] = [ML–1T–2]x [LT–1]z [MT–3]y
Comparing power,
[ ML–1T –2 ][ L]2
= For [M], 0 = x + y ....(i)
[ LT –1 ][ L] For [L], 0 = –x + z ....(ii)
= [ML–1T–1] For [T], 0 = – 2x – 3y – z ....(iii)
62. The time dependence of a physical quantity P is Solving equation (i), (ii) and (iii)
given by p = p0 exp (–at2), where a is a constant we get, x = –1
and t is the time. The constant a has dimension y=1
Skeâ meceerkeâjCe ceW P keâe meceÙe kesâ meeLe mebyebOe Fme Øekeâej z = –1
nw P = P0 exp (–at2) peneB a Skeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw, lees a 64. The frequency of vibration f of a mass m
keâer efJecee nesieer: suspended from a spring of spring constant k is
(a) is dimensionless /keâesF& efJecee veneR given by a relation f = amxky, where a is a
dimensionless constant. The values of x and y
(b) has dimensions [T–2] / T–2 keâer efJecee are
(c) has dimensions [T2]/T2 keâer efJecee efkeâmeer efmbØeie mes yeBOes õJÙeceeve m keâer DeeJe=efòe f nw, pees f
(d) has dimensions of P/P keâer efJecee = amx ky mes mecyeefvOele nw, peneB a keâer keâesF& efJecee veneR
AIPMT-1993 nw~ leye x Je y kesâ ceeve neWieW:
Ans. (b) : Given that, 1 1
P = p0 exp (–at2) (a) x = , y =
2 2
Where, a is constant 1 1
t is time (b) x = , y = –
2 2
P and P0 have the same dimensions. We know that the 1 1
power of exponential should be dimensionless. (c) x = , y = –
2 2
Therefore, the dimension of 'at2' should be
1 1
dimensionless. Now, the multiplication of the respective (d) x = – , y =
dimensions is one. 2 2
at2 = 1 AIPMT-1990

Physics 28 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that, 67. The sum of the numbers 436.32, 227.2 and
frequency (f) = amxky 0.301 in appropriate significant figures is
Where, a is constant so its dimensions is [MºLºTº] 436.32, 227.2 SJeb 0.301 mebKÙeeDeeW keâe Ùeesie GheÙeg&keäle
m is mass, so its dimensions is [M] meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW ceW nw–
k is spring constant, so its dimensions is  MT −2  (a) 663.821 (b) 664
(c) 663.8 (d) 663.82
Dimension of frequency is [T–1]
Ans. (c) : Given numbers : 436.32. 227.2 and 0.301
So, putting the value of dimensions in above equations
Sum of these numbers = 663.821
[MºLº T −1 ] = [ M]  MT −2 
x y
Q The number after 8 is 2 (which is less than 5), then
we have to exclude all the numbers present on the right
Comparing power of the respective physical quantities,
side for rounding off digit.
for [M], x + y = 0 ....(1)
Thus, appropriate significant figures is = 663.8
for [T] –2y = –1
68. The mass and volume of a body are 4.237 g and
1
⇒ y= 2.5 cm3, respectively. The density of the
2 material of the body in correct significant
–1 figures is
and x =
2 Skeâ efheb[ keâe õJÙeceeve Deewj DeeÙeleve ›eâceMe: 4.237g
65. If x = at + bt2, where x is the distance travelled SJeb 2.5cm3 nw~ Fme efheb[ kesâ heoeLe& kesâ IevelJe keâe mener
by the body in kilometers while t is the time in meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW ceW ceeve nw–
seconds, then the units of b is
(a) 16948 g cm–3
Ùeefo x = at + bt2 ceW x Ûeueer ieF& otjer (efkeâceer ceW) leLee
(b) 1.69 g cm–3
t meceÙe (meskeâC[ ceW) nes, lees b keâe cee$ekeâ nw:
(c) 1.7 g cm–3
(a) km/s/efkeâceer/meskeâC[ (d) 1.695 g cm–3
(b) km s/ efkeâceer-meskeâC[ Ans. (c) : Given, Mass (m) = 4.237g
2
(c) km/s2/efkeâceer-meskeâC[ Volume (V) = 2.5 cm3
2
(d) km s2/efkeâceer/meskeâC[ Then density (ρ) =
mass
AIPMT-1989 volume
Ans. (c) : Given that, 4.237g
ρ=
x = at + bt2 2.5cm 3
Where, x is distance in kilometers (km) ρ = 1.6948 g cm–3
t is time in second (s) As per rules, the result of division will have two
According to the principle of homogeneity, significant figures.
Dimension of x = Dimension of at = Dimension of bt2 Density (ρ) = 1.7gcm–3
for units of b, 69. The numbers 2.745 and 2.735 on rounding off
(km) = b (sec)2 to 3 significant figures will give
b = km/sec2 Ùeefo 2.745 SJeb 2.735 mebKÙeeDeeW keâes 3 meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW
lekeâ hetCeeËefkeâle keâj JÙekeäle efkeâÙee peeS lees Øeehle mebKÙeeSB
1.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems neWieer–
(a) 2.75 and 2.74 (b) 2.74 and 2.73
66. The number of significant figures in 0.06900 is (c) 2.75 and 2.73 (d) 2.74 and 2.74
0.06900 ceW meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW keâer mebKÙee nw– Ans. (d) : We have to round off 2.745 to 3 significant
figures. Here the digit to be dropped is 5 then the
(a) 5 (b) 4
previous digit is left unchanged if it is even. Hence, on
(c) 2 (d) 3 rounding of 2.745 it would be 2.74.
Ans. (b) : ''The significant figures of a given number • Next 2.735 where the digit to be dropped is 5 then the
are those significant or important digits which convey preceding digit is raised by one if it is add.
the meaning according to its accuracy.'' Hence, on rounding off 2.735 to 3 significant figure, it
Given data : 0.06900 would be 2.74.
Since, we know that. all the zeros that are on the right 70. The length and breadth of a rectangular sheet
side of the last non-zero digit, after the decimal point are 16.2 cm and 10.1 cm, respectively. The area
are significant thus, number of significant figures in of the sheet in appropriate significant figures
0.06900 is 4 and error is
Physics 29 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ DeeÙeleekeâej Meerš keâer uebyeeF& SJeb ÛeewÌ[eF& 16.2 cm (a) Work and torque./keâeÙe& Deewj yeue-DeeIetCe&
Deewj 10.1 cm nw~ GheÙegkeäle meeLe&keâ DebkeâeW ceW Deewj (b) Angular momentum and Planck's constant./
GheÙegkeäle $egefš kesâ GuuesKe kesâ meeLe Meerš keâe #es$eheâue keâesCeerÙe mebJesie Deewj huee@keâ efveÙeleebkeâ
nesiee– (c) Tension and surface tension./leveeJe Deewj he=‰
(a) 164 ± 3 cm 2
(b) 163.62 ± 2.6 cm 2 leveeJe
(c) 163.6 cm2 (d) 163.62 ± 3 cm2 (d) Impulse and linear momentum./DeeJesie Deewj
Ans. (a) : Step 1 : Find the area of rectangular sheet jsKeerÙe mebJesie
Formula used : A = l × b Ans. (c) : ∴ Tension, F = ma
Given : Length of sheet (l) = 16.2 cm Dimensional formula for tension,
Breadth of sheet (b) = 10.1 cm =[M1] [L1T–2] = [M1L1T–2]
Then, Area (A) = l × b F
Surface tension, T =
A = 16.2 × 10.1 L
A = 163.62 cm2 Dimensional formula for surface tension,
Step 2 : Find the error in area of rectangular sheet.
[M1L1T –2 ]
Error in product of quantities: = = [M1L0T –2 ]
[L1 ]
Suppose x = a × b
Hence, Tension and surface Tension does not have
Let ∆a = absolute error in measurement of a.
same dimensional formula.
∆b = absolute error in measurement of b,
72. Measure of two quantities along with the
∆x = absolute error in x.
precision of respective measuring instrument is
The maximum fractional error in x is
A = 2.5 m s–1 ± 0.5 m s–1, B = 0.10 s ± 0.01 s The
∆x  ∆a ∆b 
= ± +  value of AB will be
x  a b  oes jeefMeÙeeW keâer ceehe, Gvekeâes ceeheves ceW ØeÙegkeäle ngS ceehe
According to the question, Ùeb$eeW keâer heefjMegælee kesâ meeLe JÙekeäle keâjles ngS nQ–
Length (l) = (16.2 ± 0.1)cm
A B keâe ceeve nesiee
Breadth (b) = (10.1 ± 0.1)cm.
Area (A) = 163.62 cm2 (a) (0.25 ± 0.08) m
As per rule, area will have only three significant figures (b) (0.25 ± 0.5) m
and error will have only one significant figure. (c) (0.25 ± 0.05) m
Thus, A = 164 cm2. (d) (0.25 ± 0.135) m
∆A
If ∆A is error in the area, the relative error is Ans. (a) : Step 1 : Calculate the value of AB.
A
Given A = 2.5 m/s ± 0.5 m/s
∆ A ∆l ∆ b
Therefore, = + B = 0.10s ± 0.01 s.
A l b
⇒ AB = (2.5) (0.10)
∆A 0.1cm 0.1cm
= + AB = 0.25 m.
A 16.2cm 10.1cm
∆ A 1.01 + 1.62 2.63
Step 2 : Find the error in the value AB.
= = ∆ AB ∆ A ∆ B
A 16.2 ×10.1 163.62 Formula used : = +
2.63 AB A B
∆A = A × Given, ∆A = 0.5 m/s
163.62
2.63 ∆B = 0.01 s
⇒ ∆ A = 163.62 × = 2.63cm 2 ∆ AB 0.5 0.01 0.075
163.62 = + =
⇒∆A = 3 cm2 (by rounding off to one significant AB 2.5 0.1 0.25
figure) 0.75
∆ AB = × AB
Hence, Area of rectangular sheet in significant figure & 0.25
error is given by : A = (164 ± 3) cm2 ∆ AB =
0.75
× 0.25
71. Which of the following pairs of physical 0.25
quantities does not have same dimensional ∆AB = 0.075
formula? Rounding of two significant figures.
Yeeweflekeâ jeefMeÙeeW kesâ efvecveefueefKele peesÌ[eW ceW mes efkeâme ∆AB = 0.08m.
peesÌ[s keâe efJeceerÙe met$e meceeve veneR nw?– AB = (0.25 ± 0.08)m

Physics 30 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
73. We measure two quantities as A = 1.0 m ± 0.2 So, ∆L = 5 – 4.9 = 0.1 cm
m, B = 2.0 m ± 0.2 m. We should report correct ∆L = 5 – 4.805 = 0.195 cm
value for AB as ∆L = 5.25 – 5 = 0.25 cm
oes jeefMeÙeeW keâes ceehe keâj Deehe Gvekeâe ceeve A = 1.0 m ∆L = 5.4 – 5 = 0.4 cm
± 0.2 m, B = 2.0 m ± 0.2 m Øeehle keâjles nQ~ AB keâe We can see that 4.9 cm is more close to 5 cm.
mener ceeve nesiee– Hence more accurate.
(a) 1.4 m ± 0.4 m 76. Young's modulus of steel is 1.9 × 1011 N m–2.
(b) 1.41 m ± 0.15 m When they expressed in CGS units of dynes
(c) 1.4 m ± 0.3 m cm–2. It will be equal to
(d) 1.4 m ± 0.2 m (1 N = 105 dyne, 1 m2 = 104 cm2)
mšerue keâe Ùebie ØelÙeemLee iegCeebkeâ 1.9 × 1011 N m–2 nw~
Ans. (d) : Calculate the value of AB :
Ùeefo Fmes CGS cee$ekeâeW, [eFve Øeefle meWšerceeršj ceW JÙekeäle
Given, A = 1.0m ± 0.2m
efkeâÙee peeS lees Fmekeâe ceeve nesiee–
& B = 2.0 ± 0.2m.
(a) 1.9 × 1010 (b) 1.9 × 1011
So, AB = (1.0)(2.0)
(c) 1.9 × 1012 (d) 1.9 × 1013
AB = 1.414m. Ans. (c) : Given, young's modulus (y)= 1.9 × 1011 N/m2
Now, Error in the value AB : As we know that, 1 N = 105 dyne
∆ AB 1 ∆A 1 ∆B 1 metre = 102 cm
Formula used : = +
AB 2 A 2 B So, converting the value to CGS we get.
Given, ∆A = 0.2m & ∆B = 0.2m 1.9 × 1011 × 105
y= = 1.9×1011+5–4
(102 )2 cm2
∆ AB 1(0.2) 1(0.2)
Then, = + ⇒ y = 1.9 × 1012 dyne/cm2
1.4 2(1) 2(2)
77. If momentum (P), area (A) and time (T) are
∆ AB = 0.21
taken to be fundamental quantities, then
Rounding of one significant figure,
energy has the dimensional formula
∆ AB = 0.2m Ùeefo mebJesie (P), #es$eheâue (A) SJeb meceÙe (T) keâes cetue jeefMeÙeeB
Hence, AB = 1.4m ± 0.2m. ceeve ueW lees Tpee& keâe efJeceerÙe met$e nesiee–
74. Which of the following measurement is most (a) [p1 A-1 t–1] (b) [p2 A1 t1]
precise? (c) [p1 A–1/2 t1] (d) [p1 A1/2 t–1]
efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee ceeve meJee&efOekeâ heefjMegæ nw? Ans. (d) : Let, energy E = K Pa Ab Tc ... (i)
(a) 5.00 mm (b) 5.00 cm Where, K is dimensionless constant of proportionality.
(c) 5.00 m (d) 5.00 km P = momentum
Ans. (a) : Q Smallest the unit more precise is the A = Area
measurement. T = time.
n
So, 5.00 mm is smallest unit of measurement of length On equating dimension both side in eq (1) we get
2 –2 –1 a 0 2 0 b 0 0 c
so the precision will be more. [ML T ] = [MLT ] [M L T ] [M L T]
Hence, (a) is correct answer. = [MaLa + 2b T–a + c]
75. The mean length of an object is 5 cm. Which of Appling the principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
the following measurements is most accurate? We get,
efkeâmeer efheb[ keâer Deewmele uebyeeF& 5 cm nw~ efvecveefueefKele ceW a=1 ... (ii)
keâewve-mee ceehe meJee&efOekeâ ÙeLeeLe& nw? a + 2b = 2 ... (iii)
(a) 4.9 cm (b) 4.805 cm –a + c = – 2 ... (iv)
(c) 5.25 cm (d) 5.4 cm On solving equations, (ii), (iii) and (iv).
1
Ans. (a) : We know that accuracy is the closeness of the We get, a = 1, b = , c = –1
2
measured value with the true value.
More close value of measurement with the true value ∴ Dimensional formula of energy [E] = [P1A1/2 T–1]
more is the accuracy of the measurement [E] = [p1 A1/2 t–1]

Physics 31 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2.
M
Motion in Straight
aight Line
L
oes ieefleceeve keâCeeW keâe efJemLeeheve
heve-meceÙe DeefYejsKe efÛe$e
2.1 Position, Path Len
Length and ceW ØeoefMe&le x-De#e mes 30º SJeb 45º keâe keâesCe yeveelee nQ~
Displacement Gvekesâ ›eâceMe: JesieeW keâe Devegheelee nesiee:
1. The position-time (x – t)) gra graph for positive
acceleration is:
Oeveelcekeâ lJejCe kesâ efueS efmLeefle-meceÙ
meceÙe (x – t) «eeheâ nw:

(a)
(a) 1: 3 (b) 3 :1
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Ans. (a) :
(b)

(c)
Let displacement be s and timee be t and y-intercept is
zero
∴ s = ut + 0
s = ut, where u is velocity as perr law of o motion
Also u is slope of the graph s vs t
(d) ∴ u = tanθ
1
u1 = tan 30º ⇒ u1 =
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 3
Ans. (a) : For +ve acceleration, u 2 = tan 45º ⇒ u 2 = 1
dv
> 0 . So, velocity is increasin
creasing ∴ u1 : u 2 =
1
:1
dt 3
Acceleration is given by second cond derivative of
displacement hence the variation of acc acceleration on x-t u1 : u 2 = 1: 3
graph will be parabolic.
3. The X and Y coordinatess of the t particle at any
Also, slope of x-t graph is increasing.
time are x= 5t -2t2 and d y = 10t respectively,
where x and y are in meters eters and t in seconds.
The acceleration of the particle partic at t = 2 s is/Ùeefo
efkeâmeer meceÙe hej, efkeâmeer keâCe kesâ x leLee y efveoxMeebkeâ,
›eâceMe: x = 5t – 2t2 leLee y = 10t 10 nQ~ (peneB x leLee y
ceeršj ceW Deewj t meskebâ[ ceW nQ~) lees, t = 2s hej Gme keâCe
2. The displacement-time graphs
aphs of two moving keâe lJejCe nesiee:
particles make angles of 30°
0° and 45° with the x- (a) 0 (b) 5 m/s2
axis as shown in the figure.
re. Th
The ratio of their (c) –4m/s2 (d) –8 m/s2
respective velocity is NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Physics 32 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given 5. The displacement-time graph grap of a moving
x = 5t – 2t2 particle is shown below. w. The
T instantaneous
y = 10t velocity of the particle is negative
nega at the point
Velocity along x-axis, efÛe$e ceW efJemLeeheve-meceÙe «eeheââ efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ keâCe
dx
Vx = keâe leel#eefCekeâ Jesie efkeâme efyevogg hej $e+Ceelcekeâ nesiee?
dt
Vx = (5 – 4t) m/s
Acceleration along x-axis
dv
ax =
dt
d
= ( 5 − 4t ) (a) E (b) F
dt
ax = – 4m/s2 (c) C (d) D
Velocity along y-axis, AIPMT-(1994)
dy d (10t ) Ans. (a) : The slope of the tangent
gent at
a any point on the
Vy = =
dt dt displacement-time graph gives instantaneous
instant velocity at
Vy = 10 m/s any point/instant.
dy • The only part of the graph with
h negative
nega slope is point
Acceleration ay =
dt E. So, the instantaneous velocity
city of
o the particle is
d (10 ) negative at the point E.
ay =
dt 6. Which of the following ing curve does not
= 0 m/s2 represent motion in one dimension?
dimen
The acceleration of the particle at t = 2s is – 4 m/s2. efoS ieS «eeheâ ceW, keâewve-mee «eeheâ
«ee SkeâefJeceerÙe ieefle
4. A particle staring from the orig origin (0, 0) moves ØeoefMe&le veneR keâjlee nw?
in a straight line in thee (x, y) plane. Its
coordinates at a later timee are (
3, 3 . The )
path of the particle makes es wit
with the x-axis an
angle of:- (a) (b)
Skeâ keâCe cetue efyevog (0, 0) mes DeejcY
ejcYe keâjkesâ (x, y) leue
ceW Skeâ meerOeer jsKee hej Ûeuelee nw~ kegâÚ meceÙe he§eele kesâ
#eCe hej Fmekesâ efveoxMeebkeâ ( 3,, 3 ) ne nesles nQ~ Fme keâCe kesâ
Ûeueve heLe keâe x-De#e kesâ meeLe keâesâesCe nesiee:- (c) (d)
(a) 0º (b) 30º
(c) 45º (d) 60º
AIPMT-(1992)
AIPMT-2007
Ans. (d) : Ans. (b) : An object or a body is said to be in motion if
its position continuously changess with time.
• When the position of an object
ct changes
cha linearly, it is
called the motion in one dimension.
sion. The object cannot
have two displacement at the same
me time.
tim
• In the given option (b), curve shows the body has two
different velocities at a given time.
e. Therefore,
Th this curve
does not represent the motion in one dimension.

3 3× 3
tan θ = = = 3
3 3
⇒ tan θ = 3
⇒ θ = 60º

Physics 33 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Total time taken
2.2 Average Velocity and Average x x
t = +
Speed v1 v2

A vehicle travels half the distance with speed θ 1 1 

7. = x + 
and the remaining distance with speed 2θ . Its  v1 v2 
average speed is : Total distance
Skeâ Jeenve DeeOeer otjer Ûeeue θ mes leLee Mes<e otjer Ûeeue Average velocity = Total time taken
2θ mes ieefle keâjlee nw~ Fmekeâer Deewmele Ûeeue nw :
2x
3θ θ v=
(a) (b) 1 1 
4 3 x + 
 1v v 2 
2θ 4θ
(c) (d) 2
3 3 v=
 1 1 
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023  + 
Ans. (d) :  v1 v 2 
total distance travelled 1 1 2
Average speed = + =
total time taken v1 v2 v
L 9. A toy car with charge q moves on a frictionless
=
L L horizontal plane surfaceur under the influence urof
2+ 2 a uniform electric field E . Due to the force q E ,
θ 2θ its velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s in one
1 second duration. At that instant the direction of
= the field is reversed. The car continues to move
1 1
+ for two more seconds under the influence of
2θ 4 θ this field. The average velocity and the average
4 speed of the toy car between 0 to 3 seconds are
= θ respectively
3
keâesF& efKeueewvee keâej efpeme hej DeeJesMe q nw efkeâmeer
4 ur
Average speed = θ Skeâmeceeve efJeÅegle-#es$e E kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW efkeâmeer Ie<e&Cenerve
3
meceleue #eweflepe he=‰ hej ieefleceeve nw~ Skeâ meskeâC[ kesâ
8. A person travelling in a straight line moves ur
with a constant velocity v1 for certain distance
Devlejeue ceW yeue q E kesâ keâejCe Fmekeâe Jesie 0 mes
‘x’ and with a constant velocity v2 for next 6m/s nes peelee nw~ Gmeer #eCe efJeÅegle-#es$e keâer efoMee
equal distance. The average velocity v is given Gl›eâefcele keâj oer peeleer nw~ Fme #es$e kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW keâej
by the relation Deewj oes meskeâC[ lekeâ ieefle keâjleer jnleer nw~ 0 mes 3
keâesF& JÙeefòeâ efkeâmeer mejue jsKee ceW ieceve keâjles meceÙe keâesF& meskeâC[ kesâ yeerÛe efKeueewvee keâej kesâ Deewmele Jesie Deewj
efveef§ele otjer x efveÙele Jesie v1 mes leÙe keâjlee nw leLee Deewmele Ûeeue ›eâceMe: nQ
efveÙele Jesie v2 mes Fleveer ner otjer leÙe keâjlee nw~ Deewmele (a) 2 m/s, 4 m/s (b) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
Jesie v kesâ efueS mebyebOe nw– (c) 1.5 m/s, 3 m/s (d) 1 m/s, 3.5 m/s
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
1 1 1
(a) v = v1v2 (b) = + Ans. (b) :
v v1 v 2
2 1 1 v v1 + v 2
(c) = + (d) =
v v1 v 2 2 2
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Ans. (c) : Total distance travelled = 2x
Distance travelled during each phase = x v−u 6−0
x Acceleration, a = = = 6m / s −2
Time taken during first phase = t 1
v1 For t = 0 to t = 1s,
x 1
Time taken during second phase = Displacement, S1 = ut + at2
v2 2

Physics 34 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 t1 + t 2 t1 t 2
× 6 (1) = 3m ... ( i )
2
⇒ S1 = (a) (b)
2 2 t1 − t 2
Similarly, t1t 2
For t = 1s to t = 2s, (c) (d) t1 -t2
t1 + t 2
1
Displacement, S2 = 6.1 − × 6 (1) = 3m ... ( ii )
2
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
2
d
For t = 2s to t = 3s, Ans. (c) : Velocity of girl w.r.t. to elevator = = Vge
t1
1
Displacement, S3 = 0 − × 6 (1) = −3m ... ( iii )
2
d
2 Velocity of elevator w.r.t. to ground VeG =
Total displacement, S = S1 + S2 + S3 = 3m t2
3 Then velocity of girl w.r.t. ground
Average velocity = = 1m / s ur ur ur
3 V gG = V ge + V eG
Total distance travelled =9m i.e. VgG = Vge + VeG
9 Let t be the time to cover d distance with both girl and
Average speed = = 3m / s escalator moving
3
d d d
Alternate Solution :- = +
t t1 t 2
1 1 1
= +
t t1 t 2
t1 t 2
t=
t1 + t 2
0 s< t < 1 s velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s. 11. A particle is moving such that its position co-
1 s< t < 2 s velocity becomes 0 m/s from 6 m/s. ordinate (x, y) are
2 s < t < 3 s velocity goes to – 6 m/s from 0 m/s. (2m, 3m) at time t =0
The total displacement is the area of velocity time graph (6m, 7m) at time t = 2 s and
considering sign, (13m, 14m) at time t = 5s.
ur
1 1 Average velocity vector (V av ) from t = 0 to
= × ( 2 – 0 ) × 6 – × ( 3 – 2 ) × 6 = 6 – 3 = 3m
2 2 t= 5 s is:-
Total time = 3s Skeâ keâCe Fme Øekeâej ieefle keâjlee nw efkeâ, Fmekesâ efmLeefle
Average velocity = = 1 m/s
3 efveoxMeebkeâ (x, y) efvecve Øekeâej nw
3 (2m, 3m) meceÙe t = 0 hej
The total distance is the area of velocity time graph
(6m, 7m) meceÙe t = 2 s hej
without considering sign.
1 1 (13m, 14m) meceÙe t = 5s hej
= × ( 2 – 0 ) × 6 + × ( 3 – 2 ) × 6 = 6 + 3 = 9m ur
2 2 lees t = 0 mes t = 5s lekeâ, Deewmele Jesie meefoMe (V av )
Average speed = = 3 m/s
9 nesiee:-
3 1 ˆ 7 ˆ ˆ
10. Preeti reached the metro station and found that (a) (13i + 14ˆj) (i + j)
(b)
5 3
the escalator was not working. She walked up 11 ˆ ˆ
the stationary escalator in time t1. On other (c) 2(iˆ + ˆj) (d) (i + j)
days, if she remains stationary on the moving 5
escalator, then the escalator takes her up in AIPMT-06.05.2014
time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on Ans. (d) : At time t = 0, the position vector of the
ur
the moving escalator will be/Skeâ efove cewš^es mšsMeve particle is r = 2iˆ + 3jˆ
1
hej Smkeâuesšj (Ûeueleer meerÌ{er) kesâ ve Ûeueves hej Øeerefle, At time t = 5s, the position vector of the particle is
Gmekeâer meerefÌ{ÙeeW hej hewoue Thej ÛeÌ{leer nw~ FmeceW Gmes t1 ur
r2 = 13iˆ + 14jˆ
meceÙe ueielee nw~ DevÙe efoveeW ceW peye Smkeâuesšj Ûeue jne ur ur r ur r
nselee nw leye Jen Gme hej KeÌ[er jn keâj t2 meceÙe ceW Thej Displacement from r1 to r2 is ∆ r = r2 − r1
hengBÛe peeleer nw lees, Gmekesâ ôeje Ûeueles ngS Smkeâuesšjhej
Ûeuekeâj Thej ÛeÌ{ves ceW efueÙee ieÙee meceÙe nesiee:
( ) (
= 13iˆ + 14ˆj − 2iˆ + 3jˆ )
Physics 35 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 5 m/s2 (b) 1 m/s2
= 11iˆ + 11jˆ
(c) 7 m/s2 (d) 7 m/s2
∴ Average velocity,
r AIPMT (Screening)-2011
∆ r 11iˆ + 11jˆ 11 ˆ ˆ
( )
r
v av = = = i+ j Ans. (a) : Given – Initial velocity u = 30 î (East)
∆t 5−0 5
Final velocity v = 40 ĵ (North)
12. A particle covers half of its total distance with
speed v1 and the rest half distance with speed Change in velocity ∆v = 40 ĵ – 30 î
v2. Its average speed during the complete
Magnitude ∆v = 30 2 + 40 2 = 50m / s
journey is/Skeâ keâCe Deheveer kegâue otjer keâer DeeOeer v1
change inve locity
Ûeeue mes leLee Mes<e DeeOeer v2 Ûeeue mes leÙe keâjlee nw~ hetjer Average acceleration =
Time taken
Ùee$ee kesâ oewjeve Gmekeâer Deewmele Ûeeue nw :
∆v 50
v + v2 v1 v 2 Average acceleration (a) = = = 5 m/s 2 .
(a) 1 (b) ∆t 10
2 v1 + v 2
14. A car moves from X to Y with a uniform speed
2v1 v 2 v2 v2 vu and returns to Y with a uniform speed vd.
(c) (d) 2 1 2 2
v1 + v 2 v1 + v 2 The average speed for this round trip is:-
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 Skeâ ceesšj ieeÌ[er X mes Y lekeâ DeÛej Ûeeue vu mes Ûeueleer
Ans. (c) : If the half distance (x) covered with the speed
nw Deewj Y mes X lekeâ DeÛej Ûeeue vd mes Jeeheme Deeleer nQ
v1 in t1 time. Fme hetjer Ùee$ee kesâ efueÙes ieeÌ[er keâer Deewmele Ûeeue nesieer:-
So, using formula of speed is- vu + vd 2v d v u
(a) (b)
x 2 vd + u u
v1 =
t1 vd vu
(c) v u vd (d)
x vd + vu
t1 =
v1 AIPMT-2007
And another half distance (x), covered with speed v2 in Ans. (b) :
time t2.
x
So, v2 =
t2
x Let distance between X and Y = D.
t2 =
v2 Total distance
As Average speed =
Totaldistance Total time
Q Average velocity = D+D
Total time =
D D
total distance = x + x = 2x +
v u vd
total time = t1 + t2
2D 2v d v u
=
x
+
x = =
v1 v 2  v + vu  vd + vu
D d 
x+x 2x  vd v u 
∴ Average seepd = =
t1 + t 2 x
+
x 15. A particle starts from rest with constant
v1 v 2 acceleration. The ratio of space-average
velocity to the time average velocity is
2v1v 2
Average seepd = Skeâ keâCe efmLej DeJemLee mes efveÙele lJejCe mes ieefle ØeejbYe
v1 + v 2
keâjlee nw leye Fmekesâ meceef°-Deewmele Jesie keâe meceÙe-
13. A body is moving with velocity 30 m/s towards Deewmele Jesie kesâ meeLe Devegheele keäÙee nesiee :
east. After 10 seconds its velocity becomes 40
1 3
m/s towards north. The average acceleration of (a) (b)
the body is : 2 4
Skeâ Jemleg 30 m/s Jesie mes hetJe& keâer Deesj ieefle keâj jner nw~ (c)
4
(d)
3
10 mewkesâC[ kesâ heMÛeeled Fmekeâe Jesie Gòej keâer Deesj 40 3 2
m/s nes peelee nw, lees Jemleg keâe Deewmele lJejCe nw : AIPMT-1999
Physics 36 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
17. A bus travelling the first one-third distance at a
Ans. (c): Space average velocity is ∫ vdx ...(i) speed of 10 km/h, the next one-third at 20 km/h
∫ dx and at last one-third at 60 km/h. The average
speed of the bus is
Time average velocity is
∫ vdt ...(ii)
Skeâ yeme efkeâmeer otjer keâe Skeâ efleneF& 10 efkeâceer/IeCše
∫ dt Jesie mes, otmeje efleneF& Yeeie 20 efkeâceer/IeCše Jesie mes
Initially the particle is at rest so u = 0 leLee leermeje efleneF& Yeeie 60 efkeâceer/IeCše Jesie mes
v = at ... (a) Ûeueleer nw~ yeme keâe Deewmele Jesie nesiee:
1 2 (a) 9 km/h (b) 16 km/h
x = at .... (b) (c) 18 km/h (d) 48 km/h
2
AIPMT-(1991)
2at
dx = dt .... (c) Ans. (c) : Given that,
2 Bus travels first one-third of the total distance at speed
For space - average velocity put (a) and (c) in (i) = 10 km/hr.
at 3 Next one-third at the speed = 20 km/hr.
∫
2 2
a t dt 2 and the last one third at the speed = 60 km/hr.
= 32 = at ...(d)
∫ at dt t 3 Let us consider the total distance is 'D'.
We know that,
2
For time average velocity put equation (a) in (ii) total distance
Average speed =
∫ at dt = at 2
=
at
...(e)
total time taken

∫ dt 2t 2 =
D
Taking ratio of (d) and (e) t1 + t 2 + t 3
2 Time taken at the speed of 10 km/hr,
at D/3
3 =4 (t1) =
at 3 10
similarly, For 20 km/hr
2
Hence the ratio of space average velocity to the time D/3
t2 =
average velocity is 4 : 3 20
16. A car moves a distance of 200 m. It covers the D/3
For 60 km/hr, t3 =
first half of the distance at speed 40 km/h and 60
the second half of distance at speed v. The D
average speed is 48 km/h. The value of v is So, Average speed =
 D/3  D/3  D/3
Skeâ keâej 200 ceer. keâer otjer leÙe keâjleer nw~ Ùee$ee keâe  + + 
 10   20   60 
henuee DeeOee Yeeie Jen 40 efkeâceer/IeCše Jesie mes leLee
1
otmeje DeeOee Yeeie v Jesie mes Ûeueleer nw~ Ùeefo Deewmele Jesie =
48 efkeâceer/IeCše nw, lees v keâe ceeve nw:  1   1   1 
 + + 
 30   60   180 
(a) 56 km/h (b) 60 km/h
(c) 50 km/h (d) 48 km/h 1
=
AIPMT-(1991)  6 + 3+1
 
Ans. (b) : Given that,  180 
Distance = 200 m 180
=
Speed of the car in the first half (v1) = 40 km/hr. 10
Average speed of the car (vavg.) = 48 km/hr = 18 km/hr.
Speed of the car in the second half (v2) is v 18. A car covers the first half of the distance
So, we know that, between two places at 40 km/h and another half
2v1.v 2 at 60 km/h. The average speed of the car is
vavg = keâej Éeje kegâÚ otjer leÙe keâer peeleer nw~ otjer keâe DeeOee
v1 + v 2
Yeeie Jen 40 efkeâceer/IeCše mes leLee Mes<e Yeeie 60
2 × 40 × v
⇒ 48 = efkeâceer/Iebše Jesie mes leÙe keâjleer nw~ keâej keâe Deewmele
40 + v Jesie nw:
⇒ 48 (40 + v) = 80 v (a) 40 km/h (b) 48 km/h
32v = 48 × 40 (c) 50 km/h (d) 60 km/h
So, v = 60 km/hr. AIPMT-(1990)
Physics 37 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given that, r
Ans. (c) : Given: r(t) = (4ti$ + 2t 2 $j + 5k)
$
First half of the distance at speed (v1) = 40 km/hr.
dr
And another half of the distance at speed (v2) = 60 = 4i$ + 4t $j
km/hr. dt
We know that, If distance is constant then, ur dr
V= = 4i$ + 4$j
2v1 × v 2 dt t =1
Average speed =
v1 + v 2 ur
V = 4 2 + 4 2 = 32
2 × 40 × 60
= ur
40 + 60 V = 4 2 m / sec
= 48 km/hr.
19. A train of 150 meter length is going towards Vy 4
tanφ = = =1
north direction at a speed of 10 m/s. A parrot Vx 4
flies at the speed of 5 m/s towards south
direction parallel to the railways track. The φ = 45º
time taken by the parrot to cross the train is 21. Two cars P and Q start from a point at the
Skeâ š^sve keâer uecyeeF& 150 ceer. nw~ Ùen Gòej efoMee ceW same time in a straight line and their positions
10 ceer./meskebâ[ kesâ Jesie mes Ûeueleer nw~ Skeâ leeslee 5 are represented by xP (t) = at + bt2 and xQ(t) =
ceer./meskebâ[ mes oef#eCe efoMee ceW jsueceeie& kesâ meceevlej ft-t2. At what time do the cars have the same
GÌ[lee nw~ efkeâleves meceÙe ceW leeslee š^sve keâes heej keâj velocity?
peeSiee? P Deewj Q Skeâ ner meceÙe hej efkeâmeer efyevog mes mejue jsKee
(a) 12 s (b) 8 s ceW Ûeuevee ØeejbYe keâjleer nw Deewj Gvekeâer efmLeefleÙeeW keâes
(c) 15 s (d) 10 s ›eâceMe: xP (t) = at + bt2 Deewj xQ(t) = ft-t2 mes
AIPMT-(1988) efve¤efhele efkeâÙee peelee nw ~ efkeâme meceÙe hej Fve oesveeW
Ans. (d) : Given that, keâejeW keâe Jesie meceeve nesiee ?
length of train = 150 m
a −f a+f
speed of train = 10 m/sec in north direction (a) (b)
speed of parrot = 5 m/sec in south direction 1+ b 2(b − 1)
Both direction is opposite a+f f −a
(c) (d)
So, relative velocity = 5 – (–10) 2(b + 1) 2(1 + b)
= 15 m/sec
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
time taken to cross the train is
Ans. (d) :
length of train 150
= = = 10 sec
relative velocity 15

2.3 Instantaneous Velocity and

Instantaneous Speed
20. The position of a particle is given by Position of car P,
keâCe keâer efmLeefle oer peeleer nw xp (t) = at + bt2
r
r (t) = 4tiˆ + 2t 2 ˆj+ 5k$ Thus velocity of car P
Where t is in seconds and r in meter. Find the d  X p (t) 
magnitude and direction of velocity v(t), at t= V p = = a + 2bt
dt
1s, with respect to x-axis. Position of car Q
peneB t meskebâ[ ceW Deewj r ceeršj ceW nw~ x-De#e kesâ mebyebOe ceW xQ (t) = ft – t2
t = 1s hej Jesie v(t) keâe heefjCeece Deewj efoMee %eele Thus, velocity of car Q
keâerefpeS~ d  x Q (t) 
−1 o −1 o vQ =  = f − 2t
(a) 3 2ms , 30 (b) 3 2 ms , 45 dt
−1 o −1 o According to the question,
(c) 4 2 ms , 45 (d) 4 2 ms , 60
vp t =t0 = vQ t =t0
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023

Physics 38 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Where, t0 is time at which there velocity is same Ans. (a)
∴a + 2bt0 = f – 2t0 v(x) = βx–2n
dv
f −a = −2nβ x −2n −1
⇒ 0 t = dx
2 (1 + b ) Acceleration of the particle is given by
22. If the velocity of a particle is v = At + Bt , 2 dv dv dx dv
a= = × = ×v
where A and B are constants, then the distance dt dx dt dx
travelled by it between 1 s and 2s is dv
Therefore, a = v.
Ùeefo efkeâmeer keâCe keâe Jesie v = At + Bt2 nw ÙeneB A leLee dx
B efmLejebkeâ nw, lees Fme keâCe Éeje 1 s Deewj 2s kesâ yeerÛe a = βx–2n × (–2n βx –2n–1)
Ûeueer ieÙeer otjer nw a = – 2n β2x –4n–1
24. A car of mass m starts from rest and
A B 3 accelerates so that the instantaneous power
(a) + (b) A+B
2 2 2 delivered to the car has a constant magnitude
P0. The instantaneous velocity of this car is
3 7 proportional to
(c) 3A+7B (d) A+ B
2 3 m õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ keâej efJejeceeJemLee mes ØeejcYe neskeâj
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 Fme Øekeâej lJeefjle nesleer ns, efkeâ keâej keâes Øeehle leel#eefCekeâ
Ans. (d) : Given Meefòeâ keâe efmLej ceeve P0 nw~ lees, Fme keâej keâe
v = At + Bt2 leel#eefCekeâ Jesie meceevegheeleer nes mekeâlee nw:-
ds (a) t–1/2 (b) t/√m
We know v = 2
dt (c) t P 0 (d) t1/2
ds = vdt AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (d) : Mass of car = 'm'
∫ ds = ∫ vdt Instantaneous power delivered to the car has a constant
s t = 2s magnitude Po
Hence ∫ ds = ∫ (At + Bt 2 )dt
Q P0 = Fv
0 t =1s
2 dv
 At 2 Bt 3  Also, F = ma = m ×
S= +  dt
 2 3 1
dv
⇒ P0 = mv
A B dt
S = (22 − 12 ) + (23 − 13 )
2 3 ⇒ P0 dt = mv dv
3A 7B Now, Integrating both side –
S= + t v
2 3
23. A particle of unit mass undergoes one-
∫ P0dt = m∫ vdv
0 0
dimensional motion such that its velocity varies mv 2
according to /Skeâebkeâ õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& keâCe ⇒ P0 t =
2
SkeâefJeceerÙe ieefle keâjlee nw Deewj Fmekeâe Jesie efvecveebefkeâle 1
 2P t  2
meceerkeâjCe kesâ Devegmeej heefjJeefle&le neslee nw: ⇒ v=  0 
 m 
v(x) = βx-2n
where β and n are constants and x is the ⇒ v∝t
1
2
position of the particle. The acceleration of the
particle as a function of x, is given by : 25. The motion of a particle along a straight line is
described by equation x = 8 + 12t – t3 , where
peneB β leLee n efmLejebkeâ nQ leLee x keâCe keâer efmLeefle nw~ 'x' is in metre and t in second. The retardation
lees, Fme keâCe kesâ lJejCe keâes, x kesâ heâueve kesâ ™heceW of the particle when its velocity becomes zero
efve™efhele efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw~ is:/Skeâ mejue jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe, efkeâmeer keâCe keâer ieefle
(a) -2nβ 2x-4n-1 (b) -2β 2x-2n+1 keâes meceerkeâjCe x = 8 + 12t – t3 Éeje heefjYeeef<ele
(c) -2nβ 2e-4n+1 (d) -2nβ 2 x-2n-1 (Øekeâš) efkeâÙee peelee nw~ peneB x ceeršj ceW leLee t meskebâ[
AIPMT-03.05.2015 ceW nw~ Jesie MetvÙe nesves hej keâCe keâe cebove nw:–
Physics 39 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 6ms–2 12ms–2
(b) 12m Ans. (a): Given x = (t +5)–1
(c) 24ms–2 zero/MetvÙe
(d) zero where x = distance, t = time
n
AIPMT MT (S(Screening)-2012 Differentiating given eq ,
dx 1
Ans. (b) : Equation of motion of a pparticle along a = (v) = - - - - (i)
straight line is– dt (t + 5) 2
x = 8 + 12t – t3 Again differentiating eqn (i),
dx d2 x 2
Now, Velocity, v = = 12 − 3t ––––
2 ––––– (i) 2
= (a) = - - - (ii)
dt dt (t + 5)3
Comparing equation (i) and (ii) we get, ge
dv
also, acceleration a = = −6t ––––
––––– (ii) a∝v 3/2
dt
28. A particle shows distance-time tim curve as given
Now, retardation of particle when its vvelocity becomes in this figure. The maximu aximum instantaneous
zero is, velocity of the particle is around arou the point :
→ Put v = 0 in equation (i) Skeâ keâCe kesâ efueS otjer-meceÙe Je›eâ Fme efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee
0 = 12 – 3t2 ieÙee nw~ Fmekeâe DeefOelece lelkeâeefeefuekeâ
ek Jesie Je›eâ kesâ efkeâme
t = 2 sec efyevog kesâ Deemeheeme nesiee?
Now, Put t = 2 sec in equation (ii)
a = –6 × 2 = – 12 m/s2
a = 12 m/s2 (retardation
rdation)
26. locity ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ ) and
A particle has initial velocity
(a) D (b) A
acceleration ( 0.3iˆ + 0.2jˆ ).. The magnitude of (c) B (d) C
velocity after 10 seconds will b be:/efkeâmeer keâCe keâe AIPMT-2008
lJejCe ( 0.3iˆ + 0.2jˆ ) Ans. (d) : Given Graph of s and t.
ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ ) leLee lJejC
nw~ 10 meskeâC[ yeeo keâCe kesâ Jesie keâe ceeve nesiee:-
(a) 5 units (b) 9 un
units
(c) 9 2 units (d) 5 2 units
AIPMT
MT (S
(Screening)-2012
Ans. (d) : Given ds
and we know ⇒ = v = slope of s, t graph.
Initial velocity = 2i$ + 3j$ = u x ˆi + u yˆj dt
So where slope will be maximum m there
the velocity will be
Acceleration = 0.3i$ + 0.2j$ = a x ˆi + a y ˆj maximum.
From given figure we see that at point C, slope is
( )
Velocity (v) after time 't' = ( u x + a x t ) $i + u y + a y t $j maximum.
Now, velocity after t = 10 sec Hence Instantaneous velocity at point p C will be
maximum.
u =  2 + 0.3 (10 )  i + 3 + 0.2 (10 )  $j
$
29. A particle moving along x-axis has acceleration
u = 5i$ + 5j$  t
f, at time t, given by f = f0 1 −  , where f0 and
 T
∴ Magnitude of velocity = 52 + 52 = 5 2 units T are constants. The particle rticle at t = 0 has zero
27. A particle moves a distance stance x in time t velocity. In the time interval rval between
b t = 0 and
the instant when f = 0,, the particle's velocity
according to equation x = ((t + 5)–1. The
(vx) is:
acceleration of particle is propor roportional to –
x-De#e keâer efoMee ceW ieefleceeve Skeâ keâCe kesâ meceÙe t hej
Skeâ keâCe oer ieF& meceerkeâjCe x = (t + 5)–1 kesâ Devegmeej t
lJejCe f keâes f0 =  1 –  meceereerkeâjCe
t
meceÙe ceW Skeâ x otjer leÙe keâjleeee nnw~ keâCe keâe lJejCe eâj Éeje JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee
 T
meceevegheeleer nw – pee mekeâlee nw, peyeefkeâ f0 Deewj T efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ t=0 hej
(a) (velocity)3/2/(Jesie)3/2 (distance)2/(otjer)2
(b) (dis Fme keâCe keâe Jesie MetvÙe nw~ meceÙeceÙe t= 0 Deewj Gme #eCe
(c) (distance)–2/(otjer)–2 (velocity)2/3/(Jesie)2/3
(d) (vel kesâ yeerÛe Devlejeue ceW peyeefkeâ f=0 nw, keâCe keâe Jesie (Vx)
AIPMT
MT (S
(Screening)-2010 nesiee:-
Physics 40 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 31. A particle moves along a straight line OX. At a
(a) f0 T (b) f0T time t (in seconds) the distance x (in meters) of
2
the particle from O is given by x = 40 + 12t – t3.
1 How long would the particle travel before
(c) f 0 T 2 (d) f0T2
2 coming to rest: -
AIPMT-2007 Skeâ keâCe meerOes jsKee OX hej Ûeue jne nw~ meceÙe t
 t (meskeâC[eW ceW) hej keâCe keâer O mes otjer x (ceeršjeW ceW)
Ans. (a) Given acceleration along x-axis f = f0  1 − 
 T  nesleer nw x = 40 + 12 t – t3 ÙenkeâCe efJejecee DeJemLee
dv lekeâ hengBÛeves ceW efkeâleveer otjer Ûeue uesiee:-
and we know acceleration f = (a) 24m (b) 40m
dt
(c) 56m (d) 16m
dv  t
∴ = f0 1 −  AIPMT-2006
dt  T Ans. (d) : Distance x of particle from O
integrate both side – is given by x = 40 + 12 t – t3
T T
t
v = ∫ f 0 ⋅ dt − ∫ f 0 dt
0 0
T
T 2
 t2  T
= [f 0 t ]0 − f 0  = f 0T − f 0 2T
T

 2T 0
1
= f 0T − f 0T
2 at t = 0, Particle is at, let say x distance from O
1 x = 40 + 12(0) – (0)3 = 40 m
= f 0T
2 Q Particle comes to rest that means velocity of particle
30. The position x of a particle with respect to time becomes zero after travelling certain displacement
t along x-axis is given by x = 9t2 – t3 where x isx = 40 + 12t – t3
in metres and t in seconds. What will be the dx
V= = 12 – 3t2
position of this particle when it achieves dt
maximum speed along the + x direction ? at time t = t when particle come to rest
x-De#e hej efkeâmeer keâCe keâe meceÙe t kesâ meboYe& ceW
12 – 3t2 = 0
3t2 = 12
efveOee&efjle mLeeve x, meceerkeâjCe x = 9t2 –t3 Éeje JÙeòeâ
t=2
efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw, peyeefkeâ x ceeršjeW ceW leLee t meskeâC[eW
at t = 2, let say x' distance from O
ceW nQ~ +x efoMee ceW keâCe keâe mLeeve keäÙee nesiee peye Gmekeâer
x' = 40 + 12(2) – (2)3
Ûeeue GÛÛelece nesieer? x' = 56 m
(a) 24m (b) 32m We have seen that particle started journey when it is 40
(c) 54m (d) 81m m from point O and come to rest at 56 m from point O.
AIPMT-2007 so particle travelled a distance of 56 – 40 = 16 m
Ans. (c) : Given : position of particle x = 9t 2 − t 3 32. The displacement x of a particle varies with
dx time t as x = ae–αt + beβt, where a , b, α and β
we know, v = are positive constants. The velocity of the
dt
particle will –
∴ v = 18t − 3t 2
Skeâ keâCe kesâ efJemLeeheve x keâe meceÙe t kesâ Øeefle yeoueeJe
dv
= 18 − 6t efoÙee peelee nw x = ae–αt + beβt Éeje, peyeefkeâ a, b, α
dt Deewj β Oeve efmLejebkeâ nw~ Fme keâCe keâe Jesie-
dv d2 v (a) Be independent of α and β
For maximum speed =0 & < 0 (Negative)
dt dt 2 α Deewj β kesâ ceeveeW mes mJelev$e nesiee
d2v (b) Go on increasing with time
So, 18 − 6t = 0 ⇒ t = 3s & 2 = −6 < 0
dt meceÙe kesâ meeLe yeÌ{lee peeÙesiee
Maximum speed is at t = 3s , So maximum (c) Drop to zero when α = β
displacement at this position is -
Ieškeâj MegvÙe nes peeÙesiee peye α = β nesiee~
x = 9× ( 3) − ( 3)
2 3
(d) Go on decreasing with time
= 9 × 9 − 27 meceÙe kesâ meeLe Iešlee peeÙesiee~
= 54m AIPMT-2005
Physics 41 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given : x = ae-αt + bdβt Ans. (d) : The value of position vector
r
dx – αt βt r = cos ωtxˆ + sin ωtyˆ
Velocity, V = = −aαe + bβe r
dt r dr d(cos ωtxˆ + sin ωty) ˆ
–αt
The value of –aαe decreases with time and for second v= =
βt dt dt
derivative it increases. But the value of bβe always r
increases with time as a contains positive terms only. v = −(sin ωt)ωxˆ + (cos ωt)ωyˆ
So, velocity in entire function will goes on increasing r
v = −ω(sin ωtxˆ − cos ωty) ˆ
with time.
Now
33. Motion of a particle is given by equation
3 2
S = (3t +7t + 14 t + 8) m. The value of We need to find the acceleration of the particle
acceleration of the particle at t = 1 sec. is : r dv
a=
Skeâ keâCe keâer ieefle efvecve meceerkeâjCe mes oer peeleer nw dt
S = (3t3 + 7t2 + 14 t + 8) m, t = 1 mewkeâC[ hej keâCe r d(−ω sin ωtxˆ + ω cos ωty) ˆ
a=
kesâ lJejCe keâe ceeve nw – dt
(a) 10 m/s2 (b) 32 m/s2 r
a = −ω cos ωtxˆ − ω2 sin ωtyˆ
2

(c) 23 m/s2 (d) 16 m/s2 r

AIPMT-2000 a = −ω2 (cos ωtxˆ + sin ωty) ˆ
r r
Ans. (b) : Equation of motion given, a = −ω2 r = ω2 (− r)
S = 3t3 + 7t2 + 14t + 8
Now,
dS
Velocity (v) = The relation between the velocity vector and position
dt vector
= 9t2 + 14t + 14 rr
2 v.r = −ω(sin ωtxˆ − cos ωty) ˆ × (cos ωtxˆ + sin ωty) ˆ
d s r r
Now, acceleration, a = 2 v.r = −ω(sin ωt.cos ωt + 0 + 0 − sin ωt.cos ωt)
dt
rr
a = 18t + 14 ∴ v.r = −ω(0)
at t = 1 sec, rr
m v.r = 0
Acceleration of particle = 18×1 + 14 = 32 2 r
s So, velocity is perpendicular to r and acceleration a =
2
34. A particle moves so that its position vector is (ω r) will always be aiming towards the origin.
r
given r = cos ωtx$ + sin ωty$ . Where ω is 35. The acceleration of a particle is increasing
linearly with time t as bt. The particle starts
constant. Which of the following is true?
from origin with an initial velocity v0. The
keâesF& keâCe Fme Øekeâej ieceve keâjlee nw efkeâ Gmekeâe efmLeefle distance travelled by the particle in time t will be
r
meefoMe r = cos ωtx$ + sin ωty$ Éeje efve™efhele efkeâÙee efkeâmeer keâCe keâe lJejCe meceÙe t kesâ meeLe jwefKekeâ ™he mes
ieÙee nw, ÙeneB ω Skeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw? bt kesâ ™he ceW yeÌ{ jne nw~ keâCe DeejefcYekeâ Jesie v0 kesâ
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mes keâLeve melÙe nw? meeLe cetue efyevog mes Ûeuevee ØeejcYe keâjlee nw~ t meceÙe ceW
r
(a) Velocity is perpendicular to r and keâCe Éeje leÙe keâer ieF& otjer nesieer:
acceleration is directed away from the 1 1
r
origin./Jesie r kesâ uecyeJeled nw leLee lJejCe cetue efyevog mes (a) v 0 t + bt 2 (b) v0 t + bt 3
3 3
otj keâer Deesj efveoxefMele nw~
1 1
(b) Velocity and r acceleration both are (c) v 0 t + bt 3 (d) v0 t + bt 2
perpendicular to r 6 2
r AIPMT-(1995)
Jesie Deewj lJejCe oesveeW ner r kesâ uecyeJeled nQ~
r
Ans. (c) : Given that,
(c) Velocity and acceleration both parallel to r
r Acceleration (a) = bt
Jesie Deewj lJejCe oesveeW ner kesâ meceevlej nw~
r Given, at time t = 0, the initial velocity is v0.
r
(d) Velocity is perpendicular to r and change in velocity
acceleration is directed towards the origin. ∵ a=
r change in time
Jesie r kesâ uecyeJeled nw leLee lJejCe cetue efyevog keâer Deesj
efveoxefMele nw~ dv
a= = bt
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 dt
AIPMT-1995 dv = bt . dt
Physics 42 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Integrating on both sides, d ( 3) d ( 2) d d
v t
= t – 6t + 3 ( t ) + ( 4 )
dt 2 dt dt dt
∫ dv = ∫ bt dt
v0 0
v = 3t – 12t + 3
d
Acceleration (a) = (v)
(v –v0) = b [ t 2 / 2] 0
t
dt
d( 2
b[2 ]
t –0= = 3t – 12t + 3)
2 dt
d ( 2) d d
b = 3t – (12t ) + (3)
v = t 2 + v0 ... (i) dt dt dt
2
a = 6 t – 12
change in position As per question, acceleration (a) = 0
Velocity =
change in time 6 t – 12 = 0
dx t = 2 sec.
v= Put the value of time in the velocity equation,
dt
v = 3 (2)2 – 12 (2) + 3
b 2 dx
t + v0 = = 12 – 24 + 3
2 dt ∴ v = – 9 m/sec.
 bt 2

dx =  + v 0  dt
 2  2.4 Kinetmatic Equation for
Integrating on both side, Motion
x t
 bt 2 
∫0 d x = ∫0  2 + v 0  dt 37. A bullet from a gun is fired on a rectangular
wooden block with velocity u. When bullet
t 2 t
travels 24 cm through the block along its length
⇒ [ x ] 0x = ∫ bt dt + ∫ v 0 dt
2 u
0 0 horizontally, velocity of bullet becomes ,
3
⇒ [x – 0] = b/2 [ t 3 / 3]0 + v 0 [ t ] 0
t t
.Then it further penetrates into the block in the
b [3 ] same direction before coming to rest exactly at
⇒ x= t – 0 + v 0 (t – 0) the other end of the block. The total length of
2×3 the block is :
b yevotkeâ keâer Skeâ ieesueer uekeâÌ[er kesâ Skeâ DeeÙeleekeâej iegškesâ
⇒ x = t3 + v0t
6 hej u Jesie mes oeieer peeleer nw~ peye ieesueer iegškesâ ceW #eweflepe
1 3 u
∴ x = v0t + bt efoMee ceW 24 cm Iegme peeleer nw, ieesueer keâe Jesie nes
6 3
36. A particle moves along a straight line such that peelee nw~ leye Ùen hegve: ®keâves mes hetJe& lekeâ Gmeer efoMee ceW
its displacement at any time t is given by s=(t3 – ue#Ùe keâes "erkeâ otmejer melen lekeâ Yesoleer nw~ iegškesâ keâer
6t2 + 3t + 4) metres. The velocity when the kegâue uecyeeF& nw :
acceleration is zero is (a) 30 cm (b) 27 cm
Skeâ keâCe mejue jsKee ceW Ûeuelee nw~ Fmekeâe t meceÙe kesâ (c) 24 cm (d) 28 cm
meeLe efJemLeeheve s = (t3 – 6t2 + 3t + 4) ceer mes efoÙee NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
ieÙee nw~ lJejCe MetvÙe nesves hej Jesie keâe ceeve nesiee: Ans. (b) :
(a) 3 m/s (b) 42 m/s
(c) –9 m/s (d) –12 m/s
AIPMT-(1994)
Ans. (c) : Given that,
s = (t3 – 6t2 + 3t + 4) meters.
We know that, By using eqn of motion –
change in displacement ds v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Velocity (v) = = 2
change in time dt u
  = u − 2a × 24
2

So, differentiate the above equation with respect to  3

ds d ( 3 8u 2
time, Velocity (v) = = t – 6t 2 + 3t + 4 ) 24 × 2a = ...(i)
dt dt 9

Physics 43 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, again using eqn of motion – Ans. (d): We know that the equation of motion for the
v = u + 2as
2 2 nth second.
a
0 = u 2 − 2as Sthn = u + ( 2n − 1)
2
u 2 = 2as ...(ii)
On dividing eqn (i) by eqn (ii) we get Q Body is freely falling so, u = 0 and a = g = constant
a
24 × 2a 8u 2 1 = 0 + ( 2n − 1)
= × 2
2as 9 u2
Snth ∝ ( 2n − 1)
24 8
= = S1sd :S2sd :S3sd :S4sd
s 9
s = 27 cm =  2 (1) − 1 : 2 ( 2 ) − 1 : 2 ( 3) − 1 :  2 ( 4 ) − 1
38. A horizontal bridge is built across a river. A = 1 : 3 : 5 : 7
student standing on the bridge throws a small 40. A car starts from rest and accelerates at 5 m/s2.
ball vertically upwards with a velocity 4 m s-1 . At t = 4 s, a ball is dropped out of a window by
The ball strikes the water surface after 4s. The a person sitting in the car. What is the velocity
height of bridge above water surface is (Take g and acceleration of the ball at t = 6 s?
= 10 m s-2) : Skeâ keâej efJejeceeJemLee mes ØeejcYe keâjleer nw leLee 5
Skeâ veoer hej Skeâ #eweflepe hegue yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ hegue hej ceer./mes.2 mes lJeefjle nesleer nw~ t = 4 meskeâC[ hej keâej ceW
KeÌ[e Skeâ Úe$e 4 m s kesâ Jesie mes Skeâ Úesšer ieWo
–1
yew"s JÙeefòeâ Éeje Skeâ ieWo efKeÌ[keâer kesâ yeenj efiejeÙeer
TOJee&Oej Thej keâer Deesj HeWâkeâlee nw~ 4 s yeeo ieWo heeveer peeleer nw~ t = 6 meskeâC[ hej ieWo keâe Jesie leLee lJejCe keäÙee
keâer melen mes škeâjeleer nw~ heeveer keâer melen mes Thej hegue neslee nw? (efoÙee nw : g = 10 ceer./mes.2)
keâer TBÛeeF& nw~ ( g = 10 m s–2 ueerefpeS) : (a) 20 2 m / s, 10 m / s 2 (b) 20 m / s, 5 m / s 2
(a) 68 m (b) 56 m (c) 20 m/s, 0 (d) 20 2 m / s, 0
(c) 60 m (d) 64 m
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (a) : Motion of car in horizontal direction Velocity
Ans. (d) : of car at t = 4 sec-
vx = ux +at (∵ a = 0)
vx = at = 4×5 = 20 m/s
So, horizontal velocity of car = 20 m/s
According to question-
At t = 4sec, a ball is dropped out of window of car.
∴ After 2sec, Horizontal velocity of ball = 20 m/sec
Vertical velocity of ball at t = 6 sec i.e after 2 sec of free
fall
By equation of motion – vy = uy + gt
vy = 20m/s (∵ uy = 0, g = 10)
1
S = ut − gt 2
2 So, Net velocity of ball = 202 + 202 = 20 2 m/s
1 & once it starts falling, acceleration is only ‘g’ ie.
−H = 4 × 4 − × 10 × ( 4 )
2

2 10m/s2.
− H = 16 − 80 41. A person sitting in the ground floor of a
− H = −64 building notices through the window of height
1.5 m, a ball dropped from the roof of the
H = 64 m building crosses the window in 0.1 s. What is
39. The ratio of the distances travelled by a freely the velocity of the ball when it is at the topmost
falling body in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th second point of the window ? (g = 10 m/s2)
mJeÛÚbo ™he mes efiejles ngS efkeâmeer efheC[ Éeje henues, efkeâmeer YeJeve kesâ Yetleue hej yew"e keâesF& JÙeefòeâ 1.5m
otmejs, leermejs SJeb ÛeewLes meskesâC[ ceW leÙe keâer ieF& otefjÙeeW TBÛeeF& keâer efkeâmeer efKeÌ[keâer mes Ùes veesš keâjlee nw efkeâ
keâe Devegheele nesiee: YeJeve keâer Úle mes efiejeÙeer ieÙeer keâesF& ieWo Gme efKeÌ[keâer
(a) 1 : 1 : 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 keâes 0.1 s ceW heej keâjleer nw~ peye Ùen ieWo Fme efKeÌ[keâer kesâ
(c) 1 : 4 : 9 : 16 (d) 1 : 3 : 5 : 7 Meer<e& efyevog hej Leer, leye Fmekeâe Jesie keäÙee Lee? (g = 10
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 m/s2)

Physics 44 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 20 m/s (b) 15.5 m/s Skeâ otmejs mes 100 m otjer hej efmLele 200 m TBÛeeF& kesâ
(c) 14.5 m/s (d) 4.5 m/s oes YeJeveeW keâer ÚleeW mes Skeâ-otmejs keâer Deesj #eweflepe efoMee
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II ceW meceeve Jesie 25 m/s mes oes ieesefueÙeeB Skeâ ner #eCe oeieer
Ans. (c) : ieÙeer nw~ Ùes oesveeW ieesefueÙeeB keâye Deewj keâneB Skeâ-otmejs mes
mebIeó keâjWieer? (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) They will not collide/Ùes ieesefueÙeeB mebIeó veneR keâjWieer
(b) After 2s at a height of 180 m/ 2s kesâ he§eele 180
m keâer TBÛeeF& hej
(c) After 2s at a height of 20 m/ 2s kesâ he§eele 20 m
keâer TBÛeeF& hej
Given
For journey from A to B. {upward direction is taken as (d) After 4 s at a height of 120 m/ 4s kesâ he§eele 120
+ ve } m keâer TBÛeeF& hej
Distance ball has to travel, s = h = – 1.5 m NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
m Ans. (b) :
Acceleration (a) = – g = – 10 2
s
Initial velocity of Ball = – V
– sign represents downward direction
Time taken by ball to cross window = t = 0.1 sec.
1
From equation of motion, s = ut + at 2
2
1 Given data
– 1.5 = (–V) (0.1) + ( −10) ( 0.1)
2
VA = 25 m/s , VB = – 25 m/s
2
Distance (d) = 100m
V = 14.5 m/s.
VAB = VA – VB = 25 – (–25)
42. A ball is thrown vertically downward with a
= 50 m/s
velocity of 20 m/s from the top of a tower. It
d 100
hits the ground after some time with a velocity Time t = = = 2sec.
of 80 m/s. The height of the tower is : (g = 10 VAB 50
m/s2)/efkeâmeer ceerveej kesâ efMeKej mes efkeâmeer ieWo keâes 20 Calculating vertical distance traveled by bullets given
m/s kesâ Jesie mes GOJee&Oej DeOeescegKeer HeWâkeâe ieÙee nw~ kegâÚ initial velocity Uy = 0 m/s
meceÙe he§eele Ùen ieWo Oejleer mes 80 m/s kesâ Jesie mes Acceleration a = 10 m/s
škeâjeleer nw~ Fme ceerveej keâer TÛeeF& nw: (g = 10 m/s2) 1
y = U y + at 2
(a) 340 m (b) 320 m 2
(c) 300 m (d) 360 m 1
= 0 + (10 ) × ( 2 )
2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 2
Ans. (c) : Given that, y = 20
m Calculating height from ground-
Initial velocity of ball, u = 20
s h = 200m – 20m
m h = 180 m
Final velocity of Ball, v = 80 44. A stone falls freely under gravity. It covers
s
(acceleration due to gravity) g = 10 m/s2 distances h1, h2 and h3 in the first 5 seconds, the
next 5 seconds and the next 5 seconds
According to equation of motion for constant
respectively. The relation between h1, h2 and h3
accelerating motion - is "-
Q v 2 = u 2 + 2gh Skeâ helLej cegòeâ™he mes ieg™lJeeOeerve efiejlee nw~ Ùen helLej
802 = 202 +2×10×h henues heeBÛe (5) meskebâ[eW ceW h1 otjer, Gmemes Deieues 5
h = 300 m meskebâ[eW ceW h2 otjer leLee Gmemes Deieues 5 meskebâ[ ceW h3 otjer
43. Two bullets are fired horizontally and leÙe keâjlee nw, lees h1, h2 leLee h3 ceW mebyebOe nw-
simultaneously towards each other from roof
tops of two buildings 100 m apart and of same (a) h1 = h2 = h3 (b) h1 = 2h2 = 3h3
height of 200 m, with the same velocity of 25 h h
(c) h1 = 2 = 3 (d) h2=3h1 and h3= 3h2
m/s. When and where will the two bullets 3 5
collide? (g = 10 m/s2) NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Physics 45 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): v=0
2 (t – 3) = 0
t = 3 sec
Velocity will be zero at t = 3 sec displacement at 3 sec
also be zero.
46. A boy standing at the top of a tower of 20 m
height drops a stone. Assuming g = 10 ms–2, the
velocity with which it hits the ground is:/Skeâ
yeeuekeâ 20 m TBÛeer ceerveej kesâ Meer<e& hej KeÌ[e nw Deewj
Jen Skeâ helLej efiejelee nw~ Ùeefo g = 10 ms–2 nes, lees
S = distance helLej keâe he=LJeerleue hej škeâjeles meceÙe Jesie nesiee :
t = time
a = acceleration (a) 5.0 m/s (b) 10.0 m/s
g = acceleration due to gravity (10 m/sec2) (c) 20.0 m/s (d) 40.0 m/s
Second law of motion, AIPMT (Screening)-2011
1 Ans. (c) : Given –
S = ut + at 2 Height of tower (h) = 20m
2
Initial velocity (u) = 0, g = 10 m/s2
For h1
Final velocity (v) = ?
1
h1 = 0 × 0 + × g × 52 When there is a free fall we can directly use the
2 equation of motion :
h1 = 125m .............(i) v2 = u2 + 2gh {∵ u = 0 for free fall }
For h1 + h2 So, v = 2gh = 2×10× 20 = 400 = 20m/s.
1
h1 + h 2 = 0 × 0 + × g × 102 47. A ball is dropped from a high rise platform at t
2 = 0 starting from rest. After 6 seconds another
125 + h 2 = 500 ball is thrown downwards from the same
platform with a speed v. The two balls meet at t
h 2 = 375m ......(ii)
= 18 s. What is the value of v ?/Skeâ ieWo keâes Skeâ
For h1 + h2 +h3 TBÛes huesšHeâece& mes t = 0 mes efJejece mes ÚesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ 6
1 meskeâC[ he§eeled Skeâ ieWo keâes Fmeer huesšHeâece& mes V Ûeeue
h1 + h 2 + h 3 = 0 × 0 + × g × 152
2 mes veerÛes keâer Deesj HeWâkeâe ieÙee nw~ oesveesW ieWos t = 18 s hej
125 + 375 + h3 = 1125 Deeheme ceW efceueleer nQ~ V keâe ceeve keäÙee nw ?
h3 = 625m ............(iii) (take g = 10 m/s2)
Hence (a) 75 m/s (b) 55 m/s
h 2 h3 (c) 40 m/s (d) 60 m/s
h1 = = AIPMT (Screening)-2010
3 5
Ans. (a) : Initial speed of ball, u = 0 and t = 18 sec
45. The displacement 'x' (in meter) of a particle of 1
mass 'm' (in kg) moving in one dimension s1 = ut + gt2
2
under the action of a force, is related to time 't'
1
(in sec) by t = x + 3. The displacement of the s1 = × g × (18)2 - - - (i)
2
particle when its velocity is zero, will be For second ball initial velocity v
(a) 2 m (b) 4 m
1 2
(c) 0 m (zero) (d) 6 m s2 = vt2 + gt2
2
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
t2 = 12 sec
Ans. (c) : Given displacement = x
1
mass = m s2 = 12v + g(12) 2 - - - -(ii)
time = t 2
From eqn (i) and (ii),
Given relation t= x +3
x = ( t − 3) ⇒ s1 = s2
2
x = (t – 3) 1 1
g(18)× (18) = 12 v + g(12×12)
dx 2 2
= v = 2 ( t − 3)
dt v = 75 m/s

Physics 46 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
48. A particle has initial velocity ( 3iˆ + 4jˆ ) and has efkeâ.ceer. keâer otjer hej nes lees mketâšj Jeeues keâes yeme keâe
heerÚe efkeâme Ûeeue mes keâjvee nesiee?
( )
acceleration 0.4iˆ + 0.3jˆ . Its speed after 10 s is–
(a) 10 ms–1 (b) 20 ms–1
Skeâ keâCe ( 3iˆ + 4jˆ ) ØeejefcYekeâ Jesie leLee ( 0.4iˆ + 0.3jˆ ) (c) 40 ms–1 (d) 25 ms–1
AIMPT-2009
lJejCe jKelee nw~ 10 s he§eeled Fmekeâer Ûeeue nesieer –
Ans. (b) : Given – Speed of bus uB = 10 m/s
(a) 7 units (b) 7 2units Time taken = 100 sec
(c) 8.5 units (d) 10 units
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (b) : Initial Velocity = 3i+4j
Acceleration = 0.4i + 0.3j As scooter will overtake bus so acceleration will not
t = 10 second vary.
First equation of motion-
1
v = u + at We know S = ut + at 2
2
v = 3i + 4j + 10(0.4i + 0.3j)
v = 7i + 7j 1
Sc = u c t + at 2 ...(i)
2
v = 7 +72 2

1 2
SB = u B t + at ....(ii)
v=7 2 2
49. A particle starts its motion from rest under the Subtracting equation (ii) from (i) –
action of a constant force. If the distance Sc – SB = (uc –uB)t
covered in first 10 seconds is S1 and that 1000 = (uc – 10)100
covered in the first 20 seconds is S2 then: 10 = uc –10
Skeâ keâCe DeÛej yeue kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW efJejeceeJemLee mes ieefle uc = 20 m/s
ØeejcYe keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo Fmekeâer henues 10 meskeâC[ ceW Ûeueer 51. The distance travelled by a particle starting
otjer S1 leLee henues 20 meskeâC[ ceW Ûeueer otjer S2 neW, lees: 4
from rest and moving with an acceleration
(a) S2 = S1 (b) S2 = 2S1 3
(c) S2 = 3S1 (d) S2 = 4S1 ms–2, in the third second is –
AIMPT-2009 4
Ans. (d) : Given – motion start from rest so initial Skeâ keâCe efJejece DeJemLee mes DeejcYe keâj ms–2 kesâ
3
velocity u = 0 for action under constant force so lJejCe mes ieefleceeve nw~ efJejece DeJemLee mes leermejs meskeâC[
acceleration will be same.
ceW Ùen efkeâleveer otjer Ûeuesiee?
1
we know s = ut + at 2 10 19
(a) m (b) m
2 3 3
when S1 distance covered ⇒ (c) 6m (d) 4m
1 2 1 AIPMT-2008
S1 = 0× t + × a × (10) = × a ×100
2 2 Ans. (a) : Given – Particle starts from rest ⇒ u = 0
S1 = 50a ....... (i)
4
when S2 distance covered ⇒ Acceleration a = m / s 2
3
1 1
S2 = 0× t + × a × (20)2 = × a × 400 n = 3
2 2
th
S2 = 200a ....... (ii) Distance travelled by a particle in n second
n n 1
Dividing eq (i) and eq (ii) we see that S2 = 4 S1 Sn th = u + a ( 2n − 1)
–1 2
50. A bus is moving with a speed of 10ms on a
straight road. A scooterist wishes to overtake 1 4
the bus in 100s. If the bus is at a distance of 1 S3rd = 0 + × ( 2 × 3 − 1)
2 3
km from the scooterist, with what speed should
2
the scooterist chase the bus? = (5)
efkeâmeer meÌ[keâ hej Skeâ yeme 10 ceeršj/meskeâC[ keâer Ûeeue 3
mes pee jner nw~ Skeâ mketâšj Jeeuee yeme keâes 100 meskeâC[ =
10
m
ceW hekeâÌ[vee Ûeenlee nw~ Ùeefo yeme mketâšj Jeeues mes 1 3

Physics 47 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
52. A particle moves in a straight line with a 1 2
constant acceleration. It changes its velocity hB = gt B ...(ii)
2
from 10 ms–1 to 20 ms–1 while passing through a
From eqn (i) divided by question (ii).
distance 135 m in t second. The value of t is –
Skeâ keâCe DeÛej lJejCe kesâ meeLe Skeâ meerOeer jsKee hej 1 2
gt
hA 2 A
Ûeue jne nw~ ieefle heLe ceW Skeâ mLeeve hej t mewkeâC[ ceW =
h B 1 gt 2
135 m ceeršj otjer Ûeueves hej Fmekeâe Jesie 10 ms–1 mes 20 B
2
ms–1 nes peelee nw~ t keâe ceeve nesiee :-
t1 h1 16 4
(a) 12 (b) 9 So, = = =
(c) 10 (d) 1.8 t2 h2 25 5
AIPMT-2008 54. Two boys are standing at the ends A and B of a
Ans. (b) : Given–: Let acceleration = constant ground where AB = a. The boy at B starts.
Distance travelled s = 135m running in a direction perpendicular to AB
Time = t second with velocity v1. The boy at A starts running
simultaneously with velocity v and catches the
u
other boy in a time t, where t is –
We know v2 = u2 + 2 a s
(20)2 = (10)2 + 2 × 135 × a
oes ueÌ[kesâ Skeâ cewoeve kesâ A Deewj B efmejeW hej KeÌ[s nw otjer
300 10 AB = a nw~ B hej KeÌ[e ueÌ[keâe v1 Jesie mes AB jsKee mes
⇒a= = m / s2 uecyeJeled efoMee ceW Yeeievee DeejcYe keâj oslee nw~ Gmeer #eCe
270 9
Using first equation of motion efyevog A keâe ueÌ[keâe Jesie v mes Yeeievee DeejcYe keâjlee nw
v = u + at Deewj Jen otmejs ueÌ[kesâ keâes meceÙe t ceW hekeâÌ[ ueslee nw peye
10 efkeâ t nesiee-
20 = 10 + × t
9
a a2
9 (a) (b)
⇒ t = 10 × = 9 second v 2 − v12
10 v 2 + v12
t=9s a a
(c) (d)
53. Two bodies, A(of mass 1kg) and B(of mass ( v − v1) ( v1 )
v +
3kg), are dropped from heights of 16 m and 25
m respectively. The ratio of the time taken by AIPMT-2005
them to reach the ground is:- Ans. (b) :
oes efheC[eW A (õJÙeceeve 1 kg) Deewj B (õJÙeceeve 3 kg)
keâes ›eâceevegmeej TBÛeeF&ÙeeW 16 m Deewj 25 m mes ÚesÌ[e
ieÙee nw~ Fvekesâ he=LJeer leue lekeâ hengBÛeves kesâ ›eâceeiele
meceÙeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee:-
5 12
(a) (b) Let two boys meet at point C after time t from the
4 5
starting. Then,
5 4
(c) (d) Distance, AC = vt
12 5
Distance, BC = v1t
AIPMT-2006
AB = a
Ans. (d) : Given :-
So, (AC)2 = (AB)2 + (BC)2
mA = 1 kg hA = 16 m
mB = 3 kg hB = 25 m v2t2 = a2 + v12 t2
When body is dropped from height initial velocity u = 0 t 2 ( v 2 − v12 ) = a 2
1
So, h = ut + gt2 a2
2 t2 =
1 2 v − v12
2

h = gt
2 a2
1 ⇒ t=
hA = gt 2A ...(i) v − v12
2

Physics 48 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
55. A ball is thrown vertically upward. It has a v = u – gT
speed of 10m/sec when it has reached one half 0 = u – gT
of its maximum height. How high does the ball u
T=
rise? Take g = 10 m/s2 – g
Skeâ ieWo keâes TOJe&Jele Thej heWâkeâe ieÙee nw~ peye Ùen Velocity attained by the body in (T-t) sec. is-
Deheveer DeefOekeâlece henbgÛe mes DeeOeer TBÛeeF& mes DeeOeer v' = u − g(T − t)
TBÛeeF& lekeâ hengBÛelee nw lees Fmekeâer ieefle 10 ceeršj/ v ' = u − gT + gt
mewkeâC[ nesleer nw~ ieWo efkeâleveer TBÛeeF& lekeâ pee heeÙesiee? u
(ceevee uees g = 10 m/s2) v' = u − g× + gt
g
(a) 5m (b) 15m v ' = gt
(c) 10m (d) 20m Distance travelled in the last t second is-
AIPMT-2005, 2001
1
Ans. (c) : CB = v 't − gt 2
2
1
= gt 2 − gt 2
2
1 2
CB = gt
2
57. A man throws ball with the same speed
vertically upwards one after the other at an
Given, Initial Speed u = 10m/s. interval of 2 seconds. What should be the speed
Height = one half of its maximum height of the throw so that more than two balls are in
Now, the sky at any time ? (Given g = 9.8 m/s2)
From third equation of motion , v2 = u2 -2gh Skeâ JÙeefòeâ, meceeve ieefle mes TOJe& efoMee ceW Thej keâer
for half way, h = hmax/2 Deesj, 2 meskeâC[ kesâ Devlejeue hej ieWos HeWâkeâlee nw~ ieWo
0 = u 2 – 2g ( h max /2 ) HeWâkeâves keâer ieefle efkeâleveer nesveer ÛeeefnS leeefkeâ efkeâmeer Yeer
u 2 10×10
meceÙe DeekeâeMe ceW 2 mes DeefOekeâ ieWos nes : (efoÙee nw g =
h max = = = 10m 9.8 m/s2)
g 10
(a) More than 19.6 m/s/19.6 m/s mes GÛÛelej
∴ Ball rise to 10 m.
(b) At least 9.8 m/s /keâce mes keâce 9.8 m/s
56. If a ball is thrown vertically upwards with
speed u, the distance covered during the last ‘t’ (c) Any speed less than 19.6 m/s/ keâesF& Yeer Ûeeue
seconds of its ascent is: 19.6 m/s mes keâce
Ùeefo Skeâ ieWo keâes TOJee&Oej efoMee ceW Thej keâer Deesj u (d) Only with speed 19.6 m/s/ kesâJeue 19.6 m/s keâer
Ûeeue mes HeWâkeâe peelee nw, leye DeefOekeâlece TBÛeeF& hej ieefle
hengBÛeves mes henues Deefvlece ‘t’ meskeâC[eW ceW Ûeueer ieF& otjer AIPMT-2003
nesieer: Ans. (a): Given-
1 2 t = 2s
(a) ut (b) gt g = 9.8 m/s2
2
When the ball is thrown upward the final velocity
1
(c) ut − gt 2 (d) (u + gt)t become zero, v = 0
2 v = u – gt
AIPMT-2003 0 = u – gt
Ans. (b): u = gt
u
⇒ t=
g
Since the ball first goes up then comes down so, total
period be 2t and minimum period should more than 4
sec.
2u
⇒ t<
g
Let the body take (T) second to reach maximum height.
Physics 49 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2u (c) VB = Vm
⇒ 4< (d) VB and Vm can't related
g
VB, Vm kesâ ceOÙe mecyevOe veneR nes mekeâlee
4 × 9.8
⇒u> ≥ 19.6 m / s AIPMT-2000
2
Ans. (c) :
So, the speed of throw should be more than 19.6 m/s, so
more than two balls are in the sky at any time.
58. A mass of 1kg is thrown up with a velocity of
100 m/s. After 5 seconds, it explodes into two
parts. One part of mass 400 g comes down with θ
a velocity 25 m/s Calculate the velocity of other
part :
1 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ Skeâ efheC[ keâes 100 m/s kesâ ØeejefcYekeâ
Jesie mes Thej keâer Deesj heWâkeâe peelee nw~ 5s he§eele Ùen
efJemheâesefšle neskeâj oes YeeieeW ceW efJeYeeefpele nes peelee nw~ Given condition- A man is slipping on a frictionless
Ùeefo henuee Yeeie 400 gm keâe 25 m/s kesâ Jesie mes veerÛes inclined plane and a bag falls down from same height.
keâer Deesj ieefle keâjlee nw lees otmejs Yeeie keâe Jesie nesiee – Now, from equation of motion-
For Bag,
(a) 40 m/s upward/Thej keâer Deesj
vB2 = u2 + 2as
(b) 40 m/s downward/veerÛes keâer Deesj vB2 = 0 + 2(g) (h)
(c) 100 m/s upward/Thej keâer Deesj vB2 = 2gh ...(i)
(d) 60 m/s downward/Thej keâer Deesj Similarly for man
2 2
AIPMT-2000 vm = u + 2as
Ans. (c) : Mass of 1 kg is thrown up with a velocity of  h 
vm2 = 0 + 2 (g sinθ)  
100 m/s.  sin θ 
Q v = u + at where, v = final velocity vm2 = 2gh ...(ii)
also, a = –g as particle u = initial velocity From (i) and (ii)
is thrown up i.e. a = acceleration Velocity of Bag = Velocity of man
against the gravity t = time
60. A body starts falling from height 'h' and travels
v = u + at distance h/2 during last second of motion then
v = 100 – g×5 time of flight is (In second)/Skeâ Jemleg h TBÛeeF& mes
v = 100–10×5 efiejvee ØeejcYe keâjleer nw leLee ieefle kesâ Deefvlece mewkeâC[ ceW
v = 50 m/s
h/2 otjer leÙe keâjleer nw, lees Jemleg keâe GñÙeve keâeue keäÙee
Given Data-
m1 = 400 g = 0.4kg nesiee (mewkeâC[ ceW)-
v1 = – 25 m/s (a) 2 −1 (b) 2 + 2
m2 = 600g = 0.6kg
(c) 2 + 3 (d) 3 + 2
v2 = ?
Now, From law of conservation of momentum, AIPMT-1999
mv = m1 v1 + m2v2 Ans. (b) :
⇒ 1×50 = 0.4×(–25) + 0.6v2
⇒ v2 = 100 m/s
Hence, velocity of the part whose mass is 600g is 100
m/s.
59. A man is slipping on a frictionless inclined
plane & a bag falls down from the same height.
Then the speed of both is related as :
meceeve GBâÛeeF& mes Skeâ Deeoceer vele leue hej efheâmeuelee nw,
leLee Skeâ yewie meceeve GB@âÛeeF& mes Gmeer Ie<e&Ce jefnle vele
leue hej veerÛes keâer Deesj efiejlee nw lees veerÛes Gvekesâ JesieeW keâe Initial velocity of body zero at height (h)
Devegheele nesiee – 1 2
(a) VB > Vm ∴ h = ut + gt
2
(b) VB < Vm Let total time of fall = T
Physics 50 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 2 h 1 v2 = u2 + 2aS
gT and = g ( T − 1)
2
∴h= ⇒ u2 + 2(–a)S = 0
2 2 2
u2
1 2
gT ⇒ S=
h T2 2a
= 2 ⇒2= ⇒ s ∝ u2
( T − 1)
2
h 1
g ( T − 1)
2
2
2 2 S1  u 
= 
Taking square root both side, S2  2u 
T
⇒ = 2 ⇒T = 2T− 2 20 u2
T −1 ⇒ =
S2 4u 2
( )
2 −1 T = 2 ⇒ T =
2
2 −1
So, S2 = 80 m.
63. If a car at rest accelerates uniformly to a speed
2 +1 (
2 2 +1 ) of 144 km/h in 20 sec, it covers a distance of
T=
2
2 −1
×
2 +1
⇒
2 −1
(
= 2 + 2 m/s ) Skeâ keâej MetvÙe mes Ûeuekeâj 20 meskeâC[ ceW 144
efkeâceer/IeCše keâe Jesie Øeehle keâj uesleer nw~ Fmekesâ Éeje
61. A ball is dropped from a height of 5 m, if it efkeâleveer otjer leÙe keâer ieÙeer?
rebound upto height of 1.8 m, then the ratio of
(a) 1440 cm (b) 2980 cm
velocities of the ball after and before rebound
(c) 20 m (d) 400 m
is/Skeâ ieWo keâes 5 ceer. TBÛeeF& mes efiejeÙee peelee nw, lees
AIPMT-(1997)
Jen 1.8 ceer. TBÛeeF& lekeâ Jeeheme GÚueleer nw, lees škeäkeâj
Ans. (d) : Given that,
kesâ yeeo Jesie leLee škeäkeâj kesâ "erkeâ henues kesâ Jesie keâe initial velocity (u) = 0 (car is at rest)
Devegheele nesiee– final velocity (v) = 144 km/h
3 2 144 × 5
(a) (b) = = 40 m / sec
5 5 18
1 4 time (t) = 20 sec.
(c) (d) By the Newton's first equation of motion,
5 5
v = u + at
AIPMT-1998
⇒ 40 = 0 + 20 a
Ans. (a) : Ball dropped from height of 5 m then–
acceleration, a = 2 m/sec2
v1 = 2gh = 2 × g × 5 According to the second equation of motion,
If rebound up to height of 1.8 m then 1
s = ut + at2
v 2 = 2gh = 2 × g × 1.8 2
The ratio of velocities of ball after and before rebound 1
= 0 × 20 + × 2 × (20)2
is– 2
v2 2 × g × 1.8 18 9 s = 400 m
= = = 64. A body dropped from a height h with initial
v1 2× g ×5 50 25
velocity zero, strikes the ground with a velocity
v2 3 of 3 m/s. Another body of same mass dropped
= from the same height h with an initial velocity
v1 5 of 4 m/s. The final velocity of second mass, with
62. A car is moving with velocity v. If it stops after which it strikes the ground is
applying break at a distance of 20 m. If velocity Skeâ Jemleg h TBÛeeF& mes DeejefcYekeâ Jesie MetvÙe kesâ meeLe
of car is doubled, then how much distance it ÚesÌ[er peeleer nw Deewj 3 m/s Jesie kesâ meeLe Oejeleue mes
will cover (travel) after applying break škeâjeleer nw~ meceeve õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ otmejer Jemleg meceeve
Skeâ ieeÌ[er v Jesie mes ieefleMeerue nw Gmes yeÇskeâ ueieekeâj 20 TBÛeeF& h mes 4 m/s kesâ DeejefcYekeâ Jesie kesâ meeLe ÚesÌ[er
ceer. otjer hej jeskeâe pee mekeâlee nw Ùeefo Jesie ogiegvee keâj peeleer nw~ otmejer Jemleg keâe Debeflece Jesie efpememes Jen Oejeleue
efoÙee peeS lees Gmes efkeâleveer otjer hej jeskeâe pee mekesâiee– mes škeâjeleer nw
(a) 40 m (b) 80 m (a) 5 m/s (b) 12 m/s
(c) 160 m (d) 320 m (c) 3 m/s (d) 4 m/s
AIPMT-1998 AIPMT-(1996)
Ans. (b) : According to Newton's law of motion- Ans. (a): Given that,
Given, v = 0, S = 20 for 1st body, initial velocity (u1) = 0
rd
We know that 3 of equation of motion, final velocity (v1) = 3m/sec.
Physics 51 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
for 2nd body, initial velocity (u2) = 4 m/sec. 66. The velocity of train increases uniformly from
for 1st body, Apply newton's 3rd equation of motion, 20 km/h to 60 km/h in 4 hours. The distance
v12 = u12 + 2as travelled by the train during this period is
where, a = acceleration Skeâ š^sve keâe Jesie 4 IeCšs ceW 20km/h mes 60km/h
s = h = body is dropped from height. lekeâ Skeâ meceeve ™he mes yeÌ{lee nw~ Fme DeJeefOe kesâ oewjeve
a = g = 10 m/sec2 š^sve Éeje leÙe keâer ieF& otjer nw:
So, (3)2 = 0 + 2 × 10 × h
(a) 160 km (b) 180 km
9
h= m (c) 100 km (d) 120 km
20
As per question, second object is also dropped from AIPMT-(1994)
same height (h = s) Ans. (a) : Given that,
So, v 22 = u 22 + 2a (s) Initial velocity (u) = 20 km/hr
= (4)2 + 2 × 10 (9/20) final velocity (v) = 60 km/hr
= 16 + 9 = 25 time (t) = 4 hr.
∴ v2 = 5 m/sec. Apply Newton's first equation of motion,
65. The water drop falls at regular intervals from a v = u + at
tap 5 m above the ground. The third drop is ⇒ 60 = 20 + a (4)
leaving the tap at instant the first drop touches
⇒ 4a = 40
the ground. How far above the ground is the
second drop at that instant? a = 10 km/hr2
he=LJeer leue mes 5 ceeršj TBÛeeF& hej efmLele Skeâ šesšer mes So, distance travelled in 4 hrs by 2nd equation of motion,
heeveer keâer yetBos yejeyej meceÙeevlej hej efiejleer nw~ heeveer keâer 1
s = ut + at2
leermejer yetBo šesšer mes leye efvekeâueleer nw peye henueer yetBo 2
he=LJeer leue keâes Útleer nw~ Fme #eCe otmejer yetBo he=LJeer leue mes 1
= (20) × (4) + × (10) (4)2
efkeâleveer TBÛeeF& hej nesieer? 2
2
(g = 10 ceer/mes ) = 80 + 80 = 160 km
(a) 3.75 m (b) 4.00 m 67. A body starts from rest, what is the ratio of the
(c) 1.25 m (d) 2.50 m. distance travelled by the body during the 4th
AIPMT-(1995) and 3rd second?
Ans. (a) : Given that, keâesF& Jemleg efJejeceeJemLee mes Ûeueleer nw~ Fmekesâ Éeje ÛeewLes
Height of tap (s) = 5 m
meskebâ[ leLee leermejs meskebâ[ ceW Ûeueer ieÙeer otefjÙeeW keâe
let us consider, time taken by third drop to reach at the
ground is t sec and acceleration (a) = g = 10 m/sec2 Devegheele nesiee:
1 7 5 7 3
for the first drop, s = ut + at2 (a) (b) (c) (d)
2 5 7 3 7
1 AIPMT-(1993)
⇒ 5 = 0 × t + × 10 × t 2
2 Ans. (a) : The distance covered by a body in the nth
∵initial velocity (u) = 0 a
t2 = 1 second is given by = ( 2n − 1)
2
t = 1 sec.
for 4th second n = 4 sec
It means that the third drop leaves after one second of
a 7a
the first drop. That is second drop will be in between D4 = (8 − 1) =
both of the first and third drop. So, each drop leaves 2 2
after every 0.5 sec. a 5a
The distance covered by second drop in 0.5 sec, for 3rd second, D3 = ( 6 − 1) =
2 2
1
s = ut + at 2 ratio of distance travelled by the body during 4th and 3rd
2
7a
1
= 0 × t + × 10 × ( 0.5)
2
D4
2 second = = 2
D3 5a
= 5 × (0.5) ×(0.5)
2
s = 1.25 m
Distance of second drop of water above the ground = 5 7
=
– 1.25 = 3.75 m. 5

Physics 52 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
68. A body dropped from top of a tower fall For 4th second,
through 40 m during the last two seconds of its a
fall. The height of tower is (g = 10 m/s2) S4 = ( 2 × 4 − 1)
2
efkeâmeer ceerveej kesâ Meer<e& mes ÚesÌ[er ieF& Skeâ Jemleg Deheves a a
efiejves kesâ Debeflece oes meskeâC[eW kesâ oewjeve 40 m efiejleer = (8 − 1) = (7)
2 2
nw~ ceerveej keâer TBÛeeF& nw: (g = 10 m/s2) a
For 5 second, S5 = ( 2 × 5 − 1)
th
(a) 60 m (b) 45 m 2
(c) 80 m (d) 50 m a
AIPMT-(1992) = (9)
2
Ans. (b) : Given that, Initial velocity, u = 0 Ratio of the distance moved by a freely falling body
let h be the height of tower and t is the time taken by the from 4th and 5th second journey-
body to reach the ground. a
1 2 ×7
s
So, h = ut + at 4
= 2 =7:9
2 s5 a
×9
1 2
Total distance covered s = at 2 [ ∵ u = 0]
2 70. A car is moving along a straight road with a
Distance covered before last two seconds, uniform acceleration. It passes through two
1 points P and Q separated by a distance with
s1 = (a)(t − 2) 2 velocity 30 km/h and 40 km/h respectively. The
2
velocity of the car midway between P and Q is
Distance covered in last two seconds, s – s1 = 40 m
Skeâ keâej Skeâ meerOeer meÌ[keâ hej Skeâ meceeve lJejCe mes
1 1
⇒ 40 = at 2 − a(t − 2) 2 Ûeueleer nQ~ Ùen oes efyevogDeeW P leLee Q mes 30
2 2
efkeâceer/Iebše leLee 40 efkeâceer/Iebše mes iegpejleer nw~ P leLee
40 = a ( t 2 − ( t − 2 ) )
1 2
⇒ Q kegâÚ otjer hej nQ~ lees P leLee Q kesâ ceOÙe efyevog hej keâej
2
1
keâe Jesie nw:
= a ( t 2 − t 2 + 4t − 4 )
2 (a) 33.3 km/h (b) 20 2 km/h
1 (c) 25 2 km/h (d) 35 km/h
= a ( 4t − 4 )
2 AIPMT-(1988)
1 Ans. (c) : Given that,
⇒ 40 = × 10 ( 4t − 4 ) ∵ a = g = 10 m/sec2
2 initial velocity (u) = 30 km/hr
⇒ 40 = 5 (4t – 4) final velocity (v) = 40 km/hr
4t – 4 = 8 we know that, v2 = u2 + 2as
t = 3 sec where, a = acceleration
1 s = distance
Now, height of tower, h = at 2 put the value- (40)2 = (30)2 + 2as
2
1600 = 900 + 2as
1
= × 10 × (3)2 = 45 m 2as = 700
2
350
69. What will be the ratio of the distance moved by a= km/hr2
s
a freely falling body from rest in 4th and 5th
Let us consider, velocity of car midway is vm and initial
seconds of journey?/efJejece keâer DeJemLee mes efiejleer
velocity is same
ngF& oes ÛeerpeeW Éeje Ùee$ee kesâ ÛeewLes meskebâ[ leLee heebÛeJeW So, v2 – u2 = 2as'
meskebâ[ ceW Ûeueer ieÙeer otefjÙeeW keâe Devegheele nw: distance between midway of P and Q are the s/2.
(a) 4 : 5 (b) 7 : 9 350 s
Now, v2 – (30)2 = 2 × ×
(c) 16 : 25 (d) 1 : 1 s 2
AIPMT-(1989) v2 – 900 = 350
Ans. (b) : Given that, at rest, initial velocity (u) = 0 v2 =1250
According to the formula, v = 1250
We know that, distance covered by body in nth second =
= 625 × 2
a
( 2n – 1)
2 So, v = 25 2 km/hr.

Physics 53 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
71. Consider a car moving along a straight horizontal M M (L − x) g
road with a speed of 72 km/h. If the coefficient of W = m'g = ( L − x ) g =
static friction between the tyres and the road is L L
For the system to be stable-
0.5, the shortest distance in which the car can be
stopped is (taking g = 10 m/s2)/Skeâ keâej meceleue M ( L − x ) g µMgx
=
meÌ[keâ hej 72 efkeâcee/IeCše mes Ûeueleer nw~ Ùeefo meÌ[keâ leLee L L
keâej kesâ yeerÛe mLeweflekeâ Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ 0.5 nw, lees efkeâleveer ( L − x ) 1 Mgx  1
=  µ = 0.25 = 
vÙetvelece otjer Ûeuekeâj keâej ®keâ peeSieer? L 4 L  4
2
(g = 10 ceer/meskeâC[ ) (L − x) = x
1
(a) 30 m (b) 40 m (c) 72 m (d) 20 m 4
AIPMT-1992 4
2 x= L
Ans. (b) : Given: g = 10 m/s 5
We know, F = ma = µmg Percentage of maximum fraction of length of chain that
⇒ Acceleration (a) = µg = 0.5×10 = 5 m/s2 can hang over one edge of table is
5 L/5
Initial velocity (u) = 72 km / h × = 20 m/s × 100 = 20%
18 L
Final velocity v = 0 73. The position x of a particle varies with time, (t)
From equation of motion as x = at2 – bt3. The acceleration will be zero at
2 2
v = u – 2as time t is equal to/Skeâ keâCe keâer efmLeefle (x) meceÙe (t)
0 = (20)2 – 2 × 5 × s kesâ meeLe x = at2 –bt3 ™he mes heefjJeefle&le nesleer nw~ meceÙe
0 = 400 – 10s t hej lJejCe MetvÙe nesiee?
10s = 400 a 2a a
400 (a) (b zero/MetvÙe (c) (d)
s= = 40 m 3b 3b b
10 AIPMT-(1997)
72. A heavy uniform chain lies on horizontal table Ans. (a) : Given that,
top. If the coefficient of friction between the Equation: x = at2 – bt3
chain and the table surface is 0.25, then the Differentiating the above equation with respect to time,
maximum fraction of the length of the chain
that can hang over one edge of the table is dx d d
v= = (at 2 − bt 3 ) = (2at – 3bt 2 ) ....(i)
Skeâ Yeejer Ûesve efkeâmeer #eweflepe cespe hej jKeer nw~ Ûesve leLee dt dt dt
cespe kesâ yeerÛe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ 0.25 nw, lees Ûesve keâe Again differentiating equation (i) with respect to time,
DeefOekeâlece efkeâlevee ØeefleMele Yeeie cespe kesâ Skeâ efmejs mes Acceleration, a = d 2 x = d (2at – 3bt 2 )
ueškeâ mekeâlee nw? dt 2 dt
(a) 20% (b) 25% (c) 35% (d) 15% = 2a – 6bt
2
AIPMT-1991 d x
As per question, = 0 = 2a –6bt
Ans. (a) : dt 2
⇒ 2a = 6bt
a
∴ t=
3b
74. A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate α
for some time after which it decelerates at a
constant rate β and comes to rest. If total time
elapsed is t, then maximum velocity acquired
by car will be/Skeâ keâej efJejeceeJemLee mes Ûeuekeâj kegâÚ
Let, x = length of the rope on the table
meceÙe yeeo α lJejCe Øeehle keâj uesleer nw leLee efheâj β
(L – x) = length hanging
M = total mass cebove mes Ûeuekeâj ™keâ peeleer nw~ Ùeefo efueÙee ieÙee kegâue
Therefore, mass of hanged part & on table part are meceÙe t nes, lees keâej keâe DeefOekeâlece Jesie nesiee
M
( L − x ) g and
M
gx respectively. (a)
( α2 + β 2 ) t (b)
( α + β2 ) t
L L α +β αβ
Maximum friction force-
µMgx (α + β) t αβ t
fmax = µN = (c) (d)
L αβ α +β
Weight of the hanging chain- AIPMT-(1994)

Physics 54 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that, Displacement
Average velocity =
If car accelerates then, a = α and car decelerates then, α Time taken
= – β, initial velocity (u) = 0 (at rest) Q In above graph, the first slope is decreasing that
Applying Newton's 1st equation of motion, if car is means particle is going in one direction and its velocity
accelerated decreases, become zero at highest point of the curve and
then, v = u + at then increasing in backward direction. Hence the
vmax = 0 + αtα particle returns to its initial position. So, for one value
of displacement, there are two different points of time
v and we know that the slope of x, x – t graph gives us the
tα = max
α average velocity. Hence, for one time, slope is positive
If car decelerates then, u = vmax and for other time, slope is negative. As there are
v=0 opposite slope so a positive average velocity in the
⇒ 0 = vmax + (–β) tβ interval 0 to T. Hence average velocity can only vanish.
vmax = β.tβ 76. A lift is coming from 8th floor and is just about to
v
reach 4th floor. Taking ground floor as origin and
∴ tβ = max positive direction upwards for all quantities,
β which one of the following is correct?/Skeâ efueheäš
If total time (t) = tα + tβ Dee"JeeR cebefpeue mes veerÛes Dee jner nw Deewj ÛeewLeer cebefpeue hej
v v
= max + max hengBÛeves Jeeueer nw~ Ùeefo meYeer jeefMeÙeeW kesâ efueS Yetleue keâes cetue
α β efyebog leLee Thej keâer Deesj Oeveelcekeâ efoMee ueW lees
 1 1 efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee mener nw?
= vmax  + 
α β (a) x < 0, v < 0, a > 0 (b) x > 0, v < 0, a < 0
(c) x > 0, v < 0, a > 0 (d) x > 0, v > 0, a < 0
β+α
⇒ t = vmax   Ans. (a) : Given ; the left is coming down from 8th floor
 αβ  to 4th floor and we have chosen downward as negative,
 αβ  Therefore, displacement is negative
∴ vmax =   t i.e, x < 0
β+α So, direction of velocity we have chosen down wards as
negative (v < 0)
2.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems Q Before reaching 4th floor lift is retarded i.e.
acceleration is upwards.
Thus, a > 0
75. Among the four graphs, there is only one graph
Hence x < 0, v < 0 and a > 0
for which average velocity over the time
interval (0, T) can vanish for a suitably chosen 77. In one dimensional motion, instantaneous
T. Which one is it?/efoS ieS «eeheâeW ceW kesâJeue Skeâ speed v satisfies the condition 0 ≤ v < v0.
SkeâefJeceerÙe ieefle ceW, leel#eefCekeâ Ûeeue v kesâ efueS Mele& 0
«eeheâ Ssmee nw efpemeceW meceÙe Deblejeue (0, T) kesâ efueS
≤ v < v0 hetjer nesleer nw lees
Deewmele Jesie, Skeâ GheÙegkeäle ™he mes Ûegves ieS meceÙe T kesâ (a) The displacement in time T must always take
efueS MetvÙe nes mekeâlee nw~ Ùen keâewve-mee «eeheâ nw? non-negative values./T meceÙe ceW efJemLeeheve keâe ceeve
keâYeer $e+Ceelcekeâ veneR neslee~
(b) The displacement x in time T satisfies
– v0T < x < v0T.
/ T meceÙe ceW efJemLeeheve x kesâ efueS – v0T < x < v0T
neslee~
(c) The acceleration is always a non-negative
number./lJejCe keâYeer $e+Ceelcekeâ veneR neslee~
(d) The motion has no turning points./ieefle keâer efoMee
ceW keâYeer heefjJele&ve veneR neslee~
dx
Ans. (b) : By definition, instantaneous velocity v =
Ans. (b) : As shown in graph (b), dt
Where, x = displacement
t = time
⇒ dx = vdt
⇒ x (0) = vo (T – 0)
⇒ x = voT

Physics 55 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, if velocity is positive dv
Acceleration ao =
Then x = + voT, Maximum displacement = voT dt
But if velocity is negative d
Then x = – voT, maximum displacement = –voT a = 2(t – 2)
dt
Hence, the displacement x in time T satisfies. a = 2 (1 – 0)
78. A vehicle travels half the distance L with speed a = 2m/s2
v1 and the other half with speed v2, then its When t = 0 v = – 4m/s
average speed is/ Skeâ Jeenve DeeOeer otjer L keâes v1 mes t = 2s v = 0m/s
leLee Mes<e DeeOeer otjer keâes Ûeeue v2 mes leÙe keâjlee nw~ t = 4s, v = 4m/s
Fmekeâer Deewmele Ûeeue nw– v – t graph is shown in adjacent diagram
2v1 + v 2 Distance travelled = Area of the graph
(a) v1 + v2 (b)
2 v1 + v 2 = area of OAC + area of ABD
2v1v2 L(v1 + v 2 ) 4× 2 1
(c) (d) = + × 2× 4
v1 + v2 v1v 2 2 2
Ans. (c) : Total distance = L = 8m
1 80. At a metro station, a girl walks up a stationary
Q Velocity of first half distance = v1
2 escalator in time t1. If she remains stationary
1 on the escalator, then the escalator take her up
Velocity of next half distance = v2 in time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on
2
the moving escalator will be
Total distance traveled
Average speed = efkeâmeer cesš^es mšsMeve hej keâesF& ueÌ[keâer Skeâ ®kesâ ngS
Total time taken
Smkesâuesšj hej t1 meskebâ[ ceW Thej ÛeÌ{leer nw~ Ùeefo Jen
L
⇒ Avg. speed = Smkesâuesšj hej KeÌ[er jns lees Smkesâuesšj Gmes t2 meskebâ[ ceW
L L
+ Thej ues peelee nw~ Ùeefo Jen Ûeueles ngS Smkesâuesšj hej
2v1 2v 2
Deheveer hetJe& ieefle mes ner Thej ÛeÌ{s lees Gmekeâes Thej lekeâ
2v1v 2
⇒ Avg. speed = hengBÛeves ceW ueieves Jeeuee meceÙe nesiee–
v1 + v 2
(t1 + t 2 ) t1 t 2
79. The displacement of a particle is given by x = (t (a) (b)
2 (t 2 – t1 )
–2)2 where x is in meters and t is in seconds.
t1 t 2
The distance covered by the particle in first 4 (c) (d) t1 – t2
(t 2 + t1 )
seconds is
efkeâmeer keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve x = (t –2)2 efve®efhele efkeâÙee Ans. (c) : Let speed of girl on stationary escalator = v1
peelee nw~ peneB x ceeršj ceW leLee t meskebâ[ ceW ceehee ieÙee nw– Speed of only escalator = v2
Slant distance = d.
(a) 4 m (b) 8 m
Now, time to go up when escalator is stop;
(c) 12 m (d) 16 m
d d
Ans. (b) : Given x = (t – 2) 2
t1 = = v1 =
v1 t1
dx
Velocity, v = Time to go-up when girl stops and escalator moves,
dt
d d
d
= (t – 2) 2 t2 = ⇒ v2 =
dt v2 t2
= 2 (t – 2) m/s Now, when both girl and escalator moves up.
Velocity of girl with respect to ground = v1 + v2
d
∴ Time taken t =
v1 + v 2
d
t=
d d
+
t1 t 2
t1t 2
t=
t 2 + t1

Physics 56 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
3.
Motion in a Plane
vector product of vector is given by–
3.1 Scalars and Vectors ˆi ˆj kˆ
r r
F × r = 2 1 −1
1. Which of the following statement is not true?
3 2 −2
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mee keâLeve melÙe vener nw?
(a) Pressure is a vector quantity/oyeeJe Skeâ meefoMe = ˆi ( − 2 + 2 ) − ˆj ( − 4 + 3 ) + kˆ ( 4 − 3 )
r r
jeefMe nw F × r = ˆj + kˆ
(b) Relative density is a scalar quantity/Deehesef#ekeâ r r
F× r = 1+1 = 2
IevelJe Skeâ DeefoMe jeefMe nw ur
(c) Coefficient of viscosity is a scalar quantity/ 3. The moment of the force, F = 4i$ + 5 $j − 6k$ at (2,
MÙeevelee ieggCeebkeâ DeefoMe jeefMe nw 0, –3), about the point (2, –2, –2), is given by /
ur
(d) Surface tension is a scalar quantity/he=‰ leveeJe efyevog (2,0,-3) hej keâeÙe&jle yeue F = 4i$ + 5 $j − 6k$ keâe
Skeâ DeefoMe jeefMe nw efyevog (2, -2, -2) kesâ heefjle; DeeIetCe& nesiee
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 (a) − 8i$ − 4 $j − 7k$
Ans. (a) : • Scalar quantity - Those physical quantity (b) − 4i$ − $j − 8k$
which require only magnitude but no direction for their
(c) − 7i$ − 4$j − 8k$
complete representation are called scalars.
Example– distance, speed, work, mass, density, (d) − 7i$ − 4$j − 8k$
Relative density, Pressure, coefficient of viscosity, NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
surface tension. r
ˆ ˆ
Ans. (c) : F = 4i + 5 j − 6k ˆ
• Vector quantity : Those physical quantities which r
r = ( 2 − 2 ) i + ( 0 + 2 ) ˆj + ( − 3 + 2 ) kˆ
require magnitude as well as direction for their
complete representation. = 2 j − kˆ
Example– displacement, velocity, acceleration. Moment of force,
r r
( ) ( )
r
2. If F = 2iˆ + ˆj – kˆ and r = 3iˆ + 2jˆ – 2kˆ , then the torque τ = rr × F = 2ˆj − kˆ × 4iˆ + 5ˆj − 6kˆ
r r
scalar and vector products of F and r have the ˆi ˆj kˆ
magnitudes respectively as:
r r r =0 2 −1
Ùeefo F = 2iˆ + ˆj – kˆ leLee r = 3iˆ + 2jˆ – 2kˆ , lees F
r 4 5 −6
SJeb r kesâ DeefoMe SJeb meefoMe iegCeve kesâ heefjceeCe ›eâceMe:
nQ: = ( –12 + 5 )ˆi – ( 0 + 4 )ˆj + ( 0 – 8 ) ˆk
(a) 5, 3 (b) 4, 5 = −7iˆ − 4ˆj − 8kˆ
(c) 10, 2 (d) 10, 2 4. If the magnitude of sum of two vectors is equal
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 to the magnitude of difference of the two
r vectors, the angle between these vectors is:
F = 2iˆ + ˆj − kˆ Ùeefo oes meefoMeeW kesâ Jesie keâe heefjceeCe Gve oes meefoMeeW kesâ
Ans. (c) : Given that– r ˆ ˆ ˆ
r = 3i + 2j − 2k Devlej kesâ heefjceeCe kesâ yejeyej nw, lees Fve meefoMeeW kesâ
Scalar product of vector is given by – yeerÛe keâesCe nw~
rr
( )(
F.r = 2iˆ + ˆj − kˆ 3iˆ + 2ˆj − 2kˆ ) (a) 180º
(c) 90º
(b) 0º
(d) 45º
=6+2+2 NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
r r
F. r = 10 = 10 AIPMT-2006,1996,1991

Physics 57 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ur ur r r r
Ans. (c): Let there are to vectors A and B as shown in 6. Vectors A,B and C are such that
figure, r r r r
A.B = 0 and A.C = 0. Then the vector parallel
r
to A is
r r r r
(a) B and C (b) A × B
r r r r
(c) B + C (d) B × C
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
According to question, Ans. (d) : Vector triple product
r r r r r r r r r
ur ur
A+B = A−B
ur ur
( ) (
A × B×C = B A ⋅C − C A ⋅B = 0) ( )
r r r r
A 2 + B2 + 2ABcos θ = A 2 + B2 + 2(A)(B) cos( π − θ) Given A ⋅ B = 0 and A ⋅ C = 0
So that
A 2 + B2 + 2ABcos θ = A 2 + B2 + 2AB(− cos θ) r r r
A2 + B2 + 2AB cosθ = A2 + B2 – 2AB cosθ
⇒ A  B×C ( )
r r r
4AB cosθ = 0
cosθ = 0 = cos900
Vector Parallel to A is B × C ( )
θ = 900 7. Six vectors, a through f have the magnitudes
r
5. If vector A = cos ωt ˆi + sin ωt ˆj and and directions indicated in the figure. Which of
r ωt ωt the following statements is true?/Ú: meefoMe, a mes
B = cos ˆi + sin ˆj are functions of time,
2 2 f lekeâ kesâ heefjceeCe Je efoMeeSs veerÛes efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes
then the value of 't' at which they are nQ~ efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee keâLeve mener nw?
orthogonal to each other is/Ùeefo meefoMe
r
A = cosωt ˆi + sinωt ˆj leLee meefoMe
r ωt ωt
B = cos ˆi + sin ˆj meceÙe kesâ heâueve nQ, lees, 't'
2 2
keâe Jen ceeve keäÙee nesiee, efpeme hej Ùes meefoMe hejmhej
uebyekeâesefCekeâ neWies?
π
(a) t = 0 (b) t =
4ω
π π (a) b + c = f (b) d + c = f
(c) t = (d) t =
2ω ω (c) d + e = f (d) b + e = f
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (d) :
ur Ans. (c) : If two non-zero vectors are represented by the
A = cos ωt $i + sin ωt $j two adjacent sides of a parallelogram then the resultant
ur ωt ωt is given by the diagonal of parallelogram passing
B = cos $i + sin $j through the point of intersection of the two – vectors.
2 2 r r r
ur ur d+e=f
ωt ωt 
( )
A ⋅ B = cos ωt $i + sin ωt $j ⋅  cos $i + sin $j 
 2 2 
ur ur ωt ωt
A ⋅ B = cos ωt ⋅ cos + sin ωt ⋅ sin
2 2
ur ur  ωt 
A ⋅ B = cos  ωt − 
 2  8. Two bodies of mass 1 kg and 3 kg have position
ur ur
When they are orthogonal A ⋅ B = 0 vectors ˆi + 2jˆ + kˆ and -3iˆ - 2jˆ + kˆ , respectively.
 ωt  The centre of mass of this system has a position
0 = cos  ωt −  vector: /oes efheb[ efpevekesâ õJÙeceeve 1 efkeâ«ee leLee 3
 2 
ωt efkeâ«ee nw, ›eâceMe: ˆi + 2jˆ + kˆ leLee -3iˆ - 2jˆ + kˆ efmLeefle
cos
2
=0 Jeskeäšj ceeveeW hej jKes nQ~ Fme efvekeâeÙe kesâ õJÙeceeve kesâvõ
ωt π
keâe efmLeefle Jeskeäšj nesiee:
= (a) − ˆi + ˆj + kˆ (b) − 2iˆ + 2kˆ
2 2
π (c) −2iˆ − j + kˆ (d) 2iˆ − j − 2kˆ
t=
ω AIMPT-2009
Physics 58 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Point where we can assume mass of bodies are 11. If a vector 2iˆ + 3jˆ + 8kˆ is perpendicular to the
concentrated for system of point masses, centre of mass vector 4jˆ - 4iˆ + α kˆ , then the value of α
is calculated by
→ → → Ùeefo meefoMe 2iˆ + 3jˆ + 8kˆ meefoMe 4jˆ - 4iˆ + αkˆ mes
rcm =
m1 r1 + m 2 r2 + - - - - +mn rn uecyeJeled nes lees α keâe ceeve nesiee-
m1 + m2 + - - - - mn 1
(a) –1 (b) −
→ → 2
m1 r1 + m2 r2 1(i$ + 2$j + k)$ + 3(-3i$ - 2j$ + k)
$
rcm = = 1
m1 + m2 1+ 3 (c) (d) 1
2
$i + 2$j + k$ - 9i$ - 6$j + 3k$ -8i$ - 4$j + 4k$ AIPMT-2005
= Ans. (b) : Given
4 4 ur
A = 2i$ + 3$j + 8k$
rcm = -2i$ - $j + k$ ur
B = 4 $j − 4i$ + α k$
9. A body, under the action of a force ur ur
if, A ⊥B
F = 6iˆ - 8jˆ + 10kˆ acquires an acceleration of 1 ur ur
Then, A.B = 0
m/s2. The mass of this body must be:/Skeâ efheb[,
yeue F = 6iˆ - 8jˆ + 10kˆ kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW 1 m/s2. keâe lJejCe ⇒ ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ + 8kˆ ) ⋅ ( – 4iˆ + 4ˆj + αˆk ) = 0
hee ueslee nw lees Fme efheb[ keâe õJÙeceeve nesiee: or, -8 +12 +8α = 0
8α = – 4
(a) 10 2kg (b) 2 10 kg 4
α=–
(c) 10 kg (d) 20 kg 8
AIMPT-2009 ⇒ α = –1/ 2
→
Ans. (a) : Given F = 6i$ - 8$j +10k$ 12. If the angle between the vector A and B is θ
Acceleration, a = 1 m/s 2
(
the value of the product B × A . A is equal to)
→
F = 6 + ( -8 ) +10 = 10 2
2
2 2
oes meefoMeeW A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe θ nesves hej
∵F = ma iegCeheâue ( A × B ) . A meceleguÙe nesiee-
→ (a) Zero/MetvÙe (b) BA2 sin θ cos θ
F
10 2 (c) BA2 cos θ (d) BA2 sin θ
m= = = 10 2kg
a 1 AIPMT-2005
Ans. (a) :
10. A and B are two vectors and θ is the angle
between them, if | A × B |= 3 A.B the value ( )
of θ is:-
A Deewjoes meefoMe nQ efpevekesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe θ nw
B
Ùeefo | A × B |= 3 ( A.B ) lees θ keâe ceeve nesiee:-
(a) 90º (b) 60º
(c) 45º (d) 30º
ur ur ur ur ur
r r r r
AIPMT-2007 ( B × A) .A = ( BAsin θn$ ) .A = BAsin θ ( n.A
$
)
Ans. (b) : Given- A × B = 3 ( A ⋅ B ) ur ur
As n$ is perpendicular to A & B
r
AB sin θ = 3ABcos θ ⇒ n̂.A = 0
ur ur ur
sin θ
= 3 So, ( )
B × A .A = 0
cos θ
13. If | A× B |= 3 A.B. then the value of | A + B |
tan θ = 3
tan θ = tan 60º is:- /Ùeefo | A× B |= 3 A.B. nes, lees | A + B | keâe
⇒ θ = 60º ceeve nesiee:-

Physics 59 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1/ 2 15. An object of mass 3kg is at rest. Now a force of
 AB 
(a)  A 2 + B2 +  (b) A + B F = 6t 2 ˆi + 4t ˆj is applied on the object then
 3
velocity of object at t = 3 second is
(A )
1/ 2
(c) 2
+ B2 + 3AB (d) (A2 + B2 + AB)1/2 Skeâ 3kg õJÙeceeve keâer Jemleg efmLejeJemLee ceW nw, Fme hej
AIPMT-2004 Skeâ yeue F = 6t 2 ˆi + 4t ˆj keâeÙe&jle neslee nw lees t = 3
Ans. (d) : Given that :- hej keâCe kesâ Jesie keâe ceeve -
r r r r
A×B = 3 A⋅B (a) 18iˆ + 3ˆj (b) 18iˆ + 6ˆj
r r r r (c) 3iˆ + 18ˆj (d) 18iˆ + 4ˆj
A B sin θ = 3 A B cos θ
AIPMT-2002
sin θ
= 3 Ans. (b) : Mass of object,
r
m = 3 kg
cos θ Force F = 6t 2 $i + 4t $j
tanθ = 3
F 6t 2 $i + 4t $j
θ = 60º Q Acceleration 'a' = =
r r m 3
Now, A + B = A2 + B2 + 2ABcos θ 4
a = 2t 2 $i + t $j
3
= A 2 + B 2 + 2AB cos 60
dv 4
also, a= = 2t 2 $i + t$j
1 dt 3
= A + B + 2AB ×
2 2

2  4 
⇒ dv =  2t 2 $i + t $j  dt
r r 1
 3 
A + B = ( A 2 + B2 + AB) 2 3
 4 
14. The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular ⇒ v = ∫  2t 2 $i + t $j  dt
0
3 
to their vector differences. In that case, the
3
forces:/oes yeueeW keâe meefoMe Ùeesie Gvekesâ meefoMe Deblej kesâ 2 4 
=  t 3 $i + t 2 $j
uecyeJeled nw~ Fme efmLeefle ceW: 3 6 0
(a) Are equal to each other/yeue Skeâ otmejs kesâ yejeyej
v = 18i$ + 6j$
nw
(b) Are equal to each other in magnitude/ yeueeW 16. If | A + B | = | A | = | B | then angle between A
keâe heefjceeCe Skeâ otmejs kesâ yejeyej nw and B will be:-
(c) Are not equal to each other in magnitude/ yeueeW Ùeefo | A + B | = | A | = | B| lees A Je B kesâ yeerÛe
keâe heefjceeCe Skeâ otmejs kesâ yejeyej veneR nw keâesCe nesiee-
(d) Cannot be predicted/yeueeW kesâ yeejs ceW kegâÚ keânvee (a) 90º (b) 120º
mebYeJe veneR nw (c) 0º (d) 60º
AIPMT-2003 AIPMT-2001
ur ur ur ur
Ans. (b): Ans. (b) : B = A = A + B
r r r
→ A+B = B
Squaring both side
r2 r 2 r2 r r
B = A + B + 2A.B
r 2
r r -A
→ A .B = …(i)
2
ur ur ur ur r r
( ) ( )
P+Q ⊥ P−Q Angle between A & B
ur ur ur ur r r r2
( )( )
P + Q . P − Q = 0, {θ = 90º} A.B − A
Cos θ = r 2 =
1
r 2 = − from(i)
ur ur ur ur 2
P 2 − P.Q + Q.P − Q2 = 0 A 2. A
P 2 = Q2 1
⇒ θ = 120º {∵ cos 120º = − }
P =Q 2

Physics 60 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
17. (
If F = 60iˆ + 15ˆj − 3kˆ N and ) (
V = 2iˆ − 4ˆj + 5kˆ ) Ans. (a): Given that,
r
A = 3 units
m/s, then instantaneous power is r
B = 4 units
Ùeefo (
F = 60iˆ + 15ˆj − 3kˆ N ) leLee Jesie r
C = 5 units
( )
r r r
V = 2iˆ − 4ˆj + 5kˆ m/s nw lees leel#eefCekeâ Meefòeâ A+B = C
nesieer– On squaring both side, we get
2 2 2
(a) 195 watt/Jee@š (b) 45 watt/Jee@š A + B + 2 A B cos θ = C
(c) 75 watt/Jee@š (d) 100 watt/Jee@š (3)2 + (4)2 + 2 (3) (4) cos θ = (5)2
AIPMT-2000 9 + 16 + 24 cos θ = 25
Ans. (b) : Given, 24 cos θ = 0
ur cos θ = 0
(
Force, F = 60iˆ + 15ˆj − 3kˆ N ) θ = π/2
ur So, A is perpendicular to B.
(
Velocity, V = 2iˆ − 4ˆj + 5kˆ
m
s
) 20. The angle between the two vectors
ur ur r r
Instantaneous power, P = F.V A = 3iˆ + 4jˆ + 5kˆ and B = 3iˆ + 4jˆ – 5kˆ will be
r r
( )(
P = 60iˆ + 15ˆj − 3kˆ . 2iˆ − 4 ˆj + 5kˆ ) oes meefoMeeW A = 3iˆ + 4jˆ + 5kˆ Deewj B = 3iˆ + 4jˆ – 5kˆ
kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe nesiee:
P = 120 – 60 – 15
(a) 90º (b) 180º
P = 45 watt
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 45º
18. Identify the vector quantity among the
AIPMT-1994
following.
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes meefoMe jeefMe keâer henÛeeve keâjs Ans. (a) : Given,
r
A = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 5kˆ
(a) Distance/otjer r
(b) Angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie B = 3iˆ + 4ˆj – 5kˆ
r r
(c) Heat/Gâ<cee A.B = ( 3iˆ + 4 ˆj + 5kˆ )( 3iˆ + 4 ˆj – 5kˆ )
(d) Energy/Tpee& = 9 + 16 – 25
AIPMT-1997 = 25 – 25
Ans. (b) : Vector quantity- It is defined as the physical =0
r r r r
quantity that has both directions as well as magnitude. A.B = A B cos θ
• Some examples of vector quantity are force, velocity, r r
A.B 0
torque, acceleration etc. cos θ = r r = r r = 0
A B A B
Angular Momentum- It is defined as the property of
objects in rotational motion which is determined by the cosθ = cos90
product of their moment of inertia (I) and angular θ = 90
r r
velocity (ω). It is a vector quantity. 21. If the angle between the vectors A and B is θ,
r r r
• Its SI unit is kg.m2/sec. the value of the product ( B × A ) . A is equal to
Scalar quantity- It is defined as the physical quantity r r
with only magnitude. For e.g mass, speed, distance, Ùeefo meefoMe A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâesCe θ nw, lees iegCeve
r r r
heat, energy, volume, density etc. ( B × A ) . A keâe ceeve nw:
r r r
19. The magnitude of vectors A, B and C are 3, 4 (a) BA2 sinθ (b) BA2 cosθ
r r r (c) BA2 sinθcosθ (d) zero.
and 5 units respectively. If A + B = C, the angle
r r AIPMT-2005, 1989
between A and B is
r r r Ans. (d) :
leerve meefoMe A, B leLee C kesâ heefjceeCe ›eâceMe: 3, 4
r r r r r
leLee 5 cee$ekeâ nw~ Ùeefo A + B = C lees A leLee B kesâ
yeerÛe keâe keâesCe nw:
(a) π/2 (b) cos–1 (0.6)
(c) tan–1 (7/5) (d) π/4
AIPMT-1988

Physics 61 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r r r
Let vector A × B = C which is perpendicular to both Ans. (c) :r Given vector,
r r r r
vector A and B ∴ A.C = 0 F = 6iˆ – 8ˆj + 10kˆ
r r r a = 1 m/s2
Therefore, ( B × A ) .A ..... r
=0 F = 36 + 64 + 100
r r r
The product of ( B × A ) .A is equal to zero. = 200
r
22. The resultant of A × 0 will be equal to = 10 2 N
r
A × 0 keâe heefjCeeceer yejeyej nw: F 10 2
Now, we know that m = =
(a) zero/MetvÙe a 1
(b) A/A = 10 2 kg
(c) zero vector/MetvÙe meefoMe
(d) unit vector/FkeâeF& meefoMe 3.2 Relative Velocity
AIPMT-1992
Ans. (c) : We know that, 25. The speed of a swimmer in still water is 20 m/s.
r r r r
A × B = A B sinθ The speed of river water is 10 m/s and is
r flowing due east. If he is standing on the south
B= 0 bank and wishes to cross the river along the
r
⇒ B =0 shortest path the angle at which he should
r r make his strokes w.r.t. north is given by :
⇒ A×B = 0
efmLej peue ceW efkeâmeer lewjekeâ keâer Ûeeue 20 m/s nw~ veoer kesâ
23. Find the torque of a force Fˆ = –3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ peue keâer Ûeeue 10 m/s nw Deewj Jen "erkeâ hetJe& keâer Deesj
r
acting at the point r = 7iˆ + 3jˆ + kˆ . yen jne nw~ Ùeefo Jen oef#eCeer efkeâveejs hej KeÌ[e nw Deewj
r
efyevog r = 7i + 3j + k hej keâeÙe&jle Skeâ yeue
ˆ ˆ ˆ veoer keâes ueIeglece heLe kesâ DevegefoMe heej keâjvee Ûeenlee nw
Fˆ = –3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ keâe yeue DeeIetCe& %eele keâerefpeS~ lees Gòej kesâ meehes#e Gmes efpeme keâesCe hej mš^eskeâ ueieeves
(a) –21iˆ + 4ˆj + 4kˆ (b) –14iˆ + 34ˆj – 16kˆ
ÛeeefnS Jen nw-
(a) 0º (b) 60º west/heef§ece
(c) 14iˆ – 38ˆj + 16kˆ (d) 4iˆ + 4ˆj + 6kˆ
(c) 45º west/heef§ece (d) 30º west/heef§ece
AIPMT-1997
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (c) : Given, F̂ = –3iˆ + ˆj + 5kˆ
Ans. (d) :
r
r = 7 ˆi + 3 ˆj + kˆ
r r
We have, Torque, τ = r × F
i j k
τ= 7 3 1
–3 1 5 θ
= ˆi (15 – 1) – ˆj ( 35 + 3) + kˆ ( 7 + 9 )
= 14 ˆi – 38 ˆj + 16 kˆ
24. A force vector applied on a mass is represented Speed of swimmer w.r.t. river, VSR = 20m/s
r
as F = 6iˆ – 8jˆ + 10kˆ and accelerates with 1 m/s2. Speed of river flow, VRG = 10m/s
20 sinθ = 10 m/s
What will be the mass of the body?/efkeâmeer Jemleg
r 10 1
hej Deejesefhele yeue meefoMe keâes F = 6iˆ – 8jˆ + 10kˆ mes sin θ = =
20 2
ØeoefMe&le efkeâÙee peelee nw Deewj Ùen 1 m/s kesâ meeLe lJeefjle
2
sinθ = sin30º
neslee nw~ Jemleg keâe õJÙeceeve keäÙee nesiee? θ = 30º west
(a) 10 kg/10 efkeâ«ee (b) 20 kg/20 efkeâ«ee
26. A ship A is moving Westwards with a speed of
(c) 10 2 kg/ 10 2 efkeâ«ee 10 km h-1 and a ship B 100 km South of A, is
moving Northwards with a speed of 10 km h-1.
(d) 2 10 kg/ 2 10 efkeâ«ee
The time after which the distance between
AIPMT-1996 them becomes shortest, is :-

Physics 62 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ penepe 'A' 10 km h-1 keâer Ûeeue mes heef§ece efoMee Ans. (a): Let, Vr = Velocity of river
keâer Deesj ieefle keâj jne nw~ Skeâ DevÙe penepe 'B' Fme Vbr = Velocity of boat w.r.t. river = 5 km/h
penepe A mes 100 km oef#eCe efoMee ceW nw Deewj 10 km h- Vb = Velocity of boat
w = width of river = 1km
1
keâer Ûeeue mes Gòej efoMee keâer Deesj pee jne nw~ Fve oesveeW Time taken to cross the river, t = 15 min
kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer efkeâleves meceÙe kesâ he§eeled vÙetvelece nes 15 1
peeÙesieer:- = h= h
60 4
(a) 5 h /5 IeCšs (b) 5 2 h /5 2 IeCšs
(c) 10 2 h /10 2 IeCšs (d) 0 h/0 IeCšs
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (a) :

width
Now, t =
Vb
v 1 1
=
4 Vb

vB Vb = 4 km/hr
Using Pythagoras theorem,
Vbr2 = Vb2 + Vr2
Vr2 = Vbr2 − Vb2
Velocity of Ship A
vA = 10kmh −1 towards west ⇒ Vr = Vbr2 − Vb2
velocity of ship B = 52 − 4 2
vB = 10Kmh −1 towards north = 25 − 16
OS = 100 Km = 9
OP = Shortest distance Vr = 3km / h
Relative velocity between A & B is
28. A bus is moving on a straight road towards
v AB = v 2A + v 2B = 10 2 Kmh −1 north with a uniform speed of 50 km/hour then
OP 1 OP it turns left through 90º. If the speed remains
cos 45º = ⇒ = unchanged after turning, the increase in the
OS 2 100 velocity of bus in the turning process is
OP =
100
= 50 2 Km Skeâ yeme meÌ[keâ hej Gòej efoMee ceW 50 efkeâceer/IeCše kesâ
2 meceeve Jesie mes Ûeueleer nw~ Ùen 90º hej cegÌ[leer nw leLee
The time after which distance between them equals to cegÌ[ves kesâ yeeo Yeer Ûeeue meceeve jnleer nw~ cegÌ[ves kesâ oewjeve
OP is given by Jesie ceW efkeâleveer yeÌ{eslejer ngF&?
OP 50 2 (a) 70.7 km/hr along south-west direction/70.7
t= = = 5h efkeâceer/IeCše, oef#eCe-heef§ece efoMee ceW
v AB 10 2
(b) zero/MetvÙe
t = 5h
(c) 50 km/hr along west/50 efkeâceer/IeCše, heef§ece efoMee ceW
27. The speed of a boat is 5 km/hr is in still water. (d) 70.7 km/hr along north-west direction/70.7
It crosses a river of width 1 km along the efkeâceer/IeCše, Gòej-heef§ece efoMee ceW
shortest possible path in 15 minutes. The AIPMT-1989
velocity of river water is/Skeâ veeJe efpemekeâer Meeble Ans. (a) : Given that,
peue ceW Ûeeue 5 km/hr nw~ 1 km ÛeewÌ[er veoer keâes keâce mes v1 = 50 km/h in North direction
keâce otjer kesâ jemles mes 15 efceveš ceW heej keâjleer nw, lees v2 = 50 km/h in West direction
veoer ceW heeveer keâer Ûeeue nesieer–
(a) 3 km/hr (b) 4 km/hr
(c) 5 km/hr (d) 2 km/hr
AIPMT-2000, 1998

Physics 63 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
From figure, angle between V1 and V2 is 90º. Ans. (b):
So, –V1 = 50 km/h in South direction.
Change in velocity = V2 + (– V1 )

= V2 2 + V12

= (50)2 + (50)
0)2
= 50 2 = 50×1.414 ×1.414
= 70.7 km/h along southwest west ddirection.
Velocity of two end along the rod
d will remain same
29. A boat is sent across a river er wit
with a velocity of 8
⇒ V cos30º= V cos60º
km h–1. If the resultant velocity ocity of boat is 10 km B A
–1 V cos60º
h , then velocity of river is ⇒ VB = A

Skeâ veeJe keâes 8 efkeâceer/Iebše mes Skeâ veoer kesâ heej Yespee cos30º
peelee nw~ Ùeefo veeJe keâe heefjCeeceerer Jesie 10 efkeâceer/Iebše 1
10 ×
2 = 10 m / s
nes lees veoer kesâ yeneJe keâe Jesie nw: =
3 3
(a) 12.8 km h–1/12.8 efkeâceer/Iebše 2
(b) 6 km h–1/ 6 efkeâceer/Iebše
(c) 8 km h–1/8 efkeâceer/Iebše
3.3 Projectile Motion
(d) 10 km h–1/ 10 efkeâceer/Iebše
AIP
AIPMT-1994, 1993 31. A ball is projected from point poin A with velocity
Ans. (b) : Given that, 20 m s–1 at an angle 60° to t the horizontal
Velocity of Boat(VB) = 8 km/hr
km/hr. direction. At the highest point B of the path (as
shown in figure), the velocity locity v m s–1 of the ball
Resultant velocity of boat and riverver (VBR) = 10 km/hr
will be/Skeâ ieWo keâes efyevog A mes 20 m s-1 kesâ Jesie mes
Let us consider that velocity of river
er is VR.
#eweflepe efoMee mes 600 kesâ keâesCe hej Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peelee
So, Resultant velocity (VBR) = VB ) + (VR )
(V 2 2
nw~ heLe kesâ GÛÛelece efyebog B hej (pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW
On squaring both side, we get efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw), ieWo keâe Jesie v m s-1 nesiee
(VBR)2 = VB2 + VR 2
102 = 82 + VR 2
VR 2 = 100 − 64 = 36
VR = 6 km/hr.
30. A rigid rod is placed against nst th
the wall as shown (a) Zero/MetvÙe (b) 10
in figure. When its velocity ty of lower end is 10
ms–1 and its base makes an angle α = 60° with
n ang (c) 20 (d) 10 3
horizontal, then the vertical cal vel
velocity of its end RE NEET Manipur
nipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
B will be/efÛe$eevegmeej Skeâ meerÌ{er oerJeej kesâ menejs jKeer Ans. (b) :
nw Gmekesâ efvecvelece efmejs A keâe efpeme #eCe Jesie 10 m/s
leLee meerÌ{er keâe DeeOeej mes keâesCe a = 660º nes leye efmejs B
keâe GOJe& Jesie nesiee:

At highest point vertical component

nent of velocity is zero
locity (v) = u cos θ
and horizontal component of velocity
= 20 cos60º
20
=
(a) 10 3 (b) 10 / 3 2
(c) 5 3 (d) 5 / 3 v = 10m/sec
AIPMT-1998 Therefore, at point B velocity is 10 m/sec.
m/

Physics 64 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
32. A bullet is fired from a gun at the speed of 280 Skeâ ef›eâkesâš ieWo efkeâmeer efKeueeÌ[er Éeje 20 m/s keâer Ûeeue
m s-1 in the direction 300 above the horizontal. mes #eweflepe mes Thej 30° kesâ keâesCe keâer efoMee ceW heWâkeâer
The maximum height attained by the bullet is
(g = 9.8 m s-2 , sin300 = 0.5) :
peeleer nw~ ieWo Éeje Fmekeâer ieefle kesâ oewjeve Øeehle keâer ieF&
efkeâmeer yevotkeâ mes Skeâ ieesueer #eweflepe mes 30º keâer efoMee ceW DeefOekeâlece TBÛeeF& nw:
Thej keâer Deesj 280 m s–1 keâer Ûeeue mes oeieer peeleer nw~ (a) 5 m (b) 10 m (c) 20 m (d) 25 m
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
ieesueer Éeje leÙe keâer ieF& DeefOekeâlece TBÛeeF& nw
Ans. (a) : Given that – v = 20m/sec
(g = 9.8 ms–2, sin 30º = 0.5)
(a) 3000 m (b) 2800 m θ = 30°
(c) 2000 m (d) 1000 m
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (d) : Height attained by the body in projectile
motion is –
u 2 sin 2 θ Height attained by the body in projectile motion –
H=
2g v 2 sin 2 θ
H=
2g
( 280 )
2
× sin 2 30º
= 2
2 × 9.8 1
400 ×  
( 20 ) sin 30° =
2 2
H = 1000 m ⇒ H= 2
33. A ball is projected with a velocity 10 ms at an –1 2 × 10 2 × 10
angle of 60° with the vertical direction. Its speed ⇒ H = 5m
at the highest point of its trajectory will be 35. The velocity of a projectile at the initial point A is
efkeâmeer ieWo keâes TOJe& efoMee ceW 60º kesâ keâesCe hej ( )
2iˆ + 3jˆ m/s. It's velocity (in m/s) at point B is:-
10 ms–1 kesâ Jesie mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Øe#eshÙe heLe
/efkeâmeer Øe#eshÙe keâe ØeejbefYekeâ efyevog A hej Jesie
keâer DeefOekeâlece GBâÛeeF& hej Fmekeâer Ûeeue nesieer:
(a) 10 ms–1 (b) Zero ( )
2iˆ + 3jˆ m/s nw, lees Fmekeâe efyevog B hej Jesie (m/s ceW)
(c) 5 3 ms −1
(d) 5 ms −1 nesiee-
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Ans. (c) :
U sinθ

(a) 2iˆ + 3jˆ (b) – 2 î – 3ĵ

(c) – 2î + 3 ĵ (d) 2 î – 3ĵ
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Ans. (d)
Initially angle between the motion of a particle with a
horizontal surface θ = 90 – 60 = 30º
Velocity of ball (u) = 10m/s
At highest point only horizontal component is there
which is given by (v) = u cosθ
∴ v = 10 ⋅ cos30°
3
∴ v = 10 ×
2 u = 2iˆ + 3jˆ
v = 5 3 m / sec
u x = 2i$
34. A cricket ball is thrown by a player at a speed
of 20 m/s in a direction 30° above the u y = 3ˆj
horizontal. The maximum height attained by As, Horizontal component remains same
the ball during its motion is: Vx = 2iˆ
(g = 10 m/s2)

Physics 65 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
And due to symmetry at B velocity Vy is equal in 38. A projectile is fired from the surface of the
magnitude with Uy but opposite in direction earth with a velocity of 5 ms-1 and angle θ with
v y = − u y = − 3ˆj
the horizontal. Another projectile fired from
another planet with a velocity of 3 ms-1 at the
v = vx + vy same angle follows a trajectory which is
identical with the trajectory of the projectile
v = 2iˆ − 3ˆj fired from the earth. The value of the
36. A missile is fired for maximum range with an acceleration due to gravity on the planet is (in
initial velocity of 20 m/s. If g = 10 m/s2, the ms-2) : (given g = 9.8m/s2)
range of the missile is : Skeâ Øe#eshÙe keâes he=LJeer keâer melen mes 5 ms–1 kesâ Jesie mes
Skeâ Øe#esheem$e keâes DeefOekeâlece hejeme kesâ efueS Øe#esefhele leLee #eweflepe efoMee mes θ keâesCe hej ÚesÌ[e peelee nw~ efkeâmeer
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Fmekeâe ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie 20 m/s nw~ Ùeefo DevÙe «en mes 3 ms-1 kesâ Jesie leLee Fmeer keâesCe (θ) hej
g=10 m/s2 nes lees Øe#esheem$e keâe hejeme nesiee : ÚesÌ[s ieÙes Skeâ Øe#eshÙe keâe Øe#eshe heLe, he=LJeer mes ÚesÌ[s ieÙes
(a) 20 m (b) 40 m Øe#eshÙe heLe kesâ meJe&mece (meJe&Lee meceeve) nQ~ Ùeefo he=LJeer
(c) 50 m (d) 60 m hej g = 9.8m/s2 nQ lees, Fme «en hej ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 ceeve (ms-2 ceW) nesiee~
Ans. (b) : Given– Initial velocity (u) = 20 m/s (a) 3.5 (b) 5.9
g = 10 m/s2, R = ? (c) 16.3 (d) 110.8
We know that Range in projectile motion AIPMT-06.05.2014
u 2sin2θ Ans. (a) : The equation of trajectory is
R=
g gx 2
y = x tan θ −
For maximum Range θ will be 45º, So 2u cos 2 θ
2

( 20 )
sin ( 2 × 45º )
2
Where, 'θ' is the angle of projection and 'u' is the
R max = velocity with which projectile is projected. For equal
10
trajectories (y, x) and for same angles of projection (θ),
400 × sin 90º
= sin90º = 1 g
10 = constant
= 40 m u2
9.8 g '
37. Two particles are projected with same initial As per question, 2 = 2
velocity one makes angle θ with horizontal 5 3
while other makes an angle θ with vertical. If where, g' is acceleration due to gravity on the planet.
their common range is R then product of their 9
g ' = 9.8 × = 3.5m / s 2
time of flight is directly proportional to 25
oes keâCe meceeve ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie mes meceeve mLeeve mes Fme 39. The horizontal range and the maximum height
Øekeâej Øe#esefhele efkeâÙes ieÙes nQ efkeâ Skeâ #eweflepe mes θ keâesCe of a projectile are equal. The angle of
yeveelee nw leLee otmeje GOJe& mes θ keâesCe yeveelee nw, lees projection of the projectile is:
Gvekesâ GñÙeve keâeueeW keâe iegCeveHeâue meceevegheeleer nesiee efkeâmeer Øe#eshÙe keâer DeefOekeâlece GBâÛeeF& leLee #eweflepe hejeme
(R Gvekeâer hejeme nw) : Deeheme ceW yejeyej nw~ lees Øe#eshÙe keâe Øe#esheCe keâesCe nw:-
(a) R (b) R2 (a) θ = tan–1(2) (b) θ = 45º
1 1
(c) (d) R0 (c) θ = tan −1   (d) θ = tan–1(4)
R  4
AIPMT-1999 AIPMT (Screening)-2012
u sin 2θ
2
2u sin θ Ans. (d) : For Projectile motion,
Ans. (a) : R = , t1 =
g g u 2 sin 2θ
Horizontal Range, (R) =
2 u sin ( 90 − θ ) 2 u cos θ g
t2 = =
g g u 2 sin 2 θ
Maximum Height (H) =
4 u 2 sin θ cos θ 2R 2g
∴ t 1t 2 = = Now, according to the question,
g g
u 2 sin 2θ u 2 sin 2 θ
 t & t 2 are the time of flight =
or t1t2 ∝ R where  1 g 2g
and R is the range of particles.

Physics 66 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
sin 2 θ (a) 60° (b) 15°
⇒ 2 sinθ cosθ = (c) 45° (d) 60°
2
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
 sin θ 
⇒ 4 cosθ = sinθ Q = 4 Ans. (a) : Let v be velocity of a Projectile at its
 cos θ  maximum height 'H'.
⇒ 4 = tanθ
⇒ θ = tan–1(4)
40. A projectile is fired at an angle of 45º with the
horizontal. Elevation angle of the projectile at
its highest point as seen from the point of
projection, is/Skeâ Øe#eshÙe keâes #eweflepe mes 45º kesâ keâesCe
hej HeWâkeâe peelee nw~ Øe#esheCe efyevog mes osKeves hej Gmekesâ
GÛÛelece efyevog hej Øe#esheCe keâe SsefueJesMeve keâesCe nw:
(a) 45° (b) 60°
From the figure-
1 −1
 3 −1 v = u cos θ
(c) tan (d) tan  
2  2  u
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 According to the question v = 2
Ans. (c) : Let φ be elevation angle of the projectile at its
highest point as seen from the point of projection O and u
= u cos θ
θ be angle of projection with the horizontal. 2
1
= cos θ ⇒ cos 60º = cos θ
2
⇒ θ = 60º
42. A particle of mass m is projected with velocity
v making an angle of 45º with the horizontal
H from level ground. When the particle lands on
From figure, tan φ = ...........(i)
R/2 the level ground the magnitude of the change in
In case of projectile motion its momentum will be –/
u 2 sin 2 θ m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe #eweflepe efoMee mes 45° keâe
Maximum height, H =
2g keâesCe yeveeles ngS v Jesie mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ keâCe
u 2 sin 2θ kesâ meceleue peceerve hej Glejves hej Gmekesâ mebJesie ceW
Horizontal range, R = heefjJele&ve keâe heefjceeCe nesiee :–
g
Substituting these values of H and R in (i), we get (a) mv 2 (b) zero /MetvÙe
u 2 sin 2 θ (c) 2 mv (d) mv / 2
2g sin 2 θ sin 2 θ 1 AIPMT-2008
tan φ = 2 = = = tan θ
u sin 2θ sin 2θ 2sin θ cos θ 2 Ans. (a) : Given:– Mass of particle = m
2g Velocity = v
1 1 1 Projectile angle θ = 45°
tan φ = tan 45° = × 1 =
2 2 2
(Here, θ = 45°)
1 1
∴ tan φ = tan 45° =
2 2
1
φ = tan −1  
2
41. The speed of a projectile at its maximum height
is half of its initial speed. The angle of Change in momentum along horizontal (i.e. along x -
projection is/DeefOekeâlece TBÛeeF& hej efkeâmeer Øe#eshÙe keâer axis)
Ûeeue Gmekeâer ØeejefcYekeâ Ûeeue keâer DeeOeer nw~ lees Gmekesâ = mvcosθ - mvcosθ = 0
Øe#esheCe keâe keâesCe nesiee – Change in momentum in vertical direction only-

Physics 67 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ur
Change in momentum ∆ P = ∆Px $i + ∆Py $j (Q ∆Px = 0 ) (a)
x
(b)
u
ur ur u 2x
∆Py $j = P y ( ) − Py
final
( ) initial 2u
(c)
= – mv sin 45° – mv sin 45° x
= –2 mv sin45° (d) None of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
= − 2 mv AIPMT-1999
= 2 mv Ans. (a) :
(–ve sign shows the direction of change in momentum Let x1 and x2 are the horizontal distances travelled by
in –ve y direction). two particles in time t.
43. Two projectiles of same mass and with same u
x1 = cos 30º×t .... (i)
velocity are thrown at an angle 60º & 30º with 3
the horizontal, then which quantity will and
remain same : x2 = u cos 60º×t ....(ii)
meceeve õJÙeceeve kesâ oes Øe#eshÙe meceeve Jesie mes ›eâceMe: u
#eweflepe mes 30° Je 60° kesâ keâesCe mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙes peeles x1 + x2 = cos 30º t + u cos 60º t
3
nQ~ lees efvecve ceW mes keâewve-meer jeefMe meceeve nesieer –
(a) Time of flight/GñÙeve keâeue u 3 1
x1 + x2 = t + u t = ut [∴x = x1 = x2]
(b) Horizontal range of projectile/#eweflepe hejeme 3 2 2
(c) Max height acquired/GÛÛelece TbÛeeF&  x
x = ut ⇒  t = 
(d) All of them/Ghejesòeâ meYeer  u 
AIPMT-2000 45. The maximum range of a gun of horizontal
terrain is 16 km. If g = 10 m s–2, then muzzle
Ans. (b) : For Projectile motion,
velocity of a shell must be
2u sin θ Skeâ ieesueer keâer DeefOekeâlece hejeme 16 efkeâueesceeršj nw~
Time of flight, T =
g ieesueer efkeâme Jesie mes yebotkeâ mes efvekeâueer Leer?
u 2 sin θ (a) 160 m s–1 (b) 200 2 m s–1
Maximum height acquired, H =
2g (c) 400 m s–1 (d) 800 m s–1
u 2 sin 2θ AIPMT-1990
Horizontal range of projectile, R =
g Ans. (c) : Given that,
Maximum horizontal Range (Rmax) = 16 km =
1 3 16×1000 m, g = 10 m/sec2
Q sin30º = & sin (2×30) =
2 2 u 2 sin 2θ
We know that, Horizontal Range (R) =
3 3 g
sin60º = & sin (2×60) =
2 2 Where, u = velocity for maximum condition, θ = 45º
∴ All the quantities will change for θ = 30º or 60º but u 2 sin(2 × 45º )
horizontal range of projectile (R) will remain same as So, Rmax =
g
3
sin2θ is same for 30º & 60º. i.e. u 2 sin 90º u 2
2 Rmax = = (sin90º=1)
g g
44. Two particles separated at a horizontal
distance x and projected at the same line as u2
16000 =
shown in figure with different initial speeds. 10
The time after which the horizontal distance u2 = 16000×10
between them become zero/ X #eweflepe otjer
u= 16 × 1000 × 10
Devlejeue mes oes keâCeeW keâes efÛe$eevegmeej efYeVe-efYeVe
Velocity of shell (u) = 400 m/sec.
ØeejefcYekeâ Jesie mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ efkeâleves meceÙe,
46. A particle is projected making an angle of 45º
heMÛeeled Gvekesâ ceOÙe #eweflepe otjer MetvÙe nesieer- with horizontal having kinetic energy K. The
kinetic energy at highest point will be
Skeâ keâCe keâes #eweflepe mes 45º kesâ keâesCe hej heWâkeâe
peelee
nw, lees Gmekeâer GÛÛelece efyevog hej ieeflepe Tpee& keäÙee
nesieer, Ùeefo Fmekeâer ØeejefcYekeâ ieeflepe Tpee& K nw?

Physics 68 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
K K Ans. (c): Time taken by both the ball to reach the
(a) (b)
2 2 ground is same because the verticalvertic component of
(c) 2K (d) K velocity is unaffected by any horizon
orizontal velocity since
in vertical direction the acceleration
tion remains
re same.
AIP
AIPMT-2001,1997
1
Ans. (b) : h = u A t + gt 2A
2
2h
⇒ tA =
g
1
h By = u By + gt B 2
2
u Bj = 0
2h By 2h
Suppose point P is the highest point nt at wwhich velocity of ⇒ t B = =
particle is v cos45º y g
1
kinetic energy K' = mv'2 .....(i)
2
3.4 Uniform Circular ular Motion M
1 2
K' = m (v cos45º)
2 48. A particle moving in a circle ircle of o radius R with a
2
1  1  uniform speed takes a time T to complete one
= m v × 
2  2 revolution. If this particle cle were
we projected with
the same speed at an angle gle 'θ' to the horizontal,
1 1
= mv 2 × the maximum height attained tained by it equals 4R.
2 2 The angle of projection θ is then th given by :
1 1 Skeâ keâCe ef $epÙee kes â Je= ò e ceW meceeve
m Ûeeue mes ieefle
K' = mv × 2
[∴ Given en K.E = K R
2 2 keâjles ngS Skeâ Ûekeäkeâj hetje keâjves ves ceW
ce T meceÙe ueslee nw~
1
= K× Ùeefo Ùener keâCe #eweflepe mes Gmeereer Ûeeue Ûe mes keâesCe 'θ' hej
2
Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peeS, lees 4R keskeâ yejeyej DeefOekeâlece
K
= TBÛeeF& Øeehle keâjlee nw~ Øe#esheCe keâesCe 'θ' efoÙee peelee nw :
2
1 1
−1  2gT  −1  gT 
2 2 2 2
47. A particle (A) is dropped d from a height and
(a) θ = sin  2  (b) θ = cos  2 
another particle (B) is projecte ojected in horizontal
 πR  π R
direction with speed of 5 m/s from the same 1 1
−1  π R  −1  π R 
height then correct statement is 2 2 2 2
(c) θ = cos  2  (d) θ = sin  2 
Skeâ keâCe (A) keâes efkeâmeer TBÛeeF& mes mJeleb$eleehetJe&keâ  gT   gT 
Úes[les nQ leLee Skeâ DevÙe keâCe (B) keâes Gmeer TBÛeeF& mes NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
#eweflepe efoMee ceW 5 m/s keâer Ûeeue mes ØØe#esefhele keâjles nQ lees Ans. (a) : To Complete a Circular cular Path of radius R,
efvecve ceW mes keâewve mee keâLeve melÙe nQ - time period is T.
(a) Particle (A) will reach at gground first with 2πR
respect to particle (B) / Oejeleue jeleue keâe keâCe (A), keâCe So, velocity of particle ( u ) = T − − − −(i)
(B) kesâ meehes#e henues hengbÛesiee Now the particle is projected with sam speed at angle θ
th same
(b) Particle (B) will reach at gground first with with horizontal
respect to particle (A) / Oejeleue jeleue keâe keâCe (B), keâCe  u 2Sin in 2 θ 
(A) kesâ meehes#e henues hengbÛesieee So maximum height (H) =  
 2g 
(c) Both particles will reac reach at ground
Given H = 4R
simultaneously
oesvees keâCe, Oejeleue hej Skeâ meeLeeLe hehengbÛeWies u 2 sin 2 θ
4R =
(d) Both particles will reachh at gground with same 2g
speed / oesveeW keâCe Oejeleue hej,, mec
meceeve Ûeeue mes hengbÛeWies 8gR
sin2θ = − − − − − −(ii)
AIPMT-2002 u2

Physics 69 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8gRT 2 meceÙe kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW efkeâmeer eâ keâCe keâe efmLeefle
sin2θ = [using equation
ation (i)] r
4π 2 R 2 meefoMe R efoÙee ieÙee nw~
r
2gT 2 R = 4 sin ( 2 π t ) ˆi + 4 cos ( 2 πt ) ˆj
sin 2 θ = 2
π R peneB R ceeršj ceW leLee t meskebâ[ ceW ce nw Deewj î leLee ĵ
1/ 2 ›eâceMe: x leLee y efoMeeDeseb kesâ DevegDev efoMe Skeâebkeâ meefoMe
 2gT 2 
θ = sin −1  2  nQ~ Fme keâCe keâer ieefle kesâ efueÙess efvecveeb
e ekf eâle ceW mes keâewve-
 πR  mee keâLeve mener veneR nw?
49. A uniform circular disc off radiu radius 50 cm at rest (a) Path of the particle is a circle of radius 4
is free to turn about an axis which is meter/ keâCe keâe heLe 4 ceer. ef$epÙee
epÙ keâe Je=òe ns~
r
perpendicular to its plane and passes through (b) Acceleration vector iss along − R
r
its centre. it is subjected to a torque which lJejCe meefoMe −R kesâ DevegefoMe nwn~
produces a constant angular lar acc
acceleration of 2.0
v2
rad s-2. Its net acceleration in m ms-2 at the end of (c) Magnitude of acceleration
ation vector
v is , where
2.0 s is approximately:/efJejeceeJ eceeJemLee ceW efmLele 50 R
v is the velocity off particle/
part lJejCe-meefoMe keâe
cm ef$epÙee keâer keâesF& Skeâmeceeve Je=òeeekeâej ef[mkeâ Deheves 2
v
leue kesâ uecyeJeled Deewj kesâvõ mes iegpeejves Jeeues De#e kesâ heefjceeCe , nw~ peneB v keâCe
âCe keâ
k e Jesie nw~
R
heefjle: Ietceves kesâ efueS mJeleb$e nw~ Fme
me ef[mkeâ hej keâesF& yeue (d) Magnitude of the velocityelocity of particle is 8
DeeIetCe& keâeÙe& keâjlee nw, pees FmeceW 2.0 rad s-2 keâe efveÙele meter/second/keâCe kesâ Jesie keâe heefjceeCe 8 ceer/mes. nw~
keâesCeerÙe lJejCe Glhevve keâj oslee nw~ 2.0 s kesâ heMÛeeled AIPMT T Re-Exam-25.07.2015
ms-2 ceW Fmekeâe vesš lJejCe nesiee~ ueieY eieYeie : Ans. (d) : Given equation-
r
(a) 3.0 (b) 8.0 R = 4 sin (2πt) î + 4 cos (2πt) ĵ
(c) 7.0 (d) 6.0 Where, x = 4 sin (2πt)..................(i)
EET (UG)-01.05.2016 y = 4 cos (2πt)....................(ii)
NEET
Squaring eqn (i) and eqn (ii) then and we w get-
Ans. (b) :
x2 + y2 = 42 [sin2 2πt + cos 2πt]
x2 + y2 = 42
This is the equation of circle.
Hence, Path of the particle is a circle circl of radius 4. So,
Given that option (a) is correct.
• In uniform circular motion, velocity
elocity is always tangent
Angular acceleration α = 2 rad/
rad/s2, time t = 2 s to the orbit and acceleration has constantco magnitude
Radius (r) = 50 cm = 0.5 m but always points towards centre tre of rotation.
Q Angular speed ω = αt [∵ ω=ω0+ αt]
= 2 × 2 = 4 ra
rad/s
Q Centripetal acceleration ac = ω2r
(4)2 × 0.5
= (4
= 16 × 0.5
ac = 8 m/s2
ν2
Qtangential acceleration, and acceleration, ac =
r
at = αr = 2 × 0.5 Hence, option (c) is correct.
= 1 m/s2 • The direction of acceleration iss along
r
alon − R i.e. towards
The net acceleration the centre, the magnitude of centripetal
centri acceleration
a net = a c2 + a 2t depends on the velocity as well ll as radius
r of the circle
Hence, option (b) is correct.
a net = (8) 2 + (1) 2 = 665 ≈ 8m/s 2 • diffrentiate eqn (i) and eqn (ii) with
ith respect
resp to x we get–
r vx = 8 π cos (2πt)
50. The position vector of a pa particle R as a
vy = –8 π sin (2πt)
function of time is given by
r magnitude of velocity is given by–
R = 4 sin ( 2 π t ) ˆi + 4 cos ( 2 π t ) ˆj
|v| = v 2x + v 2y
Where R is in meters, t is in seco
seconds and î and
ĵ denote unit vectors along x-and y-directions, = 8π cos 2 2πt + sin 2 2πt
respectively. Which onee of the following |v| = 8π m/sec
statements is wrong for thee moti
motion of particle? Hence, option (d) is incorrect

Physics 70 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
51. Two stones of masses m and 2 m are whirled in Ans. (b) :
r
horizontal circles, the heavier one in a radius
2
and lighter one in radius r. The tangential
speed of lighter stone is n times that of the
value of heavier stone when they experience
same centripetal forces. The value of n is
oes helLejeW kesâ õJÙeceeve m leLee 2m nw Yeejer helLej keâes
Given, Length of the string r = 1m
r/2 ef$epÙee kesâ leLee nukesâ helLej keâes r ef$epÙee kesâ
No. of revolution = 22
Je=òeekeâej #eweflepe heLe ceW IegceeÙee peelee nw~ peye Ùes helLej
Time = 44 sec
Skeâ meceeve DeefYekesâvõerÙe yeue keâe DevegYeJe keâjles nQ leye 2
nukesâ helLej keâes jsKeerÙe Jesie Oeejer helLej jsKeerÙe Jesie keâe Radial acceleration a = rω2 = r  2πn  = r 4π 2n
2 2

n iegvee nw~ n keâe ceeve nw~  t  t

1× 4 × π2 × ( 22 )
2
(a) 1 (b) 2
= = π2 m / s 2
( 44 )
2
(c) 3 (d) 4
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
This acceleration is directed along radius of circle
Ans. (b) : Centripetal force is same on both sides as towards center of circle.
given,
• Tangential acceleration is zero in this case.
( nv2 )2 2mv22 53. The circular motion of a particle with constant
So m =
r r speed is-
2
n2 = 4 efkeâmeer keâCe keâer DeÛej Ûeeue mes Je=òeerÙe Ûeeueve7
n=2 (a) Periodic and simple harmonic/ DeeJeleea Deewj mejue

52. A stone tied to the end of a string of 1 m long is

DeheJele&keâ nes mekeâlee nw~
whirled in a horizontal circle with a constant (b) Simple harmonic but not periodic/
speed. If the stone makes 22 revolution in 44 mejue DeeJele&keâ lees nes mekeâlee nw hejvleg DeeJeleea veneR
seconds, what is the magnitude and direction of (c) Neither periodic nor simple harmonic/ ve
acceleration of the stone-
DeeJeleea ve mejue DeeJele&keâ nesiee
Skeâ helLej Skeâ ceeršj uecyeer [esjer kesâ efmejs hej yeOee nw~
(d) Periodic but not simple harmonic/DeeJeleea lees nes
otmejs efmejs keâes kesâvõ ceeve keâj helLej keâes Skeâ #eweflepe
mekeâlee nw hejvleg mejue DeeJele&keâ veneR nes mekeâlee~
efoMee kesâ Je=òe ceW efmLej ieefle mes IegceeÙee pee jne nw~ Ùeefo
AIPMT-2005
Ùen helLej 44 meskesâC[ ceW 22 Ûekeäkeâj keâešlee nes lees
Ans. (d) : The circular motion of a particle with
helLej kesâ lJejCe keâe heefjceeCe Deewj efoMee keäÙee nesieW :- constant speed is periodic but not simple harmonic
(a) π2ms–2 and direction along the tangent to the motion as it is not to and fro motion about a fixed
circle/π2ms–2; Je=òe keâer mheMe& jsKee kesâ meeLe~ point.
(b) π2ms–2 and direction along the radius
towards the centre/π2ms–2;ef$epÙee kesâ meeLe
kesâvõcegKeer~
π2
(c) ms–2 and direction along the radius
4
π2
towards the centre./ ms–2; ef$epÙee kesâ meeLe Also we can see from fig. centripetal acceleration is at
4
90o from velocity/displacement vector.
kesâvõcegKeer~
For a motion to be SHM
(d) π2ms–2 and direction along the radius away
ac ∝ – x
from the centre/ π2ms–2; ef$epÙee kesâ meeLe kesâvõ
i.e. acceleration should be at 180o from displacement
efJecegKeer~ vector.
AIPMT-2005 Hence the motion is periodic/repeated but no SHM.

Physics 71 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
54. A particle of mass m is tied to a string of length 56. Which one of the following statements is true?
l and whirled into a horizontal plane. If tension efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw?
in the string is T then the speed of the particle (a) A scalar quantity is the one that is conserved
will be/Skeâ m õJÙeceeve kesâ keâCe keâes l uecyeeF& keâer in a process./DeefoMe jeefMe Jen nesleer nw pees efkeâmeer
jmmeer mes yeebOekeâj #eweflepe leue ceW IegceeÙee peelee nw Ùeefo Øeef›eâÙee ceW mebjef#ele jnleer nw~
jmmeer ceW leveeJe T nes lees keâCe keâer Ûeeue nesieer– (b) A scalar quantity is the one that can never
take negative values./DeefoMe jeefMe Jen nesleer nw
Tℓ 2Tℓ
(a) (b) efpemekeâe ceeve keâoeefhe $e+Ceelcekeâ veneR nes mekeâlee~
m m
(c) A scalar quantity is the one that does not vary
3Tℓ T from one point to another in space./DeefoMe jeefMe
(c) (d)
m mℓ Jen nesleer nw efpemekeâe ceeve Skeâ efyebog mes otmejs efyebog hej
AIPMT-1998 veneR yeouelee~
Ans. (a) : (d) A scalar quantity has the same value for
observers with different orientation of the
axes./DeefoMe jeefMe keâe ceeve De#eeW kesâ efJeefYevve efJevÙeemeeW
ceW efmLele Øes#ekeâeW kesâ efueS meceeve neslee nw~
Ans. (d): Scalar quantity is defined only by its
magnitude and doesn't depend on any direction.
Centripetal force is Hence it has the same value for observers with different
mv 2 orientations of the axes.
Fc = 57. Figure shows the orientation of two vectors u
r
R
r r
Hence, and v in the XY plane. If u = aiˆ + bjˆ and
r
mv 2 v = piˆ + qjˆ . Which of the following is correct?
∴ T= r r
l XY leue ceW oes meefoMeeW u SJeb v kesâ efJevÙeeme oMee&S

v=
Tℓ ieS nQ~ Ùeefo ur = aiˆ + bjˆ Deewj vr = piˆ + qjˆ
m lees efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve mener nw?

3.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems

r r
55. The angle between A = ˆi + ˆj and B = ˆi – ˆj is
r r
A = ˆi + ˆj leLee B = ˆi – ˆj kesâ yeerÛe keâesCe nw–
(a) 45° (b) 90° (a) a and p are positive while b and q are
(c) –45° (d) 180° negative./a SJeb p Oeveelcekeâ nQ peyeefkeâ b Deewj q
r r
Ans. (b) : Given, A = ˆi + ˆj , B = ˆi – ˆj $e+Ceelcekeâ nQ~
r r r r (b) a, p and b are positive while q is negative./a, p
We know that A.B =| A || B | cos θ
r r Deewj b Oeveelcekeâ nQ peyeefkeâ q $e+Ceelcekeâ nw~
A.B (c) a, q and b are positive while p is negative./a, q
cos θ = r r
| A || B | Deewj b Oeveelcekeâ nQ peyeefkeâ p $e+Ceelcekeâ nw~
(iˆ + ˆj).(iˆ – ˆj) (d) a, b, p and q are all positive./a, b, p Deewj q meYeer
⇒ cos θ = Oeveelcekeâ nQ~
1+1 1+1
r r
1–1 Ans. (b) : Given, u = aiˆ + bjˆ and v = piˆ + qjˆ
⇒ cos θ =
2. 2
0
⇒ cos θ =
2
⇒cosθ = 0
⇒cosθ = cos900
⇒ θ = 900

Physics 72 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Clearly from the diagram, As u is in the first quadrant, u 2 sin(2 × 150 )
have both components a and b will be positive. For v, as R = 50m =
9.8
it is in positive X – direction p will be positive and Y – ⇒ u2sin300 = 50 × 9.8
component q will be negative.
⇒ u2 = 50 × 9.8 × 2
Hence, a p and b are positive while q is negative.
⇒ u2 = 980m/s
58. The component of a vector r along x-axis will
have maximum value if Now, the horizontal Range for θ = 450
efkeâmeer meefoMe r kesâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe Ieškeâ keâe ceeve R = u 2 sin 2θ
DeefOekeâlece nesiee Ùeefo g
(a) r is along positive y-axis 980 × sin 900
R=
r Oeveelcekeâ Y-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe nw~ 9.8
(b) r is along positive x-axis 980 × 1
R=
r Oeveelcekeâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe nw~ 9.8
(c) r makes an angle of 45° with the x– axis R = 100m.
r, X-De#e mes 45° keâe keâesCe yeveelee nw~ 60. Consider the quantities pressure, power,
(d) r is along negative y-axis energy, impulse, gravitational potential,
r $e+Ceelcekeâ Y-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe nw~ electrical charge, temperature, area. Out of
Ans. (b) : these, the only vector quantities are
jeefMeÙeeW oeye, Meefkeäle, Tpee&, DeeJesie, ieg®lJeerÙe efJeYeJe,
efJeÅegle DeeJesMe, leehe Deewj #es$eheâue hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~
FveceW kesâJeue meefoMe jeefMeÙeeB nQ–
(a) Impulse, pressure and area
DeeJesie, oeye Deewj #es$eheâue
(b) Impulse and area
DeeJesie Deewj #es$eheâue
Component of r along x-axis is r cosθ
(c) Area and gravitational potential
r cosθ will be maximum if θ is minimum.
That is cosθ = 1
#es$eheâue Deewj ieg®lJeerÙe efJeYeJe
θ = 00 (d) Impulse and pressure
i.e, r is along positive x-axis. DeeJesie Deewj oeye
59. The horizontal range of a projectile fired at an Ans. (b) : Impulse: The change in momentum is called
angle of 15° is 50 m. If it is fired with the same impulse.
speed at an angle of 45°, its range will be/15º
J = ∆P = change in momentum
keâesCe hej Øe#esefhele efkeâmeer Øe#eshÙe keâe #eweflepe hejeme 50m
nw~ Ùeefo Fmes 45º kesâ keâesCe hej meceeve Ûeeue mes Øe#esefhele We know that
efkeâÙee peeS lees Fmekeâe hejeme nesiee– P = mv
(a) 60 m As the momentum is a vector quantity so the change in
(b) 71 m momentum is also a vector quantity. Hence, impulse
(c) 100 m will also a vector quantity.
(d) 141 m Area is also a vector quantity.
Ans. (c) : Given; 61. In a two dimensional motion, instantaneous
Angle of projection, θ = 150 speed v0 is a positive constant. Then which of
Horizontal range, R = 50m the following are necessarily true?/efkeâmeer
u 2 sin 2θ efÉefJeceerÙe ieefle ceW leel#eefCekeâ Ûeeue v0 Skeâ Oeveelcekeâ
QHorizontal range (R) =
g efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ leye efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve
By putting the values in the above relation, we get. DeefveJeeÙe&le: melÙe nw?
Physics 73 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) The average velocity is not zero at any time.
r r r r r
(b) (A × B).C is not zero unless B , C are parallel/
Deewmele Jesie efkeâmeer Yeer meceÙe MetvÙe veneR nesiee~ r r r
(A × B).C MetvÙe veneR neslee peye lekeâ B, C meceeblej ve
(b) Average acceleration must always vanish.
Deewmele lJejCe meowJe MetvÙe nesvee ÛeeefnS~ neW~
r r r r r r
(c) Displacements in equal time intervals are (c) If A , B , C define a plane, (A × B)×C is in
equal. that plane.
meceeve meceÙe Deblejeue ceW ngS efJemLeeheve meceeve nesles nQ~ Ùeefo A, B, C efkeâmeer leue keâes heefjYeeef<ele keâjW lees
(d) Equal path lengths are traversed in equal (AB)C Gme leue ceW nesiee~
intervals. r r r r r r
meceeve meceÙe DeblejeueeW ceW meceeve heLe otefjÙeeB leÙe keâer (d) (A× B).C =| A || B || C |→ C2 = A2 + B2.
r r r
peeleer nQ~ Ans. (c) : Option (a) : (A × B) × C is not zero unless
r r
Ans. (d) : B,C are parallel hence option (a) is true.
∆S Path traveled r r r
Instantaneous speed (v) = = Option (b) : (A × B).C is zero when vector is
∆t time travel
perpendicular.
Given that instantaneous speed is +ve constant. r r r
Therefore, Option (c) : The sum of A + B + C = 0 the line is in
r r r
∆S ∝ ∆t plane. So, we can't say that (A × B).C is in plane.
Hence, from above eqn, it is clear that equal path lengths Hence option C is false.
are traversed in equal interval of time. ur
Option (d) : C2 = A2 + B2, then angle between A and
62. In a two dimensional motion, instantaneous ur
speed v0 is a positive constant. Then which of Buris 90º. ur ur ur ur ur ur ur ur
the following are necessarily true? ( A × B) .C = ( A Bsin 90º ) .C = A B ( C )
efkeâmeer efÉefJeceerÙe ieefle ceW leel#eefCekeâ Ûeeue v0 keâesF& Hence option (d) is true.
Oeveelcekeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve r r r
64. It is found that | A + B |=| A | . This necessarily
DeefveJeeÙe&leœe melÙe nw? r r r
(a) The acceleration of the particle is zero/keâCe keâe implies/Ùen heeÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ | A + B |=| A |
lJejCe MetvÙe nw DeveefJeeÙe&le: Øeleerle neslee nw efkeâ
(b) The acceleration of the particle is r
(a) B = 0
bounded/keâCe keâe lJejCe heefjyeæ nw~ r r
(b) A , B are antiparallel
(c) The acceleration of the particle is necessarily r r
in the plane of motion./ieefle kesâ leue ceW keâCe keâe A , B Øeefle meceeblej nQ
r r
lJejCe DeeJeMÙekeâ ™he mes neslee nw~ (c) A , B are perpendicular
r r
(d) The particle must be undergoing a uniform A , B uebyeJeled nQ~
circular motion/keâCe keâes Skeâ meceeve ieesueekeâej ieefle r r
mes iegpejvee ÛeeefnS~ (d) A . B< 0
Ans. (c) : The motion in two dimensional and given that Ans. (a) : Given;
r r r
instantaneous speed vo is positive constant. Acceleration | A + B |=| A |
is defined as rate of change of velocity (instantaneous r r r r r r
speed). Hence, it will also be in the plane of motion. Since | A + B |= | A |2 + | B |2 +2 | A || B | cosθ
So option (c) is true. r r r r r
r r r | A |2 + | B |2 +2 | A || B | cosθ =| A |
63. Three vectors A , B and C add up to zero. r r r r r
r r r
Find which is false./leerve meefoMeeW A , B SJeb C keâe | A |2 + | B |2 +2 | A || B | cosθ =| A |2
Ùeesie MetvÙe nw~ efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve DemelÙe r r r
| B | ( B + 2 | A | cosθ) = 0
nw? B = −2 A cos θ
r r r r r
(a) (A × B)×C is not zero unless B , C are r
This implies ∴ | B |= 0
parallel./ ur
r r r It mean B will have zero magnitude and have no
(A × B)×C MetvÙe veneR neslee peye lekeâ B, C meceeblej ve
direction.
neW~
Physics 74 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
4.
Laws of Motion
Mo
2. In the diagram shown,, the normal reaction
force between 2 kg and 1 kg is (Consider the
4.1 Newton's Law of Mo
Motion surface, to be smooth):
Given g = 10 ms–2
1. A football player is moving
ving southward and
oMee&Ùes ngS efÛe$e ceW, 2 kg SJeb 1 kg k kesâ yeerÛe DeefYeuecye
suddenly turns eastward with the same speed
to avoid an opponent. The force that acts on the Øeefleef›eâÙee yeue nw: (ceevee leue efÛekeâvee
ek nw) efoÙee nw g =
player while turning is : 10 ms–2
Skeâ Hegâšyee@ue keâe efKeueeÌ[er oef#eCeCe efoMee keâer Deesj oewÌ[
jne nw Deewj efJejesOeer mes yeÛeves kesâ efueeS DeÛeevekeâ meceeve
Ûeeue mes hetjye keâer Deesj cegÌ[lee nw~ efKeu
eueeÌ[er hej Deejesefhele
yeue peye Jen cegÌ[lee nw, nesiee :
(a) along south-West/ oef#eCe-heefMÛÛece keâer Deesj
(b) along eastward/ hetjye keâer Deeseesj
(a) 25 N (b) 39 N
(c) along northward / Gòej keâerr Deesj (c) 6 N (d) 10 N
(d) along north-east/ Gòej-hetjye keâer Deesj NEET (UG)
G) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
EET ((UG)-07.05.2023 Ans. (a) :
NEET
Ans. (d) : Method-1
Player moves towards south and then tu turn towards east
with the same speed. The force that hat ac
acts on the player
while turning is along north-east st due to centripetal
force.
Centripetal force : It is the force acting on the object in
curvilinear motion directed towards ds the axis of rotation
or centre of curvature. Considering all the masses together
ther the
th net mass is
Method-2 m = 3 + 2 + 1 = 6 kg
Balancing the net force along the inclined
in plane and
applying Pseudo force. We get,
F1 – F2 – mg sin 30º = ma
where a is acceleration of equivalent
alent 6 kg mass.
⇒ 60 – 18 – mg sin 30º = ma
1
⇒ 60 – 18 – 6 × 10 × = 6 × a
2
12
Force act on the player is – ⇒ a= = 2 m/s2
6
∆v
F=m Now, F.B.D. of 1 kg mass (end mass has been
∆t considered to avoid complex calculati
lculation),
∆v = v f − v i

( )
= viˆ − − vjˆ

= v ( iˆ + ˆj)
The direction of force is in same directi
direction of change of
velocity. Hence, the direction of force
orce ac
acts on the player
while turning is along north-east.

Physics 75 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Similarly balancing the 1 kg mass along inclined plane
we get
N – 18 – m1g sin 30º = m1a
1
⇒ N – 18 – 10 × =1×2
2
⇒ N = 25 N
3. A small block slides down on a smooth inclined (a) g/2 (b) g/5
plane, starting from rest at time t = 0. Let Sn be (c) g/10 (d) g
the distance travelled by the block in the NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Sn Ans. (b) : Force balancing equation for 4 kg block is -
interval t = n – 1 to t = n. Then the ratio
S n+1 T - 4g = 4a
is T = 4(a+g)
efJejeceeJemLee (t = 0) mes Skeâ Úesše yuee@keâ efÛekeâves
velemeceleue mes veerÛes keâer Deesj efKemekeâlee nw~ Ùeefo
Devlejeue t = n – 1 mes t = n kesâ yeerÛe yuee@keâ Éeje Ûeueer
Sn
ieÙeer otjer Sn nes, lees keâe Devegheele neslee nw :
S n+1
on other hand, expression for 6 kg block is-
2n 2n − 1
(a) (b)
2n − 1 2n
2n − 1 2n + 1
(c) (d)
2n +1 2n − 1
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Ans. (c) : 6g - T = 6a
Substitute the value of T in above expression .
6g - 4 (a+g) = 6a
2g -4a = 6a
g
a=
5
Acceleration along an inclined plane is g sin θ 5. When an object is shot from the bottom of a long
smooth inclined plane kept at an angle 60° with
a
Sn = u + ( 2n − 1) horizontal, it can travel a distance x1 along the
2 plane. But when the inclination is decreased to
gsin θ 30° and the same object is shot with the same
Sn = 0 + ( 2n − 1) (∵ u = 0) velocity, it can travel x2 distance. Then x1 : x2 will
2
be:/peye #eweflepe mes 60° keâesCe hej jKes efkeâmeer uecyes efÛekeâves
gsin θ gsin θ
Sn +1 = 0 + [2 ( n + 1) − 1] = ( 2n + 1) Deevele leue keâer leueer mes efkeâmeer efheC[ hej Meeš ueieeÙee peelee
2 2 nw, lees Jen leue kesâ DevegefoMe x1 otjer Ûeue mekeâlee nw~ hejvleg
peye PegkeâeJe keâes Iešekeâj 30° keâj efoÙee peelee nw leLee Fmeer
Sn g sin θ ( 2n − 1) 2 efheC[ hej meceeve Jesie mes Meeš ueieeÙee peelee nw, leye Jen x2
= ×
Sn +1 2 g sin θ ( 2n + 1) otjer Ûeue mekeâlee nw~ leye x1 : x2 nesiee~
Sn 2n – 1 (a) 2 :1 (b) 1: 3
=
Sn + 1 2n + 1 (c) 1: 2 3 (d) 1: 2
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
4. Two bodies of mass 4 kg and 6 kg are tied to
the ends of a massless string. The string passes Ans. (b) :
over a pulley which is frictionless (see figure).
The acceleration of the system in terms of
acceleration due to gravity (g) is :
4 kg Deewj 6 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ oes efheC[eW kesâ efmejeW keâes
efkeâmeer õJÙeceevejefnle [esjer mes yeebOee ieÙee nw~ Ùen [esjer
efkeâmeer Ie<e&Cejefnle efIejveer mes iegpejleer nQ (DeejsKe
osefKeS)~ ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe (g) kesâ heoeW ceW Fme efvekeâeÙe
keâe lJejCe nw:
Physics 76 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Using third equation of motion, As the elevator is moving at uniform speed so its
v2 = u2 – 2gh acceleration is zero, so no pseudo force. Thus it can not
As the object stops finally, so v = 0 affect the motion of the coin. Thus in both case the coin
takes the same time i.e.
For inclined motion, t1 = t2
g = gsinθ and h = x 7. A body initially at rest and sliding along a
Now u2 = 2gsinθx frictionless track from a height h (as shown in
u2 the figure) just completes a vertical circle of
x= diameter AB = D. The height h is equal to /
2g sin θ DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej TBÛeeF& h mes Ie<e&Cejefnle heLe
u2 kesâ DevegefoMe efJejece DeJemLee mes mejkeâves Jeeuee keâesF&
For case (I) x1 =
2gsin 60o efheC[, JÙeeme AB = D keâe Skeâ TOJee&Oej Je=òe hetje
keâjlee nw~ leye TBÛeeF& h nesieer-
u2
For case (II) x2 =
2gsin 30o
x1 u 2 / 2g sin 60o
=
x 2 u 2 / 2g sin 30o
u2 2g sin 30º
= × 3
2g sin 60º u2 (a) D (b) D
2
sin 30º 5 7
= (c) D D
(d)
sin 60º 4 5
1 2 NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
= × or 1: 3
2 3 Ans. (c) : According to the conservation of mechanical
energy.
6. A person standing on the floor of an elevator
(TE)initial = (TE)final
drops a coin. The coin reaches the floor in time
(KE)i + (PE)i = (KE)f + (PE)f
t1 if the elevator is at rest and in time t2 if the
1
elevator is moving uniformly. Then 0 + mgh = mv2A + 0
efueheäš kesâ heâMe& hej KeÌ[e keâesF& JÙeefòeâ keâesF& efmekeäkeâe 2
2
efiejelee nw~ Ùeefo efueheäš efJejece ceW nw lees Ùen efmekeäkeâe heâMe& v
gh = A
hej meceÙe t1 ceW hengBÛelee nw Deewj Ùeefo efueheäš Skeâmeceeve 2
2
ieefle ceW nw lees t2 meceÙe ceW hengBÛelee nw~ leye– v
h = A ... ( i )
(a) t1 = t2 2g
(b) t1 < t2 or t1 > t2 depending upon whether the In order to complete the vertical circle, the velocity of
lift is going up or down the body at point A should be
t1 < t2 DeLeJee t1 > t2 Ùen efveYe&j keâjlee nw efkeâ efueheäš VA = Vmin = 5gR
Thej pee jner nw DeLeJee veerÛes~ Where, R is the radius of the body.
(c) t1 < t2 AB D
Here, R = =
(d) t1 > t2 2 2
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
5
Ans. (a) : ⇒ Vmin = VA = gD
2
Substituting the value of VA in equation (i), we get
2
 5 
  gD  
2 
h=
2g
5gD 5
= = D
2 × 2g 4
5
h= D
4

Physics 77 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth
(a)
( m 2 − µ k m1 ) g (b)
m1m 2 (1 + µ k ) g
inclined wedge ABC of inclination θ as shown
in the figure. The wedge is given an
( m1 + m 2 ) ( m1 + m 2 )
acceleration 'a' towards the right. The relation m1m 2 (1 − µ k ) g ( m 2 + µ k m1 ) g
between a and θ for the block to remain (c) (d)
( m1 + m 2 ) ( m1 + m 2 )
stationary on the wedge is / Deevele keâesCe θ kesâ
AIPMT-03.05.2015
efueS efkeâmeer efÛekeâves Deevele leue ABC hej m õJÙeceeve
Ans. (b) : For Block A
keâe keâesF& yuee@keâ efÛe$eevegmeej efmLele nw~ Fme leue keâes oeÙeeR
Deesj keâesF& lJejCe 'a' efoÙee peelee nw~ yuee@keâ keâes leue hej
efmLej jKeves kesâ efueS a Deewj θ kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nesiee

g g
(a) a = (b) a = For Block A
cosec θ sin θ
m1g = N T
(c) a = g tan θ (d) a = g cos θ
& f = µ K N T = µT m1g
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Ans. (c) : T − µ K N = m1a
T– µkm1g = m1a ….(i)
For Block B
m 2g − T = m2 a …..(ii)
( m2 −µKm1 ) g = ( m1 + m2 ) a
∴a =
( m2 − µK m1 ) g
m1 + m 2
Non inertial frame of reference are accelerated that is
wedge. Now using (ii)
Pseudo force acts in the opposite direction of T = m2g − m2 a
acceleration of frame. = m2 ( g − a )
Pseudo force = ma
Balancing the net force in the direction of motion -  ( m − µ K m1 ) g 
= m2  g − 2
N sin θ = ma ............... (i) 
 m1 + m 2 
N cos θ = mg ............... (ii)
dividing equation (i) by (ii),  m g + m 2 g − m 2 g + µ K m1g 
= m2  1 
⇒ tan θ = a/g  m1 + m 2 
⇒ a = g tanθ m2 ( m1g + µ K m1g )
9. A block A of mass m1 rests on a horizontal = m1 + m2
table. A light string connected to it passes over
a frictionless pulley at the edge of table and m m (1 + µ K ) g
from its other end another block B of mass m2 T= 1 2
is suspended. The coefficient of kinetic friction m1 + m 2
between the block and the table is µk . When 10. Three blocks A, B and C of masses 4 kg, 2 kg
the block A is sliding on the table, the tension and 1 kg respectively, are in contact on a
in the string is:/Skeâ iegškesâ (yuee@keâ) 'A' keâe frictionless surface, as shown. If a force of 14 N
õJÙeceeve m1 nw~ Ùen Skeâ #eweflepe cespe hej jKee nw~ Fme is applied on the 4 kg block, then the contact
cespe kesâ efkeâveejs hej Skeâ Ie<e&Cenerve efIejveer ueieer nw, force between A and B is:/leerve iegškesâ (yuee@keâ) A,
efpemekesâ Thej mes iegpejleer ngF& nukeâer [esjer (jmmeer) keâe B leLee C DeejsKe ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes Devegmeej, Skeâ-otmejs kesâ
Skeâ efmeje 'A' mes pegÌ[e nw~ [esjer kesâ otmejs efmejs mes m2 mecheke&â ceW nQ~ FvnW Skeâ Ie<e&Ce jefnle he=‰ (melen) hej
õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ DevÙe yuee@keâ B ueškeâe nw~ yuee@keâ jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo iegškeâeW kesâ õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: 4kg,
(iegškesâ) leLee cespe kesâ yeerÛe ieeflepe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ µk nw~ 2kg leLee 1kg nQ Deewj 4kg kesâ iegškesâ (A) hej 14N keâe
lees, cespe hej yuee@keâ (iegškeâe) 'A' efheâmeueles meceÙe [esjer yeue ueieeÙee ieÙee nw lees, A leLee B kesâ yeerÛe mecheke&â yeue
ceW leveeJe keâe ceeve nesiee:- nesiee:
Physics 78 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c):

(a) 6 N (b) 8 N
(c) 18 N (d) 2 N
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (a) : Given, Mass of body A mA = 4Kg
Mass of body B m B = 2Kg
Mass of body C m C = 1Kg
Force of friction on mass, m2 = µm2g
Force of friction on mass, m3 = µm3g
Let a be common acceleration of the system.
So, total mass (M) = 4+2+1= 7 Kg m g − µm 2 g − µm3 g Net force
∴ a= 1 =
Using Newton's second law of motion F = Ma m1 + m 2 + m3 total mass of system
14 = 7×a ⇒ a = 2m / s2 Here, m1 = m2 = m3 = m
Now, free body diagram of block A mg − µmg − µmg mg − 2µmg
∴ a= =
m+m+m 3m
g (1 − 2µ )
a=
F − F ' = 4a 3
14 − F' = 4 × 2 Hence, the downward acceleration of mass (m1) is
F ' = 14 − 8 g (1 − 2µ )
F' = 6 N 3
12. A balloon with mass 'm' is descending down
11. A System consists of three masses m1, m2 and
with an acceleration 'a' (where a < g). How
m3 connected by a string passing over a pulley
much mass should be removed from it so that
P. The mass m1 hangs freely and m2 and m3 are
it starts moving up with an acceleration 'a'?
on a rough horizontal table (the coefficient of
'm' õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ yewuetve (iegyyeeje) 'a' lJejCe mes
friction =µ). The pulley is frictionless and of
negligible mass. The downward acceleration of veerÛes Glej jne nw (peneB a < g)~ FmeceW mes efkeâleves
mass m1 is: (Assume m1=m2=m3=m) õJÙeceeve keâe heoeLe& nše efoÙee peeÙes efkeâ Ùen 'a' lJejCe
ÙeneB oMee&Ùes ieÙes efvekeâeÙe ceW leerve efheb[ m1, m2 Deewj m3 mes Thej keâer Deesj peeves ueies?
Skeâ jmmeer mes pegÌ[s nQ pees Skeâ efIejveer P kesâ Thej neskeâj 2ma 2ma
(a) (b)
iegpejleer nQ m1 cegòeâ ™he mes ueškeâe nw Deewj m2 leLee m3 g+a g−a
Skeâ ™#e #eweflepe cespe hej nQ, efpemekeâe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ µ ma ma
nw~ efIejveer Ie<e&Ce jefnle nw Deewj Fmekeâe õJÙeceeve veieCÙe nw~ (c) (d)
g+a g−a
Ùeefo lJejCe m1=m2=m3=m nw lees m1 keâe DeOeescegKeer AIPMT-06.05.2014
(veerÛes keâer Deesj) lJejCe nesiee: Ans. (a) : Let 'F' be the up thrust force of the air.
As, the balloon is descending down with an acceleration
(a)
∴ mg – F = ma ...... (i)

g(1 − 2µ) 2gµ

(a) (b)
9 3
g(1 − 2µ) g(1 − 2µ)
(c) (d)
3 2 Let mass 'm0' be removed from the balloon so that it
AIPMT-06.05.2014 starts moving up with an acceleration a.
Physics 79 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Then, F – (m–m0)g = (m – m0)a 14. A person of mass 60 kg is insideins a lift of mass
F – mg + m0g = ma – m0a ...... ((ii) 940 kg and presses the buttonutton on control panel.
Adding eqn. (i) and eqn. (ii) we get The lift starts moving g upwards
up with an
m0g = 2ma – m0a acceleration 1.0 m/s2. If g = 10 ms–2, the tension
in the supporting cable is :
m0g + m0a = 2ma
m0(g+a) = 2ma
Skeâ JÙeefòeâ keâe õJÙeceeve 60 kg nw~ Ùen 940 kg
2ma õJÙeceeve kesâ efueHeäš ceW KeÌ[e neskeâj e efueHeäš keâe yešve
m0 = oyeelee nw, efpememes efueHeäš 1.0 .0 m/s2 kesâ lJejCe mes Thej
( + g)
a
keâer Deesj ieefle keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo g = 10 1 ms–2 nes, lees Gme
13. Three blocks with massess m, 22m and 3m are
kesâyeue ceW, efpememes efueHeäš ueškeâerâer jnleer
jn nw, leveeJe nesiee :
connected by strings, as shown in the figure.
After an upward force F is appl applied on block m, (a) 1200 N (b) 8600 N
the masses move upward at co constant speed v. (c) 9680 N (d) 11000 N
What is the net force on the he blo
block of mass 2m? AIPMT
IPMT (Screening)-2011
leerve yuee@keâeW (iegškeâeW) kesâ õJÙeceev
eceeve ›eâceMe: m, 2m Ans. (d) : The tension in the string
ing is given
g as-
leLee 3m nQ, Ùes DeejsKe (efÛe$e) ceW ooMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej T = m (g + a)
[esefjÙeeW mes pegÌ[s nQ~ m yuee@keâ hej Th
Thej keâer Deesj F yeue
ueieeves hej, meYeer iegškesâ Skeâ efmLej
ej JJesie v mes, Thej keâer
Deesj ieefle keâjles nw~ 2m õJÙeceeve kesâ yyuee@keâ hej vesš yeue
efkeâlevee nw? (g ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe nw)

Where, m = mass of total weightt and a = acceleration of

lift moving upward and M = mass ss of lift.
l
Given-
M = 940 kg ,m = 60 kg , a =1 m/s2 , g = 10m/s2
(a) 6 mg (b) zero Balancing the tension-
(c) 2 mg (d) 3 m
mg T - (M+m)g = (M+m)a
EET ((UG)-05.05.2013 ⇒ T – 60g – 940g = (m + M)a
NEET
Ans. (b) : ⇒ T – 1000g = (60 + 940)a
⇒ T = 1000(a + g)
v T = 1000(1 + 10) = 11000 00 N
15. The mass of lift is 2000 kg. When W the tension in
the supporting cable is 28000 28 N, then its
acceleration is:/Skeâ efueheäš keâe õJÙeceeve
õ 2000 efkeâ«ee
nw~ peye Fmes ueškeâeves Jeeueer kesâyeue keâe leveeJe 28000 N
nesiee, leye Fmekeâe lJejCe nesiee:
(a) 14 ms–2 upwards/Thej keâes
(b) 30 ms–2 downwards/veerÛes keâes keâe
v = constant (c) 4 ms upwards/Thej keâes
–2

m = mass (d) 4 ms–2 downwards/veerÛes keâes

F = Force AIMPT-2009
v = Velocity Ans. (c) :
v−u
acceleration, a =
t
[Q v = u]
T
v−v
a= =0
t a
Force, F = m × a
F=m×0
F=0 weight MLg

Physics 80 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Given mass of lift ML = 20,00 kg Ans. (c):
Tension in cable T = 28,000 N
Weight of lift = MLg = 2000 × 10
By Newton’s second law of motion
ΣF = ma
T – MLg = MLa
28000 – 20,000 = 2000 a
8000 = 2000 a Given,
a = 4 m/s2 (upward) Mass = m
16. 300 J of work is done in sliding a 2 kg block up Angle = θ
an inclined plane of height 10m. Taking g = 10 So, along the inclined plane.
m/s2, work done against friction is ma cosθ = mg sinθ
2 kg kesâ Skeâ yuee@keâ keâes Skeâ 10 m TBÛes Deevele leue hej mg sin θ
a=
KeeRÛeves ceW 300 J keâeÙe& keâjvee heÌ[lee nw~ g keâes 10 m/s 2
m cos θ
ceeveles ngS Ie<e&Ce kesâ efJe™æ efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee:- a = g tanθ
(a) 200 J (b) 100 J The normal force by wedge on the block is
(c) Zero (d) 1000 J N = mg cosθ + ma sinθ
AIPMT-2006 = mg cosθ + m(gtan θ) sinθ
Ans. (b) : Given – sin 2 θ
= mg cosθ + mg
Work w = 300 J cos θ
Mass m = 2 kg mg cos 2 θ + mg sin 2 θ
Height h = 10 m =
cos θ
By using work energy theorem w = ∆ KE Q sin θ + cos θ = 1
2 2

mg
N=
cos θ
18. A monkey of mass 20 kg is holding a vertical
rope. The rope will not break when a mass of
25 kg is suspended from it but will break if the
mass exceeds 25 kg. What is the maximum
Work done against friction acceleration with which the monkey can climb
w' = w – mgh up along the rope ? (g = 10 m/s2)
= 300 – 2 × 10 × 10 Skeâ yevoj efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve 20 kg nw, Skeâ TOJee&Oej
= 100 J ueškeâleer jmmeer keâes hekeâÌ[s ngS nQ~ Ùeefo jmmeer mes 25 kg
17. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth wedge keâe Yeej ueškeâeÙee peeS lee jmmeer veneR štšleer, uesefkeâve
of inclination θ. The whole system is Yeej 25 kg mes DeefOekeâ yeÌ{eves hej jmmeer štš peeSieer~
accelerated horizontally so that the block does efkeâveles DeefOekeâlece lJejCe mes yevoj jmmeer hej ÛeÌ{ mekeâlee
not slip on the wedge. The force exerted by the
wedge on the block (g is acceleration due to
nw, efkeâ jmmeer ve štšs? (g = 10 m/s2)
gravity) will be:/m õJÙeceeve kesâ Skeâ yuee@keâ keâes (a) 5 m/s2 (b) 10 m/s2
(c) 25 m/s2 (d) 2.5 m/s2
veeflekeâesCe θ kesâ Skeâ Ie<e&Ce efJecegòeâ heâeve hej efmLele efkeâÙee
AIPMT-2003
ieÙee nw~ Fme hetCe& efvekeâeÙe keâes #eweflepe efoMee ceW Fme Øekeâej Ans. (d):
lJeefjle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ yuee@keâ heâeve mes ve efKemekesâ~
heâeve kesâ yuee@keâ hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer yeue keâe ceeve nesiee (g
ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe nw):-
(a) mg sin θ (b) mg
mg Mass of monkey, m = 20 kg
(c) (d) mg cosθ
cos θ Breaking force required T = 25×10
AIPMT-2004 = 250 N
Physics 81 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Equation of motion, The tension developed in string is given give as -
ma = T – mg T = mg + ma
20×a = 250 – 200 = 1000×9.8 + 1000×1
50 = 10800 N
a= ∴ Tension developed in string iss 10800 1080 N.
20
21. 250 N force is required d to raise
r 75 kg mass
a = 2.5 m / s 2 from a pulley. If rope iss pulled pull 12 m then the
19. A man weighs 80 kg, he stands on a weighing load is lifted to 3m, the he efficiency
eff of pulley
scale in a lift which is moving ving u
upwards with a system will be : -
uniform acceleration of 5m/s2. What would be 75 kg kesâ õJÙeceeve keâes efIejveer mes G"eves
G kesâ efueS 250 N
the reading on the scale? (gg = 10 m/s2) kesâ yeue keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesleerer nw Ùeefo Yeej keâes G"eves
Skeâ JÙeefòeâ efpemekeâe Yeej 80 kg nww, efueHeäš kesâ Deboj Skeâ kesâ efueS jmmeer keâe KeeRÛevee heÌ[lee nwn, lees efIejveer-efvekeâeÙe
Yeej ceeheves keâer ceMeerve kesâ Thej KeÌ[e nw~ efueHeäš 5m/s2 keâer o#elee nesieer-
kesâ Skeâmeceeve lJejCe mes Thej pee jne
jner nw~ ceMeerve Gmekeâe (a) 25% (b) 33.3%
Yeej efkeâlevee yeleeSieer? (g = 10 m/s2) (c) 75% (d) 90%
(a) Zero (b) 400 N AIPMT-2001
(c) 800 N (d) 120
1200 N Ans. (c) : Load (W) = Mg = 75×10
10 = 750 N
AIPMT-2003 Effort (p) given = 250 N
Ans. (d): Output work
Efficiency =
Input work
F2 × d 2 m × g × d 2
= =
F1 × d1 F1 × d1
75 × 10 × 3
=
Given data- 250 × 12
Mass of man, m = 80 kg η = 75%
wards, a = 5 m/s2
Acceleration of the lift moving upwards,
22. Two masses as shown are suspended
s from a
Acceleration due to gravity g = 10 m/s2
massless pulley. Calculate
ate the
th acceleration of
Normal reaction acting on the man woul
would be the reading
the system when masses are left
le free:
on the scale-
Skeâ õJÙeceeve jefnle efIejveer mess oes õJÙeceeve efÛe$eevegmeej
N = ma + mg
= 80×5 + 80×10
ueškesâ ngS nQ~ peye õJÙeceeveeW keâes ÚesÌ[les nQ lees efvekeâeÙe
= 400 + 800 keâe lJejCe nesiee –
N = 1200 Newton
20. A lift of mass 1000 Kg which hich is moving with
acceleration of 1 m/s2 in upward pward direction, then
the tension developed in st string which is
connected to lift is
Skeâ efueHeäš efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve 1000 Kg nw Ùen TOJee&Oej
Thej keâer Deesj 1 m/s2 kesâ lÛejCe Ce mmes ieefleMeerue nw lees (a) 2g/3 (b) g/3
efueHeäš mes pegÌ[er jmmeer ceW leveeJe keâee cee
ceeve nw - (c) g/9 (d) g/7
(a) 9800 N (b) 10, 800 N AIPMT-2000
(c) 11000 N (d) 10, 000 N Ans. (b) :
AIPMT-2002
Ans. (b) : Given-
Mass of lift = 1000 kg
Acceleration = 1m/s2
m
Acceleration due to gravity = 9.8
s2

Physics 82 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
As the string and pulley system is ideal so tension will (c) first law of motion/ieefle keâe henuee efveÙece
be constant throughout the string & thus both blocks (d) all of these laws/Ghejesòeâ meYeer
will move with same acceleration in magnitude.
AIPMT-1991
Suppose tension T & common acceleration is 'a'.
The 10 kg being heavy will move downward. Ans. (c) : First law of motion- Newton's First Law of
motion states that a body will stay at rest or move with
constant velocity unless a resultant external force acts
on it.
The physical independence principle- It states that the
effect of a force on a body is not affected by the
presence of other forces. So even if there are a number
Free body diagram of forces acting on the same body, each force has its
• Net downward force on 10 kg block will be- own influence as other forces were absent. This is the
F = 10g - T characteristic feature of force.
F = ma • Physical independence of force is a consequence of
⇒ 10g - T = 10a ...(i) first law of motion.
Net upward force on 5 kg block will be- 25. A force of 6 N acts on a body at rest and of
F= T - 5g mass 1 kg. During this time, the body attains a
F = ma velocity of 30 m/s. The time for which the force
⇒ T-5g = 5a ...(ii) acts on the body is
adding (i) & (ii) 1 efkeâ«ee õJÙeceeve kesâ Skeâ efheC[ hej efJejeceeJemLee ceW 6
10g – T + T – 5g = 10a + 5a N keâe Skeâ yeue ueieeÙee peelee nw~ Fme DeJeefOe kesâ oewjeve
⇒ 5g = 15a efheC[ 30 m/s keâe Jesie Øeehle keâj ueslee nw~ efheC[ hej
a=
5
g=
g efkeâleves meceÙe kesâ efueS yeue ueieeÙee peelee nw?
15 3 (a) 7 seconds (b) 5 seconds
23. A small ball is suspended from a thread. It is (c) 10 seconds (d) 8 seconds
lifted up with an acceleration 4.9 ms–2 and AIPMT-1997
lowered with an acceleration 4.9 ms–2 then the
Ans. (b) : Given, Force (F) = 6 N
ratio of tensions in the thread in both cases will
be/Skeâ Úesše ieesuee Oeeies mes ueškeâe jKee nw Skeâ yeej Initial velocity (u) = 0
Mass (m) = 1 kg
peye Ùen 4.9 ms kesâ lJejCe mes Thej Je Skeâ yeej 4.9
–2
Final velocity (v) = 30 m/s
ms kesâ lJejCe mes veerÛes Deelee nw lees oesveseb eqmLeefleÙeeW ceW
–2
F 6
leveeJeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee– Therefore, Acceleration (a) = = = 6m /s2
m 1
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
Final velocity (v) = u+at
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 5 30 = 0+6t
AIPMT-1998 30
Ans. (b) : Given, a = 4.9ms–2 in up and lowered in both t=
6
cases.
we have – t = 5 sec.
T1 – mg = ma ⇒ T1 = ma + mg 26. A 10 N force is applied on a body produce in it an
2
T1 = m(a + g) acceleration of 1 m/s . The mass of the body is
T1 = m(g + a) ...(i) efkeâmeer efheC[ hej 10 N yeue ueieeves mes FmeceW 1ceer/mes2
mg – T2 = ma keâe lJejCe GlheVe neslee nw~ efheC[ keâe õJÙeceeve nesiee:
T2 = mg – ma (a) 15 kg (b) 20 kg
T2 = m(g – a) ...(ii) (c) 10 kg (d) 5 kg
The ratio of tensions is– AIPMT-1996
T1 m(g + a) (4.9 + 9.8) 14.7 3 Ans. (c) : Given, F = 10 N
= = = =
T2 m(g − a) (9.8 − 4.9) 4.9 1 a = 1 m/s2
24. Physical independence of force is a F
Acceleration (a) =
consequence of/yeueeW keâer Yeeweflekeâ mJeleb$elee m
efvecveefueefKele keâe heefjCeece nw: 10
1=
(a) third law of motion/ieefle keâe leermeje efveÙece m
(b) second law of motion/ieefle keâe otmeje efveÙece m = 10 kg
Physics 83 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. In a rocket, fuel burns at the rate of 1 kg/s. 600 kg keâe Skeâ je@kesâš TOJee&Oej Øe#esheCe kesâ efueS mesš
This fuel is ejected from the rocket with a efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo efvekeâeme ieefle 1000 m s–1 nw, lees
velocity of 60 km/s. This exerts a force on the
je@kesâš kesâ Jepeve hej keâeyet heeves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ
rocket equal to
Skeâ je@kesâš ceW, FËOeve 1 kg/s keâer oj mes peuelee nw~ Ùen ØeCeeso keâer Deehetefle& kesâ efueS Øeefle meskeâC[ efkeâleveer iewme
FËOeve 60 km/s Jesie mes je@kesâš mes yeenj efvekeâuelee nw~ Ùen Glmeefpe&efle nesieer?
je@kesâš hej Skeâ yeue ueieelee nw pees yejeyej neslee nw: (a) 117.6 kg s–1 (b) 58.6 kg s–1
(c) 6 kg s–1 (d) 76.4 kg s–1
(a) 6000 N (b) 60000 N
AIPMT-1990
(c) 60 N (d) 600 N
AIPMT-1994 Ans. (c) : Given mass of rocket MR = 600 kg
Exhaust speed v = 1000 m/s
Ans. (b) : Overall momentum of the system is
conserved. Therefore change in momentum of the dm
Gas ejected per second =
rocket will be equal to that of the fuel. dt
Change in momentum of the fuel will be ∆mv = 1 60 dp (mv)
We know that, variable mass F = = d
1000 = 60000 kg-m/s dt dt
Hence, change in momentum of the rocket will also be dv dm
∆p = 60000 kg-m/s = m +v
dt dt
∆p
Thrust force F = dm
∆t The thrust on the rocket is given by F = v
dt
F = 60000 N
dm
28. A satellite in force free space sweeps stationary mg = v
dt
interplanetary dust at a rate of dM/dt = αv,
where M is mass and v is the speed of satellite and dm
600 × 10 = 1000
α is a constant. The acceleration of satellite is dt
Skeâ Ghe«en Deblejef#e ceW Devle«e&nerÙe Oetue dM/dt = αv dm
= 6 kg / s
keâer oj mes Skeâ$e keâjlee nw, peneB M õJÙeceeve nw Deewj v dt
Ghe«en keâer ieefle nw Deewj α efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ lees Ghe«en keâe 30. When milk is churned, cream gets separated
lJejCe nesiee: due to
peye oner keâes ceLee peelee nw lees ceueeF& (›eâerce) efkeâme
– αv 2 2
(a) (b) –αv yeue kesâ keâejCe Deueie nes peeleer nw?
2M
(a) centripetal force/DeefYekesâvõer yeue
–2αv 2 – αv 2
(c) (d) (b) centrifugal force/Dehekesâvõer yeue
M M
AIPMT-1994 (c) fricitional force/Ie<e&Ce yeue
Ans. (d) : The force acting on the satellite is given by (d) gravitational force/ieg®lJeerÙe yeue
d AIPMT-1991
F = (Mv)
dt Ans. (b) :
dv dM
= M+v
dt dt
dv
= M + vαv
dt
We know that the net force is zero.
F=0
dv
M = -v ( αv )
dt
dv – αv 2 When milk is churned, the cream is separated from it
=a= due to centrifugal force because this force acts in an
dt M
outwards direction. Due to this outward force, the
29. A 600 kg rocket is set for a vertical firing. If the heavier particles in milk experience more force than the
exhaust speed is 1000 m s–1, the mass of the gas lighter particle. The cream part being heavier, separates
ejected per second to supply the thrust needed from the milk and gets out.
to overcome the weight of rocket is
Physics 84 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
• It is an apparent force that is felt by an object moving Ans. (a) : Given: m = 1kg
in a curved path that acts outward away from the center v = 1m/sec
of rotation. θ = 60º
• Centrifugal force can be calculated by the formula t = 0.1 sec
F = mω2r F=?
31. A monkey is descending from the branch of a
tree with constant acceleration. If the breaking
strength of branch is 75% of the weight of the
monkey, the minimum acceleration with which
monkey can slide down without breaking the
branch is
Skeâ yevoj hesÌ[ keâer MeeKee mes ueškeâles ngS Skeâmeceeve We know that-
∆P
lJejCe mes veerÛes Deelee nw~ Ùeefo yevoj kesâ Yeej keâe 75% F= .........(i)
∆t
Yeej hesÌ[ keâer MeeKee menve keâj mekeâleer nw lees yevoj keâe
∆P = mvcos30º–(– mvcos30º)
vÙetvelece lJejCe keäÙee nesiee efkeâ hesÌ[ keâer MeeKee ve štšs? = 2mv cos30º
(a) g (b) 3g/4
(c) g/4 (d) g/2 3
= 2×1×1×
AIPMT-1993 2
Ans. (c) : Weight of monkey = mg ∆P = 3
Let T be the tension in the branch of a tree when 3
monkey is descending with acceleration a. Equation (i)- F=
0.1
Using Newton's second law-
mg – T = ma ..... (i) F = 10 3N
Given , T = 75% of weight of monkey 33. A bullet of mass m hits a block of mass M
75 elastically. The transfer of energy is the
T= × mg maximum, when
100
3 õJÙeceeve m keâer Skeâ ieesueer õJÙeceeve M kesâ Skeâ yueekeâ
T = mg mes ØelÙeemLÙe ™he mes škeâjeleer nw~ Tpee& keâe mLeeveeblejCe
4
Putting the value of T in equation (i), we get DeefOekeâlece neslee nw, peye
mg – ma = T (a) M << m (b) M >> m

mg – ma = mg
3 (c) M = m (d) M = 2m
4 RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
3 Ans. (c) : When M = m, bullet will transfer whole of its
g–a= g velocity (and 100% of its kinetic energy) to block and
4
will itself come to rest as per theory of collision.
g
a = m/s2 During elastic collision between two bodies exchange
4 of energy is maximum when the two colliding bodies
have equal masses. i.e M =m

4.2 Impulse, Momentum & Collision 34. A shell of mass m is at rest initially. It explodes
into three fragments having mass in the ratio 2
1 : 2 : 1. If the fragments having equal mass fly
32. A 1 kg object strikes a wall with velocity 1 ms- off along mutually perpendicular directions
at an angle of 60º with wall and reflects at the with speed v, the speed of the third (lighter)
same angle. If it remains in contact with wall fragment is/Skeâ m õJÙeceeve keâe ieesuee ØeejefcYekeâ ™he
for 0.1 s, then the force exerted on the wall is
mes efmLele DeJemLee ceW jKee nw, Ùen leerve YeeieeW ceW
Skeâ 1 efkeâ«ee keâer Jemleg oerJeej mes 600 kesâ keâesCe hej
efJemheâesefšle neslee nw, efpevekesâ õJÙeceeveeW keâe Devegheele 2 : 2
1ms-1 kesâ Jesie mes oerJeej mes škeâjeleer nw Deewj Gmeer keâesCe
: 1 nw~ Ùeefo meceeve õJÙeceeve Jeeues Yeeie Skeâ otmejs mes
hej hejeJeefle&le nesleer nw~ Ùeefo Ùen 0.1s lekeâ oerJeej kesâ
uecyeJele efoMeeDeeW ceW v Ûeeue mes peeles nQ, lees leermejs
mebheke&â ceW jnlee nw, lees oerJeej hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue nw;
(nukesâ Jeeues) Yeeie keâer Ûeeue nw:
(a) 10 3 N (b) 20 3 N
(a) 3 2v (b) v
(c) 30 3 N (d) Zero/MetvÙe (c) 2v (d) 2 2v
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Physics 85 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Assertion (A): When a fire cracker (rocket)
explodes in mid air, its fragments fly in such a
way that they continue moving in the same
path, which the fire cracker would have
followed, had if not exploded.
DeefYekeâLeve (A) : peye keâesF& hešeKee (je@kesâš) yeerÛe nJee
ceW hetâšlee nw, lees Fmekesâ šgkeâÌ[s Fme lejn GÌ[les nQ efkeâ Jes
Gmeer meceeve heLe hej ieefle keâjles jnles nQ, efpeme hej hešeKee
henues mes ner Ûeue jne Lee, peye lekeâ Ùen hetâše veneR Lee~
Reason (R): Explosion of cracker (rocket)
2x + 2x + 1x = m
occurs due to internal forces only and no
m
x= external force acts for this explosion.
5 In the light of the above statements, choose the
So, most appropriate answer from the options
2m 2m m given below:
, ,
5 5 5 keâejCe (R) : kesâJeue Deebleefjkeâ yeueeW kesâ Devleie&le ner
Now the third fragment hešeKee hetâšlee nw SJeb Fmekesâ hetâšves kesâ efueS keâesF& yee¢e
m
2
 2mv   2mv 
2
yeue keâeÙe& veneR keâjlee~
v' =   + 
5  5   5  Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ DeeOej hej, veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW
m 4m 2 v 2 4m 2 v 2 ceW mes meJee&efOekeâ GheÙegòeâ Gòej ÛegveW~
v' = + (a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the
5 25 25
correct explanation of (A)/(A) SJeb (R) oesveeW mener
m 8m 2 v 2 nQ, SJeb (R), (A) keâer mener JÙeeKÙee nw~
v' =
5 25
(b) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the
m 2 2mv correct explanation of (A)/(A) SJeb (R) oesveeW mener
v' = ⇒ v' = 2 2v
5 5 nQ, efkeâvleg (R) , (A) keâer mener JÙeeKÙee veneR nw~
35. The distance covered by a body of mass 5 g (c) (A) is correct but (R) is not correct
having linear momentum 0.3 kg m/s in 5 s is: (A) mener nw, efkeâvleg (R) mener veneR nw~
5 g õJÙeceeve Jeeueer efkeâmeer Jemleg, efpemekeâe jsKeerÙe mebJesie (d) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct
0.3 kg m/s nw, Fmekesâ Éeje 5 s ceW leÙe keâer ieF& otjer nw: (A) mener veneR nw, efkeâvleg (R) mener nw~
(a) 300 m (b) 30 m NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
(c) 3 m (d) 0.3 m
Ans. (d) : When the rocket explodes in the mid air, the
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
fragments move in the different direction such that the
Ans. (a) : Given that – momentum is conserved and centre of mass of rocket
m = 5g = 5 × 10–3 kg follows the same path. It is because the explosion takes
P = 0.3kg m/sec place due to internal forces.
t = 5sec 37. A ball of mass 0.15 kg is dropped from a height
x=? 10 m strikes the ground and rebounds to the
The linear momentum of the body is – same height. The magnitude of Impulse
P = mv imparted to the ball is (g = 10 m/s2) nearly
0.3 = 5 × 10 × v
–3
0.15 efkeâ.«ee. keâer ieWo 10 ceer. TBÛeeF& mes efiejeÙeer peeleer nw
v = 60 m/sec. leLee peceerve mes škeâjekeâj meceeve TBÛeeF& lekeâ GÚueleer nw~
The distance covered by the body is –
ieWo hej ueieeÙes ieÙes DeeJesie keâe heefjceeCe neslee nw,
x = v × t = 60 × 5
ueieYeie : (g = 10 ceer./mes.2)
⇒ x = 300m
(a) 1.4 kg m/s/1.4 efkeâ.«ee. ceer./mes.
36. Given below are two statements : one is
(b) 0 kg m/s /0 efkeâ.«ee. ceer./mes.
labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is
labelled as Reason (R)./veerÛes oes keâLeve efoS ieS nw, (c) 4.2 kg m/s/4.2 efkeâ.«ee. ceer./mes.
efpeveceW mes Skeâ DeefYekeâLeve (A) Éeje efve™efhele nw SJeb (d) 2.1 kg m/s/2.1 efkeâ.«ee. ceer./mes.
otmeje keâejCe (R) Éeje efve™efhele nw~ NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Physics 86 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Velocity of ball just before striking ground- ( K.E )i – ( K.E )f
Fraction of energy lost by A =
v1 = 2gh ( K.E )i
v1 = 2 × 10 × 10 = 10 2 m/s 1 1 u2
r 4mu 2 – 4m
v1 = – 10 2 ˆj = 2 2 9
If it reaches same height, speed remains same after 1 2
4mu
collision, only direction changes. 2
v2 = 10 2 m/s 1
r = 1–
r 9
v2 = 10 2 j
r 8
Impulse = m ∆ v =
9
(
= m 10 2 ˆj – –10 2 ˆj ) 39. A particle of mass 5m at rest suddenly breaks
on its own into three fragments. Two fragments
= 0.15  2 (10 2 )  = 3 2 kg m/s of mass m each move along mutually
perpendicular direction with speed v each. The
= 4.2 kg m/s energy released during the process is,
38. Body A of mass 4m moving with speed u efJejece ceW jKee õJÙeceeve 5m keâe keâesF& keâCe DeÛeevekeâ
collides with another body B of mass 2m, at
rest. The collision is head on and elastic in mJeÙeb leerve KeC[eW ceW štš peelee nw~ FveceW mes oes KeC[
nature. After the collision the fraction of efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ keâe õJÙeceeve m nw Skeâ otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled
energy lost by the colliding body A is : efoMeeDeeW ceW meceeve Jesie v mes ieefle keâjles nw~ Fme Øeef›eâÙee
Ûeeue v mes ieefleceeve 4 m õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& efheC[ A ceW cegòeâ Tpee& nw–
efJejece ceW efmLele 2m õJÙeceeve kesâ efkeâmeer efheC[ B mes 4 3 2
Deeceves-meeceves meerOes ØelÙeemLe Øeke=âefle keâe mebIeó keâjlee nw~ (a) mv 2 mv (b)
3 5
mebIeó kesâ he§eele mebIeó keâjves Jeeues efheC[ A keâer #eefÙele
5 3
Tpee& keâe Yeeie nw~ (c) mv 2 (d) mv 2
3 2
8 4
(a) (b) NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
9 9 Ans. (a) :
5 1
(c) (d)
9 9
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (a) :

By law of conservation of momentum

Conservation of momentum
4mu = 4mv1 + 2mv2 5m × 0 = mvi$ + mv$j + 3mv '
2u = 2v1 + v2 –––– (i) v v
v ' = − $i − $j
K.E. conservation 3 3
1 1 1
4mu 2 = 4mv12 + 2mv 22  v  v
2 2
2 2 2 v' = −  +− 
2u = 2v1 + v 2 –––– (ii)
2 2 2  3  3
elastic, e = 1 2v
=
v − v1 3
e= 2 =1 ∴ Energy released
0−u
2
v2 – v1 = u 1 1 1 v 2
E = mv 2 + mv2 + m  
2  3 
v2 = u + v1 –––– (iii)
2 2
From equation (i) and (iii)
2u = 2v1 + u + v1 mv 2
= mv 2 +
u = 3v1 3
4 2
v1 = u / 3 E= mv
3

Physics 87 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
40. An object flying in air with velocity (a) 0.5 (b) 0.25
(20iˆ + 25jˆ − 12kˆ )
suddenly breaks into two (c) 0.4 (d) 0.8
pieces whose masses are in the ratio 1:5. The NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
smaller mass flies off with a velocity ( Ans. (b) : Given :
100iˆ + 35jˆ + 8kˆ ). The velocity of the larger Mass of first block (m1) = m
piece will be, Mass of second block (m2) = 4m
( )
Jesie 20iˆ + 25jˆ − 12kˆ mes JeeÙeg ceW GÌ[lee keâesF& efheC[ Initial velocity of first block (u1) = v
Since second block (heavier block) is stationary
DeÛeevekeâ oes YeeieeW ceW, efpevekesâ õJÙeceeveeW keâe Devegheele initially,
1:5 nw, štš peelee nw~ FveceW Úesše Yeeie Jesie ( Initial velocity of second block (u ) = 0
2
100iˆ + 35jˆ + 8kˆ ) mes GÌ[lee nw~ yeÌ[s Yeeie keâe Jesie After collision, the first block (lighter block), comes to
nesiee– rest.
So, final velocity of first block, V1 = 0
(a) –20iˆ –15jˆ – 80kˆ (b) 4iˆ + 23jˆ –16kˆ
Final velocity of second block = V2
(c) –100iˆ – 35jˆ – 8kˆ (d) 20iˆ +15jˆ – 80kˆ Since there is no external forces on the system, so
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) momentum of the system will remain constant.
Ans. (b) : Given data- Initial momentum (P1) = Final momentum (P2)
Let the initial mass = 6 m m1u1 + m2u2 = m1V1 + m2V2
After breaking into pieces ratio 1:5 m × v + 4m × 0 = m × 0 + 4m × V2
The mass of lighter and larger piece will be m and 5 m ⇒ mv = 4mV2
respectively ⇒ V2 = v/4
(
⇒ Initial velocity of '6m' = 20iˆ + 25ˆj − 12kˆ ) Now coefficient of restitution is given by,

(
velocity of 'm' = 100iˆ + 35ˆj + 8kˆ ) e=
Velocity of separation
Velocity of approach
v
–0
V2 – V1 4 v 1
= = = =
u1 – u 2 v – 0 4v 4
Let v2 = Initial velocity of 6 m Thus coefficient of restitution (e) = ¼ = 0.25.
(vf)1 = Final velocity of m
(vf)2 = Final velocity of 5m 42. Two identical balls A and B having velocities
Apply linear momentum conservation– of 0.5 m/s and -0.3 m/s respectively collide
As net external force is zero then apply linear elastically in one dimension. The velocities of B
momentum conservation. and A after the collision respectively will be.
Pi = Pf oes meJe&mece ieWoeW A Deewj B kesâ Jesie ›eâceMe: 0.5 m/s
(initial momentum) = (final momentum) Deewj -0.3 m/s nw ~ Ùes Skeâ jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe Ûeueles ngS
( ) ( ) ( r
)
6m × 20iˆ + 25jˆ −12kˆ = ( m) 100iˆ + 35jˆ + 8kˆ + 5m ( vf )2  škeâjeleer nw~ Ùeefo Ùen škeäkeâj ØelÙeemLe nw, lees Fme škeäkeâj
r kesâ he§eeled B leLee A kesâ Jesie neWies, ›eâceMe:
120iˆ + 150jˆ − 72kˆ = 100iˆ + 35jˆ + 8kˆ + 5( vf )2
r (a) -0.5 m/s and 0.3 m/s/-0.5 m/s Deewj 0.3 m/s
20iˆ +115jˆ − 80kˆ = 5( vf )2 (b) 0.5 m/s and -0.3 m/s/0.5 m/s Deewj -0.3 m/s
r (c) -0.3 m/s and 0.5 m/s/-0.3 m/s Deewj 0.5 m/s
4iˆ + 23jˆ − 16kˆ = ( vf )2
(d) 0.3 m/s and 0.5 m/s/0.3 m/s Deewj 0.5 m/s
41. A moving block having mass m, collides with
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
another stationary block having mass 4m. The
lighter block comes to rest after collision. When AIPMT-1998
the initial velocity of the lighter block is v, then Ans. (b) : Since both bodies are identical and collision
the value of coefficient of restitution (e) will be / is elastic therefore velocities will be interchanged after
õJÙeceeve m keâe Skeâ ieefleMeerue iegškeâe, 4m õJÙeceeve kesâ collision and they travel in opposite direction.
efkeâmeer otmejs efmLej iegškesâ mes mebIeó keâjlee nw~ mebIeó kesâ VA = – 0.3 m/s and VB = 0.5 m/s
he§eele nukeâe iegškeâe efJejece DeJemLee ceW Dee peelee nw~ Alternate solution-
Given that collision between the balls is elastic So,
Ùeefo nukesâ iegškesâ keâe DeejefcYekeâ Jesie v nw, lees
coefficient of Restitution e = 1
ØelÙeeJemLeeve iegCeebkeâ (e) keâe ceeve nesiee Let m be the mass of each ball.
Physics 88 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Applying conservation of momentum- (a) 4.5 R (b) 7.5 R
m × 0.5 – m × 0.3 = mVA + mVB (c) 1.5 R (d) 2.5 R
Where, VA & VB are velocity of A & B after collision AIPMT-03.05.2015
⇒ VA + VB = 0.2 ..................(i) Ans.(b):
− ( VA − VB )
We know, e = 1 =
0.5 − ( −0.3 )
⇒ VB – VA = 0.8 ...................( ii)
From (i) & (ii)
VB = 0.5 m/s and VA = –0.3 m/s
43. Two particles A and B, move with constant
r r
velocities v1 and v 2 . At the initial moment
r r
their position vectors are r1 and r2
GM ( 5M )
respectively. The condition for particles A and F=
(12R − X )
2
B for their collision is :
r r
oes keâCe A leLee B efmLej Jesie ›eâceMe: v1 leLee v 2 .
F G ( 5M )
mes ieefle keâj jns nw~ ØeejbefYekeâ #eCe ceW Gvekesâ efmLeefle meefoMe ∴ a small = =
r r M (12R − x )2
›eâceMe: r1 leLee r2 nw~ lees A leLee B kesâ mebIeó nesves kesâ
efueS ØeefleyebOe nw efkeâ ∴ a big =
F
=
GM
r r r r 5M (12R − x ) 2
r r r r r −r v −v
(a) r1 − r2 = v1 − v 2 (b) r1 r2 = r 2 r1
r1 − r2 v 2 − v1 1 1 G5M
rr r r r r r r ∴ x = a small t 2 = t 2 ........ (i)
(c) r1 .v1 = r2 .v 2 (d) r1 × v1 = r2 × v 2 2 2 (12R − x ) 2
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 1 1 GM
Ans. (b) : Let the particles A and B collide at time t. 9R − x = 2 a big t = 2
2
t 2 ........ (ii)
(12R − x )
2
For their collision, the position vectors of both particles
should be same at time t, i.e By solving equation (1) from (2), we get
r r r r
r1 + v1t = r2 + v2 t x = 7.5 R
r r r r
r1 − r2 = v 2 t − v1 t
r r r r 45. The force 'F' acting on a particle of mass 'm' is
r1 − r2 = t ( v2 − v1 ) –––– (i) indicated by the force-time graph shown below.
r r r r The change in momentum of the particle over
Also, r1 − r2 = t v2 − v1
r r the time interval from zero to 8 s is:
r1 − r2 'm' õJÙeceeve kesâ efkeâmeer keâCe hej Deejesefhele yeue 'F' keâes
t= r r
v 2 − v1 yeue-meceÙe «eeheâ Éeje oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ meceÙe t = 0 mes t
Substituting this value of t in eqn. (i), we get = 8s lekeâ kesâ Deblejeue ceW keâCe mebJesie ceW heefjJele&ve nesiee:-
r r
r r r r r −r
r1 − r2 = ( v 2 − v1 ) r1 r2
v 2 − v1
r r r r
r1 − r2 v2 − v1
r r = r r
r1 − r2 v2 − v1
44. Two spherical bodies of mass M and 5 M and
radii R and 2 R are released in free space with
initial separation between their centers equal to
12 R. If they attract each other due to (a) 24 Ns (b) 20 Ns
gravitational force only, then the distance (c) 12 Ns (d) 6 Ns
covered by the smaller body before collision is: AIPMT-06.05.2014
oes ieesueekeâej efheb[eW kesâ õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: M leLee 5M Ans. (c) :
leLee Fvekeâer ef$epÙeeÙeW ›eâceMe: R leLee 2R nQ~ Fve oesveeW
keâes cegòeâ DeekeâeMe ceW veerÛes efiejeÙee peelee nw, Deewj Fve
oesveeW kesâ kesâvõeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer ØeejbefYekeâ otjer 12R nw~ Ùeefo
Ùes oesveeW Skeâ-otmejs keâes kesâJeue ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue Éeje
Deekeâef<e&le keâjles nQ lees, škeäkeâj mes hetJe& (henues) Úesšs
efheb[ Éeje leÙe keâer ieF& otjer nesieer:
Physics 89 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Change in momentum = Area under f-t graph 47. An explosion breaks a rock into three parts in a
F∆t = m∆v horizontal plane. Two of them go off at right
= Area of ∆ABC – Area of rectangle CDEF + Area of angles to each other. The first part of mass 1 kg
rectangle FGHI moves with a speed of 12 ms-1 and the second
part of mass 2 kg moves with 8 ms-1 speed. If
1 the third part files off with 4 ms-1 speed, then
= × 2 × 6 − 3 × 2 + 4 × 3 = 12NS
2 its mass is :-
46. A body of mass (4m) is lying in x-y plane at efkeâmeer #eweflepe meceleue ceW, Skeâ Ûeóeve ceW efJemheâesš kesâ
rest. It suddenly explodes into three pieces. keâejCe Gmekesâ leerve Yeeie nes peeles nw~ oes Yeeie Skeâ otmejs
Two pieces, each of mass (m) move
mes mecekeâesCe hej Ûeues peeles nw~ henues Yeeie keâe õJÙeceeve
perpendicular to each other with equal speeds
(v). The total kinetic energy generated due to 1kg nw Deewj Jen 12 ms-1 keâer Ûeeue mes ieefle keâjlee nw~
explosion is. otmejs Yeeie keâe õJÙeceeve 2 kg nw Deewj Jen 8 ms-1 keâer
4m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheb[ (Jemleg) x-y meceleue hej Ûeeue mes ieefle keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo leermeje Yeeie 4 ms-1 keâer
efJejece DeJemLee ceW nw~ FmeceW DeÛeevekeâ efJemheâesš nesves mes Ûeeue mes ieefle keâjlee nw lees, Gmekeâe õJÙeceeve nesiee-
Fmekesâ leerve Yeeie nes peeles nw, Fmekesâ oes Yeeie (efpeveceW (a) 17 kg (b) 3 kg
ØelÙeskeâ keâer õJÙeceeve 'm' nw) Skeâ ner Jesie 'v' mes Skeâ-otmejs (c) 5 kg (d) 7 kg
keâer uecyeJeled efoMee ceW ieefle keâjves ueieles nw~ lees, efJemheâesš NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
kesâ keâejCe peefvele kegâue ieeflepe Tpee& keâe ceeve nesiee:- AIPMT-2009
Ans. (c) :
3
(a) mv2 (b) mv 2 m/s
2
(c) 2mv2 (d) 4 mv2
AIPMT-06.05.2014
Ans. (b) : 8 m/s
m

m/s

Given that
uur mass, m1 = 1 kg Speed, v1 = 12 m/s
Let v ' be velocity of third piece of mass 2m. Initial mass, m2 = 2 kg Speed v2 = 8 m/s
ur
momentum, Pi = 0 (Because the body is at rest) Now Linear momentum of first part
uur uur P1 = mass × speed
final momentum, Pf = mviˆ + mvjˆ + 2mv '
P1 = m1v1 = 12×1 = 12 Kg-ms–1
According to law of conservation of momentum, Linear momentum of second part
ur uur
Pi = Pj P2 = m2 × v2
uur = 2 × 8 = 16 kgms–1
0 = mviˆ + mvjˆ + 2mv '
∴ Resultant momentum
uur v v
v ' = − ˆi − ˆj
2 2
P3 = P12 + P22 + 2P1P2 Cosθ [Q θ =90]
(12) + (16)
2 2
P3 =
The magnitude of v' is
uur 2 2 P3 = 144 + 256
 −v   −v  v
v' =   +  =
 2   2  2 = 400 = 20kg − m / s
Now, total kinetic energy generated due to explosion Now P3 = m3 v3
1 1 1
= mv2 + mv2 + ( 2m )( v')
2
P3
2 2 2 m3 =
v3
2
1 1 1  v 
= mv 2 + mv 2 + ( 2m )   m3 =
20
2 2 2  2 4
3
= mv2 m 3 = 5Kg
2
Physics 90 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
48. A person holding a rifle (mass of person and Now, when same stone is dropped from height 2h, then
rifle together is 100 kg) stands on a smooth its momentum with which it hits the ground becomes –
surface and fires 10 shots horizontally, in 5 s. P ' = m 2g ( 2h ) = 2P {from i}
Each bullet has a mass of 10 g with a muzzle
velocity of 800 ms–1. The final velocity acquired P' − P
∴ % change in momentum = × 100
by the person and the average force exerted on P
the person are
2P − P
Skeâ JÙeefòeâ jeFheâue (JÙeefòeâ Deewj jeFheâue keâe õJÙeceeve = × 100
P
efceueekeâj 100 efkeâuees«eece nw) hekeâÌ[s ngS Skeâ efÛekeâveer = 41%
melen hej KeÌ[e neslee nw Deewj 5 meskeWâ[ ceW #eweflepe ™he mes 50. Two spheres A and B of masses m1 and m2
10 ieesefueÙeeb Ûeueelee nw~ ØelÙeskeâ iesesueer keâe õJÙeceeve 10 respectively collide. A is at rest initially and B
«eece Deewj LetLeve Jesie 800 m/s nw~ JÙeefòeâ Éeje Deefpe&le is moving with velocity 'v' along x-axis. After
Debeflece Jesie Deewj Gme hej ueieeÙee ieÙee Deewmele yeue nw~ v
collision B has a velocity in a direction
2
(a) −1.6 ms −1 ; 8N (b) −0.08 ms −1 ; 16N perpendicular to the original direction. The
(c) –0.8 ms–1;16N (d) −1.6 ms −1 ; 16 N mass A moves after collision in the direction.
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka ›eâceMe: m1 leLee m2 õJÙeceeve kesâ oes ieesues A leLee B
Ans. (c) : Given- mass of person + rifle = 100 kg Deeheme ceW škeâjeles nQ, ØeejbYe ceW A efJejece DeJemLee ceW nw
M = 100 kg Deewj B v Jesie mes x-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe ieefleceeve nw~ škeäkeâj
n = 10 shots in 5 second kesâ heMÛeeled B keâe Jesie Gmekeâs ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie keâer uecyeJeled
mass of bullet (m) = 10g = 0.01 kg v
muzzle speed V = 800 m/s efoMee, ceW nes peelee nw~ lees, škeäkeâj kesâ heMÛeeled ieesues
2
MV + mnv = 0 A keâer ieefle keâer efoMee nesieer-
− mnv −0.01kg × 10 × 800m / s
V= = (a) θ = tan−1(1/2) to the x-axis/ x-De#e mes keâesCe
M 100
θ = tan–1(1/2) hej
= –0.8 m/s
(b) θ = tan−1(−1/2) to the x-axis/ x-De#e mes keâesCe
Change in momentum
Average force = θ = tan–1 (–1/2) hej
change in time
(c) Same as that of B/ Jener pees B keâer nw~
∆P
= (d) Opposite to that of B/ B keâer efoMee kesâ efJehejerle~
∆t AIPMT (Screening)-2012
∆V Ans. (b) : Given,
=m
∆t Mass of sphere A = m1
0.8 Mass of sphere B = m2
= 100 ×
5 Q A is at rest initially, therefore its initial velocity,
= 16 N VA = 0
49. A stone is dropped from a height h. It hits the & Initial velocity of B, vB = v
ground with a certain momentum P. If the After collision–
same stone is dropped from a height 100% Final velocity of A along X-axis = vx & along y-axis =
more than the previous height, the momentum vy
when it hits the ground will change by/Skeâ helLej v
Final velocity of B along y-axis =
keâes h GBâÛeeF& mes efiejeÙee peelee nw~ Ùen mebJesie P mes Yet- 2
leue mes škeâjelee nw, Ùeefo Fmeer helLej keâes, Fme GBâÛeeF& mes Now, applying principle of conservation of linear
100% DeefOekeâ GBâÛeeF& mes efiejeÙee peeÙe lees Yet-leue mes momentum along x-axis–
škeâjeles meceÙe Fmekesâ mebJesie ces heefjJele&ve nesiee:- ( mA vA + mB vB )Before Collision = ( mA vA + mB vB )After Collision
(a) 200% (b) 100% m1×0 + m2v = m1vx + m2×0
(c) 68% (d) 41% m
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 vx = 2 v –––– (i)
m1
Ans. (d) : When a stone is dropped from a height 'h', it
hits the ground with a momentum Applying conservation of linear momentum along y-
axis
P = m 2gh ––– (i)
( mA vA + mB vB )Before Collision = ( mA vA + mB vB )After Collision
Where, m = mass of stone
Physics 91 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
v 52. A body of mass M hits normally a rigid wall
⇒ m1 × 0 + m 2 × 0 = m1 v y + m 2   with velocity v and bounces back with the same
2
velocity. The impulse experienced by the body
−m 2 v
⇒ m1v y = is/Skeâ Jemleg keâe õJÙeceeve M nw, Ùen Skeâ ÂÌ{ oerJeej hej
2
v Jesie mes DeefYeuecyeJeled škeâjeleer nw Deewj Fmeer Jesie mes
−m 2 v Jeeheme ueewš peeleer nw~ Jemleg hej ueiee DeeJesie nesiee-
⇒ vy = –––– (ii)
2m1
(a) Zero/MetvÙe (b) Mv
If mass A moves at an angle 'θ' with the x-axis then, (c) 1.5 Mv (d) 2Mv
vy AIPMT (Screening)-2011
tan θ =
vx Ans. (d) : Impulse experienced by the body is the
−m2 v change in momentum.
r
2m1 dP
= ∴ = force
m2 dt
v
m1 dP = force × dt
∴ Impulse = force × time
−v 1
= × A body of mass = M
2 v
velocity = viˆ
1
tanθ = −
2 Bounce velocity = – viˆ
 1 change in momentum = Mv – M (– v) = 2Mv
∴ θ = tan −1  −  from x-axis
 2 53. A man of 50 kg mass is standing in a gravity
51. A mass m moving horizontally (along the x- free space at a height of 10 m above the floor.
axis) with velocity v collides and sticks to a He throws a stone of 0.5 kg mass downwards
mass of 3m moving vertically upward (along with a speed 2 m/s. When the stone reaches the
the y-axis) with velocity 2v. The final velocity of floor, the distance of the man above the floor
the combination is/ v Jesie mes #eweflepe ™he mes (x- will be –
De#e kesâ DevegefoMe) ieefleMeerue m õJÙeceeve, 3m õJÙeceeve 50 kg keâe Skeâ JÙeefòeâ ieg™lJe cegòeâ #es$e ceW HeâMe& mes 10
mes škeäkeâj keâjlee nw leLee Gmemes efÛehekeâ peelee nw~ m Thej KeÌ[e nw~ Jen 0.5 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ helLej 2
mebÙeespeve keâe Deefvlece Jesie nw : m/s keâer Ûeeue mes veerÛes keâer Deesj HeWâkeâlee nw~ peye helLej
3 $ 1 $ 1 $ 3 $ HeâMe& hej hengBÛelee nw JÙeefòeâ keâer HeâMe& kesâ Thej TBÛeeF&
(a) vi + v j (b) vi + v j
2 4 4 2 nesieer –
1 $ 2 $ 2 $ 1 $ (a) 9.9 m (b) 10.1 m
(c) vi + v j (d) vi + v j
3 3 3 3 (c) 10 m (d) 20 m
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (b) : Ans. (b) : Given mass of man = 50 kg
h = 10m
1
Stone weight = kg = 0.5 kg
2
Downward speed = 2 m/s = Vstone
From the law of conservation of linear momentum is- Applying law of conservation of linear momentum,
mvi$ + ( 3m )( 2v ) $j = ( m + 3m ) v ' Mman Vman = Mstone Vstone
50 × V = 0.5 × 2
mviˆ + (3m)(2v)jˆ = (4m)v' V = 0.02 m/s
Time taken by stone to reach the ground,
mviˆ + 6mvjˆ = 4mv'
10m
1 6 t= = 5s
v ' = viˆ + vjˆ 2m / s
4 4
Distance covered by man in 5 sec = vt = 0.02 × 5
1 3
v ' = viˆ + vjˆ = 0.1 m (upward)
4 2 Distance of man above the floor total height = 10+0.1
Where v is the final velocity after collision = 10.1m.
Physics 92 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
54. A ball moving with velocity 2m/s collides head dv
on with another stationary ball of double the So, =0
mass. If the coefficient of restitution is 0.5, the
dt
their velocities (in m/s) after collision will be – dm
= v
Skeâ ieWo pees 2m/s mes ieefleMeerue nw ogiegves õJÙeceeve keâer dt
Skeâ DevÙe efmLej ieWo mes Meer<e& meccegKe ™he mes škeâjeleer nw~ = M.v
Ùeefo ØelÙeeJemLeeve iegCeebkeâ 0.5 nw, lees škeäkeâj kesâ he§eeled F = Mv Newton
Fvekesâ Jesie (m/s) ceW neWies – 56. A shell of mass 200 g is ejected from a gun of
(a) 0, 1 (b) 1, 1 mass 4 kg by an explosion that generates 1.05
(c) 1,0.5 (d) 0,2 kJ of energy. The initial velocity of the shell is –
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 4 kg õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ leeshe 200 «eece õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ
Ans. (a) : Given u1 = 2m/s ieesuee Skeâ efJemHeâesškeâ Éeje HeWâkeâleer nw~ efJemHeâesš mes 1.05
e = 0.5 kJ Tpee& GlheVe nesleer nw~ ieesues keâe DeejefcYekeâ Jesie
m1 = m
m2 = 2m nesiee:-
u2 = 0 (a) 40 ms–1 (b) 120 ms–1
If two bodies have head on collision with coefficient of (c) 100 ms–1 (d) 80 ms–1
restitution then, AIPMT-2008
v -v v − v1 Ans. (c) : Given:- Mass of shell m1= 200 gram = 0.2 kg
e = 2 1 ⇒ 0.5 = 2 ⇒ v 2 − v1 = 1
u1 - u 2 2−0 Mass of gun m2 = 4 kg
v 2 = 1 + v1 …. (i) Energy generated E = 1.05 kJ
From the law of conservation of linear momentum, = 1050J
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 Let velocity of shell and Gun is v1& v2 respectively.
u1 = v1 +2v2 By conservation of energy–
From eqn (i) 1 1
2 = v1 +2 (1+v1) m1v12 + m 2 v 22 = E
2 2
3v1 = 0
v1 = 0 1 1
n
× 0.2 × v12 + × 4 × v 22 = 1050
from eq (i) 2 2
v2 = 1 m/s 0.1v1 + 2v 2 = 1050 ––– (i)
2 2

55. Sand is being dropped on a conveyor belt at By momentum conservation –

the rate of M kg/s. The force necessary to keep
initial momentum = final momentum.
the belt moving with a constant velocity of v
m/s will be – 0 = m1v1 + m2v2
efkeâmeer mebJeenkeâ heefókeâe hej M efkeâ.«ee./mes. keâer oj mes jsle ⇒ 0.2v1 + 4v2 = 0
keâes efiejeÙee pee jne nQ heefókeâe keâes efveÙele Jesie v m/s mes v2 = −
0.2
v1
ÛeueeÙes jKeves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ yeue keâe ceeve nesiee :- 4
Mv Mv − v1
(a) newton / vÙetšve =
2 2 20
(b) zero/ MetvÙe From equation (i) –
2
(c) Mv newton/ Mv vÙetšve  −v 
0 .1v12 + 2  1  = 1050
(d) 2 Mv newton/2 Mv vÙetšve  20 
AIPMT-2008 2v1 2
dm 0.1v12 + = 1050
Ans. (c) : Given, =M 400
dt v12
dp 0.1v12 + = 1050
We know force F = [ P = mv] 200
dt 1050
d ( m.v ) ⇒ v12 =
Frequired =  1 
dt  0.1 + 200 
dv dm
= m +v (Q V = constant ) ⇒ v1 = 10000 = 100m/s
dt dt

Physics 93 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
57. A 0.5 kg ball moving with a speed of 12 m/s (a) 100% (b) 150%
strikes a hard wall at an angle of 30º with the (c) 265% (d) 73.2%
wall. It is reflected with the same speed and at AIPMT-2002
the same angle. If the ball is in contact with the Ans. (a) : Kinetic energy of body is given by-
wall for 0.25 seconds, the average force acting
P2
on the wall is:- K= –––––(1)
0.5 kg keâer Skeâ ieWo 12 m/s keâer ieefle mes Ûeueleer ngF& 2m
efkeâmeer oÌ{ oerJeej mes 30° kesâ keâesCe hej škeâjeleer nw Deewj Where, m = mass of body
P = momentum
Fmeer ieefle mes Deewj Fmeer keâesCe hej hejeJeefle&le nes peeleer nw~ Now, According to question,
Ùeefo ieWo 0.25 meskeâsC[ lekeâ oerJeej kesâ mecheke&â ceW jnleer Kinetic energy of body is increased by 300%
nw lees oerJeej hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer Deewmele yeue nesiee:- ∴ K'=K+ 300% K
K' = K + 3 K = 4K –––––(2)
From equation (1), equation (2) becomes-
P '2 4P 2
=
2m 2m
P' = 2P
Increase in momentum.
P '− P 2P − P
×100 = ×100 = 100%
(a) 48 N (b) 24 N P P
(c) 12 N (d) 96 N 59. A cricketer catches a ball of mass 150 gm. in
AIPMT-2006 0.1 second moving with speed 20 ms–1. Then he
Ans. (b) : Given :- experiences force of:/Skeâ efKeueeÌ[er 150 «eece keâer
Mass m = 0.5 kg Skeâ ieWo keâes 0.1 mes. ceW hekeâÌ[lee nw~ ieWo keâe Jesie 20
Speed v = 12 m/s ceer./mes. nes lees Gmekesâ Éeje DevegYeJe yeue keâe ceeve nesiee-
θ = 30° (a) 300 N (b) 30 N
Time t = 0.25 second (c) 3 N (d) 0.3 N
AIPMT-2001
Ans. (b) : Given,
Mass of ball m = 150 gm = 0.15 kg
Speed of ball (u) = 20 ms-1
Time (∆t) = 0.1 sec.
Final velocity of ball (v) = 0
Initial momentum of ball = mu
= 0.15× 20
Average force acting on the wall is = 3 kg m/s
[Final momentum - Initial momentum] Final momentum of ball = m × v = 0
=
t Change in momentum of ball = final momentum –
(mv sinθ) after collision - (-mv sinθ) before collision initial momentum
Favg = = 0 – 3 = - 3 kgm/s
t
2mvsin θ 2 × 0.5 ×12 × sin 30° ∆p -3
= Force on ball, F = = = -30N
= ∆t 0.1
t 0.25
1 Now, as per Newton’s 3rd law equal & opposite force
2 × 0.5 × 12 × acts on cricketer's hands force experienced by cricketer
= 2 = 2 × 0.5 × 6 = 30 N
0.25 0.25
60. A body of mass 3 kg hits a wall at an angle of
6 60º & returns at the same angle. The impact
= = 24N
0.25 time was 0.2 s. Calculate the force exerted on
58. If kinetic energy of a body is increased by the wall :
300%, then percentage change in momentum 3kg keâe Skeâ efheC[ 60° kesâ keâesCe hej Skeâ oerJeej mes
will be / Ùeefo Skeâ Jemleg keâer ieeflepe Tpee& ceW 300³ keâer škeâjelee nw leLee meceeve keâesCe mes Jeeheme ueewš peelee nw~
Je=efæ nesleer nw lees Gmekesâ mebJesie ceW ØeefleMele heefjJele&ve keâe Ùeefo škeäkeâj keâe meceÙe 0.2s nes lees oerJeej hej Deejesefhele
ceeve nesiee - yeue keâe ceeve nesiee –
Physics 94 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : Given, F = 500-100 t
dp
F = ⇒ Fdt = dp
dt
Integrating on both sides.
∫ dp = ∫ Fdt
(a) 150 3N (b) 50 3N  t2 
P = 500 t - 100   + C
(c) 100 N (d) 75 3N 2
AIPMT-2000 P = 500t -50t2 +C
Ans. (a) : where, C = integration constant
= 500 − 50t 2
63. For a Rocket propulsion on velocity
ve of exhaust
gases relative to rocket is 2 km/s. If mass of
rocket system is 1000 kg, g, then
the the rate of fuel
consumption for a rocket cket to rise up with
acceleration 4.9 m/s2 willl be :
efkeâmeer je@kesâš veesove kesâ efueS efve<keâeef
e<keâe mele iewmeeW keâe je@kesâš
Normal initial velocity, Vi = –10 sin60º
in60º kesâ meehes#e Jesie 2 km/s nw Ùeefo je@kesâš efvekeâeÙe keâe
Normal final velocity, Vj = 10 sin 60º
õJÙeceeve 1000 kg nes, lees je@kessâš 4.9 m/s2 kesâ lJejCe mes
∴ Change in momentum, ∆P = m (Vj – Vi)
Thej G"eves kesâ efueS FËOeve Kehelele keâerke oj nesieer–
∆P = 3 [10 sin 60º – (–10sin 60º)]
∆P = 51.96 Ns-1 (a) 12.25 kg/s (b) 17.5 kg/s
(c) 7.35 kg/s (d) 5.2 kg/s
∆P 51.96
Force, F = = = 150 3 N AIPMT-1998
∆t 0.2
Ans. (c) : Relative velocity of exhaus
xhaust gas (v) = 2 km/s
∴ Force is 150 3 N = 2000 m/s
61. A particle is projected with th velvelocity 'u' makes Acceleration, a = 4.9 m/s2
an angle θ with respect to hor horizontal. Now it Mass of rocket, M = 1000 kg
breaks in two identical parts rts at highest point of dm
Q Thrust force, Ft = v
trajectory. If one part retrace etraces its path, then dt
velocity of other part is/Skeâ keâC keâCe keâes #eweflepe mes θ dm
= 2000 ×
keâesCe yeveeles ngS u Jesie mes Øe#esefhele keâjles nQ~ Ùen keâCe dt
Deheveer GÛÛelece efmLeefle hej oes meJe&Je&mecece keâCeeW ceW efJeYeòeâ Using Ma = Ft – Mg
nes peelee nw Deye Ùeefo Skeâ keâCee hegve: Deheves heLe keâe Ft = M (a +g)
DevegmejCe keâjW lees otmejer keâCe keâe Jesie keäÙee nesiee- dm
2000 = 1000 ( 4.9 + 9.8)
(a) 3u cosθ (b) 2u ccosθ dt
(c) u cos θ dm 14.7
(d) u =
AIPMT-1999 dt 2
dm
Ans. (a) : = 7.35kg / s
Velocity of element which retrace path = u cosθ dt
So applying conservation of momentum um,
− mu m 64. A particle of mass m is moving movin with a uniform
mu cos θ = cos θ + v ' velocity v1. It is given an n impulse
imp such that its
2 2
v ' = 3u cos θ velocity becomes v2. The impulse impu is equal to
62. If force F = 500 – 100t, then n fun
function of impulse
Skeâ efheC[ efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve m nw v1 Jesie mes Ûeuelee nw~
with time will be: Fmes Skeâ DeeJesie efoÙee ieÙee leyee Fmekeâe
Fm Jesie v2 nes peelee
Ùeefo yeue F = 500 – 100t lees DeeJes
eJesie kesâ meceÙe kesâ meeLe nw~ DeeJesie keâe ceeve nesiee-
Heâueve nesiee– 1
m  v 22 – v12 
2
(a) m  v 2 – v 1  (b)
(a) 500t – 50t (b) 50t – 10 2
(c) 50 – t2 (d) 100 t2 (c) m[v1 + v2] (d) m[v2 – v1]
AIPMT-1998 AIPMT-1990

Physics 95 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given, mass = m Px = m × vx
Initial velocity = v1 = 1 × 21
Final velocity = v2 = 21 kg m/s
Impulse is a vector quantity and is equal to change in P y = m × vy
momentum of the body. Impulse is defined as change in = 1× 21
momentum i.e mv2 – mv1 = 21 kg m/s
= m [v2 – v1] ∴ Resultant = Px + Py 22

65. A man fires a bullet of mass 200 g at a speed of

= ( 21) + ( 21)
2 2
5 m/s. The gun is of one kg mass. By what
velocity the gun rebounds backward?
= 441 + 441
Skeâ Deeoceer yebotkeâ mes 5 m/s keâer Ûeeue hej 200 g
õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ ieesueer oeielee nw~ yebotkeâ 1 kg õJÙeceeve = 882
keâer nw~ efkeâme Jesie Éeje yebotkeâ heerÚs keâer efoMee ceW Øeefle#eshe = 21 2 kg m/s
keâjleer nw? The momentum of heavier fragment should be
r r
(a) 1 m/s (b) 0.01 m/s numerically equal to resultant of Px and Py .
(c) 0.1 m/s (d) 10 m/s.
3 × v = Px 2 + Py 2
AIPMT-1996
Ans. (a) : Given: Mass of bullet = 200 g = 0.2 kg 3v = 21 2
Velocity of bullet(v) = 5 m/s
v=7 2
Mass of Gun = 1 kg
Velocity of Gun = ? 67. Two bodies of masses m and 4m are moving
According to law of conservation of linear momentum, with equal kinetic energies. The ratio of their
Linear momentum = Linear momentum of firing linear momentum is
of bullet oes efheC[ efpevekesâ õJÙeceeve m leLee 4 m nw, Gvekeâer
mb vb = mg vg ieeflepe Tpee&SB yejeyej nQ~ Fvekesâ jsKeerÙe mebJesieeW keâe
0.2 × 5 = 1 × vg
Devegheele nesiee:
0.2 × 5
vg = = 1.0 (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
1 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
v2 = 1m/s AIPMT-1998, 1997, 1989
66. A body of mass 5 kg explodes at rest into three Ans. (a) : The relation between linear momentum and
fragments with masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The k.E is-
fragments with equal masses fly in mutually
perpendicular directions with speeds of 21 m/s. P2
k.E =
The velocity of heaviest fragment in m/s will be 2m
5 efkeâ«ee. keâe Skeâ efheC[ jKee ngDee nw pees leerve šgkeâÌ[eW ceW P = 2mk.E
1 : 1 : 3 kesâ õJÙeceeveeW kesâ Devegheele ceW efJejeceeJemLee ceW Where P = momentum
štšlee nw~ meceeve õJÙeceeve Jeeues efheC[ Skeâ otmejs kesâ m = mass
uecyeJeled 21 ceer/meskeâC[ mes Ûeueles nw~ meyemes Yeejer efheC[ For the masses m and 4m we have same k.E
keâe Jesie (ceer/meskeâC[ ceW) nesiee: P1 2m K.E
=
(a) 7 2 (b) 5 2 P2 8m K.E
(c) 3 2 (d) 2
P1 1 1
AIPMT-1989 = =
P2 4 2
Ans. (a) :
P1 : P2 = 1 : 2
68. Two masses of 1 g and 9 g are moving with
equal kinetic energies. The ratio of magnitudes
of their respective linear momentum is
1 «eece leLee 9 «eece kesâ oes õJÙeceeve Skeâmeceeve ieeflepe
Tpee& jKeles nQ~ Gvekesâ jsKeerÙe mebJesieeW keâe Devegheele nesiee:
(a) 1 : 9 (b) 9 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
AIPMT-1993
Physics 96 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given, Ans. (a) : The coefficient of Restituti
stitution is a measure of
Mass of first body m1 = 1 g the "bounciness" of a collision n between
betw two objects.
Mass of second body m2 = 9 g The coefficient, e is defined as the ratio of relative
The k.E of both masses is same K.E1 = K
K.E2 speeds after and before an impact, act, taken
ta along the line
of the impact.
Velocity of first body = v1
Velocity of second body v2 speed of separation
e=
∴ K.E1 = K.E2 speed of approach
1 1 The bodies stick together in perfectly
rfectly inelastic collision
m 1 v 12 = m 2 v 22
2 2 and move together hence velocity ty of a separation is zero
2 (i) For perfectly elastic collision e = 1
v  m 9
∴  1 = 2 = (ii) For perfectly inelastic collision
ion e = 0
v
 2 m 1 1 (iii) For other collision 0 < e < 1
∴ v1 = 3v2 ...(i) So option (a) is correct.
Now Ratio of the magnitude of their rrespective linear
momentum is given as.
P mv 4.3 Force Equilibrium
rium
⇒ 1 = 1 1
P2 m 2 v 2 r
71. A particle moving with velocity
veloc V is acted by
P1 1 × 3v 2
⇒ = three forces shown by thee vectorvec triangle PQR.
P2 9 × v 2 The velocity of the particle
cle will
wi :
r
⇒
P1 1
= meefoMe ef$eYegpe PQR ceW oMee&e&S Deveg
D meej Jesie V mes
P2 3 ieefleceeve efkeâmeer keâCe hej leerve yeue keâeÙe& keâj jns nw~ Fme
Hence, the ratio of linear momentum um is 1 : 3 keâCe keâe Jesie :
69. A moving body of masss m and velocity 3
km/hour collides with a body ody aat rest of mass 2
m starts to move. What will b be the combined
velocity ?
Skeâ m õJÙeceeve kesâ efheC[ keâe Jesesie 3 efkeâceer/IeCše nw~
Ùen Skeâ efmLej 2m õJÙeceeve kesâ efheC eC[ kesâ meeLe mebIeó
keâjleer nw Deewj efÛehekeâ peeleer nw, leesees mmebÙegòeâ õJÙeceeve keâe (a) Decrease/Iešsiee
mebIeó kesâ yeeo Jesie nesiee: (b) Remain constant/efveÙele jnsnsiee
(a) 3 km/hour (b) 4 km
km/hour uuur
(c) Change according to the smallest s force QR
(c) 1 km/hour (d) 2 km
km/hour uuur
AIPMT-1996 /ueIegòece yeue QR kesâ Devegmeej heef
he jJeefle&le nesiee~
Ans. (c) : Given, mass = m (d) Increase/yeÌ{siee
Velocity = 3 km/h NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Let u be the initial velocity of mass m and v be the Ans. (b) :
velocity of combined mass.
Initial momentum = m×3+2m×0
=3m
From the conservation of momentum,
3m = (m1+m2)v
= (m+2m)v
3m = 3 m×v As forces are forming closed d loop
loo in same order
3m therefore from triangle law of vector
ector addition,
a
v= = 1 km/h r ur uur uur
3m So, Fnet = F1 + F2 + F3 = 0
70. The coefficient of restitution ion e for a perfectly r
mv = 0
elastic collision is/hetCe&le: ØelÙeemL ÙeemLe mebIeó kesâ efueS r
dv
ØelÙeeJemLeeve iegCeebkeâ (e) keâe ceeve nesleee nw: m =0
dt
(a) 1 (b) 0 r
v = constant
(c) ∞ (d) –1
Velocity will not change
AIPMT-1988
Physics 97 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
72. Two blocks A and B off mas masses 3m and m g
respectively are connected d by a massless and aA =
3
inextensible string. The wh whole system is
mg
suspended by a massless sprin spring as shown in aB = =g
figure. The magnitudes of accele acceleration of A and m
B immediately after the stri string is cut, are Hence, acceleration of A and d B immediately after
respectively: g
cutting the string is , g respectively tively.
oes iegškeâeW A leLee B kesâ õJÙeceeve,e, ›e›eâceMe: 3m leLee m 3
nQ~ Ùes Deeheme ceW Skeâ õJÙeceevenervr e, DeefJeleevÙe [esjer mes 73. A rigid ball of mass m strikes rikes a rigid wall at 60°
and gets reflected without hout loss of speed as
pegÌ[s nQ~ Fme hetjs efvekeâeÙe keâes, Deej
DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes shown in the figure. The value v of impulse
Devegmeej Skeâ õJÙeceevejefnle efmØebie (keâceeveer) Éeje imparted by the wall on the ball ba will be.
ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw~ [esjer keâes keâeš osves kesâ legjvle he§eeled m õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ meòeâ ieWo (yee@ue) efkeâmeer ÂÌ{
A Deewj B kesâ lJejCe kesâ heefjCeece neWies ›eâceMe: i Devegmeej 600 hej
oerJeej mes veerÛes DeejsKe ceW oMee&&Ùes ieÙes
škeâjekeâj hejeJeefle&le nes peeleer nw ~ Ùeefo Fme Øeef›eâÙee ceW
ieWo keâer Ûeeue ceW keâesF& neefve veneReR nes
neleer nw, lees oerJeej Éeje
ieWo hej ueies DeeJesie keâe ceeve nesesiee-

g g
(a) g, ,g
(b)
3 3 (a) mv (b) 2mv
g g (c) mv/2 (d) mv/3
(c) g, g (d) ,
3 3 NEET (UG)-24.07.2016,
24.0 PHASE-II
NEET
EET ((UG)-07.05.2017 Ans. (a) : The component of velocity
locity has changed along
Ans. (b) : FBD of A and B before cuttin
cutting the string x- direction as shown in figure,
e, hence
hen momentum of
ball has changed along the x-direction
directi after receiving
impulse from the wall
x

b ⇒ Net impulse in x-direction = ∆Px

After cutting the string ∆Px = (Px)f – (Px)i = (m v coss 60º î ) – (–mv cos 60º
î )
1ˆ
∆P x = 2 mv cos 60º î = 2 mv × i = mv ˆi
2
∴ ∆Px = mv
Hence, wall has exerted impulse
ulse of
o value mv in a
direction normal to wall.
74. ABC is an equilateral triangle
triang with O as its
r r r
centre. F1 ,F2 andF3 represen
present three forces
Let the acceleration of block A andd B be aA & aB acting along the sides, s, AB,
AB BC and AC
4mg − 3mg mg respectively. If the total torque
torqu about O is zero
aA = = r
3m 3m then the magnitude of F3 is:

Physics 98 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ABC Skeâ meceyeeng ef$eYegpe nw, efpeemekeâe kesâvõ O nw~ Ans. (a):
r r r
F1 ,F2 leLee F3 ›eâceMe: AB, BC leLee AC efoMee ceW
ueies yeue nw~ Ùeefo O kesâ heefjle: kegâue yeue DeeIetCe&
r
(še@ke&â) MetvÙe nes lees F3 keâe ceeve nw :

Let r be the perpendicular distance

ce of F1, F2 and F3 from
center O.
The torque of force F3 about is clockw
lockwise while torque
F1 + F2 due to F1 and F2 are anticlockwise–
(a) (b) 2(F1 + F2) For total torque to be zero about O.
2 We must have–
(c) F1 + F2 (d) F1 – F2 F1r + F2 r − F3 r = 0
AIPMT
MT (S
(Screening)-2012
F3 = F1 + F2
Ans. (c) :

4.4 Circular Motion

76. A particle is executing uniform
niform circular motion
r r
with velocity v and accelerat
eleration a . Which of
r r
the following is True?/Skeâeâ keâCe
ke v Jesie Deewj a
lJejCe kesâ meeLe Skeâmeceeve Je=e=òeerÙe ieefle keâj jne nw~
Let, the perpendicular distance off centr
centre 'O' from each
side be 'd'.
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee melÙe lÙe nwn?
r r r
Now, Torque = Force × Perpendicular cular ddistance (a) v is a constant, a is a constant cons / v Skeâ efveÙeleebkeâ
r
Taking Anticlockwise as Positive direct
direction & since it is nw; a Skeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw
r r r
given total torque about 'O' is zero.. Then– (b) v is not a constant, a is a constant/ v efveÙeleebkeâ
F1×d + F2d– F3 × d = 0 {Q F3 is in clockwise} r
veneR nw; a Skeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw
F3 = F1+F2 r r r
(c) v is a constant, a is not a constant/ v Skeâ
75. O is the centre of an equilateral teral triangle ABC r
efveÙeleebkeâ nw; a efveÙeleebkeâ veneReR nw
F1 , F2 , F3 are three forces
ces aacting along the r r r
(d) v is not a constant, a is not a constant/ v
sides AB, BC and AC as show shown in fig. What r
efveÙeleebkeâ veneR nw; a efveÙeleebkeâ veneR
ven nw
should be the magnitude of F3 so that total RE NEET Manipur
nipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
torque about O is zero/efÛe$eeveg
vegmeeeej oes yeue F1 SJeb Ans. (d) : Uniform circular motion tion can
ca be described as
the motion of an object in a circle
rcle at a constant speed.
F2 meceyeeng ef$eYegpe keâer oes ›eâce ›eâceeiele YegpeeDeeW kesâ As an object moves in a circle , it is constantly
co changing
DevegefoMe ueie jns nQ Ùeefo kesâvõ kesâ Øeefle yeueDeeIetCe& its direction. Hence, V ur
is not a constant and
MetvÙe Øeehle keâjvee nes lees DeeJeMÙekeâeâ F3 nesiee– acceleration is also not constant.
77. The angular acceleration
on of a body, moving
along the circumference of a circle
c is :
efkeâmeer Je=òe keâer heefjefOe hej ieefleceeve
ec Skeâ efheC[ keâe
keâesCeerÙe lJejCe nesiee :
(a) along the axis of rotation/ IetCe&ve De#e kesâ DevegefoMe
(b) along the radius, away ay from centre / ef$epÙee kesâ
DevegefoMe, kesâvõ mes yeenj keâer Deesj
(c) along the radius towards t centre/ ef$epÙee kesâ
ards the
(a) | F3 |=| F1 | + | F2 | (b) | F3 |=| F1 | − | F2 |
DevegefoMe, kesâvõ keâer Deesj
(d) along the tangent to its position/ po Fmekeâer efmLeefle
(c) | F3 |= F1 + 2F2 (d) Not possible/DemecYeJe
ot po nw keâer mheMe&pÙee kesâ DevegefoMe
AIPMT-1998 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Physics 99 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Ans. (c): Given – R = 20
g = 9.8
By Balancing force–

mv 2
Any particle moving along the circular motion, mg – N =
R
• The centripetal acceleration (ac) acts towards the
center of circle. mv 2
mg = [ N = 0, for weightlessness]
• The tangential acceleration (at) acts along the tangent R
to its position. Therefore v = gR
• The angular acceleration (α) acts along the axis of
rotation. v= 9.8 × 20 = 196
78. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track = 14 m/s
of radius 10 m with a constant speed of 10 m/s. So speed of the car at the top of the hill is between 14
A bob is suspended from the roof of the car by m/s and15 m/s.
a light wire of length 1.0 m. The angle made by 80. A point mass 'm' is moved in a vertical circle of
the wire with the vertical is radius 'r' with the help of a string. The velocity
π π π of the mass is 7gr at the lowest point. The
(a) 0o (b) (c) (d)
3 6 4 tension in the string at the lowest point is
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka efkeâmeer efyevog õJÙeceeve 'm' keâes ef$epÙee 'r' TOJee&Oej Je=òe
Ans. (d) : ceW efkeâmeer [esjer keâer menÙelee mes IegceeÙee pee jne nw~ Fme
Car moving in circular horizontal track radius = 10 m
speed = 10 m/s õJÙeceeve keâe efvecvelece efyevog hej Jesie 7gr nw~ efvecvelece
mv 2 efyevog hej [esjer ceW leveeJe nesiee
T sin θ = (centripetal) ––––(i)
r (a) 1 mg (b) 6 mg
T cos θ = mg ––––(ii) (c) 7 mg (d) 8 mg
divide eqn (i) ÷ (ii) θ θ 2 NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
v2 Ans. (d) : Given, Velocity of mass = 7gr
tanθ =
rg r = radius of circle
10 × 10 m = Point mass
tanθ =
10 × 10
{g = 10 m / s2 } If velocity at bottom, Vb > 5gr ⇒ It will complete
tanθ = 1 vertical circle.
π Now,
θ= ∴ Tbottom – mg = m (a1)
4
79. A roller coaster is designed such that riders mv 2
Tbottom – mg =
experience "weightlessness" as they go round r
the top of a hill whose radius of curvature is m
20m. The speed of the car at the top of the hill Tbottom = ( 7gr ) + mg
r
is between–/Skeâ heneÌ[er keâer Ûeesšer keâer Je›eâlee keâer
Tbottom = 8mg
ef$epÙee 20 ceeršj nw~ Skeâ jesuej keâesmšj keâes Fme lejn
yeveeÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ, peye Fme ceW pee jns Ùee$eer heneÌ[er keâer Alternate solution -
Ûeesšer kesâ efieo& Ietceles nQ lees GvnW Yeejnervelee keâe DeeYeeme
neslee nQ~ heneÌ[er keâer Ûeesšer hej keâej keâer Ûeeue nesieer :-
(a) 16 m/s and 17 m/s/ 16 m/s Deewj 17 m/s kesâ yeerÛe
(b) 13 m/s and 14 m/s/ 13 m/s Deewj 14 m/s kesâ yeerÛe
(c) 14 m/s and 15 m/s/14 m/s Deewj 15 m/s kesâ yeerÛe
(d) 15 m/s and 16 m/s/ 15 m/s Deewj 16 m/s kesâ yeerÛe
AIPMT-2008
Physics 100 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
mv 2 IetCe&ve keâjles keâCe P kesâ ef$epÙee meefoMe keâe y-øe#esheCe nw~
T = mg+ πt
r (a) y(t) = 4 sin   , where here y in m/ y(t) = 4 sin
m × 7gr  2
= mg +  πt 
  , ÙeneB y m ceW nw
r
= mg + 7mg = 8 mg  2
3πt 
81. A mass m is attached to a thin w wire and whirled (b) y(t) = 3 cos   , where
wher y in m/ y(t) = 3
in a vertical circle. The wire ire is most likely to  2 
3πt 
cos 
break when:
eqkeâmeer heleues leej mes pegÌ[s õJÙecee
Ùeceeve m keâes efkeâmeer  , ÙeneB y m ceW nw
 2 
TOJee&Oej Je=òe ceW leer›elee mes IegceeÙeeÙee ppee jne nw~ Fme leej πt
(c) y(t) = 3 cos   , where here y in m/ y(t) = 3 cos
kesâ štšves keâer DeefOekeâ mebYeeJevee leyee nw peye :  2
(a) the wire is horizontal/leej #eweflep epe nes  πt 
  , ÙeneB y m ceW nw
(b) the mass is at the lowest point/õJÙeceeve efvecvelece
st poi  2
efyevog hej nes~ (d) y(t) = – 3 cos 2 πt, where y in m/ y(t) = – 3
(c) inclined at an angle off 60° from vertical/leej cos 2 πt, ÙeneB y m ceW nw
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
TOJee&Oej mes 60° kesâ PegkeâeJe hej nes~
Ans. (c) :
(d) the mass is at the highest point/ õJÙeceeve GÛÛelece
st poin
efyevog hej nes
NEET
EET ((UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (b) :

The y – projection is given by

y = A sin (ωt + φ)
Here amplitudes, A = 3m (radiuss of circle)
ci
2π π
Equation of motion in a vertical circle ω= = Q [ T = 4s ]
T 2
mv 2 π
T – mg cos θ = So y = 3 sin  t + φ 
l 2 
mv 2 At t=0 y = 3 sin φ = 3
T = mg cos θ +
l π
Wire breaks at a point where tension
on is m
maximum, φ=
2
For maximum tension cosθ=1 for θ = 0° ie.. at lowest So the final equation of motion of the y-projection is
point B.
π π
mv 2 y = 3sin  t + 
TB = mg + 2 2
l
π
82. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, y = 3 cos t
initial position and sensee of revolution are 2
indicated in the fig./DeejsKe ceW Je=òe keâer ef$epÙee, 83. A particle starting from rest, moves in a circle
heefj›eâceCe keâe DeeJele&keâeue, Deejef eejefcYYekeâ efmLeefle Deewj of radius ‘r’. It attains a velocity velo of V0 m/s in
the nth round. Its angularr acceleration
acce will be,
heefj›eâceCe keâer efoMee Fbefiele keâer ieÙeereer nnw~ keâesF& keâCe efJejeceeJemLee mes DeejcYe
ejcYe keâjkesâ ef$epÙee r kesâ
heLe ceW ieceve keâjlee nw~ n JeW Ûekeä
ekeäkeâj
e ceW Fmekeâe Jesie V0
m/s nes peelee nw~ Fmekeâe keâesCeerrÙe lJejCe
lJ nesiee–
V02 V0
(a) rad / s 2 (b) rad / s 2
4 πnr n
V02 2 V02
(c) rad / s (d) rad / s 2
2 πnr 2 4 πnr 2
y - projection of the radius
us vec
vector of rotating NEET (UG)-20.05.2019,
20. (Odisha)
particle P is :
Physics 101 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that : Initial speed v = 0 oMee&Ùes ieÙes DeejsKe ceW R = 2.5 m ef$epÙee kesâ Je=òeekeâej
Radius of circle = r heLe hej oef#eCeeJele& ieefle keâjles ngS efkeâmeer keâCe kesâ kegâue
lJejCe keâes efkeâmeer #eCe a = 15 m/s2 mes efve¤efhele efkeâÙee
peelee nw~ Fme keâCe keâer Ûeeue nesieer -

Final speed = v0
Let final angular velocity = ω
Angle after nth revolution θ = n (2π)
By applying 2nd eqn of motion
ω2 = ω02 + 2α θ (a) 4.5 m/s (b) 5.0 m/s
ω2 = 0 + 2α (2πn) (c) 5.7 m/s (d) 6.2 m/s
v 02 NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
= α ( 4 πn ) [Q v0 = ωr ] Ans. (c) : Given R = 2.5m , a = 15 m/sec2
r2
From figure, centripetal acceleration
v02 ac = a cos 30º
α=
4πnr 2 3 1.732 2
= 15 × = 15 × = 15 × 0.866 =13 m/s
84. One end of string of length l is connected to a 2 2
particle of mass ‘m’ and the other end is The centripetal acceleration is given by -
connected to a small peg on a smooth horizontal v2
table. If the particle moves in circle with speed ac =
R
‘v’, the net force on the particle (directed
Where, v is velocity of particle
towards center) will be (T represents the tension
in the string)/l uecyeeF& keâer Skeâ [esjer kesâ Skeâ efmejs mes ⇒ v2
13 =
'm' õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe peg[ Ì e nw Deewj Fmekeâe otmeje 2.5
2
efmeje Skeâ efÛekeâves meceleue cespe hej ueieer Úesšer meer KetBšer mes V = 13 × 2.5 = 32.5 m/s
V = 5.7 m/s
peg[
Ì e nQ Ùeefo Ùen keâCe Je=òeekeâej heLe hej 'v' Ûeeue mes
IetCe&ve keâjlee nw lees, Gme hej ueieves Jeeuee vesš yeue (kesâvõ 86. What is the minimum velocity with which a
body of mass m must enter a vertical loop of
keâer Deesj) nesiee: (T- jmmeer hej leveeJe nw) radius R so that it can complete the loop?/R
(a) T (b) T +
mv 2 ef $epÙee kesâ efkeâmeer TOJee&Oej heeMe (uethe) ceW m õJÙeceeve
l kesâ efkeâmeer efheC[ keâes efkeâme efvecvelece Jesie mes ØeJesMe keâjvee
mv 2 ÛeeefnS efkeâ Jen heeMe keâes hetCe& keâj mekesâ?
(c) T − (d) Zero
l (a) 5gR (b) gR
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Ans. (a) : When a particle connected to a string (c) 2gR (d) 3gR
revolves in a circular path around a center, the NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
centripetal force is provided by the tension produced in Ans. (a) :
the string. Hence, in the given case, the net force on the
particle is the tension T.

 mv 2 
N = mg  T =  At point B,
 l 
Gravitational force = Centripetal force
85. In the given figure, a = 15 m/s2 represents the 2
mVtop
total acceleration of a particle moving in the mg =
R
clockwise direction in a circle of radius R = 2.5
m at a given instant of time. The speed of the Vtop = gR
particle is Applying conservation of energy between A and B
Physics 102 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(K.E)A + UA = (K.E)B + UB 2× 3.14× 5×10-2
So, v =
1 1 0.2× 3.14
2
mVbot + 0 = mVtop
2
+ mg(2R)
2 2 v = 0.5 m/s
1 1 v 2 (0.5) 2
2
mVbot = m( gR ) 2 + mg(2R) Now, the acceleration a = =
2 2 r 5×10-2
1 2 1 a = 5 m/s 2
Vbot = gR + 2gR
2 2 89. A stone is tied to a string of length 'l' and is
Vbot = gR + 4gR
2 whirled in a vertical circle with the other end of
the string as the centre. At a certain instant of
Vbot = 5Rg time, the stone is at its lowest position and has a
speed 'u'. The magnitude of the change in
Hence, to complete the loop the minimum velocity at velocity as it reaches a position where the string
5gR . is horizontal ('g' being acceleration due to
bottom should be
gravity) is:/uecyeeF& ' l ' keâer Skeâ [esjer kesâ Skeâ efmejs hej
87. A car of mass 1000 kg negotiates a banked Skeâ helLej keâes yeeBOe keâj Gmes Skeâ uecyeefoefMekeâ Je=òeekeâej
curve of radius 90m on a frictionless road. If heLe hej IegceeÙee pee jne nw peyeefkeâ [esjer keâe otmeje efmeje
the banking angle is 45º, the speed of the car Je=òe kesâvõ hej efmLele jnlee nw~ efpeme #eCe Ùen helLej
is:/1000 efkeâ«ee. õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ keâej Ie<e&Ce nerve vÙetvelece efmLeefle ceW neslee nw~ leye Fmekeâe Jesie 'u' neslee nw~
meÌ[keâ hej 90 m. ef$epÙee kesâ Skeâ {euet (Pegkesâ ngS) ceesÌ[ peye [esjer #eweflepe DeJemLee ceW hengBÛeleer nw lees helLej kesâ
mes iegpejleer nw~ Ùeefo ceesÌ[ keâe PegkeâeJe 45º nes lees, keâej Jesie ceW heefjJele&ve keâe heefjceeCe (peyeefkeâ ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe
keâer Ûeeue nw: keâe ceeve g nes) nesiee :-
(a) 5ms–1 (b) 10ms–1 (a) u 2 − gℓ (b) u − u 2 − 2gℓ
(c) 20ms–1 (d) 30ms–1
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 (c) 2gℓ (d) 2 ( u 2 − gℓ )
Ans. (d) : Given data AIPMT-2004
mass of car = 1000 kg Ans. (d) :
Radius of banked curve, r = 90m
Banking angle = 45°
Now, the permissible speed (v) and banking angle
is related as–
v2
tanθ =
rg
v = tan θ× r × g Applying energy conservation between points A&B
1 1
v = tan 45°× 90 ×10 mu2 + 0 = mv 2 + mgl
2 2
v = 30 m/sec.
1 1
∴ Speed of car = 30 m/sec. mu 2 − mv 2 = mgl
2 2
88. A particle moves in a circle of radius 5 cm with
m ( u 2 − v 2 ) = mgl
1
constant speed and time period 0.2 π s. The
2
acceleration of the particle is:/Skeâ keâCe, 5 cm
v2 = u2 – 2gl
ef$epÙee kesâ Je=òeekeâej heLe ceW Skeâ efmLej Ûeeue Deewj 0.2 π
v = u 2 − 2gl
mewkesâC[ kesâ DeeJele&keâeue mes IetCe&ve keâj jne nw~ keâCe keâe r r
lJejCe nw : Change in velocity v − u
(a) 5 m/s2 (b) 15 m/s2 = v2 + u2 − 2uvcos90º
(c) 25 m/s2 (d) 36 m/s2
( ) ( )
2
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 = u 2 − 2g l + u 2 – 2u u 2 − 2g l × 0
Ans. (a) : Given that-
Radius of circle r = 5 cm = 5×10–2 m = u 2 − 2gl + u 2 – 0
Time period T = 0.2π sec. = 2u 2 − 2gl
2πr
We know that, the velocity v = = 2 ( u 2 − gl )
T

Physics 103 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
90. A particle moves along a ci circle of radius Ans. (b): When an object attachedtached to a string and
 20  moving in a circular motion n rotates
rot due to the
  m with constant tangentigential acceleration. centripetal (here tension force) and
nd centrifugal
ce force, the
 π 
string may break at the point where
here Maximum Tension
If the velocity of the particle
ticle iis 80 m/s at the
Occurs.
end of the second revolution
ion aafter motion has
began, the tangential acceleratio
leration is: - The FBD of all the points at Equilibriu
uilibrium are as follows.
Case I - (at point A)
Skeâ keâCe Skeâ meceeve mheMeeaÙe lJe
lJejCe mes Skeâ Jeòe
Mathematically,
 20 
efpemekeâe DeOe&JÙeeme  m nww, ceW Ietce jne nw~ FC= TA + mg
 π  ⇒ TA = FC – mg ............(i)
efJeßeeceeJemLee mes DeejcYe keâjkesâ Je=òòee kkesâ oes Ûekeäkeâj keâjves
kesâ yeeo Ùeefo Gmekeâe Jesie 800 m/s nes peelee nw, lees
mheMeeaÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve nesiee:-
(a) 40 ms–2 (b) 640 π ms–2
(c) 160 π ms–2 (d) 40 π ms–2
AIPMT-2003
Ans. (a): Case - II (at point C and D)

Here TC = TD =T.
( FC ) + ( mg ) ...........(ii)
2 2
⇒T=
Given 2 revolution = 4π rad
Case - III at point B
From equation ω = ω0 + 2αθ
2 2
[ ω0 = 0]
 v a
ω2 = 2αθ Q ω = r and α = r 
 
v2 a
2
= 2 × × 4π
r r
v2
= 2a × 4 π TB = FC + mg......... (iii)
r From eqn (i), (ii) and (iii), we can conclude that the
80 × 80 tension will be maximum at point nt B i.e.
i.
= 2 × a × 4π
 20  TB > TC = TD > TA
  So, there is highest chances for breaking
break of the string at
 π point 'B' where the maximum tensionnsion occurs.
π× 80 × 80
= 2a × 4π 92. When a body moves with a constant speed
20 along a circle/peye Skeâ efheC[ efkeâmeer
e Je=òe kesâ DevegefoMe
a = 40 m / s 2 Skeâ efveÙele Ûeeue mes ieefle keâjleee nw, lees
(a) no work is done on it/Fme me hej keâesF& keâeÙe& veneR efkeâÙee
91. A mass is performing vertical
tical circular motion
(see figure).If the averageage vvelocity of the peelee nw~
particle is increased, then
n at w which point the (b) no acceleration is produced produc in it/FmeceW keâesF&
string will break:/Skeâ m õJÙeceev
eceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe O lJejCe GlheVe veneR neslee nw~
hej efÛe$eevegmeej GOJee&Oej Je=òeekeâej ieefle keâj jne nw~ Ùeefo (c) its velocity remains constant/ const Fmekeâe Jesie efveÙele
keâCe keâe Deewmele Jesie yeÌ{eÙes lees efkeâme efyevog hej [esjer štš jnlee nw~
peeÙesieer– (d) no force acts on it/Fme hej keâesF& yeue keâeÙe& veneR
keâjlee nw~
AIPMT-1994
Ans. (a) : Work done by centripetal
ripetal force in uniform
circular motion is always zero. o. Centri
Ce petal force in
uniform circular motion alwayss acts perpendicular to
the direction of motion of the particle
partic and is directed
(a) A (b) B
towards the centre of the circle.ircle. Uniform circular
(c) C (d) D motion is the particular kind of circular
circula motion in which
AIPMT-2000 a particle moves with constant speed.
peed.
Physics 104 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
93. A particle of mass M is moving oving in a horizontal
circle of radius R with uniform iform speed v. When 4.5 Friction
it moves from one pointt to a diametrically
opposite point, its/M õJÙeceevee keâe Skeâ efheC[ Je=òeerÙe 95. A block of mass 2 kg iss placed plac on an inclined
heLe hej Skeâ meceeve Ûeeue v mes Ûeuelee nw~ Je=òeerÙe heLe rough surface AC (as shown show in figure) of
keâer ef$epÙee R nw~ peye Ùen Skeâ efyf evo
evog mes JÙeeme kesâ otmejs coefficient of friction µ. If g = 10 ms-2, the net
efyevog hej hengBÛelee nw lees: force (in N) on the block will be b
2 ef k eâ«ee õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ yuee@
k
@ eâ Ie<e&
I Ce iegCeebkeâ kesâ Skeâ
(a) kinetic energy change by M Mv2/4/ ieeflepe Tpee&
Deevele Kegjojer melen AC (pewwmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee
Mv2/4 mes yeoue peeSiee~
ieÙee nw) hej jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo g = 10ms-2, yuee@keâ hej
(b) momentum does not change/ ange/mebJesie veneR yeouesiee~
kegâue yeue (N ceW) nesiee
(c) momentum change by 2Mv/mebJesie 2Mv mes yeoue
peeSiee~
(d) kinetic energy changess by Mv2/ieeflepe Tpee&
Mv2 mes yeoue peeSieer~
AIPMT-1992
Ans. (c) : In a uniform circular motion
otion, the magnitude (a) 10 (b) 20
of velocity is same but its direction
tion cchanges at every
point. (c) 10 3 (d) Zero
• The particle moving from one point to its RE NEET Manipur
nipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
diametrically opposite point will bee as sh
shown in the fig. Ans. (d) : Given: m = 2kg
g = 10 m/sec2
F=?

• Change in momentum between points A and B = PA –

PB = Mv – M (–v)
= 2 Mv
Therefore, momentum changes by 2Mv.
Fnet = mg sin30º – µ mg cos30º
94. The earth (mass = 6 × 1024 kg) rrevolves around
the sun with an angular veloc velocity of 2 × 10–7 mg 1 3
8
= − mg
rad/s in a circular orbit off radiu radius 1.5 × 10 km. 2 3 2
The force exerted by the sun oon the earth, in Fnet =0
newton, is 96. Calculate the maximum m acceleration
a of a
he=LJeer (m = 6 × 1024 kg) metÙe& kessâ Ûe ÛeejeW Deesj 1.5 × 108 moving car so that a bodydy lying
lyi on the floor of
km ef$epÙee keâer ieesueekeâej keâ#ee ceW 2 × 10–7 rad/s kesâ the car remains stationary.
ary. The
T coefficient of
static friction between the
he body
bod and the floor is
keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes Ûekeäkeâj ueieeleer nw~ hhe=LJeer hej metÙe& Éeje 0.15 (g = 10 m s-2)
ueieeÙee ieÙee yeue (vÙetšve ceW) nw: Skeâ ieefleceeve keâej keâe DeefOekeâlece
âlece lJejCe %eele keâerefpeS
(a) 36 × 1021 (b) 27 × 1039 leeefkeâ keâej kesâ HeâMe& hej jKeer Skeâ Jemleg efmLej yeveer jns~
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 18 × 1025 Jemleg leLee HeâMe& kesâ yeerÛe keâee mLew
mL eflekeâ Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ
AIPMT-1995 0.15 nw~ (g = 10 m s ) –2

Ans. (a) : Given that: m = 6×1024 kg (a) 50 ms-2 (b) 1.2 ms-2
-2
ω = 2×10 rad/sec
–7
(c) 150 ms (d) 1.5 ms-2
8 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
R = 1.5×10 km
R = 1.5×1011 m Ans. (d) : Given µs = 0.15
Given that the earth revolves around nd the sun in circular g = 10 m/sec2
qual to the centripetal limiting friction force –
orbit then Gravitational force is equal
mv 2 fs = mamax
force- F= fs = µsN =µs mg
R
F = mRω 2 mamax = µs mg
24
F = 6×10 ×1.5×10 ×4 11
×4×10 –14 amax = µsg
= 0.15 × 10
F = 36 × 10 21 N
amax = 1.5 m/sec2

Physics 105 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
97. Calculate the acceleration n of the block and The minimum angular velocity veloci needed for the
trolley system shown in th the figure. The cylinder to keep the block ck stationary
sta when the
coefficient of kinetic friction be
between the trolly cylinder is vertical and rotating
rotati about its axis,
m/s2, mass of the
and the surface is 0.05. (g = 10 m will be : (g =10m/s2 )
string is negligible and no other friction exists). 10 kg õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& iegškeâe
eâe 1 m ef$epÙee kesâ efkeâmeer
DeejsKe ceW oMee&S ieS iegškesâ Deewj š^euueer kesâ efvekeâeÙe keâe KeesKeues yesueveekeâej [^ce keâer Yeererlejer
eje oerJeej kesâ mecheke&â ceW
lJejCe heefjkeâefuele keâerefpeS~ š^eueereer DDeewj he=‰ keWâ yeerÛe nw~ Yeerlejer oerJeej Deewj iegškesâ kesâ yeerÛe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ
ieeflepe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ 0.05. nw~ (g = 10 m/s2 [esjer keâe 0.1 nw~ peye yesueve TOJee&Oej nw Deewj Deheves De#e kesâ
õJÙeceeve Ghes#eCeerÙe nw leLee DevÙee kekeâesF& Ie<e&Ce keâeÙe&jle heefjle: IetCe&ve keâj jne nw, lees iegegškeskeâ keâes efmLej jKeves kesâ
efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ efvecvelece keâesCeererÙe Jes
J ie, nesiee
veneR nw~)
10
(a) rad / s (b) 10 rad/s
2π
(c) 10π rad/s (d) 10 rad / s
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (b) :

(a) 1.00 m/s2 (b) 1.25 m/s2

(c) 1.50 m/s2 (d) 1.66 m/s2
NEET (UG)-14.10
14.10.2020, Phase-II
Ans. (b) Given,
Mass of trolly m1 = 10 kg Given that
Kinetic friction between trolly and surfa
surface = µk = 0.05 Mass, m = 10 kg
Gravitational acceleration g = 10 m/s2 µ = 0.1
Mass of block m2 = 2 kg r=1m
Let 'a' be the acceleration g = 10 m/s2
FBD of block mv 2
Now N=
r
µN = mg
µmv 2
= mg
r
m2g - T = m2a gr 10 × 1
2 × 10 - T = 2 × a v= =
µ 0.1
20 - T = 2a -------(i)
v = ωr = 10 m/s.
FBD of trolley-
v 10 m / s
ω= =
r 1m
ω = 10rad / s
99. Which one of the followin ollowing statements is
T - f = m1a incorrect?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewâewve-mee keâLeve DemelÙe nw:?
T - µkN = m1a (a) Rolling friction is smaller sma than sliding
T - µk m1g = m1a friction. / ueesšefvekeâ Ie<e&Ce meheea Ie<e&Ce mes keâce neslee nw~
T - 0.05 × 10 × 10 = m1a (b) Limiting value of static tatic friction
f is directly
T - 5 = 10a ----------(ii) proportional to normal al reaction.
reac
Solving (i) and (ii) mLeweflekeâ Ie<e&Ce keâe meerceevle ceeve DeefYeuecye Øeefleef›eâÙee kesâ
20 - 2a - 5 = 10a Deveg›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw~
15 = 12a (c) Coefficient of sliding friction
fricti has dimensions
a = 1.25 m/s2 of length./ meheea Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ keâer efJeceeSB uecyeeF& keâer
98. A block of mass 10 kg is in con contact against the efJecee kesâ meceeve nesleer nQ~
inner wall of a hollow cylindrical
drical drum of radius (d) Frictional force opposes
ses the
th relative motion. /
1 m. The coefficient of friction
ion be
between the block Ie<e&Ce yeue Deehesef#ekeâ ieefle keâee efJejes
ej Oe keâjlee nw~
and the inner wall of the ccylinder is 0.1. NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Physics 106 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): 101. A car is negotiating a curved road of radius R.
• Rolling friction is smaller than sliding friction The road is banked at an angle θ The
because area of contact is less case of rolling as coefficient of friction between the tyres of the
compared to sliding. Hence, statement in option (a) is car and the road is µs. The maximum safe
correct. velocity on this road is:
• Limiting value of static friction is directly keâesF& keâej ef$epeÙee R keâer Jeef›eâle meÌ[keâ hej ieefleceeve nw~
proportional to normal reaction as co-efficient of Ùen meÌ[keâ keâesCe θ hej Pegkeâer nw~ keâej kesâ šeÙejeW Deewj
friction is constant for two particular surfaces. meÌ[keâ kesâ yeerÛe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ µs nw Fme meG]keâ hej keâej
The force of static friction is calculated as follows- keâe DeefOekeâlece megj#ee Jesie nw :
FS = µSN
g µ s + tan θ µ s + tan θ
Where, µS, N, FS is co-efficient of friction, normal force (a) (b) gR 2
and maximum force of static frication respectively. R 2 1 − µ s .tan θ 1 − µ s .tan θ
Hence, statement in option (b) is correct. µ s + tan θ g µ s + tan θ
(c) gR (d)
• Coefficient of sliding friction has no dimension. 1 − µ s . tan θ R 1 − µ s . tan θ
f = µSN
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
f
⇒ µS = Ans. (c) : Consider the figure-
N Let m be the mass of car
Hence, statement in option (c) is incorrect. N → normal reaction
• Friction force opposes the relative motion of an fs → frictional force
object over the another as it is a resistive force which
is in opposite direction to that of direction of motion
of the object.
Hence, statement in option (d) is correct.
100. A body of mass m is kept on a rough horizontal
surface (coefficient of friction = µ). A
horizontal force is applied on the body, but it
does not move. The resultant of normal
reaction and the frictional force acting on the
object is given by F, where F is,
∑Fy = 0 ⇒ N cos θ = fs sin θ + mg
m õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& efheC[ efkeâmeer Kegjojs #eweflepe he=‰
mg = N cos θ – fs sin θ
(Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ · µ) hej jKee ieÙee nw~ Fme efheC[ hej
mv 2
keâesF& #eweflepe yeue DevegØeÙegòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw, hejvleg Jen ∑Fx = 0 ⇒ fs cos θ + N sin θ =
R
Fmes ieefle Øeoeve veneR keâj heelee~ DeefYeuecye DeefYeef›eâÙee where mv2/R represents centripetal force, v is velocity
leLee Ie<e&Ce yeue keâe heefjCeeceer F nw, ÙeneB F nw– of car and R is radius of curvature
r r
(a) F = mg (b) F = mg + µmg we know, limiting friction fs = µsN so,
r N cos θ – µsN sin θ = mg ........... (i)
r
(d) F ≤ mg 1 + µ
2
(c) F = µmg mv 2
µsN.cosθ + N sin θ = ........... (ii)
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) R
From equation (i) and (ii)
Ans. (d) : Force applied by any surface is depends on
friction force & normal force N cos θ − µs N sin θ mg
=
0 ≤ friction force (f) ≤ µ × N µ s N cos θ + Nsin θ mv 2
/R
Now cos θ − µ s sin θ Rg
N = mg (perpendicular to surface) =
µ cos θ + sin θ v 2
s

∴ Resultant force (F) = N2 + f 2  µ cos θ + sin θ 

Fmin = N = mg When f = 0 v 2 = Rg  s 
 cos θ − µs sin θ 
Fmax = N2 + f 2 When f = µmg
 µ cos θ + sin θ 
v = Rg  s 
= ( mg )2 + ( µmg )2  cos θ − µs sin θ 
Fmax = mg 1 + µ 2  µ + tan θ 
v = Rg  s 
mg ≤ F ≤ mg 1 + µ 2  1 − µs tan θ 

Physics 107 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
102. A plank with a box on it att one eend is gradually 2
raised about the other end. nd. AAs the angle of (c) µ = (d) µ = 2 tan θ
tan θ
inclination with the horizontal
ontal rreaches 30º, the
box starts to slip and slides des 44.0 m down the NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
plank in 4.0 s. The coefficient
ficients of static and Ans. (d) :
kinetic friction between thee box and the plank
will be, respectively/efkeâmeer leKle
eKles kesâ Skeâ efmejs hej
Skeâ yekeämee jKee nw~ leKles kesâ Gme me efmejs keâes Oeerjs-Oeerjs
Thej keâer Deesj G"eÙee peelee nw~ leKle eKles kesâ #eweflepe mes 30º
keâesCe yeveeves hej, yekeämee veerÛes keâerer De
Deesj efheâmeuevee ØeejbYe
keâjlee nw Deewj 4.0 s ceW 4.0 m ottjer leleÙe keâj ueslee nw~ lees
yekeämes leLee leKles kesâ yeerÛe mLeweflekeâ leLee ieeflekeâ Ie<e&Ce
iegCeebkeâeW keâe ›eâceMe: ceeve nesiee~
The block may be stationary, when
L
mgsinθ L = µ mg cosθ
2
mg sin θ L
(a) 0.4 and 0.3 (b) 0.6 and 0.6 µ=
mg cos θ L
(c) 0.6 and 0.5 (d) 0.5 and 0.6 2
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 sinθ
µ=2
Ans. (c) : Coefficient of static friction tion is cosθ
µs = tan 30° = 0.577≈ 0.6 µ = 2 tan θ
For kinetic friction,
ma = mg sin 30° – f 104. A car of mass m is moving ving on o a level circular
= mg sin30° – µK mg cos 30° track of radius R. If µs represents rep the static
a = g sin 30º - µK g cos 30º ----- ------(i) friction between the road d and tyres of the car,
the maximum speed off the car in circular
1
and also, S = ut + at 2 motion is given by
2 m õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ keâej, R eff$epÙee epÙ kesâ efkeâmeer Je=òeekeâej
1 meceleue heLe hej ieefle keâj jner nw~ Ùeef Ù o meÌ[keâ leLee keâej
4 = 0 + a ( 4)
2
2 kes â šeÙejeW kes â yeer Û e mLew ef l ekeâ Ie<e&
e<e&C e µs nes lees, keâej keâe
a = 0.5 m/s2
Now from (i), we get IetCeeaÙe Ûeeue keâe DeefOekeâlece ceeve eve nes
n iee:
1  3 (a) mRg / µ s (b) µs Rg
0.5 = 10 × − µ k (10 )  
2  2  (c) µ s mRg (d) Rg / µs
4.5 AIPMT
AIP (Mains)-2012
µk = = 0.5
5 3 Ans. (b) : Given –
103. The upper half of an incl inclined plane of • Car of mass 'm' is moving on n level
leve circular track of
inclination θ is perfectly smoo smooth while lower radius = R.
half is rough. A block starting rting ffrom rest at the • µs = static friction between road ad & tyres
t of car.
top of the plane will again n com
come to rest at the Now,
bottom, if the coefficient off frict friction between the
block and lower half of the plan plane is given by:- For the car to stay in contact ct with
wi the track, the
frictional force is equal to centripetal petal force.
f
efkeâmeer vele-meceleue keâe keâesCe θ nw~ GGmekeâe Thejer DeeOee 2
mv
Yeeie hetCe&le: efÛekeâvee nw leLee efveÛ eÛeuee DeeOee Yeeie µsmg ≥
Kegjoje nw~ Fme vele-meceleue kesâs T Thejer efmejs mes Skeâ R
yuee@keâ (iegškeâe) veerÛes keâer Deesesj eefheâmeuelee nw~ Ùeefo v ≤ µs Rg
iegškeâe ØeejbYe ceW efJejece efmLeefle ceWW Lee lees, efheâmeueles ngS, ∴ Maximum speed of car in circular
circ motion is –
Jen vele-leue keâer leueer hej efheâj meses efJeejece DeJemLee ceW Dee vmax = µs Rg..
peeÙesiee peye iegškesâ Deewj vele-meceleu eleue kesâ efveÛeues DeeOes
Yeeie kesâ yeerÛe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ keâe ceeve
eeve nes- 105. A conveyor belt is moving
ing at a constant speed
of 2 m/s. A box is gentlytly dropped
dr on it. The
1 etween them is µ= 0.5.
coefficient of friction between
(a) µ = tan θ (b) µ =
tan θ The distance that the boxox will
wil move relative to

Physics 108 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
belt before coming to restt on it it, taking g = 10 This force is action force by a block lock on o cart. Now, block
ms–2 is/Skeâ keâveJesÙej yesuš 2 m/s keâer efveÙele Ûeeue mes will remain stationary w.r.t cart if frictionalfrict force
ieefleMeerue nw~ Skeâ yee@keäme keâes Gmeme hhej Oeerjs mes efiejeÙee µN ≥ mg
ieÙee nw~ Gvekesâ ceOÙe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkb eâ µ = 0.5 nw~ yee@keäme N = mα
yesuš hej efJejece ceW Deeves kesâ henue enues yesuš kesâ meehes#e µmα ≥ mg
efkeâleveer ieefle keâjsiee~ g = 10 ms–2 ueW- g
(a) 0.4 m (b) 1.2 m α≥
µ
(c) 0.6 m (d) Zer
Zero
AIPM
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 107. The coefficient of staticc friction, fric µs, between
Ans. (a) : block A of mass 2 kg and d the table as shown in
the figure is 0.2. What would ould be the maximum
mass value of block B so that the two blocks do
not move? The string and the pulley are
Where µ is the friction coefficient = 0.5.
assumed to be smooth and nd massless.
ma
∴ F = 0.5×m×10 Q g = 10m / s 2 { } (g = 10 m/s2)
F = 5m Fme efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS ieS yuee@@keâ A Deewj cespe kesâ yeerÛe
Q F = ma = 5m keâe mLeweflekeâ Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ, µs, 0.2 nw~ yuee@keâ A keâe
a = 5 m/s2
From v2 = u2+2as
õJÙeceeve 2 kg nw~ [esjer Deewj efIejveer ejv keâes Ie<e&Ce efJecegòeâ
Retardation of the block on the belt Deewj Yeejnerve ceevee pee mekeâlee eâlee nw~ yuee@keâ B keâe
2
0 = (2) – 2as Deef O ekeâlece õJÙeceeve ef
k eâlevee nes
es mekeâlee
me nw efpememes oesveeW
u 2 yuee@keâ Ûeeuenerve jnWies ? (g = 10 m/s m ) 2
S= {Q v = 0}
2a
( 2)
2
4
S= =
= 0.4m.
2 × 5 10
106. A block of mass m is in contact ontact with the cart (a) 4.0 kg (b) 0.2 kg
C as shown in figure – (c) 0.4 kg (d) 2.0 kg
m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ yuee@keâ Skeâ keâeš
keâeš& C mes veerÛes oMee&Ss AIPMT-2004
Devegmeej mecheke&â ceW nw - Ans. (c) : The mass of the block 'A' is 2 kg.
The coefficient of friction is 0.2
As the blocks do not move therefore refore the tension in the
string must be equal to the force of frictionfri on block 'A'.
Applying Newton's second law for block blo 'A',
The coefficient of static frictiofriction between the T = µs mA g
block and the cart is μ. The acceleration α of
he ac = 0.2 × 2 × 10
the cart that will prevent the blo block from falling =4N
satisfies –/ yuee@keâ Je keâeš& kesâ ceO
ceOÙe mLeweflepe Ie<e&Ce Applying Newton's second law for block blo 'B',
iegCeebkeâ μ nw~ keâeš& keâe lJejCe α keâe ceeve peesefkeâ T = mBg
yuee@keâ keâes efiejves mes jeskesâ mebleg° keâjs
âjsiee - 4 = mB × 10
mg g mB = 0.4 kg
(a) α > (b) α > Thus, the maximum mass of the block B is 0.4 kg.
µ µm
108. A block of mass 10 kg placed on rough
g g
(c) α ≥ (d) α < horizontal surface having g coefficient
coe of friction
µ µ µ = 0.5. If a horizontal force orce ofo 100 N acting on
AIPMT
MT (S(Screening)-2010 it then acceleration of thee block bloc will be
Ans. (c): When a cart moves with
ith so
some acceleration 10 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ yuee@keââ Kegjojer #eweflepe melen hej
rce (mα) acts on the
towards right then a pseudo force jKee nw efpemekeâe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ µ = 0.5 nw Ùeefo Fme
block toward left.
yuee@keâ hej Skeâ 100 N keâe #eweweflepe
ep yeue keâeÙe&jle nw lees
Fme yuee@keâ kesâ lJejCe keâe ceeve nesiee -
(a) 10 m/s2 (b) 5 m/s2
2
(c) 15 m/s (d) 0.5 m/s2
AIPMT-2002

Physics 109 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : Given- Mass, m = 10kg
Coefficient of friction, µ = 0.5
Horizontal force, F = 100N
Force of friction, f = µN = µmg
f = 0.5×10×10 = 50N
Force that produce acceleration- (a) 1.65 m/s2 (b) 0.98 m/s2
f ' = F- f = 100 – 50 = 50 N (c) 1.2 m/s2 (d) 0.25 m/s2
f ' 50N AIPMT-1999
a= = = 5 m / s2
m 10kg Ans. (b) :
109. A block B is pushed momentarily along a
horizontal surface with an initial velocity v. If
μ is the coefficient of sliding friction between
B and the surface, block B will come to rest
after a time:-
Skeâ yuee@keâ B keâes Skeâ #eweflepe leue hej ØeejefcYekeâ Jesie v Consider net acceleration of the slab be a limiting
mes #eCe Yej kesâ efueÙes Oekesâuee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo B Deewj leue friction
Fs = µmg = 0.6 ×10× 9. 8 = 58.8 N
kesâ yeerÛe mheMeea Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ µ nes lees yuee@keâ B efkeâleves
Since 100 N > 58.8 N
meceÙe kesâ Ghejevle efJejece DeJemLee keâes Øeehle nesiee? Therefore slab will accelerate with different
acceleration
µmg = Fk = 40 a
(a) v/g (b) v/(gµ) 0.4 × 10 × 9.8 = 40a
(c) gµ/v (d) g/v a = 0.98 m/s2
AIPMT-2007 111. If a ladder is not in balance against a smooth
vertical wall, then it can be made in balance
Ans. (b) : Let mass of Block = m
by/Ùeefo Skeâ meerÌ{er efkeâmeer Skeâ eqmLeefle kesâ efueS, efÛekeâveer
Friction Force, f = µ .N
GOJee&Oej oerJeej kesâ menejs mevlegefuele veneR nesleer nw, lees Fmes
meblegefuele efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw–
(a) Decreasing the length of ladder /meerÌ{er keâer uecyeeF&
Ieše keâj
(b) Increasing the length of ladder / meerÌ{er keâer uecyeeF&
yeÌ{e keâj
(c) Increasing the angle of inclination/PegkeâeJe keâesCe
yeÌ{e keâj
∑Fx = 0 ⇒ µ.N = ma ............... (i)
(d) Decreasing the angle of inclination/PegkeâeJe keâesCe
∑Fy = 0 ⇒ N = mg ................. (ii) Ieše keâj
⇒ µ.mg = ma AIPMT-1998
⇒ a = µ.g Ans. (c): The ladder will slip because of the
From Newton's first law of motion gravitational force acting on it the downwards direction.
vf = vi + at which is given by Mg cosθ, where M is the mass of the
Given final velocity vf = 0 ladder and 'θ' is the angle of inclination. Change in
length will have no effect in the force due to gravity.
Initial velocity vi = v
But, when the angle of inclination is increased it will
Acceleration a = – a cause the value of cos θ to decrease and hence, reducing
0 = v – at the horizontal effect due to force due to the gravity.
v 112. A block has been placed on a inclined plane
⇒ v = at ⇒ t =
a with the slope angle θ, block slides down the
v plane at constant speed. The coefficient of
⇒ t= kinetic friction is equal to
µg
110. If 100N force is applied to 10 kg block as Skeâ efheC[ vele meceleue θ hej jKee nw~ Ùen meceeve Jesie mes
shown in diagram then acceleration produced veerÛes efheâmeuelee nw~ ieeflekeâ Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ keâe ceeve nesiee:
for slab/10 kg kesâ Skeâ iegškesâ hej 100N keâe yeue (a) sinθ (b) cosθ (c) g (d) tanθ
Deejesefhele keâjW lees heefókeâe ceW GlheVe lJejCe keäÙee nesiee- AIPMT-1993
Physics 110 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d) : We know that,
Kinetic friction force fk = µ FN 4.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
Where µ = coefficient of kinetic friction
N = Normal force 114. A ball is travelling with uniform translatory
motion. This means that/keâesF& ieWo Skeâ meceeve
mLeeveeblejerÙe ieefle keâj jner nw~ Fmekeâe DeLe& nw efkeâ–
(a) It is at rest./Ùen efJejece DeJemLee ceW nw~
(b) The path can be a straight line or circular and
the ball travels with uniform speed./Fmekeâe heLe
mejue jsKeerÙe DeLeJee Je=òeekeâej nes mekeâlee nw Deewj ieWo Skeâ
On a plane perpendicular to inclination meceeve Ûeeue mes Ûeue jner nw~
N = mg cosθ (c) All parts of the ball have the same velocity
fK = µN (magnitude and direction) and the velocity is
= µ mg cosθ constant./ieWo kesâ meYeer YeeieeW keâe Jesie (heefjceeCe SJeb
Adding all the forces along the plane of inclinator mg
mg sinθ – µmg cosθ = ma efoMee) meceeve nw leLee Ùen Jesie efveÙele nw~
Since, velocity is constant, acceleration is zero (d) The centre of the ball moves with constant
mg sinθ – µmg cosθ = 0 velocity and the ball spins about its centre
mg sin θ uniformly./ieWo keâe keWâõ DeÛej Jesie mes ieefle keâjlee nw
⇒ µ= leLee ieWo Deheves keWâõ kesâ heefjle: Skeâ meceeve IetCe&ve keâjleer nw~
mg cos θ
⇒ µ = tanθ Ans. (c) : Q ''When a body moves in such a way that the
113. Starting from rest, a body slides down a 45º linear distance covered by each particle of the body is
inclined plane in twice the time it takes to slide same during the motion, then the motion is said to be
down the same distance in the absence of translatory motion.
friction. The coefficient of friction between the Hence, if a ball travelling with uniform translatory
body and the inclined plane is/Ùeefo efJejeceeJemLee mes motion, this means that, all the parts of the ball have the
45º kesâ Kegjogjs vele meceleue hej efheâmeueves hej keâesF& efheC[ same velocity (Magnitude and direction) and the
efÛekeâves meceleue hej efheâmeueves keâe oesiegvee meceÙe ueslee nw velocity is constant.
lees vele meceleue keâe Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ nesiee- 115. A metre scale is moving with uniform velocity.
(a) 0.80 (b) 0.75 This implies/keâesF& ceeršj mkesâue Skeâ meceeve Jesie mes
(c) 0.25 (d) 0.33 ieefleceeve nw~ Fmekeâe DeLe& nw efkeâ
AIPMT-1988 (a) The force acting on the scale is zero, but a
Ans. (b) : Acceleration without friction aw = g sinθ torque about the centre of mass can act on the
Acceleration with friction af = g sinθ – µg cosθ scale./mkesâue hej ueieves Jeeues yeue keâe heefjceeCe MetvÙe nw~
Now time taken t =
2h hejbleg mkesâue hej õJÙeceeve keWâõ kesâ heefjle: keâesF& yeue-DeeIetCe&
a keâeÙe& keâj mekeâlee nw~
Let T be the time taken in the absence of friction. (b) The force acting on the scale is zero and the
Tf time taken in the presence of friction torque acting about centre of mass of the
Given: Tf = 2T scale is also zero./mkesâue hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue keâe
T af gsin θ − µg cos θ heefjceeCe MetvÙe nw Deewj mkesâue kesâ õJÙeceeve keâWõ kesâ heefjle:
⇒ = =
Tf aw gsin θ keâeÙe& keâjves Jeeuee yeue DeeIetCe& Yeer MetvÙe nw~
1 (c) The total force acting on it need not be zero
⇒ = 1 − µ cot θ but the torque on it is zero./Fme hej ueieves Jeeue
2
On squaring both sides, we get kegâue yeue MetvÙe nesvee DeeJeMÙekeâ veneR nw hejbleg Fme hej
1 keâeÙe& keâjves Jeeuee yeue DeeIetCe& MetvÙe nw~
= 1 − µ cot θ [θ = 45º]
4 (d) Neither the force nor the torque need to be
1 zero./mkesâue hej keâeÙe& keâjves Jeeues ve lees yeue Deewj ve ner
= 1 − µ cot 45º [cot 45º = 1]
4 yeue DeeIetCe& keâe MetvÙe nesvee DeeJeMÙekeâ nw~
1 r r
= 1− µ Ans. (b) : Find net force : Formula used : Fnet = ma
4 Q There is no change in velocity as the meter scale is moving
1 3 with uniform velocity, its acceleration will be zero.
µ = 1 − = = 0.75 r
4 4 ⇒ Fnet = m × 0 = 0 ...(i)

Physics 111 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Hence, The net force acting on the body must be zero. 118. Conservation of momentum in a collision
Now, find torque; between particles can be understood from/keâCeeW
r r r kes â yeerÛe mebIeó ceW mebJesie mebj#eCe keâe DeJeyeesOeve efkeâme
Q τ = r ×f
r
Fnet = 0 n
(from eq (i))
DeeOeej hej efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw?
r (a) Conservation of energy./Tpee& mebj#eCe
⇒ τ=0
Hence, it is clear that for an object to move with uniform (b) Newton's first law only./kesâJeue vÙetšve keâe ØeLece
velocity, both net force and torque must be zero. efveÙece
116. A cricket ball of mass 150 g has an initial (c) Newton's second law only./kesâJeue vÙetšve keâe
r efÉleerÙe efveÙece
velocity u = ( 3iˆ + 4jˆ) ms–1 and a final velocity
r (d) Both Newton's second and third law./vÙetšve kesâ
v = −( 3iˆ + 4jˆ) ms–1 after being hit. The change in
efÉleerÙe SJeb le=leerÙe efveÙece
momentum (final momentum–initial momentum)
Ans. (d) : Conservation of momentum in a collision
is (in kg m s–1)/150g õJÙeceeve keâer efkeâmeer ef›eâkesâš keâer ieWo
r between particles can be understood from both
keâe ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie u = ( 3iˆ + 4jˆ) Deewj efnš nesves kesâ yeeo Newton's second and third law.
r Since, we know from Newton's second law,
Debeflece Jesie v = −(3iˆ + 4jˆ) ms–1 nw~ ieWo keâe mebJesie
dp
heefjJele&ve kgms–1 nw– External force =
dt
(a) zero/MetvÙe (b) –(0.45iˆ + 0.6j) ˆ
Now, if Fnet = 0, dp = 0, p = constant
(c) –(0.9iˆ +1.2j)
ˆ (d) –5(iˆ + ˆj) Hence, momentum of a system will remain conserve if
external force on the system is zero.
Ans. (c) : Given; mass (m) = 150g = 0.15kg And from Newton's Third law.
r
Initial velocity u = (3iˆ + 4ˆj)m / sec. In case of collision between particles equal and opposite
r forces will act on individual particles.
Final velocity v = –(3iˆ + 4ˆj)m / sec.
r r Hence, total force on the system will be zero.
Now, initial momentum (P1 ) = mu Then momentum of system will remain conserve.
= 0.15 × (3iˆ + 4ˆj) 119. A hockey player is moving northward and
suddenly turns westward with the same speed
= (0.45iˆ + 0.6ˆj)kgm / sec. to avoid an opponent. The force that acts on
r r the player is/ne@keâer keâe keâesF& efKeueeÌ[er efJehe#eer mes
& final momentum = (P2 ) = mv 2
yeÛeves kesâ efueS Gòej efoMee ceW peeles-peeles hetJe&Jeleea Ûeeue
= 0.15 × (–3iˆ – 4ˆj)
mes ner DeÛeevekeâ heefMÛece keâer Deesj cegÌ[ peelee nw~
= (–0.45iˆ – 0.6ˆj)kgm / sec. efKeueeÌ[er hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue nw :
r r r
Therefore, change in momentum ∆p = p 2 – p1 (a) Frictional force along westward./heefMÛece efoMee
= (–0.45iˆ – 0.6ˆj) – (0.45iˆ + 0.6ˆj) ceW Ie<e&Ce yeue
= –(0.9iˆ + 1.2ˆj)kgm / sec. (b) Muscle force along southward./oef#eCe efoMee ceW
Hence,change in momentum is
hesMeerÙe yeue
r
∆p = –(0.9iˆ + 1.2ˆj)kgm / sec. (c) Frictional force along south-west./oef#eCe-heefMÛece
efoMee ceW Ie<e&Ce yeue
117. In the previous problem 3, the magnitude of
(d) Muscle force along south-west./oef#eCe-heefMÛece
the momentum transferred during the hit
is/efheÚues ØeMve mebKÙee 3 ceW efnš nesves keâer Øeef›eâÙee ceW efoMee ceW hesMeerÙe yeue
nmleeleefjle mebJesie keâe heefjceeCe nw– Ans. (c) :
(a) zero/MetvÙe (b) 0.75 kg m s–1
–1
(c) 1.5 kg m s (d) 14 kg m s–1
Ans. (c) : From above solution (3) we have,
r
Change in momentum ∆p = –(0.9iˆ + 1.2ˆj)kgm / sec.
Thus, the magnitude of the momentum transferred
r r r
during the hit is ∆p = (–0.9) 2 + (–1.2)2 In above figure, OA = P1 = initial momentum of player
r
∆p = 0.81 + 1.44 northward.
→ →
r O B = P 2 = Final momentum of player westward.
∆p = 2.25
r According to triangle law of vectors.
∆p = 1.5kgm / sec. r r r
OA + AB = OB
Physics 112 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
uuur r r
AB = OB – OA ∴ Velocity of The body along x – axis at any time is.
r r vx = ux + axt
= P2 – P1 As body will have a velocity along the y-axis, Therefore
Thus the change in momentum of player is along south its velocity along x-axis will be zero.
west. vx = 0
As motion is due to frictional force of reaction of the 3
ground, therefore, force that acts on the player is Now, force along x-axis fx = – 3 or a = –
frictional force along south-west. 5
Force = ma
120. A body of mass 2 kg travels according to the
law x(t) = pt + qt2 + rt3 where p = 3 m s–1, q = 4 So, from v = u+at we get
ms–2 and r = 5 m s-3. The force acting on the  3 
0 = 6 +− ×t
body at t = 2 seconds is/2kg õJÙeceeve keâes keâesF&  5 
efheb[ meceerkeâjCe x(t) = pt + qt2 + rt3 kesâ Devegmeej 5
ieefle keâjlee nw, ÙeneB p = 3 m s–1, q = 4 ms–2 Deewj r = or t = 6 × = 10
3
5 m s-3 nw~ t = 10 sec
t = 2s hej efheb[ hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue nw 122. A car of mass m starts from rest and acquires a
r
(a) 136 N (b) 134 N velocity along east v = viˆ (v > 0) in two seconds.
(c) 158 N (d) 68 N Assuming the car moves with uniform
Ans. (a) : Given ; x (t) = pt + qt2 + rt3 acceleration, the force exerted on the car
Where, p = 3m/sec, q = 4m/sec2, r = 5/sec3 is/efJejece DeJemLee mes ieefle DeejbYe keâjves Jeeueer m
dx d õJÙeceeve keâer efkeâmeer keâej keâe 2s ceW hetJe& efoMee ceW Jesie
Velocity, v = = (pt + qt 2 + rt 3 ) r
dt dt v = viˆ (v > 0) nes peelee nw~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ keâej
v = p + 2qt + 3rt2 Skeâ meceeve lJejCe mes ieefle keâjleer nw, keâej hej ueieves
Acceleration, a =
r dv d
= (p + 2qt + 3rt 2 ) Jeeuee yeue keâe heefjceeCe–
dt dt
r (a) mv eastward and is exerted by the car engine./
a = 2q + 6rt 2
At t = 2sec mv hetJe& efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe nw Deewj keâej kesâ Fbpeve Éeje
a = 2 × (4m/sec2) + 6 (5m/sec3) × 2sec 2
a = 8 m/sec2 + 60 m/sec2 ueieeÙee peelee nw~
a = 68 m/sec2 (b) Eastward and is due to the friction on the tyres
Therefore, the force acting on the body of mass 2 kg is exerted by the road./ mv hetJe& efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe nw
F = ma 2
F = ma Deewj meÌ[keâ leLee šeÙejeW kesâ yeerÛe Ie<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe nw~
F = (2 kg) × (68m/sec2) (c) More than mv eastward exerted due to the
F = 136N 2
121. A body with mass 5 kg is acted upon by a force engine and overcomes the friction of the road./
r mv mes DeefOekeâ hetJe& kesâ DevegefoMe nw leLee Jen Fbpeve Éeje
F = (–3iˆ + 4j) ˆ N. If its initial velocity at t = 0 is
2
r
u = (6iˆ – 12j)ˆ m s–1, the time at which it will just meÌ[keâ kesâ Ie<e&Ce mes heej heeves kesâ efueS ueielee nw~
have a velocity along the y-axis is/ 5kg õJÙeceeve (d) mv exerted by the engine./ mv nw pees Fbpeve kesâ
r 2 2
kesâ efkeâmeer efheb[ hej keâesF& yeue F = (–3iˆ + 4j)
ˆ keâeÙe& keâj
r keâejCe ueielee nw~
jne nw~ Ùeefo u = (6iˆ – 12j) ˆ m s–1, hej efheb[ keâe ØeejbefYekeâ
Ans. (b) : Given ;
Jesie nes, lees Jen meceÙe peye Fmekeâe Jesie kesâJeue y-De#e kesâ Mass of the car = m
DevegefoMe nesiee, nw– Initial velocity, u = 0 (as car starts from rest)
(a) 0 (b) 10 s Final velocity v = v î along east.
(c) 2 s (d) 15 s t = 2sec.
Ans. (b) : Here, m = 5kg Using, v = u + at
r
F = (–3iˆ + 4ˆj)N r v
r ⇒ v î = 0 + a × 2 or, a = ˆi
u = (6iˆ –12ˆj)m / sec 2
r r mv ˆ mv
Now, acceleration of the body is. Thus, F = ma = i= eastward
r 2 2
r F –3iˆ + 4ˆj)  –3iˆ 4ˆj 
a= = = +  m / sec 2 This is due to the friction on the tyres exerted by the
m 5  5 5 
 road

Physics 113 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
5.
Wor
Work, Energy and
nd Power
Po
2. A force F= 20 + 10y acts cts on a particle in y-
5.1 Work direction where F is in newton newto and y in meter.
Work done by this forcee to move the particle
1. The restoring force of a sprin
spring with a block from y =0 to y=1 m is/efkeâmeer âmeer keâCe hej y-efoMee ceW
attached to the free end d of the spring is keâesF& yeue F = 20 +10y keâeÙe& keâj jne nw, ÙeneB F vÙetšve
represented by: ceW leLee y ceeršj ceW nw~ Fme keâCee keâes
ke y = 0 mes y = 1m
efkeâmeer efmØebie, efpemekesâ cegòeâ efmejss mes Skeâ iegškeâe pegÌ[e lekeâ ieefle keâjeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe&
keâeÙ nw:
ngDee nw, keâe ØelÙeeveÙeve yeue efvecvee kesâ Éeje efve™efhele nw: (a) 5 J (b) 25 J
(c) 20 J (d) 30 J
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (b) : Given that,
(a) (b)
Force (F) = 20 + 10y
Work done by variable force is
yf

W = ∫ Fdy
yi

(c) (d) W = ∫ ( 20 + 10y ) dy (here yi = 0 and yf = 1)

0
1
 10y 2 
=  20y + 
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022  2 0
Ans. (d) : When the spring is compress
pressed or elongated, W = 25J
it tends to recover its original length on account of 3. An object of mass 500g, initially initial at rest, is acted
elasticity. upon by a variable force ce whose
wh X-component
• For small stretch or compressionon it ffollows Hooke's varies with X in the manner man shown. The
law. velocities of the object at the points X = 8 m
• Restoring force ∝ stretch or compress
mpression and X = 12 m, would have ve the respective values
F = – kx of (nearly)
Where, k = spring constant 500 g keâe keâesF& efheC[ pees DeejcYee ceW efJejeceeJemLee ceW nw, hej
x = expansion or compression inn mete
meter. keâesF& heefjJeleea yeue, efpemekeâe X-Ieškeâ
Ieš DeejsKe ceW oMee&S
• The –ve sign represents that restorin
estoring force always Devegmeej efJeÛejCe keâjlee nw, Deejesehele
hf ele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~
directed towards the equilibrium posi
position. Fme efheC[ kesâ efyevogDeeW X = 8 m leLee X = 12 m hej
JesieeW kesâ ceeve ›eâceMe: neWies
x

• The restoring force of spring is rep

represented by the
graph is –
x

(a) 18 m/s and 20.6 m/s (b) 18 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(c) 23 m/s and 24.4 m/s (d) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019,
20. (Odisha)
Physics 114 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): From work-energy theorem, (a) WP = WQ ; WP = WQ
∆ K.E = work = area under F – x graph (b) WP > WQ ; WQ > WP
From x = 0 to x = 8m (c) WP < WQ ; WQ < WP
1 2 (d) WP = WQ ; WP > WQ
mv = ( 5 × 20 ) + ( 3 ×10 )
2 AIPMT-03.05.2015
1 1
∴ mv2 = 100 + 30 Ans. (b) : Case (a) W = KX 2
2 2
∴ v2 = 520 (∵ m = 500g = 0.5kg) 1
WP = K PX 2
∴ v = 520 = 22.8 ≈ 23 m/s 2
1
Similarly, from x = 0 to x = 12 m WQ = K Q X 2
1 2 2
mv = 100 + 30 – (47.5) + 20 Q K P > K Q ∴ WP > WQ
2
1 1
∴ mv2 = 102.5 Case (b) : W = FX
2 2
2 ×102.5 F = K P XP = KQXQ
∴ v2 =
0.5 X P KQ
∴ =
∴v= 410 ≈ 20.6 m/s XQ K P
4. A particle moves from a point ( -2iˆ + 5jˆ ) to
∴
WP X P K Q
= =
( 4jˆ + 3kˆ ) when a force of ( 4iˆ + 3jˆ ) N is applied. WQ X Q K P

How much work has been done by the force? Q K Q < K P ∴ WP < WQ

( )
efkeâme keâCe hej 4iˆ + 3jˆ N yeue ueieeves hej Jen efyevog Hence WP > WQ ; WQ > WP
( -2iˆ + 5jˆ ) mes efyevog ( 4jˆ + 3kˆ ) lekeâ
efJemLeeefhele nes 6. A uniform force of (3î + ĵ) newton acts on a
particle of mass 2kg. Hence the particle is
peelee nw Fme Øeef›eâÙee ceW yeue Éje efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe&
displaced from position (2î+ k̂ ) meter to position
efkeâlevee nesiee ?
(a) 8J (b) 11J ( )
4iˆ + 3jˆ - kˆ meter. The work done by the force
(c) 5J (d) 2J on the particle is :/efkeâmeer keâCe keâe õJÙeceeve 2kg nw~
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Fme keâCe hej ( 3iˆ + ˆj) vÙetšve keâe Skeâmeceeve yeue ueielee
Ans. (c) :Work done is given by-
ur uur
W = F.ds nw~ pees Gmes Gmekeâer efmLeefle ( 2iˆ + kˆ ) ceeršj mes
( )( ) (
= 4iˆ + 3jˆ  4jˆ + 3kˆ − −2iˆ + 5jˆ 
  ) ( 4iˆ + 3jˆ - kˆ ) ceeršj efmLeefle ceW efJemLeeefhele keâj oslee nw~ Fme
= ( 4iˆ + 3jˆ )( 2iˆ − ˆj + 3kˆ ) yeue Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw-
(a) 15 J (b) 9 J
= 8 – 3 = 5J (c) 6 J (d) 13 J
5. Two similar springs P and Q have spring NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
constants KP and KQ , such that KP > KQ. The
stretched, first by the same amount (case a,) Ans. (b) : Given
then by the same force (case b). The work done Force, F = 3iˆ + ˆj
by the springs WP and WQ are related as, in
case (a) and case (b), respectively : r1 = 2iˆ + kˆ m( )
oes Skeâ meceeve keâceeefveÙeeW P leLee Q kesâ keâceeveer efmLejebkeâ
›eâceMe: KP leLee KQ nQ Deewj KP > KQ~ ØeLece yeej ('a'
(
r2 = 4iˆ + 3jˆ − kˆ m )
efmLeefle ceW) oesveeW keâes meceeve uecyeeF& mes leLee otmejer yeej Therefore,
('b' efmLeefle ceW) meceeve yeue mes, KeeRÛee peelee nw~ Ùeefo S = r2 − r1
Fve oesveeW keâceeefveÙeeW Éeje efkeâÙes ieS keâeÙe& ›eâceMe: WP ( ) (
= 4iˆ + 3jˆ − kˆ − 2iˆ + kˆ )
leLee WQ nes lees, efmLeefle (a) leLee efmLeefle (b), ceW Fvekesâ
= ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ − 2kˆ ) m
yeerÛe ›eâceMe: mecyebOe neWies:
Physics 115 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Therefore,
W = F.S. ∫ F ⋅ dx = Area under F-x graph = A1 + A2

( )( )
1 9
= 3iˆ + ˆj 2iˆ + 3jˆ − 2kˆ = ( 3 × 3) +× 3× 3 = 9 +
2 2
= 3 × 2 + 3 ×1 + 0 ⇒ W.D = 13.5J
=6+3 9. A vertical spring with force
orce constant
c K is fixed
W = 9J on a table. A ball of mass
ss m at
a a height h above
7. Force F on a particle moving ing in a straight line the free upper end of the spring
spr falls vertically
varies with distance d as show shown in the figure. on the spring so that thee spring
spr is compressed
by a distance d. The net workw done in the
The work done on the part particle during its
process is:-
displacement of 12 m is :/meerrOeer jjsKee hej ieefle keâjles
Skeâ TOJe& efmØebie cespe mes KeÌÌ[e ngDee nw~ Fmekeâe yeue
ngS keâCe hej ueiee yeue F, otjer d kesâ meeLe efÛe$e ceW
efveÙeleebkeâ K nw~ õJÙeceeve m kessâ Skeâ
Sk ieesues keâes efmØebie kesâ
efoKeeS ieÙes Devegmeej heefjJeefle&le neseslee nw~ lees keâCe kesâ 12 cegòeâ efmejs kesâ "erkeâ Thej mes TBÛeeF& h mes efiejeves hej
m efJemLeeheve kesâ oewjeve keâCe hej efkf eâÙe
eâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee: efmØebie otjer d mes efÛehekeâ peeleee nw~ Fme Øe›eâce ceW ngDee
kegâue keâeÙe& nesiee:-
1 1
(a) mg ( h − d ) + Kd 2
(b) mg ( h + d ) + Kd 2
2 2
1 2 1 2
(a) 13 J (b) 18 J (c) mg ( h + d ) − Kd
(d) mg ( h − d ) − Kd
2 2
(c) 21 J (d) 26 J AIPMT-2007
AIPMT
MT (S(Screening)-2011
Ans. (c) : Initially ball has potential
tial energy
en = mgh
Ans. (a) : Work done(w) = ∫ Fdx , whiwhich is area under After falling on spring potential tial energy
e of ball =
F– d graph. Area of rectangle + area
ea of ttriangle mg(h+d)
1
w = (4×2) + × 2 × 5
2
= 8+5
w = 13 J
8. A force F acting on an obje object varies with
distance x as shown here. The fo force is in N and x
in m. The work done by thee forcforce in moving the
object from x = 0 to x = 6 m is
Skeâ efheC[ hej ueielee ngDee yeuee F efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes Energy stored by spring after compression by
Devegmeej otjer x kesâ meeLe yeouelee nw~ ÙeneB hej yeue N ceW 1
d = Kd 2
leLee x, ceeršjeW ceW nw~ efheC[ keâes x = 0 mes x = 6 m lekeâ 2
mLeeveevleefjle keâjves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙ
keâeÙe& nesiee- Net Work done = Work done by gravitational force +
Work done by spring force.
1
So net work done in process W = mg(h+d) mg( − Kd 2
2
Note:- Work done by spring has been b taken with is
negative sign since spring force orce acts opposite in
direction to fall of ball.
(a) 18.0 J (b) 13.5 J 10. A body of mass 3 kg is under a constant force
(c) 4.5 J (d) 9.0 J which causes a displacement ent s in meters in it,
AIPMT-2005 1
given by the relation s = t 2 , where t is in
Ans. (b) : 3
seconds. Work done by the force f in 2 seconds
is:-
3 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ Skeâ efheC[ C[ hej Skeâ efmLej yeue
ef›eâÙeekeâejer nw efpememes Fmekeâe efJemLee
mL heve s (ceeršjeW ceW)
1
JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee ieÙee nw mecyevOe s = t 2 Éeje, peneB t keâe
3
ceeve meskeâC[eW ceW nw~ Fme yeue Éeje 2 meskeâC[ ceW efkeâÙee
Work done = ∫ F ⋅ dx ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee:-
Physics 116 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
5 3 Ans. (a) : Work done during the first 4s is equal to gain
(a) J (b) J in K.E
19 8
We have given-
8 19
(c) J (d) J x = 3 − 4t 2 + t 3
3 5
dx
AIPMT-2006 So, velocity, v = = −8t + 3t 2
dt
Ans. (c) : Given : Mass of body m = 3 kg At t = 0, v1 =–0+0 = 0m/s
1 At t = 4s, v2 = –8×4+3×42 = 16 m/s
Displacement s = t2
3 Now work done during t = 0 to t = 4 sec.
ds 1 2 Gain in k.E –
We know that velocity V = = × 2t = t
dt 3 3 1 1
mv 22 − mv12
2 4 2 2
at t = 2 sec ⇒ v = × 2 = m/s
= m ( v 22 − v12 )
3 3 1
dv d  2  2
Acceleration, a = =  t 1
= × 3 ×10−3 (16 ) − ( 0 ) 
2 2
dt dt  3   
2
2 2 1
a = m/s
3 = × 3 ×10−3 [ 256 − 0]
2
2 768
Force F = m. a = 3× = 2N = ×10−3
3 3
1 4 = 384 ×10−3 J
Displacement in 2 sec ⇒ s = × ( 2 ) = m
2

3 3 = 384 mJ
Work done w = f × s 13. A bullet of mass 10 g leaves a rifle at an initial
velocity of 1000 m/s and strikes the earth at the
4 8 same level with a velocity of 500 m/s. The work
= 2 × = joule
3 3 done in joule for overcoming the resistance of
11. Two springs A and B (kA = 2 kB) are stretched air will be/Skeâ yevotkeâ mes Skeâ 10 «eece keâer ieesueer
by same suspended weights then ratio of 1000 ceer/mes. ØeejefcYekeâ Jesie mes efvekeâueleer nw leLee
workdone in stretching is/ oes efmØebieeW (kA = 2 kB) meceeve ues J eue hej he=LJeer hej 500 ceer/mes. mes škeâjeleer nw~
A Deewj B keâes meceeve Yeej ueškeâe keâj KeeRÛee peelee nw, ef k eâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& petue ceW nw:
lees efkeâÙes ieÙes keâeÙeeX keâe Devegheele keäÙee nesiee :- (a) 375 (b) 3750
(c) 5000 (d) 500
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 AIPMT-1989
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 Ans. (b) : Given, mass = 10 g
AIPMT-1999 Initial velocity = 1000 m/s
Ans. (a) : Work done in a spring. Final velocity = 500 m/s
1 Work done = change in K.E of the body
W = kx 2 , (F = – kx)
2 1
w = × 0.01 (1000) – ( 500 ) 
2 2

1 F 2
F 2 2
W = k. 2 = 1
2 k 2k = × 0.01[(1000 + 500 )(1000 – 500 )]
1 W k 2
⇒W∝ ⇒ A = B 1
2k WB k A = × 0.01[(1500 × 500 )]
2
W k 1 1
∴ A = B = Given – (kA = 2kB) = ×1 × 7500 = 3750 joule
WB 2k B 2 2
2 3
12. If x = 3 – 4t + t , then work done in first 4s. 14. A body moves a distance of 10 m along a
will be (mass of the particle is 3 gram) : straight line under the action of a 5 N force. If
Ùeefo x = 3 – 4t + t lees ØeLece 4 meskeâC[ ceW efkeâÙee
2 3 the work done is 25 j, then angle between the
force and direction of motion of the body is
ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee (keâCe keâe õJÙeceeve 3 «eece nw)– Skeâ efheC[ 5 N yeue kesâ ØeYeeJe kesâ Debleie&le Skeâ mejue
(a) 384 mJ (b) 168 mJ (meerOeer) jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe 10 m keâer otjer leÙe keâjlee
(c) 192 mJ (d) None of these nw~ Ùeefo efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& 25J nw, lees yeue Deewj efheC[
AIPMT-1998 keâer ieefle keâer efoMee kesâ yeerÛe keâesCe nw:
Physics 117 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 60º (b) 75º 5
 2 x 2 3x 3 
(c) 30º (d) 45º w = 7 x – +
AIPMT-1997  2 3  0
Ans. (a) : We know that- = ( 7 × 5 – (5) 2 + (5)3 )
r r
W = F.S = 35 – 25 + 125
W = FScos θ = 135 J
Given, W = 25 J
S = 10 m 5.2 Kinetic Energy
F=5N
Now, 25 = 5 × 10 cosθ 17. A particle of mass 10 g moves along a circle of
25 = 50 cosθ radius 6.4 cm with a constant tangential
25 1 acceleration. What is the magnitude of this
cosθ = = acceleration if the kinetic energy of the particle
50 2
becomes equal to 8×10-4 J by the end of the
cosθ = cos 60 second revolution after the beginning of the
θ = 60º motion?
15. A body, constrained to move in y-direction, is 10 g õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& keâCe 6.4 mes.ceer. uecyeer ef$epÙee
subjected to a force given by kesâ Je=òe kesâ DevegefoMe efkeâmeer efveÙele mheMe&-jsKeerÙe lJejCe mes
r
F = ( –2iˆ + 15jˆ + 16kˆ ) N. The work done by this ieefle keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ieefle DeejcYe keâjves kesâ he§eeled oes
force in moving the body through a distance of heefj›eâceeSB hetjer keâjves hej keâCe keâer ieeflepe Tpee& 8×10-4
10 m along y-axis, is
J nes peeleer nw, lees Fme lJejCe keâe heefjceeCe keäÙee nw?
y-efoMee ceW ieefle keâjves keâes yeeOÙe Skeâ efheC[
r (a) 0.2 m/s2 (b) 0.1 m/s2
F = ( –2iˆ + 15jˆ + 16kˆ ) N kesâ Skeâ yeue Éeje efheC[ keâes (c) 0.15 m/s 2
(d) 0.18 m/s2
y- De#e keâer Deesj 10 ceer mLeeveebleefjle keâjves ceW efkeâÙee NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
ieÙee keâeÙe& nw: Ans. (b) : Give that, Mass, (m) = 10g = 0.01 kg
(a) 150 J (b) 20 J radius of circle (r) = 6.4 cm
(c) 190 J (d) 160 J Kinetic energy K.E. = 8 × 10-4J
AIPMT-1994 1
r Now, K.E. = mv 2 = 8 × 10 −4 J
Ans. (a) : F = ( –2i+15j+16k ) N
ˆ ˆ ˆ 2
ˆ ˆ ˆ
Where, i, j, k are the unit of the vector a long axes. 8 × 10−4 × 2
v2 =
Where S = displacement = 10 meters. 0.01
Now we have, v2 = 16 × 10-2
Work done (w) = F.S Using Newton’s third law of motion.
v2 = u2 + 2as
= ( −2i + 15 j + 6k ) .10 j
ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ [u = 0]
v2 = 2 × a × 4πr
= 150 J
v2 16 × 10−2
16. A position dependent force, F = (7 – 2x + 3x2) N a= =
acts on a small body of mass 2 kg and displaces 8πr 8 × 3.14 × 6.4 × 10−2
it from x = 0 to x = 5 m. The work done in joule a = 0.0995 m/s 2
is /Ùeefo 2 efkeâ«ee keâer Jemleg hej Skeâ efJemLeeheve-mecyeæ Hence tangential acceleration is,
yeue (7 – 2x + 3x2) N keâeÙe& keâjkesâ Fmes x = 0 mes x =
5 ceer lekeâ efJemLeeefhele keâjlee nw, lees efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& a ≈ 0.1m/s 2
(petue ceW) nw: 18. A block of mass 10 kg, moving in x direction
(a) 135 (b) 270 with a constant speed of 10 ms-1, is subjected to
(c) 35 (d) 70 a retarding force F = 0.1x J/m during its travel
AIPMT-1994, 1992 from x = 20 m to 30 m. Its final KE will be:
2 10 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ iegškeâe (yuee@keâ), x-efoMee ceW
Ans. (a) : Force (F) = (7 – 2x + 3x )N
Mass = 2 kg 10 ms-1 keâer efmLej Ûeeue mes ieefle keâj jne nw~ Fmekeâer x =
Work done w = Fdx 20 m mes x = 30 m lekeâ keâer Ùee$ee kesâ oewjeve, Fme hej
Integrate the equation- Skeâ cebokeâ yeue, F = 0.1x J/m ueieeÙee peelee nw~ Fme
∫ dw = ∫ Fdx iegškesâ keâer Debefvlece ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer:
5 (a) 450 J (b) 275 J
(
∫ dw = ∫0 7 – 2 x + 3x dx
2
) (c) 250 J (d) 475 J
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Physics 118 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d) : From Work energy theorem
rem 20. A mass m moves in a circle circ on a smooth
Work done = Change in K.E horizontal plane with velocity locity v0 at a radius R0.
The mass is attached to a string str which passes
W = K f − Ki through a smooth hole in n the plane
p as shown.
x2 1 The tension in the string is increased in gradually
K f = W + K i = ∫ F × dx + mv2
x1 2 R
and finally m moves in a circle circ of radius 0 .
30 1 2
= ∫ −0.1x dx + ×10 ×102 The final value of the kinetic netic energy
e is:-
20 2 m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheb[ (Jemleg leg), R0 ef$epÙee kesâ heLe ceW
30
 x2  efkeâmeer efÛekeâves #eweflepe meceleue kesâ Thej v0 Jesie mes ieefle
K f = −0.1   + 500
 2  20 keâj jne nw~ Ùen efheb[ Skeâ [esjerr (jmmeer
(jm ) mes pegÌ[e nw~ Ùen
[esjer meceleue hej yeves Skeâ efÛekeâves
âves efeÚõ mes neskeâj iegpejleer
K f = −0.50 302 − 202  + 500
nw pewmee efkeâ DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙeeie nw~ Fme [esjer hej
K f = −0.05[ 900 − 400] + 500 leveeJe keâes Oeerjs-Oeerjs yeÌ{eÙee peel
eelee nw~ efpememes Devle ceW
Kf = −25 + 500 R
Ùen efheb[ m, 0 ef$epÙee kessâ Je=òeekeâej heLe hej ieefle
2
K f = 475 J keâjves ueielee nw~ lees, ieeflepe Tpee&ee& keâe
ke Deefvlece ceeve nw:-
19. Two parallel metal plates each having charges
+Q and –Q face each otherr at a certain distance
between them. If the plates es are now dipped in
kerosene oil tank, the electric tric fifield between the
plates will/oes meceevlej Oeeleg keâer eâer hhuesšW Skeâ otmejs kesâ
meeceves kegâÚ otjer hej jKeer nw~ Fve huesšeW hej +Q leLee –Q
DeeJesMe nw~ Ùeefo huesšeW keâes kesâjeses fmeve kesâ šQkeâ ceW [tyees
efoÙee peeS lees Gvekesâ yeerÛe efJeÅegle #es$e – 1
(a) mv 02 (b) 2mv20
(a) become zero/MetvÙe nes peeÙesiee 4
(b) increase/yeÌ{ peeÙesiee 1
(c) mv 02 (d) mv02
(c) decrease/Ieš peeÙesiee 2
AIPMT-03.05.2015
(d) remains same/meceeve jnsiee
Ans. (b) : Since no external torque is acting on the
AIPM
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 system, thus according to law w of conservation of
Ans. (c): Kerosene will acts as a die dielectric medium. angular momentum,
There will be induced charges at the ddielectric surface Initial angular momentum = Final
al angular
ang momentum
due to which an electric field will come into the picture. mv0 R 0 = mvr
The electric field due to induced ced ccharges will be
opposite in direction to the original
inal ddirection of the mvR 0  R 
mv 0 R 0 =  ius r = 0 
Q New radius
electric field due to the plates, and th therefore the net 2  2 
electric field between the plates will
ill hav
have comparatively v = 2v0
less magnitude.
1 1
New Kinetic energy = mv 2 = × m (2v o ) 2
2 2
= 2mvo2
21. Two charges q1 and q2 are re placed
pla 30 cm apart,
as shown in the figure.. A third th charge q3 is
moved along the arc of a circle circl of radius 40 cm
from C to D. The change ange in the potential
• Electirc field between two parallel
rallel pplates placed in q3
vacuum is given by energy of system is k , where k is-
4πε 0
σ
E= Fme efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes Devegmeej oeses DeeJes
De MeeW q1 Deewj q2 keâes
∈0
hejmhej 30 cm keâer otjer hej jKeeee nwn~ Skeâ leermejs DeeJesMe
in a medium of dielectric constant K. q3 keâes 40 cm ef$epÙee kesâ Je=òe keâer keâe Ûeehe kesâ jemles efyevog
σ C mes efJevog D lekeâ ues peeÙeee ieÙee ieÙ nw~ Fme ef›eâÙee ceW
E' =
∈0 K q3
for kerosene oil K > 1 ⇒ E ' < E efvekeâeÙe keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ceW heefjJele&
J ve k nes lees
4πε 0
Hence option (c) is correct. k keâe ceeve nesiee-
Physics 119 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library

(a) 8q2 (b) 6q2

 −qQ 1 
(c) 8q1 (d) 6q1 (a)  2 
2a (b) zero
AIPMT-2005  4πε0 a 
Ans. (a) :  qQ 1  1  qQ 1 
(c)  2 
(d)  2 
2a
 4πε0 a  2  4πε0 a 
AIPMT-2005
Ans. (b)

1
Let Potential energy, U = k
4πε0
q1 = Charge of first body
q2 = Charge of second body
The potential energy when q3 is att point c
By formula
 
1  q1q 3 q 2q 3  1 q1q 2
U1 = + Potential energy of two charge U =
4πε 0  0.40 ( 0.400 ) + ( 0.30 )
2 2  4πε0 r
 
When charge -Q is placed at point
int A, potential energy
1  q1q 3 q 2q 3 
U1 = + −Qq −Qq
4πε 0  0.40 0.50  UA = ⇒ UA =
The potential energy when q3 is att point D 4πε 0 ( OA ) 4πε 0 a
1  q1q 3 q 2 q 3  When charge -Q is placed at point
int B, potential
p energy
U2 = +
4 πε 0  0.40 0.10  UB =
−Qq
⇒ UB =
− Qq
So change in potential energy is 4πε 0 ( OB ) 4πε 0 a
∆U = U2 − U1 Work done W = UB − UA
q
∆U = 3 k −Qq  −Qq 
4πε 0 W= −  ⇒ W=0
4πε0 a  4πε0 a 
q3 1  q1q 3 q 2 q 3 q1q 3 q 2 q 3 
k=  0.40 + 0.10 − −
4πε 0 4πε 0  .10 00.40 0.50  23. A ball of mass 2 kg and d another
anot of mass 4 kg
are dropped together from a 60 feet tall
q 2 q 3 q 2 q3 building. After a fall off 30 feet f each towards
q3k = −
0.1 0.5 earth, their respective kinetic energies will be
q 2 ( 0.5 ) − ( 0.1) q 2 in the ratio of -
k= 2 kg leLee 4 kg keâer ieWoeW keâess Skeâ
Ske ner meceÙe Skeâ 60
( 0.1)( 0.5)
0.4q 2
hegâš TBÛeer Fceejle mes Skeâ meeLe ÚesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ he=LJeer keâer
k= Deesj 30 hegâš efiejves hej Gvekeâ vekeâer ›eâceevegmeej ieeflepe
0.05
k = 8q 2
Tpee&DeeW keâer Devegheele nesiee -
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 2
22. As per this diagram a pointt cha charge +q is placed
at the origin O. Work done ne in taking another (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2:1
point charge –Q from the poin point A coordinates AIPMT-2004
(0, a) to another point B coo coordinates (a, 0) Ans. (b) : Given that :-
along the straight path AB is
Fme efÛe$e kesâ Devegmeej Skeâ efyevog +q cetue efyevog O hej Mass, m1 = 2kg
jKee ieÙee nw~ Skeâ DevÙe DeeJesMs e –Q keâes efyevog A Mass, m2 = 4kg
efveoXMeebkeâ (0, a) mes efyevog B efveoxMx eebkeeâ (a, 0) lekeâ meerOes Now Kinetic energy = 1 mV2
heLe AB mes ues peeves hej efkeâÙee ieÙeeee kekeâeÙe& nesiee- 2
Physics 120 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) m (b) mº (d) 1/ m
(c) m
AIPMT-1994
Ans. (b) : As per the question, it's given that mass of
the object is equal to m
The body is moving under the constant force.
F
a=
m
Here, V1 = V2 = 2gh We know that, v2 = u2 + 2as
As both balls are falling through the same height v2 = 2as
therefore they passes same velocity.
v = 2as
KE ∝ m (V = constant)
F
1 2 ⇒ v = 2  s
( KE )1 2 m 1 V1 2 1 m
∴ = = = { Q V 1 = V 2}
( KE )2 1
m 2 V22 4 2
Now, the k.E of the object
2 mv 2
k.E =
24. A stationary particle explodes into two 2
particles of masses m1 and m2 which move in m  2F 
opposite directions with velocities v1 and v2. k.E =   s = F.s
The ratio of their Kinetic Energies E1/E2 is: 2m
efJeßeeceeJemLee cesW jKee Skeâ keâCe, efJemHeâesš kesâ yeeo m1 Hence, it s independent of mass.
Je m2 õJÙeceeve kesâ oes keâCeeW ceW štš peelee efJemHeâesš kesâ
yeeo Ùes keâCe efJehejerle efoMeeDeeW ceW v1 Je v2 Jesie mes Ûeueles 5.3 Potential Energy
nQ~ Gvekeâer ieeflepe Tpee&DeeW keâe Devegheele E1/E2 nesiee:
(a) m2/m1 (b) m1/m2 26. The potential energy of a long spring when
(c) 1 (d) m1v2/m2v1 stretched by 2 cm is U. If the spring is stretched
AIPMT-2003 by 8 cm, potential energy stored in it will be :
Ans. (a): efkeâmeer uecyes efmØebie keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& U nw peye Fmes
2cm KeeRÛee peelee nw~ Ùeefo efmØebie keâes 8 cm KeeRÛee
peeÙes, lees FmeceW mebefÛele Tpee& nesieer :
According to momentum conservation- (a) 16U (b) 2U (c) 4U (d) 8U
m(0) = m1v1 + m2(-v2) NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
m1v1 = m2v2 ... (i) AIPMT-2006
v1 m 2 Ans. (a) : We know that,
= ... (ii)
v2 m1 The potential energy of the spring is –
Now, ratio of Kinetic Energies- 1
U = kx 2
( KE )1 m1v12 / 2 2
=
( KE )2 m2 v22 / 2 U ∝ x2
U1 x12
m1 ( v1 )
2
=
= U 2 x 22
m 2 ( v2 )
2

U ( 2)
2
4
m1  m 2 
2
 From eq (i) 
n = =
= .    U 2 ( 8 )2 64
m 2  m1   m1 v1 = m 2 v 2  U2 = 16 U
( K.E.)1 m2 27. A spring of force constant k is cut into lengths
=
( K.E.)2 m1 of ratio 1 : 2 : 3. They are connected in series
and the new force constant is k'. Then they are
25. The kinetic energy acquired by a mass m in connected in parallel and force constant is k''.
travelling distance d, starting from rest, under Then k' : k'' is/Skeâ efmhebÇie (keâceeveer) keâe keâceeveer
the action of a constant force is directly efmLejebkeâ k nw~ Fmekeâes leerve YeeieeW ceW keâeš efoÙee ieÙee nw
proportional to/Skeâ Jemleg efJejeceeJemLee mes d otjer efpemekeâer uecyeeF&ÙeeW keâe Devegheele 1:2:3 nw~ Fve leerveeW
Ûeuekeâj Skeâmeceeve yeue kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW ieeflepe Tpee& Øeehle YeeieeW keâes ßesCere ›eâce ceW peesÌ[ves hej, mebÙeespeve keâe keâceeveer
keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo Jemleg keâe õJÙeceeve m nw, lees ieeflepe Tpee& efmLejebkeâ k' leLee meceevlej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[ves hej k" nw~ lees,
efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekesâ meceevegheeleer nesieer? Devegheele k' : k" nesiee:
Physics 121 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 1 : 6 (b) 1 : 9  dU 
(c) 1 : 11 (d) 1 : 14 F = − 
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017  dr 
 −2A B 
Ans. (c) : Let l be the complete length of the spring = − 3 + 2 
lengths when cut in ratio 1 : 2 : 3 then length of  r r 
individual part is - • At equilibrium,
l l l −dU
, , and F= =0
6 3 2 dr
1 −2A B
Spring constant (k) ∝ F= 3 + 2 =0
length(l ) r r
Spring constant for given segments 2A B
=
k1 = 6k, k2 = 3k and k3 = 2k r3 r 2
When they are connected in series
2A
1 1 1 1 r=
= + + B
k ' 6k 3k 2k
30. The potential energy of a system increases if
1 6 1 work done is :/efkeâmeer efvekeâeÙe keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ceW
= =
k ' 6k k Je=efæ nes peeleer nw, Ùeefo
∴ Force constant k' = k (a) Upon the system by a conservative force
When they are connected in parallel
efvekeâeÙe hej efkeâmeer mebj#eer yeue Éeje keâeÙe& efkeâÙee peeS
k" = 6k + 3k + 2k
(b) Upon the system by a non conservative force
k" = 11 k
efvekeâeÙe hej efkeâmeer Demebj#eer yeue Éeje keâeÙe& efkeâÙee peeS
k' 1
The ratio = i.e. k ' : k " = 1:11 (c) by the system against a conservative force
k " 11 efvekeâeÙe Éeje mebj#eer yeue kesâ efJe™æ keâeÙe& efkeâÙee peeS
28. A particle with total energy E is moving in a (d) by the system against a non conservative
potential energy region U(x). Motion of the force
particle is restricted to the region when efvekeâeÙe Éeje Demebj#eer yeue kesâ efJe™æ keâeÙe& efkeâÙee peeS
(a) U(x) > E (b) U(x) < E
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(c) U(x) = O (d) U(x) < E
Ans. (c) : Potential energy U for a system is defined as :
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Wint = – ∆U = – (Uf – Ui) ...................(i)
Ans. (d) : We know that total Energy = P.E. + K.E f r r
E = U (x) + K (x) ∫i F.dr = – (Uf – Ui) ............................(ii)
Given particle is moving so, K(x) ≥ 0 r
Where F is an internal conservative force, and Wint is
E – U (x) = KE ≥ 0
work done by the internal conservative force.
E – U (x) ≥ 0 If U increases then Uf > Ui, or the term – (Uf – Ui) will
E ≥ U (x) be negative
29. The potential energy of a particle in a force → Wint will become negative
field is:/efkeâmeer yeue #es$e ceW keâCe keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ∴ System has done work against the conservative force.
A B 31. A block of mass M is attached to the lower end
efvecveefueefKele nw: U = 2 −
r r of a vertical spring. The spring is hung from a
Where, A and B are positive constants and r is ceiling and has force constant value k. The
the distance of particle from the centre of the mass is released from rest with the spring
field. For stable equilibrium, the distance of the initially unstretched. The maximum extension
particle is:/peneB A, B Oeveelcekeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nQ leLee r produced in the length of the spring will be:
keâCe keâer yeue #es$e kesâ kesâvõ mes otjer nw~ mLeeÙeer meblegueve /Skeâ TOJee&Oej efmhebÇie kesâ efveÛeues efmejs hej M õJÙeceeve
keâer oMee ceW keâCe keâer otjer nesieer: keâe Skeâ efheC[ yebOee nw~ efmØebie Skeâ Úle mes ueškeâe nQ
(a) A/B (b) B/A leLee Gmekesâ yeue efveÙeleebkeâ keâe ceeve k nw~ peye efheb[ keâes
(c) B/2A (d) 2A/B cegòeâ ÚesÌ[e ieÙee lees Ùen efJejece DeJemLee ceW Lee Deewj
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
efmØebie efyevee efKebÛeeJe Lee~ efmhebÇie keâer uecyeeF& ceW
Ans. (d) : • Given potential energy of a particle in a
DeefOekeâlece Je=efæ nesieer:
A B
force field is U= 2 − (a) Mg/2k (b) Mg/k
r r (c) 2 Mg/k (d) 4 Mg/k
• Force experienced by the particle in the field, AIMPT-2009
Physics 122 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Skeâ DeCeg ceW oes hejceeCegDeeW kesâ yeerÛe efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâes
a b
U( x ) =– Éeje JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw, peneB a
x12 x 6
Deewj b Oeveelcekeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nQ leLee x hejceeCegDeeW kesâ
yeerÛe keâer otjer nw~ hejceeCeg efmLej meecÙe ceW neslee nw, peye
1/ 6 1/ 6
 2a   11a 
(a) x =   (b) x =  
When spring is stretched then,  b   5b 
Loss of potential energy = gain in spring energy  a 
1/ 6

1 (c) x = 0 (d) x =  
Mg x = kx 2  2b 
2 AIPMT-1995
2Mg Ans. (a) : Consider two atoms in a molecule that is
x=
k separated by a certain distance x
32. When a long spring is stretched by 2 cm, its The potential energy U of two atoms, at a distance apart
potential energy is U. If the spring is stretched by is
10 cm, the potential energy stored in it will be: a b
Skeâ uecyes efmØebie keâes KeeRÛeves hej peye Gmekeâer uecyeeF& 2 U(x) = 12 – 6
x x
cm yeÌ{ peeleer nw, leye Gmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& U nw~ Ùeefo The atom is in stable equilibrium when
efmØebie keâes KeeRÛekeâj Gmekeâer uecyeeF& 10 cm yeÌ{e oer du
peeS, leye GmeceW mebefÛele efmLeeflepe Tpee& nesieer: F(x) = – =0 ...(i)
dx
(a) U/5 (b) 5 U du d  a b
(c) 10 U (d) 25 U Now, =  12 – 6 
dx dx  x x 
AIPMT-2003
Ans. (d): Given that x1 = 2 cm x2 = 10 cm ⇒
du
=
d
( ax –12 – bx –6 )
The potential energy of a stretched spring is- dx dx
1 du (
U = kx 2 = –12ax –13 + 6bx –7 )
2 dx
Here, k = Spring constant
du
x = Elongation in spring = 6bx –7 –12ax –13
1 dx
U = k(2) 2 Putting this value in the above condition we get-
2
F(x) = 6bx–7 –12ax–13 = 0
1 6bx–7 = 12ax–13
U = k(4) ...(i)
2
x13 12a 2a
If elongation is 10 cm then potential energy ⇒ = =
1 x7 6b b
U' = k(10) 2 2a
2 ⇒ x6 =
1 b
U ' = k (100 ) ...(ii)
2 2a
∴ x =6
On dividing eqn (ii) by eqn (i) b
1 Therefore, the atom is in stable equilibrium when
U' 2 (
k 100 ) 1/ 6
= 2a  2a 
U 1 x=6 = 
k ( 4) b  b 
2
34. When a spring is subjected to 4N force its
U' length is 'a' metre and if 5N is applied its length
= 25
U is 'b' metre. If 9N is applied its length is
U ' = 25 U peye efmØebie hej 4N keâe yeue ueieeles nQ, lees Fmekeâer uecyeeF&
a ceer. nw leLee peye 5N keâe yeue ueieeles nQ, lees uecyeeF& b
33. The potential energy between two atoms, in a
a b
ceer. nw peye Ùeefo 9N yeue Deejesefhele keâjW lees uecyeeF& keäÙee
molecule, is given by U( x ) = 12 – 6 where a nesieer :-
x x
and b are positive constants and x is the (a) 4b – 3a (b) 5b – a
distance between the atoms. The atom is in (c) 5b – 4a (d) 5b – 2a
stable equilibrium, when AIPMT-1999

Physics 123 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Let natural length of spring be l0 then According to conservation of momentum.
according to question– m2 u1 = m1v1 + m2v2
4 = k (a – l0) ...(i) m u − m1 v1 0.01× 400 − 2 × 1.4
v2 = 2 1 = = 120 m/s
5 = k (b – l0) ...(ii) m2 0.01
1 36. A ball is thrown vertically downwards from a
⇒ l0 = 5a – 4b, k = height of 20m with an initial velocity v 0 . It
b−a
Now if we apply 9N force then, collides with the ground, loses 50 percent of its
energy in collision and rebounds to the same
1
9 = k ( l – l0 ) ⇒ 9 = [l − 5a + 4b] height. The initial velocity vo is (Take g = 10 ms–2)
b−a Skeâ ieesuee 20 ceer. keâer GBâÛeeF& mes, ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie v0 Éeje
⇒ l = 5b – 4a meerOes (TOJee&Oej) veerÛes keâer Deesj hebsâkeâe peelee nw~ Ùeefo
ieesuee Yet-leue mes škeâjelee nw, Fme škeäkeâj ceW Fmekeâer 50³
Tpee& #eefÙele nes peeleer nw~ Yet-leue mes škeâjeves kesâ yeeo
5.4 Law of Conservation of Energy Ùen ieesuee Gmeer GBâÛeeF& lekeâ GÚue Deelee nw~ Ùeefo g = 10
35. A bullet of mass 10 g moving horizontal with a ms–2 nw lees, ieesuee keâe ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie nw~
velocity of 400 m/s strikes a wood block of mass (a) 10 ms–1 (b) 14 ms–1
2 kg which is suspended by light inextensible (c) 20 ms–1 (d) 28 ms–1
string of length 5 m. As result, the centre of AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
gravity of the block found to rise a vertical Ans. (c) :When it hits the ground
distance of 10 cm. The speed of the bullet after
1
it emerges horizontally from the block will be TE = mv02 + mgh
400 m/s kesâ #eweflepe Jesie mes Ûeueleer ntF& 10 g õJÙeceeve 2
keâer Skeâ ieesueer, 2 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ uekeâÌ[er kesâ Skeâ iegškesâ It loses 50% energy , it left with 50% energy, this left
energy converted into potential energy
mes škeâjeleer nw~ Ùen iegškeâe Skeâ 5 m uecyeer nukeâer
50  1 2 
DeefJeleevÙe [esjer mes ueškeâe nw ~ Ùeefo ieesueer kesâ škeâjeves kesâ mv0 + mgh  = mgh
100  2 
heefjCeecemJe¤he iegškesâ keâe ieg¤lJe kesâvõ 10 cm TOJee&Oej
2
Thej G" peelee nw, lees iegškesâ mes #eweflepe efoMee ceW yeenj mv0
+ mgh = 2mgh
efvekeâueves hej ieesueer keâer Ûeeue ieesieer- 2
(a) 100 m/s (b) 80 m/s mv 02 + 2mgh = 4mgh
(c) 120 m/s (d) 160 m./s v 02 = 2gh
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
v 02 = 2 ×10 × 20 = 400
Ans. (c) : Given, Mass of wooden block (m1) = 2 kg
Mass of bullet (m2) = 10g v0 = 20ms −1
Velocity (u1) = 400 m/s
37. On a frictionless surface, a block of mass M
Length of the string = 5m
moving at speed v collides elastically with
another block of same mass M which is initially
at rest. After collision the first block moves at
an angle θ to its initial direction and has a
v
speed . The second blocks speed after the
3
collision is/efkeâmeer Ie<e&Cenerve he=‰ hej v Ûeeue mes Ûeuelee
ngDee M õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ yuee@keâ, Gmeer õJÙeceeve M kesâ
efJejeceeJemLee ceW efmLele Skeâ DevÙe yuee@keâ mes škeâjelee nw~
Let the velocity of the bullet and the block after the škeäkeâj kesâ he§eeled henuee yuee@keâ, v/3 Ûeeue mes Deheveer
collision will be v2 and v1 respectively. ØeejefcYekeâ ieefle keâer efoMee mes θ keâesCe hej Ûeueves ueielee
The block rises 10 cm = 0.1 m nw~ lees škeäkeâj kesâ he§eele otmejs yuee@keâ keâer Ûeeue nesieer:
According to conservation of energy.
3 2 2
P.E at the maximum height = K.E at the bottom of the (a) v (b) v
block 2 3
1 3 3
m1 gh = m1v1 2 (c) v (d) v
2 4 2
v1 = 2gh = 2 × 9.8 × 0.1 = 1.4 m/s AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015

Physics 124 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Using energy conservation

1 2 1 2 1 1 
 m1v1 + m2 v2  =  m1v2 + m2v22 
2 2 before collision 2 1 2 after collision
qQ qQ
Here,
1 1 1
mv 2 + 0 = m ( v / 3) + mv 22
2 (a) − (b)
2 2 2 6π ∈0 L 4π ∈0 L
8 qQ qQ
v 22 = v2 (c) (d)
9 2 π ∈0 L 6π ∈0 L
2 2 AIPMT-2007
v2 = v Ans. (a) : Let +Q charge is put at point
poin C.
3
and we know that-
38. Two particles of masses m1, m2 move with
initial velocities u1 and u2 . On collision, one of
the particles get excited to hig higher level, after
absorbing energy ɛ. If fina final velocities of
particles be v1 and v2 then we mu must have:
oes keâCeeW kesâ õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: m1 leLee m2 nw, Fvekesâ
ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie u1 leLee u2 nQ~ škeäkeâj kkesâ he§eeled Skeâ keâCe
Work done = Change in potential al energy
ener = Uf − Ui
ε Tpee& DeJeMeesef<ele keâj GÛÛelej mlej lekeâ Gòesefpele nes
k ( + q ) Q k ( −q ) Q
peelee nw~ Ùeefo keâCeeW kesâ Deefvlece Jesesie ›eâceMe: v1 leLee v2 Initial potential energy U iQ = + =0
L L
nes lees :
kq ( Q ) k ( −q ) Q
1 1 1 1 Final potential energy UfQ = +
(a) m1 u12 + m 2 u 22 = m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 - ε 3L L
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 Q 1 
kqQ
(b) m1u12 + m 2 u 22 − ε = m1v12 + m 2 v 22 = −1
2 2 2 2 L  3 
1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 kqQ
(c) m1 u1 + m2 u 2 + ε = m1 v1 + m2 v2 =−
2 2 2 2 3 L
(d) m12 u1 + m 22 u 2 − ε = m12 v1 + m 22 v 2 2 1 Qq  1 
=− × Q k = 
AIP
AIPMT-03.05.2015 3 4π∈0 L  4π ∈0 
Ans. (b) : Total initial energy of two wo par
particles −1 Qq
1 1 =
= m1u12 + m 2 u 22 6π∈0 L
2 2
qQ
Total final energy of two particles So, Work done, W = (Uf - Ui ) = −
1 1 6π∈0 L
= m1v12 + m2 v22 + ε
2 2 40. A bomb of mass 30kg att rest explodes into two
Using energy conservation principle, pieces of masses 18 kg and nd 12 kg. The velocity
1 1 1 1 of 18kg mass is 6ms–1. The he kinetic
kin energy of the
m1u12 + m 2 u 22 = m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 + ε other mass is :
2 2 2 2
efJejece DeJemLee ceW efmLej Skeâ 30kg
30k õJÙeceeve keâe yece
1 1 1 1
∴ m1u12 + m 2 u 22 − ε = m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 Dekeâmceele hetâškeâj 18kg Deewj 12kg12k kesâ oes õJÙeceeveeW ceW
2 2 2 2
efJeYeeefpele nes peelee nw~ Ùeefo 18kg kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe Jesie
39. Charge +q and –q are placed ced at points A and B
6ms–1 nes lees otmejs keâer ieeflepe Tpee&
Tpe nesieer :-
respectively which are at distan distance 2L apart, C
is the midpoint between A an and B. The work (a) 524 J (b) 256 J
done in moving a charge rge + Q along the (c) 486 J (d) 324 J
semicircle CRD is:- AIPMT-2005
oes DeeJesMe +q Deewj –q efÛe$e ceWW efoKKeeÙes ›eâceevegmeej A Ans. (c) : Given :
Deewj B efyevogDeeW hej efmLele nw~ Gvekes
vekesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 2L Initial mass m = 30 kg
nw~ A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe C ceOÙee efyevog nw~ Skeâ DevÙe Mass of first piece, m1 = 18 kg
DeeJesMe + Q keâes CRD DeOe&Je=òe hej Ûeueeves mes efkeâÙee Velocity of first piece, v1 = 6 m/s
ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee:- Mass of other piece , m2 = 12 kg

Physics 125 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Since initial mass is at rest so itss linea
linear momentum is E1 p12 2m 2
zero. Hence the final momentum after explosion must = × [Q m1 > m 2 ]
be zero. E 2 p 22 2m1
i.e. E1 m 2
= {Qp1 = p2}
m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 E 2 m1
⇒ m1v1 = – m2v2
E1 < E 2
18 × 6 = –12 × v 2
18 × 6 42. A mass of 0.5 kg moving with a speed of 1.5 m/s
V2 = – = –9m / s on a horizontal smooth surface surfa collides with a
12 nearly weightless spring of force fo constant k =
– sign indicates direction of motion
ion of both particle is 50 N/m. The maximum m compression
com of the
opposite to each other. spring would be :-
The kinetic energy of 12 kg mass
0.5 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheC[ Ie<e&
Ie< Ce cegòeâ #eweflepe leue
1
k 2 = m1 v 22 hej 1.5 m/s keâer ieefle mes Ûeuelee
elee ngDee efkeâmeer ueieYeie
2 Yeejnerve keâceeveer mes škeâjeleee nQn keâceeveer keâe yeue
1
k 2 = × ( 9 ) ×12 efveÙeleebkeâ k = 50 N/m nw~ keâceeveer
keâc keâer DeefOekeâlece
2

2 mebheer[ve otjer nesieer :-

⇒ k 2 = 486J
41. A particle of mass m1 is moving oving with a velocity
v1 and another particle off mas mass m2 is moving
with a velocity v2. Both off them have the same
momentum but their different erent kinetic energies (a) 0.12 m (b) 1.5 m
are E1 and E2 respectively. If m1 > m2 then : (c) 0.5 m (d) 0.15 m
m1 Deewj m2 õJÙeceeve kesâ oes keâCeeW CeeW kkesâ Jesie ›eâceMe: v1 AIPMT-2004
Deewj v2 nQ~ oesveeW kesâ mebJesie yejeyej
jeyej nQ hejvleg Gvekeâer Ans. (d) : Given data-
efJeefYeVe ieeflepe Tpee&SB ›eâceMe: E1 Dee
Deewj E2 nQ~ Ùeefo m1 Mass = 0.5Kg
> m2 neW, lees- Speed, v = 1.5 m/s
Force constant of spring, k = 50 N/m
E m
(a) 1 = 1 (b) E1 > E2 According to law of conservation n of energy
e -
E2 m2
1 1
(c) E1= E2 (d) E1 < E2 mv 2 = k.x 2
2 2
AIPMT-2004
mv2 = k.x2
Ans. (d) : We know that, P = momentum mentum (0.5) (1.5)2 = 50.x2
v = velocity
city
0.5 × 1.5 × 1.5
m = mass x2 =
P = mv 50
2
P x = 0.0225
v= ...(i)
m x = 0.0225

So, Kinetic energy, K.E. = mv2

1 x = 0.15m
2 43. When a stick is released d (as shown in fig.). Its
2
1 p free end velocity when it strikes st the ground
K.E. = m   is/ef Û e$eeveg m eej peye Skeâ ÚÌ[ keâes ceg ò eâ ef k eâÙee peelee nw,
2 m
lees Ùen efiejleer nw, Fmekesâ cegòeââ efmejs keâe Jesie peye Ùen
1 p2 p2
K.E. = m 2 = melen mes škeâjeleer nw, nesiee :-
2 m 2m
2
p
Now, K.E.1 = 1 = E1
2m1
p 22
K.E.2 = = E2
2m 2
p12
E1 2m (a) 4.2 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
Q = 21
E2 p2 (c) 2.8 m/s (d) 6m / s
2m 2 AIPMT-1999

Physics 126 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): The centre of mass of the stick fall through 46. An electric lift with a maximum load of 2000 kg
0.3 m. According to law of conservation of energy – (lift + passengers) is moving up with a constant
 1 ml 2 v 2  speed of 1.5 ms–1. The frictional force opposing
1 2
 Iω  = mgh ⇒  . 2  = mgh the motion is 3000 N. The minimum power
2  2 3 l  delivered by the motor to the lift in watts is : (g
v2 = 10 m s–2)
6
= 10 × 0.3 = 3 Skeâ efJeÅegle efueheäš Deheves DeefOekeâlece Yeej 2000 kg
⇒ v2 = 3 × 6 = 18
(efueheäš±Ùee$eer) kesâ meeLe 1.5 ms–1 keâer efmLej Ûeeueebs mes
Thej keâer lejheâ pee jner nw~ ieefle keâe efJejesOe keâjves Jeeues
v = 3 2 = 3 × 1.414 = 4.242 = 4.2 m / sec. ( 2 = 1.414 ) Ie<e&Ce yeue keâe ceeve 3000 N nw~ lees ceesšj Éeje efueheäš
keâes Øeoeve keâer ieF& vÙetvelece Meefòeâ keâe ceeve (Jee@š) ceW
nw: (g = 10 m s–2)
5.5 Power (a) 23500 (b) 23000
(c) 20000 (d) 34500
44. A particle moves with a velocity (5iˆ − 3jˆ + 6k) ˆ
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
-1
ms horizontally under the action of constant Ans. (d) :
force (10iˆ + 10j+ ˆ 20k) ˆ N. The instantaneous
power supplied to the particle is:-
Skeâ keâCe (5iˆ − 3jˆ + 6k)
ˆ ceer./mes. kesâ Jesie mes #eweflepe
efoMee ceW (10iˆ + 10j+ ˆ 20k) ˆ N kesâ efmLej yeue mes Ûeuelee
nw~ keâCe keâes oer ieF& leel#eefCekeâ Meefkeäle nw–
(a) 100 W (b) 140 W Fr Fg
(c) 200 W (d) Zero Power = Force × Velocity
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 = (Fr + Fg) ×1.5
ur = (3000 + 20000) × 1.5
$ ˆ ˆ
Ans. (b) : Given: V = (5i − 3 j + 6K )
r = 23000 ×1.5
F = (10iˆ + 10ˆj + 20K)
ˆ
P = 34500
The instantaneous power is given by-
r ur 47. Water falls from a height of 60 m at the rate of
P = F.V 15 kg/s to operate a turbine. The losses due to
( )(
= 10i$ + 10j$ + 20k$ . 5i$ − 3j$ + 6k$ ) frictional force are 10% of the input energy.
How much power is generated by the turbine?
= 50 –30+120 Skeâ šjyeeFve keâes Ûeueeves kesâ efueS 15 efkeâ«ee/mes. keâer oj
P = 140 W mes 60 ceer. TBÛeeF& mes heeveer efiejlee nw~ Ie<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe
45. The energy that will be ideally radiated by a ØeejefcYekeâ efveJesMeer Tpee& kesâ 10 ØeefleMele keâer neefve nesleer
100 KW transmitter in 1 hour is nw~ šjyeeFve kesâ Éeje efkeâleveer Meefòeâ Glhevve keâer peeleer nw?
100 KW Jeeues š^evmeceeršj (Øes<ekeâ Ùeb$e) Éeje DeeoMe& (g = 10 m/s2)/(g = 10 ceer./mes. )
2
™he mes 1 IeCšs ceW Glmeefpe&le keâer ieF& Tpee& keâe ceeve nw:
(a) 7.0 kW (b) 10.2 kW
(a) 1 × 106 J (b) 36 × 107 J (c) 8.1 kW (d) 12.3 kW
(c) 36 × 104 J (d) 36 × 106J NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 Ans. (c) :
Ans. (b) : Given, Given,
Power, P = 100 KW = 100×103 W Height, h = 60m
= 105 W Mass, m & = 15 kg/s
Time, t = 1 hour = 60 min g = 10 m/s2
t = 60×60 = 3600 sec Loss due to friction force is 10% therefore only 90%
Energy input is used to generate power.
Now, Power =
Time P = η× mgh
&
Energy = Power × time
90
E=P×t & ×
P = mgh
5
= 10 × 3600 100
P = 10×60×15×0.9 = 8100 Watt
E = 36 × 107 J
P = 8.1 kW

Physics 127 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
48. A body of mass 1 kg begins to move under the v2 k
action of a time dependent force ⇒ = t
ur 2 m
( $
) $
F = 2ti$ + 3t $j N, Where i and j are unit
2

⇒v=
2k
t
vectors along x and y axis. What power will be m
developed by the force at the time t? Now, force on the particles is given by
1 kg õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& efheC[ efkeâmeer keâeueefßele yeue 1
ur  
( ) $ $ dv d 2kt 2
F = 2ti$ + 3t 2 $j N, ÙeneB i leLee j x leLee y De#e kesâ F = m =m  
dt dt  m 
DevegefoMe cee$ekeâ meefoMe nw, kesâ DeOeerve ieefle DeejcYe
1 
keâjlee nw, lees meceÙe t hej Fme yeue Éeje efJekeâefmele Meefòeâ F = 2km  t −1/ 2 
2 
keäÙee nesieer?
(a) (2t 3
+ 3t
5
)W (b) ( 2t 2 + 3t3 ) W F=
mk −1/ 2
2
t

(c) ( 2t 2
+ 4t 4 ) W (d) ( 2t 3
+ 3t 4 ) W 50. One coolie takes 1 minute to raise a suitcase
through a height of 2 m but the second coolie
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
takes 30 S to raise the same suitcase to the same
Ans. (a) : Applying Newton’s second law of motion-
r height. The powers of two coolies are in the
r F ratio/Skeâ kegâueer keâes Skeâ metškesâme keâes 2 ceer. keâer TBÛeeF&
acceleration, a = = 2ti$ + 3t $j [Q m = 1kg given ]
m lekeâ G"eves ceW 1 efceveš keâe meceÙe ueielee nw uesefkeâve otmejs
acceleration is defined as rate of change of velocity so,
r kegâueer keâes Gmeer metškesâme keâes meceeve TBÛeeF& lekeâ G"eves ceW
r dv
a= 30 meskesâC[ keâe meceÙe ueielee nw~ oes kegâefueÙeeW keâer
dt
MeefòeâÙeeW keâe Devegheele nw-
r tr
v = ∫ a dt (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3
0 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 3 : 1
r t NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
v = ∫ (2ti$ + 3t 2 $j) dt
0 Ans. (a) : Given- h = 2 m
r
v = t 2 $i + t 3 $j First coolie take time = 1 minute
rr Second coolie take time = 30 sec
Power, P = F.v
E
P = (2ti$ + 3t 2 $j).(t 2 $i + t 3 $j) We know that power, P =
t
P = (2t 3 + 3t 5 )W P1 t 2
=
49. A particle of mass m is driven by a machine P2 t1
that delivers a constant power k watts. If the
particle starts from rest the force on the P1 30 1
= =
particle at time t is: P2 60 2
m õJÙeceeve kesâ Skeâ keâCe keâes Skeâ ceMeerve Éeje ieefleceeve
P1 : P2 = 1 : 2
efkeâÙee (ÛeueeÙee) pee jne nw~ Ùeefo Fme ceMeerve keâer efmLej
Meefòeâ k Jee@š nw Deewj Ùen keâCe efJejece DeJemLee mes Ûeuevee 51. A particle of mass M, starting from rest,
ØeejbYe keâjlee nw lees, t meceÙe hej, keâCe hej yeue nesiee: undergoes uniform acceleration. If the speed
acquired in time T is V, the power delivered to
(a) mkt −1/ 2 (b) 2mkt −1/ 2 the particle is/efJejece DeJemLee ceW efmLele M õJÙeceeve

(c)
1
mkt −1/ 2
mk −1/ 2
t(d)
Skeâ keâCe Skeâmeceeve lJejCe mes ieefle ØeejbYe keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo
2 2 T meceÙe kesâ he§eeled Gme keâCe keâer Ûeeue V nes peeleer nw
AIPMT-03.05.2015 lees, keâCe keâes oer ieF& Meefòeâ nesieer–
Ans. (d) : As the machine delivers a constant power.
So F.v = constant = k (Watts) MV 2 1 MV 2
(a) (b)
dv T 2 T2
⇒ m ⋅v = k
dt MV 2 1 MV 2
(c) (d)
k T2 2 T
⇒ ∫ vdv = ∫ dt
m AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Physics 128 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Power delivered in time T is work done
P = F.V ∴ Power =
Time
where, P = Power, F = Force,
100m
V = Velocity 2000 =
F = ma 60
100 m = 2000×60
dv
P = MV 2000 × 60
dt m= = 1200 Kg
100
Pdt = M Vdv
integrating on both sides. 1200
Volume = ×1000 litres
1000
∫ Pdt = M ∫ VdV
2 = 1200 litres
MV 1 MV 2
PT = ⇒P=
2 2 T 5.6 NCERT Exemplar plar Problems
52. An engine pumps water throug through a hose pipe.
Water passes through thee pip pipe and leaves it 54. An electron and a proton n are moving under the
with a velocity of 2 m/s.. The mass per unit influence of mutual forces. ces. In I calculating the
length of water in the pipe is 10 100 kg/m. What is change in the kinetic energy
energ of the system
the power of the engine – during motion, one ignores
res the
th magnetic force
Skeâ Fbpeve Skeâ newpe heeFhe mess peu peue heche (pumps) of one on another. This is because./ bec Skeâ Fues keäš^e@ve
keâjlee nw~ peue heeFhe mes neskeâj iegpejle
ejlee nw leLee 2 m/s mes SJeb Skeâ Øeesše@ve heejmheefjkeâ yeueeWeeW kesk â ØeYeeJe mes ieefleceeve
Fmes ÚesÌ[lee nw~ heeFhe ceW Øeefle FkeâeF&
âeF& uuecyeeF& ceW peue keâe nQ~ ieefle kesâ oewjeve Fme leb$e keâer ieeflepe
e Tpee& kesâ heefjJele&ve
keâer ieCevee keâjles meceÙe nce Skeâeâ kesâ Éeje otmejs hej ueieves
õJÙeceeve 100 kg/m nw~ Fbpeve keâerr Meefòeâ keäÙee nw –
Jeeues ÛebgyekeâerÙe yeueeW keâer Gheshes#ee keâj osles nQ~ Ssmee
(a) 400 W (b) 200 W
(c) 100 W (d) 800 W
FmeefueS nw keäÙeeWefkeâ,
AIPMT MT (S(Screening)-2010 (a) the two magnetic forces
force are equal and
oduce no net effect/oesveeW
opposite, so they produce
Ans. (d) : Given mass per unit length
gth = 100 kg/m
v = 2 m/s
ÛebgyekeâerÙe yeue heefjceeCe ceW yejeyej
yeje Deewj efoMeeDeeW ceW
P(power)
wer) = F × v efJehejerle nesles nQ FmeefueS Jes keâesF& vesš (heefjCeeceer) ØeYeeJe
v Glhevve veneR keâjles~
= m× × v (b) the magnetic forces do no n work on each
t particle/ÛebgyekeâerÙe yeue Fve oesveeWee ceW mes efkeâmeer Yeer keâCe
m 2 hej keâesF& keâeÙe& veneR keâjles~
= v
t (c) the magnetic forces do equal
e and opposite
= ρv3 ea particle/ÛebgyekeâerÙe
(but non-zero) work on each
Power = ρv3 =
m 3
×v yeue ØelÙeskeâ keâCe hej yejeyejeyej (hejbleg MetvÙeslej) Deewj
l efJehejerle keâeÙe& keâjles nQ~
= 100 ×(2)3 (d) the magnetic forces rces are necessarily
P = 800 W negligible./ÛebgyekeâerÙe yeue DeefeefveJeeÙe&
eJ le: veieCÙe nesles nQ~
53. How much water a pump of 2 k kW can raise in Ans. (b) : According to work energy ergy theorem
t -
one minute to a height off 10 m m? (take g = 10 ΣW = K.Ef – K.Ei
-
m/s2)/Skeâ heche ceMeerve 2 efkeâuees eesJeeeeš keâer nw~ Ùen 1 As the e and proton moves under the influence of
evee heeveer heche keâjsieer? mutual interactions, the magnetic
efceveš ceW 10 ceer TBÛeeF& lekeâ efkeâlevee gnetic force will be
perpendicular to their motion, shown own in i fig below.
(a) 1000 litres (b) 1201200 litres
(c) 100 litres (d) 2002000 litres
AIPMT-1990
Ans. (b) : Power of pump = 2kW = 2000 W
Time (t) = 60 sec
Height (h) = 10 m
g = 10 m/s2
We have, work done in Raising of wat water = Increase in Here, we can see the direction of magnetic mag force on the
potential energy proton is towards right and on e- is towards to left. That's
Work done = mgh why in calculating the change in the kinetic energy of
= m×10×10 the system during motion, onee ignores
igno the magnetic
= 100 m (joule) force of one on another.

Physics 129 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
55. A proton is kept at rest. A positively charged Ans. (d): In the whole process, the man exerts variable
particle is released from rest at a distance d in force (F) on the ground to set his body in motion. This
its field. Consider two experiments; one in force is in addition to the force required to support his
which the charged particle is a proton and in weight (mg). Once the man is in standing position, force
another a positron. In the same time t, the (F) becomes zero.
work done on the two moving charged particles 57. A bicyclist comes to a skidding stop in 10 m.
is/Skeâ Øeesše@ve efJejeceeJemLee ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ Fmekesâ #es$e During this process, the force on the bicycle
ceW Skeâ DevÙe Oeve DeeJesMeÙegkeäle keâCe, Fmes d otjer hej due to the road is 200 N and is directly opposed
efJejece DeJemLee ceW ner efJecegkeäle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ oes ØeÙeesieeW to the motion. The work done by the cycle on
hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS– henuee Jen efpemeceW otj DeeJesefMele the road is/Skeâ yeeFefmekeâue meJeej yeÇskeâ ueieeves kesâ yeeo
keâCe Yeer Øeesše@ve ner nw Deewj otmeje Jen efpemeceW otmeje Oeve 10 m keâer otjer efheâmeueles ngS pee mekeâlee nw~ Fme Øeef›eâÙee
DeeJesefMele keâCe hee@efpeš^e@ve nw~ meceeve meceÙe t ceW oesveeW ceW meÌ[keâ Éeje yeeFefmekeâue hej ueieeÙee ieÙee yeue 200N
ieefleceeve keâCeeW hej efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe&– nw Deewj ieefle kesâ "erkeâ efJehejerle efoMee ceW ueielee nw~
(a) same as the same force law is involved in the meeFefkeâue Éeje meÌ[keâ hej efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw–
two experiments/meceeve nw keäÙeeWefkeâ Fve oes ØeÙeesieeW ceW (a) +2000 J (b) –200 J
Skeâ ner yeue efveÙece ueeiet neslee nw~ (c) zero (d) –20000 J
(b) less for the case of a positron, as the positron Ans. (c) : We know that work done is
moves away more rapidly and the force on it w = F.S cosθ .......(i)
weakens/hee@efpeš^e@ve kesâ ØekeâjCe ceW keâce neslee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ Where, force is the magnitude of the force applied by
hee@efpeš^e@ve DeefOekeâ leer›e ieefle mes Øeeflekeâef<e&le neslee nw Deewj the cyclist (200N)
Gme hej yeue keâce nes peelee nw~ S = Distance (10m)
(c) more for the case of a positron, as the θ = Angle between the force and direction of motion
positron moves away a larger distance/hee@efpeš^e@ve In this case, the force is directly opposed to the motion,
which means the angle θ between the force and the
kesâ ØekeâjCe ceW DeefOekeâ neslee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ hee@efpeš^e@ve DeefOekeâ direction of motion is 180º.
otjer lekeâ Øeeflekeâef<e&le neslee nw~ On substituting all the values in eqn(i) we get-
(d) same as the work done by charged particle on W = 200×10×cos 180º
the stationary proton./Glevee ner neslee nw efpelevee W = 200×10×(–1)
DeJesefMele keâCe Éeje efmLej Øeesš^e@ve hej efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe&~ W = –2000 N–m
Ans. (c) : Option (c) is correct. Because their charges The frictional force on the cycle does work here and it
are equivalent, the force between two protons is equal to is equivalent to –2000 J.
the force between a proton and a positron. Because the road is immobile, the work done by the
cycle on the road is zero.
• Because of having much lighter weight than proton,
positron moves away large distance compared to proton. 58. A body is falling freely under the action of
gravity along in vacuum. Which of the
• As work done = force × displacement
following quantities remain constant during the
Therefore in the same time t work done (in case of
fall?/Skeâ efheb[ efveJee&le ceW kesâJeue ieg®lJe kesâ DeOeerve
positron) is more than that of proton.
mJeleb$eleehetJe&keâ efiej jne nw~ Fmekesâ efiejves kesâ oewjeve
56. A man squatting on the ground gets straight up
and stands. The force of reaction of ground on the efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-meer jeefMe DeÛej jnleer nw?
man during the process is/peceerve hej Gkeâ[t yew"e ngDee (a) Kinetic energy/ieeflepe Tpee&
Skeâ JÙeefkeäle G"keâj meerOee KeÌ[e neslee nw~ Fme Øeef›eâÙee ceW (b) Potential energy/efmLeeflepe Tpee&
JÙeefkeäle hej ueieves Jeeuee he=LJeer keâe Øeefleef›eâÙee yeue– (c) Total mechanical energy/kegâue Ùeebef$ekeâ Tpee&
(a) constant and equal to mg in magnitude (d) Total linear momentum/kegâue jsKeerÙe mebJesie
/DeheefjJeefle&le jnlee nw Deewj heefjceeCe ceW mg kesâ yejeyej Ans. (c) : Let a body of mass m falls freely under
neslee nw~ gravity from height 'H' above ground. Let A, B and C be
(b) constant and greater than mg in magnitude the position of body-
/DeheefjJeefle&le jnlee nw Deewj heefjceeCe ceW mg mes DeefOekeâ
neslee nw~
(c) variable but always greater than mg/ØeejbYe
heefjJeleea hejbleg heefjceeCe ceW meowJe mg mes DeefOekeâ
(d) at first greater than mg, and later becomes
equal to mg./ØeejbYe ceW mg mes DeefOekeâ neslee nw hejbleg
yeeo ceW mg kesâ yejeyej nes peelee nw~ The total Mechanical energy at point A,

Physics 130 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
EA = K.E + P.E efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw?
1
EA = mv 2 + mgH
2
At point A, velocity will be zero
Hence,
EA = mgH
Total Mechanical Energy at Point B, (a) Both the stones reach the bottom at the same
1 time but not with the same speed./ oesveeW helLej
E B = mv 2 + mgh
2 Skeâ ner #eCe hej leueeW kesâ DeeOeej hej hengBÛeles nQ hejbleg JeneB
Velocity at point B, v = 2gh Gvekeâer Ûeeue meceeve veneR nesleer~
1 (b) Both the stones reach the bottom with the
E B = m × 2gh + mg(H – h) same speed and stone I reaches the bottom
2 earlier than stone II./oesveeW helLej, leueeW kesâ DeeOeej
EB = mgh + mgH – mgh
EB = mgH
hej Skeâ ner Ûeeue mes hengBÛeles nQ Deewj helLej I, helLej II
mes henues hengBÛelee nw~
Velocity at point C, v = 2gH
(c) Both the stones reach the bottom with the
Total Mechanical Energy at point C same speed and stone II reaches the bottom
1
EC = m(2gH) + mg(0) earlier than stone I./oesveeW helLej leueeW kesâ DeeOeej hej
2 Skeâ ner Ûeeue mes hengBÛeles nQ Deewj helLej II helLej I mes
EC = mgH henues hengBÛelee nw~
Hence, as per the point A, point B and point C, the total (d) Both the stones reach the bottom at different
mechanical energy of the body will remain constant in
times and with different speeds./ oesveeW helLej
vacuum, if we neglect the air friction.
leueeW kesâ DeeOeej hej Deueie-Deueie meceÙe hej leLee Deueie-
59. During inelastic collision between two bodies,
which of the following quantities always
Deueie Jesie mes hengBÛeles nQ~
remain conserved?/oes efheb[eW kesâ yeerÛe nesves Jeeues Ans. (c) : As shown in the given diagrams, AB and AC
DeØelÙeemLe mebIešdš kesâ oewjeve efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve- are two smooth planes inclined at the angles θ1 and θ2
respectively.
meer jeefMe meowJe mebjef#ele jnleer nw–
Because there is no friction here, mechanical energy will
(a) Total kinetic energy/kegâue ieeflepe/Tpee& be preserved. And both tracks have the same height h,
(b) Total mechanical energy/kegâue Ùeebef$ekeâ Tpee& 1 2
mv = mgh
(c) Total linear momentum/kegâue jsKeerÙe mebJesie 2
(d) Speed of each body/ØelÙeskeâ efheb[ keâer Ûeeue v 2 = 2gh
Ans. (c) : v = 2gh
Hence, speed is same for both stones. For stone 1st, a =
acceleration along inclined plane = g sinθ1.
Similarly, for stone 2nd, a2 = g sinθ2
Let us consider a system in which two bodies are colliding And because track 2nd is shorter in length, stone 2nd
and the total external force on the system is zero (because arrives earlier than stone Ist.
collision is due to internal forces only). Hence, total linear 61. The potential energy function for a particle
momentum of the system remains conserved. Here kinetic 1
executing linear SHM is given by V(x) = kx2
energy appears in other forms i.e. energy may be lost in the 2
form of heat and sound etc. where k is the force constant of the oscillator.
60. Two inclined frictionless tracks, one gradual For k = 0.5Nm–1, the graph of V(x) versus x is
and the other steep meet at A from where two shown in the figure. A particle of total energy E
stones are allowed to slide down from rest, one turns back when it reaches x = ±xm. If V and K
on each track as shown in figure. Which of the indicate the potential energy and kinetic
energy, respectively of the particle at x = +xm,
following statements is correct?/oes Ie<e&Ce efJenerve
then which of the following is correct?/mejue
vele heLeeW ceW mes Skeâ otmejs keâer Dehes#ee, #eweflepe mes keâce DeeJele& ieefle (SHM) keâjles efkeâmeer keâCe keâe efmLeeflepe
keâesCe hej Pegkeâe nw~ Ùes oesveeW heLe efyebog A hej efceueles nQ,
peneB mes oes helLej efJejeceeJemLee mes ÚesÌ[s peeles nQ, efpemeceW Tpee& heâueve nw–V(x) = 1 kx2 peneB k oesefue$e keâe yeue
2
mes ØelÙeskeâ helLej Deueie heLe hej efheâmeuelee nw pewmee efÛe$e efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ k = 0.5N/m kesâ efueS V(x) Deewj x keâe
ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ «eeheâ efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~
Physics 131 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
E Tpee& keâe keâesF& keâCe x = ±xm hej hengBÛe keâj Jeeheme Ans. (b): Let 'm' be the mass of each ball bearing. Total
ueewšlee nw~ Ùeefo x = +xm hej V SJeb K ›eâceMe: keâCe keâer kinetic energy of the system before collision,
efmLeweflepe Tpee& (P.E.) SJeb ieeflepe Tpee& (K.E.) efve®efhele 1 1
= mv 2 + 0 = mv2
keâjles neW lees efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve mener nw? 2 2
In (a), K of the system after collision–
1  v2  1
K 1 = (2m)   = mv 2
2  2  4
In (b), K of the system after collision–
1 1
(a) V = 0, K = E (b) V = E, K = 0 K 2 = (m)(v 2 ) = mv2
2 2
(c) V < E, K = 0 (d) V = 0, K < E In (c), K of the system after collision–
Ans. (b) : Total energy of the particle, E = 1 J
1  v2  1
for constant, k = 0.5 N/m K 3 = (3m)   = mv 2
1 2  3  2
k.E of particle, = mv 2 In (d), K of the system after collision–
2
2 2
According to conservation law: 1 1 v 1 v
1 1 K4 = mv 2 + m   + m  
E= kx 2 + mv 2 2 2 2 2 3
2 2 49 2
( Qvelocity become zero at the moment of turn back i.e = mv
K = 0) 72
1 So, as we see K of the system is only conserved in
E = kx 2 option (b). Hence, option (b) is the only possibility.
2
1 63. A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line
1 = × 0.5 × x 2 with velocity v = ax3/2 where k = 5m–1/2s–1. The
2 work done by the net force during its
2 × 10 20
x =
2
= =4 displacement from x = 0 to x = 2 m is/0.5 kg
0.5 ×10 5 õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheb[ Skeâ mejue jsKee ceW v = ax3/2 Jesie
x=2
mes ieefleceeve nw peneB a = 5m–1/2s–1 nw~ Fmekesâ x = 0 mes x
Hence, the particle turns back when it reaches x = 2m
and potential energy is equal to the total energy of body = 2m lekeâ efJemLeeheve ceW kegâue yeue Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee
i.e V = E. keâeÙe& nw–
62. Two identical ball bearings in contact with (a) 1.5 J (b) 50 J
each other and resting on a frictionless table (c) 10 J (d) 100 J
are hit head-on by another ball bearing of the
same mass moving initially with a speed v as Ans. (b) : Given : Mass of the body (m) = 0.5 kg
3
shown in figure. If the collision is elastic, which Velocity of the body (v) = ax 2
of the following is a possible result after
–1
collision?/oes meJe&mece yee@ue efyeÙeefjbie Skeâ Ie<e&Ce efJenerve Where a = 5m 2s –1
cespe hej Skeâ otmejs kesâ mebheke&â ceW efJejeceeJemLee ceW jKes nQ Velocity of the body at x = 0,
Deewj meceeve õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ leermeje yee@ue efyeÙeefjbie v v1 = 5 × 0 = 0
Ûeeue mes Ûeuelee ngDee Deekeâj FveceW meccegKe mebIešdš keâjlee Velocity of the body at x = 2
nw pewmee efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ 3
v2 = 5 × (2) 2 m / s
According to work-energy theorem–
Work done = Change in kinetic energy
1 1
= mv 22 – mv12
Ùeefo mebIešdš ØelÙeemLe nes lees efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùeer ieF& keâewve- 2 2
meer efmLeefle mebIešdš kesâ heMÛeele mebYeJe nw? 1
= m(v22 – v12 )
2
1 3
= × 0.5[{5(2 2 )}2 – (0)2 ]
2
1
= × 0.5 × 25 × 23 = 12.5 × 4 = 50J
2
Physics 132 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
64. A body is moving unidirectionally under the efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ss ieS DeejsKeeW ceW mes keâewve-mee DeejsKe JeeÙeg
influence of a source of constant power ceW oesueve keâjles ngS efkeâmeer ueesuekeâ keâer kegâue Ùeebef$ekeâ
supplying energy. Which of the diagrams Tpee& ceW meceÙe kesâ meeLe nesves Jeeues heefjJele&ve keâe mener
shown in figure correctly shows the
displacement-time curve for its motion?/Skeâ efve™heCe keâjlee nw?
efheb[ efkeâmeer efveÙele Meefkeäle ØeoeÙekeâ Tpee& œeesle kesâ ØeYeeJe
ceW Skeâ ner efoMee ceW Ûeue jne nw~ efÛe$e ceW keâewve-mee
DeejsKe Fmekeâer ieefle keâe mener efJemLeeheve-meceÙe «eeheâ nw?

Ans. (c) : When a pendulum oscillates in air, its total

mechanical energy gradually falls as it overcomes air
resistance. As a result, the pendulum's total mechanical
energy drops exponentially over time.
67. A mass of 5 kg is moving along a circular path
of radius 1 m. If the mass moves with 300
revolutions per minute, its kinetic energy
Ans. (b) : Given : Power from a constant power source would be/5 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheb[ 1m ef$epÙee kesâ
→ →
W F.d → →
Je=òeekeâej heLe hej ieefleceeve nw~ Ùeefo Ùen efheb[ Øeefle efceveš
P= = = F.V = constant 300 Ûekeäkeâj ueieelee nes lees Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer–
t t
Now, by dimensional analysis (a) 250π2 J (b) 100π2 J
2
[F] [V] = Constant (c) 5π J (d) 0 J
⇒[MLT–2] [LT–1] = constant Ans. (a) : Given : Mass (m) = 5kg, Radius (r) = lm
–3 N = 300rpm
⇒L2T = constant (because mass is constant)
3 2πN 2π × 300
⇒L∝T 2 Angular speed ω = = = 10πrad / s
3 60 60
⇒Displacement (d) ∝ T 2
Linear speed v = ωR = 10 π × 1 = 10 πm / s
65. Which of the diagrams shown in figure most 1 1
closely shows the variation in kinetic energy of K.E = mv2 = × 5(kg) × (10πm / s) 2
the earth as it moves once around the sun in its 2 2
elliptical orbit?/efÛe$e 6.6 ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes DeejsKeeW ceW 1
= × 5 ×100π2 J
mes metÙe& kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj oerIe& Je=òeekeâej ceW Ietceleer ngF& he=LJeer 2
keâer Skeâ heefj›eâcee ceW ieeflepe Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve keâe = 5 × 50π2 = 250π2 J
efvekeâšlece efve™heCe keâjlee nw? 68. A raindrop falling from a height h above
ground, attains a near terminal velocity when it
 3
has fallen through a height   h . Which of the
4
diagrams shown in figure correctly shows the
change in kinetic and potential energy of the
drop during its fall up to the ground?/Skeâ Je<ee&
keâer yetBo pees he=LJeer kesâ Thej h TBÛeeF& mes efiejvee ØeejbYe
keâjleer nw~  3 h TBÛeeF& mes efiejves kesâ yeeo Debeflece Jesie
4
(Terminal Velocity) Øeehle keâj uesles nw~ efÛe$e ceW
oMee&Ss ieS DeejsKeeW ceW mes keâewve-mee DeejsKe Fme yetBo kesâ
Yet-he=‰ lekeâ efiejves ceW Fmekeâer ieeflepe leLee efmLeweflepe Tpee&
Ans. (d) : As the earth moves once around the sun in its ceW heefjJele&veeW keâes mener Øekeâej oMee&lee nw?
elliptical orbit its K.E is maximum when it is closest to
the sun and minimum when it is farthest from the sun.
As K.E is never zero during its motion.
66. Which of the diagrams shown in figure
represents variation of total mechanical energy of
a pendulum oscillating in air as function of time?
Physics 133 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library

Ans. (b) : Diagram (b) shows the change in kinetic and

potential energy of the drop during its fall up to ground. Ans. (b) : When an iron sphere is falling freely in the
When a raindrop falls freely, then at a height 'h' above lake, it will accelerate due to gravitational force and its
the ground, its potential energy is maximum and kinetic velocity increases continuously and resistance due to
energy is zero. During the fall, the potential energy of water, also known as viscous force or up thrust which
the rain drop keeps decreasing and kinetic energy goes opposes the motion, acts on sphere. It depends upon
h velocity of object, as the velocity increases, upthrust
on increasing up to a height above the ground.
4 increases. Hence, during fall of sphere first its velocity
At this stage, rain drop has acquired terminal velocity. increases and then becomes constant after some depth.
Thereafter its velocity remains constant. Therefore, at this This constant velocity is called terminal velocity.
stage, kinetic energy becomes constant. Potential energy Hence, KE becomes constant beyond this depth which
becomes zero when a raindrop falls to the ground. is best represented by option (b).
69. In a shotput event an athlete throws the
71. A cricket ball of mass 150 g moving with a
shotput of mass 10 kg with an initial speed of 1
m/s at 45° from a height 1.5 m above ground. speed of 126 km/h hits at the middle of the bat,
Assuming air resistance to be negligible and held firmly at its position by the batsman. The
acceleration due to gravity to be 10 m/s2, the ball moves straight back to the bowler after
kinetic energy of the shotput when it just hitting the bat. Assuming that collision between
reaches the ground will be/ieesuee heWâkeâves keâer ball and bat is completely elastic and the two
ØeefleÙeesefielee ceW Skeâ efKeueeÌ[er 10kg keâer TBÛeeF& mes 45° remain in contact for 0.001 s, the force that the
hej heWâkeâlee nw~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ JeeÙeg ØeeflejesOe veieCÙe batsman had to apply to hold the bat firmly at
its place would be/126km h–1 keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeueleer
nw SJeb ieg®lJe kesâ keâejCe lJejCe 10ms–2 nw, peye ieesuee
he=LJeer hej efiejlee nw lees Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& nesleer nw ngF& 150g õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ ef›eâkesâš ieWo, yeuuesyeepe
(a) 2.5 J (b) 5.0 J Éeje ÂÌ{leehetJe&keâ hekeâÌ[s ieS yeuues kesâ yeerÛeeW-yeerÛe
(c) 52.5 J (d) 155.0 J škeâjeleer nw~ yeuues mes škeâjekeâj ieWo meerOeer ieWoyeepe keâer
Ans. (d) : Given : m = 10kg, v = 1 m/s, h = 1.5m, g=10m /s2 Deesj ueewš peeleer nw~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ ieWo Deewj yeuues
If air resistance is neglible the system's total mechanical kesâ yeerÛe mebIešdš hetCe&le: ØelÙeemLe nw Deewj Ùes oesveeW
energy remains constant. And let us ground as a 0.001s kesâ efueS heejmheefjkeâ mebheke&â ceW jnles nQ, Jen yeue
reference point where potential energy is zero.
Initial energy = (PE)i + (KE)i pees yeuuesyeepe keâes Dehevee yeuuee ÂÌ{leehetJe&keâ hekeâÌ[s jnves
1 kesâ efueS ueieevee DeeJeMÙekeâ nw, Jen nw–
= mgh + mv2
2 (a) 10.5 N (b) 21 N
1 (c) 1.05 × 104 N (d) 2.1 × 104 N
= 10 ×10 ×1.5 + ×10 × (1)2 Ans. (c) : Given : m = 150g = 0.15 kg
2
=150 + 5 = 155J 5
v = 126Km/h = 126 × m / s = 35m / s
Now, (PE)i + (KE)i = (PE)f + (KE)f 18
155J = 0 + (KE)f t = 0.001s
Final K.E. = 155J Force applied by the batsman (F) = Rate of change of
70. Which of the diagrams in figure correctly shows momentum
the change in kinetic energy of an iron sphere (Finalmomentum – Initial momentum)
falling freely in a lake having sufficient depth to F=
impart it a terminal velocity?/efÛe$e ceW keâewve-mee time
DeejsKe efkeâmeer Peerue ceW mJeleb$eleehetJe&keâ efiejles ngS ueesns kesâ (mv – mu)
F= [Q v = –u]
ieesues keâer ieeflepe Tpee& kesâ heefjJele&ve keâe mener efve™heCe keâjlee t
nw peyeefkeâ Peerue keâer ienjeF& Fleveer nw efkeâ ieesuee Debeflece Jesie F=
m(–u) – mu –2mu
=
(Terminal Velocity) Øeehle keâj mekeâlee nw– t t
–2 × 0.15 × 35
F= = –10500N = –1.05 ×104 N
0.001
Hence, the force that the batsman has to apply to hold
the bat firmly at its place is 1.05×104N and its direction
is negative as compare to the direction of the ball.
Physics 134 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
6.
System of Particles
ticles and
Rotational
al Motion
Mo
10
(a) 5 m (b) m
6.1 Centre of Mass 3
20
(c) m (d) 10 m
1. Two particles A and B initiall
nitially at rest, move 3
towards each other under er m mutual force of NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
attraction. At an instance when the speed of A Ans. (c) :
is v and speed of B is 3v, The
he sp speed of centre of
mass is/oes keâCe A Deewj B ØeejbjbYe ceW efJejeceeJemLee ceW
hejmhej Deekeâ<e&Ce yeue kesâ Debleie&l& e SSkeâ otmejs keâer Deesj
ieefle keâjles nQ~ efkeâmeer #eCe peye A keâe
keâer ieefle v nw Deewj B Mass, m1 = 10 kg
keâer ieefle 3 v nw, õJÙeceeve kesâ keWâvõõ keâ
keâer ieefle nw- Mass, m2 = 20 kg
length of rod = 10 m
(a) v (b)
b) 4v
m x + m2 x 2
(c) 2v Zero/MetvÙe
(d) Zer Xcom = 1 1
m1 + m2
RE NEET Manipur ipur (U
(UG)- 06.06.2023
Ans. (d) : Given that: uA = 0 vA = v 10 ( 0 ) + ( 20 )(10 ) 200
= =
uB = 0 vB = 3v 10 + 20 30
Let us consider that the force acting
ng on A and B are FA 20 m
and FB respectively. X com =
3
Now, mutual force of attraction betwee
between A and B are
equal- 3. Three identical spheres each of mass M, are
placed at the corners off a right
rig angle triangle
FA = FB with mutually perpendicularular sides
s equal to 2 m
m A × v m B × 3v (see figure). Taking the point of intersection of
=
t t the two mutually perpendicuendicular sides as the
mA = 3mB origin, find the position vector
ector of centre of mass.
Hence, relative velocity according to the centre of mass efkeâmeer meceekeâesCe ef$eYegpe efpemekeâer
emeke hejmhej uecyeJeled
frame- YegpeeDeeW keâer uecyeeF& 2 m nw, kesesâ Meer
M <eex hej leerve meJe&mece
m v + mB vB ieesues, efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ keâe õJÙecee
Ùeceeve M nw, efmLele nQ
v= A A
mA + mB (DeejsKe osefKeS) oes hejmhej uecyeJe cyeJele YegpeeDeeW kesâ keâševe
3m B v − 3m B v efyevog keâes cetue efyevog ceevekeâj, õJÙeceeve
õJÙe kesâvõ keâe efmLeefle
=
3m B + m B meefoMe %eele keâerefpeS~
v=0
Here, –ve sign indicates that velocity
city of particles are in
the opposite direction.
2. Two objects of mass 10 k kg and 20 kg
respectively are connected to th the two ends of a
rigid rod of length 10 m with negligible mass.
The distance of the center of mamass of the system
from the 10 kg mass is/veieCÙe Ùe YYeej SJeb 10 ceeršj (a)
3
( )
4 ˆ ˆ
i+ j ( )
(b) 2 ˆi + ˆj
uecyeeF& Jeeueer efkeâmeer ÂÌ{ ÚÌ[ kesâ oesveeeW efmejeW hej ›eâceMe:
10 efkeâuees«eece SJeb 20 efkeâuees«eeceece õJÙeceeve Jeeues oes
efheC[ ueies nQ~ lees 10 efkeâuees«eece Jeeue
Jeeues efheC[ mes, efvekeâeÙe
(c) ( ˆi + ˆj) 2 ˆ ˆ
3
i+ j
(d) ( )
kesâ õJÙeceeve kesâvõ keâer otjer nw: NEET (UG)-14.10.2020,
14 Phase-II

Physics 135 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): X-coordinate of centre of mass i.e, (3) A couple on a body produce both
M×0 + M×2 + M×0 2 translational and rotational motion in a
Xcom = = body. /efkeâmeer efheb[ hej ueiee yeue Ùegice, GmeceW
3M 3
mLeeveevlejerÙe leLee IetCeeaÙe, oesveeW Øekeâej keâer ieefle
Y-coordinate of centre of mass i.e.
GlheVe keâjlee nw~
M×0 + M×2 + M×0 2
Ycom = = (4) Mechanical advantage greater than one
3M 3
means that small effort can be used to lift a
∴ Position vector of centre of mass =
2 $ $
3
i+ j ( ) large load. /Ùeebef$ekeâ ueeYe keâe ceeve Skeâ (1) mes
DeefOekeâ nesves keâe leelheÙe& Ùen nw efkeâ keâce DeeÙeece mes
4. Two particles of mass 5 kg and 10 kg DeefOekeâ Yeej G"eÙee pee mekeâlee nw~
respectively are attached to the two ends of a (a) (2) and (4) (b) (1) and (2)
rigid rod of length 1 m with negligible mass. (c) (2) and (3) (d) (3) and (4)
The centre of mass of the system from the 5 kg NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
particle is nearly at a distance of :
Ghes#eCeerÙe õJÙeceeve keâer 1 m uecyeer ÂÌ{ ÚÌ[ kesâ oes efmejeW Ans. (a) :
mes 5 kg Deewj 10 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ oes keâCe pegÌ[s nQ~
5 kg kesâ keâCe mes Fme efvekeâeÙe kesâ mebnefle kesâvõ keâer otjer Coincide
(ueieYeie) nw:
(a) 50 cm (b) 67 cm
(c) 80 cm (d) 33 cm
● Centre of mass : It is the point where whole mass of
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
the body is Concentrated. If an external force is
Ans. (b) : Centre of mass of the system from, applied on COM, torque will be zero.
 m1x1 + m2 x 2  ● Centre of gravity : It is the point where the torque of
Xcm =   − − − (1) gravitational force is zero.
 m1 + m2 
● COM and COG may or may not coincides.
m1 = 5 kg m2 = 10 kg (Given) ● Couple only produces rotation, no translation.
Let distance between two masses be d = 1m
output force
considering. A as origin, So, B = (d,0) ● Mechanical advantage =
Input force
using (1)
If it is greater than 1
output > input
So, less effort is required to lift large load.
6. A light rod of length L has two masses m1 and
m2 attached to its two ends. The moment of
inertia of the system about an axis
perpendicular to the rod and passing through
 m × 0 + m2 × d  m2 d
Xcm =  1 = the centre of mass is.
 m 1 + m 2  m1 + m2 Skeâ nukeâer ÚÌ[ keâer uecyeeF& L nw ~ Fmekesâ oes efmejeW mes
 10kg ×1m  2 ›eâceMe: m1 Deewj m2 õJÙeceeve kesâ efheb[ mebueive nw ~ Fme
X cm =   = m = 67cm.
 5kg + 10kg  3 ÚÌ[ kesâ uecyeJeled leLee Fmekesâ meb«eefnle kesâvõ mes iegpejles ngS
5. Which of the following statements are correct?
De#e kesâ heefjle: efvekeâeÙe keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee-
efvecveebefkeâle keâLeveeW ceWs mes keâewve mes keâLeve mener nw? m1m 2 2 m1 + m 2 2
(a) L (b) L
(1) Centre of mass of a body always coincides m1 + m 2 m1m 2
with the centre of gravity of the body,
(c) (m1+m2)L2 (d) m1 + m2 L2
efkeâmeer efheb[ keâe ieg®lJe kesâvõ Deewj Gmekeâs õJÙeceeve
kesâ meowJe mebheeleer nesles nQ~ NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
(2) Centre of mass of a body is the point at Ans. (a) :
which the total gravitational torque on the
body is zero/efkeâmeer efheb[ keâe õJÙeceeve kesâvõ Jen
efyevog peneB hej efheb[ hej ueiee kegâue ieg®lJeerÙe yeue
DeeIetCe& MetvÙe nQ~
Physics 136 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The distance of centre of mass from
m mas
mass m1 is Hence work required

x1 =
m2L
m1 + m 2
W = ∆K.E =
1
2
(
m1X 2 + m 2 ( L − X ) ω2
2
)
dW
The distance of centre of mass from
m mas
mass m2 is For Wmin , =0
m1L dx
x2 = d  m1 2 m 2
m1 + m 2 ⇒  X + ( L − X )2  ω2 = 0
dX  2 2 
Hence, moment of inertia of masses
es abo
about the centre of
⇒ [m1X + m2 (L – X)(–1)] = 0
mass = m1 x12 + m2 x22
⇒ m1X + m2X – m2L = 0
( m2 L )
m ( m L)
2 2
⇒ X (m1+ m2) = m2L
= m1 + 2 1
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 m2L
⇒ X=
m1m22 L2 + m12 m2 L2 m1 + m 2
= This is the location of centre off mass mas of the two point
( m1 + m2 )
2
masses.
On solving the above equation, we get. 8. A rod of weight W is support pported by two parallel
m1m 2 2 knife edges A and B and d is in equilibrium in a
COM = L horizontal position. The knives nives are at a distance d
m1 + m 2
from each other. The centre tre of mass of the rod is
7. Point masses m1 and m2 are placed at the at distance x from A. Thee normal nor reaction on A
opposite ends of a rigid rod oof length L, and is:/Skeâ ÚÌ[ keâe Yeej W nw~ Ùen oes meceevlej OegjOeejeW
negligible mass. The rod is to be set rotating (veeFheâ SpeeW) A leLee B hej efškeâer nwn Deewj #eweflepe DeJemLee
about an axis perpendicularlar to it. The position ceW meblegueve ceW nw~ Ùeefo A leLee B keskeâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 'd' nw
of point P on this rod through
rough which the axis
should pass so that the workrk req
required to set the leLee ÚÌ[ keâe õJÙeceeve kesâvõ A mes x otjer hej nw lees, A hej
rod rotating with angular lar vvelocity ω0 is DeefYeuecye Øeefleef›eâÙee keâe ceeve nesiee:-
minimum, is given by/efkeâmeer ÂÌ{ ÚÌ[ keâer uecyeeF& L Wd W(d − x)
(a) (b)
nw Deewj Fmekeâe õJÙeceeve veieCÙe nw~ Fmekesâ oes efJehejerle x x
efmejeW hej ›eâceMe: m1 leLee m2 õJÙ õJÙeceeve kesâ oes efyevog W (d − x ) Wx
(c) (d)
efheb[ jKes ieÙes nQ~ Fme ÚÌ[ keâes Gmekes
mekesâ mJeÙeb kesâ uecyeJele d d
De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve keâjevee nw,w ppees ÚÌ[ hej efmLele AIPMT-03.05.2015
efkeâmeer efyevog P Jen efmLeefle efpemek
emekesâ efueÙes ÚÌ[ keâes Ans. (c) : For equilibrium
keâesCeerÙe Jesie ω0 mes IetCe&ve keâjevesves kekesâ efueÙes DeeJeMÙekeâ
x
keâeÙe& vÙetvelece nesiee:

Now balancing torque about the COM

i.e. anti-clockwise moment = clockwis
ockwise moment
N1 + N2 = W ⇒ N2 = W − N1
N1x = N 2 ( d − x )

m2L m1L ∴ N1x = ( W − N1 )( d − x )

(a) x = (b) x =
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 N1x + N1 (d − x) = W ( d − x )
m m
(c) x = 1 L (d) x = 2 L W(d − x)
m2 m1 ∴ N1 =
d
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Ans. (a) : Moment of interia of thee syst
system 9. Three masses are placed on the th x-axis : 300 g at
2
I = m1x + m2 (L – x) 2 origin, 500 g at x = 40 cm and an 400 g at x = 70
The Kinetic energy of system. cm. The distance of the centre of mass from the
origin is/efJeefYeVe õJÙeceeveeW kessâ leer
leeve efheb[ X- De#e hej
1
K.E = Iω2 Fme Øekeâej jKeW nQ: 300g keâe effheb[ cetue efyevog hej, 500g
2
keâe, x = 40cm leLee 400g keâe eâe nwn x= 70cm. hej lees
=
1
2
(
m1X 2 + m 2 ( L − X ) ω2
2
) cetue efyevog mes õJÙeceeve kesâvõ keâerer otjer nesieer:–
Physics 137 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 50 cm (b) 30 cm Equating eqn (i) & (ii) we get
(c) 40 cm (d) 45 cm m1 r1 + m 2 r2 m1 ( r1 − d ) + m 2 ( r2 + d ')
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 =
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
Ans. (c) : Given
Three masses are placed on x-axis :– –m1d + m2d' = 0
(i) 300gm at origin m1
(ii) 500 gm at x = 40 cm d' = d
m2
(iii) 400 gm at x = 70 cm
11. A solid sphere of radius R is placed on smooth
horizontal surface. A horizontal force 'F' is
applied at height 'h' from the lowest point. For
the maximum acceleration of centre of mass,
Now, Distance of centre of mass of system of three
which is correct / R ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ "esme ieesuee Skeâ
masses from origin O is –
m x + m2 x 2 + m3x3
efÛekeâveer #eweflepe melen hej jKee ngDee nw~ Fme hej Skeâ
XCM = 1 1 #eweflepe yeue 'F' efvecvelece efyevog mes 'h' TBÛeeF& hej
m1 + m 2 + m 3
ueieeÙee peelee nw~ õJÙeceeve kesâvõ mes DeefOekeâlece lJejCe kesâ
300 × 0 + 500 × 40 + 400 × 70
XCM = efueS efvecve melÙe nesiee -
300 + 500 + 400
(a) h = R (b) h = 2R
500 × 40 + 400 × 70
= (c) h = 0
1200 (d) No relation between h and R
200 + 280 hJe R kesâ ceOÙe keâesF& mebyebOe veneR nesiee
=
12 AIPMT-2002
480 Ans. (d) : The smooth horizontal surface does not
=
12 provide any friction. The sphere does not roll. Hence
X CM = 40cm the acceleration of centre of mass of sphere is
independent of position of applied force.
10. Consider a system of two particles having
masses m1 and m2. If the particle of mass m1 is Therefore, there is no relation between h & R.
pushed towards the mass centre of particles
through a distance 'd', by what distance would
the particle of mass m2 move so as to keep the
mass centre of particles at the original position:
m1 Deewj m2 õJÙeceeveeW kesâ oes keâCeeW kesâ Skeâ efvekeâeÙe ceW
Ùeefo õJÙeceeve m1 kesâ keâCe keâes efvekeâeÙe kesâ õJÙeceeve kesâvõ
keâer efoMee ceW 'd' otjer lekeâ ÛeueeÙee peeS, lees keâCeeW kesâ 12. A rod of length is 3m and its mass acting per
õJÙeceeve kesâvõ keâes cetue mLeeve hej jKeves kesâ efueS õJÙeceeve
unit length is directly proportional to distance
m2 keâer Ûeueve otjer keäÙee nesieer :- x from one of its end. Then its centre of gravity
m1 from that end will be at
(a) d (b) d Skeâ 3m uecyeer ÚÌ[ efpemekeâer FkeâeF& uecyeeF& keâe õJÙeceeve
m2
m2 m1
Fmekeâer Skeâ efmejs mes otjer x kesâ meceevegheeleer nw lees Fmeer efmejs
(c) (d) d mes Fmekeâer ieg™lJe kesâvõ keâer DeJemLee nesieer -
m1 m1 + m 2
(a) 1.5 m (b) 2 m
AIPMT-2004
(c) 2.5 m (d) 3.0 m
Ans. (a) : AIPMT-2002
Ans. (b) : Given- (i) Length of Rod = 3m
Initially the centre of mass is (ii) Mass acting per unit length is directly proportional
m r + m 2 r2 to distance x.
rcm = 1 1 ...(i)
m1 + m 2
When mass m1, moves towards mass centre of particle
through a distance d, then
let mass m2 moves a distance d' away from mass center.
m ( r − d ) + m 2 ( r2 + d ')
So rcm = 1 1 ...(ii)
m1 + m 2

Physics 138 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
According to question, Ans. (*): The radius of gyration of solid sphere of mass
dm M and radius R about its own axis –
= kx where k = constant
dx 2
MR 2
Now, mass of small element of dx length is - I 5
k1 = =
dm = kx. dx M M
3
2
∫ x.dm ∫ x(kxdx) k1 =
5
R ...(i)
xcm = = 0

∫ dm
3
The radius of gyration of hollow sphere about its own
∫ kxdx
0
axis –
3 I 2 MR 2
x  3
27 k2 = =
3 M 3 M
=   03 = 3 = 2m
9 2
 x2  k2 = R ... (ii)
2 2 3
 0
On dividing eqn (i) by eqn (ii) we get –
13. The centre of mass of system of particles does
not depend on/keâCeeW kesâ Skeâ efvekeâeÙe keâe õJÙeceeve 2
R
kesâvõ hej efveYe&j veneR keâjlee- k1 5
=
(a) position of the particles/keâCeeW keâer efmLeefle hej k2 2
R
(b) relative distances between the particles/keâCeeW kesâ 3
yeerÛe keâer otjer hej k1 3
(c) masses of the particles/keâCeeW kesâ õJÙeceeve hej =
k2 5
(d) forces acting on the particle/keâCeeW hej ueieves Jeeues
yeue hej 15. An energy of 484 J is spent in increasing the
AIPMT-1997 speed of a flywheel from 60 rpm to 360 rpm.
The moment of inertia of the flywheel is:
Ans. (d) : The centre of mass of system of particles
does not depend on forces acting on the particle. efkeâmeer efheâjkeâer (heäueeF& Jnerue) keâer Ûeeue 60 rpm mes
• Centre of mass of system depends upon position and 360 rpm lekeâ yeÌ{eves kesâ efueS 484 J Tpee& JÙeÙe nesleer
masses of particle. Also, it depends upon relative nw~ efheâjkeâer keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nw:
distance between particles.
(a) 0.7 kg-m2 (b) 3.22 kg-m2
COM of a system is given by- 2
(c) 30.8 kg-m (d) 0.07 kg-m2
m x + m 2 x2
Xcom = 1 1 NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
m1 + m 2
Ans. (a) : Given :
m y + m2 y2 Speed N1 = 60 rpm, N2 = 360 rpm]
Ycom = 1 1
m1 + m 2 2 × π × N1
Angular velocity ωi =
m1z1 + m2 z 2 60
Zcom =
m1 + m2 2× π × 60
⇒ ωi = =2π rad/s
60
6.2 Moment of Inertia Angular velocity ωf =
2× π × N 2
60
14. The ratio of radius of gyration of a solid sphere 2 × π × 360
of mass M and radius R about its own axis to ⇒ ωf = = 12π rad/s
60
the radius of gyration of the thin hollow sphere
of same mass and radius about its axis is : The energy spent to increasing the energy of flywheel
M õJÙeceeve leLee R ef$epÙee kesâ Skeâ "esme ieesues keâer is–
Fmekeâer De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve ef$epÙee leLee meceeve ∆ K.E =
1
I ( ω f2 − ωi2 )
õJÙeceeve Je ef$epÙee kesâ heleues KeesKeues ieesues keâer Fmekeâer 2
De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve ef$epÙee keâe Devegheele nw : 1 2 × 486
486 = × I × (12 π ) − ( 2 π )  ⇒ I =
2 2

(a) 5 : 2 (b) 3 : 5 2   140π2

(c) 5 : 3 (d) 2 : 5
⇒ I = 0.7kg − m2
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Physics 139 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
16. The ratio of the radius of gyration of a thin 1 3
uniform disc about an axis passing through its (a) (b)
8 4
centre and normal to its plane to the radius of 7 1
gyration of the disc about its diameter is (c) (d)
Skeâ heleueer Skeâmeceeve ef[mkeâ kesâ Fmekesâ kesâvõ mes iegpejves 8 4
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Jeeues SJeb Fmekesâ leue kesâ uecyeJele De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve
Ans. (b):
keâer ef$epÙee keâe, Fme ef[mkeâ kesâ Fmekesâ JÙeeme kesâ heefjle:
IetCe&ve keâer ef$epÙee mes Devegheele keâe ceeve nesiee~
(a) 1: 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 2 :1 (d) 4 : 1
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 • Mass of the ring is M and radius is R
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013 Karnataka M
AIPMT-2008 • A sector of 90º i.e 4 mass is removed
Ans. (c) : M 3M
∴ New mass M' of ring = M − =
4 4
MOI = R 2 ∫ dm
 3M 
= R2   = KMR
2

 4 
Moment of inertia about centre, 3
K=
MR 2 4
I1 = = Mk12
2 18. Three objects, A : (a solid sphere), B : (a thin
R circular disk) and C : (a circular ring), each
k1 = − − − − −(i)
2 have the same mass M and radius R. They all
Moment of inertia about diameter, spin with the same angular speed ω about their
own symmetry axes. The amounts of work (W)
MR 2
I2 = = Mk 2 2 required to bring them to rest, would satisfy
4 the relation / leerve efheC[, A: (Skeâ "esme ieesuee), B:
R (Skeâ heleueer Je=òeekeâej Ûekeâleer) leLee C : (Skeâ
k2 = − − − − −(ii)
2 Je=òeekeâej Úuuee), efpemeceW ØelÙeskeâ keâe õJÙeceeve M leLee
From eqn (i) and (ii)
R nw, meceeve keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue ω mes Deheveer meceefceefle De#eeW
k1 R 2 kesâ heefjle: Ûe›eâCe keâj jns nQ~ FvnW efJejeceeJemLee ceW ueeves
=
k2 R/2 kesâ efueS efkeâS peeves Jeeues DeeJeMÙekeâ keâeÙeeX (W) kesâ efueS
=
R 2
× keâewve-mee mebyebOe mener nw?
2 R (a) WC > WB > WA (b) WA > WB > WC
2× 2 (c) WA > WC > WB (d) WB > WA > WC
= NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
2× 2
Ans. (a) : The moment of inertia of the given solid
k1 2 2
= sphere about its own axis, I A = MR 2
k2 1 5
17. From a circular ring of mass 'M' and radius The moment of inertia of given thin disc about its own
'R' an arc corresponding to a 90° sector is 1
axis of symmetry, I B = MR 2
removed. The Moment of Inertia of the 2
remaining part of the ring about an axis The moment of inertia of given ring about its own axis
passing through the centre of the ring and
perpendicular to the plane of the ring is 'K' of symmetry, IC = MR
2

times 'MR2'. Then the value of 'K' is As we know that rotational kinetic energy can be
'M' õJÙeceeve leLee 'R' ef$epÙee kesâ Skeâ Je=òeerÙe Úuues mes written as.
90° meskeäšj kesâ mebiele Skeâ Ûeehe (Deeke&â) nše efoÙee 1
KE rot = Iω2
peelee nw~ yeÛes ngS Úuues kesâ Yeeie keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& 2
Úuues kesâ kesâvõ mes iegpejves Jeeueer leLee Úuues kesâ leue kesâ The rotational kinetic energy of the solid sphere is
uecyeJeled De#e kesâ meehes#e 'MR2' keâe 'K' iegvee nw~ 'K' 1 1 2
KEA = I A ω2 = × MR 2 × ω2 = 0.2MR 2 ω2
keâe ceeve nw : 2 2 5
Physics 140 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Work done for the sphere is - 20. A solid sphere of mass m and radius R is
WA = (KEA) = 0.2 MR2 ω2 …(i) rotating about its diameter. A solid cylinder of
The rotational kinetic energy of the disc is the same mass and same radius is also rotating
1 1 1 about its geometrical axis with an angular
KE B = I B ω2 = × MR 2 × ω2 = 0.25MR 2 ω2 speed twice that of the sphere. The ratio of
2 2 2
Work done for the disc is - their kinetic energies of rotation (ESphere/ECylinder
WB = (KEB) = 0.25 MR ω 2 2
…(ii) will be)/õJeceeve m leLee ef$epÙee R keâe Skeâ "esme ieesuee
The rotational kinetic energy of the ring is Deheves JÙeeme kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve keâj jne nw~ Gmeer õJÙeceeve
1 1
KE C = I R ω = × M × R × ω = 0.5MR ω
2 2 2 2 2 leLee Gmeer ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ "esme yesueve (efmeefueb[j) Yeer
2 2 Deheves pÙeeefceleerÙe De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCe&ve keâj jne nw ~
Work done for the ring is -
WC = (KEC) = 0.5 MR2ω2 …(iii)
yesueve kesâ IetCe&ve keâer keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue ieesues mes oes iegvee nw ~
On comparing equation (i), (ii) and (iii), we get Fve oesvees keâer IeCe&ve ieeflepe TpeeDeeW keâe Devegheele (Eieesuee
∴ WC > WB > WA /Eyesueve) nesiee :-
19. Two discs of same moment of inertia rotating (a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 5
about their regular axis passing through centre (c) 1 : 4 (d) 3 : 1
and perpendicular to the plane of disc with
angular velocities ω1 and ω2 . They are brought NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
into contact face to face coinciding the axis of Ans. (b) : Kinetic energy of rotation of sphere is,
rotation. The expression for loss of energy 1
during this process is/oes ef[mkeâeW (Ûeef›eâkeâeÙeeW) kesâ Esphere = I s ωs 2
2
peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& Deeheme ceW yejeyej nQ~ Ùes Deheveer-Deheveer Kinetic energy of rotation of cylinder,
efveÙeefcele De#e, pees Fvekesâ meceleue kesâ uecyeJeled nw Deewj 1
Ûeef›eâkeâe kesâ kesâvõ mes neskeâj iegpejleer nw kesâ heefjle:, ›eâceMe: Ecylinder = I c ωc 2
2
ω1 leLee ω2 keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes IetCe&ve keâj jner nQ~ Fvekeâes Where, I and ω are moment of inertia and angular
Skeâ otmejs kesâ meccegKe Fme Øekeâej mecheke&â ceW ueeÙee peelee velocity of respective shapes.
nw efkeâ, Fvekeâer IetCe&ve De#e mebheeleer nes peeleer nQ lees, Fme 1
Øe›eâce ceW Tpee&-#eÙe kesâ efueÙes JÙebpekeâ nesiee: Is ωs2
E sphere 2 Is ωs2
= =
(a)
1
I(ω1 + ω2 ) 2
1
(b) I(ω1 − ω2 ) 2 E cylinder 1 I ω 2 I c ωc2
c c
2 4 2
I 2 1
(c) I(ω1 −ω2 )
2
(d) (ω1 − ω2 ) 2 Here, I s = mR 2 , I c = mR 2
8 5 2
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 Given, ωc = 2ωs
Ans. (b) : Let the angular velocity of the combination 2
be ω E sphere mR 2 × ωs2
5 4 1 1
Apply conservation of angular momentum = = × =
E cylinder 1 mR 2 × 2ω 2 5 4 5
Iω1 + Iω2 = (I + I)ω ( s)
2
1
ω = ( ω1 + ω2 ) Hence, the ratio of their kinetic energies of rotation will
2 be 1 : 5.
1 1
Initial kinetic energy, ki = Iω12 + Iω22 21. From a disc of radius R and mass M, a circular
2 2 hole of diameter R, whose rim passes through
1 the centre is cut. What is the moment of inertia
Final kinetic energy kf = (2I)ω 2

2 of the remaining part the disc about a

1 perpendicular axis, passing through the
kf = ( ω1 + ω2 ) .I
2

4 centre?/õJÙeceeve M leLee ef$epÙee R keâes efkeâmeer ef[mkeâ

∴ Loss in energy ∆k = ki – kf mes R JÙeeme keâe keâesF& Je=òeekeâej efÚõ Fme Øekeâej keâeše
peelee nw efkeâ Gmekeâer vesefce ef[mkeâ kesâ kesâvõ mes iegpejs~ ef[yyes
I ( ω12 + ω22 ) − ( ω12 + ω22 + 2ω1ω2 ) .I
1 1
=
2 4 kesâ Mes<e Yeeie keâe, ef[mkeâ kesâ uecyeJeled Gmekesâ kesâvõ mes
= ( ω1 + ω22 − 2ω1ω2 ) .I
1 2 iegpejves Jeeues De#e kesâ heefjle: peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& keäÙee nw?
4 (a) 9MR2/32 (b) 15MR2/32
1 (c) 13MR2/32 (d) 11 MR2 /32
I ( ω 1 − ω2 )
2
∆k =
4 NEET (UG)-01.05.2016

Physics 141 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c) Using parallel axis theorem
Moment of Inertia of shell 1 about
2 5
XX ' = mr 2 + mr 2 = mr 2 ..........
.... (1)
3 3
Moment of Inertia of shell 2 will be b same as shell 1
about
MR 2 5
XX ' = mr 2 .......... (2)
Moment of inertia of disk ITotal disk =
2 3
M Moment of Inertia of shell 3 about
Mass is proportional to area, MRemoved = 2
4 XX ' = mr 2 .......... (3)
Now, about the same perpendicularr axis
axis: 3
M (R / 2) 2 M  R 
2 As, moment of inertia about samee axis are added.
I Re moved = +   ∴ On adding equation (1), (2) & (3), we w get
4 2 42
5 2 5 2 2 2 12 2
3MR 2 I = mr + mr + mr = mrr = 44mr 2
= 3 3 3 3
32 Moment of Inertia of the system about XX' is 4mr2.
IRemainingdisc = ITotal − IRemoved 23. The moment of inertia of a uniform circular
MR 2 3MR 2 disc is maximum about an axis a perpendicular
= − throug efkeâmeer Skeâ meceeve
to the disc and passing through/
2 32
Je=òeekeâej ef[mkeâ (Ûekeâleer) keâe ke peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe&
13MR 2
I Remaining = DeefOekeâlece nesiee Ùeefo, IetCe&ve De#e
De# ef[mkeâ kesâ uecyeJeled
32
nes Deewj Jen iegpejleer nes:–
22. Three identical spherical shells,
hells, each of mass m
and radius r are placed as sh shown in figure.
Consider an axis XX' which ch is touching to two
shells and passing through diamet
diameter of third shell.
Moment of inertia of the syste
system consisting of
these three spherical shells abou
about XX' axis is:-
leerve meJe&mece ieesueerÙe keâesMeeW (KeesKs eue
eues ieesueeW) ceW ØelÙeskeâ (a) D (b) A
keâe õJÙeceeve m leLee ef$epÙee r nww~ Fvn FvnW DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes (c) B (d) C
ieÙes Devegmeej jKee ieÙee nw~ XX' Sk Skeâ De#e nw, pees oes AIPMT
AIP (Mains)-2012
ieesueerÙe keâesMeeW keâes mheMe& keâjleer nww De
Deewj leermejs kesâ JÙeeme Ans. (c) : Moment of inertia of a rigid r body about a
mes neskeâj iegpejleer nw~ lees, XX' De#e e#e kesâ heefjle: Fve leerve fixed axis is defined as the sum of product
pro of the masses
ieesueerÙe keâesMeeW kesâ efvekeâeÙe keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee: of the particles constituting the body and
a square of their
respective distances from the axis xis of the rotation. The
moment of inertia is expressed as–
I = Mr2
Where, r = the perpendicular distance distan of the particle
from the rotational axis
M = mass of the particle.
16 2 From the expression we can say that–
(a) 3 mr2 (b) mr When ⊥'r distance increases,, moment mo of inertia
5
increases. In the given figure perpend rpendicuular distance is
11 2 maximum for B. So, moment off inertia inert (I) is maximum
(c) 4 mr2 (d) mr
5 for B.
AIP
AIPMT-03.05.2015 24. The moment of inertia off a thin th uniform rod of
Ans. (c) : Given : Mass of spherical
al shel
shell = m mass M and length L about an axis passing
Radius of spherical shell = r through its midpoint and d perpendicular
per to its
length is I0. Its moment of inertia ine about an axis
passing through one of its ends and
r
perpendicular to its length th is :
efkeâmeer heleueer Skeâ meceeve ÚÌ[ keâe
ke õJÙeceeve M Deewj
uecyeeF& L nw~ Gmekesâ ceOÙe efyevog
vog mes
m neskeâj peeves Jeeueer
Deewj Gmekeâer uecyeeF& kesâ uecyeJeled
eled De#e kesâ heefjle:, ÚÌ[
Physics 142 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe I0 nw~ lees ÚÌ[ kesâ Skeâ efmejs mes iegpejves The moment of inertia of the complete disc about an
Jeeueer Deewj Gmekeâer uecyeeF& kesâ uecyeJeled De#e kesâ heefjle:, axis passing through its centre O and perpendicular to
its plane is.
Gmekeâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee :
9 2
(a) I0 + ML2 (b) I0 + ML2/2 I1 = MR
(c) I0 + ML2/4 (d) I0 + 2ML 2
Now, moment of inertia of the disc with removed
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
portion
Ans. (c) : 2
1 R 1
L I 2 = M   = MR 2
2  3  18
Therefore moment of inertia of the remaining portion of
disc about the centre O is,
I = I1 – I2
According to theorem of parallel axes, the moment of
inertia of the thin rod of mass M and length L. I = 9 MR 2 − 1 MR 2
I0 is moment of inertia of net length L about its axis 2 18
and IB is the moment of inertia of Rod at its ends is. I= 81MR 2
− MR 2

∴IB = I0 + Md2 18
2 40MR 2
L I=
IB = I0 + M   9
2
26. Four identical thin rods each of mass M and
ML2 length l, from a square frame. Moment of
IB = I0 +
4 inertia of this frame about an axis through the
25. From a circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, centre of the square and perpendicular to its
plane is:/Ûeej heleueer Skeâ pewmeer ÚÌ[eW mes efpeveceW mes
R
a small disc of mass M and radius is ØelÙeskeâ keâe õJÙeceeve M leLee uecyeeF& l nw, Skeâ Jeiee&keâej
3
øesâce yevee nw~ Fme Jeie& kesâ kesâvõ mes iegpejves Jeeues leLee
removed concentrically. The moment of inertia
of the remaining disc about an axis
Fmekesâ leue ceW uecyeJeled De#e kesâ meehes#e øesâce keâe peÌ[lJe
perpendicular to the plane of the disc and DeeIetCe& nesiee:
passing through its centre is 1 4
(a) ML2 (b) ML2
R 3 3
R ef$epÙee Deewj 9M õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ ef[mkeâ mes 2 13
3 (c) ML2 (d) ML2
ef$epÙee M õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ Úesšer ef[mkeâ mebkesâvõerÙe ™he 3 3
mes keâeš keâj efvekeâeue ueer ieF& nw~ Mes<e yeÛes Yeeie keâe AIMPT-2009
peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& Gmekesâ leue kesâ uecyeJeled Deewj Gmekesâ kesâvõ Ans. (b)
mes neskeâj peeves Jeeueer De#e kesâ heefjle: nesieer –
40
(a) MR 2 (b) MR2
9
4
(c) 4MR2 (d) MR 2 Moment of inertia of a rod whose axis goes through the
9 centre of the rod, having mass m and length is
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
1
Ans. (a) : Given– expressed as Ic = ML2
12
Radius of disc = R 2
Mass of disc = 9M L
Parallel axis theorem = I c + M  
Mass of removed portion of the disc = M 2
Radius of small disc = R/3 Moment of inertia due to all four rods,
I = 4  Ic + M ( L / 2 ) 
2
 
 ML2 ML2 
I = 4 + 
 12 4 
4
I= ML2
3

Physics 143 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. A thin rod of length L and mass M is bent at its Ans. (c): Given : Disc radius = R
midpoint into two halves so that the angle Mass = M
between them is 90º. The moment of inertia of Moment of Inertia about an axis passing through O and
the bent rod about an axis passing through the
1
bending point and perpendicular to the plane perpendicular to the place, I0 = MR2
defined by the two halves of the rod is – 2
uecyeeF& L Deewj õJÙeceeve M keâer Skeâ heleueer ÚÌ[ keâes Deheves
ceOÙe efyevog hej 90º kesâ keâesCe hej ceesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ ÚÌ[ kesâ
cees[
Ì efyevog mes Skeâ De#e Fme lejn peelee nw efkeâ, cegÌ[er ÚÌ[
kesâ oes YeeieeW mes yeves leue mes De#e uecye efoMee ceW nw~ Fme
De#e kesâ efieo& ceg[
Ì er ÚÌ[ keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee :- Moment of inertia about an axis passing through C
(touching diameter) and normal to disc –
ML2 2ML2 IC = I0 + MR2
(a) (b)
6 24 1
ML2 ML2 = MR2 + MR2
(c) (d) 2
24 12 3
AIPMT-2008 = MR2
2
Ans. (d) : Given : Thin rod length = L
29. The ratio of the radii of gyration of a circular
Mass = M disc about a tangential axis in the plane of the
Since rod is bent at its mid point disc and of a circular ring of the same radius
L about a tangential axis in the plane of the ring
So length of each bent part rod =
2 is:-
M Skeâ Je=òeekeâej ef[mkeâ Deewj Skeâ Je=òeekeâej JeueÙe meceeve
Mass =
2 ef$epÙeeSB jKeleer nQ~ Jes Deheves-Deheves leue ceW ner efmLele Skeâ
We know M.O.I. of rod at its end = ML2
1 mheMe&jsKeerÙe De#e kesâ efieo& Ietceleer nQ~ ef[mkeâ Deewj JeueÙe
3 keâer ›eâceMe: heefjYeüceCe ef$epÙeeDeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee :-
So M.O.I. of structure at Bend point & ⊥ to Plane
2 2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 5 : 6
1  M  L  1  M   L 
=    +  ×  (c) 2 : 3 (d) 1 : 2
3  2  2  3  2   2 
AIPMT-2004
ML2 ML2
= + Ans. (b) : Moment of inertia of a circular disc about a
24 24 tangential in the plane of disc.
ML2
= 2× 5 5
24 I1 = mk12 = mR 2 , k1 = R ...(i)
4 4
ML2 Moment of inertia of a circular ring of same radius
=
12 about tangential axis in the plane of the ring
28. The moment of inertia of a uniform circular 3
disc of radius 'R' and mass 'M' about an axis I2 = mk 22 = mR 2
2
touching the disc at its diameter and normal to
the disc is:- 3
k2 = R ...(ii)
Skeâ Skeâmeceeve Je=òeerÙe Ûeef›eâkeâe keâe ef$epÙee R nw Deewj 2
Fmekeâe õJÙeceeve M nw~ Fme Ûeef›eâkeâe kesâ JÙeeme kesâ efmejs From eqn (i) & (ii)
hej Ûeef›eâkeâe keâes Útleer ngF& Ûeef›eâkeâe leue mes uecye efoMee 5
R
kesâ jsKee ™heer De#e kesâ efieo& Ûeef›eâkeâe keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& k1 4
∴ =
nesiee:- k2 3
R
2 2
(a) MR2 (b) MR2
5 5 2 5
= × =
3 1 4 3 6
(c) MR2 (d) MR2
2 2
k1 : k 2 : : 5 : 6
AIPMT-2006, 2005
Physics 144 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
30. Three particles, each of mass m gram, are Ans. (b): Moment of Inertia of a triangle tria lamina ABC
situated at the vertices of an equilateral mh 2

triangle ABC of side l cm. m. (a(as shown in the about side =

6
figure). The moment of inertia of the system
about a line AX perpendicular ular tto AB and in the
plane of ABC, in gram cm2 units will be :-
õJÙeceeve m «eece ØelÙeskeâ kesâ leerve keâC
keâCeeW keâes l cm Yegpee
kesâ Skeâ meceyeeng ef$eYegpe ABC kesâ Meer<e& efyevogDeeW hej
efÛe$e Devegmeej JÙeJeefmLele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ AX jsKee AB
jsKee mes uecye efoMee ceW nw Deewj ABC leue ceW nQ~ AX kesâ
h = height of lamina w.r.t. that side.
efieo& Fme efvekeâeÙe kesâ peÌ[lJe DeeIet
eeIetCe& keâe ceeve «eece-
m × 42 m
mesceer2 cee$ekeâeW ceW nesiee :- Moment of Inertia about BC, I2 = = 16
6 6
m×3 2
m
Moment of Inertia about AB, I1 = = 9.
6 6
⇒ I2 > I1
32. In a rectangle ABCD (BC C = 2AB).
2 The moment
of inertia is minimum along
ong axis
ax through
5 2
(a) 2ml2 (b) ml Skeâ DeeÙele ABCD (BC = 2AB)
2AB kesâ efkeâme De#e kesâ
4
heefjle: peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& vÙetvelece nesiee?
ee
3 2 3
(c) ml (d) ml 2
2 4
AIPMT-2004
Ans. (b) :

(a) BC (b) BD
(c) HF (d) EG
AIPMT-1993
Ans. (d) :

Moment of inertia = mA rA2 + mBrB2 + mCrC2

Given, A rectangle ABCD wheree BC = 2AB
Where rA = 0 , rB = l , rC = l sin30°
Let M be the mass of the rectangle AB
gle ABCD and length of
Moment of inertia = m(0)2 + m(l)2 + m(l sin30)2 AB = L ...(
...(i)
ml 2 5 2 Then, AB = CD = L
= ml2 + = ml
4 4 BC = 2AB = 2L
31. For the adjoining diagram,, a tri triangular lamina The moment of inertia about the axis CD
C
2
is shown the correct relation on bet between I1, I2 & I3 ML
is (I – moment of inertia) I= ... (ii)
3
efoS ieÙes efÛe$e ceW ef$eYegpeekeâej heóererkeâe oMee&Ùeer ieÙeer nw lees 1
yevOe nesiee (I- peÌ[lJe ICD = 3 M ( BC )
2
I1, I2 leLee I3 kesâ ceOÙe mener mecyevOe
DeeIetCe& nw) 1
= M ( 2L )
2

3
4
= ML2 ... (A)
3
Moment of inertia about the axiss BC is i
1 (
IBC = M AB )
2

(a) I1 > I2 (b) I2 > I1 3

1
= M ( L)
2
(c) I3 > I1 (d) I3 > I2
AIPMT-2000 3
Physics 145 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 Skeâ ef[mkeâ keâe JÙeeme kesâ heefjle: peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& I nw~
= ML2 ... (B) Fmekesâ meceleue kesâ uecyeJele leLee Fmekesâ efjce hej Skeâ
3
The moment of inertia about the axis HF is efyevog mes iegpejles De#e kesâ heefjle: peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee:
2 (a) 5I (b) 3I
1  BC 
IHF = M  (c) 6I (d) 4I
12  2  AIPMT-1990
1 Ans. (c) :
= ML2 ... (C)
12
The moment of inertia about the axis EG is
2
1  AB 
IEG = M  
12  2 
2
1 L
= M 
12  2 
1 Moment of inertia of a circular disc about diameter axis
= ML2 ... (D) is given as
48
MR 2
From each (A) (B) (C) and (D) Ix = Iy = ⇒ MR 2 = 4I ( say )
The moment of inertia about EG, 4
Moment of inertia of a circular disc about an axis
1
IEG = ML2 has the minimum value. perpendicular to plane of disc and passing through
48 origin or centre is
33. A fly wheel rotating about fixed axis has a MR 2 MR 2 MR 2
kinetic energy of 360 joule when its angular Ic = Ix + I y = + =
4 4 2
speed is 30 radian/sec. The moment of inertia Moment of inertia of the circular disc passing through
of the wheel about the axis of rotation is an axis perpendicular to plane and passing through a
Skeâ heäueeF&Jeerue Deheves De#e kesâ heefjle: 360 J keâer IetCe&ve point on rim at a distance R from centre.
ieeflepe Tpee& mes Ietcelee nw~ keâesCeerÙe Jesie 30 jsef[Ùeve/mes nw~ MR 2 3
I R = I c + MR 2 = + MR 2 = MR 2
IetCe&ve De#e kesâ heefjle: heäueeF&Jeerue keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nesiee~ 2 2
2
(a) 0.6 kg m / 0.6 efkeâ«ee-ceer
2 3
⇒ I R = × 4I = 6I
2
(b) 0.15 kg m2/0.15 efkeâ«ee-ceer 2
2 IR = 6I
(c) 0.8 kg m /0.8 efkeâ«ee-ceer
2

2 35. The moment of inertia of a body about a given

(d) 0.75 kg m2/ 0.75 efkeâ«ee-ceer
axis is 1.2 kg m2. Initially, the body is at rest. In
AIPMT-1990 order to produce a rotational kinetic energy of
Ans. (c) : Given, 1500 joule, an angular acceleration of 25
Angular speed of the flywheel ω= 30 rad/s radian/sec2 must be applied about that axis for a
Rotational kinetic energy E = 360 J duration of/efkeâmeer De#e kesâ heefjle: efkeâmeer efheC[ keâe
We have, the relation between k.E, angular speed and peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& 1.2 efkeâ«ee-ceer2 nw~ DeejcYe ceW efheC[ efmLej
M.I is, nw~ FmeceW 1500 J keâer IetCe&ve ieeflepe Tpee& GlheVe keâjves kesâ
1 2 efueS 25 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[2 keâe keâesCeerÙe lJejCe Gme De#e kesâ
K.E = Iω
2 heefjle: efkeâleves meceÙe kesâ efueS ueieevee heÌ[siee?
1 (a) 4 s (b) 2 s
360 = I ( 30 )
2

2 (c) 8 s (d) 10 s
1 AIPMT-1990
360 = I × 900
2 Ans. (b) : Given that, I = 1.2 kgm2
360 × 2 K.E = 1500 J
I=
900 Initial angular velocity ( ω0) = 0
= 0.8 kgm 2 1
So, K.E = I ω2
34. Moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc 2
about a diameter is I. Its moment of inertia ω2
1500 = 1.2 ×
about an axis perpendicular to its plane and 2
passing through a point on its rim will be ω = 50 rad/sec
Physics 146 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Relation between initial and final angulaangular velocity is, AB
sinθ =
ω = ω0 + at AC
50 = 0 + 25 × t 4
sinθ = ....(i)
50 5
t= = 2 sec for ∆ABCD
25
BD
36. The ABC is a triangular ar pla
plate of uniform sinθ =
thickness. The sides are in n the ratio shown in BC
the figure. IAB, IBC and ICA are the moments of h3
sinθ = .... (ii)
inertia of plate about AB, BC and CA 3
respectively. Which onee of the following On equating eqn(i) and eqn(ii) wee get,
relations is correct? 4 h3
=
ABC Skeâ meceeve ceesšeF& keâer ef$eY eYegpeekeâej huesšW nQ~ 5 3
YegpeeSB efÛe$e ceW oer ieF& nw~ IAB, IBC leLee ICA ›eâceMe: 12
h3 =
AB, BC leLee CA De#e kesâ heefjf le: peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& nw~ 5
efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee mecyevOe menerer nw?  12 
2

m 
mh32
Hence, ICA = =  5
6 6
144 1 5.76 5. m
= m× × =
25 6 6
5.76 m 9m 16m
(a) IAB + IBC = ICA (b) ICA is maximum Therefore, I CA = < IAB = < I BC =
(c) IAB > IBC (d) IBC > IAB 6 6 6
From option (d) IBC > IAB and we can ca also see that the
AIPMT-1995
sum of IAB and IBC is
Ans. (d) : We know that the moment oment of Inertia of a 9 m 16 m 25m
mh 2 IAB + IBC = + = ≠ I CAA
triangular plate about its base is, IB = 6 6 6
6 Therefore, option (d) is correct.
Where m = total mass
h = height
Therefore, Moment of inertia aboutt AB will be. 6.3 Angular Velocity locity and its
mh12 Relation with Linear Linea Velocity
IAB = (Here h1 = 3)
6
37. A constant torque of 100 0 Nm turns a wheel of
m × 32 9m moment of inertia 300 kgm2 about an axis
∴ IAB = =
6 6 passing through its centre. tre. Starting
S from rest,
Moment of inertia about BC will be. its angular velocity after 3 s is
100 Nm keâe Skeâ efveÙele yeue eue DeeIetCe& 300kg m2
mh22
IBC = (Here h2 = 4) peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& kesâ Skeâ heefnÙes keâes
eâes Gmekes
G â kesâvõ mes iegpejves
6 Jeeues De#e kesâ heefjle: Iegceelee nww~ efJejeceeJemLee mes ØeebjcYe
m × 16 16m keâjles ngS 3s kesâ yeeo Fmekeâe keâesâesCeereeÙe Jesie nw:
∴ IBC = =
6 6 (a) 10 rad/s (b) 15 rad/s
Moment of inertia about CA will be. (c) 1 rad/s (d) 5 rad/s
mh 32 RE NEET Manipur nipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
ICA =
6 Ans. (c) : Given: τ = 100 N-m
Now from figure we can find sinθ for ∆ABC and also I = 300 kg.m2
for triangle ∆BCD ω =?
So, for ∆ABC t = 3 sec
The torque of a body undergoing g circular
circu motion is
τ = Iα
100 = 300α
100
α=
300
1
α = rad / sec 2 ... (i)
3

Physics 147 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For a constant acceleration the equation of motion for (a) 1 rad/s2 (b) 2π rad/s2
rotational motion is - (c) 28π rad/s2 (d) 120π rad/s2
ω = ωo+ αt NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
As the wheel starts from rest, initial angular velocity Ans. (b) : Given, Time (t) = 14 sec.
ωo = 0
360
1 Initial angular speed, N0 = rps (revolution/s)
ω = 0+ ×3 (from equation (i)) 60
3
ω0 = 2π N0 = 2 × π × 6
ω = 1 rad/sec
= 12 π radian/sec.
38. The angular speed of a fly wheel moving with
uniform angular acceleration changes from Final angular speed, N = 1200 rps
1200 rpm to 3120 rpm in 16 seconds. The 60
angular acceleration in rad/s2 is ω = 2 × π × 20 = 40π radian/sec
Skeâ meceeve keâesCeerÙe lJejCe mes Ietce jner efkeâmeer efheâjkeâer Now,
(fly wheel) keâer keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue 16 meskesâC[ ceW 1200 ω = ω0 + αt {α = Angular Acceleration}
rpm (IetCe&ve Øeefle efceveš) mes 3120 rpm nes peeleer nw~ ω − ω0
keâesCeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve rad/s2 ceW nw: α=
t
(a) 104π (b) 2π 40 π − 12 π
α=
(c) 4π (d) 12π 14
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 28π
Ans. (c) : Given =
14
n1 = 1200 rpm
1200 α = 2π rads −2
= rps
60 40. Two particles A and B are moving in uniform
= 20 rps circular motion in concentric circles of radii rA
n2 = 3120 rpm and rB with speed vA and vB respectively. Their
3120 time period of rotation is the same. The ratio of
= rps
60 angular speed of A to that of B will be :
= 52 rps rA Deewj rB ef$epÙeeDeeW kesâ mebkesâvõer Je=òeeW hej oes keâCe A
Time, t = 16s Deewj B ›eâceMe: vA Deewj vB JesieeW mes Skeâmeceeve Je=òeerÙe
Now we know that
ieefle keâj jns nQ~ Fvekesâ IetCe&ve keâe DeeJele&keâeue meceeve nw~
ω = ω0 + αt
Where A Deewj B keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeeueeW keâe Devegheele nesiee:
ω = final angular speed (a) vA : vB (b) rB : rA
ω0 = Initial angular speed (c) 1 : 1 (d) rA : rB
t = time NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
α = angular acceleration Ans. (c) :
ω − ω0
α= [Q ω = ω0 + αt ]
t
2 πn 2 − 2 πn1
=
t
2π ( 52 − 20 )
= Time period of rotation is same,
16
T = TA = TB
2π ( 32 )
α= = 4π Now Time period =
2π
16 ω
39. The angular speed of the wheel of a vehicle is Where ω = angular speed
increased from 360 rpm to 1200 rpm in 14
TA = TB
second. Its angular acceleration is,
efkeâmeer Jeenve kesâ heefnS keâer keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue 14 meskeâC[ ceW 2π 2π
=
360 rpm mes yeÌ{keâj 1200 rpm nes peeleer nw~ Fmekeâe ωA ωB
keâesCeerÙe lJejCe nw ωA : ωB = 1 : 1

Physics 148 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
41. A rope is wound around a hollow cylinder of Ans. (c): Given disc
mass 3 kg and radius 40 cm. What is the m1 = 2kg, r1 = 0.2m, ω1 = 50 rad/sec
angular acceleration of the cylinder if the rope m2 = 4kg, r2 = 0.1m, ω2 = 200 rad/sec
is pulled with a force of 30 N? Final Angular velocity = ωf
Skeâ KeesKeues efmeefuev[j keâe õJÙeceeve 3 kg leLee ef$epÙee Using conservation of Angular Momentum
40 cm nw~ Fme hej Skeâ [esjer uehesš oer ieF& nw~ Ùeefo, Fme ωf (I1+I2) = I1ω1 + I2× ω2
[esjer keâes 30 N yeue Éeje KeeRÛee peeS lees, efmeuesv[j keâe I ω +I ω
ωf = 1 1 2 2
keâesCeerÙe lJejCe efkeâlevee nesiee? I1 + I 2
(a) 25m/s2 (b) 0.25rad/s2 When ω = Angular Velocity
(c) 25 rad/s2 (d) 5m/s 2
I = moment of Inertia
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 1 1 1
I1 = m1r12 = × 2 × ( 0.2 ) = × 2 × 0.04 = 0.04
2

Ans. (c) : 2 2 2
I2= 1 m 2 r22 = 1 × 4 × ( 0.1)2 = 1 × 4 × 0.1 × 0.1 = 0.02
2 2 2
0.04 × 50 + 0.02 × 200
ωf =
0.06
0.2 ×10 + 4
ωf =
0.06
6
ωf =
0.06
ωf = 100 rad/ sec
Moment of inertia of hollow cylinder
43. A gramophone record is revolving with angular
I = MR2
velocity ω. A coin is placed at a distance r
= 3 × (0.4)2
from the centre of the record. The static
Torque, τ = Iα ...(i) coefficient of friction is μ. The coin will
Torque about centre line of cylinder revolve with the record if –
τ=F×R ...(ii) Skeâ «eeceesHeâesve efjkeâe[&ωkeâesCeerÙe Jesie kesâ meeLe heefj›eâceCe
From equation (i) and (ii) keâj jne nw~ Skeâ efmekeäkeâe Fmekesâ kesâvõ mes r otjer hej efmLele
F × R = Iα nw~ mLeweflekeâ Ie<e&Ce iegCeebkeâ μnw~ efmekeäkeâe efjkeâe@[& kesâ meeLe
F× R heefj›eâceCe keâjsiee, Ùeefo –
Angular acceleration α =
I
ω2
30 × 0.4 (a) r = µg ω2 (b) r <
= µg
MR 2
30 × 0.4 µg µg
= (c) r ≤ (d) r ≥
3 × ( 0.4 )
2 ω2 ω2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
100
= rad / s 2 Ans. (c) : Given: Angular velocity = ω
4 distance = r
= 25 rad/s2 coefficient of friction = µ
42. Two discs are rotating about their axes, normal When the disc spins the frictional force between the
to the discs and passing through the centres of gramophone record and coin is µmg. the coin revolve
the discs. Disc D1 has 2 kg mass and 0.2 m with record if,
radius and initial angular velocity of 50 rad s–1. f(frictional) ≥ F(centripetal)
Disc D2 has 4kg mass, 0.1 m radius and initial µmg ≥ mω2r
angular velocity of 200 rad s–1. The two discs
µg
are brought in contact face to face, with their r≤ 2
axes of rotation coincident. The final angular ω
velocity (in rad.s–1) of the system is 44. A wheel has angular acceleration of 3.0 rad/sec2
(a) 40 (b) 60 and initial angular speed of 2.00 rad/sec. In a
(c) 100 (d) 120 time of 2 sec it has rotated through an angle (in
radian) of :
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Physics 149 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ Ûe›eâ keâe keâesCeerÙe lJejCe 3.0 rad/sec2 nw Deewj 47. The angular speed of a flywheel making 120
Fmekeâer DeejefcYekeâ keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue 2.00 rad/sec. nw~ 2 revolutions/minute is/Øeefle efceveš 120 heefj›eâceCe keâjves
meskeâC[ kesâ keâeue ceW Fmekesâ IegceeJeeW keâe ceeve jsef[Ùeve ceW Jeeueer Skeâ Ûekeâjer (flywheel) keâer keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue nw:
nesiee:- (a) 4π rad/s (b) 4π2 rad/s
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) π rad/s (d) 2π rad/s
AIPMT-1995
(c) 10 (d) 12
AIPMT-2007 Ans. (a) : Given that, ν = 120 resolutions/minute
We know that,
Ans. (c) : Given: angular acceleration α = 3 rad / s
2
Angular velocity ( ω) = 2πν = 2π×120
initial angular speed ω0 = 2 rad /s = 240 π rad/minute
time = 2s 240 π
ω= rad/second
1 2 60
We know θ = ω0 t + α t = 4π rad/sec.
2
1 48. An electric fan has blades of length 30 cm
= 2 × 2 + × 3× 4 measured from the axis of rotation. If the fan is
2
rotating at 120 rpm, the acceleration of a point
= 4+6
on the tip of the blade is
= 10 radian Skeâ efJeÅegle hebKes kesâ yues[ keâer IetCe&ve De#e mes uecyeeF& 30
45. For a body of angular velocity ω = ˆi - 2jˆ + 3kˆ mesceer nw~ hebKee 120 rpm mes Ûeuelee nw~ hebKes kesâ yues[ kesâ
and radius vector is r = ˆi + ˆj + kˆ then its De«e Yeeie keâe lJejCe nesiee:
(a) 1600 m s–2 (b) 47.4 m s–2
velocity is/Skeâ Jemleg kesâ efueS keâesCeerÙe Jesie –2
(c) 23.7 m s (d) 50.55 m s–2
ω = ˆi - 2jˆ + 3kˆ SJeb ef$epÙeerÙe meefoMe r = ˆi + ˆj + kˆ nw, AIPMT-1990
lees Fmekeâe Jesie keäÙee nesiee :- Ans. (b) : Given that, Length (r) = 30 cm = 0.3 m
(a) −5iˆ + 2jˆ + 3kˆ (b) −5iˆ + 2jˆ − 3kˆ N = 120 rpm (revolutions/minute)
120
(c) −5iˆ − 2jˆ + 3kˆ (d) −5iˆ − 2jˆ − 3kˆ for second, N = revolutions/sec
60
AIPMT-1999 = 2 rps
Ans. (a) : Relation between linear velocity We know that, Angular velocity ( ω) = 2πN = 2π×2
and angular velocity is– = 4π radian/sec.
r r r Acceleration of the point at the tip = ω2 × r
v = ω× r
= (4π)2 × 0.3
( ) (
= ˆi − 2ˆj + 3kˆ × ˆi + ˆj + kˆ ) = 16π2 × 0.3
= ( −2 − 3 ) ˆi − (1 − 3 ) ˆj + (1 + 2 ) kˆ =16×3.14×3.14×0.3
= 47.4 m/sec2.
= −5iˆ + 2jˆ + 3kˆ 49. A ring of mass m and radius r rotates about an
46. A body is whirled in a horizontal circle of axis passing through its centre and perpendicular
radius 20 cm. It has an angular velocity of 10 to its plane with angular velocity ω. Its kinetic
rad/s. What is its linear velocity at any point on energy is/Skeâ m õJÙeceeve leLee r ef$epÙee keâer efjbie kesâvõ mes
circular path? iegpejves Jeeues De#e kesâ uecyeJeled Ietceleer nw~ Fmekeâe keâesCeerÙe Jesie
Skeâ efheC[ keâes #eweflepe Je=òe (r = 20 mesceer) ceW keâesCeerÙe ω nw~ Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer:
Jesie 10 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[ mes IegceeÙee peelee nw~ Fmekeâe 1
jsKeerÙe Jesie nesiee: (a) mr 2 ω2 (b) mr ω2
2
(a) 20 m/s (b) 2 m/s 1
(c) mr2 ω2 (d) mrω2
(c) 10 m/s (d) 2 m/s 2
AIPMT-1996 AIPMT-1988
Ans. (d) : Given that, Radius of circle (r) = 20 m 1
Ans. (a) : K.E = mv 2
= 0.2 m 2
Angular velocity ( ω) = 10 rad/sec. We know that,
We know that, Linear velocity (v) = r.ω v = rω
= 0.2×10 1 1
K.E = m ( rω) = mr 2 ω2
2

= 2 m/sec. 2 2
Physics 150 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : Given F = 3 ĵ N
6.4 Torque and Angular Momentum
r
r = 2kˆ m
50. A uniform rod of length 200 cm and mass 500 g r r r
is balanced on a wedge placed at 40 cm mark. Torque about origin is given by , τ = r × F
A mass of 2 kg is suspended from the rod at 20 ˆ ˆ
cm and another unknown mass 'm' is τ = 2k × 3j
suspended from the rod at 160 cm mark as = 6 −ˆi
shown in the figure. Find the value of 'm' such
( )
that the rod is in equilibrium. (g = 10 m/s2) τ = −6iˆ Nm
Skeâ 200 mes.ceer. uecyeeF& leLee 500 «eece õJÙeceeve keâer
meceeve ÚÌ[ Skeâ Jespe kesâ 40 mes.ceer. efveMeeve hej meblegefuele 52. A solid sphere is rotating freely about its
symmetrical axis in free space. The radius of
nesleer nw~ Skeâ 2 efkeâ.«ee. keâe õJÙeceeve ÚÌ[ mes 20 mes.ceer.
the sphere is increased keeping its mass same.
hej efveueefcyele efkeâÙee peelee nw leLee otmeje De%eele Which of the following physical quantities
õJÙeceeve 'm' keâe ceeve efpememes ÚÌ[ meblegueve DeJemLee ceW would remain constant for the sphere?
jns~ (g = 10 ceer./mes.2) keâesF& "esme ieesuee cegòeâ DeekeâeMe ceW Deheveer meceefceefle De#e
kesâ heefjle: cegòeâ ¤he mes IetCe&ve keâj jne nw~ Fme ieesues keâe
õJÙeceeve meceeve jKeles ngS Fmekeâer ef$epÙee ceW Je=efæ keâer
peeleer nw~ ieesues kesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-meer
Yeeweflekeâ jeefMe efmLej jnsieer?
(a) Angular velocity / keâesCeerÙe Jesie
1 1
(a) kg (b)
kg (b) Moment of inertia / peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe&
12 2
1 1 (c) Angular momentum / keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
(c) kg (d) kg
3 6 (d) Rotational kinetic energy / IetCeea ieeflepe Tpee&
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Ans. (a) : All the force acting on the rod are shown in Ans. (c) : ⇒ No external force acts on the system,
the figure below : hence net torque acting on the system is zero. The
relationship between torque and angular momentum is
dL
=τ
dt
(since τ = 0 this means that angular momentum is
constant)
For the rod to remain in equilibrium,
This is law of conservation of angular momentum for a
τnet = 0 spinning body.
Net torque equation on rod at wedge,
⇒ By changing radius, moment of inertia, angular
2g × 20 = 0.5g × 60 + mg × 120
velocity and rotational kinetic energy will change.
0.5
m= kg 53. An automobile moves on a road with a speed of
6
54 km h–1. The radius of its wheels is 0.45 m
1 and the moment of inertia of the wheel about
m = kg
12 its axis of rotation is 3 kg m2. If the vehicle is
brought to rest in 15 s, the magnitude of
51. Find the torque about the origin when a force
average torque transmitted by its brakes to the
of 3j$ N acts on a particle whose position vector wheel is/Skeâ ceesšj Jeenve efkeâmeer meÌ[keâ hej 54 km h–1
is 2k$ m./efkeâmeer keâCe, efpemekeâe efmLeefle meefoMe 2k$ m nw Deewj IetCe&ve De#e kesâ heefjle: heefnÙes keâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe&
nw, hej peye cetue efyevot kesâ heefjle: 3j$ N keâe keâesF& yeue 3 kg m2 nw~ Ùeefo yeÇskeâ ueieeves kesâ yeeo, Jeenve keâes ®keâves
keâeÙe& keâjlee nw, lees yeueDeeIetCe& %eele keâerefpeS~ ceW 15s keâe meceÙe ueielee nw lees yeÇskeâ Éeje heefnÙes hej ueiee
Deewmele yeue DeeIetCe& keâe ceeve nesiee :
(a) 6$j Nm (b) −6i$ Nm
(a) 2.86 kg m2s–2 (b) 6.66 kg m2s–2
(c) 6k$ Nm (d) 6i$ Nm (c) 8.58 kg m2s–2 (d) 10.86 kg m2s–2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015

Physics 151 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given that: Substituting this value in eqn (i)
v = 54 km/hrs = 54 ×
5
= 15m / sec L  ML2 ML2 
18 Mg =  + a
2  12 4 
r = 0.45 m
t = 15 sec. MgL ML2
= a
I = 3 kg/m2 2 3
ω = 0 (final angular speed)
3g
The initial angular speed of car is – ∴ a=
2L
v 15 100
ω0 = = =
r 0.45 3 55. A circular disc of moment of inertia It is
100 rotating in a horizontal plane, about its
ω0 = rad / sec. symmetric axis, with a constant angular speed
3
ω = ω0 + αt ωi. Another disc of moment of inertia Ib is
100 dropped coaxially onto the rotating disc.
0= + α (15 ) Initially the second disc has zero angular speed.
7
Eventually both the disc rotate with a constant
−100 −20
α= = =− rad / sec 2 angular speed ωf. The energy lost by the
3 × 15 9
initially rotating disc due to friction is –
 −20  −20 Skeâ JeòeerÙe Ûekeâleer efpemekeâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& It nw, Deheveer
τ = Iα = 3  =
 9  3
meceefcelelee De#e kesâ heeefjle: Skeâ efveÙele keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes
2 2
= – 6.66 kgm /sec
ω1 mes Skeâ #eweflepe leue ceW IetCe&ve keâj jner nw~ Skeâ DevÙe
54. A rod PQ of mass M and length L is hinged at
end P. The rod is kept horizontal by a massless Ûekeâleer efpemekeâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& Ib nw keâes IetCe&ve keâj jner
string tied to point Q as shown in figure. When Ûekeâleer hej mecee#eerÙe ™he mes ÚesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ efÉleerÙe
string is cut, the initial angular acceleration of Ûekeâleer ØeejefcYekeâ ™he mes MetvÙe keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue jKeleer nw~
the rod is:/Skeâ ÚÌ[ PQ keâe õJÙeceeve M nw Deewj
Devlele: oesveeW ÛekeâleerÙeeB Skeâ ner keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue ωf mes
Fmekeâer uecyeeF& L nw~ Ùen ÚÌ[ P efyevog hej efnbpe keâer ieF&
IetCe&ve keâjves ueieleer nw~ ØeejefcYekeâ ™he mes IetCe&ve keâjleer
nw~ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes Devegmeej, ÚÌ[ kesâ efmejs Q hej
Ûekeâleer Éeje Ie<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe Tpee& neefve nw-
yebOeer õJÙeceeve-jefnle Skeâ jmmeer Fmes #eweflepe yeveeÙes
jKeleer nw~ Ùeefo Fme jmmeer keâes keâeš efoÙee peeÙes lees, ÚÌ[ 1 I 2b 1 I 2t
(a) ωi2 (b) ωi2
keâe ØeejbefYekeâ keâesCeerÙe lJejCe nesiee- 2 ( It + Ib ) 2 ( It + Ib )
Ib − It 2 1 Ib It
(c) ω (d) ωi2
( It + Ib ) i 2 ( It + Ib )
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
2g 3g Ans. (d) : Conservation of angular momentum,
(a) (b)
3L 2L It ωi = (It + Ib) ωf , where It = MOI of circular disc
(c) g/L (d) 2g/L Ib = MOI of second disc
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 ωi = initial angular speed
AIPMT -2007, 2006 ωf = final angular speed
Ans. (b) :
 I 
L/2
L/2
⇒ ωf =  t  ωi
 I t + Ib 
Loss in kinetic Energy
1 1
∆E = I t ωi2 - ( I t + I b ) ωf2
2 2
2
1 1  I 
Hence torque on rod = Moment of weight of rod about P = I t ωi2 - ( It + Ib )  t  ωi2
τmg = Iα .........(i) 2 2  I t + Ib 
The MOI of the rod about P 1  Ib It  2
ML2 ML2 ∆E =   ωi
I= + 2  Ib + It 
12 4
Physics 152 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
56. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius r is
rotating about its axis with constant angular
velocity ω. Two objects each of mass m are
attached gently to the opposite ends of a
diameter of the ring. The ring now rotates with
angular velocity given by
M oJÙeceeve Deewj r ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ heleuee Úuuee
(a) LA < LB
(JeueÙe) Deheveer De#e kesâ heefjle: efmLej keâesCeerÙe Jesie ω
(b) LA > LB
mes IetCe&ve keâj jne nw~ Fme Úuues kesâ JÙeeme kesâ oes efJehejerle (c) LA = LB
efmejeW hej meceeve (yejeyej) õJÙeceeve m keâer oes efheb[es keâes (d) The relationship between LA and LB depends
nukesâ mes mebueive keâj (peesÌ[ efoÙee) ieÙee nw~ Deye Úuues upon the slope of the line AB
keâe keâesCeerÙe Jesie nes peesÙesiee LA Deewj LB keâe Deehemeer mebyebOe jsKee AB keâer ØeJeCelee
(M + 2m)ω 2Mω ({eue) hej efveYe&j nesiee~
(a) (b)
2m M + 2m AIPMT-2007
(M + 2m)ω Mω Ans. (c) :
(c) (d)
M M + 2m
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
AIPMT-2009, 1998
Ans. (d) : Given M1=M, M2= 2m, R1=R2=R (Let)
initial velocity (ω1)=ω
final velocity (ω2)=ω'
A thin circular ring of mass M and radius (r) and it is
rotated at constant angular velocity (ω) From the definition of angular momentum
r r r
The initial moment of inertia is of the circular ring L = r × p = rmvsin φ −kˆ ( )
I1 = M1R12 = MR 2 r
L = mvrsin φ = mvd
The initial momentum of the circular ring is
Where d = r sin φ is the distance of the closest approach
L = I1ω = MR 2 ω ...(i)
of the particle to the origin.
when another ring of the same mass is put on Ist
Since d & v is same for particle at both the point A & B
rotating ring. Then final moment of inertia is
Thus, LA = LB
I2 = MR 2 + 2mR 2 = ( M + 2m ) R 2
58. A round disc of moment of inertia I2 about its
Final momentum of the circular ring axis perpendicular to its plane and passing
L ' = I'2 ω = ( M + 2m ) R 2 ω ' ...(ii) through its centre is placed over another disc of
moment of inertia I1 rotating with an angular
there is not external torque acting on this system this
velocity ω about the same axis. The final
means that angular momentum of the system will be
angular velocity of the combination of discs is :-
conserved thus the conservation of angular momentum.
L= L'
Skeâ Je=òeekeâej ef[mkeâ, efpemekeâe Deheves kesâvõ efyevog hej leue
mes uecye jKeves Jeeues De#e kesâ efieo& peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& I2 nw,
MR 2 ω = ( M + 2m ) R 2 ω '
keâes Fmeer De#e hej keâesCeerÙe Jesie ω mes Ietceves Jeeues otmejs
MR 2 ω  Mω  ef[mkeâ, efpemekeâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& I1 nw, hej jKee ieÙee nw~
ω' = =
( M + 2m ) R  M + 2m 
2
Fme ef[mkeâ Ùegice mebÙeespeve keâe Debeflece keâesCeerÙe Jesie nesiee:-
57. A particle of mass m moves in the XY plane (a) ω
with a velocity v along the straight line AB. If I1ω
the angular momentum of the particle with (b)
I1 + I 2
respect to origin O is LA when it is at A and LB
when it is at B, then :
(c)
( I1 + I2 ) ω
m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe, XY leue ceW meerOeer jsKee AB I1
hej v Jesie mes ieefleMeerue nw~ Ùeefo cetueefyevog O kesâ meehes#e I2ω
keâCe keâe keâesCeerÙe mebJesie efyevog A hej LA nes leLee efyevog (d)
I1 + I 2
B hej LB nes, lees: AIPMT-2004
Physics 153 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : 60. A circular platform is mounted on a frictionless
vertical axle. Its radius R = 2m and its moment
of inertia about the axle is 200 kg m2. It is
initially at rest. A 50 kg man stands on the edge
of the platform and begins to walk along the
edge at the speed of 1 ms–1 relative to the
ground. Time taken by the man to complete
one revolution is/Skeâ Je=òeekeâej cebÛe Skeâ Ie<e&Cejefnle
TOJee&Oej Oegjer hej efškeâe nw~ Fme cebÛe keâer ef$epÙee R =
2
2m nw Deewj Fmekeâe peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& 200 efkeâ«ee ceer nw~
In the absence of any external torque angular ØeejbYe ceW Ùen efJejeceeJemLee ceW nw~ 50 efkeâ«ee õJÙeceeve keâe
momentum remains conserved-
Skeâ JÙeefòeâ Fme cebÛe kesâ efkeâveejs hej KeÌ[e neslee nw Deewj
Li = Lf
efkeâveejs-efkeâveejs (DevegefoMe) Yet-leue kesâ meehes#e 1 ms–1
I1 ω = ( I1 + I2 ) ωf kesâ Jesie mes Ûeuevee ØeejbYe keâjlee nw lees, Fme JÙeefòeâ Éeje
I1 ω = ( I1 + I2 ) ωf Skeâ Ûekeäkeâj hetje keâjves ceW ueiee meceÙe nesiee:-
π
 I  (a) 2π s s (b)
ωf =  1  ω 2
 I1 + I2  3π
(c) π s (d) s
I1ω 2
ωf = AIPMT (Mains)-2012
I1 + I 2
Ans. (a) Q System is at rest, External torque (τext) = 0
59. A thin circular ring M and radius ‘r’ is Initially, initial angular momentum, Li = 0
rotating about its axis with a constant angular
As per principle of conservation of angular momentum,
velocity ω. Four objects each of mass m are Initial momentum = Final momentum
kept gently to the opposite ends of two i.e. Li = Lf = 0
perpendicular diameters of the ring. The ∴ Angular momentum of man = Angular momentum of
angular velocity of the ring will be – platform
M õJÙeceeve Deewj ‘r’ ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ heleuee Je=òeerÙe or mvR = Iω
JeueÙe Deheves De#e hej efmLej keâesCeerÙe Jesie ω mes IetCe&ve mvR 50 ×1× 2 –1
keâj jne nw~ m õJÙeceeve ØelÙeskeâ kesâ Ûeej efheC[, JeueÙe kesâ ω = = = 0.5rad – s
I 200
oes uecyeJeled JÙeemeeW kesâ efJehejerle efmejeW hej Oeerjs mes jKes v = ω × R
peeles nQ~ JeueÙe keâe keâesCeerÙe Jesie nesiee- = 0.5×2
Mω Mω =1m/s
(a) (b)
4m M + 4m Now, Velocity of man with respect to platform i.e.
r r r
( M + 4m ) ω ( M + 4m ) ω vm/ p = vm/ g − vp / g
(c) (d)
M M + 4m = 1– (–1)= 2 m/s
AIPMT-2003 So, vmp = 2 m/s
Ans. (b): Initial angular velocity of ring = ω ⇒2= ω×2
Moment of inertia initially (I1) = Mr2 ω= 1 rad/s
Now four objects of mass, m are attached to ring. Final 2πR = 2π × 2 = 4π
moment of inertia- 4π
So, time (t) = = 2π sec.
I2 = Mr 2 + 4mr 2 2
= r 2 ( M + 4m) 61. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a
fixed point, its angular momentum is directed
Let ω2 be the final angular velocity of ring. along:-/eqkeâmeer efmLej efyevog kesâ heefjle: efkeâmeer meceleue ceW
Using conservation of angular momentum- IetCe&ve keâjles ngS Skeâ efheb[ kesâ keâesCeerÙe mebJesie keâer efoMee
I1ω1 = I2 ω2
nesleer nw-
Mr 2ω = ( M + 4m ) r 2ω2
(a) The radius/ ef$epÙee kesâ DevegefoMe
Mω (b) The tangent to the orbit
ω2 =
M + 4m keâ#ee keâer mhepÙee kesâ DevegefoMe

Physics 154 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) A line perpendicular to the plane of rotation/ 1
IetCe&ve-meceleue keâer uecyeJeled jsKee kesâ DevegoefMe ( KE ) mv 2 2
2 v
∴ = = 
(d) The line making an angle of 45º to the plane ( KE ') 1
mv '2  v ' 
of rotation/ IetCe&ve-meceleue mes 45° keâesCe hej 2
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 ( KE )  1 2  1 
= = {Q v ' = 2v}
Ans. (c) : ( KE ')  2   4 
So, ( KE ') = 4 ( KE )
ur
63. If F is the force acting on a particle having
r
position vector r and τ be the torque of this
r = distance b/w object & fixed force about the origin, then:/Ùeefo efkeâmeer keâCe hej
r
point (O) about which ef›eâÙeekeâejer yeue F keâe efmLeefle meefoMe r nes Deewj cetue
object revolves
ur r r
efyevog kesâ efieo& Fme yeue keâe yeue DeeIetCe& τ nes lees:
Angular momentum– L = r×p (a) r.τ = 0and F.τ ≠ 0
ur r r
L = r × mv ( ) (b) r.τ ≠ 0and F.τ = 0
r r
Q Angular momentum is the cross-product of r & v . (c) r.τ > and F.τ < 0
r r
Cross product of r & v is perpendicular to plane of (d) r.τ = 0and F.τ = 0
rotation. AIMPT-2009
r
∴ Angular momentum is directed along a line Ans. (d) : Torque is the cross product of force F and
r
perpendicular to the plane of rotation. the position vector r .
62. A small mass attached to a string rotates on a r r r
τ = r × F = r.F sinθ n$ (direction of torque is
frictionless table top as shown. If the tension in
perpendicular to both the vectors)
the string is increased by pulling the string
causing the radius of the circular motion to So the angle between τ and F is 90° and between τ and r
is 90° .
decrease by a factor of 2, the kinetic energy of
For example if we take dot product between two vectors
the mass will
as θ = 90° ⇒ cos90° = 0
Skeâ Ie<e&Cenerve šsyeue kesâ Meer<e& hej oMee&Ùes Devegmeej IetCe&ve → → → →

keâj jner Skeâ [esjer mes Skeâ Úesše õJÙeceeve peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ ⇒ r . τ = 0 & F. τ = 0
Ùeefo [esjer keâes KeeRÛekeâj [esjer ceW leveeJe yeÌ{eÙee peelee nw 64. A tube of length L is filled completely with an
incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at
Fme keâejCe Je=òeerÙe ieefle keâer ef$epÙee 2 kesâ Ieškeâ mes both the ends. The tube is then rotated in a
Iešleer nw, õJÙeceeve keâer ieeflepe Tpee& horizontal plane about one of its ends with a
uniform angular velocity ω. The force exerted
by the liquid at the other ends is:-
L uecyeeF& keâer Skeâ veueer keâes Skeâ Demebheer[erÙe õJe mes
hetje Yej keâj Fmes oesveeW efmejeW mes yevo keâj efueÙee ieÙee nw~
(a) decrease by a factor of 2/2 kesâ Ieškeâ mes Iešsieer yebo õJe keâe õJÙeceeve M nw~ Fme veueer keâes Skeâ #eweflepe
leue ceW veueer kesâ Skeâ efmejs kesâ efieo& DeÛej keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes
(b) remain constant/DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer
ω IegceeÙee pee jne nw~ õJe Éeje veueer kesâ otmejs efmejs hej
(c) increase by a factor of 2/2 kesâ Ieškeâ Éeje yeÌ{sieer
ef›eâÙeekeâejer yeue nesiee:-
(d) increase by a factor of 4/4 kesâ Ieškeâ Éeje yeÌ{sieer
MLω2
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 (a)
2
Ans. (d) : According to law of conservation of angular
ML2 ω
momentum (b)
2
mvr = mv'r'
(c) MLω2
r
vr = v '   ML2 ω2
2 (d)
'
2
v = 2v AIPMT-2006

Physics 155 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : Given :- Length of tube = L, mass = M cetue efyevog kesâ heefjle: efyevog rr = 3iˆ + 2jˆ + 3kˆ m hej
r
keâeÙe&jle yeue F = 2iˆ – 3jˆ + 4kˆ N keâe yeue DeeIetCe& keäÙee
nw?
(a) –6iˆ + 6 ˆj – 12kˆ
(b) –17iˆ + 6 ˆj + 13kˆ
df = dm. ω .x 2
(c) 6iˆ – 6ˆj + 12kˆ
M (d) 17iˆ – 6ˆj + 13kˆ
= dx ω2 x
L
AIPMT-1995
M 2 r
= ω x. dx Ans. (b) : Given, F = 2 ˆi – 3 ˆj + 4 k
L
L r̂ = 3 ˆi + 2 ˆj + 3 kˆ
x =L x =L M 2 M  x2  r r
F =∫ df .dx = ∫ ω x.dx = ω2   Torque τ = r × F
x =0 x =0 L
L  2 0
i j k
Mω2 L2
= × = 2 –3 4
L 2
3 2 3
MLω2
F = = ˆi ( –9 – 8 ) – ˆj ( 6 − 12 ) + kˆ ( 4 + 9 )
2
65. Two bodies have their moments of inertia I and = − 17 ˆi + 6 ˆj + 13 kˆ
2I respectively about their axis of rotation. If 67. A particle of mass m = 5kg is moving with a
their kinetic energies of rotation are equal, uniform speed v = 3 2 units in the XOY plane
their angular momentum will be in the ratio – along the line y = x + 4. The magnitude of the
Ùeefo oes efheb[es kesâ Deheves De#eeW kesâ efieo& IetCe&veeW kesâ peÌ[lJe angular momentum of the particle about the
›eâceMe: I Deewj 2I nes Deewj Gvekeâer IetCe&ve ieeflepe ieeflepe origin is
Tpee&SW meceeve nes lees Gvekesâ keâesCeerÙe mebJesiees keâe Devegheele m = 5kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe v = 3 2 FkeâeF& Jesie
nesiee- mes XOY leue ceW y = x + 4 jsKee hej Ûeuelee nw~ cetue
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 :1 efyevog kesâ heefjle: keâesCeerÙe mebJesie nesiee
(a) 60 units
(c) 1: 2 (d) 2 : 1
(b) 40 2 units
AIPMT-2005
(c) zero
Ans. (c) : Given I1 = I , I2 = 2I
(d) 7.5 units
( K.E.)1 = ( K.E )2 AIPMT-1991
1 2 1 Ans. (a) : Given,
I1ω1 = I2 ω22 Mass of the particle, m = 5 kg
2 2
ω1 Speed, v = 3 2 units
I ω 2I ω 2
= 2 ⇒ 1 = ⇒ 1= The equation representing the position vector of the
ω2 I1 ω2 I ω2 1
particle y = x + 4
Let, angular momentum of body 1 = L1
angular momentum of body 2 = L2
L1 = I1 ω1 = Ιω1
L2 = I2 ω2 = 2Ιω2
L1 Iω1 2
⇒ = =
L 2 2Iω 2 2
L1 1
⇒ =
L2 2
r r = 4 unit
66. What is the torque of the force F = 2iˆ – 3jˆ + 4kˆ
The angle between the horizontal x-axis and velocity
r
N acting at the point r = 3iˆ + 2jˆ + 3kˆ m about vector is 45º and the angle between the position vector
origin? and the horizontal is 90º.

Physics 156 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Perpendicular distance between a point and a line is (c) only the rotational kinetic energy about the
Ax + By + C centre of mass is conserved/õJÙeceeve keWâvõ kesâ
Given by- r1 =
A 2 + B2 heefjle: kesâJeue IetCe&ve ieeflepe Tpee& mebjef#ele nesieer~
x–y+4=0 (d) angular momentum about the centre of mass
Comparing with Ax – By + c = 0 is conserved/õJÙeceeve kesâvõ kesâ heefjle: keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
⇒ A = 1, B = –1 C = 4 mebjef#ele nesiee~
0−0+4 AIPMT-1988
=
2 Ans. (b) : The angular momentum of the sphere about
the point of contact with the plane is conserved.
Substituting (x, y) = (0, 0) for origin r1 = 2 2
Therefore, we know L = mv r1 • Angular momentum about the point of contact with
the surface includes the angular momentum about the
L = 5× 3 2 × 2 2 centre.
= 60 units Because all forces pass through the point of contact, the
68. A couple produces moment of all forces acting in the body about the point
Skeâ efÉÙegice GlheVe keâjlee nw of contact is zero.
(a) linear and rotational motion/IetCe&ve leLee jsKeerÙe Hence there is no torque about the point of contact
oesveeW ieefle GlheVe keâjlee nw which means angular momentum about the point of
(b) no motion/keâesF& ieefle GlheVe veneR keâjlee contact must be conserved.
(c) purely linear motion/hetCe& jsKeerÙe ieefle GlheVe keâjlee
nw
(d) purely rotational motion/hetCe& IetCe&ve ieefle GlheVe
keâjlee nw
AIPMT-1997
Ans. (d) : Motion is the action on the object which 70. A disc is rotating with angular speed ω. If a
results in producing the movement of the object. When child sits on it, what is conserved
the object moves in the straight path, the motion is
known as the translational motion. When the object is Skeâ ef[mkeâ ωkeâesCeerÙe Jesie mes IetCe&ve keâj jner nw ~ Skeâ
moving in the circular path around the same point yeÛÛee Fme hej yew" peelee nw lees, keäÙee mebjef#ele jnsiee -
motion is known as the rotational motion. (a) Linear momentum /jsKeerÙe mebJesie
• The mathematical expression of the couple of force is
(b) Angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
given by.
τ = r×F (c) Kinetic energy / ieeflepe Tpee&
Where, F is the force and r is the distance. (d) Potential energy / efmLeeflepe Tpee&
The resultant force acting by the couple is zero. So, AIPMT-2002
there is no linear movement of the object.
Ans. (b) : Given: Angular speed of rotating disc = ω.
This, the couple produces pure rotational motion of the
object. When child sits on disc then there is a force parallel to
axis.
69. A solid homogenous sphere of mass M and
radius R is moving on a rough horizontal
surface, partly rolling and partly sliding.
During this kind of motion of the sphere
Skeâ M õJÙeceeve leLee R ef$epÙee keâe "esme Skeâ meceeve
ieesuee Skeâ Kegjojs #eweflepe meceleue hej DebMele: efheâmeueve
leLee DebMele: IetCe&ve ieefle keâjlee nw~ Fme Øekeâej keâer ieefle
Q Force acting parallel to axis, so Torque (τ) = 0
ceW ieesues keâe
dI
(a) total kinetic energy is conserved/kegâue ieeflepe but, τ = {I = Angular momentum}
dt
Tpee& mebjef#ele nesieer~
dI
(b) the angular momentum of the sphere about ⇒ =0 { Qτ = 0 }
the point of contact with the plane is dt
conserved/meceleue kesâ meeLe ieesues kesâ mheMe& efyevog kesâ ⇒ I = constant.
heefjle: Gmekeâe keâesCeerÙe mebJesie mebjef#ele nesiee~ ∴ Angular momentum will be conserved.
Physics 157 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
× mr ( 0 – ωi2 )
1 1 2 2
6.5 Rolling Motion Now, W = – τθ =
2 2
2
2 2π 
× × 2 × ( 4 × 10 –2 )  –3 × 
71. A disc of radius 2 m and mass 100 kg rolls on a 1 1
horizontal floor. Its centre of mass has speed of –τ =
2 2  60 
20 cm/s. How much work is needed to stop it? 4π2
õJÙeceeve 100 kg Deewj ef$epÙee 2m keâer keâesF& Ûekeâleer
τ = 2 × 10 –6 Nm
efkeâmeer #eweflepe heâMe& hej uegÌ{keâleer nw~ Fmekesâ mebnefle kesâvõ
keâer Ûeeue 20 cm/s nw~ Fmes jeskeâves kesâ efueS efkeâleves keâeÙe& 73. A solid cylinder of mass 2 kg and radius 50 cm
keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer? rolls up an inclined plane of angle of inclination
30°. The centre of mass of the cylinder has
(a) 30 kJ (b) 2 J
speed of 4 m/s. The distance travelled by the
(c) 1 J (d) 3 J
cylinder on the inclined surface will be, [take g
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
= 10 m/s2]
Ans. (d) :
ef$epÙee 50 cm Deewj õJÙeceeve 2 kg keâer keâesF& "esme
efmeefueC[j 30° keâesCe kesâ PegkeâeJe Jeeues efkeâmeer Deevele leue
Thej keâer Deesj uegÌ{keâ jner nw~ Fme efmeefueC[j kesâ mebnefle
kesâvõ keâer Ûeeue 4 m/s nw~ Deevele he=‰ hej efmeefueC[j Éeje
Work done = change in kinetic energy
Ûeueer ieÙeer otjer nesieer, [g = 10 m/s2 ueerefpeS~]
Final K.E = 0
(a) 2.4 m (b) 2.2 m
1 1
Initial K.E = Iω2 + mv 2 (c) 1.6 m (d) 1.2 m
2 2
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
1 1 v2 1
= × mr 2 × 2 + mv 2 (∵ ω = v/r) Ans. (a) : When a body rolls, i.e. have rotational motion
2 2 r 2
the K.E. of the system will be
1 1
= mv 2 + mv 2 1  K2 
4 2 KE = mv 2 1 + 2 
3 2  R 
= mv 2
4 Where
3 m = mass of body, v = velocity ; k = radius of gyration
∆ K = mv 2
4 Given m = 2kg, θ = 30° & v = 4m/s
work done = ∆K
3
= mv 2
4
= × 100 × ( 20 × 10 –2 )
3 2

4
= 3J K.E. = P E
72. A solid cylinder of mass 2 kg and radius 4 cm is 1  K2 
mv 2 1 + 2  = mgh
rotating about its axis at the rate of 3 rpm. The 2  R 
torque required to stop after 2π revolutions is
4 cm ef$epÙee Deewj 2 kg õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& "esme yesueve 1 2 1  K2 1 
× 2 × ( 4 ) 1 +  = 2 × 10 × h Q For cylinder 2 = 
Deheves De#e kesâ heefjle: 3 rpm keâer oj mes IetCe&ve keâj jne 2  2  R 2
nw~ 2π heefj›eâceCe keâjves kesâ he§eele Fmes jeskeâves kesâ efueS 3
8 × = 10h
DeeJeMÙekeâ yeue DeeIetCe& nw~ 2
(a) 2 × 10–3 N m (b) 12 × 10–4 N m h = 1.2 m
(c) 2 × 106 N m (d) 2 × 10–6 N m From the above diagram,
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 h
sin θ =
Ans. (d) : Work energy theorem, x
W = I ( ωf2 – ωi2 )
1 h 1.2  1
x= = Q sin 30° =
2
sin θ sin 30°  2 
Here θ = 2π revolution = 2π × 2π = 4π2 rad
2π x = 1.2 × 2
ωi = 3 × rad/s and ωf = 0 rad/s x = 2.4m
60
Physics 158 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
74. A solid sphere is in rolling motion. In rolling Ans. (c): Time taken by a body to reach bottom from
motion a body possesses translational kinetic given altitude is given as,
energy (Kt) as well as rotational kinetic energy
(Kr) simultaneously. The ratio Kt : (Kt + Kr) for  K2 
2l  1 + 2 
the sphere is  R 
Skeâ "esme ieesuee ueesšve ieefle ceW nQ ueesšve ieefle ceW Jemleg T=
g sin θ
keâer mLeeveevlejerÙe ieeflepe Tpee& (Kt) kesâ meeLe-meeLe IetCeea
where K = radius of gyration
ieeflepe Tpee& (Kr) Yeer nesleer nw~ ieesues kesâ efueS Kt : (Kt
R = radius of rotating body
+ Kr) keâe Devegheele nesiee
l = length of inclined plane
(a) 7 : 10 (b) 5 : 7
(c) 2 : 5 (d) 10 : 7  K 2
2l 1 + d 2 
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018  R d  .............. (i)
AIPMT-2018, 1991 Tdisk =
g sin θ
Ans. (b) : In rolling motion the translational kinetic
1  K2
energy is equal to K t = mv 2 2l 1 + s2 
2
Tsphere =  R s  .............. (ii)
In rolling motion the rotational kinetic energy is equal to g sin θ
1 2
K r = Iω Since g is constant and l, R and sinθ are same
2
We know for solid sphere, K2
1 + d2
2 Td Rd
\ I = mr 2 ∴ =
5 Ts K2
Where, m is mass of body, I is moment of inertia of 1 + s2
Rs
body, ω is angular velocity and, v is speed of body.
1 2  v 
2
R2  R 
So, K r =  mr 2   2  1+  K d = 2 for disk 
2 5  r  T 2R 2
 
d
= Q
Ts 2R 2  2 
 v  7 1+
2
1 12 Ks = R for sphere 
K t + K r = mv 2 +  mr 2   2  = mr 2 5R 2  5 
2 2 5   r  10
7 Td 3 5 15
K t + K r = mr 2 = × =
10 Ts 2 7 14
1 Td > Ts
Kt mv 2
= 2
Hence the sphere gets to the bottom first as it takes less
Kt + Kr 7
mv 2 time.
10
76. A solid cylinder of mass 50 kg and radius 0.5 m
Kt 5
So, = is free to rotate about the horizontal axis. A
Kt + Kr 7 massless string is wound round the cylinder
75. A disk and a sphere of same radius but with one end attached to it and other hanging
different masses roll off on two inclined planes freely. Tension in the string required to
of the same altitude and length. Which one of produce an angular acceleration of 2
the two objects gets to the bottom of the plant revolutions s-2 is:-
first?/keâesF& ef[mkeâ Deewj keâesF& ieesuee, efpevekeâer ef$epÙeeSW 50 kg õJÙeceeve leLee 0.5 m ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ "esme
meceeve hejvleg õJÙeceeve efYeVe nQ, meceeve GvveleebMe Deewj efmeefueb[j (yesueve) Deheveer #eweflepe De#e kesâ heefjle: mJeleb$e
uecyeeF& kesâ oes Deevele meceleueeW hej uegÌ{keâles nQ~ Fve oesveeW ™he mes IetCe&ve keâj mekeâlee nw~ Fme hej Skeâ Yeejnerve jmmeer
efheC[eW ceW mes leueer lekeâ henues keâewve hengBÛesiee? uehesšer ieF& nw, efpemekeâe Skeâ efmeje Fme efmeefueb[j mes pegÌ[e
(a) Depends on their masses
nw Deewj otmeje efmeje cegòeâ ™he mes ueškeâe jne nw~ jmmeer ceW
Fvekesâ õJÙeceeveeW hej efveYe&j keâjlee nw
efkeâlevee leveeJe ueieeÙee peeÙes efkeâ keâesCeerÙe lJejCe 2
(b) Disk/ef[mkeâ
(c) Sphere /ieesuee
heefj›eâceCe mes.–2 nes:-
(d) both reach at the same time (a) 25 N (b) 50 N
oesveeW Skeâ ner meceÙe hengBÛeWies~ (c) 78.5N (d) 157 N
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 AIPMT-06.05.2014

Physics 159 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Here, mass of the cylinder, Ratio of acceleration of without slipping to the
M = 50 kg a'
acceleration of body with slipping =
a
5
g sin θ
a' 7
=
a g sinθ
Radius of the cylinder, R = 0.5 m a' : a = 5 : 7
Angular acceleration, α = 2 rev/s2 78. A small object of uniform density rolls up a
= 2×2π rad/s2 curved surface with an initial velocity 'v'. It

3 4
v
2 g
= 4π rad/s2
Q Torque, τ = T×R reaches upto a maximum height of with
Moment of inertia of solid cylinder about its axis.
1 respect to the initial position. The object is
I = MR 2 efkeâmeer Úesšer Jemleg keâe IevelJe Skeâmeceeve nw~ Ùen efkeâmeer
2
∴ Angular acceleration of the cylinder Je›eâ meceleue hej ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie 'v' mes Thej keâer Deesj
τ TR uegÌ{keâleer nw~ Ùen Deheveer ØeejbefYekeâ efmLeefle mes DeefOekeâlece
α= =
I 1 MR 2 3v 2
2
TBÛeeF& lekeâ hengBÛeleer nw~ Ùen Jemleg nw Skeâ -
4g
MRα 50 × 0.5 × 4π
∴ T= = = 157 N (a) Disc/ ef[mkeâ
2 2
77. The ratio of the accelerations for a solid sphere (b) Ring/ efjbie
(mass 'm' and radius 'R') rolling down an (c) Solid sphere/ "esme ieesuee
incline of angle 'θ' without slipping and (d) Hollow sphere/ KeesKeuee ieesuee
slipping down the incline without rolling is:-
efkeâmeer vele meceleue keâe Deevele keâesCe 'θ' nw Fme hej 'm' NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
õJÙeceeve leLee 'R' ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ "esme ieesuee Thej mes Ans. (a) : m = mass of object
veerÛes keâer Deesj Fme Øekeâej ieefle keâjlee nQ efkeâ ØeLece oMee r = radius
ceW ieefle hetCe&le: ueesšefvekeâ nw Deewj mejkeâer (efheâmeueve) v = velocity
veneR nw, leLee otmejer oMee ceW ieefle kesâJeue mejkeâer nw Deewj
ueesšefvekeâ veneR nw~ lees Fve oesveeW oMeeDeeW ceW ieesues kesâ
lJejCeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee:
(a) 5 : 7 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 5 (d) 7 : 5
AIPMT-06.05.2014 From conservation of energy
Ans. (a) : Case (i)- When body is slipping
1 1  3v 2 
a = gsinθ mv 2 + Iω2 = mg  
2 2  4g 
v
For pure rolling condition, ω =
R
Case (ii)- When body is rolling (without slipping) 1 1 v2 3v 2
mv 2 + = mg
g sin θ 2 2 R2 4g
a'=
K2 1 Iv 2 3v 2 1
1+ 2 = mg − mv 2
R 2 R2 4g 2
1 Iv 2  3 1 
2
=  m − m  v2
2R 4 2 
1 I 3 1
K2 2 = m− m
For solid sphere, = 2R 2
4 2
R2 5
g sin θ 5 mR 2
∴ a'= = g sin θ I=
2 7 2
1+ Object must be disc.
5
Physics 160 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
79. A solid cylinder and a hollow cylinder, both of i.e. the body whose I (MOI) is less reach the bottom
the same mass and same external diameter are first
released from the same height at the same time So, I Solid Cylinder < I hollow
on an inclined plane. Both roll down without Hence, solid cylinder reach bottom first.
slipping. Which one will reach the bottom first? 80. A solid cylinder of mass 3 kg is rolling on a
meceeve õJÙeceeve Deewj meceeve yeeåe ef$epÙee kesâ oes yesueveeW horizontal surface with velocity 4 ms–1. It
ceW mes Skeâ "esme nw Deewj otmeje KeesKeuee nw~ oesveeW keâes Skeâ collides with a horizontal spring of force
constant 200 Nm–1. The maximum compression
ner meceÙe, Skeâ ner TBÛeeF& mes efkeâmeer Deevele meceleue hej
produced in the spring will be/3 efkeâ«ee õJÙeceeve
uegÌ{keâeÙee ieÙee nw~ oesveeW yeiewj efHeâmeues ueesšve keâjles nQ keâe Skeâ "esme efmeefuev[j (yesueve) efkeâmeer #eweflepe meceleue
Fve oesveeW yeiewj efHeâmeues ueesšve keâjles nQ Fve oesveeW ceW mes hej 4ms–1 kesâ Jesie mes uegÌ{keâ jne nw~ Ùen 200Nm–1 kesâ
keâewve leueer hej hengBÛesiee – yeue efveÙeleebkeâ kesâ #eweflepe efmØebie (keâceeveer) mes škeâjelee
(a) Both together only when angle of inclination nw, lees efmØebie ceW GlheVe DeefOekeâlece mebheer[ve nesiee:
of plane is 45°/oesveeW Skeâ meeLe, kesâJeue leye peye
(a) 0.7 m (b) 0.2 m
Deeveble meceleue 45° hej Pegkeâe nes (c) 0.5 m (d) 0.6 m
(b) Both together/oesveeWSkeâ meeLe AIPMT (Screening)-2012
(c) Hollow cylinder/KeesKeuee efmeefuev[j Ans. (d) :
(d) Solid cylinder/"esme efmeefuev[j Q For rolling body,
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 Initial KE of body (KE) = Potential energy of
Spring (PE)
AIPMT-2000
Now, If K = spring constant
Ans. (d) :
∆x = maximum compression of spring
K∆x 2
∴ Potential energy of spring = ––––– (1)
2
Kinetic energy of rolling body = Translational KE +
Rotational KE
1 1
for rolling without slipping (Pure rolling) we have , = mv 2 + Iω2
2 2
a = α R − − − −(i) 1 1  mR 2   v 
2

We know that F = ma = mv2 +   

2 2  2  R 
mg sinθ - f = ma ----- (ii)
3
Here f is the friction force, 'a' is linear acceleration and = mv 2 ––––– (2)
'α' is angular acceleration. as we know 4
From (1) & (2)
τ = I α ( about COM )
K∆x 2 3
= mv 2
f × R = I  a  from eqn (i) 2 4
 
R
3mv 2
∆x =
f = I.a -------- (iii) 2K
R2
from equation (ii) and (iii) 3 × 3 × 42
∆x =
mg sinθ - Ia = ma 2 × 200
R2 ∆x = 0.6m
a = mg sin θ 81. A solid cylinder of mass M and radius R rolls
 I  without slipping down an inclined plane of
 2 + m length L and height h. What is the speed of its
R 
centre of mass when the cylinder reaches its
a= mgR 2 sin θ bottom –
( I + R 2m ) Skeâ "esme yesueve, efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve M nw Deewj DeOe&JÙeeme
where ( m, R and θ are constant) R nw, Skeâ vele leue hej efyevee efHeâmeues uegÌ{keâlee nw leue

Thus, a ∝ 1
keâer uecyeeF& L Je TBÛeeF& h nw~ veerÛes henBgÛeves hej, yesueve
I kesâ õJÙeceeve kesâvõ keâer Ûeeue keäÙee nesieer-
Physics 161 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
3 1 v2
(a) 2gh (b) gh = mK 2 2 (v = Rω)
4 2 R
4 Total energy = (TKE) + (RKE)
(c) gh (d) 4gh 1 1 mK 2 v 2
3 mv 2 +=
AIPMT-2003,1989 2 2 R2
Ans. (c): Fraction associated with rotational motion
Rotational kinetic energy
=
ω Total kineticenergy
1 v2
mK 2 2
= 2 R
1 1 mK 2 v 2
ω mv +
2

2 2 R2
1
mK 2 ω2
=
1
2
1
[Q v = Rω]
P.E. = KET + KER mR ω + mK ω
2 2 2 2

2 2
1 1
Mgh = Mv2 + Iω2 K2
2 2 =
K2 + R2
1 1  MR 2  v2  v 83. A point P consider at contact point of a wheel
Mgh = Mv2 +   Q ω = R 
2 2  2  R2   on ground which rolls on ground without
slipping then value of displacement of point P
Mv 2 Mv 2
Mgh = + when wheel completes half of rotation (If
2 4 radius of wheel is 1m) / Skeâ heefnÙee pees efkeâ efyevee
3 efHeâmeues uegÌ{keâ jne nw~ peye heefnÙee DeeOee Ûekeäkeâj hetCe&
gh = v 2
4 keâj ueslee nw, lees Oejeleue kesâ mecheke&â efyevog P efJemLeeheve
4
v 2 = gh keâe ceeve nw (Ùeefo heefnÙes keâer ef$epÙee 1m nw): -
3
4
(a) 2 m (b) π2 + 4 m
v= gh
3 (c) π m (d) π2 + 2 m
82. A ball rolls without slipping. The radius of AIPMT-2002
gyration of the ball about an axis passing Ans. (b) : When the wheel rolls on the ground without
through its centre of mass is K. If radius of the slipping and completes half rotation, point P takes new
ball be R, then the fraction of total energy position as P'. Horizontal position x = πR
associated with its rotational energy will be:
(R=Radius of Wheel = 1 m)
Skeâ ieWo efyevee efHeâmeues uegÌ{keâleer nw~ õJÙeceeve kesâ kesâvõ mes Vertical displacement, y = 2R
peeles ngS De#e kesâ efieo& ieWo keâer heefjYeüceCe ef$epÙee K nQ Thus, displacement of point P when wheel completes
Ùeefo ieWo keâe DeOe&JÙeeme R nw, leye mebhetCe& Tpee& keâe half rotation,
keâewvemee Yeeie Gmekeâer IetCe&ve Tpee& mes mebyebæ nesiee: S = x 2 + y2
K +R
2 2
K 2

( πR ) + ( 2R )
2 2
(a) (b) =
R2 R2
K2 R2 = π2 R 2 + 4R 2
(c) (d)
K + R2
2
K + R2
2

AIPMT-2003
Ans. (c): Radius = R
1
Translational Kinetic Energy (TKE) = mv 2
2 Q R=1
1 S = π2 + 4
Rotational Kinetic Energy (RKE) = Iω2
2
Physics 162 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
84. A disc is rolling the velocity of its centre of 86. A solid sphere, disc and solid cylinder all of the
mass is Vcm then which one will be correct : - same mass and radius are allowed to roll down
Skeâ Ûekeâleer efyevee efheâmeues uegÌ{keâ jner nw Ùeefo Fmekesâ (from rest) on the inclined plane, then
õJÙeceeve kesâvõ keâe Jesie Vcm nw, lees melÙe keâLeve nw- Skeâ "esme ieesuee, ef[mkeâ leLee efmeuesC[j Skeâ ner heoeLe&
(a) The velocity of highest point is 2Vcm and kesâ yeves nQ~ Fvekesâ õJÙeceeve meceeve nQ~ Ùes leerveeW IetCe&ve ieefle
point of contact is zero/GÛÛelece efyevog keâe Jesie keâjles ngS vele meceleue hej veerÛes Deeles nQ lees:
2Vcm Je mecheke&â efyevog keâe Jesie MetvÙe (a) solid sphere reaches the bottom first/"esme ieesuee
(b) The velocity of highest point is Vcm and point henues veerÛes hengBÛesiee~
of contact is Vcm /GÛÛelece efyevog keâe Jesie Vcm leLee (b) solid sphere reaches the bottom last/"esme ieesuee
mecheke&â efyevog keâe Jesie Vcm Deble ceW veerÛes hengBÛesiee~
(c) The velocity of highest point is 2Vcm and (c) disc will reach the bottom first/ef[mkeâ henues ceW
point of contact is Vcm/GÛÛelece efyevog keâe Jesie
2Vcm Je mecheke&â efyevog keâe Jesie Vcm
veerÛes hengBÛesiee~
(d) The velocity of highest point is 2Vcm and (d) all reach the bottom at the same time/leerveeW veerÛes
point of contact of contact is 2Vcm/ GÛÛelece Skeâ meeLe hengBÛesies~
efyevog keâe Jesie 2Vcm Je mecheke&â efyevog keâe Jesie 2Vcm AIPMT-1993
AIPMT-2001 Ans. (a) : By comparing the moment of inertia of above
Ans. (a) three objects, we found that,
1
IC = MR 2
2
2
IS = MR 2
5
From above free body diagram of disc, we can write 1
Velocity at highest point (A) = V + Rω ID = MR 2
2
= 2 V (∵ V = Rω)
Velocity at centre of disc = V • The moment of inertia of the solid sphere is smaller
Velocity at bottom point (C) = V – Rω than the other two.
= 0 (∵ V = Rω) • It means its angular acceleration will be highest and
85. A solid spherical ball rolls on a table. Ratio of hence, it will roll faster and reaches the bottom first.
its rotational kinetic energy to total kinetic 87. The speed of a homogenous solid sphere after
energy is/Skeâ "esme ieesueerÙe ieWo cespe hej uegÌ{keâleer nw~ rolling down an inclined plane of vertical
Fmekeâer IetCeeaÙe ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj kegâue ieeflepe Tpee& keâe height h from rest without sliding is
Devegheele nw: Skeâ "esme ieesuee h TOJee&Oej TBÛeeF& kesâ vele meceleue hej
(a) 1/2 (b) 1/6 efyevee efheâmeues IetCe&ve ieefle keâjlee nw~ Gmekeâer Ûeeue nesieer:
(c) 7/10 (d) 2/7
AIPMT-1994 10
(a) gh (b) gh
1 7
2
Ans. (d) : Linear K.E of ball = mv
2 6 4
(c) gh (d) gh
1 2 5 3
Rotational K.E of ball = Iω
2 AIPMT-1992
12 2 2  2 2 Ans. (a) :
=  mr  ω  I = 5 mr 
25 
1
= mv 2 [∴ v = r ω]
5
1 1
Therefore total K.E = mv 2 + mv 2
2 5
( 5 + 2 ) mv 2
7
= = mv 2
10 10
And ratio of rotational K.E and total K.E
1 2
 mv  • P.E = K.E translation + K.E rotational
K.E =  5  = 1 × 10 = 2
 7 2 5 7 7 1 1
  mv • mgh = mv 2 + Iω2
 10  2 2
Physics 163 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2 z-axis at z = a. The change in its angular
• mgh = mv 2 + I  
1 1 v
momentum about the origin as it bounces
2 2 r elastically from a wall at y = constant is/ m
 I 
2 mgh = mv 2  1 + 2 
õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& keâCe Skeâ meceeve Jesie v mes y-x leue
 mr  ceW Fme Øekeâej ieefleceeve nw efkeâ Fmekeâe heLe + y-De#e kesâ
2gh meceeblej jnlee nw Deewj z-De#e keâes z = a hej ØeefleÛÚsefole
• v= ...(i)
keâj jne nw~ Ùeefo Ùen y = DeÛejebkeâ kesâ mebiele oerJeej hej
 I 
 1 + 
 mr 2  cetue efyebog kesâ heeefjle-Fmekesâ keâesCeerÙe mebJesie ceW heefjJele&ve
We know that moment of inertia of solid sphere is, keâe ceeve nw
2
I = mr 2
5
∴ Substitute this value in eqn (i)
10
• Vsolidsphere = gh
7
10
The velocity of the solid sphere is gh (a) mva ê x (b) 2mva ê x
7
(c) ymv ê x (d) 2ymv ê x
r
6.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems Ans. (b) : Given : Initial velocity vi = veˆ y
r
Final Velocity v f = –veˆ y
88. For which of the following does the centre of
The trajectory is given as
mass lie outside the body?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâme r
r = yeˆ y + aeˆ z
efheb[ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ Gmekesâ yeenj efmLele neslee nw~
So, change in angular momentum–
(a) A pencil/heWefmeue r r r r
∆L = r × m(v f – vi )
(b) A shotput/Mee@šhegš (ieesuee)
(c) A dice/ (heemee) = (yeˆ y + aeˆ z ) × (–mveˆ y – mveˆ y )
(d) A bangle (ÛetÌ[er) = (yeˆ y + aeˆ z ) × (–2mveˆ y )
Ans. (d) : A bangle is a hollow cylinder. Hence, the Q eˆ y × eˆ y = 0 & eˆ z × eˆ y = –eˆ x 
centre of mass lies outside the body.
= – 2mva (– eˆ x )
89. Which of the following points is the likely
position of the centre of mass of the system = 2mvaeˆ x
shown in figure ?/efÛe$e ceW oMee&S ieS efvekeâeÙe ceW 91. When a disc rotates with uniform angular
Debefkeâle keâewve-mee efyebog Fmekeâs õJÙeceeve keWâõ keâer mebYeeefJele velocity, which of the following is not true?/peye
efmLeefle nw? keâesF& ef[mkeâ Skeâ meceeve keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes IetCe&ve keâjleer nw,
lees efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe veneR neslee?
(a) The sense of rotation remains same./IetCe&ve keâer
efoMee meceeve jnleer nw~
(b) The orientation of the axis of rotation remains
same./IetCe&ve De#e keâe efokeâd-efJevÙeeme meceeve jnlee nw~
(c) The speed of rotation is non-zero and remains
same. /IetCe&ve keâer Ûeeue MetvÙeslej nesleer nw leLee meceeve
(a) A (b) B jnleer nw~
(c) C (d) D (d) The angular acceleration is non-zero and
Ans. (c) : According to given figure, the position of the remains same./keâesCeerÙe lJejCe MetvÙeslej nesleer nw leLee
centre of mass of the system is likely to be 'C'. This is meceeve jnleer nw~
because the lower part of the sphere containing sand, is
heavier than the upper part of the sphere containing air. Ans. (d) : When the disc is rotated with constant
angular velocity, angular acceleration of the disc is zero.
90. A particle of mass m is moving in y - z plane
∆ω
with a uniform velocity v with its trajectory Because angular acceleration α =
running parallel to +ve y-axis and intersecting ∆t

Physics 164 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Where, ω = constant Ans. (a) : Given :
∴∆ ω = 0 Non-uniform density ρ (x) = a (1 + bx2)
1
0  dm 
So, α = =0
∆t ∫0 (dm)x  ρ=
dx 
Hence, the angular acceleration is non-zero and remains We know, X =  
dm = ρ.dx
com 1

same, is not correct. ∫0 (dm) dm = a(1 + bx 2 )dx 
 
92. A uniform square plate has a small piece Q of
an irregular shape removed and glued to the By putting the value
centre of the plate leaving a hole behind. The 1

∫0 a(1 + bx )x.dx
2
moment of inertia about the z-axis, then/efkeâmeer
Skeâ meceeve Jeiee&keâej huesš mes keâesF& DeefveÙeefcele Deeke=âefle X com = 1
∫ a(1 + bx )dx
2
keâes Úesše šgkeâÌ[e Q keâeškeâj Fmes huesš kesâ keWâõ mes
efÛehekeâe efoÙee ieÙee nw Deewj huesš ceW hetJe& mLeeve hej efÚõ 0
1
ÚesÌ[ efoÙee ieÙee nw~ leye z-De#e kesâ heefjle: Fmes huesš keâe
∫0 (x + bx )dx
3

peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe& X com = 1

∫ (1 + bx
2
)dx
0

On integrating, we get–
1
 x 2 bx 4  1 b 2 + b
(a) increased/yeÌ{ peelee nw~  +   2 + 4 
X com = 2 4 0
= = 4
(b) decreased/Ieš peelee nw~
 bx 3 
1
 b  3+ b
(c) the same/meceeve jnlee nw~ x + 3  1 + 
 0  3 3
(d) changed in unpredicted manner./DevevegcesefÙele ™he
mes yeoue peelee nw~ 3(2 + b)
X com =
4(3 + b)
Ans. (b) : As the piece of Q is removed and glued to
centre, the moment of inertia decreases about z-axis as the 95. A merry-go-round, made of a ring-like
M.I. = ∑ mi d i 2 platform of radius R and mass M, is revolving
with angular speed ω. A person of mass M is
As the distance of that piece from z-axis is decreased to
standing on it. At one instant, the person jumps
zero, hence its moment of inertia will decrease.
off the round, radially away from the centre of
93. In problem 5, the centre of mass of the plate is the round. The speed of the round afterwards
now in the following quadrant of x-y is/ef$epÙee R leLee õJÙeceeve M kesâ Úuues pewmes huesšheâece&
plane,/ØeMve 5 ceW, Deye huesš keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ x-y
keâe yevee keâesF& cesjer-iees-jeGb[ Petuee keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue ω mes
leue kesâ veerÛes efoS ieS efkeâme ÛelegLeeËMe ceb nw? heefj›eâceCe keâj jne nw~ M õJÙeceeve keâe keâesF& JÙeefkeäle Fme
(a) I (b) II Petues hej KeÌ[e nw~ efkeâmeer #eCe efJeMes<e hej Ùen JÙeefkeäle Fme
(c) III (d) IV
Petues mes Fme Petues kesâ keâWõ mes hejs ef$epÙeele: (Petues mes
Ans. (c) : The centre of mass will shift towards the side
opposite to Q along the line passing through the axis of
osKeves hej) ketâolee nw~ Fmekesâ heMÛeeled Petues keâer Ûeeue nw
rotation thus, the new centre of mass will be in quadrant III. (a) 2ω (b) ω
94. The density of a non-uniform rod of length 1 m ω
(c) (d) 0
is given by ρ(x) = a(1 + bx2) where a and b are 2
constants and 0 < x < 1. The centre of mass of Ans. (a): As no torque is exerted by the person
the road will be at/1 m uebyeer efkeâmeer Demeceeve ÚÌ[ jumping, radially away from the centre of the round,
keâe IevelJe Fme Øekeâej JÙekeäle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw ρ(x) = a(1 angular momentum will remain conserve.
+ bx2) Initial Momentum (platform + Person)
ÙeneB a leLee b efmLejebkeâ nQ leLee 0 < x < 1 Ii = 2 MR2 × ω
Final Momentum (Platform),
Fme ÚÌ[ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ nesiee
If = MR2 × ω'
3(2 + b) 4(2 + b)
(a) (b) Q Ii = If
4(3 + b) 3(3 + b)
3(3 + b) 4(3 + b)
2MR2 × ω = MR2 × ω'
(c) (d) ω' = 2ω
4(2 + b) 3(2 + b)

Physics 165 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
7.
Gravitation
2. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit
around the earth. The mass of the satellite is
7.1 Kepler's Laws very small compared to the mass of the earth
1. The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 then/Skeâ Ghe«en S oerIe&Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee cebbW he=LJeer keâer
h, at a height 6RE (RE is radius of earth) from heefj›eâcee keâj jne nQ Ghe«en keâe õJÙeceeve, he=LJeer kesâ
surface of earth. The time period of another õJÙeceeve keâer leguevee ceW yengle keâce nw lees;
satellite whose height is 2.5 RE from surface will (a) The acceleration of S is always directed
be,/he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ mes 6RE (RE he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee nw) TBÛeeF& towards the centre of the earth/ S keâe lJejCe
hej efkeâmeer YetmLeweflekeâ Ghe«en keâe DeeJele&keâeue 24 h nw~ efkeâmeer meowJe he=LJeer kesâ keâsvõ keâer Deesj nesiee~
DevÙe Ghe«en, efpemekeâer he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ mes TbÛeeF& 2.5 RE nw, (b) The angular momentum of S about the centre
of the earth changes in direction, but its
keâe DeeJele&keâeue nesiee magnitude remains constant/ he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ kesâ
(a)
12
h (b) 6 2h
heeefjle: S kesâ keâesCeerÙe mebJesie keâer efoMee ceW heefjJele&ve neslee
2.5 jnlee nw~ efkeâvleg Fmekeâs heefjCeece meceeve jnlee nw~
24 (c) The total mechanical energy of S varies
(c) 12 2h (d)
h periodically with time/ S keâer kegâue Ùeebef$ekeâ Tpee&
2.5
keâe ceeve meceÙe kesâ meeLe DeeJele& ™he ceW heefjJeefle&le nesleer
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
jnleer nw~
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 (d) The linear momentum of S remains constant
Ans. (b) : Given data in magnitude/ S kesâ jsKeerÙe mebJesie keâe heefjceeCe (ceeve)
r1 = R + 6R = 7R efmLej jnlee nw~
r2 = R + 2.5R = 3.5 R AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
T1 = 24 hours Ans. (a) : The satellite revolves around the earth due to
Using Kepler's third law of periods gravitational force that acts towards the centre of the
earth. And according to the kepler's law, the angular
r3
T = 2π momentum of the satellite remains constant but not the
GM linear momentum.
Where r = radius of orbit 3. Kepler's third law states that square of period
G & M = constant of revolution (T) of a planet around the sun, is
proportional to third power of average distance
r3
T1 = 2π 1 = 2π
( 7R )3 ––– (1)
r between sun and planet/kewâhuej kesâ le=leerÙe efveÙece
GM GM kesâ Devegmeej, metÙe& keâer heefj›eâcee keâjles ngS efkeâmeer «en keâe
heefj›eâceCe keâeue (T), metÙe& Deewj Gme «en kesâ yeerÛe keâer
r3 ( 3.5R ) 3
Deewmele otjer r keâer le=leerÙe Ieele kesâ meceevegheeleer neslee nw~
T2 = 2π 2 = 2π –––– (II)
GM GM i.e. T2 = Kr3
Dividing eqn (II) by (I) DeLee&le T2 = Kr3
T2 ( 3.5R )3 here K is constant.
peneB, K Skeâ efmLejebkeâ nw~
=
T1 ( 7R )3 If the masses of sun and planet are M and m
T2 1 respectively then as per Newton's law of
= gravitation force of attraction between them is
T1 2 2
GMm
T2 1 F = 2 , here G is gravitational constant.
= [T1 = 24h ] r
24 2 2 Ùeefo, metÙe& leLee «en kesâ õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: M leLee m nw,
24 lees vÙetšve kesâ ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej Fvekesâ yeeo
T2 =
2 2 ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue keâe ceeve
∴ T2 = 6 2h GMm
F= neslee nw~
r2
Physics 166 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The relation between G and
d K is described as: 5. The figure shows elliptical cal orbit
or of a planet m
peneB G ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efmLejebkeâ nw, lees about the sun S. The shaded aded area
a SCD is twice
G leLee K kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nw: the shaded area SAB. If t1 is the time for the
planet to move from C to o D and
an t2 is the time to
(a) GMK= 4π2 (b) K = G move from A to B then /Fmee efÛe$e ceW Skeâ «en m keâe
(c) K =
1
(d) GK = 4π2 metÙe& S kesâ efieo& Je=òe Deejefyeš (heLe)
(heL efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~
G DeeÛÚeefole #es$e SDC mes ogiegves #es # $eheâue keâe nw~ Ùeefo
AIP
AIPMT-03.05.2015 «en keâes C mes D lekeâ Ûeueves ceWW meceÙe
mec t1 ueielee nes Deewj
Ans. (a) : The time period of planet
et will be A mes B lekeâ Ûeueves ceW t2 meceÙee ueielee
uei nes lees–
2πr
T=
v
r r3 2
T = 2π = 2π
GM GM
r
Squaring both sides, we get (a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 > t2
4π2 r 3 (c) t1 = 4t2 (d) t1 = 2t2
T2 = …………..(1) AIMPT-2009
GM
Also from Kepler's third law Ans. (d) : According to Kepler's r's second
sec law the areal
T 2 = Kr 3 ………………(2) velocity of a planet revolving ng around
aro the sun in
From eqn (1) & (2) elliptical orbit remains constant.
Area of SAB, A2 = A
4π 2 r 3
= Kr 3 Area of SCD A1 = 2A
GM
4π2
K=
GM
GMK = 4 π 2
4. A planet moving along an ell elliptical orbit is ∆A
closest to the sun at a distance
tance r1 and farthest = const
away at a distance of r2. If v1 and v2 are the ∆t
linear velocities at these poin
points respectively, A1 A 2
=
v1 t1 t2
then the ratio is : /metÙe&& keâe
keâer hejJeueerÙe heLe ceW
v2 2A A
heefj›eâcee keâjles ngS efkeâmeer «en keâerâer me
metÙe& mes vÙetvelece otjer =
t1 t2
r1 leLee DeefOekeâlece otjer r2 nw~ Ùeefo Fve efmLeefleÙeeW ceW t1 = 2t2
v1
jsKeerÙe Jesie ›eâceMe: v1 SJeb v2 nes, lees DDevegheele nesiee: 6. The period of revolution of planet pla A around the
v2 sun is 8 times that of B. The distance d of A from
(a) r1/r2 (b) (r1/r2)2 the sun is how many times es grater
gra than that of B
(c) r2/r1 (d) (r2/r1)2 from the sun?/Skeâ «en A keâe metÙe& kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj
AIPMTMT (S(Screening)-2011 Ietceves keâe DeeJele&keâeue «en B mes 8 iegvee nw, lees metÙe& mes
Ans. (c) : Given that v1 is the speeded of the planet when A keâer otjer B kesâ meehes#e efkeâleveerer nesieer?
it is at a distance r1 and v2 is the speed when it is at a
distance r2 as shown in the figure. (a) 4 (b) 5
v2 (c) 2 (d) 3
AIPMT-1997
r1
Ans. (a) : According to kepler's third law of motion-
v1 r2 The square of the time period of revolution revo of a planet
Since the torque on the planet about
out the sun is zero, its around the sun is directly proportion ortional to the cube of
angular momentum will be conserved. semi- major axis of its elliptical orbit.
Now, using law of conservation off Ang
Angular Momentum T 2 ∝ a3
at P and A, Where, a = semi-major axis of the he elliptical
elli orbit
mv1r1 = mv2r2 Given that: TA = 8TB
2 3
v1 r2  TA   a A 
= T  =a 
v2 r1  B  B

Physics 167 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 8TB 
2
 aA 
3 If R is the distance of earth from the sun in position
 T  = a  perpendicular to major axis of its elliptical orbit then
 B   B from property of ellipse.
 aA 
3 2 1 1
= +
 a  = 64 R r1 r2
 B
2r1r2
a A = 4a B R=
r1 + r2
7. The distance of two planets from the sun are
1013 m and 1012 m respectively. The ratio of 9. A satellite A of mass m is at a distance of r from
time periods of the planets is the centre of the earth. Another satellite B of
metÙe& mes oes «eneW keâer otefjÙeeB ›eâceMe: 1013 ceeršj leLee mass 2m is at a distance of 2r from the earth's
centre. Their time periods are in the ratio of
1012 ceeršj nw~ Fmekesâ DeeJele&keâeueeW keâe Devegheele nw
Skeâ Ghe«en A efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve m nw~ he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ mes
(a) 10 (b) 10 10 r otjer hej nw leLee otmeje Ghe«en B efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve 2m
(c) 10 (d) 1/ 10 nw, 2r otjer hej nw~ Fvekesâ DeeJele&keâeueeW keâe Devegheele nesiee:
AIPMT-1994, 1988 (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 16
Ans. (b) : According to kepler's third law- (c) 1 : 32 (d) 1: 2 2
T 2 ∝ a3 AIPMT-1993
Given that: r1 = 1013 m r2 = 1012 m
2 3
Ans. (d) : According to the kepler's third law-
 T1   r1  T 2 ∝ r3 ...(i)
T  =r  n
 2  2 From eq (i) it is clear that time period does not depend
2 3 upon the mass of satellite. It only depends upon the
 T1   10 
13
= orbital radius.
 T   1012 
 2 TA  rA 
3/ 2

=
2
 T1  ( 3 ) TB  rB 
 T  = 10
 2  r 
3/2

=  
T1  2r 
= 10 10 TA 1
T2 =
TB 2 2
8. The largest and the shortest distance of the
earth from the sun are r1 and r2. Its distance
form the sun when it is at perpendicular to the
major-axis of the orbit drawn form the sun is 7.2 Universal Law of Gravitation
he=LJeer keâer metÙe& mes DeefOekeâlece leLee vÙetvelece otjer keâe ceeve
10. A gravitational field is present in a region and
r1 leLee r2 nw~ Ùeefo he=LJeer metÙe& kesâ keâ#ee kesâ oerIe&De#e kesâ a mass is shifted from A to B through different
uecyeJeled nes lees Fmekeâer metÙe& mes otjer nesieer- paths as shown. If W1, W2 and W3 represent
r1 + r2 r1 + r2 the work done by the gravitational force along
(a) (b)
4 r1 – r2 the respective paths, then:
efkeâmeer mLeeve hej ieg®lJeerÙe #es$e GheefmLele nw SJeb efkeâmeer
2r1r2 r +r
(c) (d) 1 2 õJÙeceeve keâes A mes B hej Deueie-Deueie heLeeW Éeje efÛe$e
r1 + r2 3
ceW oMee&Ùes Devegmeej efJemLeeefhele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo W1,
AIPMT-1988
W2 SJeb W3 ieg®lJeerÙe yeue Éeje Deueie-Deueie ›eâceMe:
Ans. (c) :
heLeeW kesâ DevegefoMe efkeâS ieS keâeÙe& nQ, lees:

(a) W1 = W2 = W3 (b) W1 > W2 > W3

(c) W1 > W3 > W2 (d) W1 < W2 < W3
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Physics 168 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
conservative force. The variation of E with distancee r from
Ans. (a): Gravitational force is a con fro the centre is as
Work done by conservative force is path independent. shown in the figure.
Hence, W1 = W2 = W3
11. Two astronauts are floating ting iin gravitational
free space after having lost st con
contact with their
spaceship. The two will
oes Devleefj#eÙeeef$eÙeeW keâe mecheke&â Dehev
eheves Devleefj#e Ùeeve mes
štš peelee nw Deewj Jes oesveeW ieg®lJeekeâ<e&
keâ<e&Ce efJenerve Devleefj#e
ceW lewjves ueieles nQ~ lees Ùes oesveeW: 13. Two spheres of masses m and M are situated in
air and the gravitationall force forc between them is
(a) Keep floating at the same ame ddistance between
F. The space around thee masses ma is now filled
them/lewjles ngS Fvekesâ yeerÛe keâerr otjer Jener yeveer jnsieer~ with a liquid of specific cific density 3. The
(b) Move towards each other gravitational force will now ow be: be
Skeâ-otmejs keâer Deesj ieefle keâjWies~ oes ieesues efpevekeâe õJÙeceeve m Deeweewj M nw JeeÙeg ceW efmLele nQ
(c) Move away from each other leLee Fvekesâ yeerÛe ieg™lJeerÙe yeuee keâe
keâ ceeve F nw~ ieesueeW kesâ
Skeâ otmejs mes otj peeÙeWies~ ÛeejeW Deesj kesâ mLeeve keâes Deye SkeâSke õJe mes Yej osles nQ
(d) Will become stationary/DeÛeue eÛeue jnWies~ efpemekeâe Deehesef#ekeâ IevelJe 3 nww~ ieg™lJeerÙe yeue keâe ceeve
NEET
EET ((UG)-07.05.2017 Deye nesiee:
Ans. (b) : The two astronauts will ill mov
move towards each (a) 3F (b) F
other due to the gravitational forcee betw between them but it (c) F/3 (d) F/9
will be a very slow process as they ey mo move towards each
AIPMT-2003
other with very small acceleration ion du due to their low
mass. Ans. (b): Newton's law of gravitation:
tation:
12. Dependence of intensity of gra gravitational field m1m2
F=G
(E) of earth with distancee (r) from centre of R2
earth is correctly represented ted by by:- Where,
he=LJeer kesâ ieg™lJeerÙe #es$e keâer leer›elee (E) keâer, he=LJeer kesâ G = Universal gravitational constant
stant
kesâvõ mes otjer (r) hej, efveYe&jlee keâeseâes kekeâewve mee «eeheâ mener m1 = Mass of 1st body
efve™efhele keâjlee nw? m2 = Mass of 2nd body
R = Distance between the two bodies.
odies.
• From above it is clear that the gravitational
g force
depends on the mass of the bodies
bodie and the distance
between them.
• It is independent of the nature
re and size of the bodies
as well as the nature of thee medium
med between the
bodies.
Therefore it will remain the same.
14. Gravitational force is required
quired for :
ieg™lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue efkeâmekesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ
Dee nw –
(a) Stirring of liquid/õJe keâe efJeueeseu [ve
AIP
AIPMT-06.05.2014 (b) Convection/mebJenve
Ans. (a) : For a point inside the earth
rth i.e
i.e. r < R (c) Conduction/Ûeeueve
GM (d) Radiation/efJeefkeâjCe
E = − 3 .r AIPMT-2000
R
where, 'M' and 'R' be mass andd radi radius of the earth Ans. (b) : Gravitational force is required
requir for convection.
respectively. In natural convection, the heat transfer
ansfer does not need any
At the centre, r = 0 contact to transfer. The thermal energy travels away from
source towards the object. The tempera
emperature gradient exist
∴E=0 only in vertical direction & nott in horizontal
h direction
For a point outside the earth i.e. r > R, because of density variation with ith temperature
tem rise. As
GM temperature increases, fluid portions
rtions become light &
E=− 2 move upwards, heavy & more dense ense fluid
f portions move
r
on the surface of the earth i.e. r = R, downward. So, up & down movemen ement of particles takes
place; this depends on weight & gravity.
gravi Thus, presence
GM of a gravitational field is required
d in heat
he transfer through
E=− 2
R natural convection.

Physics 169 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
15. Two particles of equal mass m go around a Ans. (b): We know that the
circle of radius R under the action of their
mv 2
mutual gravitational attraction. The speed v of Centripetal force = ....(i)
each particle is R
meceeve õJÙeceeve m Jeeues oes keâCe R ef$epÙee kesâ Skeâ Je=òe Gravitational force = F =
GMm
...(ii)
kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj Gvekesâ hejmhej ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue keâer ef›eâÙee R2
2 n
kesâ Debleie&le ieefle keâjles nQ~ ØelÙeskeâ keâCe keâer Ûeeue v nw: If replacing R by R in the eq (ii) we get-
GMm
1 Gm 4Gm F= ... (iii)
(a) (b) R
2 R R
Equating (i) and (iii) we get-
1 1 Gm mv 2 GMm
(c) (d) =
2 R Gm R R R
AIPMT-1995 v = GM ...(iv)
Ans. (a) : Given that the mass of two particles are- From eqn (iv) we conclude that the orbital velocity v
m1 = m2 = m proportional to Rº. i.e independent of R.
Gravitational force of attraction between both the 17. What will be the formula of mass of the earth
particles is- in terms of g, R and G?
he=LJeer kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe met$e g, R, G kesâ ™he ceW nesiee-
R R2
(a) G (b) g
g G
2 R g
(c) g (d) G
G R
AIPMT-1996
Gmm
F= ...(i) Ans. (b) : The gravitational force acting on an object of
( 2R )2
mass m placed on the surface of earth is-
mv 2 GMm
We know that centripetal force = ...(ii) F=
R R2
Equating eqn(i) and eqn(ii) we get- From Newton's Law-
G m 2 mv 2 GMm
= F = ma = mg =
4R 2 R R2
Gm GMm
v2 = mg =
4R R2
1 Gm GM
v= g= 2
2 R R
16. If the gravitational force between two objects gR 2
M=
were proportional to 1/R (and not as 1/R2), G
where R is the distance between them, then a R2
particle in a circular path (under such a force) M=g
G
would have its orbital speed v, proportional to
Ùeefo ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue 1/R kesâ meceevegheeleer nes (1/R2 kesâ
veneR) peneB R oes JemlegDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer nes, lees Ùeefo 7.3 Acceleration due to Gravity
Jemleg Je=òeerÙe heLe hej Deeefye&šue Jesie v mes Ûeueles, lees v
meceevegheeleer nesiee- 18. If R is the radius of the earth and g is the
(a) R acceleration due to gravity on the earth
(b) Rº (independent of R) surface. Then the mean density of the earth will
(c) 1/R2 be./Ùeefo R he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee nw Deewj g he=LJeer keâer melen
(d) 1/R hej ieg™lJeekeâ<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe lJejCe nw~ leye he=LJeer keâe
AIPMT-1994, 1989 Deewmele IevelJe nesiee:
Physics 170 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
3g 4πG 4
ge
(a) (b) g' =
9
4πRG 3gR
Now, weight of man on surface of earth is given by-
πRG 3πR W = mge ..............(iii)
(c) (d) R
12g 4gG weight of man at a height, h =
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 2
AIPMT-1995 W ' = mg ' .............. (iv)
Ans. (a) :We know that acceleration due to gravity on Dividing (iii) from (iv) we get
earth surface is - W' g' 4
⇒ = =
GM W ge 9
g = 2 .............(i)
R 4
M ⇒ W' = W
Now, ρ= 9
V 4
M = Vρ ⇒ W' = × 72
9
4
M = πR 3ρ ⇒ W' = 32N
3 20. What is the depth at which the value of
On putting the value of M in equation (i) we get- 1
4 acceleration due to gravity becomes times
G × πR 3 ρ n
g= 3 the value that at the surface of earth? (radius
R2 of earth = R)
4 Jen ienjeF& efkeâleveer nw peneB hej ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve
g= GπRρ
3 1
Mean density of earth- he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ hej ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe kesâ ceeve keâe iegvee
n
3 g nes peelee nw?
ρ=
4 GπR
(he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee = R)
19. A body of weight 72 N moves from the surface of
earth at a height half of the radius of the earth, R R
(a) (b)
then gravitational force exerted on it will be : n n2
72 N Yeej keâe Skeâ efheC[ he=LJeer keâer melen mes heLJeer keâer R ( n − 1) Rn
ef$epÙee keâer DeeOeer GBâÛeeF& mes ieefle keâjlee nw lees Fme hej (c) (d)
n ( n − 1)
ueieves Jeeuee ieg™lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue nesiee –
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
(a) 36 N (b) 32 N
(c) 144 N (d) 50 N Ans. (c) : Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d under
NEET (UG)- 13.09.2020 earth surface g = gs 1 − d 
 R
AIPMT-2000  
Ans. (b) : Value of acceleration due to gravity (g) at Where, gs = Acceleration due to gravity at surface of
earth surface earth
GM R = Radius of earth.
ge = ...(i)
R2 d = depth
Value of 'g' at a height 'h' above earth's surface is given According to Question,
by- g
GM g= s
g' = n
(R + h)2
gs  d
Q Height (h) = Half of radius of earth (given) ∴ = g s 1 − 
n  R
GM
⇒ g' = ...(ii) 1  d
 R
2
or = 1 − 
R +  n  R
 2
d 1
Divide equation (ii) by (i) ⇒ = 1−
R n
g' GM R2
= 2
×  n −1 
g e  3R  GM d = R 
   n 
 2 
Physics 171 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
21. A body weights 200N on the surface of the New acceleration due to gravity (g') will be
earth. How much will it weight half way down G 'm 10Gm
to the center of the earth?/efkeâmeer efheC[ keâe he=LJeer g' = 2 = = 10 g
R R2
kesâ he=‰ hej Yeej 200N nw~ he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ keâer Deesj DeeOeer
otjer hej Fmekeâe Yeej efkeâlevee nesiee? T' = 2 π
l
(a) 200 N (b) 250 N g
(c) 100 N (d) 150 N From the above new value of g' we can say that
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 acceleration due to gravity increases, so the raindrops
Ans. (c) : will fall faster. So Statement (a) is correct.
⇒ Due to more acceleration due to gravity the weight
of the man will increases and hence it will be
difficult to move. Statement (b) is correct.
⇒ Due to increases in the g value the time period of
pendulum decreases. So Statement (d) is correct.
⇒ g is increases 10 times, so statement (c) is not
correct.
Given, 23. The acceleration due to gravity at a height 1
Weight of the body, W = mg = 200 N km above the earth is the same as at a depth d
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d from surface of below the surface of earth. Then:/he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ mes
earth
1 efkeâceer. GBâÛeeF& hej ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve Jener nw
 d
pees he=LJeer kesâ Yeerlej d ienjeF& hej nw, lees:
g ' = g  1 –  ––––– (i)
 R
1
Where R = The radius of the earth.
n
(a) d = km (b) d = 1 km
Multiplying m on both side of eq (1) 2
We get 3
(c) d = km (d) d =2 km
 d  R 2
mg ' = mg 1 –  Qd = 
 R  2 NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Ans. (d) : Acceleration due to gravity at height h,
 R  200
= 200 1– =  2h 
 2R  2 gh = g0 1 −  , h = 1 km
= 100 N  R
Acceleration due to gravity at depth d
22. If the mass of the Sun were ten times smaller
and the universal gravitational constant were  d
gd = g0 1 − 
ten times larger in magnitude, which of the  R
following is not correct? Where, R is radius of earth and g0 is gravity at surface
1 of earth-
Ùeefo metÙe& keâe õJÙeceeve iegvee nes leLee meeJe&ef$ekeâ gh = gd
10
ieg™lJeekeâ<e&Ce efmLejebkeâ heefjceeCe ceW 10 iegvee nes, lees
g0  1 − 2h  = g 0  1 − d 
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee mener vener nw?  R   R
(a) Raindrops will fall faster R − 2h R − d
Je<ee& keâer yetBos Oejleer hej DeefOekeâ lespeer mes efiejWieer~ =
R R
(b) Walking on the ground would become more d = 2h
difficult / Oejleer hej Ûeuevee keâef"ve nes peeSiee~
d = 2 × 1 = 2km
(c) ‘g’ on the Earth will not change
he=LJeer hej ‘g’ kesâ ceeve ceW heefjJele&ve veneR nesiee~ 24. Starting from the centre of the earth having
(d) Time period of a simple pendulum on the radius R, the variation of g (acceleration due to
Earth would decrease gravity) is
he=LJeer hej mejue ueesuekeâ keâe DeeJele&keâeue keâce nes peeSiee~ Ùeefo he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee R nQ, lees he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ mes ØeejbYe
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 keâj ieg¤lJeerÙe lJejCe g kesâ heefjJele&ve keâes efvecveebefkeâle ceW mes
Ans. (c) : Mass of sun becomes 10 times smaller and keâewvemee DeejsKe («eeHeâ) mener oMee&lee nw ?
universal gravitational constant becomes 10 times
larger.
Gm (a) (b)
We know, g= 2
R
New gravitational constant (G') = 10 G
Physics 172 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 3R (b) 4R
(c) 5R (d) 15R
(c) (d)
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Ans. (a) : • Acceleration due to gravity is given as ,
GM
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II g=
R2
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 where, G = Universal gravitational constant
Ans. (b) : Acceleration due to gravity inside the earth- M = mass of earth
GMr R = Radius of earth.
g=
R3 • Weight of object (W) = mg. { m = mass of object
For 0 < r < R ⇒ g ∝ r → Linear variation g = acceleration due
Acceleration due to gravity outside the surface - to gravity }
GM Now, Acceleration due to gravity at height 'h' from
g= earth surface,
r2
g
1 ⇒ g' =
For r ≥ R ⇒ g ∝ → parabolic variation  h
2
r2 1 + 
 R
multiply both side by 'm'
mg
mg' = 2
 h
r=R
 1 + 
 R
Option (b) satisfies the combination of linear and
mg
parabolic variation hence correct answer is option (b). W' = 2
25. A spherical planet has a mass MP and diameter  h
1 + 
DP. A particle of mass m falling freely near the  R
surface of this planet will experience an W
acceleration due to gravity, equal to:- According to question W' =
16
efkeâmeer ieesueekeâej «en keâe õJÙeceeve MP leLee JÙeeme DP
nw~ Fmekesâ he=‰ hej, mJeleb$elee hetJe&keâ efiejles ngS m õJÙeceeve W W
= 2
kesâ keâCe kesâ efueS ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve nesiee- 16  h
 1 + 
(a) GMP/DP2 (b) 4GMPm/DP2  R
(c) 4GMP/DP2 (d) GMPm/DP2 2
 h
AIPMT (Screening)-2012  1 +  = 16
 R
Ans. (c) : • When a force acts on body it produces
 h
acceleration. Therefore, body under effect of 1 +  = 4
gravitational pull must accelerate.  R 
• Acceleration of a body under the effect of gravity is h
called acceleration due to gravity. (g) =3
R
GM
Q g = 2P G = Gravitational constant h = 3R
RP
27. Imagine a new planet having the same density as
MP = Mass of Planet
that of earth but it is 3 times bigger than the earth
D in size. If the acceleration due to gravity on the
RP = Radius of Planet = P
2 surface of earth is g and that on the surface of the
4GM P new planet is g', then–/Skeâ Ssmes veÙes «en keâer keâuhevee
GM P
g= ⇒ g= keâerefpeS efpemekeâe IevelJe he=LJeer kesâ IevelJe kesâ yejeyej nw leLee
 DP 
2 DP 2
 2  Gmekeâe Deekeâej he=LJeer mes leerve iegvee nw~ Ùeefo he=LJeer keâer melen
 
hej ieg®lJe peefvele lJejCe keâe ceeve g nw leLee veÙes «en keâer
26. The height at which the weight of a body
becomes 1/16th of its weight on the surface of
melen hej g' nw lees nesiee-
earth (radius R) is: (a) g' = 3g (b) g' =9g
Jen TBÛeeF& efpeme hej efkeâmeer Jemleg keâe Yeej, he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ (c) g' = g/9 (d) g' = 27g
hej Gmekesâ Yeej keâe 1/16 nes peeÙesiee, nw : AIPMT-2005

Physics 173 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Given, Rp 1
Radius of the new planet R' = 3R =
Re 2
Mass of the earth for same density
Re R
M M' Rp = =
= 2 2
4 3 4
π ( 3R )
3
πR 29. The acceleration due to gravity on the planet A
3 3 is 9 times the acceleration due to gravity on
M ' = 27M planet B. A man jumps to a height of 2m on the
Now for earth g is given as - surface of A. What is the height of jump by the
same person on the planet B.
GM «en A hej ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve, «en B hej
g = 2 − − − − − (i)
R ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe kesâ ceeve 9 iegvee nw~ Jener JÙeefòeâ «en B
For new planet - hej efkeâleveer TBÛeeF& lekeâ ketâo mekesâiee-
GM ' G ( 27M )  GM  (a) 2/9 (b) 18 m
g' = = = 3  2  = 3g
R '2 ( 3R )
2
 R  (c) 6 m (d) 2/3 m
28. The density of newly discovered planet is twice AIPMT-2003
that of earth. The acceleration due to gravity at Ans. (b): Given that-
the surface of the planet is equal to that at the Acceleration due to gravity on planet A is 9 times the
surface of the earth. If the radius of the earth is acceleration due to gravity on planet B i.e.
R, the radius of the planet would be :- gA = 9 gB ...(i)
n
Skeâ veS %eele ngS «en keâe IevelJe he=LJeer kesâ IevelJe mes From third eq of motion-
v2 = 2gh
ogiegvee nw~ he=LJeer Deewj Fme «en kesâ leueeW hej ieg™lJeerÙe 2
lJejCe keâe ceeve meceeve nw~ Ùeefo he=LJeer keâe ef$epÙee R At planet A, h A = v ...(ii)
2g A
ceeveer peeS, lees «en keâer ef$epÙee keâe ceeve nesiee:-
v2
(a) 4R (b) 1 R At planet B, h B = ...(iii)
4 2g B
(c) 1 R (d) 2R Dividing eq (ii) by eqn (i)
n
2
hA gB
AIPMT-2004 =
h B gA
Ans. (c) : Given- Density of the planet, ρp = ρ
Density of the earth, ρe = 2ρ hA g 1
= B =  From,eq n (i) 
GM h B 9g B 9
The acceleration due to gravity, g = hB = 9hA
R2
4 hB = 9×2 [Q h A = 2m ]
G πR 3ρ
g= 3 2 h B = 18m
R
4 30. If radius of earth shrinks by 1% then for
g = G πR ρ acceleration due to gravity/Ùeefo he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee
3
1% keâce nes peeÙes lees ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve :-
The acceleration due to gravity of the earth,
(a) No change at poles/OeÇgJeeW hej DeheefjJeefle&le jnsiee
4
ge = Gπ R e ρe ...(i) (b) No change at equator
3
YetceOÙe jsKee hej DeheefjJeefle&le jnsiee
The acceleration due to gravity of the planet
(c) Maximum change at equator
4
gp = GπR p ρp ...(ii) YetceOÙe jsKee hej DeefOekeâlece heefjJele&ve nesiee
3
(d) Equal change at all locations
Equation (i) is equal to eqn (ii)
meYeer mLeeveeW hej meceeve heefjJele&ve nesiee~
ge = gp
AIPMT-1999
4 4
πG R e ρe = πGR p ρ p Ans. (d) : We know that
3 3
GM 1
Reρe = Rp ρp g= 2
⇒g∝ 2
R p ρe R R
ρ
= = If radius changes then acceleration due to gravity
R e ρ p 2ρ changes it means equal change at all locations.

Physics 174 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
31. For moon, its mass is 1/81 of earth mass and its
ge 5
diameter is 1/3.7 of earth diameter If = ...(i)
acceleration due to gravity at earth surface is gm 2
9.8 m/s2 then at moon its value is If an object is on the surface of earth then from
Ûevõcee keâe õJÙeceeve he=LJeer keâe 1/81 SJeb JÙeeme 1/3.7 Newton's law-
iegvee nw Ùeefo he=LJeer melen hej ieg™lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe ceeve F = mge
9.8 m/s2 nw, lees Ûevõcee hej Fmekeâe ceeve keäÙee nesiee :- mge = 200N ...(ii)
2 2
(a) 2.86 m/s (b) 1.65 m/s Now, w m = m × g m
(c) 8.65 m/s2 (d) 5.16 m/s2 200 2g e
AIPMT-1999 = × {from eqn (i)}
ge 5
Ans. (b) : Acceleration due to gravity –
GM e wm = 80 N
g=
R2
GM e
at earth, ge = 7.4 Gravitational Potential
R e2
GM
Energy and Kinetic Energy
At moon, gm = 2m
R m 33. Two bodies of mass m and 9 m are placed at a
M R 
2
R 
2
distance R. The gravitational potential on the
∴ ge M
= e  m  ⇒ gm = ge m ×  e  line joining the bodies where the gravitational
gm M m  R e  Me  Rm 
field equals zero, will be (G = gravitational
 1  constant):/õJÙeceeve m leLee 9m kesâ oes efheC[ Skeâ
 where – M m = mass of moon   M m = 81 M e 
 
M e = mass of earth 
  otmejs mes R otjer hej efmLele nQ~ efheC[eW keâes efceueeves Jeeueer
 R = 1 R 
 m e  jsKee hej, peneB ieg®lJeerÙe #es$e MetvÙe nw, ieg®lJeerÙe efJeYeJe
 3.7 
nesiee ( G = ieg®lJeerÙe efmLejebkeâ) :
1
= 9.8 × × 3.7 × 3.7 20Gm 8Gm
81 (a) − (b) −
= 1.65 m/sec . 2 R R
32. The radius of earth is about 6400 km and that of 12Gm 16 Gm
(c) − (d) −
mars in 3200 km. The mass of the earth is about R R
10 times mass of mars. An object weighs 200 N on NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
the surface of earth. Its weight on the surface of
Ans. (d) :
mars will be/he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee ueieYeie 6400 km nw
Deewj cebieue keâer ef$epÙee ueieYeie 3200 km nw~ he=LJeer keâe
õJÙeceeve cebieue keâs õJÙeceeve keâe ueieYeie 10 iegvee nw~ he=LJeer
kesâ he=‰ hej Skeâ Jemleg keâe Jepeve 200 N nw~ Fmekeâe Jepeve
cebieue kesâ he=‰ hej nesiee:
(a) 20 N (b) 8 N
Let the electric field at point P is zero which is situated
(c) 80 N (d) 40 N
at distance x from m,
AIPMT-1994
Gm G ( 9m )
Ans. (c) : Given that: RE = 6400 km =
(R − x )
2 2
Rm = 3200 km x
ME = 10 Mm (R − x)
2

Object weight = 200 N =9

x2
Now, acceleration due to gravity is-
(R − x)
GM =3
g= x
R2
R
g e M E R m2 x=
= × 4
g m R e2 M m
Now, potential at point P is –
10M m (3200) 2 Gm G ( 9m )
= × VP = − −
(6400) 2 Mm x R−x

Physics 175 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Gm G ( 9m ) 0.05
VP = − − =
R / 4 3R / 4 10−3
Gm Fg = 50 N / kg
VP = − [ 4 + 12] 36. A particle is released from height S from the
R
surface of the Earth. At a certain height its
− 16Gm
VP = kinetic energy is three times to its potential
R energy. The height from the surface of earth
34. In a gravitational field, the gravitational potential and the speed of the particle at that instant are
respectively
K Skeâ keâCe he=LJeer melen mes S TBÛeeF& mes efiejeÙee peelee nw~
is given by, V = – ( J/kg ) . The gravitational
x kegâÚ efveefMÛele TBÛeeF& hej Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& Fmekeâer
field intensity at point (2, 0, 3)m is: efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâer leerve iegvee nesleer nw~ Fme #eCe keâCe keâer
efkeâmeer ieg®lJeerÙe #es$e ceW, ieg®lJeerÙe efJeYeJe V = – he=LJeer melen mes TBÛeeF& leLee keâCe keâer Ûeeue nesleer nw :
K
( J/kg ) Éeje efoÙee ieÙee nw~ (2, 0, 3)m efyebog hej (a)
S 3gS
, (b)
S 3gS
,
x 4 2 4 2
ieg®lJeerÙe #es$e keâer leer›elee nw:
S 3gS S 3gS
K K (c) , (d) ,
(a) + (b) − 4 2 2 2
2 2 NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
K K Ans. (a)
(c) − (d) +
4 4
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Ans. (c) : Given that–
K
V(x) = –
x
Gravitational field intensity –
dV d  −K 
Eg = − =−   At A, body has only PE
dx dx  x 
∴vA = 0 and UA = mgS
d  −K  At B, body has both PE and KE
Eg = −  
dx  x  1 2
UB = mgh and KB = mvB
K 2
Eg = − 2 î
x Using v2 = u2 + 2as
r
E ( 2, 0,3, ) = −
K
=−
K v 2B = v A2 + 2g ( S − h )
(2)
g 2
4
v2B = 2g ( S − h ) ……… (1)
35. A body of mass 60 g experiences a gravitational
force of 3.0 N, when placed at a particular 1
(Multiplying both side by m)
point. The magnitude of the gravitational field 2
intensity at that point is/peye 60 g õJÙeceeve Jeeueer ∴ KB = mg (S – h)……….(2)
efkeâmeer Jemleg keâes efkeâmeer efveÙece efyevog hej jKee peelee nw, Given that, at B KE is three times to its PE.
lees Ùen 3.0 N kesâ ieg®lJeerÙe yeue keâe DevegYeJe keâjleer nw~ K B = 3 × UB = 3mgh

Fme efyevog hej ieg®lJeerÙe #es$e keâer leer›elee kesâ heefjceeCe keâe 3h =S–h
4h = S
ceeve nesiee:
(a) 180 N/kg (b) 0.05 N/kg h= S
4
(c) 50 N/kg (d) 20 N/kg Put the value of h in equation …….(1)
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
v B = 2g ( S – h )
Ans. (c) : Given, Mass, (m) = 60 g = 60×10–3 kg
Gravitational force (F) = 3 N  S
v B = 2g  S –  (Put the value of h)
 4
Gravitational field intensity, Fg =
m
F
( )
3
3 v= gS
= −3 2
60 ×10
Physics 176 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
37. The work done to raise a mass m from the Ans. (c): Gravitational Potential energy;
surface of the earth to a height h, which is Workdone by a gravitational force in shifting a test
equal to the radius of the earth, is: mass from one place to another place.
efkeâmeer õJÙeceeve m keâes he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ mes TbÛeeF& h, pees
he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee kesâ yejeyej nw, lekeâ Thej G"eves ceW W = U = −GMm
efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw~ r
1
(a) 2mgR (b) mgR
2
3
(c) mgR (d) mgR
2
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (b) :
Suppose a block of mass m on the surface of the earth
we want to left this block by 'h' height.
Workdone required in this process is equal to increased
in P.E.
Uf – Ui = m (Vf – Vi)
  GM   GM  
= m −   −− 
Initial potential energy at earths surface is   R + h   R 
GMm 1 1 
Ui = − Wext = ∆U = GMm  − 
R  R R +h
Final potential energy at height h = R
R+h−R 
= GMm 
Uf = −
GMm  R ( R + h ) 
R+h  
GMm GMmh
Uf = − =
R+R R (R + h)
GMm
Uf = − ∆U =
GMmh
2R R (R + h)
As work done = change in potential energy
W = Uf – Ui 39. The kinetic energies of a planet in an elliptical
GMm orbit about the Sun, at positions A, B and C are
= KA, KB and KC, respectively. AC is the major
2R
axis and SB is perpendicular to AC at the
gR 2 m
= Q GM = gR 2  position of the Sun S as shown in the figure.
2R Then / metÙe& kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj oerIe&Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW ieefleceeve
mgR «en keâer efmLeefleÙeeW A, B Deewj C hej ieeflepe Tpee&SB
=
2
›eâceMe: KA, KB Deewj KC nQ~ AC oerIe& De#eo nw leLee
38. Assuming that the gravitational potential
energy of an object at infinity is zero, the metÙe& keâer efmLeefle S hej SB efÛe$eevegmeej oerIe& De#e AC hej
change in potential energy (final – initial) of an uecye nw~ leye
object of mass m, when taken to a height h
from the surface of earth (of radius R), is given
by,
Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ Devevle hej efkeâmeer efheC[ keâer ie®lJeerÙe
efmLeeflepe Tpee& MetvÙe nesleer nw, m õJÙeceeve kesâ efkeâmeer (a) KA < KB < KC (b) KA > KB > KC
efheC[ keâes he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ (ef$epÙee R) mes TbÛeeF& h hej ues (c) K B > K A > K C (d) KB < KA < KC
peeves hej Gmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve (Debeflece – NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
DeejefcYekeâ), nesiee Ans. (b) : Point A is perihelion and C is aphelion.
GMm GMm
(a) (b) –
R+h R+h
GMmh
(c) (d) mgh
R (R + h )
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Physics 177 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When the planet revolve around sun the angular 41. A satellite of mass m is orbiting the earth (of
momentum remains constant i.e. radius R) at a height h from its surface. The
total energy of the satellite in terms of g0, the
mvr = C value of acceleration due to gravity at the
⇒ vr = C earth's surface is
1 Skeâ Ghe«en efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve m nw, he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ mes h
⇒ v∝ TBÛeeF& hej he=LJeer keâer heefj›eâcee keâj jne nw ~ Ùeefo he=LJeer
r
Which means the farthest point has minimum velocity keâer ef$epÙee R nw leLee Gmekesâ he=‰ hej ieg¤lJeerÙe lJejCe keâe
and nearest point has maximum velocity. i.e. ceeve g0 nw, lees Ghe«en keâer kegâue Tpee& nesieer -
VA > VB > VC mg 0 R 2 mg 0 R 2
We know kinetic energy directly depends on square of (a) (b) −
2(R + h) 2(R + h)
velocity. So,
2mg 0 R 2 2mg 0 R 2
KA > KB > KC (c) (d) −
• Aphelion is the point of the earth’s orbit that is R+h R+h
farthest away from the sun. NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Ans. (b) : Potential energy of satellite orbiting earth at a
• Perihelion is the point of the earth’s orbit that is height h above the earth's surface is given by
nearest to the sun.
−GMm
40. Consider a drop of rain water having mass 1 g U=
(R + h)
falling from a height of 1 km. It hits the ground
Where, M = mass of earth, m = mass of satellite
with a speed of 50 m/s. Take (g) constant with a
Kinetic energy of the same satellite is given by
value 10 m/s2. The work done by the (i)
GMm
gravitational force and the (ii) resistive force of K.E =
air is:/1 «eece õJÙeceeve keâer Je<ee& kesâ heeveer keâer Skeâ yeBto 2(R + h)
1 efkeâceer. GBâÛeeF& mes efiejleer nw Deewj Yet-leue mes 50 Total energy of satellite T.E. = K.E + U
− GMm GMm
ceer./mes. keâer Ûeeue mes škeâjeleer nw~ Ùeefo 'g' keâe ceeve 10 TE = +
( R + h ) 2 (R + h )
ceer./mes.2 efmLej jns lees, (i) ieg®lJeerÙe yeue leLee (ii) JeeÙeg
−GMm
kesâ ØeeflejesOekeâ yeue Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee: TE = ...................(i)
2(R + h)
(a) (i) - 10 J (ii) -8.75 J
Now we known, gravity at earth surface is given as,
(b) (i) 1.25 J (ii) -8.75 J
GM g 0 .R 2
(c) (i) 100 J (ii) -8.75 J g0 = ⇒ G =
(d) (i) 10 J (ii)-8.75 J R2 M
n
Put in eq (i)
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
− g 0 R 2 .M.m
Ans. (d) : Given T.E =
M.2 ( R + h )
1
Mass (m) = 1g = kg , speed (v) = 50 m/s − mg 0 R 2
1000 T.E =
Height (h) = 1km = 1000m 2 (R + h )
Work done by gravitational force 42. At what height from the surface of earth the
Wg = mgh gravitational potential and value of g are -
1 5.4×107 J kg-2 and 6.0 ms-2 respectively? Take
Wg = × 10 × 1000 the radius of earth as 6400 Km./he=LJeer kesâ melen mes
1000
efkeâleveer TBÛeeF& hej ieg®lJeerÙe efJeYeJe Deewj ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe
Wg = 10 J
g kesâ ceeve ›eâceMe: are -5.4×107 J kg-2 leLee 6.0 ms-2
Change in kinetic energy
nesles nw? he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee 6400 Km. ueerefpeS~
1
∆ K . E = mv – 0 2
(a) 2000 km (b) 2600 km
2 (c) 1600 km (d) 1400 km
1 1 NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
= × × 50 × 50 − 0
2 1000 Ans. (b) : Gravitational potential at height h is given by,
= 1.25 J GM
V=− = −5.4 ×107 ...(i)
By work energy theorem R+h
Wg + Wair resistance = ∆K. E Gravity at height h from earth surface is given by
10 + Wair resistance = 1.25 GM
g= =6 ...(ii)
Wair resistance = –8.75 J (R + h) 2
Physics 178 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
where, M = Mass of earth and R = radiu radius of earth Devevle mebKÙee keâer JemlegDeeW ceW ØelÙes
lÙekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve 2kg
Dividing the two equations we get, nw~ Ùes JemlegSB x–De#e hej, cetue efyevog mes ›eâceMe: 1m,
5.4 × 107 2m, 4m, 8m, ........., otjer hej efmLele Le nw~ Fme efvekeâeÙe kesâ
=6 keâejCe, cetue efyevog hej heefjCeeceerer ieg™lJeerÙe efJeYeJe nesiee-
R+h
R + h = 9000 km (a) –4G (b) –G
h = 9000 – 6400 8 4
(c) − G (d) − G
h = 2600 km 3 3
43. A body of mass 'm' is taken ken fr from the earth's NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
surface to the height equal al to ttwice the radius Ans. (a) : The resulting gravitational ional potential,
p
(R) of the earth. The change ge in p potential energy  1 1 1 1 
of body will be :- V = −2G  + + + + ... .....
1 2 4 8 
'm' õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ Jemleg keâes he=LJe Jeer keâer melen (he=‰)
mes, Gmekeâer ef$epÙee (R) mes oes iegveee TTBÛeeF& lekeâ ues peeÙee  1 1 1 
V = −2G 1 + + 2 + 3 + ......
peelee nw Jemleg keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ceW heheefjJele&ve nesiee-  2 2 2 
−1
1  1
V = − 2G  1 + 
(a) mgR (b) 2mg
2mgR  2
3
2 −2G
(c) mgR (d) 3 m
mgR V=
3  1
1 − 
NEET
EET ((UG)-05.05.2013  2
Ans. (c) : −2G
V=
1
 
2
V = −4G
45. Which one of the following ing plots
pl represents the
variation of gravitational al field
fie on a particle
with distance r due to a thin spherical shell of
radius R? (r is measured d from the centre of the
spherical shell)/efvecveebefkeâle «eeheâeW
«eehe (DeeuesKeeW) ceW mes
M = Mass of earth keâewve mee «eeheâ, R ef$epÙee kesâ effkeâmeer
eâme ieesueekeâej keâesMe kesâ
R = Radius of earth efkeâmeer keâCe hej ieg®lJeerÙe #ess$e keâek otjer r kesâ meeLe
Ui = Initial potential
tial en
energy heefjJele&ve oMee&lee nw? (r keâe ceeve ieesueekeâej keâesMe kesâ
Uf = Final potential
tial ene
energy kesâvõ mes ceehee ieÙee nw~)
GmM
Ui =
R
GmM (a) (b)
Uf =
3R
∆U = U f − U i
GmM GmM
mM (c) (d)
= −
3R R AIPMT
AIP (Mains)-2012
 GM  Ans. (d) : For a thin spherical shell, gravitational field
2 GmM  g = R2  inside spherical shell is zero & gravitational
g field
∆U = ∴  outside spherical shell at a distance
tance 'r' from centre of
3 R gR = GM  GM
 R  spherical shell is E = 2
r
2
∆U = mgR  GMm
3 Q F = r 2

44. Infinite number of bodies, s, each of mass 2 kg
are situated on x-axis at distan
distance 1m, 2m, 4m,
8m, ....,respectively, fromm th the origin. The
resulting gravitational potenti
otential due to this
system at the origin will be :

Physics 179 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
F GM  m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ Ghe«en, efkeâmeer M õJÙeceeve kesâ «en keâer
∴E = = 2  heefj›eâcee, R1 ef$epÙee keâer Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW keâj jne nQ~ Fmekeâer
m r 
keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee keâes R2 keâjves kesâ efueÙes (R2 > R1) Ghe«en
1
∴ F∝ 2 & keâes oer peeves Jeeueer Deefleefjòeâ ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer –
r
 1 1 
1  1 1 
F∝ 2 (a) GmM  2 − 2  (b) GmM  − 
r  R1 R 2   R1 R 2 
On the surface of the shell i.e. (r = R)  
GMm  1 1  1  1 1 
F= (c) 2GmM  −  (d)
GmM  − 
R2  R1 R 2  2  R1 R 2 
Outside the shell i.e. (r > R) AIPMT (Mains)-2010
F is maximum on the surface of the shell and then Ans. (d) : Given, Mass of Satellite = m.
decreases outside the shell. Mass of Planet = M.
All the graph represents this concept but inside the shell Addition K.E. required to transfer the satellite from a
i.e. (r < R), circular orbit of radius R1 to another radius R2 is-
F=0
KE = KEf − KEi
46. A particle of mass M is situated at the centre of
1  GMm  1  GMm 
a spherical shell of same mass and radius a.
The magnitude of the gravitational potential at = −  − − 
a point situated at a/2 distance from the centre, 2  R 2  2  R1 
will be/M õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe meceeve õJÙeceeve
leLee ef$epÙee a kesâ Skeâ ieesueerÙe keâesMe kesâ kesâvõ hej efmLele GMm  1 1 
KE =  − 
nw~ kesâvõ mes a/2 otjer hej efmLele Skeâ efyevog hej ieg™lJeerÙe 2  R1 R 2 
efJeYeJe keâe heefjceeCe nesiee :
GM 2GM 1  1 1 
GMm 
 R R 
(a) (b) KE = −
a a 2  1 2
3GM 4GM
(c) (d) 48. Two satellites of earth, S1 and S2, are moving in
a a the same orbit. The mass of S1 is four times the
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 mass of S2. Which one of the following
AIPMT(Screening)-2010 statements is true ?
Ans. (c) : Let point A is situated at a/2 distance from he=LJeer kesâ oes Ghe«en S1 leLee S2 Skeâ ner keâ#ee ceW Ietce jns
the center. nQ~ S1 keâe õJÙeceeve S2 kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe Ûeej iegvee nw~
Gravitational potential at point A due to spherical shell, efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mee keâLeve melÙe nw?
GM (a) The kinetic energies of the two satellites are
V1 = − , equal/oesveeW Ghe«eneW keâer ieeflepe TpeeËSB meceeve nQ~
a
(b) The time period of S1 is four times that of S2/ S1
keâe DeeJele& keâeue S2 kesâ DeeJele& keâeue mes Ûeej iegvee nw~
(c) The potential energies of earth and satellite in
the two cases are equal/oesveeW Ghe«eneW kesâ efueS he=LJeer
Deewj Ghe«en keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee&SB yejeyej nw~
(d) S1 and S2 are moving with the same speed/ S1
Gravitational potential at point A due to mass M at leLee S2 oesveeW Ghe«en meceeve Ûeeue mes Ietce jns nQ~
GM 2GM AIPMT-2007
point O, V2 = − =−
a/2 a Ans. (d) : Given m s1 = 4m s2
Total Gravitational Potential = v1 + v2
Mass of earth =Me
GM 2GM 3GM
=− − =−
a a a
3GM
Magnitude of total gravitational potential =
a
47. The additional kinetic energy to be provided to
a satellite of mass m revolving around a planet
of mass M, to transfer it from a circular orbit
of radius R1 to another of radius R2 (R2 > R1) is

Physics 180 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The kinetic energy of satellite Ans. (c): Gravitational potential energy on earth's
GMe m −GMm
K= ⇒K∝m surface =
2r R
Potential energy of satellite Where, M = Mass of earth
−GMe m R = Radius of earth
U= ⇒U∝m m = Mass of body
r G = Universal Gravitational constant.
Both kinetic energy and potential energy depends upon
mass of satellite. Now,
Gravitational potential energy at a height h= 3R
K s 1 ≠ K s2 & U s1 ≠ U s2
−GMm
12 =
 4π2 r 3  R+h
Time period of revolution of satellite, T =  
 GM e  −GMm
=
R + 3R
GM e
& orbital speed of satellite , v0 = −GMm
r =
4R
ms1 = 4ms2
∴ Change in potential energy,
We see both time period and speed of satellite does not −GMm  −GMm 
depends upon mass of satellite. = − 
Therefore orbital speed and time period of both satellite 4R  R 
are same. −GMm GMm
= +
49. For a satellite moving in an orbit around the 4R R
earth, the ratio of kinetic energy to potential 3 GMm
energy is – =
4 R
he=LJeer kesâ efieo& Iegceves Jeeues Ghe«en kesâ efueÙes ›eâceevegmeej GMm
ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâe Deveggheele nesiee :- Again, we have = mg
R2
1 1
(a) (b) 2 (c) 2 (d)
2 2 GMm
∴ = mgR
AIPMT-2005 R
Ans. (d) : 3
∴ Change in potential energy = mgR
Magnitude of potential energy, P.E = GMm − − − − − (i) 4
r 51. The satellite of mass m is orbiting around the
1 earth in a circular orbit with a velocity v. What
Kinetic energy, K.E = mV
2

2 will be its total energy?/Skeâ m õJÙeceeve keâe

2 Ghe«en v Jesie mes he=LJeer kesâ ÛeejeW Deewj Je=òeerÙe heLe hej
1  GM  GMm ieefle keâjlee nw, lees Gmekeâer kegâue Tpee& nesieer:
K.E. = m   = − − − −(ii)
2  r  2r (a) (3/4)mv2 (b) (1/2)mv2
On Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) (c) mv2 (d) –(1/2)mv2
AIPMT-1991
K.E GMm / 2r K.E 1
= ⇒ = Ans. (d) : The kinetic energy of a satellite orbiting
P.E GMm / r P.E 2 around the earth is given by-
50. A body of mass m is placed on earth surface GMm
which is taken from earth surface to a height of K.E =
2r
h = 3R, then change in gravitational potential The gravitational potential energy of satellite is-
energy is
−GMm
Skeâ m õJÙeceeve keâer Jemleg he=LJeer melen hej jKeer nw Fmekeâe P.E =
r
he=LJeer melen mes TBÛeeF& h = 3R hej ues peeves hej ieg™lJeerÙe Total energy of the satellite in orbit is given by-
efmLeeflepe Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve keâe ceeve nw - T.E = K.E + P.E
mgR 2 − GMm
(a) (b) mgR ET = ...(i)
4 3 2r
3 mgR Orbital velocity is given by-
(c) mgR (d)
4 2 GM
v=
AIPMT-2002 r
Physics 181 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
GM GM
v2 = rω2 =
r r2
GM GM
Put the value of in the equation (i) r3 = 2
r ω
We know that,
–1
ET = mv 2 GM = gR2
2 Where, g = acceleration due to gravity.
52. A planet is moving in an elliptical orbit around gR 2
the sun. If, T, V, E and L stand respectively for r3 = 2
ω
its kinetic energy, gravitational potential
1/ 3
energy, total energy and magnitude of angular  gR 2 
momentum about the centre of force, which of r= 2 
 ω 
the following is correct?
Skeâ «en metÙe& kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj oerIe&Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW Ietcelee
nw~ Ùeefo T, V, E leLee L Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee&, 7.5 Orbital Velocity and Escape
ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efmLeeflepe Tpee&, kegâue Tpee& leLee keâesCeerÙe
Velocity
mebJesie keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjles neW, lees keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe
nw? 54. The escape velocity of a body on the earth
(a) T is conserved./T mebjef#ele jnlee nw~ surface is 11.2 km/s. If the same body is
projected upward with velocity 22.4 km/s, the
(b) V is always positive./V ncesMee Oeveelcekeâ neslee nw~
velocity of this body at infinite distance from
(c) E is always negative./E ncesMee $e+Ceelcekeâ neslee nw~ the centre of the earth will be
(d) L is conserved but direction of vector L He=LJeer keâer melen hej efkeâmeer efheb[ keâe heueeÙeve Jesie 11.2
changes continuously./L mebjef#ele jnlee nw hejvleg km/s neslee nw~ Ùeefo Gmeer efheC[ keâes 22.4
meefoMe Lkeâer efoMee ncesMee yeoueleer jnleer nw~ efkeâceer/meskeâC[ kesâ Jesie mes Thej keâer Deesj Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee
AIPMT-1990 peelee nw lees he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ mes Deveble otjer hej Fme efheC[
Ans. (c) : In a circular / elliptical orbit motion the keâe Jesie nesiee~
angular momentum of a planet is conserved and the
direction of motion does of not change when motion is (a) 11.2 km/s (b) 11.2 3km / s
in the plane. Since the path of planet is elliptical the (c) 11.2 2km / s (d) Zero
distance of planet from sun is not constant due to which RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
velocity is also not constant. Hence kinetic energy is not
Ans. (b) : Given: ve = 11.2 km/sec
conserved. In an attractive field potential energy and
total energy is always negative. v = 22.4 km/sec
let us consider that mass of the projectile is equal to m
53. The mean radius of earth is R, its angular and the velocity of the projectile far away from the earth
speed on its own axis is ω and the acceleration is vf.
due to gravity at earth's surface is g. What will Now, The total energy of projectile on the earth is equal
be the radius of the orbit of a geostationary to -
satellite?
1 2 1 2
he=LJeer keâer ceeOÙe ef$epÙee R leLee Deheves De#e kesâ heefjle: E = mvP − mvesc ...........(i)
2 2
IetCe&ve Jesie ω nw~ he=LJeer keâer melen hej ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe g The total energy of the projectile far away from the
nw, lees efpeÙeesmšsMevejer leLe keâer ef$epÙee nesieer: earth is _
(a) (R2g/ω2)1/3 (b) (Rg/ω2)1/3 1
E = mvf2 + 0
(c) (R2 ω2/g)1/3 (d) (R2g/ω)1/3 2
AIPMT-1992 1 2
Ans. (a) : For circular motion, E = mvf ..........(ii)
2
Centripetal force = Gravitational force
 P.E is zero at far away from the 
GMm  
mrω2 =  earth 
r2
On equating equation (i) and equation (ii) we get _
Where, m = mass of satellite
M = mass of earth 1 2 1 2 1
mvP − mvesc = mvf2
ω = angular velocity 2 2 2

Physics 182 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Minimum speed required for a free, non-
vf = v 2P − v esc
2
propelled object or celestial body to escape from the
gravitational influence of a primary body is called
( 22.4) − (11.2 )
2 2
vf =
Escape Velocity (v).
vf = 501.76 − 125.44 4
2G πR 3ρ
vf = 376.32 2GM 3
vf = 19.39 v= =
R R
vf = 11.2 3 m/sec ∵v∝R
v' 4R
55. A particle of mass 'm' is projected with a ∴ =
velocity v = kVe (k < 1) from the surface of the v R
earth. (Ve = escape velocity) ⇒ v′ = 4v
Skeâ 'm' õJÙeceeve keâe keâCe he=LJeer melen mes meceeve Jesie v 57. The ratio of escape velocity at earth (Ve) to the
= kVe (k < 1) mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ (Ve = escape velocity at a planet (Vp) whose radius
heueeÙeve Jesie) and mean density are twice as that of earth is:
The maximum height above the surface he=LJeer hej heueeÙeve Jesie (Ve) leLee Gme «en hej heueeÙeve
reached by the particle is Jesie (Vp) ceW keäÙee Devegheele nesiee, efpemekeâer ef$epÙee Deewj
keâCe kesâ Éeje melen kesâ Thej Øeehle DeefOekeâlece TBÛeeF& nw: Deewmele IevelJe he=LJeer keâer leguevee ceW oes iegves nw?
2
Rk 2
(b) R 
k  (a) 1: 2 (b) 1 : 2
(a) 
1− k2 1− k  (c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 1 : 4
2
R 2k NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
(c) R 
k 
 (d) Ans. (c) : Radius of the earth R = Re
1+ k  1+ k
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 Density of the earth = ρe
4
The mass of the earth M e = π ( R e ) ρ e
3
Ans. (a) : Given- Velocity of particle, v = kVe
Where, k < 1 3
Since, v < Ve Radius of the planet Rp = 2Re
From conservation of mechanical energy- Density of he planet ρ p = 2ρe
1 GmM –GmM
mv 2 – = 2GM e
2 R (R + h ) Escape velocity of earth is given by, Ve =
Re
v 2 GM ( GM ) h where G = Gravitational constant
= – = GM
2 R (R + h ) R (R + h ) 2× G × ( 4 / 3) × π× R e3 × ρe
1 2 2 GMh Ve =
k Ve = Re
2 R (R + h)
8Gπρe
2GM ⇒ Ve = R e
We know that, Ve = 3
R
⇒ Ve ∝ R e ρ e
1 2  2GM  GMh
k  =
2  R  R (R + h ) Ve R e ρe
Now, = where, VP=escape velocity of planet
h VP 2R e 2ρe
k2 = ⇒ Rk2 + hk2 = h
(R + h) Ve 1
⇒ =
Rk2 = h (1-k2) VP 2 2
Rk 2 58. A remote-sensing satellite of earth revolves in a
⇒ h=
1 – k2 circular orbit at a height of 0.25 × 106 m above
the surface of earth. If earth's radius is 6.38 ×
56. The Escape Velocity from the Earth's surface is 106 m and g = 9.8 ms–2, then the orbital speed of
v. The Escape Velocity from the surface of the satellite is/Skeâ megotj-mebJesoer Ghe«en, he=LJeer kesâ he=‰
another planet having a radius four times that mes 0.25 × 106 m GBâÛeeF& hej, Je=òeekeâej keâ#ee ceW he=LJeer
of Earth and same mass density is keâe Ûekeäkeâj ueiee jne nw~ Ùeefo he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee 6.38 ×
he=LJeer melen mes heueeÙeve Jesie v nw~ meceeve õJÙeceeve IevelJe 106 m nw Deewj g = 9.8 ms–2 nw lees, Ghe«en keâer keâ#eerÙe
leLee he=LJeer kesâ ef$epÙee kesâ Ûeej iegvee ef$epÙee Jeeues otmejs Ûeeue nesieer:
«en kesâ melen mes heueeÙeve Jesie neslee nw : (a) 6.67 km s–1 (b) 7.76 km s–1
(a) 4v (b) v (c) 2v (d) 3v (c) 8.56 km s–1 (d) 9.13 km s–1
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015

Physics 183 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): According to the satellite motion, the 60. A particle of mass 'm' is kept at rest at a height
centripetal force acting on the satellite is equal to the 3R from the surface of earth, where 'R' is
gravitational force acting on the satellite i.e. radius of earth and 'M' is mass of earth. The
minimum speed with which it should be
projected, so that it does not return back, is (g
is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
earth)/õJÙeceeve m keâe Skeâ keâCe he=LJeer keâer melen mes
G@âÛeeF& 3R hej Deejece mes jKee peelee nw peneB R-he=LJeer
Fc = Fg keâer ef$epÙee nw Deewj M-he=LJeer keâe õJÙeceeve nw~ vÙetvelece
mv 2 GMm ieefle efkeâmekesâ meeLe Fmes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peeve ÛeeefnS
=
R0 R 02 leeefkeâ Jeeheme ve DeeÙes (g lJejCe nw melen hej
Where, R0 = radius of the orbit ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe)
v = velocity of the satellite (orbital speed) 1 1
M = mass of the earth  GM  2  GM  2
R0 = radius of the orbit (a)   (b)  
 R   2R 
G = gravitational constant. 1 1

GM  gR  2  2g  2
v= ...............(i) (c)   (d)  
R0  4  R 
Where, R0 = R + h (because satellite revolving a height NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
above the earth) AIPMT (Mains)-2011
AIPMT-2001
GM
v= ...............(ii) Ans. (b) : Given mass of particle = m
R+h height (h) = 3R from surface
acceleration due to gravity can be writte as- Where, R is the radius of earth
gR2 = GM M is the mass of the earth
gR 2 Speed with which it should be projected,
V=
R+h 2GM 2GM
Ve = ⇒ Ve =
9.8 × ( 6.38 ×10
(R + h)
V=
6 2
) R

( 6.38 ×10 ) + 0.25 ×10

6 6
Ve =
2GM
⇒ Ve =
2GM

v = 7756 m/sec
( R + 3R ) ( 4R )
v = 7.76 kms–1 1
 GM  2
59. A black hole is an object whose gravitational Ve =  
field is so strong that even light cannot escape  2R 
from it. To what approximate radius would 61. The radius of a planet is twice the radius of
earth (mass = 5.98×1024 kg) have to be earth. Both have almost equal average mass-
compressed to be a black hole?/ke=â<Ce efJeJej densities. If VP and VE are escape velocities of
(yuewkeâ nesue) Skeâ Ssmee efheb[ nw, efpemekeâe ieg™lJeerÙe #es$e the planet and the earth, respectively, then
Flevee Øeyeue neslee nw efkeâ FmeceW mes ØekeâeMe Yeer yeenj vener (a) VE = 1.5VP (b) VP = 1.5VE
efvekeâue mekeâlee~ he=LJeer keâes ueieYeie efkeâleveer ef$epÙee lekeâ (c) VP = 2VE (d) VE = 3VP
mebheeref[le efkeâÙee peeÙes efkeâ Jen ke=â<Ce efJeJej yeve peeÙes? NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
(he=LJeer keâe õJÙeceeve · 5.98×1024 kg) Ans. (c) : VE = Escape Velocity of Earth
(a) 10-9 m (b) 10-6 m VP = Escape Velocity of Planet
(c) 10-2 m (d) 100 m 2GM
AIPMT-06.05.2014 We know that VE =
R
Ans. (c) : Light cannot escape from a black hole,
4
Vesc = c M = V × ρ = πR 3 × ρ , when ρ = density
3
2GM
=c 4 ρG
R VE = × 2 × πR 3
Where M = Mass of earth, R = Radius of earth 3 R
c = Speed of light, G = Gravitational field constant. 8
VE = R πGρ
2GM 2 × 6.67 ×10−11 × 5.98 ×1024 3
∴ R= 2 =
( )
2
c 3 ×108 4 8
MP = π ( 2R ) × ρ =
3
× 4πR 3ρ
R = 8.86×10 m ≈ 10 m
–3 –2 3 3

Physics 184 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8 DeOe&JÙeeme keâe Skeâ ieesuee nw~ he=LJeer leue mes TBÛeeF& R hej
VP = R 4 × πGρ Skeâ huesšheâe@ce& yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme huesšheâe@ce& mes efkeâmeer
3
efheb[ keâe heueeÙeve Jesie fv nw peyeefkeâ Fmekeâe he=LJeer leue
VP = VE 4
hej ceeve v nw~ f keâe ceeve nesiee:-
VP = 2VE
1 1 1
62. If ve is escape velocity and v0 is orbital velocity (a) 2 (b) (c) (d)
2 3 2
of a satellite for orbit close to the earth's
AIPMT-2006
surface, then these are related by
Ùeefo ve heueeÙeve Jesie nes leLee he=LJeer kesâ efvekeâš keâer keâ#ee Ans. (b) : Earths of radius = R
Escape of velocity = f.v
ceW heefj›eâceCe keâjles efkeâmeer Ghe«en keâe keâ#eerÙe Jesie v0 nes For platform at a height = h
lees, Gvekesâ yeerÛe mecyevOe nesiee:-
(a) v e = 2v 0 (b) v e = 2 v 0
(c) v 0 = 2v e (d) v0 = ve
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 Escape energy = Binding energy of sphere
1 GM.m
Ans. (b) : Escape velocity, ve =
2GM E
–– (1) mve'2 = [∴ h = R ]
RE 2 R+h
where, ME = Mass of earth 2GM 2Gm GM
ve' = = =
RE = Radius of earth R+R 2R R
Orbital velocity of satellite close to earth's surface is –– 2GM
at surface of earth h = 0 ⇒ ve =
GM E R
v0 = ––– (2)
RE As given ve' = fve
From equation (1) & (2), we get GM 2GM
Hence =f
R R
v e = 2v 0
1
63. The radii of circular orbits of two satellite A and ⇒ f = 2
B of the earth are 4R and R respectively and
65. For a planet having mass equal to mass of the
speed of satellite A is 3V, then the speed satellite earth but radius is one fourth of radius of the
B will be –/heLJeer kesâ oes Ghe«eneW A Je B keâer Je=òeerÙe earth. Then escape velocity for this planet will
keâ#eeDeeW keâer ef$epÙeeSW ›eâceMe: 4R Je R nQ~ Ghe«en A keâer be/Skeâ «en efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve he=LJeer kesâ yejeyej hejvleg
Ûeeue 3V nw, lees Ghe«en B keâer Ûeeue nesieer – ef$epÙee he=LJeer keâer ef$epÙee keâer ÛeewLeeF& nw lees «en kesâ efueS
(a) 3V/4 (b) 6V heueeÙeve Jesie nesiee –
(c) 12V (d) 3V/2 (a) 11.2 km/s (b) 22.4 km/s
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 (c) 5.6 km/s (d) 44.8 km/s
st AIPMT-2000
Ans. (b) : Radius of I (A) satellite = 4R
nd Ans. (b) : Escape Velocity- Escape velocity or escape
Radius of II (B) satellite = R speed is the minimum speed needed for a free, non-
GM propelled object to escape from the gravitational
Orbital Velocity of satellite V = influence of a primary body, thus reaching an infinite
R
distance from it.
VA GM RB RB = R 1
= × = = Ve =
2GM e
VB RA GM RA 4R 2 Re
Given speed of satellite VA = 3V Ve = escape velocity of earth
3V 1 G = universal gravitational constant
=
V 2 Me = mass of earth
Re = Radius
VB = 6V Escape velocity for earth = 11.2 km/sec
64. The Earth is assumed to be a sphere of radius 2GM e
R. A platform is arranged at a height R from Q Ves = Re
,
the surface of the Earth. The escape velocity of
a body from this platform is fv, where v is its Given, Mass is equal to mass of earth
escape velocity from the surface of the Earth. 1
Radius = of radius of earth
The value of f is:/ceevee peelee nw efkeâ he=LJeer R 4
Physics 185 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) it will fall down to the earth gradually/Ùen Oeerjs-
2 × GM e
Ves =
1
Oeerjs he=LJeer hej efiej peeÙesiee~
Re (b) it will go very far in the space/Ùen Debleefj#e ces
4
yengle otj peeSiee
Ves = 2 ( Ves )earth = 2 × 11.2 (c) it will continue to move with the same speed
Ves=22.4 km/sec, where 'Ves' is escape velocity of planet. along the original orbit of spacecraft/Ùen
66. The escape velocity of a body on the surface of the Debleefj#e Ùeeve keâer cetue keâ#ee kesâ meeLe Gmeer ieefle kesâ meeLe
earth is 11.2 km/s. If the earth's mass increases to Deeies yeÌ{vee peejer jKesiee~
twice its present value and radius of the earth (d) it will move with the same speed, tangentially
becomes half, the escape velocity becomes to the spacecraft/Ùen Gmeer ieefle mes Debleefj#e Ùeeve keâer
he=LJeer keâer melen hej heueeÙeve Jesie 11.2 efkeâceer/mes nw~ Ùeefo Deesj ieefle keâjsiee~
he=LJeer keâe õJÙeceeve Jele&ceeve mes oesiegvee leLee ef$epÙee AIPMT-1996
DeeOeer jn peeS, lees heueeÙeve Jesie keâe ceeve keäÙee nesiee? Ans. (c) : When the ball is dropped from the spacecraft the
relative velocity of ball with respect to spacecraft is zero.
(a) 22.4 km/s (b) 44.8 km/s Hence the ball when dropped will start moving with same
(c) 5.6 km/s (d) 11.2 km/s speed as that of spacecraft along the original orbit.
AIPMT-1997 69. Rohini satellite is at a height of 500 km. and
Ans. (a) : Give that: escape velocity on the earth = 11.2 INSAT-B is at a height of 3600 km. from
km/s surface of earth then relation between their
orbital velocity (VR,VI) is
Now, v e =
2GM
= 11.2 m / sec ...(i) jes efnCeer Ghe«en SJeb Fvmesš-B Ghe«en he=LJeer melen mes
R ›eâceMe: 500 km. SJeb 3600 km. TBÛeeF& hej nQ leye Fvekesâ
According to the ques- keâ#eerÙe (VR SJeb VI) /ceW keäÙee mebyebOe nw :-
M = 2M (a) VR > VI (b) VR < VI
R = R/2 (c) VR = VI
Then escape velocity is- (d) No relation/keâesF& mecyevOe veneR
2G(2M) AIPMT-1999
ve = Ans. (a) : Orbital velocity of a satellite is given by
R/2
GM e
2GM v0 =
ve = 2 r
R
Where, G = gravitational constant
ve = 2 ×11.2 (From eqn (i)) Me = mass of the earth
ve = 22.4 km / s r = distance of the satellite from the centre of the earth.
1
67. The escape velocity from earth is 11.2 km/s. If a ∴v0 ∝
r
body is to be projected in a direction making
As the distance of INSAT -B from the centre of the
an angle 45º to the vertical, then the escape earth is greater than the distance of Rohini from the
velocity is/he=LJeer mes heueeÙeve Jesie 11.2 km/s nw~ Ùeefo centre of the earth.
Skeâ Jemleg TOJee&Oej kesâ meeLe 45º keâesCe hej Øe#esefhele keâer ∴ [VR > VI]
peeveer nes, lees heueeÙeve Jesie nesiee:
(a) 11.2 × 2 km/s (b) 11.2 km/s 7.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
(c) 11.2 / 2 km/s (d) 11.2 2 km/s 70. The Earth is an approximate sphere. If the
AIPMT-1993, 1989 interior contained matter which is not of the
Ans. (b): The escape velocity of a body is- same density everywhere, then on the surface
of the Earth, the acceleration due to gravity
ve = 2gR =
2GM he=LJeer Skeâ ieesues keâe meefvvekeâš ™he nw~ Ùeefo Fmekesâ
R DeYÙeblej ceW nj mLeeve hej Skeâ meceeve IevelJe keâe õJÙe
We can see that escape velocity does not depend on the angle of veneR nw, lees he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ hej ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe
projection. Hence, escape velocity remains the same. (a) will be directed towards the centre but not the
68. A ball is dropped form a spacecraft revolving same everywhere./keWâõ keâer Deesj efveefo&° nesiee, hejbleg
around the earth at a height of 120 km. What nj mLeeve hej meceeve veneR nesiee~
will happen to the ball? (b) will have the same value everywhere but not
Skeâ Ghe«en he=LJeer mes 120 efkeâceer TBÛeeF& hej Ûekeäkeâj directed towards the center./ nj mLeeve hej meceeve
ueiee jne nw~ Fmemes Skeâ ieWo ÚesÌ[ oer ieÙeer lees ieWo: ceeve nesiee hejbleg keWâõ keâer Deesj efveefo&° veneR nesiee~
Physics 186 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) will be same everywhere in magnitude (c) not be true because the major gravitational force
directed towards the centre./heefjceeCe ceW nj mLeeve on mercury is due to sun/melÙe veneR nesieer keäÙeeWefkeâ yegOe
hej meceeve leLee keWâõ keâer Deesj efveefo&° veneR nesiee~ hej ØecegKe ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue metÙe& kesâ keâejCe nw~
(d) not be true because mercury is influenced by
(d) cannot be zero at any point./efkeâmeer Yeer efyebog hej
forces other than gravitational forces./melÙe veneR
MetvÙe veneR nes mekeâlee~ nesieer keäÙeeWefkeâ yegOe ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeueeW kesâ Deefleefjkeäle DevÙe
Ans. (d) : The acceleration due to gravity (g) is the yeueeW mes Yeer ØeYeeefJele neslee nw~
acceleration of the body falling under free fall with in Ans. (c) : We know that,
vacuum. The value of the g is 9.8 m/sec2.
Gm1m2
• If we assume the earth as a sphere of uniform density Gravitational Force (F) =
then it can be treated as a point was placed at centre. In
r2
this case acceleration due to gravity (g) will be zero. Where m1 and m2 are masses of two bodies planet.
But earth is considered as a sphere of non-uniform R is the distance between them.
density, in that case value of 'g' will be different at • Mercury experiences force of gravitational attraction
different points and cannot be zero at any point.] both from the sun and the Earth. But the mass of sun is
massive so the force due to sun is very large compared
to force due to earth.
• Therefore, the gravitational force on the mercury due
to the earth is much smaller as compared to that acting
We know that, on it due to the sun. Hence it revolves around the sun
Mass = volume × density and not around the earth.
4 3 72. Different points in Earth are at slightly
M = πR ×ρ different distances from the sun and hence
3
Acceleration due to gravity of earth, experience different forces due to gravitation.
For a rigid body, we know that if various forces
GM
g= 2 act at various points in it, the resultant motion
R is as if a net force acts on the centre of mass
Where, G is Gravitational constant causing translation and a net torque at the
R is Radius of earth. centre of mass. For the Earth-sun system
Put the value of M (approximating the Earth as a uniform density
4  sphere)/he=LJeer kesâ efJeefYevve efyebog, metÙe& mes kegâÚ efYevve
G  πR 3 × ρ 
otefjÙeeW hej nesles nQ~ Dele: ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe efYevve
g=  
3
R2 yeueeW keâe DevegYeJe keâjles nQ~ Skeâ ÂÌ{-efheb[eW kesâ efueS nce
4 peeveles nQ efkeâ Ùeefo Fmekeâs efYevve efyebogDeeW hej efYevve-efYevve
g = πGRρ
3 yeue keâeÙe& keâjW, lees Fmekeâer heefjCeeceer ieefle Fme Øekeâej
So, g α ρ nesieer~ pewmes efkeâ Skeâ vesš yeue Fmekesâ õJÙeceeve keWâõ hej
From the above expression, it is clear that if the interior Deejesefhele neskeâj FmeceW mLeeveblejerÙe ieefle Glhevve keâj jne
contained matter which is not of the same density
nes leLee vesš yeue-DeeIetCe& õJÙeceeve keWâõ mes iegpejves Jeeues
everywhere, then on the surface of the acceleration due
to gravity cannot be zero at any point. De#e kesâ heefjle: IetCeea ieefle Glhevve keâj jne nes~ he=LJeer-
71. As observed from Earth, the sun appears to metÙe& efvekeâeÙe kesâ efueS he=LJeer ceW Skeâ meceeve IevelJe kesâ
move in an approximate circular orbit. For the ieesues kesâ meÂMÙe ceevekeâj
motion of another planet like mercury as (a) the torque is zero./yeue DeeIetCe& MetvÙe nw~
observed from Earth, this would/he=LJeer mes Øes#eCe
(b) the torque causes the Earth to spin./yeue DeeIetCe&
keâjves hej metÙe& ueieYeie Je=òeekeâej keâ#ee ceW ieefle keâjlee
he=LJeer keâes Ûe›eâCe keâjelee nw~
Øeleerle neslee nw~ yegOe pewmes efkeâmeer DevÙe «en keâer ieefle kesâ
(c) the rigid body result is not applicable since
efueS he=LJeer mes Øes#eCe keâjves hej Yeer Ùen yeele the Earth is not even approximately a rigid
(a) be similarly true/Fmeer Øekeâej melÙe nesieer~ body./ÂÌ{-efheb[ heefjCeece ÙeneB ueeiet veneR neslee keäÙeeWefkeâ
(b) not be true because he force between Earth he=LJeer kesâ meÂMÙe Yeer veneR nw~
and mercury is not inverse square law/melÙe veneR (d) the torque causes the Earth to move around
nesieer keäÙeeWefkeâ he=LJeer SJeb yegOe kesâ yeerÛe yeue JÙegl›eâce Jeie& the sun./yeue DeeIetCe& he=LJeer keâes metÙe& kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj ieefle
efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej veneR neslee~ keâjelee nw~
Physics 187 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): The earth experiences a centripetal force due (a) will be elliptical./oerIe&Je=òeerÙe nesieer~
to gravitational force of attraction of sun and thus it (b) will not be strictly elliptical because the total
revolves around the sun in a circular orbit. gravitational force on it is not central./hetCe&™he
We know that, torque is the manure of the force that can mes oerIe&Je=òeerÙe veneR nesieer keäÙeeWefkeâ Gme hej ueiee kegâue
cause an object to rotate about an axis. so,
ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue keWâõerÙe veneR nw~
τ = force × radius
r ur (c) is not elliptical but will necessarily be a
For vector, τ = r×F
closed curve./oerIe&Je=òeerÙe veneR nesieer, hejbleg DeeJeMÙekeâ
τ = rF sinθ
From question, Here r is the distance of point of
™he mes Skeâ yebo Je›eâ nesieer~
application of force from the point about which torque (d) deviates considerably from being elliptical
is calculated. due to influence of planets other than
• Direction of force (F) and the line joining (r) the point Earth./he=LJeer kesâ Deefleefjkeäle DevÙe «eneW kesâ ØeYeeJe kesâ
of application of force is along the same direction. keâejCe oerIe&Je=òeerÙe mes keâeheâer efYevve nesieer~
So angle between r and F is zero.
Ans. (b) : According to the universal law of gravitation
So, τ = F × r sin0o
it states that every object in the universe attracts each
τ=0
other with a force varying directly as the product of
• Hence, the torque on earth due to gravitational their masses and inversely as the square of the distance
attractive force is zero.
between them.
73. Satellites orbiting the Earth have finite life and
GM1M2
sometimes debris of satellites fall to the Earth. So, F=–
This is because,/he=LJeer keâer heefj›eâcee keâj jns Ghe«eneW R2
keâer DeeÙeg heefjefcele nesleer nw leLee keâYeer-keâYeer Ghe«eneW keâe • Moon revolves around the earth in a nearly circular
keâÛeje he=LJeer hej efiejlee nw~ Fmekeâe keâejCe Ùen nw efkeâ– orbit. Sun exerts gravitational force on both earth and
(a) the solar cells and batteries in satellites run moon. When observed from the sun, the orbit of moon
out./meewj mesue leLee yewšefjÙeeB meceehle nes peeleer nQ~ will not be strictly elliptical therefore the total
(b) the laws of gravitation predict a trajectory gravitational force due to earth on moon and force due
spiralling inwards./ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce efveÙece Yeerlej keâer to sun on moon is not central.
Deesj meefhe&ue Øe#eshe keâe mebkesâle oslee nw~ 75. In our solar system, the inter-planetary region
(c) of viscous forces causing the reduction in has chunks of matter (much smaller in size
speed of satellite and hence height to compared to planets) called asteroids.
gradually decrease./MÙeeve yeue Ghe«en keâer Ûeeue keâes They/nceejs meewj heefjJeej kesâ Debleje«eefnkeâ #es$e ceW õJÙe
keâce keâjles nQ Deewj Fme Øekeâej Ghe«en keâer TBÛeeF& Oeerjs-Oeerjs kesâ šgkeâÌ[s («eneW keâer leguevee ceW, Deeceehe ceW yengle Úesšs)
Iešleer nw~ efJeÅeceeve nQ efpevnW #egõ«en keânles nQ~
(d) of collisions with other satellites./DevÙe Ghe«eneW (a) will not move around the sun since they have
mes mebIešdš neslee nw~ very small masses compared to sun./metÙe& keâer
Ans. (c) : A satellite orbits earth when its speed is leguevee ceW yengle keâce õJÙeceeve kesâ nesves kesâ keâejCe metÙe& kesâ
balanced by the pull of earth's gravity. Acceleration due
to gravity is the acceleration gained by the object due to
ÛeejeW Deesj ieefle veneR keâjWies~
gravitational force. (b) will move in an irregular way because of their
• Total energy of the earth satellite bounded system is small masses and will drift away into outer
GM space./Deheves ueIeg õJÙeceeveeW kesâ keâejCe DeefveÙeefcele {bie
E= – mes ieefle keâjWies leLee yee¢e Debleefj#e ceW Ûeues peeSBies~
2R
Here negative sign show the nature of force between (c) will move around the sun in closed orbits but
satellite and earth. not obey Kepler's laws./yebo keâ#eeDeeW ceW metÙe& kesâ
Where, M is mass of earth ÛeejeW Deesj ieefle keâjWies, hejbleg kesâhuej kesâ efveÙeceeW keâe heeueve
r is radius of satellite
veneR keâjWies~
• Due to atmospheric friction, energy continuously
decreasing so radius of orbit or height also decreasing (d) will move in orbits like planets and obey
then it comes back to earth with high speed then burns Kepler's laws./«eneW keâer YeeBefle keâ#eeDeeW ceW ieefle keâjWies
in atmosphere. leLee kesâhuej kesâ efveÙeceeW keâe heeueve keâjWies~
74. Both Earth and Moon are subjected to the Ans. (d) : Asteroids are small, rocky objects that orbit
gravitational force of the sun. As observed the sun. Although asteroids orbits the sun like planets
from the sun, the orbit of the moon/he=LJeer leLee they are much smaller than planets. Most of them live in
Ûebõcee oesveeW hej metÙe& keâe ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue keâeÙe& keâjlee the main asteroid belt a region between the orbits of
nw, metÙe& mes Øes#eCe keâjves hej Ûebõcee keâer keâ#ee– Mars and Jupiter.
Physics 188 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
• Kepler's three laws describe how planetary bodies • Therefore gravitational mass of proton is equal to
orbit the sun. They describe how– inertial mass which is independent from the presence of
(i) Planets move in elliptical orbits with the sun as a neighbouring heavy objects.
focus. 77. Particles of masses 2M, m and M are
(ii) A planet covers the same area of space in the same respectively at points A, B and C with AB =
amount of time no matter where it is in its orbit. 1/2(BC). m is much-much smaller than M and
(iii) A planet's orbital period is proportional to the size at time t = 0, they are all at rest. At subsequent
of its orbit. times before any collision takes place/2M, m
• All three property of Kepler's law followed by leLee M õJÙeceeve kesâ keâCe ›eâceMe: A, B leLee C efyebogDeeW
asteroids. Therefore asteroids obey kepler's law.
hej Fme Øekeâej efmLele nQ efkeâ AB =1/2 (BC) leLee M keâer
76. Choose the wrong option./DemelÙe (ieuele) efJekeâuhe
leguevee ceW m yengle Úesše nw Deewj meceÙe t = 0 hej Ùes meYeer
keâe ÛeÙeve keâerefpeS–
efJejece ceW nQ~ leoveblej, efkeâmeer mebIešdš mes hetJe&–
(a) Inertial mass is a measure of difficulty of
accelerating a body by an external force
whereas the gravitational mass is relevant in
determining the gravitational force on it by an (a) m will remain at rest./ mefJejece ceW jnsiee~
external mass./peÌ[lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve efkeâmeer yee¢e yeue (b) m will move towards M./ m, M keâer Deesj ieefle
Éeje efkeâmeer efheb[ keâes lJeefjle keâjves ceW keâef"veeF& keâer ceehe nw keâjsiee~
peyeefkeâ ieg®lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve Gme hej efkeâmeer yee¢e õJÙeceeve (c) m will move towards 2M./ m, 2M keâer Deesj ieefle
Éeje ieg®lJeekeâ<e&Ce yeue kesâ efveOee&jCe ceW Øeemebefiekeâ neslee nw~
keâjsiee~
(b) That the gravitational mass and inertial mass
are equal is an experimental result./ieg®lJeerÙe (d) m will have oscillatory motion./ m oesueveer ieefle
õJÙeceeve leLee peÌ[lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve meceeve nesles nQ Ùen Skeâ keâjsiee~
ØeÙeewefiekeâ heefjCeece nw~ Ans. (c) : Let us consider that length of AB is 'x'.
(c) That the acceleration due to the gravity on
Earth is the same for all bodies and is due to
the equality of gravitational mass and inertial So from the question,
mass./ieg®lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve leLee peÌ[lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve meceeve 1
AB = BC
nesves kesâ keâejCe he=LJeer hej meYeer JemlegDeeW kesâ efueS ieg®lJeerÙe 2
lJejCe meceeve neslee nw~ 1
(d) Gravitational mass of a particle like proton x = BC
2
can depend on the presence of neighbouring
BC = 2x
heavy objects but the inertial mass
cannot./Øeesše@ve pewmes keâCeeW keâe ieg®lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve Deeme- According to the Newton's law of Gravitation,
heeme kesâ Yeejer efheb[eW keâer GheefmLeefle hej efveYe&j keâj mekeâlee Gravitational force (F) = GM1M2
nw peyeefkeâ peÌ[lJeerÙe õJÙeceeve Ssmee veneR keâj mekeâlee~ r2
Ans. (d) : Inertial Mass– It is a property of mass that Where, G is Gravitational constant
determines an object's resistance to change in motion M1 is mass of first object
from an external force. It is evident from Newton's M2 is mass of second object
second law of motion which can be expressed by, r is distance between the two objects
F = ma So, FAB is force exerted on the first body (A) by second
Where m is inertial mass of the body a is acceleration of body (B),
the body. Where, M1 = 2M and M2 = m and r = x
Gravitational Mass– It is the mass of an object
G(2M)(m)
calculated using the object's response to the force. of So, FAB = ... (i)
gravity alone. (x) 2
• If the inertial and gravitational mass of an object are Similarly for,
measured at rest, they will be identical. If the same G(m)(M)
object is moving even at high velocities both aril still be FBC = ... (ii)
(2x) 2
the same. The mass of an object will not change as it
From equation (i) and (ii), we see
accelerates. This relationship formed the basis of
Einstein's equivalence principle a statement of the FAB > FBC
equivalence of inertial and gravitational masses. So, 'm' moves towards 2M.

Physics 189 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8.
Mechanical Properties of Solids
Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ Deeueeskeâ ceW, veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW
8.1 Stress and Strain ceW mes meJee&efOekeâ GheÙegòeâ Gòej ÛegveW:
(a) (A) is false but (R) is true
1. Let a wire be suspended from the ceiling (rigid
support) and stretched by a weight W attached (A) DemelÙe nw, efkeâvleg (R) melÙe nw~
at its free end. The longitudinal stress at any (b) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the
point of cross-sectional area A of the wire is: correct explanation of (A)/ (A) SJeb (R) oesveeW
ceevee Skeâ leej keâes efkeâmeer Úle (ÂÌ{ DeeOeej) mes melÙe nQ, (R), (A) keâer mener JÙeeKÙee nw~
ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw leLee Fmekesâ cegòeâ efmejs mes W Yeej (c) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the
yeeBOekeâj KeeRÛee peelee nw~ A DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eHeâue kesâ correct explanation of (A)/ (A) SJeb (R) oesveeW
leej kesâ efkeâmeer efyevog hej DevegowOÙe& Øeefleyeue nw –
melÙe nQ, efkeâvleg (R), (A) keâer mener JÙeeKÙee veneR nw~
(a) Zero/ MetvÙe (b) 2W/A (d) (A) is true but (R) is false
(c) W/A (d) W/2A
(A) melÙe nw, efkeâvleg (R) DemelÙe nw~
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Ans. (c) : The formula for the stress is given by –
Ans. (d) : In stretching of coil of spring there is no
change in its length and volume. There is change in its
shape.
Due to which shear modulus involved.
shear stress
Shear Modulus =
Restoring force shear strain
Stress =
Area Hence assertion is true.
W Tensile strength of steel is more than that of copper.
Stress =
A so R is false.
2. Given below are two statements : One is 3. The stress-strain curves are drawn for two
labelled as Assertion (A) and the other is different materials X and Y. It is observed that
labelled as Reason (R). the ultimate strength point and the fracture
veerÛes oes keâLeve efoS ieS nQ: FveceW mes Skeâ DeefYekeâLeve point are close to each other for material X but
(A) Éeje efve™efhele nw SJeb otmeje keâejCe (R) Éeje are far apart for material Y.
efve™efhele nw~ We can say that materials X and Y are likely to
Assertion (A): The stretching of a spring is be (respectively),
determined by the shear modulus of the oes efJeefYeVe heoeLeeXX X Deewj Y kesâ efueS Øeefleyeue-efJeke=âefle
material of the spring. Je›eâ KeeRÛes ieS nQ~ Ùen Øes#eCe efkeâÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ heoeLe&
DeefYekeâLeve (A) : efkeâmeer efmØebie keâe Øemeej (KeeRÛes X kesâ efueS Ûejce meeceLÙe& efyevog Deewj efJeYebie efyevog Skeâ-
peevee), Gme efmØebie kesâ heoeLe& kesâ Dehe™heCe iegCeebkeâ Éeje otmejs kesâ efvekeâš nQ hejvleg otmejs heoeLe& Y kesâ efueS Ùes
heefjkeâefuele neslee nw~
Skeâ-otmejs kesâ keâeheâer otj nQ~
Reason (R) : A coil spring of copper has more
tensile strength than a steel spring of same nce Ùen keân mekeâles nQ efkeâ heoeLe& X Deewj Y ›eâceMe: nes
dimensions. mekeâles nQ –
keâejCe (R) : leeByes keâer kegbâ[efuele efmØebie keâer levÙelee (a) Plastic and ductile/ hueeefmškeâ Deewj levÙe
#ecelee, meceeve efJeceeDeeW Jeeueer mšerue keâer efmØebie keâer (b) Ductile and brittle/ levÙe Deewj Yebiegj
levÙelee #ecelee mes pÙeeoe nesleer nw~
(c) Brittle and ductile/ Yebiegj Deewj levÙe
In the light of the above statements, choose the
most appropriate answer from the options (d) Brittle and plastic/ Yebiegj Deewj hueeefmškeâ
given below: NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Physics 190 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): The elastic potential energy per unit volume is -
1
= × stress × strain
2
1 stress
y = × × (strain) 2
2 strain
1
= × Y × (strain)2
2
2
1  ∆l 
= × Y× 
2  l 
−3 2
1 11  10 
= × 2 × 10 ×  
2  1 
In the region from A to B, stress and strain are not 1
proportional. Nevertheless, the body still returns to its = × 2 × 105
2
original dimension when the load is removed. The point
= 105 J/m3
B in the curve is known as yield point (also known as
elastic limit) and the corresponding stress is known as 5. A wire of length L, area of cross section A is
yield strength (σy) of the material. hanging from a fixed support. The length of the
If the load is increased further, the stress developed wire changes to L1 when mass M is suspended
exceeds the yield strength and strain increases rapidly from its free end. The expression for Young’s
even for a small change in the stress. The portion of the modulus is :
curve between B and D shows this. When the load is DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eHeâue A leLee uecyeeF& L keâe keâesF& leej
removed, say at some point C between B and D, the efkeâmeer mLeeÙeer šskeâ mes ueškeâe nw~ Fme leej kesâ cegòeâ efmejs
body does not regain its original dimension. In this case,
even when the stress is zero, the station is not zero. The
mes efkeâmeer õJÙeceeve M keâes efveuebefyele keâjves hej Fmekeâer
material is said to have a permanent set. The uecyeeF& L1 nes peeleer nw~ Ùebie-iegCeebkeâ kesâ efueS JÙebpekeâ nw:
deformation is said to be plastic deformation. The point Mg ( L1 − L ) MgL
D on the graph is the ultimate tensile strength (σu) of (a) (b)
AL AL l
the material.
Beyond this point, additional strain is produced even by MgL MgL1
(c) (d)
a reduced applied force and fracture occurs at point E. A ( L1 − L ) AL
If the ultimate strength and fracture points D & E are
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
close, the material is said to be brittle. If they are far
apart, the material is said to be ductile. Ans. (c) :

8.2 Elastic Behaviour of Solids

4. The amount of elastic potential energy per unit
volume (in SI unit) of a steel wire of length 100
cm to stretch it by 1mm is (if Young's modulus
of the wire = 2.0× 1011 Nm–2)
100 mesceer uebyeeF& kesâ mšerue kesâ leej keâes 1mm lekeâ
hewâueeves kesâ efueS Øeefle Skeâebkeâ DeeÙeleve ØelÙeemLÙe keâer
mebYeeefJele Tpee& keâer cee$ee nw? When mass M is suspended from free end, the force
(Ùeefo leej keâe Ùebie ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ = exerted on the wire is,
2.0 × 1011 Nm −2 ) F = Mg
(a) 107 (b) 105 The initial length of the wire is 'L' and new length is 'L1'
(c) 1011 (d) 1017 Change in length ( ∆L ) = L1 – L
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 We know that young's modulus is given as
Ans. (b) : Given: l = 100 cm = 1m FL
Y = 2.0×1011 N/m2 Y=
∆LA
∆l = 1mm = 1×10–3m ∆L is the change in length of the wire.
Physics 191 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now put all the value of change length in the above Ans. (c) : Young's modulus.
formula. Fl
MgL Y=
Young’s modulus ( Y ) = A∆l
A ( L1 − L ) Here A, l and ∆l is same for both material.
6. The bulk modulus of a spherical object is ‘B’. If So, F ∝ l
it is subjected to uniform pressure ‘p’, the F Y 2Y 2
Thus, S = s = b =
fractional decrease in radius is Fb Yb Yb 1
efkeâmeer ieesueerÙe efheb[ keâe DeeÙeleve ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ 'B' Hence FS : Fb = 2 : 1
nw~ Fme hej Skeâmeceeve oeye 'p' ueieeÙee peelee nw~ lees, 8. Copper of fixed volume 'V', is drawn into wire
Fmekeâer ef$epÙee ceW efYeVeelcekeâ keâceer nesieer: of length l. When this wire is subjected to a
p B constant force 'F', the extension produced in
(a) (b) the wire is '∆l. Which of the following graphs is
B 3p a straight line?
3p p leebyes kesâ efveÙele DeeÙeleve V mes, l uecyeeF& keâe Skeâ leej
(c) (d)
B 3B yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme leej hej Skeâ efveÙele (DeÛej) yeue
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 'F' ueieeves mes, Fme uecyeeF& ceW ∆l Je=efæ nes peeleer nw, lees
∆p efvecveebefkeâle ceW mes keâewve mee «eeheâ mejue jsKee nesiee?
Ans. (d) : Bulk modulus, B =
∆V 1 1
− (a) ∆l versus / ∆l leLee kesâ yeerÛe
V l l
–Ve sign represents decrease in volume- (b) ∆l versus l / ∆l leLee l kesâ yeerÛe
2 2

V∆p 1 1
B= (c) ∆l versus / ∆l leLee 2 kesâ yeerÛe
∆V
2
l l
4 (d) ∆l versus l/ ∆l leLee l kes â yeerÛe
Volume of sphere (V) = πr 3 AIPMT-06.05.2014
3
2
Change in volume (∆V) = 4πr (∆r) Ans. (b) : As we know, volume V = Al
Where, 'A' is the area of cross section of wire
Then,
'l' is the length of wire.
V r
= F/A Fl
∆V 3∆r Young's Modulus, Y = =
∆l / l A∆l
r∆ p
∴B= Fl Fl 2
3∆ r ∆l = =
AY VY
Considering ∆p as p
So, ∆l ∝ l2
∆r p
⇒ Fractional decrease in radius = Hence, the graph between '∆l' and 'l2' is a straight line.
r 3B
9. The following four wires are made of the same
7. The Young's modulus of steel is twice that of material. Which of these will have the largest
brass. Two wires of same length and of same extension when the same tension is applied ?
area of cross section, one of steel and another of efvecveebefkeâle Ûeej leej Skeâ ner heoeLe& mes yeves nQ~ Ùeefo meYeer
brass are suspended from the same roof. If we hej meceeve leveeJe ueieeÙee peeÙe lees, efkeâmeceW meyemes
want the lower ends of the wires to be at the DeefOekeâ Øemeej nesiee?
same level, then the weights added to the steel (a) length = 300 cm, diameter = 3 mm
and brass wires must be in the ratio of (b) length = 50 cm, diameter = 0.5 mm
mšerue keâe Ùebie ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ, heerleue mes oes iegvee nw~ (c) length = 100 cm, diameter = 1 mm
Skeâ ner uecyeeF& leLee Skeâ ner DevegØemLe keâeš kesâ oes leejeW, (d) length = 200 cm, diameter = 2 mm
Skeâ mšerue keâe leLee Skeâ heerleue keâe, oesveeW keâes Skeâ ner Úle NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
mes ueškeâeÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo, Yeej ueškeâeves hej oesveeW leejeW kesâ Ans. (b) : Young's Modulus(Y) is given by,
efveÛeues efmejs Skeâ ner leue hej nQ lees mšerue leLee heerleue kesâ Y=
Stress
leejeW mes ueškeâeÙes YeejeW keâe Devegheele nesvee ÛeeefnÙes : Strain
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 F
Y= A
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1 ∆L
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 L
Physics 192 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
FL Ans. (c): Young's modulus is given as,
∆L =
YA FL
Y=
As material is same, So Y will be the same for each A∆L
wires and load applied (F) is also equal for each wire. FL
∆L =
L L YA
∆L ∝ ∝
A  d2  π D2
π  A=
 4  4
Ratio of increase in their lengths,
L
∆L ∝ ......(i) ∆Ls Fs × Ls × Dc 2 × Yc
d2 =
For option (a) ∆Lc Fc × Lc × Ds 2 × Ys
L = 3000 mm d = 3mm Fs = (5m + 2m) g = 7mg
Fc = 5mg
L 3000 1000
= = Ls Ds Ys
d2 3× 3 3 = q, = p, =s
Lc Dc Yc
For option (b)
2
L = 500 mm d = 0.5 mm ∆L s  7mg  1 1
=  ( q )   ×
L 500 ∆L c  5mg  p s
= = 2000
d 2
0.5 × 0.5 ∆L s 7q
= 2
For option (c) ∆L c 5p s
L = 100mm d = 1 mm
11. When a block of mass M is suspended by a long
L 1000 wire of length L, the length of the wire becomes
= = 1000
d 2
1× 1 (L + l). The elastic potential energy stored in
For option (d) L = 2000 mm d = 2mm the extended wire is :
peye õJÙeceeve M kesâ efkeâmeer iegškesâ keâes L uecyeeF& kesâ
L 2000
= = 500 efkeâmeer leej mes efveuebefyele efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees leej keâer
d2 2 × 2
uecyeeF& (L + l) nes peeleer nw~ efJemleeefjle leej ceW mebÛeefÙele
The order of extension produced in the wire
ØelÙeemLe efmLeeflepe Tpee& nw:
b>c>d>a
Option (b) it will have the maximum extension 1
(a) MgL (b) Mgl
10. If the ratio of diameters, lengths and Young's 2
modulus of steel and copper wires shown in the 1
(c) MgL (d) Mgl
figure are p, q and s respectively, then the 2
corresponding ratio of increase in their lengths NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
would be Ans. (b) :
Ùeefo efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS ieS mšerue Deewj leebyes kesâ leejeW keâe
JÙeeme, uecyeeF& Deewj Ùebie ceeheebkeâ keâe Devegheele ›eâceMe:
p,q Deewj s nw lees Gvekeâer uebyeeF& ceW Je=efæ keâe mebiele
Devegheele nesiee-

7q 5q
(a) (b)
( 5sp ) ( 7sp 2 ) EnergyStored 1
= × stress × strain
7q 2q Volume 2
(c) (d)
( 2)
5sp ( 5sp ) E 1 mg l
= × ×
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka V 2 A L

Physics 193 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
E 1 mg l
= × × [ V = Volume of wire ] 8.3 NCERT Exemplar Problems
L×A 2 A L
1 mgl Modulus of rigidity of an ideal liquids is/efkeâmeer
E= × × LA 13.
2 AL DeeoMe& õJe keâe DeJe™heCe iegCeebkeâ neslee nw–
1 (a) infinity/Deveble
E= mgl
2 (b) zero/MetvÙe
12. Two wires are made of the same material and (c) unity/Skeâebkeâ
have the same volume. The first wire has cross- (d) some finite small non-zero constant
sectional area A and the second wire has cross- value./keâesF& heefjefcele, Úesše, MetvÙeslej efveÙeleceeve
sectional area 3A. If the length of the first wire
Ans. (b) : Modulus of Rigidity– It can be defined as the
is increased by ∆l on applying a force F, how
ratio of shear stress to shear strain in a body with in the
much force is needed to stretch the second wire elastic limit.
by the same amount? / oes leej meceeve heoeLe& kesâ
Shear stress
yeves nQ Deewj oesveeW kesâ DeeÙeleve Yeer meceeve nQ~ henues leej Modulus of Rigidity =
Shear strain
keâer DevegØemLe-keâeš keâe #es$eHeâue A Deewj otmejs leej keâer F× L
=
DevegØemLe-keâeš keâe #es$eHeâue 3A nw~ Ùeefo yeue F ueieekeâj A × ∆L
henues leej keâer uecyeeF& ceW ∆l keâer Je=efæ keâer peeleer nw, lees Where, F is the force,
otmejs leej keâer uecyeeF& ceW Yeer Fleveer ner Je=efæ keâjves kesâ L is the original length,
A is the cross-sectional area
efueS efkeâleves yeue keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer?
and ∆ L is the change in length (deformation)
(a) 9 F (b) 6 F
• Modulus of Rigidity is the property of solids. It is
(c) F (d) 4 F related to change in the shape of body or deformation of
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 body.
Ans. (a) : Wire - 1 • While considering ideal liquid there are some
assumptions. One of them is that there is no viscous
A, ll1 force. This implies that there is no tangential force. So,
modulus of rigidity of ideal fluid is zero.
14. The maximum load a wire can withstand
without breaking, when its length is reduced to
l half of its original length will be/Ùeefo efkeâmeer leej
For wire 1, keâer uecyeeF& Deheves cetue uebyeeF& mes Ieškeâj DeeOeer jn peeleer
Change in length ∆ l is given by nw, lees Jen DeefOekeâlece uees[, pees Ùen leej efyevee štšs
F⋅l menve keâj mekeâlee nw~
∆l = ..... (i)
A⋅Y
(a) be double/oesiegvee
Volume V = Area (A) × length ( l )
(b) be half/DeeOee
V
⇒ l = (c) be four times/Ûeej iegvee
A
Put is (i) (d) remain same./Glevee ner (meceeve)
F.V Ans. (d) : The maximum load a wire can withstand
∆l = 2 without breaking means that wire is stressed. so,
A ⋅Y
Maximum Load
⇒ F∝A 2
..... (ii) stress =
Area of cross section
Similarly for same change in length for wire 2,
F ' ∝ (3A) 2
.... (iii) • When the wire is cut half, the area of cross section of
Dividing (iii) by (ii), wire does not change. It will remain same.
• Therefore, there is not any change in the area of the
F' ( 3A )
2

= =9 wire supporting maximum load. So, if we reduce the

F A2 length to half of its original length it will stand with
F' = 9F same amount of load.

Physics 194 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
15. The temperature of a wire is doubled. The Ans. (c):
Young's modulus of elasticity will/efkeâmeer leej keâe
leehe oesiegvee keâj efoÙee peelee nw lees Fmekeâe Ùebie
ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ
(a) also double/Yeer oesiegvee nes peeSiee
(b) become four times/Ûeej iegvee nes peeSiee
(c) remain same/Jener jnsiee
(d) decrease/Ieš peeSiee~
Ans. (d) : Young's modulus of elasticity– It is defined
as the mechanical property of a material to withstand
the compression or the elongation with respect to its
original length. It is the ratio of tensile or compressive • When a spring is stretched by a load its shape (shear)
stress (σ) to the longitudinal strain (ε). and length changes. So, strain is produced in the spring
σ is longitudinal and shear strain.
Young 's Modulus(Y) =
ε • Longitudinal strain– The ratio of axial deformation
Force F to the original length of the body.
We know that, stress = =
Area A • Shear strain– The angular lift between different
Change in length( ∆L)
ε, Strain = layers of a body.
Original Length(L)
17. A rigid bar of mass M is supported
∆L symmetrically by three wires each of length L.
=
L Those at each end are of copper and the middle
F× L one is of iron. The ratio of their diameters, if
Y=
A × ∆L each is to have the same tension, is equal to/M
Linear expansion of material with the change in
õJÙeceeve keâer keâesF& ÂÌ{ ÚÌ[ leerve leejeW, efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ keâer
temperature,
∆L = L α ∆T uebyeeF& L nw, hej meceefcele ™he mes efškeâer nw~ FveceW oesveeW
Where, α = Coefficient of linear expansion efmejeW Jeeues leej leeByee kesâ leLee ceOÙe Jeeuee leej ueesne keâe
∆T = Change in Temperature. nw~ Ùeefo ØelÙeskeâ ceW leveeJe meceeve jnlee nw, lees Fve leejeW
F× L kesâ JÙeemeeW keâe Devegheele yejekeâj nw
So, Y=
A × Lα∆T
Ycopper Yiron
1 (a) (b)
Now, Y∝ Yiron Ycopper
∆T
2 2
Yiron Yiron
That means Young's modulus is inversely Proportional (c) 2
(d) 2
Ycopper Ycopper
to the temperature. So, if temperature increases then
young's modulus decreases. So, if the temperature of the Ans. (b) : Let the tension of the wire be 'T'.
wire is doubled, then young's modulus of elasticity will We know that,
decrease.
Stress(T)
16. A spring is stretched by applying a load to its Young's modulus (Y) =
Strain
free end. The strain produced in the spring
F× L
is/efkeâmeer keâceeveer kesâ Skeâ efmejs hej uees[ DevegØeÙegkeäle =
A × ∆L
keâjkesâ Fmes KeeRÛee peelee nw~ keâceeveer ceW Glhevve
efJeke=âefle nw–
(a) volumetric/DeeÙeleveer
(b) shear/DeJe™heCe
(c) longitudinal and shear/DevegowIÙe& SJeb DeJe™heCe
(d) longitudinalDevegowIÙe&

Physics 195 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For copper wire, Ans. (a) :
F× L
Ycopper = 2
D 
π  copper  × ∆L
 2 
4FL
D2 copper = ... (i)
π × ∆L × Ycopper
For iron wire,
F× L
Yiron = 2
In ∆ACD,
D  AD2 = AC2 + CD2
π  iron  × ∆L
 2  = L2 + x2
4F × L AD = (L2 + x2)1/2
D 2iron = ... (ii)
π × ∆L × Yiron Similarly in ∆BCD,
Dividing equation (i) from (ii), BD = (L2 + x2)1/2
4× F× L Change in length, (∆l) = AD + BD – AB
D 2 copper π× ∆L × Ycopper = (L2 + x2)1/2 + (L2 + x2)1/2 – 2L
=
D 2 Iron 4× F× L = 2(L2 + x2)1/2 – 2L
π × ∆L × Yiron 1
 x2  2
D 2copper Y iron ⇒ ∆L = 2L 1 + 2  – 2L
⇒ =  L 
D 2 Iron Ycopper
 x 2  1 2 
 
D copper Y iron = 2L  1 + 2  – 1
∴ = L 
D Iron Y copper  
By Binomial expression, (1 + x)n = 1 + nx, if x < < 1
18. A mild steel wire of length 2L and cross-
sectional area A is stretched, well within elastic Apply this expression,
limit, horizontally between two pillars as  x2 
∆L = 2L 1 + 2 –1
shown in the figure. A mass m is suspended  2L 
from the mid-point of the wire. Strain in the
∆L x 2
wire is/2L, uebyeeF& DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue A kesâ ⇒ =
(2L) 2L2
efkeâmeer ce=ot Fmheele kesâ leej keâes Fmekeâer ØelÙeemLelee meercee
kesâ Yeerlej oes mlebYeeW kesâ yeerÛe #eweflepele: leeefvele efkeâÙee Q Change in length( ∆L) = Strain = x 2
2

Original Length(2L) 2L
peelee nw~ keâesF& õJÙeceeve m Fmekesâ ceOÙe efyebog mes
efveuebefyele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ leej ceW efJeke=âefle nw– 19. A rectangular frame is to be suspended
symmetrically by two strings of equal length on
two supports as shown in the figure. It can be
done in one of the following three ways/efkeâmeer
DeeÙeleekeâej øesâce keâes oes meceeve uebyeeF& keâer [esefjÙeeW Éeje
oes DeJeuebyeeW mes meceefcele ™he mes efveuebefyele efkeâÙee peevee
nw~ Fmes veerÛes efoS leerve Ì{bieeW mes efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw–
x2
(a) [esjer ceW leveeJe–
2L2
x
(b)
L
2
(c) x
L
2
(d) x
2L

Physics 196 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The tension in the strings will be keâe Skeâ efmeje Úle mes ÂÌ{leehetJe&keâ peÌ[ efoÙee ieÙee nw~
(a) the same in all cases ØelÙeskeâ ÚÌ[ kesâ cegkeäle efmejs kesâ keWâõ hej keâesF& õJÙeceeve M
meye ØekeâjCeW ceW meceeve nesiee~ peÌ[ efoÙee ieÙee nw~
(b) least in (i) (a) Both the rods will elongate but there shall be
(i) ceW meyemes keâce nesiee~ no perceptible change in shape./oesveeW ÚÌ[eW ces
(c) least in (ii) Je=efæ nesieer Deewj Fmekeâer Deeke=âefle heefjJeefle&le nesieer~
(ii) ceW meyemes keâce nesiee~ (b) The steel rod will elongate and change shape
(d) least in (iii) but the rubber rod will only elongate./mšerue keâer
(iii) ceW meyemes keâce nesiee~ ÚÌ[ ces Je=efæ nesieer Je Gmekeâer Deeke=âefle heefjJeefle&le nesieer
Ans. (c) : hejbleg jyeÌ[ keâer ÚÌ[ ces kesâJeue Je=efæ nesieer~
(c) The steel rod will elongate without any
perceptible change in shape, but the rubber
rod will elongate and the shape of the bottom
edge will change to an ellipse./mšerue keâer ÚÌ[ ces,
Deeke=âefle ces yeesOeiecÙe heefjJele&ve ngS efyevee Je=efæ nesieer, hejbleg
jyeÌ[ keâer ÚÌ[ ces Jegefæ nesieer leLee Fmekesâ efveÛeues efmejs keâer
Deeke=âefle oerIe&Je=òe ces heefjJeefle&le nes peeSieer~
(d) The steel rod will elongate, without any
Let us consider m be the mass of rectangular frame, θ is perceptible change in shape, but the rubber
the angle and T is the tension in the strings. rod will elongate with the shape of the bottom
Balancing vertical forces, edge tapered to a tip at the centre./mšerue keâer ÚÌ[
2T sinθ – mg = 0 ces, Deeke=âefle ces yeesOeiecÙe heefjJele&ve ngS efyevee Je=efæ nesieer,
⇒ 2T sinθ = mg hejbleg jyeÌ[ keâer ÚÌ[ ces Je=efæ nesieer leLee Fmekeâe efveÛeuee
mg efkeâveeje keWâõ hej heleuee neskeâj veeWkeâ yeve peeSiee~
⇒ T= ...(i)
2 sin θ Ans. (d) :
Balancing horizontal forces, Tcosθ – Tcosθ = 0
From equation (i)
Now from equation (i),
mg
T=
2 sin θ
where, mg is constant
T is least if sinθ has maximum value, Elasticity of a material is defined as its capacity to
mg restore in its original form after being subjected to an
⇒ Tmin = external force. When we apply similar quantities of
2sin θmax
mass to steel and rubber with the same cross sectional
⇒ sinθmax = 1
area, the rubber stretches more than steel because of its
So, θ = 90º more elastic nature.
Hence, from the given fig it is clear that fig (ii) has least FL
So, young's modulus =
tension. ∆L × A
20. Consider two cylindrical rods of identical If rubber stretches more i.e. ∆L increases so, Young's
dimensions, one of rubber and the other of modulus of elasticity decreases. Therefore, steel has a
steel. Both the rods are fixed rigidly at one end higher young's modulus of elasticity than rubber and
to the roof. A mass M is attached to each of the hence has more elasticity.
free ends at the centre of the rods./meJe&mece Due to different elastic properties of the material the
steel rod will elongate without any perceptible change
efJeceeDeeW keâer oes yesueveekeâej ÚÌ[W efpeveceW– Skeâ jyeÌ[ keâer in shape but the rubber rod will elongate with the shape
Deewj otmejer mšerue keâer nw, hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~ oesveeW ÚÌ[eW of the bottom edge tapered at a tip at the centre.

Physics 197 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
9.
Mechanic
hanical Propertiess of Fluids
Fl
2. A barometer is constructed ructed using a liquid
9.1 Pressure (density = 760 kg/m3).. What Wh would be the
height of the liquid column, umn, when a mercury
barometer reads 76 cm?
1. Two copper vessels A and B hav have the same base (density of mercury = 13600 600 kg/m
k 3
)
area but of different shapes. es. A takes twice the efkeâmeer oeyeceeheer keâes efkeâmeer õJe (IevelJe
(Ie = 760 kg/m3)
volume of water as that B requi requires to fill upto a keâe GheÙeesie keâjkesâ yeveeÙee ieÙeee nw~ peye heejo oeyeceeheer
particular common height. t. Th
Then the correct
keâe hee"Ùeebkeâ 76 cm nw, Fme oeyec eyeceeheer ceW õJe kesâ mlecYe
statement among the following wing iis:
keâer TBÛeeF& keäÙee nw? (heejs keâe IevelJe
Ievel = 13600 kg/m3)
leeByes kesâ oes yele&ve A SJeb B keâer leueer
ueer kkeâe #es$eheâue meceeve
(a) 0.76 m (b) 1.36 m
nw, efkeâvleg Gvekeâer Deeke=âefleÙeeB Deueie
eueie-Deueie nQ~ efkeâmeer (c) 13.6 m (d) 136 m
efJeMes<e GYeÙeefve‰ TBÛeeF& lekeâ Yejsjs pe peeves kesâ efueS B keâes NEET (UG)-14.10.2020,
14 Phase-II
efpeleves peue keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesleerer nw, A ceW Gmekesâ oesiegves Ans. (c) : Pressure is same whether ther the
th mercury is used
or any other liquid is used. There ere is only difference in
DeeÙeleve keâe heeveer Dee mekeâlee nw~ lees efvecveefueefKele ceW mes density of liquid & height of fluid.
mener keâLeve nw: Hence, conversion from one column lumn to other column is
(a) Pressure on the base area ea of vessels A and B given as-
is same. P1 = P2
ρmghm = ρlghl
A SJeb B kesâ leueer kesâ #es$e hej oeye
eye mmeceeve nesiee~ Where ρ = density of respective fluid.
(b) Pressure on the base area ea of vessels A and B h = height of respective fluid
is not same. Given ρm = 13600 kg/m3
A SJeb B kesâ leueer kesâ #es$e hej oeye
eye mmeceeve veneR nesiee~ ρl = 760 kg/m3
(c) Both vessels A and B weigh eigh tthe same. hm = 76 cm = 0.76 m
oesveeW yele&veeW A SJeb B keâe Yeej meceev
meceeve nw~ hl = ?
13600 × g × 0.76 = 760 × g × hl
(d) Vessel B weighs twice that of A.
hl = 13.6 m
yele&ve B keâe Yeej, A kesâ Yeej mess oesieegvee nesiee~ 3. In a u-tube as shown in the fig. water and oil
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 are in the left side and right side of the tube
Ans. (a) : The pressure exerted at aany point on an respectively. The heights ts from the bottom for
enclosed liquid is transmitted equally lly in all direction. water and oil columns are 15 1 cm and 20 cm
respectively. The density of the th oil is
• Pressure will be same at all point nt at th
the same level in [take ρwater = 1000 kg/m3]
a liquid. DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej u-veueer
veue ceW peue Deewj lesue
• Pressure exerted by a liquid depen depends only on the ›eâceMe: yeeÙeeR Deesj leLee oeÙeeR Deesj Yejs nQ~ leueer mes peue
height of fluid column and iss inde independent of the Deewj lesue kesâ mlecYeeW keâer TBÛeeF&F&ÙeeB ›eâceMe: 15 cm Deewj
shape of the containing vessels. 20 cm nQ~ lesue keâe IevelJe nw– [ρpeue = 1000 kg/m3
ueerefpeS]

• Pressure at a point inside the liquid

uid in
increases with the
increase in the density of liquid.
• These are known as hydrostatic parad
paradox. (a) 1333 kg/m3 (b) 1200 kg/m3
3
Hence, pressure on the base area ea of vvessels A and B (c) 750 kg/m (d) 1000 kg/m3
is same. NEET (UG)-20.05.2019,
20. (Odisha)
Physics 198 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given ρwater = 1000 kg/m3 5. The approximate depth of an ocean is 2700m.
The compressibility of water is 45.4×10-11 Pa-1
and density of water is 103 kg/m3. What
fractional compression of water will be
20 cm obtained at the bottom of the ocean ?
efkeâmeer cenemeeiej keâer ienjeF& ueieYeie 2700 m nw~ peue
keâer mebheer[Ÿelee 45.4 × 10-11 Pa-1 nw leLee Fmekeâe IevelJe
At bottom most point (C) pressure will be same. 103 kg/m3 nw~ lees, cenemeeiej keâes leueer hej peue keâe
Pressure at A = Pressure at B mebheer[ve DebMe nesiee?
Pa + ρwater × g × h water = Pa + ρoil × g × hoil (a) 1.0×10-2 (b) 1.2×10-2
(c) 1.4×10-2 (d) 0.8×10-2
ρwater × h water = ρoil × hoil
AIPMT-03.05.2015
ρ water × h water 1000 × 15 Ans. (b) : Compressibility is defined as,
ρoil = =
h oil 20 1
Z=
ρoil = 750kg / m3 Bulk modulus
1
4. A U tube with both ends open to the Z=
−∆P
atmosphere, is partially filled with water. Oil, ∆V
which is immiscible with water, is poured into
one side until it stands at a distance of 10 mm V
above the water level on the other side. ∆V
= − Z ∆p
Meanwhile the water rises by 65 mm from its V
original level (see diagram). The density of the ∆V
oil is:/oesveeW efmejeW hej Kegueer Skeâ Ùet-veefuekeâe keâes heeveer
= − Zρgh [ ∆p = ρgh ]
V
mes DeebefMekeâ Yeje ieÙee nw~ Fmekeâer Skeâ Yegpee ceW heeveer ceW Where,
efceefßele ve nesves Jeeuee Skeâ lesue Flevee [euee ieÙee nw efkeâ ρ = density of water
Ùen otmejer veueer ceW heeveer kesâ leue mes 10 efceceer GBâÛee nes z = compressibility of water
peelee nw leLee otmejer Yegpee ceW heeveer keâe leue Gmekesâ h = depth of ocean
ØeejbefYekeâ leue mes 65 efceceer GBâÛee ÛeÌ{ peelee nw~ (DeejsKe ∆V
⇒ = −45.4 × 10 −11 × 1000 × 10 × 2700
osefKeÙes) lees Fme lesue keâe Deehesef]#ekeâ IevelJe nw: V
∆V
⇒ = −1.2 × 10−2
V
[-ve sign shows compression or reduction in volume of
water]
∆V
⇒ denotes fractional change in volume.
V

9.2 Streamline Flow

6. A fluid is in streamline flow across a horizontal
pipe of variable area of cross section. For this
which of the following statements is correct?
(a) 650 kg m–3 (b) 425 kg m–3
(a) The velocity is minimum at the narrowest part
(c) 800 kg m–3 (d) 928 kg m–3
of the pipe and the pressure is minimum at the
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
widest part of the pipe
Ans. (d) : Given - hoil = 65+65+10 = 140mm (b) The velocity is maximum at the narrowest
hwater= 65+65 = 130mm part of the pipe and pressure is maximum at
Balancing the fluid column – the widest part of the pipe
hoil ρoil g = hwater ρwater g (c) Velocity and pressure both are maximum at
140×ρoil = 130×ρwater the narrowest part of the pipe
13 (d) Velocity and pressure both are maximum at
ρoil = × 1000kg / m3 the widest part of the pipe
14
ρoil = 928 kgm–3 NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka

Physics 199 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Fluid is flowing across a pipe in horizontal so 9. A wind with speed 40m/s blows parallel to the
that no change in gravitational potential energy occurs, roof of a house. The area of the roof is 250 m2.
then a decrease in fluid pressure is associated with an Assuming that the pressure inside the house is
increase in fluid velocity atmospheric pressure, the force exerted by the
1 wind on the roof and the direction of the force
P + ρv 2 = Constant
2 will be:
And from continuity equation, Skeâ YeJeve keâer Úle keâer #es$eheâue 250 m2 nw~ Fmekesâ Thej
Av = Constant Deewj Fmekesâ meceevlej 40 m/s keâer Ûeeue mes heJeve (JeeÙeg)
If A is minimum, v is maximum, P is minimum. Ûeue jner nw~ Ùeefo YeJeve kesâ Yeerlej oeye, JeeÙegceb[ueerÙe
oeye kesâ yejeyej nw lees, YeJeve keâer Úle hej heJeve Éeje
9.3 Bernoulli's Principle Deejesefhele yeue keâe ceeve Je Gmekeâer efoMee ›eâceMe: nesieer:
7. The venturi-meter works on: (ρair = 1.2 kg/m3)
JeWšgjerceeheer keâeÙe& keâjlee nw : (a) 4.8 × 105 N, upwards/Thej keâer Deesj
(a) The principle of perpendicular axes/uecyeJele (b) 2.4 × 105 N, upwards/Thejkeâer Deesj
De#eeW kesâ efmeæeble hej (c) 2.4 × 10 N, downwards/ veerÛes keâer Deesj
5

(b) Huygen's principle/neFieWme efmeæeble hej (d) 4.8 × 105 N, downwards/ veerÛes keâer Deesj
(c) Bernoulli's principle/yejveewueer efmeæeble hej AIPMT-03.05.2015
(d) The principle of parallel axes/meceevlej De#eeW kesâ Ans.(b): Given A = area of the roof = 250m2
efmeæeble hej v1 = velocity of wind inside = 0 m/s
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 v2 = velocity of wind outside = 40m/s
Ans. (c) : Venturi meter is a flow measurement Applying Bernoulli's equation just above and below the
instrument, here a converging section of a pipe is used roof
to increase the flow velocity and a corresponding
pressure drop from which the flow rate of the fluid is P1 + 1 ρv12 = P2 + 1 ρv 22 ......(i)
deduced based on Bernouli’s equation. 2 2
8. A small hole of area of cross-section 2mm2 is
present near the bottom of a fully filled open tank
of height 2m. Taking g=10m/s2, the rate of flow of
water through the open hole would be nearly
2 m TbÛeeF& kesâ hetCe& ™he mes peue mes Yejs efkeâmeer Kegues šQkeâ
ceW leueer kesâ efvekeâš 2mm2 DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue keâe
keâesF& Úesše efÚõ GheefmLele nw~ g = 10 m/s2 uesles ngS Kegues
efÚõ mes ØeJeeefnle peue keâer oj nesieer ueieYeie :
(a) 8.9×10–6 m3/s (b) 2.23×10–6 m3/s
(c) 6.4×10–6 m3/s (d) 12.6×10–6 m3/s
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 P1 = Patm = P0 is the pressure inside the house or just
Ans. (d) : below the roof.
From eqn (1), we get
∆P = P1 − P2 = ρ ( v 22 − v12 )
1
..... (ii)
2
Net force on the roof is due to the pressure differential
F = ∆P × A ..... (iii)
Area of hole a = 2mm2 = 2 × 10–6 m2
From equation (ii) & (iii)
Height of tank h = 2m
ρ ( v 22 − v12 ) =
1 F
As the velocity of liquid flow is given as v = 2gh
2 A
Rate of flow liquid
× 1.2 × ( 40 2 − 02 ) =
1 F
Q = a.v = a. 2gh 2 250
= 2 ×10–6 × 2 ×10 × 2 ( Q P1 > P2 , hence net pressure differential is along
= 2 × 10 –6 × 6.32 upwards direction)
= 12.64 ×10 –6 m3 s F = 2.4 ×105 N, upwards.

Physics 200 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
10. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has keâesF& Fbpeve Skeâ nespeheeFhe mes efvejvlej peue keâes heche
radius R, one end of which has n fine holes, keâjlee nw~ nespeheeFhe mes peue Jesie v mes efvekeâuelee nw Deewj
each of radius r. If the speed of the liquid in the
tube is V, the speed of the ejection of the liquid
peue Oeeje keâe Øeefle cee$ekeâ uecyeeF& m nw~ peue keâes
through the holes is/efkeâmeer mØes-heche keâer yesueveekeâej ieeflepe Tpee& efoÙes peeves keâer oj keäÙee nesiee?
veueer keâer ef$epÙee R nw~ Fme veueer kesâ efmejs hej n met#ce 1 2 2 1
(a) m v (b) mv 3
efÚõ nQ, efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ keâer ef$epÙee r nw~ Ùeefo veueer ceW õJe 2 2
keâer Ûeeue V nw lees, Fve efÚõeW mes yeenj efvekeâueles ngS õJe 1
(c) mv3 (d) mv 2
keâer Ûeeue nesieer : 2
V 2R VR 2 AIMPT-2009
(a) (b) Ans. (b) : Given, Velocity = v
nr n 2r 2
dm
VR 2 VR 2 Mass per unit length m =
(c) (d) 3 2 dl
nr 2 n r
We know that
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
1
Ans. (c) : Using equation of continuity, K.E = mv 2
AV = Constant. 2

( K.E ) =  mv2 
A1V1 = A2V2 d d 1
πR V = (nπr )V'
2 2 dt dt 2 
2
Where, nπr is the total area of n fine holes and V' is the 1 dm
= v2
speed of ejection through each hole. 2 dt
2 1 2 dm dl
R V = v ×
V' = 2 2 dt dl
nr
1 dm dl
11. Water falls from a height of 60 m at the rate of = v2 ×
2 dl dt
15 kg/s to operate a turbine. The losses due to
1
frictional forces are 10 % of energy. How = v2m × v
much power is generated by the turbine ? (g = 2
2 1
10 m/s ) = mv3
Skeâ šyee&Fve keâes Ûeueeves kesâ efueS 60 ceeršj keâer TbÛeeF& mes 2
15 kg/s keâer oj mes heeveer efiejeÙee pee jne nw~ Ie<eCe& yeueeW
kesâ keâejCe 10% veeMe nes peelee nw~ šyee&Fve efkeâleveer 9.4 Viscosity
Meefòeâ (heeJej) GlheVe keâjleer nw?
(g = 10 m/s2) 13. The viscous drag acting on a metal sphere of
(a) 12.3 kW (b) 7.0 kW diameter 1mm, falling through a fluid of
viscosity 0.8 Pa-s with a velocity of 2ms-1 is
(c) 8.1 kW (d) 10.2 kW
equal to?
AIPMT-2008
0.8Pa-s MÙeevelee Jeeues õJe ceW 2 m s-1 kesâ Jesie mes efiejles
Ans. (c) : Given:- Height (h) = 60 m
Mass flow rate m = 15 kg/s
ngS 1 efceceer JÙeeme Jeeues Oeeleg kesâ ieesues hej keâeÙe& keâjves
Frictional losses, f = 10% losses Jeeuee MÙeeve keâ<e&Ce efkeâmekesâ yejeyej nw?
So, efficiency (η) = 100–10 (a) 1.5×10-3N (b) 20×10-3N
-3
= 90% (c) 15×10 N (d) 30×10-3N
Power generated Pgen = Pinput × η RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
 90 Ans. (c) : Given: d = 1mm = 1×10–3m
Pgen = m gh × η = 0.8 Pa-s
100
v = 2 m/sec.
90
= 15 × 10 × 60 × We know that viscous drag on sphere is given by-
100
F= 6πηrv
= 8.1 KW
22 10−3
12. An engine pumps water continuously through a = 6× ×0.8× ×2
hose. Water leaves the hose with a velocity v 7 2
and m is the mass per unit length of the water = 15.07×10-3N
jet. What is the rate for which kinetic energy is F  15 ×10−3 N
imparted to water?
Physics 201 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
14. The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius (body moves with constant velocity, v = 0)
5 mm falling through a tank of oil at room FV = Mg – FB
temperature is 10 cm s–1. If the viscosity of oil = Vd1g – Vd2g (M = d1V)
at room temperature is 0.9 kg m–1 s–1, the (V = volume of Ball, d1 = density of Ball)
viscous drag force is: = Vd1g[1–(d2/d1)]
= Mg[1–d2/d1]
keâcejs kesâ leehe hej efkeâmeer lesue keâer šbkeâer ceW efiej jner 5
d
mm ef$epÙee Jeeueer efkeâmeer leeByes keâer ieWo keâe meerceeble Jesie
Q d2 = & d1 = d
10 cm s–1 nw~ Ùeefo keâcejs kesâ leehe hej lesue keâer MÙeevelee 2
0.9 kg m–1 s–1 nw, lees Deejesefhele MÙeeve yeue nw:  d 
∴ Viscous force = Mg 1 –
 2 ⋅ d 
(a) 8.48 × 10–3 N (b) 8.48 × 10–5 N
Mg
(c) 4.23 × 10–3 N (d) 4.23 × 10–6 N =
2
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
16. Two small spherical metal balls, having equal
Ans. (a) : Given that –
masses, are made from materials of densities ρ1
r = 5 mm = 5 × 10 m–3
and ρ2 (ρ1 = 8ρ2 ) and have radii of 1 mm and 2
vt = 10 cm s–1 = 10 × 10–2 ms–1 mm, respectively, they are made to fall
The viscous drag force is given by– vertically (from rest) in a viscous medium
F = 6πηrvt whose coefficient of viscosity equals η and
Where, η = viscosity of the oil whose density is 0.1ρ2. The ratio of their
r = radius of copper ball terminal velocities would be,
vt = terminal velocity oes Úesšer Oeeleg keâer ieesue ieWo, efpevekesâ õJÙeceeve meceeve nQ,
F = 6π × 0.9 × 5 × 10–3 × 10 × 10–2 ρ1 and ρ2 (ρ1 = 8ρ2) IevelJeeW kesâ heoeLe& mes yeveer nQ leLee
F = 84.82 × 10 –4
Fvekeâer ef$epÙeeSB ›eâceMe: 1 mm Deewj 2 mm nQ~ FvnW efJejece
F = 8.48 × 10–3 N mes TOJeeOe&j veerÛes efkeâmeer MÙeeve heoeLe&, efpemekeâe MÙeevelee
15. The velocity of a small ball of mass M and iegCeebkeâ η leLee IevelJe 0.1ρ2 nw ceW efiejeÙee ieÙee nw~
density d, when dropped in a container filled
Fvekesâ meerceevle JesieeW keâe Devegheele nesiee
with glycerine becomes constant after some
d 79 79
time. If the density of glycerine is , then the (a) (b)
2 36 72
viscous force acting on the ball will be 19 39
(c) (d)
M õJÙeceeve leLee d IevelJe keâer Úesšer ieWo keâe Jesie 36 72
efiuemejerve mes Yejs yele&ve ceW [eueves hej kegâÚ meceÙe yeeo NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
nes, lees Ans. (a) : Terminal velocity v = 2r ( ρ − σ ) g
d 2
DeÛej nes peelee nw~ Ùeefo efiuemejerve keâe IevelJe
2 9η
ieWo hej ueieves Jeeuee MÙeeve yeue nesiee : Where,
Mg ρ = density of balls
(a) 2Mg (b)
2 σ = density of viscous medium
3
2 (1) ( 8ρ2 − 0.1ρ2 )
2
(c) Mg (d) Mg
2 v1 =
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 9η
2 ( 2 ) ( ρ2 − 0.1ρ2 )
Ans. (b) : Let FV and FB be the Viscous Force and 2

Buoyant Force respectively acting on the ball. v2 =

9η
Ratio of terminal velocity of spherical metal balls
2 (1) ( 8ρ2 − 0.1ρ2 )
2

v1 9η
=
v 2 2 ( 2 )2 ( ρ2 − 0.1ρ2 )
9η
v1 7.9ρ 2 79
= =
v 2 4 ( 0.9ρ 2 ) 36
Mg = FB + FV

Physics 202 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
19. A liquid does not wet the solid surface if angle
9.5 Surface Tension of contact is
peye keâesF& õJe efkeâmeer "esme he=‰ keâes ieeruee veneR keâjlee,
17. The amount of energy required to form a soap leye mecheke&â keâesCe keâe ceeve neslee nw
bubble of radius 2 cm from a soap solution is (a) zero/MetvÙe
nearly : (surface tension of soap solution = 0.03
(b) equal to 45°/45° kesâ yejeyej
N m-1 )
meeyegve kesâ Ieesue mes 2 cm ef$epÙee keâe meeyegve keâe yegueyeguee (c) equal to 60°/60° kesâ yejeyej
yeveeves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ Tpee& keâer cee$ee ueieYeie nw (d) greater than 90°/90° mes DeefOekeâ
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
(meeyegve kesâ Ieesue keâe he=‰ leveeJe = 0.03 N m–1) :
Ans. (d) : The wetting and non-wetting of a solid
(a) 50.1×10−4 J (b) 30.16 ×10−4 J surface when in contact with a liquid depends on the
−4 −4 contact angle between them.
(c) 5.06 × 10 J (d) 3.01×10 J
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 • A liquid does not wet the surface when angle of
contact between them is more than 900. For
Ans. (d) : Surface area of soap bubble is example Mercury.
A = 2 4πR 2 ( ) • A liquid wet the surface when angle of contact
between them is less than 900. For example water.
= 8π ( 2 × 10 )
−2 2
20. A capillary tube of radius r is immersed in
A = 32π×10 m −4 2 water and water rises in it to a height h. The
mass of the water in the capillary is 5 g.
Work done (W) = T × A Another capillary tube of radius 2r is
= 0.03 × 32π× 10−4 immersed in water. The mass of water that will
W = 3.01×10 J −4 rise in this tube is :/ef$epÙee r keâer keâesF& kesâefMekeâe veueer
peue cesW [tyeer nw Deewj FmeceW peue TbÛeeF& h lekeâ ÛeÌ{ ieÙee
18. If a soap bubble expands, the pressure inside
the bubble/Ùeefo keâesF& meeyegve keâe yegueyeguee hewâuelee nw, nw ~ kesâefMekeâe veueer ceW Yejs peue keâe õJÙeceeve 5 g nw~
lees yegueyegues kesâ Deboj oeye keâe ceeve~ ef$epÙee 2r keâer keâesF& DevÙe kesâefMekeâe veueer peue ceW [tyeer nQ~
Fme veueer ceW Thej ÛeÌ{s peue keâe õJÙeceeve nw:
(a) Is equal to the atmospheric pressure
(a) 5.0 g
(b) 10.0 g
JeeleeJejCe oeye kesâ ceeve kesâ yejeyej neslee nw~ (c) 20.0 g
(d) 2.5 g
(b) Decreases/Iešlee nw NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
(c) Increases/yeÌ{lee nw Ans. (b) : Given that : Radius, r1 = r
(d) Remains the same/meceeve jnlee nw r2 = 2r
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 Height, h 1= h Mass, M1 = 5g
M2 = ?
Ans. (b) :
rh = constant
So, r2h2 = r1h1
Putting the given values we have
(2r) h2 = rh
h
4T h2 =
P= 2
R Now, the mass of the water that rises in the first
Where, capillary tube, we have –
T = Surface tension mass
P = Pressure in a bubble Density =
volume
R = Radius of the bubble M1 = ρ (πr2h)
1 5 = ρ (πr2 h)
P∝
R Here, 'ρ' is the density of the water in the capillary tube
So pressure in a bubble is inversely proportional to the Mass of the 2nd capillary tube we have–
radius of the bubble. M2 = ρ (πr22h2)
So Soap bubble expands the radius will increase and  2 h 
inside pressure will decrease. M2 = ρ  π ( 2r ) 
 2

Physics 203 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 h (a) 0.250 Nm–1 (b) 0.125 Nm–1
M2 = 4  ρπr 2  (c) 0.2 Nm –1
(d) 8.0 Nm–1
 2
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
M2 = 2 ρπr 2 h
Ans. (b) :
M2 = 2M1
M2 = 2 × 5
M2 = 10g
21. A soap bubble, having radius of 1 mm, is blown
from a detergent solution having a surface
tension of 2.5 × 10–2 N/m. The pressure inside the
bubble equals at a point Z0 below the free surface Initial area of the film
of water in a container. Taking g = 10 m/s2, Ai = 4 × 2 = 8 cm2 = 8 × 10–4 m2
3 3
density of water = 10 kg/m , the value of Z0 is : Final area of the film
he=‰erÙe leveeJe 2.5 × 10–2 N/m kesâ efkeâmeer ef[šjpewvš- Af = 5 × 4 = 20 cm2 = 20 × 10–4 m2
efJeueÙeve mes 1 mm ef$epÙee keâe keâesF& meeyegve keâe yegueyeguee Thus change in area
hegâueeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme yegueyegues kesâ Yeerlej keâe oeye efkeâmeer ∆A = (20 – 8) × 10–4 = 12 × 10–4 m2
hee$e ceW Yejs peue kesâ cegòeâ he=‰ kesâ veerÛes efkeâmeer efyevog Z0 Work done W = 3 × 10–4 J
hej oeye kesâ yejeyej nw~ g = 10 m/s leLee peue keâe For the given film of liquid having surface tension S
2

IevelJe = 103 kg/m3 uesles ngS, Z0 keâe ceeve nw~ Work done is given by
(a) 10 cm (b) 1 cm W = S (2∆A)
(c) 0.5 cm (d) 100 cm W 3 × 10−4
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 S= =
2 ∆A 2 × 12 × 10−4
Ans. (b) : Given
S = 0.125 Nm–1
Radius of soap bubble, R = 1 mm = 10–3m
Surface tension, T = 2.5 × 10–2N/m 23. Three liquids of densities ρ1, ρ2 and ρ3 (with
Value of g = 10 m/s 2 ρ1 > ρ2> ρ3) , having the same value of surface
tension T, rise to the same height in three
Density of water ρ = 1000 Kg/m3
identical capillaries. The angles of contact θ1, θ2
We know pressure inside soap bubble is given by
and θ3 obey./leerve õJeeW kesâ IevelJe ›eâceMe: ρ1, ρ2 leLee
4T
P = P0 + ρ3 (ρ1 > ρ2> ρ3) nQ~ leerveeW õJeeW keâe he=‰ leveeJe T meceeve
R
4 × 2.5 × 10 –2
nw leerve meJe&mece kesâefMekeâeDeeW ceW leerveeW õJe meceeve TBÛeeF&
= P0 + lekeâ ÛeÌ{les nw ~ Ùeefo Fve õJeeW kesâ efueS mheMe&-keâesCe
10 –3
P = P0 + 100
›eâceMe: θ1, θ2 leLee θ3 nw, lees efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-
––––– (i)
mee mecyevOe "erkeâ nesiee ?
Pressure at depth Z0 below free surface of water
P = P0 + ρgZ0 π
> θ1 > θ2 > θ3 ≥ 0 (a)
= P0 + 1000 × 10 × Z0 2
= P0 + 104 Z0 ––––– (ii) π
(b) 0 ≤ θ1 < θ2 < θ3 <
Now 2
Pressure at depth Z0 is equal to pressure inside soap π
bubble (c) < θ1 < θ2 < θ3 < π
2
P0 + 100 = P0 + 104 Z0
π
Z0 = 10–2 m (d) π > θ1 > θ2 > θ3 >
2
Z0 = 1cm
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
22. A rectangular film of liquid is extended from Ans. (b) :
(4cm × 2cm) to (5cm × 4 cm). If the work done
is 3 ×10–4J, the value of the surface tension of
the liquid is
efkeâmeer õJe keâer DeeÙeleekeâej efPeuueer (efHeâuce) keâe
efJemleej (4cm × 2cm) mes yeÌ{ekeâj (5cm × 4 cm ) keâj Rise of a liquid in a capillary tube is given by.
efoÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Fme Øeef›eâÙee ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& 2T cos θ
h=
3 ×10 J nes, lees õJe kesâ he=‰ leveeJe keâe ceeve nesiee -
–4
rρg

Physics 204 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
cos θ (c) Water rises upto the top of capillary tube and
As, r,h,T, are same constant stays there without overflowing
ρ
peue kesâefMekeâe kesâ Thejer efmejs lekeâ ÛeÌ{ peelee nw~ JeneR
As ρ is increasing θ will decrease simultaneously and
®keâe jnlee nw yeenj veneR yenlee~
for rise of liquid the minimum value of θ is 0 and
(d) Water rises upto a point a little below the top
π
maximum is . and stays there/peue kesâefMekeâe kesâ Thejer efmejs mes kegâÚ
2
veerÛes lekeâ ÛeÌ{lee nw Deewj JeneR yevee jnlee nw~
So If ρ1 > ρ2 > ρ3 then,
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
π
0 < θ1 < θ2 < θ3 < Ans. (c) : Water rises to a height h in capillary tube. If
2 the length of capillary tube above the surface of water is
24. Two non-mixing liquids of densities ρ and nρ (n made less then h, then water rises up to the top of
> 1) are put in container. The height of each capillary tube and stays there without overflowing.
liquid is h. A solid cylinder of length L and
density d is put in this container. The cylinder
floats with its axis vertical and length PL (P<1)
9.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
in the denser liquid. The density d is equal
to/Skeâ otmejs ceW efceefßele ve nesves Jeeues oes õJe, efpevekesâ 26. A tall cylinder is filled with viscous oil. A round
pebble is dropped from the top with zero initial
IevelJe ρ leLee nρ (n > 1) nQ, efkeâmeer hee$e ceW Yejs nw~ velocity. From the plots shown, indicate the one
ØelÙeskeâ õJe keâer TBÛeeF& h nw~ uecyeeF& L Deewj IevelJe d kesâ that represents the velocity (v) of the pebble as
efkeâmeer yesueve keâes Fme hee$e ceW jKee peelee nw~ Ùen yesueve a function of time (t)./keâesF& TBÛee efmeefueb[j MÙeeve
hee$e ceW Fme Øekeâej lewjlee nw, efkeâ Fmekeâe De#e TOJee&Oej lesue mes Yeje nw~ FmeceW keâesF& ieesue helLej Fmekesâ Meer<e& mes
jnlee nw leLee Fmekeâer uecyeeF& PL (P<1) meIeve õJe ceW MetvÙe DeejbefYekeâ Jesie mes efiejeÙee peelee nw~ oMee&S ieS
nesleer nw~ IevelJe d keâe ceeve nw~ «eeheâeW ceW Jen «eeheâ ÛegefveS pees meceÙe (t) kesâ heâueve kesâ
(a) {1+(n–1)P}ρ (b) {1+(n+1)P}ρ ™he ceW helLej kesâ Jesie (v) keâe efve®heCe keâjlee nw~
(c) {2+(n+1)P}ρ (d) {2+(n–1)P}ρ
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Ans. (a) :

Weight of the wooden block

W = Vdg = AL dg
Ans. (c) : When a pebble is dropped from the top of a
Where A = the cross section area of the cylinder
cylinder filled with viscous oil, it falls with an initial
Using Archimedes’ principle, acceleration due to gravity.
Weight of wooden block = up thrust due to liquid of
• As the pebble falls through the oil, it keeps attaining
desity nρ + upthrust due to liquid of density ρ velocity and experiences drag force,
ALdg = (PL) A(nρ)g + (1 – P) LAρg F = = 6πηrv
d = (1 – P)ρ + Pnρ Where, n is fluid viscosity.
d = [1 + (n – 1)P]ρ v is velocity
25. Water rises to a height h in capillary tube. If r is radius of the pebble
the length of capillary tube above the surface of • As the fore is dependent on the fluid viscosity,
water is made less than h, then/efkeâmeer kesâefMekeâe ceW
velocity and radius. So force is variable, hence
peue 'h' GBâÛeeF& lekeâ ÛeÌ{lee nw~ Ùeefo peue keâer melen mes
acceleration is also variable. So, the 'v' and 't' graph will
Thej kesâefMekeâe keâer uecyeeF& 'h' mes keâce nes leesnot be a straight line. First velocity increases and then
becomes constant known as terminal velocity. Theses
(a) Water does not rise at all
condition are verified in option (c).
peue kesâefMekeâe ceW veneR ÛeÌ{lee~ 27. Which of the following diagrams does not
(b) Water rises upto the tip of capillary tube and represent a streamline flow?/efvecveefueefKele ceW
then starts overflowing like a fountain
keâewve-mee DeejsKe OeejejsKeer, ØeJeen keâes efve®efhele veneR
peue kesâefMekeâe kesâ Thejer efmejs lekeâ ÛeÌ{keâj heâJJeejs kesâ ™he
keâjlee nw?
ceW yeenj yenves ueielee nw~
Physics 205 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2
D 
π 2 
(D2 )2
= 
2 
2
=
D  (D1 )2
π 1 
 2 
.75)2
v1 (3.75)
∴ =
.5)2
v 2 (2.5)
Ans. (d) : Streamline flow– it is define
defined as the flow in 14.0625
0625
=
which the fluids flow in parallel layers
yers ssuch that there is 6.25
.25
no disruption or intermixing of thee layer
layers and at a given
point, the velocity of each fluidd partparticle passing by ⇒ v 1 = 2.25
v2
remains constant with time.
Hence, In streamline flow layers rs do not cross each ⇒ v1 = 2 + 0.25
other. So, option (d) is not streamlined
ined fflow diagram. v2
28. Along a streamline/efkeâmeer Oeejee jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe ⇒ v1 = 2 + 25 = 2 + 1 ]
(a) the velocity of a fluid luid pparticle remains v2 100 4
constant/efkeâmeer lejue keâCe keâe Jesie efveÙele jnlee nw~
∴ v1 = 9
(b) the velocity of all fluid id par
particles crossing a v2 4
given position is constant/efkeâm eâmeer oer ieF& efmLeefle mes 30. The angle of contact at the interface in of water-
iegpejves Jeeues meYeer lejue keâCeeW keâe
eâe JeJesie efveÙele neslee nw~ glass is 0°, Ethylalcohol-glass glas is 0°, mercury-
(c) the velocity of all fluidd partparticles at a given glass is 140° and Methyliodi yliodide-glass is 30° A
instant is constant/efkeâmeer efoS ieS #eCe hej meYeer glass capillary is put in a trough trou containing one
of these four liquids. Itt is obs o erved that the
lejue keâCe keâe Jesie efveÙele neslee nw~ meniscus is convex. Thee liquid liqu in the trough
(d) the speed of a fluid uid pparticle remains is/mheMe& keâesCe keâe ceeve peue-keâeBÛe, Deblejhe=‰ hej 0O,
constant./efkeâmeer lejue keâCe keâerâer Ûee
Ûeeue efveÙele jnleer nw~ SsefLeue Deukeâesnue-keâeBÛe Deblejhe=e=‰ hej
h 0O, cejkeâjer-keâeBÛe
Ans. (b) : Streamlines are definess as th
the path taken by Deblejehe=‰ hej 140O Deewj efceLeeFuLeeFue DeeÙees[eF[-keâeBÛe
particles of fluid under steady flow conditions. In Deblejehe=‰ hej 30O nw~ efkeâmeer õessCeer ceW Yejs Fve ÛeejeW ceW mes
streamline flow, the velocity off all fluid particles
efkeâmeer Skeâ õJe ceW keâeBÛe keâer keâesefMekeâe keâes jKee ieÙee~
crossing a given position is constant.
Ùen heeÙee peelee nw efkeâ cesefvemkeâme
me Gòeue
G nw~ õesCeer ceW Yeje
• According to the equation of contin
continuity, streamline
flow equation, Av = Constant õJe nw–
where, A is the cross-sectional areaa and (a) water/peue
v is the velocity of the fluid. (b) ethylalcohol/SsefLeue Deukeâesâesnue
29. An ideal fluid flows through gh a pipe of circular (c) mercury/cejkeâjer
cross-section made of two sections with (d) methyliodide/cesefLeue DeeÙeesees[eF[
eF
diameters 2.5 cm and 3.75 cm. T The ratio of the
Ans. (c) :
velocities in the two pipes are/keâesF& DeeoMe& lejue,
Je=òeerÙe DevegØemLe keâeš kesâ Demeceeve
eeve heeFhe mes ØeJeeefnle
neslee nw efpemekesâ oes DevegYeeie kesâ JÙee
JÙeeme 2.5 cm leLee
3.75 cm nQ~ Fve oesveeW heeFheeWeW mes ØeJeeefnle lejue kesâ
JesieeW keâe Devegheele nw–
(a) 9 : 4 (b) 3 : 2
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 2 : 3
• In mercury, the intermolecularr attraction
attra between the
Ans. (a) : Given that, mercury molecules are much higher.
higher So the mercury
Diameter of first section (D1) = 2.5cm molecules do not stick to the glass
lass walls
wa of the capillary
Diameter of second sectionn (D 2) = 3.75cm tube and due to the effect of gravity.
ravity. Those molecules
According to equation of continuity,
ty, Av = Constant appear to fall down.
A1v1 = A2v2 • So when a capillary tube is immersed
imm in mercury,
v1 A 2 mercury descends in the capillaryillary tube forming a
⇒ = convex meniscus.
v 2 A1

Physics 206 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
10.
Thermal Properties of Matter
3. A Centigrade and a Fahrenheit thermometer
10.1 Measurement of Temperature are dipped in boiling water. The water
temperature is lowered until the Fahrenheit
1. On a new scale of temperature (which is linear) thermometer registers 140ºF. What is the fall in
and called the W scale, the freezing and boiling temperature as registered by the centigrade
points of water are 39º W and 239º W thermometer?/Skeâ mesvšer«es[ leLee Skeâ hewâjsveneFš
respectively. What will be the temperature on Lecee&ceeršj keâes Gyeueles heeveer ceW jKee peelee nw~ heeveer keâe
the new scale, corresponding to a temperature
of 39ºC on the Celsius scale ? leehe leye lekeâ IešeÙee peelee nw peye lekeâ hewâjsveneFš
leehe keâer Skeâ veF& mkesâue, pees jsKeerÙe nw, Fmes W mkesâue Lecee&ceeršj keâe hee"Ÿeebkeâ 140º F ve nes peeS, lees mesvšer«es[
keâe veece efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme mkesâue hej peue keâe efnceebkeâ Lecee&ceeršj ceW leeheceeve nesiee:
Deewj keäJeLeveebkeâ ›eâceevegmeej 39° W Deewj 239° W nw~ (a) 80ºC (b) 60ºC
peye mewumeerDeme mkesâue hej leehe 39°C nesiee, lees veF& (c) 40ºC (d) 30ºC
mkesâue hej leehe keâe ceeve nesiee:- AIPMT-1990
(a) 200ºW (b) 139ºW Ans. (c) : Given data
(c) 78ºW (d) 117ºW Temperature of Fahrenheit scale (T°F) = 140°F
AIPMT-2008 We know that,
Ans. (d) : Given, boiling point = 239º W Tº C Tº F – 32º
=
Freezing point = 39º W 100 180
Tº C 140º –32º
=
100 180
 108 
Tº C = 100 ×  
 180 
TºC = 100×(0.6)
TºC = 60º
W scale = Celsius scale Now, Temperature fall on centigrade thermometer
tº −freezing point 39ºC−freezing point = temperature of boiling water-final temperature
= = 100º – 60º = 40º
boiling point − freezing point boiling point − freezing point
t °W − 39 39 − 0
= 10.2 Thermal Expansion
239 − 39 100 − 0
t°W − 39 39
= 4. The resistance of platinum wire at 00C is 2Ω
200 100 and 6.8Ω at 800C. The temperature coefficient
⇒ t° W – 39 = 2 × 39 ⇒ t° W = 117° W of resistance of the wire is :
So, temperature on new scale is 117º W corresponding hues efšvece kesâ leej keâe ØeeflejesOe 0ºC hej 2Ω leLee 80ºC
to 39ºC
2. Mercury thermometer can be used to measure
hej 6.8Ω nw~ leej keâe ØeeflejesOe leehe iegCeebkeâ nw :
temperature upto (a) 3 × 10 −1 o C −1 (b) 3 × 10 −4 o C −1
cejkeâjer Lecee&ceeršj efkeâme leehe lekeâ veehe mekeâlee nw?
(c) 3 × 10 −3 o C −1 (d) 3 × 10 −2 o C −1
(a) 260ºC (b) 100ºC
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
(c) 360ºC (d) 500ºC
AIPMT-1992 Ans. (d) : Given that
Ans. (c): Mercury thermometers are used in R0 = 2Ω, T0 = 0º C
measurement because mercury is the only metal that is R T = 6.8Ω T = 80º C
in liquid state at room temperature. Resistance of a wire at a given temperature T is –
Mercury thermometers cover a wide temperature range
from –37 to 357º C (–35 to 673ºF). R T = R 0 1 + α ( T − T0 ) 
Mercury cannot be used below the temperature at which 6.8 = 2 1 + α ( 80 − 0 ) 
it becomes solid –38 . 83º C (–37.89ºF).

Physics 207 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
3.4 = 1 + 80α 7. The value of coefficient of volume expansion of
2.4 = 80 α glycerin is 5 × 10−4 K −1 . The fractional change in
2.4 o
α= the density of glycerin for a rise of 40 C in its
80 temperature is/efiuemejerve keâe DeeÙeleve Øemeej iegCeebkeâ
α = 0.03 /ºC o
α = 3 ×10−2 /ºC 5 × 10−4 K −1 . nw~ leye efiuemejerve kesâ leehe›eâce ceW 40 C
5. A copper rod of 88 cm and an aluminium rod Je=efæ keâjves hej Gmes IevelJe ceW DeebefMekeâ heefjJele&ve nesiee:
of unknown length have their increase in length (a) 0.010 (b) 0.015
independent of increase in temperature. The
length of aluminium rod is : (αCu = 1.7 × 10–5 (c) 0.020 (d) 0.025
–1 –5 –1
K and αAl = 2.2 × 10 K ) AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
88 cm keâer keâe@hej keâer ÚÌ[ leLee De%eele uecyeeF& keâer Ans. (c) : Given
efkeâmeer SuegefceefveÙece keâer ÚÌ[ keâer uecyeeF& ceW Je=efæ leehe Coefficient of volume expansion = 5 × 10–4 K–1
Je=efæ hej efveYe&j veneR nw~ SuegefceefveÙece keâer ÚÌ[ keâer ∵ Original density of glycerin
uecyeeF& nw:
ρ = ρ0 (1 + γ∆T )
(αCu = 1.7 × 10–5 K–1 and αAl = 2.2 × 10–5 K–1)
(a) 113.9 cm (b) 88 cm ⇒ ρ −ρ0 = ρ0 γ∆T
(c) 68 cm (d) 6.8 cm
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 Fractional change in density of glycerin
Ans. (c): Since, the elongation is same for both the rods ∆ρ
= γ∆T = 5 × 10−4 × 40 = 200 × 10−4
( )Cu ( )Al
∆ l = ∆l ρ
l α ∆T = l α ∆T
Cu Cu Al Al
= 0.02
88 × 1.7 × 10 = l Al × 2.2 × 10 –5
–5 8. The density of water at 20oC is 998 kg/m3 and
at 40oC 992 kg/m3. The coefficient of volume
l Al = 68cm
expansion of water is
6. Coefficient of linear expansion of brass and 20°C hej peue keâe IevelJe 998kg/m3 Deewj 40°C hej
steel rods are α1 and α2. Lengths of brass and
992 kg/m3 nw~ peue keâe DeeÙeleve Øemeej iegCeebkeâ nw-
steel rods l 1 and l 2 respectively. If ( l1 − l 2 ) (a) 10−4 / o C (b) 3 ×10−4 / o C
maintained same at all temperatures, which
one of the following relations holds (c) 2 ×10−4 / o C (d) 6 ×10−4 / o C
good?/heerleue (yeÇeme) Deewj mšerue keâer ÚÌ[eW kesâ NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
DevegowOÙe& Øemeej kesâ iegCeebkeâ ›eâceMe: α1 Deewj α2 nw~ heerleue Ans. (b) : Given
3
Deewj mšerue keâer ÚÌ[eW keâer uecyeeF&ÙeeW ›eâceMe: l 1 Deewj Density of water = 998 kg/ m , at 20°C
3
Density of water = 992 kg/m , at 40°C
l 2 nw~ Ùeefo ( l1 − l 2 ) keâes meYeer leeheeW kesâ efueS
m
meceeve yeveeÙee peeÙes, leye veerÛes efoS ieS mebyebOeeW ceW mes ρ=
V
keâewve-mee melÙe nw?
∆ρ −∆V
(a) α1l 1 = α 2 l 2 (b) α1l 2 = α 2 l 1 =
ρ V
(c) α1l 2 = α 2 l 1 (d) α1 l 2 = α 2 l 1
2 2 2 2
∆ρ ∆V
=
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 ρ V
Ans. (a) : New length after heating is given by, 1 ∆ρ 1 ∆V
l' = l0 (1 + α ∆T) =
ρ ∆t V ∆t
Where l0 is initial length
Now, Final length of brass and steel is, And coefficient of volume expansion,
lbrass = l1(1 + α1 ∆T) ...(i) −1  ∂ρ  1  ∂V 
(β) = =   =  
lsteel= l2(1 + α2 ∆T) ...(ii) ρ  ∂T  p V  ∂T  p
Given, lbrass – lsteel= l1 – l2
From (i) and (ii) 1  998 − 992 
=  
l1 – l2 +α1 l1 ∆T – α2 l2 ∆T = l1 – l2 998  40 − 20 
α1l1 ∆T = α2l2 ∆T 6
= ≅ 3 × 10 −4 /º C
α1l1 = α2l2 998 × 20

Physics 208 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 50°C
10.3 Calorimetry (b) more than 50°C/ 50°C mes DeefOekeâ
(c) less than 50°C but greater then 0°C
9. The quantities of heat required to raise the
50°C mes keâce hejvleg 0°C mes DeefOekeâ
temperature of two solid copper spheres of
radii r1 and r2 (r1 = 1.5 r2) through 1 K are in (d) 0°C
the ratio: NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
r1 Deewj r2 ef$epÙeeDeeW (r1 = 1.5 r2) kesâ oes keâe@hej kesâ "esme Ans. (b) : Let θ be the final common temperature
ieesueeW kesâ leehe ceW 1 K keâer Je=efæ keâjves kesâ efueS further, let Sc and Sh be the average heat capacities of
DeeJeMÙekeâ T<ceeDeeW keâer cee$eeDeeW keâe Devegheele nw: the cold and hot (initially) bodies respectively
9 3 Where Sc < Sh since for high temperature heat capacity
(a) (b) is high.
4 2
From, principle of calorimetry
5 27
(c) (d) Heat lost = heat gained
3 8
Sh (100ºC – θ) = Sc (θ–0º)
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Sh 100º
Ans. (d) : ∆Q (Change in heat) ⇒ θ= × 100º C =
S h + Sc S
Q = ms∆T 1+ c
Where, m = mass Sh
s = specific heat capacity Sc  Sc 
∆T = change in temperature 1+ <2 Q < 1
Sh  Sh 
Specific heat capacity will be same for both the copper
spheres, let it be ‘s’ and ∆T = 1K. 100º C
Qθ > or θ > 50º C.
Density = mass/volume 2
As both are made up of copper so they have same 11. A piece of ice falls from a height h so that it
density. Let it be D. melts completely. Only one-quarter of the heat
4 produced is absorbed by the ice and all energy
The volume of 1st sphere = πr13
3 of ice gets converted into heat during its fall.
4 The value of h is :
Volume of 2nd sphere = πr23 [ Latent heat of ice is 3.4×105 J/kg and g = 10
3
N/kg]/yeHe&â keâe keâesF& šgkeâÌ[e TBÛeeF& h mes Fme Øekeâej
4 3
πr efiejlee nw efkeâ Jen hetCe&le: efheIeue peelee nw~ Glhevve nesves
∆Q1 D × V1 × 1 Q1  3 1 
= = ⇒ =  Jeeueer G<cee keâe kesâJeue Skeâ-ÛeewLeeF& Yeeie ner yeHe&â Éeje
∆Q 2 D × V2 × 1 Q2  4 3 
 πr2  DeJeMeesef<ele efkeâÙee peelee nw leLee yeHe&â keâer mecemle Tpee&
3 
3 Fmekesâ efiejles meceÙe T<cee ceW ™heevleefjle nes peeleer nw~ Ùeefo
∆Q1  r1 
=  yeHe&â keâer ieghle T<cee 3.4×105 J/kg leLee g = 10 N/kg
∆Q 2  r2 
3
nw, lees TBÛeeF& h keâe ceeve nw :
∆Q1  3  3 (a) 68 km (b) 34 km
=  Q r1 = 1.5r2 = r2 (Given)
∆Q 2  2  2 (c) 544 km (d) 136 km
∆Q1 27 NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
= Ans. (d) : Using energy balance,
∆Q2 8
mgh
10. Two identical bodies are made of a material for = mL
4
which the heat capacity increases with
Here mL = Heat used for complete melting of ice
temperature. One of these is at 100°C. while
the other one is at 0°C. If the two bodies are mgh = Gravitational potential energy
brought into contact, then assuming no heat mgh
= mL
loss, the final common temperature is 4
oes meJe&mece efheb[ Skeâ Ssmes heoeLe& kesâ yeves nQ efpevekeâer T<cee 10 × h
= 3.4 × 105
Oeeefjlee leehe kesâ meeLe yeÌ{ peeleer nw ~ FveceW mes Skeâ efheb[ keâe 4
leehe 100°C nw leLee otmejs keâe 0°C nw ~ Ùeefo Fve oesveeW keâes h = 0.4 × 3.4 ×105 m
mecheke&â ceW jKee peeS Deewj Fme Øeef›eâÙee ceW T<cee keâe #eÙe ve h = 136 km
nes, lees oesveeW efheb[eW keâe GYeÙeefve‰ leehe nesiee -
Physics 209 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12. Steam at 100°C is passed into 20 g of water at (a) 31ºC (b) 22ºC
10°C. When water acquires a temperature of (c) 19ºC (d) 15ºC
80°C, the mass of water present will be. AIPMT-1988
[Take specific heat of water = 1 cal g–1 °C–1 Ans. (b) : Heat loss by tumbler Q1 = 55 (40 – T) cal
and latent heat of steam = 540 cal g–1] Heat gain by ice to melt at 0ºC
10°C leehe kesâ, 20 g peue ceW, 100°C keâer Jee<he iegpejleer Q2 = mice L = 10 × 80
nw peue keâe leehe 80°C nesves hej GheefmLele peue keâe = 800 cal
õJÙeceeve efkeâlevee nesiee? Heat gain by melted water to attain temperature T
[peue keâer efJeefMe° T<cee 1 cal g–1 °C–1 leLee Jee<he keâer Q3 = 10 × 1 × (T – 0)
ieghle T<cee = 540 cal g ] –1 = 10 × 1 × T
= 10 T cal
(a) 24 g (b) 31.5 g
For equilibrium
(c) 42.5 g (d) 22.5 g
Heat loss = Heat gain
AIPMT-06.05.2014 55 (40 – T) = 800 + 10 T
Ans. (d) : Steam at 100°C, Water acquires = 20g, 11 (40 – T) = 160 + 2 T
temperature = 80°C 440 – 11 T = 160 + 2 T
Given- Specific heat of water = 1 calg–1°C–1 440 – 160 = 13 T
Latent heat of steam = 540 calg–1 280
Q Heat gain by water = Heat loss by steam T=
13
mwSw∆Tw = mL + mSw∆T T = 21.53ºC
20×1×(80–10) = m×540+m×1×(100–80)
T ≈ 22º C
1400 = 560m
1400
m= = 2.5g (This mass is converted from steam) 10.4 Heat Transfer (Conduction,
560
Total mass of water = 20+2.5 = 22.5 g Convection & Radiation)
13. Thermal capacity of 40 g of aluminium (s = 0.2
cal/g K) is 15. Two rods one made of copper and other made
40 g SsuegefceefveÙece keâer T<ceerÙe Oeeefjlee (s = 0.2 of steel of the same length and same cross
sectional area are joined together. The thermal
kewâueesjer/«eece kesâefuJeve) nw: conductivity of copper and steel are 385 J s–1
(a) 168 J/K (b) 672 J/K K–1 m–1 and 50J s–1 K–1 m–1 respectively. The
(c) 840 J/K (d) 33.6 J/K free ends of copper and steel are held at 100°C
AIPMT-1990 and 0°C respectively. The temperature at the
Ans. (d) : Given data junction is nearly:
Mass of aluminium, m = 40 g meceeve uecyeeF& SJeb meceeve DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue Jeeueer
Specific heat, s = 0.2 cal/gK oes ÚÌ[eW keâes Skeâ meeLe pees[e peelee nw, efpemeceW Skeâ leeByes
We know that mes yeveer nw SJeb otmejer mšerue mes~ leeByes SJeb mšerue keâer
Thermal capacity = ms T<ceerÙe Ûeeuekeâlee ›eâceMe: 385 J s–1 K–1 m–1 SJeb 50J
= 40 g × 0.2 cal/gK s–1 K–1 m–1 nw~ leeByes SJeb mšerue kesâ cegòeâ efmejeW keâes
=8 cal/K ›eâceMe: 100°C SJeb 0°C hej jKee peelee nw~ mebefOe hej
∵ (1 cal/K = 4.2 J/K) leeheceeve ueieYeie nesiee:
= 8 × 4.2 J/K
(a) 12°C (b) 50°C
= 33.6 J/K (c) 73°C (d) 88.5°C
14. 10 gm of ice cubes at 0ºC are released in a NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
tumbler (water equivalent 55 g) at 40ºC.
Assuming that negligible heat is taken from the Ans. (d) : Let the length and area of each rod be l and
surroundings, the temperature of water in A respectively. Also the temperature at the junction is T
As the two rods are connected in series with each other,
tumbler becomes nearely (L = 80 cal/g)
thus rate of heat flow through the rods must be equal.
0ºC hej 10 «eece yehe&â Skeâ yele&ve (peue leguÙeebkeâ 55
«eece) ceW [eue oer peeleer nw efpemekeâe leehe 40ºC nw~ ceevee
efkeâ heefjJesMe mes keâesF& T<cee Devoj mLeeveebleefjle veneR nesleer 0
nw, lees yele&ve ceW heeveer keâe leeheceeve nes peelee nw: (L = 80
cal/g) H1 = H2
Physics 210 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
K cu A [100 − θ] K steel A [ θ − 0] Where, Q = heat
= A = Surface area
l l
∆T = change in temperature
385 [100 – θ] = 50 [θ – 0]
∆x = change in thickness.
θ = 88.5°C [junction temperature]
Given that: Initial temperature (T1) = – 26ºC
16. Three stars A, B, C have surface temperatures
Final temperature (T2) = 0ºC
TA, TB, TC respectively. Star A appears bluish,
Heat required to change the state from water to ice is –
star B appears reddish and star C yellowish.
Hence, Q = mL .....(ii)
leerve leejeW A, B Deewj C kesâ he=‰erÙe leehe ›eâceMe: TA, TB, The density is written as–
m
Deewj TC leeje A veeruee, leeje B jòeâeYe leLee C Øeleerle ρ=
V
neslee nw~ Dele:
m = ρAdx ...(iii)
(a) TA > TC > TB (b) TA > TB > TC
Now equation (i) can be written as–
(c) TB > TC > TA (d) TC > TB > TA
∆T ∆T
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II mL = KA dt ⇒ ρAdxL = KA dt .....(iv)
AIPMT-03.05.2015 ∆x ∆x
Put the given values in equation (iv) we get–
Ans. (a) : Three stars A, B, C have surface temp. TA,
⇒ ρAdxL = KA  (
TB, TC respectively.  0 − −26 ) 
 dt
Star A appears bluish, B appears reddish and C appears  x −0 
yellowish 26
Now, from wein's displacement Law- ⇒ ρAdxL = KA dt
x
b
λ= dx 26K
T ⇒ =
dt ρxL
We know, λ blue < λ yellow < λ Re d ⇒ λ A < λ C < λ B
18. The power radiated by a black body is P and it
1 radiates maximum energy at wavelength, λ0. If
Since λ ∝
T the temperature of the black body is now
TA > TC > TB changed so that it radiates maximum energy at
17. A deep rectangular pond of surface area A, 3
wavelength λ 0 , the power radiated by it
containing water (density = ρ, specific heat 4
capacity = s), is located in a region where the becomes nP. The value of n is
outside air temperature is at a steady value of – efkeâmeer ke=âef<Cekeâe Éeje efJeefkeâefjle Meefòeâ P nw leLee Ùen
26°C. The thickness of the frozen ice layer in
this pond, at a certain instant is x.
lejbieowOÙe&, λ0 hej DeefOekeâlece Tpee& efJeefkeâefjle keâjleer nw~
Taking the thermal conductivity of ice as K, Deye Ùeefo Fme ke=âef<Cekeâe keâe leehe heefjJeefle&le keâj efoÙee
and its specific latent heat of fusion as L, the 3
peelee nw, efpememes efkeâ Ùen λ 0 , lejbieowIÙe& hej
rate of increase of the thickness of ice layer, at 4
this instant, would be given by DeefOekeâlece Tpee& efJeefkeâefjle keâjleer nw, lees Fmekesâ ôeje
he=‰erÙe #es$eheâue A kesâ efkeâmeer ienjs DeeÙeleekeâej leeueeye, efJeefkeâefjle Meefòeâ nP nes peeleer nw~ n keâe ceeve nesiee
efpemeceW peue (IevelJe = ρ, efJeefMe° T<cee Oeeefjlee = s) 3 4
Yeje nw, ceW keâesF& Ssmee #es$e heeÙee peelee nw efpemekesâ yeenj (a) (b)
4 3
keâer JeeÙeg keâe mLeeÙeer leehe –26°C nw~ Fme leeueeye ceW yehe&â 81 256
keâer peceer hejle keâer efkeâmeer #eCe ceesšeF& x nw~ (c) (d)
256 81
yehe&â keâer T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee keâe ceeve K leLee ieueve keâer NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
efJeefMe° ieghle T<cee L uesles ngS, Fme #eCe yehe&â keâer hejle Ans. (d) : We know,
keâer ceesšeF& ceW Je=efæ keâer oj nesieer– λ max T = constant (Wien’s Law)
(a) 26K/ρx(L + 4s) (b) 26K/ρx(L – 4s) So, λ max T1 = λ max 2 T2
(c) 26K/(ρx2L) (d) 26K/(ρxL)
3λ
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) λ0T = 0 T '
4
Ans. (d) : The equation of the heat is written as-
4
 ∆T  T'= T
Q = KA   dt .....(i) 3
 ∆ x 
Physics 211 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Power radiated initially, P1= σAεT4, (a) 225 (b) 450
Power radiated after changing wavelength, (c) 1000 (d) 1800
4 NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
 4T 
P2 = σAε ×   Ans. (d) : As per Stefan's Boltzmann law the emmissive
 3 
power or Power radiated, P = 4πr2σT4
Where, P = Power
P ∝ r2T4
T = Temperature
4 4 For two given sphere-
P2  T '   4  256
So, =  =  = 2
P2  R 2   T2 
4

P1  T   3  81 ∴ =   
P 1  R 1   T1 
19. Two rods A and B of different materials are
2 4
welded together as shown in figure. Their 1 2
thermal conductivities are K1and K2. The =   × 
2 1
thermal conductivity of the composite rod will
be/efJeefYeVe heoeLeeX keâer yeveer oes ÚÌ[eW A Deewj B keâes, P2
=4
DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej Deeheme ceW Jewu[ keâj peesÌ[ P1
efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Fve ÚÌ[eW keâer T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee ›eâceMe: K1 P2 = 4P1 = 4 × 450
leLee K2 nQ~ lees, Fvemes yeveer mebÙegòeâ ÚÌ[ keâer T<cee P2 = 1800 Watt
Ûeeuekeâlee nesieer:
21. A black body is at a temperature of 5760 K.
The energy of radiation emitted by the body at
wavelength 250 nm is U1, at wavelength 500
nm is U2 and that at 1000 nm is U3 Wien's
constant, b = 2.88 ×106 nmK. Which of the
following is correct?
K1 + K 2 3(K1 + K 2 ) keâesF& keâefCekeâe 5760 K leehe hej nQ~ Fme efheC[ Éeje
(a) (b)
2 2 Glmeefpe&le efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer Tpee&, lejbieowOÙe& 250 nm hej
(c) K1+ K2 (d) 2 (K1+ K2) U1 lejbieowOÙe& 500 nm hej U2 leLee lejbieowOÙe& 1000 nm
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
hej U3 nw~ Jeerve-efveÙeleebkeâ, b = 2.88 ×106 nmK nw~
Ans. (a) : The temperature difference across both the
rods are same. So it can be assumed that their thermal veerÛes efoÙee ieÙee keâewve mee mebyebOe mener nw?
resistance are connected in parallel. (a) U2 > U1 (b) U1 = 0
d (c) U 3 = 0 (d) U1 > U2
Resistance of Rod A (RA) = NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
K1A
Where, A = Area of Rods Ans. (a) : According to Wien's law, λmT = b
Where, b = Wien’s constant = 2.88 × 106 nmK
d
Resistance of Rod B (RB) = b
K 2A λm =
T
1 1 1 KA K A
= + = 1 + 2 2.88 × 106 nmK
R eq R A R B d d λm =
5760 K
1 A ( 1 2 ) eq
K + K K .2A
λ m = 500 nm
= =
Req d d
Q λm = wavelength corresponding to maximum energy
K1 + K 2 i.e. maximum energy is at a wavelength of 500 nm
⇒ K eq =
2
20. A spherical black body with a radius of 12 cm
radiates 450 watt power at 500 K. If the radius
were halved and the temperature IS doubled,
the power radiated in watt would be:
Skeâ ieesueerÙe ke=âef<Cekeâe keâer ef$epÙee 12 mesceer. nw~ Ùen 500
K hej 450 Jeeš Meefòeâ keâe Glmepe&ve keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo
Fmekeâer ef$epÙee keâes DeeOee (1/2) leLee leehe keâes oes iegvee ⇒ U1 < U2 > U3
keâj efoÙee peeS lees Glmeefpe&le Meefòeâ keâe ceeve Jeeš ceW ⇒ U2 > U1
Hence correct answer is option (a).
nesiee:
Physics 212 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
22. Two metal wires of identical dimensions are = 110 – 100 = 10°C
connected in series. If σ1 and σ2 are the For case first Q = K (∆T1)
conductivities of the metal wires respectively, 4 = K10
the effective conductivity of the combination K = 0.4
is/meJe&mece efJemleej (ceehe) kesâ Oeeleg kesâ oes leej ßesCeer Here ∆T2 = T2 – T1
›eâce ceW pegÌ[s nQ~ Ùeefo Fve leejeW keâer Ûeeuekeâlee ›eâceMe: σ1 = 210 – 200 = 10°C
leLee σ2 nw lees, Fvekesâ Fme mebÙeespeve keâer Ûeeuekeâlee nesieer: For case second Q' = K∆T2
σ1σ2 2σ1σ 2 Q' = 0.4 × 10
(a) (b)
σ1 + σ 2 σ1 + σ 2 = 4J/s
σ + σ2 σ + σ2 24. A piece of iron is heated in a flame. It first
(c) 1 (d) 1 becomes dull red then becomes reddish yellow
2σ1σ 2 σ1σ2
and finally turns to white hot. The correct
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 explanation for the above observation is
Ans. (b) : As we know Resistance of a wire is, possible by using :-
 1 ueesns kesâ Skeâ šgkeâÌ[s keâes efkeâmeer ueew (heäuesce) hej iece&
σ = ρ  efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùen henues nukeâe ueeue, efheâj jòeâeYe
 
ρl l heeruee Deewj Devle ceW Õesle iece& nes peelee nw~ Fme Øes#eCe keâe
R= =
A σA mener mhe°erkeâjCe mebYeJe nw-
l l (a) Newton's Law of cooling
R1 = & R2 =
σ1A σ2 A vÙetšve kesâ Meerleueve efveÙece mes
For series combination (b) Stefan's Law/ mšerheâve kesâ efveÙece mes
Req = R1 + R2 (c) Wien's displacement Law
2l
=
l
+
l Jeerve kesâ efJemLeeheve efveÙece mes
σeff A σ1A σ2 A (d) Kirchoff's Law/ efkeâjÛee@Heâ kesâ efveÙece mes
2 1 1 NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
= +
σeff σ1 σ2 Ans. (c) : Wien's displacement law,
2 σ + σ1 λmT = b
= 2
σeff σ1 × σ2 Here b = constant
λm = Wavelength of radiation of
2σ1σ2
σeff = maximum intensity
σ1 + σ2
T = Temperature
23. The two ends of a metal rod are maintained at As temperature increases wavelength for which
temperatures 100ºC and 110ºC. The rate of intensity is maximum decreases. Initially T is low, so
heat flow in the rod is found to be 4.0J/s. If the λm is more which corresponds to red as T increases λ
ends are maintained at temperatures 200ºC turns to yellow and then to bluish white.
and 210ºC the rate of heat flow will be: 25. Two metal rods 1 and 2 of same lengths have
efkeâmeer ÚÌ[ kesâ oes efmejeW kesâ leeheeW keâes ›eâceMe: 100°C leLee same temperature difference between their
110°C hej jKee peelee nw, efpememes ÚÌ[ ceW T<cee keâe ends. Their thermal conductivities are K1 and
ØeJeen 4.0 J/s heeÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Fve efmejeW kesâ leeheeW K2 and cross sectional areas A1 and A2,
respectively. If the rate of heat conduction in 1
keâes ›eâceMe: 200°C leLee 210°C hej jKee peeÙe lees T<cee is four times that in 2, then
ØeJeen nesiee:- meceeve uebyeeF& keâer oes Oeeleg keâer ÚÌ[W 1 Deewj 2 kesâ efmejeW
(a) 16.8 J/s (b) 8.0 J/s kesâ yeerÛe leeheceeve keâe Deblej meceeve nw~ Gvekeâer G<ceerÙe
(c) 4.0 J/s (d) 44.0 J/s
Ûeeuekeâlee ›eâceMe: K1 Deewj K2 nQb Deewj DevegØemLe #es$eheâue
AIPMT-03.05.2015
A1 Deewj A2 nw~ Ùeefo G<cee Ûeeueve keâer oj ÚÌ[ 1 ceW ÚÌ[
Ans. (c) : Given Q = 4J/s
2 keâer Ûeej iegvee nw, lees-
KA∆T
Rate of heat flow Q = (a) K1A1 = K2 A2 (b) K1A1 = 4K 2 A2
L
Since K, A and L remains constant ∴Q ∝∆T (c) K1A1 = 2K 2 A2 (d) 4K1A1 = K 2 A2
Here ∆T1 = T2 – T1 NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka

Physics 213 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : We know that rate of heat conduction dT = change in temperature
KA∆T 4.8 × 3.36 × 105 × 0.1
Q= K= J/m/s/ºC
L 3600 × 0.36 × 100
Where K = thermal Conductivity K = 1.24 J/m/s/ºC
Q = Amount of heat transfer 27. If the radius of a star is R and it acts as a black
L = Distance between two isothermal planes body, what would be the temperature of the
A = Area of surface star, in which the rate of energy production is
∆T = Difference in temperature Q?
Given Condition Ùeefo efkeâmeer leejs ceW Tpee& Glheeove keâer oj Q nw Deewj
Q1 = 4Q2 Gmekeâer ef$epÙee R nw Deewj Jen Skeâ ke=âef<Cekeâe keâer lejn
K1A1∆T 4K 2 A 2 ∆T JÙeJenej keâjlee nw lees, Gmekeâe leehe efkeâlevee nesiee?
=
L L (a) (4πR2Q/σ)1/4 (b) (Q/4πR2σ)1/4
K l A1 = 4K 2 A 2 (c) Q/4πR σ
2
(d) (Q/4πR2σ)–1/2
26. A slab of stone of area 0.36 m2 and thickness 0.1 (σ stands for Stefan's constant/σ mšerheâve efveÙeleebkeâ nw)
m is exposed on the lower surface to steam at AIPMT (Screening)-2012
100ºC. A block of ice at 0ºC rests on the upper Ans. (b) : Given, radius of star = 'R' & star is acting as
surface of the slab. In one hour 4.8 kg of ice is a black body.
melted. The thermal conductivity of slab is: According to Stefan's Boltzmann law, "Amount of
(Given latent heat of fusion of ice 3.36 × 105 J radiation emitted per unit time from area A of a black
kg–1):/helLej keâer Skeâ muewye (heefókeâe) keâe #es$eheâue body at absolute temperature T is directly proportional
0.36 ceer2 nw Deewj Gmekeâer ceesšeF& 0.1 ceer nw~ Fmekeâer to fourth power of temperature."
efveÛeueer melen (he=‰) 100ºC keâer Yeehe kesâ mecheke&â ceW nw i.e. Q = σAT4
Deewj Fmekeâer Thejer melen hej 0ºC keâer yehe&â keâer Skeâ muewye W
Where, σ = Stefan's constant = 5.67 ×10–8
jKeer nw~ efpememes Skeâ Iebšs ceW 4.8 kg yehe&â efheIeue peeleer nw~ m 2K 4
1 1
Ùeefo yehe&â kesâ mebieueve keâer ieghle T<cee 3.36×105 J kg–1  Q 4  Q 4
nes lees, helLej kesâ muewye keâer T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee ∴ Temperature (T) =   = 
 σA   σ4πR 2 
28. The rate of increase of thermo-e.m.f. with
(a) 2.05 J/m/s/ºC (b) 1.02 J/m/s/ºC temperature at the neutral temperature of a
(c) 1.24 J/m/s/ºC (d) 1.29 J/m/s/ºC thermocouple : /efkeâmeer leehe JewÅegle Ùegice kesâ Goemeerve
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 leehe hej leehe JewÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue keâer Je=efæ keâer oj :
Ans. (c) : Given that
(a) is negative/$e+Ceelcekeâ nesleer nw
Latent heat of fusion of ice,
(b) is positive/Oeveelcekeâ nesleer nw
Lf = 3.36 × 105 JKg–1, dT = 1 hour = 3600 sec
m = 4.8 Kg (c) is zero/MetvÙe nesleer nw
x = 0.1 m (d) depends upon the choice of the two materials
A = 0.36 m2 of the thermocouple/leehe JewÅegle Ùegice kesâ oesveeW
T1 = 100ºC heoeLeeX kesâ ÛeÙeve hej efveYe&j keâjleer nw
T2 = 0ºC AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Where, Ans. (c) : Governing equation of Thermo e.m.f.
x = thickness of the slab e = at + bt2
A = area of cross -section of slab de
m = mass of the slab We know = a + 2bt
dt
Lf = latent heat of fusion At neutral temperature the rate of increase of thermo-
dQ = change in heat de
By heat conduction equation, e.m.f. with temperature, =0
dt
dQ KA ( T1 − T2 ) 29. The thermo e.m.f. 'E' in volts of a certain
=
dT x thermocouple is found to vary with
Where, temperature difference θ in °C between the two
K = thermal conductivity of slab. junctions according to the relation

Physics 214 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer leehe–JewÅegle Ùegice keâe Jeesuš ceW leehe–efJeÅegle Where 'K' is thermal Conductivity of Material Rod,
Jeenkeâ yeue E. °C ceW oesveeW mebefOeÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe leeheevlej θ Q A r2
∝ ∝ - - - -(i)
hej Fme Øekeâej efveYe&j keâjlee nw~ t l l
θ2 As per given condition metallic rod is melted and
E = 30θ − material is formed into a rod of half the radius
15
V1 = V2
The neutral temperature for the thermo-couple
will be ⇒ πr2l1 = πr22 l2 (r1 = r)
Fme leehe–JewÅegle Ùegice keâe Goemeerve leehe nesiee –  r
Q r2 = 
(a) 450°C (b) 400°C  2
(c) 225°C (d) 30°C l
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 l1 = 2 - - - -(ii)
4
Ans. (c) : The thermo e.m.f. = E From eqn (i) and (ii), we get
Given relation Q r 2 l 2 r 2 4l1
2 = × = ×
θ Q2 l1 r22 l1  r 2
E = 30 θ –  
15 2
Differentiating with respect to θ. Q
= 16
dE 2θ dE Q2
= 30 – (At neutral temp. =0
dθ 15 dθ Q
Q2 =
2θ 16
0 = 30 –
15 31. The total radiant energy per unit area, normal
30 × 15 to the direction of incidence, received at a
θ= distance R from the centre of a star of radius r,
2
whose outer surface radiates as a black body at
θ = 225º C a temperature 'T' K is given by –
30. A cylindrical metallic rod in thermal contact Skeâ r ef$epÙee kesâ leejs kesâ Øeefle FkeâeF& #es$eHeâue mes
with two reservoirs of heat at its two ends efJeefkeâefjle kegâue Tpee&, Deeheleve keâer efoMee kesâ uecyeJeled
conducts an amount of heat Q in time t. The kesâvõ mes otjer R hej, efkeâleveer nesieer ? leejs keâer yeeåe melen
metallic rod is melted and the material is formed keâe leehe 'T' K nw leLee Ùen keâef<Cekeâe Jemleg keâer lejn
into a rod of half the radius of the original rod.
efJeefkeâjCe efJeefkeâefjle keâjleer nw –
What is the amount of heat conducted by the
new rod, when placed in thermal contact with (a) σr2T4/R2 (b) σ r2T4/4πr2
4 4 4
the two reservoirs in time t ? (c) σ r T /r (d) 4π σ r2T4/R2
Skeâ yesueveekeâej OeeeflJekeâ ÚÌ[ Fmekesâ oesveeW Devle: efmejs oes (Where σ is Stefan's Constant)
ŒeesleeW kesâ mecheke&â ceW nw leLee FmeceW t meceÙe ceW T<cee keâer (peneB σ mšerHeâve efveÙeleebkeâ nw)
Q cee$ee keâe Ûeeueve neslee nw~ OeeeflJekeâ ÚÌ[ keâes ieueekeâj AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Fme heoeLe& Éeje hetJe& ÚÌ[ keâer DeeOeer ef$epÙee keâer Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ans. (a) : Let r is the radius of star and T is
efveefce&le keâer peeleer nw~ peye veF& ÚÌ[ keâes oesveeW ŒeesleeW kesâ temperature. Energy emitted by star per second through
ceOÙe efmLele efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees veF& ÚÌ[ Éeje t meceÙe ceW the radiation in accordance with Stefan's law will be
given as
Ûeeueve keâer ieF& T<cee keâer cee$ee nw ?
E = AσΤ4
Q Q = 4πr2σT4
(a) (b)
4 16 In reaching a distance R energy will spread over the
Q sphere of radius 'R'. So the intensity of radiation will be
(c) 2Q (d)
2 given by,
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 E 4πr 2 σT 4
S= =
Ans. (b) : At the steady state amount of heat flowing 4πR 2
4πR 2
from one face to other face in time t is given by
4πr 2 σT 4 r 2 σT 4
KA(θ1 − θ 2 )t S= or S =
Q= 4πR 2 R2
l
Physics 215 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
32. The two ends of a rod of length L and a Heat transfer by radiation Q ∝ T4
uniform cross-sectional area A are kept at two 4 4
temperatures T1 and T2 (T1 > T2). The rate of so Q 2 =  T2  ⇒ Q =  1000  .7
2  
dQ Q1  T1   500 
heat transfer, through the rod in a steady
dt Q2 = 16×7 = 112
state is given by:/uecyeeF& L Deewj DeÛej DevegØemLe 34. Assuming the sun to have a spherical outer
keâeš #es$eheâue A keâer Skeâ ÚÌ[ kesâ oes efmejeW kesâ oes surface of radius r, radiating like a black body
leeheceeveeW T1 Deewj T2 (peyeefkeâ T1 > T2 nw) hej efvejvlej at temperature tºC, the power received by a
jKee pee jne nw~ efmLej DeJemLee ceW ÚÌ[ ceW mes T<cee kesâ unit surface, (normal to the incident rays) at
distance R from the centre of the Sun is:-
dQ
mLeeveevlejCe keâer oj nesieer~ Where σ is the Stefan's Constant.
dt
Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ metÙe& r ef$epÙee keâe ieesueekeâej yeenjer
dQ kA ( T1 − T2 )
(a) = leue jKelee nw Deewj leeheceeve tºC hej Skeâ ke=â<Ce efheb[ keâer
dt L
lejn ØekeâerCe&ve keâjlee nw, metÙe& kesâvõ mes R otjer hej
dQ kL ( T1 − T2 )
(b) = Deeheeflele efkeâjCeeW kesâ uecye efoMee ceW efkeâmeer Skeâ cee$e leue
dt A
Éeje Øeehle keâer ieF& Meefòeâ nesieer:-
dQ k ( T1 − T2 ) ( σ = efmšHeâve efveÙeleebkeâ)
(c) =
dt LA
(a) r2σ (t + 273)4/R2 (b) 4πr2σt4/R2
dQ
(d) = kLA ( T1 − T2 ) (c) r σ (t + 273) /4πR (d) 16π2r2σ t4/R2
2 4 2
dt
AIMPT-2009 AIPMT-2007
Ans. (a) : Ans. (a) : Given -
Outer surface radius = r
Temperature = tºC
Power at distance R = ?
Let Heat transfer by induction dQ ∝ temp difference
1
⇒ dQ ∝ Area ∝
Thickness
A ∆T K.A ∆T
So dQ ∝ ⇒ dQ =
x x
dQ
So rate of heat transfer through rod in steady state
dt
dQ K.A(T1 − T2 )
⇒ = We know power received per unit area is Intensity
dt L
P P
33. A black body at 227ºC radiates heat at the rate So, I = = at distance R from sun surface.
2
of 7 cals/cm s. At a temperature of 727ºC, the A 4 πR2
rate of heat radiated in the same units will be :/ From Stefan's law the rate of energy radiated from sun
227ºC leeheceeve hej Skeâ ke=â<Ce efheb[ 7 cals/cm2s. keâer surface, P = σAT4 .
oj mes T<cee keâe efJeefkeâjCeve keâjlee nw~ 727ºC leeheceeve P = σ × 4 πr 2 ( t + 273 )
4

hej Fvner cee$ekeâeW ceW Fme efheb[ kesâ T<cee efJeefkeâjCeve keâer So power received by unit surface,
oj nesieer :
P σ × 4πr ( t + 273) σr 2 ( t + 273)
2 4 4

(a) 80 (b) 60 = =
A 4πR 2 R2
(c) 50 (d) 112
35. A black body is at 727ºC. It emits energy at a
AIMPT-2009
rate which is proportional to:
Ans. (d) : Given,
Skeâ ke=â<Ce 727ºC efheb[ hej nw~ Ùen Tpee& keâe efJeefkeâjCe
T1 = 227 + 273 = 500K
Gme oj hej keâjsiee pees Devegheeleer nesiee:-
dQ cal
Q1= =7 (a) (727)4 (b) (727)2
dt cm 2
(c) (1000)4 (d) (1000)2
T2 = 727 °C = 1000 K
AIPMT-2007
Physics 216 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c) : For Black Body, (b) be reduced by a factor of 4
According to Stefan's law- 4 kesâ iegCekeâ mes keâce nes peeÙesieer~
Energy emitted by radiation, E b = σT 4 (where T is (c) be reduced by a factor of 8
Kelvin) 8 kesâ iegCekeâ mes keâce nes peeÙesieer~
Given temperature T = 727+273= 1000K (d) be reduced by a factor of 16
So, E b ∝ (1000 )
4 16 kesâ iegCekeâ mes keâce nes peeÙesieer~
AIPMT-2007
36. If the cold junction of a thermo-couple is kept
at 0ºC and the hot junction is kept at TºC, then Ans. (b) : Given power of the source P0 = 5W
the relation between neutral temperature (Tn) ri = 0.5m
and temperature of inversion (Ti) is: rf = 1m
Ùeefo efkeâmeer T<ceerÙe Ùegice kesâ "b[s peesÌ[ keâes 0ºC hej Deewj
iejce peesÌ[ keâes TºC hej jKee peeÙes lees Fme Ùegice kesâ
efueÙes Goemeerve (vÙetš^ue) leehe (Tn) Deewj Øeefleueesce
(FveJeMe&j) leehe (Ti) keâe hejmhej mecyevOe nesiee-
(a) Tn = Ti + T (b) Tn = Ti/2
(c) Tn = 2Ti (d) Tn = Ti – T
AIPMT-2007 No. of photo electrons emitted(ne) ∝ no of photons
Ans. (b) : Given: Thermocouple cold junction temp incident (np)
TC = 0º C No. of photons incident ∝ intensity.
Hot junction temp Th = T °C Power 1
Intensity = ⇒ I∝ 2
Neutral temp = Tn 4πr 2
r
Inversion temp = Ti 1
So, ne ∝ 2
For thermocouple, r
Ti − Tn = Tn − Tc 2
n i  rf   1 
2

=  = 
Ti − Tn = Tn − 0 n f  ri   0.5 
Ti = 2Tn ni  1 
2

⇒ =  =4
Ti nf  1 2 
` Tn =
2 ni
⇒ n i = 4n f or n f =
4
So, no of photo electrons will be reduced by a factor of 4.
38. A black body at 1227ºC emits radiations with
maximum intensity at a wavelength of 5000Å.
The temperature of the body is increased by
1000ºC, the maximum intensity will be observe
at:-/1227 ºC hej Skeâ keâ=<Ce efheb[ efJeefkeâjCe Glmepe&ve
37. A 5 watt source emits monochromatic light of keâjlee nw efpemeceW DeefOekeâlece efJeefkeâjCe heäuekeäme IevelJe kesâ
wavelength 5000 Å. When placed 0.5 m away, it
5000 Å lejbieowOÙe& hej neslee nw~ Ùeefo efheb[ keâe leehe
liberates photoelectrons from a photosensitive
metallic surface. When the source is moved to a 1000ºC mes yeÌ{e efoÙee peeS, lees DeefOekeâlece efJeefkeâjCe
distance of 1.0m. The number of photo heäuekeäme IevelJe osKee peeSiee:-
electrons liberated will : (a) 4000Å (b) 5000Å
5 Jeeš keâe Skeâ œeesle 5000 Å lejbieowOÙe& kesâ Skeâ JeCeea (c) 6000Å (d) 3000Å
ØekeâeMe keâe Glmepe&ve keâjlee nw~ 0.5m keâer otjer hej jKeves AIPMT-2006
mes Ùen Skeâ ØekeâeMe me›eâerÙe OeelJeer leue mes ØekeâeMeer Ans. (d) : Temperature of black body T1 = 1227 °C +
Fueskeäš^e@ve cegòeâ keâjlee nw peye Œeesle keâes leue mes 1.0m 273 = 1500 K
keâer otjer hej ues peeÙee peeÙesiee:- Wave length λ m1 = 5000 Å
(a) be reduced by a factor of 2 T2 = 1500 + 1000 = 2500 K
2 kesâ iegCekeâ mes keâce nes peeÙesieer~ λ m2 = ?

Physics 217 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
According to wein's displacement law λm × T = b = JÙeefòeâ kesâ Mejerj mes Glmeeefpe&le nesves Jeeues efJeefkeâjCeeW kesâ
constant yeejs ceW efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw:
λ m1 T1 = λ m2 T2 (a) The radiation emitted is in the infrared region
λ m1 T1 5000 × 1500 efJeefkeâjCe DeJejòeâ #es$e ceW nesles nQ
λ m2 = = (b) The radiation is emitted only during the day
T2 2500 K
= 3000 Å efJeefkeâjCe kesâJeue efove kesâ meceÙe Glmeeefpe&le nesles nQ~
39. The temperature of inversion of a (c) The radiation is emitted during the summers
thermocouple is 620ºC and the neutral and absorbed during the winters
temperature is 300ºC. What is the temperature efJeefkeâjCe «eer<ce $e+leg ceW Mejerj mes Glmeefpe&le nesles nQ Deewj
of cold junction : Meerle $e+leg ceW Mejerj ceW Meesef<ele nesles nQ~
Skeâ T<ceerÙe Ùegice keâe Øeleerheve leeheceeve 620ºC nw Deewj (d) The radiation emitted lies in the ultraviolet
Fmekeâe Goemeerve leeheceeve 300ºC nw~ Fmekesâ "b[s peesÌ[ keâe region and hence is not visible/efJeefkeâjCe hejeyeQieveer
leeheceeve keäÙee nesiee :- #es$e ceW nesles nQ Deewj FmeefueS efoKeeF& veneR osles
(a) 40ºC (b) 20ºC AIPMT-2003
(c) 320ºC (d) –20ºC Ans. (a): All the bodies in the universe emit the
AIPMT-2005 radiations. The reason is that the atoms inside the body
Ans. (d) : Given keep on vibrating, so they undergo acceleration.
Therefore, the charges present inside it are also
Tn = 300ºC
accelerated and produces the electromagnetic radiation.
Ti = 620º C
Wavelength of emitted radiations is inversely
Let To' be temperature of cold junction and 'Tn' be proportional to the temperature of the body.
neutral temperature let 'Ti' be temperature of inversion
b
Tn − T0 = Ti − Tn λ= ...(i)
T
300 −T0 = 620 −300
Now, we know that the temperature of human body is
600 − T0 = 620 T = 37ºC = 310K
T0 = 600 − 620 Substituting in (i) we get –
⇒ T0 = −20º C b
λ=
40. If λm denotes the wavelength at which the 310
radioactive emission from a black body at a We know that b = 2898 µmK
temperature T K is maximum, then :- 2898
∴ λ= =
Ùeefo leehe T K hej Skeâ ke=â<Ce efheb[ mes Glmeefpe&le 310
efJeefkeâjCeve keâe DeefOekeâlece lejbieowOÙe& λm nes, lees :- λ = 9.345 µm (infrared region)
(a) λm is independent of T 42. Consider a compound slab consisting of two
different materials having equal thicknesses
T kesâ ØeYeej mes λm cegòeâ nesiee and thermal conductivities K and 2K
(b) λm ∝ T/λm ∝ T nesiee respectively. The equivalent thermal
(c) λm ∝ T / λ m ∝ T nesiee
–1 –1 conductivity of the slab is –
›eâceMe: K Deewj 2K T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee Jeeues leLee meceeve
(d) λm ∝ T–4/ λ m ∝ T–4 nesiee
ceesšeF& kesâ oes efYeVe heoeLeeX keâer Skeâ mebÙegòeâ heefókeâ nw~
AIPMT-2004 heefó^keâ keâer leguÙe T<cee Ûeeuekeâlee nesieer-
Ans. (c) : According to wein's displacement law,
λm × T = b (a) 2/6 K (b) 2K
Where, b = wein's constant (c) 3K (d) 4/3 K
AIPMT-2003
b
λm = Ans. (d): The quantity of heat flowing across a slab in
T
time t-
1
λm ∝ KA∆θ
T Q=
l
λ m ∝ T −1 Here-
K = Thermal conductivity
41. We consider the radiation emitted by the
A = Area of slab
human body. Which of the following
l = Thickness
statements is true:
Physics 218 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For same heat flow through each slab and composite D max = Wavelength peak
slab, we have T = Absolute temperature
K1A ( ∆θ1 ) K 2 A ( ∆θ2 ) K 'A ( ∆θ1 + ∆θ2 ) λ T =b
= =
l l 2l ∴ It expresses relation between wavelength
K'
or K1∆θ1 = K 2 ∆θ 2 = ( ∆θ1 + ∆θ2 ) = C (say) corresponding to maximum energy & temperature.
2 44. Which of the following is best close to an ideal
C C black body
So ∆θ1 = , ∆θ2 =
K1 K2 efvecve ceW mes keâewve DeeoMe& keâef<Cekeâe Jemleg kesâ meefVekeâš nQ -
2C (a) Black lamp / yuewkeâ uewche
( ∆θ1 + ∆θ2 ) = (b) Cavity maintained at constant temperature
K'
C C 2C efveÙele leehe hej iegefnkeâe
+ =
K1 K 2 K ' (c) Platinum black / huesefšvece yuewkeâ
 K + K 2  2C (d) A lump of charcoal heated to high temp.
C 1 = GÛÛe leehe hej Skeâ keâesÙeues keâe šgkeâÌ[e
 K1 K 2  K '
AIPMT-2002
2K1K 2
K' = Ans. (b) : Black Body-
K1 + K 2
K1 = K, K2 = 2K
2K × 2K
K' =
K + 2K
4 An ideal black body is one which absorbs all the
K'= K incident radiation without reflecting or transmitting any
3
part of it. Black lamp absorbs 96% of incident
43. The Wien's displacement law express relation radiations.
between ⇒ An ideal black body can be realize in practice by
Jeerve keâe efJemLeeheve efveÙece mebyebOe JÙeòeâ keâjlee nw - small hole in the wall of hollow body. Which is at
(a) Wavelength corresponding to maximum uniform temperature .Any radiations entering the
energy and temperature / DeefOekeâlece efJeefkeâjCe Tpee& hollow body through the holes suffers a number of
kesâ mebiele lejbieowOÙe& SJeb leehe kesâ ceOÙe reflections and ultimately gets completely absorbed.
This can be facilitated by coating the interior surface
(b) Radiation energy and wavelength
with black so that about 96% of the radiation is
efJeefkeâjCe Tpee& SJeb lejbieowOÙe& kesâ ceOÙe absorbed each reflection.
(c) Temperature and wavelength From the given option-
leehe SJeb lejbieowOÙe& kesâ ceOÙe Best close to an ideal black body - Cavity maintained at
(d) Colour of light and temperature constant temperature.
ØekeâeMe kesâ jbie leLee leehe kesâ ceOÙe 45. For a black body at temperature 727ºC, its
AIPMT-2002 radiating power is 60 watt and temperature of
Ans. (a) : Wien's displacement law surrounding is 227ºC. If temperature of black
Wien's displacement law states that the wavelength body is changed to 1227ºC then its radiating
corresponding to maximum energy is inversely power will be
proportional to the temperature of the body in Kelvin. It 727ºC hej keâef<Cekeâe Jemleg kesâ efueS efJeefkeâjCe Meefòeâ 60
can also be said that the black body radiation curve for Jee@š nw SJeb JeeleeJejCe keâe leehe 227ºC nw ~ Ùeefo
different temperatures will peak at different keâef<Cekeâe Jemleg keâe leehe heefjJeefle&le keâj 1227ºC keâj
wavelengths that are inversely proportional to the efoÙee peeÙes lees Fmekeâer efJeefkeâefjle Meefòeâ nesieer -
temperature.
(a) 304 W (b) 320 W
1
λ max∝ (c) 240 W (d) 120 W
T
AIPMT-2002
b
λ max = Ans. (b) : Initial temperature of black body T1 = 727ºC
T = 1000K
λ max T = b (where 'b' is wein's displacement constant.) Final temperature of black body T2 = 1227ºC = 1500K

Physics 219 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Temperature of surrounding . To = 227ºC = 500K Thus,
Radiating power for body at 727ºC is P1 = 60W A dT A dT
− K1 1 = − K 2 2
Now, L L
From Stefan's Boltzmann law, Radiating power (P) of a or,
black body is defined as- K1A1 = K 2 A 2
P = σA(T4 – T04)…. (1)
47. Unit of Stefan's constant is
σ = Stefan's Boltzmann constant
mšerHeâve efveÙeleebkeâ keâe cee$ekeâ nw -
T = Temperature of Black body 2 4
(a) Watt-m2-K4 / Jee@š-ceer -kesâefuJeve
T0 = Surrounding Temperature 2 4
A = Surface area (b) Watt-m2/K4 / Jee@š-ceer -kesâefuJeve
2
From equation (i) (c) Watt/m2–K/Jee@š/ceer -kesâefuJeve
2 4
P1  10004 − 5004  60 15 (d) Watt/m2K4/Jee@š/ceer kesâefuJeve
= ⇒ = AIPMT-2002
P2  15004 − 500 4  P2 80
Ans. (d) : Stefan-Boltzmann constant
⇒ P2 = 320W (i) It is a physical constant denoted by sigma (σ) is the
constant of proportionality in Stefan Boltzmann law.
46. Consider two rods of same length and different
specific heats (S1, S2), conductivities (K1, K2) (ii) Stefan Boltzmann constant can be used to measure
the amount of heat that is emitted by a black body,
and area of cross-sections (A1, A2) and both
which absorbs all of radiant energy that hits it & will
having temperature T1 and T2 at their ends. If
emit all radiant energy.
rate of loss of heat due to conduction is equal,
W
then / meceeve uecyeeF& keâer oes ÚÌ[W, efpevekeâer efJeefMe° (iii) σ = 5.67×10–8 2 4
m K
T<ceeSW (S1, S2) T<ceerÙe ÛeeuekeâleeSW (K1, K2) SJeb
W
DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eHeâue (A1, A2) nw SJeb oesveeW ÚÌ[es kesâ ∴ unit = 2 4
m K
efmejs T1 leLee T2 leehe hej nw~ Ùeefo Ûeeueve kesâ keâejCe 48. A black body has wavelength λ corresponding
m
T<cee neefve keâer oj meceeve nes lees - to maximum energy at 2000 K. Its wavelength
KA K A corresponding to maximum energy at 3000 K
(a) K1A1 = K2A2 (b) 1 1 = 2 2 will be : -
S1 S2
Skeâ keâef<Cekeâe keâe 2000 K kesâ mebiele DeefOekeâlece
K 2 A1 K1A 2 lejbieowOÙe& λm nw, lees 3000 K kesâ mebiele DeefOekeâlece
(c) K2A1 = K1A2 (d) =
S2 S1 lejbieowOÙe& nesiee-
AIPMT-2002 3 2
(a) λm (b) λm
Ans. (a) : Given data- 2 3
For rod 1, 16 81
Its sectional area = A1 (c) λm (d) λm
81 16
Specific heat = S1 AIPMT-2001
Temperature difference b/w ends of rod = T1 – T2
Ans. (b) : From wein's displacement law,
Thermal conductivity = K1
λmax . T = constant [λmax = maximum
For rod 2, wavelength, T = temp (in
Its sectional area = A2 Kelvin)]
Specific heat = S2 λ1 T2
Temperature difference at ends of rod = T1 – T2 ⇒ = ...(i)
λ 2 T1
Thermal conductivity = K2
Given,
By Fourier's law of heat conduction-
Maximum wavelength at T1 = 2000 K, λ1 = λ
For 1st rod,
T2 = 3000 K, λ2 = ?
dθ1 A dT
= − K1 1 From equation (i)
dt L λ
For 2nd rod, λ2 = × 2000
3000
dθ2 A dT
= −K 2 2 2λ
dt L λ2 =
Since, rate of heat transfer is same: 3

Physics 220 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
49. A cylindrical rod having temptemperature T1 and Ans. (a) : From Stefan's law, "the total
to radiant energy
T2 at its end. The rate of flow
low of heat Q1 cal/sec. emitted per second per unit surface
ace area
ar of a black body
If all the linear dimension are ddoubled keeping is proportional to the fourth power
powe of the absolute
temperature remain constant then rate of flow temperature of the body".
of heat Q2 will be: -
E = σT4
Skeâ yesueveekeâej ÚÌ[ kesâ efueS efpf emekemekesâ oesveeW efmejeW keâe
Where, σ is Stefan's constant.
leeheceeve T1 Je T2 nw~ efpemekesâ Skeâeâ efmejs mes kewâueesjer/ mes
E is the Radiant energy when sphere
phere cools from 600 K
Q1 T<cee iegpejleer nw~ Ùeefo Fmekeâerer meYmeYeer jsKeerÙe efJeceeDeeW to 200 K and E' is the radiant nt energy
en when sphere
keâes ogievee keâj oW, lees GvneR leeheeW kesâ eefueS ØeJeeefnle G<cee cools from 400 K to 200 K then,
keâer oj Q2 nw- E' = σ [(400)4 – (200)4]
(a) 4Q1 (b) 2Q1 E = σ [(600)4 – (200)4]
Q Q
E ( 600 ) − ( 200 ) 
(c) 1 (d) 1  4 4

4 2 =
AIPMT-2001 E ' ( 400 )4 − ( 200 )4 
 
Ans. (b) :
E 16 3
= ⇒ E' = E
E' 3 16
51. Two conducting slabs off heat
hea conductivity K1
l and K2 are joined as shownshow in figure. The
Rate of flow of heat (thermal current)
ent) is given by temperature at ends of the slabs
sl are θ1 and θ2
KA (T1 − T2 ) (θ1 > θ2) the, final temperature
eratur (θm) of junction
q= [A = πr2]
l is/ K1 SJeb K2 G<ceerÙe Ûeeueke
euekeâlee keâer oes Ûeeuekeâ
q = rate of flow of Heat heefókeâeDeeW keâes efÛe$eevegmeej mebebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee peelee nw
A = Cross-sectional Area of rod Fvekesâ efmejeW hej leehe›eâce ›eâceMe: θ1 SJeb (θ1 > θ2) nw, lees
K = constant (thermal conductivity) mebefOe keâe Deefvlece leehe keâe (θm) keäÙee nesiee :-
Acc. to question, q = Q cal/sec
KA (T1 − T2 )
⇒ Q1 =
l
Kπ r 2 (T1 − T2 )
⇒ Q1 =
l
If we double all linear dimension
K1θ1 + K 2 θ 2 K1θ 2 + K 2 θ1
‘l’ = 2l, ‘r’ = 2r (a) (b)
K1 + K 2 K1 + K 2
Kπ (2r) 2 (T1 − T2 )
Then, Q 2 = K1θ2 − K 2 θ1
2l (c) (d) None/keâesF& veneR
 Kπr (T1 − T2 ) 
2 K1 + K 2
= 2  AIPMT-1999
 l 
Ans. (a) :
Q 2 = 2Q1
50. A sphere maintained at tempera mperature 600 K, has
cooling rate R in an external rnal environment of
200 K temp. If its temperature rature falls to 400 K
then its cooling rate will be
600 K hej efmLele ieesues keâer yee¢e Jeel
JeeleeJejCe 200 K hej
Meerleueve oj R nw peye ieesues keâe leehe Ieškeâj 400 K nes
peelee nw leye Meerleueve oj keäÙee nesieer- Heat transfer rate,
3 16 Q1 Q 2
(a) E (b) E =
16 3 t t
9 ⇒ K1 (θ1 – θm) = K2 (θm – θ2)
(c) E (d) Non
None
27 ⇒ K1θ1 – K1θm = K2θm – K2θ2
AIPMT-1999 K1θ1 + K2θ2 = (K1 + K2) θm

Physics 221 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 K θ + K 2 θ2  Ans. (d) : Given data,
θm =  1 1  Ratio of diameters of rod = 1 : 2
 K1 + K 2  Ratio of lengths = 2 : 1
52. Radiation energy corresponding to the Now,
temperature T of the sun is E. If its dQ kA∆T
The rate of heat flow R = =
temperature is doubled, then its radiation dt L
energy will be/metÙe& kesâ leehe T kesâ mebiele efJeefkeâjCe 2
 D1 
Tpee& E nw Ùeefo Gmekeâe leehe ogiegvee keâj efoÙee peeS lees
( dQ / dt )1 kπ  2  ∆T × L2
efJeefkeâjCe Tpee& nes peeSieer– = =
( dQ / dt )2 D 
2

(a) 32E (b) 16E kπ  2  ∆T × L1

(c) 8E (d) 4E  2 
AIPMT-1998, 1993 D 2
×L
= 12 2
Ans. (b) : According to Stefan's law, D2 × L1
E ∝ T4 1 1
= ×
E1  T  T4
4 4 2
⇒ =  = 1
E 2  2T  16T 4 =
8
E1 T4
=
E 2 16T 4 10.5 Newton's Law of Cooling
E2 = 16 E (E1 = E)
53. A black body is at a temperature of 500 K. It 55. A cup coffee cools from 90°C to 80°C in t
emits energy at a rate which is proportional to minutes, when the room temperature is 20°C.
The time taken by a similar cup of coffee to
Skeâ ke=âef<Cekeâe keâe leehe 500 K nw~ Fmemes Tpee& Glmepe&ve cool from 80°C to 60°C at a room temperature
keâer oj meceevegheeleer nesieer: same at 20°C is
(a) (500)3 K Skeâ keâhe keâeHeâer 't' efceveš ceW 90°C mes 80°C lekeâ "v[er
(b) (500)4 K nesleer nw, peye keâcejs keâe leehe 20°C nw~ Gmeer keâcejs kesâ
(c) (500) K leehe hej meceeve lejn kesâ keâhe ceW keâeHeâer keâes 80°C mes
(d) (500)2 K 60°C lekeâ "v[e keâjves ceW meceÙe ueiee nesiee :
AIPMT-1997 5 13
(a) t (b) t
Ans. (b) : Given data 13 10
Temperature, T = 500 K 13 10
(c) t (d) t
From the Stefan's - Boltzmann relation 5 13
Eb = σ T 4 NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Eb ∝ T 4 Ans. (c) : From Newton’s law of cooling
Eb ∝ 5004 T1 – T2  T + T2 
= α 1 – T0 
54. Heat is flowing through two cylindrical rods of t  2 
the same material. The diameters of the rods For case I,
are in the ratio 1 : 2 and the lengths in the ratio 90º C – 80º C  90º C + 80º C 
= α – 20º C 
2 : 1. If the temperature difference between the t  2 
ends is same, then ratio of the rate of flow of 10
heat through them will be = 65α ...(i)
t
meceeve õJe kesâ oes yesueveekeâej ÚÌ[eW mes neskeâj T<cee For case II,
ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ ÚÌ[eW kesâ JÙeeme 1 : 2 Devegheele ceW 80º C – 60º C  80º C + 60º C 
= α – 20º C 
leLee Gvekeâer uecyeeF& 2 : 1 Devegheele ceW nQ~ Ùeefo oesveeW ÚÌ[eW t'  2 
kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe leeheeblej meceeve nw, lees ÚÌ[eW mes T<cee 20  10 
= 50α QFrom eq (i) α =
n
ØeJeen keâer oj keâe Devegheele nesiee: 
t'  65t 
(a) 2:1 20 10
= 50 ×
(b) 8:1 t' 65t
(c) 1:1 13t
(d) 1:8 t′ =
5
AIPMT-1995
Physics 222 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
56. An object kept in a large room having air cm3. If the specific latent heat of vaporisation
temperature of 25°C takes 12 minutes to cool of water is 2256 J/g, the change in internal
from 80°C to 70°C. energy is,
The time taken to cool for the same object from meeceevÙe JeeÙegceC[ueerÙe oeye (  1×105 Pa) hej meceeve
70°C to 60°C would be nearly, leehe 100ºC hej 1 cm3 DeeÙeleve kesâ 1 g peue keâes Yeehe
25°C JeeÙeg leehe Jeeues efkeâmeer efJeMeeue keâ#e ceW jKee keâesF& ceW heefjJeefle&le efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme Yeehe keâe DeeÙeleve 1671
efheC[ 80°C mes 70°C lekeâ "b[e nesves ceW 12 efceveš keâe cm3 nw~ Ùeefo peue kesâ Jee<heve keâer efJeefMe° ieghle T<cee
meceÙe ueslee nw~ 2256 J/g nw, lees Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve nw–
Fmeer efheC[ keâes 70°C mes 60°C lekeâ "b[e nesves ceW ueieves (a) 2256 J (b) 2423 J
Jeeuee meceÙe nesiee, ueieYeie (c) 2089 J (d) 167 J
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
(a) 15 min (b) 10 min
(c) 12 min (d) 20 min Ans. (c) : Given data
Mass of water = 1g
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Latent heat = 2256J/g
Ans. (a) : The average method in Newton's law of
Atmospheric pressure = 1 × 105 Pa
cooling
Volume of steam = 1671cm3 = 1671×10–6m3
( T1 − T2 )  T1 + T2  Volume of water = 1cm3 = 1× 10–6 m3
= k − T0 
t  2  By first law of thermodynamic
Here T1 = temperature ∆U = dQ – dW
T2 = temperature dQ = mass × Latent heat
t = time = 1 × 2256
T0 = temprature of surrounding = 2256 J
T1 + T2 dW = P (Vsteam – Vwater)
= average temprature
2 = 1 × 105 (1671 – 1) × 10–6
Case (I): t = 12 m, T0 = 25°C, T1 = 80°C, T2 = 70°C = 167 J
First law of thermodynamic
( T1 − T2 )  T1 + T2  dQ = work done + internal energy
= k − T0  dQ = dW + ∆U
t  2 
∆U = dQ – dW
80 − 70  80 + 70  = 2256 – 167
= k − 25 
12  2  ∆U = 2089 J
10
= k ( 75 − 25) 58. A body cools from a temperature 3T to 2T in
12 10 minutes. The room temperature is T.
1 Assume that Newton's law of cooling is
k= applicable. The temperature of the body at the
60 end of next 10 minutes will be
Case (II) : T1 = 70°C, T2 = 60°C, T0 = 25°C efkeâmeer Jemleg keâe leehe 3T mes 2T lekeâ efiejves ceW 10 efceveš
T1 − T2 T +T  keâe meceÙe ueielee nw ~ keâcejs keâe leehe T nw ~ Ùeefo FmeceW
= k  1 2 − T0 
t  2  vÙetšve kesâ Meerleueve efveÙece keâe Devegheeueve neslee nw, lees
70 − 60 1  70 + 60  Deieues 10 efceveš kesâ Devle ceW Jemleg keâe leehe nesiee -
=  − 25 
t 60  2  7 3
(a) T (b) T
10 1 4 2
= ( 65 − 25) 4
t 60 (c) T (d) T
10 40 3
= NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
t 60
Ans. (b) : Newton's law of cooling is expressed by-
60 × 10
t= = 15min. dT
40 = –K (T – T0)
3
dt
57. 1 g of water, of volume 1 cm at 100ºC, is Where T = room/surrounding temperature
0
converted into steam at same temperature
under normal atmospheric pressure (  1× 10 5 dT
= – Kdt
Pa). The volume of steam formed equals 1671 T − T0

Physics 223 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Integrating the above equation peue keâer kegâÚ cee$ee keâes 70°C mes 60°C lekeâ "b[e nesves
2T dT 10 ceW 5 efceveš leLee 60°C mes 54°C lekeâ "b[e nesves ceW Deewsj
∫3T T − T0 = −K∫0 dt 5 efceveš ueieles nQ~ lees peue kesâ Deemeheeme (heefjJesMe) keâe
leehe nesiee:-
 2T − T0 
ln   = –K × 10 (a) 45°C (b) 20°C
 3T − T0  (c) 42°C (d) 10°C
Given, T0 = T AIPMT-06.05.2014
T Ans. (a) : Let Ts be the temperature of the surroundings.
⇒ ln = –K × 10 According to Newton's law of cooling,
2T
ln ( 0.5 ) T1 − T2  T + T2 
⇒ K= = K 1 − Ts 
−10 t  2 
To find the temperature at the end of next 10 min where 'K' is the cooling constant and 't' is the time for
first 5 minutes,
Ts dT 20
∫ = −K ∫ dt T1 = 70°C, T2 = 60°C, t = 5 minutes
2T T − T0 10
70 − 60  70 + 60 
∴ = K − TS 
 T −T  −ln ( 0.5 ) 5  2 
ln  s  = ×10
 2T − T  −10 10
= K ( 65 − TS ) –––––– (i)
Ts − T 1 5
=
T 2 For next 5 minutes,
2Ts = T + 2T T1 = 60°C, T2 = 54°C, t = 5 minutes
60 − 54  60 + 54 
3T
Ts = ∴ = K − TS 
2 5  2 
6
Alternate solution (using direct formula):- = K ( 57 − TS ) –––––– (ii)
By using Newton's law of cooling, 5
T1 − T2 Divide eqn. (i) by eqn. (ii), we get
T +T 
= K 1 2 − T , 5 65 − TS
t  2  =
3 57 − TS
dθ
As Newton's law of cooling = −k(θ − θ0 ) , 285 – 5TS = 195 – 3TS
dt
2TS = 90 or TS = 45°C
T1 + T2
we have, θ = , θ0 = T0, T1 =3T, T2 = 2T 60. A beaker full of hot water is kept in a room. If
2 it cools form 80ºC to 75ºC in t1 minutes, from
3T − 2T  5T − 2T  75ºC to 70ºC in t2 minutes and from 70ºC to
= K  65ºC in t3 minutes, then
10  2 
Skeâ yeerkeâj ceW iece& heeveer Yeje nw~ Fmes keâcejs kesâ leehe hej
T  3T  jKee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Fmekeâe leehe 80ºC mes 75ºC t1 efceveš
= K   ––––(i)
10  2  ceW, 75ºC mes 70ºC t2 efceveš ceW neslee nes leLee 70ºC mes
2T − Ts  2T + Ts  65ºC t3 efceveš ceW neslee nw lees:
= K −T
10  2  (a) t1 < t2 < t3 (b) t1 > t2 > t3
(c) t1 = t2 = t3 (d) t1 < t2 = t3.
2T − Ts T 
= K s  –––––(ii) AIPMT-1995
10 2 
Ans. (a) :
By solving equation (i) & (ii), we get
3
Ts = T
2
59. Certain quantity of water cools from 70°C to
60°C in the first 5 minutes and to 54°C in the
next 5 minutes. The temperature of the
surroundings is.

Physics 224 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
80ºC to 75ºC → t1 (a) its speed of rotation increases/IetCe&ve-Ûeeue yeÌ{
75ºC to 70ºC → t2 peeleer nw~
70ºC to 65ºC →t3 (b) its speed of rotation decreases/IetCe&ve Ûeeue Ieš
Newton's law of cooling
peeleer nw~
dQ
∝ ∆T (c) its speed of rotation remains same/IetCe&ve Ûeeue
dt
Where ∆T = temperature difference DeheefjJeefle&le jnleer nw~
From Newton cooling law as temperature difference (d) its speed increases because its moment of
(∆t) increases heat transfer rate also increases means inertia increases./IetCe&ve-Ûeeue Fmekesâ peÌ[lJe DeeIetCe&
larger temperature difference leads to faster cooling.
ceW Je=efæ kesâ keâejCe yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
∆T1 = 15ºC , ∆T2 = 10ºC , ∆T3 = 5ºC
So t1 < t2 < t3 Ans. (b) : Given;

10.6 NCERT Exemplar Prolems

61. A bimetallic strip is made of aluminium and
steel (αAl > αsteel). On heating, the strip will/Skeâ
efÉOeelegkeâ he$eer SuÙegefceefveÙece SJeb mšerue (αAl > αsteel) We know that, the moment of inertial of rod is,
keâer yeveer nw~ iejce keâjves hej Ùen he$eer–
mL2
(a) remain straight/meerOeer jnsieer~ I=
12
(b) get twisted/JÙeeJeefle&le nes peeSieer~
Q Due to heating, length will increase.
(c) will bend with aluminium on concave
Hence, I will also increase.
side/SuÙegefceefveÙece keâes DeJeleue heeMJe& yeveekeâj ceg[
Ì sieer~ Now, from the conservation of angular momentum,
(d) will bend with steel on concave side./mšerue keâes I1ω1 = I2 ω2
DeJeleue heeMJe& yeveekeâj cegÌ[sieer~ mL1 2
mL22
Since, ω1 = ω2
Ans. (d) : Q We know that, the thermal conductivity of 12 12
aluminum is greater than that of steels. Both the strips ⇒ L > L
2 1
of aluminum and steel are fixed together initially in a
∴ ω2 < ω1
bimetallic strip. When both are heated then expansion in
steel will be smaller than aluminum. Hence speed of rotation will decrease.
So, the strip will bend with aluminium on convex side 63. The graph between two temperature scales A
and with steel on concave side. and B is shown in figure. Between upper fixed
point and lower fixed point there are 150 equal
division on scale A and 100 on scale B. The
relationship for conversion between the two
scales is given by/efÛe$e 11.1 ceW oes leehe›eâceeW A
leLee B kesâ yeerÛe «eeheâ oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ mkesâue A leLee B
hej efvecve efveÙele leeheebkeâ leLee GÛÛe efveÙele leeheebkeâ kesâ
yeerÛe ›eâceMe: 150 leLee 100 meceeve Yeeie nQ~
oesveeW mkesâueeW kesâ yeerÛe ™heeblejCe kesâ efueS efoÙee ieÙee
mebyebOe nw–

62. A uniform metallic rod rotates about its

perpendicular bisector with constant angular
speed. If it is heated uniformly to raise its
temperature slightly/keâesF& Skeâ meceeve Oeeleg keâer ÚÌ[
Deheves uebyeJeled efÉYeepekeâ kesâ heefjle: Skeâ meceeve keâesCeerÙe
Ûeeue mes IetCe&ve keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo Fmekeâe LeesÌ[e leehe yeÌ{eves
kesâ efueS Fmes Skeâ meceeve leehe mes iece& keâjW lees Fmekeâer
Physics 225 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
TA –180 TB (d) Buoyancy may be more or less in water at
(a) =
100 150 4°C depending on the radius of the sphere./
TA – 30 TB 4°C kesâ peue ceW GlheueeJevelee keâce Ùee DeefOekeâ nesvee
(b) =
150 100 ieesues keâer ef$epÙee hej efveYe&j nw~
T –180 TA Ans. (a) : We have given that, an aluminum sphere is
(c) B =
150 100 dipped into water. So, let the volume of the sphere be V
TB – 40 TA and acceleration due to gravity is g.
(d) =
100 180 At 0ºC, let density of water is denoted by ρ0 . Then the
Ans. (b) :
buoyant force, FB = V ρ0 g ... (i)
Now, considering II case when temperature of water is
at 4ºC and let density is ρT
Then the buoyant force F'B = VρTg ... (ii)
FB Vρo g
Now, =
FB' VρT g
FB ρo
⇒ =
FB' ρT
From the graph; Q The density of water at higher temperature is more
For scale A, than the density at lower temperature.
lower fixed point = 30oA So,
upper fixed point = 180oA ρT > ρ 0
For scale B,
FB ρ o
lower fixed point = 0oB ⇒ = <1
o F B' ρT
lower fixed point = 100 B
Hence, the relation between the two scales A and B is ∴ F B < F B'
given by. So, Buoyancy will be less in water at 0ºC than in water
º
at 4 C.
TA – (LFP) A TB – (LFP) B
= 65. As the temperature is increased, the time
(UFP) A – (LFP) A (UFP) B – (LFP) B
period of a pendulum/leehe ceW Je=efæ nesves hej ueesuekeâ
Where,
keâe DeeJele& keâeue
LFP = lower fixed point
(a) increases as its effective length increases even
UFP = upper fixed point
though its centre of mass still remains at the
Therefore, by the above equation we get,
centre of the bob./yeÌ{ peelee nw keäÙesebefkeâ ueesuekeâ keâer
TA – 30 T –0
= B ØeYeeJeer uecyeeF& ieesuekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ Gmekesâ keWâõ hej
180 – 30 100 – 0
jnves hej Yeer yeÌ{ peelee nw~
TA – 30 TB
⇒ = (b) decreases as its effective length increases
150 100 even though its centre of mass still remains at
64. An aluminium sphere is dipped into water. the centre of the bob./Ieš peelee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ ueesuekeâ
Which of the following is true? efkeâmeer keâer ØeYeeJeer uecyeeF& ieesuekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ Gmekesâ keWâõ
SuÙegefceefveÙece kesâ ieesues keâes peue ceW [gyeesÙee ieÙee nw~ hej ner jnves hej Yeer yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw? (c) increases as its effective length increases due
(a) Buoyancy will be less in water at 0°C than to shifting of centre of mass below the centre
that in water at 4°C./ 4°C kesâ peue keâer leguevee ceW of the bob./yeÌ{ peelee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ ueesuekeâ keâer ØeYeeJeer
0°C kesâ peue ceW GlheueeJevelee keâce nesieer~ uecyeeF&, ieesuekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ ieesuekeâ kesâ ieg®lJe keWâõ
(b) Buoyancy will be more in water at 0°C than kesâ veerÛes mLeeveebleefjle nesves kesâ keâejCe yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
that in water at 4°C./ 4°C kesâ peue keâer leguevee ceW (d) decreases as its effective length remains same
0° kesâ peue ceW GlheueeJevelee DeefOekeâ nesieer~ but the centre of mass shifts above the centre
(c) Buoyancy in water at 0°C will be same as that of the bob./Ieš peelee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ ueesuekeâ keâer ØeYeeJeer
in water at 4°C/0°C kesâ peue ceW GlhueeJevelee, 4°C uebyeeF& meceeve jnleer nw~ hejbleg ieesuekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve keWâõ
kesâ peue keâer GlheueeJevelee kesâ meceeve nesieer~ ieesuekeâ kesâ ieg®lJe keWâõ hej mLeeveebleefjle nes peelee nw~
Physics 226 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Let, L = The effective length of the pendulum le=hle keâjkesâ Fmekesâ leehe ceW ∆T Je=efæ keâer peeleer nw efpememes
and g = acceleration due to gravity Fmekeâe veÙee leehe T + ∆T nes peelee nw~ ieesues kesâ DeeÙeleve
We know that with an increase in temperature, the ceW ngF& ueieYeie Je=efæ nw–
effective length or L of the simple pendulum increases.
(a) 2πRα∆T
This increment happens even when the centre of mass
still remains at the centre of the bob. Time period of a (b) πR2α∆T
pendulum is given by (c) 4πR3 α∆T/3
(d) 4πR3α∆T
Ans. (d) : Given;
Radius of the sphere at the room temperature is
R.
Coefficient of linear expansion = α
L 4
T = 2π Initial volume of the sphere, V = πR 3
g 3
As the temperature increases, ∆V = Vγ∆T
⇒ T∝ L
Q coefficient of volume expansion, γ = 3α
Thus, time period of the pendulum increases as the
4 3
temperature increases. ⇒ ∆V = πR (3α) ∆T
3
66. Heat is associated with/T<cee mebyeæ nesleer nw–
∴ ∆V = 4πR3α∆T
(a) kinetic energy of random motion of
68. A sphere, a cube and a thin circular plate, all of
molecules/DeCegDeeW keâer ÙeeÂefÛÚkeâ ieefle keâer ieeflepe same material and same mass, are initially
Tpee& mes~ heated to same high temperature./meceeve õJÙeceeve
(b) kinetic energy of orderly motion of leLee meceeve heoeLe& kesâ yeves Skeâ ieesues, Skeâ Ieve SJeb Skeâ
molecules/DeCegDeeW keâer JÙeJeefmLele ieefle keâer ieeflepe
Je=òeekeâej huesš keâes meceeve GÛÛe leehe lekeâ DeejcYe ceW
Tpee& mes~
lehle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw
(c) total kinetic energy of random and orderly
(a) Plate will cool fastest and cube the
motion of molecules/DeCegDeeW keâes ÙeeÂefÛÚkeâ SJeb
slowest./huesš meyemes DeefOekeâ leer›elee mes Deewj Ieve meyemes
JÙeJeefmLele ieefleÙeeW keâer kegâue ieeflepe Tpee& mes~
Oeerjs "b[e nesiee~
(d) kinetic energy of random motion in some
cases and kinetic energy of orderly motion in (b) Sphere will cool fastest and cube the
other./kegâÚ ØekeâjCeeW ceW ÙeeÂefÛÚkeâ ieefle keâer ieeflepe Tpee& slowest./ieesuee meyemes DeefOekeâ leer›elee mes Deewj Ieve meyemes
mes leLee kegâÚ DevÙe ØekeâjCeeW ceW JÙeJeefmLele ieefle keâer ieeflepe Oeerjs "b[e nesiee~
Tpee& mes~ (c) Plate will cool fastest and sphere the
slowest./huesš meyemes DeefOekeâ leer›elee mes Deewj ieesuee
Ans. (a) : We know that the vibration of molecules
about their mean position increases as the temperature meyemes Oeerjs "b[e nesiee~
increases or the body gets heated. (d) Cube will cool fastest and plate the
Hence, kinetic energy associated with the random slowest./Ieve meyemes DeefOekeâ leer›elee mes Deewj huesš meyemes
motion of the molecules increases. Oeerjs "b[er nesieer~
67. The radius of a metal sphere at room Ans. (c) : Q The sphere, cube and the circular plate are
temperature T is R and the coefficient of linear made up of the same material, their density will be same
expansion of the metal is α. The sphere is and hence the volume be same. The surface area of the
heated by a very low temperature ∆T so that its plate is the largest and that of the sphere is smallest,
new temperature is (T + ∆T). The increase in therefore rate of heat loss by radiation is proportional to
the volume of the sphere is approximately the surface area.
leehe T hej efkeâmeer Oeeleg kesâ ieesues keâer ef$epÙee R nw leLee Hence, the plate will cool the fastest while the sphere
Oeeleg keâe jwefKekeâ Øemeej iegCeebkeâ α nw~ ieesues keâes LeesÌ[e the slowest.

Physics 227 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
11.
Thermodynam
dynamics
Ans. (c) :
11.1 Thermodynamic
ic Pro
Processes P 4

3
1. For the given cycle, the wor
work done during 2
isobaric process is:
1
efoS ieS Ûe›eâ kesâ efueS, meceoeyeer Øe›eâ
Øe›eâce kesâ oewjeve efkeâÙee
ieÙee keâeÙe& nw: V
1 is isochoric (constant volume),
), 4 is isobaric (constant
pressure). Out of curves 2 and 3,, since curve 2 is steeper
than curve 3 so it represents adiabati
diabatic change whereas
curve 3 represent an isothermal change.
chang
3. The P-V diagram for an n ideal
idea gas in a piston
cylinder assembly undergoing
u a
thermodynamic process is shownsho in the figure.
(a) 400 J/petue (b) 600 J/petue The process is
(c) 200 J/petue Zero/MetvÙe
(d) Zer DeejsKe ces efhemšve-efmeefueC[j [j mecevJeeÙeespeve ceW
RE NEET Manipuripur (U
(UG)- 06.06.2023
T<ceeieeflekeâ Øe›eâce keâj jner efkeâmeer
âmeer DeeoMe& iewme keâe P-V
Je›eâ oMeeÙee& ieÙee nw~ Ùen Øe›eâce nw
Ans. (b) : From the figure-
Work done in isobaric process (AB) -
= P∆V
= 3×102[3−1]
W = 6×102
W = 600J
(a) isothermal/meceleeheerÙe (b) adiabatic/™æes<ce
2. An ideal gas undergoes four ur diff
different processes
(c) isochoric/meceDeeÙeleefvekeâ (d) isobaric/meceoeyeerÙe
from the same initial state ate as shown in the
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020,14 Phase-II
figure below. Those processes cesses are adiabatic,
Ans. (d) :
isothermal, isobaric and isocho isochoric. The curve
• Isothermal Process– Thermody rmodynamic process in
which represents the adiabatic batic process among
which temperature of system m remains
rem const.
1, 2, 3 and 4 is
• Adiabatic Process– Typee of Thermodynamic
veerÛes efoKeeS ieS efÛe$eevegmeej, keâesF & DeeoMe& iewme Skeâ process that occurs without ut transferring
tra heat or
meceeve DeJemLee mes DeejcYe keâjkes kesâ ÛÛeej Deueie-Deueie mass between thermodynamic namic system & its
Øe›eâceeW mes iegpejleer nw~ Ùes Øe›eâce ®æ
®æes<ce, meceleeheerÙe, environment.
• Isochoric Process– Thermod ermodynamic process
meceoeyeerÙe SJeb meceDeeÙeleefvekeâ nQ~ 1, 2, 3 SJeb 4 ceW
during which volume of closed osed system
s undergoing
mes Jen Je›eâ pees ®æes<ce Øe›eâce keâe keâes efve™efhele keâjlee such a process remains const.
nw, Jen nw: • Isobaric Process– Thermodyn odynamic process in
which pressure of system stays ays const.
co i.e, ∆ P = 0
In given question, pressure of Initial Initia & final state is
same as volume increase. Therefore refore shown process is
Isobaric process.
4. Two cylinders A and B of equal e capacity are
connected to each other er via a stop cock. A
contains an ideal gas at standard stand temperature
(a) 4 (b) 1
and pressure. B is completel pletely evacuated. The
(c) 2 (d) 3 entire system is thermally lly insulated.
in The stop
NEET
EET ((UG)-17.07.2022 cock is suddenly opened.. The process is :
Physics 228 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
meceeve Oeeefjle kesâ oes efmeefueC[j A Deewj B Skeâ otmejs mes R. Process III c. Isochoric
efkeâmeer mše@he keâe@keâ mes nesles ngS pegÌ[s nQ~ A ceW ceevekeâ leehe Øe›eâce III meceDeeÙeleefvekeâ
Deewj oeye hej keâesF& DeeoMe& iewme Yejer nw~ B hetCe&le: S. Process IV d. Isothermal
efveJee&eflele nw~ mecemle efvekeâeÙe T<ceerÙejesefOele nw~ mše@he Øe›eâce IV meceleeheerÙe
keâe@keâ keâes DeÛeevekeâ Keesue efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùen ØeefkeâÙee nw: (a) P → a, Q →c, R→ d, S→ b
(a) adiabatic/®æes<ce (b) isochoric/meceDeeÙeleveer (b) P → c, Q →a, R→ d, S→ b
(c) isobaric/meceoeyeer (d) isothermal/meceleeheer (c) P → c, Q →d, R→ b, S→ a
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 (d) P → d, Q →b, R→ a, S→ d
Ans. (a) : Entire system is completely insulated & free NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
expansion of gas will take place , the temperature of gas Ans. (b) :
will remain constant. So, process will be adiabatic. Process (i) → constant volume → isochoric
• Adiabatic process - It is the type of thermodynamic Process (ii) → PVγ = k → adiabatic
process there is no transfer of the heat or mass between Process (iii) → constant temperature → isothermal
the system and the surroundings is known as the Process (iv) → constant pressure → isobaric
adiabatic process
7. A gas is compressed isothermally to half its
5. In which of the following processes, heat is initial volume. The same gas is compressed
neither absorbed nor released by a system? separately through an adiabatic process until
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâme Skeâ Øeef›eâÙee ceW, efkeâme efvekeâeÙe its volume is again reduced to half. Then:
Éeje ve lees T<cee keâe DeJeMees<eCe neslee nw Deewj ve ner efkeâmeer iewme keâes meceleeheerÙe ™he mes Gmekesâ DeeOes DeeÙeleve
T<cee efJecegòeâ nesleer nw? lekeâ mebheerefÌ[le efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Fmeer iewme keâes he=Lekeâ ™he
(a) Adiabatic/Sef[Ùeeyesefškeâ (™æes<ce) mes ™odOees<ce Øeef›eâÙee Éeje Gmekesâ DeeOes DeeÙeleve lekeâ
(b) Isobaric/meceoeyeerÙe mebheerefÌ[le efkeâÙee peelee nw~ leye :
(c) Isochoric/DeeFmeeskeâesefjkeâ (meceDeeleefvekeâ (a) Which of the case (Whether compression
(d) Isothermal/meceleeheerÙe through adiabatic process) requires more
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 work will depend upon the atomicity of the
gas/Ûeens meceleeheerÙe Øeef›eâÙee Éeje mebheerefÌ[le keâjW DeLeJee
Ans. (a) : In adiabatic processes, there is no transfer of
heat between the system and its surroundings. ™odOees<ce Øeef›eâÙee Éeje mebheerefÌ[le keâjW, efkeâme ØekeâjCe ceW
DeefOekeâ keâeÙe& keâjves keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer, Ùen iewme keâer
∆Q = 0 hejceeCegkeâlee hej efveYe&j keâjsiee~
• Process in which pressure is constant throughout is (b) Compressing the gas isothermally will require
isobaric process. ∆P = 0 more to done
• In isochoric process volume is constant throughout. iewme keâes meceleeheerÙe Øeef›eâÙee Éeje mebheerefÌ[le keâjves ceW
DeefOekeâ keâeÙe& keâjves keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer~
∆V = 0 (c) Compressing the gas through adiabatic
• Isothermal process keeps the temperature constant process will require more work to be done
throughout. ∆T = 0 iewme keâes ™odOees<ce Øeef›eâÙee Éeje mebheerefÌ[le keâjves ceW DeefOekeâ
6. Thermodynamic processes are indicated in the keâeÙe& keâjves keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer~
following diagram./efvecveefueefKele DeejsKe ceW (d) Compressing the gas isothermally or
adiabatically will require the same amount of
T<ceeieeflekeâerÙe Øe›eâceeW keâes oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ work/iewme keâes meceleeheerÙe Øeef›eâÙee DeLeJee ™odOees<ce Øeef›eâÙee
oesveeW ceW ner meceeve keâeÙe& keâjves keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer~
f NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Ans. (c) :

Match the following/efvecveefueefKele ceW oes keâe@ueceeW keâe

efceueeve keâerefpeÙes:
Column-1 Column-2
keâe@uece-1 keâe@uece-2 (Slope)adiabatic > (slope)isothermal
P. Process I a. Adiabatic Area under the curve on P-V diagram represents work
Øe›eâce I ®æes<ce done by a process. Since,
Q. Process II b. Isobaric (Area)adiabatic > (Area) isothermal
Øe›eâce II meceoeyeerÙe ⇒ (Work done)adiabatic > (Work done)isothermal

Physics 229 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8. A monoatomic gas at a pressure P, having a
volume V expands isothermally to a volume 2V
and then adibatically to a volume 16 V. The
5
final pressure of the gas is : (take γ = )
3
efkeâmeer Skeâ hejceeefCJekeâ iewme keâe oeye P Deewj DeeÙeleve V
nQ FmeceW henues meceleeheerÙe ™he mes 2V DeeÙeleve lekeâ Deewj PVγ = constant
efheâj ™æes<ce ™he mes 16 V DeeÙeleve lekeâ Øemeej neslee nw~ C
γ = P , γ = Ratio of specific heat of gas
5 CV
Ùeefo γ = nes lees, iewme keâe Debeflece oeye nesiee: γ 1−γ
3 So, P .T = constant does not represent adiabatic
(a) 64 P (b) 32 P process.
P 10. One mole of an ideal gas goes from an initial
(c) (d) 16 P
64 state A to final state B via two processes. If first
undergoes isothermal expansion from volume
AIPMT-06.05.2014
V to 3V and then its volume is reduced from 3V
Ans. (c) : In isothermal expansion temperature is to V at constant pressure. The correct P-V
constant, PV = constant diagram representing the two processes is:
First, isothermal expansion - Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme, ØeejbefYekeâ DeJemLee A mes Deefvlece
PV = P'(2V) DeJemLee B keâes efvecveefueefKele oes Øe›eâceeW mes neskeâj peeleer
P nw~ henues Fmekesâ DeeÙeleve keâe V mes 3V lekeâ meceleeheerÙe
P' =
2 ™he mes Øemeej neslee nw~ efheâj, efmLej oeye hej Fmekeâe
Then, adiabatic expansion DeeÙeleve 3V mes V lekeâ keâce efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees Fve oes
γ  5 Øe›eâceeW keâe efve™efhele keâjves kesâ efueÙes men P-V DeejsKe nw:
P ' ( 2V ) = Pf (16V )  γ = 
γ

 3
(For adiabatic process, PV γ = constant)
P
( 2V ) = Pf (16V )
5/3 5/3
(a) (b)
2
5/3 5/3 5/3
P  2V  P1 P 1 
Pf = = =
2  16V  2  8  2  23 
P 1  P
Pf = =
2  25
(c) (d)
 64
9. Which of the following relations does not give
the equation of an adiabatic process, where AIPMT (Screening)-2012
terms have their usual meaning? Ans. (b) : One mole of an ideal gas goes from an initial
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mee mecyeOe ™Oões<ce Øeef›eâÙee state A to final state B via two processes.
Ist Process – Isothermal expansion from volume V to
keâe meceerkeâjCe veneR oslee nw peneb Meyoes keâe Dehevee 3V.
meeceevÙe DeLe& neslee nw~ II process – volume is reduced from 3V to V at constant
γ 1−γ 1−γ γ
(a) P .T = constant (b) P .T = constant pressure.
(c) PV γ = constant (d) TV γ−1 = constant
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Ans. (a) : Adiabatic equation of state
PVγ = constant
11. In thermodynamic processes which of the
PV = RT Where P = Pressure
following statements is not true?/T<ceeieeflekeâer
RT Øe›eâceeW kesâ mecyevOe ceW efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee melÙe veneR nw?
P= V = Volume
V
(a) In an adiabatic process PVγ = constant
RT γ
V = Constant. T = Temperature T<ceejesner Øe›eâce ceW PV γ efmLejebkeâ neslee nw~
V
(b) In an adiabatic process the system is insulated
TVγ-1 = Constant. from the surroundings/T<ceejesOeer Øe›eâce ceW lev$e keâes
TγP1-γ = Constant. heefjJesMe mes he=Lekeâ jKee peelee nw~
Physics 230 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) In an isochoric process pressure remains Ans. (d):
constant
meceDeeÙeleveer Øe›eâce ceW oeyeceeve efmLej jnlee nw~
(d) In an isothermal process the temperature
remains constant
meceleeheerÙe Øe›eâce ceW leeheceeve efmLej jnlee nw~
AIMPT-2009 From process 1 → 2
 P
Ans. (c) : In adiabatic process heat transfer Q = 0 PV = P'. 4V  P ' = 
PVγ =const  4
From 2 → 3
In Isochoric process ⇒ volume is constant.
P' (4v)γ = P" (V)γ ⇒ (PVγ = C)
Isobaric process ⇒ pressure is constant P
Isothermal process ⇒ Temperature is constant. P' (4)γ = P" ⇒ .4 γ = P"
4
3
12. Which of the following processes is reversible P
⇒ .( 4 ) 2 = P " (γ = 1.5)
FveceW mes keâewvemee ›eâce Gl›eâceCeerÙe nesiee:- 4
P
(a) Transfer of heat by radiation ⇒ .8 = P" ⇒ P" = 2P
4
efJeefkeâCe&ve Éeje T<cee keâe mLeeveevlejCe
14. When volume changes from V to 2V at
(b) Transfer of heat by conduction constant pressure (P) then the change in
Ûeeuekeâlee Éeje T<cee keâe DeefYeieceve internal energy will be/eqmLej oeye P hej efkeâmeer iewme
(c) Isothermal compression/efmLej leehe mebheerÌ[ve keâe DeeÙeleve V mes 2V efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees Gmekeâer
Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve nesiee–
(d) Electrical heating of a nichrome wire
(a) PV (b) 3PV
veeF›eâesce leej keâe JewÅegle leeheve
PV RV
AIPMT-2005 (c) (d)
γ −1 γ −1
Ans. (c) :Reversible process:- A reversible process is AIPMT-1998
defined as a process in which the system and surrounding Ans. (c) : Change in internal energy is–
can be returned to the original conditions from the final 1
state without producing any changes in the ∆U = ( P2 V2 − P1V1 )
γ −1
thermodynamics properties of the universe. In the given
Here, V1 = V, V2 = 2V
question Isothermal compression is reversible process.
1
Irreversible process- An irreversible process can be ∴ ∆U = [P × 2V − P × V]
defined as a process in which the system and the γ −1
1
surroundings do not return to their original condition. In = [ 2PV − PV ]
the given question, transfer of heat by radiation, transfer γ −1
of heat by conduction & electrical heating of a
nichrome wire represents an irreversible process. PV
=
Hence, option (c) is correct answer. γ −1
13. Initial pressure and volume of a gas are P and Note:- The internal energy of an ideals gas depends
V respectively. First its volume is expanded to only of its absolute temperature(T) and directly
4V by isothermal process and then again its proportional to T.
volume makes to be V by adiabatic process 15. A sample of gas expands from volume V1 to V2.
The amount of work done by the gas is
then its final pressure is (γ = 1.5) greatest, when the expansion is/Ùeefo Skeâ iewme keâes
iewme kesâ ØeejbefYekeâ oeye SJeb DeeÙeleve ›eâceMe: P SJeb V nw~ DeeÙeleve V1 mes V2 lekeâ Øemeeefjle efkeâÙee peeS, lees efkeâme
Fmekeâe DeeÙeleve meceleeheerÙe Øe›eâce ceW mes 4V efkeâÙee ieÙee Øe›eâce ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& DeefOekeâlece nesiee?
nw Deye hegve: Gmekeâe DeeÙeleve V ™æes<ce Øe›eâce mes keâjW (a) adiabatic/®æes<ce
lees Deefvlece oeye keäÙee nesiee (γ = 1.5) (b) equal in all cases/meYeer ceW meceeve
(c) isothermal/meceleeheerÙe
(a) 8P (b) 4P
(c) P (d) 2P (d) isobaric/meceoeyeerÙe
AIPMT-1999 AIPMT-1997
Physics 231 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): The P-V diagrams for the three processes is as γ –1
T1  V2 
shown in the figure. =
T2  V1 
For diatomic gas γ = 1.4
γ –1
291  V1 / 8 
=
T2  V1 
1.4–1
291  1 
= 
T2  8 
0.4
291  1 
For the same change in volume the work done will be = 
T2 8
maximum for the curve having maximum area enclosed
between the curve and the volume axis. T2 = 291 × (8)0.4
Area (Isobaric) > Area (isothermal) > Area (adiabatic) T2 = 291 × 2.29 = 668.54 K
16. An ideal gas, undergoing adiabatic change, has T2 = 666.4 K
which of the following pressure temperature T2 = 666.4 – 273 = 395.5 K
relationship?
T2 395.4º C
Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme ceW ®æes<ce heefjJele&ve neslee nw~ Fmekesâ
oeye leLee leehe kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nesiee: 18.
In a adiabatic change, the pressure and
γ 1–γ γ 1–γ temperature of a monatomic gas are related as
(a) P T = constant/ P T = efveÙeleebkeâ
P ∝ TC, where C equals/Skeâ ®æes<ce heefjJele&ve ceW,
(b) P1–γ Tγ constant/ P1–γ Tγ = efveÙeleebkeâ
efkeâmeer SkeâhejceeefCJekeâ iewme kesâ oeye Deewj leehe P ∝ TC
(c) Pγ–1 Tγ = constant/ Pγ–1 Tγ = efveÙeleebkeâ
™he ceW mebyebefOele nesles nQ, peneB C yejeyej nw:
(d) Pγ Tγ–1 = constant/ Pγ Tγ–1 =efveÙeleebkeâ
(a) 3/5 (b) 5/3
AIPMT-1996
(c) 2/5 (d) 5/2
Ans. (b) : The adiabatic relation between P& V for a
γ AIPMT-1994
perfect gas is PV = K ... (i)
From standard gas equation Ans. (d) : For adiabatic process,
PV = RT PVγ = constant
γ
RT  RT   RT 
V= =K P  = constant ∴V =
P  P   P 
Putting value of V in equation (i) P1–γ Tγ = constant
γ
 RT  γ
P  =K P ∝ T γ –1 ....(i)
 P 
K Now given P ∝ T C
... (ii)
P1– γ T γ = γ = another constant On comparing with equation (i)
R
γ
P1– γ T γ = constant C=
γ −1
17. A diatomic gas initially at 18ºC is compressed 5
adiabatically to one eighth of its original For a monoatomic gas γ =
3
volume. The final temperature will be–
Skeâ efÉDeeefCJekeâ iewme keâes 18ºC hej ®æes<ce heefjJele&ve kesâ 5
C= 3
Devegmeej oyeeÙee ieÙee efpememes Fmekeâe DeeÙeleve ØeejefcYekeâ
5
DeeÙeleve keâe 1/8 nes ieÙee~ Deefvlece leehe nesiee: –1
3
(a) 395.4ºC (b) 144ºC
5 3
(c) 18ºC (d) 887.ºC C= ×
AIPMT-1996 3 2
Ans. (a) : Give that 5
C=
T1 = 18ºC = (273 + 18) = 291 K 2
V 19. A thermodynamic system is taken from state A
V2 = 1
8 to B along ACB and is brought back to A along
We know that BDA as shown in the PV diagram. The net
For an adiabatic process work done during the complete cycle is given
T1V1γ–1 = T2V2γ–1 by the area

Physics 232 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ T<ceeieeflekeâer Øe›eâce (efÛe$e osK s eW) ceW iewme keâes A mes Heat required by water ( ∆Q ) = +54cal
54ca
B lekeâ ABC Éeje efheâj Jeeefheme A me mes BDA Éeje ueeÙee ∆Q = 54 × 4.18 = +225.72J
.72J
ieÙee nw~ hetjs Øe›eâce ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe
keâeÙe& efkeâme #es$eheâue kesâ It is given that pressure is constant
nstant and is equal to
yejeyej nesiee? atmospheric pressure.
P = 1.013 × 105Pa
Volume of water is
M 0.1g
= = 0.1×10−6 m3
p 1g / cc
Change in volume
(a) P1ACBP2P1 (b) AC
ACBB'A'A
(c) ACBDA (d) AD
ADBB'A ( ∆V ) = 167.1×10−6 − 0.1 (.1×10−6 = +167 ×10−6 )
AIPMT-1992 Now, as per first law of thermodynam ynamics
Ans. (c) : ACBDA ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W
∆Q = ∆U + P∆V
225.72 = ∆U + 1.013 × 105 ×167 ×16 × 10–6
∆U = + 208.8 J
21. One mole of an ideal diatomi atomic gas undergoes a
transition from A to B along alon a path AB as
shown in the figure,
Work done = Area enclosed under P–V curve
Skeâ DeeoMe& efÉhejceeCegkeâ iewme kesâ 1 ceesue keâe AB ceeie&
=ACBDA kes â DevegefoMe, A mes B lekeâ meb›eâceCe
ceCe neslee nw~
The work done in the cyclic process
ss is eequal to the area
enclosed by the P-V diagram.
Hence, the net work done during
ng the co
complete cycle is
given by the area ACBDA.

11.2 Zeroth and first Law of

Thermodynamics The change in internal energy
nergy of the gas during
the transition is :
20. A sample of 0.1 g of water at 100 100°C and normal Fme meb›eâceCe kesâ oewjeve iewme keâe Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW
pressure (1.013 × 10 Nm ) req 5 –2
requires 54 cal of heefjJele&ve nesiee:
heat energy to convert to steam at 100°C. If the (a) −20 kJ (b) 20 J
volume of the steam produced uced is 167.1 cc, the
(c) −12 kJ (d) 20 kJ
change in internal energyy of tthe sample, is /
meeceevÙe oeye (1.013 × 10 Nm ) Deewj 100°C leehe
5 –2 AIPMT-03.05.2015
hej0.1 g peue kesâ vecetves keâes 100 100°C keâer Yeehe ceW Ans. (a) : ∆U = nCv∆Τ
heefjJeefle&le keâjves kesâ efueS 54 kkewâueesjer G<cee keâer for diatomic gas Cv = = 5 R
DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesleer nw~ Ùeefo 167.1 7.1 cc Yeehe GlheVe nesleer 2
nw, lees Fme vecetves keâer Deevleefjkeâ Tpee&
pee& ceW heefjJele&ve nw 5 5
∆U = n R ∆T = n R (Tf − Ti )
(a) 104.3 J (b) 208
208.7 J 2 2
(c) 84. 5 J (d) 42.2 J 5  P V − Pi i 
V
= nR  f f  (Q PV = nRT)
NEET
EET ((UG)-06.05.2018 2  nR 
Ans. (b) : From the equation on of first law of
5
thermodynamics - = (Pf Vf − Pi Vi )
∆Q = W + ∆U, 2
Where, ∆Q = Change in heat energy 5
= ( 2 × 6 − 5 × 4 ) Kp × m3
∆U = Change in internal energy nergy 2
W = Work done by system 5 5
= (12 − 20 ) = × ( −8 )
W = P.∆V 2 2
P = Pressure ∆U = −20kJ
∆V = Change in volume
Physics 233 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
22. Figure below shows two paths that may be ∴ Q = ∆U + ∆W
taken by a gas to go from a state A to a state C Q = 380 + 80
ÙeneB DeejsKe ceW oes ceeie& oMee&Ùes ieÙes nQ efpevekesâ Éeje
efkeâmeer iewme keâes DeJemLee A mes DeJemLee C lekeâ ues peeÙee Q = 460 J
peelee nw~ 23. A thermodynamic system undergoes cyclic
process ABCDA as shown in fig. The work
done by the system in the cycle is:-
keâesF& T<ceeieeflekeâ efvekeâeÙe DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej
Ûeef›eâÙe Øe›eâce ABCDA hej Ûeuelee nw~ lees efvekeâeÙe Éeje
Fme Ûe›eâ ceW efoÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee:-

In process AB, 400 J of heat is added to the

system and in process BC, 100 J of heat is
added to the system. The heat absorbed by the
system in the process AC will be:
efvekeâeÙe keâes, AB Øe›eâce ceW 400 J leLee Øe›eâce BC ceW
100 J T<cee oer peeleer nw~ lees Øe›eâce AC ceW, efvekeâeÙe
Éeje DeJeMeesef<ele T<cee nesieer:
(a) 500 J (b) 460 J
(c) 300 J (d) 380 J
AIPMT-03.05.2015
(a) P0V0 (b) 2 P0V0
Ans. (b) : Process AB is isochoric so no work is done.
PV
Heat added to be system is Q = 400 J (c) 0 0 (d) Zero
Q = ∆U + ∆W 2
Where ∆U = Change in internal energy AIPMT-06.05.2014
∆W = Work done. Ans. (d) : In a cyclic process work done is equal to the
area under the cycle and is positive and negative if cycle
Since ∆W = 0
is clockwise and anticlockwise respectively.
Q = ∆U + ∆W
As is clear from given figure,
400 = ∆U + 0
1
∆U = 400 J WAEDA = + Area of ∆AED = + P0 V0
Process BC is isobaric and the work done is given by 2

(
∆W = P ( V2 − V1 ) = 6 × 104 4 × 10−3 − 2 × 10−3 ) WBCEB = – Area of ∆BCE = − P0 V0
1
2
= 6 × 104 × 2 × 10−3 = 120 J The net work done by the system is
Heat added to be system is Q = 100 J Wnet = WAEDA + WBCEB
Since Q = ∆U + ∆W 1 1
Wnet = + P0 V0 − P0 V0 = 0
∴∆U = Q − ∆W 2 2
∆U = 100 − 120 = −20 J 24. A gas is taken through the cycle A →B→C→A,
Total increase in internal energy is going from state A as shown, what is the network done by the gas?
to state C is 400 – 20 = 380 J Skeâ iewme keâes efÛe$e (DeejsKe) ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej A
Work done in process AC is the area under the curve. →B→C→D ØeÛeeueve Ûe›eâ mes iegpeeje peelee nw~ lees iewme
1 Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee vesš keâeÙe& nw?
Area of the trapezium = ( P2 + P1 ) × ( V2 − V1 )
2
= ( 6 × 104 + 2 × 104 ) × ( 4 × 10 −3 − 2 × 10 −3 )
1
2
1
= × 8 × 104 × 2 × 10 −3 = 80 J
2
Since Q = ∆U + ∆W and ∆U the change in internal
energy is process AC, we have
∆U = 380 J & ∆W= 80 J

Physics 234 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) – 2000 J (b) 2000 J again
(c) 1000 J (d) Zero Qabc = ∆Uabc + Wabc
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 Wabc = Qabc – ∆Uabc
Ans. (c) : ∴ The network done by the gas is = 36J – 30 J
W = Area of the cycle ABCA Wabc = 6J
1 26. An ideal gas goes from state A to state B via
= ( 7 − 2 ) × 10−3 × ( 6 − 2 ) × 105
2 three different processes as indicated in the P-
1 V diagram/ ef o KeeÙes ieÙes P-V DeejsKe kesâ Devegmeej, Skeâ
= ( 5 ) × 10 −3 × 4 × 105 DeeoMe& iewme keâes leerve efJeefYeVe Øe›eâceeW Éeje efmLeefle A mes
2
= 10 × 10 J
2 ef mLeefle B lekeâ ues peeÙee peelee nw~
W = 1000J
25. A system is taken from state a to state c by two
paths adc and abc as shown in the figure. The
internal energy at a is ua = 10J. Along the
path adc the amount of heat absorbed
δQ1 = 50J and the work obtained δW1 = 20J If Q1, Q2, Q3 indicate the heat absorbed by the
gas along the three processes and ∆U1, ∆U2,
whereas along the path abc the heat absorbed
∆U3 indicate the change in internal energy
δQ 2 = 36 J. The amount of work along the along the three processes respectively, then
path abc is/Skeâ efvekeâeÙe keâes DeJemLee a mes DeJemLee cÙeefo Fve leerve Øe›eâceeW ceW, DeJeMeesef<ele T<cee ›eâceMe: Q1,
lekeâ oes heLeeW adc Deewj abc Éeje ueW peeÙee peelee nw pewmee
Q2 leLee Q3 Deewj Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve ∆U1,
efkeâ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ a hej Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ua =
∆U2 leLee ∆U3 nes lees–
10J nw~ heLe adc kesâ DevegefoMe T<cee DeJeMeesef<ele δQ1 = (a) Q1 = Q2 = Q3 and ∆U1 > ∆U2 > ∆U3
50J Deewj Øeehle keâeÙe& δW = 20J peyeefkeâ heLe abc kesâ (b) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and ∆U1 > ∆U2 > ∆U3
DevegefoMe G<cee DeJeMeesef<ele δQ2= 36J nw~ abc hej kesâ (c) Q1 > Q2 > Q3 and ∆U1 = ∆U2 = ∆U3
DevegefoMe efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw- (d) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and ∆U1 = ∆U2 = ∆U3
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (c) : Since, internal energy (U) can be the sum of
all the kinetic energy of individual gas molecules.
So, change in internal energy is path independent and
depends only on the initial and final states.
So, for all the processes here,
∆ U 1= ∆ U 2 = ∆ U 3 ...(i)
Workdone depends on the path and the heat required
increases as the workdone increases.
(a) 6 J (b) 10 J
According to the first law of thermodynamics –
(c) 12 J (d) 36 J
∆Q = ∆W + dU
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Where, ∆Q = heat absorbed
Ans. (a) : We know that Q = ∆U + W dU = change in internal energy
∆W = workdone
Since,
workdone by an ideal gas is given by,
∆W = P∆V, which is just the area under the curve in the
region 1, 2 and 3.
It is clear from the given P-Vcurve,
A1 > A2 > A3
⇒ W1 > W2 > W3 ...(ii)
From 1st and 2nd, on analysing the 1st law of
Qadc = ∆Uadc + Wadc Thermodynamics,
50J = ∆Uadc + 20J ⇒ Q1 > Q2 > Q3
∆Uadc = 30J Hence,
⇒ ∆Uadc = ∆ Uabc = Uc – Ua = 30 J The correct answer is option 'c'.

Physics 235 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. A thermodynamic system is taken through the Ans. (a): Given- W = 150J.
cycle ABCD as shown in figure. Heat rejected According to first law of thermodynamics-
by the gas during the cycle is: Q = ∆U + W
efkeâmeer T<ceeieeflekeâ efvekeâeÙe keâes DeejsKe ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes ∆U = 0 (for isothermal process)
Devegmeej ABCD Ûe›eâ mes iegpeeje peelee nw~ Fme Ûe›eâ ceW Q = 0 + 150
iewme Éeje efvekeâeueer ieF& T<cee keâe ceeve nesiee- Q = +150J
So, 150 J of heat has been added to the gas.
29. If ΔU and ΔW represent the increase in
internal energy and work done by the system
respectively in a thermodynamical process,
which of the following is true ?
1
(a) PV (b) PV Ùeefo ΔU Je ΔW Skeâ T<ceeieeflekeâerÙe Øe›eâce ceW ›eâceMe:
2
efvekeâeÙe keâer Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW Je=efæ Je efvekeâeÙe Éeje
(c) 2PV (d) 4PV
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
efkeâÙes ieÙes keâeÙe& keâes oMee&les nes, lees efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee
Ans. (c) mener nw?
(a) ΔU = – ΔW, in an adiabatic process
ΔU = – ΔW,Skeâ ™æes<ceerÙe Øe›eâce ceW
(b) ΔU = ΔW, in an isothermal process
ΔU = ΔW,Skeâ meceleeheerÙe Øe›eâce ceW
(c) ΔU = ΔW, in an adiabatic process
st
From 1 law of Thermodynamics, ΔU = ΔW, Skeâ ™æes<ceerÙe Øe›eâce
∆Q = ∆U + ∆W (d) ΔU = – ΔW, in an isothermal process
∆U = Change in Internal Energy ΔU = – ΔW, Skeâ meceleeheerÙe Øe›eâce ceW
∆W = Work done. AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Now, ∆W = Work done in cyclic process AIPMT-1998
Work done, W = Area under P-V graph Ans. (a) : From the first law of thermodynamics,
W = –2PV {negative sign indicates that energy ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W
is leaving the system or work is done by the system}. ∆Q = Change in heat
∆U = 0 for a closed cycle. ∆U = Internal energy
∴ From (1) ∆W = Work done
∆Q = 0 + (−2PV) For the adiabatic process, ∆Q = 0
∆Q = − 2PV
∆U = −∆W
Heat rejected in the cycle = ∆Q = 2PV
28. During an isothermal expansion, a confined 30. The internal energy change in a system that has
absorbed 2 k cal of heat and done 500 J of
ideal gas does 150 J of work against its
work is:/efpeme efvekeâeÙe ves 2 kcal T<cee keâe DeJeMees<eCe
surroundings. This implies that :
meceleeheerÙe Øemeej ceW Skeâ heefj™æ DeeoMe& iewme Deheves efkeâÙee nes Deewj 500 J keâeÙe& efkeâÙee nes GmeceW Deevleefjkeâ
JeeleeJejCe kesâ efJe™æ 150 J keâeÙe& keâjleer nw, Fmemes Ùen Tpee& heefjJele&ve keâe ceeve nesiee:
(a) 7900 J (b) 8900 J
efve<keâ<e& efvekeâuelee nw efkeâ :
(c) 6400 J (d) 5400 J
(a) 150 J of heat has been added to the gas AIMPT-2009
iewme keâes 150 J T<cee oer ieF& nw Ans. (a) : Given,
(b) 150 J of heat has been removed from the Q = +2 k cal = 2×4.2×1000 [1 cal = 4.2 J]
gas/iewme ceW mes 150 J T<cee efve<keâeefmele nes ieF& nw = 8400
(c) 300 J of heat has been added to the gas W = 500 J
iewme keâes 300 J T<cee oer ieF& nw According to first law of thermodynamics
(d) no heat is transferred because the process is Q = W + ∆U
isothermal/kegâÚ Yeer T<cee keâe mLeeveevlejCe veneR ngDee ∆U = Q – W
nw keäÙeeWefkeâ Øe›eâce meceleeheerÙe nw = 8400 – 500
= 7900 J
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Physics 236 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
31. An electric kettle takes 4 A current at 220 V. Ans. (d) : A gas volume changes 2 litre to 10 litre at
How much time will it take to boil 1 kg of water constant temperature 300 K.
from temperature 20ºC ? The temperature of The change in internal energy is–
boiling water is 100ºC./Skeâ JewÅegle kesâleueer (kettle) ∆U = nCV ∆T
ceW 220 V hej 4 A keâer Oeeje mes Ûeueleer nw~ Fmes 20ºC kesâ =0J [∴ ∆T = 0 (temperature constant)
leehe hej efmLele 1 kg peue keâes Gyeeueves ceW efkeâlevee meceÙe 34. 110 joule of heat is added to a gaseous system
whose internal energy is 40 J, then the amount
ueiesiee? peue 100ºC hej Gyeuelee nw :- of external work done is
(a) 12.6 min (b) 4.2 min Skeâ iewmeerÙe efvekeâeÙe keâes 110 petue T<cee oer ieÙeer
(c) 6.3 min (d) 8.4 min efpemekeâer Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& 40 J nw~ FmeceW efkeâÙee ieÙee
AIPMT-2008 keâeÙe& nesiee:
Ans. (c) : Given :- Current I = 4 amp (a) 150 J (b) 70 J
Voltage V = 220 V (c) 110 J (d) 40 J
Mass of water = 1 kg AIPMT-1993
Initial temp ti = 20° C Ans. (b) : Given that ∆Q = 110 J
Boiling temp tb = 100°C (∆U) = 40 J
Power generated by electric kettle P = VI According to the first law of thermodynamics
= 220 × 4 ∆Q = ∆W + ∆U
= 880 J/s ∆W = ∆Q – ∆U
Heat required Q = m Cp ∆ T ∆W = 110 – 40
Q = m C p ( t b − t i) ∆W = 70 J
Q = 1× 4200 × (100 – 20) 35. First law of thermodynamics is consequence of
= 4200 × 80 = 336000 Joule conservation of/T<ceeieeflekeâer keâe ØeLece efveÙece
Q 336000 J ef keâmekesâ mebj#eCe hej DeeOeeefjle nw~
Time required t = =
P 880 J / s (a) work/keâeÙe&
= 381.81 second , ≈ 6.3 min (b) energy/Tpee&
32. If Q, E and W denote respectively the heat (c) heat/T<cee
added, change in internal energy and the work (d) all of these/Ghejesòeâ meYeer
done by a closed cycle process, then : AIPMT-1988
Ùeefo Skeâ yevo DeeJele& (meeFkeâue) Øeef›eâÙee ceW Q, E Deewj Ans. (b) : The first law of thermodynamics states that
W ›eâceevegmeej, oer ieF& T<cee, Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW heat is a form of energy and thermodynamic processes
are therefore subject to the principle of conservation of
heefjJele&ve Deewj efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& oMee&les neW, lees nesiee: energy. This means that energy can not be created or
(a) E = 0 (b) Q = 0 destroyed. However, it can be transferred from one
(c) W = 0 (d) Q = W = 0 location to another and converted to one form to other
AIPMT-2008 forms of energy
Ans. (a) : Heat added = Q 36. One mole of an ideal gas requires 207 J heat to
Change in internal energy = E rise the temperature by 10 K when heated at
work done = W constant pressure. If the same gas is heated at
Heat and work are path functions. It does not depends constant volume to raise the temperature by
upon end points. the same 10 K, the heat required is
(Given the gas constant R = 8.3 J/mole K)
Internal energy is point function so in closed loop,
initial and final internal energy will be same, so change ef veÙele oeye hej Skeâ hejceeefCJekeâ DeeoMe& iewme kesâ Skeâ
in internal energy E will be zero for closed cycle. cees ue keâe leehe 10 kesâefuJeve yeÌ{eves kesâ efueS 207 petue
33. A gas of volume changes 2 litre to 10 litre at T<cee keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nw~ Fmeer iewme kesâ efveÙele DeeÙeleve
constant temperature 300K, then the change in hej 10 kesâefuJeve leehe Je=efæ kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ T<cee
internal energy will be/efkeâmeer iewme keâe efmLej leehe nesieer~ (R = 8.3 petue/ceesue-kesâefuJeve)
300K hej DeeÙeleve 2 ueeršj mes 10 ueeršj efkeâÙee peelee (a) 198.7 J/198.7 petue
nw Deebleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve nesiee– (b) 29 J/29 petue
(a) 12J (b) 24J (c) 215.3 J/215.3 petue
(c) 36J (d) 0 J (d) 124 J/124 petue
AIPMT-1998 AIPMT-1990
Physics 237 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that R = 8.3 (J/mole-k) (a) 560 J (b) 800 J
n = 1 mole (c) 600 J (d) 640 J
Q = 207 J AIPMT-1991
∆T = 10 k Ans. (a) : No work done is along ng the AB because this
Heat at constant pressure is- process is isochoric process
Q = Cp ∆T ∆V = 0
Where n = the number of moles Now work done = P∆V
Cp = the specific heat at constant
onstant speed = P×0 = 0
∆T = the change in temperature
rature. Work done (w) along BC = PB (VD – VA)
207 = 1 × Cp × 10 = 8 × 104 (5 × 10–3 –2 × 10–3)
C p = 20.7 .......(i) = 8 × 104 × 3 × 10–3
We know that = 240 J
Cp = C v + R The energy absorbed by the system
tem = (dQ)AB + (dQ)BC
20.7 = Cv + 8.3 = 600 + 200
= 800 J
Cv = 12.4
The change in internal energy dE E = dQ – W
Now, The heat required to raisee the temperature at dE = 800
80 – 240
constant volume dE = 560
56 J
Q = nCv ∆T
Q = 1 × 12.4 × 10
Q = 124 J 11.3 Second Law of
37. Which of the following is not th
thermodynamical Thermodynamics
mics & Entropy
function?
efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee T<ceeieeflekeâererÙe hheâueve veneR nw? 39. The efficiency of a Carnot
ot engine
eng depends upon
(a) Enthalpy/FvLesueheer efkeâmeer keâeveexš Fbpeve keâer o#elee efveYe&
eY j keâjleer nw
(b) Work done/efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& (a) the temperature of the
he source
sourc only
(c) Gibb's energy/efieyme Tpee& œeesle kesâ leehe hej kesâJeue
(d) Internal energy/Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& pee& (b) the temperature of the
he sink only
AIPMT-1993 DeefYeiece (efmebkeâ) kesâ leehe hej kesâJeue
Jeu
Ans. (b) : Work done is nott a the thermodynamical (c) the temperatures of the
he source
sour and sink
function because it depends on path.
th. It is a path function œeesle Deewj DeefYeiece kesâ leeheeW hej
not a state function. Thermodynamical
mical functions must
be state function. (d) the volume of the cylinder
inder of
o the engine
38. A thermodynamic process ss is shown in the Fbpeve kesâ efmeefueC[j kesâ DeeÙeleve
eve hej
he
figure. The pressuree aand volumes NEET (UG)-14.10.2020,
14 Phase-II
corresponding to some points
nts in the figure are Ans. (c) : Carnot engine is a reversible
rever heat engine
PA = 3 × 104 Pa; VA = 2×10–3 m3; working between 2 Reservoirs irs & has maximum
PB = 8×104 Pa; VD = 5×10–3 m3. possible efficiency. It is based on theoretical
In the process AB, 600 J of heat is added to the thermodynamic cycle.
system and in process BC, C, 20200 J of heat is
added to the system. Thee cha change in internal
energy of the system is process
cess AAC would be
efÛe$e ceW T<ceeieeflekeâer Øe›eâce efoKeeKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ kegâÚ
efyevogDeeW hej oeye Je DeeÙeleve efvecvee Øek
Øekeâej nw-
3
PA = 3 × 10 Pa; VA = 2×10 ceer
4 –3

3
PB = 8×104 Pa; VD = 5×10–3 ceer ~
Øe›eâce AB ceW 600 J T<cee oer ieÙeer Ùeer lleLee BC ceW 200 J
T<cee oer ieÙeer~ AC Øe›eâce ceWeW DDeevleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW Efficiency of Carnot heat engine is given
give by–
heefjJele&ve nesiee: T
η = 1− L
TH
TL = cold reservoir Temp (Sink Temp)
Temp
TH = Hot reservoir Temp (Sourcee Temp)
Tem
∴ Efficiency of Carnot engine depends upon
Temperatures of source & sink.

Physics 238 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
40. The efficiency of an ideal heat engine working 1 10
between the freezing point and boiling point of =
water, is / peue kesâ ieueveebkeâ Deewj keäJeLeveebkeâ kesâ yeerÛe 10 Q
keâeÙe&jle efkeâmeer DeeoMe& T<cee Fbpeve keâer o#elee nesleer nw Q = 100J
(a) 26.8% (b) 20% ∴ Amount of heat released at reservoir, QL = QH – W
(c) 12.5% (d) 6.25% = 100 – 10
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 = 90J
Ans. (a) : Efficiency of ideal heat engine, This heat is equal to heat absorbed during reverse
process from same reservoir.
42. The temperature inside a refrigerator is t2°C
and the room temperature is t1°C. The amount
of heat delivered to the room for each joule of
electrical energy consumed ideally will be.
 T 
ef keâmeer Meerleuekeâ (jseføeâpejsšj) kesâ Yeerlej keâe leehe t2°C
η = 1 − 2  nw Deewj keâcejs keâe leehe t1°C nw ~ DeeoMe& DeJemLee ceW Øeefle
 T1  petue efJeÅegle Tpee& kesâ JÙeÙe nesves hej keâcejW keâer
T2 : sink temperature mLeeveevleefjle T<cee keâe ceeve nesiee -
T1 : Source temperature
Percentage efficiency- t1 t + 273
(a) (b) 1
t1 − t t1 − t 2
 Τ2 
% η = 1 −  × 100 t + 273 t +t
 T1  (c) 2 (d) 1 2
t1 + t 2 t1 + 273
 273   100 
% η = 1 −  × 100 =   × 100 NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
 373   373  Ans. (b) :
%η = 26.8%
1
41. A Carnot engine having an efficiency of as
10
heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the
work done on the system is 10 J, the amount of
energy absorbed from the reservoir at lower
temperature is/T<cee Fbpeve kesâ ™he ceW efkeâmeer keâeveexš Coefficient of Performance of Refrigerator is
1 Q t + 273
Fbpeve keâer o#elee nw~ Fmekeâe GheÙeesie Skeâ jseføeâpejsšj COP = c = 2
10 W t1 − t 2
keâer YeeBefle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Fme lev$e (efvekeâeÙe) hej QH = Qc + W
efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& 10J nes lees efvecve leehe hej efjpej JeeÙej Q Q
(kegbâ[) mes DeJeMeesef<ele Tpee& keâe ceeve nesiee: ⇒ H = c +1
W W
(a) 1 J (b) 90 J Q H t 2 + 273
(c) 99 J (d) 100 J = +1
W t1 − t 2
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
AIPMT-03.05.2015 Q H t 2 + 273 + t1 − t 2
=
Ans. (b) : W t1 − t 2
Q H t1 + 273
=
W t1 − t 2
43. A refrigerator works between 4ºC and 30ºC. it
is required to remove 600 calories of heat every
second in order to keep temperature of the
refrigerated space constant. The power
For a heat engine efficiency required is: /keâesF& jseføeâpejsšj 4ºC Deewj 30ºC kesâ yeerÛe
work output keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ ØeMeerleve efkeâS peeves Jeeues mLeeve keâe leehe
η=
Heat input efveÙele jKeves kesâ efueS 600 kewâueesjer T<cee keâes Øeefle
W meskeâC[ yeenj efvekeâeuevee DeeJeMÙekeâ neslee nw~ Fmekesâ efueS
η=
QH DeeJeMÙekeâ Meefòeâ ÛeeefnS :
Physics 239 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(Take 1 cal = 4.2 Joules) 45. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in
( 1 cal = 4.2 Joules ueerefpeÙes) series. The engine A receives heat from the
source at temperature T1 and rejects the heat
(a) 2365 W (b) 2.365 W to the sink at temperature T. The second
(c) 23.65 W (d) 236. 5 W engine B receives the heat at temperature T
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 and rejects to its sink at temperature T2. For
what value of T the efficiencies of the two
Ans. (d) : Consider the situation in figure-
engines are equal?/oes keâeveexš Fbpeve A Deewj B
ëe=bKeuee ceW keâeÙe&jle nw~ Fbpeve A leeheceeve T œeesle mes
T<cee Øeehle keâjlee nw Deewj leeheceeve T hej efmebkeâ keâes
T<cee efve<heeefole keâjlee nw~ otmeje Fbpeve B leeheceeve T
hej G<cee Øeehle keâjlee nw Deewj leeheceeve T2 hej Deheves
efmebkeâ keâes efve<heeefole keâj oslee nw~ T kesâ efkeâme ceeve kesâ
efueS oesveeW Fbpeve keâer o#elee meceeve nesieer~
Q2 = 600 cal/s T1 + T2 T1 − T2
(a) (b)
T2 Q 2 2
COP = = 2 (c) T1T2 (d) T1T2
T1 − T2 W
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
277 600cal/s
= Ans. (d) : Given
(303 − 277) W A receive heat from source is = T1
600 × 26
W= cal/s
277
W = 56.317 cal/s
W = (56.37 × 4.2) J/s
W = 236.53J/s
Power required = 236.53 watt
44. The coefficient of performance of a refrigerator Sink heat rejected = T
is 5. If the temperature inside freezer is –20°C, B Rejected heat from sink = T2
the temperature of the surroundings to which it Thot − Tcold
rejects heat is/efkeâmeer ØeMeerlekeâ (jseføeâpejsšj) keâe Carnot efficiency = ηe =
Thot
efve<heeove iegCebekeâ 5 nw~ Ùeefo øeâerpej (ØeMeerefle$e) keâe
T
Yeerlejer leehe-20ºC nw lees ØeMeerlekeâ kesâ yeenj ÛeejeW Deesj ηA = 1 –
T1
peneB Ùen leehe yeenj hebsâkeâlee nQ keâe leeheceeve nesiee:
T
(a) 21°C (b) 31°C ηB = 1– 2
T
(c) 41°C (d) 11°C
When ηA = ηB
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
T T
1 1− = 1− 2
Ans. (b) : K = T1 T
T1
−1 T T2
T2 =
T1 T
T1 1
−1 =
T2 K T = T1T2
T1 1 46. When 1 kg of ice at 0ºC melts to water at 0ºC,
−1 = the resulting change in its entropy, taking
T2 5
latent heat of ice to be 80 Cal/gm, is :
T1
=
6 peye 0ºC keâer 1 kg yeHe&â 0ºC kesâ peue ceW heefjJeefle&le nesleer
273 + ( −20 ) 5 nw lees Fmekeâer Svš^e@heer ceW heefjCeeceer heefjJele&ve nesiee (Ùeefo
253 × 6
yeHe&â keâer ieghle T<cee 80 Cal/gm neW) :
T1 = = 303.6K (a) 293 Cal/K (b) 273 Cal/K
5
(c) 8 × 104 Cal/K (d) 80 Cal/K
T1 = 30.6 31°C AIPMT (Screening)-2011

Physics 240 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Given – Latent heat of ice (L)= 80 Cal/gm Ans. (c) :
Mass of ice (m) = 1 kg = 1000gm.
T = 0oC = 273 K
Heat absorbed during change of phase, Q = mL
∆Q = 1000 × 80 = 8 × 104 Cal
∆Q 8×104
∴ Change in entropy, (S) = = = 293 Cal/K
T 273
47. An engine has an efficiency of 1/6. When the
temperature of sink is reduced by 62ºC, its
efficiency is doubled. Temperature of the source
is- /Skeâ Fbpeve keâer o#elee 1/6 nw~ peye Fmekesâ iele& (efmebkeâ) Given
kesâ leeheceeve keâes 62ºC mes keâce keâj efoÙee peelee nw~ lees sink temp TL = 300 K
Fmekeâer o#elee ogiegveer nes peeleer nw~ Œeesle keâe leeheceeve η1 = 0.4
nesiee:- By Carnot Theorem
(a) 99ºC (b) 124ºC T
η1 = 1 – L
(c) 37ºC (d) 62ºC TH
AIPMT-2007 300
0.4 = 1 –
Ans. (a) : Given engine efficiency ηI = 1 6 TH1
Let source temp = TH 300
= 0.6
Let sink temp = TL TH1
difference remains same so 62 °C can directly be 300
subtracted TH = = 500K
1
0.6
Hence, Sink temp = ( TL − 62 ) Now efficiency is increased 50% of original efficiency–
50
So new efficiency η2 = 40 + 40× = 60%
1 T T 5 100
so, η 1= = 1 − L ⇒ L = ........ (i)
6 TH TH 6 300
η2 = 1 –
1 1 T − 62 T − 62 2 TH2
Also, ηII = 2 × = = 1− L ⇒ L =
6 3 TH TH 3 300 300
0.6 = 1 – ⇒ = 0.4
5 6TH − 62 2 TH2 TH2
or, = [from equation (i)]
TH 3 300
TH 2 = = 750 K
5 62 2 62 1 0.4
or, − = ⇒ =
6 TH 3 TH 6 So, Increase in source temp to increase efficiency 50%
TH = 372 K = 750 – 500
= 250 K
or, TH = 372 − 273 = 99º C
49. An ideal gas heat engine operates in Carnot
48. A Carnot engine whose sink is at 300 K has an cycle between 227ºC and 127ºC. It absorbs 6 ×
efficiency of 40%. By how much should the 104 calories of heat at higher temperature.
temperature of source be increased so as to Amount of heat converted to work is:-
increase its efficiency by 50% of original
efficiency:-
Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme keâe T<ceerÙe Fbpeve keâejvee@š meeFkeâue
Skeâ keâejvee@š Fbpeve kesâ iele& (efmebkeâ) keâe leehe 300 K nw Devegmeej 227ºC Deewj 127ºC leeheceeveeW kesâ yeerÛe keâeÙe&
keâjlee nQ Ùen GÛÛe leehe hej 6 × 104 kewâueesjer T<cee
Deewj Fmekeâer o#elee 40% nw œeesle leehe keâes efkeâlevee
(a) 4.8 × 104 calories/4.8 × 104 kewâueesjer
yeÌ{eÙee peeS efkeâ Fbpeve keâer o#elee Fmekeâer henueer o#elee
mes 50% DeefOekeâ nes peeS:- (b) 2.4 × 104 calories/2.4 × 104 kewâueesjer

(a) 275 K (b) 325 K (c) 1.2 × 104 calories/1.2 × 104 kewâueesjer
(c) 250 K (d) 380 K (d) 6 × 104 calories/6 × 104 kewâueesjer
AIPMT-2006 AIPMT-2005,2003
Physics 241 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): 60 T
⇒ = 1− 2
100 1000
⇒ T2 = 400 K
∴ Required temperature of sink will be = 400K.
51. A scientist says that the efficiency of his heat
engine which work at source temperature
127ºC and sink temperature 27º C to 26%, then
Skeâ Jew%eeefvekeâ keânlee nw efkeâ Gmekeâe Fbpeve 127ºC œeesle
Given, Temperature of source, T1= 227º C Je 27ºC efmebkeâ kesâ yeerÛe keâeÙe& keâjlee nw, Ùeefo Fbpeve keâer
= 227 +273
= 500 K
o#elee 26% nw, lees Ùen-
Temperature of source, T2 = 127ºC (a) It is impossible/ Ùen DemebYeJe nw~
= 127+273 (b) It is possible but less probable
= 400 K Ùen mebYeJe nw hej keâce mebYeeJevee nw~
Amount of heat absorbed Q1 = 6×104 cal (c) It is quite probable/ Ùen ueieYeie mebYeJe nw~
for a reversible heat engine we have, (d) Data are incomplete/ DeebkeâÌ[s heÙee&hle veneR nQ~
Q AIPMT-2001
= constant
T Ans. (a) : Given, source temperature = 127ºC = 400 K
Q2 T2 Sink Temperature = 27ºC = 300 K
⇒ =
Q1 T1 Efficiency of heat engine = 26%
Now,
Q2 400
⇒ = Efficiency of Carnot’s cycle –
6 × 10 4 500
Tsink
4 η = 1-
Heat rejected,Q 2 = × 6 × 10 4 ⇒ Q 2 = 4.8 × 104 cal Tsource
5
300
Now, heat converted to work, W = Q1 − Q 2 η = 1- = 0.25
400
= 6 × 104 − 4.8 × 104 ⇒ W = 1.2 ×104 cal So, with these source & sink Temperatures, maximum
efficiency is 25%.
50. The efficiency of carnot engine is 50% and
temperature of sink is 500K. If temperature of ⇒ 26% is impossible.
source is kept constant and its efficiency raised 1
52. The ratio (W/Q) for a carnot – engine is Now
to 60%, then the required temperature of the 6
sink will be /keâejvee@š Fbpeve keâer o#elee 50³ SJeb efmebkeâ the temperature of sink is reduced by 62ºC,
keâe leehe 500K nw~ Ùeefo Œeesle keâe leehe efveÙele jKee then this ratio becomes twice, then the initial
peeÙes SJeb Fmekeâer o#elee 60³ keâj efoÙee peeÙes lees efmebkeâ temp. of the sink and source are respectively :
keâe DeeJeMÙekeâ leehe nesiee - Skeâ keâeveexš Fvpeve kesâ
W
keâe ceeve 1/6 nw~ Ùeefo
(a) 100 K (b) 600 K Q
(c) 400 K (d) 500 K efmevkeâ keâe leehe 62°C mes Iešeles nQ, lees Fme Devegheele keâe
AIPMT-2002 ceeve ogievee nes peelee nw, lees efmevkeâ leLee Œeesle kesâ
Ans. (c) : Given, ØeejefcYekeâ leehe ›eâceMe: neWies –
Efficiency of carnot engine = 50% (a) 33ºC, 67ºC (b) 37ºC, 99ºC
Temperature of sink = 500K = T2 (c) 67ºC, 33ºC (d) 97 K, 37 K
T
Q η = 1− 2 AIPMT-2000
T1
W 1
50 500 Ans. (b) : Given, Ratio, =
⇒ =1− Q 6
100 T1 ...(i)
500 100 − 50 W = work done = TH – TL , Q = TH ,
⇒ =
T1 100
⇒ T1 = 1000K
To increase the efficiency upto 60%
T1 = 1000K
T
η = 1− 2
T1

Physics 242 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Sink Q1 (T2) (a) 800 K (b) 900 K
W T1 − T2 T (c) 600 K (d) 700 K
η= = = 1− 2 AIPMT-1995
Q T1 T1
1 T Ans. (c) : Given that
⇒ =1− 2 Efficiency of the Carnot engine is, η1 = 40% = 0.4
6 T1
T2 1 5 Intake temperature is, T1 = 500 K
⇒ = 1 − = ...........(i) Efficiency of the Carnot engine is, η2 = 50% = 0.5
T1 6 6
1 T − 62 We know that
Case- II ⇒ 2 × = 1− 2 T2
6 T1 The efficiency of Carnot engine η1 = 1 –
T1
1 T − 62
⇒ −1 = − 2 T2
3 T1 0.40 = 1 –
2 T 62 500
⇒ − =− 2 + T2 = 0.6 × 500
3 T1 T1
T2 = 300 K
5 2 62
⇒ − = Now efficiency is 50%
6 3 T1 T
1 62 So, 0.5 = 1 – 2
⇒ = T1
6 T1 300
T1 = 372 K 0.5 = 1 –
T1
T1 = 372-273
T1 = 99ºC 300
= 1 – 0.5
T2 5 5 5 T1
= ⇒ T2 = × T1 = × 372
T1 6 6 6 300
= 0.5
⇒ T2 = 310 – 273 = 37ºC. T1
53. The efficiency of a Carnot engine operating 300
with reservoir temperature of 100ºC and –23ºC T1 =
will be/Skeâ keâeveexš Fbpeve 100ºC leLee –23ºC hej 0.5
keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ Fmekeâer o#elee nesieer: T 1 = 600K
373 + 250 373 – 250
(a) (b)
373 373 11.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems
100 + 23 100 – 23
(c) (d)
100 100
AIPMT-1997 55. An ideal gas undergoes four different processes
Ans. (b) : Given that, T1 = 100ºC = 273 + 100 from the same initial state as shown in P-V
= 373 K diagram. Four processes are adiabatic,
T2 = –23ºC = 273 –23 isothermal, isobaric and isochoric out of 1, 2, 3
= 250 K and 4, which one is adiabatic./keâesF& DeeoMe& iewme
We know that Skeâ ner DeejbefYekeâ DeJemLee mes ØeejbYe keâjkesâ efJeefYevve
T2 Øe›eâceeW mes iegpejleer nw~ efÛe$e ceW Ùes Ûeej Øe›eâce nQ– ®æes<ce,
η=1–
T1
meceleeheerÙe, meceoeyeerÙe SJeb meceDeeÙeleefvele~ 1, 2, 3 Deewj
250
η=1– 4 ceW mes keâewve-mee ®æs<ce nw?
373
373 – 250
η=
373
54. An ideal Carnot engine, whose efficiency is
40%, receives heat at 500 K. If its efficiency is
50%, then the intake temperature for the same
exhaust temperature is
Skeâ DeeoMe& keâeveexš Fbpeve keâer o#elee 40% nw peyeefkeâ Out of 1, 2, 3 and 4, which one is adiabatic?
Jen 500 K mes T<cee Øeehle keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo o#elee 50% (a) 4 (b) 3
keâjveer nes, lees efkeâleves leehe hej T<cee Øeehle keâjsiee? (c) 2 (d) 1

Physics 243 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c):

A thermodynamic system in which there is a change in

the state of matter due to the change in the pressure,
volume, temperature without transferring heat or mass
with the thermodynamic system or its surroundings.
As per the given (P–V) graph, in the curve (4), pressure (a) (iv) (b) (ii)
is constant, So this is an isobaric process. For the curve (c) (iii) (d) (iv)
(1), volume is constant, so it is isochoric process.
Between curves (3) and curve (2) is steeper (more Ans. (c) : Given P-V diagram;
slope), so it is adiabatic and the remaining curve (3) is
isothermal.
56. If an average person jogs, he produces 14.5 ×
104 cal min–1. This is removed by the
evaporation of sweat. The amount of sweat
evaporated per minute (assuming 1 kg requires
580 × 103 cal/kg for evaporation) is/Ùeefo keâesF& Q For an ideal gas,
meeceevÙe JÙeefkeäle cebLej ieefle mes Ûeuelee nw lees Jen 14.5 × PV = constant
10 cal min T<cee Glhevve keâjlee nw~ Ùen T<cee hemeerves
4 –1 As we know,
PV = nRT
kesâ Jee<heve mes Mejerj mes efvekeâue peeleer nw~ (Ùen ceeveles ngS
So, in the above figure, T is constant i.e. an isothermal
efkeâ 1 efkeâuees hemeerves kesâ Jee<heve keâs efueS 580 × 103 process and pressure at point 1 is greater than 2, P > P .
1 2
cal/kg ÛeeefnS) leye Øeefle efceveš Jeeef<hele hemeerves keâe This situation is represented by the curve (iii) in which
heefjceeCe nw P1 > P2 and straight-line graph is parallel to pressure
(a) 0.25 kg (b) 2.25 kg axis indicating constant temperature.
(c) 0.05 kg (d) 0.20 kg
Ans. (a) : Given ;
Calories produced per minute = 14.5 × 104 cal/min
Latent heat = 580 × 103 cal/kg
Now, Amount of sweat evaporated per minute
Sweat produces per minute 58. An ideal gas undergoes cyclic process ABCDA as
Number of calories required for evaporation per kg shown in given P-V diagram. The amount of
Calories produced (heat produce) / min ute work done by the gas is/keâesF& DeeoMe& iewme efÛe$e kesâ P-V
=
Latent heat (in cal / kg) Deejs
Ke ceW oMee&S Devegmeej Ûe›eâerÙe Øeef›eâÙee ABCDA mes
iegpejleer nw~ iewme Éeje efkeâS ieS keâeÙe& keâer cee$ee nw
14.5 × 10 4 145
= =
580 × 103 580
= 0.25 kg
57. Consider P-V diagram for an ideal gas shown
in figure./ efÛe$e ceW oMee&S ieS efkeâmeer DeeoMe& iewme kesâ
P-V DeejsKe hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~
(a) 6 P0V0 (b) –2 P0V0
(c) +2 P0V0 (d) +4 P0V0
Ans. (b) :

Out of the following diagrams, which

represents the T-P diagram?/efÛe$e ceW efoS ieS
DeejsKeeW ceW mes keâewve-mee «eeheâ Fmekesâ mebiele T-P DeejsKe
keâes efve®efhele keâjlee nw?
Physics 244 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Let P be the pressure of the gas in the cylinder, then the For container B (gas is compressed to half of its original
force exerted by the gas on the piston of the cylinder. volume) adiabatic compression
F = PA P 1V 1γ = P 2V 2γ
In a small displacement of piston through dx. Let original volume be 2Vo then after compression it
Work done by the gas while displacing the piston with becomes Vo.
the dx displacement, P1(2Vo) γ = P2(Vo) γ
dW = F.dx = PAdx = PdV γ
∴ Total amount of work done,  2V 
Vf
P2 =  o  Po
 Vo 
W = ∫ dW = ∫ PdV = (Vf – Vi )
Vi
(P2)B
( P2 ) B =2γ Po ... (ii)
In P – V diagram, ( P2 )A
The area under P – V curve represents work done. Ratio of final pressure of gas in B to that of gas A will
Now, Work done in the process ABCD be obtained by, (ii)/(i)
= Area of rectangle ABCDA
( P2 ) B 2 γ P0 γ –1
= AB × BC = =2
=(3Vo – Vo) × (2Po – Po) ( P2 )A 2P0
= 2Vo × Po 60. Three copper blocks of masses M1, M2 and M3
= 2Po Vo kg respectively are brought into thermal
Since, work done by the system is negative. So amount of contact till they reach equilibrium. Before
work done by the gas is negative or in other words, cyclic contact, they were at T1, T2, T3 (T1 > T2 > T3) .
process is anticlockwise, work done by the gas is negative. Assuming there is no heat loss to the
Hence, the amount of work done by the gas = – 2PoVo surroundings, the equilibrium temperature T
59. Consider two containers A and B containing is (s is specific heat of copper)/keâe@hej kesâ leerve
identical gases at the same pressure, volume
and temperature. The gas in container A is
ieg škesâ efpevekesâ õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: M1, M2 SJeb M3 nQ~
compressed to half of its original volume meecÙe DeJemLee ceW Deeves lekeâ leeheer mebheke&â ceW jKes ieS nQ~
isothermally while the gas in conainer B is mebheke&â mes hetJe& Fvekesâ leehe T1, T2 SJeb T3 (T1> T2>
compressed to half of its original value T3>)Les~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ heefjJesMe ceW keâesF& T<cee Üeme
adiabatically. The ratio of final pressure of gas
in B to that of gas in A is/ A leLee B, oes hee$eeW hej veneR nesleer, meblegueve leehe T keâe ceeve nesiee–
efJeÛeej keâerefpeS efpeveceW meceeve oeye, DeeÙeleve leLee leehe (a) T = 1 2
T + T + T3
hej meceeve iewme Yejer nw~ hee$e A keâer iewme keâes meceleeheerÙe 3
Øe›eâce Éeje Gmekesâ cetue DeeÙeleve kesâ DeeOes DeeÙeleve lekeâ M T + M 2T2 + M3T3
(b) T = 1 1
mebheeref[le efkeâÙee peelee nw peyeefkeâ hee$e B keâer iewme keâes M1 + M 2 + M3
®æes<ce Øe›eâce Éeje Gmekesâ cetue DeeÙeleve kesâ DeeOes M1T1 + M 2T2 + M3T3
DeeÙeleve lekeâ mebheeref[le efkeâÙee peelee nw~ B ceW iewme leLee (c) T =
3(M1 + M 2 + M3 )
A ceW iewme kesâ Debeflece oeyeeW keâe Devegheele nw
M1T1s + M 2T2s + M3T3s
γ–1 (d) T =
γ–1 1 M1 + M 2 + M3
(a) 2 (b)  
 2
Ans. (b) : Let the equilibrium temperature of the system
γ–1 2
 1   1  is T and M3 is at equilibrium with M1 and M2.
(c)   (d)  
 1– γ   1– γ  Let us assume that, T1 < T2 < T3.
Ans. (a) : Given; two containers A and B containing According to the question, there is no heat loss to the
identical gases at the same pressure, volume and surroundings.
temperature. So, Heat loss by M3 = Heat gained by M1 + Heat gained
For container A (gas is compressed to half of its original by M2
volume) isothermal compression ⇒ M3 s (T3 – T) = M1s (T – T1) + M2s (T – T2)
P 1V 1 = P 2V 2 (Where, s is specific heat of the copper material)
Let original volume be 2Vo then after compression it ⇒ T (M1 + M2 + M3) = M3T3 + M1T1 + M2T2
becomes Vo.
M1T1 + M 2T2 + M3T3
Po (2Vo) = P2 (Vo) ⇒T =
(P2)A = 2Po ... (i) M1 + M 2 + M3

Physics 245 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12.
Kinetic Theory
Ans. (a): The Kinetic energy of the gas molecules
12.1 Introduction and Behaviour moving from one place to another is expressed as
1
of Gases KE = k BT where kB is Boltzmann constant and T is
2
1. An ideal gas follows a process described by the temperature.
equation PV2 = C from the initial (P1, V1, T1) to As KE ∝ temperature therefore increase in temperature
of a gas filled in a container would lead to increase in its
final (P2, V2, T2) thermodynamic states, where kinetic energy.
C is a constant. Then: 3. Two vessels separately contain two ideal gases
Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme ØeejefcYekeâ DeJemLee (P1, V1, T1) mes A and B at the same temperature, the pressure
Debeflece DeJemLee (P2, V2, T2) lekeâ peeves kesâ efueS Skeâ of A being twice that of B. Under such
conditions, the density of A is found to be 1.5
Øe›eâce keâe DevegkeâjCe keâjleer nw, pees efkeâ meceerkeâjCe PV2 = times the density of B. The ratio of molecular
C Éeje efve™efhele nw, peneB C Skeâ efmLejebkeâ nw~ lees: weight of A and B is/Skeâ meceeve leeheceeve hej oes
hee$eeW ceW mes Skeâ ceW DeeoMe& iewme A leLee otmejs ceW DeeoMe&
(a) If P1 > P2 then T1 < T2/Ùeefo P1 > P2 lees T1 < T2
iewme B Yejer nw~ iewme A keâe oeye, iewme B kesâ oeye keâe oes
(b) If V2 > V1 then T2 > T1/Ùeefo V2 > V1 lees T2 > T1 iegvee nw~ Fve oMeeDeeW kesâ Devleie&le iewme A keâe IevelJe, iewme
(c) If V2 > V1 then T2 < T1/Ùeefo V2 > V1 lees T2 < T1 B kesâ IevelJe mes 1.5 iegvee heeÙee peelee nQ, lees A leLee B
(d) If P1 > P2 then V1 > V2/Ùeefo P1 > P2 lees V1 > V2 kesâ DeCegYeejeW Devegheele nesiee:
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 1 2
(a) (b)
Ans. (c) : Given that – 2 3
PV2 = C ...(i) 3
(c) (d) 2
By the ideal gas equation – 4
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
PV = nRT ...(ii)
n n Ans. (c) : For ideal gas,
Put the value of P in eq (i) from eq (ii) we get
PV = RT & M = ρV
nRT 2
V =C PM  M
V Thus, = RT Q V = 
ρ  ρ
C
⇒ VT = ⇒ VT = C1 PA M A
nR Here, = RT –––– (1)
ρA
⇒ T 1 V1 = T 2 V2
If temperature increases, volume decreases and vice PB M B
& = RT ––––– (2)
versa. ρB
⇒ If V2 > V1 then T2 < T1 Divide eq. (1) by (2)
2. Increase in temperature of a gas filled in a M A ρA PB 3 1 3
= × = × =
container would lead to:/efkeâmeer hee$e ceW Yejer iewme kesâ M B ρ B PA 2 2 4
leehe ceW Je=efæ nesves mes keäÙee nesiee? The ratio of molecular weight of A & B is 3 : 4
4. In the given (V – T) diagram, what is the
(a) Increase in its kinetic energy
relation between pressure P1 and P2 ?
Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& ceW Je=efæ oMee&Ùes ieÙes (V–T) DeejsKe ceW, oeye P1 leLee P2 kesâ yeerÛe
(b) Decrease in its pressure/Fmekesâ oeye ceW keâceer keäÙee mebyebOe nw?
(c) Decrease in intermolecular distance
DeblejeDeCegkeâ otjer ceW keâceer
(d) Increase in its mass/Fmekesâ õJÙeceeve ceW Je=efæ
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019

Physics 246 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a)Cannot be predicted/ efveOee&e& fjle vveneR efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee
(b)P2 = P1
(c)P2 > P1 (a) (b)
(d)P2 < P1
NEETEET ((UG)-05.05.2013
Ans. (d) : According to ideal gas eqn, –
PV = nRT (c) (d)

 nR 
V= T AIPMT
IPMT (Screening)-2012
 P  Ans. (c) : When liquified oxygen
n is heated
he from 50 K to
nR 300 K, first its temperature goes
es on increasing. After
Slope =
P some time, when conversion off liquid
liqui state to gaseous
1 state initiate i.e. during phasee change,
cha temperature
Slope ∝ remains constant. When the liquid
quid state
s is completely
P
converted into a gaseous state,ate, again temperature
So increases on further heating.
θ 2 > θ1
1 1
Slope 2 > Slope1 ⇒ >
P2 P1
P1 > P2
7. If Cp and Cv denote the specific specif heats (per unit
5. In a vessel, the gas is at a pre pressure P. If the mass) of an ideal gas off molecular mo weight M
mass of all the molecules is ha halved and their where R is the molecularr weight weig constant, then
speed is doubled, then thee res resultant pressure Ùeefo efkeâmeer DeeoMe& iewme keâe DeCeg
CegYeej
ee M nw~ Cp leLee Cv
will be/Skeâ yele&ve ceW iewme P oeye
eye hej nw~ Ùeefo meYeer Fmekeâer efJeefMe‰ Gâ<cee (Øeefle FkeâeF&
âeF& õJÙeceeve)
õ nw lees–
DeCegDeeW keâe õJÙeceeve DeeOee keâj efoÙe Ùee peeS Deewj Gvekeâer (a) Cp – Cv = R/M2 (b) Cp – Cv = R
ieefle oesiegveer keâj oer peeS lees heefjCeecee
eeceer oeye nesiee- (c) Cp – Cv = R/M (d) Cp – Cv = MR
(a) 4P (b) 2P R ÙeneB ceesueerÙe iewme (DeCeg iewwme) efeveÙeleebkeâ nw
(c) P (d) P/2 AIPMT
AIP (Mains)-2010
NEET (UG)-18.05.2
8.05.2013, Karnataka Ans. (c) : Let Cv and Cp be the molar
mola specific heats of
ure of gas is,
Ans. (b) : Average Value of Pressure the ideal gas at constant volumee and constant pressure
respectively, then
1 N 2
P= m Vrms Cp = Mcp and Cv = Mcv
3 V
Where, cv = Specific heat capacity at constant volume
m
m' = , V'rms = 2Vrms cp = Specific heat capacity at constant
c pressure
2 M= Molar weight of thee actual
actua substance
1 N m
Then P' = ( 2V )2rms dU= CvdT ...(i)
3 V 2 Also enthalpy is given by,
1 N 2 ×2 ⇒ H = U + PV
P' = mVrms
3 V ⇒ dH = dU + d(PV)
P ' = 2P ⇒ dH = dU + nRT …(ii)
[From ideal gas eq'n, PV
V = nRT]
n
6. Liquid oxygen at 50 K iss heat heated to 300 K at
Also, dH = CPdT
constant pressure of 1 atm.. The rate of heating
CPdT = CvdT + nRdT
is constant. Which one of the fo following graphs
CP = Cv + nR
represents the variation of tem temperature with
CP – Cv = nR
time?/50 K hej õJe Deekeämeerpeve keâe
keâes 300 K lekeâ Skeâ
Where 'n' is concentration of ideal
al gas
atm (JeeÙegceb[ueerÙe) efmLej oeye hej iiece& efkeâÙee peelee nw~
m
Ùeefo iece& keâjves keâer oj efmLej nw leesees, eefvecveebefkeâle ceW keâewve Where n = ,
M
mee «eeheâ (DeeuesKe) meceÙe kesâ meeLe eeLe leehe kesâ heefjJele&ve m = given mass of gas,
keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjlee nw? M = Molar mass
Physics 247 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
m Ans. (c): Dalton's law of partial pressure states that the
⇒ CP = Cv =R , where m = 1, total pressure of a mixture of gases is equal to the sum
M
of the partial pressure of the component gases.
R PTotal = Pgas1 + Pgas2 + Pgas3
CP − Cv =
M P = P1 + P2 + P3
8. An ideal gas A and a real gas B have their 10. Two containers A and B are partly filled with
volumes increased form V to 2V under water and closed. The volume of A is twice that
isothermal conditions. The increase in internal of B and it contains half the amount of water in
energy/Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme A leLee JeemleefJekeâ iewme B kesâ B. If both are at the same temperature, the
water vapour in the containers will have
DeeÙeleve, V mes 2V lekeâ meceleeheerÙe efmLeefle ceW yeÌ{e efoÙes pressure in the ratio of
ieÙes~ Fmekeâer Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& ceW Je=efæ oes yele&veeW A Deewj B ceW LeesÌ[e heeveer Yejkeâj yebo keâj efoÙee
(a) will be same in both A and B/A leLee B oesveeW ceW ieÙee~ A keâe DeeÙeleve B mes oesiegvee nw leLee A ceW heeveer
meceeve keâe DeeÙeleve B mes DeeOee nw~ Ùeefo oesveeW keâe leeheceeve
(b) will be zero in both the gases/oesveeW ceW MetvÙe meceeve nes lees oesveeW ceW Jee<he kesâ oeye keâe Devegheele nesiee:
(c) of B will be more than that of A/B ceW A mes (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1
DeefOekeâ (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
(d) of A will be more then that of B/A ceW B mes AIPMT-1988
DeefOekeâ Ans. (b) : Given data
AIPMT-1993 VA = 2VB
Ans. (c) : An Isothermal condition 1
MA = M B
Temperature = constant 2
In Ideal gas, TA = TB
change in Internal energy- Partial pressure and vapour pressure depends upon
3 temperature only
∆U = nR ∆T [∵∆T =constant]
2 PA 1
=
∆U = 0 PB 1
In the case of real gas, there is interactions between the
molecules i.e attraction between molecules at low 11. At constant volume temperature is increased
pressure and repulsion at high pressure. Thus, even if then/efveÙele DeeÙeleve hej leehe yeÌ{eÙee peelee nw, lees
temperature is constant, charge in pressure changes their (a) collission on walls will be less/DeCegDeeW keâe yele&ve
internal energy. keâer oerJeejeW mes mebIeó keâce nesiee~
∆U ≠ 0 (b) number of collisions per unit time will
9. Three containers of the same volume contain increase/Øeefle meskeâC[ nesves Jeeues mebIeó yeÌ{sieW~
three different gases. The masses of the (c) collisions will be in straight lines/mebIeó mejue
molecules are m1, m2 and m3 and the number of
molecules in their respective containers are N1,
jsKee ceW neWieW~
N2 and N3. The gas pressure in the containers (d) collisions will not change/mebIeóeW keâer mebKÙee ceW
are P1, P2 and P3 respectively. All the gases are keâesF& heefjJele&ve veneR nesiee~
now mixed and put in one of these containers. AIPMT-1989
The pressure P of the mixture will be
Ans. (b) : PV = nRT
leerve yele&veeW ceW leerve Deueie-Deueie iewmeW meceeve DeeÙeleve If temperature of gas increases at constant volume then
keâer Yej oer ieÙeer~ DeCegDeeW keâe õJÙeceeve ›eâceMe: m1, m2, kinetic energy of gas molecule increase. Due to which
m3 leLee DeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee N1, N2, N3 nw~ yele&veeW ceW the number of collisions per unit time increases.
iewmeeW keâe oeye ›eâceMe: P1, P2, P3 nw~ leerveeW iewmeeW keâes 12. The value of critical temperature in terms of
efceueekeâj Skeâ yele&ve ceW [eue efoÙee ieÙee lees iewmeeW keâe Vander Waals' constant a and b is given by
oeye P nesiee: JeeC[j Jeeue efveÙeleebkeâ a Deewj b kesâ heoeW ceW ›eâebeflekeâ leehe
(a) P < (P1 + P2 + P3) keâe ceeve nw:
P +P +P 8a 27a
(b) P = 1 2 3 (a) TC = (b) TC =
3 27Rb 8Rb
(c) P = P1 + P2 + P3 a a
(c) TC = (d) TC =
(d) P > (P1 + P2 + P3) 2Rb 27Rb
AIPMT-1991 AIPMT-1996
Physics 248 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Vander waals equation is given by
12.2 Kinetic Theory of Gases
 a 
 P + 2  ( V – b ) = RT
 V 
14. A container of volume 200 cm3 contains 0.2
Where a and b are constant mole of hydrogen gas and 0.3 mole of argon
RT a gas. The pressure of the system at temperature
P= − 2
V−b V 200 K (R = 8.3 J K-1 mol-1) will be
At critical temperature derivative of P with respect of 200 mesceer3 DeeÙeleve Jeeues hee$e ceW 0.2 ceesue neF[^espeve
volume
–RT 2a
+ 3 =0
iewme Deewj 0.3 ceesue Deeie&ve iewme nw~ 200K (R = 8.3
( V − b) V
2
JK-1 mol-1) kesâ leeheceeve hej efvekeâeÙe keâe oeye nesiee~
2a RT (a) 4.15×105 P (b) 4.15× 106Pa
=
V3 ( V − b ) 2 5
(c) 6.15×10 Pa (d) 6.15×104Pa
a RT RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
= ..........(i) Ans. (b) : Given:
V 4 2V ( V − b )2
3
V = 200 cm
∂2 P
Taking double derivative =0 n1 = 0.2
∂V 2
n2 = 0.3
2RT 6a
– =0 T = 200K
( V − b )3 V 4 R = 8.3 JK-1 mol-1
RT a Pnet = P1+P2
= 4 ..........(ii)
(
3 V−b ) 3
V RT
= (n1 +n2)
On equating eqn(i) and eqn(ii) we get- V
RT RT 8.3×200
= = (0.2+0.3)
(
3 V−b ) 3
2V V − b )
( 2 200 ×10−6
= 8.3×0.5×106
1 3
= Pnet = 4.15×106 Pa
( V − b ) 2V
15. The temperature of a gas is –500 C. To what
V = 3b temperature the gas should be heated so that
Put the value of V in eqn (i) the rms speed is increased by 3 times?
a RT efkeâmeer iewme keâe leeheceeve –50ºC nw~ iewme keâes efkeâme
=
( 3b ) 4 2 × 3b ( 2b ) 2 leeheceeve lekeâ iece& efkeâÙee peeÙes efkeâ Fmekeâer Jeie& ceeOÙe
a RT cetue Ûeeue ceW leerve iegveer Je=efæ nes peeÙes?
=
81b 4
2 × 3b × 4b 2 (a) 233 K (b) 6690 C
8a (c) 32950 C (d) 3097 K
i.e. TC = NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
27 bR
Ans. (c) : The rms speed of gas is –
13. At 0 K which of the following properties of a
3RT
gas will be zero?/0 K hej efvecvefueefKele ceW mes iewme keâe Vrms =
M
keâewve-mee iegCe MetvÙe nesiee?
V1 T
(a) vibrational energy/kebâheve Tpee& = 1
V2 T2
(b) density/IevelJe
(c) kinetic energy/ieeflepe Tpee& V
=
223
(d) potential energy/efmLeeflepe Tpee& 4V T2
AIPMT-1996 1 223
=
Ans. (c) : At absolute zero temperature that is at T = 0 16 T2
K the average kinetic energy of gases reduces to T2 = 3568 K
zero K.E ∝ T T2 = 3568 – 273
K.E = 0 T2 = 3295º C

Physics 249 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
16. Three vessels of equal capacity have gases at = 22.4×10–3 m3
the same temperature and pressure. The first ∴ 4.5 kg occupies
vessel contains helium (monoatomic). the
22.4 × 10 −3
second contains fluorine (diatomic) and the = × 4.5
third contains sulfur hexafluoride (polyatomic). 18 × 10 −3
The correct statement, among the following is: = 5.6 m3
meceeve #ecelee Jeeues leerve yele&veeW ceW meceeve leehe SJeb oeye 18. Match Column - I and Column - II and choose
hej iewmeW jKeer ngF& nQ~ ØeLece yele&ve ceW nerefueÙece (Skeâue the correct match from the given choices.
hejceeCeJeerÙe), otmejs yele&ve ceW keäueesjerve (efÉhejceeCeJeerÙe) mlecYe-I keâes mlecYe-II mes megcesefuele keâerefpeS leLee veerÛes
SJeb leermejs yele&ve ceW meuheâj nskeämeeheäueesjeF[ efoS ieÙes efJekeâuheeW mes mener megcesefuele keâes ÚeBefšS :
(yenghejceeCeJeerÙe) iewmeW jKeer nQ~ efvecveefueefKele ceW mes mener Column - I/mlecYe-I Column - II
keâLeve nw: mlecYe-II
(a) All vessels contain unequal number of
1
respective molecules/meYeer yele&veeW ceW Deheves-Deheves (A) Root mean square (P) nm v− 2
3
DeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee yejeyej veneR nesieer
speed of gas
(b) The root mean square speed of molecules is
molecules/iewme kesâ
same in all three cases/meYeer leerveeW heefjefmLeefleÙeeW ceW,
DeCegDeeW keâer Jeie&ceeOÙe cetue Ûeeue meceeve nesieer DeCegDeeW keâe Jeie& ceeOÙe
(c) The root mean square speed of helium is the cetue Jesie
largest 3 RT
(B) Pressure exerted (Q)
nerefueÙece kesâ Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue Ûeeue meJee&efOekeâ nesieer M
(d) The root mean square speed of sulfur by ideal gas/DeeoMe&
hexafluoride is the largest/meuheâj nskeämeeheäueesje@F[
iewme Éeje Deejesefhele oeye
keâer Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue Ûeeue meJee&efOekeâ nesieer
5
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 (C) Average kinetic (R) RT
2
Ans. (c) : Root mean square speed of gas molecule is
energy of a
given by –
molecule/DeCeg keâer
3RT
Vrms = Deewmele ieeflepe Tpee&
M
3
• Vrms is independent of degree of freedom and (D) Total internal (S) k BT
inversely proportional to the molecular weight of the 2
atom. energy of 1 mole
decreasing order of molecular weight of atoms is – of a diatomic gas/1 ceesue
MHexa fluoride > Mfluorine > MHe efÉhejceeCegkeâ iewme keâer kegâue
• MHelium is smallest among all given. So, Vrms for Deevleefjkeâ Tpee&
Helium is maximum. (a) (A) - (R), (B) - (Q), (C) - (P), (D) - (S)
17. The volume occupied by the molecules (b) (A) - (R), (B) - (P), (C) - (S), (D) - (Q)
contained in 4.5 kg water at STP, if the (c) (A) - (Q), (B) - (R), (C) - (S), (D) - (P)
intermolecular forces vanish away is
(d) (A) - (Q), (B) - (P), (C) - (S), (D) - (R)
Ùeefo Deble: DeeefCJekeâ yeue nš peeS, lees ceevekeâ leehe SJeb
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
oeye hej 4.5 kg peue kesâ DeCegDeeW Éeje efueÙee ieÙee
Ans. (d) :
DeeÙeleve nesiee:
(A) Root mean square speed - 3RT
(a) 5.6 m3 (b) 5.6 ×10−6 m3 of gas molecule
M
(c) 5.6 ×103 m3 (d) 5.6 ×10−3 m3
(B) Pressure exerted by Ideal - 1
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 nmv 2
gas 3
Ans. (a) : When intermolecular force vanishes, the
liquid is converted into vapour. (C) Avg. kinetic energy of - 3
Molecular mass of water vapour = 18g KbT
molecule 2
= 18×10–3 kg
(D) Total internal energy of 1 - 5
We know the volume occupied by 1 mole of water RT
mole of a diatomic gas 2
vapour at STP = 22.4 liters
Physics 250 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
19. An ideal gas equation can be written as neF[^espeve, nerefueÙece leLee DevÙe DeeoMe& efÉhejceeCegkeâ iewme
P=
ρRT
where ρ and M0 are respectively, X (efpemekesâ DeCeg ÂÌ{ veneR nw hejvleg GveceW keâesF& Deefleefjòeâ
M0  Cp 
efkeâmeer DeeoMe& iewme meceerkeâjCe keâes veerÛes efoS ieS ™he ceW keâcheve efJeOee nw) kesâ γ  =  keâe ceeve ›eâceMe: nQ–
 Cv 
ρRT
efueKee pee mekeâlee nw P = 7 5 7 7 5 9
M0 (a) , , (b) , ,
5 3 5 5 3 7
ÙeneB ρ Deewj M0 nw, ›eâceMe: 5 7 9 5 7 7
(a) Number density, mass of the gas (c) , , (d) , ,
3 5 7 3 5 5
mebKÙee IevelJe, iewme keâe õJÙeceeve NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
(b) Mass density, mass of the gas Ans. (b) : For Hydrogen :- Diatomic gases have 5
õJÙeceeve IevelJe, iewme keâe õJÙeceeve degrees of freedom
(c) Number density, molar mass f=5
mebKÙee IevelJe, ceesuej õJÙeceeve f 5R
(d) Mass density, molar mass Cv = R =
2 2
õJÙeceeve IevelJe, ceesuej õJÙeceeve CP = Cv + R
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II 5R 7R
Ans. (d) : Ideal gas law, also called the general gas = +R =
2 2
equation, is the equation of state of hypothetical Ideal
C 7R
gas. It is a good approximation of behavior of many γH = V = 2 =7
gases under many condition. CP 5R 5
2
PV = nRT
For Helium :- Monatomic gases have 3 degree of
1 m
⇒P= RT freedom (f = 3)
V M0
3R
 m  Cv =
m RT ρ = = mass density  2
⇒P=  V  CP = CV + R
V M0  
M 0 = molar mass 3R 5R
= +R =
Hence, option (d) is correct. 2 2
20. The average thermal energy for a mono-atomic C 5R
gas is : (kB is Boltzmann constant and T, γ He = P = 2 =5
absolute temperature) C V 3R 3
2
efkeâmeer SkeâhejceeCegkeâ iewme keâer Deewmele leeheerÙe Tpee& nesleer For Gases (Unknown):- Additional mode is also
nw: (yeesušdmeceeve efveÙeleebkeâ·kB leLee efvejhes#e leehe · T) considered the degree of freedom of diatomic gas is 7
3 5 f=7
(a) k BT (b) k BT
2 2 7R
CV =
7 1 2
(c) k BT (d) k BT
2 2 CP = CV + R
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 7R 9R
= +R =
Ans. (a) : Average thermal kinetic energy of gas 2 2
molecule depend upon the temperature. 9R
C 2γ = 9
• For mono-atomic gases, degree of freedom is 3. γ gass = P =
Average thermal energy for mono-atomic gas is given CV 7R 7
2
by-
7 5 9
3 γ H , γ He , γ gass =  , , 
E = k BT 3 3 7
2
22. At what temperature will the rms speed of
 Cp  oxygen molecules become just sufficient for
21. The value of γ  =  , for hydrogen, helium
 C v  escaping from the Earth's atmosphere?
and another ideal diatomic gas X (whose (Given :
molecules are not rigid but have an additional Mass of oxygen molecule (m) = 2.76 × 10–26 kg
vibrational mode), are respectively equal to, Boltzmann's constant kB = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1) /
Physics 251 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer leehe hej Dee@keämeerpeve DeCegDeeW keâer Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue For mono atomic gas
(rms) Ûeeue he=LJeer kesâ JeeÙegceC[ue mes heueeÙeve keâj f=3
mekeâves kesâ efueS cee$e heÙee&hle nes peeSieer? f  5
Cp =  R + R  = R
2  2
(efoÙee ieÙee nw:
W mR∆T mR∆T 1 2
Dee@keämeerpeve kesâ DeCeg keâe õJÙeceeve (m)=2.76×10–26 kg So, = = = =
∆Q mC p ∆T 5  5 5
yeesušdpeceeve efmLejebkeâ kB = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1) m  R  ∆T
 2  2
(a) 2.508 × 104 K (b) 8.360 × 104 K 24. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of O2 and 4
(c) 1.254 × 104 K (d) 5.016 × 104 K moles of Ar at temperature T. Neglecting all
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 vibrational modes, the total internal energy of
Ans. (b) : Given, the system is/iewmeeW kesâ Skeâ efceßeCe ceW T leehe hej 2
Vrms = Vescape = 11.2 km/s = 11200 m/s ceesue Dee@keämeerpeve leLee 4 ceesue Deeie&ve iewme nQ~ keâcheVe kesâ
Mass of oxygen molecule (m) = 2.76 × 10–26 kg meYeer efJevÙeemeeW keâes veieCÙe ceeveles ngS, Fme efvekeâeÙe keâer
Boltzmann’s constant (KB) = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1 kegâue Deevleefjkeâ Tpee& nesieer~
The rms speed of gas molecules (a) 4 RT (b) 15 RT
3K BT (c) 9 RT (d) 11 RT
Vrms = = 11200
m NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Ans. (d) : Given :
3 ×1.38 ×10−23 × T
= 11200 Number of moles of oxygen, n1 = 2
2.76 × 10−26
Number of moles of argon, n2 = 4
Squaring both side, we get Temperature = T
2.76 × 10−26 × (11200 )
2
Using ideal gas internal energy is
T=
3 × 1.38 × 10−23 f
U= n RT
T = 8.360 × 10 4 K 2
Where,
23. The volume (V) of a monatomic gas varies with f = degree of freedom
its temperature (T), as shown in the graph. The n = number of moles
ratio of work done by the gas, to the heat
So, total internal energy
absorbed by it, when it undergoes a change
U = U1 + U2
from state A to state B, is / efkeâmeer SkeâhejceeCegkeâ
f f
iewme kesâ DeeÙeleve (V) ceW leehe (T) kesâ meeLe efJeÛejCe «eeHeâ = 1 n1RT1 + 2 n2RT2
2 2
ceW oMee&S Devegmeej neslee nQ DeJemLee A mes DeJemLee B lekeâ
5 3  O 2 ,f = 5 
peeves keâer Øeef›eâÙee ceW iewme Éeje efkeâS ieS keâeÙe& Deewj Fmekesâ = × 2 RT + × 4 RT Q Ar, f = 3
2 2  
Éeje DeJeMeesef<ele T<cee keâe Devegheele nw = 5RT + 6RT
⇒ U = 11RT
25. One mole of an ideal monatomic gas undergoes
a process described by the equation PV3
= constant. The heat capacity of the gas during
2 2 this process is
(a) (b)
5 3 efkeâmeer Øe›eâce ceW SkeâhejceeCeg DeeoMe& iewme kesâ Skeâ ceesue
2 1 kesâ heefjJele&ve keâes meceerkeâjCe PV3 = efmLejebkeâ Éeje JÙeòeâ
(c) (d)
7 3 efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Fme Øe›eâce keâer DeJeefOe ceW iewme keâer T<cee
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 Oeeefjlee nesieer -
Ans. (a) : V ∝ T (a)
3
R
5
R (b)
This is a case of isobaric process 2 2
W = P∆V = mR∆T (c) 2R (d) R
∆Q = mCp∆T NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II

Physics 252 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): equation (i) divided by eqn (ii)
PVx = constant (Polytropic process) v1 3
=
Heat capacity in polytropic process is given by v2 4
 R 
C = Cv + 1 − X  , v 2 = v1
4
3
Where, R is gas constant
200 × 2 400
Given that PV3 = constant v2 = =
X=3 ...(i) 3 3
Also, gas is monatomic, so 27. 4.0 g of a gas occupies 22.4 litres at NTP. The
degree of freedom, f = 3 ...(ii) specific heat capacity of the gas at constant
volume is 5.0 JK–1 mol–1. If the speed of sound
fR 3R
We know Cv = ⇒ Cv = in the gas at NTP is 952 ms–1, then the heat
2 2
capacity at constant pressure is
By formula.
meeceevÙe leehe leLee oeye hej, efkeâmeer iewme kesâ 4.0 «ee.
fR R 3R R 2R
C= + = − = =R õJÙeceeve keâe DeeÙeleve 22.4 ueeršj nw~ efmLej-DeeÙeleve
2 1− X 2 2 2
hej Fmekeâer efJeefMe° T<cee-Oeeefjlee 5.0 JK–1 mol–1 nQ
26. The molecules of given mass of gas have r.m.s.
velocity of 200 ms -1 at 27ºC and 1.0×105 Nm-2
Ùeefo, Fme iewme ceW, meeceevÙe leehe Je oeJe hej, OJeefve keâe
Pressure. When the temperature and pressure Jesie 952 ms–1 nw lees, Fme iewme keâer efmLej oeye hej
of the gas respectively, 127ºC and 0.05×105 efJeefMe° T<cee Oeeefjlee nw:
Nm2 , the r.m.s velocity of its molecules in ms-1 –1 –1
(Take gas constant R = 8.3 JK mol )
is ;/leehe 27ºC leLee 1.0×105 Nm-2 hej efkeâmeer efoS –1 –1 –1 –1
ieS õJÙeceeve keâer iewme kesâ DeCegDeeW keâe Jeie& ceOÙe cetue (a) 8.5 JK mol (b) 8.0 JK mol
–1 –1 –1 –1
(r.m.p.) Jesie 200 ms -1 nw~ peye Fme iewme kesâ leehe hej (c) 9.5 JK mol (d) 7.0 JK mol
oeye ›eâceMe: 127ºC Deewj 0.05×105 Nm2 nw, lees ms -1 AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015

ceW Fme iewme kesâ DeCegDeeW keâe Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue Jesie nw- γRT
Ans. (b) : Speed of sound V =
m
100
(a) (b) 100 2 γRT
3 V2 =
m
400 100 2 γ × 8 ⋅ 3 × 273
(c) (d) ( 952 )2 =
3 3 4 × 10 −3
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 7.5
γ=
Ans. (c) : rms velocity of gas molecules, 5
3RT C P 7.5
v rms = Thus γ= =
M Cv 5
Here R = gas constant Where Cv = 5 JK–1 mol–1 given
T = Temperature 7.5
CP = 5 × = 7.5 JK–1mol–1 ≈ 8JK–1mol–1
M = molecular weight 5
vrms of gas ∝ temperatrue 28. A cylinder contains hydrogen gas at pressure of
When 0
T = T1 = 27 C = 300 k 249 kPa and temperature 27°C.
T = T2 = 1270C = 400 k Its density is : (R = 8.3 J mol–1 K–1)
vrms = v1 = 200 m/sec efkeâmeer efmeefueC[j ceW 249 kPa oeye Deewj 27°C leehe hej
vrms = v2 = ? neF[^espeve iewme Yejer nw~
3 × R × 300 Fmekeâe IevelJe nw: (R = 8.3 J mol–1 K–1)
v1 = .................(i)
M (a) 0.2 kg/m3 (b) 0.1 kg/m3
3 × R × 400 (c) 0.02 kg/m3 (d) 0.5 kg/m3
v2 = .................(ii) NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
M
Physics 253 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : Given that, 3 4
(a) (b)
Pressure (P) = 249 kPa 2 3
Temperature (T) = 27ºC = 273 + 27 = 300 K 5
(c) 2 (d)
from ideal gas equation, 3
Q PV = nRT NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
m Ans. (a) : Given that
∴ PV =   RT ,
M P ∝ T3
Where 'M' is the molar mass of hydrogen and 'm' is the or PT −3 = constant ......(i)
given mass. P = Pressure
m V = Volume
PM = RT T = Temperature
V
Also for adiabatic process
PM m
ρ= Q =ρ PV γ = Constant
RT V but PV = RT (ideal gas law)

ρ=
( 249 × 10 ) × ( 2 × 10 ) = 0.2kg / m
3 −3
3
V=
RT
8.3 × 300 P
γ
CP  RT 
29. The ratio of the specific heats = γ in terms P  = Constant
CV  P 
of degrees of freedom (n) is given by: P1–γ Tγ = Constant
mJeeleb$Ùe keâesefš (n) kesâ heoeW ceW, efkeâmeer iewme keâer oes On dividing both sides by 1-γ in power we get,
γ
C or PT ( ) = constant
1−γ
efJeefMe° T<ceeDeeW kesâ Devegheele, DeLee&le P = γ keâe ceeve ........(ii)
CV n
Equating eq (i) and (ii)
nw: γ
= −3
 n  2 1 − γ
(a) 1 +  (b) 1 + 
 3  n γ = −3 + 3γ
 n  1 2γ = 3
(c) 1 +  (d) 1 + 
 2  n γ=3
2
AIPMT-03.05.2015 Cp
Ans. (b) : We know =3
Cv 2
n
CV = R 31. The amount of heat energy required to raise
2
the temperature of 1 g of Helium at constant
n  volume, from T1 K to T2 K is :-
CP = CV + R =  + 1  R
2  efveÙele DeeÙeleve hej 1g nerefueÙece keâe leehe T1 kewâefuJeve mes
n  T2 kewâefuJeve lekeâ yeÌ{eves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ T<ceerÙe
+1 R
C P  2   n+2 Tpee& keâe ceeve nw-
⇒γ= = = 
CV n  n 
R 3 T 
2 (a) Na kB  2 
4  T1 
2
γ = 1+ 3
n (b) N a k B ( T2 − T1 )
8
30. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a 3
gas is found to be proportional to the cube of its (c) N a k B ( T2 − T1 )
2
C
temperature. The ratio of P for the gas is:- 3
CV (d) N a k B ( T2 − T1 )
4
efkeâmeer ™æes<ce Øe›eâce ceW Skeâ iewme keâe oeye Gmekesâ leehe NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
kesâ Ieve (keäÙetye) kesâ meceevegheeleer heeÙee peelee nw, lees Fme Ans. (b) : The Process is being completed at a constant
C volume because the volume of the container is fixed so
iewme kesâ P keâe Devegheele nw- the heat energy required will be
CV

Physics 254 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Q = nCv∆T 33. A mass of diatomic gas (γ = 1.4) at a pressure
Cv = Specific heat at constant volume of 2 atmospheres is compressed adiabatically.
n = number of moles So that its temperature rises from 27ºC to
1gm 1 927ºC. The pressure of the gas in the final state
n= = mole is/efÉhejceeCegkeâ iewme (γ = 1.4) kesâ Skeâ õJÙeceeve keâes 2
4gm / mole 4
JeeÙegceC[ueerÙe oeye hej ™æes<ceerÙe ™he mes mecheerefÌ[le
f Na K b efkeâÙee peelee nw leeefkeâ Gmekeâe leehe 27ºC mes 927ºC lekeâ
Cv =
2
yeÌ{s~ Deefvlece DeJemLee ceW iewme keâe oeye nw~
The degree of freedom f has value 3 for a mono atomic
gas (a) 8 atm
Na = Avogadro Number (b) 28 atm
Kb = Boltzman constant (c) 68.7 atm
Putting all above Value (d) 256 atm
3 AIPMT (Mains)-2011
Q= Na Kb ∆T Ans. (d) : For an adiabatic process
8
Tγ
3 = constant
= Na K b ( T2 − T1 ) P γ−1
8
Given, T1 = 27°C = 273+27 = 300°K
32. The molar specific heats of an ideal gas at
T2 = 927°C = 273+927 = 1200°K
C C

constant pressure and volume are denoted by

=

P1 = 2atm
P

CP and CV, respectively. If γ and R is the γ = 1.4

V

Gas Equation for adiabatic relation

universal gas constant, then CV is equal to:
efmLej oeye leLee DeeÙeleve hej efkeâmeer DeeoMe& iewme keâer Q T1γ T2 γ
=
ceesuej efJeefMe° T<cee keâes ›eâceMe: CP leLee CV mes efveefo&° P1γ−1 P2 γ−1
C Substituting the values,
efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo γ = P Deewj R meeJe&ef$ekeâ iewme 3001.4 12001.4
CV = 1.4−1
efveÙeleebkeâ nw lees CV yejeyej nw- 21.4−1 P2
1+ γ  P2 
0.4
 1200 
1.4
(a) γR (b) ∴   = 
1− γ  2  300 
(c)
R
(d)
( γ − 1) taking log both side -
( γ − 1) R P  4
0.4ln  2  = 1.4 ln   = 1.94
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013  2 1
Ans. (c) : We know that P 
ln  2  = 4.852
C
γ= P ---------(1)  2
CV ∴ P2 = 255.9 ≈ 256atm.
Cp − Cv = R 34. A mono-atomic gas at pressure P1 and volume
Cp = R + C v ---------(2) 1
V1 is compressed adiabatically to th of its
8
eq (2) value put in eq (1)
original volume.
R + Cv
γ= What is the final pressure of the gas
Cv efkeâmeer SkeâhejceeCegkeâ iewme keâe oeye P1 Deewj DeeÙeleve V1
R 1
γ= +1 nw~ Fmekeâes ™æes<ce ™he mes ØeejefcYekeâ DeeÙeleve kesâ th
Cv 8
R lekeâ mebheeref[le efkeâÙee peelee nw, iewme keâe Deefvlece oeye
= γ −1 efkeâlevee nesiee –
Cv
(a) 64P1 (b) P1
 R 
C v = γ − 1  (c) 16P1 (d) 32P1
  AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Physics 255 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Ideal gas equation, for an adiabatic process is 36. The molar specific heat at constant pressure of
PV γ = Constant 7
an ideal gas is   R. The ratio of specific heat
2
P1 V1γ = P2 V2γ
at constant pressure to that at constant volume
5 is:-
for mono-atomic gas γ =
3 Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme kesâ efueS efmLej oeye DeJemLee ceW ceesuej
efJeefMe° T<cee keâe ceeve   R nw~ Fmekesâ efueS efmLej
5/3 7
∴ V  2
= P2  1 
5/3
P1V 1
8 oeye Deewj efmLej DeeÙeleve DeJemLeeDeeW ceW efJeefMe° T<ceeDeeW
5/3
 V ×8 keâe Devegheele nesiee:-
P2 = P1  1
 V  7 8
 1  (a)
5
(b)
7
P2 = P1 ( 2 )
5
5 9
(c) (d)
7 7
P2 = 32P1
AIPMT-2006
35. At 10ºC the value of the density of a fixed mass Ans. (a) : Given
of an ideal gas divided by its pressure is x. At Specific heat of an ideal gas at constant pressure
110ºC this ratio is –
7
10ºC hej Skeâ DeeoMe& iewme kesâ efveÙele õJÙeceeve kesâ Cp =   R
2
IevelJe Je iewme kesâ oeye keâe Devegheele x nes, lees 110ºC hej and we know Cp – Cv = R
Fme Devegheele keâe ceeve nesiee- 7
R– Cv = R
10 283 2
(a) x (b) x
110 383 7 5
Cv = R – R = R
383 2 2
(c) x (d) x
283 Cp 7 2R 7
ratio of specific heats = = =
AIPMT-2008 Cv 5 2R 5
Ans. (b) : From Ideal gas equation PV = n RT 37. The equation of state for 5 g of oxygen at a
m pressure P and temperature T, when occupying
PV =   RT a volume V, will be :-
M
5 «eece Dee@keämeerpeve keâe oeye P, leeheceeve T Deewj DeeleÙeve
m
PM =   RT V nQ~ Fmekeâe DeJemLee meceerkeâjCe nesiee :-
V
(a) PV = 5 RT (b) PV = (5/2) RT
PM = ρRT (c) PV = (5/16) RT (d) PV = (5/32) RT
PM Where R is the gas constant.
ρ=
RT peneb R = iewme efveÙeleebkeâ nw~
ρ M AIPMT-2004
r= =
P RT Ans. (d) : Given that :-
M Molecular weight of oxygen = 32g
At 10º C x = --------(I)
RT Number of moles of 5g oxygen, n = 5/32
M According to ideal gas eqn,
At 110º C x ' = -------(II)
RT ' PV = nRT
From equation (II) divided by (I) Given mass 5
where, n = =
x ' T 273 + 10 283 molar mass 32
= = =
x T ' 373 + 10 383
5
283 PV = RT
x' = x 32
383
Physics 256 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
38. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial ⇒ Cp = Cv +R
temperature of T K does 6 R joules of work n
adiabatically. If the ratio of specific heats of ⇒ Cp = R + R
2
this gas at constant pressure and at constant
n 
5 ⇒ Cp = R  + 1
volume is   , the final temperature of gas 2 
3
Also,
will be :-
efmLej oeye leLee efmLej DeeÙeleve hej efJeefMe° T<ceeDeeW kesâ n 
R  + 1
Cp 2  n+2
5 γ= =  =
  Deveg h eele Jeeueer Skeâ DeeoMe& iew
m e keâe Skeâ cees ue Cv n n
3 R
2
™æes<ce jerefle mes 6R petue keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo iewme keâe 2
DeejefcYekeâ leehe TK nes, lees Fmekeâe Deefvlece leehe nesiee:- ∴ γ=1+
n
(a) (T –2.4) K (b) (T + 4)K 2
(c) (T – 4) K (d) (T + 2.4)K ⇒ n=
γ −1
AIPMT-2004
40. Relation between pressure (P) and kinetic
Ans. (c) : Given Initial temperature, T1=T energy per unit volume (E) of a gas is
Work, W= 6R Skeâ iewme kesâ efueS oeye (P) leLee Skeâebkeâ DeeÙeleve keâer
Cp 5
γ= = ieeflepe Tpee& (E) kesâ yeerÛe mecyevOe nw:
Cv 3
2
In an adiabatic process, (a) P = E
3
R ( T2 – T1 ) 1
W= (b) P = E
1– γ 3
R ( T2 – T1 ) (c) P = E
W= (d) P = 3E
5
1– AIPMT-1991
3
Ans. (a) : The pressure of the gas molecules is given as
 5
W 1 −  = R ( T2 − T1 ) 1
 3 P = ρv 2r.m.s ..........(i)
3
 2
6R  −  = R ( T2 − T ) Where ρ = density
 3 v = R.M.S. speed of gas
 2  The kinetic energy of translation per unit volume of gas
T2 – T = 6  –  = –4 is-
 3
1
T2 = ( T – 4 ) K E = ρv 2rms .........(ii)
2
39. To find out degree of freedom, the correct Dividing equation (ii) ÷ (i)
expression is : 1 2
ρv
mJelev$elee keâer keâesefš %eele keâjves kesâ efueS mener JÙebpekeâ nw E 2 rms
=
2 γ +1 P 1 ρv 2
(a) n = (b) n = 3
rms
γ −1 2
E 1 3
2 1 = ×
(c) n = (d) n = P 2 1
γ +1 γ +1
3
AIPMT-2000 E= P
2
Ans. (a) : For 'n' degree of freedom, specific heat at
2
n P= E
constant volume (Cv) = R 3
2
Also, Cp – Cv = R 41. According to kinetic theory of gases, at
Cp = specific heat at constant pressure absolute zero of temperature/ieQmeeW kesâ DeCegieefle
R = universal gas constant. efmeæeble kesâ Devegmeej hejce MetvÙe leehe hej
Physics 257 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) water freezes/heeveer
pece peeSiee~ R
Ans. (c) : Given data = 0.67
(b) liquid helium freezes/õJe nerefueÙece pecesieer~ CV
(c) molecular motion stops/DeeefCJekeâ ieefle yebo nes WWe know that
peeSieer~ CP – CV = R .........(i)
(d) liquid hydrogen freezes/õJe neF[^espeve pecesieer~ C
and γ = P ...........(ii)
AIPMT-1990 CV
Ans. (c) : According to kinetic theory of gases, the R CP − CV
average kinetic energy of gas molecules is directly then C = C
V V
proportional to absolute temperature only this implies
that all molecular motion ceases if the temperature is C
0.67 = P − 1
reduced to absolute zero. CV
42. The number of translational degrees of CP
= 1.67
freedom for a diatomic gas in CV
efkeâmeer efÉhejceeCegkeâ iewme ceW mLeeveeblejerÙe mJeeleb$Ùe keâesefš
γ = 1.67 From equation (ii)
nesleer nw:
(a) 2 (b) 3 Hence the gas is monatomic.
(c) 5 (d) 6 45. For hydrogen gas CP – CV = a and for oxygen
AIPMT-1993 gas CP – CV = b, so the relation between a and b
Ans. (b) : A diatomic molecule has total 5 degree of is given by
freedom. Diatomic gas has 3 translational degree of Ùeefo neF[^espeve kesâ efueS CP – CV = a ; Deekeämeerpeve kesâ
freedom and 2 rotational degrees of freedom. efueS CP – CV = b, lees a Je b kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nw:
43. A polyatomic gas with n degrees of freedom has (a) b = 16a (b) 16b = a
a mean energy per molecule given by (c) a = 4b
Skeâ yenghejceeCegkeâ iewme ceW mJeeleb$Ùe keâesefš n nw, lees Øeefle (d) a = b
DeCeg ceeOÙe Tpee& nesieer: AIPMT-1991
nkT nkT Ans. (b) : Relation between specific heat per unit mass
(a) (b)
N 2N R
CP – CV = r =
nkT 3kT M
(c) (d)
2 2 R
r=
AIPMT-1989 M
Ans. (c) : According to law of equipartition of energy, Where M = molocular weight
1 For hydrogen gas M = 2
the energy per degree of freedom is kT .
2 R
For a polyatomic gas with n degrees of freedom the =a
2
1 For oxygen gas M = 32
mean energy per molecule = n KT
2 R
=b
R 32
44. For a gas = 0.67, this gas is made up of
CV Ratio of a and b
molecules which are a R/2
=
R b R / 32
efkeâmeer iewme kesâ efueS = 0.67, Fme iewme ceW
CV a = 16b
DeCegefmLeefle nw: 46. For a certain gas the ratio of specific heats is
(a) diatomic/efÉhejceeCegkeâ given to by γ = 1.5. For this gas
(b) mixture of diatomic and polyatomic efkeâmeer iewme kesâ efueS efJeefMe° T<ceeDeeW keâe Devegheele γ =
molecules/efÉhejceeCegkeâ leLee yenghejceeCegkeâ keâe efceßeCe 1.5 nw~ Fme iewme kesâ efueS
(c) monoatomic/SkeâhejceeCegkeâ (a) CV = 3R/J (b) CP = 3R/J
(d) polyatomic/yenghejceeCegkeâ (c) CP = 5R/J (d) CV = 5R/J
AIPMT-1992 AIPMT-1990

Physics 258 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Ratio of specific heat is given Ans. (a): Mean free Path-
C The mean free path for gas is defined as the average
γ = P = 1.5 distance of an object that will move in between collision
CV
and it is directly proportional to the temperature and
CP inversely proportional to the pressure and the diameter
CP = 1.5 CV or CV =
1.5 of the molecule. it is written as–
Now RT
R λ=
CP – CV = 2nπd 2 P
J
1
CP R λ∝ [If 'T' and 'P' are constant]
CP − = 2nπd 2
1.5 J
where, d is the diameter and n is the molecular density
C P 1.5 − C P R
= of the gas.
1.5 J
49. The mean free path of molecules of a gas,
1.5R (radius 'r') is inversely proportional to:-
CP 0.5 =
J Ùeefo efkeâmeer iewme kesâ DeCegDeeW keâer ef$epÙee 'r' nes lees,
3R Gvekeâe ceeOÙe-cegòeâ heLe JÙegl›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw:-
CP =
J (a) r3 (b) r2
(c) r (d) r
12.3 Mean free Path AIPMT-06.05.2014
Ans. (b) : The mean free path of molecules of a gas is
47. The Mean Free Path l for a gas molecule the average distance travelled by the particle between
depends upon diameter, d of the molecule as successive collisions.
efkeâmeer iewme kesâ DeCegDeeW keâe ceeOÙe cegòeâ heLe l DeCegDeeW Q We know that, Mean free path (λ )
m
kesâ JÙeeme, d hej efvecveefueefKele ces mes efkeâme ™he ceW efveYe&j 1
keâjlee nw? λm =
2 πd 2 n
1 1 where, d = diameter of molecule
(a) l ∝ (b) l ∝ 2
d d d = 2r
(c) l ∝ d (d) l ∝ d 2 1
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II λm ∝ 2
r
Ans. (b) : Mean free path ( l ) of gas molecule is
50. The mean free path of electrons in a metal is 4
defined as its average path length between successive
× 10–8 m. The electric field which can give on
collisions. It is given by -
an average 2 eV energy to an electron in the
1 metal will be in units of V/m :
l=
2πd 2 n Skeâ Oeeleg ceW Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe ceeOÙe cegòeâ heLe 4 × 10–8m
Where n = number of molecules per unit volume nw~ Jen efJeÅegle-#es$e pees Oeeleg ceW efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes
d = diameter of molecule Deewmele ™he ceW 2eV keâer Tpee& Øeoeve keâj mekesâ V/m keâer
Thus, from above formula we can see that cee$ekeâeW ceW nesiee~
1 (a) 5 × 107 (b) 8 × 107
Mean free path( l ) ∝ 2
–11
d (c) 5 × 10 (d) 8 × 10–11
Hence, option (b) is correct. AIMPT-2009
48. The mean free path for a gas, with molecular Ans. (a) : Given,
diameter d and number density n can be Mean free path of electron r = 4×10–8m energy = 2 eV
expressed as : Required to bring an electron between these points =
efkeâmeer iewme kesâ efueS efpemekeâe DeefCJekeâ JÙeeme d leLee eVo
mebKÙee IevelJe n nw, ceeOÙe cegòeâ heLe keâes Fme JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee Energy of electron eVo = 2eV
pee mekeâlee nw: Vo = 2V
1 1 2
(a) (b) Now electric field E =
2nπd 2
2n πd
2 2 λ
1 1 2
(c) (d) E=
2n 2 π2 d 2 2nπd 4 × 10−8
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 E = 5 × 107 N / m
Physics 259 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
52. 1 mole of an ideal gas is contained in a cubical
12.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems volume V, ABCDEFGH at 300 K as shown in
figure. One face of the cube (EFGH) is made up
51. A cubic vessel (with faces horizontal + vertical) of a material which totally absorbs any gas
contains an ideal gas at NTP. The vessel is molecule incident on it. At any given time.
being carried by a rocket which is moving at a efkeâmeer Ieveekeâej hee$e ABCDEFGH ceW 300 K leehe
speed of 500 m/s in vertical direction. The hej Skeâ ceesue DeeoMe& iewme Yejer nw~ Fme Ieve keâe Skeâ
pressure of the gas inside the vessel as observed heeMJe& EFGH efkeâmeer Ssmes heoeLe& keâe yevee nw pees Deheves
by us on the ground./efkeâmeer Ieveekeâej hee$e (efpemekesâ
Thej Deeheeflele iewmes kesâ efkeâmeer DeCeg keâes hetCe&le:
heeMJe& #eweflepe + TOJee&Oej nQ) ceW NTP hej DeeoMe& iewme DeJeMeesef<ele keâj ueslee nw~ efkeâmeer Yeer efoS ieS meceÙe hej,
Yejer nw~ Ùen hee$e efkeâmeer je@kesâš ceW nw, pees 500ms–1 keâer
Ûeeue mes TOJee&Oej efoMee ceW ieefle keâj jne nw~ he=LJeer mes
osKeves hej hee$e kesâ Yeerlej iewme keâe oeye
(a) remains the same because 500 m/s is very
much smaller than vrms of the gas/Skeâ meceeve
jnlee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ 500ms–1 keâer Ûeeue iewme keâer vrms mes (a) the pressure on EFGH would be zero/ EFGH
yengle keâce nw~ hej oeye MetvÙe nesiee~
(b) remains the same because motion of the (b) the pressure on all the faces will be equal/meYeer
vessel as a whole does not affect the relative heeMJeeX hej oeye meceeve nesiee~
motion of the gas molecules and the (c) the pressure of EFGH would be double the
walls/meceeve jnlee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ mecemle hee$e keâer ieefle pressure on ABCD/ ABCD keâer leguevee ceW EFGH
oerJeejeW leLee iewmes kesâ DeCegDeeW keâer ieefle meehesef#ekeâ ieefle keâes hej oeye oesiegvee nesiee~
ØeYeeefJele veneR keâjleer~ (d) the pressure on EFGH would be half that on
(c) will increase by a factor equal to ABCD./ EFGH hej ABCD keâer leguevee ceW oeye
 v2rms + 5(500)2  /v2rms , where vrms was the DeeOee nesiee~
original mean square velocity of the gas/ Ans. (d) : According to question,
 v2rms + 5(500)2  /v2rms iegvee yeÌ{ peeSiee, peneB vrms
iewmes keâe Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue Jesie nw~
(d) will be different on the top wall and bottom
wall of the vessel./hee$e kesâ Meer<e& keâer oerJeej leLee leueer
keâer oerJeej hej efYevve-efYevve nesiee~ The pressure on EFGH would be half that on ABCD.
Ans. (b) : By ideal gas equation, The rate of transfer of momentum on the wall exerts
PV = nRT, pressure on the wall due to the force exerted by the
Where P, V and T are the pressure, volume and absolute molecules. Elastic collision takes place and will transfer
temperature, n is the number of moles of gas and R is twice the magnitude of its normal momentum.
the ideal gas constant. So, the momentum transferred to the face ABCD is 2mv
Here, temperature of the vessel remain unchanged and on EFGH is half of that it is an absorbing material.
hence, the pressure remains same from that point of The pressure on the face due to total change in
view. momentum on the face i.e. the pressure on EFGH would
Now, let us discuss the phenomenon inside the vessel, be half that on ABCD.
the gas molecules keeps on colliding themselves as well 53. Boyle's law is applicable for an/yee@Ùeue keâe efveÙece
as with the wall of containing vessel. These collisions ueeiet neslee nw-
are perfectly elastic. The number of collision per unit (a) adiabatic process/®æes<ce Øe›eâce hej
volume in the gas remains constant. So, the pressure of
(b) isothermal process/meceleeheerÙe Øe›eâce hej
the gas inside the vessel remains the same because
motion of vessel as a whole does not affect the relative (c) isobaric process/meceoeyeer Øe›eâce hej
motion of gas molecules with respect to the walls. (d) isochoric process/mece DeeÙeleefvekeâ Øekeâce hej

Physics 260 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Boyle's law is applicable to an isothermal 55. Volume versus temperature graphs for a given
process where temperature remains constant. mass of an ideal gas are shown in figure at two
Boyle's law- Boyle's law states that at constant different values of constant pressure. What can
temperature the volume of a given mass of a gas is be inferred about relation between P1 and
inversely proportional to its pressure. P2?/efkeâmeer DeeoMe& iewme kesâ efueS efoS ieS õJÙeceeve kesâ
1 efueS, oeye kesâ oes efYevve ceeveeW kesâ efueS DeeÙeleve SJeb leehe
Mathematically, P ∝ or PV = k (constant).
V kesâ yeerÛe «eeheâ ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ P1 leLee P2 kesâ yeerÛe
54. A cylinder containing an ideal gas is in vertical mebyebOe kesâ yeejs ceW keäÙee efve<keâ<e& efvekeâeuee pee mekeâlee nw?
position and has a piston of mass M that is able
to move up or down without friction. If the
temperature is increased, then/efkeâmeer efmeefueb[j ceW
TOJee&Oej efmLeefle ceW DeeoMe& iewme Yejer nw leLee Fme hej M
õJÙeceeve keâe efhemšve ueiee nw pees efyevee efkeâmeer Ie<e&Ce kesâ
Thej-veerÛes ieefle keâj mekeâlee nw~ Ùeefo leehe ceW Je=efæ
keâjW lees
(a) P1 > P2
(b) P1 = P2
(c) P1 < P2
(d) data is insufficient/DeebkeâÌ[s heÙee&hle veneR nQ~
Ans. (a) : We know that
PV = nRT
(a) both P and V of the gas will change/iewme kesâ P V∝T
leLee V oesveeW heefjJeefle&le nes peeSbies~ Where n, R, P = constant
(b) only P will increase according to Charle's Slope of graph
law./Ûeeume& kesâ efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej kesâJeue P ceW Je=efæ nRT
V=
nesieer~ P
(c) V will change but not P/V heefjJeefle&le nesiee hejbleg P Differentiate with respect to T
veneR dV nR
=
(d) P will change but not V/P heefjJeefle&le nesiee hejbleg V dT P
veneR dV 1 1
⇒ ∝ i.e slope ∝
dT P P
Ans. (c) : Consider the diagram, where an ideal gas is
As given graph, slope of P1 is smaller than P2
contained in a cylinder, having a piston of mass M and
friction is absent. So, P1 > P2
56. 1 mole of H2 gas is contained in a box of
volume V = 1.00 m3 at T = 300 K. The gas is
heated to a temperature of T = 3000 K and the
gas gets converted to a gas of hydrogen atoms.
The final pressure would be (considering all
gases to be ideal)/1 ceesue H2 iewme T = 300 K leehe
hej DeeÙeleve V = 1.00 m3 kesâ yee@keäme ceW Yejer nw~ iewme keâes
Mg T = 3000 K kesâ leeheceeve lekeâ iece& efkeâÙee peelee nw Deewj
The Pressure inside the gas will be P = Pa +
A iewme neF[^espeve hejceeCegDeeW keâer iewme ceW heefjJeefle&le nes
Where, Pa = atmosphere pressure, peeleer nw~ Deefvlece oyeeJe nesiee (meYeer iewmeeW keâes DeeoMe&
A = area of cross - section of the piston and ceeveles ngS)
Mg = weight of piston
(a) same as the pressure initially/DeejcYe kesâ oeye kesâ
∴ P = Constant.
yejeyej
As, PV = nRT
When temperature increases, volume (V) increases at (b) 2 times the pressure initially/DeejcYe kesâ oeye keâe
constant pressure. oesiegvee

Physics 261 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) 10 times the pressure initially/DeejcYe kesâ oeye keâe Ans. (b): The Maxwell speed distribution law is defined
10 iegvee  m  2 – 2k BT
3 mv 2

(d) 20 times the pressure initially/DeejcYe kesâ oyeeJe as, f (v) = 4 π v   e

2

 2πk BT 
keâe 20 iegvee
Here, f(v) denotes molecules having speeds between v
Ans. (d) : As we know, ideal gas equation is given by, and v + dv.
PV = nRT
Where, kB = Boltzmann constant,
P
⇒ = constant T = absolute temperature,
nT
M = mass of molecules
(Q The volume of box remains same no matter which
and v = speed
gas is present.)
The Maxwell– Boltzmann speed distribution function
P P
Therefore, 1 = 2 f(v) depends on the mass of the gas molecule. The
n1T1 n 2 T2
masses of hydrogen and oxygen molecules are different.
P2 n 2 T2
⇒ = For each function f1 (v) and f2 (v), m will be different,
P1 n1T1 hence the function f1 (v) and f2 (v) will obey the
Given : T2 = 3000K, T1 = 300K. Maxwell's distribution law separately.
Since, H2 splits into hydrogen atoms, then number of 58. An inflated rubber balloon contains one mole
moles becomes twice the original. of an ideal gas, has a pressure P, volume V and
P2 2n1 3000 temperature T. If the temperature rises to 1.1
∴ = ×
P1 n1 300 T, and the volume is increased to 1.05 V, the
P2 final pressure will be/efkeâmeer hetâues ngS jyeÌ[ kesâ
⇒ = 20
P1 iegyyeejs ceW Yejer 1 ceesue iewme keâe oeye P, DeeÙeleve V
⇒ P2 = 20P1 leLee leehe T nw~ Ùeefo leehe yeÌ{keâj 1.1 T leLee DeeÙeleve
Hence, the final pressure would be 20 times the pressure yeÌ{keâj 1.05V nes peelee nw lees Debeflece oeye nesiee–
initially.
(a) 1.1 P
57. A vessel of volume V contains a mixture of 1
(b) P
mole of hydrogen and 1 mole of oxygen (both
considered as ideal). Let f1(v)dv denote the (c) less than P/ P mes keâce
fraction of molecules with speed between v and (d) between P and 1.1 P/ P SJeb 1.1 P kesâ yeerÛe
(v + dv) with f2(v)dv, similarly for oxygen.
Ans. (d) : Let P1 = P, V1 = V, V2 = 1.05V.
Then/V DeeÙeleve kesâ efkeâmeer hee$e ceW 1 ceesue neF[^espeve
T2 = 1.1T, T1 = T
leLee 1 ceesue Dee@keämeerpeve keâe efceßeCe (oesveeW iewmeeW keâes
From the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT
DeeoMe& iewme ceevekeâj) Yeje nw~ ceeve ueerefpeS f1(v)dv Here, n is the number of moles,
neF[^espeve DeCegDeeW kesâ Gme DebMe keâes efveefo&° keâjlee nw PV P V
efpevekeâer v leLee (v + dv) kesâ yeerÛe nw leLee Ssmee f2(v)dv So, n = 1 1 = 2 2
RT1 RT2
Dee@keämeerpeve kesâ efueS nw~ leye P1V1 P2 V2
(a) f1(v) + f2(v) = f(v) obeys the Maxwell's Or =
T1 T2
distribution law/ f1(v) + f2(v) = f(v)cewkeämeJesue-
V1T2
efJelejCe efveÙece keâe heeueve keâjlee nw~ ⇒ P2 = P1
V2 T1
(b) f1(v), f2(v) will obey the Maxwell's
distribution law separately/f1(v), f2(v)he=Lekeâ ™he Substituting the values, we get
mes cewkeämeJesue-efJelejCe efveÙece keâe heeueve keâjWies~ P × V × 1.1 × T
P2 =
(c) Neither f (v) nor f (v) will obey the 1.05V × T
1 2
Maxwell's distribution law/ve lees f1(v) Deewj ve ner ⇒
1.1
P P2 =
f2(v) cewkeämeJesue-efJelejCe efveÙece keâe heeueve keâjWies~ 1.05
(d) f2(v) and f1(v) will be the same/ f2(v) leLee f1(v) ⇒ P2 = 1.05P
meceeve neWies~ i.e. The final pressure will be between P and 1.1 P.

Physics 262 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
13.
Oscillat
scillations
From the figure we can see valuee of y increases with e+x
13.1 Periodic and Oscillator illatory Motions and decreases with e–x and the value alue achieved
a once does
not repeat itself over time.
–ωt
1. Identify the function which represents a non- Hence, e is a non- periodic function
ch rep nction.
periodic motion. 2. A spring is stretched by 5 cm by a force 10 N.
Gme heâueve keâes %eele keâerefpeS peess efkeeâ iewj-DeeJeleea ieefle The time period of the oscillat scillations when a mass
keâes efve™efhele keâj jne nw of 2 kg is suspended by it is
Skeâ efmØebie 10 vÙetve kesâ yeue mes 5 mes.ceer. efKebÛeer nesleer nw~
(a) e–ωt (b) sin ωt
peye 2 efkeâ.«ee. õJÙeceeve keâes Fmeme memes ueškeâeÙee peelee nw,
(c) sinωt + cosωt (d) sin( ωt + π/4)
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
lees oesueve keâe DeeJele&keâeue nesleee nw :
Ans. (a) : A function f : X → Y is sai said to be periodic (a) 0.628 s/0.628 meskeâC[
function if there exist a +ve real no. o. T susuch that f(x + T) (b) 0.0628 s/0.0628 meskeâC[
= f(x) for all x ∈ X. The least +vee valu value of T is called (c) 6.28 s/6.28 meskeâC[
the fundamental period of the function. tion. cclearly. (d) 3.14 s/3.14 meskeâC[
f(x) = f(x + T) = f(x + 2T)) = f(x + 3T)... NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
• Since, sinωt and cosωt have period riod 2π. Hence, sinωt Ans. (a) : Spring force, F = kx
and cosωt is a periodic function.
10 = k(5×10–2)
sin(ωt + 2π) = sinωt
N
cos(ωt + 2π) = cosωt k = 200
m
• Period of (sinωt) = 2π Now,
Period of (cosωt) = 2π
m
Period of (sinωt + cosωt) = LCM (2π, 2 π) = 2π T = 2π
k
Hence, sinωt + cosωt is also a periodic iodic ffunction.
π 2
• sin(ωt + ) = 2π
4 200
The given function can also be written itten aas, 2π
=
π π 10
sin(2π + ωt + ) = sin(ωt + )
4 4 T = 0.628 sec.
which shows repeatition of the function ction after a period of 3. Identify the function which whic represents a
2π. periodic motion.
Hence, sin(ωt +
π
) represents a periodic
riodic function. Gme Heâueve keâes henÛeeefveS pees DeeJele&
DeeJ ieefle keâes efve™efhele
4 keâjlee nw~
• e–ωt is a non-periodic function. (a) e−ωt (b) eωt
(c) loge (ωt) (d) sin ωt + cos ωt
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020,
14 Phase-II
Ans. (d) : (1) e-ωt → Not periodi eriodic as it decreases
monotonically with increasing time & tends to zero as
t → ∞ & thus never repeat its value.
(2) eωt → Not periodic as it increases
reases monotonically.
(3) log (ωt) → Increases monotonicall
onically with time t.
It's, therefore never repeat its value
alue & is a non-periodic
function.
(4) sin ωt + cos ωt is a periodic function.
functi We know that
sin ωt and cos ωt are individuallyly periodic
peri as after every
Physics 263 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2π radian the value of function retraces to its initial Squaring and then dividing equation (i) by (ii)
value & sum of periodic function is also periodic 9 m
function. =
25 m + 1
sin ωt + cos ωt 9m + 9 = 25m
π  16 m = 9
sin ωt + sin  − ωt 
2  9
m=
1  π  1 π 16
2 sin  ωt + − ωt  cos  ωt + ωt − 
2  2  2  2 5. A particle of mass m oscillates along x-axis
π  π according to equation x = a sin ωt. The nature
= 2sin cos  ωt −  of the graph between momentum and
4  4
displacement of the particle is
 π m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe x - De#e kesâ DevegefoMe meceerkeâjCe
= 2 cos  ωt − 
 4 x = a sin ωt kesâ Devegmeej oesueve keâjlee nw~ keâCe kesâ mebJesie
cos θ has period of 2π Deewj efJemLeeheve kesâ yeerÛe «eeheâ keâer Øeke=âefle nw-
 π (a) Straight line passing through origin/cetue efyebog mes
∴ 2 cos  ωt −  has period 2π.
 4 iegpejves Jeeueer meeerOeer jsKee
4. A body of mass m is attached to the lower end (b) Circle/Skeâ Je=òe
of a spring whose upper end is fixed. The (c) Hyperbola/DeeflehejJeueÙe
spring has negligible mass. When the mass m is
(d) Ellipse/oerIe&Je=òe
slightly pulled down and released, it oscillates
with a time period of 3s. When the mass m is NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
increased by 1 kg, the time period of Ans. (d) : x = a sin ωt
oscillations becomes 5s. The value of m in kg is. x
efkeâmeer keâceeveer keâe Thejer efmeje efmLej nw leLee efveÛeues efmejs = sin ωt
a
mes m õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheb[ ueškeâe nw ~ keâceeveer keâe dx
Dehevee õJÙeceeve veieCÙe nw ~ keâceeveer kesâ efveÛeues efmejs keâes Velocity (v) = dt = aω cos ωt
Lees[e-mee KeeRÛekeâj ÚesÌ[ osves hej õJÙeceeve m keâe efheb[
Momentum of particle, p = mv = ma ω cos ωt
oesueve keâjves ueielee nw Deewj Fmekesâ oesueveeW keâe p
DeeJele&keâeue 3s nw~ m kesâ ceeve keâes 1kg yeÌ{eves hej = cos ωt
maω
oesueveeW keâe DeeJele&keâeue 5s nes peelee nw ~ m keâe kg ceW
ceeve nw - (sin ωt)2 + (cos ωt)2 = 1
3 4 16 9 x2 p2
(a) (b) (c) (d) + 2 2 2 =1
4 3 9 16 a 2
m a ω
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II 2 2
x  p 
Ans. (d) : or   +   =1
 a   maω 
It is an equation of ellipse
k Hence, the graph between momentum and displacement
is an ellipse.
6. The period of oscillation of a mass M
suspended from a spring of negligible mass is
For spring mass system time period is given by, T. If along with it another mass M is also
m suspended, the period of oscillation will now be
T = 2π veieCÙe õJÙeceeve keâer efmhebÇie mes ueškesâ Skeâ õJÙeceeve M
k
For a time period of 3 s, kesâ oesueve keâe DeeJele&keâeue T nw~ Ùeefo Fmekesâ DevegefoMe
m
Skeâ DevÙe õJÙeceeve M keâes Yeer ueškeâe efoÙee peeSs, lees
3 = 2π ...(i) Deye oesueve keâe DeeJele&keâeue nesiee –
k
The time period of system when mass increases by 1 kg (a) T (b) T/ 2
m +1 (c) 2T (d)2T
5 = 2π ...(ii)
k AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Physics 264 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Time Period of spring pendulum Ans. (c):
T - Time period of oscillation
M - Mass suspended
K - Spring constant
M
T = 2π
k
if mass is double
2M
T' = 2π = 2T
k Spring is cut in four equal part
T ' = 2T
7. Two springs of spring constants k1 and k2 are
joined in series. The effective spring constant of l
the combination is given by - kl = k ' {for same mass}
4
k1 leLee k2 keâceeveer efveÙeleekeâeW Jeeues oes efmØebiees keâes
k' = 4k
ëe=bKeuee ›eâce ceW peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme mebÙeespeve keâe So time period is given by
heefjCeeceer keâceeveer efveÙeleebkeâ nesiee-
m
( k1 + k 2 ) T = 2π − − − − −(i)
(a) (b) k1 + k2 k
2 The spring is cut into four equal part, the spring
k1 k 2 constant of one part will become 4k
(c) (d) k1 k 2
( k1 + k 2 ) Therefore, the new time period-
AIPMT-2004 m m
T ' = 2π ⇒ T ' = 2π
Ans. (c) : k' 4k
1 m
T' = 2π
2 k
T  m
T' = Q T = 2π 
2  k
9. A mass 'm' is suspended separately by two
Let us consider two spring constants k1 & k2 are joined different springs in successive order then time
in the series- period is T1 and T2 respectively. If it is
F = k1x1 = k2x2 ...(i) connected by both the springs as shown in
x = x1 + x2 figure then time period is T0. The correct
1 1 1 relation is /efkeâmeer õJÙeceeve m keâes oes efmØebie mes Deueie
= +
k e k1 k 2 – Deueie ueškeâeves hej DeeJele&keâeue T1 leLee T2 Øeehle
1 1 1
= +
neslee nw~ Ùeefo õJÙeceeve keâes efÛe$e kesâ Devegmeej ueškeâeÙee
k e k1 k 2 peeÙes lees DeeJele&keâeue kesâ efueS mener mecyevOe nesiee -
k1 k 2
ke =
k1 + k 2
8 The time period of a mass suspended from a
spring is T. If the spring is cut into four equal
parts and the same mass is suspended from one (a) T02 = T12 + T22 (b) T0–2 = T1–2 + T2–2
of the parts, then the new time period will be – (c) T0–1 = T1–1 + T2–1 (d) T0 = T1 + T2
Skeâ efmØebie mes ueškeâeÙes ieS Skeâ õJÙeceeve keâe AIPMT-2002
DeeJele&keâeue T nw~ Ùeefo efmØebie keâes Ûeej meceeve YeeieeW ceW Ans. (b) : Given-
yeeBše peeS Deewj Gmeer õJÙeceeve keâes Skeâ Yeeie mes (i) When mass is suspended separately by two different
ueškeâeÙee peeS, leye veÙee DeeJele& keâeue nesiee- spring then time period = T1 & T2 respectively.
(a) T/4 (b) T (ii) When mass is connected by both spring then time
(c) T/2 (d) 2T period = T0.
AIPMT-2003 Expression for time period,
Physics 265 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
m FA = F B
T = 2π K= spring constant KAxA = KB xB
K 2KB xA = KB xB [KA = 2KB]
4π2 m x
⇒ T2 = xA = B or xB = 2xA ....(i)
K 2
4π2 m 1
⇒K= Energy stored in spring A = KA x 2A = E ...(ii)
T2 2
A.T.Q. 1
Energy stored in spring B = KB x 2B = EB ...(iii)
K0 = K1 + K2 2
4π 2 m 4π 2 m 4π 2 m From eqn (ii) dividing eqn (iii)
∴ = 2 + 2
T02 E K A x A2 2K B x A2
T1 T2 = = [ K A = 2K B ]
E B K B x B2 K B x B2
∴ T0−2 = T1−2 + T2−2
2x 2A
10. Two particles having mass 'M' and 'm' are = [xB = 2xA]
( 2x A )
2
moving in a circular path having radius R & r
respectively. If their time period are same then E 2 x 2A
the ratio of angular velocity will be : - =
E B 4 x 2A
oes 'M' Je 'm' õJÙeceeve kesâ keâCe ›eâceMe: ef$epÙee R Je r
E 2
kesâ heLe ceW ieefle keâjles nQ~ Ùeefo Gvekeâe DeeJele&keâeue meceeve =
EB 4
nw, lees Gvekesâ keâesCeerÙe Jesie keâe Devegheele nesiee-
r R E B = 2E
(a) (b)
R r 12. A spring elongated by length 'L' when a mass
R 'M' is suspended to it. Now a tiny mass 'm' is
(c) 1 (d) attached and then released, its time period of
r oscillation is/peye Skeâ efmØebie mes M õJÙeceeve
AIPMT-2001 ueškeâeÙee peelee nw, lees uecyeeF& ceW Je=efæ L nw Deye Fme
2π õJÙeceeve kesâ meeLe Skeâ DevÙe Úesše keâCe (m) mecyeæ keâj
Ans. (c) : Time period of revolution T =
ω ÚesÌ[ efoÙee peeÙes lees oesueveeW keâe DeeJele&keâeue keäÙee nesiee-
As according to question, T1 = T2 then,
(a) 2π
(M + m) ℓ (b) 2π
mℓ
2π 2π Mg Mg
∴ =
ω1 ω2
Mℓ
⇒ ω1 = ω2 (c) 2π L / g (d) 2π
(m + M)g
ω1 1
⇒ = =1. AIPMT-1999
ω2 1 Ans. (a) : At initial equilibrium of block of mass M.
11. Two springs A and B having spring constant
KA and KB. (KA = 2KB) are stretched by
applying force of equal magnitude. If energy
stored in spring A is E then energy stored in B
will be:/oes efmØebie A leLee B efpevekesâ yeue efveÙeleebkeâ
(KA = 2KB) ™he ceW nw Fve hej meceeve yeue ueieekeâj
KeeRÛeles nQ Ùeefo efmheb«e (A) ceW mebefÛele Tpee& (E) nw, lees
efmhebie (B) ceW mebefÛele Tpee& nesieer-
E
(a) 2E (b)
4
E
(c) (d) 4E
2 k 2π
AIPMT-2001 Angular frequency of SHM, ω = M =
T
Ans. (a) : Let’s consider the spring constant of two  Mg 
spring A & B are KA & KB respectively & are stretched [k l = Mg] k = l 
by applying force of same magnitude.  

Physics 266 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 2n (b) n/2
M
Initial time period, T = 2π (c) n
k
(d) None of the above/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
On attaching tiny mass m AIPMT-1998
(M + m) ( M + m) l
T ' = 2π = 2π Ans. (b) : Frequency n =
1 k
k Mg 2π M
13. Two pendulums suspended from same point 1
n∝
having length 2m and 0.5m. If they displaced M
slightly and released then they will be in same n1 = n , n 2 = ?
phase, when small pendulum will have
completed n m2 4M
= = =2
oes meceeve efyevog mes efveueefcyele ueesuekeâeW ceW Skeâ leej keâer n2 m1 M
uecyeeF& 2 ceeršj Je otmejs keâer uecyeeF& 0.5 ceeršj nw lees n2 =
n
Deuhe efJemLeeheve osves hej Úesše ueesuekeâ yeÌ[s ueesuekeâ kesâ 2
mebheeleer nesiee peye Úesše ueesuekeâ keâj Ûegkeâe nesiee– 15. A mass m is suspended from the two coupled
springs connected in series. The force constant
(a) 2 oscillation/oesueve (b) 4 oscillation/oesueve for springs are k1 and k2. The time period of
(c) 3 oscillation/oesueve (d) 5 oscillation/oesueve the suspended mass will be
AIPMT-1998 Skeâ m õJÙeceeve keâer Jemleg ßesCeer›eâce ceW pegÌ[er ngF& k1
Ans. (a) : Given length - l1 = 2m and l2 = 0.5m Deewj k2 yeue efveÙeleebkeâeW keâer efmØebieeW mes ueškeâer ngF& nw~
(N)T1 = total time Jemleg keâe oesuevekeâeue nesiee-
(N+1)T2 = total time , where T1 and T2 are the time m
taken by the first and second pendulum to complete 'N' (a) T= 2 π
k1 – k 2
and 'N + 1' oscillation respectively.
mk1k 2
l (b) T = 2 π
T = 2π k1 + k 2
g
Time period of N oscillation of first = Time period of m
(c) T = 2 π
(N+1) oscillation of second is- k1 + k 2
Then,
m ( k1 + k 2 )
NT1 = ( N + 1) T2 (d) T = 2 π
k1 k 2
l1 l AIPMT-1990
N × 2π = ( N + 1) 2π 2
g g Ans. (d) : Given that,
mass of body is 'm'
l1 N + 1
=
l2 N

2 N +1
=
0.5 N
20 N + 1
=
5 N
N +1
=2
N Force constant for springs are k1 and k2 if two coupled
N+1 = 2N springs are connected in series then,
⇒ N=1 1
= +
1 1
and N+1=2 . k eq k1 k 2
14. If the frequency of a spring is n after 1 k + k2
suspending mass M, now 4M mass is suspended = 1
k eq k1 k 2
from spring then the frequency will be
kk
Skeâ eqmØebie hej M õJÙeceeve ueškeâeves hej DeeJe=efòe n nw lees k eq = 1 2
k1 + k 2
4M õJÙeceeve ueškeâeves hej DeeJe=efòe nesieer–
Physics 267 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
If there is oscillation, then the time period of suspended l
m T' = 2π
3g
( from equation (ii) )
mass (T) = 2 π
k eq 4
4l
m T' = 2π
= 2π 3g
k1k 2
k1 + k 2 l 4
T' = 2π
g 3
m ( k1 + k 2 )
T = 2π
k1 k 2 4
T' = 3 (from equation (i))
3
T' = 2 sec
13.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 17. The x − t graph of a particle performing simple
harmonic motion is shown in the figure. The
16. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has a acceleration of the particle at t = 2 s is :/mejue
period of 3 s. If it is completely immersed in DeeJele& ieefle keâjles ngS Skeâ keâCe keâe x-t «eeHeâ efÛe$e ceW
th oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ t = 2 meskebâ[ hej keâCe keâe lJejCe nw :
1
non-viscous liquid, having density   of the
4
material of the bob, the new period will be
nJee ceW oesueve keâjves Jeeues Skeâ meeOeejCe heW[guece keâer
DeJeefOe 3s nw~ Ùeefo Ùen hetCe& ™he mes DeMÙeeve lejue ceW π2 −2 π2
(a) − ms ms −2 (b)
[tyee ngDee nw, efpemekeâe IevelJe yee@ye kesâ heoeLe& kesâ IevelJe 16 8
π2 π2
(c) − ms −2 ms −2
th
1 8
(d)
16
keâe   nw lees veÙee DeeJele&keâeue nesiee~
4 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (a) : The displacement equation is –
3
(a) 2s (b) s x = A sin ω t ... (i)
2
2
(c) 2 3s s (d)
3
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
Ans. (a) : The time period of simple pendulum
oscillating in air is equal to-
l l From the fig. A = 1, T = 8
T = 2π ⇒ 3 = 2π ........(i) Put all the values in eqn (i) we get –
g g
2π
The gravitation pull g' can be calculated as follows- x = sint
 ρ  8
g ' = g  a − liquid  dx 2π 2π
 ρ body = cos t
 
dt 8 8
 1
g' = g  1 − 
2
d2 x  2π  2π
 4 2
= −   sin t
dt  8  8
 1
g' = g  1 − 
 4
3
g' = g..........(ii)
4 4π2
= −
The time period of the liquid when simple pendulum is 64
immersed in liquid is-
d2 x π2
l =− m / s2
T ' = 2π dt 2 16
g' t = 2sec

Physics 268 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
18. Match List-I with List-II:/metÛeer-I keâe metÛeer- II mes iii. Restorin
efceueeve keâjW: g force
B. of a
List-I/metÛeer- I List-II/metÛeer- II spring
(x-y graphs)/(x-y «eeheâ) (Situations)
(efmLeefleÙeeB) Bob of a
ii.
i. Total pendulu
mechanical m is
energy is oscillatin
C.
A. conserved/kegâue g under
negligibl
Ùeebef$ekeâ Tpee& e air
mebjef#ele nw~ friction
ii. Bob of a i. Total
pendulum is mechani
oscillating cal
D.
under energy is
negligible air conserve
B.
friction/oesuekeâ d
keâe ieesuekeâ, veieCÙe 19. Two pendulums of length 121 cm and 100 cm
start vibrating in phase. At some instant, the
nJee kesâ ØeeflejesOe ceW
two are at their mean position in the same
oesueve keâj jne nw~ phase. The minimum number of vibrations of
iii. Restoring the shorter pendulum after which the two are
force of a again in phase at the mean position is:
C. spring/Skeâ efmØebie 121 mesceer. SJeb 100 mesceer. uecyeeF& Jeeues oes oesuekeâ
keâe ØelÙeeveÙeve yeue meceeve keâuee ceW keâcheve keâjvee ØeejcYe keâjles nQ~ efkeâmeer
iv. Bob of a #eCe hej oesveeW Deheveer-Deheveer ceeOÙe DeJemLeeDeeW ceW meceeve
pendulum is keâuee ceW nQ~ Úesšs Jeeues oesueve kesâ vÙetvelece keâcheveeW keâer
oscillating mebKÙee nesieer, peye Fmekesâ yeeo Ùes oesveeW efheâj mes ceeOÙe
along with air efmLeefleÙeeW hej meceeve keâuee ceW neWies:
D. friction/oesuekeâ
(a) 8 (b) 11
keâe ieesuekeâ,nJee kesâ (c) 9 (d) 10
ØeeflejesOe kesâ meeLe NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
oesueve keâj jne nw~ Ans. (b) : Time period of motion,
Choose the correct answer from the
L
options given below:/veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW ceW T = 2π ..............(i)
g
mes mener Gòej ÛegveW:
Where, L = length of pendulum
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
g = acceleration due to gravity
A B C D
from equation (i) we can conclude that–
(a) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i)
T ∝ L ..............(ii)
(b) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)
(c) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) Given that:
(d) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) Length of pendulum (L1) = 121 cm = 1.21 m
Length of short pendulum (L2) = 100 cm = 1 m
Ans. (b) :
From equation (2) we have –
List-I List-II
T1 1.21
(graphs x-y) (Situations) = = 1.21 = 1.1
iv. Bob of a T2 1
pendulum is T1 = 1.1 T2
A. oscillating 10T1 = 11T2
along with When a longer pendulum vibrates 10 times then shorter
air friction pendulum have to vibrate 11 times to complete the path.

Physics 269 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
20. A body is executing simple harmonic motion 23. The displacement of a particle executing simple
with frequency 'n', the frequency of its potential harmonic motion is given by y = A0 + A sin ωt +
energy is-/Skeâ Jemleg 'n' DeeJe=efòe mes mejue DeeJele& ieefle B cos ωt. Then the amplitude of its oscillation is
keâjleer nw~ Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâer DeeJe=efòe nw : given by :
(a) 4n (b) n mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles efkeâmeer keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve y =
(c) 2n (d) 3n A0 + A sin ωt + B cos ωt Éeje efve™efhele efkeâÙee ieÙee
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 nw~ leye Fmekesâ oesueve keâe DeeÙece nesiee~
Ans. (c) : Displacement equation of SHM of frequency
A 02 + ( A + B)
2
‘n’- (a) A 2 + B2 (b)
x = A sin(ωt) = A sin (2πnt) (c) A + B (d) A0 + A2 + B2
Now,
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
1 1
Potential energy U = kx 2 = kA 2 sin 2 ( 2 πnt ) Ans. (a) :
2 2
1 2 1– cos ( 2π ( 2n ) t )   1 − cos 2θ 
 Q sin θ =
2
= kA  
2  2   2 
21. The phase difference between displacement and
acceleration of a particle in a simple harmonic
motion is/mejue DeeJeleea ieefle keâjles efkeâmeer keâCe kesâ
efJemLeeheve Deewj lJejCe kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej neslee nw:
The displacement of given particle is
3π π
(a) rad rad (b) y = A0 + A sin ωt + B cos ωt –––– (i)
2 2
The general equation of SHM can be given as
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) π rad
x = a sin ωt + b cos ωt
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 Equation of SHM
Ans. (d) : The motion in which acceleration of a y' = y – A0 = A sin ωt + B cos ωt
particle is directly proportional to its displacement and
= A sin ωt + B sin (90º– ωt)
is directed towards its mean position is known as
Resultant amplitude
Simple Harmonic motion.
Displacement of particle executing SHM R = A 2 + B2 + 2AB cos 90º [∵ cos90º = 0]
x = A sin ωt
2
R = A 2 + B2
d x
Acceleration of particle a = 24. The distance covered by a particle undergoing
dt 2 SHM in one time period is (amplitude = A),
⇒ a = − Aω2 sin ωt = Aω2 sin ( π + ωt ) mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles efkeâmeer keâCe, efpemekeâe DeeÙeece A
Thus the phase difference between displacement & nw, Éeje Skeâ DeeJele&keâeue ceW Ûeueer ieÙeer otjer nw–
acceleration of particle is π radian. (a) 4A (b) Zero/MetvÙe
22. Average velocity of a particle executing SHM (c) A (d) 2A
in one complete vibration is : NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Skeâ hetCe& oesueve ceW mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles efkeâmeer keâCe Ans. (a) :
keâe Deewmele Jesie neslee nw~
Aω2
(a) Aω (b)
2
Aω
(c) Zero (d)
2
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (c) : In one complete cycle the particle comes back Calculating of distance in one time period.
to the initial position thus displacement is zero.
• As shown in figure – path of SHM.
Displacement • The total distance covered in one-time period is given as
Average velocity =
Time interval D = PQ +QP + PR + RP
xf – xi =A+A+A+A
= =0
T D = 4A

Physics 270 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
25. A mass falls from a height ‘h’ and its time of
l
fall ‘t’ is recorded in terms of time period T of T ' = 2π
a simple pendulum. On the surface of earth it is gP
found that t = 2T. The entire set up is taken on 2l
the surface of another planet whose mass is half T ' = 2π
of that of earth and radius the same. Same g
experiment is repeated and corresponding
T ' = 2T
times noted as t′ and T′.
Then we can say Again Using
keâesF& efheC[ TbÛeeF& h mes efiejlee nw Deewj Fmekesâ efiejves kesâ 1
s = ut + × at '2
meceÙe, ‘t’ keâes efkeâmeer mejue ueesuekeâ kesâ DeeJele&keâeue, T kesâ 2
heoeW ceW efjkeâe[& efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ hej Ùen t = 2T 1
h = 0 + × g p t '2
nw~ Fme mecemle JÙeJemLee keâes efkeâmeer DevÙe «en, efpemekeâe 2
õJÙeceeve he=LJeer kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe DeeOee leLee ef$epÙee he=LJeer 2h
t '2 =
keâer ef$epÙee kesâ meceeve nw, hej ues peeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fmeer ØeÙeesie gp
keâer hegvejeJe=efòe keâjkesâ leoveg™heer meceÙe t′ Deewj T′ efjkeâe[& 2h × 2
efkeâS ieS nQ~ leye Ùen keâne pee mekeâlee nw efkeâ – t '2 =
g
(a) t′ = 2T′ (b) t′ = 2 T′
t '2 = 4T 2 × 2
(c) t′ > 2T′ (d) t′ < 2T′
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) t ' = 8T2 = 2 2T
Ans. (a) : Given
t ' 2 2T
Height = h =
Time = t T' 2T
Time period of simple pendulum = T t ' = 2T '
On earth surface t = 2T
26. A pendulum is hung from the roof of a
1 sufficiently high building and is moving freely
Mass of the other planet Mp = Me
2 to and fro like a simple harmonic oscillator.
∴ Using the formula time period of simple pendulam The acceleration of the bob of the pendulum is
l 20 m/s2 at a distance of 5 m from the mean
T = 2π position. The time period of oscillation is
g
keâesF& ueesuekeâ Skeâ keâeHeâer TBÛes YeJeve keâer Úle mes ueškeâe
GM e
g= nw Deewj mejue DeeJele& oesuekeâ keâer YeeBefle cegòeâ ™he mes
R2
Where,
Deeies-heerÚs ieefle keâj jne nw~ ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes 5 m keâer
R = radius of earth otjer hej Fmekesâ ieesuekeâ keâe lJejCe 20 m/s2 nw~ oesueve keâe
Now for the surface of earth DeeJele&keâeue nw
1
Using S = ut + at 2 (a) 2π s (b) π s
2 (c) 1 s (d) 2 s
1 2 NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
h = 0 + gt
2 Ans. (b) Simple Harmonic motion
2h Acceleration a = –ω2x
t2 =
g Here – ω = angular frequency
2h x = distance = 5m (given)
t= = 2T a = 20 m/s2
g
2h |a| = ω2x
= 4T 2 ................(i)
g 20 = ω2×5
On the surface of planet 20
ω2 = =4
GM p 5
gp = 2
R ⇒ ω = 2 rad/s.
GM e g 2 π 2π
gp = = Time period, T = = = π s.
2R 2 2 ω 2

Physics 271 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. A particle executes linear simple harmonic Then time period
motion with an amplitude of 3 cm. When the 2π 2π
particle is at 2 cm from the mean position, the T= =
ω α
magnitude of its velocity is equal to that of its β
acceleration. Then its time period in seconds
2πβ
is/efkeâmeer keâCe keâer jsKeerÙe mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâe DeeÙeece T=
α
3 mesceer. nw~ peye Ùen keâCe Deheveer ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes 2
mesceer. otjer hej nesleer nw lees Gme meceÙe Fmekesâ Jesie keâe 29. When two displacements represented by y1 = a
sin ( ωt) and y2 = b cos( ωt) are superimposed,
heefjceeCe, Fmekesâ lJejCe kesâ yejeyej neslee nw~ Fme keâCe keâe
the motion is :
DeeJele&keâeue (meskebâ[ ceW) nw: oes efJemLeeheveeW, y1 = a sin (ωt) leLee y2 = b cos( ωt) kesâ
5 5 4π 2π DeOÙeejesheCe mes Øeehle heefjCeeceer ieefle:
(a) (b) (c)(d)
π 2π 5 3 a
(a) Simple harmonic with amplitude
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 b
Ans. (c) : Velocity of particle executing S.H.M. is- a
DeeÙeece keâer, mejue DeeJele& ieefle nesleer nw~
V = ω A2 − x2 b
Here x = displacement at any time interval (b) Simple harmonic with amplitude a 2 + b2
A = amplitude = 3 cm
acceleration (a) = ω2x a 2 + b2 DeeÙeece keâer, mejue DeeJele& ieefle nesleer nw~
here, ω = angular frequency =
2π (a + b )
(c) Simple harmonic with amplitude
T 2
Now (a + b )
V = a (velocity = acceleration) DeeÙeece keâer, mejue DeeJele& ieefle nesleer nw~
2
ω A 2 − x 2 = xω2 (d) Not a simple harmonic
 2π  mejue DeeJele& veneR nesleer nw~
(3)2 − (2)2 = 2   AIPMT-03.05.2015
T 
Ans. (b) : Given :
4π
5 =
T
4π
T= A eq = a 2 + b 2
5
28. A particle is executing a simple harmonic
motion. Its maximum acceleration is α and
y = asin (ωt) and y2 = b cos(ωt)
maximum velocity is β. Then, its time period of 1
The resultant displacement is given by
vibration will be/mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles ngS efkeâmeer
y = y1+ y2 = a sin ωt + b cos ωt
keâCe keâe DeefOekeâlece lJejCe α leLee DeefOekeâlece Jesie β nw~
= a sin ωt + b sin (π/2 + ωt)
lees, Fmekesâ keâcheve keâe DeeJele&keâeue nesiee:
π
= a 2 + b 2 sin ( ωt + φ ) (∴Phase different φ = )
2πβ β2 2
(a) (b) 2
α α tan φ = b/a
α β 2 Hence, the motion of superimposed wave is simple
(c) (d)
β α harmonic with amplitude a 2 + b 2
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 30. A particle is executing SHM along a straight
Ans. (a) : Given: Magnitude of maximum acceleration line. Its velocities at distances x1 and x2 from
and maximum velocity the mean position are V1 and V2 , respectively.
amax = Aω = α
2
... (i) Its time period is:-
Vmax = Aω = β ... (ii) Ùeef o ef k eâmeer mejue jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe mejue DeeJele& ieefle
Dividing eq. (1) by (2) keâjles ngS, efkeâmeer keâCe keâer otjer cetue efyevog mes x1 leLee x2
α nesves hej, Gmekesâ Jesie ›eâceMe: V1 leLee V2 nw lees, Fme keâCe
ω=
β keâe DeeJele& keâeue nw:-
Physics 272 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
x 22 − x12 V12 + V22
(a) 2π (b) 2 π (c)
V12 − V22 x12 + x 22

V12 − V22 x12 + x 22

(c) 2 π (d) 2 π
x12 − x 22 V12 + V22
(d)
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (a) : For SHM, the velocity of particle at a
distance x from mean position is given by, Here a = acceleration at time 't'
V =ω A −x 2 2 T = Time period
AIPMT-06.05.2014
⇒ V1 = ω A 2 − x12 Ans. (c) : Q Displacement, X = A cos(ωt)
⇒ V12 = ω2 ( A 2 − x12 ) ………. (i) velocity, v =
dX
= − Aω sin(ωt)
dt
Similarly,
dv
V22 = ω2 ( A2 − x 22 ) ………. (ii) Acceleration, a =
dt
= − Aω2 cos(ωt)

Subtracting equation (ii) from eqn. (i), we get Q a ∝ –cos(ωt)

V12 − V22 = ω2 ( x 22 − x12 )
Since, cosωt at (t = 0) is maximum with negative
amplitude hence graph between a and t will be option
(c).
V12 − V22
ω=
x 22 − x12
2π
So, T =
ω
x 22 − x12 Tt
T = 2π
V12 − V22

31. The oscillation of a body on a smooth

horizontal surface is represented by the 32. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is
equation. given by
X = A cos ( ωt) π
y = 3 sin ( 50t − x )
Where, X = displacement at time 't' 2
ω = frequency of oscillation Where x and y are in metres and t is in seconds.
The ratio of maximum particle velocity to the
Which one of the following graphs shows
wave velocity is
correctly the variation 'a' with 't'?
efkeâmeer mejue DeeJele& lejbie keâe meceerkeâjCe efoÙee ieÙee nw~
efkeâmeer efheb[ (Jemleg) kesâ efÛekeâves #eweflepe he=‰ (melen) hej
π
oesueveeW kesâ meceerkeâjCe keâes y = 3sin ( 50t − x )
2
X = A cos ( ωt) Éeje peneB x leLee y ceeršj ceW Deewj t messkebâ[ ceW nw lees,
efve™efhele efkeâÙee peelee nw, peneB DeefOekeâlece keâCe-Jesie leLee lejbie-Jesie keâe Devegheele
X = t meceÙe hej efJemLeeheve nesiee:–
ω = oesueveeW keâer DeeJe=efòe 2
(a) 3π π(b)
lees 't' kesâ meeLe 'a' kesâ efJeÛeueve (heefjJele&ve) keâes keâewve 3
mee «eeheâ (DeeuesKe) mener ™he ceW oMee&lee nw? 3
(c) 2π (d) π
2
(a) AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (d) : Given equation of simple harmonic wave–
π
y = 3 sin ( 50t − x )
2
(b)
 π 
y = 3 sin  25πt − x  –– (i)
 2 

Physics 273 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now the standard wave equation is – 34. A particle of mass m is released
releas from rest and
y = A sin (ωt–kx) ––– (ii) follows a parabolic pathh as shown. Assuming
that the displacement of the th mass from the
Comparing (i) & (ii)
origin is small, which graph
raph correctly depicts
π
ω = 25π, k = the position of the particles
ticles as a function of
2 time ?/Skeâ keâCe keâe õJÙeceeve
ceeve m nw~ Fmes efJejece
ω 255π DeJemLee mes ceesefÛele efkeâÙee ieÙeeee nwn Deewj Ùen DeejsKe ceW
Now, wave velocity (v) = = = 50 ms −1
k π efoKeeS ieS Devegmeej Skeâ hejJeueer ueerÙe ceeie& hej Ûeuelee nw~
 
2 Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ keâCe keâe cetue efmLeefle mes efJemLeeheve
Maximum particle velocity (vmax) = A ω keâce nw, keâewve-mee «eeHeâ keâCe keâer
eâer cet
c ue efmLeefle keâes meceÙe
= 3 × 25π kesâ Heâueve kesâ ™he ceW mener oMee&lee nwn-
= 75 π
Now, the required ratio –
vmax 75π 3
= = π
v 50 2
33. Two particles are oscillating
ting aalong two close
parallel straight lines sidee by side, with the
same frequency and amplitud plitudes. They pass
each other, moving in opposite
osite directions when (a) (b)
their displacement is half of the amplitude. The
mean positions of the twoo pa particles lie on a
straight line perpendicularr to tthe paths of the
(c) (d)
two particles. The phase differen
ifference is
oes keâCe oes meceerhe meceevlej meerOeer jsKeeDeeW kesâ DevegefoMe
AIPMT
IPMT (Screening)-2011
Skeâ keâesves mes otmejs keâesves lekeâ mec meceeve DeeJe=efle leLee Ans. (b) :
DeeÙeece mes oesueve keâjlee nw~ Jes efJeheje
ehejerle efoMeeDeeW ceW ieefle
keâjles ngÙes Skeâ otmejs keâes heej keâj keâjles nw peye Gvekeâe
efJemLeeheve DeeÙeece keâe DeeOee neseslee nw~ oes keâCeeW keâer
ceeOÙe efmLeefle oes keâCeeW kesâ heLeeW kesâ uuecyeJeled Skeâ mejue
jsKee hej efmLele nw~ keâueevlej nw-
(a) π/6 (b) 0
We have potential energy-
(c) 2π/3 (d) π V = x2
AIPM
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
dV d (x2 )
Ans. (c) : In SHM, x = A sin ωt →F= – =– = –2x
When displacement is half the amplitude
plitude dx dx
A F = – 2x ...(i)
x= and also,
2
A md 2 x
Then = A sin ω t F= ...(ii)
...(
2 dt 2
1 π From eqn (i) and (ii),
sin ωt = = sin  
2 6 md 2 x
→ = -2x
π 5π dt 2
ωt = or  d2x 2 
6 6 →  2 + x = 0
π  dt m 
∴ Phase of 1st particle, φ1 = rad
6 d x2

 + ω2 x  = 0
5 π  dt
2

Phase of 2nd particle, φ 2 = rad
6 → x = A sin (ωt + φ)
Phase difference,
At t = 0, xmax = A sinφ
5π π 2 π
= φ2 − φ1 = − = rad . A = A sinφ → φ =
π
6 6 3 2

Physics 274 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
→ x = A cos ωt Squaring and adding equation (i) and (ii) we get–
So, graph of x = A cos ωt will be option (b). x
2

  = sin ωt
2

a
2
 y
  = cos ωt
2

a
35. The displacement of a particle along the x-axis x 2 y2
is given by x = a sin2ωt. The motion of the + = cos 2 ωt + sin 2 ωt
a2 a2
particle corresponds to –
sin2θ + cos2 θ = 1
Skeâ keâCe keâe x-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe efJemLeeheve x = a We know that
sin2ωt. Éeje efoÙee peelee nw~ keâCe keâer ieefle mecyeefvOele nw- x 2 y2
+ =1 2 2
(a) simple harmonic motion of frequency ω/π a a
mejue DeeJele& ieefle efpemekeâer DeeJe=efòe ω/π nw x 2 + y2 = a 2
(b) simple harmonic motion of frequency
This is the equation of circle with radius 'a'. Hence,
3ω/2π
particle follows a circular path.
mejue DeeJele& ieefle efpemekeâer DeeJe=efòe 3ω/2π nw 37. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic
(c) non simple harmonic motion motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and
mejue DeeJele& ieefle veneR nw time period T. The speed of the pendulum at
(d) simple harmonic motion of frequency ω/2π x = a/2 will be:
mejue DeeJele& ieefle efpemekeâer DeeJe=efòeω/2π nw Skeâ mejue ueesuekeâ x = 0 kesâ efieo& mejue DeeJeleea Ûeeue mes
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 Ûeue jne nw efpeme keâe DeeÙeece a Deewj meceÙe Devlejeue T
Ans. (c) : Displacement of particle x = asin2 ωt nw~ x = a/2 hej ueesuekeâ keâer Ûeeue nesieer~
differentiating w.r.t t.
πa 3 πa 3
dx (a) (b)
velocity, v = = 2aω sinωt . cosωt T 2T
dt
again differentiating πa 3π 2 a
(c) (d)
d2 x T T
acceleration, A = 2 = 2aω2 [ cos2 ωt – sin2 ωt] AIMPT-2009
dt
2 Ans. (a) : Amplitude a & Time period T
= 2aω cos2ωt
For SHM, A ∝ − x As simple pendulum performs simple harmonic motion
n
The given eq does not satisfy the condition for SHM. ∴ velocity v = ω a 2 - x 2
Therefore motion is not simple harmonic motion
at x = a/2
36. A particle moves in x-y plane according to rule
x = asin ωt and y = acos ωt. The particle follows v = 2π a 2 - a = 2π 3a Q ω = 2π 
2 2

keâesF& keâCe x-y meceleue ceW x = asinωt leLee y = acosωt T 4 T 2  T 

kesâ Devegmeej ieefle keâjlee nw~ keâCe keâe heLe nesiee πa 3
v= .
(a) an elliptical path/DeC[ekeâej T
(b) a circular path/ Je=òeekeâej 38. Which one of the following equations of motion
(c) a parabolic path/hejJeueÙeekeâej represents simple harmonic motion ?
(d) a straight line path inclined equally to x and efvecve meceerkeâjCeeW ceW mes keâewve meer mejue DeeJeleea Ûeeue keâer
y-axes/ x Je y-De#eeW mes meceeve keâesCe yeveeleer ngF& mejue metÛekeâ nw?
jsKee (a) Acceleration = kx / lJejCe = kx
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 (b) Acceleration = – k0x + k1x2 /
Ans. (b) : Particle move in x-y plane according to rule lJejCe = k0x + k1x2
x = a sinωt and y = a cosωt (c) Acceleration = – k (x + a)/ lJejCe = –k(x+a)
x (d) Acceleration = k(x + a)/ lJejCe = k(x+a)
= sin ωt .........(i)
a Where k, k0, k1 and a are all positive
y
= cos ωt ...........(ii) peyeefkeâ k, k0, k1 Deewj a meYeer Oeveelcekeâ nw~
a AIMPT-2009
Physics 275 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Equation of SHM Ans. (b): Given ,
d x 2
π
Acceleration = = − ω2 x Equation of SHM x = a sin (ωt + )
dt 2 6
k dx  π
ω= Velocity v = = aω cos  ωt + 
m dt  6
Where aω  π
= aω cos  ωt +  (Q Vmax = aω )
x = A sin (ωt+δ) 2  6
Acceleration = –kX π
1 
in SHM acceleration is proportional to negative of = cos  ωt + 
2  6
displacement so among the given options the correct
answer is option (c). π π
ωt + =
Acceleration = –k (x+a) 6 3
39. Two simple harmonic motions of angular π
ωt =
frequency 100 and 1000 rad s–1 have the same 6
displacement amplitude. The ratio of their
2π π  2π 
maximum accelerations is –/keâesCeerÙe DeeJe=efòe 100 ×t = ω = T 
T 6
Deewj 1000 jsef[Ùeve Øeefle meskeâC[ keâer oes mejue DeeJele&
T
ieefleÙeeW keâe efJemLeeheve DeeÙeece meceeve nw~ Gvekesâ t=
12
DeefOekeâlece lJejCeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee :-
41. The phase difference between the
(a) 1 : 103 (b) 1 : 104 instantaneous velocity and acceleration of a
(c) 1 : 10 (d) 1 : 102 particle executing simple harmonic motion is:-
AIPMT-2008 Skeâ keâCe mejue DeeJeleea ieefle mes ieefle keâj jne nw~ Fmekesâ
Ans. (d) : Given : angular frequencies– leel#eefCekeâ Jesie Deewj lJejCe keâe keâueevlej nesiee:-
ω1 = 100 rad/s (a) Zero (b) 0.5π
ω2 = 1000 rad/s (c) π (d) 0.707π
Amplitude = constant AIPMT-2007
Maximum acceleration of simple harmonic motion is Ans. (b) : The displacement equation of particle
αmax = –ω2Α executing SHM is-
2
α1= − ω1 Α = −(100) .Α x = a cos ( ωt )
2

α2 = − ω22 Α= −(1000)2Α Velocity, v =

dx
= −aω sin ( ωt )
dt
− (100 ) .A
2
α1 π
= ( A Remains same ) Acceleration, a = dv = −aω2 cos ( ωt ) =–aω2sin (ωt + )
α 2 − (1000 )2 .A dt 2
1
=
102
40. A point performs simple harmonic oscillation
of period T and the equation of motion is given
by x = a sin (ωt + π/6). After the elapse of
what fraction of the time period the velocity of
the point will be equal to half of its maximum
velocity ?
Skeâ efyevog mejue DeeJele& oesueve keâjlee nw efpemekeâe
DeeJele&keâeue T Deewj ieefle keâe meceerkeâjCe x = a sin (ωt
Hence, acceleration is 0.5 π out of phase relative to
+ π/6) nw~ DeeJele&keâeue kesâ efkeâme DebMe kesâ he§eeled efyevog velocity.
keâe Jesie Gmekesâ DeefOekeâlece Jesie keâe DeeOee nesiee ? 42. The particle executing simple harmonic motion
(a) T/3 (b) T/12 has a Kinetic energy K0 cos2ωt. The maximum
(c) T/8 (d) T/6 values of the potential energy and the total
AIPMT-2008, 2007 energy are respectively:-
Physics 276 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ keâCe mejue DeeJeleea ieefle ceW nw~ FFmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& 44. Which one of the following wing statements
s is true
K0 cos2ωt nw~ Fmekeâer efmLeefle Deewj mebhetCe& Tpee& kesâ for the speed 'v' and the he acceleration
acc 'a' of a
particle executing simple
sim harmonic
›eâceevegmeej DeefOekeâlece ceeve neWies:-
motion./efpeme keâCe keâer Ûeeuee mejue
me DeeJele& ieefle keâer
(a) K0 and K0 (b) 0 an
and 2K0
nesieer Gmekesâ Jesie 'v' Deewj lJejCe
ejCe 'a' mecyevOeer efvecve
K0
(c) and K0 (d) K0 and 2K0 keâLeveeW ceW mes efkeâmekeâes ÙeLeeLe& ceevee
eevee peeSiee~
2
(a) Value of 'a' is zero,, whatever wha may be the
AIPMT-2007
value of 'v'
Ans. (a) : Given, Kinetic energy of pa particle executing
'v' keâe ceeve kegâÚ Yeer nes, 'a' keâe ceeve MetvÙe nesiee
S.H.M. is
K.E. = K0 cos ωt2 (b) When 'v' is zero, 'a' is zero
The maximum kinetic energy is when hen co cos ωt = 1, i.e.
2 peye 'v' MetvÙe nesiee lees 'a' Yeerer MetvÙe nesiee
K.E. = K0×1 = K0 .................
....... (i
(i) (c) When 'v' is maximum, 'a' is zero
We know, In S.H.M. the summation tion oof kinetic energy peye 'v' DeefOekeâlece nesiee lees 'a' MetvÙe nesiee
and potential energy at any point int remremains same i.e. (d) When 'v' is maximum, 'a' is maximum
Total energy remain same at every point peye 'v' DeefOekeâlece nesiee lees 'a' Yeer DeefOekeâlece nesiee
T.E. = K.E. + P.E. AIPMT-2004
So, if K.E. is maximum then potential
tential energy is zero, Ans. (c) : In simple harmonic motion otion, the displacement
i.e. equation is -
T.E. = K0 + 0 ⇒ T.E. = K0 ..... ................... (ii) y = A sin ωt
Similarly, if kinetic energy is zero then potential energy Where, A = Amplitude of the motion otion
will be maximum and is equal to total
otal enenergy.
dy
T.E. = 0 + P.E. ⇒ P.E. = K0 ... ................. (iii) Velocity, V = = Aω cos ωt
Hence, total energy and maximum pote otential energy are dt
K 0. V = Aω 1 − sin 2 ωt
V = ω A2 − y2 ...(i)
...(
dV d
Acceleration, a = = (Aω cosωt)
dt dt
a = – Aω2 sin ωt
a = – ω2y ...(ii)
...(
When, y = 0 , V = Aω = Vmax
a = 0 = amin
43. A particle executing simplee harm harmonic motion of When, y = A , V = 0 = Vmin
amplitude 5 cm has maximum imum speed of 31.4 a = – ω2A = amax
cm/s. The frequency of its oscilla oscillation is :
Hence, it is clear that when V is maximum, ma then a is
mejue DeeJele& Ûeeue mes ieefleceeve Skeâ keâCe 5 cm keâe minimum (i.e. zero).
DeeÙeece Deewj 31.4 cm/s keâer DeefOekeâl ekeâlece Ûeeue jKelee nw~ 45. A particle of mass m oscillates oscill with simple
Fmekesâ oesueveeW keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer :- harmonic motion between en points
po x1 and x2, the
(a) 1Hz (b) 3Hz equilibrium position being eing O. Its potential
(c) 2Hz (d) 4Hz energy is plotted. It will
ll be as a given below in
AIPMT-2005 the graph:
Ans. (a) : Given, a = 5 cm
Skeâ m õJÙeceeve keâe keâCe x1 Deewj x2 efyevogDeeW kesâ yeerÛe
Vmax = 31.4 cm/s mejue DeeJele& ieefle mes oesuevee keâj k jne nw, peyeefkeâ
The maximum speed of a particle execut executing SHM is meecÙeeJemLee O ef y evog hej nw ~ Fmekeâ
mekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâe
Vmax = aω «eeHeâ Keer Û ee peelee nw w ~ Ùen ef
v ecvee «eeHeâ
«eeH ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw:
Vmax = a ( 2πn ) [∴ωω = 2πn ]
Where n = frequency (a) (b)
Vmax = 5× 2π ×n
V 31.4
n = max =
5 × 2π 2 × 3.14 × 5 (c) (d)
⇒ n = 1Hz AIPMT-2003
Physics 277 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): QWe know that for a particle in SHM- a
(a) ± (b) +a
1 2
Potential energy, U = kx 2 which is of the form; y = x2
2 (c) ± a (d) –1
So graph will be; AIPMT-2002
Ans. (c) : For a particle under SHM, the kinetic energy
is given by–
1
KE = mω2 (a 2 − y 2 ).......(1)
2
b and potential energy-
46. The potential energy of a simple harmonic 1
oscillator when the particle is half way to its PE = 2 mω y .......(2)
2 2

end point is – From equation (1), KE is maximum at mean position i.e

Skeâ mejue DeeJeleea oesuekeâ keâe efmLeeflepe Tpee&, peyeefkeâ y = 0
keâCe Deheves Deefvlece efyevog mes DeeOeer otjer hej nw, nesieer- 1
∴ Kmax = mω2 a 2
2E 1E 2
(a) (b) From equation (2) PE is maximum when y = ± a
3 8
1
(c)
1E
(d)
1E PEmax = mω2 a 2
4 2 2
Displacement between max. P.E. position and max.
AIPMT-2003
K.E. position for a particle executing simple harmonic
Ans. (c): Kinetic Energy, K.E. = = m ω2 ( A 2 − y 2 )
1 motion is ±a.
2
48. A mass of 2.0 kg is put on a flat pan attached to
1 a vertical spring fixed on the ground as shown in
Potential energy, P.E = mω2 y 2
2 the figure. The mass of the spring and the pan is
Where- negligible. When pressed slightly and released
m = mass the mass executes a simple harmonic motion.
ω = angular velocity The spring constant is 200N/m. What should be
the minimum amplitude of the motion so that
y = distance from mean position
the mass gets detached from the pan
A = Amplitude
(Take g = 10 m/s2)
Total Energy (E) = KE + PE
Skeâ GOJee&Oej efoMee keâer keâceeveer keâes Oejeleue hej efÛe$e ceW
= m ω 2 ( A 2 − y 2 ) + m ω 2 y 2 = mω 2 A 2 ….(i)
1 1 1
efoKeeÙes Devegmeej mLeeÙeer efkeâÙee ieÙee nw leLee Fmekesâ Thej
2 2 2
efmejs hej heueÌ[s hej 2.0 kg õJÙeceeve keâer Jemleg jKeer nw~
A
Given, y = keâceeveer Deewj heueÌ[s kesâ Yeej veieCÙe nw~ LeesÌ[e oyee keâj
2
2 ÚesÌ[ osves hej õJÙeceeve mejue DeeJeleea ieefle keâjlee nw~
1 A keâceeveer keâe yeue efveÙeleebkeâ 200N/m nw~ DeeJele& ieefle keâe
P.E. = mω 2  
2 2 vÙetvelece DeeÙeece efkeâlevee nesvee ÛeeefnS efpememes Thej jKeer
1 A2 Jemleg heueÌ[s mes Deueie nes peeÙes?
= mω2
2 4 (ceeve uees g = 10m/s2)
 From eq n (i) 
1 1  
= . mω 2 A 2
4 2  E = 1 m ω2 A 2 
 2 
1
PE = E
4
47. Displacement between max. P.E. position and (a) 4.0 cm
max. K.E. position for a particle executing (b) 8.0 cm
simple harmonic motion is (c) 10.0 cm
Ùeefo Skeâ keâCe mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâj jne nes lees (d) Any value less than 12.0 cm
DeefOekeâlece efmLeeflepe Tpee& leLee DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& 12.0 cm mes keâce keâesF& Yeer ceeve
keâer efmLeefleÙeeW kesâ ceOÙe efJemLeeheve nesiee - AIPMT-2007

Physics 278 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given: mass (m) = 2 kg m
spring constant k = 200 N/m l= − − − − − (ii)
ρ.A
g = 10 m/s2 Substituting the value of l in (i) we get,
m
so T = 2π
ρ.A.g
Thus, from the above equation it can be said
1
T∝
A
Restoring force on spring is given by F = k ⋅ A
50. The total energy of particle performing SHM
Restoring force is balanced by weight mg of block for
mass to execute simple harmonic motion of amplitude depend on : -/mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjves Jeeues keâCe keâer
A. keg âue Tpee& efveYe&j keâjleer nw-
mg (a) K, a, m (b) K, a
k ⋅ A = mg ⇒ A = (c) K, a, x (d) K, x
k
AIPMT-2001
2 × 10 10
A= = m = 10cm Ans. (b) : The total energy of particle performing SHM
200 100
1
49. A rectangular block of mass m and area of E = mω2 a 2
cross-section A floats in a liquid of density ρ. If 2
it is given a small vertical displacement from 1
E = Ka 2
equilibrium, it undergoes oscillation with a 2
time period T. Then:- so total energy depends on K&A.
õJÙeceeve m Deewj DevegØemLe-keâeš #es$eheâue A keâe Skeâ 51. The bob of simple pendulum having length l, is
DeeÙeleekeâej yuee@keâ, ρ IevelJe kesâ Skeâ õJe ceW lewj jne nQ~ displaced from mean position to an angular
Ùeefo Fme yuee@keâ keâes Deheveer meecÙe DeJemLee ceW Skeâ Úesše position θ with respect to vertical. If it is
TOJee&Oej mLeeve efJeÛeueve efoÙee peelee nw lees Ùen DeeJele& released, then velocity of bob at lowest position
keâeue T mes oesueve DeejcYe keâj oslee nw~ leye nesiee:- :/l uecyeeF& kesâ Skeâ mejue ueesuekeâ kesâ ieesuekeâ keâes

1
GOJee&Oej mes θ keâesCe yeveeles ngS ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes efJe#esefhele
(a) T ∝ ρ (b) T ∝ keâj osles nQ~ Ùeefo Fmes ÚesÌ[ os lees efvecvelece DeJemLee hej
A
ieesuekeâ keâe Jesie nesiee –
1 1
(c) T ∝ (d) T ∝ (a) 2gℓ (1 − cos θ ) (b) 2gℓ (1 + cos θ )
ρ m
AIPMT-2006 (c) 2gℓ cos θ (d) 2gℓ
Ans. (b) : Given rectangular block AIPMT-2000
Mass = m Ans. (a) :
Area = A
Density = ρ

]
We know that,
Time period of SHM of small vertical oscillation in OA
liquid is given T = 2π l / g − − − −(i) In ∆OAC, cosθ =
l
Where l = length of particle dipped in the liquid. ⇒ OA = l cosθ
By the law of floatation. ∴ AB = OB – OA = l – l cosθ
[ Weight of block = weight of liquid displaced
= l (1 – cosθ)
w = weight density
v = volume of displaced fluid ∴ h = l (1 – cosθ)
v=A×l] When bob is at mean (equilibrium) position, total
mg = w × v mv 2
energy is due to kinetic energy =
mg = ρ.g × A × l 2

Physics 279 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When bob is lifted through an angle θ, height through Ans. (a) : Time period for a simple pendulum–
which it has been lifted is, h = l – l cosθ l
h = l (1-cosθ) T = 2π
g eff
The total energy at that position is only potential
energy, since it is at extreme position and velocity is If it is a free falling lift then
zero. geff = (g − g ') = 0
Thus total energy at that position = mgh = mg l (1-
[T = ∞] (Time period infinite)
cosθ)
From this we can conclude that the frequency is zero
Since, energy is conserved, because the net acceleration is zero during free fall.
mv2 54. If time of mean position from amplitude
= mgl(1 − cos θ)
2 (extreme) position is 6s. then the frequency of
v = 2gl(1 − cos θ) SHM will be/Ùeefo DeeÙeece eqmLeefle mes ceeOÙe eqmLeefle keâe
52. Two spherical bob of masses MA and MB are
meceÙe 6s nw, lees mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer–
hung vertically from two strings of length lA (a) 0.01 Hz (b) 0.02 Hz
and lB respectively. They are executing SHM (c) 0.03 Hz (d) 0.04 Hz
with frequency relation fA = 2fB. Then : AIPMT-1998
MA Je MB õJÙeceeve kesâ oes keâCe ›eâceMe: lA Deewj lB Ans. (d) : Given, Time T = 6 sec
uecyeeF& keâer oes [esefjÙeeW mes TOJee&Oej ueškeâeles nQ~ Ùes oesveeW T
= 6 sec
DeeJe=efòe mecyevOe fA = 2fB mes SHM keâj jns nQ lees mener 4
mecyevOe nw – T = 24 sec
1 1
ℓ Frequency = = Hz = 0.04 Hz
(a) ℓ A = B T 24
4
55. Two SHM's with same amplitude and time
(b) lA = 4lB
period, when acting together in perpendicular
(c) lA= 2 lB & MA = 2MB directions with a phase difference of π/2, give
ℓB MB rise to
(d) ℓ A = & MA =
2 2 meceeve DeeÙeece Deewj meceeve DeeJele&keâeue Jeeues oes mejue
AIPMT-2000 DeeJele& ieefle peye π/2 keâueeblej kesâ meeLe Skeâ otmejs kesâ
Ans. (a) : For simple harmonic motion, uebyeJele keâeÙe&jle nesles nQ lees heefjCeeceer ieefle nesleer nw?
Frequency 'f' =
1 g
where 'l' is length of string (a) straight motion/mejue ieefle
2π l (b) elliptical motion/oerIe&Je=òeerÙe ieefle
∴f ∝
1 (c) circular motion/Je=òeerÙe ieefle
l (d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR

{ll }
fA l = length of string A AIPMT-1997
⇒ = B A
fB lA B = length of string B Ans. (c) : According to the question, two SHM have
same amplitude and time period.
Given, fA = 2 fB
So, SHM equation,
2f B lB x = A sin (ωt) ...... (i)
⇒ =
fB lA Where A = amplitude
l ω = angular velocity
⇒4= B t = time period
lA
x = position of the wave
lB similarly for 2nd SHM but phase difference is π/2
⇒ lA =
4 So, y = A sin (ωt + π/2)
53. Frequency of simple pendulum in a free falling y = A cos (ωt) ......(ii)
lift is/cegòeâ ™he mes efiejleer efueHeäš ceW mejue ueesuekeâ keâer Squaring both equation (i) and (ii) and then adding, we
DeeJe=efòe keäÙee nesieer :- get
(a) Zero/MetvÙe (b) Infinite/Devevle x2 + y2 = A2 sin2 (ωt) + A2 cos2 (ωt)
(c) Can't be say/kegâÚ keân veneR mekeâles x2 + y2 = A2 [sin2(ωt) + cos2 (ωt)]
(d) Finite/heefjefcele x2 + y2 = A2 ∵ sin2θ + cos2θ = 1
The above equation is showing circular motion.
AIPMT-1999
Physics 280 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
56. A simple harmonic oscillator tor ha
has an amplitude circle/Je=òe kesâ DevegefoMe
(a)
A and time period T. The time rrequired by it to figure of eight/8 kesâ Deekeâej
(b) eâej kesk â DevegefoMe
travel from x = A to x = A/2 is
Skeâ mejue DeeJele& oesueve keâe eâe DeeÙeece A Deewj straight line/mejuejsKee kesâ DevegefoMe
(c)
DeeJele&keâeue T nw~ x = A mes x = A/2 lekeâ peeves ceW Fmekesâ ellipse/oerIe&Je=òe kesâ DevegefoMe
(d)
Éeje efueÙee ieÙee meceÙe nw: AIPMT-1990
(a) T/6 (b) T/4 Ans. (c) : Given that
(c) T/3 (d) T/2 Phase difference = π
AIPMT-1992 So, position of simple harmonic motion motio is given by
Ans. (a) : We know that, x = a sin ωt ....(i)
SHM equation, x = A sin (ωt) If phase difference is π
 2π  then, y = b sin (ωt + π)
= A sin  t = –b sin (ωt) ...... (ii)
 T 
Where, x and y are position off two simple harmonic
Where, A = amplitude, ω = angula angular frequency or
motion and a and b are two different erent amplitude
a dividing
2π
velocity = equation (i) and (ii)
T x a sin( ωt)
t = time period =
T = period of oscillation y − b sin(ωt)
From question, x = A x −y
=
 2π  a b
then, A = A sin  t
 T  y=
–b
x
 2π  a
1= sin  t For straight line equation,
 T 
y = mx + c
 2π 
sin(π/2) = sin  t ∵ sin90º sinπ/2 = 1
0º = si Where, m = slope (constant)
 T  c = constant
1 2
= t So, y =
–b
x is a straight line equatio
quation.
2 T a
T
t= 58. A particle starts with S.H.M. S.H.M from the mean
4 position as shown in the figure.
figur Its amplitude is
Now, x = A/2 then, A and its time period is T. At one time, its
 2π  speed is half that of the maximum
maxim speed.
A/2 = A sin  t
 T  What is its displacement?
1  2π  Skeâ keâCe efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej ceeOÙe
c efmLeefle mes mejue
= sin  t DeeJele& ieef l e keâjvee ØeejcYe keâjlee
lee nw
n ~ Fmekeâe DeeÙeece A
2  T 
 2π 
Deewj Fmekeâe DeeJele&keâeue T nww~ Skeâ S meceÙe hej Fmekeâer
sin(π/6) = sin  t ∵ sin 30º = ssinπ/6 = 1/2 Ûeeue Deef O ekeâlece Ûeeue keâer DeeOeer
DeeO nesleer nw~ Fmekeâe
 T 
1 2 efJemLeeheve keäÙee nw?
= t
6 T
T
tA /2 =
12
Now, time taken to travel from x = A to x = A/2
T T 12T − 4T 8T T 2A 3A
⇒ − = = = (a) (b)
4 12 12 × 4 48 6 3 2
57. The composition of twoo sim simple harmonic
2A 3A
motions of equal periods at righ right angle to each (c) (d)
other and with a phase differenc ference of π results in 3 2
the displacement of the particle rticle along AIPMT-1996
meceeve DeeJele&keâeue, Skeâ otmejs mes 90º kesâ keâesCe hej leLee Ans. (d) : We know that relationn between betw displacement
and speed in simple harmonic motion
otion
π keâueeblej keâer oes mejue DeeJele&i& eefleÙ
eÙeeW kesâ mebÙeespeve mes
keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve neslee nw v = ω A 2 − x 2 .....(i)

Physics 281 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Where, A = amplitude 60. A body is executing simple harmonic motion.
x = position of particles or displacement When the displacements from the mean
ω = angular frequency or velocity position is 4 cm and 5 cm, the corresponding
v = speed velocities of the body is 10 cm/sec and 8 cm/sec.
Then the time period of the body is
For maximum condition,
x=0
Skeâ efheC[ mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjlee nw~ peye Gmekeâe
vmax = ωA ef J emLeeheve ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes 4 mesceer leLee 5 mesceer nes lees
From question, speed of the particle is equal to the half Gmekeâe Jesie 10 efkeâceer/meskeâC[ leLee 8 mesceer/meskeâC[ nw,
v Fmekeâe DeeJele&keâeue nesiee-
of the maximum, v = max
2 (a) 2π sec/2π meskeâC[ (b) π/2 sec/π/2 meskeâC[
ωA (c) π sec/π meskeâC[
v=
2 (d) 3π/2 sec/3π/2 meskeâC[
Put the value in equation (i), we get AIPMT-1991
ωA
=ω A −x2 2
Ans. (c) : Given that,
2 Velocity (v1) = 10 cm/sec
A (v2) = 8 cm/sec
= A −x
2 2

2 and its position (x1) = 4 cm

On squaring in both side, we get (x2) = 5 cm
2
A We know that, relation between speed and displacement
= A2 − x2 in simple harmonic motion,
4
A2 v = ω A2 − x 2
x2 = A 2 − st
4 For 1 position,
2
3A v1 = ω A 2 − (4) 2
x2 =
4
10 = ω A 2 − 16 ......(i)
A 3
x= For 2nd position, v 2 = ω A 2 − (5) 2
2
59. If a simple harmonic oscillator has got a 8 = ω A 2 − 25 .........(ii)
displacement of 0.02 m and acceleration equal On dividing equation (i) and (ii), we get
to 2.0 m/s2 at any time, the angular frequency
of the oscillator is equal to 10 ω A 2 − 16
=
mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles ngS efheC[ keâe efJemLeeheve 0.02 8 ω A 2 − 25
ceeršj nes lees Gmekeâe lJejCe 2 ceer/meskeâC[2 neslee nw~ On squaring both side, we get
Fmekeâer keâesCeerÙe DeeJe=efòe nesieer-  10 
2
A 2 − 16
  = 2
(a) 10 rad/s/10 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[  8 A − 25
(b) 0.1 rad/s/0.1 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[ 100 (A –25) = 64 (A2 – 16)
2

(c) 100 rad/s/100 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[ 100 A2 – 2500 = 64A2 –1024

36 A2 = 1476
(d) 1 rad/s/1 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[
A2 = 41
AIPMT-1992
Put the value of A2 in equation (i), we get
Ans. (a) : Given that,
Displacement (x) = 0.02 m 10 = ω 41 − 16
Acceleration (a) = 2.0 m/sec2 10 = ω 25
We know that, if motion is simple harmonic motion 10 = ω×5
then, acceleration (a) = ω2 x ] ω = 2 rad/sec.
2.0 = ω2×0.02 We know that,
2 2π
ω2 = ω= b
0.02 T
2 × 100 2π
= 2=
2 T
ω = 10 rad/sec. T = π sec.

Physics 282 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
61. A particle executes S.H.M. along x-axis. The 1
force acting on it is given by K.E max = k.x 2
2
Where A and k are positive constant. 1
= ( 2 × 106 ) ( 0.01) = 0.0001 × 106
2

Skeâ keâCe x- De#e keâer efoMee ceW Ûeuelee ngDee mejue 2

DeeJele& ieefle keâjlee nw lees yeue nesiee = 100 J
If K.E is maximum, then P.E is minimum.
peneB A leLee k Oeveelcekeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw So, T.E = K.Emax + P.Emin
(a) A cos (kx) (b) Ae–kx 160 = 100 + P.Emin
(c) Akx (d) –Akx. P.Emin = 60 J
AIPMT-1994, 1988 If K.E is minimum then P.E is maximum
Ans. (d) : We know that, position of simple harmonic T.E = KEmin + P.Emax
motion is given by, 160 = 0+P.Emax
P.Emax = 160 J
x = A sin ωt
Then at a point Potential energy = P.Emax – P.Emin
dx = 160 – 60 = 100 J
Velocity (v) =
dt 63. In a simple harmonic motion, when the
d displacement is one-half the amplitude, what
= ( A sin ωt )
dt fraction of the total energy is kinetic?
= Aω cos ωt efkeâmeer mejue DeeJele& ieefle ceW, peye efJemLeeheve DeeÙeece keâe
dv DeeOee nw, lees kegâue Tpee& keâe efkeâlevee Yeeie ieeflepe Tpee&
Acceleration, (a) = nesieer?
dt
d (a) 1/2 (b) 3/4
= ( Aω cos ωt ) (c) zero (d) 1/4.
dt
AIPMT-1995
= – Aω2 sin ωt
Ans. (b) : We know that,
= – xω2 ∵ x = + A sin ωt Total energy in simple harmonic motion is given by,
We know that, Force (F) = mass (m) × acceleration (a) 1
E = mω2 A 2 .......(i)
= m × (–x ω2) 2
= – m × ω2 × x Where A is amplitude and kinetic energy of a particle in
⇒ F = – kx or – Akx (mω2 = k) 1
SHM, K.E = mω2 ( A 2 − x 2 )
Where, A and k are the positive constant 2
Hence, from the given option, force acting on it. is From the question, x = A/2
1
given by, F = –Akx So, K.E = mω2 ( A 2 − A 2 /(2) 2 )
62. A linear harmonic oscillator of force constant 2 2
6
× 10 N/m and displacement 0.01 m has a total 1  3A 2 
= mω2  
mechanical energy of 160 J. Its 2  4 
2×106 N/m yeue efveÙeleebkeâ Deewj 0.01 m efJemLeeheve kesâ Ratio of K.E and total energy,
efkeâmeer jwefKekeâ DeeJele& oesuekeâ keâer kegâue Ùebeef$ekeâ Tpee& 1  3A 2 
mω2  
160 J nw, Fmekeâer K.E 2
=  4 
E 1
(a) P.E is 160 J/efmLeeflepe Tpee& 160 J mω2 A 2
2
(b) P.E. is zero/efmLeeflepe Tpee& MetvÙe nw~ 3
(c) P.E. is 100 J/efmLeeflepe Tpee& 100 J nw~ =
4
(d) P.E. is 120 J/efmLeeflepe Tpee& 120 J nw~  3
K.E =   .E
AIPMT-1996 4
Ans. (c) : Given that, 3
So, fraction of the total energy is kinetic.
Force constant (k) = 2×106 N/m 4
Amplitude / displacement (x) = 0.01m 64. A loaded vertical spring executes S.H.M. with a
Total mechanical energy = 160 J time period of 4 sec. The difference between the
When kinetic energy is zero, then potential energy is kinetic energy and potential energy of this
maximum. So, P.Emax = total mechanical energy = 160 J system varies with a period of

Physics 283 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ Yeej Ùegòeâ TOJee&Oej efmØebie 4 meskeâC[ kesâ 1
and total energy (E) = mω2A2
DeeJele&keâeue kesâ meeLe mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjleer nw~ Fme 2
efvekeâeÙe kesâ ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj efmLeeflepe Tpee& kesâ yeerÛe Where A = Amplitude
Deblej DeJeefOe hej heefjJeefle&le neslee nw? ω = Angular frequency
From question,
(a) 2 sec/2 meskeâC[ (b) 1 sec/1 meskeâC[
1
(c) 8 sec/8 meskeâC[ (d) 4 sec/4 meskeâC[ Potential energy (P.E) = (total energy)
4
AIPMT-1994
1 11 
Ans. (a) : If spring executes in SHM, then displacement mω2x2 =  mω2 A 2 
2 42 
(x) = A sin ωt
1
1 x2 = A2
Potential energy of the system (P.E) = kx2 4
2
A
where k = mω2 x=
2
1
So, P.E = mω2. A2 sin2 ωt 66. The angular velocity and the amplitude of
2
simple pendulum is ω and a respectively. At a
1 displacement x from the mean position if its
Kinetic energy (K.E) = mv2
2 kinetic energy is T and potential energy is V,
Where v = velocity then the ratio of T to V is
dx d Skeâ mejue ueesuekeâ keâe DeeÙeece leLee keâesCeerÙe Jesie
v= = (Asin ωt) = A cos ωt ×ω
dt dt ›eâceMe: a leLee ω nw~ ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes x otjer hej Fmekeâer
1 1 ieeflepe Tpee& T leLee efmLeeflepe Tpee& V nw lees T leLee V
So, K.E = m (Aω cos ωt)2 = mA 2 ω2 cos 2 ωt
2 2 keâe Devegheele nesiee
difference between K.E and P.E ( a 2 – x 2 ω2 ) x 2 ω2
1 (a) (b)
K.E–P.E = m A 2 ω2 ( cos2 ωt − sin 2 ωt ) x 2 ω2 ( a 2 – x 2 ω2 )
2
(a2 – x2 ) x2
1 (c) (d)
= mA 2 ω2 cos 2ωt x2 (a2 – x2 )
2
comparing angular frequency, ω' = 2ω AIPMT-1991
2π 2 × 2π Ans. (c) : Given that, ω is angular velocity, a is
= amplitude and kinetic energy is 'T', potential energy is
T' T
'V'. If a particle is moving in simple harmonic motion,
4
T = T / 2 = = 2sec
'
then velocity = ω a 2 − x 2
2
Where x is displacement
65. A body executes simple harmonic motion with
1
an amplitude A. At what displacement from the So, Kinetic energy T = mω2 ( a 2 – x 2 ) .........(i)
mean position is the potential energy of the 2
body is one-fourth of its total energy? 1
Potential energy V = kx 2
Skeâ keâCe DeeÙeece A kesâ meeLe mejue DeeJele&ieefle keâjlee 2
2
nw~ ceeOÙe efmLeefle mes efkeâleveer otjer hej Gmekeâer efmLeeflepe Where, k = force constant = mω
Tpee& kegâue Tpee& keâer Skeâ ÛeewLeeF& nw? 1
v = mω2 x 2 .......(ii)
2
(a) A/4
Equation (i) is divided by equation (ii)
(b) A/2
1 2( 2 2)
T 2 mω a − x
(c) 3A/4
a 2 − x2
(d) Some other fraction of A/A keâe keâesF& DevÙe efYeVe nw = =
V 1
mω2 x 2 x2
AIPMT-1993
2
Ans. (b) : In simple harmonic motion,
67. A simple pendulum with a bob of mass m
1 oscillates form A to C and back to A such that
P.E= kx 2 (where k = force constant = mω2)
2 PB is H. If the acceleration due to gravity is
1 g, then the velocity of the bob as it passes
Potential energy (P.E) = mω2 x 2 through B is
2
Physics 284 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
õJÙeceeve m kesâ Skeâ ieesuekeâ kesâ meeLe
eLe mmejue ueesuekeâ A mes 69. A seconds pendulum is mounted
mou in a rocket.
C Deewj Jeeheme A lekeâ Fme Øekeâejj o oesueve keâjlee nw efkeâ Its period of oscillation wil decrease when
n will
PB = H nw~ Ùeefo ieg®lJeerÙe lJejCe g nw, lees ieesuekeâ keâe rocket is
Jesie peye Ùen B mes iegpejlee nw, nesiee: Skeâ meskeâC[ ueesuekeâ efkeâmeer je@@kesâš ceW ues peeÙee peelee nw
Fmekesâ oesueve keâe DeeJele&keâeue Iešs
ešsieee peye je@kesâš
(a) moving down with uniform uni acceleration
/Skeâmeceeve lJejCe kesâ meeLe veereerÛes keâer Deesj ieefle keâj jne
nes~
(a) mgH (b) 2gH (b) moving around the earth in geostationary
(c) zero (d) 2gH
2gH. orbit/leguÙekeâeueer keâ#ee ceW he==LJeer kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj ieefle keâj
AIPMT-1995 jne nes~
Ans. (b) : Given that, Mass of bob is 'm'
(c) moving up with uniform
orm velocity/
v Skeâmeceeve Jesie
Acceleration due to gravity
ty is 'g
'g'
We know that, total energy is conserve
served. So, potential kesâ meeLe Thej keâer Deesj ieefle keâj jne nes~
energy at point A (or C) = kinetic energy at point B (d) moving up with uniform
orm acceleration/
ac Skeâmeceeve
mgH = mv2
1 lJejCe kesâ meeLe Thej keâer Deessj ieefle keâj jne nes~
2 AIPMT-1994
Where, H is height of pendulum, v is vel
velocity of bob.
Ans. (d) : We know that,
v = 2gH
l
Therefore, velocity of the bob as it pass
passes through B is π
Time period (T) = 22π
g
2gH .
68. A body of mass 5 kg hangs gs fro
from a spring and
oscillates with a time period iod of 2π seconds. If
the body is removed, the lengt length of the spring
will decrease by
5 kg õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ efheC[ Skeâeâ efmØebie mes ueškeâlee nw
Deewj 2π meskeâC[ kesâ DeeJele&keâeue kesâ meeLe oesueve keâjlee
According to the situation,
nw~ Ùeefo efheC[ keâes nše efueÙee peelee
eelee nw, lees efmØebie keâer
uecyeeF& efkeâleves mes Ieš peeSieer? l
T = 2π
g effective
(a) g/k metres/ g/k ceeršj
(b) k/g metres/ k/g ceeršj Where, geffective < g
(c) 2π metres/2π ceeršj Therefore, T will decrease when en acceleration
ac due to
(d) g metres/ g ceeršj gravity = (g + a) i.e. (g)effective increases
incre this happens
when rocket accelerates upward
pwards with uniform
AIPMT-1994
acceleration.
Ans. (d) : Given that, Mass (m) = 5 kg
Time period (T) = 2π sec 70. A simple pendulum is suspen
uspended from the roof
of a trolley which movesoves in a horizontal
m
eriod ((T) = 2 π
We know that, for a spring time period direction with an acceleration
ration a, then the time
k
period is given by T = 2π ( l/a' ) , where a'
5
2 π = 2π equal to
k
Skeâ mejue ueesuekeâ Skeâ #eweflepee efoMee ceW 'a' lJejCe mes
5 Ûeueleer ngF& š^eueer keâer Úle mes ueškeâe nw~ Gmekeâe
1=
k
On squaring both side, we get DeeJele&keâeue T = 2π ( l/a' ) mes efoÙee peelee nw peneB a'
k = 5 N/m keâe ceeve nesiee
If body is removed, length of spring
ing w
will decreased by (a) g (b) g – a
mg 5 × g
x=
k
=
5
(c) g + a (d) (g2 + a 2 )
x = g meters. AIPMT-1991

Physics 285 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Let us consider, Ans. (a) : Given,
Length of the pendulum is L Damping force ∝Velocity.
i.e. F∝V
F = KV, where
K = constant of Proportionality
F
∴ K=
V
kg − m / s 2
=
m/s
When the trolley is moves in horizontal direction with
an acceleration 'a' then effective acceleration (a') K = kg-s–1
(a')2 = g2 + a2 73. In case of a forced vibration, the resonance
wave becomes very sharp when the:/ØeCeesefole
a' = g 2 + a 2
kebâheve ceW, Devegveeoer lejbie DeefOekeâ leer›e nesieer peye:
So, time period = 2π
L
= 2π
L (a) Damping force is small/DeJecebove yeue #eerCe nes
a' g2 + a 2 (b) Restoring force is small/ØelÙeeveÙeve yeue #eerCe nes
71. Wave has simple harmonic motion whose (c) Applied periodic force is small/ueieeÙee ieÙee
period is 4 seconds while another wave which DeeJeleea yeue #eerCe nes
also possesses simple harmonic motion has its (d) Quality factor is small/iegCelee keâejkeâ Úesše nes
period 3 seconds. If both are combined, then AIPMT-2003
the resultant wave will have the period equal to
Ans. (a): Resonance:- When the frequency of the
Skeâ lejbie pees mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjleer nw Gmekeâe vibrating body is equal to the natural frequency of
DeeJele&keâeue 4 meskeâC[ leLee otmejer lejbie keâe DeeJele&keâeue another body, then the transfer of energy between the
3 meskeâC[ nw~ Ùeefo oesveeW lejbieeW keâe mebÙeespeve keâj efoÙee bodies is maximum and the other body vibrates with
peeÙes lees Fme veÙeer lejbie keâe DeeJele&keâeue keäÙee nesiee- greater amplitude. This phenomenon is called
resonance.
(a) 4 s/4 meskeâC[ (b) 5 s/5meskeâC[
(c) 12 s/12 meskeâC[ (d) 3 s/3 meskeâC[
AIPMT-1993
Ans. (c) : Given that,
Time period (T1) = 4 sec
(T2) = 3 sec
The time period of a wave is equal to reciprocal of its
frequency. When wave 1 and 2 superimpose then, the
frequency of resultant wave is known as beat frequency
and is given by,
f resultant = f 2 – f1
1 1 1 1 1 1
sSo, = – = – = From above figure the damping force is small when
Tresultant T2 T1 3 4 12 resonance peak becomes sharp.
Tresultant = 12 sec. 74. When an oscillator completes 100 oscillation its
1
amplitude reduced to of initial value. What
13.3 Free, Forced Oscillations and 3
Resonance will be its amplitude, when it completes 200
oscillation / peye Skeâ oesefue$e 100 oesueve keâjlee nw, lees
72. The damping force on an oscillator is directly Fmekeâe DeeÙeece ØeejefcYekeâ ceeve keâe Skeâ efleneF& nes peelee
proportional to the velocity. The units of the nw peye Ùen 200 oesueve hetjs keâj uesiee lees Fmekeâe DeeÙeece
constant of proportionality are: nesiee -
efkeâmeer oesefue$e hej DeJecevokeâ-yeue Jesie kesâ meceevegheeleer
1 th
neslee nw~ Deevegheeeflekeâlee kesâ efveÙeleebkeâ keâe cee$ekeâ nw:- (a) of its initial value.
8
(a) kgs–1 (b) kgs
(c) kgms–1 (d) kgms–2 2
(b) rd of its initial value.
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 3
Physics 286 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 th For a capacitor,
(c) of its initial value.
6 V IX
Q-factor = C = c
1 th VR IR
(d) of its initial value.
9 Xc
=
AIPMT-2002 R
Ans. (d) : Amplitude of oscillation at time 't' is given Q factor = 1  1 
Q X c = 
by- ωcR  ωc 
– γt
A = a 0e 76. The amplitude of a S.H.M. reduces to 1/3 in
Where, first 20 seconds then in first 40 second its
a0 = Initial amplitude of oscillation amplitude becomes/ØeLece 20 mewkeâC[ ceW Skeâ mejue
γ = damping constant DeeJele& oesuekeâ keâe DeeÙeece (1/3) nes peelee nw, lees 40
According to Question- mewkeâC[ yeeo DeeÙeece keäÙee nesiee -
When an oscillator completes 100 oscillation, its 1 1
(a) (b)
1 3 9
amplitude reduced to of initial value-
3 1 1
a0 (c) (d)
= a 0 e−γ ×100 / ν ……. (i) 27 3
3 AIPMT-1999
−γ×100
1 Ans. (b) : Amplitude of damped oscillation at time t–
⇒e ν
= ……. (a)
3 x = x0 e–λt
& A = a0e–γ×200/ν ….. (ii) where λ = constant after 20 sec
Divide equation (ii) by (i) 1
Now in 20 second its amplitude reduces to
A e − γ× 200 / ν − γ×100 / ν 1 3
⇒ a = − γ×100 / ν = e = (from equation (a))
e 3 x0 1
= x 0 e ( ) ⇒ e −λ ( ) = .....(1)
0 – λ 20 20

3 3 3
1 1 a After 40 second –
⇒ A = a0 × × = 0
3 3 9 x' = x0e–λ(40) ⇒x0 e–λ(2 × 20)
2
1 1 x
⇒ A = a0 From equation (i) → x' = x 0   = 0
9 3 9
1
75. The value of quality factor is : So after 40 sec its amplitude becomes
efJeMes<elee iegCeebkeâ keâe ceeve nw – 9
77. A particle, with restoring force proportional to
ωL ω displacement and resisting force proportional
(a) (b)
R RC to velocity is subjected to a force Fsin ωt. If the
(c) LC (d) L/R amplitude of the particle is maximum for ω =
ω1 and the energy of the particle is maximum
AIPMT-2000
for ω = ω2, then (ω0 is natural frequency of
Ans. (a) : oscillation of the particle)
Quality factor (Q) Skeâ keâCe hej jsmšesefjbie yeue Gmekesâ efJemLeeheve kesâ
=
Voltage through an inductor or capacitor meceevegheeleer nQ leLee Ie<e&Ce yeue Gmekesâ Jesie kesâ meceevegheeleer
Voltage through the resistor nw peyeefkeâ Gme hej Fsin ωt keâe yeue keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~
VL or VC Ùeefo keâCe keâe DeeÙeece ω = ω1 hej DeefOekeâlece nes leLee
Q=
VR keâCe keâer Tpee& ω = ω2 hej DeefOekeâlece nes lees
For an inductor, (a) ω1≠ω0 and ω2 = ω0
X (b) ω1 = ω0 and ω2 = ω0
Q-factor = L
R (c) ω1 = ω0 and ω2≠ω0
ωL (d) ω1≠ω0 and ω2≠ω0
Q-factor =
R AIPMT-1998, 1989

Physics 287 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : Given, π 
Q x = 3 cos  – 2ωt 
Driving frequency for maximum amplitude = ω1  4 
driving frequency for maximum energy = ω2  π
⇒ x = 3 cos  2ωt –  {Qcos (–x) = cosx}
Let us consider natural frequency of vibration is ω0  4
• For maximum amplitude driving frequency ω1 must Comparing above with equation x = r cos (ω't + φ), we
be equal to harmonic of natural frequency (ω0). For have,
example if driving frequency is 100 Hz then harmonic
ω' = 2ω
of natural frequency may be taken as 20 Hz, 25Hz,
2π
50Hz and 100Hz. Hence for maximum amplitude ⇒ = 2ω
driving frequency may be equal to any of these value T'
and not necessarily equal to natural frequency. π
⇒ T' =
Thus, ω1 ≠ ω0 .....(i) ω
• For maximum energy driving frequency ω2 must be Hence, the motion of the particle is simple harmonic
equal to natural frequency of given system. π
with period
Thus, ω2 = ω0 .....(ii) ω
Hence correct answer is option (a) 79. The displacement of a particle is represented
by the equation y = sin3 ωt. The motion is/Skeâ
13.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve JÙekeäle keâjves kesâ efueS meceerkeâjCe nw :
y = sin3 ωt Fme keâCe keâer ieefle
78. The displacement of a particle is represented (a) non-periodic/DeeJeòeea ieefle veneR nw~
π  (b) periodic but not simple harmonic/DeeJeleea lees nw
by the equation y = 3 cos  − 2ωt  .The
4  uesefkeâve mejue DeeJele& ieefle veneR nw~
motion of the particle is/Skeâ keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve
(c) simple harmonic with period 2π/ω/mejue DeeJele&
efvecveefueefKele meceerkeâjCe Éeje JÙekeäle neslee nw– ieefle nw efpemekeâe oesueve keâeue 2π/ω nw~
keâCe keâer ieefle : (d) simple harmonic with period π/ω/mejue DeeJele&
(a) simple harmonic with period
2π
/mejue DeeJele& ieefle nw efpemekeâe oesueve keâeue π/ω nw~
ω Ans. (b) : Given the equation of displacement of
2π particle, y = sin3 ωt.
ieefle nw efpemekeâe oesueve keâeue
ω Qsin3θ = 3sinθ – 4sin3θ.
π
/mejue DeeJele& 3sin ωt – sin 3ωt
(b) simple harmonic with period ⇒y=
ω 4
π 4dy
ieefle nw efpemekeâe oesueve keâeue nw ⇒ = 3ω cosωt – (3ω cos3ωt)
ω dt
(c) periodic but not simple harmonic/DeeJeleea nw hejbleg d 2 y –3ω2 sin ωt + 9ω2 sin 3ωt
Ùen mejue DeeJele& ieefle veneR nw~ ⇒ =
dt 2 4
(d) non-periodic./DeeJeleea ieefle veneR nw~ d y –3ω sin ωt + 9ω2 sin 3ωt
2 2
⇒ =
Ans. (b) : Given, the displacement of a particle is given dt 2 4
π  2
d y
by the equation x = 3 cos  – 2ωt  ... (i) ⇒ is not proportional to y.
4  dt 2
dx π  Hence, the motion is not SHM.
Now, velocity v = = 3 × 2ω sin  – 2ωt  As the expression is involving sine function, hence it
dt 4 
will be periodic.
dv π  Also, sin3 ωt = (sinωt)3
Acceleration, a = = – 12 ω2 cos  – 2ωt 
dt 4  = [sin (ωt + 2π)]3
⇒ a = – 4ω2x This function represents a periodic function as it can be
As, a ∝ x and negative sign shows that it is directed 2π
written in the form: sin(ωt + φ) and its period is
towards equilibrium (or mean position). ω
Hence particle will execute SHM.

Physics 288 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
80. The relation between acceleration and
h l
displacement of four particles are given below. ⇒ T = 2π ⇒ T = 2π [Ql = h]
From these for which particle motion is simple g g
harmonic motion./Ûeej keâCeeW kesâ lJejCe SJeb Which is independent of the density of the liquid.
efJemLeeheve kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe veerÛes efoS ieS nQ~ FveceW efkeâme 82. A particle is acted simultaneously by mutually
keâCe keâer ieefle mejue DeeJele& ieefle nw: perpendicular simple harmonic motions x = a
(a) ax = +2x (b) ax = +2x2 cos ωt and y = a sin ωt. The trajectory of
2
(c) ax = –2x (d) ax = –2x motion of the particle will be/Skeâ keâCe Skeâ meeLe
Ans. (d) : For simple harmonic motion; oes hejmhej uebyeJeled mejue DeeJele& ieefleÙeeB x = a cos ωt
Acceleration ∝ (displacement)
SJeb y = a sin ωt Deejesefhele nQ~ keâCe keâer ieefle keâe heLe
i.e. a∝ (–x)
The particle's acceleration is proportional to its negative (a) an ellipse/Skeâ oerIe&Je=òe nesiee~
displacement. (b) a parabola/ Skeâ hejJeueÙe nesiee~
From option (d) we have, (c) a circle/ Skeâ Je=òe nesiee~
ax = –2x
So, the particles is executing SHM. Hence, option (d) is (d) a straight line./Skeâ mejue jsKee nesieer~
correct. Ans. (c) : Given: x = a cos ωt and y = a sin ωt
81. Motion of an oscillating liquid column in a U- Given relation are of x and y with time t. Now, by
tube is/efkeâme U-Deeke=âefle keâer veefuekeâe ceW õJe-mlebYe keâer squaring and adding them, we get
oesueve ieefle– x2 + y2 = a2 (cos2 ωt + sin2 ωt)
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic/DeeJeleea ieefle nw {(cos2ωt + sin2 ωt = 1)}
hejbleg mejue DeeJele& ieefle veneR nw~ ⇒ x2 + y2 = a2 ... (i)
(b) non-periodic/DeveeJeleea ieefle nw~ Hence, we see this is the equation of circle. So, the
(c) simple harmonic and time period is trajectory of motion of the particle will be circle.
independent of the density of the liquid/mejue
83. The displacement of a particle varies with time
ieefle nesleer nw efpemekeâe DeeJele&-keâeue õJe kesâ IevelJe hej according to the relation y = a sin ωt + b cos
efveYe&j veneR keâjlee~
ωt./Skeâ keâCe keâe efJemLeeheve mebyebOe y = a sin ωt + b
(d) simple harmonic and time period is directly
proportional to the density of the liquid./mejue cos ωt kesâ Devegmeej yeouelee jnlee nw-
DeeJele& ieefle nesleer nw efpemekeâe DeeJele&-keâeue õJe kesâ IevelJe (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM./ieefle
kesâ Deveg›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw~ oesueveer nw hejbleg mejue DeeJele& ieefle veneR nw~
Ans. (c) : Consider the diagram in which a liquid (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude a + b./ieefle
column oscillates.
(a + b) DeeÙeece keâer mejue DeeJele& ieefle nw~
In this case, restoring force acts on the liquid due to
gravity. Acceleration of the liquid column can be (c) The motion is SHM with amplitude a2 +
calculated in terms of restoring force. b2./ieefle (a2 + b2) DeeÙeece keâer mejue DeeJele& ieefle nw~
(d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a 2 + b2
/ieefle a 2 + b 2 DeeÙeece keâer mejue DeeJele& ieefle nw~
Ans. (d) : Given : the displacement,
y = a sinωt + b cosωt ... (i)
Let,
a = A cosφ ... (ii)
Let h be height of liquid in each limb of U tube, y be b = A sinφ ... (iii)
drop in height of liquid column in one of limbs.
On squaring and adding (ii) and (iii), we get,
Restoring force f = weight of the column of height 2y
a2 +b2 = A2cos2φ + A2sin2φ = A2
⇒ F = – (A × 2y × ρ) × g = – 2 Aρgy (Qm = ρv)
⇒ma = – 2Aρgy ⇒ A = a 2 + b2
⇒a∝–y Now, y = Acosφ . sinωt + A sinφ cosω t
⇒ Motion is SHM with force constant k = 2 Aρg. ⇒y = A sin (ωt + φ)
m A × 2h × ρ dy
Now, Time period T = 2π = 2π ⇒ = Aω cos(ωt + φ)
k 2Aρg dt

Physics 289 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
d2 y efÛe$e ceW Skeâ keâCe keâer Je=òeerÙe ieefle oMee&F& ieF& nw~ Je=òe
⇒ = –Aω2 sin(ωt + φ) keâer ef$epÙee, keâCe keâe heefj›eâceCe keâeue, heefj›eâceCe keâer
dt 2
efoMee SJeb ØeejbefYekeâ efmLeefle hej Debefkeâle nQ~ heefj›eâcee keâjles
d2y
⇒ 2 = –Aω2 y keâCe P kesâ ef$epÙee meefoMe kesâ x-De#e hej Øe#esheCe keâer
dt
mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâes JÙekeäle keâj mekeâles nQ~
d2y
⇒ 2 α(–y)
dt
Hence, the given equation is S.H.M. with amplitude
a 2 + b2 .
84. Four pendulums A, B, C and D are suspended
from the same elastic support as shown in
figure. A and C are of the same length, while B
is smaller than A and D is larger than A. If A is
given a transverse displacement./Ûeej ueesuekeâ A,
 2π 
B, C SJeb D Skeâ ner ØelÙeemLe DeeOeej mes efÛe$e kesâ (a) x(t) = B sin  t 
 30 
Devegmeej ueškeâeÙes ieÙes nQ~ A SJeb C keâer uebyeeF& yejeyej
nw, B keâer uebyeeF& A mes keâce nw peyeefkeâ D keâer uebyeeF& A mes π 
(b) x(t) = B cos  t 
DeefOekeâ nw~ Ùeefo A keâes Skeâ DevegØemLe efJemLeeheve efoÙee  15 
peeÙes lees π π
(c) x(t) = B sin  t + 
 15 2
 π π
(d) x(t) = B cos  t + 
 15 2
Ans. (a) : Given : T = 30 sec, OQ = B
The projection of the radius vector on the diameter of
the circle when a particle is moving with uniform
angular velocity (ω) on a circle of reference is SHM.
(a) D will vibrate with maximum amplitude/D Let the particle go from P to Q in time t.
DeefOekeâlece DeeÙeece kesâ oesueve keâjsiee~
(b) C will vibrate with maximum amplitude/ C
DeefOekeâlece DeeÙeece kesâ oesueve keâjsiee~
(c) B will vibrate with maximum amplitude/B
DeefOekeâlece DeeÙeece kesâ oesueve keâjsiee~
(d) All the four will oscillate with equal
amplitude./meYeer (ÛeejeW) ueesuekeâ meceeve DeeÙeece kesâ
oesueve keâjWies~
Ans. (b) : When pendulum vibrate with transverse
vibration then. Then ∠ POQ = ωt = ∠OQR
The projection of radius OQ on x-axis will be OR = x
l (t) say.
T = 2π , l = length of pendulum A and C.
g In ∆OQR,
The disturbance produce in elastic rigid support of time x(t)
period T, which is transmitted by support to all sin ωt =
B
pendulum B, C, D but the frequency or time period of C
2π 2π
is same as of A, so a periodic force of period T ⇒x (t) = B sinωt = Bsin .t = Bsin .t
produces resonance in C and D with maximum as in T 30
resonance. 86. The equation of motion of a particle is x = a cos
Hence, C will vibrate with maximum amplitude. (αt)2. The motion is/Skeâ keâCe keâer ieefle keâe
85. Figure shows the circular motion of a particle. meceerkeâjCe x = a cos (αt)2 nw~ ieefle nesieer–
The radius of the circle, the period, sense of (a) periodic but not oscillatory./ DeeJeleea nw
revolution and the initial position are indicated hejbleg oesueveer veneR nw~
on the figure. The simple harmonic motion of
the x-projection of the radius vector of the (b) periodic and oscillatory./DeeJeleea Yeer nw Deewj
rotating particle P is oesueveer Yeer~
Physics 290 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) oscillatory but not periodic./oesueveer nw hejbleg Skeâ õJÙeceeve m keâes peye oes efmØebieeW S1 SJeb S2 mes
DeeJeleea veneR ~ he=Lekeâ-he=Lekeâ peesÌ[keâj oesueve keâjeÙee peelee nw lees oesueve
(d) neither periodic nor oscillatory./ve lees DeeJeleea nw DeeJe=efle v1 SJeb v2 heeF& peeleer nw~ Ùeefo Gme õJÙeceeve keâes
ve lees oesueveer~ Gve efmØebieeW kesâ meeLe efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes Devegmeej
Ans. (c) : As the given equation is x = a cos (αt)2 is peesÌ[keâj oesueve keâjeÙee peeS lees oesueve DeeJe=efle nesieer–
cosine function. Hence, it is an oscillatory motion.
Now, putting t + T in place of t,
x (t + T) = a cos [α(t + T)]
Hence, it is not periodic.
• An oscillatory motion is always periodic but a
periodic motion is not always oscillatory.
87. A particle executing SHM has a maximum (a) v1 + v2 (b) v12 + v 22
speed of 30 cm s–1 and a maximum acceleration –1
of 60 cm s–2. 1 1 
(c)  +  (d) v12 – v 22
The period of oscillation is v
 1 v 2 
mejue DeeJele& ieefle keâjles ngS keâCe keâer DeefOekeâlece Ûeeue
Ans. (b) :
30 cms–1 leLee DeefOekeâlece lJejCe 60 cm/s2 nw~ Fmekeâe
DeeJele&-keâeue nw–
π
(a) π sec (b) sec
2
π
(c) 2π sec (d) sec
t When the mass is connected to the springs individually,
Ans. (a) : The given particle in SHM has,
1 k1
Maximum speed vmax = 30 cm/sec v1 = ... (i)
2π m
Maximum acceleration amax = 60 cm/sec2
QWe know that, displacement, x = A sin ωt 1 k2
v2 = ... (ii)
dx 2π m
Velocity, v = = –Aω cos ωt.
dt Where, k1 and k2 are two spring constant.
⇒ Maximum velocity, vmax = Aω. Now, the block is connected with two springs.
dv Here, equivalent spring constant;
And, Acceleration, a = = –Aω2 sin ωt
dt kequi = k1 + k2
⇒ Maximum acceleration, amax = Aω2. Time period of oscillation of the spring block system is
Thus we have, m m
Aω = 30 cm/sec & Aω2 = 60 / sec2 T = 2π = 2π
k equi k1 + k 2
⇒ Aω = 30 ... (i)
& Aω2 = 60 ... (ii) 1 1 k1 + k 2
v= =
Aω 2
60 T 2π m
Now, =
Aω 30 1 k1 + k 2
⇒ ω = 2 rad/sec. ⇒ v=
2π m
2π
We know : ω = 1 k1 k 2
T ⇒ v= + ... (ii)
2π m m
2π
⇒ T= k1
ω from (i); = 4π2 v12
2π m
⇒ T= k2
2 from (ii); = 4π 2 v 2 2
⇒ T = πsec. m
88. When a mass m is connected individually to Thus,
two springs S1 and S2, the oscillation 1 1
v=  4π2 v12 + 4π2 v 22  2
frequencies are v1 and v2. If the same mass is 2π
attached to the two springs as shown in figure,
the oscillation frequency would be ⇒ v = v12 + v22

Physics 291 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
14.
Waves
Ans. (c):
14.1 Transverse and Longitudinal
Waves
1. If the initial tension on a stretched string is
doubled, then the ratio of the initial and final
speeds of a transverse wave along the string is
Ùeefo efkeâmeer KeeRÛeer ngF& jmmeer ceW leveeJe keâe ceeve
ØeejefcYekeâ ceeve keâe oesiegvee nes peeS, lees Fme jmmeer hej Tension T1 = m2g ................ (i)
Ûeueves Jeeueer DevegØemLe lejbie keâer ØeejefcYekeâ SJeb Debeflece Tension T2 = (m1 + m2)g ................ (ii)
ÛeeueeW keâe Devegheele nw: velocity of a wave in a string is given by
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1 T
v= ...(A)
(c) 2 :1 (d) 1: 2 µ
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 Where T = tension in string
Ans. (d) : We know that the speed v of the transverse µ = mass per unit length
wave is directly proportional to the square root of the
we know, v = fλ ... (B)
tension.
from (A) and (B)
T
v= Wavelength ∝ T (remaining parameter are constant)
µ
Where, T = Tension λ∝ T
µ = mass per unit length (m/l) λ1 T1
v1 T1 T = or
= = λ2 T2
v2 T2 2T
λ2 m1 + m 2
v1 1 1 =
= = λ1 m2
v2 2 2
2. A uniform rope of length L and mass m1 hangs 3. A transverse wave is represented by y = A sin
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass (ωt – kx). For what value of the wavelength is
m2 attached to the free end of the rope. A the wave velocity equal to the maximum
transverse pulse of wavelength λ1 is produced particle velocity ?
at the lower end of the rope. The wavelength of Skeâ DevegØemLe lejbie y = A sin (ωt – kx) Éeje oMee&F&b
the pulse when it reaches the top of the rope is
λ2 The ratio λ2/λ1 is:/õJÙeceeve m1 leLee uecyeeF& L ieF& nw~ λ kesâ efkeâme ceeve kesâ efueÙes lejbie Jesie keâe ceeve
keâer keâesF& Skeâmeceeve jmmeer efkeâmeer o=Ì{ šskeâ mes TOJee&Oej DeefOekeâlece keâCe Jesie kesâ yejeyej nesiee –
ueškeâer nQ Fme jmmeer kesâ cegòeâ efmejs mes õJÙeceeve m2 keâe (a) πA/2 (b) πA
keâesF& iegškeâe pegÌ[e nw~ jmmeer kesâ cegòeâ efmejs hej lejbieowOÙe& (c) 2πA (d) A
λ1 keâe keâesF& DevegØemLe mhevo Glhevve efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo AIPMT (Screening)-2010
jmmeer kesâ Meer<e& lekeâ heng^BÛeves hej Fme mhevo keâer lejbieowOÙe&
λ ωλ
λ2 nes peeleer nw~ leye Devegheele λ2/λ1 keâe ceeve nw : Ans. (c) : Wave velocity v = =
T 2π
m1 + m 2 m1 Maximum particle Velocity (VP) max = Aω
(a) (b)
m1 m2 V = (VP) max
m1 + m 2 m2 ωλ
= Aω
(c) (d)
m2 m1 2π
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 λ = 2πA

Physics 292 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
4. Which one of the following statements is true: 6. With the propagation of a longitudinal wave
efvecveefueefKele mes keâewve keâLeve ÙeLeeLe& nw:- through a material medium, the quantities
(a) Both light and sound waves in air are transmitted in the propagation direction are
transverse peye efkeâmeer ceeOÙece ceW DevegowIÙe& lejbie Ûeueleer nw lees
JeeÙeg ceW ØekeâeMe Deewj OJeefve lejieW DevegØemLe nesleer nQ keâewve-meer efJeMes<elee lejbie keâer Ûeueves keâer efoMee ceW nesieer
(b) The sound waves in air are longitudinal while (a) energy, momentum and mass/Tpee&, mebJesie leLee
the light waves are transverse õJÙeceeve
JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve lejbieW DevegowOÙe& nesleer nQ peyeefkeâ ØekeâeMe lejbieW (b) energy/Tpee&
DevegØemLe nesleer nQ (c) energy and mass/Tpee& leLee õJÙeceeve
(c) Both light and sound waves in air are (d) energy and linear momentum/Tpee& leLee jsKeerÙe
longitudinal/ JeeÙeg ceW ØekeâeMe Deewj OJeefve oesveeW lejbieW mebJesie
DevegowOÙe& nesleer nw AIPMT-1992
(d) Both light and sound waves can travel in Ans. (d) : Longitudinal waves are waves where the
vacuum/ ØekeâeMe Deewj OJeefve oesvees lejbieeW keâe efveJee&le ceW displacement of the medium is in the same direction as
mebÛeej nes mekeâlee nw~ the direction of the travelling wave. It is a mechanical
AIPMT-2006 wave.
• Some examples of longitudinal waves are sound
Ans. (b) : Sound waves in air are longitudinal while
waves, seismic P-waves and ultrasound waves.
light waves are transverse.
• When wave travels it means energy transfers from one
Light waves are electromagnetic waves and transverse
end to other in the direction of propagation of wave.
in nature. Light wave do not require a medium for travel
hence they can travel in vacuum. • If particles vibrate in the direction of propagation of
wave, linear momentum also transmitted in the direction
Sound waves are longitudinal waves and requires a
of propagation of wave.
medium for travel. They do not travel in vacuum.
5. A transverse wave propagating along x-axis is
represented by 14.2 Progressive Wave, Travelling
 π Wave & Standing Wave
y(x, t) = 8.0 sin  0.5πx – 4πt – 
 4
7. A wave travelling in the +ve x-direction having
where x is in metres and t is in seconds. The

1
displacement along y-direction as 1m,
speed of the wave is:-
x-De#e kesâ meeLe Ûeue jner Skeâ DevegØemLe lejbie keâes efvecve wavelength 2π m and frequency of Hz is
π
meceerkeâjCe Éeje JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw: represented by :
 π Oeveelcekeâ (+ve) x-efoMee ceW Ûeueleer ngF& efkeâmeer lejbie keâe
y(x, t) = 8.0 sin  0.5πx – 4πt – 
 4 y-efoMee ceW efJemLeeheve 1 m, lejbieowOÙe& 2πm nw leLee
peneB x keâe ceeve ceeršjeW ceW Deewj t keâe meskeâC[eW ceW nw~ Fme Fmekeâer DeeJe=efòe
1
Hz nw~ Fme lejbie kesâ efueÙes mener
lejbie keâer Ûeeue nesieer:- π
(a) 4π m/s (b) 0.5 π m/s meceerkeâjCe nesiee-
π y = sin (2πx + 2πt) (a)
(c) m/s (d) 8 m/s y = sin (x – 2t) (b)
4
y = sin (2πx – 2πt) (c)
AIPMT-2006
y = sin (10πx + 20πt) (d)
π
Ans. (d) : y(x, t) = 8.0 sin (0.5 πx – 4πt – ) NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
4
Ans. (b) : Given –
y = A sin (kx – ωt + φ)
Wavelength = 2π m , amplitude = 1m
k = 0.5π , ω = 4π,
1
2π frequency = Hz
k= = 0.5π ⇒ λ = 4 m π
λ
So, equation is, y = a sin (kx – ωt)
2π
ω= = 4π ⇒ T = 0.5s Here, a = amplitude
T ω = angular frequency
λ 4 k = spring constant
v= = = 8 m/s
T 0.5 t = time

Physics 293 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
So Ans. (a) Given:- Wave equation, y = 0.25sin(10πx–2πt)
 2π 1   2π  ∵ y = A sin (kx – ωt)
y = sin  .x − 2π× × t  Q k = 
 2π π   λ  (–) Ve sign → + Ve x direction
y = sin ( x − 2t ) By comparing –
A = 0.25
8. A wave in a string has an amplitude of 2 cm.
The wave travels in the +ve direction of x-axis k = 10π
with a speed of 128 m/s and it is noted that 5 ω = 2π
complete waves fit in 4 m length of the string. ∵ ω = 2πf
The equation describing the wave is
So 2π = 2πf
Skeâ [esjer ceW Ûeueleer lejbie keâe DeeÙeece 2 cm nw~ Ùen lejbie
⇒ f=1Hz
x-De#e keâer Oeve efoMee ceW 128 m/sec keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeue
jner nw Deewj Ùen heeÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ [esjer keâer 4m keâer 2π
& λ=
uecyeeF& ceW 5 hetjer lejbieW mecee peeleer nw~ lejbie metÛekeâ k
meceerkeâjCe nesiee- 2π
=
(a)y = (0.02)m sin (7.85x – 1005 t) 10π
(b)y = (0.02)m sin (7.85x + 1005 t) ⇒ λ = 0.2 m
(c)y = (0.02)m sin (15.7x – 2010 t)
So wave traveling along +Ve x direction with
(d)y = (0.02)m sin (15.7x + 2010 t)
AIMPT-2009 frequency 1 Hz and wavelength λ = 0.2 m
Ans. (a) : Given amplitude a = 2 cm = 0.02 m 10. Two points are located at a distance of 10 m
v = 128 m/s and 15 m from the source of oscillation. The
5λ = 4 period of oscillation is 0.05 sec and the velocity
λ = 4/5 = 0.8m of the wave is 300 m/s. What is the phase
∵ v = fλ difference between the oscillations of two
128 points?/oes efyevog oesueve œeesle ceW 10 m Deewj 15 m keâer
f= = 160 Hz
0.8 otjer hej efmLele nw~ oesueve keâe DeeJele&keâeue 0.05 meskeâC[ nw
ω = 2πf = 2π × 160 = 1005 Deewj lejbie keâe Jesie 300 ceeršj/meskeâC[ nwwQ~ Fve oes
ω 1005 efyevogDeeW kesâ oesueve ces keâueevlej nesiee?
k= = = 7.85
c 128
(a) π (b) π/6
Therefore y = a sin (kx – ωt)
y = 0.02 sin (7.85x – 1005t) (c) π/3 (d) 2π/3
9. The wave described by y = 0.25 sin (10 πx – AIPMT-2008
2πt), where x and y are in metres and t in Ans. (d) : Given :– x1 = 10 m
seconds, is a wave travelling along the – x2 = 15 m
y = 0.25 sin (10 πx – 2πt), meceerkeâjCe efpemeceW x Time period, T = 0.05 second
leLee y ceeršjeW ceW nw Deewj t meskeâC[eW ceW nw, Gme lejbie keâes Velocity (v) = 300 m/s
JÙeòeâ keâjlee nw efpemekeâe ieefleheLe nw :- 2π
(a) + ve x direction with frequency 1 Hz and Phase difference (∆φ) = λ × path difference.
wavelength λ = 0.2 m/ Oeveelcekeâ x efoMee ceW,
path difference (∆x) = x2 – x1
DeeJeefòe 1 Hz Deewj lejbie owOÙe& λ = 0.2 m nw~
= 15 – 10 = 5m
(b) –ve x direction with amplitude 0.25 m and
wavelength λ = 0.2 m ∵ v=f.λ
$e+Ceelcekeâ x efoMee ceW efpemekeâe DeeÙeece 0.25 ceeršj Deewj 1  1
300 = λ Q f = 
lejbieowOÙe& λ = 0.2 m nw~ T  T
(c) – ve x direction with frequency 1 Hz 1
$e+Ceelcekeâ x efoMee ceW Deewj DeeJeefòe 1 Hz nw~ 300 = ×λ
0.05
(d) + ve x direction with frequency π Hz and
λ = 15 m
wavelength λ = 0.2m/ Oeveelcekeâ x efoMee ceW,
2π 2
DeeJeefòe π Hz Deewj lejbieo&OÙe& λ = 0.2m nw~ ∴ ∆φ = ×5 = π
15 3
AIPMT-2008
Physics 294 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
11. The phase difference between two waves, Wave length, λ = 60m
represented by/efvecve meceerkeâjCeeW Éeje oes lejbieeW keâe Equation of wave along x-axis is y = A sin (ωt-kx)
ÛejCe Devlej oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw, ceW ueieYeie keâueevlej keäÙee Now, k = 2π
nesiee- λ
2π
y1 = 10–6 sin {100t + (x/50) + 0.5}m k=
60
–6  x  π
y2 = 10 cos{100t +  }m Where X is k=
 50  30
expressed in metres and t is expressed in 2π
seconds, is approximately : - Q ω=
T
peneB x keâes ceeršj ceW Deewj t keâes meskesâC[ JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee & v = vλ
peelee nw~ v 360
(a) 2.07 radians/2.07 jsef[Ùeve ⇒v= = = 6Hz
λ 60
(b) 0.5 radians/0.5 jsef[Ùeve So,
(c) 1.5 radians/1.5 jsef[Ùeve ω = 2π × 6
(d) 1.07 radians/1.07 jsef[Ùeve ω = 12π
AIPMT-2004 ∴ Equation of wave becomes-
 x   πx 
Ans. (d) : y1 = 10–6 sin 100t + + 0.5 m y = 0.2 sin  − + 12πt 
 50   30 
 x   x 
y2 = 10–6 cos 100t +  m y = 0.2sin  2π  6t –  
 50    60  
 x π 13. The equation of a wave is represented by : -
= 10–6 sin 100t + +  Skeâ lejbie keâer meceerkeâjCe efvecve nw
 50 2 
Phase difference = y2 – y1  x
y = 10–4 sin 100t −  m, then the velocity of
π  π   10 
Phase difference = − 0.5 Q = 1.571rad 
2  2  wave will be: –
= 1.07 rad  x
y = 10–4 sin 100t −  ceer nw, lees lejbie keâe Jesie
12. A wave travelling in positive X-direction with  10 
A = 0.2 m, velocity = 360 m/s and λ = 60 m. nesiee
Then correct expression for the wave is (a) 100 m/s (b) 4 m/s
Skeâ lejbie pees Oeveelcekeâ X-efoMee ceW ieceve keâj jner nw (c) 1000 m/s (d) 0.00 m/s
leLee efpemekeâe DeeÙeece A = 0.2 ceer., Jesie = 360 ceer/mes AIPMT-2001
Je lejbieowOÙe& λ = 60 ceer. nw lees lejbie keâer mener Ans. (c) : Given wave equation,
DeefYeJÙeòeâ keâjves Jeeuee JÙebpekeâ nw -  x
y = 10-4 sin 100t –  ...(i)
  x   10 
(a) y = 0.2 sin  2π  6t +  
  60   General wave equation, y = A Sin (ωt – kx) …(ii)
Comparing equation (i) & (ii)
  x 
(b) y = 0.2 sin  π  6t +   ω = 100
  60  
1
  x  k=
(c) y = 0.2sin  2π  6t −   10
  60   Q Velocity = Frequency × wavelength
  x  ω = 2πv
(d) y = 0.2 sin  π  6t −  
  60   100 = 2πv
AIPMT-2002 ⇒ v = 100
Ans. (c) : Given data- 2π
Amplitude, A = 0.2m 2π 1
& k= =
m λ 10
Velocity, v = 360
s ⇒ λ = 2π × 10
Physics 295 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Therefore, 15. A standing wave having 3 nodes and 2
v=v×λ antinodes is formed between 1.21 Å distance
100 m then the wavelength is/efkeâmeer DeØeieeceer lejbie
= × 2π ×10 Øeefle™he ceW leerve efvemhebo leLee 2 Øemhebo kesâ ceOÙe otjer
2π s
m 1.21 Å nw lees lejbieowOÙe& λ = nesiee–
v = 1000
s (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
14. For a wave y = y0sin ( ωt – kx), for what value of (c) 0.605 Å (d) 4.84 Å
λ is the maximum particle velocity equal to AIPMT-1998
two times the wave velocity/Ùeefo DeefOekeâlece keâCe Ans. (a) : The given standing wave has 2 segments–
Jesie, lejbie Jesie keâe ogiegvee nw, lees meceerkeâjCe y = y0sin the given standing wave has shown in the fig.–
( ωt – kx) ceW λ keâe ceeve nesiee–
(a) πy0 (b) 2πy0
(c) πy0/2 (d) 4πy0
AIPMT-1998 λ
As length of one loop or segment is , so length of 2
Ans. (a) : The given wave equation is- 2
y = y0 sin ( ωt − kx ) λ
segments is 2  
2π 2
y = y 0 sin ( vt − x ) … (i) λ
λ ∴ 2 = 1.21Aº
In the wave equation 'v' is the particle velocity 2
differentiating equation (i) w.r.t time, we get - λ = 1.21 Aº
dy 2πv 2π 16. The equation of a sound wave is y = 0.0015 sin
u= = y0 cos ( vt − x )
dt λ λ (62.4x + 3161t).
2 πv The wavelength of this wave is
Maximum particle velocity, u max = y 0 Skeâ OJeefve lejbie keâe meceerkeâjCe y = 0.0015 sin (62.4x
λ
Now it is given that, + 3161t) nw~ Fmekeâer lebjieowIÙe& nesieer-
Maximum particle velocity = 2×wave velocity (a) 0.3 unit/0.3 FkeâeF&
2πv 0.2 unit/0.2 FkeâeF&
Or y 0 = 2v (b)
λ
(c) 0.1 unit/0.1 FkeâeF&
⇒ λ = y0 π (d) cannot be calculated/ieCevee veneR keâer pee mekeâleer
Alternative solution:- AIPMT-1996
y = y0 sin(ωt - kx) Ans. (c) : Given that:
dy
= y 0 ω cos ( ωt − kx ) Equation: y = 0.0015 sin (62.4x + 3161t) ....... (1)
dt We know that, equation of progressive harmonic wave-
ω y = a sin (ωt + kx) .......(2)
we know that, vwave =
k Where, a is amplitude, t is time, k is wave number, ω is
vparticle = y0 ω cos (ωt - kx) angular frequency.
⇒ vmax = y0 ω Comparing equation (1) and (2), we get
According to question- a = 0.0015
vmax= 2vwave ω = 3161
 2ω  k = 62.4
⇒ y0 ω =  
 k  2π
k=
 2  λ
k = 
y
 0 2π 2π
λ= =
 2π  k 62.4
k = 
 λ  2 × 3.14 6.28
 2π  = = = 0.1 unit
λ=  62.4 62.4
 k 
17. Which one of the following represents a wave?
λ = πy0 efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee meceerkeâjCe Skeâ lejbie keâes ØeoefMe&le
Hence option (a) is correct. keâjlee nQ?
Physics 296 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) y = Asin (ωt – kx) Ans. (b) : Given,
(b) y = Acos2(at – bx +c)   t x  π
(c) y = Asinkx y = 4sin  π  −  +  ...(i)
 5 9  6
(d) y = Asinωt.
The general equation of progressive wave,
AIPMT-1994
y = Asin(ωt – kx + φ) ....(ii)
Ans. (a) : An oscillation that travels through space
Comparing equation (i) and (ii), we get
accompanied by the transfer of energy is called a wave.
π π π
• The general form of the sinusoidal wave is y(x, t) = A ω= , k = , φ =
sin (ωt – kx) 5 9 6
Amplitude A = 4cm
Where, A is amplitude, ω is angular frequency, k is
wave number. We know that, propagation constant,
2π π
18. The frequency of sinusoidal wave y = 0.40cos k= =
[2000 t + 0.80x] would be/Skeâ y = 0.40cos [2000 λ 9
t + 0.80x] pÙeelejbie keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer- λ = 18cm
ω π/5
(a) 10000π Hz/10000π nšd&pe Velocity, v = =
k π/9
(b) 2000 Hz/2000 nšd&pe
v = 1.8cm/s
(c) 20 Hz/20 nšd&pe And the frequency
(d) 1000/π Hz/1000/π nšd&pe ω π/5 1
f= = = Hz
AIPMT-1992 2 π 2π 10
Ans. (d) : Given that, From above the correct option is (b)
y = 0.40 cos (2000 t + 0.80x) ......(i) 20. Standing waves are produced in 10 m long
The general form of a sinusoidal wave is, stretched string. If the string vibrates in 5
y = A cos (ωt + φ) ........(ii) segments and wave velocity is 20 m/s, the
Where, ω is angular frequency frequency is
A is amplitude 10 m uecyes leefvele [esjer ceW DeØeieeceer lejbieW GlheVe nesleer
φ = phase nQ~ Ùeefo [esjer GmeceW 5 KeC[eW ceW kebâheve keâjleer nw Deewj
Comparing equation (i) and (ii), we get lejbie Jesie 20 m/s nw, lees DeeJe=efòe nw:
A = 0.40 (a) 5 Hz (b) 10 Hz
ω = 2000 (c) 2 Hz (d) 4 Hz
We know that, ω = 2πd AIPMT-1997
Where d is frequency Ans. (a) : Given that,
2000 = 2 π d Length of string (L) = 10m
1000 Number of segments = 5
d= Hz Velocity of sound = 20m/sec
π
Now, wavelength of string is given by,
19. Equation of progressive wave is given by y =
n
  t x  π L = ×λ
4sin  π  –  +  where y, x are in cm and t 2
 5 9  6 Where, n is number of segments.
is in seconds. Then which of the following is 5
correct? So, L = ×λ
2
Skeâ Øeieeceer lejbie efvecve meceerkeâjCe Éeje ØeoefMe&le keâer
10 × 2
peeleer nw: Wavelength (λ) = = 4m
5
  t x  π We know that,
y = 4sin  π  –  +  , peneB y, x mesceer leLee t
 5 9  6 velocity of sound = frequency × wavelength (λ)
meskesâC[ ceW nw lees efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mee mener nw 20 = frequency × 4
(a) v = 50 cm/v = 50 mesceer frequency = 5 Hz
(b) λ = 18 cm/λ = 18 mesceer 21. A wave of frequency 100 Hz travels along a
string towards its fixed end. When this wave
(c) a = 0.04 cm/ a = 0.04 mesceer
travels back after reflection, a node is formed
(d) f = 50 Hz/f = 50 nšdpe& at a distance of 10 cm from the fixed end. The
AIPMT-1988 speed of the wave (incident and reflected) is
Physics 297 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ efKebÛes leej ceW yeveer lejbie keâer DeeJe=efòe 100 nšdpe& nw,
peyeefkeâ Jen ÂÌ{ efmejs keâer Deesj Ûeueleer nw~ peye Ùes lejbie 14.3 The Principle of Superposition
hejeJele&ve kesâ yeeo Jeeheme Deeleer nw lees ÂÌ{ efmejs mes 10 mesceer. of Waves & Reflection of
otjer hej Skeâ vees[ yeveleer nw~ lejbie Jesie keâe ceeve nesiee~ Waves
(a) 20 m/s/20 ceer/meskeâC[ (b) 40 m/s/40 ceer/meskeâC[
(c) 5 m/s/5 ceer/meskeâC[ (d) 10 m/s/10 ceer/meskeâC[ 23. Two sources of sound placed closed to each
AIPMT-1994 other, are emitting progressive waves given by
Ans. (a) : Given that, y1 = 4 sin 600 πt and y2 = 5 sin 608πt
frequency (f) = 100 Hz An observer located near these two sources
ratio sound will hear:
Skeâ otmejs kesâ efvekeâš efmLele OJeefve kesâ oes œeesle efvecve
Øekeâej efve™efhele Øeieeceer lejbieW Glmeefpe&le keâj jns nw~
y1 = 4 sin 600 πt and y2 = 5 sin 608πt
As fixed end is a node, therefore distance between two Fve oesveeW œeesleeW kesâ efvekeâš efmLele Skeâ ßeeslee keâes megveeF&
consecutive nodes = 10 cm osiee-
λ
= 10cm (a) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1
2 between waxing and waning
λ = 20 cm where λ is wavelength 8 efJemhevo Øeefle meskebâ[ leLee Jewefkeämebie Deewj Jewefvebie leer›elee
λ = 0.2 m
ceW 81 : 1 keâe Devegheele nesiee~
We know that, velocity of sound (v) = frequency (f) ×
wavelength (λ) (b) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1
v = 100 × 0.2 between waxing and waning
= 20 m/sec 4 efJemhevo Øeefle meskebâ[ leLee Jewefkeämebie Deewj Jewefvebie leer›elee
22. A stationary wave is represented by y = a sin keâe Devegheele 81 : 1 keâe Devegheele nesiee~
(100t)cos(0.01x), where y and A are in (c) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16
millimetres, t is in seconds and x is in metres. between waxing and waning
The velocity of the wave is 4 efJemhevo Øeefle meskebâ[ leLee Jewefkeämebie Deewj Jewefvebie leer›elee
Skeâ mLeeÙeer lejbie y = a sin (100t)cos(0.01x) mes cebs Devegheele 25 : 16 nesiee~
ØeoefMe&le keâer peeleer nw~ peneB y leLee A efceceer ceW, t meskeâC[ (d) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16
ceW leLee x ceer. ceW nw lees lejbie keâe Jesie nesiee- between waxing and waning
(a) 104 m/s/104 ceer/meskeâC[ 8 efJemhevo Øeefle meskebâ[ leLee Jewefkeämebie Deewj Jewefvebie leer›elee
(b) not derivable/Ghejesòeâ DeeBkeâÌ[eW mes Øeehle veneR efkeâÙee ceW Devegheele 25 : 16 nesiee~
pee mekeâlee AIPMT (Screening)-2012
(c) 1 m/s/1 ceer/meskeâC[ Ans. (b) : General equation of wave
(d) 102 m/s/102 ceer/meskeâC[ ⇒ y = a sin ωt = a sin 2π ft –––––– (1)
AIPMT-1994 Given equation of wave,
Ans. (a) : Given that, y1 = 4 sin 600 πt = 4 sin 2π (300)t
y = A sin (100 t) cos (0.01 x) ......(i) y2 = 5 sin 608 πt = 5 sin 2π (304) t
Where, y and A are in millimeters, t is in seconds, x is Compare above two equation with (1)
in meters f1 = 300 Hz & f2 = 304 Hz
The general form of stationary wave equation is Now, number of beats = 304 - 300 = 4 beats/sec
y = A sin (ωt) cos (kx) ...... (ii) 2
I m ax  a1 + a 2 
Where, A is amplitude Intensity ratio = =  
I min  a1 − a 2 
ω is angular frequency
k is the propagation constant, Where, a1 = Amplitude of wave 1
t is time a2 = Amplitude of wave 2
2
Now comparing equation (i) and (ii), we get I m ax  4 + 5 
= 
ω = 100 I m in  4 − 5 
k = 0.01
I max
ω 100 = 81:1
Velocity of the wave (v) = = = 104 m / sec I min
k 0.01
Physics 298 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
24. Two waves are represented by the equations 26. A point source emits sound equally in all
y1 = a sin ( ωt + kx + 0.57) m and y2 = a cos directions in a non-absorbing medium. Two
( ωt + kx)m, where x is in meter and t in second points P and Q are at distance of 2m and 3m
the phase difference between them is : respectively from the source. The ratio of the
oes lejbieeW keâes ›eâceMe: y1 = a sin ( ωt + kx + 0.57) m intensities of the waves at P and Q is –
leLee y2 = a cos (ωt + kx)m, mes efve™efhele efkeâÙee peelee iewj-DeJeMees<ekeâ ceeOÙece ceW Skeâ efyevogkeâ Œeesle meYeer
nw, peneB x ceeršj ceW Deewj t meskeâC[ ceW nw, lees oesveeW lejbieeW efoMeeDeeW ceW meceeve ™he mes OJeefve keâe mebÛeej keâj jne nw~
kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej nw : Œeesle kesâ ›eâceevegmeej 2m Deewj 3m keâer otjer hej
(a) 0.57 radian/0.57 jsef[Ùeve oes efyevogDeeW P Deewj Q hej lejbieeW keâer leer›elee keâe Devegheele
(b) 1 radian/1 jsef[Ùeve
nesiee-
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 1.25 radian/1.25 jsef[Ùeve
(c) 9 : 4 (d) 4 : 9
(d) 1.57 radian/1.57 jsef[Ùeve
AIPMT-2005
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Ans. (c) :
Ans. (b) : Given – y1 = a sin (ωt + kx + 0.57)m
y2 = a cos (ωt + kx)m
Where x is in meter and t in sec
we can write as-
P
π Intensity of sound I=
y2 = asin (ωt + kx + ) 4 πr 2
2
P = Power
π
So phase difference of y1 & y2 = - 0.57 r = distance between source and the point
2
1
Phase difference = 1.57 – 0.57 = 1 radian ⇒ I∝ 2
r
 π 
Q = 1.571rad  I1  r2 
2
 2  = 
25. Two periodic waves of intensities I1 and I2 pass I 2  r1 
through a region at the same time in the same Here,
direction. The sum of the maximum and r1 = 2m , r2 = 3m
minimum intensities is –
Substituting the values we have,
I1 Deewj I2 leer›eleeDeeW keâer oes DeeJeleea lejbieW Skeâ mLeeve mes 2
I1  3  9
Skeâ ner meceÙe Skeâ ner efoMee ceW iegpejleer nw~ DeefOekeâlece =  =
Deewj vÙetvelece leer›eleeDeeW keâe peesÌ[ nesiee:- I2  2  4
27. Two waves having equation
( )
2
(a) I1 − I2 (b) 2(I1 + I2) oes lejbieeW keâer meceerkeâjCe efvecve nw
( ) x1 = a sin(ωt + φ1)
2
(c) I1 + I2 (d) I1 + I 2
x2 = a sin(ωt + φ2)
AIPMT-2008 If in the resultant wave the frequency and
Ans. (b) Intensities of the first wave = I1 amplitude remains equals to amplitude of
Intensities of the second wave = I2 superimposing waves. Then phase difference
IR = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos δ between them : -
Where δ is the phase difference between the waves.
Ùeefo oesveeW lejbieeW kesâ DeOÙeejesheCe mes Øeehle heefjCeeceer lejbie
For maximum intensity cos δ = 1
keâe DeeÙeece leLee DeeJe=efòe, DeOÙeejesefhele nesves Jeeueer lejbieeW
kesâ meceeve nw, lees Gvekesâ ceOÙe keâueevlej nesiee-
( )
2
Imax = I1 + I2
π 2π
(a) (b)
For minimum intensity cos δ = – I 6 3

( ) π π
2
Imin = I1 − I2 = I1 + I2 -2 I1I 2 (c) (d)
4 3
( ) ( )
2 2
∴ Imax + Imin = I1 + I2 + I1 − I2 AIPMT-2001
Ans. (b) : Given equation of wave-
= I1 + I 2 + 2 I1 I2 + I1 + I 2 − 2 I1 I2 x1 = a sin(ωt + φ1)
= 2(I1 + I2) x2 = a sin(ωt + φ2)

Physics 299 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, xnet = x1 + x2 Ans. (a): Given Ratio of intensities of two waves.
= a sin (ωt + φ1) + a sin (ωt + φ2) I1 4
=
Applying. I2 1
 A+B  A –B We know that formula of Intensity
sin A + sin B = 2 sin   cos  
 2   2  I ∝ A2
 φ +φ   φ1 – φ2  I1 A12
xnet = 2a sin ωt +  1 2 ⇒ =
  c os  2  I 2 A2 2
  2   
φ –φ   φ +φ  A1
=
I1
=
4
= 2a cos  1 2  sin  ω t + 1 2 
 2   2  A2 I2 1
Amplitude of Resultant wave– A1 2
=
φ –φ  A2 1
2a cos  1 2  = a
 2  The ratio of the Amplitudes of the two waves is 2:1
φ –φ  1
⇒ cos  1 2 = 14.4 Sound and Beats
 2  2
φ1 – φ2 π 30. The 4th overtone of a closed organ pipe is same
⇒ =
2 3 as that of 3rd overtone of open pipe. The ratio
of the length of the closed pipe to the length of
2π
⇒ φ1 − φ2 = the open pipe is.
3 Skeâ yebo Dee@ie&ve heeFhe keâe ÛeewLee DeefOemJej Skeâ Kegues
28. The equations of two waves given as x = a heeFhe kesâ leermejs DeefOemJej kesâ meceeve neslee nw ~ yebo heeFhe
cos(ωt + δ) and y = a cos (ωt + α), Where δ keâer uebyeeF& keâe Kegues heeFhe keâer uebyeeF& mes Devegheele nw:
= α + π/2, then resultant wave represent (a) 9:8 (b) 7:9
oes lejbieeW keâer meceerkeâjCe x = a cos (ωt + δ) leLee y = (c) 8:9 (d) 9:7
a cos (ωt + α) nw peneB δ = α + π/2 nw lees heefjCeeceer RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
lejbie ØeoefMe&le keâjsieer – Ans. (a) :
Fourth overtone for closed organ pipe = 9th harmonic
(a) a circle (c.w)/Skeâ Je=òe (oef#eCeeJele&) Third overtone for open organ pipe = 4th harmonic
(b) a circle (a.c.w)/Skeâ Je=òe (JeeceeJele&) According to the question-
(c) an ellipse (c.w)/Skeâ oerIe&Je=òe (oef#eCeeJele&) Fourth overtone for closed organ pipe = 3rd overtone for
(d) an ellipse (a.c.w)/Skeâ oerIe&Je=òe (JeeceeJele&) open organ pipe
AIPMT-2000  V  V 
9  = 4 
Ans. (b) : Given equation of two waves-  4l c   2lo 
π
x = a cos (ωt + δ) & δ = α + lC 9
2 =
lO 8
y = a cos (ωt + α) ...(i)
π 31. The ratio of frequencies of fundamental
∴ x = a cos (ωt + α + ) = – a sin (ωt + α) ...(ii) harmonic produced by an open pipe to that of
2
closed pipe having the same length is :
Squaring (i) and (ii), adding
2 2 2 meceeve uecyeeF& kesâ Skeâ Kegues heeFhe leLee yevo heeFhe Éeje
x +y =a
Above equation represent the equation of circle, & -ve GlheVe cetue iegCeeJe=efòe keâer DeeJe=efòeÙeeW keâe Devegheele nw :
n (a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
sign of eq (ii) shows anti-clockwise direction.
29. Ratio of intensities of two waves are given by 4 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 3
: 1. Then ratio of the amplitudes of the two NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
waves is Ans. (c) : Fundamental frequency in open organ pipe,
oes lejbieeW keâer leer›elee keâe Devegheele 4 : 1 nw~ Fvekesâ v
f1 =
DeeÙeeceeW keâe Devegheele nesiee: 2l
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 Fundamental frequency in closed pipe,
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 v
f2 =
AIPMT-1991 4l

Physics 300 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
f1 v 4l ν1 = 120 Hz
Now, = ×
f 2 2l v Q The given new frequency ν2 = 180 Hz.
Now, as we known that νλ = const
f1 2
= ν 1λ 1 = ν 2λ 2
f2 1
120×180 = 180 × λ2 ⇒ λ2 = 120 cm
f1 : f 2 :: 2 :1 The midpoint of this would be node (where the strings
32. An organ pipe filled with a gas at 27°C needs to be plucked)
resonates at 400 Hz in its fundamental mode. If The string needs to be plucked at 60 cm. [Ql 2 = λ 2 / 2]
it is filled with the same gas at 90°C, the
resonance frequency at the same mode will be: 34. In a guitar, two strings A and B made of same
Skeâ Devegveeo veueer 27°C hej iewme mes Yejer nw SJeb Deheveer material are slightly out of tune and produce
beats of frequency 6 Hz. When tension in B is
cetue efyeOee (hebâ[eceWšue cees[) ceW 400 Hz hej Devegveeo slightly decreased, the beat frequency increases
keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo Fmekeâes meceeve iewme mes 90°C hej Yeje peeS to 7 Hz. If the frequency of A is 530 Hz, the
lees meceeve cees[ kesâ efueS Fmekeâer Devegveeoer DeeJe=efòe nesieer: original frequency of B will be
(a) 420 Hz (b) 440 Hz efkeâmeer efiešej ceW meceeve heoeLe& keâer yeveer oes [esefjÙeeW A
(c) 484 Hz (d) 512 Hz Deewj B kesâ mJej nukesâ mes cesue veneR Kee jns nQ Deewj 6 Hz
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 DeeJe=efòe kesâ efJemhevo GlheVe keâj jns nQ~ peye B ceW leveeJe
Ans. (b) : We know that the frequency is equal to - keâes kegâÚ keâce keâj efoÙee peelee nw, lees efJemhevo DeeJe=efòe
v yeÌ{keâj 7 Hz nes peeleer nw~ Ùeefo A keâer DeeJe=efòe 530 Hz
f= i.e. f ∝ v ...(i)
λ nw, lees B keâer cetue DeeJe=efòe nw:
velocity of sound in a gas is given by –
(a) 524 Hz (b) 536 Hz
γRT (c) 537 Hz (d) 523 Hz
v=
M NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
v∝ T ...(ii) Ans. (a) : Given that: nA = 530Hz
from eqn (i) and eqn (ii) we get – nB= N (suppose)
f∝ T ∴ n A − n B = 6 Hz

f1 T n A − n B = ±6 Hz
⇒ = 1
f2 T2 nB =530 ± 6
So, nB = 536 or 524
400 273 + 27 300 1 Now, given that when Tension is decrease in B.
= = =
f2 273 + 90 363 1.1 n∝ T
⇒ f 2 = 440Hz ∴ nB ↓
33. The length of the string of a musical instrument As final beat frequency is 7 Hz.
is 90 cm and has a fundamental frequency of So, frequency of B is 524 Hz
120 Hz. Where should it be pressed to produce 35. A tuning fork with frequency 800 Hz produces
fundamental frequency of 180 Hz? resonance in a resonance column tube with
efkeâmeer mebieerle JeeÅe keâer [esjer keâer uebyeeF& 90cm leLee upper end open and lower end, closed by water
Gmekeâer cetue DeeJe=efòe 120 Hz nw~ Fmes keâneB hej oyeeÙee surface. Successive resonance are observed at
peevee ÛeeefnS leeefkeâ 180 Hz cetue DeeJe=efòe GlheVe nes? lengths 9.75 cm, 31.25 cm and 52.75 cm. The
speed of sound in air is,
(a) 80 cm (b) 75 cm
(c) 60 cm (d) 45 cm 800 Hz DeeJe=efòe keâe keâesF& mJeefj$e efÉYegpe efkeâmeer Devegveeo
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II veef uekeâe efpemekeâe Thejer efmeje Keguee Deewj efveÛeuee efmeje
Ans. (c) : Given data: peue kesâ he=‰ Éeje yevo nQ, ceW Devegveeo GlheVe keâjlee nw~
Length of string = 90 cm ›eâceeiele DevegveeoeW keâe Øes#eCe 9.75 cm, 31.25 cm Deewj
Fundamental frequency = 120 Hz. 52.75 cm uecyeeFÙeeW hej efkeâÙee ieÙee nQ~ JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve
The velocity of travelling wave remains constant. keâer Ûeeue nw
Initially for fundamental mode, length of string is half (a) 172 m/s (b) 500 m/s
the wavelength.
(c) 156 m/s (d) 344 m/s
λ1 = 180 cm [Qλ / 2 = 90] NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Physics 301 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d) : Given that: Ans. (b) Given : l 1 = 20 cm = 0.2 m
f = 800 Hz l1 = 9.75 cm l2 = 31.25 cm l3 = l 2 = 73 cm = 0.73 m
52.75cm f = 320 Hz
for the tube at the open end resonance frequencies are λ
For first resonance, l1 =
nv 4
odd integer is a positive
4l 3λ
Now as the same tuning fork produces successive For second resonance, l 2 =
4
resonance 3λ λ
nv l 2 − l1 = −
f= 4 4
4l1 ⇒ λ = 2 ( l 2 − l1 )
nv
l1 = ––– (1) As, velocity of sound wave,
4f v = fλ
f=
( n + 2) v v = f  2 ( l 2 − l1 ) 
4l 2
= 320  2 × ( 0.73 − 0.20 ) 
l2 =
( n + 2) v ––– (II) = 2 × 320 × 0.53
4f = 339.2m / s
f=
( n + 4) v 37. The fundamental frequency in an open organ
4l 3 pipe is equal to the third harmonic of a closed
organ pipe. If the length of the closed organ pipe
l3 =
(n + 4) v ––– (III) is 20 cm, the length of the open organ pipe is /
4f efkeâmeer Kegues Dee@ie&ve heeFhe keâer cetue DeeJe=efòe efkeâmeer yevo
2v Dee@ie&ve heeFhe kesâ le=leerÙe iegCeeJe=efòe (mebveeoer) keâer DeeJe=efòe kesâ
l3 – l2 = l2 – l1 =
4f meceeve nw~ Ùeefo yevo Dee@ie&ve heeFhe keâer uecyeeF& 20 cm nw,
2v lees Kegues Dee@ie&ve heeFhe keâer uecyeeF& nesieer-
l2 – l1 =
4f (a) 13.2 cm (b) 8 cm
2× v (c) 16 cm (d) 12.5 cm
( 31.25 − 9.75) = NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
4 × 800
Ans. (a) : Let, length of open organ pipe = l
2× v
21.50 × 10−2 = length of closed organ pipe = l '
4 × 800 Fundamental frequency for open organ pipe is
21.50 ×10−2 × 4 × 800 v
v= = 344 m / s f1 =
2 2l
The frequency for third harmonic for closed organ pipe
36. A tuning fork is used to produce resonance in a
3v
glass tube. The length of the air column in this is, f3 =
tube can be adjusted by a variable piston. At 4l '
room temperature of 27ºC two successive But, it is given that both are equal
resonances are produced at 20 cm and 73 cm of v 3v
So, =
column length. If the frequency of the tuning 2l 4l '
fork is 320 Hz, the velocity of sound in air at 2l '
27ºC is/efkeâmeer mJeefj$e efÉYegpe keâe GheÙeesie efkeâmeer Ssmeer l=
3
keâeBÛe keâer veefuekeâe ceW Devegveeo GlheVe keâjves kesâ efueS 2 × 20
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw, efpemeceW JeeÙeg mlecYe keâer uecyeeF& keâes l= = 13.33cm
3
heefjJeleea efhemšve Éeje meceeÙeesefpele efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw~ 38. The two nearest harmonics of a tube closed at
270C keâ#e leehe hej mlecYe keâer uecyeeF& 20 cm Deewj 73 one end and open at other end are 220 Hz and
cm nesves hej ›eâceeiele Devegveeo GlheVe nesles nQ~ Ùeefo 260 Hz. What is the fundamental frequency of
mJeefj$e keâer DeeJe=efòe 320 Hz nw, lees JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve keâe the system?
270C hej Jesie nw
Skeâ veefuekeâe keâe Skeâ efmeje yevo nw Deewj otmeje efmeje
Keguee nw~ Fmekesâ oes efvekeâšmLe mebveeoer mJejeW keâer
(a) 330 m/s (b) 339 m/s
(c) 300 m/s (d) 350 m/s DeeJe=efòeÙeeB ›eâceMe: 220 Hz leLee 260 Hz nQ lees Fme
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 efvekeâeÙe keâer cetue DeeJe=efòe efkeâleveer nesieer?
Physics 302 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 10 Hz (b) 20 Hz f f
(c) 30 Hz (d) 40 Hz
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Ans. (b) : Two successive frequencies of closed pipe
nv
= 220 .........(i)
4l L0
L
(n + 2)v
= 260 .......(ii)
4l
Dividing (ii)/(i), we get
(n + 2) 260
=
n 220
(n + 2) 13 40. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
= frequencies (n-1), n, (n + 1). They superimpose
n 11 to give beats. The number of beats produced
11n + 22 = 13n per second will be.
2n = 22 meceeve DeeÙeece keâer leerve OJeefve lejbieeW keâer DeeJe=efòeÙeeB
n = 11 ›eâceMe: (n-1), n, (n + 1) nQ~ Fvekesâ DeOÙeejesheCe mes
Putting n in equation (i) we get - efJemhevo GlheVe nesles nQ~ Øeefle meskeâC[ GlheVe efJemhevoeW keâer
11× v mebKÙee nesieer -
= 220
4l (a) 1 (b) 4
v (c) 3 (d) 2
= 20 Hz
4l NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
So fundamental frequency is = 20Hz Ans. (d) : Beats oscillate to and fro between zero and
39. The second overtone of an open organ pipe has maximum amplitude. Beats per second is the difference
the same frequency as the first overtone of a between frequencies. Since the given frequencies are
closed pipe L meter long. The length of the consecutive we can directly take the difference between
open pipe will be. Ist and 3rd frequency.
efkeâmeer Kegues Deeie&ve heeFhe kesâ efÉleerÙe DeefOemJejkeâ keâer Given : f1 = n – 1, f2 = n, f3 = n + 1
DeeJe=efòe L ceeršj uecyes yevo heeFhe kesâ ØeLece DeefOemJejkeâ
keâer DeeJe=efòe kesâ yejeyej nw ~ Kegues heeFhe keâer uecyeeF&
nesieer-
(a) L (b) 2L
Maximum number of beats will be
(c) L/2 (d) 4L
N = f3 – f1
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
= (n + 1) – ( n – 1)
Ans. (b) : For 2nd overtone (third harmonic) of an open =n+1–n+1
3v N = 2 beats / s.
organ pipe (f3) =
2L0 41. A string is stretched between fixed points
3v separated by 75.0 cm. It is observed to have
For Ist overtone of a closed organ pipe (f2) = resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz.
4L
There are no other resonant frequencies
Where,
between these two. The lowest resonant
f3= frequency of second overtone of a open organ pipe frequency for this string is/Skeâ [esjer oes efmLej
f2 = frequency of first overtone of a closed organ pipe efyevogDeeW kesâ yeerÛe efKeÛeer nw~ Fve efyevogDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer
L = length of closed organ pipe
otjer 75.0 mesceer. nw~ Fme [esjer keâer ose Devegveeo-
L0 = length of open organ pipe = ?
DeeJe=efòeÙeeB 420 Hz leLee 315 Hz nw~ Fve oesveeW kesâ
according to question
f3 = f2
yeer Ûe kesâ keâesF& DevÙe Devegveeo-DeeJe=efòe veneR nw~ lees, Fme
[esjer kesâ efueÙes vÙetvelece Devegveeo-DeeJe=efòe nw :
3v 3v
= (a) 105 Hz (b) 155 Hz
2L0 4L
(c) 205 Hz (d) 10.5 Hz
L0 = 2L AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Physics 303 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Given f1 = 420 Hz 1 T
f2 = 315 Hz L=
2n µ
l = 75 cm
If n1,n2 and n3 are the frequency
y of length
le l1, l2, and l3
Lowest resonant frequency
respectively.
nv
= 315 Hz –––– (1) 1 T
2l so, l1 =
( n + 1) v 2n1 µ
= 420 Hz –––– (2)
2l 1 T
l2 =
Divide eq (2) by (1) 2n 2 µ
( n + 1) v 1 T
2l 420 l3 =
⇒ = 2n 3 µ
nv 315
2l Put the value of l1, l2, and l3 in equation
equati (i)
n + 1 28 1 T 1 T 1 T 1 T
= = + +
n 21 2n µ 2n1 µ 2n 2 µ 2n 3 µ
21n + 21 = 28n 1 1 1 1
7n = 21 = + +
n n1 n 2 n 3
n=3
f 315 43. An air column, closed att one end and open at
flowest = 2 = = 105 Hz the other, resonates withth a tuning
t fork when
n 3 the smallest length of thee column
colu is 50 cm. The
42. If n1, n2 and n3 are the fundamen damental frequencies next larger length of the column
co resonating
of three segments into which ch a sstring is divided, with the same tuning fork k is:
then the original fundamental ental frequency n of Skeâ efmejs hej yevo leLee otmejs efmejs hej Keguee keâesF& JeeÙeg
the string is given by:/Ùeefo efkeâm
eâmeer jmmeer keâes leerve mlecYe efkeâmeer mJeefj$e efÉYegpe kesâ meeLe
meeL Gme meceÙe Devegveeo
Keb[es ceW efJeYeeefpele keâjves hej Gve Keb[eW keâer cetue keâjlee nw peye Fme JeeÙeg mlecYe keâer keâce mes keâce uecyeeF&
DeeJe=efòeÙeeb ›eâceMe: n1, n2 Deewj n3 neW lees, Fme jmmeer keâer 50 mesceer. nesleer nw~ Fmeer mJeefj$e efÉYeg
Y pe kesâ meeLe Devegveeo
ØeejbefYekeâ cetue DeeJe=efòe n kesâ efueS mebyeebOe nesiee:-
keâjves Jeeueer mlecYe keâer Deieueer yeÌ[ere uecyeeF& nw-
1 1 1 1
(a) = + + (a) 200 cm (b) 66.7
n n1 n 2 n 3 (c) 100 cm (d) 150 cm
1 1 1 1 NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
(b) = + +
n n1 n2 n3 Ans. (d) : First harmonic length,

(c) n = n 1 + n 2 + n 3
(d) n =n1+n2+n3
AIP
AIPMT-06.05.2014
AIPMT
MT (S
(Screening)-2012
λ
AIPMT-2000 = 50cm
4
Ans. (a) : 1 T
Q n= λ = 200 cm
2L µ 3rd Harmonic length,
where, n = fundamental frequency
L = Length of string
T = String tension
µ = Linear density or masss per uunit length.
λ λ 3λ
+ =
2 4 4
3 × 200
Total length of string =
4
l = l1 + l2 + l3 ........ (i)
= 150 cm
Q n=
1 T The 3rd harmonic length represents
ents next
n larger length.
2L µ Hence, correct answer is option (d).

Physics 304 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
44. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ ∴ The frequency below 1250 are 100, 300, 500, 700,
pipe of length 20 cm is equal to the second 900 and 1100.
overtone of an organ pipe open at both the Thus, the number of possible natural oscillations is 6.
ends. The length of organ pipe open at both the 46. A source of unknown frequency gives 4 beats/s,
ends is:- /20 cm uecyes efkeâmeer yevo Deeie&ve heeFhe when sounded with a source of known
(veefuekeâe) keâer cetue DeeJe=efle, oesveeW efmejeW hej Kegueer frequency 250 Hz, The second harmonic of the
efkeâmeer veefuekeâe kesâ efÉleerÙe DeefOemJejkeâ keâer DeeJe=efòe kesâ source of unknown frequency gives five beats
yejeyej nw~ lees, Fme Kegueer veefuekeâe keâer uecyeeF& nw:- per second, when sounded with a source of
frequency 513 Hz, The unknown frequency is
(a) 100 cm (b) 120 cm
De%eele DeeJe=efòe keâe Skeâ Œeesle, 250 Hz DeeJe=efòe kesâ
(c) 140 cm (d) 80 cm
AIPMT-03.05.2015 efkeâmeer DevÙe Œeesle kesâ meeLe Øeefle meskeâC[ 4 efJemhevo
Ans. (b): For closed organ pipe, fundamental frequency GlheVe keâjlee nw~ De%eele DeeJe=efòe keâe otmeje mebveeoer
is given by (nejceesefvekeâ), 513 Hz DeeJe=efòe kesâ Œeesle kesâ meeLe 5
v efJemhevo Øeefle meskebâ[ GlheVe keâjlee nw~ lees, De%eele
νc =
4l DeeJe=efòe nw-
For open organ pipe, fundamental frequency is given by (a) 260 Hz (b) 254 Hz
v (c) 246 Hz (d) 240 Hz
ν0 =
2l' NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
2nd overtone of open organ pipe Ans. (b) : For the first harmonic, the beat frequency = 4
3v Frequency of source f = 250 Hz
ν ' = 3v0 ; ν ' =
2l 4 = f − 250
According to question, If we consider f > 250
ν c = v' f – 250 = 4
v 3v f = 254 .......(1)
= Then for the second harmonic, the beat frequency = 5
4l 2l '
Source frequency = 513 Hz
l ' = 6l
5 = 2f − 513
Here, l = 20cm, l = ?
'

2f = 518
l ' = 6 × 20 = 120 cm.
f = 259Hz .......(2)
45. The number of possible natural oscillations of This is different from the result first
air column in a pipe closed at one end of length
Now if we consider 513 > 2f
85 cm whose frequencies lie below 1250 Hz are:
513 – 2f = 5
(velocity of sound = 340 ms-1)
2f = 508
Ùeefo JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve keâe Jesie 340 ms-1 nes lees, 1250 Hz
f = 254 Hz ..............(3)
mes keâce DeeJe=efòe Jeeues 85 cm uecyes Skeâ efmejs hej yebo So, we can say that condition (1) and (3) matched. So
veeefuekeâe (heeFhe) ceW JeeÙeg-mlecYe kesâ mebYeJe Øeeke=âeflekeâ the required frequency is 254 Hz
oesueveeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer: 47. If we study the vibration of a pipe open at both
(a) 4 (b) 5 ends, then the following statement is not true :
(c) 7 (d) 6 oesveeW efmejeW hej Kegues heeFhe ceW keâcheveeW kesâ efueÙes keâewve mee
AIPMT-06.05.2014 keâLeve mener veneR nw?
Ans. (d) : The fundamental frequency (n) (a) Pressure change will be maximum at both
v ends/ oesveeW efmejeW hej oeye heefjJele&ve DeefOekeâlece nesiee
n=
4l (b) Open end will be antinode
where, n = frequency Kegues efmejeW hej Øemhevo neWies
v = velocity of sound = 340 ms–1 (c) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency
l = length of pipe = 85 cm = 0.85m will be generated
340 × 100 cetue DeeJe=efòe kesâ efJe<ece mebveeoer GlheVe neWies
∴ n= = 100Hz
4 × 85 (d) All harmonics of the fundamental frequency
Q we need to add harmonics are heard in a pipe closed will be generated
at one end, the possible frequency are 100, 300, 500, cetue DeeJe=efòe kesâ meYeer mebveeoer GlheVe neWies~
700, 900, 1100, 1300, etc. NEET (UG)-05.05.2013

Physics 305 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : λ= Wavelength, l = length 1 1 1
l 1: l 2: l 3 = : :
f1 f 2 f3
= f2f3 : f1f3 : f2f1
3×5:1×5:1×3
l1 : l 2 : l 3 =15: 5: 3
λ λ λ
+ =
4 4 2
λ
=L
2
λ = 2L Given 15x + 5x + 3x = 100
100
V ⇒ x=
Frequency f= 23
λ 1500
Now l1 = 15x =
V
= [Q λ = 2L] 500
23
2L
l2 = 5x =
nV 23
Frequency generated =
2L 49. Two identical piano wires, kept under the same
Here, tension T have a fundamental frequency of
600Hz. The fractional increase in the tension of
n = no of harmonics one of the wires which will lead to occurrence
n = 1, 2, 3, 4 ....... of 6 beats / s when both the wires oscillate
So, option (a) is not true. together would be
48. The length of the wire between two ends of a oes mece™he efmeleej Jeeues leej meceeve leveeJe T kesâ DeOeerve
sonometer is 100 cm. What should be the nw leLee Gvekeâer cetue DeeJe=efòe 600Hz nw~ leejeW ceW mes efkeâmeer
positions of two bridges below the wire so that Skeâ kesâ leveeJe ceW DeebefMekeâ Je=efæ keâjves hej efJemheoeW ceW 6
the three segments of the wire have their efJemhebo/mewkeâC[ keâe Devlej nw peye oesveeW leejeW keâes meeLe-
fundamental frequencies in the ratio 1 : 3 : 5? meeLe oesueve keâjeÙee peeS, lees nesiee :
meesveesceeršj kesâ oes efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe leej keâer uecyeeF& 100 (a) 0.01 (b) 0.02
mesceer nw~ leej keâer veerÛes oes hegueeW keâer efmLeefle keäÙee nesveer (c) 0.03 (d) 0.04
ÛeeefnS leeefkeâ leej kesâ leerve KeC[eW ceW Gvekeâer ceewefuekeâ AIPMT (Mains)-2011
DeeJe=efòeÙeeW keâe Devegheele 1 : 3 : 5 nes- Ans. (b) : Fundamental frequency (f) produced by a
stretched string is given by
1500 2000 1500 500
(a) cm. cm (b) cm. cm 1 T
23 23 23 23 f=
1500 300 300 1500 2 l m
(c) cm. cm (d) cm. cm According to law of tension the frequency of
23 23 23 23
the string varies directly as the square root of its
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka tension,
Ans. (b) :
f ∝ T ⇒ f = K T (where K is constant)
Distance between two consecutive modes l = λ/2
df 1
Where l is the length of string ∴ =K
dt 2 T
λ = 2l
f 1 f f
v = fλ = × = {Q K = }
T 2 T 2T T
v = f.2l
∆f f ∆T 2∆f 2 × 6
T = ⇒ = = = 0.02 .
and, v= ∆ T 2T T f 600
m 50. Sound waves travel at 350 m/s through a warm
T air and at 3500 m/s through brass. The
⇒ = f.2l wavelength of a 700 Hz acoustic wave as it
m enters brass from warm air :
1 T OJeefve keâer lejbieW iece& JeeÙeg ceW 350 m/s keâer Ûeeue mes leLee
f=
2l m heerleue ceW 3500 m/s keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeueleer nQ, lees 700 Hz
1 keâer OJeefvekeâ lejbie Ùeefo iece& JeeÙeg mes heerleue ceW ØeJesMe keâjs
⇒ ∝f
l lees Gmekeâer lejbieowOÙe& :
Physics 306 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a)decreases by a factor 20/20 iegvee keâce nes peeSieer uecyeeF& õJÙeceeve meceeve nw Deewj Ùen 1 g/m nw~ peye Skeâ
(b)decreases by a factor 10/10 iegvee keâce nes peeSieer ner meceÙe [esefjÙeeB meeLe-meeLe keâcheVe keâjleer nw lees mhevove
(c)increases by a factor 20/20 iegvee yeÌ{ peeSieer mebKÙee nesieer-
(d)increases by a factor 10/10 iegvee yeÌ{ peeSieer (a) 3 (b) 5
(c) 7 (d) 8
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (d) : Given- Ans. (c) : Given
Velocity of sound wave in warm air (v1) = 350 m/s
Length of first string l1 = 51.6 cm = 51.6 × 10–2 m
Velocity of sound waves in brass (v2) = 3500 m/s
Length of second string l2 = 49.1 cm = 49.1 × 10–2 m
For wave propagation, we have the formula for velocity
Tension T = 20 N
as :
Mass per unit length of both string = 1 g/m = 10–3 kg/m
v=n×λ The no. of beats will be the difference of frequencies of
For first medium, two strings.
v1 = n × λ1
1 T
For second medium Frequency of first string f1 =
2l 1 m
v2 = n × λ2
Ratio will be, 1 20
=
v1 λ1 v 3500 2×51.6×10-2 10-3
= ⇒ λ 2 = λ1 2 = λ1 × = 10λ1
v2 λ 2 v1 350 Similarly frequency of second string(f2)
λ 2 = 10λ1 1 20
= -2
×
2× 49.1×10 10-3
Hence, wavelength increases by a factor 10.
No. of Beats = difference in frequency
51. A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 4
beats per second with the vibrating string of a = f1 – f2 = 1 20 1 20
-2
× -3
- -2
× -3
string of a piano. The beat frequency decreases 2×51.6×10 10 2× 49.1×10 10
to 2 beats per second, when the tension in the = 144 – 137 = 7 Beats
piano string is slightly increased. The 53. The time of reverberation of a room A is one
frequency of the piano string before increasing second. What will be the time (in seconds) of
the tension was – /512 Hz DeeJe=efòe keâes Skeâ mJeefj$e reverberation of a room, having all the
keâes Skeâ efheÙeeveeW keâes [esjer kesâ meeLe keâefchele keâjeÙes peeves dimensions double of those of room A-
hej 4 efJemhevo Øeefle meskeâC[ GlheVe keâjleer nQ [esjer ceW Skeâ keâ#e A keâe DevegmejCe keâeue Skeâ meskeâC[ nw~ Skeâ
otmejs keâ#e kesâ meYeer ceehe keâ#e A keâer leguevee ceW ogiegves
leveeJe keâes LeesÌ[e yeÌ{eves hej efJemhevo DeeJe=efòe Ieškeâj 2
ceeve jKeles nQ~ Fme otmejs keâ#e keâe DevegmejCe keâeue
efJemhevo Øeefle meskeâC[ nes peeleer nw~ leveeJe keâce keâjves mes meskeâC[eW ceW keäÙee nesiee:-
hetJe& efheÙeeveeW keâer [esjer keâer DeeJe=efòe Leer – (a) 2 (b) 4
(a) 510 Hz (b) 514 Hz 1
(c) 516 Hz (d) 508 Hz (c) (d) 1
2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
AIPMT-2006
Ans. (d) : Given,
Ans. (a) : Sabine's formula for reverberation time is
Frequency of tuning fork = 512 Hz
0.16V
Number of beats = 4 T=
Σas
Reduced beats = 2
Where, V is volume of hall in m3.
Qf ∝ T
Σas = a1s1 + a2s2 + a3s3 ...
∴ beats = n f − n p = Total absorption of hall
4 = 512–np⇒ np = 508 Hz s1, s2, s3,.... are surface area
52. Each of the two strings of length 51.6 cm and a1, a2, a3,... are absorption coefficient
49.1 cm are tensioned separately by 20 N force. Area of room becomes 4 times of A and volume
Mass per unit length of both the strings is same becomes 8 times of V.
and equal to 1 g/m. When both the strings T ' V ' S 8V s
= × = ×
vibrate simultaneously the number of beats is : T V S' V 4s
oes [esefjÙeeW keâer uecyeeF&ÙeeB 51.6 cm Deewj 49.1 cm nw T' = 2T
Deewj FveceW mes ØelÙeskeâ ceW he=Lekeâ-he=Lekeâ 20N yeue keâe =2×1
leveeJe keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ oesveeW [esefjÙeeW keâe Øeefle cee$ekeâ = 2 second

Physics 307 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Note- Persistence of sound in a room due to multiple 506π
reflections occurring from walls, ceilings, floor etc is Frequency, n 2 = = 253 beats
2π
called reverberation of sound. Reverberation occurs due
Thus, number of beats per second = n2 − n1
to the superposition of echoes. Echo is one time
reflection of a sound wave or pulse. 253 − 250 = 3beats / s
54. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and number of beats produced per minute = 3×60 beats/ min
5.5 m respectively, each propagate in a gas with ⇒ n = 180 beats / min
velocity 330 m/s. We expect the following
number of beats per second:- 56. If the tension and diameter of a sonometer wire
›eâceMe: 5.0 m Deewj 5.5 m lejbieowOÙe& keâer oes OJeefve of fundamental frequency n is doubled and
lejbieW 330 m/s kesâ Jesie mes Skeâ iewme ceW Ûeue jner nw~ nce density is halved then its fundamental
DeeMee keâj mekeâles nQ efkeâ Øeefle meskeâC[ efJemheoeW keâer mebKÙee frequency will become
nesieer:- Skeâ mJejceeheer efpemekeâer cetue DeeJe=efòe n nw, Gmekesâ leej
(a) 12 (b) 0
keâe leveeJe Je JÙeeme ogievee keâj efueÙee peeÙes Je IevelJe
(c) 1 (d) 6 DeeOee keâj efoÙee peeÙes lees Deye DeeJe=efòe nesieer-
AIPMT-2006 n
(a) (b) 2n
Ans. (d) : Wavelength, λ1= 5.0 m 4
Wavelength, λ2 = 5.5 m n
(c) n (d)
Velocity, V = 330 m/s 2
V AIPMT-2001
We know frequency n =
λ Ans. (c) : The fundamental frequency (n) of stretched
V string of length ‘l’ having mass per unit length ‘m’ &
So, n1 =
λ1 density ‘ρ’ is given by following relation, where T
330 represents tension of the string.
= = 66 Hz
5.0 1 T
n=
V 2l m
& n2 =
λ2 mass of wire
m=
330 length of wire
= = 60 Hz
5.5 Volume x density
m=
Hence no of Beats per second = n1 – n2 length
= 66 – 60
Area of cross - section × Length × density
=6 ∴m =
Length
55. Two vibrating tuning forks produce
progressive waves given by Y1 = 4 sin 500 πt ∴ m = area of cross section of wire×density
and Y2 = 2 sin 506 πt Number of beats ∴ m = π r2ρ
produced per minute is/oes keâcheve keâjles ngS šŸetefvebie
1 T
keâebšs Y1 = 4 sin 500 πt Deewj Y2 = 2 sin 506 πt ∴n =
Éeje oer ieF& Øeieeceer lejbies GlheVe keâj jns nQ~ Øeefle efceveš 2l πr 2 ρ
Øeehle efJemheboeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer :- 1 T
⇒n=
(a) 3 (b) 360 2lr πρ
(c) 180 (d) 60 Let n' be the frequency when.
AIPMT-2005 ρ
Ans. (c) : Y1 = 4 sin 500πt -------(i) Tension = 2T, Radius = 2r, density =
2
Y2 = 2 sin506πt ------ (ii)
1 2T
Comparing equation (i) and (ii), with So, n' =
2l × 2r πρ/2
Y = a sinωt
we have ω1 = 500π 1 T
n' =
ω
Frequency, n1 = 500π = 250 beats/s 
∴ n = 2π 
2lr πρ
2π   n' = n
also, ω2 = 506π ∴ Frequency remains unchanged.

Physics 308 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
57. Two stationary sources each emitting waves of Case - II
wave length λ. An observer moves from one 3λ 3V
l= ⇒ f2 =
source to other with velocity u. Then number of 4 4l
beats heared by him: 5V
oes efmLej Œeesle ØelÙeskeâ λ lejbieowOÙe& keâer lejbies Glmeefpe&le and same as, f3 = 4L
keâj jns nQ~ Skeâ Øes#ekeâ u Jesie mes Skeâ Œeesle mes otmejs Frequency is generated in the form of
Œeesle lekeâ ieefle keâjlee nw, lees Gmes efkeâleves efJemhevo ( 2n + 1) V
(beats) megveeF& oWies – f = (v = fλ)
4l
2u u  v
(a)
λ
(b)
λ
Where n = 0,1,2... λ = 
 f
u 330
(c) uλ (d) λ= ∴λ=1m
2λ 330
AIPMT-2000 λ 3λ 5λ
Ans. (a) : Let both source have same frequency = f0 Resonance will occurs l = , ,
4 4 4
v l = 25 cm, 75 cm, 125 cm
Frequency of each stationary source, f0 = ........ (i)
λ When water is filling in the column–
Where v = velocity of wave in stationary medium. l = 75 cm
Q An observer moves from one source to other with l = (L – l)
H2O
velocity u.
v = 125 – 75
Putting the value f 0 = from equation (i) = 50 cm
λ
IInd Method-
v−u 1
∴ From Doppler effect, f1 =   f0 = (v − u) ( 2n − 1) v
 v  λ f=
4l
When observer is moving towards the source.
v+u
( 2n − 1) v
1 l= n = 0,1,2... given v = f = 330
f2 = × f0 = (v + u) 4f
v λ
∴ Number of beat per second is given by- ( 2n − 1)
=
4
 ( v + u ) (v − u)  2u
f 2 − f1 =  −  = 1 3
 λ λ  λ l = m, m = 25 cm, 75 cm
4 4
58. A cylindrical tube (L = 125 cm) is resonant Minimum height of water column = 125 – 75 = 50 cm
with a tuning fork of frequency 330 Hz. If it is 59. Velocity of sound waves in air is 330 m/s. For a
filling by water then to get resonance again, particular sound wave in air, a path difference
minimum length of water column is (Vair = 330 of 40 cm is equivalent to phase difference of 1.6
m/s)/ Skeâ yesueveekeâej (L = 125 mesceer) veueer Skeâ π. The frequency of this wave is
mJeefj$e kesâ meeLe Devegveeefole nw~ mJeefj$e keâer DeeJe=efòe 330 nJee ceW OJeefve keâer Ûeeue 330 ceer/meskeâC[ nw~ efkeâmeer OJeefve
Hz nw Deye veefuekeâe ceW heeveer YejW lees heeveer kesâ mlecYe keâer kesâ efueS heLeevlej 40 cm leLee keâueevlej 1.6π nw~
vÙetvelece TBÛeeF& efpemekesâ efueS hegve: Devegveeo efmLeefle Øeehle Fmekeâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer-
nesieer : (Vair = 330 m/s)- (a) 165 Hz/165 nšdpe& (b) 150 Hz/150 nšdpe&
(a) 50 cm (b) 60 cm (c) 660 Hz/660 nšdpe& (d) 330 Hz/330 nšdpe&
(c) 25 cm (d) 20 cm
AIPMT-1990
AIPMT-1999
Ans. (c) : Given that,
Ans. (a) : Given,
Velocity of sound waves (v) = 330 m/s
v = 330 m/s
Path difference (∆x) = 40 cm = 40×10–2 m
f = 330 Hz
Phase difference (∆φ) = 1.6π
λ
Initially, l = ∴ λ = 4 l We know that,
4
∆φ = k × ∆x
Case - I
2π
 V where, k is wave number =
Frequency  f = 
 4L  λ

Physics 309 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2π Ans. (a):
So, ∆φ = × ∆x
λ
2π –2
1.6π = × 40 × 10
λ
2 –2 1
λ= × 40 × 10 m
= Given that,
1.6 2
Length of a wire, AB (L) = 110 cm
We know that,
Its ratio of fundamental frequencies of (three) these
velocity (v) = frequency × wavelength (λ) segment, f1 : f2 : f3 is 1 : 2 : 3
1 Let us consider that, L1, L2 and L3 be length of three
330 = frequency × segments.
2
So, L1 + L2 + L3 = 110 ........(1)
frequency = 660 Hz.
From, law of vibration of stretched strings
60. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends has f1 × L1 = f2 × L2
fundamental frequency f in air. The tube is
f 
dipped vertically in water, so that half of it is in L2 =  1  × L1
water. The fundamental frequency of air  f2 
column is now 1 f1 1
Skeâ Kegues Dee@ie&ve heeFhe keâer nJee ceW cetue DeeJe=efòe f nw~ L2 = × L1 ....(2) Q =
2 f2 2
Ùeefo Fme heeFhe keâes TOJee&Oej DeeOee heeveer ceW [gyees efoÙee
peeS lees Fmekeâer nJee ceW cetue DeeJe=efòe nesieer- f 
Similarly, L3 =  1  × L1
(a) f /2 (b) 3f / 4  f3 
(c) 2f (d) f 1 f 1
L3 = × L1....(3) Q 1 =
AIPMT-1997 3 f3 3
Ans. (d) : For open organ pipe fundamental frequency Put the values in equation (1), we get
v 1 1
(f) is, f= (Given) L1 + L1 + L1 = 110
2L 2 3
Where, v is speed of sound 6L1 + 3L1 + 2L1
L is length of organ tube/pipe = 110
6
We know that, speed of sound changes with the change
11L1
in medium. On dipping in water, the tube becomes = 110
closed at that end and that too of half the length L' = L/2 6
v 110 × 6
So, new fundamental frequency (f ' ) = L1 = = 60cm
4L' 11
v v Put the value of L1 in equation (2) and (3), we get
= = =f 1 1
(
4 L/2 ) 2L So, L2 = L1 = × 60
Hence, there will be no change in fundamental 2 2
frequency. = 30 cm
1 1
61. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. L3 = L1 = × 60
Where should the two bridges be placed from 3 3
A to divide the wire in 3 segments whose = 20 cm
fundamental frequencies are in the ratio of 1 : First bridge L1 = 60 cm
2:3? Second bridge = (L2) + (L1) = 60 + 30
efkeâmeer mJejceeheer (sonometer) leej AB keâer uecyeeF& = 90 cm
110 cm nw~ A mes oes efyeÇpeeW keâer efmLeefle keäÙee nesveer ÛeeefnS 62. A stretched string resonates with tuning fork
leeefkeâ leej kesâ leerve KeCÌ[eW keâer cetue DeeJe=efòeÙeeW 1 : 2 : 3 frequency 512 Hz when length of the string is
0.5 m. The length of the string required to
kesâ Devegheele ceW neW? vibrate resonantly with a tuning fork of
(a) 60 cm and 90 cm/60 cm Deewj 90 cm frequency 256 Hz would be
(b) 30 cm and 60 cm/30 cm Deewj 60 cm Skeâ KeeRÛee ngDee leej mJeefj$e kesâ meeLe 512 nšdpe&
(c) 30 cm and 90 cm/30 cm Deewj 90 cm DeeJe=efòe keâe oesueve keâjlee nw peyeefkeâ leej keâer uecyeeF&
(d) 40 cm and 80 cm/40 cm Deewj 80 cm 0.5 ceeršj nw~ Ùeefo DeeJe=efòe 256 nšdpe& nes, lees leej keâer
AIPMT-1995 uecyeeF& keâe ceeve nesiee-
Physics 310 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 0.25 m/0.25 ceeršj (b) 0.5 m/0.5 ceeršj • Third overtone has a frequency 4n, 4th harmonic
(c) 1 m/1 ceeršj (d) 2 m/2 ceeršj means three full loops and one half loop.
AIPMT-1993 • When it vibrates in third overtone, there are four
Ans. (c) : Given that, nodes and four antinodes.
Frequency (f1) = 512 Hz 64. A source of sound gives 5 beats per second,
and length of string (L1) = 0.5 m when sounded with another source of
if frequency (f2) = 256 Hz frequency 100 Hz. The second harmonic of the
1 T source, together with a source of frequency 205
We know that, frequency (f) = Hz gives 5 beats per second. What is the
2L µ
frequency of the source?
Where, L is length of string
Skeâ OJeefve kesâ Œeesle keâes peye otmejs Œeesle (f = 100 Hz)
T is tension
µ is mass per unit length
kesâ meeLe OJeefvele efkeâÙee peelee nw lees Jen 5 efJemhebo GlheVe
1 keâjlee nw~ Œeesle keâer DeeJe=efòe 205 nšd&pe keâj oer peeS lees
So, f∝ Ùen 5 efJemhebo/meskeâC[ yeveelee nw~ lees henues Œeesle keâer
L
1 DeeJe=efòe keäÙee nesieer?
f1 ∝ .......(i)
L1 (a) 105 second–1/105 Øeefle meskeâC[
1 (b) 205 second /205 Øeefle meskeâC[
–1
and f2 ∝
L2 (c) 95 second–1/95 Øeefle meskeâC[
From equation (i) and (ii), we get (d) 100 second–1/100 Øeefle meskeâC[
f1 L 2 AIPMT-1995
=
f 2 L1 Ans. (a) : Given that,
512 L2 Source of sound gives 5 beat per second with the
=
256 0.5 frequency = 100 ± 5
512 × 0.5 So, frequency of source = 105 Hz or 95 Hz
L2 =
256 Second harmonic of the source = 210 Hz or 190 Hz
=1m As the second harmonic gives 5 beat/sec with sound of
63. A closed organ pipe (closed at one end) is frequency 205 Hz then second harmonic of source =
excited to support the third overtone. It is 210 Hz. So, the frequency of source = 105 Hz.
found that air in the pipe has 65. A source of frequency υ gives 5 beats/second
Skeâ yebo Dee@ie&ve heeFhe (Skeâ efmejs hej yebo heeFhe) ceW when sounded with a source of frequency 200
leermejer DeefOe-mJejkeâ yeveleer nw~ Fme heeFhe ceW yevesieW Hz. The second harmonic of frequency 2υ of
(a) three nodes and three antinodes/leerve efvemhebo leLee source gives 10 beats/second when sounded
leerve Øemhebo with a source of frequency 420 Hz. The value of
υ is
(b) three nodes and four antinodes/leerve efvemhebo leLee
Ûeej Øemhebo DeeJe=efòe υ keâe Skeâ Œeesle peye 200 Hz DeeJe=efòe kesâ Skeâ
(c) four nodes and three antinodes/Ûeej efvemhebo leLee Œees le kesâ meeLe OJeefve keâjlee nw, lees Øeefle meskeâC[ 5
leerve Øemhebo efJemhebo GlheVe keâjlee nw~ Œeesle keâer efÉleerÙe iegCeeJe=efòe 2υ
(d) four nodes and four antinodes/Ûeej efvemhebo leLee peye 420 Hz DeeJe=efòe kesâ efkeâmeer Œeesle kesâ meeLe OJeefve
Ûeej Øemhebo keâjleer nw lees Øeefle meskeâC[ 10 efJemhebo GlheVe neslee nw~ υ
AIPMT-1991 keâe ceeve nw:
Ans. (d) : Antinode always occur at the open end and (a) 205 Hz (b) 195 Hz
node always occurs at the closed end. When close pipe (c) 200 Hz (d) 210 Hz.
vibrates in fundamental mode there are one node and AIPMT-1994
one antinode. Ans. (a) : Given that,
Source of frequency υ gives a beat of 5 per second with
the sound of frequency 200 Hz.
So, υ – 200 = 5 ......(i)
case I - If υ is greater than 200
then, υ = 205 Hz

Physics 311 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
If we put the value of υ in equation (i) so we observe 3
1.7 × 10
that it satisfy the equation = 6
case II- If υ is less than 200 4.2 × 10
then, –(υ–200) = 5 .....(ii) = 0.405 × 10–3
υ = –205 Hz λ = 4.05 × 10–4 m
If we put the value of υ in equation (i) it will not satisfy 68. Two sound waves having a phase difference of
60º gave path difference of (λ is wavelength of
the equation (ii) so, the value of υ is 205 Hz
sound wave)
66. For production of beats the two sources must oes OJeefve lejbieeW kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej 60º nw lees Fvekeâe
have
heLeevlej nesiee (λ OJeefve lejbie keâer lejieowOÙe& nw)-
efJemheboeW keâer heefjIešvee kesâ efueS oes ŒeesleeW keâer
λ λ
(a) different frequencies and same amplitude/ (a) (b)
6 3
DeeJe=efleÙeeB efYeVe Deewj DeeÙeece meceeve nesves ÛeeefnS~
λ
(b) different frequencies/DeeJe=efleÙeeB efYeVe nesveer ÛeeefnS~ (c) 2λ (d)
2
(c) different frequencies, same amplitude and AIPMT-1996
same phase/DeeJe=efleÙeeB efYeVe, DeeÙeece meceeve keâuee Ans. (a) : Given that,
meceeve nesveer ÛeeefnS~ λ is wavelength of sound wave
(d) different frequencies and same phase/efYeVe Phase difference (∆φ) = 60º
DeeJe=efleÙeeB Deewj meceeve keâuee nesveer ÛeeefnS~ π
AIPMT-1992 = 60 × = π / 3 radians
180
Ans. (b) : Beat- The combination of two waves of We know that, relation between phase difference and
slightly different frequencies, perceived as a periodic path difference,
variation whose rate is the difference of the two 2π
frequencies. ∆φ = × ∆x
Beat frequency (b) = f1 – f2 λ
So, production of beats of two sources must have Where, ∆x is path difference
different frequencies. 2π
π/3 = × ∆x
• The different amplitudes effect the minimum and λ
maximum amplitude of the beat. If frequencies are ∆x = λ/6
different phase will also be different.
69. A 5.5 metre length of string has a mass of 0.035
67. A hospital uses an ultrasonic scanner to locate kg. If the tension in the string in 77 N, the
tumours in a tissue. The operating frequency of speed of a wave on the string is
the scanner is 4.2 MHz. The speed of sound in a Skeâ leej 5.5 ceeršj uecyee leLee Gmekeâe õJÙeceeve 0.035
tissue is 1.7 km/s. The wavelength of sound in efkeâ«ee nw~ Ùeefo leej ceW leveeJe 77 N nes, lees leej ceW lejbie
the tissue is close to/Skeâ Demheleeue ceW šŸetcej keâes keâe Jesie nesiee
peeBÛeves kesâ efueS Deuš^e meesefvekeâ mkewâvej ueieeÙee peelee nw~ (a) 110 m s–1/110 ceer/meskeâC[
mkewâvej keâer DeeJe=efòe 4.2 MHz nw leLee OJeefve keâer Ûeeue (b) 165 m s–1/165 ceer/meskeâC[
1.7 efkeâceer/meskeâC[ nw lees OJeefve keâer lejbieowIÙe& nesieer- (c) 77 m s–1/77 ceer/meskeâC[
(a) 4 × 10 m/4 × 10 ceeršj
–3 –3
(d) 102 m s–1/102 ceer/meskeâC[
(b) 8 × 10 m/8 × 10 ceeršj
–3 –3
AIPMT-1989
(c) 4 × 10–4 m/4 × 10–4 ceeršj Ans. (a) : Given that,
(d) 8 × 10 m/8 × 10 ceeršj
–4 –4 Tension in the string = 77 N
Mass (M) = 0.035 kg
AIPMT-1995
Length (L) = 5.5 m
Ans. (c) : Given that, We know that,
Frequency (f) = 4.2 MHz Speed of wave on a string under tension is
= 4.2 × 106 Hz
T
Speed of sound (c) = 1.7 km/sec v= ........(i)
= 1.7 × 103 m/sec µ
We know that, Where, µ is mass per length of the string
Sound velocity Mass of string (M) 0.035
Wavelength = So, µ = = kg / m
Sound frequency Length of string(L) 5.5

Physics 312 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Put the value in equation (i), we get Ans. (b): The velocity of sound in any gas depends
upon the density, temperature and elasticity of gas.
77
v= γRT P
 0.035  v= =γ
  m ρ
 5.5  • In solid velocity of sound depends on young's
77 × 5.5 77 × 55 × 1000 modulus of elasticity (Y).
= =
0.035 35 × 10
= 121×100 = 11×10 14.5 Doppler Effect
v = 110 m/sec.
72. Two cars moving in opposite directions
70. If the amplitude of sound is doubled and the approach each other with speed of 22 m/s and
frequency reduced to one fourth, the intensity 16.5 m/s respectively. The driver of the first car
of sound at the same point will be
blows a horn having a frequency 400 Hz. The
Ùeefo OJeefve keâe DeeÙeece oesiegvee leLee DeeJe=efòe Skeâ frequency heard by the driver of the second car
ÛeewLeeF& keâj oer peeS lees OJeefve keâer leer›elee is [velocity of sound 340 m/s]
(a) increasing by a factor of 2/2 iegCee yeÌ{sieer oes keâejeW keâer ÛeeueW ›eâceMe: 22 ceer./mes. leLee 16.5
(b) decreasing by a factor of 2/2 iegCee Iešsieer ceer./mes. nw~ Ùes oesveeW efJehejerle efoMeeDeeW ceW Skeâ otmejs keâer
(c) decreasing by a factor of 4/4 iegCee Iešsieer Deesj pee jner nQ~ henueer keâej keâe Ûeeuekeâ ne@ve& yepeelee nw,
(d) unchanged/efveÙele jnsieer efpemekeâer DeeJe=efòe 400 Hz nw~ Ùeefo, OJeefve keâe Jesie 340
AIPMT-1989
ceer./mes. nw lees, otmejer keâej kesâ Ûeeuekeâ keâes Fme ne@ve& keâer
Ans. (c) : Let us consider amplitude of sound is A
So, A1 = 2A (Given)
OJeefve efkeâleveer DeeJe=efòe keâer megveeF& osieer~
and frequency is ν1 (a) 350 Hz (b) 361 Hz
1 (c) 411 Hz (d) 448 Hz
So, ν1 = ν (Given) NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
4
We know that, Ans. (d) : Given frequency of sound of first car,
Intensity of sound (I) = (amplitude)2 × (frequency)2 f = 400Hz
I = A2 × ν2 ......(1)
I1 = A12 × ν12
2
1 
= (2A)2 ×  ν  ......(2)
4 
dividing equation (2) by equation (1), we get
1
4A 2 × ν2 Given, Velocity of sound v = 340 m/s
I1 16
So, = The frequency heard by driver of second car is given by-
I A 2 × ν2
I1 1  v + v0 
= f2 = f1  
I 4  v − vs 
1
I1 = × I  340 + 16.5 
4 = 400 ×  
Hence, from the question, intensity of sound at same  340 − 22 
point (I1) is decreasing a factor of 4. = 400 × 1.12106
71. The velocity of sound in any gas depends upon f2 = 448.4 Hz
iewmeeW ceW OJeefve keâe Jesie efkeâme yeele hej efveYe&j keâjlee nw? f 2 ≈ 448 Hz
(a) wavelength of sound only/OJeefve keâer lejbieowIÙe& hej
73. A siren emitting a sound of frequency 800 Hz
(b) density and elasticity of gas/iewme kesâ IevelJe leLee
moves away from an observer towards a cliff at
ØeÙeemLelee hej a speed of 15 ms-1 then, the frequency of sound
(c) intensity of sound waves only/OJeefve kesâ leer›elee hej that the observer hears in the echo reflected
(d) amplitude and frequency of sound/OJeefve keâer from the cliff is:/ 800 Hz DeeJeefòe keâer OJeefve Glhevve
DeeJe=efòe leLee DeeÙeece hej keâjves Jeeuee keâesF& meeÙejve efkeâmeer Øes#ejebkeâ mes Skeâ Ûeóeve
AIPMT-1988 keâer Deesj 15 ms-1 keâer Ûeeue mes ieefleceeve nw~ leye Gme
OJeefve keâer DeeJe=efòe, efpemes Ûeóeve mes hejeJeefle&le ØeefleOJeefve
kesâ ™he ceW Jen Øes#ekeâ megvelee nw, keäÙee nesieer?
Physics 313 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(Take velocity of sound in air = 330 ms-1)/(JeeÙeg v0 = 0
ceW OJeefve keâer Ûeeue = 330 ms ueererefpeS
-1
eS)  330 − 0 
fapparent = 100 ×  
(a) 885 Hz (b) 765 Hz  330 − 19.4 × cos 60° 
(c) 800 Hz (d) 838 Hz  
EET (UG)-01.05.2016 fapparent = 100 × 
NEET 330 − 0 
Ans. (d) : Given that, Velocity of sourcesource, Vs = 15 m/s  330 − 19.4 × 1 
 2
frequency, f = 800 Hz
 330 
speed of sound, V = 330 m/s = 100 ×  
Frequency reflected at wall  330 − 9.7 
 v − v0  fapparent = 103.03 Hz
f'=f  75. A speeding motorcyclist sees traffic jam ahead
 v − vs  of him. He slows down to o 36 km/hour.
k He finds
As observer is at rest so v0 = 0 that traffic has eased and nd a car
c moving ahead
 330 − 0  of him at 18 km/hour is honking
honki at a frequency
f ' = 800  
 330 − 15  of 1392 Hz. If the speeds ds of sound is 343 m/s,
the frequency of the honk k as heard by him will
f ' = 838Hz
be.
š^wefheâkeâ pewce kesâ keâejCe Skeâ ceesšj meeFefkeâue Ûeeuekeâ
Deheveer Ûeeue keâce keâjles ngS Gmes mes 36 km Øeefle Iebšs keâj
oslee nw~ š^wefheâkeâ keâce nesves hej, Gmemes
Gmem Deeies 18 km Øeefle
Iebšs keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeueleer ngF& Skeâ S keâej, 1392 Hz
74. A source of sound emittingg wav waves of frequency DeeJe=efòe keâe ne@ve& yepeeleer nw~ Ùeefeefo OJeefve keâer Ûeeue 343
100 Hz and an observer O are located at some m/s nw lees, ceesšj meeFefkeâue Ûeeue eeuekeâ keâes Fme ne@ve& keâer
distance from each other. The ssource is moving
with a speed of 19.4 ms-1 att an aangle of 60º with
DeeJe=efòe megveeF& osieer:-
the source observer line ass show shown in the figure. (a) 1332 Hz (b) 1372 Hz
The observer is at rest. Thee app apparent frequency (c) 1412 Hz (d) 1454
1 Hz
observed by the observer (veloc (velocity of sound in AIPMT-06.05.2014
air 330 ms-1) is/100 Hz DeeJe= Je=efòe keâer OJeefve GlheVe Ans. (c) : When source and observe
server both are moving
keâjlee ngDee Skeâ OJeefve Œeesle S, leL
leLee Skeâ Øes#ekeâ O, and they are following each other -
Skeâ otmejs mes ketâÚ otjer hej efmLelee nQ~ Ùen OJeefve Œeesle,
19.4 ms–1 keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeue jnee nw~ Gmekesâ Ûeueves keâer
efoMee, Œeesle leLee Øes#ekeâ keâer efmLe LeefleÙeeW keâes efceueeves
 v + vo 
Jeeueer mejuejsKee mes 60° keâe keâesCs e yyeveeleer nw (DeejsKe f' =  
osefKeÙes)~ Ùeefo, Øes#ekeâ Deheveer efmLeefeefle hej ner ®keâe jnlee  v + vs 
keâer DeeYeemeer DeeJe=efòe Where, vs = Source velocity
nw lees Øes#ekeâ Éeje megveer ieF& OJeefve keâe
v = Velocity of sound
(nJee ceW OJeefve keâe Jesie 330 ms ) ne–1
nesieer :
vo = Observer velocity
f ' = Apparent frequency
f = Frequency of source
Given that,
vo (velocity of motor cyclist) = 36 km/h
km
(a) 97 Hz (b) 100 Hz = 10 m/sec
(c) 103Hz (d) 106 Hz vs (velocity of car) 18 km/h = 5 m/sec
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 f = 1392
392 Hz
H
Ans. (c) : Apparent frequency is- v = 343
43 m/sec
m/s
The frequency of the horn heard by the th motorcyclist is
 v − v0 
fapparent = f0    v + vm   343 + 10 
 v − vs  f'=f  = 1392  
Where, vs = velocity of the source  v + vc   343 + 5 
v = velocity of sound 1392 × 353
= = 1412Hz
f0 = frequency emitted by source 348

Physics 314 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
76. A whistle revolves in a circle with angular Ans. (b): Situation as shown in Figure
speed ω = 20 rad/sec using a string of length 50
cm. If the frequency of sound from the whistle
is 385 Hz, then what is the minimum frequency
heard by an observer which is far away from
the centre : - (Vsound = 340 m/s)
Skeâ meeršer 50 mesceer uecyeeF& keâer [esjer keâer meneÙelee mes Speed of listener v1 = 1 m/s
Skeâ Je=òe ceW keâesCeerÙe Ûeeue ω = 20 jsef[Ùeve/meskeâC[ mes speed of sound (v) = 330 m/s
Ûekeäkeâj ueiee jner nw~ Ùeefo meeršer keâer OJeefve keâer DeeJe=efòe Frequency of each source ( f) = 660 Hz
Apparent frequency due to p
385 Hz nw lees kesâvõ mes yengle otj KeÌ[s Øes#ekeâ Éeje megveer
( v − v1 ) × f
ieÙeer vÙetvelece DeeJe=efòe nesieer (VOJeefve= 340 m/s) - f'=
v
(a) 385 Hz (b) 374 Hz
=
( 330 − 1)
× 660
(c) 394 Hz (d) 333 Hz
330
AIPMT-2002 = 329 × 2 = 658 Hz
Ans. (b) : Apparent frequency due to Q

f"=
( v + v1 ) × f
v

=
( 330 + 1) × 660
330
= 331×2 = 662 Hz
Angular speed of whistle, ω = 20 rad/sec
Beat frequency = f " – f '
Radius of circle, r = 50cm = 0.5 m = 662 – 658 = 4 Hz
Frequency of sound from whistle, f = 385 Hz
78. A train moving at a speed of 220 ms–1 towards
Velocity of sound, V = 340 m/s a stationary object, emits a sound of frequency
The line Joining the source & observer will be a secant 1000 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the object
passing through centre. gets reflected back to the train as echo. The
Frequency heard by observer will be minimum when frequency of the echo as detected by the driver
source recedes away from him as shown in figure. of the train is/efkeâmeer efmLej Jemleg keâer Deesj 220ms–1
m
keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeueleer ngF& Skeâ š^sve 1000Hz DeeJe=efòe keâer
Speed of source, Vs = rω = 0.5×20 = 10 OJeefve GlheVe keâjleer nw~ Fme OJeefve keâe kegâÚ Yeeie Gme
s
Jemleg mes škeâjekeâj ØeefleOJeefve kesâ ™he ceW š^sve hej Jeeheme
Now,
Dee peelee nw~ lees š^sve kesâ [^eFJej Éeje mebmetefÛele (Øeehle)
Frequency heard by observer,
Fme ØeefleOJeefve keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer:
 V  (speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1)
fmin = f  
 V + Vs  (OJeefve keâer JeeÙeg keâer Ûeeue · 330 ms–1)
(a) 5000 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
 340 
fmin = 385   (c) 3500 Hz (d) 4000 Hz
 340 + 10  AIPMT (Mains)-2012
fmin = 374 Hz Ans. (a) : • The phenomenon of apparent change in
77. Two sources P and Q produce notes of frequency of source due to a relative motion between
frequency 660 Hz each. A listener moves from the source and observer is called Doppler's effect.
P to Q with a speed of 1 ms–1. If the speed of • When train (source) is moving towards the stationary
sound is 330 m/s, then the number of beats observer then –
heard by the listener per second will be  v 
f'=f  .....(i)
oes œeesle PDeewj Q ØelÙeskeâ 660 Hz DeeJe=efòe kesâ veesš  v − vs 
GlheVe keâjles nw~ Skeâ ßeeslee P mes Q keâer Deesj 1 where, vs = source velocity
ceer/meskesâC[ keâer Ûeeue mes peelee nw, Ùeefo OJeefve keâer ieefle v = velocity of sound
330 ceer/meskesâC[ nw, lees Øeefle meskesâC[ ßeeslee Éeje megveer v0 = observer velocity
f ' = apparent frequency
ieF& mhebove keâer mebKÙee nesieer- f = frequency of sound
(a) Zero (b) 4 Given that: vs = 220 m/sec
(c) 8 (d) 2 f = 1000 Hz
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka v = 330 m/sec
Physics 315 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When source and observer both are moving– Ans. (a):
 v + v0 
f'=f 
 v − vs 
 330 + 220 
f ' = 1000   (v0 = vs)
 330 − 220 
 550 
= 1000  
 110 
f ' = 5000 Hz
Note - v0 = vs because sound reaching the object get Apparent frequency heard by the observer is given by-
reflected back to the train as echo.
79. The driver of a car traveling with speed 30  v + v0 
f' = f  
m/sec towards a hill sounds a horn of frequency  v − v0 
600 Hz. If the velocity of sound in air is 330
m/s, the frequency of reflected sound as heard Where, v = Velocity of sound
by driver is:/Skeâ keâej 30 m/sec keâer Ûeeue mes Skeâ v0 = Velocity of car = vs
heneÌ[er keâer Deesj Ûeue jner nw~ Gmekeâe Ûeeuekeâ 600 Hz Frequency of reflected sound heard by driver-
DeeJe=efòe keâe neve& yepeelee nw~ Ùeefo JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve keâer  v + vs 
2f = f  
Ûeeue 300 m/s nes lees Ûeeuekeâ Éeje megveer ngF& hejeJeefle&le  v − vs 
OJeefve keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer:
v + vs
(a) 500 Hz (b) 550 Hz 2=
(c) 555.5 Hz (d) 720 Hz v − vs
AIMPT-2009 2v – 2vs = v + vs
Ans. (d) : Given car speed u = 30 m/s 2v – v = vs + 2vs
Frequency of Horn v = 600 Hz v = 3vs
Velocity of sound in air c = 330 m/s
v
As the source is moving towards the hill (the listener), vs =
Therefore apparent frequency of horn, 3
 c  81. An observer moves towards a stationary source
ν' =  ν of sound with a speed 1/5th of the speed of
 c-u 
sound. The wavelength and frequency of the
330 330× 600
= × 600 = source emitted are λ and f respectively. The
330 - 30 300
apparent frequency and wavelength recorded
ν ' = 660 Hz by the observer are respectively:
For reflected sound, driver acts as listener moving Skeâ Øes#ekeâ Skeâ efmLej OJeefve œeesle keâer Deesj OJeefve Ûeeue
towards source,
(c + u)ν' (330 + 30)× 660
keâer 1/5th Ûeeue mes Ûeue jne nw~ œeesle mes Glmeefpe&le
∴ ν" = = lebjieowOÙe& Deewj DeeJe=efòe ›eâceMe: λ Deewj f nQ~ Øes#ekeâ Éeje
c 330
360× 660 megveer ieF& DeeYeemeer DeeJe=efòe Deewj lebjieowOÙe& ›eâceMe: nw:
ν" = = 360× 2
330 (a) 1.2f, 1.2λ (b) 1.2f, λ
ν " = 720 Hz. (c) f, 1.2λ (d) 0.8f, 0.8λ
80. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The car AIPMT-2003
driver sounds a horn of frequency 'f'. The Ans. (b): Given data- Velocity of source, vs = 0
reflected sound heard by the driver has a
frequency 2f. If 'v' be the velocity of sound then 1
Velocity of observer, v0 =   v = 0.2 v
the velocity of the car, in the same velocity 5
units, will be - /Skeâ ceesšj ieeÌ[er Skeâ TBÛeer heneÌ[er keâer Where v = the velocity of sound
efoMee ceW Ûeue jner nw~ ceesšj Ûeeuekeâ 'f' DeeJe=efòe keâe ne@ve& Now
yepeelee nw~ Ûeeuekeâ hejeJeefle&le 2f DeeJe=efòe keâer OJeefve
 v + v0 
megvelee nw~ Ùeefo OJeefve 'v' Jesie cee$ekeâ nes, lees Fvner Jesie f '= f
cee$ekeâeW ceW keâej keâe Jesie nesiee-  v − vs 
(a) v/3 (b) v/4 vs = 0 v0 = 0.2v
(d) v / 2  v + v0 
(c) v/2 f '= f
AIPMT-2004  v 

Physics 316 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 v + 0.2 v  14.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
f '= f
 v 
1.2 v
f'= f = 1.2f 84. Water waves produced by a motor boat sailing
v in water are/peue ceW Ûeueleer ceesšj yeesš Éeje Glhevve
Motion of the observer doesn't affect λ, so it remains peue lejbieW–
constant. (a) neither longitudinal nor transverse/ve lees
82. If a source moves perpendicularly from listener DevegowIÙe& nesleer nQ ve ner DevegØemLe~
then the change in frequency will be :
(b) both longitudinal and transverse/DevegowIÙe& Deewj
Ùeefo keâesF& n DeeJe=efòe keâe œeesle ßeeslee mes uecyeJeled ieefle DevegØemLe oesveeW nesleer nQ~
keâjs lees DeeJe=efòe ceW heefjJele&ve nesiee– (c) only longitudinal/kesâJeue DevegowIÙe& nesleer nQ~
(a) 2n (b) n (c) n/2
(d) Zero (d) only transverse./kesâJeue DevegØemLe nesleer nQ~
AIPMT-1998
Ans. (b) : The waves formed on the surface of water are
Ans. (d) : If source moves perpendicular to observer's transverse waves. Inside the water, longitudinal waves
motion then change in frequency = 0 are produced due to vibrations of the rudder.
Note–No doppler's effect occurs. Hence, both transverse as well as longitudinal waves are
83. Two trains move towards each other with the produced while a motor boat sails in water.
same speed. The speed of sound is 340 m/s. If • The waves in which the particles oscillate parallel to
the height of the tone of the whistle of one of the direction of the propagation are called the
them heard on the other changes to 9/8 times, longitudinal waves.
then the speed of each train should be • The waves in which the particles oscillate
perpendicular to the direction of the propagation are
oes š^sve Skeâ otmejs keâer Deesj meceeve Jesie mes Dee jner nw~ called the transverse waves.
OJeefve keâe Jesie 340 ceeršj/meskeâC[ nw~ Ùeefo Skeâ keâer 85. Sound waves of wavelength λ travelling in a
meeršer keâer DeeJeepe otmejer š^sve keâes 9/8 iegvee megveeF& osleer medium with a speed of v ms–1 enter into another
medium where its speed is 2v ms–1. Wavelength of
nes lees š^sveeW keâe Jesie nesiee- sound waves in the second medium is/efkeâmeer ceeOÙece
(a) 20 m/s/20 ceeršj/meskeâC[
ceW v m/s keâer Ûeeue mes Ûeueleer ngF&, λ lejbieowIÙe& keâer OJeefve
(b) 2 m/s/2 ceeršj/meskeâC[ lejbies efkeâmeer DevÙe ceeOÙece ceW ØeJesMe keâjleer nQ efpemeceW Fvekeâer
(c) 200 m/s/200 ceeršj/meskeâC[ 2v m/s Ûeeue nesleer nw~ otmejs ceeOÙece ceW OJeefve lejbieeW keâe
(d) 2000 m/s/2000 ceeršj/meskeâC[ lejbieowIÙe& nesieer~
AIPMT-1991 λ
(a) λ (b) (c) 2λ (d) 4λ
Ans. (a) : Given that, 2
Speed of sound (v) = 340 m/sec Ans. (c) : The frequency remains the same whereas, the
9 wavelength and velocity changes when the wave passes
Apparent frequency ( f ap ) = f from one medium to the other.
8 The mathematical representation of the same is
where, f is actual frequency. v
ν=
 v + v0  λ
We know that, fap = f  
 v − vs  ⇒
v 2v
=
where, v is velocity of sound, v0 is velocity of observer, λ λ'
vs is velocity of source ∴ λ' = 2λ
Velocity of source = Velocity of observer Therefore, the wavelength of sound waves in the second
vs = v0 medium is 2λ
 v + v0  86. Speed of sound wave in air/JeeÙeg ceW OJeefve keâer lejbieeW
so, fap = f   keâer Ûeeue
 v − v0 
(a) is independent of temperature/leehe mes mJeleb$e
9  340 + v 0  nesleer nw~
f =f 
8  340 − v 0  (b) increases with pressure/oeye kesâ meeLe yeÌ{leer nw~
9 (340 – v0) = 8 (340 + v0) (c) increases with increase in humidity/Deeõlee yeÌ{ves
3060 – 9 v0 = 2720 + 8 v0 kesâ meeLe yeÌ{leer nw~
17 v0 = 340 (d) decreases with increase in humidity./DeeoÇlee
v0 = 20 m/sec. yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe Iešleer nw~
Physics 317 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): The speed of sound in air is 343 m/sec. 89. Which of the following statements is true for
The speed of sound in air is directly proportional to the wave motion?/lejbie ieefle kesâ mebyebOe ceW efvecveefueefKele
square root of temperature is given by– ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw?
vair ∝ T (a) Mechanical transverse waves can propagate
Where, vair = Speed of sound in air through all mediums./Ùeebef$ekeâ DevegØemLe lejbieW Yeer
T = temperature of medium ceeOÙeceeW ceW ieceve keâj mekeâleer nQ~
Therefore, if the humidity increases then the density (b) Longitudinal waves can propagate through
decreases as a result speed of sound increases. Therefore, solids only./DevegowIÙe& lejbieW kesâJeue "esmeeW ceW ieceve keâj
as humidity increases speed of sound also increases. mekeâleer nQ~
87. Change in temperature of the medium changes/ (c) Mechanical transverse waves can propagate
ceeOÙece kesâ leehe heefjJele&ve mes– through solids only./Ùeebef$ekeâ DevegØemLe lejbieW kesâJeue
(a) frequency of sound waves/OJeefve lejbieeW keâer DeeJe=efle "esmeeW ceW ieceve keâj mekeâleer nQ~
heefjJeefle&le nes peeleer nw~ (d) Longitudinal waves can propagate through
(b) amplitude of sound waves/OJeefve lejbieeW keâe DeeÙeece vacuum./DevegowIÙe& lejbieW efveJee&le ceW ieceve keâj mekeâleer nQ~
yeoue peelee nw~ Ans. (c) : The transverse waves propagate through the
(c) wavelength of sound waves./OJeefve lejbieeW keâe solid and they also propagate through the surface of the
lejbieowIÙe& yeoue peelee nw~ liquid.
(d) loudness of sound waves/OJeefve lejbieeW keâer Øeyeuelee • Mechanical transverse waves can propagate through
yeoue peeleer nw~ solids only because transverse waves are shear waves,
which move perpendicular to direction of propagation.
Ans. (c) : Change in temperature of the medium
changes the velocity of sound wave changes and hence • Longitudinal wave can propagate through all type of
the wavelength of sound waves. This is because medium but not through vacuum as for the propagation
v of these waves medium is necessary.
frequency f = is fixed. 90. A sound wave is passing through air column in
λ the form of compression and rarefaction. In
The relationship of the speed of sound, its frequency
consecutive compressions and rarefactions,/Skeâ
and wavelength is the same as for all waves : vw = fλ
Where v is the speed of sound, f is its frequency and λ
OJeefve lejbie keâer JeeÙegmleber ceW mebheer[veeW Deewj efJejueveeW kesâ
is its wavelength. ™he ceW iegpej jner nQ~ ›eâefcekeâ mebheer[veeW Deewj efJejueveeW ceW
The speed of the sound wave in the medium. (a) density remains constant/IevelJe DeÛej jnlee nw~
γRT (b) Boyle's law is obeyed/yee@Ùeue kesâ efveÙece keâe heeueve
v= ......(i) neslee nw~
M
Where γ is the specific heat ratio, R is the gas constant, (c) bulk modulus of air oscillates eeÙeg keâe DeeÙeleve
T is the temperature and M is the mass. ØelÙeemLelee iegCeebkeâ oesueve keâjlee nw~
Here, γ, R, M are constant. (d) there is no transfer of heat./T<cee keâe mLeeveeblejCe
⇒ v∝ T veneR neslee~
Consider the formula v = fλ Ans. (d) : Rarefaction : Rarefaction is the region of
v ∝ λ ... (ii) expansion of particles due to compression in adjoining
Comparing the equation (i) & (ii) shows that, the molecules during wave propagation, appearing in the
wavelength of the wave changes with the temperature as light zone in the wave diagram or when particles of
the speed of the wave changes with the temperature. sound waves are away from each other this
88. With propagation of longitudinal waves phenomenon is called rarefaction.
through a medium, the quantity transmitted
• A sound wave is passing through the air column in the
is/efkeâmeer ceeOÙece ceW DevegowIÙe& lejbieeW kesâ Øeieceve mes pees
form of compression and rarefaction. In consecutive
jeefMe mebÛeefjle nesleer nw Jen nw– compression and rarefaction. Because air is a poor
(a) matter/õJÙe (b) energy/Tpee& conductor of heat, there is no heat transfer from
(c) energy and matter/Tpee& SJeb õJÙe compression to rarefaction and time of compression as
(d) energy, matter and momentum/Tpee&, õJÙe SJeb well as rarefaction too small.
mebJesie 91. Equation of a plane progressive wave is given
Ans. (b): The wave propagates from one point to the  x
by y = 0.6 sin 2 π  t +  . On reflection from a
other in a medium. By transmitting the energy, the  2
particles of the medium vibrate in a direction parallel to 2
the direction of energy transport. The matter of the denser medium its amplitude becomes of the
propagation wave remains constant. Only the energy 3
gets transmitted by the propagating wave. Thus the amplitude of the incident wave. The equation of
wave transmits only energy. So, option (b) is correct. the reflected wave is
Physics 318 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ meceleue Øeieeceer lejbie keâe meceerkeâjCe y = 0.6 sin 2π T
 x v=
µ
 t +  nw~ Skeâ meIeve ceeOÙece mes heefjJele&ve nesves hej
 2 200 1000 200000
Fmekeâe DeeÙeece Deeheeflele lejbie kesâ DeeÙeece keâe 2/3 nes = × =
0.125 1000 125
peelee nw~ hejeJeefle&le lejbie keâe meceerkeâjCe nw–
= 1600 = 40m/s
 x ∴ Time taken by the disturbance to reach the other end.
(a) y = 0.6 sin 2π  t + 
 2 l 20 1
t= = = = 0.5s.
 x v 40 2
(b) y = –0.4 sin 2π  t + 
 2 93. A train whistling at constant frequency is
moving towards a station at a constant speed v.
 x The train goes past a stationary observer on the
(c) y = 0.4 sin 2π  t + 
 2 station. The frequency n of the sound as heard
 x by the observer is plotted as a function of time
(d) y = –0.4 sin 2π  t +  t. Identify the expected curve./efveÙele DeeJe=efòe keâer
 2
meeršer yepeeleer ngF& Skeâ jsueieeÌ[er DeÛej Jesie v mes mšsMeve
2 keâer Deesj pee jner nw~ jsueieeÌ[er mšsMeve hej Skeâ efmLej
Ans. (b) : Given, Amplitude of reflected wave = × 0.6
3 Øes#ekeâ kesâ heeme mes iegpejleer nw~ Øes#ekeâ Éeje megveer ieF&
New amplitude = 0.4 OJeefve keâer DeeJe=efle n keâe meceÙe d kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW
The incident wave is given. «eeheâ yeveeÙee ieÙee~ Dehesef#ele Je›eâ keâes henÛeeefveS~
 x
y = 0.6 sin 2π  t + 
 2
On reflection from a denser medium there is phase
change of 180.
Therefore, Equation of reflected wave is,
 2 πx 
y = 0.4 sin  2 πt + + π
 2 
 x 
y = 0.4sin 2π  t + + π 
 2 
 x
= –0.4sin 2π  t +  Ans. (c):
 2
92. A string of mass 2.5 kg is under a tension of 200
N. The length of the stretched string is 20 m. If
the transverse jerk is struck at one end of the
string, the disturbance will reach the other end
in/2.5kg õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ [esjer ceW 200N keâe leveeJe
nw~ leeefvele [esjer keâer uebyeeF& 20.0m nw~ Ùeefo [esjer kesâ Whistling train is the source of sound, vs = B
Skeâ efmejs hej Skeâ DevegØemLe mhebo Glhevve efkeâÙee peeS lees Before crossing a stationary observer on station,
frequency heard is
efJe#eCe Fmekesâ otmejs efmejs hej hengBÛesiee–
 v 
(a) one second/Skeâ meskebâ[ ceW n' =   no Where vs = speed of source
(b) 0.5 second/0.5 meskebâ[ ceW  v − vs 
Where no is the original frequency of the source of
(c) 2 second/2 meWkeâ[ ceW
sound
(d) data given is insufficient./efoS ieS DeebkeâÌ[s V = speed of sound in the medium
DeheÙee&hle nQ~ n' > no
Ans. (b) : Given, Mass of string, M = 2.50 kg Here, v is velocity of sound in air and n is actual
frequency of whistle.
Tension in the string, T = 200 N
After crossing the stationary observer, frequency heard
Length of the string, l = 20.0m
vn o
Mass per unit length, is n' =
M 2.5 v + vs
µ= = = 0.125kg / m n' = no
l 20
The velocity (v) of the transverse wave in the string is and n' <n
given by the relation Therefore, the expected curve is (c).

Physics 319 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
15.
Electric Charges and Fields
5 Q
15.1 Electric Charge = 3 2
1

4πR
1. Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the 5 4πr 2 σ
other of radius 2R respectively have the same = 3 2
4πR
surface charge density σ. They are brought in
contact and separated. What will be the new 5
σ1 = σ
surface charge densities on them? 3
oes Oeeleg kesâ ieesueeW, efpeveceW Skeâ keâer ef$epÙee R leLee otmejs Q'
keâer ef$epÙee 2R nw, kesâ he=‰erÙe DeeJesMe IevelJe meceeve, σ Surface charge density σ2 = 4π ( 2r )2
1

nQ~ FvnW Skeâ otmejs kesâ mecheke&â ceW ueekeâj efheâj he=Lekeâ keâj
2Q'2
efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Fve hej veS he=‰erÙe DeeJesMe IevelJe keäÙee =
4π4r 2
neWies? 5 2 2×
× 4πr σ
5 5 5 5 3
=
(a) σ1 = σ, σ 2 = σ (b) σ1 = σ, σ 2 = σ 4π4r 2
3 6 6 2
10 1σ 5
5 5 5 5 σ2 = × = σ
(c) σ1 = σ, σ 2 = σ (d) σ1 = σ, σ 2 = σ 3 4 6
2 6 2 3 5
2. 10 coulomb's charge liberated 1 gm silver
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
(Ag). If now charge is doubled then the amount
Ans. (a) : of liberated Ag will be/105 ketâuee@ce DeeJesMe ØeJeeefnle
Case (I) keâjves hej efmeuJej keâe 1 «eece DeJe#esefhele neslee nw lees
ogievee DeeJesMe ØeJeeefnle keâjves hej DeJe#esefhele efmeuJej
nesieer–
Surface are Q1 = (4πr2) σ (a) 1 gm/«eece (b) 2 gm /«eece
Q2 = 4π (2r)2 σ (c) 3 gm/«eece (d) 4 gm/«eece
= 4(4πr2) σ AIPMT-1998
Q2 = 4Q1 –––– (1) Ans. (b) : Total charge flowing through Quantitative
Case (II) metal spheres in contact and separated Electrolysis Q = It
Q
I=
t
Faraday's law of electrolysis
m = zIt
m = zIt = zQ
KQ1' KQ'2 So, m∝Q
V= =
R 2R If charge is doubled then amount of librated Ag will be
Q'2 = 2Q1' ––––– (II) double, so answer will be 2 gm.
3. The given figure gives electric lines of force due
By consolation of charge to two charges q1 and q2. What are the signs of
Q1 + Q2 = Q'2 + 2Q1' the two charges?/efoÙes ieÙes efÛe$e ceW oes DeeJesMe q1
Q1 + 4Q1 = Q'1 + 2Q1' Deewj q2 kesâ keâejCe efJeÅegle #es$e jsKeeDeeW keâes oMee&lee nw~
5Q1 = 3Q'1
oesveeW DeeJesMeeW keâe efÛevn keäÙee nw?
5
Q '1 = Q1 –––––– (III)
3
Q '1
Surface charge density σ1 =
4 πR 2

Physics 320 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) q1 is positive but q2 is negative/q1 Oeveelcekeâ nw Ans. (a): The ratio of coulomb's electrostatic force to
uesefkeâve q2 $e+Ceelcekeâ nw~ the gravitational force is given by –
(b) q1 is negative but q2 is positive/q1 $e+Ceelcekeâ nw
uesefkeâve q2 Oeveelcekeâ nw~
(c) both are negative/oesvees $e+Ceelcekeâ nQ~
(d) both are positive/oesveeW Oeveelcekeâ nQ~
AIPMT-1994 2.4 × 1039 =
Ans. (c) : • Both the two charges are negative.
• Positive charge, directs the line of force radically K
outward and negative charge directs the electric line of ≈ 1020
G
force radically inward.
5. The acceleration of an electron due to the
mutual attraction between the electron and a
proton when they are 1.6 Å apart is,
o
peye Fueskeäš^e@ve Deewj Øeesš^eve kesâ yeerÛe 1.6 A keâer otjer nw
lees Gve oesveeW kesâ yeerÛe DevÙeesvÙe Deekeâ<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe
• Given figure Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe lJejCe neslee nw,
 1 2 –2 
 Take/ ueeerfpeS 4πε = 9×10 Nm C , 
9

 0 
 M 9×10–31 kg,e = 1.6×10 –19 C 
 e 
25 2 24 2
∵ Electric line of force are radically inward. (a) 10 m/s (b) 10 m/s
(c) 1023 m/s2 (d) 1022 m/s2
⇒ charges are –ve.
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II

15.2 Coulomb's Law 1 e2

Ans. (d) : From Coulomb's law, F =
4 πε 0 r 2
4. The ratio of Coulomb's electrostatic force to Given, r = 1.6Aº = 1.6×10-10 m.
the gravitational force between an electron and
( )
2
9 ×109 × 1.6 × 10−19
a proton separated by some distance is 2.4 × F= = 9 × 10−9 N
( )
2
1039. The ratio of the proportionality constant, 1.6 ×10−10 m
1 Acceleration of electron,
K = to the Gravitational constant G is From Newton's law, F = m a
4πε 0 e e
−9
nearly (Given that the charge of the proton and Acceleration of electron (ae) = F = 9 × 10
electron each = 1.6 × 10–19C, the mass of the m e 9 × 10 −31
electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg the mass of the proton ae = 10 m/s2
22

= 1.67 × 10–27 kg): 6. Two identical charged spheres suspended from

a common point by two massless strings of
efkeâmeer otjer hej efmLele Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve SJeb Skeâ Øeesše@ve kesâ lengths l , are initially at a distance d (d ≪ l ) a
yeerÛe ueieves Jeeues ketâuee@ce kesâ mLeweflekeâ JewÅegle yeue SJeb part because of their mutual repulsion. The
charges begin to leak from both the spheres at
ieg®lJeerÙe yeue keâe Devegheele 2.4 × 10 nw~ 39
a constant rate. As a result, the spheres
1 approach each other with a velocity v. Then v
Deveg›eâceevegheeleer efmLejebkeâ K = keâe ieg®lJeerÙe varies as a function of the distance x between
4πε 0
the spheres as:
efmLejebkeâ G mes Devegheele keâe ceeve ueieYeie nesiee: (efoÙee efkeâmeer GYeÙeefve‰ efyevog mes, uecyeeF& l keâer oes
nw, Øeesše@ve SJeb Fueskeäš^e@ve ØelÙeskeâ hej DeeJesMe = 1.6 × õJÙeceevenerve [esefjÙeeW mes efveuebefyele, oes meJe&mece DeeJesefMele
10–19C, Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve = 9.1 × 10–31 kg
ieesues, DevÙeesvÙe Øeeflekeâ<e&Ce kesâ keâejCe, DeejcYe ceW Skeâ
otmejs mes d (d≪ l ) otjer hej nw~ oesveeW ner ieesueeW mes Skeâ
Øeesše@ve keâe õJÙeceeve = 1.67 × 10–27 kg) efveÙele oj mes DeeJesMe keâe #ejCe DeejcYe neslee nw, Deewj
(a) 1020 (b) 1030 Fmekesâ heefjCeecemJe™he ieesues Skeâ otmejs keâer Deesj Jesie v mes
(c) 1040 (d) 10 Deeles nw~ leye ieesueeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer, x kesâ Heâueve kesâ
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 ™he ceW Jesie efJeÛejCe efkeâme ™he ceW neslee nw?
Physics 321 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) v ∝ x -1 (b) v ∝ x1/2
(c) v ∝ x (d) v ∝ x -1/2
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Ans. (d) : consider the situation as described in figure,
Let m be the mass of sphere, q is charge on respective
spheres, F is coulomb force between two charge. 2
A  2r   1 
(a)   (b)  
 3  2
 r   2r 
(c)  3  (d)  
 2  3
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Ans. (c) :

θ θ
cos cos

Balancing the forces,

∑ Fx = 0 ⇒ T sinθ = F
∑ Fy = 0 ⇒ T cosθ = mg
F mg mg mg mg
⇒ tan θ =
mg
F = mg tanθ [∵ θ is very small (d<<l)] Case (1) : Fe cos θ = mg sinθ
2
Kq x x Fe
= mg × [∴ θ = = tan θ ] = tan θ
x2 2l 2l mg
 mg  3 Fe Fe
q2 =  x mg = or tan θ =
 2Kl  tan θ mg
q = K0 x3 / 2  q2  1
tan θ =  2  ........(i)
Rate of charge leakage -  r ( mg ) 
4π ∈o
dq 3 dx Case (II) : Fe' cos θ1 = mg sinθ1
= K 0 x1/ 2
dt 2 dt Fe
= tan θ1
dq mg
Here = constant
dt Fe
dx mg =
=v tan θ1
dt Fe
tanθ =
v ∝ x −1/ 2 mg
7. Two pith balls carrying equal charges are 1  q2 
suspended from a common point by strings of tanθ1 =   .......(ii)
4πε 0  r '2 ( mg ) 
equal length, the equilibrium separation
between them is r. Now the strings are rigidly Now dividing (i) by (ii), we get
clamped at half the height. The equilibrium tan θ r '2
separation between the balls now become : =
tan θ1 r 2
mejkebâ[s (efheLe) keâer oes yee@ueeW (ieesefueÙeeW) hej meceeve
 
(yejeyej) DeeJesMe nQ~ FvnW meceeve uecyeeF& keâer [esefjÙeeW  r 
(Oeeies) mes Skeâ efyevog keâes ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw~ meblegueve keâer  2 
 y r '2
DeJemLee ceW Fvekesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer r nw~ oesveeW [esefjÙeeW keâes =
 r'  r2
Gvekeâer DeeOeer uecyeeFÇ& hej keâme keâj yeeBOe efoÙee peelee nw~ 
2

 
Deye mevlegueve keâer efmLeefle ceW oesveeW yee@ueeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer 
y

2
otjer nesieer~  

Physics 322 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r y r '2 4πε0 Fd 2 4πε 0 Fe 2
× = (a) (b)
2y r ' r 2 e2 d2
r3 4πε0 Fd 2
4πε 0 Fd 2
r '3 = (c) (d)
2 d2
e2
r AIPMT (Screening)-2010
r' = 3
2 Ans. (c) : Two positive ions each carrying a charge q
8. A charge q is placed at the centre of the line are kept at a distance d, then it is found that force of
joining two equal charges Q. The system of the repulsion between them is,
three charges will be in equilibrium if q is 1 q2
equal to/Skeâ DeeJesMe q oes meceeve DeeJesMe Q keâes F= , where q = ne
4πε o d 2
efceueeves Jeeueer jsKee kesâ kesâvõ hej efmLele nw~ leerve DeeJesMeeW
keâe Ùen efvekeâeÙe meecÙe ceW nesiee Ùeefo q yejeyej nw: 1 n 2e2
F=
(a) –Q/4 (b) Q/4 4πε o d 2
(c) –Q/2 (d) Q/2
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka 4πεo Fd 2
n=
AIPMT- 1995 e2
Ans. (a) :
10. Point charges +4q, – q and +4q are kept on the
x-axis at point x = 0, x = a and x = 2a
respectively. Then
efyevog DeeJesMe +4q, – q leLee +4q, x- De#e kesâ efyevog x
For all the three charges to be in equilibrium, net force
on each charge should be zero. = 0, x = a, x = 2a hej jKes ieÙes nQ~ leye
Both other charge +Q will exert equal & opposite force (a) only –q is in stable equilibrium/kesâJeue –q
on q. Therefore net effect will be zero.
DeeJesMe mLeeÙeer meblegueve ceW nQ~
Also, for equilibrium of charge Q, force applied by both
the charges ie, another Q & q should be equal in (b) all the charges are in stable equilibrium/ meYeer
magnitude & opposite in direction. Therefore q must be DeeJesMe mLeeÙeer meblegueve ceW nQ~
negative.
(c) all of the charges are in unstable
equilibrium/meYeer DeeJesMe DemLeeÙeer
meblegueve ceW nQ~
(d) none of the charges is in equilibrium/ keâesF& Yeer
kQ 2 DeeJesMe meblegueve ceW veneR nQ~
FQQ = Force on Q due to Q =
( 2d )2 AIPMT-1988
− kQq Ans. (c) :
FQq = force on Q due to q =
d2
i.e, FQQ = – FQq
kQ2 –kQq
⇒ =
4d 2 d2
–Q (1) Force on charge (–q) due to (+4q) will be equal &
∴ q=
4 opposite to each other.
9. Two positive ions, each carrying a charge q, are k 4q q k4q 2
ie, Fq = = 2
separated by a distance d. If F is the force of a2 a
repulsion between the ions, the number of ∵ Fq will be equal & opposite to each other
electrons missing from each ion will be (e being
the charge on an electron) – ∴ Net effect will be cancelled.
oes Oeveelcekeâ DeeÙeve ØelÙeskeâ hej DeeJesMe q nw Skeâ otmejs (2) Force on outer (+4q) charge due to (+4q) & (–q)
mes d otjer Éeje he=Lekeâ nQ~ Ùeefo F DeeÙeveeW kesâ ceOÙe charge,
Øeeflekeâ<e&Ce yeue nw, lees ØelÙeskeâ DeeÙeveeW mes keâce ngÙes F4q/q = force on outer (4q) charge due to (q)
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer mebKÙee nesieer (e Skeâ Fueskeäš^@eve hej k 4q.q 4 kq 2
= = 2 ........(i)
DeeJesMe nw)– a2 a
Physics 323 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
F4q / 4q = force on outer (4q) charge due to (4q) 1 1
(a) (b)
k 4q.4q 4 kq 2 R6 R2
= = 2 .......(ii) 1 1
( 2a ) 2 a (c) (d)
R3 R4
from (i) & (ii) NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
F4q / q = F4q / 4q Ans. (c) : Electric field intensity at point P on the given
axis
∴ Net force on outer charge is '0'.
Hence, net force or all charges are zero so all changes
are in equilibrium but if any charge is disturbed then it EA P
start motion so all charges are in unstable equilibrium.
R
We know that
15.3 Electric Field 2KPR
E=
(R − L2 )
2 2

11. If a conducting sphere of radius R is charged.

then the electric field at a distance r(r>R) from So R >> L
the centre of the sphere would be, (V= potential 2KPR
E=
on the surface of the sphere)
(R2 )
2

Ùeefo ef$epÙee R kesâ Skeâ mebJeenkeâ ieesues keâes DeeJesefMele

efkeâÙee peelee nw~ efheâj efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ keWâvõ mes otjer 2KPR
E=
r(r>R) hej efJeÅegle #es$e nesiee, (V= ieesues keâer melen hej R4
2KP
efJeYeJe) E= 3
R
RV V
(a) (b) 1
r
2
r E∝
R3
2
rV R V 13. A spherical conductor of radius 10 cm has a
(c) (d)
R
2
r
3 charge of 3.2 × 10–7 C distributed uniformly.
What is the magnitude of electric field at a
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 point 15 cm from the centre of the sphere?
Ans. (a) : For r >R, 10 cm ef$epÙee kesâ efkeâmeer ieesueerÙe Ûeeuekeâ hej 3.2 × 10–7
Electric field at a distance r from the centre of the C DeeJesMe Skeâmeceeve ™he mes efJeleefjle nw~ Fme ieesues kesâvõ
sphere would be- mes 15 cm otjer hej efJeÅegle #es$e keâe heefjceeCe keäÙee nw?
Kq
E = 2 ..........(i)  1 
r  = 9×109 Nm 2 /C2 
and potential at surface of sphere is-  4π ∈0 
Kq (a) 1.28 × 105 N/C (b) 1.28 × 106 N/C
V= 7
R (c) 1.28 × 10 N/C (d) 1.28 × 104 N/C
from equation (i), NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (a) Charge present inside sphere is q = 3.2×10-7 C
Er 2
V= electric field is to be determined at a point at r = 15 cm
R Since point is outside the sphere, electric field can be
RV obtained by considering point charge of same
⇒E= 2
r magnitude at distance of 15 cm from the sphere as
12. Two point charges –q and +q are placed at a whole charge is concentrated at center.
distance of L, as shown in the figure. 1 q
Electric field, E =
4πε 0 r 2
3.2 ×10−7
= 9 ×109 ×
The magnitude of electric field intensity at a 0.225
distance R(R>>L) varies as: E = 1.28 × 10 5 NC −1
efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej oes efyevog DeeJesMeeW –q SJeb +q 14. Two point charges A and B, having charges +Q
keâes, L otjer hej jKee peelee nw~ and –Q respectively, are placed at certain
otjer R(R>>L) kesâ meeLe, efJeÅegle #es$e keâer leer›elee keâe distance apart and force acting between them is
F. If 25% charge of A is transferred to B, then
heefjceeCe efvecveevegmeej heefjJeefle&le nesiee: force between the charges becomes :
Physics 324 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
oes efyevog DeeJesMe A Deewj B efpeve hej ›eâceMe: + Q Deewj – Ans. (b)
Q DeeJesMe nw, Skeâ otmejs mes kegâÚ otjer hej efmLele nQ Deewj
Fvekesâ yeerÛe ueieves Jeeuee yeue F nw~ Ùeefo A keâe 25%
DeeJesMe B keâes mLeeveevleefjle keâj efoÙee peeS, lees DeeJesMeeW
kesâ yeerÛe yeue nes peeSiee~
9F 16F
(a) (b)
16 9
4F
(c) (d) F
3 ur λ $
Electric field due to line charge (1) E1 = iN/C
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 2πε0 R
Ans. (a) : ur λ $
Electric field due to line charge (2) E 2 = iN/C
2πε 0 R
ur ur ur
KQ ( −Q ) E = E1 + E2
Force (F) =
r2 λ $ λ $
= i+ i
–KQ 2 2πε 0 R 2πε 0 R
=
r2 λ $
= iN/C
If 25% charge of A transferred to B then πε 0 R
16. A hollow metal sphere of radius R is uniformly
charged. The electric field due to the sphere at
a distance r from the centre
 3Q  –3Q 
ef$epÙee R kesâ efkeâmeer KeesKeues Oeeleg kesâ ieesues keâes
K   Skeâmeceeve DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ kesâvõ mes otjer r hej
Force (F') = 
4  4 
r 2 ieesues kesâ keâejCe efJeÅegle #es$e:
9 (a) Zero as r increases for r < R, decreases as r
–K   Q 2 increases for r > R
=  16 
r2
peye r yeÌ{lee nw lees r < R kesâ efueS MetvÙe nes peelee nw
9  –KQ 2 
leLee r > R kesâ efueS Ieš peelee nw~
=  2  (b) Zero as r increases for r < R, increases as r
16  r  increases for r > R
9F peye r yeÌ{lee nw lees r < R kesâ efueS MetvÙe nes peelee nw
=
16 leLee r > R kesâ efueS yeÌ{ peelee nw~
15. Two parallel infinite line charges with linear (c) Decreases as r increases for r < R and for r >
charge densities +λ C/m and –λ C/m are placed R/ peye r yeÌ{lee nw lees r < R Deewj r > R kesâ efueS
at a distance of 2R in free space. What is the Iešlee nw~
electric field mid-way between the two line (d) Increases as r increases for r < R and for r >
charges? R/ peye r yeÌ{lee nw lees r < R Deewj r > R kesâ efueS
oes meceevlej Devevle jwefKekeâ DeeJesMe efpevekesâ jwefKekeâ yeÌ{lee nw~
DeeJesMe IevelJe +λC/m Deewj –λ C/m nQ, cegòeâ DeJekeâeMe NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
ceW 2R otjer hej jKes ieS nw~ Fve oes jwefKekeâ DeeJesMeeW kesâ Ans. (a) :
yeerÛe, ceOÙe ceW efJeÅegle #es$e efkeâlevee nw?
2λ λ
(a) N/C (b) N/C
πε 0 R πε 0 R
λ
(c) N/C (d) Zero/MetvÙe
2πε 0 R Charge Q will be distributed over the surface of hollow
metal sphere.
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Physics 325 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(1) For r < R (inside) From Newton's seconds law of motion -
ur uur q 1
By Gauss law ∫ E in .ds = en = 0 h = ut + at 2
ε0 2
1 2
= E in = 0 (Qq en = 0 ) h = at ----------(ii)
uuur 2
E in = 0 Putting the value of a in equation (ii)
1 qE 2
h= t
2 m
2hm
t=
qE
(ii) For r > R (outside) As charge on electron & protons are same
ur uur q ⇒t∝ m
∫ 0 .ds = ε0o
E
Hence electron has smaller mass so it will take smaller
ur time.
Q
E .4πr 2 = 18. The electric field in a certain region is acting
ε0 radially outward and is given by E = Ar. A
ur Q charge contained in a sphere of radius 'a'
E= centered at the origin of the field, will be given by:
4πε 0 r 2
Skeâ efveef§ele #es$e ceW efJeÅegle #es$e jsef[Ùeue ™he mes yeenj
ur 1 keâer Deesj keâeÙe& keâj jne nw Deewj Fmes E = Ar Éeje efoÙee
E∝ 2
r ieÙee nw, #es$e kesâ cetue hej keWâefõle ef$epÙee 'a' kesâ Skeâ
17. An electron falls from rest through a vertical ieesues ceW efveefnle DeeJesMe nesiee~
distance h in a uniform and vertically upward (a) A ε0 a2 (b) 4 πε0 Aa3
directed electric field E. The direction of (c) ε0 Aa 3
(d) 4 πε0 Aa2
electric field is now reversed, keeping its AIPMT-03.05.2015
magnitude the same. A proton is allowed to fall Ans. (b) : According to question, electric field varies as
from rest in it through the same vertical E = Ar
distance h. The time of fall of the electron, in Here r is the radial distance.
comparison to the time of fall of the proton is / At r = a, E = Aa ......... (1)
keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve efJejeceeJemLee mes efkeâmeer Skeâmeceeve leLee
q
Thej keâes GOJee&Oej efJeÅegle-#es$e E ceW keâesF& oer ieF& otjer, Flux linked with the given sphere φ = in ...(2)
εo
h, efiejlee nw~ Deye efJeÅegle-#es$e keâe heefjceeCe DeheefjJeefle&le
jKeles ngS Fmekeâer efoMee Gl›eâefcele keâj oer peeleer nw~ efkeâmeer where qin = charge enclosed by the sphere
Øeesše@ve keâes efJejeceeJemLee mes Fleveer ner GOJee&Oej otjer h {φ = EA}
lekeâ FmeceW efiejves efoÙee peelee nw~ Øeesše@ve kesâ efiejves ceW efueS
ieS meceÙe keâer leguevee ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve Éeje efiejves ceW efueÙee
ieÙee meceÙe nw
(a) Smaller/ keâce
⇒ ( Aa ) × ( 4πa 2 ) = ⋅ (using eqn (1) & (2))
q
(b) 5 times greater /5iegvee DeefOekeâ
ε0
(c) Equal / meceeve
(d) 10 times greater / 10 iegvee DeefOekeâ q = 4 πε0 Aa 3

NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 19. A thin conducting ring of radius R is given a

Ans. (a) Force exerted by a charged particle in an charge + Q. The electric field at the centre O of
electric field, F = q E the ring due to the charge on the part AKB of
As, F = ma the ring is E. The electric field at the centre due
to the charge on the part ACDB of the ring is –
ma = q E
Skeâ heleueer efJeÅegle Ûeeuekeâ R ef$epÙee keâer efjbie (Úuues)
qE
a= ... ( i ) keâess + Q DeeJesMe efoÙee ieÙee nw~ efjbie kesâ kesâvõ O hej efjbie
m
As electron and proton both falls from same vertical
kesâ Yeeie AKB kesâ DeeJesMe kesâ keâejCe efJeÅegle Heâeru[ keâe
distance h at rest. ceeve E nw~ efjbie keâe Mes<e Yeeie ACDB kesâ DeeJesMe kesâ
Initial velocity u = 0 keâejCe kesâvõ O hej efJeÅegle #es$e keâe ceeve nesiee-
Physics 326 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
λ
E=
2 πε0a

(a) E along KO/ E, KO efoMee ceW

(b) 3E along OK/3E, OK efoMee ceW
(c) 3 E along KO/ 3E, KO efoMee ceW
(d) E along OK/ E,OK efoMee ceW
AIPMT-2008 21. A hollow sphere of radius 1m is given a positive
Ans. (d) : Given : Thin conducting ring charge of 10μC. The electric field at the centre
Radius = R of hollow sphere will be/efkeâmeer KeesKeues ieesues keâer
Charge = Q ef$epÙee 1 ceeršj DeeJesMe nw, lees KeesKeues ieesues kesâ keWâõ hej
electric field at O = E efJeÅegle #es$e keâe ceeve nesiee–
(a) 60 × 103 Vm–1 (b) 90 × 103 Vm–1
Charge on AKB = Q/4
∴ E at O due to AKB is due to change Q/4. (c) Zero/MetvÙe (d) Infinite/Devevle
In the part ACDB, intensity at O due to charges on AC AIPMT-1998
& DB Cancels out. Net intensity at O is due to charge Ans. (c) : Electric field will be zero at the centre of
Q/4 on part CD. Its value must be E along direction Ok. hollow sphere. This means that the potential inside the
20. Electric field at centre O of semicircle of radius shell is constant.
'a' having linear charge density λ is given by Sphere of radius = R
λ jsKeerÙe DeeJesMe IevelJe Jeeues a ef$epÙee kesâ Deæ&Je=òe kesâ
kesâvõ O hej efJeÅegle #es$e nesiee –

We consider a spherical surface of radius r<R

2λ λπ By Gauss's theorem,
(a) f = (b)
∈0 a ∈0 a → → 1
∫s E.ds = ε0 × Charge enclosed
λ λ
(c) (d)
2π ∈0 a π ∈0 a Or E.4πr 2 =
1
×0 ⇒ E = 0
AIPMT-2000 ε0
Ans. (c) : Considering symmetric elements each of 22. A charge q is placed in an uniform electric field
length dl at A & B we note that electric field E. If it is released, then the K.E of the charge
perpendicular to PO are cancelled & those along PO are after travelling distance y will be:/mece™he efJeÅegle #es$e
added. The electric field due to an element of length dl E ceW q DeeJesMe eqmLej jKee nw Ùeefo Gmes ÚesÌ[ efoÙee peeS lees y
(= adθ) along PO. otjer leÙe keâjves hej Gmes Øeehle ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer–
1 dq (a) qEy (b) 2qEy
dE = cos θ (Q dl = adθ)
4 πε0 a 2 qEy
(c) (d) qEy
1 λdl 2
dE = cos θ
4 πε0 a 2 AIPMT-1998
1 λ(adθ) Ans. (a) : Method - I
dE = cos θ From the Work-Energy theorem,
4 πε0 a 2
∆ K.E = F.d = work done on the body
Net electric field at O ∆ K.E = qE × y
π/2 π/2 1 λa cos θdθ ∆ K.E = qEy
E = ∫ dF = 2 ∫
−π / 2 0 4πε0 a2 Method - II
1 λ Force on charged particle in a uniform electric field is
E=2 [sin θ]0π / 2
4 πε 0 a F = ma = qE or

Physics 327 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Eq Q −3 Q −6
a= (a) × 10 (b) × 10
m 6ε0 6ε0
from Equation of motion , we have- −3
Q −6 2Q
v 2 = u 2 + 2ay (c) × 10 (d) × 10
ε0 3ε0
Eq
= 0 + 2× ×y RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
m
AIPMT-2001
Eqy
=2 Ans. (b): According to the Gauss's law, electric flux
m through a closed surface is.
Now kinetic energy of the particle Q
1 φnet =
K = mV 2 εo
2 Total electric flux through the cube is-
m 2Eqy Q × 10 −6
= × = qEy φT =
2 m εo
23. There is an electric field E in x-direction. If the
Since, charge is placed at centre of the cube therefore,
work done on moving a charge of 0.2 C flux thorough each face is same.
through a distance of 2 m along a line making
Now,
an angle 60º with x-axis is 4 J, then what is the
The flux coming out from any one of its faces will be-
value of E?/x-efoMee ceW Skeâ efJeÅegle #es$e E nw~ Ùeefo x-
1
De#e kesâ meeLe 60º keâesCe yeveeves Jeeueer jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe φ = φT
6
2 m keâer otjer mes 0.2 C kesâ Skeâ DeeJesMe keâes ieefle keâjeves
ceW 4 J keâeÙe& keâjvee heÌ[lee nw, lees E keâe ceeve keäÙee nw? 1 Q × 10 −6
= ×
(a) 5N/C (b) 20 N/C 6 εo

(c) 3 N/C (d) 4 N/C Q

φ= × 10 −6
AIPMT-1995 6ε o
Ans. (b) : ur uur
25. If ∫ E • dS = 0 over a surface, then :
s
r r
Ùeefo yevo he=‰ kesâ efueS ∫ E.dS = 0 nw , leye :
S

(a) the electric field inside the surface is necessarily

Given data: uniform./he=‰ kesâ Devoj Skeâmeceeve JewÅegle #es$e DeeJeMÙekeâ nw
Charge = 0.2C (b) the number of flux lines entering the surface
angle θ = 60º must be equal to the number of flux lines
work done = 4 J leaving it./ he=‰ ceW ØeJesMe keâjves Jeeueer Heäuekeäme jsKeeDeeW keâer
∵ work done = F.S = FS cos θ (Since F = qE) mebKÙee Fmes Úes[Ì ves Jeeueer Heäuekeäme jsKeeDeeW keâer mebKÙee kesâ
W = qES cos θ yejeyej nesveer ÛeeefnS~
⇒ 4 = 0.2 × E × 2 × cos 60º (c) the magnitude of electric field on the surface is
⇒ E=
2 consant./ he=‰ hej JewÅegle #es$e keâe heefjceeCe efveÙele nw~
0.2 × cos 60º (d) all the charges must necessarily be inside the
N surface./ meYeer DeeJesMe, he=‰ kesâ Devoj nesves DeeJeMÙekeâ nQ~
E = 20
C NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
r uur
Ans. (b) : ∫ E.dS represents electric flux over the
r uur
15.4 Electric Flux and Gauss's Law closed surface, when ∫ E.dS = 0.
It means the number of flux lines entering the surface
24. A charge Q µC is placed at the centre of a cube.
must be equal to number of flux lines leaving it.
The flux coming out from any one of its faces
will be (in SI unit) 26. According to gauss law of electrostatics, electric
Skeâ DeeJesMe Q µC Skeâ Ieve kesâ keWâvõ ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ flux through a closed surface depends on/efmLej
Fmekesâ efkeâmeer Skeâ melen mes efvekeâueves Jeeuee heäuekeäme nesiee JewÅegeflekeâer kesâ iee@me efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej, Skeâ yebo melen kesâ
(SmeDeeF& FkeâeF& ceW) ceeOÙece mes efJeÅegle heäuekeäme efveYe&j keâjlee nw
Physics 328 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) The shape of the surface/melen keâe Deekeâej If the radius of the Gaussian surface is doubled, the
(b) The volume enclosed by the surface/melen mes outward electric flux will remain the same. This is
because of electric flux depends only on the charge
efIeje DeeÙeleve enclosed by the surface.
(c) The area of the surface/melen keâe #es$eheâue 29. A point charge +q is placed at the centre of a
(d) The quantity of charges enclosed by the cube of side l. The electric flux emerging from
surface/melen mes efIejs DeeJesMeeW keâer cee$ee the cube is
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 Skeâ Ieve (l Yegpee Jeeues) kesâ ceOÙe efyevog hej Skeâ DeeJesMe
Ans. (d) : According to Gauss law of electrostatics - q jKee ieÙee nw~ Ieve mes efvekeâueves Jeeuee JewÅegle heäuekeäme
ur r q nesiee:
φ = ∫ E.ds = enclosed
εo 6ql 2 q
(a) (b)
∴ Flux depends on quantity of charges enclosed by ε0 6l 2ε0
surface. q
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d)
27. A sphere encloses an electric dipole with ε0
charges ± 3 × 10–6 C. What is the total electric AIPMT-1996
flux across the sphere?
Ans. (d) : (i) According to gauss' law-
efkeâmeer ieesues ceW ± 3 × 10 C DeeJesMeeW keâe keâesF& efJeÅegle
–6
1
efÉOeÇgJe Deeyeæ nw~ Fme ieesues mes efvekeâueves Jeeuee kegâue Total electric flux through a closed surface is times
ε0
efJeÅegle heäuekeäme efkeâlevee nw?
the net charge enclosed by the surface.
(a) 6 × 10–6 Nm2/C (b) – 3 × 10–6 Nm2/C q
(c) Zero/MetvÙe (d) 3 × 10–6 Nm2/C Mathematically electric flux, φ =
ε0
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Ans. (c) :

Using formula
totalcharge ( algebraic sum )
Electric flux φ =
ε0
(ii) ∵ Electric flux through a closed surface is-
−q + q r uur
=
ε0 φ = ∫ E.ds
r uur q
φ=0 ∵ ∫ E.ds = ε 0
[where q' is the charge contained
Dipole have equal and opposite charge, So net charge
inside the sphere will be zero. in the cube]
From this expression, it is clear that electric flux
28. A charge Q is enclosed by a Gaussian spherical emerging from cube is independent of side of cube .
surface of radius R. If the radius is doubled,
then the outward electric flux will : q
∴ Total flux is φ =
Skeâ DeeJesMe Q, /ef$epÙee R kesâ efkeâmeer ieeGmeerÙe ieesueerÙe ε0
he=‰ mes heefjyeæ nw~ Ùeefo ef$epÙee keâes ogiegvee keâj efoÙee 30. A square surface of side L meters is in the
peeS lees, yeenj keâer Deesj efJeÅegle Heäuekeäme : plane of the paper. A uniform electric field E
(a) be doubled/oes iegvee nes peeSiee (volt/m), also in the plane of the paper, is
(b) increase four time/Ûeej iegvee yeÌ{ peeSiee limited only to the lower half of the square
surface, (see figure). The electric flux in SI
(c) be reduced to half/DeeOee nes peeSiee units associated with the surface is:-
(d) remain the same/Jener jnsiee L ceeršj Yegpe keâe Skeâ Jeiee&keâej leue keâeiepe he=‰ ceW
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 efmLele nw~ keâeiepe he=‰ ceW ef›eâÙeekeâejer Skeâ DeÛej JewÅegle
Ans. (d) : According to Gauss's law #es$e E (Jeesuš/ceeršj) efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS Devegmeej JeieeaÙe
Q leue kesâ kesâJeue efveÛeues DeOe&Yeeie ceW meerefcele nw~ leue mes
φE = enclosed
εo mecyeæ heäuekeäme SI cee$ekeâeW ceW nesiee:-
Physics 329 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library

q 1 q 
(a) −φ (b)  − φ
∈0 2  ∈0 
(a) EL2/(2ε0) (b) EL2/2
(c) Zero (d) E L2 q φ
(c) (d)
AIPMT-2006 2 ∈0 3
Ans. (c) : AIPMT-2007
Ans. (b) : Given: electric flux associated with curved
surface B = φ

ur r
φ = E. S = EScos 90º = 0 From Gauss' Law total flux associated with closed Body
ur q
Q area vector is perpendicular toE φtotal =
∈0
Electric flux is only generated when electric field lines
outs any surface or passes through any surface. φA + φB + φC = φtotal
Here electric field line are not cutting the particular q
surface. so electric flux φ = 0 φA + φC = − φ (Q φB = φ)
∈0
31. A charge q is located at the centre of a cube.
The electric flux through any face is – and By symmetry- φA = φC (Q both have equal area)
Skeâ Ieve kesâ kesâvõ hej Skeâ DeeJesMe q efmLele nw~ efkeâmeer q
2φ A = − φ
Skeâ he=‰es hej efvekeâueves Jeeuee efJeÅegle DeefYeJeen nw- ∈0
2πq 4πq
(a) (b) 1 q 
6 ( 4πε 0 ) 6 ( 4πε 0 ) φA =  − φ
2 ∈0 
πq q
(c) (d) 33. A charge Q is situated at the corner of a cube,
6 ( 4πε 0 ) 6 ( 4πε 0 )
the electric flux passed through all the six faces
AIPMT-2003 of the cube is :
Ans. (b): Net flux passes through the cube- Skeâ DeeJesMe Q Skeâ Ieve kesâ Skeâ keâesves hej efmLele nw lees
q Ieve kesâ meYeer Ú: heâuekeâeW mes iegpejves Jeeuee heäuekeäme nesiee
φ net =
∈0
Q Q
Because all the surface are symmetric with respect to (a) (b)
6 ∈0 8 ∈0
charge (q)
q Q Q
6 ( φsurface ) = φnet = (c) (d)
∈0 ∈0 2 ∈0
q AIPMT (Screening)-2012
φsurface =
6 ∈0 AIPMT-2000
4πq Ans. (b) : According to Gauss's law,
=
6 ( 4πε 0 ) Electric flux through a closed surface is equal to
1
32. A hollow cylinder has a charge q coulomb times the net charge enclosed by the surface. Since,
ε0
within it. If φ is the electric flux in units of
voltmeter associated with the curved surface B, Q is charge enclosed by surface, then electric flux,
the flux linked with the plane surface A in units Q
φ= If charge 'Q' is placed at corner of cube, it will
of voltmeter will be- ε0
Skeâ KeesKeues yesueve kesâ Yeerlej q ketâ@ueece keâe DeeJesMe be divided into 8 such cubes. Therefore electric flux
efmLele nw~ Ùeefo efÛe$eevegmeej Je›eâ mes mecyevOe JewÅegle through all the six faces of cube is-
DeefYeJeen Jeesuš-ceeršj cee$ekeâeW ceW φ nes lees meceleue leue 1Q
φ=
A mes mecyeæ Jeesuš-ceeršj cee$ekeâeW ceW DeefYeJeen nesiee- 8 ε0

Physics 330 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Potential at point P is the sum of potential
15.5 Electric Dipole caused by charges +q and –q respectively –
q −q
34. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 300 V= +
4π ∈0 ×2 4π ∈0 ×8
with an electric field of intensity 2 × 10 5 NC -1 . It
experience a torque equal to 4Nm. Calculate 3qK
V=
the magnitude of charge on the dipole, if the 8
dipole length is 2 cm. 3
Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOegÇJe keâes 2 × 105 N C–1 leer›elee kesâ Skeâ V = qK
8
JewÅegle #es$e kesâ meeLe 30º kesâ keâesCe hej jKee ieÙee nw~ Fme
hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue DeeIetCe& 4 N m nw~ Ùeefo efÉOegÇJe keâer 36. Polar molecules are the molecules-
uecyeeF& 2 cm nes lees efÉOegÇJe hej DeeJesMe nw : OeÇgJeerÙe DeCeg Ssmes DeCeg nesles nQ :
(a) 2 mC (b) 8 mC (a) Having a permanent electric dipole moment
(c) 6 mC (d) 4 mC efpeveceW mLeeÙeer efJeÅegle efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& neslee nw~
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 (b) Having zero dipole moment
Ans. (a) : Given that : efpevekeâe efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& MetvÙe neslee nw~
θ = 30º (c) Acquire a dipole moment only in the presence
E = 2 × 10 5 NC −1 of electric field due to displacement of
τ =4Nm charges
l = 2 cm=2×10–2m pees efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ GheefmLele ceW ner efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& Øeehle
We know that keâjles nQ, DeeJesMeeW kesâ efJemLeeheve kesâ keâejCe~
τ = pE sin θ (d) Acquire a dipole moment only when
τ = ( q × 2l ) E sin θ magnetic field is absent
τ
pees efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& kesâJeue leYeer Øeehle keâjles nw, peye
q= ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e DevegheefmLele neslee nw~
2l × Esin θ
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
4  1
=
2 ×10−2 × 2 ×105 × sin 30º  sin 30º = 2 
Ans. (a) : A molecule or chemical group which have
 
electric dipole moment due to separation of electric
= 2 × 10 −3 C charges is called polarity. It depends on the electro
q = 2 mC negativities of the resulting atom or a molecule.
35. An electric dipole is placed as shown in the In polar molecules one end acquires a positive charge
figure. where as the opposite end acquires a negative charge
Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe efÛe$e ceW ØeoefMe&le nw~ and their centers do not coincide.
Example - V shaped molecules.
37. A dipole is placed in an electric field as shown.
In which direction will it move?
efÛe$eevegmeej Skeâ efÉOeÇgJe efJeÅegle #es$e ceW jKee peelee nw~ Ùen
efkeâme efoMee ceW ieefle keâjsiee?
The electric potential (in 102 V) a point P due to
the dipole is ( ∈0 = permittivity of free space and
1
= K ):
4π ∈0
efÉOegÇJe kesâ keâejCe efyevog P hej efJeÅegle efJeYeJe (102 V ceW )
nw ( ∈0 = cegòeâ DeekeâeMe keâer JewÅegleMeeruelee leLee
1
= K) :
4π ∈0
(a) Towards the right as its potential energy will
8 3 increase.
(a)   qK (b)   qK
3 8 oeÙeeR lejHeâ keäÙeeWefkeâ Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& yeÌ{sieer~
5 8 (b) Towards the left as its potential energy will
(c)   qK (d)   qK increase.
8 5
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 yeeBÙeer lejHeâ keäÙeeWefkeâ Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& yeÌ{sieer~
Physics 331 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) Towards the right as its potential energy will Electric field on axial line (at pt.B)
decrease. uuuuur 1 2p
oeÙeeR lejHeâ keäÙeeWefkeâ Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& Iešsieer~ E axial =
4 πε 0 r 3
(d) Towards the left as its potential energy will r
decrease. where, p = Dipole Moment
yeeBÙeer lejn keäÙeeWefkeâ Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& Iešsieer~ ε0 = Permittivity of free space
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 ∴ Electric field of a dipole at a point on equatorial
Ans. (c) : plane is
uuur −1 p
E eq =
4πε0 r 3
Alternate solution -

Potential energy of electric dipole in external electric

field-
ur ur
U = –P ⋅ E = –PEcos θ At point Q -
Angle between electric field & dipole is 180º. KP cos θ
V=
∴ U = –PE cos 180º = + PE r2
On moving towards right, electric field strength – ∂v 2KP cos θ
decreases therefore potential energy decreases. Er = =
∂r r3
The net force on electric dipole is towards right & the
–1 ∂v + KPsin θ
net torque acting on it becomes zero. So, it will move Eθ = =
towards right. r ∂θ r3
38. The electric field at a point on the equatorial Resultant E = E r2 + E θ2
plane at a distance r from the centre of a dipole KP
r = 3 1 + 3cos 2 θ
having dipole moment p is given by, (r >>
r
separation of two charges forming the dipole, There are two position, Axial and equatorial,
∈0 - permittivity of free space) At Axial θ = 0º, and at equatorial θ = 90º.
efÉOeÇgJe kesâ kesâvõ mes r otjer hej efvej#eerÙe meceleue ceW efmLele KP
efkeâmeer efyevog hej efJeÅegle #es$e neslee nw So, Eeq = 3 1 + 3cos 2 90º
r
(r >> efÉOeÇgJe efveefce&le keâjves Jeeues oes DeeJesMeeW kesâ he=Lekeâ KP
= 3
mes, ∈0 cegòeâ DeekeâeMe keâer efJeÅegleMeeruelee) r
r r ∵ We know, direction of dipole moment is always from
r P r P
(a) E = − (b) E = –q to +q. And At equatorial, direction of E is opposite
4π ∈0 r 3 4π ∈0 r 3 to dipole moment.
r r
r 2P r P Therefore,
(c) E = (d) E = − –KP
4π ∈0 r 3
4π ∈0 r 2
Eeq =
r3
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
1 P  1 
Ans. (a) : (1) Electric dipole– When two equal and or Eeq = – QK =
opposite charges are separated by a small distance than 4πε 0 r 3
 4πε 0 
this combination of charges is called electric dipole. 39. A short electric dipole has a dipole moment of
(2) Dipole Moment (P) = q × 2a 16 × 10–9 C m. The electric potential due to the
where q is charge & '2a' is distance b/w two charged dipole at a point at a distance of 0.6 m from the
particle. centre of the dipole, situated on a line making
an angle of 60° with the dipole axis is :
efkeâmeer ueIeg efJeÅegle efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& 16 × 10–9 Cm nw~ Fme
efÉOeÇgJe kesâ keâejCe, Fme efÉOeÇgJe kesâ De#e mes 60° keâe keâesCe
yeveeves Jeeueer efkeâmeer jsKee hej efmLele 0.6 m otjer kesâ
efkeâmeer efyevog hej, efJeÅegle efJeYeJe nesiee:
Physics 332 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 1  Also, forces are equal & opposite, therefore they form
 = 9×109 Nm 2 /C2  couple which rotates the dipole. Hence couple tends to
 4π ∈0  align the dipole along direction of electric field (E).
(a) 200 V (b) 400 V τ = Force x arms of a couple
(c) zero (d) 50 V τ = F × 2l sinθ = (qE) × 2lsinθ
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 τ = (q × 2 l) E sinθ
r r r r
Ans. (a) : Electric potential at an angle 60º is given by τ = p × E Q p = q × 2l 
kP cos θ
V= -------(i) τ = pE Sinθ
r2 Potential Energy (U)
where, Potential energy of an electric dipole in an electric field
1 Nm 2 is the energy possessed by dipole due to its particular
k= = 9 × 109 2
4πε 0 c position in field.
∴ U = –pE (cosθ2 – cosθ1)
P = 16 × 10 −9 Cm
Q θ1 = 90° , θ2 = θ
r = 0.6m
⇒ U = –pE (cosθ – cos 90°)
Using equation (i) we have
U = – pE cosθ
9 ×109 ×16 ×10−9 × cos 60º
∴V = = 200V 41. Three point charges +q, –2q and +q are placed
( 0.6 )
2
at points (x = 0, y = a, z = 0), (x = 0,y = 0, z = 0)
and (x = a, y = 0, z = 0) respectively. The
40. An electrical dipole of moment 'p' is placed in magnitude and direction of the electric dipole
an electric field of intensity 'E'. The dipole moment vector of this charge assembly are:-
acquires a position such that the axis of the leerve efyevog DeeJesMeeW +q, –2q Deewj +q keâes ›eâceevegmeej
dipole makes an angle θ with the direction of
the field. Assuming that the potential energy of efyevogDeeW (x = 0, y = a, z = 0), (x = 0,y = 0, z = 0)
the dipole to be zero when θ = 90º, the torque Deewj (x = a, y = 0, z = 0) hej jKee ieÙee nQ Fme DeeJesMe
and the potential energy of the dipole will JÙeJemLee kesâ efueÙes JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& meefoMe kesâ ceeve
respectively be:- Deewj efoMee ›eâceevegmeej neWies:-
Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& 'p' nw Deewj Fmes 'E' leer›elee kesâ (a) 2 qa along + x direction/ 2 qa + x efoMee ceW
JewÅegle #es$e ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùen efÉOegÇJe Ssmeer efmLeefle Øeehle
(b) 2 qa along + y direction/ 2 qa + y efoMee ceW
keâj ueslee nw efpemeceW, Fme keâer De#e, #es$e keâer efoMee mes θ
2 qa along the line joining points
keâesCe yeveeleer nw~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ θ = 90° hej efÉOeÇgJe (c)
(x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)/
keâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& MetvÙe nw, efÉOeÇgJe hej yeue DeeIetCe&
(še@ke&â) leLee Gmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ›eâceMe: nesieer: 2 qa, efyevogDeeW (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) Deewj (x = a,
y = a, z = 0)
(a) p E sin θ, 2p E cos θ (d) qa along the line joining points
(b) p E cos θ, –p E sin θ (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) and (x = a, y = a, z = 0)/
(c) p E sin θ, –p E cos θ qa, efyevogDeeW (x = 0, y = 0, z = 0) Deewj (x = a, y =
(d) p E sin θ, –2p E cos θ a, z = 0)
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 AIPMT-2007
Ans. (c) : Electric Dipole : When two equal and Ans. (c) : Electric dipole moment is a vector quantity
opposite charges are separated by a small distance then directed from negative charge to similar positive charge.
this combination of charge is called an electric dipole. The given system is equivalent to two dipoles along x
and y direction respectively. The resultant dipole
moment will be directed along OP where P = (a, a, o)

Q Electric
ur dipole of moment 'p' is placed in an electric
field E , at an angle θ with direction of E.
Now, Force at A= –qE The magnitude of resultant dipole moment is-
Force at B = +qE
( Px ) + ( Py ) = ( qa ) + ( qa )
2 2 2 2
electric field (E) is uniform, therefore net force on P' = = 2qa
dipole is 0.
Physics 333 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r
42. An electric dipole of moment P is lying along 44.
a uniform electric field E . The work done in
A dipole of moment P ( ) is placed in uniform
rotating the dipole by 90º is:/P DeeIegCe& keâe Skeâ electric field E then torque acting on it is given
by : -
JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe DeÛej JewÅegle #es$e E kesâ meeLe heÌ[e nw~ Fme r
efÉOeÇgJe keâes 90° mes Iegceeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee:- ( )
Ùeefo efJeÅegle efÉOeÇgJe kesâ efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& P keâes Skeâ
PE meceeve efJeÅegle #es$e E ceW jKee ieÙee nw lees Gme hej
(a) 2 PE (b)
2 keâeÙe&jle yeueDeeIetCe& nesiee-
(c) 2PE (d) PE r rr r r r
(a) τ = P.E (b) τ = P × E
NEET (UG)- 18.05.2013, Karnataka r r r r r r
(c) τ = P + E (d) τ = P − E
AIPMT-2006
AIPMT-2001
Ans. (d) : We know potential energy of dipole.
Ans. (b) : Given –
ur
Dipole moment = P
ur
Uniform electric field = E
We know that dipole moment of dipole P = q (a)
ur ur urur
U = − P.E or PE cos θ Where, q = charge
urur a = dipole length
Ui = − PE cos 0 0 = –PE When a dipole of dipole moment ‘p’ is placed in
uruur
Uf = − P.E cos900 =0 uniform electric field E, the Torque, (τ) = charge x
Work done, W = ∆U Perpendicular distance force due to charge = qaE sin θ
= Uf – Ui ∴ Torque (τ) = q a E sin θ
= 0 – (–PE) = PE sin θ
ur ur
= PE τ = P×E
43. An electric dipole has the magnitude of its 45. Electric field at the equator of a dipole is E. If
charge as q and its dipole moment is p. It is strength of the dipole and distance is now
placed in a uniform electric field E. If its dipole doubled then the electric field will be/efÉOeÇgJe mes
moment is along the direction of the field, the
force on it and its potential energy are efvej#e hej efJeÅegle #es$e E nw Ùeefo efÉOeÇgJe meeceLÙe& leLee otjer
respectively :- ogieveer keâj oer peeSb lees efJeÅegle #es$e nesiee–
Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe kesâ DeeJesMe keâe ceeve q nw Deewj Fmekeâe (a) E/2 (b) E/8
efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& p nw~ Fmes Skeâ mece™he JewÅegle #es$e E ceW (c) E/4 (d) E
jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& Deewj JewÅegle #es$e Skeâ AIPMT-1998
ner efoMee ceW ef›eâÙeekeâejer neW, lees efÉOeÇgJe hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer Ans. (c) :
yeue Deewj Fmekeâer efmLeeflepe Tpee& ›eâceevegmeej neWies :-
(a) q. E and p. E/q. E Deewj p. E r
ur Kp
(b) zero and minimum/MetvÙe Deewj vÙetvelece Electric field due to an equatorial dipole, E = 3
(c) q. E and maximum/q. E Deewj DeefOekeâlece r
3
(d) 2q. E and minimum/2q. E Deewj vÙetvelece p E 2p r 2 1
E∝ 3 ⇒ 1 = × = =
AIPMT-2004 r E ( 2r )3 p 8 4
Ans. (b): E1 1
=
E 4
E
E1 =
4
Now, Potential energy u = – qE cosθ 46. A point Q lies on the perpendicular bisector of
where θ = 0 an electrical dipole of dipole moment p. If the
So, U = – qE cos 0 distance of Q from the dipole is r (much larger
U = – qE (1) than the size of the dipole), then the electric
U = −qE minimum field at Q is proportional to
Skeâ efyevog Q, p efÉOeÇgJe DeeIetCe& kesâ Skeâ efJeÅegle efÉOegÇJe kesâ
Now, F = qE
uecye meceefÉYeepekeâ hej eqmLele nw~ Ùeefo efÉOeÇJg e mes Q keâer
Fnet = qE + (–qE)
otjer r (efÉOeÇgJe kesâ Deekeâej mes DeefOekeâ yeÌ[er) nw, leye Q
Fnet = 0
hej efJeÅegle #es$e meceevegheeleer nw:
Physics 334 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) p2 and r–3 (b) p and r–2
(c) p–1 and r–2 (d) p and r–3 15.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
AIPMT-1998
48. In the figure, two positive charges q2 and q3 are
Ans. (d) : As we know that electric field due to an
fixed along the y axis, exert a net electric force
equatorial dipole is given by
r in the +'X' direction on a charge 'q1' fixed
ur p
E=k along the X-axis. If a positive charge Q is added
3

(r + a )
2 2 2 at (x, 0), the force on q1/efÛe$e ceW y-De#e kesâ
DevegefoMe efmLele oes JewÅegle DeeJesMe q2 leLee q3, x–De#e kesâ
where, p (dipole moment)= q × 2a
Given, r > > a, so, 'a' can be neglected. DevegefoMe efmLele JewÅegle DeeJesMe q1 hej + x efoMee ceW keâesF&
r r vesš efJeÅegle yeue Deejesefhele keâjles nQ~ Ùeefo (x, 0), hej keâesF&
ur kp kp
∴ E= 3
= 3 , which is acting along negative X - OeveeJesMe Q jKe efoÙee peeS lees q1 hej Deejesefhele yeue
2 2 r
(r )
direction.
From above it is clear that,
p
E∝ 3
r
⇒ E ∝ p and E ∝ r-3
where, r = distance of that point from center of dipole.
47. An electric dipole of moment p is placed in the (a) shall increase along the positive x-
position of stable equilibrium in uniform axis./Oeveelcekeâ x-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe yeÌ{ peeSiee~
electric field of intensity E. This is rotated
through an angle θ from the initial position. (b) shall decrease along the positive x-
The potential energy of the electric dipole in axis./Oeveelcekeâ x-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe Ieš peeSiee~
the final position is (c) shall point along the negative x-axis./ $e+Ceelcekeâ
DeeIetCe& p kesâ Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe keâes E leer›elee kesâ x-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe mebkesâle keâjsiee~
Skeâmeceeve efJeÅegle #es$e ceW efmLej meecÙe keâer efmLeefle ceW jKee (d) shall increase but the direction charges
peelee nw~ Ùen ØeejefcYekeâ efmLeefle mes θ keâesCe Éeje IetefCe&le because of the intersection of Q with q2 and
efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Debeflece efmLeefle ceW JewÅegle efÉOeÇgJe keâer q3./yeÌ{ peeSiee hejvleg q2 SJeb q3 kesâ meeLe Q kesâ
efmLeeflepe Tpee& nesieer: ØeefleÛÚsove kesâ keâejCe efoMee heefjJeefle&le nes peeSieer~
(a) –pE cosθ Ans. (a) : According to the question, q2, q3 and Q are
(b) pE(1– cosθ) positive and charge q1 is negative because resultant
(c) pE cosθ force is in the direction of +x-axis.
(d) pE sinθ
AIPMT-1994
Ans. (b) : Given:
Dipole moment = p
Electric field Intensity = E
∵ Dipole is rotated through an angle θ. So, torque (τ)
produced on dipole is given by,
τ = pE sinθ Since, +ve charges q2 and q3 exert a net force in +x-
Now, work done in rotating the dipole from an direction on the charge q1 which is fixed along x-axis.
equilibrium position by an angle θ is- The charge q1 is negative as shown in figure.
θ θ On addition of +Q charge on x-axis, the force on –q
W = ∫ τdθ = ∫ pE sin θ dθ shall increases along the +x-axis.
0 0
49. A point positive charge is brought near an
θ
W = −pE [cos θ] 0 isolated conducting sphere. The electric field is
best given by/efkeâmeer efyevog OeveeJesMe keâes efkeâmeer
W = −pE [cos θ − cos0]
efJeÙegkeäle Ûeeuekeâ ieesues kesâ efvekeâš ueeÙee ieÙee nw ~ efJeÅegle
W = pE [1 – cos θ] #es$e keâes oMee&ves Jeeuee meJe&ßes‰ efÛe$e nw,
Physics 335 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Electric flux (φ) through the closed surface
depends only on the net charge enclosed inside the
(a) surface.
Here, charge inside all figures are same, so, electric flux
(φ = qnet/ε0 ) will remain same.
51. Five charges q1, q2, q3, q4 and q5 are fixed at
their positions as shown in figure. S is Gaussian
(b) surface.
r uur q
The Gauss's law is given by ∫ E.ds = .Which
s ε0
of the following statements is correct?/heeBÛe
DeeJesMe q1, q2, q3, q4 leLee q5 efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej
(c) Deheveer efmLeefleÙeeW hej efmLele nQ~ S keâesF& ieeGmeerÙe he=‰ nw~
ieeGme efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej
r uur q
∫ E.ds = ε
s 0
(d)

Ans. (a) : As given charge is +q and lines of force in

positive charge must be outward from positive charge q.
Now, as the positive charge is kept near an isolated
conducting sphere, due to induction, left part of the
sphere gets accumulated negative charge and right part
must have positive charge and lines of force from right
part of sphere must emerge outward normally. efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve mener nw?
r
So, figure (a) verifies the lines. As the lines of forces (a) E on the LHS of the above equation will have
are not perpendicular to the surface of sphere, so (c) & a contribution from q1, q5 and q3 while q on
(d) diagram are not correct along with (b) as electric the RHS will have a contribution from q2 and
field lines are radially inward to the conducting sphere. q4 only./Ghejeskeäle meceerkeâjCe kesâ yeeÙeeR Deesj E ceW q1, q5
50. The electric flux through the surface/veerÛes efoS leLee q3 keâe Ùeesieoeve nesiee, peyeefkeâ oeÙeeR Deesj q ceW kesâJeue
ieS efÛe$eeW ceW he=‰ mes iegpejves Jeeuee efJeÅegle heäuekeäme q2 leLee q4 keâe ner Ùeesieoeve nesiee~
r
(b) E on the LHS of the above equation will have
a contribution from all the charges while q on
the RHS will have a contribution from q2 and
q4 only./Ghejeskeäle meceerkeâjCe kesâ yeeÙeeR Deesj E ceW Yeer
DeeJesMeeW keâe Ùeesieoeve nesiee, peyeefkeâ oeÙeber Deesj q ceW
kesâJeue q2 leLee q4 keâe ner Ùeesieoeve nesiee~
r
(c) E on the LHS of the above equation will have
(a) in figure (iv) is the largest./efÛe$e (iv) ceW meJee&efOekeâ a contribution from all charges while q on the
nw RHS will have a contribution from q1 q3 and
(b) in figure (iii) is the least/efÛe$e (iii) ceW vÙetvelece nw q5 only /Ghejeskeäle meceerkeâjCe kesâ yeeÙeeR Deesj E ceW meYeer
DeeJesMeeW keâe Ùeesieoeve nesiee, peyeefkeâ oeÙeeR Deesj q ceW
(c) in figure (ii) is same as in figure (iii) but is
kesâJeue q1, q3 leLee q5 keâe ner Ùeesieoeve nesiee~
smaller than figure (iv)/efÛe$e (ii) ceW efÛe$e (iii) kesâ r
(d) Both E on the LHS and q on the RHS will
meceeve nw, hejvleg efÛe$e (iv) mes keâce nw~
have a contributions from q2 and q4 only./yeebÙeer
(d) is the same for all the figures./meYeer efÛe$eeW ceW Deesj kesâ E leLee oeÙeeR Deesj kesâ q oesveeW ceW ner kesâJeue q2
meceeve nw~ leLee q4 keâe ner Ùeesieoeve nesiee~
Physics 336 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): According to the gauss law, the term qenclosed (c) directed radially away from the point
on the right side of the given equation includes the sum charge/efyevog DeeJesMe mes otj keâer Deesj efo° nw~
of all charges enclosed by the surface called (Gaussian (d) directed radially towards the point charge./
surface). Hence, q on R.H.S will have a contribution efyevog DeeJesMe keâer Deesj nw~
from q2 and q4. In left side equation, the electric field is Ans. (a) : Let, charge '+q' is placed to the left is isolated
due to all the charges present both inside as well as conducting plane AB vertical to the plane of paper. Due
ur
outside the Gaussian surface hence, E on L.H.S of the to induction by '+q' charge, R.H.S of the plane will
above equation will have a contribution from all the acquire positive charge.
charges. So, line of forces will emerge perpendicularly, outward
and parallel to each other. It satisfied the option (a).
52. Figure shows electric field lines in which an
r
electric dipole moment p is placed as shown.
Which of the following statements is
correct?/efÛe$e ceW efJeÅegle #es$e jsKeeSB oMee&Ùeer ieF& nQ
efpeveceW Skeâ JewÅegle efÉOegÇJe p efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej jKee
nw~ efvecveefueefKele keâLeveeW ceW keâewve-mee mener nw?

54. A hemisphere is uniformly charged positively.

(a) The dipole will not experience any The electric field at a point on a diameter away
force./efÉOeÇgJe efkeâmeer yeue keâe DevegYeJe veneR keâjsiee~ from the centre is directed/keâesF& DeOe&ieesuee
(b) The dipole will experience a force towards Skeâmeceeve OeveeJesefMele nw~ ieesues kesâ kesâvõ mes hejs Fmekesâ
right./efÉOegÇJe oeÙeeR Deesj efkeâmeer yeue keâe DevegYeJe keâjsiee~ efkeâmeer JÙeeme hej efmLele efyevog hej pees kesâvõ mes otj nw,
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards efJeÅegle #es$e keâer efoMee
left./efÉOegÇJe yeeÙeeR Deesj efkeâmeer yeue keâe DevegYeJe keâjsiee~ (a) perpendicular to the diameter/Fme JÙeeme kesâ
(d) The dipole will experience a force uecyeJele nw~
upwards./efÉOeÇgJe Thej keâer Deesj efkeâmeer yeue keâe DevegYeJe (b) parallel to the diameter/Fme JÙeeme kesâ meceevelej nw~
keâjsiee~ (c) at an angle tilted towards the diameter/Fme
Ans. (c) : As the electric field lines density decreases JÙeeme keâer Deesj efkeâmeer keâesCe hej Pegkeâer nw~
from left to right, so electric field intensity on '+q' will (d) at an angle titled away from the diameter./Fme
r ur
be smaller than '–q' charge of dipole. As, F = qE . JÙeeme mes otj efkeâmeer keâesCe hej Pegkeâer nw~
So, the direction of force on +q is along the direction of Ans. (a) : As the side or diameter of the hemisphere is
electric field and force on –q will be in left direction. plane surface and whole hemisphere is charged with
positive charge, so the electric field line of force
Thus the net force on dipole will be towards left.
emerging outward will be perpendicular to the plane
53. A point charge +q, is placed at a distance d surface or diameter.
from an isolated conducting plane. The field at
a point P on the other side of the plane is/Skeâ
efyevog DeeJesMe +q efkeâmeer efJeÙegkeäle Ûeeuekeâ leue mes d otjer
hej efmLele nw~ leue kesâ otmejer Deesj kesâ efyevog P hej #es$e
keâer efoMee
(a) directed perpendicular to the plane and away
from the plane/leue kesâ uecyeJele leLee leue mes otj keâer
Deesj nw~
(b) directed perpendicular to the plane but
towards the plane/leue kesâ uecyeJele hejvleg leue keâer
Deesj nw~
Physics 337 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
16.
Electrostatics Potential
and Capacitance
−q 2
16.1 Electrostatics Potential & (a) Zero/MetvÙe (b)
4πε0 d
Electrostatics Potential Energy
−q 2  1  −q 2  1 
3−  (c) (d) 6− 
1. Two hollow conducting spheres of radii R1 and 4 πε 0 
d 2 4 πε 0 
d 2
R2 (R1>>R2) have equal charges. The potential NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
would be
Ans. (a) : Potential at the centre of the Hexagon is zero.
R1 SJeb R2 ef$epÙeeDeeW (R1>>R2) Jeeues oes KeesKeues
Ûeeuekeâ ieesueeW hej meceeve DeeJesMe nw~ lees efJeYeJe keâe ceeve
nesiee:
(a) Dependent on the material property of the
sphere/ieesues kesâ heoeLe& keâer efJeMes<eleeDeeW hej efveYe&j keâjsiee
(b) More on bigger sphere/yeÌ[s ieesues hej pÙeeoe
(c) More on smaller sphere/Úesšs ieesues hej pÙeeoe Vο = 0
(d) Equal on both the spheres/oesveeW ieesueeW hej meceeve The electric potential at a point in an electric field is the
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 ratio of work done in carrying a rest charge from
infinity to that point is given by –
Ans. (c) : We have two hollow conducting sphere
where R1> R2. The larger the radius the smaller the W
V0 =
potential for the given conducting sphere. So R2 is q
having large potential than R1 W = q×V0 = q × 0
1 Q
V= . ⇒ W=0
4πε0 R
3. The angle between the electric lines of force
1 and the equipotential surface is
= constant
4πε0 yeue keâer efJeÅegle jsKeeDeeW SJeb meceefJeYeJeerÙe leue kesâ yeerÛe
Q = same (Given) keâe keâesCe nw:
1 (a) 180o (b) 0o
∴V ∝
R (c) 45o (d) 90o
∴ Potential is more on smaller sphere. NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
2. Six charges + q, – q, + q, – q, + q and –q are Ans. (d) :
fixed at the corners of a hexagon of side d as
shown in the figure. The work done in bringing
a charge q0 to the centre of the hexagon from
infinity is:
Ú: DeeJesMeeW + q, –q, + q, – q, + q SJeb –q keâes d Yegpee
Jeeues Skeâ <ešYegpe kesâ keâesveeW hej efÛe$eevegmeej ueieeÙee ieÙee
nw~ Devevle mes DeeJesMe q0 keâes <ešYegped kesâ kesâvõ lekeâ ueeves We know that potential
ur uur
difference
ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw: V= − ∫ E.dr ----------(1)
(ε0- cegòeâ DeekeâeMe keâe hejeJewÅegleebkeâ) We know that this is an equipotential surface then,
(ε0-permittivity of free space) dV = 0
ur uur
dV = −∫ E.dr = 0
ur uur
From here we get E per .dr = 0
The scalar product of the normal component of the
electric field with distance is zero.

Physics 338 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
⇒ The normal component of the electric field is E cosθ q1 R 1
Now, Ecosθ.dr = 0 =
q2 R 2
E and dr both are zero values
∴ cosθ = 0 , θ = 90° σ1 q1 / 4πR12
=
θ = 90° means that the angle between electric lines of σ 2 q 2 / 4πR 22
force or electric field and the equipotential surface is 2
σ1 q1  R 2 
90°. =
4. Twenty seven drops of same size are charged at σ2 q2  R1 
220 V each. They combine to form a bigger
σ1 R 2  q1 R1 
drop. Calculate the potential of the bigger = Q = 
drop. σ 2 R1  q2 R 2 
meceeve meeFpe keâer 27 yetboW ØelÙeskeâ 220 Jeesuš hej
DeeJesefMele nesleer nw~ Jes efceuekeâj Skeâ yeÌ[er yetbo yeveeleer nw~ 6. The variation of electrostatic potential with
radial distance r from the centre of a positively
yeÌ[er yetbo kesâ efJeYeJe keâer ieCevee keâerefpeS~ charged metallic thin shell of radius R is given
(a) 1980 V/1980 Jeesuš (b) 660 V/660 Jeesuš by the graph
(c) 1320 V/1320 Jeesuš (d) 1520 V/1520 Jeesuš ef$epÙee R kesâ DeeJesefMele OeeeflJekeâ heleues Keesue kesâ kesâvõ mes
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
ef$epÙe otjer r kesâ meeLe efJeÅegle efJeYeJe kesâ efJeÛejCe keâes
Ans. (a) : Since volume and charge remains constant
therefore Q (charge on bigger drop) is equal to 27q. oMee&ves Jeeuee «eeHeâ nw
Radius of Bigger drop will be-
4 3 4
πR = 27 × πr 3
3 3
where, R = Radius of bigger drop (a)
r = Radius of smaller drop
R=3r
Kq
Potential on smaller drop = =V
r
KQ K × 27q
Potential on bigger drop = V′ = = = 9V (b)
R 3r
V' = 9V = 9×220
V′ = 1980V
5. Two charged spherical conductors of radius R1
and R2 are connected by a wire. Then the ratio of
surface charge densities of the spheres (σ1/σ2) is-
R1 leLee R2 ef$epÙee kesâ oes DeeJesefMele ieesueerÙe Ûeeuekeâ (c)
Skeâ leej mes peesÌ[ efoS peeles nQ~ ieesueeW kesâ he=‰ DeeJesMe
IevelJeeW (σ1/σ2) keâe Devegheele neslee nw :
R 12 R1
(a) (b)
R 22 R2
R2  R1  (d)
(c) (d)  
R1  R2 
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Ans. (c) : NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Ans. (c)

The potential will be equal as they are connected with

wire. Given-
∴ V1 = V2 'r' is distance of respective point under consideration
Kq1 Kq 2 from centre
=
R1 R2 R is Radius of sphere
Physics 339 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For r < R (a) Maximum work is required to move q in
r r r figure (c)./DeejsKe (c) ceW q keâes ues peeves hej DeefOekeâlece
E.dr = − dv
r keâeÙe& keâjvee heÌ[siee:
0 = – dv (Q Inside the shell, the electric field, Ein = 0 (b) In all the four cases the work done is the
because no charge inside the shell) same./meYeer ÛeejeW DeejsKeeW ceW meceeve keâeÙe& keâjvee heÌ[siee~
⇒ V = constant (c) Minimum work is required to move q in
When r = R figure (a)./DeejsKe (a) ceW q keâes ues peeves hej vÙetvelece
1 Q keâeÙe& keâjvee nesiee~
Vsurface = (d) Maximum work is required to move q in
4πε0 R figure (b)./DeejsKe (b) ceW q keâes ues peeves hej
For r > R DeefOekeâlece keâeÙe& keâjvee heÌ[siee:
1 Q NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
V=
4πε0 r Ans. (b) : The External work required to move a charge
in a electric field depends only upon the change in the
1 electric potential of the charge and not the path taken by
⇒ V∝ the charge.
r
● As we can see in the figure in all cases the charge in
Among the given option we can see that option (c) is moved from point A (10 V) to point B (40 V).
correct since it satisfies our values of potential V over
Hence, work done in all the cases remains same.
distance r.
9. If potential (in volts) in a region is expressed as
V (x, y, z) = 6xy – y + 2yz, the electric field (in
N/C) at point (1, 1, 0) is
Ùeefo efkeâmeer #es$e cebs efJeYeJe (Jeesuš ceW) keâes, V (x, y, z)
= 6xy – y + 2yz mes efveefo&° efkeâÙee peeÙe lees, efyevog
(1,1,0) hej efJeÅegle #es$e (N/C ceW) nw:

7. In a certain region of space with volume 0.2 m3,

(
(a) − 6iˆ + 9ˆj + kˆ ) (
(b) − 3iˆ + 5ˆj + 3kˆ )
the electric potential is found to be 5 V
throughout. The magnitude of electric field in
(
(c) − 6iˆ + 5ˆj + 2kˆ ) (
(d) − 2iˆ + 3jˆ + kˆ )
this region is :/Debleefj#e kesâ 0.2 m3 DeeÙeleve kesâ efkeâmeer AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
efveef§ele #es$e ceW nj mLeeve hej efJeÅegle efJeYeJe 5 V heeÙee Ans. (c) : Given: V (x, y, z) = 6 x y – y + 2yz
ieÙee nw~ Fme #es$eeW ceW efJeÅegle #es$e keâe heefjceeCe nw: As we know that
r −∂V ∂v ∂v
(a) 0.5 N/C (b) 1 N/C E= $i − $j − k$
(c) 5 N/C (d) zero/MetvÙe ∂ X ∂y ∂z
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 Now,
∂v ∂v ∂v
dV = 6y; = 6x − 1 + 2z : = 2y
Ans. (d) : QE = − ∂x ∂y ∂z
dr So the electric field become
Given, potential 'V' is constant, throughout the space. r
E = −6yi$ − ( 6x − 1 + 2z ) $j − 2yk$
So, change in potential dV=0 for only displacement dr.
∴ Electric filed will be zero in the region. A (1, 1, 0) ⇒ x = 1, y = 1, z = 0
r
8. The diagrams below shows regions of E = −6i$ − 5j$ − 2k$

( )
equipotentials. r
E = − 6i$ + 5j$ + 2k$
A positive charge is moved from A to B in each
diagram. 10. In a region, the potential is represented by V
ÙeneB DeejsKe ceW kegâÚ meceefJeYeJe #es$e oMee&Ùes ieÙes nQ: (x,y,z) = 6x-8xy-8y+6yz, where 'V' is in volts
ØelÙeskeâ DeejsKe Skeâ Oeveelcekeâ DeeJesMe keâes A mes B lekeâ and x, y, z are in metres. The electric force
experienced by a charge of 2 coulomb situated
ues peeles nQ~ lees Fme Øe›eâce ceW q keâes A mes B lekeâ ues at point (1, 1, 1) is.
peeves ceW: efvecve #es$e ceW efJeYeJe keâes, V(x, y, z) = 6x-8xy-
8y+6yz mes efve™efhele efkeâÙee peelee nw, peneB V Jeesuš ceW
leLee x, y, z ceeršj ceW nw~ lees, efyebog (1, 1, 1) hej efmLele 2
ketâuee@ce DeeJesMe hej ueieves Jeeuee efJeÅegle yeue nesiee:-
(a) 6 5N (b) 30 N
(c) 24 N (d) 4 35N
AIPMT-06.05.2014
Physics 340 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Here, V(x, y, z) = (6x – 8xy – 8y + 6yz) Ans. (b): For the conducting sphere,
where, 'V' is the potential Potential at the centre = Potential on the surface of
The x, y and z components of electric field are sphere

−dV −∂ ( 6x − 8xy − 8y + 6yz )

1 Q
V=
Ex = = 4πε0 R
dx ∂x
= –(6–8y) = –6+8y where 'Q' is the charge and 'R' is the radius of sphere.
Electric field at the centre = 0
−∂V −∂ ( 6x − 8xy − 8y + 6yz )
Ey = = 12. A, B and C are three points in a uniform
∂y ∂y electric field. The electric potential is :-
= –(–8x–8+6z) = 8x+8–6z A, B leLee C efkeâmeer Skeâmeceeve efJeÅegle #es$e ceW leerve efyevog
−∂V −∂ ( 6x − 8xy − 8y + 6yz ) nw~ efJeÅegle efJeYeJe keâe ceeve -
Ez = =
∂z ∂z
= –6y
ur
Q E = E x i + E y j + E z kˆ
ˆ ˆ
(a) Same at all the three points A, B and C
ur meYeer efyevogDeeW A, B leLee C hej meceeve nw~
E = ( −6 + 8y ) ˆi + ( 8x + 8 − 6z ) ˆj + 6ykˆ
(b) Maximum at A/ A hej DeefOekeâlece nw
At point (1, 1, 1)
ur (c) Maximum at B/ B hej DeefOekeâlece nw~
E = ( −6 + 8) ˆi + ( 8 + 8 − 6 ) ˆj − 6kˆ (d) Maximum at C/ C hej DeefOekeâlece nQ~
ur
E = 2iˆ + 10ˆj − 6kˆ NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
ur Ans. (c) : The electric field E and the potential changes
The magnitude of electric field E is with the distance of the point from the charge. The
ur
E = E 2x + E 2y + E 2z electric field at a point in the field is equal to the
negative of the potential gradient. So, use the concept of
ur equipotential surface and calculate the momentum
E = ( 2 ) + (10 ) + ( −6 )
2 2 2
potential from point A, B and C placed in the electric
ur field.
E = 140 = 2 35 N / C
Electric force experienced by the charge -
F = qE =2×2 35 N / C
F = 4 35 N
11. A conducting sphere of radius 'R' is given a In the direction of electric field, the electric potential
charge 'Q'. The electric potential and the decreases
electric field at the centre of the sphere
∆V = −E.dr
respectively are:/Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ ieesues keâer ef$epÙee R nw~
VB > VC > VA
Fme hej Q DeeJesMe nw~ Fme ieesues kesâ kesâvõ hej efJeÅegle
efJeYeJe leLee efJeÅegle #es$e ›eâceMe: neWies:- 13. Two metallic spheres of radii 1 cm and 3 cm
are given charges of –1 × 10–2 C and 5 × 10–2 C,
Q Q
(a) zero and /MetvÙe leLee respectively. If these are connected by a
4π ∈0 R 2 4π ∈0 R 2 conducting wire, the final charge on the bigger
sphere is/1 mesceer. leLee 3 mesceer. ef$epÙee kesâ Oeeleg kesâ oes
Q Q
(b) and zero/ leLee MetvÙe ieesueeW keâes ›eâceMe: –1×10–2 C leLee 5 × 10–2 C DeeJesMe
4π ∈0 R 4π ∈0 R
efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo, Fvekeâes Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ leej mes peesÌ[
Q Q efoÙee peeÙe lees, yeÌ[s ieesues hej Deefvlece DeeJesMe nesiee:–
(c) and /
4π ∈0 R 4π ∈0 R 2 (a) 4 × 10–2 C
(b) 1 × 10–2 C
Q Q (c) 2 × 10–2 C
(d) 3 × 10–2 C
Deewj AIPMT (Mains)-2012
4π ∈0 R 4π ∈0 R 2
Ans. (d) : Given – Q1 = 5 × 10–2C
(d) Both are zero/oesveeW MetvÙe
Q2 = – 1× 10–2C
AIPMT-06.05.2014 R = 3cm r = 1cm
Physics 341 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Capacitance of spherical body of radius r is, ' a '
C = 4πε0r –––– (1) Where, is the distance of the point charge from
2
Q the centre.
From definition of capacitance of conductor : C =
V ⇒ –Q – q + 2q + 2Q = 0
Here, Q = charge on conductor ⇒ Q = –q
V = Potential difference
From (1)
Q Q
V= = ––– (2)
C 4πε0 r

15. Three charges, each +q, are placed at the

corners of an isosceles triangle ABC of sides
BC and AC, 2a. D and E are the mid points of
After connecting with conducting wire, let q be the net BC and CA. The work done in taking a charge
charge transfer from Q1 to Q2 such that potential of both Q from D to E is :
spheres become equal. leerve DeeJesMeeW, ØelÙeskeâ +q keâes 2a keâer BC Deewj AC
∴ V1 = V2 YegpeeDeeW kesâ Skeâ meceefÉyeent ef$eYegpe ABC kesâ keâesveeW hej
From (2) jKee ieÙee nw~ D Je E, BC Je CA kesâ ceOÙe efyevog nw~ Skeâ
Q1 − q Q 2 + q DeeJesMe Q keâes D mes E lekeâ ues peeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw:
=
4πε0 R 4πε0 r
Q1 − q Q2 + q
⇒ =
R r
Q1 − q Q 2 + q 3qQ 3qQ
⇒ = (a) (b)
3 1 4π∈0 a 8π∈0 a
Q1 − 3Q 2 5 × 10 − ( −3 × 10 )
−2 −2
qQ
⇒ q= = (c) (d) zero
4 4 4π∈0 a
⇒ q = 2 × 10–2C AIPMT (Mains)-2011
∴ Therefore the final charge on bigger sphere is, Ans. (d) : Step 1: Potential difference between point D
Q1 – q = (5– 2) × 10–2 = 3 ×10–2C and E
14. Four point charges –Q, –q, 2q and 2Q are
placed, one at each corner of the square. The
relation between Q and q for which the
potential at the centre of the square is zero is:
efkeâmeer Jeie& kesâ Ûeej keâesveeW hej efyevog DeeJesMe –Q, –q, 2q
leLee 2Q ›eâceMe: jKes ieÙes nw~ Q leLee q kesâ yeerÛe keäÙee
mebyebOe nesvee ÛeeefnÙes, leeefkeâ Jeie& kesâ kesâvõ hej efJeYeJe
MetvÙe nes peeS? As the triangle is isosceles with AC = BC and D & E
are midpoints of BC and AC respectively.
1
(a) Q = q (b) Q = Therefore BE = DA = r
q As all charges at A, B and C are equal and points D and
1 E are equidistant from all three charges.
(c) Q = –q (d) Q = −
q So potential at D and E are equal
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 i.e., VD = VE
Step 2: Work done
Ans. (c) : Four point charge –Q, –q, 2q & 2Q are placed
one at each corner of square. Work done in moving charge Q from D to E
will be -
Let the side length of square be 'a' then potential at
centre O is– W = q ∆ v = Q(VE – VD) = 0
k ( −Q ) k ( −q ) k ( 2q ) k ( 2Q ) W=0
V= + + + = 0,
a a a a Hence, work done in moving charge from D to E will be
2 2 2 2 zero.

Physics 342 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
16. Four electric charge + q, + q, – q and – q are Ans. (a): Electric field at general point (x, y, z)
placed at the corners of a square of side 2L. Given, Potential function as V = 4x2
(see figure). The electric potential at point A,
Therefore, Electric field E is given by:
midway between the two charge + q and + q, is:
efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS ieS Devegmeej 2L Yegpee kesâ Skeâ Jeie& kesâ ur ∂V $ ∂V $ ∂V $
E=− i− j− k
Ûeej keâesveeW hej + q, + q, – q Deewj – q DeeJesMe efmLele nQ, ∂x ∂y ∂z
oes DeeJesMe + q Deewj + q kesâ yeerÛe kesâ ceOÙe efyevog A hej ur ∂ ( 4x 2 ) $ ∂ ( 4x 2 ) $ ∂ ( 4x 2 ) $
efJeÅegle efJeYeJe nw: E=− i− j− k
∂x ∂y ∂z
ur
E = −8xi$ – 0 – 0
ur
E = −8xi$ Vm–1
So Electric field at point (1, 0, 2)
ur
E = −8 × 1i$
1 2q
(a) Zero/MetvÙe (b) (1 + 5) E(1, 0, 2) = −8iˆ Vm −1
4πε0 L
ur
1 2q  1  1 2q  1  E = −8i$ Vm−1
(c) 1 +  (d) 1 – 
4πε0 L  5 4πε0 L  5  Hence, electric field is 8 Volt/meter along negative X-
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 axis.
Ans. (d) : 18. The electric potential at a point (x, y, z) is given
by V = – x2y – xz3 + 4
The electric field E at that point is :
efyevog (x, y, z) hej JewÅegle efJeYeJe V = –x2y – xz3 + 4 nw~
r
Fme efyevog hej efJeÅegle #es$e E nesiee~
(a) E = ˆi ( 2xy − z3 ) + ˆjxy 2 + k3z
ˆ 2x

(b) E = ˆi ( 2xy + z3 ) + ˆjx 2 + k3xz

ˆ 2

AB = AE = L and (c) E = ˆi2xy + ˆj ( x 2 + y 2 ) + kˆ ( 3xz − y 2 )

AC = AD = AB2 + BC2 = L2 + (2L)2 = 5L
(d) E = ˆiz + ˆjxyz + kz
ˆ 2
1  q -q -q q 
Potential at A is VA = + + + AIMPT-2009
4πε 0  AB AC AD AE 

Ans. (b) : Given electric potential V = –x y – xz3 + 4 2

1 q q q q ∂V $ ∂V $ ∂V $
VA = L - - +  and we know electric field E = – i- j- k
4πε 0  5L 5L L  ∂x ∂y ∂z
1 2q  1  ∂V
VA = 1- = – 2xy – z3
4πε 0 L  
5 ∂ x
17. The electric potential V at any point (x, y, z), all ∂V = – x2
in meters in space is given by V = 4x2 volt. The ∂y
electric field at the point (1, 0, 2) in volt/meter, ∂V
is :/Devleefj#e ceW efkeâmeer efyevog (x, y, z) meYeer ceeršj ceW hej = – 3xz2
∂ z
efJeÅegle efJeYeJe V, V = 4x2 volt Éeje efoÙee peelee nw~ r
efyevog (1, 0, 2) hej efJeÅegle #es$e volt/meter ceW nw : Hence E = (2xy + z3) $i + x 2 $j + 3xz 2 k$
(a) 8 along negative X-axis 19. Three concentric spherical shells have radii a,
8 $e+Ceelcekeâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe b, and c(a < b < c) and have surface charge
(b) 8 along positive X-axis densities σ, –σ and σ respectively. If VA, VB
8 Oeveelcekeâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe and VC denote the potentials of the three shells,
(c) 16 along negative X-axis then, for c = a + b, we have :
16 $e+Ceelcekeâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe leerve mecekesâvõer ieesueeW keâer ef$epÙeeSb a, b Deewj c (peyeefkeâ
(d) 16 along positive X-axis a<b<c ) nQ Deewj Fvekesâ leueerÙe DeeJesMe IevelJe ›eâceevegmeej
16 Oeveelcekeâ X-De#e kesâ DevegefoMe σ, –σ Deewj σ nw~ Ùeefo VA, VB leLee VC Fve leerve ieesueeW
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 kes â efJeYeJeeW keâes metefÛele keâjles neW, lees c = a + b nesves hej:
Physics 343 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) VC = VB = VA (b) VC = VA ≠ VB Q
(c) VC = VB ≠ VA (d) VC ≠ VB ≠ VA So Q × 1011 = k
r
AIMPT-2009 k
Ans. (b): ⇒ r= ––– (1)
1011
 1 q and we know – at same point electric field
Potential for a concentric shell, V =  
 4πε o  r E= k 2
Q
q q r
Surface charge density σ = = ⇒ q = σ.4πr2 Putting value of r from equation (1) ––
A 4πr 2
1  qA qB qC  Q Q Q
so VA = + +  E=k = k× 2 =
4πε o  a
2 k
b c   k  k
 11  1022 1022
∵ q = σ.4πr2  10 
and given that σA = +σ , σB = –σ , σC = +σ  1 
⇒ E = Q × 4πε0 × 1022 Q k = 
1  σ4πa 2 σ4πb 2 σ4πc2   4πε0 
VA =  – + 
4πε o  a b c  21. A bullet of mass 2 g is having a charge of 2µC.
Through what potential difference must it be
1
VA = [ σ.a - σb + σ.c] accelerated, starting from rest, to acquire a
εo speed of 10 m/s ?/2 «eece õJÙeceeve keâer Skeâ ieesueer
σ 2σ a 2µC keâe DeeJesMe jKeleer nw~ Fmekeâes efJejece DeJemLee mes 10
VA = (a – b + c) = (Q c = b + a ) m/s keâer ieefle Øeehle keâjves kesâ efueS efkeâleves efJeYeJeevlej
εo εo
Éeje lJeefjle keâjvee nesiee?
1  qA qB qC 
Similarly ⇒ VB = + +  (a) 50 kV (b) 5V
4πε o  b b c  (c) 50V (d) 5kV
1  σ.4πa 2 4πb 2 .σ σ.4πc 2  AIPMT-2004
VB =  - +  Ans. (a) : Given that :-
4πε o  b b c 
Mass (m) = 2g = 2 × 10–3 kg
σ a2  Velocity (v) = 10 m/s
VB =  - b + c
εo  b  Charge, q = 2µC = 2 × 10–6 C
σ a2  1
By Using mv 2 = qV
VB =  a +  By putting c = a +b 2
εo  b
1
1  q A q B q C  2σa mv 2
VC = + +  = 2
4πε o  a b c  ε0 Voltage (V) =
q
So, VC = VA ≠ VB
2 × 10−3 × (10 )
2

20. The electric potential at a point in free space V=

2 × 2 ×10−6
due to a charge Q coulomb is Q × 1011 volts.
The electric field at that point is –/cegòeâ DeekeâeMe V = 50 × 103V
ceW Skeâ efyevog Q ketâ@ueece kesâ keâejCe efJeÅegle efJeYeJe Q × V = 50kV
1011 Jeesuš nw~ Fme efyevog hej efJeÅegle #es$e nesiee :- 22. Identical charges (–q) are placed at each corner
of a cube of side 'b' then electrical potential
(a) 4πε0 Q × 10 volt/m
20
energy of charge (+q) which is placed at centre
(b) 12πε0 Q × 1022 volt/m of cube will be/Skeâ Ieve efpemekeâer Yegpee ‘b’ nw kesâ meYeer
(c) 4πε0 Q × 1022 volt/m keâesveeW hej meJe&mece DeeJesMe (–q) jKes ieÙes nQ~ Skeâ
(d) 12πε0 Q × 1020 volt/m Deefleefjòeâ DeeJesMe (+q) Ieve kesâ kesâvõ hej jKee nw lees
AIPMT-2008 Fmekeâer JewÅegle efmLeeflepe Tpee& nesieer -
Ans. (c) : Given: electric potential due to charge
−4 2q 2 −8 2q 2
Q = Q × 10+11 volt (a) (b)
πε 0 b πε 0 b
⇒ V = Q × 1011 V
∵ The electric potential due to charge Q −4q 2 8 2q 2
(c) (d)
Q 1 3πε 0 b 4πε 0 b
⇒ V=K (where K = )
r 4πε0 AIPMT-2002

Physics 344 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): By Pythagoras theorem, its length 1 qq 1 qq
(a) × 12 2 (b) × 1 2
2b2 + b2 = 3b 4πε0 r 4πε0 r
The distance of a corner to point is- (c) zero/MetvÙe (d) infinite/Deveble
 3 3b AIPMT-1994
 × b =
 Ans. (c) : Radius of circular path = r
 2  2
charge 'q2' is at the centre of a circular path.
Let the electrostatic potential energy (U) be at centre,
The work done in moving a charge (q1) between two
Distance between -q and +q is given points in an equipotential surface is zero.
3b If point charge is move from point VA to VB in an
r=
2 equipotential surface then,
 −8q 2  W = q1 (VA – VB) (VA = VB)
1
∴U = ×  W=0
4πε0  r 
25. Two metallic spheres of radii 1 cm and 2 cm
8 corners, so 8 negative charges are given charges 10–2 C and 5 × 10–2 C
 −8q 2   −16q 2  respectively. If they are connected by a
∴U =   =   conducting wire, the final charge on the smaller
 4πε0 r   4πε0 3b  sphere is
−4q 2 ef$epÙee 1 cm Deewj 2 cm kesâ oes OeeeflJekeâ ieesueeW hej
=
3πε 0 b ›eâceMe: 10–2 C Deewj 5 × 10–2 C DeeJesMe efoÙee peelee nw~
23. A hollow metallic sphere of radius 10 cm is Ùeefo GvnW Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ leej Éeje peesÌ[ efoÙee peeS, lees
charged such that potential of its surface is 80 Úesšs ieesues hej Debeflece DeeJesMe nesiee:
V. The potential at the centre of the sphere (a) 3 × 10–2C (b) 4 × 10–2C
would be/Skeâ KeesKeues Oeeleg kesâ ieesues keâer ef$epÙee 10 (c) 1 × 10–2C (d) 2 × 10–2C
mesceer nw~ Fmekeâer melen keâes 80 V keâer Jeesušlee mes AIPMT-1995
DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ yeleeFÙes Fmekesâ kesâvõ hej efkeâlevee Ans. (d) : When two charged spheres are connected
efJeYeJe nesiee? with each other with conducting wire, the flow of
charge will take place between two spheres until
(a) 80 V (b) 800 V potential of both spheres becomes the same.
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 8V
AIPMT-1994
Ans. (a) : Given data:
Radius of metallic sphere = 10 cm Let 'q' charge is being transferred from smaller sphere to
Potential at surface of sphere = 80 V the larger sphere.
• Given sphere is hollow & made of metal. So, there is Then, V1 = V2.
no electric field inside the hollow sphere. Q Potential for both sphere should be same.
• Since the electric field is zero inside sphere, the kq1 kq 2
potential will be same everywhere inside the sphere. ∴ =
10 –2 2 × 10 –2
Relation between the electric field (E), electric potential
(V) and distance(r) is given by. k × (10–2 − q ) k ( 5 ×10–2 + q )
⇒ =
dV 10–2 2 × 10–2
E=− ⇒ –2
2×10 – 2q = 5×10 + q –2
dr
∵ E=0 ⇒ 3q = –3×10–2 C
⇒ dV = 0 ⇒ q = –1×10–2 C
⇒ V = (k) constant ∴ Charge on smaller sphere = q1 – q = 10–2 – (–10–2)
Potential at centre of sphere is constant at 80 V q1 = 2 × 10 – 2 C
24. Charge q2 is at the centre of a circular path with 26. Eight equal charged tiny drops are combined
radius r. Work done in carrying charge q1, once to form a big drop. If the potential on each
around this equipotential path, would be drop is 10V then potential of big drop will
ef$epÙee r Jeeues Skeâ Je=òeekeâej heLe kesâ kesâvõ hej DeeJesMe be/Dee" meJe&mece Úesšer DeeJesefMele yetbos efceuekeâj Skeâ
q2 nw~ Fme meceefJeYeJe heLe kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj Skeâ yeej yeÌ[er yetbo yeveeleer nw~ Ùeefo ØelÙeskeâ Úesšer yetbo keâe efJeYeJe
DeeJesMe q1 keâes ues peeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee: 10V nw, lees yeÌ[er yetbo keâe efJeYeJe keäÙee nesiee-
Physics 345 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 40V (b) 10V DevegheÇmLe keâeš #es$eHeâue A leLee he=Lekeâ d kesâ efkeâmeer
(c) 30V (d) 20V meeceeblej heefššdkeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe JeeÙeg Yejer nw~ Fve
AIPMT-1999 heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe ceesšeF& d/2 Deewj meceeve #es$eHeâue keâe
Ans. (a) : Given data– keâesF& efJeÅeglejesOeer iegškeâe, efpemekeâe hejeJewÅegleebkeâ K(= 4)
Eight equal charged tiny drops are combined to form a nw, DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej meefVeJesefMele keâj efoÙee ieÙee
big drop– nw~ Fme mebOeeefj$e keâer veÙeer Oeeefjlee Deewj cetue Oeeefjlee keâe
8 Vtiny = Vbig Devegheele nesiee~
4 4
8 × πr 3 = πR 3
3 3
2r = R
kq
Potential Vtiny = ....(i)
r
k × 8q
Vbig = ....(ii)
R (a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
From (i) and (ii) we get– (c) 8 : 5 (d) 6 : 5
Vbig = 4 Vtiny NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Vbig = 4 × 10 = 40 V Ans. (c) : Capacitance of Parallel plate capacitor is
So, potential of big drops = 40 V. given by
27. Some charge is being given to a conductor. ε A  A = cross - sectional area of plate
Ca = 0 
Then its potential / Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ keâes kegâÚ DeeJesMe d d = distance b/w plate
efoÙee peelee nw lees Gmekeâe efJeYeJe - Now, when an insulating slab of dielectric const (K = 4)
(a) is maximum at surface d
of same area but thickness is inserted b/w plates
melen hej DeefOekeâlece neslee nw 2
(b) is maximum at centre / kesâvõ hej DeefOekeâlece neslee nw ε 0A
then, capacitance, Ck =
(c) is remain same throughout the conductor t
d−t+
mechetCe& Ûeeuekeâ hej meceeve nesiee K
(d) is maximum somewhere between surface and ε 0 A
Ck =
centre / melen SJeb kesâvõ kesâ ceOÙe ceW keâneR DeefOekeâlece d d
d− +
AIPMT-2002 2 2× 4
Ans. (c) : Conductors have large number of free ε 0A
Ck =
electrons, so when charge is distributed itself such that d d
electric field inside the conductor becomes zero. So its d− +
2 8
potential is same throughout the conductor.
8 ε0 A
⇒ When some charges are applied to a conductor, Ck =
5 d
their entire charge is distributed only on its surface.
Inside the conductor its field is zero, and its ε A
8/5 0
potential is the same as it is on the outside. Ck d
∴ Ratio, =
⇒ The potential is same across the conductor because Ca ε0 A
the entire conductor is equipotential. d
Hence, when a charge is applied to the conductor, the Ck 8
potential remains constant throughout. =
Ca 5
29. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
16.2 Dielectrics and Polarisation with air as medium is 6 µF. With the
introduction of a dielectric medium, the
28. A parallel plate capacitor having cross- capacitance becomes 30 µF. The permittivity of
sectional area A and separation d has air in the medium is :
between the plates. Now an insulating slab of efkeâmeer meceevlej heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e, efpemeceW ceeOÙece kesâ ™he
same area but thickness d/2 is inserted between ceW JeeÙeg Yejer nw, keâer Oeeefjlee 6 µF nw~ keâesF& hejeJewÅegle
the plates as shown in figure having dielectric
constant (K= 4). The ratio of new capacitance ceeOÙece Yejves hej Fmekeâer Oeeefjlee 30 µF nes peeleer nw~ Fme
to its original capacitance will be, ceeOÙece keâe hejeJewÅegleebkeâ nw:
Physics 346 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(∈0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2) Ans. (c):
(a) 1.77 × 10–12 C2 N–1 m–2
(b) 0.44 × 10–10 C2 N–1 m–2
(c) 5.00 C2 N–1 m–2
(d) 0.44 × 10–13 C2 N–1 m–2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (b) : Capacitance of air Capacitor as the medium
εA
Co = 0 = 6µF − − − (1)
d
When dielectric medium of permittivity εm & dielectric Let C1, C2, C3, and C4 are the capacitance of parts of
constant k is introduced between plates, then the capacitor filled with dielectric constant k1, k2, k3, k4
kε KA ∈0
Capacitate C = 0 A = 30µf − − − (2) we know capacitance C =
d d
kε 0 A k1 ∈0 ( A / 3) 2k1ε0 A
Dividing (2) by (1), C
= d =
30 C1 = =
Co ε0 A 6 d/2 3d
d k 2 ∈0 ( A / 3) 2k 2 ε0 A
k=5 C2 = =
d/2 3d
εm
k = εr = k 3 ∈0 ( A / 3) 2k 3 ε0 A
ε0 C3 = =
d/2 3d
∴ Permittivity of medium = ε m = ε0 k
= 8. 85×10-12 ×5 k 4 ∈0 A 2k 4 ε0 A
C4 = =
ε m = 0.44 × 10−10 C2 N-1m-2 d/2 d
There capacitance C1, C2, & C3 are in parallel & then it
30. A parallel-plate capacitor of area A, plate
separation d and capacitance C is filled with is in series with C4.
four dielectric materials having dielectric In Parallel- Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3
constants k1, k2, k3 and k4 as shown in the figure Now Ceq & C4 are in series.
below. If a single dielectric material is to be used 1 1 1
to have the same capacitance C in this capacitor, = +
then dielectric constant K is given by. C Ceq C4
Skeâ meceevlej-heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e keâe #es$eHeâue A leLee 1 1 1
Fmekeâer Oeeefjlee C nw Fmekeâer oes huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe keâe he=Lekeâ = +
C C1 + C 2 + C4 C4
(otjer) d nw~ FmeceW ›eâceMe: k1, k2, k3, Deewj k4
hejeJewÅegleebkeâ kesâ Ûeej hejeJewÅegle heoeLe&, veerÛes efoÙes DeejsKe
ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej, Yejs ieÙes nw ~ Ùeefo Fve ÛeejeW
hejeJewÅegleebkeâ keâe kesâJeue Skeâ hejeJewÅegle heoeLe& Yeje peeÙes,
leeefkeâ Gmekeâer Oeeefjlee C nes, lees K keâe ceeve nesiee :-

31. A parallel plate air capacitor of capacitance C

is connected to a cell of emf V and then
disconnected from it. A dielectric slab of
dielectric constant K, which can just fill the air
gap of the capacitor, is now inserted in it.
Which of the following is incorrect ?
efkeâmeer meceevlej-heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e keâer Oeeefjlee C nw~ Fmes
(a) k= k1+k2+k3+3k4
henues V efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue kesâ mesue mes peesÌ[e peelee nw,
2
(b) k = (k1 + k 2 + k 3 ) + 2k 4 Deewj efheâj mesue keâes nše efueÙee peelee nw~ Fmekesâ he§eeled
3
2 3 1 mebOeeefj$e keâer oes heefókeâeDeeW (huesšeW) kesâ yeerÛe kesâ mLeeve
(c) = + keâes Skeâ hejeJewÅegle heoeLe& kesâ muewye (heó) mes hetje Yej
k k1 + k 2 + k 3 k 4
1 1 1 1 3 efoÙee peelee nw~ Fme heoeLe& keâe hejeJewÅegleebkeâ K nw~ Fme
(d) = + + + mebOeeefj$e kesâ efueÙes efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewvemee keâLeve
k k1 k 2 k3 2k 4
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II mener veneR nw?
Physics 347 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) The energy stored in the capacitor decreases
K times.
mebOeeefj$e ceW mebefÛele Tpee& K iegvee keâce nes peeleer nw~
(b) The change in energy stored is 1 CV2  1 − 1 .
2 K 
mebefÛele Tpee& ceW heefjJele&ve 1 1 
CV 2  − 1 neslee nw~
2 K 
(c) The charge on the capacitor is not conserved.
mebOeeefj$e hej DeeJesMe keâe mebj#eCe veneR neslee~
(d) The potential difference between the plates
decreases K times
AIPMT-06.05.2014
oes huesšeW (heefókeâeDeeW) kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej K iegvee keâce
Ans. (c) : Electric field inside parallel plate capacitor
nes peelee nw~ having charge 'Q' at place where dielectric is absent
AIPMT-03.05.2015 Q
Ans.(c): E=
Aε 0
Q
when dielectric is present, E =
KAε 0
1
Q E∝
K
As K1 < K2
so, E1 > E2
Q = CV • The electric field inside the dielectrics will be less
Q = constant than the electric field in vacuum. The electric field
inside the dielectric could not be zero. As K2 > K1 the
Now capacitor drop in electric field for K2 dielectric must be more
Aεo k than K1.
C' =
d • The electric field will be maximum and constant in
C' = Ck portion without a dielectric. Inside the dielectric the
drop in electric field will be more for thick dielectric.
When the configuration is not charged and the capacitor i.e. for K2. Hence, graph (c) correctly depicts the
is not connected to any circuit, the charge always variation of electric field E with distance d.
remains constant (by the law of conservation of charge).
Initial charge = Final charge
16.3 Capacitors and Capacitance
So, the statement (c) is incorrect.
32. Two thin dielectric slabs of dielectric constants 33. The equivalent capacitance of the arrangement
K1 and K2 (K1 <K2) are inserted between plates shown in figure is
of a parallel plate capacitor, as shown in the eqÛe$e ceW oMee&F& ieF& JÙeJemLee keâer leguÙe Oeeefjlee nw
figure. The variation of electric field 'E'
between the plates with distance 'd' as
measured from plate P is correctly shown by:-
Skeâ meceeblej heefókeâe (huesš) mebOeeefj$e keâer oes huesšeW kesâ
yeerÛe K1 leLee K2 (K1 <K2) hejeJewÅegleebkeâ kesâ oes heleues
muewye (heóerkeâ) efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej jKeer ieF&
nQ~ mebOeeefj$e keâer heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ ceeve (a) 25µF (b) 20µF
'E' ceW, heóerkeâe P mes otjer 'd' kesâ meeLe heefjJele&ve keâes (c) 30µF (d) 15µF
keâewvemee «eeheâ mener ™he mes oMee&lee nw:- RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
Ans. (b) :

Physics 348 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
From the fig, capacitor C1, C2, C3, are in series 1 1
combination then equivalent capacitance is - = +
6 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
= + + =
C ' C1 C2 C3 C" 2
1 1 1 C " = 2µF
= + +
15 15 15
Hence, the equivalent capacitance of the circuit is 2µF.
1 3
=
C ' 15 35. The distance between the two plates of a
C' = 5µF parallel plate capacitor is doubled and the area
of each plate is halved. If C is its initial
Now, circuit can be modified as - capacitance, its final capacitance is equal to:
efkeâmeer meceeveevlej heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e keâer oesveeW heefóÙeeW kesâ
yeerÛe keâer otjer keâes oesiegvee SJeb ØelÙeskeâ heóer kesâ #es$eheâue
keâes DeeOee keâj efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo C Fmekeâer ØeejbefYekeâ
Oeeefjlee nw lees Fmekeâer veÙeer Oeeefjlee nesieer:
C
(a) 2 C (b)
2
From the figure-
C
C"=C'+C4 (c) 4 C (d)
4
= 5+15
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
C"=20µF
Ans. (d) : Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with
34. The equivalent capacitance of the system vacuum between the plates is given by –
shown in the following circuit is:/efvecveefueefKele
ε A
heefjheLe ceW ØeoefMe&le efvekeâeÙe keâer leguÙe Oeeefjlee nw C = ο Farad ...(i)
d

(a) 9 µ F (b) 2 µ F
(c) 3 µ F (d) 6 µ F
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 When distance between the parallel plate capacitor is
Ans. (b) : A
doubled i.e. 2d and area of each plate is halved then
2
capacitance is equal to
εA
C' = ο Farad ...(ii)
2d.2
dividing eqn(i) by eqn(ii) we get –
εο A
C
= d
C 2  C3 ⇒ C ' = C2 + C3 C ' εο A
4d
= 3+3
C 4
C ' = 6µF =
C' 1
Capacitor C1 and C ' are in series then –
C
1 1 1 C' =
= + 4
C" C ' C1

Physics 349 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
36. The effective capacitances of two capacitors are
3 µF and 16 µF, when they are connected in
series and parallel respectively. The
capacitance of two capacitors are: (1) (2)
oes mebOeeefj$eeW keâer ØeYeeJeer Oeeefjlee 3µF Deewj 16 µF nw,
peye Jess ›eâceMe: ßesCeer Deewj meceeveeblej ›eâce ceW pegÌ[s nesles
nQ~ oes mebOeeefj$eeW keâer Oeeefjlee nw- (a) 1.5 × 10−6 J (b) 4.5 × 10−6 J
(a) 10 µF, 6 µF (b) 8 µF, 8 µF (c) 3.25 × 10−6 J (d) 2.25 × 10−6 J
(c) 12 µF, 4 µF (d) 1.2 µF, 1.8 µF NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 Ans. (d) :
Ans. (c) : When two capacitor are connected in series
then –

1 1 1
= +
C' C1 C2
Common potential
C1C2 C V + C2 V2
C' = = 3µF ...(i) VC = 1 1
C1 + C2 C1 + C2
When two capacitors are connected in parallel then–
C ×100 + C × 0
VC =
C+C
900 × 100
VC =
900 + 900
VC = 50 volt
C'' = C1 + C2 = 16µF ...(ii) Electrostatic energy stored
From eqn (i) & eqn(ii) we get – 1
= 2 × CV 2
C1C2 2
C' × C'' = × ( C + C ) = C1C2 = 48µF ...(iii)
( 1 + C2 ) 1 2
C = CV 2
Now, (C1 – C2)2 = (C1 + C2)2 – 4C1 C2 = 900 × 10−12 × 50 × 50
(C1 – C2)2 = (16)2 – 4 × 48 = 225 × 10 −8 J
C1 – C2 = 8 ...(iv) = 2.25 × 10−6 J
Adding eqn(ii) and eqn(iv) we get– 38. The equivalent capacitance of the combination
C1 = 12µF shown in the figure is
eq (iv) ⇒ 12 – C2 = 8
n efoS ieÙes mebÙeespeve ceW leguÙe Oeeefjlee nw :
C2 = 4µF
37. A capacitor of capacitance C = 900 pF is
charged fully by 100 V battery B as shown in
figure (1). Then it is disconnected from the
battery and connected to another uncharged 3C
(a) (b) 3C
capacitor of capacitance C = 900 pF as shown 2
in figure (2). The electrostatic energy stored by C
the system (2) is (c) 2C (d)
2
efÛe$e (1) ceW oMee&Ùes Devegmeej, C = 900 pF Oeeefjlee Jeeues NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
efkeâmeer mebOeeefj$e keâes 100 V Jeeueer yewšjer B kesâ Éeje Ans. (c) :
hetCe&le: DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Fmekesâ yeeo Fmes yewšjer
kesâ meeLe mes nše efoÙee peelee nw, SJeb efÛe$e (2) kesâ
Devegmeej C = 900 pF Oeeefjlee Jeeues efkeâmeer otmejs
DeveeJesefMele mebOeeefj$e kesâ meeLe peesÌ[ efoÙee peelee nw~
efvekeâeÙe (2) Éeje mebefÛele mLeweflekeâ JewÅegle Tpee& nw:
Physics 350 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Since, the potential at point A is equal to potential at 40. The electrostatic force between the metal plates
point B. Therefore, no current will flow along arm AB. of an isolated parallel plate capacitor C having
Hence, the capacitor on arm AB will not contribute to a charge Q and area A, is / DeeJesMe Q kesâ efkeâmeer
the circuit. Now, the remaining 2 capacitor are efJeÙegòeâ meceevlej heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e C keâer #es$eHeâue A
connected in parallel, therefore the net capacitance of Jeeueer Oeeleg keâer heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe efmLej-JewÅegle yeue nw-
circuit is given by – Ceq = C+C = 2C (a) Independent of the distance between the
39. Two identical capacitors C1 and C2 of equal plates
capacitance are connected as shown in the heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer hej efveYe&j veneR keâjlee~
circuit. Terminals a and b of the key k are (b) Linearly proportional to the distance between
connected to charge capacitor C1 using battery the plates / heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer kesâ jwefKekeâle:
of emf V volt. Now disconnecting a and b the
terminals b and c are connected. Due to this, Deveg›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw~
what will be the percentage loss of energy? (c) Inversely proportional to the distance between
heefjheLe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej meceeve Oeeefjlee kesâ oes meJe&mece the plates / heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer kesâ
mebOeeefjle C1 Deewj C2 mebÙeesefpele nQ~ efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue V JÙegl›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw~
(d) Proportional to the square root of the distance
Jeesuš keâer yewšjer keâe GheÙeesie keâjkesâ mebOeeefj$e C1 keâes
between the plates / heefókeâeDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer kesâ
kegâvpeer k kesâ šefce&veueeW a Deewj b mes mebÙeesefpele keâjkesâ Jeie&cetue kesâ Deveg›eâceevegheeleer neslee nw~
DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee~ Deye a Deewj b keâes efJeÙeesefpele NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
keâjkesâ šefce&veueeW b Deewj c keâes mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ans. (a) Given : Capacitance of capacitor = C
Fmekesâ keâejCe Tpee& keâe ØeefleMele Üeme efkeâlevee nesiee? Charge = Q, Area of plates = A

(a) 25% (b) 75% Force between plates of capacitors,

r
(c) 0% (d) 50% F=Q E
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) r σ
Ans. (d) : Where, electric field E =
2ε0
σ
= Q×
V C C 2εo
Q
Surface charge density σ =
When we connect the a and b poles we have energy A
1 Q2
E1 = CV 2 F=
2 2ε o A
When we connected with b & c we have energy Hence, the electrostatic force between the metal plates
1 C1C2 of capacitor does not depend on the distance between
∆E = V2 the plates.
2 C1 + C2
41. A capacitor is charged by a battery. The
1 C2 2 battery is removed and another identical
= V
2 2C uncharged capacitor is connected in parallel.
1 The total electrostatic energy of resulting
= CV 2 system/efkeâmeer mebOeeefj$e keâes Skeâ yewšjer mes DeeJesefMele
4
∆E efkeâÙee peelee nw~ efheâj yewšjer keâes nšekeâj, Fme mebOeeefj$e mes
loss = × 100 meceevlej ›eâce ceW "erkeâ Ssmee ner Skeâ DevÙe DeveeJesefMele
E
1
mebOeeefj$e peesÌ[ efoÙee peelee nw~ lees, Fme Øekeâej yeves
CV 2 heefjCeeceer efvekeâeÙe keâer kegâue efmLej JewÅegle Tpee& (henues
= 4 × 100 mebOeeefj$e keâer leguevee ceW):
1 2
CV (a) Increases by a factor of 4/4 iegvee yeÌ{ peeÙesieer
2
2 ×100 (b) Decreases by a factor of 2/oesiegvee keâce nes peeÙesieer
= (c) Remains the same/Jener jnsieer
4
(d) Increases by a factor of 2/2 iegvee yeÌ{ peeÙesieer~
loss = 50% NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Physics 351 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): position 2, the percentage of its stored energy
dissipated is :/DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes Devegmeej 2µF Oeeefjlee
kesâ efkeâmeer mebOeeefj$e keâe DeeJesMeve efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ peye
efmJeÛe S keâes efmLeefle 2 hej IegceeÙee peelee nw, lees FmeceW
mebefÛele Tpee& keâe ØeefleMele #eÙe nesiee~
(a) 80% (b) 0%
Charge on capacitor (c) 20% (d) 75%
q = CV NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
When battery is replaced by another uncharged Ans. (a) : Initial energy stored in capacitor of 2µF is,
capacitor
1
Ui = 2(V)2
2
Ui = V 2
Where V is initial voltage
Final voltage after switch 2 is on,
As uncharged capacitor is connected parallel C1V
Vf =
So, C" = 2C C1 + C2
q + q2 Given, C1 = 2 µF, C2 = 8µF
Vc = 1
C1 + C 2 2× V
=
q+0 2+8
Vc =
C+C 2V
= = 0.2V
CV 10
Vc =
2C Final energy in both the capacitors,
1 1
U f = (C1 + C2 )Vf 2 = × ( 8 + 2 ) × ( 0.2V ) = 0.2V 2
V 2
Vc =
2 2 2
Therefore energy dissipated
1
Initial energy of system, Ui = CV2 ...(i) V 2 − 0.2V 2
2 = ×100
2 V2
( 2C )  
1 V = (1 – 0.2) × 100
Final energy of system, Uf =
2 2 = 80%
1 2 43. A parallel plate capacitor has a uniform
= CV ...(ii) electric field E in the space between the plates.
4
From equation (i) & (ii) If the distance between the plates is d and area
of each plate is A, the energy stored in the
1 capacitor is/efkeâmeer meceevlej huesš mebOeeefj$e keâer oes
CV 2
Uf 4 huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe Skeâ meceeve efJeÅegle #es$e keâe ceeve E nw~
=
Ui 1 Ùeefo mebOeeefj$e keâer oes huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer d nes leLee
CV 2
2 ØelÙeskeâ huesš keâe #es$eheâue A nes, lees mebOeeefj$e ceW mebefÛele
Uf 1 Tpee& keâe ceeve nesiee:-
=
Ui 2 1
(a) ε 0 E 2 Ad (b) ε0ΕΑd
1 2
Uf = Ui
2 1
(c) ε 0 E 2 (d) E2Ad/ε0
i.e., Total electrostatic energy of resulting system 2
decreases by a factor of 2. NEET (UG) 12.9.2021
42. AIPMT (Mains)-2012
AI PMT (Screening 2011)
Ans. (a) : Given:
(I) Parallel plate capacitor has uniform electric field E
in space between plates.

A capacitor of 2µF is charged as shown in the (II) Distance between plates = d

diagram. When the switch S is turned to
Physics 352 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(III) Area of cross-section of each plate = A leerve mebOeeefj$eeW ceW mes ØelÙeskeâ keâer Oeeefjlee C Deewj efJeYeJe
1 Jeesušlee V nw~ FvnW ßeb=Keueeyeæ peesÌ[e ieÙee nw Fme mebÙeespeve
Now, Energy stored in capacitor = CV 2 kesâ efueÙes Oeeefjlee Deewj efJeYeJe Jeesušlee kesâ ceeve neWies:
2
where, C = capacitance C V
V = Voltage. (a) 3C, 3V (b) ,
3 3
Aε0 V C
For parallel plate capacitor, C = & V = E.d (c) 3C, (d) ,3V
d 3 3
1 AIMPT-2009
∴ Energy, E = × C × V
2

2 Ans. (d) :
1  Aε0 
E=  × ( E2 d2 )
2  d 
1
E= ε0 E 2 Ad
2 In series arrangement charge on each plate of each
capacitor has the same magnitude. The potential
44. A series combination of n1 capacitors, each of
difference is distributed inversely in The ratio of
value C1, is charged by a source of potential
difference 4V. When another parallel capacitors, and the voltage across the circuit is the sum
combination of n2 capacitors, each of value C2, of individual .i.e. V = V1 + V2 +V3 + …….
is charged by a source of potential difference V, Here V = V + V + V = 3V
it has the same (total) energy stored in it, as the and in series combination the equivalent capacitance
first combination has. The value of C2, in terms 1 1 1 1
of C1, is then – Ceq is given by = + + +-----
Ceq C1 C2 C3
n1 mebOeeefj$eeW keâer Skeâ ßesCeer›eâce mebÙeespeve ØelÙeskeâ keâer
Oeeefjlee C1 keâes Skeâ 4V efJeYeJeevlej Œeesle mes DeeJesefMele Here, 1 = 1 + 1 + 1
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ n2 mebOeeefj$eeW keâe Skeâ DevÙe meceevlej Ceq C C C
mebÙeespeve ØelÙeskeâ keâer Oeeefjlee C2 keâes Skeâ efJeYeJeevlej 1 3
(V) Œeesle mes DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùen oesveeW =
Ceq C
mebÙeespeve kegâue meb«eefnle Tpee& Skeâ yejeyej jKeles nQ, lees
C2 keâe ceeve C1 kesâ heoeW ceW nesiee– C
Ceq =
3
2C1 n2
(a) (b) 16 C1 46. The energy required to charge a parallel plate
n1 n 2 n2 condenser of plate separation d and plate area
n2 16C1 of cross-section A such that the uniform
(c) 2 C1 (d) electric field between the plates is E, is :
n2 n1 n 2
Skeâ meceevlej heóerkeâerÙe mebOeeefj$e keâer huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
otjer d Deewj huešeW keâe DevegØemLe heefjÛÚsefole #es$eHeâue A
Ans. (d) : Case-1
When the capacitors are joined in series,
nw~ Fmes DeeJesefMele keâj huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe keâe DeÛej JewÅegle
Heâeru[ E yeveevee nw~ Fmes DeeJesefMele keâjves kesâ efueS
1 C1  C 
Useries= (4v) 2 Q (Ceq )series = 1  DeeJeMÙekeâ Tpee& nesieer :-
2 n1  n1 
1
Case- II When the capacitors are joined in parallel (a) ε0E2 Ad (b) ε0 E 2 Ad
2
1
Uparallel = (n 2 C2 )v (Q (Ceq )parallel = n 2 C 2 )
2
1
2 (c) ε0 E 2 / Ad (d) ε0E2/Ad
2
Given Useries = Uparallel
AIPMT-2008
1 C1 1 Ans. (a) : Given:- distance between parallel plates = d
(4v) 2 = (n 2 C2 )v 2
2 n1 2 Plate cross section Area = A
Uniform electric field = E
16C1
C2 = The capacitance of capacitor is given as:
n 2 n1
ε A
C = 0 ––– (1)
45. Three capacitors each of capacitance C and of d
breakdown voltage V are joined in series. The Where ε0 → absolute permittivity of free space.
capacitance and breakdown voltage of the & Potential difference is given by–
combination will be : V = E.d. –––– (2)

Physics 353 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now the energy required to charge plates = Energy in (a) Decreases/Ieš peeSiee
given by the cell (b) Does not change/veneR yeouesiee
E = CV2
(c) Becomes zero/MegvÙe peeSiee
ε A Increases/yeÌ{ peeSiee
=  0  ( E.d )
2
(d)
 d  AIPMT-2006
= ε0AE2.d A
47. Two condensers, one of capacity C and the Ans. (d) : As we know capacitance c = ε where
d
C
other of capacity , are connected to a V-volt A → Area of capacitors
2
d → distance between parallel plates
battery, as shown-
C 1
Oeeefjlee C Deewj kesâ oes mebOeeefj$eeW keâes efÛe$e ceW Now, C∝
2 d
efoKeeÙes Devegmeej V-Jeesuš yewš^er mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ For a charged capacitors Q = C V
Q
V=
C
The work done in charging fully both the 1
V∝
condensers is: C
oesveeW mebOeeefj$eeW keâes hetCe& DeeJesefMele keâjves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee If d increases then C will decrease.
keâeÙe& nesiee:- If C decreases then V will increases.
1 2
49. A network of four capacitors of capacity equal
(a) CV (b) 2CV2 to C1 = C, C2 = 2C, C3 = 3C and C4 = 4C are
2
connected to a battery as shown in the figure.
1 2 3 2 The ratio of the charges on C2 and C4 is –
(c) CV (d) CV
4 4 Fme efÛe$e ceW efoKeeves kesâ Deveg™he C1 = C, C2 = 2C,
AIPMT-2007 C3 = 3C Deewj C4 = 4C OeeefjleeDeeW kesâ meOeeefj$eeW kesâ
C meOeeef j$eeW keâes Skeâ yewš^er mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ C2 Deewj C4
Ans. (d) : Given: two condenser of capacitance C &
2 hej kesâ DeeJesMeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee-
From figure we see both capacitance are in parallel.

C 3C
So equivalent capacitance Ceq = C + =
2 2
and Work done W = energy stored (U)
1
= Ceq V 2
2 7 22
(a) (b)
1 3 4 3
= × C× V 2

2 2 3 4
3 (c) (d)
= CV 2 22 7
4 AIPMT-2005
48. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged to a Ans. (c) : The charge flowing through C4 is
potential difference of V volts. After q = C × V = 4CV
4 4
disconnecting the charging battery the distance
between the plates of the capacitor is increased The series combination of c1 , c2 and c3 gives
using an insulating handle. As a result the 1 1 1 1
potential difference between the plates:- = + +
Ceq C 2C 3C
meceevlej huesšeW kesâ Skeâ JeeÙeg mebOeeefj$e keâes V Jeesuš
efJeYeJeevlej lekeâ DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw DeeJesMekeâ yewšjer 6 + 3 + 2 11
= =
mes nševes kesâ Ghejevle Skeâ DeÛeeuekeâ Ùeb$e ØeÙeesie keâjles 6C 6C
ngS mebOeeefj$e huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer yeÌ{e oer ieF&~ Fmekesâ 6C
Ceq =
heâuemJe™he huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe ef›eâÙeekeâejer efJeYeJeevlej:- 11

Physics 354 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Charge flowing through capacitors c1, c2 & c3 will be Option (c) connecting two in series and one in parallel
same as they are in series
6C
q2 = Ceq × V = ×V
11
Now ratio of charge on C4 & C2 is
q 4 4CV ×11 22
= = Cnet =
C1C2
+ C3
q2 6CV 3 C1 + C2
q2 3 4× 4
⇒ = = +4
q 4 22 4+4
50. Three capacitors each of capacity 4µF are to be = 2 + 4 = 6µF
connected in such a way that the effective Option (d) connecting two in parallel and one in series.
capacitance is 6µF. This can be done by –
4µF Oeeefjlee Jeeues leerve mebOeeefj$eeW keâes Fme Øekeâej peesÌ[e
peelee nw efkeâ Gvekeâer ØeYeeJeer Oeeefjlee 6µF nw~ Ùen efkeâÙee
pee mekeâlee nw-
(a) connecting all of them in series
meYeer keâes ßesCeer›eâce ceW peesÌ[ keâj ( C1 + C 2 ) × C3
C net =
(b) connecting them in parallel ( C1 + C 2 ) + C3
meYeer keâes meceevlej ›eâce ceW pees[Ì keâj ( 4 + 4 ) × 4 = 32 = 8 µF
=
(c) connecting two in series and one in parallel/oes ( 4 + 4 ) + 4 12 3
keâes ßesCeer›eâce ceW Deewj Skeâ keâes meceevlej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[ keâj The option (c) is right answer.
(d) connecting two in parallel and one in series/oes 51. A capacitor of capacity C1 charged upto V volt
keâes meceevlej ›eâce ceW Deewj Skeâ keâes ßesCeer›eâce ceW peesÌ[ keâj and then connected to an uncharged capacitor
C2. Then final P.D. across each will be
AIPMT-2003 C1 Oeeefjlee kesâ Skeâ mebOeeefj$e keâes V Jeesuš lekeâ DeeJesefMele
Ans. (c): By option- efkeâÙee ieÙee nw, Deye Fmes Skeâ DeveeJesefMele mebOeeefj$e C2 mes
Option (a) Connecting all of them in series peesÌ[ efoÙee peeJeW lees ØelÙeskeâ kesâ efueS Deefvlece efJeYeJeevlej
nesiee -
C2 V C1V
(a) (b)
C1 + C 2 C1 + C 2
1 1 1 1
So, = + +  C   C 
Cnet C1 C2 C3 (c)  1 + 2  (d) 1 − 2  V
 C1   C1 
1 1 1 3
= + + = AIPMT-2002
4 4 4 4 Ans. (b) : C2 capacitor is uncharged capacitor that
4 means potential difference across it is = 0
C = µF
3 ∵ Capacity can't be Zero,
εA
Option (b) connecting them in parallel C= 0 , q = CV
d
Then potential difference will be -
C V + C 2 V2
V' = 1 1
C1 + C 2
V2 =0, V1 = V (given)
C V + C 2 (0)
then, V' = 1
C1 + C 2
 C1 V 
So, Cnet = C1 + C2 + C3 V' =  
= 4 + 4 + 4 =12µF  C1 + C 2 

Physics 355 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
52. The effective capacity of the network between Ans. (c) : The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor is
terminals A and B is/ heefjheLe keâer A Deewj B kesâ given by
ceOÙe leguÙe Oeeefjlee keäÙee nesieer- ε0A
C=
d
In the presence of medium
∈r ε0 A
C' = {∵ ∈r = 6}
d
6ε 0 A
C' = = 6C
(a) 6 µF (b) 20 µF d
(c) 3 µF (d) 10 µF & Energy stored in capacitor is –
AIPMT-1999
q2
Ans. (a) : Wheatstone bridge condition is satisfied, so E=
2C
no charge will go in 20µf capacitance
In the presence of medium
6× 6
Ceq = = 3µF q2
6+6 E' =
2C'
Putting the value of C'
q2 E
E' = =
( 2C ) 6 6
Then, (Ceq)f = 3 + 3 = 6 µ F E q2
E' = QE=
6 2C
54. Energy per unit volume for a capacitor having
area A and separation d kept at potential
difference V is given by : -
Ùeefo mebOeeefj$e keâer huesšes keâe #es$eheâue (A) Gvekesâ ceOÙe
keâer otjer (d) Je efJeYeevlej (V) nw, lees Tpee& Øeefle FkeâeF&
DeeÙeleve nesieer-
6µF
1 V2 1 V2
(a) ε0 (b)
2 d2 2ε 0 d 2
This series makes a parallel combination
(Ceq)f = 3 + 3 = 6µF 1 Q2
(c) CV 2 (d)
53. The energy and capacity of a charged parallel 2 2C
plate capacitor are E and C respectively. Now a AIPMT-2001
dielectric slab of ∈r = 6 is inserted in it then Ans. (a) : Given, area of Plate = A
energy and capacity becomes (Assuming Distance between plates = d
charge on plates remains constant)
Since, potential difference between plates of capacitor is
Skeâ DeeJesefMele meceevlej heó mebOeeefj$e keâes Oeeefjlee SJeb
V.
efJeÅegle #es$e ›eâceMe: C SJeb E nw Deye Ùeefo heefókeâeDeeW kesâ Hence we will consider one of plates to be at potential
ceOÙe Skeâ ∈r = 6 keâer hejeJewÅegle heefókeâe jKe oW lees (v) & another plate to have potential zero.
efJeÅegle #es$e SJeb Oeeefjlee nes peeSieer (huesšeW hej DeeJesMe
efveÙece ceeve efueefpeS)
(a) 6E, 6C (b) E, C
E Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor (c) is
(c) , 6C (d) E, 6C
6 ε0 A
c=
AIPMT-1999 d

Physics 356 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Electrical energy stored in parallel plate capacitor is 1  Q 
2

1 = C 
given by; E = CV
2 2  2C 
2 1 Q2
1ε A ε A U' = C 2
 2 4C
E =  0  V 2 , Q C = 0 
2 d   d 
1 1 Q2
Now, = × ×
2 4 C
Volume of Parallel plate capacitor: V = Ad U
∴ Energy per unit volume of capacitor is given as U'=
4
 ε0A  2
1 56. The energy stored in a capacitor of capacity C
 d V 2
=  
E and potential V is given by
U=
Volume A×d Oeeefjlee C Deewj efJeYeJe V kesâ Skeâ mebOeeefj$e ceW mebefÛele
1  ε0  2 1 V2 Tpee& keâes efkeâme Øekeâej JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw?
U= V ⇒ U = ε0
2  d 2 
 2 d2 CV C2 V 2
(a) (b)
2 2
55. A capacitor is charged with a battery and
energy stored is U. After disconnecting battery C2 V CV 2
(c) (d)
another capacitor of same capacity is connected 2 2
in parallel with it. Then energy stored in each AIPMT-1996
capacitor is: Ans. (d) : Capacity of capacitor = C
Skeâ mebOeeefj$e keâes Skeâ yewšjer mes DeeJesefMele keâjles nQ lees Q
potential = V =
GmeceW meb«eefnle Tpee& U nw~ Deye yewšjer keâes nšekeâj Fme C
mebOeeefj$e kesâ meceevlej ›eâce ceW leguÙe Oeeefjlee keâe otmeje Now,
Let, 'W' be the workdone in bringing a small
mebOeeefj$e peesÌ[les nQ lees ØelÙeskeâ mebOeeefj$e ceW meb«eefnle Tpee&
charge dQ at this potential is
keâe ceeve nesiee – Q
(a) U/2 (b) U/4 dW = V.dQ = dQ
C
(c) 4 U (d) 2U ∴ Total work done, from 0 to Q is
AIPMT-2000 Q Q
Q
Ans. (b) : Given Data, W = ∫0 dW = ∫0 C dQ
1 Q2
Energy stored in capacitor = U = W=
1
[Q2 ] 0
Q
2 C 2C
Let capacitance of battery = C & charge on capacitor be
1 Q2
'Q'. W=
According to question, Capacitor of same capacity is 2 C
connected in parallel with it. Therefore, charge will Q Q = CV
1 ( CV )
2
flow equally between both capacitors.
W= ×
Q 2 C
∴ Charge in each capacitor =
2 1
W = CV 2
Potential difference across two capacitor is given by. 2
charge 57. A 4 µF capacitor is charged to 400 V. If its
V=
capacity plates are joined through a resistance of 2 kΩ,
Q 1 then heat produced in the resistance is
V= × 4 µF keâe Skeâ mebOeeefj$e 400V hej Ûeepe& efkeâÙee ieÙee
2 C
Q leLee Gmekesâ huesšes keâes 1 KΩ kesâ ØeeflejesOe mes peesÌ[e ieÙee~
V=
2C ØeeflejesOe ceW GlheVe T<cee keâe ceeve:
Now, Energy in each capacitor is given by- (a) 0.64 J (b) 1.28 J
1 (c) 0.16 J (d) 0.32 J
U ' = CV 2
2 AIPMT-(1995)

Physics 357 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that: (a) remains a constant because the electric field is
C = 4µF = 4 × 10–6 F uniform./efveÙele jnleer nw keäÙeeWefkeâ efJeÅegle #es$e Skeâ meceeve nw~
Voltage applied = 400 V (b) increases because the charge moves along the
Energy stored = energy produced through resistance electric field./yeÌ{ peeleer nw keäÙeeWefkeâ DeeJesMe efJeÅegle #es$e
1 1 kesâ DevegefoMe ieefle keâjlee nw~
U = CV 2 = × (4 × 10–6 ) × (400) 2 (c) decreases because the charge moves along the
2 2
= 32 × 10–2 Joule electric field./Ieš peeleer nw keäÙeeWefkeâ DeeJesMe efJeÅegle #es$e
Heat produced = 0.32 Joule kesâ DevegefoMe ieefle keâjlee nw~
(d) decreases because the charge moves opposite
16.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems to the electric field./Ieš peeleer nw keäÙeeWefkeâ DeeJesMe
efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ efJehejerle ieefle keâjlee nw~
58. A capacitor of 4 µF is connected as shown in Ans. (c): Equipotential surface is always perpendicular
the circuit. The internal resistance of the to the direction of electric field.
battery is 0.5 Ω. The amount of charge on the • Positive charge experiences the force in the direction
capacitor plates will be/efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej of electric field.
• When a positive charge is released from rest in
heefjheLe ceW 4µF keâe mebOeeefj$e nw~ yewšjer keâe Deevleefjkeâ uniform electric field, its velocity increases in the
ØeeflejesOe 0.5Ω nw~ mebOeeefj$e keâer huesšeW hej DeeJesMe keâer direction of electric field. So K.E increases and the P.E
cee$ee nesieer– decreases due to the law of conservation of energy.
So, P.E. of positively charged particle decreases
because along the electric charged particle moves in the
ur
direction of field due to the force qE .
60. Figure shows some equipotential lines
distributed in space. A charged object is moved
from point A to point B./efÛe$e ceW efJeleefjle kegâÚ
meceefJeYeJe jsKeeSB oMee&Ùeer ieF& nQ~ keâesF& DeeJesefMele efheC[
(a) 0 (b) 4µC
efyevog A mes efyevog B lekeâ ieefle keâjlee nw~
(c) 16 µC (d) 8 µC
Ans. (d) : As capacitor offer infinite resistance so
current from cell will not flow across capacitor branch.
So, current will flow across 2Ω branch.
V 2.5 2.5
I= = = = 1Amp.
R + r 2 + 0.5 2.5 Fig (i) Fig (ii)
So, Potential difference across the internal resistance of
cell
V = 1R
= 1×0.5
= 0.5 v
Potential difference across the 4µF capacitor Fig (iii)
V = E – ir (a) The work done in figure (i) is the greatest./efÛe$e
= 2.5 – 0.5 (i) ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& DeefOekeâlece nw~
= 2V (b) The work done in figure (ii) is the least./efÛe$e
So charge on the capacitor plats (ii) ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& vÙetvelece nw~
Q = CV
(c) The work done is the same in figure (i), (ii)
Q = 4×2 = 8µC and (iii)./efÛe$e (i), (ii), Deewj (iii), ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee
59. A positively charged particle is released from keâeÙe& meceeve nw~
rest in a uniform electric field. The electric (d) The work done in figure (iii) is greater than
potential energy of the charge/efkeâmeer Skeâ meceeve figure (ii) but equal to that in figure (i).efÛe$e
efJeÅegle #es$e ceW efkeâmeer OeveeJesefMele keâCe keâes cegkeäle efkeâÙee (iii) ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& efÛe$e (ii) mes DeefOekeâ nw hejvleg
peelee nw~ DeeJesMe keâer JewÅegle efmLeefle Tpee& efÛe$e (i) kesâ meceeve nw~
Physics 358 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): As the potential difference between A and B • Since, the algebraic sum of all the charges must not be
in all three figures are equal to 20V. So, work done by zero. So, the equipotential surface at a greater distance
any charge in moving from A to B surface will be means that spaced of charge is negligible as compared
 W to distance.
equal.  V =  • So, the collection of charges is considered as a point
 qo 
charge.
Hence the work done is same in all figure. • The lines of field from point charges are radial. So,
61. The electrostatic potential on the surface of a the equipotential surface (perpendicular to the field
charged conducting sphere is 100V. Two lines.) form a sphere.
statements are made in this regard/efkeâmeer Hence, it is clearly shown that spheres is the correct
DeeJesefMele Ûeeuekeâ ieesues kesâ he=‰ hej efmLele efJeYeJe 100V answer.
nw~ Fmekesâ meboYe& ceW oes keâLeve efoS ieS nQ : 63. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two
S1 : At any point inside the sphere, electric dielectric blocks in series. One of the blocks
intensity is zero./ieesues kesâ Yeerlej efkeâmeer efyevog hej has thickness d1 and dielectric constant K1 and
efJeÅegle leer›elee MetvÙe nw~ the other has thickness d2 and dielectric
constant k2 as shown in figure. This
S2 : At any point inside the sphere, the
arrangement can be thought as a dielectric
electrostatic potential is 100 V/ieesues kesâ Yeerlej
slab of thickness (d = d1 + d2) and effective
efkeâmeer efyevog hej efmLele JewÅegle efJeYeJe 100V nw~ dielectric constant K. The K is/keâesF& meceevlej
Which of the following is a correct heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e oes ßesCeeryeæ hejeJewÅegle iegškeâeW mes yevee
statement?/veerÛes efoS ieS keâLeveeW ceW keâewve-mee mener nw?
nw~ FveceW efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej Skeâ iegškesâ keâer ceesšeF&
(a) S1 is true but S2 is false/ S1 melÙe nw hejvleg S2
d1 leLee hejeJewÅegleebkeâ k1 leLee otmejs iegškesâ keâer ceesšeF& d2
DemelÙe nw~
leLee k2 hejeJewÅegleebkeâ nw~ Fme JÙeJemLee keâes Skeâ Ssmee
(b) Both S1 and S2 are false/ S1 leLee S2 DemelÙe nw~
hejeJewÅegle iegškeâe ceevee pee mekeâlee nw efpemekeâer ceesšeF& d
(c) S1 is true, S2 is also true and S1 is the cause of
S2 approximately/ S1 melÙe nw, S2 Yeer melÙe nw leLee (= d1 + d2) leLee ØeYeeJeer hejeJewÅegleebkeâ k nw~ leye k keâe
keâLeve S2 keâe keâejCe keâLeve S1 nw~ ceeve nw~
(d) S1 is true, S2 is also true but the statements are
independent./ S1 melÙe nw, S2 Yeer melÙe nw hejvleg oesveeW
keâLeve Skeâ otmejs mes mJeleb$e nQ~
Ans. (c) : The relation between electric field intensity E K1d1 + K 2d 2 K1d1 + K 2d 2
(a) (b)
and potential V is. d1 + d 2 K1 + K 2
dV K1K 2 (d1 + d 2 ) 2K1K 2
E=– (c) (d)
dr K 2 d1 + K1d 2 K1 + K 2
Here, E = 0 inside the sphere, then
dV Ans. (c) : Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor filled
= 0 ⇒ V = Constant with dielectric of constant k and thickness d is given by
dr
kε A
If E = 0 inside the charged sphere, the potential is C= o
constant or V = 100, everywhere inside the sphere and it d
verifies the shielding effect also. As, both the capacitors are in series, so equivalent
Hence, S1 is true; S2 is also true and S1 is the cause of S2 capacitance, C will be related as
approximately. 1 1 1 d1 d2
= + = +
62. Equipotentials at a great distance from a C C1 C2 k1ε0 A k 2 ε0 A
collection of charges whose total sum is not
d d1 d2
zero are approximately/kegâÚ DeeJesMeeW kesâ Skeâ mecetn ⇒ = +
keâe kegâue Ùeesie MetvÙe veneR nw~ Fmemes DeefOekeâ otjer hej yeveves kε0 A k1ε0 A k 2 ε0 A
Jeeues meceefJeYeJe he=‰ neWies ⇒
d d1 d 2
= +
(a) spheres/ieesues (b) planes/meceleue k k1 k 2
(c) paraboloids/hejJeueÙepe (d) ellipsoids/oerIe&Je=òepe d d1k 2 + d 2 k1
⇒ =
Ans. (a) : Here, we have to find out the shape of k k1 k 2
equipotential surface. These surfaces are perpendicular k1k 2 (d1 + d 2 )
to the field lines. So, there must be electric field which ∴ k= [ Q d = d 1 + d 2]
(d1k 2 + d 2 k1 )
cannot be without charge.

Physics 359 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
17.
Current Electricity
Ans. (d): In general ions are always present in gases
17.1 Electric Current due to cosmic rays and many other factors so when we
apply a potential difference across the discharge tube
1. Across a metallic conductor of non-uniform the ions get accelerated due to electric field. If this
cross section a constant potential difference potential difference is large enough then these ion get
is applied. The quantity which remains enough energy to ionize the molecule on collision thus a
constant along the conductor is:/Demeceeve large number of ions produced and conduction starts.
heefjÛÚso (ceesšeF&) kesâ Oeeleg kesâ efkeâmeer Ûeeuekeâ kesâ oes Generally an electron gets detached from a molecule to
efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe Skeâ efmLej efJeYeJeevlej Deejesefhele efkeâÙee form a positive ion and at a low pressure these electrons
move through a large distance and get attached to
peelee nw~ Fme Ûeeuekeâ kesâ DevegefoMe pees jeefMe
another molecule and thus forms the conduction
DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer Jen nw: electron into positive ions and negative ions takes part.
(a) current/efJeÅegle Oeeje Hence the current conduction takes place due to positive
(b) drift velocity/DeheJeen Jesie ion and electrons.
(c) electric field/efJeÅegle #es$e 3. The current in 8Ω resistance is (See fig.)
(d) current density/Oeeje IevelJe heefjheLe ceW 8Ω ceW Oeeje keäÙee nesieer-
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (a)

The drift velocity of the electron is calculated by:

I
v=
neA (a) 0.69 A (b) 0.92 A
The relation between drift velocity and electric field E: (c) 1.30 A (d) 1.6 A
E = vdm/eτ AIPMT-1999
I Ans. (a) :
Current density (J) =
A
V
Current in conductor I =
R
Since cross section of conductor is non-uniform the
current density of conductor will be non-uniform.
The rate of flow of current is constant because applied
potential is constant and resistance is material property
which is also constant therefore current flow will
remain constant in non uniform cross sectional area By mesh analysis–
conductor. For mesh 1 let current be I1 & for mesh 2 let current be
2. The current conduction in a discharge tube is I 2,
due to/efJemepe&ve veefuekeâe ceW Oeeje ØeJeen nw - 4 I1 + (I1 + I2) 8 = 8 ...(i)
12 I1 + 8I2 = 8
(a) Electrons only/Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ keâejCe
6 I2 + (I1 + I2) 8 = 6 ...(ii)
(b) +ve ions and –ve ions
8I1 + 14 I2 = 6
OeveeÙeve SJeb $e+CeeÙeve kesâ keâejCe
[Current in 8Ω = I1 + I2]
(c) –ve ions and electrons From equation (i) and equation (ii) we get the value of
$e+CeeÙeve SJeb Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ keâejCe I1 and I2.
(d) +ve ions, and electrons I1 = 0.615A, I2 = 0.076A
OeveeÙeve SJeb Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ keâejCe Hence current in 8Ω resistor is,
AIPMT-1999 I1 + I2 = 0.615A + 0.076A = 0.69A.
Physics 360 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
4. A flow of 107 electrons per second in a 10
conducting wire constitutes a current of vd =
10 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × π (10 −3 )
22 2

efkeâmeer Ûeeuekeâ leej ceW Øeefle meskeâC[ 107 Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe

ØeJeen efkeâleveer Oeeje efveefce&le keâjlee nw? vd =
10
(a) 1.6 × 10 A –12
(b) 1.6 × 10 A26 π× 1.6 × 10−3
(c) 1.6 × 10–26A (d) 1.6 × 1012A 6.25
vd = × 103 m/sec
AIPMT-(1994) π
Ans. (a) : We know that, 7. Column-I gives certain physical terms
q ne associated with flow of current through a
current (I) = = metallic conductor.
t t
= 107 × 1.6 × 10–19 mlecYe-I OeelJeerÙe Ûeeuekeâ mes ØeJeeefnle Oeeje mes mecyeefvOele
kegâÚ Yeeweflekeâ leLÙe JÙeòeâ keâjlee nw~
I = 1.6 × 10–12 A
Column-II gives some mathematical relations
5. Identify the set in which all the three materials involving electrical quantities. Match Column-I
are good conductors of electricity. and Column-II with appropriate relations.
Gme mecegÛÛeÙe keâer henÛeeve keâerefpeS efpemeceW meYeer leerveeW mlecYe-II meceeve ieefCeleerÙe mecyevOe efpeveceW efJeÅegle
õJÙe efJeÅegle kesâ DeÛÚs Ûeeuekeâ nw~ jeefMeÙeeB meefcceefuele nesleer nw, keâes JÙeòeâ keâjlee nw~ mlecYe-
(a) Cu, Hg and NaCl/ Cu, Hg Deewj NaCl I keâes mlecYe-II mes mener mecyevOe Éeje megcesefuele keâerefpeS :
(b) Cu, Ge and Hg/ Cu, Ge Deewj Hg Column-I Column-II
(c) Cu, Ag and Au/ Cu, Ag Deewj Au (A) Drift Velocity (P)
m
(d) Cu, Si and diamond/ Cu, Si Deewj nerje ne 2ρ
AIPMT-(1994) Devegieceve Jesie
Ans. (c) : Cu, Ag and Au are good conductors of (B) Electrical Resistivity (Q) nevd
electricity. efJeÅegleerÙe ØeeflejesOekeâlee
eE
(C) Relaxation Period (R) τ
17.2 Drift of Electrons m
efJeßeece keâeue
6. A copper wire of radius 1 mm contains 1022
E
free electrons per cubic meter. The drift (D) Current Density (S)
velocity for free electrons when 10A current J
flows through the wire will be (Given, charge Oeeje IevelJe
on electron = 1.6×10-19C) (a) (A) - (R), (B) - (Q), (C) - (S), (D) - (P)
1 efceceer ef$epÙee Jeeues leebyes kesâ leej ces Øeefle Ieve ceeršj (b) (A) - (R), (B) - (S), (C) - (P), (D) - (Q)
1022 cegòeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve nw~ leej ceW 10A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nessves (c) (A) - (R), (B) - (S), (C) - (Q), (D) - (P)
hej cegòeâ Fueskeäš^e@veeW kesâ efueS DeheJeen Jesie nesiee (efoÙee (d) (A) - (R), (B) - (P), (C) - (S), (D) - (Q)
–19 NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
ieÙee nw, Fueskeäš^e@ve hej DeeJesMe =1.6×10 C)
Ans. (b) : • The average velocity attained by charged
5
6.25 −1 6.25 × 10 −1 particles in direction of applied electric field in a
(a) ms (b) ms material is called drift velocity.
π π
4
• Relaxation period is the time gap between two
6.25 × 10 −1 6.25 3 −1 successive electron collisions in a conductor.
(c) ms (d) × 10 ms
π π • The amount of electric current passing per unit cross
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 sectional area in a conductor is called current density.
Ans. (d) : Given: r = 1mm = 1×10 m -3
Column − I Column − II
n = 1022 / m3 Drift velocity eE
i = 10A τ
-19
m
e = 1.6×10 C Electrical resistivity E
The drift velocity for e– is -
J
i
vd = Relaxation period m
neA
ne2 ρ
i
vd = Current density nevd
neπr 2

Physics 361 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8. A charged particle having drift velocity of 7.5 × R A AB
10–4 m s–1 in an electric field of 3 × 10–10 Vm–1, =
R B AA
has a mobility in m2 V–1 s–1 of :
efkeâmeer DeeJesefMele keâCe, efpemekeâe 3 × 10–10 Vm–1 leer›elee π
(3d) 2
RA 4
kesâ efJeÅegle #es$e ceW DeheJeen Jesie 7.5 × 10–4 m s–1 nw, keâer =
RB π 2
m2 V–1 s–1 ceW ieefleMeeruelee nw: d
4
(a) 2.5 × 106 (b) 2.5 × 10–6
–15 R A 9d 2
(c) 2.25 × 10 (d) 2.25 × 1015 = 2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 RB d
Ans. (a) : Given that, 81 9
=
vd = 7.5×10-4m/sec RB 1
E = 3×10-10 Vm–1
RB = 9Ω
Mobility of charge particle
11. On the basis of electrical conductivity, which
| v | 7.5 × 10−4 2 −1 −1
µ= d = = 2.5 × 10 6
m V s one of the following materials has the smallest
E 3 ×10−10 resistivity?
9. The velocity of charge carriers of current efJeÅegle Ûeeuekeâlee kesâ DeeOeej hej efvecveefueefKele ceW mes
(about 1 ampere) in a metal under normal efkeâme heoeLe& keâer ØeeflejesOekeâlee meyemes keâce nesleer nw?
conditions is the order of/efkeâmeer Oeeleg ceW DeeJesMe
(a) Glass/keâeBÛe
JeenkeâeW keâe Jesie, meeceevÙe heefjefmLeefleÙeeW ceW nesiee:
(b) Silicon/efmeefuekeâe@ve
(a) a fraction of mm/sec/ efceceer/meskeâC[ keâe kegâÚ Yeeie
(c) Germanium/pecexefveÙece
(b) velocity of light/ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie
(d) Silver/ÛeeBoer
(c) several thousand metres/second/kegâÚ npeej
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
ceeršj/meskeâC[ Ans. (d) : We know that, resistivity (ρ) is the inverse of
(d) a few hundred metres per second/kegâÚ meew conductivity (σ). The unit of resistivity is ohm-meters
ceeršj/meskeâC[ (Ω-m).
AIPMT-(1991) 1
Ans. (a) : The velocity of charge carriers of current ρ=
σ
(about 1 ampere) in a metal under normal conditions is
of the order of a fraction of mm/sec Material Conductivity (S/m) at
20ºC
Glass 10-15 to 10-11
17.3 Resistance & Resistivity Silicon 4.35×10-4
Germanium 2.17
10. A certain wire A has resistance 81Ω. The
Silver 6.30×107
resistance of another wire B of same material
and equal length but of diameter thrice the On the basis of conductivity, silver has smallest
diameter of A will be. resistivity.
efkeâmeer leej A keâe ØeeflejesOe 81 Ω nw~ meceeve heoeLe& leLee 12. Resistance of a carbon resistor determined
meceeve uecyeeF& kesâ Skeâ DevÙe leej B keâe JÙeeme A kesâ from colour codes is ( 22000 ± 5% ) Ω. The
JÙeeme keâe leerve iegvee nw, B keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee– colour of third band must be :
(a) 729Ω (b) 243Ω JeCe& keâes[ mes %eele efkeâÙee ieÙee Skeâ keâeye&ve ØeeflejesOe keâe
(c) 81Ω (d) 9Ω ØeeflejesOe (22000 ± 5%) Ω nw~ leermejs yeQ[ keâe JeCe&
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 nesvee ÛeeefnS :
Ans. (d) : Given: RA= 81Ω dA = d (a) Yellow / heeruee (b) Red/ ueeue
RB = ? dB = 3d (c) Green/ nje (d) Orange/ veejbieer
We know that-
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
resistance of wire is -
Ans. (d) : Given that :
ρl
R=
A
( 22000 ± 5%)
π ⇒ 22 ×103 ± 5%
Where, A = d 2
4 ⇒ Colour code for 103 is orange.

Physics 362 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
13. As the temperature increases, the electrical Ans. (a): Given that,
resistance Length of wire, L = 10 m
leeheceeve kesâ yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe, efJeÅegle ØeeflejesOe keâe ceeve:  10−2 
Radius of wire, r =  m
(a) Decreases for conductors but increases for  π 
semiconductors/ÛeeuekeâeW kesâ efueS Iešlee nw, efkeâvleg Electrical resistance, R = 10Ω
Deæ&ÛeeuekeâeW kesâ efueS yeÌ{lee nw~ Electric field strength E = 10 V/m
(b) Increases for both conductors and Now,
semiconductors J=σE
ÛeeuekeâeW SJeb Deæ&ÛeeuekeâeW oesveeW kesâ efueS yeÌ{lee nw~ Where J = current density
σ = current conductance of the resistance
(c) Decreases for both conductors and
E = Electric field
semiconductors
ÛeeuekeâeW SJeb Deæ&ÛeeuekeâeW oesveeW kesâ efueS Iešlee nw~ 1
J= E
(d) Increases for conductors but decreases for ρ
semiconductors/ÛeeuekeâeW kesâ efueS yeÌ{lee nw, efkeâvleg  L 
Q R = ρ A 
Deæ&ÛeeuekeâeW kesâ efueS Iešlee nw~ J=
EL
 
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 RA  ρ = RA 
 L 
Ans. (d) : Conductor has positive temperature
coefficient i.e. as temperature increases the resistance EL
J=
increases. Rπr 2
Semiconductor has negative temperature coefficient i.e. 10 × 10
as temperature increases the resistance decreases. = 2
 10−2 
14. The reciprocal of resistance is: 10 × π  
 π 
ØeeflejesOe keâe JÙegl›eâce nw:
10
(a) reactance/ØeefleIeele = −4
10
(b) mobility/ieefleMeeruelee
J = 105 A / m2
(c) conductivity/Ûeeuekeâlee
16. Two solid conductors are made up of same
(d) conductance/ÛeeuekeâlJe material, have same length and same resistance.
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 One of them has a circular cross section of area
Ans. (d) : The reciprocal of resistance is known as A1 and the other one has a square cross section
of area A2. The ratio A1/A2 is
conductance of a resistor. Its unit is Ω or (mho) –1
meceeve heoeLe& kesâ yeves meceeve uebyeeF& kesâ oes "esme ÛeeuekeâeW
1
G= kesâ ØeeflejesOe meceeve nw~ FveceW mes Skeâ keâer DevegØemLekeâeš
R Je=òeekeâej nw efpemekeâe #es$eHeâue A1 nw Deewj otmeje Jeiee&keâej
Where, G = conductance of a resistor nw efpemekeâe #es$eheâue A nw~ A /A Devegheele keâe ceeve nw-
2 1 2
• Resistance R is given by R = ρ l /A (a) 2 (b) 1.5
Where, ρ is resistivity of conductor and reciprocal of (c) 1 (d) 0.8
resistivity is called conductivity. NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
15. A copper wire of length 10 m and radius ρl
Ans. (c) : Resistance R =
(10 -2
)
π m has electrical resistance of 10Ω. A
ρl
The current density in the wire for an electric ⇒A=
R
field strength of 10 (V/m) is
A1 ρ1 l1  R 2 
10 ceeršj uecyeeF& SJeb ( 10-2 π ) ceeršj ef$epÙee Jeeues ⇒ = × 
A 2 ρ2 l 2  R1 

efkeâmeer leebyes kesâ leej keâe JewÅegle ØeeflejesOe 10 Deesce nw~ Where ρ represents resistivity of respective conductors
10 ( V/m ) leer›elee Jeeues efkeâmeer efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ efueS, leej l represents length of respective conductors
A represents area of respective conductors
keâe Oeeje IevelJe nesiee:
A1
(a) 105 A/m2 (b) 104 A/m2 =1
A2
(c) 106 A/m2 (d) 10–5 A/m2
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 Since, R1 = R 2 , l1 = l 2 & for same material ρ1 = ρ2

Physics 363 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
17. Which of the following graph represents the So, for given colour, resistance is given AB×10c ±
variation of resistivity (ρ) with temperature (T) tolerance
for copper?/veerÛes efoÙee ieÙee keâewvemee «eeHeâ keâe@hej kesâ So, R = 47×101 ± 5%
efueS, leehe (T) kesâ meeLe ØeeflejesOekeâlee (ρ) kesâ efJeÛejCe R = 470Ω , ± 5%
keâes efve™efhele keâjlee nw? 19. A carbon resistor of (47 ± 4.7) kΩ is to be
marked with rings of different colours for its
identification. The colour code sequence will be
(a) (b) / (47 ± 4.7) kΩ ØeeflejesOe kesâ efkeâmeer keâeye&ve-ØeeflejesOekeâ
hej, henÛeeve kesâ efueS, efJeefYeVe JeCeeX kesâ JeueÙe Debefkeâle
efkeâS peeves nQ~ JeCe& keâes[ keâe ›eâce nesiee
(a) Violet – Yellow – Orange – Silver
yeQieveer- heeruee - veejbieer – ÛeeBoer jbie keâe
(c) (d) (b) Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
heeruee – yeQieveer – veejbieer – ÛeeBoer jbie keâe
(c) Green – Orange – Violet – Gold
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 nje – veejbieer – yeQieveer – megvenje
Ans. (b) : For Conductor, resistivity is given as, (d) Yellow – Green – Violet – Gold
ρr = ρ0 (1 + α∆T ) − − − −(1) heeruee – nje – yeQieveer – megvenje
where, 'α' is temperature coefficient NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
and ∆T = T2 − T1 , is the change in temperature. On Ans. (b): (47 ± 4.7 kΩ = 47×103 ± 10%)
increasing temperature, resistivity increases. From the Checking the colour for individual digits of given
equation (1), it is clear that resistivity is parabolic in resistance we get,
nature. Yellow – Violet – Orange – Silver
18. The color code of a resistance is given below Colour Digit Multiplier Toleranc
veerÛes efkeâmeer ØeeflejesOe keâe JeCe& keâes[ efoÙee ieÙee nw: es (%)
Black 0 100
Brown 1 101 ±1
Red 2 102 ±2
The values of resistance and tolerance,
respectively, are
Orange 3 103
Fmekesâ ØeeflejesOe Deewj me¢elee kesâ ceeve ›eâceMe: nw: Yellow 4 104
(a) 47 kΩ, 10% (b) 4.7 kΩ, 5% Green 5 ± 0.5 105
(c) 470 Ω, 5% (d) 470 kΩ, 5% Blue 6 ± 0.25 106
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 Violet 7 ± 0.1 107
Ans. (c) : According to colour code of resistances,
Colour Digit Multiplier Tolerance
Grey 8 108
(%) White 9 109
Black 0 0
10 = 1 Gold ±5 10–1
Brown 1 101 ±1 Silver ± 10 10–2
Red 2 102 ±2 20. A 12 cm wire is given a shape of a right angled
Orange 3 103 triangle ABC having sides 3 cm, 4 cm and 5 cm
Yellow 4 104 as shown in the figure. The resistance between
5 two ends (AB, BC, CA) of the respective sides
Green 5 10 ± 0.5
6
are measured one by one by a multi-meter. The
Blue 6 10 ± 0.25 resistances will be in the ratio
Violet 7 107 ± 0.1 Skeâ 12 mesceer leej keâes Skeâ mecekeâesCe ef$eYegpe ABC keâe
Grey 8 108 Deekeâej efoÙee ieÙee nw efpemekeâer YegpeeSB 3 mesceer, 4 mesceer
white 9 109 Deewj 5 mesceer nw, pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~
Gold 10-1 ±5 mebyebefOele he#eeW kesâ oes efmejeW (AB, BC, CA) kesâ yeerÛe
Silver 10-2 ± 10 ØeeflejesOe keâes ceušer-ceeršj Éeje Skeâ-Skeâ keâjkesâ ceehee
None ± 20 peelee nw~ ØeeflejesOe Devegheele ceW nesiee-
Physics 364 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
leeByes keâer nw efpemekeâer ØeeflejesOekeâlee 1.7 × 10−6 Deesce-
meWšerceeršj, otmeje ueesns keâe nw efpemekeâer ØeeflejesOekeâlee
10–5 Deesce-meWšerceeršj nw~ ÚÌ[eW ceW Skeâ SefcheÙej keâer Oeeje
GlheVe keâjves kesâ efueS efkeâleves Jeesušspe keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee
nseieer-
(a) 3 : 4 : 5 (b) 9 : 16 : 25
(c) 27 : 32 : 35 (d) 21 : 24 : 25
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Ans. (c) : Let ρ and A be resistivity and area of cross
section of wire respectively

(a) 0.117 V (b) 0.00145 V

(c) 0.0145 V (d) 1.7 ×10−6 V
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Wire bend and form Right Angle triangle Ans. (a) : Given = I = 1 Ampere
Resistance side Cross–sectional area = 0.01 cm2 = 0.01 × 10–4 m2
ρl 3ρ
AB is R1 = =
A A
4ρ
BC is R2 =
A
5ρ
AC is R3 =
A ρcu = 1.7 × 10–6 ohm – centimeter
Resistance between ends A and B is ρFe = 1× 10–5 ohm–centimeter
(Because in this case AC & BC are connect in series
l
and also they are in parallel with AB.) R=ρ ]
A
R (R + R3 )
RAB = 1 2 Connect in Services Req = Rcu+ RFe
R1 + R 2 + R 3 l
= ( ρ cu + ρ Fe )
27 ρ A
=

Similarly,
12 A
(
= 1.7 ×10−6 ×10−2 + 1×10−5 ×10−2 ) 0.01×110−4
Resistance between B and C
(1.7 ×10−8 + 10 ×10−8 )
R ( R + R 3 ) 32 ρ =
RBC = 2 1 = 0.01 × 10 −4
R1 + R 2 + R 3 12 A
11.7 ×10−4
And resistance between A and C =
0.01
R ( R + R1 ) 35 ρ
RAC = 3 2 = Req = 0.117 Ω
R1 + R 2 + R 3 12 A V=IR
27 32 35 V = 1 × 0.117
So RAB : RBC : RAC = : :
12 12 12 V = 0.117V
RAB : RBC : RAC = 27 : 32 : 35 22. The resistance of a wire is ‘R’ ohm. If it is
21. Two rods are joined end to end, as shown. Both melted and stretched to ‘n’ times its original
have a cross-sectional area of 0.01 cm2. Each is length, its new resistance will be
1 meter long. One rod is a copper with a efkeâmeer leej keâe ØeeflejesOe ‘R’ Deesce nw~ leej keâes efheIeueeÙee
resistivity of 1.7 × 10−6 ohm-centimeter, the peelee nw Deewj efHeâj KeeRÛekeâj cetue leej mes ‘n’ iegvee
other is of iron with a resistivity of 10–5 ohm- uecyeeF& keâe Skeâ leej yevee efoÙee peelee nw~ Fme veÙes leej
centimeter. keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee:
How much voltage is required to produce a R
current of 1 ampere in the rods? (a) nR (b)
n
oes ÚÌ[s Skeâ efmejs mes otmejs efmejs lekeâ pegÌ[er ngF& nw pewmee efkeâ R
efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ oesveeW keâe ›eâe@me-meskeäMeveue #es$eheâue (c) n2R (d) 2
n
0.01 mesceer2 nw~ ØelÙeskeâ 1 ceeršj uecyee nw~ Skeâ ÚÌ[ NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Physics 365 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): We known that resistance is given by 1 1 1
Ans. (a): = +
ρL R eq R 5
R=
A 1 5+ R
Where, ρ is resistivity, L is length and A is area of cross =
section R eq 5R
Volume of the wire = AL 5R
R eq =
Now final length, L' = nL 5+ R
But AL = L'A'
L L A
A' = A =A =
L' nL n
ρ.L ' ρnL ρL 2
New resistance R' = = = .n
A' A/n A
⇒ R ' = Rn 2
23. A wire of resistance 4Ω is stretched to twice its V2
P=
original length. The resistance of stretched wire R eq
would be :-
Skeâ leej keâe ØeeflejesOe 4Ω nw, Fmekeâes KeeRÛekeâj Fmekeâer (10) 2
30 =
uecyeeF& keâes oes iegvee keâj efoÙee peelee nw~ Fme veÙes leej keâe  5R 
 
ØeeflejesOe nesiee~ 5+ R 
(a) 16Ω (b) 2Ω 100
30 =
(c) 4Ω (d) 8Ω 5R
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 (5 + R)
Ans. (a) : Let length and cross-section area of the wire 3 5+ R
=
be l and A respectively. 10 5R
l 15R = 50 + 10R
∴ resistance ( R ) = ρ
A 5R = 50
Where ρ is the resistivity of the material R = 10Ω
According to question, 25. A wire of resistance 12 ohms per metre is bent to
R = 4Ω form a complete circle of radius 10 cm. The
A resistance between its two diametrically opposite
For l' = 2l and A’= points, A and B as shown in the figure, is :
2
12 ohms Øeefle ceeršj kesâ Skeâ leej keâes ceesÌ[ keâj 10 cm
Resistance of wire be R’
ef$epÙee keâe Skeâ Je=òe yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fmekesâ JÙeeme kesâ
l' 2l l
∴R'=ρ =ρ = 4ρ DeefYecegKe efyevogDeeW A Deewj B, pewmes efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee nw,
A' A/2 A
kesâ yeerÛe kesâ ØeeflejesOe keâe ceeve nesiee:
 l 
R ' = 4R ∴ρ = R 
 A 
∴R ' = 4 × 4Ω = 16 Ω
(a) 6 Ω (b) 0.6 πΩ
24. The power dissipated in the circuit shown in
(c) 3 Ω (d) 6 πΩ
the figure is 30 Watts. The value of R is:/DeejsKe
AIMPT-2009
ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes heefjheLe ceW Meefòeâ -#eÙe 30 Jeeš nw lees,
Ans. (b) : Given. Resistance R = 12 ohms/m
R keâe ceeve nw:–
Radius of circle r = 10 cm = 0.1m
Circumference = 2πr = 2π(0.1)

(a) 10 Ω (b) 30 Ω Total resistance of wire = circumference × wire resistance

(c) 20 Ω (d) 15 Ω = 12Ω × 2π × 10–1
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 = 2.4π

Physics 366 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2.4π (b) The resistance will be halved and the specific
Resistance of each half = b = 1.2π resistance will be doubled/ØeeflejesOe ceeve DeeOee nes
2
and as about diameter both parts are in parallel peeÙesiee Deewj efJeefMe° ØeeflejesOe ceeve ogiegvee nes peeÙesiee
1.2π (c) The resistance and the specific resistance, will
so Req = = 0.6πΩ both remain unchanged/ØeeflejesOe ceeve Deewj efJeefMe°
2
26. A wire of a certain material is stretched slowly ØeeflejesOe ceeve oesveeW DeheefjJeefle&le jnWies~
by ten percent. Its new resistance and specific (d) The resistance will be doubled and the
resistance become respectively – specific resistance will be halved
Skeâ heoeLe& efJeMes<e keâer leej keâes Oeerjs-Oeerjs KeeRÛe keâj ØeeflejesOe ceeve ogiegvee nes peeÙesiee Deewj efJeefMe° ØeeflejesOe
10% yeÌ[e keâj efueÙee ieÙee nw~ veF& DeJemLee ceW Fmekeâe DeeOee nes peeSiee~
ØeeflejesOe Deewj efJeefMe° ØeeflejesOe ›eâceevegmeej henueer DeJemLee AIPMT-2004
keâer leguevee ceW nes peeÙeWies:- Ans. (a) : Resistance of wire is
(a) both remain the same/oesveeW hetJe&Jele~ ρl
R=
(b) 1.1 times, 1.1 times/ 1.1 iegCee Deewj, 1.1 iegCee A
(c) 1.2 times, 1.1 times/ 1.2 iegCee Deewj, 1.1 iegCee Where, ρ = Specific resistance of the wire
(d) 1.21 times, same/ 1.21 iegCee Deewj hetJe&Jele
AIPMT-2008
R∝
1
A
Q A = πr 2 ( )
Ans. (d) : Given, 1
R∝ 2
Material is stretched slowly by 10% r
∵ specific resistance is property of material (wire) R 1 l1 r22
So After stretching specific resistance (ρ) remains same. ∴ = = ...(i)
R 2 l2 r12
Wire is stretched so valume remain constant.
V1 = V2 Given l1 = l , l2 = 2l
A1 × l = A2 × 1.1l r1 = r r2 = 2r , R1 = R
A1 Substituting these values in eqn (i)
⇒ = 1.1 R l (2r) 2
A2 = × 2
R 2 2l r
A1
A2 =
1.1 R
R2 =
l 2
and we know Resistance R = ρ
A Therefore, Resistance will be halved and now the
l specific resistance of the wire does not depend on the
Initial resistance R1 = ρ geometry of the wire hence, it remains unchanged.
A1
28. A 6 volt battery is connected to the terminals of
1.1l
After stretching resistance R2 = ρ a three meter long wire of uniform thickness
A2 and resistance of 100 ohm. The difference of
1.1l potential between two points on the wire
R2= ρ separated by a distance of 50 cm will be :-
A1
6 Jeesuš keâer Skeâ yewšjer keâes Skeâ 100 Deesce ØeeflejesOe keâer
1.1
l  ρl 
Skeâ meceeve ceesšeF& keâer leerve ceeršj uecyeer leej kesâ efmejeW mes
R2= ρ (1.1)2 Q R1 =  peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme leej hej oes efyevog hejmhej 50cm keâer
A1  A1 
otjer hej efueS peeSB, lees Gvekeâe efJeYeJeevlej nesiee :-
Hence, R2 = 1.21 R1
(a) 3v (b) 1v
27. The electric resistance of a certain wire of iron
(c) 1.5v (d) 2v
is R. If its length and radius both are doubled,
AIPMT-2004
then:- /Skeâ efJeMes<e ueewn leej keâe JewÅegle ØeeflejesOe R nQ~
Ùeefo Fmekeâer uecyeeF& Deewj ef$epÙee oesveeW oesiegveer keâj oer Ans. (b) :
peeS, lees-
(a) The resistance will be halved and the specific
resistance will remain unchanged
ØeeflejesOe ceeve DeeOee nes peeÙesiee Deewj efJeefMe° ØeeflejesOe ceeve
DeheefjJeefle&le jnsiee
Physics 367 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Given, (a) 4 × 10–6 Ω m (b) 1 × 10–6 Ω m
Voltage of a battery v, = 6 volt (c) 2 × 10–7 Ω m (d) 5 × 10–7 Ω m
length of the wire l = 3m AIPMT-(1994)
Resistance of the wire R = 100Ω Ans. (b) : Length (l) = 50 cm = 0.5 m
Distance of separation d = 50cm
Area (A) = 1 mm2 = 1 × 10–6 m2
E1 = v = 6 volt
Current I = 4A
Let, potential drop across 50 cm is E
Voltage (V) = 2 volts
E1 E 2
= V 2
L1 L2 Resistance (R) = = = 0.5 Ω
I 4
6 E
= A 1 × 10 –6
3 50 × 10−2 Resistivity (ρ) = R × = 0.5 ×
l 0.5
E = 2 × 50 × 10–2
= 1 × 10 Ω m–6

E = 1volt 31. The masses of the wires of copper is in the ratio

29. Three copper wires of lengths and cross- of 1 : 3 : 5 and their lengths are in the ratio of 5
l  : 3 : 1. The ratio of their electrical resistance is
sectional areas are (l, A), (2l, A/2),  , 2A  . leebyes kesâ leerve leejes kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe Devegheele 1 : 3 : 5
2 
Resistance is minimum in leLee Fvekeâer uecyeeF& keâe Devegheele 5: 3 : 1 nQ~ Fve leejeW
leerve keâe@hej (leeByee) leejeW keâer uecyeeF&ÙeeB Deewj DevegØemLe- kesâ efJeÅegle ØeeflejesOe keâe Devegheele nesiee:
keâeš #es$eheâue (l, A), (2l, A/2) Deewj (l/2, 2A) nQ~ (a) 1 : 3 : 5 (b) 5 : 3 : 1
efkeâmeceW ØeeflejesOe vÙetvelece nesiee? (c) 1 : 25 : 125 (d) 125 : 15 : 1
(a) wire of cross-sectional area 2A/DevegØemLe-keâeš AIPMT-(1988)
#es$eheâue 2A Jeeues leej ceW Ans. (d) : Given that:
A mA: mB : mC = 1 : 3 : 5
(b) wire of cross-sectional area /DevegØemLe-keâeš
2 lA : lB : lC = 5 : 3 : 1
#es$eheâue A/2 Jeeues leej ceW RA : RB : RC = ?
(c) wire of cross-sectional area A/DevegØemLe-keâeš We know that-
#es$eheâue A Jeeues leej ceW ρl
R=
(d) same in all three cases/meYeer leej ceW meceeve A
AIPMT-(1997) ρl2
Ans. (a) : Three wires of different lengths and cross R=
Al
sectional areas are given as-
(l, A), (2l, A/2) and (l/2, 2A) ρ l2
R=
For Ist wire- V
l ρl 2
R1 ∝ = R  m
A R=  density,d = 
m  V
For 2nd wire-
d
2l
R2 ∝ = 4R l2
A/2 R = ρd
For 3rd wire m
l /2 R l2
R3 ∝ = R=k (let k = ρd)
2A 4 m
Therefore, resistance of the wire will be minimum for Here, k = ρd which is same for all wires as material is
l  same.
IIIrd wire  , 2A  .
2  l 2 A l 2 B l 2C
RA : RB : RC = : :
30. A wire 50 cm long and 1 mm2 in cross-section mA m B mC
carries a current of 4 A when connected to a 2
V battery. The resistivity of the wire is 52 32 1
= : :
50 cm uecyes Deewj 1 mm2 DevegØemLe-keâeš #es$eheâue kesâ 1 3 5
Skeâ leej keâes peye 2 V keâer yewšjer mes peesÌ[e peelee nw, lees = 25 : 3 :
1
FmeceW mes 4 A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ leej keâer 5
ØeeflejesOekeâlee nw: RA : RB : RC = 125 : 15 : 1

Physics 368 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
32. From the graph between current (I) and (a) 40 Ω (b) 100 Ω
voltage (V) is shown. Identify the portion (c) (5/2) Ω (d) (40/3) Ω
corresponding to negative resistance] AIPMT-(1995)
efÛe$e Oeeje (I) Deewj Jeesušlee (V) kesâ ceOÙe «eeheâ oMee&lee Ans. (a) : Ratio of cross sectional areas of the wires = 3
nw~ $e+Ceelcekeâ Oeeje ØeeflejesOe kesâ mebiele Yeeie keâer henÛeeve : 1
keâerefpeS~ Resistance of wire (R1) = 10Ω
ρl
Now, Resistance (R) =
A
Where ρ resistivity, l = length, A = cross section of wire
1
R∝
A
(a) CD (b) DE R1 A2 1
(c) AB (d) BC = =
R 2 A1 3
AIPMT-(1997)
⇒ R2 = 3R1
Ans. (a) :
∴ R2 = 3 × 10 = 30Ω
and equivalent resistance of these two resistances in
series combination is
Req = R1 + R2 = 10 + 30 = 40Ω

17.4 Heating Effect of Current

The slope of the graph will be given as-
I 34. A standard filament lamp consumes 100 W
tanθ = when connected to 200 V ac mains supply. The
V
where, I = current peak current through the bulb will be:
v = voltage peye efkeâmeer ceevekeâ lebleg uewche keâes 200 V Jeeueer cegKÙe
Let's analyze the ohm's law that the voltage current ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje (ac) Œeesle mes peesÌ[e peelee nw lees Ùen
through the circuit. 100 W keâe GheYeesie keâjlee nw~ yeuye ceW ØeJeeefnle Oeeje
V = RI keâe efMeKej ceeve nesiee:
From the above equation, (a) 0.707 A (b) 1 A
I I 1 (c) 1.414 A (d) 2 A
tanθ = = =
V RI R NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
1 Ans. (a) : Given that –
⇒ Slope =
R P = 100W
i.e. the slope of the graph is reciprocal of the resistance. Vrms = 200V
• In the graph, the region AB shows that the voltage P 100 1
increases directly with the current. irms = = = ...(i)
Vrms 200 2
• In the region BC even the voltage is increasing the
current has only a slight increase. i
irms = ο
• But in the region CD, the current is decreasing with 2
the voltage. 1
• The graph went negative in that region as slope is io = irms × 2 = × 2 [from eqn (i)]
2
negative and current is low which indicates the only i0 = 0.707A
small amount of current is flowing through circuit. The
region CD shows this property. 35. A light bulb and an inductor coil are connected
to an ac source through a key as shown in the
33. Two wires of the same metal have same length, figure below. The key is closed and after
but their cross-sections are in the ratio 3 : 1. sometime an iron rod is inserted into the interior
They are joined in series. The resistance of of the inductor. The glow of the light bulb
thicker wire is 10 Ω. The total resistance of the DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej efkeâmeer kegâbpeer mes neskeâj efkeâmeer
combination will be
ac œeesle keâes efkeâmeer efJeÅegle yeuye Deewj Øesjkeâ kegâC[ueer mes
oes Skeâmeceeve leej pees meceeve uecyeeF& kesâ nQ hejvleg he=‰
#es$eheâueeW keâe Devegheele 3 : 1 nw~ FvnW ßesCeer ›eâce ceW peesÌ[e mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ kegbâpeer keâes yevo keâjves mes kegâÚ
ieÙee~ ceesšs leej keâe ØeeflejesOe 10 Ω nw~ Fmekeâe leguÙe meceÙe he§eeled Øesjkeâ kegâC[ueer kesâ Yeerlej efkeâmeer DeeÙejve
ØeeflejesOe nw: keâer ÚÌ[ keâes Oebmee efoÙee peelee nw~ Ssmee keâjves hej yeuye
keâer Ûecekeâ
Physics 369 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
V 2 (100 )
2

Resistance of the bulb R b = = = 20Ω

P 500
P 500
Current through bulb is I b = = = 5A
V 100

increases/ yeÌ{ peeSieer

(a)
decreases/Ieš peeSieer
(b)
remains unchanged/DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer
(c)
will fluctuate/ceW Ieš-yeÌ{ nesieer
(d)
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II equivalent resistance through circuit is Req = 20 + R
Ans. (b) : When an iron rod is inserted into interior of using ohm's law
inductor the inductance (L) of coil increases thereby Vs = Ib Req
increasing the inductive reactance– 230 = 5 × (20 + R)
XL = ωL. 130
=R
E 5
Now, current Iv = V . Decreases due to increase in XL. ⇒ R = 26 Ω
XL
Therefore, glow of light bulb decreases. 38. The charge flowing through a resistance R
• If AC source is replaced by dc source of same voltage, varies with time t as Q = at -bt2, where a and b
are positive constants. The total heat produced
glow of light bulb is much more (Q XL = ωL = 2πνL = 0)
in R is :/efkeâmeer ØeeflejesOe R mes ØeJeeefnle DeeJesMe keâe
However, this glow does not change on inserting iron
rod. meceÙe t kesâ meeLe efJeÛejCe Q = at – bt2 kesâ ™he ceW neslee
36. Which of the following acts as a circuit nw, peneB a leLee b Oeveelcekeâ efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ R mes Glhevve
protection device? kegâue T<cee nw :
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee Skeâ, heefjheLe megj#ee Ùegefòeâ a 3R a 3R
kesâ ™he ceW keâeÙe& keâjlee nw? (a) (b)
b 6b
(a) Inductor/Øesjkeâ (b) Switch/efmJeÛe 3
(c) Fuse/heäÙetpe (d) Conductor/Ûeeuekeâ aR a 3R
(c) (d)
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 3b 2b
Ans. (c) : Fuse is a circuit protection device which NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
protects all other elements of the circuit from damage at Ans. (b) : Given charge, Q = at – bt2
the time of short circuit due to an overflow of current. Differentiation with respect to t gives us current
Fuse wire has less melting point so when excess dQ
current flows, due to heat produced in it, it melts. Hence ⇒ = I = a − 2bt
it acts circuit protecting device. dt
I = a – 2bt
37. A filament bulb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in
a 230 V main supply. When a resistance R is When I = 0
connected in series, it works perfectly and the a
t=
bulb consumes 500 W. The value of R is. 2b
Skeâ efHeâueeceWš (levleg) yeuye (500 W, 100 V) keâes Q The total heat produced (H)
230 V keâer cesve mehueeF& ceW ØeÙegòeâ efkeâÙee peevee nw~ Fmekesâ t

ßesCeer ›eâce ceW R ØeeflejesOe peesÌ[ves hej Ùen yeuye hetCe&le: H = ∫ i 2 Rdt
0
"erkeâ keâeÙe& keâjlee nw leLee 500 W Meeefòeâ ueslee nw~ R a / 2b
keâe ceeve nw :-  a 
H= ∫ (a − 2bt)2 R.dt Q t = 2b 
 
(a) 230 Ω (b) 46 Ω 0

(c) 26 Ω (d) 13 Ω a / 2b

NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II

H= ∫
0
(a 2 + 4b 2 t 2 − 4abt)Rdt
Ans. (c) : Given, a
Bulb voltage V = 100 V  t 3 4abt 2  2b
H =  (a 2 t + 4b 2 −  R
Power, P = 500 W  3 2 0
Supply Voltage Vs = 230 V
Physics 370 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 a a 3 1 4aba 2 
Skeâ efyepeueer keâer kesâleueer ceW oes leeheerÙe kegâC[efueÙeeB nQ~
H = a 2 . + 4b 2 3 × − R peye Skeâ kegâC[ueer keâes Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje kesâ œeesle mes
 2b 8b 3 2 × 4b 2 
peesÌ[e peelee nw, leye kesâleueer ceW heeveer 10 efceveš ceW
 a3 a3 a 3  Gyeuelee nw~ peye otmejer kegâC[ueer ØeÙeesie ceW ueeles nQ, leye
H= + − R
 2b 6b 2b  heeveer 40 efceveš ceW Gyeuelee nw Ùeefo oesveeW kegâC[efueÙeeW keâes
meceevlej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[e peeS, leye meceeve cee$ee kesâ heeveer
a3R Gyeueves ceW meceÙe ueiesiee:
H=
6b (a) 8 min/ 8 efceveš (b) 4 min/4 efceveš
39. A current of 3 amp. flows through the 2Ω (c) 25 min/25 efceveš (d) 15 min/15 efceveš
resistor shown in the circuit. The power AIPMT-2003
dissipated in the 5Ω resistor is – Ans. (a): Let R1 and R2 be the resistance of the coils, V
Fme efÛeef$ele heefjheLe kesâ 2Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe ceW Ûeueves Jeeueer be the supply voltage, H be the heat required to boil the
water.
Oeeje keâe ceeve 3 SscheerÙej nQ 5Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe mes Meefòeâ
V 2 t1
(heeJej) kesâ #eÙe keâe ceeve nesiee :- For first coil H= ...(i)
R1
V2 t2
For second coil H= ...(ii)
R2
n
Equating eq (i) and (ii)
t1 t
= 2
R1 R 2
R 2 t 2 40  t1 = 10 min 
(a) 1 watt (b) 5 watt = =  t = 40 min 
R 1 t1 10  2 
(c) 4 watt (d) 2 watt
AIPMT-2008 R 2 = 4R1 ...(iii)
Ans. (b) : When the two heating coils are in parallel, Equivalent
resistance is-
RR
R= 1 2
R1 + R 2
R1 × 4R1 4R1
= =
R1 + 4R1 5
Potential Voltage between point A and B V2 t
and H= ...(iv)
VAB = IAB × RAB R
=3×2 Comparing eqn (i) and (iv) we get
= 6V V 2 t1 V 2 t
=
Current through 5Ω Resistance – R1 R
6 6 R
i= = (∵ 1 and 5Ω are in series so t= × t1
1+ 5 6 R1
current will flow same) 4
i = 1 amp t = × 10
5
Now power dissipated in 5Ω resistor –
t = 8min
P = i 2R
= (1) × 5
2 41. Two cities are 150 km apart. Electric power is
= 5 watt sent from one city to another city through
copper wires. The fall of potential per km is 8
40. An electric kettle has two heating coils. When volt and the average resistance per km is 0.5Ω,
one of the coil is connected to an a.c. source, the the power loss in the wires is:-
water in the kettle boils in 10 minutes. When Skeâ veiej mes efJeÅegle Meefòeâ keâes, 150 km otj efmLele Skeâ
the other coil is used, then water boils in 40
DevÙe veiej lekeâ, leeByes kesâ leejes mes Yespee peelee nw~ Øeefle
minutes. If both the coils are connected in
parallel, the time taken by the same quantity of ef
keâueesceeršj efJeYeJe-heele 8 Jeesuš leLee Øeefle efkeâueesceeršj
water to boil will be: Deewmele ØeeflejesOe 0.5Ω nw, lees, leej ceW Meefòeâ-#eÙe nesiee:-
Physics 371 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 19.2 W (b) 19.2 kW Ùeefo efoS ieS heefjheLe DeejsKe ceW 9Ω ØeeflejesOe ceW JÙeÙe
(c) 10.2 W (d) 12.2 kW Meefòeâ 36 Jee@š nw, lees 2Ω ØeeflejesOe kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe
AIPMT-06.05.2014 efJeYeJeevlej nesiee-
Ans. (b) : Given-
Distance between two cities = 150 km
Potential fall per km = 8 Volt.
Average resistance per km = 0.5Ω
So, voltage drop across the wire,
V = 8 V/km×150km = 1200 V
Total resistance = 0.5×150 = 75Ω (a) 2 Volt/2 Jeesuš (b) 4 Volt/4 Jeesuš
Power loss in the wire is (c) 8 Volt/8 Jeesuš (d) 10 Volt/10 Jeesuš
V 2 (1200 )
2 AIPMT (Screening)-2011
P= = = 19200W Ans. (d) :
R 75 I1
P = 19.2KW
42. If voltage across a bulb rated 220 Volt and 100 I2
Watt drops by 2.5% of its rated value, the I I
percentage of the rated value by which the
power would decrease is ?
Skeâ efJeÅegle yeuye keâer Devegheele Jeesušlee leLee Meefòeâ
›eâceMe: 220 Jeesuš - 100 Jee@š nw~ Ùeefo yeuye kesâ efmejeW Current flow through the 9Ω resistor is
kesâ yeerÛe Jeesušlee, Fme Devegcele Jeesušlee mes 2.5% keâce 2 P
nes peeÙes lees, Gmekeâer Meefòeâ ceW, Devegcele Meefòeâ kesâ meehes#e I1 = R
efkeâleves ØeefleMele keâer keâceer nesieer? (∵ P = 36 watt, R = 9Ω)
(a) 5% (b) 10% 36
(c) 20% (d) 2.5% I1 = = 2A
9
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
As the resistors 9Ω and 6Ω are connected in parallel
Ans. (a) : Given that- therefore potential difference across them is the same.
Bulb is rated 220Volt & 100 Watt. ∴ 9I1 = 6 I2
V2 9× 2
Q P= I2 = = 3A
R 6
Where, P = Power Current drawn from the battery is
V = Voltage I = I1 + I2 = 2 + 3 = 5A
R = Resistance of bulb The potential difference across the 2Ω resistor is
V 2 220 × 220 (5A) × (2Ω) = 10V (Q V = IR)
⇒ R= = 44. The total power dissipated in watts in the
P 100
circuit shown here is:-
Q Voltage drops 2.5% of its rated value.
Fme efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes heefjheLe ceW Meefòeâ kesâ hetCe& #eÙe
2.5
New Voltage (Vn) = 220 – × 220 = 214.5 Volt keâe ceeve JeešeW ceW nesiee:-
100
Vn2
∴ Now Power (Pn) =
R
214.5 × 214.5
=
484
Pn = 95.06 W (a) 4W (b) 16W
(c) 40W (d) 54W
100 − 95.06
Now, % decrease in power = ×100 AIPMT-2007
100
Ans. (d) : Here resistance 6Ω and 3Ω are in parallel
= 4.94% ≈ 5% connection.
43. If power dissipated in the 9Ω resistor in the 3× 6  1 1 1
circuit shown is 36 Watt, the potential So equivalent R1 = 6 + 3 = 2Ω Q R = 6 + 3 
 1 
difference across the 2Ω resistor is :
Physics 372 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
46. A 5-ampere fuse wire can withstand a
maximum power of 1 watt in the circuit. The
resistance of the fuse wire is :
Skeâ 5-SscheerÙej keâer heäÙetpe leej heefjheLe ceW DeefOekeâ mes
DeefOekeâ 1 Jeeš keâer Meefòeâ menve mekeâleer nw~ heäÙetpe leej
keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee :-
R 1 and 4Ω will be in series connection.
(a) 5 ohm (b) 0.04 ohm
R eq = R 1 + 4Ω = 2 + 4 = 6Ω (c) 0.2 ohm (d) 0.4 ohm
AIPMT-2005
V2
We know power dissipated P = Ans. (b) : Given data
R
Power, P = 1W
(18 )
2
Current , I = 5A
= = 54 Watt Now,
6
Electric power = Voltage difference × current
45. Power dissipated across the 8Ω resistor in the
P = I.V
circuit shown here is 2 watt. The power P = I×IR
dissipated in watt units across the 3Ω resistor P
is:- ⇒ R= 2
I
efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS ieS heefjheLe ceW 8Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOekeâ ceW 1
R=
Meefòeâ ùeme 2 Jeeš keâe nQ 3Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOekeâ ceW Meefòeâ ( )
5
2

ùeme keâe ceeve Jeeš FkeâeF& ceW nesiee:-

R = 0.04Ω
47. When three identical bulbs of 60 watt, 200 volt
rating are connected in series to a 200 volt
supply, the power drawn by them will be :-
peye 60 Jeeš, 200 Jeesuš ojerÙe leerve Skeâ pewmes yeuyeeW
(a) 2.0 (b) 1.0 keâes ëe=bKeueeyeæ peesÌ[ keâj 200 Jeesuš mehueeF& hej
(c) 0.5 (d) 3.0 ueieeÙee peeS, lees Fme JÙeJemLee Éeje Øeehle keâer ieF& Meefòeâ
AIPMT-2006 keâe ceeve nesiee:-
Ans. (d) : (a) 180 watt/180 Jeeš (b) 10 watt/10 Jeeš
(c) 20 watt/20 Jeeš (d) 60 watt/60 Jeeš
AIPMT-2004
Ans. (c) :

Resistance 1Ω and 3Ω are connected in series, so

effective resistance R' = 1 + 3 = 4Ω
Now R' and 8Ω are in parallel. We know that potential
difference across resistance in parallel order is same.
Hence R' × i1 = 8 i2 Given
4 i1 = 8 i2 P1= P2 = P3 = 60W
i1 = 2 i2 V = 200V
Power dissipated across 8Ω resistance is- We know that
i 22 (8).t = 2W P = VI
V2
i 22 t = 0.25 W P=
R
Power dissipated across 3Ω resistance-
V2 200 × 200
P = i12 (3) t = (2 i2)2 ×3 × t = 12 i 22 t R= =
P 60
P = 12 × 0.25 (Q i 22 t = 0.25) 2000
R= Ω
=3W 3

Physics 373 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
RTotal req = R1 + R2 + R3 (c) 200 watt, 150 watt/200 Jeeš, 200 Jeeš
2000 2000 2000 (d) 50 watt, 200 watt/50 Jeeš, 200 Jeeš
= + +
3 3 3 AIPMT-2003
= 2000Ω Ans. (d): Power P = 100 watt
By ohm's law Voltage, V = 220 V
V = IR V2
P=
V 200 R
I= =
R 2000 V 2 ( 220 )
2
220 × 220
I = 0.1A ∴ R= = = Ω
P 100 100
V2
So , P= = I2 R R = 484Ω
R As both the bulb have same voltage and power so,
1 1 resistance of bulbs will also be same.
P= × × 2000
10 10 Case-I When two bulbs are connected in series.
P = 20W 220V 220 V
100 W 100 W
48. In India electricity is supplied for domestic use
at 220 V. It is supplied at 110 V in USA. If the
resistance of a 60W bulb for use in India is R,
The resistance of a 60W bulb for use in USA
will be :-
Iejsuet ØeÙeesie kesâ efueS Yeejle ceW efJeÅegle 220 V hej Deewj
mebÙegòeâ je°^ Decesefjkeâe ceW 110 V hej oer peeleer nw~ Ùeefo In series Req = R1 + R2
Yeejle ceW ØeÙegòeâ 60W kesâ yeuye keâe ØeeflejesOe R nes, lees = 484 + 484 = 968 Ω
mebÙegòeâ je°^ Decesefjkeâe ceW ØeÙegòeâ 60W kesâ yeuye kesâ
V2
ØeeflejesOe keâe ceeve nesiee :- Hence, Peq =
R eq
(a) 2R (b) R/4
(c) R/2 (d) R 220 × 220
Peq =
AIPMT-2004 968
Ans. (b) : Power rating of bulb in both the countries 48400
India and USA should be the same. So- Peq =
968
V12 V22 Peq = 50 W
=
R1 R 2
Case-II When two bulbs are connected in parallel
220 × 220 110 × 110
=
R1 R2
R 2 110 110
= ×
R1 220 220
R
R2 = (Q R 1 = R )
4
49. Two 220 volt, 100 watt bulbs are connected In parallel
first in series and then in parallel. Each time R1 R 2
the combination is connected to a 220 volt a.c. R eq =
supply line. The power drawn by the R1 + R 2
combination in each case respectively will be: 484 × 484
=
220 Jeesuš, 100 Jeeš kesâ oes yeuyeeW keâes henues ßesCeer›eâce 484 + 484
ceW Deewj efHeâj meceevlej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[e peelee nw~ ØelÙeskeâ yeej 234256
R eq = = 242
mebÙeespeve keâes 220 Jeesuš ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje kesâ œeesle 968
(mehueeF& ueeFve) mes peesÌ[e peelee nw~ ØelÙeskeâ yeej Hence,
mebÙeespeve Éeje peer ieF& Meefòeâ ›eâceMe: nesieer: V 2 220 × 220 48400
Pe q = = =
(a) 50 watt, 100 watt/50 Jeeš, 100 Jeeš R eq 242 242
(b) 100 watt, 50 watt/100 Jeeš, 50 Jeeš Peq = 200W

Physics 374 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
50. Fuse wire is a wire of 52. The value of R for which power in it is
HeäÙetpe leej Jen leej nw, efpemekeâe neslee nw maximum/R kesâ efkeâme ceeve kesâ efueS FmeceW JÙeefLele
(a) high resistance and high melting point Meefòeâ DeefOekeâlece nesieer-
GÛÛe ØeeflejesOe Deewj GÛÛe ieueveebkeâ
(b) high resistance and low melting point
GÛÛe ØeeflejesOe Deesj efvecve ieueveebkeâ
(c) low resistance and low melting point
(a) 3Ω (b) 6Ω
efvecve ØeeflejesOe Deesj efvecve ieueveebkeâ (c) 12Ω (d) 9Ω
(d) low resistance and high melting point AIPMT-1999
efvecve ØeeflejesOe Deewj GÛÛe ieueveebkeâ Ans. (b) : The condition for maximum power
AIPMT-2003 dissipation across the load is RL = RTh.
Ans. (b): A fuse is a piece of wire made of a material If the value of load resistance is equal to the value of
with a very low melting point, which means it melts and source resistance, the power dissipated across the load
breaks when the temperature rises above its melting will be of maximum value. In a given circuit, when the
point. external resistance will be equal to the internal
resistance of battery, the total resistance will be
• Fuse wire has the high resistance. minimum and current will be maximum.
• Fuse wire are mostly made of tin, lead or zinc.
51. If the power dissipated in 5Ω is 20 W then
power dissipated in 4Ω is/5Ω ceW JÙeefÙele Meefòeâ
20W nw, lees 4Ω ceW keäÙee nesieer-

For maximum power R should also 6Ω

53. When three identical bulbs are connected in
series, the consumed power is 10W. If they are
(a) 4 W (b) 6 W now connected in parallel then the consumed
(c) 10 W (d) 20 W power will be/leerve meJe&mece yeuyeeW keâes efJeÅegle œeesle mes
AIPMT-1999 ßesCeer ›eâce ceW peesÌ[ves hej JÙeeflele Meefòeâ 10W nw Deye
Ans. (a) : leerveeW keâes Ùeefo meceeveeblej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[ efoÙee peeS lees
JÙeefÙele Meefòeâ nesieer–
(a) 30W (b) 90W
10
(c) W (d) 270W
3
AIPMT-1998
Ans. (b) : Given, power = 10 W

Since, we know that potential is same for two resistors

connected in parallel.
∴ V = 5I1 = 10 I2 (Series)
1 1 1 1
= + +
Now Given, P1 = 20W Peq P1 P2 P3
⇒ I12 .5 = 20 (Parallel) Peq = P1 + P2 + P3
⇒ I1 = 2A P
and 5I1 = 10I2 In series, equivalent power, Ps = = 10
n
1 1 or P = 10 n
⇒ I2 = I1 = .2
2 2 P = 10 × 3 (∴ n = 3)
I2 = 1A = 30 W
∴ Power dissipated through 4Ω resistor = I22 . ( 4) where 'P' is the power of each bulb.
In parallel series equivalent power–
= 1 × 4 = 4W Peq = P + P+ P = 3P ⇒ 30 × 3 = 90W

Physics 375 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
54. A (100 W, 200 V) bulb is connected to a 160 Ans. (b) : Given that:
volts supply. The power consumption would be I = 2A
Skeâ yeuye (100 W, 200 V) keâes 160V keâer Meefòeâ H = 80 J
Deehetefle& mes peesÌ[er ieÙeer~ yeleeDeeW efkeâleveer Meefòeâ ueiesieer?
t = 10 second
(a) 100 W (b) 125 W R=?
(c) 64 W (d) 80 W We know that-
AIPMT-(1997) H = I2 Rt
Ans. (c) : Given that: ⇒ 80 = 2×2×R×10
P1 = 100 W V2 = 160 V R=2Ω
V1 = 200 V P2 = ? 57. If two bulbs, whose resistances are in the ratio
We know that- of 1 : 2 are connected in series, the power
V12 dissipated in them has the ratio of
P1 =
R Ùeefo oes yeuye efpevekesâ ØeeflejesOe 1 : 2 kesâ Devegheele ceW nQ,
V12 200 × 200 keâes ßesCeer ›eâce ceW peesÌ[e peelee nw, lees GveceW #eefÙele Meefòeâ
R= =
P1 100 keâe Devegheele nesiee:
R = 400 Ω (a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
V22 1602
∴ P2 = = = 64 AIPMT-(1997)
R 400
Ans. (d) : Given that:
P2 = 64 W R1 : R2 = 1 : 2
55. An electric bulb is rated 60 W, 220 V. The R1 1
=
resistance of its filament is R2 2
60 W, 200 V keâe Skeâ efJeÅegle yeuye nw~ Fmekesâ Now, power dissipated (P) = I2R
efheâueecesvš (lebleg) keâe ØeeflejesOe nw: P∝R
(a) 870 Ω (b) 780 Ω P1 R 1 1
(c) 708 Ω (d) 807 Ω = =
P2 R 2 2
AIPMT-(1994)
P1 : P2 : 1 : 2
Ans. (d) : Given that:
P = 60 W 58. 40 electric bulbs are connected in series across a
220 V supply. After one bulb is fused the
V = 220 V
remaining 39 are connected again in series across
R=?
the same supply. The illumination will be
We know that
40 efJeÅegle yeuye 220 V mehueeF& kesâ meeLe ßesCeer ›eâce ceW
V2 peesÌ[s ieS~ kegâÚ meceÙe yeeo 1 yeuye Kejeye nes ieÙee leLee
P=
R yeÛes ngS 39 yeuye efheâj meceeve mehueeF& kesâ meeLe ßesCeer
220 × 220 ›eâce ceW peesÌ[s ieS~ leer›elee nesieer:
⇒ 60 =
R
(a) more with 40 bulbs than with 39/39 yeuyeeW keâer
220 × 220
⇒ R= Dehes#ee 40 keâer pÙeeoe
60
(b) more with 39 bulbs than with 40/40 yeuyeeW keâer
R = 806.66
Dehes#ee 39 keâer pÙeeoe
R = 807 Ω (c) equal in both the cases/oesveeW ceW yejeyej
56. A current of 2 A, passing through a conductor (d) in the ratio 402 : 392/Devegheele nesiee 402 : 392
produces 80 J of heat in 10 seconds. The AIPMT-1989
resistance of the conductor in ohm is Ans. (b) : Resistance of bulb = R
2 A Oeeje Skeâ leej ceW ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw, lees 80 J T<cee Equivalent resistance of 40 bulbs = 40 R
10 meskeâC[ ceW GlheVe keâjleer nw~ Ûeeuekeâ leej keâe ØeeflejesOe [∵ All are connected in series]
(Deesce ceW) nw: Similarly, for 39 bulbs = 39R
(a) 0.5 Ω (b) 2 Ω So, heat released by 40 bulbs is
(c) 4 Ω (d) 20 Ω V2 t
H 39 =
AIPMT-(1989) 40R
Physics 376 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
and heat released by 39 bulbs is Ans. (c):
Vt 2 R1 = 100 Ω
H 40 =
39R
Now, H39 > H40
R2 = 200 Ω
Therefore, illumination of 39 bulbs will greater than 40
bulbs.

17.5 Combination of Resistors V

Both resistance are in parallel combination
Series and Parallel V2
P1 = t
59. 10 resistors, each of resistance R are connected R1
in series to a battery of emf E and negligible
V2
internal resistance. Then those are connected in = t − − − − −(i)
parallel to the same battery, the current is 100
increased n times. The value of n is: V2
P2 = t
Skeâ meceeve ØeeflejesOe R kesâ 10 ØeeflejesOeeW keâes E efJeÅegle R2
Jeenkeâ yeue leLee veieCÙe Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe keâer Skeâ V2
= t − − − − −(ii)
yewš^er kesâ meeLe ßesCeer ›eâce ceW pees[ Ì e ieÙee nw~ peye Fmes 200
meceeve yewš^er kesâ meeLe meceevlej ›eâce peces peesÌ[e peelee nw, from eqn (i) and (ii)
lees Oeeje n iegveer nes peeleer nw~ n keâe ceeve nw : V2
×t
(a) 1000 (b) 10 P1 100
= 2
(c) 100 (d) 1 P2 V
×t
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 200
Ans. (c) : Given that the 10 resistors are connected in V 2 200
= ×
series then R'eq is – 100 V 2
V P1 2
R'eq = 10R = ... (i) =
I P2 1
Similarly, when 10 resistors are connected in parallel
then – 61. The equivalent resistance of the infinite
network given below is:/veerÛes efoS ieS Devevle
R V
R"eq = = ...(ii) heefjheLe peeue keâe heefjCeeceer ØeeflejesOe nw:
10 nI
On dividing eqn (i) by eqn (ii), we get –
V
I = 10R
V R
nI
n = 100
10 (a) 2 Ω ( )
(b) 1 + 2 Ω

60. Two resistors of resistance, 100 Ω and 200 Ω (

(c) 1 + 3 Ω ) (d) (1 + 5 ) Ω
are connected in parallel in an electrical NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
circuit. The ratio of the thermal energy Ans. (c) : Let the equivalent resistance of the above
developed in 100 Ω to that in 200 Ω in a given circuit is R. Since, the circuit is infinitely long removing
time is the loop APQB from the circuit will not affect the
100 Deesce SJeb 200 Deesce ØeeflejesOe Jeeues oes ØeeflejesOe equivalent resistance of the circuit. Therefore, the
efkeâmeer efJeÅegle heefjheLe ceW heeÕe& ›eâce ceW pegÌ[s nQ~ efkeâmeer equivalent resistance of the circuit beyond PQ is also R.
Now, the given circuit diagram becomes -
efveÙele meceÙe ceW 100 Deesce Jeeues ØeeflejesOe ceW GlheVe
T<ceerÙe Tpee& keâe, 200 Deesce Jeeues ØeeflejesOe ceW GlheVe
T<ceerÙe Tpee& mes Devegheele nesiee:
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Physics 377 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
In the above circuit resistor R and 1Ω are in parallel 1 1 1 1 1 4
combination to each other. The equivalent resistance of
= + + + =
R P R1 R 2 R 3 R 4 R
these two is -
1 4
R ×1 R =
R1 = = 0.25 R
1+ R 1+ R R = 1Ω
Now, R1Ω, 1Ω and 1Ω resistance are in series– Now, these 4 resistances are arranged in series-
R = 1 + 1 + R1
R
R=2+
1+ R Rs = R + R + R + R = 4R
R (1 + R) = 2 + 2R + R Rs = 4×1 = 4Ω
R + R2 = 2 + 3R
63. Three resistors having resistances r1, r2 and r3
R2 – 2R – 2 = 0
are connected as shown in the given circuit.
by using quadratic formula we get equivalent resistance
i
R as – The ratio 3 of currents in terms of resistances
i1
2± 4+8
R= used in the circuit is
2 efoS ieÙes heefjheLe kesâ Devegmeej r1, r2 leLee r3 ØeeflejesOeeW
2 ± 12 2±2 3 Jeeues leerve ØeeflejesOekeâ peesÌ[s ieÙes nQ~ heefjheLe ceW ØeÙegòeâ
= = = 1± 3
2 2 i3
ØeeflejesOeeW kesâ heoeW ceW OeejeDeeW keâe Devegheele nw :
⇒ R = 1± 3 i1
R = 1 + 3 since (1 − 3 ) will be negative
which in impossible for resistance.
Hence, equivalent resistance is 1 + 3 .
62. The effective resistance of a parallel connection
that consists of four wires of equal length,
equal area of cross-section and same material is r2 r1
0.25 Ω. What will be the effective resistance if (a) (b)
r1 + r3 r2 + r3
they are connected in series?
meceeve uecyeeF&, meceeve DevegØemLe keâeš kesâ #es$eHeâue leLee r2 r1
(c) (d)
meceeve heoeLe& kesâ meceevlej ›eâce ceW pegÌ[s Ûeej leejeW keâe r2 + r3 r1 + r2
leâuÙe ØeeflejesOe 0.25 Deesce nw~ Ùeefo Gvekeâes ßesCeer ›eâce ceW NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
peesÌ[ efoÙee peeS, lees ØeYeJeer ØeeflejesOe keäÙee nesiee? Ans. (c) : In Parallel combination of resistances r2 & r3,
potential difference will be equal across both
(a) 4 Ω/4 Deesce (b) 0.25 Ω/â0.25 Deesce resistances.
(c) 0.5 Ω/0.5 Deesce (d) 1 Ω/1 Deesce r3
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 So, i 2 r 2 = i3 r 3 ⇒ i 2 = i 3 --------(i)
r2
ρl Also,
Ans. (a) : R =
A i1 = i2+i3
Where, ρ – Resistivity of the material r 
l – Length of the wire i1 =  3 + 1  i3 from equation (i)
r
 2 
A – Cross section area of wire
As ρ, l and A are same. i3 r
= 2
ρl i1 r2 + r3
∴ R1 = R2 = R3 = R4 = R =
A 64. The equivalent resistance between A and B for
the mesh shown in the figure is/DeejsKe ceW oMee&S
ieS peeue ceW A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe nw:-

Physics 378 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 4.8 Ω (b) 7.2 Ω Ans. (b):
(c) 16 Ω (d) 30 Ω
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Ans. (c) :

Since upper Resistance 4Ω & 8Ω are in Series.

Therefore their equivalent resistance is 12Ω

For ideal Voltmeter Rv = ∞ Ω

Now, 12Ω and 6Ω are in Parallel, For ideal Ammeters RA = 0 Ω
1 1 1 1 For Circuit 1
= + = 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
R e q 12 6 4 = + = + = +
Req = 4Ω
R eq R 1 R 2 10 ∞ 10 1
0 ( )
Req = 10 Ω
V 10
i1 = = = 1A
R eq 10
For Circuit 2
Now, all resistances are in series. 1 1 1
= +
R e q = 4 + 4 + 8 = 16Ω R eq R1 R 2
1 1
65. In the circuits shown below, the readings of = +
voltmeters and the ammeters will be 10 (10 + ∞ )
veerÛes oMee&S ieS heefjheLe ceW JeesušceeršjeW Deewj SceeršjeW kesâ 1 1 1
= + =
hee"Ÿeebkeâ neWies : 10  1  10
 10 + 
 0
Req = 10 Ω
V 10
i2 = = = 1A
R eq 10
i1 = i 2 and V1 = V2
66. The reading of an ideal voltmeter in the circuit
shown is,/oMee&S ieS heefjheLe ceW efkeâmeer DeeoMe&
Jeesušceeršj keâe hee"Ÿeebkeâ nw

(a) V1 = V2 and i1 > i2

(b) V1 = V2 and i1 = i2
(c) V2 > V1 and i1 > i2 (a) 0.4 V (b) 0.6 V
(d) V2 > V1 and i1 = i2 (c) 0 V (d) 0.5 V
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)

Physics 379 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Ans. (d) In moving coil galvanometer,
V NBA
Current sensitivity Is = .............. (i)
C
NBA
V
Voltage sensitivity Vs = ............ (ii)
CR G
Where, N = Number of turns
V B = Magnetic field
A = Area
C = Restoring torque
So, resistance of galvanometer can be obtained by
divided eqn. (i) by (ii), -
I 5 ×1 5000
V RG = s = −3
= = 250Ω
Vs 20 × 10 20
V
68. A set of 'n' equal resistors, of value 'R' each,
V 2 are connected in series to a battery of emf 'E'
i= = A _______(i) and internal resistance 'R'. The current drawn
R 25 is I. Now, the 'n' resistors are connected in
From the diagram, parallel to the same battery. Then the current
i drawn from battery becomes 10 I. The value of
V1 − V = × 20
2 'n' is /'n' meJe&mece ØeeflejesOekeâeW keâe mecegÛÛeÙe, efpemeceW
2 ØelÙeskeâ keâe ØeeflejesOe 'R' nw, ßesCeer›eâce ceW efJe] Jee] yeue
V1 − V = 25 × 20 (emf), 'E' Deewj Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe, 'R' keâer efkeâmeer
2 yewšjer mes mebÙeesefpele nw~ yewšjer mes ueer ieF& Oeeje I nw~ Deye
1 Fve 'n' ØeeflejesOekeâeW keâes heeÕe& ›eâce ceW Fmeer yewšjer mes
V1 − V = × 20 –––– (ii)
25 mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ lees yewšjer mes ueer ieF& Oeeje 10
i I nes peeleer nw~ 'n' keâe ceeve nw
V2 − V = × 30
2 (a) 10 (b) 11
2 (c) 9 (d) 20
= 25 × 30 NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
2
Ans. (a) Electrical resistance in series = nR
1
= × 30 ––––– (iii)
25
From eqn (ii) & (iii)
30 20
V2 − V1 = −
25 25
10 E
= I= ....................... (i)
25 ( 1) R
n +
= 0.4 V In parallel, current drawn is 10I
67. Current sensitivity of a moving coil
galvanometer is 5 div/mA and its voltage
sensitivity (angular deflection per unit voltage
applied) is 20 div/V. The resistance of the
galvanometer is / efkeâmeer Ûeue kegâC[ueer iewuJesveesceeršj
keâer Oeeje meg«eeefnlee 5 div/mA Deewj Jeesušlee meg«eeefnlee
(ØeÙegòeâ FkeâeF& Jeesušlee mes GlheVe keâesCeerÙe efJe#eshe) 20
div/V nw~ Fme iewuJesveesceeršj keâe ØeeflejesOe nw
(a) 40 Ω (b) 25 Ω E
10I =
R
(c) 500 Ω (d) 250 Ω R+
n
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Physics 380 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
nE Ans. (d):
10I = ....................... (ii)
R ( n + 1)
Dividing eq.(ii) by (i)

10 =
nE
×
( n +1) R
R ( n +1) E
⇒ n = 10
69. A circuit contains an ammeter, a battery of As in figure, resistance RB & RC of voltmeter '
are in
30V and a resistance 40.8 ohm all connected in parallel. So their equivalent resistance R is
series. If the ammeter has a coil of resistance 1 1 1 1 1 2 +1 3
480 ohm and a shunt of 20 ohm, the reading in R ' = R + R = 1.5R + 3R = 3R = 3R
B C
the ammeter will be
efkeâmeer heefjheLe ceW 30 V keâer Skeâ yewšjer 40.8 Deesce keâe R = R
'

Skeâ ØeeflejesOe leLee Skeâ Sceeršj, meYeer ßesCeer ceW ›eâce ceW So voltage across XP is V = V = IR
XP A
pegÌ[s nw~ Ùeefo Sceeršj keâer kegbâ[ueer keâe ØeeflejesOe 480 nQ
Voltage across PQ is VPQ = VB = VC = IR
Deewj Fmemes pegÌ[s Mebš keâe ØeeflejesOe 20Ω nw lees, Sceeršj
keâe hee"Ÿeebkeâ nesiee: ∴ VA = VB = VC
(a) 1A (b) 0.5A 71. In an ammeter 0.2% of main current passes
(c) 0.25A (d) 2A through the galvanometer. If resistance of
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 galvanometer is G, the resistance of ammeter
Ans. (b) : will be.
efkeâmeer Sceeršj ceW cegKÙe Oeeje 0.2³ Yeeie iewuJesveesceeršj
kegbâ[ueer mes iegpejlee nw~ Ùeefo iewuJesveesceeršj keâer kegbâ[ueer
ØeeflejesOe 'G' nQ lees, Fme Sceeršj keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee:
1 499
(a) G (b) G
499 500
480 × 20 1 500
Reff = 40.8 + (c) G (d) G
480 + 20 500 499
= 40.8 + 19.2
AIPMT-06.05.2014
= 60Ω
Ans. (c) : Here, resistance of the galvanometer = G
V 30
I = eff = = 0.5A Current through the galvanometer,
R eff 60
0.2 1
IG = 0.2% of I = I= I
70. A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5 100 500
R and 3R respectively as shown in the figure. ∴Current through the shunt,
When some potential difference is applied
between X and Y, the voltmeter readings are IS = I – IG = I– 1 I = 499 I
VA, VB, and VC respectively. Then: 500 500
ÙeneB DeejsKe ceW leerve JeesušceeršjeW A, B leLee C kesâ
ØeeflejesOe ›eâceMe: R, 1.5 R leLee 3R nQ~ X leLee Y kesâ
yeerÛe kegâÚ efJeYeJeevlej Deejesefhele keâjves mes, Fve
JeesušceeršjeW kesâ he"ve (jeref[bie) ›eâceMe: VA, VB, leLee
VC nw~ lees:
As shunt and galvanometer are in parallel
∴ IGG = ISS
 1× I   499 
 500  G =  500  S
   
(a) VA ≠ VB = VC (b) VA = VB ≠ VC
G
(c) VA ≠ VB ≠ VC (d) VA = VB = VC or S=
AIPMT-03.05.2015 499

Physics 381 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Resistance of the ammeter 'RA' is l1 3 l1 1
(a) = (b) =
1 1 1 l2 8 l2 2
= +
RA G S l1 5 l1 1
(c) = = (d)
1 1 1 500 l2 8 l 2 3
= + =
R A G G / 499 G AIPMT (Screening)-2012
1 Ans. (b) : Resistance of Ring = R0 = 12Ω
RA = G Now, when ring is divided, let the length of portion be
500 l1 & l2.
72. When a wire of uniform cross-section a, length Let, Resistance is R1 for length l1 & R2 for length l2.
l and resistance R is bent into a complete circle,
resistance between any two of diametrically
opposite points will be –
heefjÚso a uecyeeF& l Deewj ØeeflejesOe R keâer Skeâ DeÛej
heefjÚso keâer leej keâes ceesÌ[ keâj Skeâ hetje Je=òe yeveeÙee ieÙee
nw~ Fme Je=òe kesâ efkeâmeer JÙeeme kesâ efmejeW kesâ oes efyevogDeeW kesâ A/Q,
yeerÛe keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee :- 1 1 1 RR 8
= + ⇒ R= 1 2 =
(a) R/2 (b) R/4 R R1 R 2 R1 + R 2 3
(c) R/8 (d) 4R Q R1 + R 2 = 12Ω
AIPMT-2005 R1 R 2 8
Ans. (b) : Given Resistance = R, Length = l ∴ = ⇒ R1R 2 = 32
12 3
We know that,

R1 − R 2 = ± ( R1 + R 2 )2 − 4R1R 2 = 122 − 4 × 32
R2 – R1 = 4Ω
So, R1 = 4Ω and R2 = 8Ω
Net resistance in parallel combination of two l1 R1 4 1
semicircular resistance ∴ = = =
l2 R 2 8 2
R R
× 74. A milli voltmeter of 25 milli volt range is to be
R2 / 4
R'= 2 2 = converted into an ammeter of 25 ampere range.
R R R
+ The value (in ohm) of necessary shunts will be:
2 2 Skeâ efceueer Jeesušceeršj keâe hejeme 25 efkeâuees Jeesuš nw~
⇒ R'=
R Fmes 25A hejeme kesâ Ssceeršj ceW ™heevleefjle keâjvee nw~
4 Fmekesâ efueÙes DeeJeMÙekeâ Mevš keâe ceeve (Deesce) ceW nesiee:
73. A ring is made of a wire having a resistance R0 = (a) 1 (b) 0.05
12Ω. Find the points A and B as shown in the (c) 0.001 (d) 0.01
figure at which a current carrying conductor AIPMT (Screening)-2012
should be connected so that the resistance R of Ans. (c) :
the sub circuit between these points is equal to
8
Ω.
3
leej mes yeves Skeâ JeueÙe keâe ØeeflejesOe R0 = 12Ω nw~ Fme
JeueÙe ceW Ssmes efkeâve oes efyevogDeeW A Deewj B hej OeejeJeener
Ûeeuekeâ keâer peesÌ[e peeÙes leeefkeâ, Fve oes efyevogDeeW kesâ yeerÛe For making ammeter, Rs is connected in parallel to the
8 galvanometer.
Ghe heefjheLe keâe ØeeflejesOe R = Ω nes :
3 Va
here, Rs = ––––– (1)
( I − Ig )
25mV
Now, Ig =
Rg

Physics 382 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Here, Voltmeter's Resistance = Rg Galvanometer is a very sensitive instrument therefore it
Rg → ∞ {because, in Ideal Voltmeter R→ ∞} cannot measure heavy currents. In order to convert a
∴ Ig = 0 galvanometer into an ammeter, a very low shunt
Thus from (1)
resistance is connected in parallel to galvanometer.
Value of shunt is so adjusted that most of current passes
V 25mV through shunt. If resistance of galvanometer is Rg and it
Rs = a = = 0.001Ω
I 25A gives full-scale deflection when current Ig is passed
75. A galvanometer has a coil of resistance 100 Ω through it. Then, V = Ig Rg
V = 1.0 × 60
and gives a full scale deflection for 30 mA
current. If it is to work as a voltmeter of 30 volt = 60V
range, the resistance required to be added will
be –/Skeâ Oeejeceeheer, 100 Ω ØeeflejesOe keâer Skeâ kegâC[ueer
jKelee nw 30 mA Je Oeeje kesâ efueS Skeâ hetCe& hewceevee
efJe#eshe oslee nw~ Ùeefo Fmes 30 Jeesuš hejeme kesâ Jeesušceeršj Let shunt resistance (Rs) is connected in parallel to
kesâ ™he ceW GheÙeesie keâjvee nes, lees peesÌ[e peeves Jeeuee galvanometer then it acts as an ammeter. If total current
DeeJeMÙekeâ ØeeflejesOe nesiee – through the circuit is I so,
(a) 900 Ω (b) 1800 Ω
(c) 500 Ω (d) 1000 Ω
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
–3
Ans. (a) : Given, ig =30×10 A, V = 30 Volt, G =100Ω
A galvanometer can function as a voltmeter when it is I = 5A = Is + Ig
connected in series with a large resistance R. The value V = Is Rs = (I – Ig)Rs
of R is determined by the maximum voltage that will be (I – Ig)Rs = IgRg
measured, it can be written as (5 – 1)Rs = 60 × 1
V Rs = 15Ω
Required resistance R = - G
ig 77. In the circuit shown, the current through the 4Ω
resistor is 1 amp when the points P and M are
30 connected to a D.C. voltage source. The potential
= -100
30×10-3 difference between the points M and N is –
= 900Ω peye Fme efÛe$e kesâ efyevogDeeW P Deewj M keâes Skeâ D.C.
76. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 60 Jeesušlee œeesle mes peesÌ[e ieÙee, lees 4Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe ceW
Ω shows full scale deflection when a current of Ûeueves Jeeueer Oeeje 1 SscheerÙej Leer Fme DeJemLee ceW M
1.0 amp passes through it. It can be converted Deewj N efyevogDeeW keâe efJeYeJe-Devlej nesiee :-
into an ammeter to read currents upto 5.0 amp
by :
Skeâ iesuJesveesceeršj kesâ keâe@Ùeue keâe ØeeflejesOe 60Ω nw~ Deewj
1.0 ScheerÙej Oeeje kesâ efueÙes hetCe& mkesâue keâe efJeÛeueve
efoÙee nw~ Fmes 5.0 ScheerÙej lekeâ heÌ{ves kesâ Sceeršj ceW
yeoueves kesâ efueÙes :
(a) Putting in parallel a resistance of 15 Ω /15Ω (a) 0.5 volt/0.5 Jeesuš (b) 3.2 volt/ 3.2 Jeesuš
kesâ ØeeflejesOe keâes Fmemes heeÕe& yeæ peesÌ[vee nesiee~ (c) 1.5 volt/ 1.5 Jeesuš (d) 1.0 volt/ 1.0 Jeesuš
(b) Putting in parallel a resistance of 240 Ω AIPMT-2008
/240Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe keâes Fmemes heeÕe& yeæ peesÌ[vee nesiee~ Ans. (b) : Given :- Current through 4Ω resister is 1amp
(c) Putting in series a resistance of 15 Ω/15Ω kesâ Potential diffference across point P & M
V=IR
ØeeflejesOe keâes Fmemes ßeb=Keuee yeæ peesÌ[vee nesiee~
= 1 × 4 = 4V
(d) Putting in series a resistance of 240 Ω/240Ω
kesâ ØeeflejesOe keâes Fmemes ëe=bKeuee yeæ peesÌ[vee nesiee~
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (a) : Given,
Resistance of galvanometer Rg = 60Ω
Current of galvanometer Ig = 1 amp
Total current in the circuit I = 5A

Physics 383 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now consider upper portion of point P & M apply in order to get decision we place resistance R in place
Parallel combination 2950Ω resistance.
V
So, ifinal = = 20 division
1 1 1
= + 50 +R
Rl 4 3 30 V / 50 + 2950
Now, =
1 3+ 4 7 20 V / 50 + R
= =
R1 12 12 3 R + 50
=
12 2 50 + 2950
R1 = Ω 2R + 100 = 9000
7
Now consider lower portion of point P & N apply R = 4450Ω
parallel combination 79. Resistances n, each of r ohm, when connected
1 1 1 1 in parallel give an equivalent resistance of R
= + = ohm. If these resistances were connected in
R 2 0.5 0.5 0.25
series, the combination would have a resistance
R2 = 0.25 in ohms, equal to/peye r Deesce kesâ n ØeeflejesOeeW keâes
heeÕe&yeæ peesÌ[e peelee nw, lees Gvekeâe meceleguÙe ØeeflejesOe R
Then equivalent resistance of lower arm Deesce neslee nw~ Ùeefo FvnW ßeb=Keueeyeæ peesÌ[e peeS, lees Gme
Req = R1 + R = 0.25 +1 JÙeJemLee keâe meceleguÙe ØeeflejesOe Deesce ceW nesiee :-
= 1.25
R
Current flow in the lower branch i.e. through equivalent (a) 2 (b) R/n
resistance n
I Req = V (c) nR (d) n2R
V 4 AIPMT-2004
I= = = 3.2A Ans. (d) : Equivalent resistance of n resistance each of r
R eq 1.25
ohm in parallel is given by
Hence potential difference between point M & N 1 1 1
V1 = 3.2 × I = + + .... + n times
R r r
= 3.2 × 1
1 n
= 3.2 Volt =
R r
78. A galvanometer of resistance 50 Ω is connected
to a battery of 3V along with a resistance of r = nR
2950 Ω in series. A full scale deflection of 30 When, these resistance are connected in series effective
divisions is obtained in the galvanometer. In resistance is
order to reduce this deflection to 20 divisions, Req = r + r + .... + n times
the resistance in series should be–/50Ω ØeeflejesOe Req = nr
kesâ Skeâ iewueJewveesceeršj keâes 3V keâer yewšjer mes Fme lejn ∴ Req = n (nR)
peesÌ[e ieÙee nw efkeâ 2950Ω keâe jesOekeâ Fmemes ßeb=Keueeyeæ R eq = n2R
pegÌ[e nw~ Fme efmLeefle ceW iewueJesveesceeršj ceW 30 ØeYeeieeW keâes
hetjer mkesâue keâe efJe#esheve neslee nw efJe#esheve keâes ØeYeeJe keâes 80. A galvanometer acting as a voltmeter will
have:-
nesves kesâ efueÙes ßeb=Keueeyeæ ØeeflejesOe keâes nesvee nesiee:- Skeâ iewuJesveesceeršj Jeesušceeršj keâe keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ Fme
(a) 6050 Ω (b) 4450 Ω JÙeJemLee ceW iewuJesveesceeršj keâer kegâC[ueer kesâ meeLe pegÌ[e
(c) 5050 Ω (d) 5550 Ω nesiee :-
AIPMT-2008
(a) a high resistance in series with its coil
Ans. (b) : Given :-
Skeâ GÛÛeceeveer ØeeflejesOe ßeb=Keueeyeæ
(b) a low resistance in parallel with its coil
Skeâ vÙetveceeveer ØeeflejesOe heeÕe&yeæ
(c) a low resistance in series with its coil
Resistance of Galvanometer G = 50 Ω Skeâ vÙetveceeveer ØeeflejesOe ßeb=Keueeyeæ
Resistance R = 2950 Ω (d) a high resistance in parallel with its coil
Initial current ii =
V
= 30 division
Skeâ GÛÛeceeveer ØeeflejesOe heeÕe&yeæ
50 + 2950Ω AIPMT-2004
Physics 384 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Galvanometer is a very sensitive instrument only (a) High resistance in series with galvanometer
a small current is required to cause notable deflection in iesuJesveesceeršj kesâ ßesCeer›eâce ceW GÛÛe ØeeflejesOe
the dial. A voltmeter will be added in parallel between the (b) Low resistance in series with galvanometer
points across which we intend to measure the voltage drop. iesuJesveesceeršj kesâ ßesCeer›eâce ceW vÙetve ØeeflejesOe
So the galvanometer will be directly exposed to the same (c) High resistance in parallel with galvanometer
voltage which is being measured.
iesuJesveesceeršj kesâ meceevlej›eâce ceW GÛÛe ØeeflejesOe
In galvanometer high resistance is connected in series
(d) Low resistance in parallel with galvanometer
so that less current passes through voltmeter and it does
not affect the actual circuit as such. iesuJesveesceeršj kesâ meceevlej›eâce ceW vÙetve ØeeflejesOe
AIPMT-2002
Ans. (a) :

81. A galvanometer of 50 ohm resistance has 25 ⇒ A Galvanometer may be converted into a Voltmeter
divisions. A current of 4 × 10–4 ampere gives a by connecting a large resistance R in series with the
deflection of one division. To convert this Galvanometer. The equivalent resistance of the
galvanometer into a voltmeter having a range combination = (G + R) ,where 'G' is resistance of
of 25 volts, it should be connected with a Galvanometer.
resistance of :- ⇒ If nth Part of applied voltage appeared across
50 Deesce ØeeflejesOe kesâ Skeâ iewuJesveesceeršj hej 25 Debkeâ V
Debefkeâle nQ~ FmeceW 4 × 10–4 SscheerÙej keâer Oeeje Skeâ Debkeâ Galvanometer Vg = , then required series resistance
n
keâe efJeÛeueve osleer nw~ Fme iewuJesveesceeršj keâes 25 Jeesuš
is R = (n-1) G
kesâ Øemeej keâes Jeesušceeršj yeveeves kesâ efueS efkeâleves Deewj
(i) Voltmeter is an instrument used to measure
efkeâme Øekeâej kesâ ØeeflejesOe mes peesÌ[vee nesiee :- potential difference between two ends of a current
carrying conductor.
(a) 245 Ω as a shunt/245 Ω mes Mebš
(ii) A Galvanometer is a type of sensitive Ammeter or
(b) 2550 Ω in series/2550 Ωmes meerjerpe digital Multimeter for detecting electric current.
(c) 2450 Ω in series/2450 Ωmes meerjerpe (iii) Galvanometer can be converted into a Voltmeter by
(d) 2500 Ω as a shunt/2500 Ωmes Mebš connecting a high resistance in series connection
AIPMT-2004 within it.
Ans. (c) : Given– 83. Calculate the net resistance of the circuit
between A and B : /efoÙes ngSs heefjheLe keâe A leLee B
Rg = 50Ω
Ig = 25 × 4 × 10–4 kesâ ceOÙe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe nesiee –
=10–2A
V = 25 volts

(a) 8/3Ω (b) 14/3Ω

We know,
(c) 16/3Ω (d) 22/3Ω
V = Ig(Rs + Rg)
AIPMT-2000
V
Rs = – R g Ans. (b) :
Ig Q
25
Rs = – 50 P R
10 –2
Rs = 2500 –50
R S = 2450Ω S
Above given circuit is Wheatstone bridge as-
82. To convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter one PQ 3 1
should connect a / Skeâ iesuJesveesceeršj keâes Jeesušceeršj = =
PS 6 2
cebs yeoueves kesâ efueS peesÌ[vee ÛeeefnS -
Physics 385 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
QR 4 1 ig 8 8
& = = 1− = = = 0.8
RS 8 2 i 2 + 8 10
PQ QR ig
Here, = ⇒ = 0.2
PS RS i
i.e., Ratio of resistance in two arms of one side (i.e. 3Ω ig = 0.2 × 1
& 6Ω) & other side (i.e. 4Ω & 8Ω) are same. = 0.2A
∴ Above circuit can be simplified as- Hence, i – ig = 1 – 0.2
= 0.8A
85. In hot wire Ammeter due to flowing of current
temperature of wire is increased by 5°C. If
value of current is doubled, then increases in
temperature will be :
efkeâmeer lehle leej Deceeršj ceW Oeeje ØeJeen mes leej kesâ
leeheceeve ceW Je=efæ 5°C nw~ Ùeefo Oeeje keâe ceeve ogiegvee keâj
efoÙee peeS lees leehe ceW Je=efæ nesieer–
(a) 15ºC (b) 20ºC
(c) 25ºC (d) 30ºC
1 1 1 3
Now, = + = AIPMT-1998
R eq 7 14 14 Ans. (b) : When current is passed through a conductor,
14 electric energy is absorbed by the conductor through
Req = Ω collisions between its atomic lattice and the charge
3
carriers causing its temperature to rise.
84. Resistance of a Galvanometer coil is 8Ω and Energy loss in Conductor,
2
2Ω Shunt resistance is connected with it. If H = i RT
main current is 1 A then the current flow Heat developed = mS∆θ
through 2Ω resistance will be : We know that–
I2RT = mS∆θ
Oeejeceeheer kegâC[ueer keâe ØeeflejesOe 8Ω nw leLee Fme hej I2 ∝ ∆θ
2Ω keâe Mebš ØeeflejesOe ueieeÙee peelee nw Ùeefo ØecegKe Oeeje 2
∆θ2 I22 I 
1 SeqcheÙej keâer nes lees 2Ω mes ØeJeeefnle Oeeje nesieer– = 2 or ∆θ2 =  2  ∆θ1 − − − −(i)
∆θ1 I1  I1 
(a) 0.2 A (b) 0.8 A
(c) 0.1 A (d) 0.4 A Given, value of current double the increase of
temperature will be–
AIPMT-1998
I2 = 2I1
Ans. (b): Let the total current through the parallel
∆θ1 = 5ºC
combination is i. form Equation (i)
The current through the galvanometer is ig and current 2
through the shunt is i – ig.  2I1 
∆θ2 =   × 5 = 4 × 5 = 20º C
 I1 
86. The current in the following circuit is
heefjheLe ceW Oeeje keâe ceeve nw:

The potential difference Vab = (Va – Vb) is the same for

both path so–
ig G = (i – ig)S
or, ig (G + S) = iS (a) 2/3 A (b) 1 A
ig (c) 1/8 A (d) 2/9 A
S
or, = AIPMT-(1997)
i S+ G
Ans. (b) :
The fraction of current passing through shunt
ig S
−1 = −1
i S+ G
 ig  G
⇒ 1 −  =
 i  S+ G

Physics 386 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Resistances R1 and R2 are in series then equivalent R1 and R2 are in parallel combination then-
resistance is- 1 1 1 1 1 1
'
= + = + =
R R1 R 2 20 20 10
Req = R1 + R2 ⇒ R' = 10Ω
= 3Ω + 3Ω
R1 = 6Ω
Resistance R1 and R3 are in parallel then equivalent
resistance is- Req = 10 + 10 + 10
1 1 1 Req = 30Ω
= +
R e q R1 R 3 88. Six resistors of 3 Ω each are connected along
1 1 1 the sides of a hexagon and three resistors of 6 Ω
= + each are connected along AC, AD and AE as
Req 6 3
shown in the figures. The equivalent resistance
1+ 2 between A and B is equal to
=
6 ØelÙeskeâ 3 Ω kesâ Ú: ØeeflejesOekeâ Skeâ <ešdYegpe kesâ YegpeeDeeW
⇒
1
=
3 kesâ DevegefoMe peesÌ[s peeles nQ Deewj ØelÙeskeâ 6 Ω kesâ leerve
Req 6 ØeeflejesOekeâ AC, AD Deewj AE Yegpee kesâ DevegefoMe peesÌ[s
R e q = 2Ω peeles nQ pewmee efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ A Deewj B kesâ
yeerÛe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe nw:
The current flowing in the circuit is-
V = IR
2=I×2
I = 1A
87. What will be the equivalent resistance between
the two points A and D?
efoS ieS heefjheLe ceW efyevog A leLee D kesâ yeerÛe leguÙe
ØeeflejesOe %eele keâjW~ (a) 2 Ω (b) 6 Ω
(c) 3 Ω (d) 9 Ω
AIPMT-1994
Ans. (a) :

(a) 30 Ω (b) 40 Ω
(c) 20 Ω (d) 10 Ω
AIPMT-(1996)
Ans. (a) :

Resistances RAF and RFE are in series combination their

equivalent resistance
R' = RAF + RFE
=3+3
R' = 6Ω
The equivalent resistance of above circuit is-
Now the resistance RAE and equivalent resistance R' are
in parallel combination-
1 1 1
= +
R'' R' R AE
1 1 1
= +
From the fig resistance between P and S are in series R'' 6 6
then- R" = 3Ω
R1 = 10 + 10 = 20Ω Similarly, we can calculate for RED, RAC, RDC and
R2 = 10 + 10 = 20Ω finally the circuit reduces to-

Physics 387 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library

R''' = RAC + RBC (a) 9.6 V (b) 2.6 V

=3+3 (c) 4.8 V (d) 1.2 V
= 6Ω AIPMT-1993
1 1 1 Ans. (c) :
= +
R e q R ''' R AB
1 1
= +
6 3
Req = 2Ω
89. Three resistances each of R=4 Ω are connected
According to the ques, current through 3Ω resistor is
to from a triangle. The resistance between any
0.8A then voltage across 3Ω resistance is-
two terminals is
V=IR
leerve ØeeflejesOe R = 4 Ω pegÌ[keâj Skeâ ef$eYegpe yeveeles nQ~
V = 0.8 × 3
efkeâvneR oes efyevogDeeW kesâ yeerÛe ØeeflejesOe nesiee: V = 2.4 V
(a) 12 Ω (b) 2 Ω As 3Ω and 6Ω are connected in parallel, thus voltage
(c) 6 Ω (d) 8/3 Ω across them is equal.
AIPMT-1993 Current through 6Ω.
Ans. (d) : According to the question- 2.4
I2 = = 0.4 A
6
Current through 4Ω resistor
I' = I1 + I0
= 0.8 + 0.4
= 1.2 A
From the fig resistance R1 and R2 are connected in Potential drop across 4Ω is
series we get- V' = I' R3
R' = R1 + R2 = 1.2 × 4
=4+4 V' = 4.8 V
R' = 8Ω 91. In the network shown in figure each resistance
The equivalent resistance between B and C is equal to- is 1 Ω. The effective resistance between A and
1
=
1
+
1 B is/efoS ieS efÛe$e ceW meYeer ØeeflejesOe 1Ω kesâ nQ~ A leLee
R e q R' R 3 B kesâ yeerÛe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe yeleeFS~
1 1
= +
8 4
1+ 2
=
8
1 3
= 4 3
Req 8 (a) Ω (b) Ω
3 2
8 8
Req = Ω (c) 7 Ω (d) Ω
3 7
AIPMT-1990
90. Current through 3 Ω resistor is 0.8 A ampere,
then potential drop through 4 Ω resistor is Ans. (d) :
efoS ieS efÛe$e ceW 3 Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe ceW 0.8 A Oeeje
ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ %eele keâjeW efkeâ 4 Ω ØeeflejesOe ceW
efJeYeJeeblej keâe ceeve keäÙee nesiee?
Physics 388 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Resistance PQ and RQ are in series combination-
R' = RPQ + RQR
R' = 1 + 1
R' = 2Ω

Now, four segments are connected in parallel

combination to each other having 20Ω resistance each
Equivalent resistance of upper branch is- which gives Req = 5Ω
2 If maximum current flowing through each resistor is 1A
= +1+1 then the total current in the circuit will be Ieq = 4A.
3
8 Hence, we can say that minimum no of 8 resistances is
= Ω required to make this circuit.
3
93. n equal resistors are first connected in series
8
Now, Ω and 2Ω are in parallel and then connected in parallel. What is the
3 ratio of the maximum to the minimum
8 resistance?
×2
So, RAB = 3 n Skeâ meceeve ØeeflejesOe henues ßesCeer ›eâce ceW peesÌ[s ieS
8 leLee efheâj meceeblej ›eâce ceW peesÌ[s ieS~ Fmekesâ meJee&efOekeâ
+2
3 leLee efvecvelece ØeeflejesOeeW keâe Devegheele keäÙee nesiee?
16 (a) n (b) 1/n2
⇒ RAB = 3 (c) n2 (d) 1/n
14 AIPMT-1989
3 Ans. (c) : When n equal resistance are connected in
16 series then equivalent resistance is-
⇒ RAB =
14 R' = R + R + R + ......... + nR
8 R' = nR ..........(i) [In this case, R is maximum]
So, R AB = Ω Similarly, when n equal resistance are connected in
7
parallel then equivalent resistance is-
92. You are given several identical resistances each 1 1 1 1 n
of value R = 10 Ω and each capable of carrying = + + + ....... +
R'' R R R R
a maximum current of one ampere. It is
R
required to make a suitable combination of R" = ........(ii) [In this case, R is minimum]
these resistances of 5 Ω which can carry a n
current of 4 ampere. The minimum number of On dividing eqn (i) by eqn (ii) we get-
resistances of the type R that will be required R' nR
⇒ = = n2
for this job is R" R
nceejs heeme R=10 Ω kesâ kegâÚ ØeeflejesOe nQ pees efkeâ n
GÛÛelece Oeeje 1 A menve keâj mekeâles nQ~ nceW FvnW R'
⇒ = n2
peesÌ[keâj 5 Ω keâe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe yeveevee nw pees efkeâ 4 A R"
keâer Oeeje menve keâj mekesâ~ yeleeFS efkeâ Fme keâeÙe& kesâ efueS 94. To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter,
keâce-mes keâce efkeâleves ØeeflejesOeeW keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer? one needs to connect a/Skeâ iewuJesveesceeršj keâes Sceeršj
(a) 4 (b) 10 ceW yeoueves nsleg nceW peesÌ[vee ÛeeefnS
(c) 8 (d) 20 (a) Low resistance in parallel/meceevlej ›eâce ceW keâce
AIPMT-1990 ØeeflejesOe
Ans. (c) : According to the question- (b) High resistance in parallel/meceevlej ›eâce ceW DeefOekeâ
R = 10Ω Ieq = 4Ω ØeeflejesOe
Req = 5Ω (c) Low resistance in series/ßesCeer ›eâce ceW keâce ØeeflejesOe
Now, the above combination is only possible when we
(d) High resistance in series/ßesCeer ›eâce ceW DeefOekeâ
use 4 segments each of which have two resistors and all
the four segments are connected in parallel to each ØeeflejesOe
other. AIPMT-1992

Physics 389 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): A galvanometer is converted into an ammeter DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej Ú: Skeâmeceeve yeuye MetvÙe
by connecting a low resistance in parallel with the Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe Deewj efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue E kesâ efkeâmeer
galvanometer. This low resistance wire is called shunt efo° Oeeje œeesle mes mebÙeesefpele nw~
resistance. Fve yeuyeeW Éeje GheYegòeâ Meefòeâ keâe Devegheele peye
(i) meYeer yeuye oerhÙeceeve nw Deewj (ii) Äen heefjefmLeefle
efpemeceW oes A Yeeie mes leLee Skeâ B Yeeie mes oerhÙeceeve nw,
nesiee :

17.6 Cells, Emf, Internal Resistance

95. A cell of emf 4 V and internal resistance 0.5Ω is
connected to a 7.5Ω external resistance. The (a) 9:4 (b) 1:2
terminal potential difference of the cell is: (c) 2:1 (d) 4:9
4 V efJeÅegleJeenkeâ yeue (emf) SJeb 0.5Ω Deevleefjkeâ NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
ØeeflejesOe Jeeues Skeâ mesue keâes 7.5Ω Jeeues yee¢e ØeeflejesOe Ans. (a) :
kesâ meeLe peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ mesue kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe
efJeYeJeevlej nw:
(a) 3.75 V (b) 4.25 V
(c) 4 V (d) 0.375 V
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Ans. (a) : Given that :

Case (I) All the bulbs are glowing

So the parallel bulbs give the resistance as
1 1 1 1 3
= + + =
ε = 4V RA R R R R
r = 0.5Ω 1 1 1 1 3
R = 7.5Ω = + + =
RB R R R R
VAB = ?
Req = R A + RB
Current passing through the circuit is-
R R 2R
ε = + =
i= 3 3 3
R+r
The power consumed by the network in this case given
4 by
i=
7.5 + 0.5 E2
i = 0.5A P1 =
R eq
Potential difference across the cell is-
VA – VB = ε – ir 3E 2
P1 = –––––– (1)
= 4 – 0.5 × 0.5 2R
= 4 – 0.25 Case II Two from section A and one from section B are
VA – VB = 3.75 V glowing.
96. Six similar bulbs are connected as shown in the
figure with a DC source of emf E and zero
internal resistance.
The ratio of power consumption by the bulbs
when (i) all are glowing and (ii) in the situation
when two from section A and one from section
B are glowing, will be:

Physics 390 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The equivalent resistance is given by 98. The potential difference (VA-VB) between the
1 1 1 2 points A and B in the given figure is
= + = oMee&Ùes ieÙes DeejsKe ceW efyevogDeeW A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe
RA R R R
RB = R efJeYeeJevlej (VA-VB) nesiee :-
 3R 
Req = RA + RB =  
 2 
Now power,
(a) -3 V (b) +3 V
E2 (c) +6 V (d) +9 V
P2 =
R eq NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
2E 2 Ans. (d) : Given- I = 2A
P2 = ........(ii) Using Kirchhoff's voltage law-
3R
P1 3E 2 / 2R
The ratio of power = = = 9:4
P2 2E 2 / 3R
VB = VA – (2 × 2) –3 – (2 × 1)
Hence option (a) is correct VA – VB = 4 + 3 + 2
97. A battery consists of a variable number 'n' of VA – VB = 9V
identical cells (having internal resistance 'r'
each) which are connected in series. The 99. In the given figure, a diode D is connected to an
terminals of the battery are short-circuited and external resistance R = 100Ω and an e.m.f. of
the current I is measured. Which of the graphs 3.5 V. If the barrier potential developed across
shows the correct relationship between I and the diode is 0.5 V, the current in the circuit will
n? / keâesF& yewšjer Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe 'r' Jeeues,ßesCeer›eâce ceW be/ÙeneB heefjheLe ceW Skeâ [eÙees[ D keâes Skeâ yee¢e R =
mebÙeesefpele, 'n' meJe&mece mesueeW (mebKÙee n heefjJeleea nQ) mes 100Ω ØeeflejesOe, 3.5V F&.Sce.Sheâ. keâer yewšjer mes peesÌ[e
yeveer nw~ yewšjer kesâ šefce&veue keâe ueIegheLeve keâjkesâ Oeeje I ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo [eÙees[ cesb (oesveeW #es$eeW keâer mebefOe keâer
ceeheer ieF& nw~ efoÙeeieÙee keâewve-mee «eeHeâ I Deewj n kesâ yeerÛe Deejheej) GlheVe jesefOekeâe efJeYeJe 0.5 V nw lees, heefjheLe ceW
mener mebyebOe keâes oMee&lee nw? Oeeje nesieer~

(a) (b)

(c) (d) (a) 35 mA (b) 30 mA

(c) 40 mA (d) 20 mA
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 Ans. (b) : Net potential across the resistor is difference
Ans. (a) of the emf and the barrier potential.
∴ IR = ε – V barrier = 3.5 – 0.5 = 3V
3
I= A = 3 × 10–2A = 30 mA
100
Equivalent emf, Eeq= nE 100. The internal resistance of a 2.1 cell which gives
Equivalent resistance R = nr a current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10Ω
E eq nE E is
Current, I = = = 2.1 V keâe Skeâ mesue, 10Ω kesâ yeeÿe ØeeflejesOe mes 0.2A
R nr r
So, current I is independent of n and I is constant Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâjlee nw, lees Fme mesue keâe Deevleefjkeâ
ØeeflejesOe nesiee-
(a) 1.0 Ω (b) 0.2 Ω
(c) 0.5 Ω (d) 0.8 Ω
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Physics 391 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Vacross = IR
εR ε
⇒ V= =
R + r 1+ r
R
∴ at R = 0, the V = 0
& R → ∞ then V →ε
Hence, graph of V vs R is as show in figure (1).
Given that
Voltage, V = 2.1V
Current in circuit, I = 0.2A
External Resistance , R = 10Ω
Ohm's law
V = IR
2.1 = 0.2 × (10 + r) 102. A thermocouple of negligible resistance
produces an e.m.f. of 40 µV/ºC in the linear
2.1
10 + r = range of temperature. A galvanometer of
0.2 resistance 10 ohm whose sensitivity is 1
10 + r =
21 µA/division, is employed with the
2 thermocouple. The smallest value of
21 temperature difference that can be detected by
r= − 10 the system will be/veieCÙe ØeeflejesOe keâe Skeâ leehe-
2
r = 10.5 − 10 Ùegice leehe keâer jsKeerÙe hejeme ceW 40 µV/ºC keâe efJe.Jee.yeue
r = 0.5Ω
Glhevve keâjlee nw~ 10 ohm ØeeflejesOe keâe Skeâ
iesuJesveesceeršj efpemekeâer meg«eeefnlee 1 µA/division nw,
101. A cell having an emf ε and internal resistance r leeheÙegice kesâ meeLe meÙegòeâ nw~ leeheevlej keâe vÙetvelece ceeve
is connected across a variable external
resistance R. As the resistance R is increased, pees efvekeâeÙe Éeje mebmetefÛele efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw, nesiee
the plot of potential difference V across R is (a) 0.25°C (b) 0.5 °C
given by/Skeâ mesue keâe efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue (c) 1°C (d) 0.1 °C
(F&.Sce.Sheâ) ε leLee Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe r nw~ Fmes Skeâ AIPMT (Mains)-2011
heefjJeleea ØeeflejesOe R kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Ans. (a) : For minimum deflection of 1 division
Ùeefo ØeeflejesOe R keâe ceeve yeÌ{eÙee peeÙe lees, R kesâ efmejeW required current = 1 µA
kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej V keâe DeeuesKe nesiee:- ⇒ voltage required = IR = (1µA) (10) = 10µV
∴ 40 µV ≅ 1°C
1
⇒ 10µV ≅ °C = 0.25°C .
4
(a) (b) 103. A current of 2 A flows through a 2Ω resistor
when connected across a battery. The same
battery supplies a current of 0.5 A when
connected across a 9Ω resistor. The internal
resistance of the battery is :/efkeâmeer yewšjer mes pegÌ[s
(c) (d) 2Ω efJeÅegle Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Ùeefo yewšjer 9Ω kesâ
ØeeflejesOe ceW 0.5 A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâjleer nw, lees
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 yewšjer keâe Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe nesiee :
Ans. (a) : Draw circuit diagram (a) 1 Ω (b) 0.5 Ω
(c) 1/3 Ω (d) 1/4 Ω
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Ans. (c) : Case 1 :

Now apply KVL in loop,

ε
ε – IR – Ir = 0 ⇒ I=
R+r
Physics 392 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
E mecyevOe peeveves kesâ efueÙes V Deewj I kesâ yeerÛe «eeheâ yeveelee
I1 =
2+r nw~ Fme «eeheâ keâer ØeJeCelee Deewj Deble:KeC[ ›eâceevegmeej
E neWies:
2=
2+r (a) – ε and r/ – ε Deewj r (b) ε and – r/ε Deewj – r
4 + 2r = E ------- (i) (c) – r and ε /– r Deewj ε (d) r and – ε / r Deewj –ε
Case 2 : AIMPT-2009
Ans. (c) : Given, terminal potential difference = V
EMF of cell E = ε
Internal resistance = r
General equation of EMF in cell,
I2 = 0.5A
V = E – Ir
E
I2 = or V = ε + I(– r)
9+r Compare it with standard equation of the line,
E y = c + mx
0.5 =
9+r Since graph of student is V vs I
4.5 + 0.5r = E = 4 + 2r (using eqn(i))
0.5 = 1.5r
1
r= Ω
3
104. In producing chlorine by electrolysis 100 kW
power at 125 V is being consumed. How much
chlorine per minute is liberated, Electro
chemical equivalent (E.C.E.) of chlorine is ∴ V is y and I is x.
0.367 × 10–6 kg/C) – Therefore ε is intercept and (– r) is slope.
efJeÅegle DeheIešve Éeje keäueesjerve Glheeove ceW 100 kW 106. A steady current of 1.5 amp flows through a
Meefòeâ 125 V hej JÙeÙe nesleer nw~ Øeefle efceveš efkeâleveer copper volt-meter for 10 minutes. If the
keäueesjerve cegòeâ nesleer nw (keäueesjerve keâe E.C.E., 0.367 × electrochemical equivalent of copper is 30×10–5
10–6 kg/C nw) – gm coulomb–1, the mass of copper deposited on
the electrode will be: -
(a) 1.76 × 10–3 kg (b) 9.67 × 10–3 kg
–3 Skeâ leeceü Jeesušceeršj ceW 1.5 ScheerÙej keâer efmLej Oeeje 10
(c) 17.6 1× 10 kg (d) 3.67 × 10–3 kg
efceveš kesâ efueÙes Ûeueleer nw Ùeefo leeByes kesâ efueÙes efJeÅegle-
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
jemeeÙeefvekeâ leguÙeebkeâ 30 × 10–5 gm coulomb–1 nes lees
Ans. (c) : Given: power = 100 kW
voltage = 125 V Fuewkeäš^es[ hej efve#esefhele leeByes keâe õJÙeceeve nesiee:-
power = VI (a) 0.27 gm (b) 0.40 gm
100000 (c) 0.50 gm (d) 0.67 gm
I= = 800 A AIPMT-2007
125
Mass of substance deposit at the cathode is m, which is Ans. (a) : Given- steady current i = 1.5 amp
given as, Time t = 10 min
m = zit, where 'z' is E.C.E. Electro chemical equivalent, z = 30 × 10-5
= 0.367×10–6 × 800 × 60 gram/Coulomb
Mass of copper deposited mcu = ?
m = 17.6 × 10 −3 kg
According to Faraday's first law of electrolysis,
105. A student measures the terminal potential Mass deposited ∝ quantity of electricity
difference (V) of a cell (of emf ε and internal
resistance r) as a function of the current (I)
flowing through it. The slope and intercept of
the graph between V and I, then respectively
equal to :
Skeâ Úe$e Skeâ mesue (efpemekeâe efJe.Jee. yeue (emf) ε nw
Deewj Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe r nw) kesâ šjefceueveeW kesâ
efJeYeJeevlej (V) keâe mesue ceW Ûeue jner Oeeje (I) mes m∝Q

Physics 393 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
⇒ m = zQ 15 Iebšs lekeâ efoÙee~ Fme ØeÙeesie meceÙe ceW yewšjer šefce&veueeW
⇒ m = zit (Q Q = it ) kesâ yeerÛe keâer Jeesušlee keâe ceOÙeJeleea ceeve 14V jne~ yewšjer
keâer ‘‘Jeeš-IeCše’’ o#elee nesieer :-
= 30 ×10 × 1.5 × (10 × 60 )
−5
(a) 80% (b) 90%
⇒ m cu = 27 × 10 −2 gram = 0.27gram (c) 87.5% (d) 82.5%
107. Two cells, having the same e.m.f., are AIPMT-2004
connected in series through an external output power
resistance R. Cell have internal resistances r1 Ans. (c) : % efficiency (η) = ×100
Input power
and r2 (r1 > r2) respectively. When the circuit is
closed, the potential difference across the first 14 × 5 × 15
= × 100
cell is zero. The value of R is:- 15 × 10 × 8
meceeve efJe.Jee.yeue Jeeues oes mesueeW keâes Skeâ yeenjer = .875×100
ØeeflejesOekeâ Éeje ßeb=Keueeyeæ peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ mesueeW kesâ = 87.5%
Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe ›eâceevegmeej r1 Deewj r2 (r1 > r2) nw 109. For a cell terminal P.D. is 2.2V when circuit is
peye heefjheLe keâes yevo efkeâÙee ieÙee lees henues mesue kesâ open and reduces to 1.8V when cell is
Deej-heej keâe efJeYeJeevlej MetvÙe Lee~ R keâe ceeve nesiee:- connected to a resistance of R = 5Ω. Determine
r1 + r2 internal resistance of cell (r)
(a) r1 – r2 (b) Skeâ mesue peye Kegues heefjheLe ceW nw leye šefce&veue Jeesušlee
2
r1 − r2 2.2V nw leLee peye Gmekesâ efmejeW hej R = 5Ω keâe ØeeflejesOe
(c) (d) r1 + r2 peesÌ[les nQ lees šefce&veue Jeesušlee 1.8V jn peeleer nw, mewue
2
AIPMT-2006 keâe Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe (r) nw -
Ans. (a) : 10 9
(a) Ω (b) Ω
9 10
11 5
(c) Ω (d) Ω
9 9
AIPMT-2002
Ans. (a) :
We know V = IR
E + E = I (r1 + r2 + R)
2E
I= ... (i)
r1 + r2 + R
Given that circuit is closed, potential difference across
the first cell is zero.
V = E – I r1 ⇒ When the circuit is open, the terminal Voltage is
0 = E – I r1 equal to the emf i.e E = 2.2V
I = E/r1 ...(ii) E - iR -ir = 0 ⇒E-V-ir = 0
From eqn (i) and (ii) – Terminal potential difference,
2E E V = E − ir
=
r1 + r2 + R r1 Er
V =E−
⇒ 2 r1 = r1 + r2 + R r+R
⇒ R = r1 – r2 ER
V=
108. A battery is charged at a potential of 15V for 8 r+R
hours when the current flowing is 10A. The ⇒ 1.8= 2.2 × 5
battery on discharge supplies a current of 5A 5+r
for 15 hours. The mean terminal voltage during ⇒ 1.8 r + 5 = 11
discharges is 14 V. The "Watt hour" efficiency
( )
of the battery is :- 110
⇒ r +5 =
Skeâ yewšjer keâes 15 Jeesuš efJeYeJe hej 8 Iebšs lekeâ 18
DeeJesefMele keâjves ceW 10A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Fme 10
DeeJesefMele yewšjer mes keâece uesves hej Fmeves 5A Oeeje ØeJeen ⇒ r = 9 Ω
Physics 394 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
110. A car battery of e.m.f 12 V and internal 112. On the basis of unit cell concept a crystal has/
resistance 5 × 10–2 Ω, receives a current of 60 FkeâeF& mesue leLÙe kesâ DeeOeej hej efkeâmeer ef›eâmšue keâes
A from external source, then terminal voltage Jeieeake=âle efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw :-
of battery is:/12 Jeesuš keâe efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue leLee 5
(a) 7 systems/7 efvekeâeÙe
× 10–2Ω Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe keâer Skeâ yewšjer ceW yeeÿe
(b) 14 systems/14 efvekeâeÙe
Œeesle mes 60 SefcheÙej keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw lees
(c) 230 systems/230 efvekeâeÙe
yewšjer keâer šefce&veue Jeesušlee nesieer –
(d) 32 systems/32 efvekeâeÙe
(a) 12 V (b) 9 V
(c) 15 V (d) 20 V AIPMT-1999
AIPMT-2000 Ans. (a) : Unit cell :– It is regulation 3-D arrangement
of atoms or ion in a crystal. There are 7 systems on the
Ans. (c) :
r basis of unit cell concept of crystal –
(i) Cubic (ii) Tetragonal (iii) Orthorhombic
(iv) Hexagonal (v) Monoclinic (vi) Triclinic (vii)
Trigonal.
113. A battery of e.m.f 10 V and internal resistance
Given, e.m.f = 12V
0.5 Ω is connected across a variable resistance
Internal resistance 'r' = 5×10-2 Ω R. The value of R for which the power
current I = 60A delivered in it is maximum is given by
Now, Terminal voltage, V = 12 + Ir ef JeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue 10 V Deewj Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe 0.5 Ω
= 12 + (60×5×10-2) keâer Skeâ yewšjer keâes Skeâ heefjJeleea ØeeflejesOe R mes peesÌ[e
V = 15V
peelee nw~ lees R keâe ceeve efpemekesâ efueS FmeceW cegòeâ Tpee&
111. The terminal potential difference of a cell is DeefOekeâlece nes, nw:
greater than its emf when/mesue kesâ efueS šefce&veue
(a) 0.5 Ω (b) 1.0 Ω
Jeesšulee Fmekesâ efJe.Jee.yeue mes DeefOekeâ nw peye-
(c) 2.0 Ω (d) 0.25 Ω
(a) A battery of less emf is connected in its series
AIPMT-1992
Skeâ keâce efJe.Jee.yeue keâer yewšjer Fmekesâ ßesCeer ceW peesÌ[ os~ Ans. (a) : Given that,
(b) A battery of higher emf is connected in its E = 10 V
series/Skeâ GÛÛe efJe.Jee. yeue keâer yewšjer Fmekesâ ßesCeer ceW
r = 0.5Ω
peesÌ[ os~ pmax = ?
(c) A battery of higher emf is connected in its Maximum power is delivered to the load only when the
parallel/Skeâ GÛÛe efJe.Jee. yeue keâer yewšjer Fmekesâ internal resistance of the source is equal to the load
meceevlej ceW peesÌ[ os~ resistance (R) i.e R = r.
(d) A battery of less emf is connected in its Hence, the value of R for which the power delivered is
parallel/Skeâ keâce efJe.Jee. yeue keâer yewšjer Fmekesâ maximum = 0.5Ω.
meceevlej ceW peesÌ[ os~
AIPMT-1999 17.7 Combination of Cells-Series
Ans. (c) : We define, emf as the voltage of battery when
no current is flowing, while terminal potential
and in Parallel
difference is voltage across battery when connected to a
114. Ten identical cells connected in series are
resistor and current is flowing through it.
needed to heat a wire of length one meter and
radius 'r' by 10oC in time 't'. How many cells
will be required to heat the wire of length two
meter of the same radius by the same
temperature in time 't'?/Skeâ ceeršj uebyeeF& Deewj
ef$epÙee 'r' kesâ Skeâ leej keâes 't' meceÙe ceW 10ºC lekeâ iece&
keâjves kesâ efueS ëe=bKeuee ceW pegÌ[s ome meceeve mesue keâer
We have condition of charging when battery of emf E is DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesleer nw~ meceeve ef$epÙee kesâ oes ceeršj uebyes
charged by another source of voltage V. leej keâes meceÙe 't' ceW meceeve leeheceeve lekeâ iece& keâjves kesâ
Equation of charging ⇒ V = E + Ir efueS efkeâleves mesueeWs keâer DeeJeMkeâlee nesieer?
Hence V > E only when battery is connected to an
external source of emf greater than that of our battery (a) 10 (b) 20
parallely. (c) 30 (d) 40
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Physics 395 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Let ρ is the resistivity of material r is the The effective emf in closed circuit is = 18V – 12V = 6V
radius of wire The net resistance is = 2 + 1 = 3Ω
Then So,
l Effective emf
R=ρ Current ( I ) =
A Total resistance
ρl ρ ( 2l ) 6
So, R1 = = R and R 2 = = 2R =
A A 3
m = V × ρ = (A × l)ρ I = 2A
m1 = m and m2 = (A × 2l) ρ = 2m The Potential difference across V will be same as the
Let e is the emt of each cell terminal Voltage of either cell.
Since, current is drawn from the cell of 18V, hence,
V1 = E1 - ir1
= 18 − 2 × 2
10 cell connect in series heat the wire of length 1m by V1 = 14V
∆T = 10°C in time t1 Hence, correct answer option (c).
V 2
(10e ) 2
116. Two identical batteries each of e.m.f. 2 V and
Heat = t = ms∆T ⇒ × t = ms∆T ------(I) internal resistance 1 Ω are available to produce
R R
heat in an external resistance by passing a
Second case n cell connect in series heat same wire of current through it. The maximum power that can
length 2m. be developed across R using these batteries is
( ne ) t
2
ØelÙes keâ 2 V efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue Deewj Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe
= 2ms∆T -----(II)
2R 1 Ω keâer oes meJe&mece yewšjer Skeâ yee¢e ØeeflejesOe ceW mes
From eq (I) and (II) ef JeÅegle Oeeje iegpeej keâj GmeceW T<cee GlheVe keâjves kesâ
( ne ) t
2
(10e ) 2 efueS GheueyOe nw~ Fve yewšefjÙeeW kesâ GheÙeesie mes R ceW GlheVe
= 2× ×t DeefOekeâlece Meefòeâ nw:
2R R
n2 = 400 ⇒ n = 20 (a) 3.2 W (b) 2.0 W
115. Two batteries, one of emf 18 volts and internal 8
(c) 1.28 W (d) W
resistance 2Ω and the other of emf 12 volt and 9
internal resistance 1Ω, are connected as shown. AIPMT-1990
The voltmeter V will record a reading of. Ans. (b) : According to the ques-
18 Jeesuš, Yeerlejer ØeeflejesOe 2Ω Deewj 12 Jeesuš, Yeerlejer
ØeeflejesOe 1Ω keâer oes yewefš^ÙeeW keâes efÛe$e Devegmeej peesÌ[e
ieÙee nw~ Jeesušceeršj V hej hee"Ÿeebkeâ nesiee :-

From the fig-

r1 r2
req =
r1 + r2
(a) 18 volt (b) 30 volt 1 ×1 1
(c) 14 volt (d) 15 volt = =
1+1 2
AIPMT-2005
req = 0.5Ω
Ans. (c) :
According to max power theorem
r = R = 0.5Ω
Maximum current through R is Imax-
V
I m ax =
req + R
2
=
Given E1 = 18 V E2 = 12 V 0.5 + 0.5
r1 = 2 Ω r2 = 1 Ω Imax = 2A

Physics 396 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, Pmax = I2max R
= 22 × 0.5 17.8 Kirchhoff's Rules
Pmax = 2W
118. The magnitude and direction of the current in
117. Two batteries of emf 4 V and 8 V with internal the following circuit is
resistance 1 Ω and 2 Ω are connected in a efvecveefueefKele heefjheLe ceW Oeeje keâe heefjceeCe SJeb efoMee nw
circuit with resistance of 9 Ω as shown in
figure. The current and potential difference
between the points P and Q are
oes yewš^er efpevekesâ efJe.Jee.ye. 4 V leLee 8 V SJeb Deeblejefkeâ
ØeeflejesOe 1 Ω leLee 2 Ω nw Skeâ 9 Ω kesâ yee¢e ØeeflejesOe
mes pegÌ[s nw pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw efyevog P
leLee Q kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej leLee Oeeje keâe ceeve keäÙee (a) 1.5 A from B to A through E/1.5 A, E mes neskeâj
nesiee: B mes A keâer Deesj
(b) 0.2 A from B to A through E/0.2 , E mes neskeâj B
mes A keâj Deesj
(c) 0.5 A from A to B through E/0.5 A, E mes neskeâj
A mes B keâer Deesj
5 5
(d) A from A to B through E/ A, E mes neskeâj
1 9 9
(a) A and 3 V A mes B keâer Deesj
3
1 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
(b) A and 4 V
6 Ans. (c) :
1
(c) A and 9 V
9
1
(d) A and 12 V
12
AIPMT-1988
Ans. (a) : Applying Kirchoff voltage law in the above circuit is –
−2 × i + (10 − 5) V − 1i − 7i = 0
−2i + 5V − 8i = 0
5 = 10 i
5
i=
the net potential applied to the circuit- 10
8V – 4V = 4V i = 0.5 A
The net resistance is- Hence, the current in the circuit is 0.5 A from A to B
= R + r1 + r2 through E.
=9+1+2 119. For the circuit shown in the figure, the current
= 12Ω I will be
Hence, the current in the circuit is- DeejsKe ceW oMee&S ieS efJeÅegle heefjheLe kesâ efueS Oeeje I keâe
=
4V ceeve nessiee-
12
1
= A
3
Potential difference across P and Q
V = IR
1
= ×9 (a) 0.5 A (b) 0.75 A
3 (c) 1 A (d) 1.5 A
V = 3V NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Physics 397 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): By Kirchhoff's Voltage law in a closed loop
ABCDA,
–I×4–I×1+4–I×1+2=0
– 6I + 6 = 0
I = 1A (a) 12V (b) 6V
(c) 4V (d) 2V
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Ans. (d) : From Kirchoff's second law, "Algebraic sum
of changes in the Electric potential is complete
traversal of a mesh (closed-loop) is 0."
i.e. ∑V = 0
Alternate solution-
In given circuit resistances 1Ω, 1Ω & 4Ω are in series
So, Req = 1+1+4 = 6Ω
Voltage = 2+4 = 6V Now, applying Kirchoff's loop rule into the loop
V 6 containing VB & VA
So, By Ohm's law, current I = = = 1A
R 6 ⇒ 500 I + 100I = VA
⇒ 600I = 12
120. For the circuit given below, the Kirchoff's loop ⇒ I = 2×10–2 A
rule for the loop BCDEB is given by the Q VB & R in parallel, therefore their potential
difference is same.
equation
veerÛes efoS ieS heefjheLe kesâ efueS heeMe BCDEB kesâ efueS, ⇒ VB = IR
efkeâjÛee@Heâ heeMe meceerkeâjCe nesiee- ⇒ VB = 2 × 10–2×100 = 2V
122. In the circuit shown in the figure, if the
potential at point A is taken to be zero, the
potential at point B is
efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùes heefjheLe ceW, Ùeefo efyevog A hej efJeYeJe
MetvÙe uesles nw, lees efyevog B hej efJeYeJe nw :

(a) –i2R2 + E2 + E3 + i3R1 = 0

(b) –i2R2 + E2 – E3 + i3R1 = 0
(c) i 2R 2 + E 2 – E 3 – i 3R 1 = 0
(d) i 2R 2 + E 2 + E 3 + i 3R 1 = 0
(a) +1 V (b) – 1 V
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
(c) +2 V (d) – 2 V
Ans. (c) : AIPMT (Mains)-2011
• Kirchhoff's loop rule states that sum of all electric Ans. (a) : Along the path ACDB
potential differences around a loop is zero. VB = VA + 1 V + 2×1V – 2V
• It is also sometimes called as Kirchhoff's Voltage law. VB = 0 + 1 + 2 – 2 = 1V {VA = 0}
In loop BCDEB by KVL VB = 1V
V B – i 2R 2 – E 2 + E 3 + i 3R 1 = V B
123. Consider the following two statements –
⇒ i2R2 + E2 – E3 – i3R1 = 0.
efvecve oes keâLeveeW keâes efJeÛeeefjle keâerefpeÙes –
121. In the circuit shown the cells A and B have
(A) Kirchhoff's junction law follows from the
negligible resistances. For VA = 12V, R1 = 500Ω conservation of charge/ efkeâjÛee@Heâ keâe mebefOe efveÙece :
and R = 100Ω the galvanometer (G) shows no DeeJesMe mebj#eCe keâe heeueve keâjlee nw
deflection. The value of VB is:
(B) Kirchhoff's loop law follows from the
oMee&Ùes ieÙes heefjheLe ceW oes mesuees A leLee B keâe ØeeflejesOe conservation of energy/efkeâjÛee@Heâ uethe efveÙece : Tpee&
veieCÙe nw, peye VA = 12V, R1 500Ω leLee R = 100Ω mebj#eCe keâe heeueve keâjlee nw
nw lees, iewuJesveesceeršj (G) ceW keâesF& efJe#eshe veneR neslee, lees Which of the following is correct ?
VB keâe ceeve nw~ efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee mener nQ
Physics 398 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) Both (A) and (B) are wrong (c) Conservation of electric charge
(A) Je (B) oesveeW ieuele nQ JewÅegle DeeJesMe kesâ mebj#eCe kesâ
(b) (A) is correct and (B) is wrong (d) Conservation of energy and electric charge
(A) mener nw Je (B) ieuele nw ? respectively
(c) (A) is wrong and (B) is correct ›eâceevegmeej Tpee& Deewj JewÅegle DeeJesMe kesâ mebj#eCe kesâ
(A) ieuele nw Je (B) mener nw AIPMT-2006
(d) Both (A) and (B) are correct Ans. (b) : Kirchhoff's first law, also known as
(A) Je (B) oesveeW mener nQ Kirchhoff's current law (KCL) states that the current
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 flowing into a node must be equal to current flowing out
Ans. (d): Kirchhoff's first law also known as of the node. This is a consequence of charge
Kirchhoff's junction law follows from the conservation conservation. Kirchhoff's second low, also known as
of charge. Kirchhoff's second law also known as Kirchhoff's voltage low (KVL) states that the sum of all
Kirchhoff's loop law follows from the conservation of voltages around a closed loop in any circuit must be
energy. equal to zero. This again is a consequence of charge
124. See the electrical circuit shown in this figure. conservation & also conservation of energy.
Which of the following equations is a correct 126. Kirchhoff's first law, i.e. Σ i = 0 at a junction,
equation for it ? deals with the conservation of
eqÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes JewÅegle heefjheLe kesâ mecyevOe ceW efvecve efkeâjÛee@heâ keâe ØeLece efveÙece i.e., Σ i = 0 pebkeäMeve hej
meceerkeâjCeeW ceW mes keâewve mee meceerkeâjCe mener nw? efkeâme efveÙece kesâ mebj#eCe hej DeeOeefjle nw:
(a) momentum/mebJesie
(b) angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
(c) charge/DeeJesMe
(d) energy/Tpee&
AIPMT-1997, 1992
(a) ∈1– (i1 + i2)R + i1r1 = 0 Ans. (c) : Kirchhoff's first law is based on the principle
of conservation of charge. It states that at a junction in
(b) ∈1– (i1 + i2)R – i1r1 = 0
an electrical circuit, the sum of currents flowing into the
(c) ∈2–i1r2 – ε1 – i1r1 = 0
junction is equal to the sum of currents flowing out of
(d) –∈2– (i1 + i2)R + i2r2 = 0 the junction.
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (b) :
17.9 Wheatstone Bridge, Meter
Bridge & Potentiometer
127. The emf of a cell having internal resistance 1 Ω
is balanced against a length of 330 cm on a
potentiometer wire. When an external
for loop (1) – resistance of 2Ω is connected across the cell, the
∈1 – (i1 + i2)R – i1r1 = 0 balancing length will be
for loop (2) – Skeâ efJeYeJeceeheer leej hej 330 mesceer keâer uebyeeF& kesâ
–∈1 + i1r1 – i2r2 + E2 = 0 efJeheefjle Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe 1 Ω Jeeues mesue keâe efJeÅegle
for loop (3) – Jeenkeâ yeue meblegefuele nw~ peye mesue mes 2 Ω keâe yee¢e
∈2 – (i1 + i2)R – i2r2 = 0 ØeeflejesOe peesÌ[e peelee nw, lees meblegueve uebyeeF& nesieer~
125. Kirchhoff's first and second laws for electrical
(a) 115 cm/115 mesceer (b) 332 cm/332 mesceer
circuits are consequences of:-
JewÅegle heefjheLeeW kesâ efueS efkeâjÛee@heâ kesâ henues Deewj otmejs (c) 220 cm/220 mesceer (d) 330 cm/330 mesceer
efveÙece heefjCeece nQ:- RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
(a) Conservation of energy/ Tpee& mebj#eCe kesâ Ans. (c) : Given : r1 = 1Ω
(b) Conservation of electric charge and energy r2 = 2Ω
respectively l1 =330 cm
›eâceevegmeej JewÅegle DeeJesMe Deewj Tpee& kesâ mebj#eCe kesâ l2 = l cm

Physics 399 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
for case (1)- Ans. (d): Due to no deflection on galvanometer,
potential at point C and D are same

we know that potential Gradient (K) is - 10 − 2 8 1

E i400 Ω = = = = iR
K= 1 400 400 50
l1 V 1 2
iR = R ⇒ =
E1 R 50 R
K= V / cm..........(i)
330 R = 100Ω
for case (2)- 129. The sliding contact C is at one fourth of the
length of the potentiometer wire (AB) from A
as shown in the circuit diagram. If the
resistance of the wire AB is R0 then the
potential drop (V) across the resistor R is.
efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùes ngS heefjheLe kesâ Devegmeej, meheea mheMeea
efyevog C, efyevog A mes efJeYeJeceeheer kesâ leej (AB) keâer
uecyeeF& kesâ Skeâ ÛeewLeeF& otjer hej nw~ Ùeefo leej AB keâe
ØeeflejesOe R0 nw, lees ØeeflejesOe R kesâ efmejeW hej efJeYeJeevlej
(V) nw:
The potential gradient is -
i×2 = Kl2
E1
× 2 = Kl2
3
E 2
K = 1 × .........(ii)
3 l2
On equating equation (i) and equation (ii) we get- 4V0 R 4V0 R
E1 E1 2 (a) (b)
= × 3R 0 + 16R 3R 0 + R
330 3 l2
2V0 R 2V0 R
l2 = 220 cm (c) (d)
4R 0 + R 2R 0 + 3R
128. If the galvanometer G does not show any NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
deflection in the circuit shown, the value of R is
Ans. (a) :
given by:
Ùeefo heefjheLe ceW Oeejeceeheer G keâesF& efJe#eshe veneR oMee&lee
nw, leye R keâe ceeve nesiee :

Given that:
RAB = R0
Since R ∝ l,
R0
So, RAC = R0 –
4
(a) 400Ω (b) 200 Ω 3R 0
(c) 50 Ω (d) 100 Ω RAC =
4
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Physics 400 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
R0 3R 0 (a) Do not play any significant role
Resistance R,
4
are in parallel and
4
are in series then kesâ ceeveeW keâe keâesF& meeLe&keâ cenlJe veneR nw~
(b) Should be approximately equal to 2X
R0
×R
3R kesâ ceeve ueieYeie 2X kesâ ceeve kesâ yejeyej nesves ÛeeefnS~
Req = 4 + 0 (c) Should be approximately equal and are
R0 4
+R small/kesâ ceeve ueieYeie yejeyej SJeb Úesšs nesves ÛeeefnS~
4
(d) Should be very large and unequal
R 0R 3R yengle yeÌ[s SJeb Demeceeve nesves ÛeeefnS~
= + 0
R 0 + 4R 4 NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
4R 0 R + 3R 0 ( R 0 + 4R ) Ans. (c)
=
4 ( R 0 + 4R )
R 0  4R + 3 ( R 0 + 4R ) 
=
4 ( R 0 + 4R )
R 0 (16R + 3R 0 )
=
4(R 0 + 4R)
Total current flow in the circuit is
V
I= 0 From the figure
R eq P x
=
V0 Q y
I=
R 0 (16R + 3R 0 ) P=Q⇒x=y
4 ( R 0 + 4R ) Resistance of P and Q should be approx equal as it
decreases error in experiment.
4V0 ( R 0 + 4R ) 131. In a potentiometer circuit a cell of EMF 1.5 V
I=
R 0 (16R + 3R 0 ) gives balance point at 36 cm length of wire. If
another cell of EMF 2.5 V replaces the first
The potential drop across the resistor R is –
cell, then at what length of the wire, the
R balance point occurs?
I 0 ×R
VR = 4 Skeâ efJeYeJeceeheer heefjheLe ceW 1.5 Jeesuš efJe.Jee.ye. keâer
R0
+R Skeâ mesue 36 mes.ceer. leej kesâ uecyeeF& hej meblegefuele efyevog
4 osleer nw~ Ùeefo 2.5 Jeesuš efJe.Jee.ye. Jeeueer otmejer mesue
R 0R 4V0 ( R 0 + 4R ) henueer mesue keâes ØeeflemLeeefhele keâjleer nw, lees leej kesâ efkeâme
= ×
R 0 + 4R R 0 (16R + 3R 0 ) uecyeeF& hej meblegefuele efyevog Øeehle nesiee?
4V0 R (a) 62 cm/62 mes.ceer. (b) 60 cm/60 mes.ceer.
VR = (c) 21.6 cm/21.6 mes.ceer. (d) 64 cm/64 mes.ceer.
16R + 3R 0
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
130. A wheatstone bridge is used to determine the Ans. (b) : The basic principle of the potentiometer is
value of unknown resistance X by adjusting the that the potential drop across any section of the wire
variable resistance Y as shown in the figure. will be directly proportional to the length of the wire,
For the most precise measurement of X, the provided the wire is of the uniform cross-sectional area
resistances P and Q/fÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùes Devegmeej, and a uniform current flows through the wire.
heefjJele&veMeerue ØeeflejesOe Y kesâ ceeve keâes heefjJeefle&le keâjkesâ E1 φl1
=
De%eele ØeeflejesOe X keâe ceeve %eele keâjves kesâ efueS Jnerš E 2 φl 2
mšesve mesleg keâe ØeÙeesie efkeâÙee peelee nw~ X kesâ meJee&efOekeâ 1.5 36
GheÙegòeâ ceeheve kesâ efueS ØeeflejesOeeW P SJeb Q =
2.5 l 2
⇒ l 2 = 60cm
132. A resistance wire connected in the left gap of a
meter bridge balances a 10 Ω resistance in the
right gap at a point which divides the bridge
wire in the ratio 3 : 2. If the length of the
resistance wire is 1.5 m, then the length of 1 Ω
of the resistance wire is:
Physics 401 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer ceeršj mesleg kesâ yeeSB Devlejeue ceW mebÙeesefpele keâesF& Ans. (a) : Case (I) In balanced bridge (initially)
ØeeflejesOe leej Fmekesâ oeSB Devlejeue kesâ 10 Ω ØeeflejesOe keâes P l1
=
Gme efyevog hej meblegefuele keâjlee nw pees mesleg kesâ leej keâes 3 : Q l2
2 kesâ Devegheele ceW efJeYeeefpele keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ØeeflejesOe leej
keâer uecyeeF& 1.5 m nw, lees Fme ØeeflejesOe leej keâer Jen
uecyeeF& efpemekeâe ØeeflejesOe 1 Ω nesiee, nw:
(a) 1.0 × 10–1 m (b) 1.5 × 10–1 m l1 l2
(c) 1.5 × 10–2 m (d) 1.0 × 10–2 m
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (a) : Given that, R : S = 3 :2
S = 10Ω Case (II) In balanced bridge (finally)
3 P Q
R = × 10 = 15Ω =
2 l1 l 2
P l1
=
Q l2

length of 15Ω resistance wire is 1.5m

l1 l2
1.5
∴ length of 1Ω resistance wire = = 0.1m
15
= 1×10-1m Yes the bridge will work. For a balanced condition the
133. The metre bridge shown is in balance position current drawn from the battery will be zero.
P l1 Also P ∝ l1 and Q ∝ l2 therefore the condition
with = . If we now interchange the P l1
Q l2 = will remain same after interchanging the cell
positions of galvanometer and cell, will the Q l2
bridge work? If yes, what will be balance and galvanometer.
P l1 134. A potentiometer is an accurate and versatile
condition?/oMee&S ieS ceeršj mesleg = . kesâ meeLe
Q l2 device to make electrical measurements of
MetvÙe efJe#eshe efmLeefle ceW nw~ Deye Ùeefo nce iewuJewveesceeršj E.M.F, because the method involves:
Deewj mesue keâer efmLeefleÙeeW keâer Deouee-yeoueer keâj oW lees efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue keâer JewÅegle ceehe kesâ efueÙes efJeYeJeceeheer
keäÙee Ùen ceeršj mesleg keâeÙe& keâjsiee? Ùeefo neB, lees MetvÙe Skeâ ÙeLeeLe& leLee yengcegKeer Ùegefòeâ nw, keäÙeeWefkeâ Fme efJeefOe
efJe#eshe efmLeefle keäÙee nesieer? ceW Meeefceue neslee nw:
(a) Cells/mesueeW keâe GheÙeesie
(b) Potential gradients/efJeYeJe ØeJeCelee
(c) A condition of no current flow through the
galvanometer
iewuJesveesceeršj mes Oeeje kesâ ØeJeeefnle ve nesves keâer efmLeefle
(d) A combination of cells, galvanometer and
l1 l2 resistances
P l1 P l1 mewueeW, iewuJesveesceeršj leLee ØeeflejesOeeW keâe mebÙeespeve
(a) yes, = / neB, =
Q l2 Q l2 NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
P l 2 – l1 P l 2 – l1 Ans. (c) : A potentiometer is an accurate and versatile
(b) yes, = / neB, = device to make electrical measurements of emf because
Q l 2 + l1 Q l 2 + l1
the method involves a condition of no current flow
(c) no, no null point/ veneR, keâesF& Goemeerve efyevog veneR through the galvanometer as it works on the principle of
P l2 P l2 Wheatstone Bridge. The device can be used to measure
(d) yes, = / neB, =
Q l1 Q l1 potential difference, internal resistance of a cell and
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) compare emf's of two sources.

Physics 402 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
135. A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a and the potential difference across the wire is
constant potential difference is maintained E r
across it. Two cells are connected in series first V = Ir = 0
to support one another and then in opposite r + r1
direction. The balance points are obtained at The potential gradient along the potentiometer wire is
50 cm and 10 cm from the positive end of the V E0 r
wire in the two cases. The ratio of emf's is: K= =
L (r + r1 )L
efkeâmeer efJeYeJeceeheer kesâ leej kesâ uecyeeF& 100 cm nw leLee
Fmekesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe keâesF& efveÙele efJeYeJeevlej yeveeS jKee As the unknown e.m.f. is balanced against length l of
the potentiometer wire ,
ieÙee nw~ oes mesueeW keâes ßesCeer›eâce ceW henues Skeâ otmejs keâer
E = Kl
meneÙelee keâjles ngS Deewj efHeâj Skeâ-otmejs keâer efJehejerle
Eo r l
efoMeeDeeW ceW mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Fve oesveeW ØekeâjCeeW ⇒ .
ceW MetvÙe-efJe#eshe efmLeefle leej kesâ Ieveelcekeâ efmejs mes 50 cm ( r + r1 ) L
Deewj 10 cm otjer hej Øeehle nesleer nw~ oesveeW mesueeW keâer emf 137. A potentiometer wire has length 4 m and
keâe Devegheele nw : resistance 8Ω. The resistance that must be
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 5 : 1 connected in series with the wire and an
(c) 5 : 4 (d) 3 : 4 accumulator of e.m.f. 2V, so as to get a
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 potential gradient 1 mV per cm on the wire is :
Ans. (a) : Case (1) When cell are connected in series efkeâmeer heesšsefvMeÙeesceeršj (efJeYeJeceeheer) kesâ leej keâer
E1 + E2 = K × 50 ..............(i) uecyeeF& 4 m nw Deewj Fmekeâe ØeeflejesOe 8Ω nw~ Fmemes ßesCeer
Case (II) When cell are connect opposite to each other ›eâce ceW 2V efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue keâe Skeâ mebÛeeÙekeâ mesue
E1 – E2 = K × 10 ..............(ii) leLee Skeâ ØeeflejesOekeâ peesÌ[e ieÙee nw leeefkeâ Fme leej hej
From equation (i) and (ii) efJeYeJe ØeJeCelee 1 mV Øeefle meWšerceeršj nes peeÙe~ lees, Fme
E1 + E 2 K × 50 5 ØeeflejesOekeâ keâe ØeeflejesOe nesiee
= =
E1 − E 2 K × 10 1 (a) 40Ω (b) 44Ω
E1 3 (c) 48Ω (d) 32Ω
=
E2 2 AIPMT-03.05.2015
136. A potentiometer wire of length L and a Ans.(d):
resistance r are connected in series with a
battery of e.m.f. E0 and a resistance r1. An
unknown e.m.f. E is balanced at a length l of
the potentiometer wire. The e.m.f. E will be
given by/L uecyeeF& kesâ Skeâ efJeYeJeceeheer leej leLee Skeâ
ØeeflejesOe r keâes ßesCeer ›eâce ceW, E0 F&.Sce.Sheâ. keâer Skeâ Potentiometer wire length ( l = 4m ) and Potentiometer
yewšjer leLee ØeeflejesOe r1 mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme efJeYeJeceeheer wire resistance R = 8Ω
keâer l uecyeeF& hej, efkeâmeer De%eele F&.Sce.Sheâ. E kesâ efueÙes Potential gradient =
dV
= 1mV / cm
meblegueve efyevog Øeehle neslee nw~ lees, E keâe ceeve nw : dr
LE 0 r LE 0 r So for 400 cm, ∆V = 400 ×1×10−3 = 0.4V
(a) (b) Let a resistor Rs be connected in series, so as
( r + r1 ) l lr1
V
E0r l E 0l ∆V = ×R
(c) . (d) R + Rs
( r + r1 ) L L
2
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 0.4 = ×8
8+R
Ans. (c):The current through the potentiometers wire is 16
8+ R = = 40
0.4
R = 32Ω
l 138. The resistance in the two arms of the meter
bridge are 5 Ω and R Ω, respectively. When the
resistance R is shunted with an equal
E0 resistance, the new balance point is at 1.6 l1.
I=
( r + r1 ) The resistance 'R' is:-

Physics 403 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer ceeršj-mesleg keâer oes YegpeeDeeW keâe ØeeflejesOe 5 Ω Deewj 139. A potentiometer circuit has been set up for
R Ω, nw~ peye ØeeflejesOe R mes meceeblej (heeÕe&) ›eâce ceW R finding the internal resistance of a given cell.
The main battery, used across the
Deesce keâe Skeâ DevÙe ØeeflejesOe (Mebš) ueiee efoÙee peelee nw potentiometer wire, has an emf of 2.0 V and a
lees veÙee meblegueve efyebog 1.6 l1 hej Øeehle neslee nw~ ØeeflejesOe negligible internal resistance. The
'R' keâe ceeve nesiee:- potentiometer wire itself is 4m long. When the
resistance R, connected across the given cell,
has values of.
efkeâmeer efoÙes ieÙes mesue keâe Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe %eele keâjves
kesâ efueÙes ØeÙegòeâ Skeâ efJeYeJeceeheer kesâ leej keâer uecyeeF& 4m
nw Deewj Fmekesâ efmejeW mes pegÌ[er cegKÙe yewšjer keâe efJeÅegle
Jeenkeâ yeue (F.Sce.Sheâ) 2.0 V nw~ yewšjer keâe Deebleefjkeâ
(a) 10 Ω (b) 15 Ω ØeeflejesOe veieCÙe nw~ efoÙes ieÙes mesue kesâ efmejeW hej peesÌ[s ieÙes
(c) 20 Ω (d) 25 Ω ØeeflejesOekeâ R keâe ØeeflejesOe
AIPMT-06.05.2014 (i) infinity/Devevle (ii) 9.5Ω
Ans. (b) : Case- I The balancing lengths, on the potentiometer
wire are found to be 3 m and 2.85 m,
respectively. The value of internal resistance of
the cell is
jKeves hej efJeYeJeceeheer keâer ‘meblegueve uecyeeFÙeeB’ ›eâceMe: 3
m leLee 2.85 m nQ~
lees, mesue keâe Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe nesiee:
At balance point (a) 0.25Ω (b) 0.95Ω
5 l1 (c) 0.5Ω (d) 0.75Ω
= ––––––– (i)
R 100 − l1 AIPMT-06.05.2014
Case- II Ans. (c) : This internal resistance of the cell is
When R is shunted with an equal resistance R, shunt l 
placed parallel to R R ' =  1 − 1 R
 l2 
where, l1 = 3m, l2 = 2.85m
R = 9.5Ω
 3 
∴ R'= − 1 9.5
 2.85 
0.15
R'= × 9.5 = 0.5Ω
2.85
At balance point 140. The resistances of the four arms P, Q, R and S
5 1.6l1 in a Wheatstone's bridge are 10 ohm, 30 ohm,
= ––––––– (ii) 30 ohm and 90 ohm, respectively. The e.m.f.
R / 2 100 − 1.6l1
and internal resistance of the cell are 7 volt and
Divide eqn. (i) by eqn. (ii), we get 5 ohm respectively. If the galvanometer
1 100 − 1.6l1 resistance is 50 ohm, the current drawn from
=
2 1.6 (100 − l1 ) the cell will be :-
efkeâmeer Jneršmšesve efyeÇpe (mesleg) keâer Ûeej YegpeeDeeW P, Q,
160 – 1.6l1 = 200 – 3.2l1
R leLee S kesâ ØeeflejesOe ›eâceMe: 10Ω, 30Ω, 30Ω leLee
1.6l1 = 40
90Ω nQ~ pegÌ[s mesue keâe F&.Sce.Sheâ. (e.m.f.) 7 Jeesuš
40
or l1 = = 25cm leLee Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe 5Ω nw~ Ùeefo iewuJesveesceeršj keâe
1.6
Substituting this value in eqn. (i) we get
ØeeflejesOe 50Ω nw lees mesue Éeje ØeJeeefnle efJeÅegle Oeeje keâe
5 25
ceeve nesiee-
= (a) 2.0 A (b) 1.0 A
R 75
(c) 0.2 A (d) 0.1 A
R = 15Ω
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013

Physics 404 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c):

(a) k (l2 – l1) and kl2 (b) kl1 and k (l2 – l1)
Resistance on the left side of the galvanometer (c) k (l2 – l1) and kl1 (d) kl1 and kl2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
R1 = 10 + 30
Ans. (b): In the given circuital diagram,
= 40Ω When 1 and 2 are connected only R will be in circuit,
Resistance on the right side of the galvanometer iR = k l 1
R 2 = 30 + 90
1.R = k l 1
=120Ω R = k l 1 ……..(i)
Now R1 & R2 in parallel the net effective resistance
When 1 and 3 are connected then R and X will be in
1 1 1 circuit,
= +
R eff 40 120 i(R+X) = k l 2
1 120 + 40 (R + X) = k l 2
=
R eff 40 × 120 from (i)
4800 k l1 + X = k l 2
R eff = = 30Ω
160 X = k(l 2 - l1 )
∈ 142. A cell can be balanced against 110 cm and 100
Current drawn I=
R eff + r cm of potentiometer wire, respectively with and
without being short circuited through a
7 resistance of 10 Ω. Its internal resistance is –
=
30 + 5 Skeâ mewue keâe heesšQefMeÙeesceeršj leej kesâ 110 meW. ceer. Deewj
1
I = = 0.2A 100 meW. ceer. kesâ Øeefle ›eâceevegmeej 10 Ω kesâ ØeeflejesOe mes
5 Mebefšle Deewj ve Mebefšle DeJemLee ceW meblegefuele efkeâÙee pee
141. A potentiometer circuit is set up as shown. The mekeâlee nw~ mewue keâe Deebleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOe nesiee:-
potential gradient across the potentiometer (a) 2.0 ohm/2.0 Deesce (b) zero/ MetvÙe
wire is k volt/cm and the Ammeter present in (c) 1.0 ohm/1.0 Deesce (d) 0.5 ohm/0.5 Deesce
the circuit reads 1.0 A when two way key is
switched off. The balance points when the key AIPMT-2008
between the terminals (i) 1 and 2 (ii) 1 and 3, is Ans. (c) : Given
plugged in are found to be at lengths l 1 cm and
l 2 cm respectively. The magnitudes of the
resistors R and X in ohms are then equal
respectively to–
l = 110 cm (with short circuit)
1
Skeâ efJeYeJeceeheer keâes veerÛes oMee&Ùes Devegmeej mebÙeesefpele l2 = 100 cm (without short circuit)
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ efJeYeJeceeheer leej kesâ efmejeW kesâ ceOÙe efJeYeJe R = 10Ω
ØeJeCelee k volt/cm nw Je peye efÉ ceeieea kegbâpeer keâe efmJeÛe Let E is the emf of cell and V is potential difference
Dee@Heâ efkeâÙee peelee nw heefjheLe ceW ueiee Deceeršj 1.0 A across terminal.
hee"dÙeebkeâ oslee nw~ kegbâpeer keâes šefce&veueeW (i) 1 Je 2 (ii) 1 Je E l1
=
3 kesâ ceOÙe ueieeves hej mevlegueve uecyeeF& ›eâceMe: l1cm Je V l2
l2 cm Øeehle nesleer nw, lees ØeeflejesOe R Je X kesâ heefjceeCe, I ( R + r ) 110
Deesce cesW ›eâceMe: yejeyej nw – =
IR 100
Physics 405 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r 11 144. For the network shown in the figure the value
1+ = of the current i is –
R 10
r 1
= ⇒ r = 0.1 R
R 10
r = 0.1× 10 = 1Ω
143. In the circuit shown, if a conducting wire is
connected between points A and B, the current
in this wire will-/efÛe$e ceW efoKeeS ieS heefjheLe, ceW Ùeefo
Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ leej Éeje A Deewj B efyevogDeeW keâes peesÌ[e
peeS, lees Fme leej ceW ØeJeeefnle Oeeje- efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes Ûeeuekeâ kesâ Devegmeej Oeeje i nesieer-
18V 5V
(a) (b)
5 9
9V 5V
(c) (d)
35 18
AIPMT-2005
Ans. (d) :
(a) Flow from A to B/A mes B keâes Ûeuesieer
(b) Flow in the direction which will be decided
by the value of V/keâer Ûeueve efoMee keâe efveCe&Ùe V keâe
ceeve keâjsiee
(c) Be zero/MegvÙe nesieer
(d) Flow from B to A/B mes A keâes Ûeuesieer
AIPMT-2006
Ans. (d) :

The circuit given resembles the balanced Wheatstone

4 2
bridge as =
6 3
Thus middle arm containing 4Ω resistance will be
ineffective and no current flows through it.
Net resistance in upper arm i.e. AB & BC
R' = 4 + 2 = 6Ω
The current passes through
Net resistance in lower arm i.e. AD & DC
V V V
PAQ I1 = = = amp R = 6 +3 = 9Ω
R 4+4 8 Thus parallel combination of R' and R gives
Potential difference between P and A = VP–VA
R '× R 6 × 9 54 18
V V R= = = = Ω
= × 4 = volt R '+ R 6 + 9 15 5
8 2
The current passes through V V
Hence current, i = =
V V V R 18 / 5
PBQ I2 = = = amp
R 1+ 3 4 5V
Potential difference between P and B = VP–VB ⇒ i=
18
V V
= × 1 = volt 145. Five equal resistances each of resistance R are
4 4
connected as shown in the Figure. A battery of
Potential difference between A and B = VA –VB
V volts is connected between A and B. The
= (VP–VB) –(VP–VA)
current flowing in AFCEB will be
V V V
= – =– ØelÙeskeâ R ØeeflejesOe kesâ heeBÛe meceeve ØeeflejesOeeW keâes efÛe$e
4 2 4
⇒ VA –VB < 0
Devegmeej JÙeJeefmLele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Skeâ V Jeesuš keâer
From the above we can clearly say VB> VA so current yewšjer A Deewj B peesÌ[er peeleer nw~ AFCEB heLe ceW
flows from higher potential to lower potential i.e., B to A. ØeJeeefnle Oeeje keâe ceeve nesiee :-
Physics 406 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
In Wheatstone's bridge the resistance of galvanometer
can be neglected.
So, resistance of arm ABC, R1 = R + R = 2R
resistance of arm ADC, R2 = R + R
= 2R
Resistance between A and C are parallel-
(a) V/R (b) V/2R 1 1 1
= +
(c) 2V/R (d) 3V/R R P R1 R 2
AIPMT-2004
1 1 1
Ans. (b) : = +
R P 2R 2R
1 2
=
R P 2R
RP = R
147. If specific resistance of a potentiometer wire is
10–7Ωm and current flow through it is 0.1 A,
cross-sectional area of wire is 10–6 m2 then
Balance wheat stone bridge potential gradient will be : -
R FC R DF Ùeefo efJeYeJeceeheer kesâ leej keâe efJeefMe° ØeeflejesOe 10–7Ωm
= =1
R EC R DE nw #es$eheâue 10–6 m2 nw, Oeeje 0.1 A nw, lees efJeYeJe
ØeJeCelee nesieer-
(a) 10–2 V/m (b) 10–4 V/m
(c) 10–6 V/m (d) 10–8 V/m
AIPMT-2001
2R × 2R
Re q = Ans. (a) : Given–
2R + 2R Specific resistance of a potentiometer, ρ = 10–7 Ω
Req= R
Current in AFCEB, Cross-sectional area, A = 10–6m2
I V Current, I = 0.1A
i = and I =
2 R l
Now, Resistance of Potentiometer wire R = ρ
The current flowing in upper of AFCEB A
V Potential difference across wire V= IR
⇒ i=
2R V IR Iρ l
∴ Potential gradient = = =
146. In a Wheatstone's bridge all the four arms have l l Al
equal resistance R. If the resistance of the V Iρ 0.1×10-7
galvanometer arm is also R, the equivalent ⇒ = =
resistance of the combination as seen by the l A 10–6
battery is:/Skeâ Jneršmšesve mesleg keâer meYeer ÛeejeW V -2 V
YegpeeDeeW ceW meceeve ØeeflejesOe R nw~ Ùeefo iewuJesveesceeršj keâer ⇒ l = 0.01 = 10 m
Yegpee keâe ØeeflejesOe Yeer R nes, leye yewšjer Éeje osKeW ieS 148. The resistance of each arm of the wheat stone
mebÙeespeve keâe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe nw: bridge is 10 ohm. A resistance of 10 ohm is
(a) R/4 (b) R/2 connected in series with galvanometer then the
(c) R (d) 2R equivalent resistance across the battery will be:
AIPMT-2003 Jnerue mšesve mesleg keâer ØelÙeskeâ Yegpee keâe ØeeflejesOe10Ω nw~
Ans. (c):
iewuJesveesceeršj kesâ meeLe 10Ω keâe ØeeflejesOe ßesCeer›eâce ceW
nQ, lees yewšjer kesâ efmejeW kesâ ceOÙe leguÙe ØeeflejesOe nesiee-
(a) 10 ohm/ 10Ω (b) 15 ohm/ 15Ω
(c) 20 ohm/ 20Ω (d) 40 ohm/ 40Ω
AIPMT-2001
Physics 407 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Ans. (d):

Given, P =Q = R = S = 10 Ω
P S
Q = = 1 ⇒ Given Wheatstone bridge is balanced.
Q R
Therefore, no current pass through galvanometer All
arm resistances are equal, so its equivalent resistance is
also 10Ω.
149. The potentiometer is best for measuring Equivalent circuit in wheatstone bridge-
voltage, as:/Jeesušspe keâes ceeheves kesâ efueS efJeYeJeceeheer R' = R1 + R2 = 2 + 2 = 4Ω
meyemes GheÙegòeâ nw keäÙeeWefkeâ – R" = R3 + R4 = 2 + 2 = 4Ω
1 1 1 1 1
(a) It has a sensitive galvanometer = + = +
R e q R' R" 4 4
Ùen meg«eener Oeejeceeheer jKelee nw~
(b) It has wire of high resistance R e q = 2Ω
Ùen GÛÛe ØeeflejesOe keâe leej jKelee nw~
(c) It measures p.d. like in closed circuit
Ùen yevo heefjheLe ceW efJeYeJeevlej ceehelee nw~ 17.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems
(d) It measures p.d. like in open circuit 151. Consider a current carrying wire (current I) in
Ùen Kegues heefjheLe ceW efJeYeJeevlej ceehelee nw~ the shape of a circle. Note that as the current
AIPMT-2000 progresses along the wire, the direction of
r
Ans. (d) : Potentiometer measures voltage when J (current density) changes in an exact
galvanometer shows zero current rating, mean it takes manner, while the current I remaining
zero current (open circuit) while measuring voltage unaffected. The agent that is essentially
across any component, that is why, it is more accurate responsible for it is–
as all current passing through that component only. Je=òe keâer Deeke=âefle kesâ efkeâmeer OeejeJeener leej (Oeeje I) hej
∴ Potentiometer is best for measuring voltage as it efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~ OÙeeve oerefpeS pewmes-pewmes leej kesâ
r
measures p.d. like in open circuit. DevegefoMe Oeeje efJekeâefmele nesleer nw, J (Oeeje IevelJe) keâer
150. In the network shown in the figure, each of the efoMee ÙeLeeLe& {bie mes heefjJeefle&le nesleer nw, peyeefkeâ Oeeje I
resistance is equal to 2Ω. The resistance
DeØeYeeefJele jnleer nw~ Fmekesâ efueS DeefveJeeÙe& ™he mes
between the points A and B is
GòejoeÙeer Sspesvš nw–
efÛe$e ceW oMee&S ieS vesšJeke&â ceW ØelÙeskeâ ØeeflejesOe 2 Ω kesâ
(a) source of e.m.f./œeesle keâe efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue
yejeyej nw~ efyevog A Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe ØeeflejesOe nw:
(b) electric field produced by charges
accumulated on the surface of wire./leej kesâ he=‰
hej mebefÛele DeeJesMeeW Éeje Glhevve efJeÅegle #es$e
(c) the charges just behind a given segment of
wire which push them just right way by
repulsion./leej kesâ efoS ieS KeC[ kesâ "erkeâ heerÚs kesâ
(a) 3 Ω (b) 4 Ω DeeJesMe pees Øeeflekeâ<e&Ce Éeje DeeJesMeeW keâes cee$e mener {bie mes
(c) 1 Ω (d) 2 Ω Oekesâueles nQ~
AIPMT-1995 (d) the charges ahead./Deeies kesâ DeeJesMe
Physics 408 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
I r1.r2
Ans. (b): (i) Current per unit area, J = , is called ∴ req =
A r1 + r2
→
current density & is denoted by J . εeq ε1 ε 2
Also, = +
A req r1 r2
(ii) The SI units of current density are 2 . Current
m ε ε 
ur ⇒ εeq = req  1 + 2 
density is also directed along E & which is also a
→
 r1 r2 
vector quantity & relationship is given by, J = sE Now, put the value of req,
→
J Changes due to electric field produced by charges ε1r2 + ε 2 r1
⇒ εeq =
accumulated on the surface of wire. r1 + r2
Note- That as current progresses along the wire, the ⇒Equivalent emf 'εeq' of two cell is between ε1 & ε2
direction of J (current density) changes in an exact
This shows that whatever may be the values of r1 and r2,
manner, while the current I remain unaffected. The
agent that is essentially responsible for this. the value of εeq is in between ε1 and ε2. As ε2 > ε1, So ε1
< εeq < ε2.
152. Two batteries of emf ε1 and ε2(ε2 > ε1) and
internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively are 153. A resistance R is to be measured using a meter
connected in parallel as shown in figure./oes bridge. Student chooses the standard resistance
S to be 100 Ω. He find the null point at l1 = 2.9
yewšefjÙeeB efpevekesâ emf ε1 leLee ε2(ε2 > ε1) leLee Deevleefjkeâ
cm. He is told to attempt to improve the
ØeeflejesOe ›eâceMe: r1 leLee r2 nQ, efÛe$e 3.1 ceW oMee&S accuracy. Which of the following is a useful
Devegmeej heeMJe& ›eâce ceW mebÙeesefpele nQ~ way?/ceeršj mesleg kesâ GheÙeesie Éeje ØeeflejesOe R ceehee
peevee nw~ Skeâ Úe$e ceevekeâ ØeeflejesOe S keâe ÛeÙeve
100Ω keâjlee nw~ Jen MetvÙe efJe#eshe efyevog l1 = 2.9 cm
hej heelee nw~ Gmes heeefjMegælee ceW megOeej kesâ efueS ØeÙelve
keâjves keâes keâne peelee nw~ Fmekesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele ceW
keâewve GheÙeesieer {bie nw?
(a) The equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is (a) He should measure l1 more accurately./Gmes l1
between ε1 and ε2, i.e., ε1 < εeq < ε2./oesveeW mesueeW keâes Deewj DeefOekeâ heefjMegælee mes ceehevee ÛeeefnS~
keâe leguÙe emf εleguÙe,ε1 leLee ε2 kesâ yeerÛe DeLee&led ε1 < ε (b) He should change S to 1000 Ω and repeat the
leguÙe < ε2 nw~ experiment./Gmes S keâes 1000Ω ceW ueskeâj ØeÙeesie
(b) The equivalent emf εeq is smaller than ε1./leguÙe oesnjevee ÛeeefnS~
emf εleguÙe mes Úesše nw~
(c) He should change S to 3Ω and repeal the
(c) The εeq is given by εeq = ε1 + ε2 always./εleguÙe experiment./Gmes S keâes 3Ω ceW ueskeâj ØeÙeesie oesnjevee
efoÙee ngDee meowJe εleguÙe ε1+ ε2 neslee nw~ ÛeeefnS~
(d) εeq is independent of internal resistances r1 (d) He should give up hope of a more accurate
and r2. εleguÙe Deevleefjkeâ ØeeflejesOeeW r1 leLee r2 hej efveYe&j measurement with a meter bridge./Gmes ceeršj
veneR nw~ mesleg kesâ GheÙeesie Éeje DeefOekeâ heefjMegæ ceehe keâer DeeMee
Ans. (a) : Q ε2 > ε1. ÚesÌ[ osveer ÛeeefnS~
Ans. (c) : Given :
Standard Resistance 'S' = 100 Ω
Null point, l1 = 2.9 cm
As the meter bridge balanced, it can be written:
l1 R
=
100 – l1 S
Given internal Resistance, r1 & r2 are connected in
2.9 R
parallel. The equivalent internal resistance of two cells ⇒ =
1 1 1 r1 + r2 100 – 2.9 100
between A and B is = + = ⇒ R = 3Ω
req r1 r2 r1r2
Physics 409 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, to increase the accuracy of meter bridge, the null (a) maximum when the battery is connected across
point. should be found near the middle of meter bridge 1
1 cm × cm faces./leye DeefOekeâlece nesiee peye yewšjer
wire, length of both the known & unknown resistance 2
shall be nearly equal. 1
1 cm × cm heâuekeâeW kesâ yeerÛe mebÙeesefpele nw~
R 1 2
∴ =
S 1 (b) maximum when the battery is connected
across 10 cm × 1 cm faces./leye DeefOekeâlece nesiee peye
⇒ S = R = 3Ω
1
The meter bridge is of the same order. yewšjer 10cm × cm heâuekeâeW kesâ yeerÛe mebÙeesefpele nw~
2
Therefore, to improve the accuracy, students should (c) maximum when the battery is connected
change S to 3Ω & repeat the experiment. 1
154. Two cells of emf's approximately 5 V and 10 V across 10 cm × cm faces./leye DeefOekeâlece nesiee
2
are to be accurately compared using a peye yewšjer heâuekeâeW kesâ yeerÛe mebÙeesefpele nw~
potentiometer of length 400 cm./ 5 V leLee 10 V (d) same irrespective of the three faces./meceeve jnsiee
meefvvekeâš emf kesâ oes mesueeW keâer leguevee heefjMegæ ™he mes Ûeens leerveeW heâuekeâeW ceW mes efkeâmeer kesâ yeerÛe Yeer yewšjer keâes
400cm uecyeeF& kesâ efJeYeJeceeheer Éeje keâer peeveer nw~ mebÙeesefpele keâjW~
(a) The battery that runs the potentiometers Ans. (a) : Length of rod = 10 cm
should have voltage of 8 V./efJeYeJeceeheer ceW GheÙeesie 1
Rectangular cross - section = 1 × cm
nesves Jeeueer yewšjer keâer Jeesušlee 8V nesveer ÛeeefnS~ 2
(b) The battery of potentiometer can have a ρl 1
voltage of 15 V and R and adjusted so that the Q Re sistance , R = ⇒ R ∝ l and R ∝
A A
potential drop across the wire slightly exceeds For maximum resistance, area should be minimum & 'l'
10 V./efJeYeJeceeheer keâer Jeesušlee 15V nes mekeâleer nw leLee should be maximum.
R keâes Fme Øekeâej meceeÙeesefpele keâj mekeâles nQ efkeâ leej kesâ So, option (a) will give minimum area
efmejeW hej efJeYeJeheele 10V mes LeesÌ[e DeefOekeâ nes~ Hence, it is possible only when the battery is connected
1
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself across 1cm × cm (area of cross - section A).
should have a potential drop of 10 V./mJeÙeb leej 2
kesâ henues 50cm Yeeie hej efJeYeJeheele 10V nesvee 156. Which of the following characteristics of
electrons determines the current in a
ÛeeefnS~ conductor?/ Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe keâewve-mee DeefYeue#eCe
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing Ûeeuekeâ ceW Oeeje kesâ ØeJeen keâes efveOee&efjle keâjlee nw?
resistances and not voltages./efJeYeJeceeheer keâe (a) Drift velocity alone/kesâJeue DeheJeen Jesie
GheÙeesie ØeeÙe: ØeeflejesOe keâer leguevee kesâ efueS efkeâÙee peelee (b) Thermal velocity alone/kesâJeue leeheerÙe Jesie
nw, efJeYeJeeW kesâ efueS veneR~ (c) Both drift velocity and thermal;
Ans. (b) : Given emf's of Z cell : 5V & 10V velocity/DeheJeen Jesie leLee leeheerÙe Jesie oesveeW
Since, In a potentiometer experiment, the emf of a cell (d) Neither drift nor thermal velocity/ve lees DeheJeen
can be measured, if the potential drop along the Deewj ve leeheerÙe Jesie
potentiometer wire is more than the emf of the cell to be Ans. (a) : Drift velocity is the average velocity attained
determined. Here values of emfs of two cells are given by charged particles (electrons) in a material due to an
as 5V and 10V. electric field.
Therefore, potential drop along potentiometer wire must • Drift velocity of electrons determines the current in
be more than 10V. conductor.
So, Battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 15V • The relation between current and drift speed is given
and R & adjusted so that potential drop across wire by I = neAvd
slightly exceeds 10V. Here I is the current and vd is the drift velocity
155. A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular So, I ∝ vd
1 e = charge on each electrons.
cross-section of 1 cm × cm is connected to a n = no. of free electrons,
2
A = cross sectional area,
battery across opposite faces. The resistance
Thus, only drift velocity determines the current in a
1
will be/DeeÙeleekeâej DevegØemLekeâeš 1 cm × cm leLee conductor.
2 Drift velocity determines the current in conductor.
10 cm uecyeeF& keâer keâesF& Oeeleg keâer ÚÌ[ efJehejerle heâuekeâeW • Drift velocity is the average velocity with which
hej efkeâmeer yewšjer mes mebÙeesefpele nw~ Fmekeâe ØeeflejesOe electrons 'drift' in the presence of a electric field.

Physics 410 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
18.
Moving Charges and Magnestism
L uebyeeF& kesâ Skeâ leej ceW I Oeeje x- De#e keâer Oeveelcekeâ
18.1 Magnetic Force efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Fmes Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe
r
1. A long straight wire of length 2 m and mass 250
#es$e B = ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ - 4kˆ ) T ceW jKee peelee nw~ leej hej
g is suspended horizontally in a uniform keâeÙe&jle ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeue keâe heefjceeCe nw :
horizontal magnetic field of 0.7T. The amount
of current flowing through the wire will be (g = (a) 3IL (b) 3 IL
9.8ms-2) (c) 5 IL (d) 5 IL
2 ceeršj uecyeeF& Deewj 250 «eece õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
uebyee meerOee leej Skeâ meceeve #eweflepe ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e 0.7 Ans. (d) : Given that: A wire carrying a current I along
T ceW #eweflepe ™he mes efveuebefyele nw~ leej kesâ ceeOÙece mes the +ve x-axis –
yenves Jeeueer Oeeje keâer cee$ee nesieer (g = 9.8 ms–2)
(a) 2.75 A (b) 1.75 A
(c) 2.45 A (d) 2.25A
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
Ans. (b) : Given: L = 2 m
m = 250 g The magnetic force act on the wire is –
r r r
B = 0.7T F = Il × B
g = 9.8 m/s2 = I  Liˆ × 2iˆ + 3jˆ − 4kˆ 
  ( ) ( )
= I  4j + 3k  L
ˆ ˆ
 
r
F = IL 16 + 9
r
F = 5I L
3. In the product/iegCeveHeâue ceW
ur r ur
From the fig- (
F = q v×B )
F = mg ........(i) r
We know that current on straight wire of length L is -
r r (
= qv × Bi$ + Bj$ + B k$ 0 )
F = I (L × B) r
For q = 1 and/leLee v = 2i$ + 4j$ + 6k$ and/leLee
F = ILBsin θ ur
F = ILB .......(ii) (θ =90o) F = 4i$ − 20j$ + 12k$ /kesâ efueS
ur
On equating equation (i) and equation (ii) we get- What will be the complete expression for B ?
ILB = mg ur
/ B keâe mechetCe& JÙebpekeâ keäÙee nesiee?
mg
I= (a) 6i$ + 6$j − 8k$ (b) −8i$ − 8j$ − 6k$
LB
250 × 10 −3 × 9.8 (c) −6i$ − 6j$ − 8k$ (d) 8i$ + 8j$ − 6k$
=
2 × 0.7 NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
I = 1.75 A Ans. (c) : Given-
2. A wire carrying a current I along the positive r
F = 4i$ − 20$j + 12k$
x-axis has length L. It is kept in a magnetic r
ur
( )
field B = 2i$ + 3j$ - 4k$ T. The magnitude of the v = 2i$ + 4$j + 6k$ & q = 1
r r ur
magnetic force acting on the wire is : F = q ( v × B ) , since q = 1

Physics 411 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ˆi ˆj 5. A square loop ABCD carrying a current i, is
kˆ
r r ur placed near and coplanar with a long straight
F = v×B = 2 4 6 conductor XY carrying a current I, the net
B B B0 force on the loop will be:
r keâesF& Jeiee&keâej heeMe (uethe) ABCD efpememes Oeeje i
F = ˆi ( 4B0 – 6B ) – ˆj ( 2B0 – 6B ) – 2Bkˆ = 4iˆ – 20ˆj + 12kˆ
ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw, efkeâmeer uecyes meerOes Ûeeuekeâ XY
Comparing ˆi, ˆj and kˆ coefficients efpememes Oeeje I ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw kesâ efvekeâš Skeâ ner leue
–2B = 12 ceW jKee nw~ Fme heeMe hej ueieves Jeeuee vesš yeue nesiee :
B = –6
4B0 – 6B = 4
B0 = –8
r
B = –6iˆ – 6ˆj – 8kˆ
4. An infinitely long straight conductor carries a
current of 5 A as shown. An electron is moving
with a speed of 105 m/s parallel to the conductor.
The perpendicular distance between the electron µ 0 IiL 2µ 0 Ii
(a) (b)
and the conductor is 20 cm at an instant. 2π 3π
Calculate the magnitude of the force experienced µ Ii 2µ 0 IiL
by the electron at that instant. (c) 0 (d)
efoKeeS ieÙes Deveble uecyeeF& kesâ Ûeeuekeâ ceW 5 SefcheÙej keâer 2π 3π
Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Ûeeuekeâ kesâ meceevlej Skeâ NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Fueskeäš^e@ve 105 ceer./mes. kesâ Ûeeue mes ieefle keâjlee nw~ Skeâ Ans. (b) : Given A square loop carrying a current i and
#eCe hej Fueskeäš^e@ve leLee Ûeeuekeâ kesâ yeerÛe uecyeJeled otjer conductor carrying a current I.
20 mes.ceer. nw~ Gme #eCe hej Fueskeäš^e@ve Éeje DevegYeJe efkeâÙes
peeves Jeeues yeue kesâ heefjceeCe keâer ieCevee keâerefpeS~

FBC Cancels FAD Since they are perpendicular to the

(a) 8 × 10–20 N/vÙetšve (b) 4 × 10–20 N/vÙetšve given conductor
(c) 8π × 10–20 N/vÙetšve (d) 4π × 10–20 N/vÙetšve We know magnetic field at distance r from long wire is
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 µI
given by B = 0 and force on loop due to B is given
Ans. (a): 2πr
by F = BiL
Hence force on AB is given by,
µ 0 IiL
FAB = ...............(i)
2π(L / 2)
µ0 IiL
Lorentz force is used to calculate the force experienced FCD = ............(ii)
 3L 
by an electron or charge q moving with velocity v in an 2π  
applied magnetic field B.  2 
r r µ0 IiL
F = q(v × B)
FCD =
µ0I  3L 
B= 2π  
2 πr  2 
r
| F |= qvB Therefore net force on the loop ABCD will be
Floop = FAB – FCD
µ I
F = ev  0  µ IiL  1 1 
 2πr  Floop = 0  − 
2π  (L / 2) (3L / 2) 
1.6 × 10 –19 × 105 × 2 × 10 –7 × 5
F= 2µ 0 Ii
0.2 Floop =
F= 8×10–20 Newton 3π

Physics 412 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
6. A circular coil ABCD carrying a current i is 8. A current carrying closed loop in the form of a
placed in a uniform magnetic field. If the right angle isosceles triangle ABC is placed in a
r
magnetic force on the segment AB is F, the uniform magnetic field acting along AB. If the
ur
force on the remaining segment BCDA is magnetic force on the arm BC is F , the force
i Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâjves Jeeueer Skeâ Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer on the arm AC is : /mecekeâesCe meceefÉyeeng ef$eYegpe kesâ
ABCD keâes Skeâ meceeve ÛebgyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee ieÙee ns~ Deekeâej kesâ Skeâ yebo heeMe ABC ceW efJeÅegle Oeeje ØeJeeefnle
Ùeefo Keb[ AB hej ÛegbyekeâerÙe yeue F nw, lees Mes<e Keb[ nes jner nw~ Fmes efkeâmeer Skeâ meceeve AB efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe
BCDA hej yeue nw~
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo Yegpee BC hej
ur
ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeue F keâes, leye Yegpee AC hej yeue nesiee :

r r r r
(a) F (b) −F (a) 2 F (b) – 2 F
r r r r
(c) 3F (d) −3F (c) –F (d) F
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Ans. (b) : Net magnetic force on a current loop of any
shape in a uniform magnetic field is always zero.
r r Ans. (c) :
Fnet = FAB + FBCDA = 0
r r
FBCDA = −FAB = −F r
Given, FBC = F
7. A long straight wire carries a certain current
The force on AB will be zero as field and current are in
Weber
and produces a magnetic field 2 × 10 −4 the same direction.
r
m2
∴ FBA = 0
at a perpendicular distance of 5 cm from the
wire. An electron situated at 5 cm from the As we know that, net force on a closed loop (of any
wire moves with a velocity 107 m/s towards the shape) due to external magnetic field is zero. So,
r r r
wire along perpendicular to it. The force FBA + FAC + FCB = 0
experienced by the electron will be (charge on r r r
electron 1.6 × 10 −19 C) FAC + FCB = 0 (Q FBA = 0)
r r r
Skeâ uecyee meerOee leej Skeâ efveef§ele Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâjlee ∴ FAC = − FCB = −F
nw Deewj 5 mesceer uebyeJeled otjer hej Skeâ ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e 9. A square current carrying loop is suspended in
Weber GlheVe keâjlee nw~ leej mes 5 mesceer otjer a uniform magnetic field acting in the plane of
2 × 10 −4 the loop. If the force on one arm of the loop
m2 r
hej efmLele Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve leej kesâ uebyeJeled efoMee ceW 107 is F , the net force on remaining three arms of
the loop is-
ceer./mes. kesâ Jesie mes ieefle keâjlee nw~ Fueskeäš^e@ve Éeje Skeâ Jeiee&keâej OeejeJeener uethe keâes mece™he ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
DevegYeJe efkeâÙee peeves Jeeuee yeue nesiee (Fueskeäš^e@ve hej pees uethe kesâ leue ceW keâeÙe&jle nw ceW efveueefcyele efkeâÙee ieÙee
DeeJesMe 1.6 × 10 −19 C) r
F nw~ Ùeefo uethe keâer Skeâ Yegpee hej keâeÙe&jle yeue F nw, lees
(a) Zero (b) 3.2 N
−16
uethe keâer Mes<e leerve YegpeeDeeW hej kegâue yeue nw –
(c) 3.2 × 10 N (d) 1.6 × 10−16 N
(a) 3F (b) −F
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Ans. (c) : F = qv B sin θ , θ = 90° (c) – 3F (d) F
F = magnetic force AIPMT (Screening)-2010
q = Charge = 1.6×10–19 Ans. (b) : When a current carrying loop is placed in a
7
v= Velocity = 10 m/s magnetic field the coil experience a Torque given by
–4
B = magnetic field = 2× 10 wb/m 2 τ = NBiA sinθ.
–19 7
F = 1.6×10 × 10 × 2 × 10 –4 Torque will be maximum when θ = 90°
F = 3.2 × 10–16 N τ = NBiA

Physics 413 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Deewj F3 ef›eâÙeekeâejer neW Deewj Ùen keâeiepe he=‰ kesâ leue ceW
mebkesâeflele efoMeeDeeW ceW neW, lees Yeeie QP hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer
yeue nesiee-

Forces F1 and F2 acting on the coil are equal in

magnitude and opposite in direction. As the force F1 and
F2 have the same line of action their resultant effect on
the coil is zero. The two forces F3 and F4 are equal in
(a) ( F3 − F1 ) − F22
2
magnitude and opposite in direction. Two force have (b) F3 – F1 – F2
different line of action they constitute a torque. Thus the
r
(d) ( F3 − F1 ) + F22
2
force on the arm of the loop is F , the net force on the (c) F3 – F1 – F2
remaining three arms of loop is – F. AIPMT-2008
10. The magnetic force acting on a charged Ans. (d) : Force on current carrying conductor
particle of charge – 2μC in a magnetic field of r ur
2T acting in y direction, when the particle F = i l×B ( )
( )
velocity is 2iˆ + 3jˆ ×106 ms-1 , is:
= i   dl × B ( )
 ∫c 
Skeâ DeeJesefMele keâCe hej DeeJesMe keâe ceeve –2µC nw~ Ùen
y efoMee ceW ef›eâÙeekeâejer 2T kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW Jesie For closed loop  ∫ c dl = 0
( )
2iˆ + 3jˆ ×106 ms-1 Ûeue jne nes lees Fme hej
ef›eâÙeekeâejer ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeue nesiee-
8N in z – direction/ 8N z – efoMee ceW
(a)
4N in y – direction/ 4N y – efoMee ceW
(b)
4N in z – direction/4N z – efoMee ceW
(c)
8N in y – direction/8N y – efoMee ceW
(d) So fnet = 0 for closed current carrying conductor,
AIMPT-2009 Force Body diagram-
–6
Ans. (a) : Given charge q = – 2×10 C
Magnetic field B = 2T
ur
$ $
Velocity V = (2i + 3j)×10 6
m/s
r r
Magnetic force F = q (V × B)
= -2×10-6 (2i$ + 3j)×10
$ 6
× 2$j
 
= -2× (2i$ × 2$j)× 2$j
ˆi ˆj k$ resultant R = ( F3 − F1 )2 + F22
Q 2 3 0 = 0i$ + 0$j + 4k$ This resultant force R will be along the PQ segment.
0 2 0
r
FQP = ( F3 − F1 )2 + F22
$ = 8N in z- direction
F = - 2 × 4k. 12. A charge 'q' moves in a region where electric
11. A closed loop PQRS carrying a current is field and magnetic field both exist. Then force
placed in a uniform magnetic field. If the on it is / Skeâ DeeJesMe 'q' Ssmes #es$e ceW ieefleceeve nw, peneB
magnetic forces on segments PS, SR and RQ efJeÅegle Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e oesveeW GheefmLele nw, lees Fme hej
are F1, F2 and F3 respectively and are in the
plane of the paper and along the directions yeue nesiee -
r r r r
shown, the force on the segment QP is : (
(a) q v × B ) (b) qE + q ( vr × B)
Skeâ Oeeje Jeenkeâ yevo uethe (leej Heâvo) PQRS keâes r r r r r
DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heâeru[ ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo uethe YeeieeW (
(c) qE + q B × v ) (d) qB + q ( E × vr )
PS, SR leLee RQ hej ›eâceevegmeej ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeue F1, F2 AIPMT-2002

Physics 414 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): We know that force on a charge 'q' due to
ur 18.2 Motion in Electric and Magnetic
Electric field E is given by-
uur ur Fields
Fe = qE
ur
Force on charge q due to magnetic field B is given by- 15. A uniform electric field and a uniform
uur r r magnetic field are acting along the same
( ) r
Fm = q v × B where, v is velocity of charged particle.
direction in a certain region. If an electron is
r r r projected in the region such that its velocity is
Total Force F = Fe + F m
r r r r pointed along the direction of fields, then the
⇒ F = qE + q v × B ( ) electron
This force is known as Lorentz force. Skeâ meceeve efJeÅegle #es$e Deewj Skeâ meceeve ÛebgyekeâerÙe #es$e
13. Two long parallel wires are at a distance of 1m.
Skeâ efveef§ele #es$e ceW Skeâ ner efoMee ceW keâeÙe& keâj jnW nw~
If both of them carry one ampere of current in Ùeefo Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes Fme #es$e ceW Fme lejn Øe#esefhele
same direction, then the force of attraction on efkeâÙee peelee nw efkeâ Gmekeâe Jesie #es$e keâer efoMee ceW Fbefiele
unit length of the wires will be : efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees Fueskeäš^e@ve
oes meceeblej leej ceW ØelÙeskeâ ceW Oeeje 1 SeqcheÙej Skeâ ner (a) Speed will decrease/ieefle keâce nes peeSieer
efoMee ceW ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw, Fvekesâ ceOÙe otjer 1 ceer. nw (b) Speed will increase/ieefle ye{sieer
lees hejmhej Skeâebkeâ uecyeeF& hej Deekeâ<e&Ce yeue nesiee–
(c) Will turn towards right of direction of
(a) 2 × 10–7 N/m (b) 4 × 10–7 N/m motion/ieefle keâer efoMee kesâ oeefnveer Deesj cegÌ[siee
(c) 8 × 10–7 N/m –7
(d) 3×10 N/m (d) Will turn towards left of direction of motion/
AIPMT-1998 ieef le keâer efoMee ceW yeeFË Deesj ceg[Ì siee
Ans. (a) : Magnetic force between parallel wires per RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
unit length is– Ans. (a) : Given that the uniform electric field and
F µ 0 i1i 2 magnetic field are acting along the same direction i.e.
= ×
l 2π r
where, i1 and i2 are the current in wires 1 and 2
respectively and r is the distance between them. So the
direction of currents in both the wire will be same–
]
i1 = i2 = 1A, r = 1 m
Here, angle between B and V is 0º, i.e θ = 0º.
µ 0 = 4π× 10−7 N / m
Force due to magnetic field is given by-
F 4π × 10 −7 1 × 1 −7 Fm = qVBsinθ
∴ = × = 2 × 10 N / m
l 2π 1 Fm = 0
14. A straight wire of length 0.5 metre and Now, Force due to electric field is given by-
r r
carrying a current of 1.2 ampere is placed in Fe = –eE
uniform magnetic field of induction 2 tesla. The Force due to electric field will be in opposite direction
magnetic field is perpendicular to the length of of motion. Hence, its speed will decrease.
the wire. The force on the wire is 16. An electron is moving in a circular path under
0.5 m uecyee Deewj 1.2 A OeejeJeener Skeâ meerOee leej 2 T the influence of a transverse magnetic field of
kesâ Skeâmeceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee peelee nw~ 3.57×10-2T . If the value of e/m is 1.76×1011
C/kg, the frequency of revolution of the
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e leej keâer uecyeeF& kesâ DeefYeuecyeJele nw~ leej electron is
hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue nw: 3.57×10-2T leer›elee kesâ DevegØemLe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ
(a) 2.4 N (b) 1.2 N ØeYeeJe ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW IetCe&ve keâj jne
(c) 3.0 N (d) 2.0 N nw ~ Ùeefo e/m keâe ceeve 1.76×1011 C/kg nes, lees
AIPMT-1992 Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ heefj›eâceCe keâer DeeJe=efòe nesieer :-
Ans. (b) : The force on a section of wire of length L (a) 1 GHz (b) 100 MHz
carrying a current I through a magnetic field B is- (c) 62.8 MHz (d) 6.28 MHz
F = I (L×B) NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
⇒ F = I L B sinθ e
⇒ F = 1.2 × 0.5×2 sin90º Ans. (a) : Given:- = 1.76 × 1011 C / kg
m
⇒ F = 1.2 × 0.5×2 Magnetic field B = 3.57×10–2 T
⇒ F = 1.2 N time taken by electron to complete the circle

Physics 415 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
distance 2πr µ0 n 2e
= = ................. (i) (a) Zero/MetvÙe (b)
velocity v r
Where 'r' is radius of orbit and 'v' is velocity of electron µ 0 ne µ ne
(c) (d) 0
velocity 'v' of electron in magnetic field is given by 2r 2πr
eBr AIPMT-03.05.2015
v=
2m Ans. (c) :
Where 'm' is mass of electron
put in (i)
2πr × m 2πm
t= =
eBr eB
1
f∝ ⇒ The magnetic field at centre O due to the circular coil is
t µI µ q
eB 1.76 × 1011 × 3.57 × 10−2 given by B = 0 = 0 × [Q I = q t ]
frequency f = = Hz 2r 2r t
2 πm 2 × 3.14 Where I = current in coil.
• time taken in n revolution is 1sec.
= 109 Hz • time taken in 1 revolution = 1 n
f = 1 GHz
1
17. A proton and an alpha particle both enter a Put t = and q = e
n
region of uniform magnetic field B, moving at
right angles to the field B. If the radius of µ e
B= 0×
circular orbits for both the particles is equal 2r 1 n
and the kinetic energy acquired by proton is 1
µ ne
MeV, the energy acquired by the alpha particle B= 0
will be/Skeâ Øeesše@ve leLee Skeâ Ssuheâe keâCe, efkeâmeer Skeâ 2r
meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B ceW ØeJesMe keâjles nQ~ Fvekeâer ieefle 19. When a proton is released from rest in a room,
keâer efoMee #es$e B kesâ uecyeJele nw~ Ùeefo, oesveeW keâCeeW kesâ it starts with an initial acceleration a0 towards
efueÙes, Je=òeekeâej keâ#eeDeeW keâer ef$epÙee Deeheme ceW yejeyej nw west. When it is projected towards north with a
speed v0 it moves with an initial acceleration
Deewj Øeesše@ve Éeje Deefpe&le ieeflepe Tpee& MeV nw lees, 3a0 towards west. The electric and magnetic
Ssuheâe keâCe Éeje Tpee& nesieer: fields in the room are :
(a) 1 MeV (b) 4 MeV peye efkeâmeer keâcejs ceW Skeâ Øeesše@ve keâes efJejece DeJemLee mes
(c) 0.5 meV (d) 1.5 MeV cegòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw lees, Ùen ØeejbefYekeâ lJejCe a0 mes
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 heef§ece efoMee keâer Deesj ieefle keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo Fmes v0 Jesie mes
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Gòej efoMee keâer Deesj Øesef#ele efkeâÙee peelee nw lees Ùen
Ans. (a) : Given, rp = rα, Ep = 1 MeV
ØeejbefYekeâ lJejCe 3a0 mes heef§ece efoMee keâer Deesj Ûeuelee nw,
2mE lees Fme keâcejs ceW JewÅegle leLee ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nw~
r=
qβ
ma 0 3ma0
(a) east, down
rp Ep e ev0
=
rα Eα ma 0 3ma0
hetJe& keâer Deesj, veerÛes keâer Deesj
EP e ev0
⇒ =1
Eα ma 0 2ma0
(b) west, up
e ev0
EP
⇒ =1 ma 0 2ma0
Eα heef§ece keâer Deesj, Thej keâer Deesj
e ev0
18. An electron moving in a circular orbit of radius
r makes n rotations per second. The magnetic ma 0 2ma0
(c) west, down
field produced at the centre has magnitude: e ev0
ef$epÙee r kesâ Je=òeekeâej keâ#ee ceW ieefle keâjlee ngDee Skeâ ma 0 2ma0
Fueskeäš^e@ve, Skeâ meskeâC[ ceW n Ûekeäkeâj ueieelee nw~ Fmemes heef§ece keâer Deesj, veerÛes keâer Deesj
e ev0
kesâvõ hej GlheVe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nesiee:
Physics 416 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ma 0 2ma0 mv
(d) east, up (c) B = and K = 2mπ2 v 2 R 2
e ev0 e
2πmv
ma 0 3ma0 (d) B = and K = m 2 πvR 2
hetJe& keâer Deesj, Tâhej keâer Deesj e
e ev0
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
 qB 
Ans. (c) : Ans. (a) : As we know, frequency (v) =  
 2πm. 
V0 where, q = charge on particle
m B = operating magnetic field
+ Froce
+
m = mass of charged particle.
eB
∴ v=
2πm
2πmv
⇒ B= ––––– (1)
e
Case (I) : mv
F1 = electric force acting on the west direction Also, R = ]
eB
F1 = ma0 Where, R = radius of circular path taken by charge
qE = ma 0 v= velocity of charged particle.
ma o qBR
E= (q = e) (along west) ∴ v= ––––– (2)
q m
ma o 1
E= Now, Kinetic energy, K = mv 2
e 2
from eqn (2)
Case (II) :
F2 = magnetic force 1  e 2 B2 R 2 
K = m
= qV0 B 2  m 2 
F1 + F2 = m×3a0 2
e2 B2 R 2 e 2 R 2  2πmv 
mn0 + qv0B = m×3a0 ⇒ Κ= =
qv0b = 2ma0 2m 2m  e 
2ma 0 ⇒ Κ = 2mπ2v2R2
B= (q = e) (down) 21. A uniform electric field and a uniform
qv 0
magnetic field are acting along the same
2ma o direction in a certain region. If an electron is
B=
ev o projected in the region such that its velocity is
pointed along the direction of fields, then the
20. An alternating electric field of frequency 'v' is
electron:/efkeâmeer #es$e ceW, Skeâ meceeve efJeÅegle Deewj Skeâ
applied across the D's (radius = R) of a
cyclotron that is being used to accelerate meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e Skeâ ner efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe keâeÙe&
protons (mass = m). The operating magnetic keâj jns nQ~ Ùeefo Fme #es$e ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Fme Øekeâej
field (B) used in the cyclotron and the kinetic Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee peeS efkeâ Gmekesâ Jesie keâer efoMee, #es$eeW keâer
energy (K) of the proton beam, produced by it, efoMee ceW nes lees Fueskeäš^e@ve :
are given by:
(a) will turn towards left of direction of motion
Skeâ meeFkeäueesš^e@ve keâe GheÙeesie Øeesše@veeW (õJÙeceeve = m)
keâes lJeefjle keâjves kesâ efueÙes efkeâÙee pee jne nw~ Fmekesâ [erpe Deheveer ieefle keâer efoMee keâer yeebÙeer Deesj cegÌ[ peeSiee
(b) will turn towards right of direction of motion
(D's) (ef$epÙee R) hej v DeeJe=efòe keâe Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea
/Deheveer ieefle keâer efoMee keâer oebÙeer Deesj cegÌ[siee
efJeÅegle #es$e ueieeÙee peelee nw~ lees, meeFkeäueesš^e@ve ceW ØeÙegòeâ
(c) speed will decrease/keâer Ûeeue keâce nes peeSieer
ØeÛeeueve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e (B) leLee Glheve Øeesše@ve
(d) speed will increase/keâer Ûeeue yeÌ{ peeSieer
efkeâjCehegbpe keâer ieeflepe Tpee& (K) nesieer~
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
2πmv r r r
(a) B =
e
and K = 2mπ2 R 2 v2 Ans. (c) : Since, F = q  E + v × B 
  ( )
r r r
mv When E , v and B are all along same direction, then
(b) B = and K = m 2 πvR 2
e magnetic force experienced by electron is zero.
Physics 417 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r r DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe heâeru[ kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW Skeâ DeeJesefMele
(
Fmag = q v × B = 0 ) keâCe ef$epÙee R kesâ Je=òe ceW DeÛej Ûeeue v mes Ûeuelee nQ
While electric force is acting opposite to velocity of Fmekesâ Ietceves keâe meceÙe Devlejeue :
electron, so velocity of electron will decrease.
(a) Depends on both v and R
22. A beam of cathode rays is subjected to crossed v leLee R oesveeW kesâ ceeve hej efveYe&j nesiee~
Electric (E) and Magnetic fields (B). The fields (b) Depends on v and not on R
are adjusted such that the beam is not
v kesâ ceeve hej efveYe&j nesiee, hejvleg R kesâ ceeve hej veneR
deflected. The specific charge of the cathode
(c) Depends on R and not on v
rays is given by –
R kesâ ceeve hej efveYe&j nesiee, hejvleg v kesâ ceeve hej veneR
Skeâ kewâLees[
Ì efkeâjCe hebgpe Skeâ hejmhej ›eâe@me efJeÅegle #es$e (E)
(d) Is independent of both v and R
Je ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e (B) kesâ ØeYeeJe ceW nw~ #es$eeW keâes Fme v leLee R oesveeW, kesâ ceeveeW mes mJelev$e nesiee~
Øekeâej meceeÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw, efkeâ hebgpe DeefJeÛeefuele AIMPT-2009, 2007
jnlee nw~ kewâLeesÌ[ efkeâjCeeW keâe efJeefMe° DeeJesMe nw – Ans. (d) : When a particle moves in a magnetic field of
B2 2VB2 intensity B pointing downwards into the page and
(a) (b) particle is moving with a speed of v on the plane of
2VE 2 E2
paper
2VE 2 E2 F = q.v. B [ force of charged particle in magnetic field
(c) (d)
B2 2VB2 mv 2
and we know that. F =
(where V is the potential difference between r
cathode and anode)
mv 2 mv
(V ÙeneB kewâLeesÌ[ Je Ssvees[ kesâ ceOÙe keâe efJeYeJeevlej nw) q.v. B = ⇒ r=
r q.B
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Now, as we know that-
Ans. (d) : When Electron beam is not deflected then, v q.B
Fm = Fe ω= ⇒ ω=
r m
Fm = Bev, Fe = Ee
2π
Bev = Ee Time period T =
ω
E 2 πm
v= - - - -(i) T=
B Bq
As per electron move from cathode to anode, its This shows that it is independent of both radius and
potential energy at the cathode appears as its kinetic velocity.
energy at the anode. If V is the potential difference 24. A particle of mass m, charge Q and kinetic
between anode and cathode, then potential energy of energy T enters a transverse uniform magnetic
electron at cathodes = eV, also KE of electron at anode,
field of induction B After 3 seconds the kinetic
1
E = mv 2 . energy of the particle will be –
2 õJÙeceeve m DeeJesMe Q Deewj ieeflepe Tpee& T keâe Skeâ
According to law of conservation of energy, ur
keâCe GlØejsCe B kesâ DevegØemLe DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heâeru[
1 2
mv = eV (#es$e) ceW ØeJesMe keâjlee nw~ 3 meskeâC[ kesâ Ghejevle Fme
2
keâCe keâer ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer:-
2eV (a) T (b) 4T
v= - - - - - (ii)
m (c) 3T (d) 2T
From eq'n (i) and (ii) AIPMT-2008
E 2eV Ans. (a) : Given :
=
B m Particle mass = m
charge = Q
e E2 Kinetic energy =T
= ur
m 2V B2 Magnetic field = B
23. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic After passing through a magnetic field, the magnitude
field, a charged particle moves with constant of its mass and velocity of particle remains same,
speed v in a circle of radius R. The time period So its energy does not change i.e. kinetic energy will
of rotation of the particle: remain constant T.

Physics 418 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
25. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a
circle of radius R with uniform speed v. The
associated magnetic moment μ is given by:
DeeJesMe q keâe Skeâ keâCe ef$epÙee R kesâ Je=òeekeâej ceeie& ceW
Ûeeue v kesâ meeLe Ûeue jne nw~ Fmemes mecyeefvOele ÛegcyekeâerÙe
DeeIetCe& µ keâe ceeve nesiee:-
(a) q v R (b) q v R/2
The magnetic force qvB acting on the ion provides
(c) q v R2 (d) qv R2/2
mv 2
AIPMT-2007 required centripetal force =
R
Ans. (b) : Radius of circle = R
Speed = v mv 2
So, = qvB
R
mv qBR
R= or v =
qB m
As initially ions are accelerated by an electric potential
2πR
Time ( t ) = V so there will be a kinetic energy produced by it.
v
1 1 q 2 B2 R 2 q 2 B2 R 2
q q ∴ KE = mv 2 = m × =
and we know i = = 2 2 m2 2m
t 2πR The K.E. is equal to initial K.E. due to potential V i.e.
v KE = qV
Magnetic moment for the current loop
r r r q 2 B2 R 2 q 2V
is, µ = i × A = iA = qV ⇒ =
2m m B2 R 2
Where, A is area of loop. q 1
q qvR So, ∝
So, µ = × πR 2 = m R2
2πR 2 27. A very long straight wire carries a current I. At
v the instant when a charge +Q at point P has
26. In a mass spectrometer used for measuring the velocity V , as shown, the force on the charge is-
masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated
by an electric potential V and then made to efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes Devegmeej Skeâ yengle uecyeer meerOeer leej ceW
describe semicircular paths of radius R using a Oeeje I Ûeue jner nw~ efpeme #eCe efyevog P hej DeeJesMe +Q
magnetic field B. If V and B are kept constant,
Jesie V mes ieefleceeve nesiee, Fme hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer yeue
 Charge on the ion 
the ratio   will be nesiee:-
 Massof the ion 
proportional to:-
DeeÙeveeW kesâ õJÙeceeve ceeheves kesâ efueÙes Skeâ õJÙeceeve ceeheer
mhewkeäš^esceeršj ceW DeeÙeveeW keâes henues JewÅegle efJeYeJe V Éeje
lJeefjle keâj efHeâj ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B keâe ØeÙeesie keâj R
(a) Along OX/ OX efoMee ceW neWies
ef$epÙee kesâ DeOe&Je=òeerÙe heLe hej ÛeueeÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo V
(b) Opposite to OY/ OY mes efJecegKe efoMee ceW neWies
Deewj B keâes efmLejceeve jKee peeÙes lees
(c) Along OY / OY keâer efoMee ceW neWies
 DeeÙeve keâe DeeJesMe 
Devegheele   Devegheeleer nesiee:- (d) Opposite to OX / OX mes efJecegKe efoMee ceW neWies
 DeeÙeve keâe õJÙeceeve  AIPMT-2005
1 Ans. (c) : • The current in the wire is along the positive
(a) R (b)
R Y-axis. The direction of the field at P due to this current
1 can be obtained using the right hand thumb rule.
(c) (d) R2
R2 According to this rule the right thumb points upwards
AIPMT-2007 when we curl the fingers inwards around the thumb
Ans. (c) : If an ion of charge q, mass m moves in which points in the direction of current. Thus the
magnetic field of flux density B with velocity v then its direction of the magnetic field will be into the plane or
path is circular with radius R. along negative Z-direction.

Physics 419 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Time period of electron moving along orbit
Circumference 2πr
T= =
speed v
e ev
Current in circular wire i = =
T 2πr
Magnetic field due to circular current carrying loop at
the centre
µ 2πi µ 0 ev × 2π
B= 0 × = .
• Fleming's left-hand rule gives the direction of the 4π r 4π 2π r.r
force to be in the direction in which the left thumb
µ 0 ev
point when the direction of the magnetic field is = .
given by the index finger and the direction in which 4π r 2
the charge moves is given by the middle finger. µ 0 ev
r= .
4π B
v
r∝
B
29. A charged particle moves through a magnetic
field in a direction perpendicular to it. Then
the
Skeâ DeeJesefMele keâCe keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceWs, Gmekeâer efoMee
This gives the direction of force in the upward direction kesâ uecyeJeled ieefle keâj jne nw~ leye-
i.e. along OY.
(a) Speed of the particle remains unchanged
Alternate Solution -
r r keâCe keâer Ûeeue DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer
Magnetic force at P given F = Q ( vr × B)
(b) Direction of the particle remains unchanged
From right hand thumb rule we have,
r keâCe keâer efoMee DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer
r
v = v x î, B = – Bz k̂ (c) Acceleration remains unchanged
r r lJejCe DeheefjJeefle&le jnsieer
Then v × B = v ˆi × ( –B ) kˆ = v B ˆj sinθ
x z x z

Hence, force is along OY-direction. (d) Velocity remains unchanged

28. An electron moves in a circular orbit with a Jesie DeheefjJeefle&le jnsiee
uniform speed v. It produces a magnetic field B AIPMT-2003
at the centre of the circle. The radius of the Ans. (a): If a moving charged particle is subjected to a
circle is proportional to: perpendicular uniform magnetic field, then according to
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve DeÛej Ûeeue v mes Skeâ Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW F = qvBsinθ
ieefleceeve nw~ Fme keâejCe Je=òe kesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e It will experience a maximum force which will provide
keâeÙe& B keâjlee nw~ Je=òe keâer ef$epÙee Devegheeleer nesieer:- the centripetal force to particle and it will describe a
circular path with uniform speed.
v v
(a) (b) 30. An electron having mass 'm' and kinetic energy
B B
E enter in uniform magnetic field B
B B perpendicularly, then its frequency will be : -
(c) (d)
v v Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve mece™he ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e uecyeJele ØeJesMe
AIPMT-2005 keâjlee nw, Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& E nw, lees Fmekeâer DeeJe=efòe
Ans. (a) : nesieer (ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B leLee Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve m
nw):-
eE 2 πm
(a) (b)
qVB eB
eB 2m
(c) (d)
2 πm eBE
Circumference of circular path = 2πr AIPMT-2001

Physics 420 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c) : Given 32. Two identically charged particles A and B
An electron having mass ‘m’ and kinetic energy ‘E’ initially at rest, are accelerated by a common
enter in uniform magnetic field B, perpendicularly. potential difference V. They enters into a
Now, transverse uniform magnetic field B. They
If velocity of particle is perpendicular to magnetic field, describe a circular path of radii r1 and r2
particles moves in a circle centripetal force is respectively then their mass ratio is/oes meJe&mece
experienced by electron is qvB.
DeeJesefMele keâCe A SJeb B meceeve efJeYeJeevlej mes lJeefjle
mv 2 nesles ngS Skeâ meceeve DevegØemLe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B ceW ØeJesMe
Now, Centripetal force = = qvB
r keâjles nQ Gvekesâ Éeje Je=òeerÙe heLe keâer ef$epÙeeÙeW r1 SJeb r2
mv v
= = qB (ω = angular velocity) nes lees Gvekesâ õJÙeceeveeW keâe Devegheele nesie :-
r r
2 2
mω = qB ...(i) r  r 
(a)  1  (b)  2 
qB  r2   r1 
ω= ...(ii)
m
We know that r  r 
(c)  1  (d)  2 
2π  r2   r1 
ω= substitute this value in equation (ii)
T AIPMT-1999
2π qB Ans. (a) : Given data–
=
T m Two charged particle A & B at rest potential difference
1 qB  1 = V, magnetic field = B
= Qf = 
T 2πm  T Let radius of A and B be r1 and r2 and their masses m1
and m2
qB
f= 2m ( qV )
2πm r=
eB qB
Frequency = {q = e}
2π m Since they have same charge –
31. A charge having q/m equal to 108 C/kg and r1 m1 m r 
2

with velocity 3 × 105 m/s enters into a uniform = ⇒ 1 = 1 

magnetic field B = 0.3 Tesla at an angle 30º r2 m2 m 2  r2 
with direction of field. Then radius of 33. When a charged particle moving with velocity
curvature will be:
V is subjected to a magnetic field of induction
C
108 efJeefMe° DeeJesMe Jeeuee Skeâ DeeJesefMele keâCe 3 × B the force on it is non-zero. This implies the:-
kg
105 m/s kesâ Jesie mes B = 0.3 šsmeuee Jeeues mece™he peye V Jesie mes ieefleceeve Skeâ DeeJesefMele keâCe keâes ØesjCe
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW #es$e mes 30° keâe keâesCe yeveeles ngS B kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes ØeYeeefJele efkeâÙee ieÙee lees Fme
ØeJesMe keâjlee nw lees Gmekeâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee nesieer – hej ef›eâÙeekeâejer yeue MetvÙeslej ceeve jKelee Lee~
(a) 0.01 cm (b) 0.5 cm Fmekeâe leelheÙe& nw efkeâ:-
(c) 1 cm (d) 2 cm
AIPMT-2000 (a) Angle between V and B is necessary 90º/
q DeeJeMÙekeâ ™he V Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe 90º nw~
Ans. (b) : Given, = 108 C/kg
m (b) Angle between V and B can have at value
v = 3 × 105 m/s other than 90º/ V Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe 90º mes
B = 0.3T efYeVe keâesF& Yeer ceeve jKe mekeâlee nw~
mv
r= (c) Angle between V and B can have at value
qB
other than zero and 180º/ V Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâe
m 3 × 105 × sin 30° keâesCe MetvÙe Deewj 180º mes efYeVe keâesF& Yeer ceeve jKe
r=
q 0.3 mekeâlee nw~
3 × 105 (d) Angle between V and B is either zero or
r=
10 × 0.3 × 2
8
180º/ V Deewj B kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe Ùee lees MetvÙe nw
= 0.5 × 10–2m DeLeJee 180º nw~
= 0.5 cm. AIPMT-2006
Physics 421 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c) : Given (c) retard along X-axis/x-De#e keâer efoMee ceW DeJecebefole
Velocity = V, ieefle keâjsiee~
Magnetic field of Induction = B (d) moving along a helical path around X-axis/x-
We know force on charge particle in magnetic field is
r ur r De#e ceW meefhe&ueekeâej heLe kesâ DevegefoMe ieefle keâjsiee~
given by F = q V × B( ) AIPMT-1993
= q. VB sinθ Ans. (a) : When a moving charge is subjected to a
magnetic field, the charge experiences a force, which is
When θ = 0° or θ = 180° ⇒ F = 0
directly proportional to the velocity of the charge as
Therefore for non zero force, angle between V and B well as to the strength of magnetic field. The force
can have any value other than zero and 180°. experienced by this moving charge is given by-
ur
34. A beam of electrons passes undeflected through F = qvBsin θ = qvBsin (180º )
mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic ur
fields. The electric field is switched off and the F=0
same magnetic field is maintained, the
electrons move:/Fueskeäš^eveeW keâe Skeâ efkeâjCe mecetn
hejmhej uecyeJeled JewÅegle Deewj ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$eeW ceW mes
DeefJeef#ehle Ûeuee peelee nw~ Ùeefo JewÅegle #es$e keâes yevo keâj
efoÙee peeÙes Deewj ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâes DeheefjJeefle&le jKee
peeÙes lees Fueskeäš^eveeW keâe Ûeueve nesiee:-
Therefore, it can be stated that no force is acting on this
(a) along a straight line/Skeâ meerOeer jsKee ceW
moving charge due to the magnetic field. Thus, the
(b) in an elliptical orbit/Skeâ oerIe&Je=òe keâ#ee ceW
charge maintains the same velocity and remains
moving. Hence, it can be said that the charge will
(c) in a circular orbit/Skeâ Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW
remain unaffected.
(d) along a parabolic path/Skeâ hejJeueefÙekeâ heLe ceW
36. A positively charged particle moving due East
AIPMT-2007
enters a region of uniform magnetic field
Ans. (c) : Total force acting on the electron when directed vertically upwards. This particle will
switch is on,
r r r r r Skeâ Oeveelcekeâ DeeJesefMele keâCe Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe
Fnet = FB + FE = q V × B + qE( ) #es$e (TOJee&Oejle: efo°) ceW hetJe& keâer Deesj ieefle keâjlee nw,
Where, q is charge and V is velocity of charge. Ùen keâCe-
(a) move in a circular path with a decreased
speed Je=òeerÙe heLe hej Iešles Ûeeue mes Ûeuesiee
(b) move in a circular path with a uniform speed
Je=òeerÙe heLe hej meceeve Ûeeue mes Ûeuesiee
r (c) get deflected in vertically upward direction/
When switch is off then E becomes zero and only B Thej keâer Deesj efo° nes peeSiee
exists. So only FB is applied on e-beam. (d) move in circular path with an increased speed
r r
Fnet = FB = q V × B ( ) Je=òeerÙe heLe hej Ûeueles ngS Ûeeue yeÌ{sieer
r r r AIPMT-1997
⇒ FB = – e V × B ( ) Ans. (b) : When a positively charged particle enters in
r a region of uniform magnetic field directed vertically
This force FB will make the e-beam to move in circular upwards, it experiences a centripetal force which will
orbit as magnetic force does not increases the speed of move it in circular path with a uniform speed.
the particle. 37. A 10 eV electron is circulating in a plane at
35. A charge moving with velocity v in X-direction right angles to a uniform field at magnetic
is subjected to a field of magnetic induction in induction 10–4 Wb/m2 (= 1.0 gauss), the orbital
negative X-direction. As a result, the charge radius of electron is/Skeâ 10 eV Tpee& keâe Skeâ
will /Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e x-De#e keâer $e+Ceelcekeâ efoMee Fueskeäš^e@ve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e 10–4 Jesyej/ceer2 (IG) kesâ
ceW nw FmeceW Skeâ DeeJesMe v Jesie mes x-De#e keâer Oeveelcekeâ uecyeJeled ieefle keâjlee nw leLee oesveeW OeejeDeeW mes meceeve nQ,
efoMee ceW ieefle keâjlee nw lees DeeJesMe lees Fmekesâ heLe keâer ef$epÙee nesieer
(a) remain unaffected/DeØeYeeefJele jnsiee~ (a) 11 cm (b) 18 cm
(b) start moving in a circular path Y-Z plane/y-z (c) 12 cm (d) 16 cm
meceleue ceW Je=òeekeâj heLe ceW ieefle keâjsiee~ AIPMT-1996
Physics 422 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Force due to perpendicular magnetic field- Skeâ [Ÿetš^e@ve Skeâ efoS ngS ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B uecyeJeled
Fmag = qvB .......(i) leue ceW 0.5 ceeršj Jeeues Je=òeerÙe heLe hej ieefle keâjlee nw~
where, B = magnetic induction Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& 50 keV nw~ Ùeefo Fme Je=òeerÙe heLe hej
v = electron speed
q = charge of the e- leLee Fmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW Øeesše@ve ieefleceÙe nes, lees
Now, expression for the centripetal force experienced Fmekeâer ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer
by the electron in the circular motion- (a) 25 keV (b) 50 keV
mv 2 (c) 200 keV (d) 100 keV
Fe = .......(ii)
R AIPMT-1991
where, R = orbital radius Ans. (d) : Given that:
m = mass of the electron
E1 = k.E = 50 kev E2 = ?
equating eqn (i) and eqn (ii) we get-
r = 0.5 metre
mv
R= Now, we know that orbital radius is-
Bq
2m k.E
2m K.E r= .........(i)
R= qB
Bq
q2
2 × 9.1 × 10–31 × 10 × 1.6 × 10–19 From eqn (i), k.E ∝
= m
(10–4 × 1.6 × 10 –19 )
1
[10 eV = 10×1.6×10–19 J] k.E ∝
m
R = 0.1066 × 100 cm
k p md
R = 10.66 cm  11cm = .......(ii)
k d mp
38. A uniform magnetic field acts at right angles to
the direction of motion of electrons. As a result, We know that the mass of the deutron is twice the mass
the electron moves in a circular path of radius of the proton-
2 cm. If the speed of electrons is doubled, then md = 2 mp
the radius of the circular path will be
k p 2m p
Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieefle kesâ eq n (ii) ⇒ =
uecyeJeled efoMee ceW ueieeÙee peelee nw~ Fmekesâ keâejCe kd mp
Fueskeäš^e@ve 2 mesceer Jeeues Je=òeerÙe heLe hej Ietcelee nw~ Ùeefo kp = 2 kd
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe Jesie oesiegvee keâj efoÙee peeS lees heLe keâer kp = 2 × 50 keV (kd = 50 keV
ef$epÙee nesieer: given)
(a) 2.0 cm (b) 0.5 cm kp = 100 keV
(c) 4.0 cm (d) 1.0 cm Thus, the k.E of the proton is 100 keV.
AIPMT-1991
40. A beam of electrons is moving with constant
Ans. (c) : The radius of the electron moving in a velocity in a region having electric and
magnetic field is given by- magnetic fields of strength 20 V m–1 and 0.5 T
mv at right angles to the direction of motion of the
r=
qB electrons. What is the velocity of the electrons ?
r∝v Skeâ mLeeve hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = 0.5 T leLee JewÅegle
So, when the speed of the e- doubled the radius will also #es$e E = 20 Jeesuš/ceer Skeâ otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled ueieles nQ~
be doubled for the e-
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve heggbpe meceeve ieefle mes Fve #es$eeW ceW oesveeW kesâ
r1 v1
= uecyeJeled Ûeuelee nw lees Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe Jesie nesiee
r2 v 2
(a) 8 m s–1 (b) 5.5 m s–1
2 v
⇒ = (c) 20 m s –1
(d) 40 m s–1
r2 2v
AIPMT-1996
So, r2 = 4 cm Ans. (d) : Electric field (E) = 20 v/m
39. A deuteron of kinetic energy 50 keV is B = 0.5 T
describing a circular orbit of radius 0.5 metre The force on electron in a magnetic field is
in a plane perpendicular to magnetic field B. F = evB ..........(i)
The kinetic energy of the proton that describes
a circular orbit of radius 0.5 metre in the same The force on electron in a electric field is-
plane with the same B is F = eE ...........(ii)
Physics 423 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
equating eqn (i) and eqn (ii) we get-
⇒ eE = evB
18.3 Biot-Savart Law
E 42. A very long conducting wire is bent in a semi-
⇒ v=
B circular shape from A to B as shown in figure.
20 The magnetic field at point P for steady current
= configuration is given by :
0.5 ØeoefMe&le efÛe$e kesâ Devegmeej Skeâ uecyes Ûeeuekeâ leej keâes A
So, v = 40 m/sec mes B lekeâ Deæ& Je=òeekeâej Deekeâej ceW ceesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ efmLej
41. Two equal electric currents are flowing Oeeje efJevÙeeme kesâ efueS efyevog P hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nw :
perpendicular to each other as shown in the
figure. AB and CD are perpendicular to each
other and symmetrically placed with respect to
the currents. Where do we expect the resultant
magnetic field to be zero?
oes OeejeJeener Ûeeuekeâ Skeâ otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled jKes nQ~ AB
µ 0i  2 
1− (a) pointed into the page/
4R  π 
leLee CB Skeâ otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled nQ lees leguÙe ÛegcyekeâerÙe
#es$e leer›elee keâneb MetvÙe nesieer µ0i  2 
1− hespe ceW Devoj keâer Deesj
4R  π 
µi
(b) 0 pointed into the page/
4R
µ0i
hespe ceW Devoj keâer Deesj
4R
µi
(c) 0 pointed away from the page /
(a) On CD/ CD hej 4R
µ0i
(b) On AB/ AB hej hespe mes yeenj keâer Deesj
4R
(c) On both OD and OB/ oesveeW OD leLee OB hej µ i  2
(d) 0 1 −  pointed away from page/
(d) On both AB and CD/oesveeW AB leLee CD hej 4R  π 
AIPMT-1996 µ0i  2 
1− hespe mes yeenj keâer Deesj
Ans. (b) : 4R  π 
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (d) :

Total magnetic field at point P –

BP = B1 + B2 + B3
µi µi µi
= 0 ⊗+ 0  + 0 ⊗
4Rπ 4R 4Rπ
Using right hand thumb rule, 2µ0 i µi
= ⊗+ 0 
• Due to current (1), direction of magnetic field on 4Rπ 4R
segments OA and OC are outward the plane, and on µ0 i  2 
BP = 1 −  
segments OB and OD are inward the plane. 4R  π 
• Due to current (2), direction of magnetic field on 43. Given below are two statements
segments OA and OD are into the plane, and on veerÛes oes keâLeve efoS ieS nQ:
segment OB and OC are outward the plane. Statement I : Biot-Savart’s law gives us the
Hence, from the fig on segment AB, the resultant expression for the magnetic field strength of an
infinitesimal current element (Idl) of a current
magnetic field is zero.
carrying conductor only.
Physics 424 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
keâLeve I : yeeÙeesmeeJeš& keâe efveÙece kesâJeue nceW, efkeâmeer Ans. (d): Given that – N = 1000
OeejeJeener Ûeeuekeâ kesâ DelÙeble met#ce Oeeje DeJeÙeJe (Idl) r = 62.8cm = 62.8 × 10–2m
kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer #ecelee (mš^wvLe) keâe JÙebpekeâ Øeoeve I = 1A
µo = 4π × 10–7 H/m
keâjlee nw
The magnetic field at the centre of the coil is given by
Statement II : Biot-Savart’s law is analogous to the following relation-
Coulomb’s inverse square law of charge q, with µ NI
the former being related to the field produced B= ο
by a scalar source, Idl while the latter being 2R
produced by a vector source, q. In light of 4 π × 10 −7 × 1000 × 1
B=
above statements choose the most appropriate 2 × 62.8 × 10−2
answer from the options given below 12.560 × 10 −2
keâLeve II : yeeÙeesmeeJeš& keâe efveÙece, DeeJesMe q kesâ B =
125.6
JÙegl›eâce Jeie& efveÙece kesâ Deveg™he nw, efpemeceW henuee Skeâ B = 10–3 T
DeefoMe œeesle Idl Éeje GlheVe #es$e mes mecyeefvOele nw, 45. Two conducting circular loops of radii R1 and
peyeefkeâ yeeo Jeeuee meefoMe œeesle q ôeje GlheVe #es$e mes R2 are placed in the same plane with their
mecyeefvOele nw~ centres coinciding. If R1 > > R2, the Mutual
Inductance M between them will be directly
Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ Deeueeskeâ ceW, veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW proportional to
ceW mes meJee&efOekeâ GheÙegòeâ Gòej ÛegveW: R1 leLee R2 ef$epÙeeDeeW keâer oes ÛeeuekeâerÙe Je=òeerÙe uethe Skeâ
(a) Statement I is incorrect and Statement II is leue ceW mecekesâefvõle jKeer nw~ Ùeefo R1 > > R2 lees Gvekesâ
correct/keâLeve I ieuele nw efkeâvleg keâLeve II mener nw~ ceOÙe heejmheefjkeâ ØesjkeâlJe 'M' meceevegheeleer neslee nw :
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are R 22 R 22 R1 R1
correct/keâLeve I SJeb keâLeve II oesveeW mener nQ~ (a) / kesâ (b) / kesâ
R1 R1 R2 R2
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are
R2 R2 R2 R2
incorrect/keâLeve I SJeb keâLeve II oesveeW ieuele nQ~ (c) / kesâ (d) 1 / 1 kesâ
(d) Statement I is correct and Statement II is R1 R1 R2 R2
incorrect/keâLeve I mener nw efkeâvleg keâLeve II ieuele nw~ NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 Ans. (a) :
Ans. (d) : Biot-savart's law gives us the expression for
the magnetic field strength of an infinitesimal current
element (I.dl) of current carrying conductor only which O
is written as
r r
(
ur µ o Id l × r
dB =
)
4πr 2 Two concentric circular loops of radius R1 and R2 are
As per biot-savart law, the expression for magnetic field shown.
r Let current in outer loop be i.
depends on current carrying element Id l which is a
vector quantity. Therefore, statement-1 is correct and µi
Magnetic field at the centre B = 0
statement-II is wrong. 2R 1
44. A closely packed coil having 1000 turns has an Magnetic flux through the inner loop = B ×πR 22
average radius of 62.8 cm. If current carried by
µ0i
the wire of the coil is 1 A, the value of magnetic φ= × πR 22
field produced at the centre of the coil will be 2R 1
(Permeability of free space = 4π × 10–7 H/m) µ i ( πR 2 )
2

nearly: φ= 0 × …(1)
2 R1
1000 HesâjeW Jeeueer DeÛÚer lejn mes keâmeer ngF& Skeâ kebgâ[ueer
Q φ = Mi ……(2)
keâer Deewmele ef$epÙee 62.8 cm nw~ Ùeefo kegbâ[ueer kesâ leej ceW
1 A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nw, lees kegâC[ueer kesâ kesâvõ hej From eqn (1) and (2)
GlheVe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe ceeve ueieYeie nesiee: µ0 π  R 22 
M=  
(cegòeâ DeekeâeMe keâer ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee = 4π × 10–7 H/m) 2  R1 
(a) 10–1 T (b) 10–2 T R 22
(c) 102 T (d) 10–3 T ⇒ M∝
R1
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Physics 425 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
46. A wire carrying current I has the shape as and I2 currents respectively. Point 'P' is lying at
shown in adjoining figure. Linear parts of the distance 'd' from 'O' along a direction
wire are very long and parallel to X-axis while perpendicular to the plane containing the
semicircular portion of radius R is lying in Y-Z wires. The magnetic field at the point 'P' will be
plane. Magnetic field at point O is: oes meJe&mece (Skeâ mes) uecyes Ûeeuekeâ leej AOB leLee
Skeâ leej keâe Deekeâej ÙeneB DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ COD, Skeâ-otmejs kesâ Thej, Deeheme ceW uecyeJeled jKes ieÙes
Fmemes I Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ leej kesâ jsKeerÙe Yeeie nQ, Deewj 'O' efyebog hej Skeâ-otmejs keâes keâešles nQ~ FveceW
yengle uecyes nQ Deewj X-De#e kesâ meceeblej nQ~ leej keâe DeOe& ›eâceMe: l1 leLee l2 OeejeÙeW ØeJeeefnle nes jner nQ~ efyebog 'O' mes
Je=òeekeâej Yeeie Y-Z meceleue ceW nw Deewj Fme Yeeie keâer 'd' otjer hej, oesveeW leejeW kesâ leue kesâ uecyeJeled efoMee kesâ
ef$epÙee R nw~ lees O efyevog hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nQ: DevegefoMe efmLele efkeâmeer efyebog 'P' hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe
ceeve nesiee:-
µ 0  I1  µ0
(a)   (I1 + I 2 )
(b)
2πd  I 2  2πd
µ0 2 2 µ 0 2 2 1/ 2
(c) (I1 − I 2 ) (d) (I1 + I 2 )
2πd 2πd
ur µ I $ $ AIPMT-06.05.2014
(a) B = − 0
4π R
(
πi − 2k ) Ans. (d) : The magnetic field at the point P, at a
perpendicular distance 'd' from 'O' in a direction
ur µ I $ $
(b) B = − 0
4π R
(
πi + 2k ) perpendicular to the plane ABCD due to currents
through AOB and COD are perpendicular to each other.
ur µ I
(c) B = 0
4π R
(
π$i − 2k$ )
ur µ I
(d) B = 0
4π R
(
π$i + 2k$ )
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (b) : Given situation is shown in the figure
 µ 2I   µ 2I 
B1=  0 1  and B2=  0 2 
 4 π d   4π d 
( )
1/ 2
B = B12 + B22
1/ 2
 µ 2I  2  µ 2I  2 
B =  0 1  +  . 2  
Parallel wires 1 and 3 are semi-infinite, so magnetic  4π d   4π d  
field at O due to them
µ
( )
1/ 2
r r -µ 0 I B = 0 I12 + I 22
B1 =B3 = kˆ 2 πd
4πR
48. Two similar coils of radius R are lying
Magnetic field at O due to semi-circular are in YZ-
concentrically with their planes at right angles
plane is given by
to each other. The currents flowing in them are
r −µ 0 I ˆ I and 2I respectively. The resultant magnetic
B2 = i
4R field induction at the centre will be:
Net magnetic field at point O is given by
r r r r oes Skeâ-pewmeer kegbâ[efueÙeeW keâer ef$epÙee R nw~ Fvekeâes
B = B1 + B2 + B3 mebkesâvõerÙe Fme Øekeâej jKee ieÙee nw efkeâ, Gvekesâ meceleue
µ 0 I ˆ µ0 I ˆ µ 0 I ˆ Skeâ otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled nw~ Gvemes ØeJeeefnle OeejeÙeW ›eâceMe:
=− k− i− k I leLee 2I nQ, lees kesâvõ hej heefjCeeceer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ØesjCe
4πR 4R 4πR
ur µI
nesiee:
4πR
(
B = − 0 πˆi + 2kˆ ) (a)
µ0I
(b)
µ0I
2R R
47. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and
COD are placed at right angle to each other, 5µ 0 I 3µ 0 I
(c) (d)
with one above other such that 'O' is their 2R 2R
common point for the two. The wires carry I1 AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Physics 426 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c) : Given, (a) 3 (b) 4
Radius of given coils = 'R' (c) 6 (d) 2
Current flowing in them = I & 2I AIPMT-2006
Now, Ans. (b) : From Biot-savert law
Magnetic field at centre due to Ist coil is, Given
µ I
B1 = 0
2R
Magnetic field at centre due to IInd coil perpendicular to
µ ( 2I )
1st is B2 = 0
2R
∴ Net magnetic field at centre = B12 + B22

 µ 0 I   µ 0 ( 2I ) 
2 2
=  2R  +  2R 
   
µ 0i
B=
5µ0 I 2r
Bnet =
2R µi µi
B1 = 0 1 & B2 = 0 2
49. Charge q is uniformly spread on a thin ring of 2r1 2r2
radius R. The ring rotates about its axis with a Q B1 = B2
uniform frequency f Hz. The magnitude of
µi µi i1 i 2
magnetic induction at the center of the ring ∴ 0 1 = 0 2 ⇒ =
is/R ef$epÙee keâer Skeâ heleueer JeueÙe hej q keâes Skeâmeceeve 2r1 2r2 r1 r2
™he mes efJeleefjle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ JeueÙe Deheveer De#e kesâ i1 = i 2 (Q Given r1 = 2r2)
meehes#e Skeâmeceeve DeeJe=efòe f Hz mes IetCe&ve keâjleer nw~ 2r2 r2
JeueÙe kesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe ØesjCe keâe heefjceeCe nw- i1 =2 i2 ... (i)
µ 0 qf µ 0 qf ρl ρ× 2π× r1
(a) (b) We Know R1 = =
2 πR 2R A A
µq µ0q ρl ρ× 2π× r2
(c) 0 (d) R2 = =
2fR 2πfR A A
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 ρ × 2π × r1
Ans. (b) : We know that the current flowing in the ring & V1 = i1R1 = i1× A
is, i = qf
ρ × 2π × r2
Where q is the charge and f is the frequency. V 2 = i 2 R2 = i 2 ×
The magnetic induction at the centre of the ring is A
V1 i1 r1 V1
µ 2πi µ 0 i = × ⇒ =2×2=4 [from egn (i)]
B= 0 = V2 i 2 r2 V2
4πR 2R
V1 = 4V2
q  1
q = it ⇒ i = = qf ∴ f =  51. For adjoining fig., The magnetic field at point,
t  t
'P' will be :
Then
efÛe$e ceW OeejeJeener leejeW kesâ ceOÙe efmLele ceOÙe efyevog P hej
µ 0 qf ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nesiee –
B=
2R
50. Two circular coil 1 and 2 are made from the
same wire but the radius of the 1st coil is twice
that of the 2nd coil. What potential difference in
volts should be applied across them so that the
magnetic field at their centres is the same-
µ0 µ0
oes Je=òeerÙe kegâC[efueÙeeW 1 Deewj 2 keâes Skeâ ner leej mes (a) ⊙ (b) ⊗
4π π
yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ hejvleg henueer keâgC[ueer keâer ef$epÙee otmejer
kegâC[ueer keâer ef$epÙee mes oesiegveer nw~ Fvekesâ Deej-heej Jeesuš µ µ
(c) 0 ⊗ (d) 0 ⊙
ceW keäÙee efJeYeJeevlej ueieeÙee peeS efkeâ Gvekesâ kesâvõeW hej 2π 2π
ef›eâÙeekeâejer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e meceeve neW- AIPMT-2000

Physics 427 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given Ans. (a) : Let the radius of the first and second loop be
I1 = 5A R1 and R2 respectively.
I2 = 2.5 A According Question
L = 2πR1( for the first loop)
L = 2.2π R2 (for the second loop)
2πR1 = 2(2πR2)
R 1 2 ( 2π ) R1 2
= =
R2 2π R2 1
Magnetic field due to a infinite wire carrying current I R2  1 
= 
at a point lies at a distance 'd' from wire is given by- R1  2 
µI The magnetic field at the centre of the coil of radius R.
B= 0
2π d µ nI
B= 0
For wire 1, d1 = 2.5 2R
∴ Magnetic field at P, due to I1, Now for the first and second loop the magnetic field at
µ ×5 µ the centre of the coil of radius R1 and R2.
B1 = 0 = 0 (into the paper)
2 π(2.5) π µ nI µ n I
B1 = o 1 B2 = o 2
For wire 2, d2 = 2.5 2R 1 2R 2
∴ Magnetic field at P, due to I2,
n1 1
µ × 2.5 µ 0
B2 = 0 = (out of paper) B1 n1R 2 n 2 1
2π × 2.5 2π = = = 2=
B2 n 2 R 1 R 2 4
µ µ 1
Net magnetic field B = B1 – B2 = 0 − 0 R2 1
π 2π
µ0 B1 1
B= [into the paper = ⊗] = B1 : B2 = 1: 4
2π B2 4
52. A current carrying coil (I = 5A, R = 10 cm.) Therefore, correct option is (a)
having 50 number of turns then find magnetic r
54. The magnetic field dB due to a small current
field at its centre r r
50 Iesjs Jeeueer OeejeJeener kegâC[ueer (I = 5A, R = 10 element dl at a distance r and element
cm.) kesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keäÙee nesiee- carrying current i is
r r
(a) 1.57 mT (b) 3.14 mT Skeâ Úesšs OeejeJeener leej dl keâer efkeâme Jepen mes r otjer
r
(c) 1 mT (d) 2 mT hej yevee ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ( dB ) nesiee
AIPMT-1999 r
r µ 0 2  d l × rr 
Ans. (a) : Given data (a) dB = i  
I = 5A, R = 10 cm = 0.1 m, N = 50 4π  r 3 
r
µ NI r µ  d l× rr 
We know that magnetic field at centre → B = 0 (at (b) dB = 0 i  3 
2R 4π  r 
r
centre) r µ 0  d l× rr 
Put the given value in the expression, (c) dB = i 
−7 4π  r 
4π × 10 × 50 × 5 r r
⇒ B= r µ  d l× r 
2 ( 0.1) (d) dB = 0 i 2  2 
4π  r 
= 1.57 mT
AIPMT-1996
53. A coil of one loop is made from a wire of length
L and there after a coil of two loops is made Ans. (b) : According to Biot - Savart's law- The
from same wire, then the ratio of magnetic field magnetic field due to small current element 'dl' and
at the centre of coils will be : current i passing through it is directly proportional to
L uecyeeF& kesâ leej mes Skeâ uethe keâer kegâC[ueer yeveeF& leLee the amount of current and the current element 'dl' and
Fmekesâ yeeo ces Fmeer leej mes 2 uethe keâer kegâC[ueer yeveeF& lees directly proportional to the sine of angle made between
the wire to the point at which the magnetic field is to be
kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe Devegheele nesiee– determined and inversely proportional to square of the
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 1 distance between the current element and the point at
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 4 : 1 which the magnetic field is determined,
AIPMT-1998
Physics 428 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
i.e. Ans. (a): Given that: B = 0.4 T
idlr sin θ and r1 = 2r
dB ∝ Magnetic field at a distance r due to a long current
r3
carrying wire is
On combining,
uur r µi
 dl × r  B= 0
⇒ dB ∝ i  3  2 πr
 r  B1 r2
uur r ⇒ =
µ 0  dl × r  B2 r1
dB = i 
4π  r 3  0.4 2r
⇒ =
55. A straight wire of diameter 0.5 mm carrying a B2 r
current of 1 A is replaced by the another wire
So, B2 = 0.2T
of 1 mm diameter carrying the same current.
The strength of the magnetic field far away is 57. The magnetic induction at a point P which is at
Skeâ leej keâe JÙeeme 0.5 efceceer nw~ FmeceW 1A Oeeje the distance of 4 cm from a long current
ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Fmekeâes Skeâ otmejs leej efpemekeâe JÙeeme 1 carrying wire is 10–3 T. The field of induction at
a distance 12 cm from the current will be
efceceer nw leLee FmeceW Yeer 1A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw Gmemes Skeâ uecyes Oeeje ØeJeeefnle leej keâer Jepen mes efkeâmeer efyevog
yeoue efoÙee peelee nw~ lees kegâÚ otjer hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e P hej pees leej mes 4 mesceer otj nw, ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e leer›elee
leer›elee nesieer- 10–3T nw, lees 12 mesceer otj efmLele efyevog hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe
(a) one-quarter of the earlier value/ henues keâer ÛeewLeeF& #es$e leer›elee %eele keâjW~
(b) one-half of the earlier value/henueer keâer DeeOee (a) 3.33× 10–4 T (b) 1.11 × 10–4 T
(c) twice the earlier value/ henueer mes oesiegveer (c) 33 × 10–3 T (d) 9 × 10–3 T
(d) same as the earlier value./henues kesâ meceeve AIPMT-1990
AIPMT-1999, 1997 Ans. (a) : Given that:
r1 = 4cm
Ans. (d) : The magnetic field of a straight long current
B1 = 10–3T
carrying conductor, carrying current IA at a distance r is
r2 = 12 cm
given by-
B2 = ?
µI
B = 0 ........(i) Magnetic field at a distance r for a long wire carrying
4πr current is-
From eqn (i) we can see that the strength of the µi
magnetic field depends on the current I and distance r B= 0
2 πr
from the straight current carrying conductor. B1 r2
Hence, we can say that as the current through the Now, =
B2 r1
current -carrying conductor increases, the magnetic
field increases. When we move further away from the 10 –3 12
⇒ =
conductor, the magnetic field decreases with increasing B2 4
distance. Therefore, magnetic field does not depend on
So, B2 = 3.33×10–4 T
the radius or diameter of the current carrying conductor.
In the given question there is no change in distance and
current. Hence, there is no change in the strength of 18.4 Magnetic Field on the Axis of a
magnetic field. So, the strength of the magnetic field Circular Current Loop
remains unchanged.
56. The magnetic field at a distance r from a long 58. The shape of the magnetic field lines due to an
wire carrying current i is 0.4 tesla. The infinite long. Straight current carrying
magnetic field at a distance 2r is conductor is:/efkeâmeer Devevle uecyeeF& kesâ meerOes OeejeJeener
efJeÅegle #es$e Jeeues Skeâ uecyes leej mes r otjer hej keâjWš i, Ûeeuekeâ kesâ keâejCe GlheVe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer jsKeeDeeW keâer
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e 0.4 T nw 2r otjer hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nw Deeke=âefle nesleer nw:
(a) 0.2 tesla/0.2 šsmuee (a) a straight line/Skeâ mejue jsKee
(b) 0.8 tesla /0.8 šsmuee (b) circular Je=òeekeâj
(c) 0.1 tesla/0.1 šsmuee (c) elliptical/oerIe&Je=òeekeâej
(d) 1.6 tesla/1.6 šsmuee (d) a plane/Skeâ leue
AIPMT-1992 NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022

Physics 429 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : The shape of the magnetic field lines due to (c) A linearly increasing function of distance
an infinite long straight current carrying conductor can upto the boundary of the wire and then
be predicted with right hand thumb rule in which we linearly decreasing for the outside region.
point thumb in the direction of current then curling leej keâer meercee lekeâ otjer kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW mejue
finger will give direction of magnetic field. jsKeerÙe ™he mes yeÌ{lee nw, SJeb Fmekesâ yeeo leej kesâ yeenjer
The shape thus formed is circular. #es$e ceW mejue jsKeerÙe ™he mes Iešlee nw~
(d) A linearly increasing function of distance r
upto the boundary of the wire and then
1
decreasing one with dependence for the
r
outside region.
leej keâer meercee lekeâ, otjer r kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW mejue
jsKeerÙe ™he mes yeÌ{lee nw, SJeb Fmekesâ yeeo leej kesâ yeenjer
59. The magnetic field on the axis of a circular loop 1
#es$e ceW efveYe&jlee kesâ meeLe Iešlee nw~
of radius 100 cm carrying current I = 2 A, at r
point 1 m away from the centre of the loop is NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
given by: Ans. (d) :
100 cm ef$epÙee Jeeues Je=òeekeâej OeejeJeener Iesjs, efpemeceW I
= 2 A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nw, kesâ De#e hej Iesjs kesâ kesâvõ
mes 1 m keâer otjer hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nesiee:
(a) 3.14 × 10–7 T (b) 6.28 × 10–7 T
(c) 3.14 × 10–4 T (d) 6.28 × 10–4 T
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 According to ampere's circuital equation of the electric
Ans. (a) : The magnetic field on the axis of circular field inside the loop is constant, B.dl of the resultant
loop is – ∫
magnetic field along a closed, plane curve is equal to µ0
µ ο IR 2 4π×10−7 × 2 ×12 times the total current crossing the area limited by the
B= =
( ) ( )
3/ 2 3/ 2
2 R 2 + X2 2 12 + 12 closed curve.
ur uur
4π × 10 × 2−7 ∫ B.dl = µ 0 I ---------(1)
= = π × 10–7 T for r > a we get B.2πr = µ0I
2× 2 2
µI
⇒ B = 3.14 ×10−7 T B = 0 ------------(2)
2πr
µ Ir
for r < a we get B= 0 2 ------(3)
18.5 Ampere's Circuit Law 2πa
1
60. From Ampere’s circuital law for a long straight From equation (2) we get B∝ r for r> a region which
wire of circular cross-section carrying a steady means it is decreasing for this regions
current, the variation of magnetic field in the From equation (3) B ∝ r for r < a region which means it
inside and outside region of the wire is is increasing for this region.
SefcheÙej kesâ heefjheLeerÙe efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej, Je=òeekeâej 61. A thick current carrying cable of radius 'R'
DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue Jeeues efkeâmeer uecyes SJeb meerOes leej carries current 'I' uniformly distributed across
efpemeceW Skeâ mLeeÙeer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw, Fme leej kesâ its cross section. The variation of magnetic field
B(r) due to the cable with the distance 'r' from
Deevleefjkeâ SJeb Jee¢e #es$e ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW heefjJele&ve nw:
the axis of the cable is represented by/Skeâ 'R'
(a) A linearly decreasing function of distance
ef$epÙee keâer ceesšer OeejeJeener kesâefyeue ceW Oeeje 'I' Fmekesâ
upto the boundary of the wire and then a
linearly increasing one for the outside region. DevegØemLe keâeš hej meceeve ™he mes efJeleefjle nw~ kesâefyeue kesâ
leej keâer meercee lekeâ otjer kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW mejue keâejCe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B(r) keâe heefjJele&ve kesâefyeue De#e
jsKeerÙe ™he mes Iešlee nw, SJeb Fmekesâ yeeo leej kesâ yeenjer mes 'r' otjer kesâ meehes#e ØeoefMe&le efkeâÙee peelee nw :
#es$e ceW mejue jsKeerÙe ™he mes yeÌ{lee nw~
(b) Uniform and remains constant for both the
regions. (a) (b)
Skeâmeceeve SJeb oesveeW #es$eeW kesâ efueS efmLej jnlee nw~
Physics 430 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Outside (d > R)
µ i
(c) (d) B= 0
2π d
1
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 B∝
d
Ans. (d) : According to the Ampere's Circuital law-
The magnetic field inside the current carrying cable is
µ I
18.6 The Solenoid and Toroid
Binside = 0 2 ⋅ r , if r < R
2πR 63. A long solenoid of radius 1 mm has 100 turns
⇒ Binside ∝ r per mm. If 1 A current flows in the solenoid,
The magnetic field outside the current carrying cable is the magnetic field strength at the centre of the
solenoid is
µ I
Boutside = 0 , if r ≥ R 1 mm ef$epÙee Jeeueer efkeâmeer uecyeer heefjveefuekeâe ceW Øeefle
2πr
efceueerceeršj 100 (Iesjs) nQ~ Ùeefo heefjveeefuekeâe ceW 1 A keâer
⇒ Boutside ∝ 1 Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw, lees heefjveefuekeâe kesâ kesâvõ hej
r ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer #ecelee keâe ceeve nesiee:
Here, B is the magnetic field, "I" is the current and 'r' is
(a) 6.28 × 10−4 T (b) 6.28 × 10−2 T
the distance from axis of cable. −2
Hence, option (d) is correct. (c) 12.56 × 10 T (d) 12.56 × 10−4 T
62. A cylindrical conductor of radius R is carrying NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
a constant current. The plot of the magnitude Ans. (c) : Given,
3
of the magnetic field B with the distance d from Number of turns, (N) = 100 per mm = 100×10 turn per
the centre of the conductor, is correctly m
represented by the figure : Current, (I) = 1A
ef$epÙee R kesâ efkeâmeer yesueveekeâej Ûeeuekeâ mes keâesF& efveÙele Magnetic field B = µo NI
Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e, B kesâ heefjceeCe N = No. of turns per unit length
leLee Ûeeuekeâ kesâ kesâvõ mes otjer d kesâ yeerÛe «eeheâ keâe mener B = 4π×10–7×100×103×1
B = 12.56×10–7×105
efve™heCe efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâme DeejsKe Éeje efkeâÙee
ieÙee nw? B = 12.56×10-2 T
64. Two very long, straight parallel conductors A
and B carry current of 5 A and 10 A
(a) (b) respectively and are at a distance of 10 cm
from each other. The direction of current in
two conductors is same. The force acting per
unit length between two conductors is: ( µ0 = 4π
× 10–7 SI unit)
(c) (d) oes yengle uecyes, mejue jsKeerÙe, meceeveevlej Ûeeuekeâ A SJeb
B Skeâ-otmejs mes 10cm keâer otjer hej jKes nQ, efpeveceW
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 ›eâceMe: 5 A SJeb 10 A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~
Ans. (b) oesveeW ÛeeuekeâeW ceW Oeeje keâer efoMee meceeve nw~ ÛeeuekeâeW kesâ
yeerÛe Øeefle FkeâeF& uecyeeF& hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue nw:
(µ0 = 4 π × 10–7 SI cee$ekeâ)
(a) 2 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is attractive
2 × 10–4 Nm–1 SJeb Deekeâef<e&le
(b) 2 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is repulsive
µ0 i 2 × 10–4 Nm–1 SJeb Øeeflekeâef<e&le
Magnetic field inside conductor B = d ......(i) (c) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is attractive
2π R 2
Straight line passing through origin at surface (d = R) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 SJeb Deekeâef<e&le
µi (d) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is repulsive
B= 0 .......(ii) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 SJeb Øeeflekeâef<e&le
2πR
Maximum at surface NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Physics 431 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Two parallel wires carrying current in same B1 n1 N / 2πr1
direction will be attract each other. = = 1
B2 n 2 N 2 / 2πr2
B1 200 20
= ×
B2 40 100
F µ οi1i 2 2 × 10 −7 × 5 × 10
= = = 10 −4 N / m B1 1
L 2πd 10 × 10−2 =
B2 1
65. A long solenoid of 50 cm length having 100
turns carries a current of 2.5 A. The magnetic 67. A straight conductor carrying current i splits
field at the centre of the solenoid is : into two parts as shown in the figure. The
50 cm uecyeer efkeâmeer heefjveeefuekeâe, efpemeceW 100 Hesâjs nQ, radius of the circular loop is R. The total
magnetic field at the centre P of the loop is,
mes 2.5 A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Fme heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ keâesF& meerOee Ûeeuekeâ efpememes Oeeje i ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw,
kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nw: DeejsKe ceW oMee&S Devegmeej oes YeeieeW ceW štšlee nw~ Je=òeerÙe
(µ0 = 4 π × 10–7 T m A–1) heeMe keâer ef$epÙee R nw~ Fme heeMe kesâ kesâvõ P hej kegâue
(a) 3.14 × 10–4 T (b) 6.28 × 10–5 T ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nw–
–5
(c) 3.14 × 10 T (d) 6.28 × 10–4 T
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (d) : Given that,
50
l = 50cm = m = 0.5m
100
I = 2.5 A
N = 100 turns.
No of turns per unit length, µ0i µi
(a) , inward/ 0 , Yeerlej keâer Deesj
N 100 2R 2R
n= = = 200turns / m (b) zero/MetvÙe
l 0.5
(c) 3µ0i/32R, outward/3µ0i/32R, yeenj keâer Deesj
∴ Magnetic field inside solenoid
(d) 3µ0i/32R, inward/3µ0i/32R, Yeerlej keâer Deesj
B= µ o nI = 4π × 10 −7 × 200 × 2.5
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
B = 6.28 ×10−4 T Ans. (b) :
66. Two toroids 1 and 2 have total no. of turns 200
and 100 respectively with average radii 40 cm
and 20 cm respectively. If they carry same
current i, the ratio of the magnetic fields along
the two loops is,/oes šesje@Ùe[eW 1 Deewj 2 ceW kegâue hesâjeW
keâer mebKÙee ›eâceMe: 200 Deewj 100 nw leLee Fvekeâer Deewmele
π 3π
ef$epÙeeSB ›eâceMe: 40 cm Deewj 20 cm nw~ Ùeefo Fvemes θ1 = 90º = θ2 = 270º =
2 2
meceeve Oeeje (i) ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw, lees Fve oesveeW heeMeeW kesâ Into the plane
DevegefoMe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$eeW keâe Devegheele nw– µ 0 i1 θ1
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1 Magnetic field due to i1 is B1 =
2R 2π
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 2 : 1 Out of the plane
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) µ0 i 2 θ2
Ans. (b) : Given that: Magnetic field due to i2 is B2 =
2R 2 π
N1 = 200, N2 = 100, r1 = 40cm, r2 = 20 cm
B1 i1θ1 i
For a toroid magnetic field is = = 1 …… (i)
B2 i 2 θ2 3i 2
B = µ0nI
Where, n = number of turns per unit length From the figure if length l1 is equal to l then l2 is equal
N to 3l i.e.
= R 1 l1 l
2πr = =
Now R 2 l 2 3l
B1 µ 0 n1I R1 1
= =
B2 µ 0 n 2 I R2 3

Physics 432 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
If R1 = R then R2 = 3R i.e. ∆q − N ∆φ
=
i1 : i 2 =
1 1
: ∆t R ∆t
R1 R 2  − N ∆φ   − N.∆φ 
∆q =   ∆t =  
1 1  R ∆t   R 
=:
R 3R (–) sign shows that induced emf opposes the change in
flux.
i1 1/ R 3
= = …(ii) Total flux linkage ∆φ through a magnetic field can be
i 2 1/ 3R 1 given by
B1 i1 1 ∆φ = B.A
From equation (i) ⇒ = ×
B2 i 2 3 N.B.A
⇒ ∆q =
3 1 R
= × (from equation (ii)) magnetic field (B) of a solenoid is given by
1 3
B = µ0ni
B1 1 µ n.N.i.πr 2
= ⇒ ∆q = 0
B2 1 R
Bnet = B1 – B2 =0 4π × 10 −7 × 100 × 2 × 10 4 × 4 × π × (0.01) 2
∆q =
68. A long solenoid of diameter 0.1 m has 2 × 104 10π2
turns per meter. At the centre of the solenoid, a
coil of 100 turns and radius 0.01 m is placed ∆q = 32µc
with its axis coinciding with the solenoid axis. 69. A long wire carrying a steady current is bent
The current in the solenoid reduces at a into a circular loop of one turn. The magnetic
constant rate to 0 A from 4 A in 0.05 s. If the field at the centre of the loop is B. It is then
resistance of the coil is 10π2Ω , the total charge bent into a circular coil of n turns. The
flowing through the coil during this time magnetic field at the centre of this coil of n
is:/efkeâmeer uecyeer heefjveeefuekeâe keâe JÙeeme 0.1 ceer. nw~ turns will be
FmeceW leej kesâ hesâjeW keâer mebKÙee 2×104 Øeefle ceeršj nw~ efkeâmeer uecyes leej mes DeheefjJeleea efJeÅegle-Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes
Fmekesâ kesâvõ hej 0.01 ceer. ef$epÙee leLee 100 hesâjeW Jeeueer jner nw~ Skeâ uecyes leej keâes Skeâ Hesâjs kesâ Je=òeekeâej heeMe
Skeâ kegbâ[ueer Fme Øekeâej jKeer nw~ efkeâ oesveeW keâer De#e (uethe ) ceW ceesÌ[ves hej Fmekesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
mebheeleer nw~b heefjveeefuekeâe mes ØeJeeefnle nesves Jeeueer efJeÅegle keâe ceeve B nw~ Deiej Fmeer leej keâes n HesâjeW keâer Je=òeekeâej
Oeeje keâe ceeve Skeâ efmLej oj mes keâce neslee peelee nw Deewj kegbâ[ueer ceW ceesÌ[ efoÙee peelee nw, lees Fme n HesâjeW keâer
0.05 mes. ceW 4A mes MetvÙe nes peelee nw~ Ùeefo kegbâ[ueer keâe kegbâ[ueer kesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e nesiee :-
ØeeflejesOe 10π2Ω nw lees, Fme Devlejeue ceW kegbâ[ueer mes (a) nB (b) n2B
ØeJeeefnle kegâue DeeJesMe nesiee: (c) 2nB (d) 2n2B
(a) 32 πµC (b) 16 µC NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
(c) 32µC (d) 16 πµC Ans. (b) :
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
Ans. (c) : Given, diameter of long solenoid d1 = 0.1 m
Radius of inner coil, r2 = 0.01 m
Number of turns of long solenoid N = 2×104
Number of turns of inner coil n = 100
Resistance of inner coil R = 10 π2 Ω
current (i) in the solenoid varies from 0 to 4A
time ∆t = 0.05 s The circumference of first loop is the length of wire =
By Lenz's law 2π R
same wire is bent into n circular coils, thus new radius
dφ
emf, e = – N is found out by
dt l = 2π R = n (2π r)
Dividing by resistance R of coil on both side R
e − Ndφ ⇒ r=
= n
R Rdt For one turn the magnetic field at the centre of this wire
− N dφ µi
∆I = B= 0
R dt 2R

Physics 433 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For n turn the magnetic field at the centre of this wire µ0i
µ i.n B' =
B' = 0 2πr
2r at r = 2a
put r = R/n µi
µ n 2i B' = 0
B' = 0 = n 2 B. 4 πa
2R
B µ0i µ 0i
⇒ B' = n2 B = =1
B' 4πa 4πa
70. A long solenoid has 1000 turns. When a current
72. A long solenoid carrying a current produces a
of 4A flow through it, the magnetic flux linked
with each turn of the solenoid is 4×10 Wb. -3 magnetic field B along its axis. If the current is
The self -inductance of the solenoid is doubled and the number of turns per cm is
efkeâmeer uecyeer heefjveeefuekeâe ceW HesâjeW keâer mebKÙee 1000 nw~ halved, the new value of the magnetic field is –
peye Fme heefjveeefuekeâe mes 4A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw, leye Skeâ uecyeer OeejeJeener heefjveefuekeâe Deheves De#e kesâ meeLe-meeLe
Fme heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ ØelÙeskeâ Hesâjs mes mebyeæ ÛegcyekeâerÙe B ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e GlheVe keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo Oeeje keâe ceeve ogiegvee
Heäuekeäme 4×10-3 Wb neslee nw~ Fme heefjveeefuekeâe keâe mJe- keâj efoÙee peeS Deewj Øeefle mes. ceer. HesâjeW keâer mebKÙee DeeOeer keâj
ØesjkeâlJe nw : oer peeS, leye ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe veÙee ceeve nw-
(a) 1H (b) 4 H(c) 3 H (d) 2 H (a) B/2 (b) B
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 (c) 2B (d) 4B
Ans. (a) : Given, Number of turn, N = 1000 AIPMT-2003
Current, I = 4A Ans. (b): The Magnetic Field of a Solenoid is-
Flux for each turn = 4 × 10-3 wb B = µ0iN/L
For 1000 turns total flux (φ) = 1000 × 4 × 10–3 = 4 wb Where,
We know that, N = Number of turns in the solenoid
Total Magnetic flux φ = LI i = Current in the coil
Here, L = inductance L = Length of the coil
⇒ 4=L×4 If i is doubled and N is halved then magnetic field,
L = 1Henry B' = µ 2i ( N / 2) L 0
71. A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady B ' = µ 0i N L
current I. The current is uniformly distributed
over its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic B' = B
a
fields B and B', at a radial distance and 2a 73. A long solenoid has 500 turns. When a current
2 of 2 ampere is passed through it, the resulting
respectively, from the axis of the wire is: magnetic flux linked with each turn of the
ef$epÙee a kesâ efkeâmeer uecyes meerOes leej mes keâesF& mLeeÙeer Oeeje solenoid is 4 × 10–3 Wb. The self-inductance of
I ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Fme leej keâer DevegØemLe keâeš hej the solenoid is –
Oeeje Skeâmeceeve ™he mes efJeleefjle nw~ leej kesâ De]#e mes Skeâ uecyes yengkegâC[uekeâ (meesefuevee@F[) ceW 500 HesâjW nQ~
a peye FmeceW mes 2 SscheerÙej keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâer peeleer nw,
ef$epÙee otefjÙeeW Deewj 2a hej ›eâceMe: ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$eeW lees nj Hesâjs mes mecyeefvOele ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heäuekeäme 4 × 10–3
2
B Deewj B' keâe Devegheele nw- Wb nesleer nw~ meesefueveeF[ keâe mJeØesjkeâlJe nesiee :–
(a) 1.0 henry/1.0 nwvjer
(b) 4.0 henry/4.0 nwvjer
1 1
(a) 4 (b) (c) (d) 1 (c) 2.5 henry/nwvjer
(d) 2.0 henry/2.0 nwvjer
4 2
AIPMT-2008
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Ans. (d) : For a point inside the long solid cylindrical Ans. (a) : Given : Number of turns = 500
wire magnetic field is given by- Current I = 2 amp
µ ir Magnetic flux linked with each turn of solenoid
B= 0 2 = φ = 4 ×10–3 Wb per turn
2πa
We know relation N φ = LI (L → self inductance )
a
at r = ⇒ 500×4×10–3 = L ×2
2
µi 500 × 4 × 10 −3
B= 0 L=
4 πa 2
For a point outside the long solid cylindrical wire, L= 1 Henry

Physics 434 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
75. Two parallel wires in free space are 10 cm
18.7 Force between two Parallel apart and each carries a current of 10 A in the
Currents, the Ampere same direction. The force exerted by one wire
on the other, per metre length is
74. An arrangement of three parallel straight wires cegòeâ mLeeve ceW oes meceeblej leejW Skeâ otmejs mes 10 cm otjer
placed perpendicular to plane of paper hej efmLele nQ Deewj ØelÙeskeâ ceW 10 A keâer Oeeje meceeve efoMee
carrying same current ‘I’ along the same ceW ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ Skeâ leej Éeje otmejer leej hej Øeefle
direction is shown in Fig. Magnitude of force
per unit length on the middle wire ‘B’ is given ceeršj uecyeeF& hej Deejesefhele yeue nw:
by:/ÙeneB DeejsKe ceW leerve meceevlej leejeW keâer Skeâ JÙeJemLee (a) 2 × 10–4 N, repulsive/2 × 10–4 N, Øeeflekeâ<eea
oMee&Ùeer ieF& nw~ Ùes leej Fme heshej (he=‰) kesâ meceleue kesâ (b) 2 × 10–7 N, repulsive/2 × 10–7 N, Øeeflekeâ<eea
uecyeJeled nQ Deewj meYeer mes 'I' efJeÅegleOeeje Skeâ ner efoMee (c) 2 × 10–4 N, attractive/2 × 10–4 N, Deekeâ<eea
ceW ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Fve leerveeW kesâ yeerÛe ceW efmLele, leej (d) 2 × 10–7 N, attractive/2 × 10–7 N, Deekeâ<eer&
'I' keâer Øeefle FkeâeF& uecyeeF& hej ueieves Jeeues yeue keâe AIPMT-1997
heefjCeece nesiee? Ans. (c) : r = 10 cm
I = 10 A

Force due to current carrying conductor 'i2' on 'i1' in the

magnetic field 'B1' and having current element 'l' is
given by
µ0 I2 2µ 0 I 2 r ur
Fi2 = i 2 ( l × B )
(a) (b)
2 πd πd
2µ 0 I 2 µ0 I2 µ 0i1
(c) (d) Bdue to i1 =
πd 2πd 2 πr
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 F = i2 lB1 sin(90º)
µ i 
Ans. (d) : Fi2 = i 2 × l ×  0 1  sin 90º
 2 πr 
µi
Fi 2 = i 2 × l × 0 1
2 πr
10 × 10 × 4π × 10–7 × l
=
2π × 0.1
Fi 2
⇒ = 2 × 10 –4 N (attractive)
l
Magnetic field per unit length due to current carrying
wire is given by-
µI 18.8 Torque on Current Loop
B= 0
2πd Magnetic Dipole
Force due to magnetic field on current carrying wire per
unit length is- 76. A wheel with 20 metallic spokes each 1 m long
µ I 2 is rotated with a speed of 120 rpm in a plane
due to wire 1, FB1 = 0 perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 G. The
2 πd induced emf between the axle and rim of the
µ0 I2 wheel will be (1 G = 10–4 T)
due to wire 2, FB2 =
2 πd Oeeleg kesâ 20 mheeskeâ (Deejs), efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ keâer uecyeeF&
2 2 1 m nw, Jeeues efkeâmeer heefnS keâes 120 rpm keâer Ûeeue mes
 µ0 I 2   µ 0 I2  µ0 I 2
Resultant =   +  = 0.4 G leer›elee kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ uecyeJeled leue ceW
 2πd   2πd  2 πd
IetefCe&le keâjeÙee ieÙee nw~
µ0 I 2 Fme heefnS keâer Oegjer Deewj vesefce kesâ yeerÛe Øesefjle emf nesieer,
Hence, force on wire 3 i.e. middle wire is .
2 πd (1 G = 10–4 T)

Physics 435 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 2.51 V (b) 2.51 × 10–4 V W = MB (cosθ1– cosθ2)
(c) 2.51 × 10 V
–5
(d) 4.0 × 10–5 V Here, θ1 = 0°, θ2 = 60°
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II W = MB (cos0°– cos60°)
 1
Ans. (b) : Induced EMF (E) =
1
Bωr 2 W = MB  1 − 
2  2
Where, B = Magnetic field, ω = Angular speed, r = MB
W= ... (i)
length of spoke 2
120  2 The torque on needle is–
(E) = × ( 0.4 × 10−4 ) × 2π 
1 r r r
 (1) τ = M × B in magnitude,
2  60 
τ = MB sinθ = MB sin 60°
1
(E) = × 0.8π× 10−4 × 2 3
2 τ= MB ...(ii)
(E) = 2.512×10-4 Volt 2
Dividing (2) by (1)
77. A wire of length L meter carrying a current of l
τ
ampere is bent in the form of circle. Its
magnetic moment is W
= 3 (Q W = 3 )
L ceeršj uecyeeF& kesâ efkeâmeer leej kesâ, efpememes I SefcheÙej keâer τ = 3W = 3 × 3J , τ = 3J
Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw, Je=òe keâer Deeke=âefle ceW ceesÌ[e ieÙee 79. A square loop, carrying a steady current I, is
nw~ Fmekeâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& nw, placed in a horizontal plane near a long
(a) I L2/4π Am2 (b) I L2/4 Am2 straight conductor carrying a steady current I1
at a distance d from the conductor as shown in
(c) I πL /4 Am
2 2
(d) 2I L2/π Am2
figure. The loop will experience:/Skeâ Jeiee&keâej
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
uethe, efpemeceW efveÙele Oeeje I ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw, keâes
Ans. (a) : Given length of wire = L
Q Wire is bent in form of circle of radius 'r'
efÛe$eevegmeej Skeâ uecyes meerOes Ûeeuekeâ efpemeceW I1 Oeeje
⇒ L = 2πr {r = radius of circle} ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw leLee pees uethe mes d otjer hej nw kesâ
L meceerhe #eweflepe leue ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ uethe DevegYeJe keâjsiee:
⇒r=
2π
Now, Magnetic Moment = Current × Area
= I ×A
= I . πr2
2
 L
=I.π   (a) a net attractive force towards the
 2π 
conductor/Ûeeuekeâ keâer Deesj Skeâ vesš Deekeâ<e&Ce yeue
IL2 (b) a net repulsive force away from the
Magnetic moment = A-m2
4π conductor/Ûeeuekeâ mes otj Skeâ vesš Øeeflekeâ<eea yeue
78. A magnetic needle suspended parallel to a (c) a net torque acting upward perpendicular to
the horizontal plane/#eweflepe leue kesâ uecyeJeled Thej
magnetic field requires 3J of work to turn it
through 60º. The torque needed to maintain the keâer Deesj Skeâ vesš yeue DeeIetCe& keâeÙe&jle nw
needle in this position will be (d) a net torque acting downward normal to the
efkeâmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ meceevlej ueškeâer ÛegcyekeâerÙe megF& horizontal plane/#eweflepe leue kesâ uecyeJeled veerÛes keâer
Deesj Skeâ vesš yeue DeeIetCe& keâeÙe&jle nw
keâes 60º Iegceeves kesâ efueS 3J keâeÙe& keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
nesleer nw~ lees, Fme megF& keâes Fmeer efmLeefle ceW yeveeÙes jKeves kesâ
Ans. (a) : From figure we can say
efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ yeue-DeeIetCe& (še@ke&â) keâe ceeve nesiee:-
3
(a) 3J J (b)
2
(c) 2 3J (d) 3J
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (d) : Work done in changing orientation of a
magnetic needle of magnetic moment M in a magnetic
field B from position θ1 to θ2 is given by–

Physics 436 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
µ 0 I1Il ef›eâÙeekeâejer #es$e nw #es$e efoMee kesâ meceevlej efoMee mes
then, F1 =
2πd Ûegcyekeâ keâes Oeerjs-Oeerjs #es$e efoMee mes 60° keâer efoMee lekeâ
µ 0 I1Il ues peeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nesiee~
F3 =
2π ( d + l ) (a) 2J (b) 0.6 J
(c) 12 J (d) 6 J
F1 > F3
AIMPT-2009
fnet = F1 – F3
Ans. (d) : Given – M = 2 × 104 JT–1
So, Wire is attractive loop and a net attractive force
towards the conductor B = 6 × 10–4 T
θ1 = 0° & θ2 = 60°
80. A closely wound solenoid of 2000 turns and area
of cross-section 1.5×10-4 m2 carries a current of Work done to rotate bar magnet from θ1 to θ2,
2.0 A. It is suspended through its centre and W = MB [cosθ1 – cosθ2]
perpendicular to its length, allowing it to turn in = MB [1 – cos 60°]
a horizontal plane in a uniform magnetic field 5 1
× 10-2 tesla making an angle of 30° with the axis = 2 × 104 × 6×10–4[1– ]
2
of the solenoid. The torque on the solenoid will W=6J
be/Skeâ heefjveeefuekeâe ceW 2000 Hesâjs heeme–heeme uehesšs ieÙes
82. A coil carrying electric current is placed in
nQ~ Fmekeâer DevegØemLe keâeš keâe #es$eHeâue 1.5×10-4 m2 nw uniform magnetic field/Skeâ Oeeje ØeJeeefnle kegbâ[ue Ùeefo
Deewj FmeceW 2.0 A keâer efJeÅegleOeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Fmes Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKeer ieÙeer nw lees GmeceW
uecyeeF& kesâ uecyeJeled Deheves kesâvõ mes Fme Øekeâej ueškeâeÙee (a) torque is formed/DeeIetCe& yevesiee
ieÙee nw efkeâ Ùen heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ meeLe 30° keâe keâesCe yeveeles (b) e.m.f is induced/efJe.Jee.ye. yevesiee
ngS 5×10-2 šsmuee kesâ Skeâmeceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW #eweflepe (c) both (a) and (b) are correct/oesveeW yevesiee
meceleue ceW ceg[
Ì mekeâlee nw lees, heefjveeefuekeâe hej yeue DeeIetCe& (d) none of these/Ghejesòeâ ceW keâesF& veneR
nesiee– AIPMT-1993
(a) 3 × 10–3 N m (b) 1.5 × 10–3 N m Ans. (a) : A coil carrying electric current is placed in
(c) 1.5 × 10–2 N m (d) 3 × 10–2 N m uniform magnetic field then torque is formed. The
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 expression of the torque is given by-
Ans. (c) : Magnetic moment of the loop τ = N I A B sinθ
M = NIA The loop carries a current I has N turns each of area A
where, M = Magnetic moment and perpendicular to the loop makes an angle θ with the
N = Number of turn. field B.
I = Current 83. A current carrying coil is subjected to a
A = Area of Cross Section uniform magnetic field. The coil will orient so
M= NIA that its plane becomes
= 2000×2×1.5×10-4 Skeâ Oeeje ØeJeeefnle kegâC[ueer Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
= 0.6 J/T ceW jKeer ieÙeer nw~ kegâC[ueer Ietcesieer leeefkeâ Gmekeâe meceleue
Torque(τ) = MB Sinθ (a) inclined at 45º to the magnetic field/ÛegiyekeâerÙe
B = magnetic field. #es$e mes 45º hej nes peeS
τ = 0.6×5×10-2 ×sin30º (b) inclined at any arbitrary angle to the magnetic
1 field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes efkeâmeer Yeer keâesCe hej nes peeS
= 0.6×5×10-2 ×
2 (c) parallel to the magnetic field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ
–2
meceevlej nes peeS
τ = 1.5 × 10 N−m (d) perpendicular to magnetic field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ
81. A bar magnet having a magnetic movement of uecyeJeled nes peeS
2 × 104 JT–1 is free to rotate in a horizontal AIPMT-1988
plane. A horizontal magnetic field B = 6×10–4 T
Ans. (d) : A current carrying coil behave as a magnetic
exists in the space. The work done in taking the
dipole. Therefore, in a uniform magnetic field coil will
magnet slowly from a direction parallel to the
get aligned such that the dipole moment of the coil is
field to a direction 60º from the field is :
parallel to the magnetic field. And we know that dipole
2×104 JT–1 ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& keâe Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ moment of the coil is perpendicular to its plane.
Skeâ #eweflepe leue ceW mJelev$e ™he mes Ietce mekeâlee nw~ Fme Therefore, coil will align itself such that its plane is
mLeeve hej B = 6 × 10–4 T keâe #eweflepe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field.

Physics 437 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
84. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M is cut into According to the question
two parts of equal length. The magnetic moment W1 = nW2
of each part will be/ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& M keâe Skeâ ÚÌ[ MB = n × 0.5 MB
Ûegcyekeâ meceeve uecyeeF& kesâ oes YeeieeW ceW keâeše peelee nw~ ⇒ n=2
ØelÙeskeâ Yeeie keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& nesiee: Hence, option (c) is correct
86. A circular loop of area 0.01 m2 carrying a
(a) M (b) 2M
current of 10 A, is held perpendicular to a
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 0.5M magnetic field of intensity 0.1 T. The torque
AIPMT-1997 acting on the loop is/0.01 m2 #es$eheâue kesâ Skeâ
Ans. (d) : The magnetic moment M of a bar magnet is Je=òeekeâj heeMe ceW 10 A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw Deewj
given by- uethe 0.1 T leer›elee kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e uecyeJeled jKee
M = m×l .........(i) ieÙee nw~ uethe hej ueieves Jeeuee yeue DeeIetCe& nw:
Where, m = dipole strength of bar magnet (a) 0.001 N m (b) 0.8 N m
l = length between the two pole of the bar (c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 0.01 N m.
magnet.
AIPMT-1994
The magnetic moment of the part of magnets is given
Ans. (c) :
by-
m×l  l
M' = m×l' = Q l' → 
2  2
M
⇒ M' = uur ur
2 τ = M×B
Thus, the magnetic moment of the part of bar magnet is = MB sinθ
M
. Hence, the new magnetic moment of each parts are = IAB sinθ
2 = IAB sin0º
M ⇒ τ = 0
.
2
85. The work done in turning a magnet of 18.9 The Moving Coil Galavanometer
magnetic moment M by an angle of 90º from
the meridian, is n times the corresponding 87. An emf is generated by an ac generator having
work done to turn it through an angle of 60º. 100 turn coil, of loop area 1 m2. The coil rotates
The value of n is given by at a speed of one revolution per second and
Skeâ Ûegcyekeâ efpemekeâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& M nw, keâes placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.05 T
ÙeecÙeesòej mes 90º Iegceeves ceW efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& 60º mes perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the coil.
The maximum value of emf is
Iegceeves ceW efkeâÙes ieÙes keâeÙe& mes n iegvee pÙeeoe nw lees n keâe }the #es$e 1m2 kesâ 100 hesâjeW kegbâ[ueer Jeeues ØelÙeeJeleea
ceeve: Oeeje peefve$e Éeje Skeâ efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue Glhevve neslee
(a) 1/2 (b) 1/4 nw~ kegbâ[ueer Øeefle meskebâ[ Skeâ Ûekeäkeâj keâer Ûeeue mes Ietcelee
(c) 2 (d) 1 nw Deewj kebgâ[ueer keâes IetCe&ve kesâ De#e kesâ uebyeJeled 0.05 T
AIPMT-1995 kesâ Skeâmeceeve ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee peelee nw efJeÅegle
Ans. (c) : The work done in moving a magnetic dipole Jeenkeâ yeue keâe DeefOekeâlece ceeve nw–
from one angle to another angle in a uniform magnetic
(a) 62.8V (b) 6.28V
field is-
(c) 3.14V (d) 31.4V
W = MB (cosθ1 – cosθ2)
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
where, M = magnetic dipole moment.
Work done in rotating magnet of magnetic moment, M Ans. (d) : Given: N = 100
by an angle of 90º from meridian (θ2 = 0º) is A = 1 m2
B = 0.05T
⇒ W1 = MB (cos0º – cos90º)
f = 1 revolution/sec
⇒ W1 = MB (1–0)
We know that the maximum value of emf generated by
So, W1 = MB ..........(i)
an ac generator is given by-
Work done in rotating from magnetic meridian θ1 = 0º
εo = NABω
to θ = 60º is-
W2 = MB (cos 0º– cos60º) = 100×0.05×1×2π×1
W2 = MB (1 – 0.5) = 31.4 V
W2 = 0.5 MB .......(ii) ε o = 31.4 V
Physics 438 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
88. A 800 turn coil of effective area 0.05 m2 is kept 90. A rectangular coil of length 0.12 m and width
perpendicular to a magnetic field 5 × 10–5 T. 0.1 m having 50 turns of wire is suspended
When the plane of the coil is rotated by 90° vertically in a uniform magnetic field of
around any of its coplanar axis in 0.1 s, the emf strength 0.2 Weber/m2. The coil carries a
induced in the coil will be:/ ØeYeeJeer #es$eheâue 0.05 current of 2 A. If the plane of the coil is
m2 keâer 800 hesâjes keâer keâesF& kegâC[ueer 5 × 10–5 T kesâ inclined at an angle of 30o with the direction of
the field, the torque required to keep the coil in
efkeâmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ uecyeJele jKeer nw~ peye Fme stable equilibrium will be
kegâC[ueer kesâ leue keâes 0.1s ceW Fmekesâ efkeâmeer meceleueerÙe Skeâ 0.12m uecyeer, 0.1m ÛeewÌ[er kegâ[ueer ceW leej kesâ 50
De#e kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj 90° hej IetefCe&le efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees hesâjs nQ~ Fmekeâes 0.2 Weber/m2 kesâ Skeâmeceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe
Fme kegâC[ueer ceW Øesefjle efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue nesiee~ #es$e ceW TOJee&Oej ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw~ keggbâ[ueer ceW 2A
(a) 0.2V (b) 2 × 10–3 V efJeÅegleOeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Ùeefo kegbâ[ueer, ÛegcyekeâerÙe
(c) 0.02 V (d) 2 V #es$e mes 30° keâesCe yeveeleer nw lees, Fmes jeskesâ jKeves kesâ efueÙes
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
DeeJeMÙekeâ yeue DeeIetCe& keâe ceeve nesiee :
Ans. (c) : Give that, Magnetic field, B = 5×10–5 T
(a) 0.12 Nm (b) 0.15 Nm
Number of turns in coil, N = 800
2 (c) 0.20 Nm (d) 0.24 Nm
Area of coil, A = 0.05 m
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Time taken to rotate ∆t = 0.15
Ans. (c) : The tourque on a loop in uniform magnetic
φf = 0
ur ur field is given by.
( )
r uur ur
φi =N B .A τ = M×B
r uur ur
= 800 × 5 × 10 × 5 × 10 = 2 × 10 weber
–5 –2 –3
τ = M × B sin 60°.
– ∆φ – ( φf – φi )
Now einduced = =
∆t ∆t
– ( 0 – 2 × 10 ) 0.002
–3

= =
0.1 0.1
einduced = 0.02 V As the coil is inclined at an angle of 30° with magnetic
89. A 250-Turn rectangular coil of length 2.1 cm field, so area vector will be inclined at an angle of 60°
and width 1.25 cm carries a current of 85 µA with the field,
and subjected to a magnetic field of strength M = NI × lb = 50 × 2 × 0.12 × 0.1 = 1.2
0.85 T. Work done for rotating the coil by 180° B = 0.2 T
against the torque is/250 hesâjeW Jeeueer Skeâ τ = 1.2 × 0.2 × sin 60°
DeeÙeleekeâej kegbâ[ueer keâer uecyeeF& 2.1 mesceer. leLee τ = 0.207 Nm
ÛeewÌ[eF& 1.25 mesceer. nw~ FmeceW 85 µA keâer efJeÅegle Oeeje 91. A rectangular, a square, a circular and an
ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Fme hej 0.85T keâer leer›elee keâe Skeâ elliptical loop, all in the (x – y) plane, are moving
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e Deejesefhele efkeâÙee peelee nw~ lees, yeue out of a uniform magnetic field with a constant
DeeIetCe& kesâ efJe®æ Fme kegbâ[ueer keâes 180º mes Iegceeves kesâ velocity, V = v.iˆ . The magnetic field is directed
along the negative z-axis direction. The induced
efueÙes DeeJeMÙekeâ keâeÙe& keâe ceeve nesiee? emf, during the passage of these loops, come out
(a) 9.1 µJ (b) 4.55 µJ (c) 2.3 µJ (d) 1.15µJ of the field region, will not remain constant for
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 :/Skeâ DeeÙeleekeâej Skeâ Je=òeerÙe Deewj Skeâ oerIe&Je=òeerÙe heâvo
Ans. (a): Given that, Length l = 2.1 cm pees meYeer x – y leue ceW nw, Skeâ DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes
ur
Width W = 1.25 cm, Current (I) = 85 µA efmLej Jesie V = v.iˆ mes yeenj efvekeâue jns nw~ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
Magnetic field, B = 0.85 T keâer efoMee $e+Ceelcekeâ z De#e keâer efoMee ceW nw~ #es$e mes yeenj
When it is rotated by an angle of 180º then, efvekeâueves kesâ Øe›eâce ceW Fve heâvo ceW Øesefjle efJe.Jee. yeue (emf)
Work done in rotating the coil is given by efmLejceeveer veneR jnsiee:
W = MB (cos θ1 – cos θ2) = MB (cos 0º – cos180º) (a) any of the four loops/ Ûeej heâvoeW mes efkeâmeer ceW Yeer
W = 2 MB (b) The rectangular, circular and elliptical loops/
W = 2 (NIA)B DeeÙeleekeâej, Je=òeerÙe Deewj oerIe&Je=òeerÙe heâvoeW ceW
= 2 × 250 × 85 × 10–6 × (1.25 × 2.1 × 10–4) × 85 × 10–2 (c) The circular and the elliptical loops
= 9482812.5 × 10–12 Je=òeerÙe Deewj oerIe&Je=òeerÙe heâvoeW ceW
⇒ W = 9.4 µJ ≈ 9.1 µJ (d) Only the elliptical loop/ kesâJeue oerIe&Je=òeerÙe heâvoeW ceW
Hence, best possible choice of answer is option (a). AIMPT-2009
Physics 439 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): When the loops are being drawn cut of field, 93. Biot-Savart's law rindicates that the moving
at which the number of field line cutting through the electrons (velocity v ) produce a magnetic field
r r
loop decreases will be constant for square and rectangle B ⊥ v such that/yeeÙees meeJeš& efveÙece Fbefiele keâjlee nw
loops, but not for circular or elliptical shape. efkeâ v Jesie mes ieefleceeve Fueskeäš^e@veeW Éeje ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B
Fme Øekeâej keâe neslee nw efkeâ
r r r r
18.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems (a) B ⊥ v (b) B || v
(c) it obeys inverse cube law./Ùen JÙegl›eâce Ieve efveÙece
92. Two charged particles traverse identical helical
paths in a completely opposite sense in a
keâe heeueve keâjlee nw~
r (d) it is along the line joining the electron and
uniform magnetic field, B = Bo kˆ ./oes DeeJesefMele point of observation./Ùen Øes#eCe efyevog Dewj Fueskeäš^e@ve
r
keâCe efkeâmeer Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = B kˆ ceW
o keâes efceueeves Jeeueer jsKee kesâ DevegefoMe neslee nw~
hetCe&le: meJe&mece meefhe&ue heLeeW hej efJehejerle efoMeeDeeW ceW Ans. (a) : (a) Biot-Savart r
law indicates that moving
ieceve keâjles nQ lees Fvekesâ electrons
r
(velocity v ) produce a magnetic field B such
r
(a) They have equal z-components of that B ⊥ v .
momenta./mebJesieeW kesâ z-DeJeÙeJe meceeve nesves ÛeeefnS~ (b) Magnetic field produced by charges moving with
r
(b) They must have equal charges./DeeJesMe meceeve velocity v at a distance r is,
→ →
nesves ÛeeefnS~ r  µ  dl× r
(c) They necessarily represent a particle- B =  0  .i 3 or
antiparticle pair./DeeJesMe DeJeMÙe ner keâCe-ØeeflekeâCe  4π  r
Therefore,
Ùegieue keâes efve™efhele keâjles neWies~
 µ  dlsinθ
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy/DeeJesMe SJeb B =  0  .i 2
õJÙeceeve keâe Devegheele mebyebOe keâer hegef° keâjsiee~  4π  r
→ →

 e   e  ∴ B⊥ v
ur r r
 +  = 0. The direction of B is along ( v × r ) , i.e, perpendicular to
 m1   m 2  r r
Ans. (d) : Q Charged particle in a magnetic field with the plane containing v and r .
an initial horizontal velocity exhibits a helical motion. 94. A current carrying circular loop of radius R is
Path of helical motion can be describe as – P = Tvcosθ placed in the x–y plane with centre at the
where, T = Time period, v = initial velocity origin. Half of the loop with x > 0 is now bent
so that it now lies in the y – z plane./R ef$epÙee keâe
and θ = Angle made by particle with horizontal
2πm 2πm
keâesF& OeejeJeener Je=òeekeâej uethe x-y leue ceW Fme Øekeâej
Q T= ⇒T × vcosθ = vcos θ jKee nw efkeâ Gmekeâe kesâvõ cetue efyevog hej nes~ Fmekeâe Jen
qB qB
Deæ&Yeeie efpemekesâ efueS x > 0 nw, Deye Fme Øekeâj ceesÌ[
2πm
⇒ P= v cos θ efoÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ Ùen y-z leue ceW jns~
qB (a) The magnitude of magnetic moment now
P 2πv cos θ diminishes./Deye ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& keâe heefjceeCe keâce
⇒ =
m qB nes peelee nw~
(b) The magnetic moment does not change.
/ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& heefjJeefle&le veneR neslee~
r
(c) The magnitude of B at (0, 0, z), z >> R
increases C./ (0, 0, z), z > > R hej B keâe heefjceeCe
ye{ peelee nw~
r
(d) The magnitude of B at (0, 0, z), z > > R is
unchanged./ (0, 0, z), z > > R hej keâe heefjceeCe
Q For two given particles, helical path has an equal DeheefjJeefle&le jnlee nw~
magnitude so pitch 'P' is constant. Also, all the other Ans. (a) : Magnetic moment of loop placed in x-y
parameters are constants & hence charge to mass ratio is plane, M = IπR2, it acts along z-direction.
constant. Now, the loop is bent in z half.
⇒For given two particle to follow two opposite paths, they
should have opposite charges with equal magnitude.
∴ Sum of the charge to mass ratio of two particles will
have equal and opposite magnitude, which is to be zero.
 e   e 
⇒ + =0
 m1   m 2 
Physics 440 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 πR 2  96. In a cyclotron, a charged particle/meeFkeäueesš^e@ve ceW
∴ M1 = I   acting along z-direction keâesF& DeeJesefMele keâCe
 2 
(a) undergoes acceleration all the time./nj meceÙe
 πR 2 
& M2 = I   acting along x-direction lJejCe lespeer mes iegpejlee nw
 2  (b) speeds up between the dees because of the
The direction of magnetic moment are along the z- magnetic field./ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ keâejCe oesveeW ‘[er’
direction and x-direction kesâ yeerÛe kesâ Deblejeue ceW lJeefjle neslee nw~
∴ Effective magnetic moment, (c) speeds up in a dee./ Ûeeue ‘[er’ ceW yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
M net = M12 + M 2 2 (d) slows down within a dee and speed up
2 2
between dees./keâer Ûeeue ‘[er’ ceW cevo nes peeleer nw
 IπR 2   IπR 2  leLee oesveeW ‘[er’ kesâ yeerÛe yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
⇒ M net =   + 
 2   2  Ans. (a) : In a cyclotron, charged particles experiences
IπR 2
M coulombic force due to electric field between the dees
⇒ Mnet = 2 = and magnetic force (force due to magnetic field) while
2 2 circulating inside the dees. That is it always experiences
So, Mnet <M or m diminishes. a centripetal force.
95. An electron is projected with uniform velocity Therefore, it always accelerates.
along the axis of a current carrying long • The high energy particles produced in a cyclotron are
solenoid. Which of the following is true?/Skeâ used to bombard nuclei and study the resulting nuclear
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes efkeâmeer uecyeer OeejJeener heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ reactions and hence investigate nuclear structure.
De#e kesâ DevegefoMe Skeâ meceeve Jesie mes Øe#esefhele efkeâÙee 97. A circular current loop of magnetic moment M
is in an arbitrary orientation in an external
peelee nw~ efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw? r
magnetic field B . The work done to rotate the
(a) The electron will be accelerated along the loop by 30° about an axis perpendicular to its
axis./Fueskeâš^e@ve De#e kesâ DevegefoMe lJeefjle nesiee~ plane is/ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& M keâe keâesF& efJeÅegleJeener
(b) The electron path will be circular about the Je=òeekeâej uethe, efkeâmeer ÙeeÂefÛÚkeâ efoefiJevÙeeme ceW, efkeâmeer
axis./De#e kesâ heefjle: Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe heLe Je=òeekeâej nesiee~ yee¢e ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B ceW efmLele nw~ uethe keâes Fmekesâ leue
(c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to kesâ uecyeJeled De#e kesâ heefjle: 30O hej IetCe&ve keâjeves ceW
the axis and hence execute a helical path. efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& nw:
/Fueskeäš^e@ve De#e mes 45º hej yeue DevegYeJe keâjsiee Deewj Fme MB
Øekeâej kegbâ[efuele heLe hej ieceve keâjsiee~ (a) MB (b) 3
2
(d) The electron will continue to move with MB
uniform velocity along the axis of the (c) (d) zero.
2
solenoid./Fueskeäš^e@ve heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ De#e kesâ DevegefoMe
Ans. (d) :
Skeâ meceeve Jesie mes ieefle keâjlee jnsiee~
Ans. (d) : Let us consider that charge 'q' is projected in
an uniform magnetic field 'B' with velocity 'v' at an
angle 'θ'. The expression for the force on the charge due
to magnetic field as -
F = q (v × B)
F = qv B sinθ ..................(i)
When the axis of rotation of loop is along B, then the
According to the question, the charge is projected along → →
the axis of solenoid. The magnetic field is also parallel angle between B and A is 900 always. So work done
to the direction of the velocity vector of the charge as by a circular current carrying loop to rotate is given by,
the field lines are parallel to the axis of the solenoid. i.e. W = MB (cosθ1 – cosθ2)
θ = 00 and sinθ = 0 W.D. = MB cos900
F = q v B sin 0º ∴ W=0
⇒ F=0
• The rotation of the loop by 30º about an axis
Hence, the force due to the magnetic field on the charge perpendicular to its plane make no change in the angle
will be zero. It means the electron will continue to move made by axis of the loop with the direction of magnetic
with a uniform velocity along the axis of the solenoid. field therefore, the work done to rotate the loop is zero.

Physics 441 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
19.
Magnetism and Matter
DeejsKe ceW ob[ (ÚÌ[) ÛegcyekeâeW keâer JÙeJemLeeDeeW kesâ
19.1 The Bar Magnet efJevÙeeme oMee&Ùes ieÙes nQ~ ØelÙeskeâ Ûegcyekeâ keâe efÉOeÇgJe
DeeIetCe& m nw~ efkeâmeceW vesš ÛegcyekeâerÙe efÉOegÇJe DeeIetCe& keâe
1. A bar magnet is hung by a thin cotton thread in
a uniform horizontal magnetic field and is in ceeve DeefOekeâlece nesiee?
equilibrium state. The energy required to
rotate it by 60° is W. Now the torque required
to keep the magnet in this new position is.
efkeâmeer Skeâmeceeve #eweflepe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW Skeâ heleues metleer
Oeeies mes ueškeâeÙee peeÙes lees Skeâ ob[ Ûegcyekeâ meecÙeeJemLee ceW
nw~ Fmes 600 mes Iegceeves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ Tpee& W nw~ Deye
Fme Ûegcyekeâ keâes efkeâmeer veÙeer efmLeefle ceW yeveeÙes jKeves kesâ efueS
DeeJeMÙekeâ yeue-DeeIetCe& keâe ceeve nesiee :-
W
(a) (b) 3W AIPMT-06.05.2014
3
Ans. (c) : The direction of magnetic dipole moment is
3W 2W from south to north pole.
(c) (d)
2 3 In figure (a)
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Ans. (b) :

m net = m 2 + m 2 + 2mm cos 90°

= m2 + m 2 = 2 m
In figure (b)

mnet = m – m = 0
Torque acting on the magnet is, In figure (c)
τ = MB sin 60º – (i)
Energy required/work done can be written as-
W = MB cos 60º – (ii)
Where M is Magnetic Moment and B is Magnetic field
From (i) & (ii), we get m net = m 2 + m 2 + 2mm cos 30°
τ 3/2  3
=
2m 2 + 2m 2  = m 2+ 3
 2 
W 1/ 2 =
 
τ=W 3
In figure (d)-
2. Following figures show the arrangement of bar
magnets in different configurations. Each
magnet has magnetic dipole moment m. Which
configuration has highest net magnetic dipole
moment?

Physics 442 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
4. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M is placed
m net = m 2 + m 2 + 2mm cos 60°
at right angles to a magnetic induction B. If a
1 force F is experienced by each pole of the
= 2m 2 + 2m 2   magnet, the length of the magnet will be
2
Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe ÚÌ[, ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& M keâes
m net = m 3 ÛegcyekeâerÙe ØesjCe B kesâ mecekeâesCe hej jKee ieÙee nw Ùeefo
from above results we can say that figure (c) gives the Ûegcyekeâ kesâ ØelÙeskeâ OegÇJe hej Skeâ yeue F keâe DevegYeJe
maximum net magnetic dipole moment. neslee nw, lees Ûegcyekeâ keâer uecyeeF& nesieer~
3. A bar magnet of length 'l' and magnetic dipole (a) F/MB (b) MB/F
moment 'M' is bent in the form of an arc as (c) BF/M (d) MF/B
shown in figure. The new magnetic dipole NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
moment will be/Skeâ ÚÌ[ (ob[) keâer uecyeeF& 'l' nw Ans. (b)
Deewj Fmekeâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe efÉOegÇJe yeue-DeeIetCe& 'M' nw~ Ùeefo
Fmes DeejsKe (efÛe$e) ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej Skeâ Ûeehe kesâ
Deekeâej ceW ceesÌ[ efoÙee peeÙes lees, Fmekeâe veÙee ÛegcyekeâerÙe
efÉOegÇJe yeue DeeIetCe& nesiee :
In given figure, torque on the dipole,
τ = (F × L) = MB sin θ
F × L = MB sin 90°
MB
L=
F
M 5. There are four light-weight-rod samples A,B,C,
(a) (b) M
2 D separately suspended by threads. A bar
3 2 magnet is slowly brought near each sample and
(c) M (d) M the following observations are noted :
π π
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 Ûeej nukeâer ÚÌ[eW A, B, C Deewj D keâes OeeieeW mes Deueie-
Ans. (c)
Deueie ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw~ Skeâ ÚÌ[ (oC[) Ûegcyekeâ keâes
Oeerjs-Oeerjs ØelÙeskeâ kesâ heeme ueeÙee peelee nw Deewj
efvecveefueefKele Øes#eCe veesš efkeâS peeles nQ :
A is feebly repelled/A nukeâer meer Øeeflekeâef<e&le nesleer nw
B is feebly attracted/B nukeâer meer Deekeâef<e&le nesleer nw
C is strongly attracted/C yengle DeefOekeâ Deekeâef<e&le
nesleer nw
D remains unaffected/D DeØeYeeefJele jnleer nw
Given that, Initial magnetic moment = M
Which one of the following is true?
M
Pole strength = lees efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve mener nw?
l
(a) A is of a non-magnetic material
arc A DeÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& keâer nw
angle =
radius (b) B is of a paramagnetic material
radius =
arc
=
l
=
3l B DeÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& keâer nw
angle π π (c) C is of a diamagnetic material
3
C ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& keâer nw
 3l 
New distance between pole 2r sin 30o = r =   (d) D is of a ferromagnetic material
π
D ueewn ÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& keâer nw
New magnetic moment = Pole strength x distance
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
M 3l
= × Ans. (b) : Since, A is feebly repelled
l π → A develops weak magnetization opposite to external
3M field
=
π → A is dia-magnetic in nature.

Physics 443 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
B is feebly attracted: Q DeeJesMe
hej yeue nw –
→ B develops weak magnetization in the direction of (a) Zero/MetvÙe
external field
(b) directed along OP/ OP kesâ DevegefoMe nesiee
B is of a paramagnetic material.
C is strongly attracted : (c) directed along PO/PQ kesâ DevegefoMe nesiee
→ C develops strong magnetization along the external (d) directed perpendicular to the plane of
field paper/keâeiepe kesâ meceleue hej uecye kesâ DevegefoMe nesiee
C must be ferromagnetic in nature. AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Hence option (b) is correct. Ans. (a) : The force of attraction on Q by the north
6. A vibration magnetometer placed in magnetic pole of first magnet is F. The force of attraction on
meridian has a small bar magnet. The magnet some charge by the north pole of another magnet must
executes oscillations with a time period of 2 sec be opposite to that of the first magnet. Thus they can
in earth's horizontal magnetic field of 24 cancel the effect of one another hence force on charge Q
microtesla. When a horizontal field of 18 is zero .
microtesla is produced opposite to the earth's ⇒ Magnetic field due to bar magnets exerts force on
field by placing a current carrying wire, the moving charge only. Since the charge is at rest, zero
new time period of magnet will be – force act on it.
Skeâ keâcheVe Ûegcyekeâveceeheer keâes Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ kesâ
8. A bar magnet is oscillating in the Earth's
ÛegcyekeâerÙe ÙeecÙeesòej ceW efmLele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ ÛegcyekeâerÙe magnetic field with a period T. What happens
#es$e keâe #eweflepe Ieškeâ 24 ceeF›eâesšsmeuee ceW Ûegcyekeâ 2 to this period and motion if its mass is
sec DeeJele&keâeue kesâ meeLe oesueve keâjlee nw~ Skeâ quadrupled–/Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ he=LJeer kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe
OeejeJeener leej efmLele keâjkesâ, heLJeer kesâ #es$e kesâ efJehejerle #es$e ceW T DeeJele& keâeue mes oesueve keâj jne nw~ Ùeefo
Skeâ 18 ceeF›eâesšsmeuee keâe #eweflepe #es$e GlheVe efkeâÙee Fmekeâe õJÙeceeve Ûeej iegvee keâj efoÙee peeS leye Gmekeâe
peelee nw, lees Ûegcyekeâ keâe veÙee DeeJele&keâeue nesiee – DeeJele& keâeue Deewj ieefle keäÙee neWsies-
(a) 1s (b) 2s (a) Motion remains S.H. with time period =
(c) 3s (d) 4s T/2/mejue DeeJele& ieefle jnsieer Deewj DeeJele& keâeue = T/2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
(b) Motion remains S.H. with time period =
Ans. (d) : Time period in vibration magnetometer, 2T/mejue DeeJele& ieefle jnsieer Deewj DeeJele& keâeue = 2T
I (c) Motion remains S.H. with time period = 4T/
T = 2π
M × BH mejue DeeJele& ieefle jnsieer Deewj DeeJele& keâeue = 4T
(d) Motion remains S.H. with time period
T1 (BH ) 2
= remains nearly constant/mejue DeeJele& ieefle jnsieer
T2 (BH )1
Deewj DeeJele& keâeue ueieYeie efmLej jnsiee
2
=
( 24 − 18) AIPMT-2003, 1994
T2 24 Ans. (b): A bar magnet is oscillating in the Earth's
T =2×2 = 4 s. magnetic field with a period T. Motion remains SHM if
its mass is quadrupled.
7. Two identical bar magnets are fixed with their
centres at a distance d apart. A stationary Step-1 Time period for initial mass-
charge Q is placed at P in between the gap of mL2
the two magnets at a distance D from the The moment of inertia of a cuboid is I =
12
centre O as shown in the figure
oes meJe&mece (mece™he) ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâes keâes Fme Øekeâej I
We know that the time period is T = 2π
efmLej efkeâÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ Gvekesâ kesâvõ D otjer hej nw~ efÛe$e MH
ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes Devegmeej oesveeW ÛegcyekeâeW kesâ yeerÛe kesâ Where, I = Moment of inertia
Keeueer mLeeve ceW ceOÙeefyevog O mes D otjer hej efyevog P hej M = Magnetic moment
H = Magnetic intensity
Skeâ efmLej DeeJesMe Q jKee nw~
∴ T∝ I
mL2
T∝
12
T∝ m ...(i)
Step-2 Time period for final mass (m' = 4m)
The force on the charge Q is For the second mass, we can write the time period

Physics 444 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
T ' ∝ m' Ans. (c): We know–
the time period of vibration magnetometer is–
T ' ∝ 4m
I
T' = 2 m T = 2π
mBH
From equation (i) we get
T ' = 2T For some moment of inertia I and magnetic moment (m)
1
9. Two bar magnets having same geometry with T ∝
magnetic moments M and 2M are firstly placed BH
in such a way that their similer poles are same T can be reduced if horizontal component of earth's
side then its time period of oscillation is T1. magnetic field H is increased.
Now the polarity of one of the magnet is but (BH = Bcos θ)
reversed then time period of oscillation is T2, H is high if the dip is zero. This occurs at the equator.
then / Skeâ meceeve ÚÌ[ ÛegcyekeâeW kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& Hence the period can be reduced by moving towards the
›eâceMe: M Je 2M nw~ Fvekeâes Fme Øekeâej mes mebÙeesefpele equator.
efkeâÙee peelee nw efkeâ Fvekesâ meceeve OegÇJe Skeâ Deesj nesles nQ,
Fme efmLeefle ceW Fmekeâe oesueve keâeue T1 nw~ Ùeefo efkeâmeer 19.2 The Earth's Magnetism
Skeâ Ûegcyekeâ keâer OeÇgJelee keâes Gueš efoÙee peeJes lees Fmekeâe
oesuevekeâeue T2 nes peelee nw, lees - 11. A big circular coil of 1000 turns and average
(a) T1 < T2 (b) T1 = T2 radius 10 m is rotating about its horizontal
(c) T1 > T2 (d) T2 = ∞ diameter at 2 rad s–1. If the vertical component
of earth's magnetic field at that place is
AIPMT-2002
2 × 10 −5 T and electrical resistance of the coil is
Ans. (a) : When similar poles are on same side, Time
period of oscillation T1 is given by - 12.56 Ω, then the maximum induced current in
the coil will be
I1 + I2 1000 IesjeW SJeb 10 ceeršj keâer Deewmele ef$epÙee Jeeueer Skeâ
T1 = 2π (given)
( M1 + M 2 ) BH yeÌ[er Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer, Deheves #eweflepe JÙeeme kesâ meehes#e 2
M1 = 2M, M2 = M rad s–1 keâer oj mes Ietce jner nw~ Ùeefo Gme mLeeve hej he=LJeer
I1 + I2 kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ TOJee&Oej Ieškeâ keâe ceeve 2×10–5
T1 = 2π ----------(i)
( 3M ) BH T nw, SJeb kegbâ[ueer kesâ JewÅegle ØeeflejesOe keâe ceeve 12.56 Ω
When polarity of magnet is reversed. time period of nw, lees kegbâ[ueer ceW Øesefjle Oeeje keâe DeefOekeâlece ceeve nesiee:
oscillation T2 is given by, (a) 2A (b) 0.25 A
(c) 1.5 A (d) 1 A
I1 + I 2
T2 = 2π NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
( M1 − M 2 ) B H Ans. (d) : Given-
I +I No. of coil turns, N = 1000
T2 = 2π 1 2 -------(ii)
MBH Average radius, r = 10 m
Rotational speed (ω) = 2 rad/sec
On Comparing (i) &(ii)
Magnetic field B = 2×10–5 T
T2>T1
or T1<T2 Electrical resistance, R = 12.56Ω
Maximum induced current in coil,
10. For a vibration magnetometer, the time period
of suspended bar magnet can be reduced by e
i max = max
ÛegcyekeâlJe oewueveceeheer ceW ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ keâe oesuevekeâeue R
Iešsiee Ùeefo Fmes - NBA ω
=
(a) Moving it towards south pole R
oef#eCe OeÇgJe keâer Deesj ues peeÙes 10 × 2 × 10−5 × πr 2 × 2
3
=
(b) Moving it towards north pole 12.56
Gòejer OeÇgJe keâer Deesj ues peeÙes 10 × 2 × 10−5 × π× 102 × 2
3
=
(c) Moving it towards equator 12.56
YetceOÙe jsKee keâer Deesj ues peeÙes 4π
=
(d) Anyone of them/Ghejesòeâ ceW mes keâesF& Yeer 12.56
AIPMT-1999 = 1A
Physics 445 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12. At a point on the earth’s surface the angle of Ans. (c): Here, BE = net magnetic field and H & V are
dip, δ = +25°. At a point B on the earth’s the horizontal and vertical component of BE.
surface the angle of dip, δ = –25°. We can δ is the angle between B and H.
E
interpret that:
he=LJeer kesâ he=‰ kesâ efkeâmeer efyevog A hej veefle keâesCe δ =
+25°~ he=LJeer kesâ efkeâmeer DevÙe efyevog B hej veefle keâesCe δ =
–25°~ nce Ùen JÙeeKÙee keâj mekeâles nQ efkeâ
(a) A is located in the southern hemisphere and B
is located in the northern hemisphere.
A oef#eCeer ieesueeOe& ceW efmLele nw nw leLee B oef#eCeer ieesueeOe& H
From figure in ∆AOB, cos δ =
ceW efmLele nw~ BE
(b) A is located in the northern hemisphere and B
H = BE cos δ
is located in the southern hemisphere./A Gòejer
V
ieesueeOe& ceW efmLele nw leLee B oef#eCeer ieesueeOe& ceW efmLele nw~ & in ∆OBC, sin δ =
BE
(c) A and B are both located in the southern
hemisphere. ⇒ V = BE sin δ
A Deewj B oesveeW oef#eCeer ieesueeOe& ceW efmLele nw~ 14. A compass needle which is allowed to move in a
(d) A and B are both located in the northern horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic pole.
hemisphere. It -
A Deewj B oesveeW ner Gòejer ieesueeOe& ceW efmLele nw~ Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe megF& #eweflepe meceleue ceW Ietce mekeâleer nw~
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ùeefo Fmes efkeâmeer YetÛegcyekeâerÙe OeÇgJe hej ues peeÙeW lees Ùen:
Ans. (b) : Angle of dip
(a) Will stay in north-south direction only
Point A→ δ = +25º
Point B→ δ = –25º Gòej-oef#eCe efoMee ceW "nj peeÙesieer
Angle of dip is the angle made by resultant earth's (b) Will stay in east-west direction only
magnetic field from horizontal magnetic field. hetJe&-heefMÛece efoMee ceW "nj peeÙesieer
(c) Will become rigid showing no movement
ÂÌ{ nes peeÙesieer Deewj keâesF& ieefle veneR oMee&Ùesieer~
(d) Will stay in any position
efkeâmeer Yeer efmLeefle ceW "nj peeÙesieer~
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Ans. (d) : At geomagnetic pole, horizontal component
of earth's magnetic field becomes zero.
• Dip is zero at equator and positive in northern Therefore, when a compass needle which is allowed to
hemisphere. move in a horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic
• In southern hemisphere dip angle is considered as pole, It will stay in any position.
negative.
15. For protecting a magnetic needle it should be
13. The relations amongst the three elements of
earth’s magnetic field, namely horizontal placed/ÛegcyekeâerÙe megF& keâes megjef#ele jKeves kesâ efueS
component H, vertical component V and dip δ Gmekeâes jKevee ÛeeefnS–
are, (BE = total magnetic field)
(a) In iron box/ueesns kesâ yekeämes ceW
he=LJeer kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ leerve DeJeÙeJeeW – #eweflepe
(b) In wooden box/uekeâÌ[er kesâ yekeämes ceW
Ieškeâ H, TOJee&Oej Ieškeâ V leLee veefle keâesCe δ kesâ
(c) In metallic box/Oeeleg kesâ yekeämes ceW
yeerÛe mebyebOe nQ, (BE = kegâue ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e)
(a) V = BE, H = BE tanδ (d) None of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
(b) V = BE tanδ, H = BE AIPMT-1998
(c) V = BE sinδ, H = BE cosδ Ans. (a) : For protecting the magnetic needle it should
(d) V = BE cosδ, H = BE sinδ be kept in an iron box because the iron box will divert
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) the field, and acts as a magnetic shield.
Physics 446 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Since,
19.3 Magnetisation and Magnetic H1 and H2 are horizontal components in two planes at
Intensity 90° to each other.
Hence
16. An iron rod of susceptibility 599 is subjected to H2 = H12 + H 22
–1
a magnetising field of 1200Am . The
permeability of the material of the rod is : 2 2
 V 
2
 V   V 
(µ0 = 4 π × 10 T m A )
–7 –1
  =   +  
599 OeejCeMeeruelee keâer efkeâmeer ueesns keâer ÚÌ[ 1200Am–1  tan θ   tan θ1   tan θ2 
leer›elee keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ueieeÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme ÚÌ[ kesâ
heoeLe& keâer heejiecÙelee nw: Vcot2θ = Vcot2θ1 + Vcot2θ2
(a) 8.0 × 10–5 T m A–1 (b) 2.4π × 10–5 T m A–1
(c) 2.4π × 10–7 T m A–1 (d) 2.4π × 10–4 T m A–1 cot 2 θ = cot 2 θ1 + cot 2 θ2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 18. Electromagnets are made of soft iron because
Ans. (d) : Given Xm = 599 , H = 1200 Am-1, µ0 = soft iron has–/efJeÅegleÛegcyekeâ, vece& ueesns kesâ yeves nesles
4π×10-7 T m A-1 nQ, keäÙeeWefkeâ vece& ueesne jKelee nw –
we know that permeability of the material, (a) low retentivity and high coercive force
µ r = 1 + χ m = 1 + 599 = 600 keâce OeejCeMeeruelee Je GÛÛe efve«eener yeue
Now, (b) high retentivity and high coercive force
µ = µ0µr GÛÛe OeejCeMeeruelee Je GÛÛe efve«eener yeue
-7 (c) low retentivity and low coercive force
= 600×4π×10
µ = 2.4π×10-4 T m A-1
keâce OeejCeMeeruelee Je keâce efve«eener yeue
(d) high retentivity and low coercive force
17. If θ1 and θ2 be the apparent angles of dip
GÛÛe OeejCeMeeruelee Je keâce efve«eener yeue
observed in two vertical planes at right angles
to each other, then the true angle of dip θ is AIPMT (Screening)-2010
given by: /Ùeefo, Skeâ otmejs mes uecyeJele, oes TOJee&Oej Ans. (c) : Electromagnetic are made of soft iron
because soft iron has low retentivity, low coercive force
meceleueeW ceW Øesef#ele DeeYeemeer veceve (veefle) keâesCe θ1 and high magnetic susceptibility because it is desired
leLee θ2 nQ lees, JeemleefJekeâ veceve keâesCe θ keâe ceeve efkeâme that electromagnet acts as magnet only when the electric
meceerkeâjCe mes Øeehle nesiee? current is supplied through it.
(a) cot2θ = cot2θ1 + cot2θ2
(b) tan2θ = tan2θ1 + tan2θ2 19.4 Magnetic Properties of Materials
(c) cot θ = cot θ1 – cot θ2
2 2 2

(d) tan2θ = tan2θ1– tan2θ2 19. The variation of susceptibility ( χ ) with

NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 absolute temperature (T) for a paramagnetic
Ans. (a) : Angle of dip is also known as the magnetic material is represnted as:/Skeâ DevegÛebgyekeâerÙe heoeLe&
dip and is defined as the angle that is made by the kesâ efueS hetCe& leeheceeve (T) kesâ meeLe mebJesoveMeeruelee
earth's magnetic field lines with the horizontal. ( χ ) keâer efYeVelee keâes Fme Øekeâej oMee&Ùee peelee nw:

(a) (b)

(c) (d)

RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023

Ans. (c) : Curie law: This law indicates that the
susceptibility of paramagnetic materials is inversely
proportional to their temperature. i.e the materials
V V V become more magnetic at lower temperature. The
tan θ1 = , tanθ2 = , tanθ =
H1 H2 H mathematical expression is :

Physics 447 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
C (c) Repelled by the north pole and attracted by
M = χH = H the south pole/ Gòejer heesue Éeje Øeeflekeâef<e&le Deewj
T
oef#eCeer heesue Éeje Deekeâef<e&le nesiee
1
χ∝ (d) Attracted by the north pole and repelled by
T the south pole/ Gòejer heesue Éeje Deekeâef<e&le Deewj
Now, susceptibility varies inversely with absolute
oef#eCeer heesue Éeje Øeeflekeâef<e&le nesiee~
temperature as-
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (b) : Diamagnetic materials are substances that are
usually repelled by a magnetic field. Electrons in atom
revolve around the nucleus thus possess orbital angular
momentum. The resultant angular momentum in atom
of the diamagnetic material is zero. In diamagnetic
materials there are no atomic dipoles due to pairing of
electrons thus diamagnetic materials are repelled by
both the poles of magnet. The intensity of
20. A thin diamagnetic rod is placed vertically magnetization I is very small, negative and proportional
to the magnetizing field. The substances are weakly
between the poles of an electromagnet. When
repelled by the field, so in no uniform field, these
the current in the electromagnet is switched
substances have a tendency to move from a strong to
on, then the diamagnetic rod is pushed up, out weak part of the external magnetic field.
of the horizontal magnetic field. Hence the rod
22. The magnetic moment of a diamagnetic atom is
gains gravitational potential energy. The work
required to do this comes from efkeâmeer ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe hejceeCeg keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe&
efkeâmeer efJeÅegle-Ûegcyekeâ kesâ OeÇgJeeW kesâ yeerÛe ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe neslee nw –
heoeLe& keâer Skeâ heleueer ÚÌ[ TOJee&Oej efmLele nw~ peye (a) much greater than one/Skeâ mes yengle DeefOekeâ
efJeÅegle- Ûegcyekeâ ceW Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâer peeleer nw, lees Jen (b) one/1
ÚÌ[ #eweflepe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes yeenj Thej keâer Deesj (c) between zero and one/MetvÙe Deewj Skeâ kesâ yeerÛe
Oekesâue oer peeleer nw~ Fme Øekeâej Ùen ÚÌ[ ieg™lJeerÙe (d) equal to zero/MetvÙe
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
efmLeeflepe Tpee& Øeehle keâjleer nw~ Ssmee keâjves kesâ efueS
Ans. (d) : Magnetic dipole : A magnetic dipole consist
DeeJeMÙekeâ keâeÙe& keâjlee nw of two unlike poles of equivalent strength and separate
(a) The current source / efJeÅegle œeesle by a small distance, i.e.
(b) The magnetic field / ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e M = m ×l
(c) The induced electric field due to the changing M = magnetic moment, m = pole strength
magnetic field / Øesefjle efJeÅegle-#es$e pees efkeâ heefjJeleea l = distance between the poles.
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes GlheVe neslee nw It is Vector quantity.
In the diamagnetic substance the net magnetic moment
(d) The lattice structure of the material of the rod
of an atom' is zero. All the electrons are paired so there
ÚÌ[ kesâ heoeLe& keâer peeuekeâ mebjÛevee is no permanent net magnetic moment per atom. So
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 that, magnetic moment of diamagnetic atom is zero.
Ans. (a) When a diamagnetic rod is placed in between 23. If the magnetic dipole moment of an atom of
the poles of electromagnetic field then it experiences a diamagnetic material, paramagnetic material
magnetic force on it. Due to this force, the rod pushed and ferromagnetic material are denoted by µd ,
up, out of the horizontal magnetic field. µp and µf respectively, then
Finally the rod gains the gravitational potential energy
due to work done by the electric current source. Ùeefo [eÙeecesivesefškeâ (Øeefle ÛegcyekeâerÙe), hewjecewivesefškeâ
21. If a diamagnetic substance is brought near the (DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe) Deewj hewâjes cewivesefškeâ (ueesn ÛeggcyekeâerÙe)
north or the south pole of a bar magnet, it is : heoeLeeX kesâ hejceeCegDeeW kesâ ›eâceevegmeej ÛegcyekeâerÙe efÉOeÇgJe
Skeâ ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& keâes Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ kesâ DeeIetCe& µd, µp Deewj µf nes lees :-
Gòejer heesue DeLeJee oef#eCeer heesue kesâ efvekeâš ueeÙee peeÙes (a) µp = 0 and µf ≠ 0/µp = 0 Deewj µf ≠ 0
lees Ùen : (b) µd ≠ 0 and µp = 0/µd ≠ 0 Deewj µp = 0
(a) Attracted by both the poles
(c) µd≠ 0 and µf ≠ 0/µd ≠ 0 Deewj µf ≠ 0
oesveeW heesueeW Éeje Deekeâef<e&le nesiee
(d) µd = 0 and µp ≠ 0/µd = 0 Deewj µp ≠ 0
(b) Repelled by both the poles
oesveeW heesuees Éeje Øeeflekeâef<e&le nesiee AIPMT-2005

Physics 448 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): • Magnetic moment of ferromagnetic material (c) ferromagnetic material becomes paramagnetic
µf is non-zero always µf ≠ 0. material
• Under application of external magnetic field the
ueew nÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe nes peelee nw~
paramagnetic material has all magnetic moments (d) paramagnetic material becomes diamagnetic
material
aligned giving µp ≠ 0.
DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe nes peelee nw~
• However the magnetic moments of atoms in
AIPMT-2008, 2006
diamagnetic material cancels out resulting in µd = 0 .
Ans. (c) : Curie temperature – It is temperature at which
24. Diamagnetic material in a magnetic field the magnetic properties of temperature, the magnetic
moves:/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW Skeâ ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& materials lose their magnetic property.
ieefleMeerue nw: • When the temperature is greater than the Curie
(a) from stronger to the weaker parts of the temperature, ferromagnetic material becomes
paramagnetic material.
field/#es$e kesâ leer›e Yeeie mes #eerCe Yeeie keâer Deesj
• At this temperature, the ferromagnetism of the
(b) from weaker to the stronger parts of the substances suddenly vanishes.
field/#es$e kesâ #eerCe Yeeie mes leer›e Yeeie keâer Deesj 27. Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room
(c) perpendicular to the field/#es$e kesâ uecyeJeled temperature. If the temperature is increased
(d) in none of the above direction beyond Curie temperature then it will show:-
Ghejesòeâ ceW mes efkeâmeer Yeer efoMee ceW veneR keâcejs kesâ leehe›eâce hej ‘efvekeâue’ ueewn-ÛegcyekeâlJe iegCe
AIPMT-2003 oMee&lee nw~ Ùeefo leehe›eâce keâes keäÙetjer leehe›eâce mes DeefOekeâ
Ans. (a): Since diamagnetic substance gets magnetized
keâj oW lees efvekeâue ØeoefMe&le keâjsiee:-
in opposite direction. Therefore it will try to reduce the (a) diamagnetism/ØeefleÛegbyekeâlJe
magnetic field in the direction of magnetizing field and (b) paramagnetism/DevegÛegbyekeâlJe
therefore diamagnetic material shifts towards the region (c) anti ferromagnetism/Øeefle ueewnÛegbyekeâlJe
in which magnetizing field is weaker. (d) no magnetic property/keâesF& ÛegcyekeâerÙe Øeke=âefle veneR
25. Among which the magnetic susceptibility does AIPMT-2007
not depend on the temperature : - Ans. (b) : Curie temperature is that temperature above
efkeâmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe ØeJe=efòe leehe hej efveYe&j veneR keâjleer nw- which there is sharp change in magnetic properties of
(a) Dia-magnetic/Øeefle ÛegcyekeâerÙe all the magnetic substances.
• All ferromagnetic material becomes paramagnetic
(b) Paramagnetic/DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe material above Curie temperature.
(c) Ferro-magnetic/ueewn ÛegcyekeâerÙe • When temperature increases then magnetic fields
(d) Ferrite/ hewâjeF&š inside the matter decreases because the magnetic
moment of electrons get random direction due to
AIPMT-2001 temperature change.
Ans. (a) : Magnetic susceptibility: Finally a condition comes when the magnetic
(i) It is a dimensionless proportionality constant that moment of electrons gets reduced to a particular
indicates the degree of magnetization of a material stage which is called paramagnetism.
in response to an applied magnetic field. • Nickel exhibits forromagnetism due to a quantum
(ii) It is caused by interactions of electrons & nuclei physical effect called exchange coupling in which
with external applied magnetic field. electron spins of one atom interact with those of
(iii) Diamagnetic material’s magnetic susceptibility neighboring atoms.
does not depend on temperature. Thus, if the temperature of Nickel which is a
ferromagnetic material is increased above curie
temperature then it becomes paramagnetic.
19.5 Permanent Magnets and 28. A coil in the shape of an equilateral triangle of
Electromagnets side l is suspended between the pole pieces of a
permanent magnet such that B is in place of the
26. Curie temperature is the temperature above
coil. If due to a current i in the triangle a torque
which –
τ acts on it, the side l of the triangle is-
keäÙetjer leehe Ssmee leehe neslee nw~ efpememes Thej :-
(a) paramagnetic material becomes ferromagnetic Skeâ heâvo l Yegpe keâer meceYegpe ef$eYegpe keâer Deeke=âefle ceW
material yevee nw~ Fmes Skeâ mLeeF& Ûegcyekeâ kesâ OeÇgJeeW kesâ yeerÛe Fme
DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& ueewnÛegcyekeâerÙe nes peelee nw~ lejn ueškeâeÙee ieÙee nw efkeâ B heâvo kesâ he=‰ cebs keâeÙe&
(b) ferromagnetic material becomes diamagnetic
material keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ef$eYegpe heâvo ceW Oeeje i kesâ keâejCe Sb"ve τ
ueewnÛegcyekeâerÙe heoeLe& ØeefleÛegcyekeâerÙe nes peelee nw~ heâvo hej keâeÙe& keâjlee nw lees ef$eYegpe keâer Yegpee l nesieer-
Physics 449 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2  τ  1 τ
(a)   (b) 19.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
3  Bi  3 Bi
1 1
30. A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and cross
 τ 2 2  τ 2 sectional radius 'a' carries current I. It is
(c) 2   (d)  
 3Bi  3  Bi  placed on a horizontal table taken as x-y plane.
r
AIPMT-2005 Its magnetic moment M /n hesâjeW, ceeOÙe ef$epÙee R
Ans. (c) : leLee DevegØemLe keâeš ef$epÙee a kesâ efkeâmeer šesje@Ùe[ mes I
Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw~ Ùen efkeâmeer #eweflepe cespe hej, x –
y leue hej jKee nw~ Fmekeâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& M
(a) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by
symmetry/MetvÙeslej nw leLee meefceefle Éeje z-efoMee ceW nw
(b) points along the axis of the toroid
(M = Mφˆ ) /šesje@Ùe[ (M = Mφˆ ) kesâ De#e kesâ DevegefoMe
Torque acting on equilateral triangle in a magnetic field nw~
B is (c) is zero, other wise there would be a field
r r
τ = M×B 1
falling as 3 at large distances outside the
Where, M = magnetic moment = iA r
toroid/MetvÙe nw, DevÙeLee ÙeneB Skeâ #es$e nesiee pees
τ = iABsin θ − − − − − (i)
1
Area of LMN is - šesje@Ùe[ kesâ yeenj DeefOekeâ otefjÙeeW hej 3 kesâ Devegmeej keâce
r
3 2 neslee nw~
A= l and θ = 90º [ l = sides of triangle]
4 (d) is pointing radially outwards./ef$epÙele: yeenj keâer
Substituting the given values in the equation (i) Deesj efo° nw~
3 2 Ans. (c) : A toroid is a form of solenoid which is bent in
τ = i ABsin θ = l × i × B × sin 90º the form of a circular coil. The magnetic field due to the
4
toroid remains inside the circular coil of the toroid.
3 2 Magnetic field outside the toroid is zero and magnetic
τ= l iB
4 force outside the toroid decreases very quickly because
1/ 2 it is inversely related to the third power of the distance
 τ 
⇒ l = 2  from the toroid centre.
 3Bi  31. The magnetic field of the earth can be modelled
29. According to Curie's law, the magnetic by that of a point dipole placed at the centre of
susceptibility of a substance at an absolute the earth. The dipole axis makes an angle of
temperature T is proportional to – 11.3° with the axis of the earth. At Mumbai,
keäÙetjer kesâ efveÙece kesâ Devegmeej heoeLe& keâer ÛegcyekeâerÙe ØeJeefòe declination is nearly zero. Then,/he=LJeer kesâ
hejce leehe T kesâ efkeâme Øekeâej meceevegheeleer nesleer nw - ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâes he=LJeer kesâ kesâvõ hej efmLele efyevog
(a) 1/T / 1/T kesâ (b) T/ T kesâ
efÉOeÇgJe kesâ #es$e keâe Øeefle™he ceevee pee mekeâlee nw~ Fme
(c) 1/T2/1/T2 kesâ (d) T2/ T2 kesâ
efÉOeÇgJe keâe De#e he=LJeer kesâ De#e mes 11.3º keâe keâesCe
AIPMT-2003
yeveelee nw~ cegcyeF& ceW efokeäheele ueieYeie MetvÙe nw~ leye
(a) the declination varies between 11.3°W to
Ans. (a): Curie's law-
11.3°E. /he=LJeer hej efokeäheele keâe ceeve 11.3°W mes
It can be defined as the magnetization in a paramagnetic
material is directly proportional to the applied magnetic 11.3°E kesâ yeerÛe heefjJeefle&le neslee nw~
field. (b) the least declination is 0°./efvecvelece efokeäheele MetvÙe
If the object is heated the magnetization is viewed to be DebMe (0O) nw~
inversely proportional to the temperature. (c) the plane defined by dipole axis and the earth
The law was discovered by the French physicist, Pierre. axis passes through Greenwich./efÉOegÇJe De#e leLee
Curie.
he=LJeer kesâ De#e keâes OeejCe keâjves Jeeuee leue «eerveefJeÛe mes
Curie's law holds good for high temperature and not so
strong magnetic fields.
iegpejlee nw~
From the above discussion, it's clear that magnetic (d) declination averaged over the earth must be
susceptibility proportional to 1/T. always negative./mecemle he=LJeer hej efokeäheele meowJe
So option (a) is correct. $e+Ceelcekeâ nesvee ÛeeefnS~
Physics 450 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): The magnifies field lines of the earth resembles (a) case (i) contradicts Gaus's law for
that of a hypothetical magnetic dipole located at the centre electrostatic fields./ØekeâjCe (i) mes efmLelej JewÅegle #es$e
of the earth. The axis of the dipole does not coincide with kesâ efueS ieeGme-efveÙece keâe Keb[ve neslee nw~
the axis of rotation of the earth and it is tilted at some angle (b) case (ii) contradicts Gauss's law for magnetic
(angle of declination). Here, in this situation the angle of fields./ØekeâjCe (ii) mes ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ efueS ieeGme-
declination is approximately 11.3O with respect to the efveÙece keâe Keb[ve neslee nw~
earth's axis by on both the west and east sides. Here, two r r
possibilities as shown in given below. (c) case (i) agrees with 
r r
∫ l = 0. /ØekeâjCe (i)
E.d

∫ E.dl = 0. kesâ Devegketâue nw~ r r

(d) case (ii) contradicts 
r r
∫ H.dl = Ien . /ØekeâjCe
∫ H.dl = Ien . keâe Keb[ve keâjlee nw~
(ii) 
Ans. (b) : The electric field lines do not form a closed
32. In a permanent magnet at room temperature/ loop whereas the magnetic field lines form constant
keâcejs kesâ leehe hej efkeâmeer mLeeÙeer Ûegcyekeâ ceW loop The gauss's law for electrostatic states that–
(a) magnetic moment of each molecule is Q
zero/ØelÙeskeâ DeCeg keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& MetvÙe neslee nw~ ∫ E.dS = ∈o
(b) the individual molecules have non-zero and the gauss's law for magnetic field states that–
magnetic moment which are all perfectly
aligned/meYeer Deueie-Deueie DeCegDeeW kesâ MetvÙeslej ∫ B.ds = 0
ÛegcyekeâerÙe DeeIetCe& nesles nQ pees hetCe&le: mebjsefKele nesles nQ~ It means that the no. of magnetic field lines entering the
closed surface is same as the number. of lines existing
(c) domains are partially aligned/kegâÚ [escesve DebMele: the surface, which contradicts the second case.
mebjsefKele nesles nQ~ 34. A paramagnetic sample shows a net
(d) domains are all perfectly aligned./meYeer [escesve magnetisation of 8 A m–1 when placed in an
hetCe&le: mebjsefKele nesles nQ~ external magnetic field of 0.6 T at a
Ans. (c) : Permanent magnet shows the effect of temperature of 4 K. When the same sample is
magnetism at room temperature. Iron, nickel, cobalt and placed in an external magnetic field of 0.2 T at
gadolinium shows the properties of permanent a temperature of 16 K, the magnetisation will
be/keâesF& DevegÛegcyekeâerÙe vecetvee 4K leehe hej 0.6T kesâ
magnetism at room temperature. In these materials, the
atoms form a group where the atoms arranged yeeåÙe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKes peeves hej 8Am–1 keâe vesš
themselves in the same magnetic orientation. Ûegcyekeâve oMee&lee nw~ peye Fmeer vecetves keâes 16K leehe hej
• Hence for a permanent magnet at room temperature, 0.2T kesâ yeeåÙe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKeles nQ lees
all domains can't be perfectly aligned because of Ûegcyekeâve nesiee
thermal agitation.
32 2
• This means although it will be completely magnetized (a) A m–1 (b) A m–1
domains of a permanent magnet at room temperature 3 3
will be partially aligned. (c) 6 A m–1 (d) 2.4 A m–1
33. Consider the two idealised systems/oes DeeoMe& Ans. (b) : Given that :
M1 = 8 Am–1
efvekeâeÙeeW hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS : B1 = 0.6T
(i) a parallel plate capacitor with large plates and T1 = 4k
small separation/efJeMeeue heefókeâeDeeW leLee ueIeg B2 = 0.2T
he=LekeäkeâjCe Jeeuee keâesF& meceevlej heefókeâe meIebeefj$e T2 = 16k
(ii) a long solenoid of length L >> R, radius of for paramagnetic material–
cross-section./keâesF& uecyeer heefjveeefuekeâe efpemekeâer uecyeeF& B
L >> R (DevegØemLe keâeš-ef$epÙee) nw~ M=C
r T
In (i) E is ideally treated as a constant between M1 B1 T2
plates and zero outside. In (ii) magnetic field is ⇒ = ×
M 2 T1 B2
constant inside the solenoid and zero outside./ (i)
8 0.6 16
huesš Deewj huesš kesâ yeenj efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ ceeve keâes DeeoMe& ™he ⇒ = ×
M2 4 0.2
mes DeÛej efueÙee peelee nw~
(ii) heefjveeefuekeâe kesâ Yeerlej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e DeÛej uesles nQ leLee 8
∴ M2 =
yeenj MetvÙe uesles nQ~ leLeeefhe Ùes DeeoMe& ceevÙeleeSB cetue efveÙeceeW 12
keâe veerÛes efoS Devegmeej Keb[ve Ùee meceLe&ve keâjleer nQ, M2 =
2
Am –1
These idealized assumptions, however, contradict 3
fundamental laws as below
Physics 451 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
20.
Electromagnetic Induction
ÛeewLes meskeâC[ hej kegâC[ueer ceW Øesefjle emf keâe heefjceeCe
20.1 Magnetic Flux nesiee –
(a) 10 V (b) 33 V
1. The net magnetic flux through any closed
(c) 43 V (d) 108 V
surface is:/efkeâmeer yevo he=‰ mes iegpejves Jeeuee heefjCeeceer
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heäuekeäme nw :
Ans. (c) : Given magnetic Flux (φ) = 5t2 + 3t + 16
(a) Negative/$e+Ceelcekeâ(b) Zero/ MetvÙe
dφ
(c) Positive/ Oeveelcekeâ(d) Infinity/ Deveble ∴ Induced emf (e) =
dt
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 i.e derivative of magnetic flux w.r.t to time
Ans. (b) : The net magnetic flux of the magnetic field
dφ
must always be zero over only closed surface because (e) = = 10t + 3
the field lines entering the surface is equal to the field dt
lines leaving the surface, and there is no existence of Now at t = 4 sec.,
magnetic monopoles. i.e. Induced emf (e) = 10 × 4 + 3 = 43V
4. Light with an average flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on
∫ B.nds = 0 a non-reflecting surface at normal incidence
2. The magnetic flux linked to a circular coil of having surface area 20 cm2. The energy
radius R is: received by the surface during time span of 1
φ = 2t3 + 4t2 + 2t + 5 Wb minute is :
The magnitude of induced emf in the coil at t = 20 cm2 #es$eHeâue kesâ efkeâmeer DehejeJeleea he=‰ hej 20
5 s is: W/cm2 Deewmele Heäuekeäme kesâ meeLe ØekeâeMe DeefYeuecyeJele
R ef$epÙee Jeeueer Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer mes iegpejves Jeeuee Deeheleve keâjlee nw~ 1 efceveš keâer meceÙeeJeefOe ceW Fme he=‰
ÛegcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme efvecveJele nw: hej Øeehle keâer ieÙeer Tpee& nw:
φ = 2t3 + 4t2 + 2t + 5 Wb (a) 12 × 103 J (b) 24 × 103 J
t = 5 s hej, kegbâ[ueer ceW Øesefjle efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue (emf) (c) 48 × 103 J (d) 10 × 103 J
keâe heefjceeCe nw: NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
(a) 108 V (b) 197 V Ans. (b) : Given that,
(c) 150 V (d) 192 V I = 20W/cm2
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 A = 20 cm2
Ans. (d) : emf induced in the coil is – t = 1 min = 60 sec.
dφ Intensity of light incident is given by-
E=
dt
=
d
dt
(
2t 3 + 4t 2 + 2t + 5 ) E
I=
= 6t2 + 8t + 2 At
The magnitude of induced emf in the coil at t = 5 sec is- E
∴ 20 =
dφ 20 × 60
E= = 6× 52 + 8 × 5 + 2
dt t = 5 E = 24 × 103 J
= 150 + 42 5. In a coil of resistance 10 Ω, the induced current
E = 192V developed by changing magnetic flux through it
is shown in figure as a function of time. The
3. The magnetic flux linked with a coil (in Wb) is magnitude of change in flux through the coil in
given by the equation φ = 5t2 + 3t + 16 The Weber is/10Ω ØeeflejesOe keâer Skeâ kegbâ[ueer ceW, Fmemes
magnitude of induced emf in the coil at the
fourth second will be
mebyeæ ÛegcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme kesâ heefjJele&ve mes Øesefjle efJeÅegle
efkeâmeer kegâC[ueer mes mebyeæ ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heäuekeäme (Wb ceW) Oeeje keâes meceÙe kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW efoÙes ieÙes DeejsKe
keâes meceerkeâjCe Éeje Øekeâej oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ Éeje ØeoefMe&le efkeâÙee ieÙee nw lees, Fme kegbâ[ueer mes mebyeæ
φ = 5t2 + 3t + 16 heäuekeäme ceW heefjJele&ve keâe ceeve (Jesyej ceW) nw:-
Physics 452 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 0.08 Wb (b) 0.01 Wb
(c) 0.02 Wb (d) 0.06 Wb
AIPMT-2008
Ans. (c) : Given :- radius of disc R= 0.2 m uniform
1
magnetic field (B) = wb/m2
π

(a) 6 (b) 4
(c) 8 (d) 2
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 ur ur
Ans. (d) : magnetic flux (φ) = B.A
= B A cos θ
1
= × π ( 0.2 ) × cos 60
2
π
= 0.02 wb
Given,
Resistance of coil = 10Ω 20.2 Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic
dφ Induction
Now, Induced emf (e) =
dt 7. A cycle wheel of radius 0.5 m is rotated with
dφ = change in magnetic flux constant angular velocity of 10 rad/s in a region
dφ of magnetic field of 0.1 T which is perpendicular
iR = to the plane of the wheel. The EMF generated
dt
between its centre and the rim is,
∫ dφ = R ∫ idt 0.5 m ef$epÙee kesâ efkeâmeer meeFefkeâue kesâ heefnS keâes 0.1 T
⇒ Magnitude of change in flux = R × Area under ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW, pees efkeâ heefnS kesâ leue kesâ uecyeJele nw,
current Vs time graph 10 rad/s kesâ efveÙele keâesCeerÙe Jesie mes IetefCe&le keâjeÙee ieÙee
1 nw~ heefnS kesâ kesâvõ Deewj Fmekeâer vesefce kesâ yeerÛe GlheVe
= 10 × × 0.1 × 4 efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue nw –
2
(a) Zero/ MetvÙe (b) 0.25 V
⇒ φ = 2 Wb
(c) 0.125 V (d) 0.5 V
Alternate Solution:- NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
q = area under i – t graph Ans. (c) :
1 1
q = × 4 × 0.1 = 0.2C The EMF generated, E = Bωl 2
2 2
∆φ Where
q= B = Magnetic field
R
∆φ = qR = (0.2C) (10Ω) ω = Angular velocity
∆φ = 2 Weber l = radius
1
= × 0.1× 10 × ( 0.5 )
2
6. A circular disc of radius 0.2 metre is placed in
a uniform magnetic field of induction 2
1 0.25
Wb / m 2 in such a way that its axis makes an =
π 2
angle of 60º with B . The magnetic flux linked E = 0.125V
with the disc is 8. An electron moves on a straight line path XY
0.2 ceeršj ef$epÙee keâer Skeâ Je=òeekeâej ef[mkeâ keâes as shown. The abcd is a coil adjacent to the
path of electron. What will be the direction of
1  Wb 
  ØesjCeve kesâ DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heâeru[ ceW Fme current, if any, induced in the coil?
π  m2  Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve, mejue jsKeerÙe heLe, XY hej ieefleceeve nw~
Øekeâej jKee nw efkeâ, Fmekeâe De#e B kesâ meeLe 60º keâe Skeâ kebgâ[ueer abcd Fme Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ ceeie& kesâ efvekeâšJeleea
keâesCe yeveelee nw~ ef[mkeâ mes mecyeefvOele ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heäuekeäme nw (DeejsKe osefKeÙes)~ lees, Fme kegbâ[ueer ceW Øesefjle Oeeje
nesiee :- (Ùeefo keâesF& nes lees) keâer efoMee keäÙee nesieer?
Physics 453 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
R ef$epÙee keâer Skeâ heleueer JeueÙe Deheves hej q ketâueece DeeJesMe
mece™he efJeleefjle jKeleer nw~ JeueÙe Deheveer De#e kesâ heeefjle:
Skeâ efveÙele DeeJe=efòe f heefj›eâceCe/meskesâC[ mes IetCe&ve keâj jner
nw~ JeueÙe kesâ kesâvõ hej ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe ceeve nw-
µ 0 qf µ0 q
(a) (b)
(a) No current induced/Oeeje Øesefjle veneR nesieer~ 2 πR 2πfR
(b) abcd/abcd efoMee ceW~ µ q µ qf
(c) 0 (d) 0
(c) adcb/abcd efoMee ceW~ 2fR 2R
(d) The current will reverse it direction as the AIPMT (Screening)-2010
electron goes past the coil/Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ kegbâ[ueer ceW Ans. (d) : Given radius of ring = R
heeme mes efvekeâue peeves hej Oeeje keâer efoMee efJehejerle nes Charge = q
peeÙesieer~ frequency = f
Magnetic field at the centre of the circle,
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
µ 2πi µ i
Ans. (d) : The direction of flow of current is always B= o× ⇒ B= o×
opposite to the direction of flow of electron. Thus, the 4π R 2 R
direction of the magnetic field will be in the direction of q
electron flow. The direction of current induced is such ∴ i = = qf
t
that it always opposes the change or cause.
µ q µ qf
B= o = 0
2 tR 2R
11. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform
magnetic field 0.04T with its plane perpendicular
to the magnetic field. The radius of the loop starts
shrinking at 2 mm/s. The induced emf in the loop
when the radius is 2 cm is :
9. A conducting circular loop is placed in a Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ Je=òeerÙe uethe keâes 0.04T kesâ DeÛej ÛegcyekeâerÙe
uniform magnetic field, B = 0.025 T with its #es$e keâer efoMee ceW pees efkeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer uecye efoMee
plane perpendicular to the loop. The radius of
the loop is made to shrink at a constant rate of ceW nw~ uethe keâe leue ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer efoMee mes uecye
1 mms–1. The induced e.m.f. when the radius is efoMee ceW nw~ uethe keâer ef$epÙee 2 mm/s keâer oj mes Iešves
2 cm, is – ueieleer nw~ peye uethe keâer ef$epÙee 2 cm nesieer lees FmeceW
Skeâ JeòeerÙe uethe Skeâ mehe™he ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = Øesefjle efJe.efJe. yeue (emf) keâe ceeve nesiee~
0.025 T ceW efmLele nw meeLe ner Fmekeâe (#es$e keâe) leue (a) 1.6 πμV (b) 3.2 πμV
JeòeerÙe uethe kesâ uecyeJeled nw~ uethe keâer ef$epÙee keâes 1 mms– (c) 4.8 πμV (d) 0.8 πμV
1
keâer oj mes efmekeâesÌ[e peelee nw~ Øesefjle efJe] Jee] yeue peye AIMPT-2009
ef$epÙee 2 cm nw, nesiee – Ans. (b) : Given B = 0.04 T
(a) 2πµV (b) πµV Radius of loop r = 2 cm = .02 m
π According to faraday law, any change in magnetic field
(c) µV (d) 2µV or magnetic flux of a coil will cause an induced EMF.
2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 dφ
e = –N
dr dt
Ans. (b) : Given B = 0.025T, = 1 mm/s (e is the induced EMF, N is the number of turns of coil
dt & φ is magnetic flux.)
Magnetic flux φ = B.A= B.πr2 Here no of coil N = 1 (as it is a loop of radius 2 cm)
dφ dr φ
Induced emf e = = Bπ2r magnetic field is given as B = (A is Area)
dt dt A
= 0.025×π×2×2×10–3×1×10–2 φ = B.A
= 0.025 ×4π×10–5 dφ d
e= = (B.A)
e = π µV dt dt
d dr
10. A thin ring of radius R meter has charge 'q' = (Bπr2) = 2πrB = 2×π×.02×4×10–2×2×10–3
coulomb uniformly spread on it. The ring dt dt
rotates about its axis with a constant frequency  dr -3 
of f revolutions/s. The value of magnetic = 3.2 × 10–6πV = 3.2π µV Q = 2×10 
induction in Wb/m2 at the centre of the ring is –  dt 

Physics 454 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12. The magnetic flux through a circuit of R = 100 Ω
resistance R changes by an amount ∆φ in a time dB
Δt. Then the total quantity of electric charges = 1000T s –1
dt
Q that passes any point in the circuit during The emf associated with changing magnetic field is
the time Δt is represented by :- dB
Skeâ heefjheLe keâe ØeeflejesOe R nw~ Fme heefjheLe ceW meceÙe ∆t given by- ε = NA
dt
ceW ÛetcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme keâe ceeve ∆φ mes yeoue peelee nw~ Where, N = no of the turns in coil
heefjheLe kesâ efkeâmeer Yeer efyevog mes ∆t meceÙe ceW Ûeueves Jeeues A = area of the coil
kegâue efJeÅegle DeeJesMe Q keâe ceeve JÙeòeâ nesiee :- We know that,
ε
∆φ ∆φ i=
(a) Q = (b) Q = R
R ∆t
dB
∆φ 1 ∆φ NA
(c) Q = R. (d) Q = . dt
∆t R ∆t i=
R
AIPMT-2004
20 × 25 × 10 –4 × 1000
Ans. (a) : According to Faraday's law- =
100
dφ
Emf induced, ε = = Rate of change of flux i = 0.5 A
dt
The current in the rectangular coil is 0.5 A
−∆φ
ε= 14. Faraday's laws are consequence of
∆t conservation of
∆φ hewâje[s keâe efveÙece efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekesâ mebj#eCe keâe
|ε|=
∆t heefjCeece nw?
ε ∆φ (a) energy/Tpee&
Current in the circuit, I = =
R R∆t (b) energy and magnetic field/Tpee& Deewj ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e
∆φ (c) charge/DeeJesMe
I=
R ∆t (d) magnetic field/ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e
dQ Q AIPMT-1991
Current, I = =
dt ∆t Ans. (a) : Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction
Q = I ∆t are consequences of the conservation of energy. It
∆φ involves only the transformation of energy into
Q= × ∆t electrical energy.
R∆t
15. The total charge, induced in a conducting loop
∆φ when it is moved in magnetic field depends on
Q=
R Skeâ Ûeeuekeâ uethe ceW yeveves Jeeuee DeeJesMe, peyeefkeâ Ùen
13. A rectangular coil of 20 turns and area of ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW nes, efveYe&j keâjsiee
cross-section 25 sq. cm has a resistance of 100 (a) The rate of change of magnetic flux/ÛegcyekeâerÙe
Ω. If a magnetic field which is perpendicular to heäuekeäme heefjJele&ve keâer oj
the plane of coil changes at a rate of 1000 tesla
per second, the current in the coil is (b) Initial magnetic flux only/ØeejefcYekeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe
Skeâ DeeÙeleekeâej kegbâ[ueer keâe #es$eheâue 25 mesceer2, heäuekeäme hej
ØeeflejesOe 100 Ω leLee hesâjeW keâer mebKÙee 20 nw~ Ùeefo (c) The total change in magnetic flux/kegâue ÛegcyekeâerÙe
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kegbâ[ueer kesâ leue kesâ uecyeJeled nes leLee heäuekeäme ceW heefjJele&ve hej
1000 šsmuee/meskeâC[ keâer oj mes yeouelee nes, lees kegbâ[ueer (d) Final magnetic flux only/Debeflece ÛegcyekeâerÙe heäuekeäme
ceW Oeeje keâe ceeve nw: hej
(a) 1 A (b) 50 A AIPMT-1992
(c) 0.5 A (d) 5 A Ans. (c) : Induced emf is given by-
AIPMT-1992 –dφ
e=
Ans. (c) : Given that: dt
N = 20 e –1 dφ
As, i= =
A = 20 cm2 R R dt

Physics 455 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
∴ Total charge induced = ∫ i dt Ans. (c) : Case I:
Let us suppose that the north pole of the magnetic bar is
1 dφ entering first in the metal ring. According to Lenz's law,
=∫– dt
R dt the current induced in a circuit due to a change in a
–1 φ2 magnetic field is directed to oppose the change in flux
R ∫φ1
dφ=
and to exert a mechanical force which opposes the
1 motion. Therefore, the force of repulsion between the
= ( φ1 − φ2 ) ring and bar will oppose the motion of bar.
R
Thus, the induced charge in a conducting loop, moving Thus, the bar will slow down when dropped through the
in a magnetic field depends on the total change in ring and acceleration of the ring will be less than g.
magnetic flux.

20.3 Lenz's Law and Conservation

of Energy
16. A magnetic field of 2 × 10–2 T acts at right
angles to a coil of area 100 cm2, with 50 turns.
The average e.m.f. induced in the coil is 0.1 V.
When it is removed from the field in t sec. The
value of t is Case -2 similarly, when the south pole of the magnetic
Skeâ kegbâ[ueer efpemeceW 50 hesâjs nQ Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e 2 × bar is entering first in the metal ring then the direction
of magnetic field will be reversed. And at this time the
10–2 T kesâ uecyeJeled jKeer peeleer nw~ kegâC[ueer keâe
south pole of ring and south pole of the magnetic bar
#es$eheâue 100 mesceer2 nw~ kegbâ[ueer ceW GlheVe Øesefjle efJe.Jee.ye. will repel each other. Thus, again the bar will slow
0.1V nw peye Fmes t meskeâC[ ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e mes nše down while passing through the ring. Thus, the
efueÙee peelee nw~ t keâe ceeve nw: acceleration of the magnetic bar will be less than g.
(a) 10 s (b) 0.1 s
(c) 0.01 s (d) 1 s
20.4 Motional Electromotive Force
AIPMT-1991
Ans. (b) : Given that: 18. A metallic rod of mass per unit length 0.5 kg
B = 2×10–2 T m–1 is lying horizontally on a smooth inclined
A = 100 cm2 plane which makes an angle of 30° with the
N= 50 horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down
e = 0.1 V by flowing a current through it when a
By Lenz's law, magnetic field of induction 0.25 T is acting on it
– ( φ2 − φ1 ) – ( 0 − NB A ) NBA in the vertical direction. The current flowing in
e= = =
t t t the rod to keep it stationary is
NBA 50 × 2 × 10 × 10 –2 –2
0.5 kg m–1 Øeefle FkeâeF& uecyeeF& õJÙeceeve keâer efkeâmeer Oeeleg
t= = = 0.1 sec
e 0.1 keâer #eweflepe ÚÌ[ keâes Skeâ efÛekeâves Deevele leue hej pees
t = 0.1 sec. #eweflepe mes 30° keâe keâesCe yeveelee nw, jKee ieÙee nw~ Fme
17. A metal ring is held horizontally and bar ÚÌ[ keâes FmeceW efJeÅegled Oeeje ØeJeeefnle keâjekeâj veerÛes
magnet is dropped through the ring with its
length along the axis of the ring. The mejkeâves veneR efoÙee peelee peye Fme hej 0.25 T ØesjCe keâe
acceleration of the falling magnet is ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e TOJee&Oej efoMee ceW keâeÙe& keâj jne nw~ ÚÌ[
Skeâ Oeeleg JeueÙe keâes #eweflepe ™he mes jKee peelee nw Deewj keâes efmLej jKeves kesâ efueS FmeceW ØeJeeefnle Oeeje nw
Skeâ ÚÌ[ Ûegbyekeâ JeueÙe kesâ De#e kesâ DevegefoMe Fmekeâer (a) 7.14 A (b) 5.98 A
uecyeeF& kesâ meeLe JeueÙe mes neskeâj ÚesÌ[e peelee nw~ efiejles (c) 11.32 A (d) 14.76 A
ngS Ûegbyekeâ keâe lJejCe nw: NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
(a) more than g/ g mes DeefOekeâ Ans. (c) Given,
(b) equal to g/ g kesâ yejeyej B = 0.25T
(c) less than g/ g mes keâce m
= 0.5kg / m
(d) either (a) or (c)/ (a) DeLeJee (c) l
AIPMT-1996 θ = 30º
Physics 456 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For Loop 2,
εind = 0 as no flux passes through it.
dB 2
So, emf generated is − πr in loop 1 and zero in loop
dt
2.
For equilibrium 20. A conducting square frame of side 'a' and a
Mg sin30º = BI l cos30º long straight wire carrying current I are
located in the same plane as shown in the
mg
I= tan 30º figure. The frame moves to the right with a
Bl constant velocity 'V'. The emf induced in the
0.5 × 9.81 1 frame will be proportional to:
= ×
0.25 3 'a' Yegpee keâe Skeâ Jeiee&keâej Ûeeuekeâ øesâce leLee I
I = 11.32 amp. OeejeJeener Skeâ uecyee meerOee leej, DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes
19. A uniform magnetic field is restricted within a Devegmeej, Skeâ ner meceleue ceW nQ~ Ùen øesâce oeFË Deesj keâes
region of radius r. The magnetic field changes Skeâ efmLele Jesie 'V' mes ieefle keâjlee nw~ Fmemes øesâce ceW
dB Øesefjle efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue meceevegheeleer nesiee:
with time at a rate Loop 1 of radius R > r
dt
encloses the region r and loop 2 of radius R is
outside the region of magnetic field as shown in
the figure. Then, the emf generated is.
keâesF& Skeâmeceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e r ef$epÙee kesâ efkeâmeer #es$e
dB
ceW meerefcele nw~ Ùen ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e meceÙe kesâ meeLe
dt
keâer oj mes heefjJeefle&le neslee nw veerÛes efoÙes DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes
ieÙes Devegmeej ef$epÙee R > r keâe heeMe (uethe) 1, r #es$e 1 1
(a) (b)
keâes heefjyeæ keâjlee nw leLee R ef$epÙee keâe heeMe 2, ( 2x − a )
2
( 2x + a )
2

ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer meercee mes yeenj nw~ GlheVe efJeÅegle

Jeenkeâ yeue keâe ceeve nesiee :- 1 1
(c) (d)
( 2x − a )( 2x + a ) x2
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans.(c): Given, Square frame of side = a
(a) Zero in loop 1 and zero in loop 2 Current = I, Velocity = V
heeMe 1 ceW MetvÙe leLee heeMe 2 ceW MetvÙe µ I
Magnetic field due to infinite wire B = o
dB 2 2πx
(b) − πr in loop 1and zero in loop 2/heeMe 1 ceW
dt r µ0 I µ0 I
B1 = =
−
dB 2
πr leLee heeMe 2ces MetvÙe −
dB 2
πr  a  π ( 2x − a )
2π  x − 
dt dt  2
dB 2
(c) − πR in loop 1 and zero in loop 2 r µ0 I µ0 I
dt B2 = =
 a  π ( 2x + a )
dB 2π  x + 
heeMe 1 ceW − πR 2 leLee heeMe 2 ceW MetvÙe  2
dt
dφ d ( BA )
(d) −
dB 2
πr in loop 1 and zero in loop 2 emf = = [Q φ = BA ]
dt dt dt
r r r
2  B1 − B2 
dB AdB
heeMe 1 ceW − πr 2 leLee heeMe 2 ceW MetvÙe emf = =a  
dt dt  t 
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Ans. (d) : Emf is induced in a coil due to change of flux = a 2  µ0 I −
µ0 I 
 
through it.  π ( 2x − a ) π ( 2x + a ) 
For Loop 1,
µI  1 1 
dφ  dB  = 0 a2  −
εind = –
dt
=−
d
dt
( )
Bπr 2 = −πr 2  
 dt 
π  2x − a 2x + a 


Physics 457 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
µ 0 I 2  2x + a − 2x + a  Ans. (c) : Given that:
= a   Resistance of coil = 400 Ω
π  ( 2x − a )( 2x + a ) 
magnetic flux (φ) = 50 t2 + 4
µI  2a 
= 0 a2 
π ( 2x − a )( 2x + a )  Now, Induced emf, ε =
− dφ
dt
1 –d
emf ∝ ε= 50t 2 + 4 
( 2x − a )( 2x + a ) dt 
21. A thin semicircular conducting ring (PQR) of ε = –100t V
radius 'r' is falling with its plane vertical in a At t = 2sec,
horizontal magnetic field B, as shown in figure. ε = –100×2 = –200 V
The potential difference developed across the
ε = 200 V
ring when its speed is v, is:-
'r' ef$epÙee keâer Skeâ heleueer DeOe&Je=òeekeâej Ûeeuekeâ efjbie Now, Induced current,
(JeueÙe) PQR, efkeâmeer #eweflepe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B ceW efiej ε 200V
I= =
jner nQ~ efiejles meceÙe Fmekeâe meceleue, DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes R 400Ω
ieÙes Devegmeej, TOJee&Oej jnlee nw~ peye efiejleer ngF& efjbie keâer I = 0.5A
Ûeeue v nw lees, Fmekesâ oes efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe efJekeâefmele 23. The current i in a coil varies with time as
efJeYeJeeblej nesiee:- shown in the figure. The variation of induced
emf with time would be :
efkeâmeer kegâC[ueer ceW efJeÅegleOeeje i keâe ceeve DeejsKeevegmeej
meceÙe kesâ meeLe heefjJeefle&le neslee nw, lees Øesefjle efJeÅegle
Jeenkeâ yeue keâe ceeve meceÙe kesâ meeLe heefjJeefle&le nesiee :
(a) zero/MetvÙe
(b) Bvπr2/2 and P is at higher potential
Bvπr2/2 leLee P GÛÛe efJeYeJe hej nesiee~
(c) πrBv and R is at higher potential
πrBv leLee R keâe efJeYeJe DeefOekeâ (GÛÛe) nesiee~
(d) 2rBv and R is at higher potential
2rBv leLee R keâe efJeYeJe DeefOekeâ (GÛÛe) nesiee~ (a) (b)
AIPMT-06.05.2014
Ans. (d) : Motional EMF induced in the semicircular
ring 'PQR' is equivalent to the motional emf induced in (c) (d)
the imaginary conductor PR.
i.e. εPQR = εPR = BVl {l = PR = 2r}
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Therefore, potential difference developed across the
ring is 2rBV with R is at higher potential. Ans. (b) : We know that,
di
22. A coil of resistance 400Ω is placed in a Eind = -L
dt
magnetic field. If the magnetic flux φ (Wb)
linked with the coil varies with time t (sec) as In the range 0 to T/4
φ = 50t2 + 4. di
= constant ⇒ Eind = –ve constant
The current in the coil at t = 2 sec is: dt
400Ω ØeeflejesOe keâer Skeâ kegbâ[ueer keâes Skeâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe In the range T/4 to T/2
di
#es$e ceW jKee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo kegbâ[ueer mes mebyeæ ÛegcyekeâerÙe = 0 ⇒ Eind = 0
dt
heäuekeäme φ(Wb), meceÙe t(meskebâ[) kesâ meeLe efvecve Øekeâej T 3T
heefjJeefle&le neslee nw~ In the range to
2 4
φ= 50t2 + 4 di
lees, t = 2 meskebâ[ hej kegbâ[ueer ceW efJeÅegleOeeje nesieer- = constant ⇒ Eind = + constant
dt
(a) 2A (b) 1A 3T
(c) 0.5A (d) 0.1A In the range to T :
4
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Physics 458 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
di
= 0 ⇒ Eind = 0
dt
On plotting the induced emf against t, we have

(a) QV (b) QV/2

(c) 2QV (d) Zero
Hence option (b) is correct.
AIPMT-2005
24. Initially plane of coil is parallel to the uniform
magnetic field B. In time Δt it makes to Ans. (a) : Given, Charge = Q
perpendicular to the magnetic field, then Volt induced in the loop = V
charge flows in Δt depends on this time Work done along the loop
We know, Induced emf =
as/ØeejbYe ceW kegâC[ueer keâe leue Skeâ meceeve ÛegcyekeâerÙe Charge Q
#es$e B ×es¹ meceevlej nw~ Δt meceÙe ceW Fmekeâe leue uecyeJeled
W
keâj efoÙee peeÙes lees ØeJeeefnle DeeJesMe, Δt hej efkeâme V= ⇒ W = VQ
Q
Øekeâej efveYe&j keâjsiee-
1 26. A straight line conductor of length 0.4 m is
(a) ∝∆t (b) ∝ moved with a speed of 7 m/s perpendicular to a
∆t
magnetic field of intensity 0.9 Wb/m2. The
(c) ∝ (∆t)0 (d) ∝ (∆t)2
induced e.m.f. across the conductor is
AIPMT-1999
Skeâ 0.4 ceer uecyeeF& Jeeuee Ûeeuekeâ 7 ceer/meskeâC[ mes
Ans. (c) : Current in a magnetic field–
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = 0.9 Jesyej/ceer2 kesâ uecyeJeled Ietcelee
 E 
nw~ FmeceW Øesefjle efJe.Jee.yee nesiee:
i = i0 sin ωt ∴ i 0 = 0 
 R
(a) 5.04 V (b) 25.2 V
E  (c) 1.26 V (d) 2.52 V
i =  0 sin ωt  magnetic flux
R  AIPMT-1995
Any change in current stets of an induced e.m.f in the Ans. (d) : Given that:
coil given by - l = 0.4 m
 dφ  v = 7 m/sec
e = − = e0 sin ωt 
 dt  B = 0.9 wb/m2
1  dφ  ε=?
i=  
R  dt  The induced emf of the conductor is given by-
(ε) = Bl v
∆φ
So charge, q = i. ∆t = .∆t = 0.9×0.4×7
R ∆t
(ε) = 2.52 V
⇒ q ∝ (∆t)º
Hence we can see in the above expression q depends
only the orientation. 20.5 Eddy Currents
25. As a result of change in the magnetic flux
27. In which of the following devices, the eddy
linked to the closed loop shown in the figure, an
current effect is not used?
e.m.f. V volt is induced in the loop. The work
veerÛes oer ieÙeer ÙegefòeâÙeeW ceW mes efkeâmeceW YebJej Oeeje ØeYeeJe
done (joules) in taking a charge Q coulomb
once along the loop is- keâe GheÙeesie veneR efkeâÙee peelee nw?
efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙes ieÙes yevo heâvo mes mecyeefvOele ÛegcyekeâerÙe (a) Magnetic braking in train/š^sve ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeÇskeâ
heäuekeäme ceW heefjJele&ve kesâ heefjCeecemJe™he heâvo ceW (b) Electromagnet/efJeÅegle Ûegcyekeâ
efJe.Jee.yeue V Jeesuš Øesefjle neslee nw~ DeeJesMe Q keâes (c) Electric heater/efJeÅegle neršj
Skeâ yeej heâvo ceW Ûekeäkeâj ueieJeeves keâes keâeÙe& (petueeW ceW) (d) Induction furnace/ØesjCe Yeóer
nesiee :- NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Physics 459 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Whenever a change in magnetic flux linked to oes kegâC[efueÙeeW kesâ mJeØesjkeâlJe ›eâceMe: 2 mH Deewj 8
a given coil takes place an induced electromotive force mH nw Fvekeâess Fme Øekeâej mes jKee ieÙee nw efkeâ Skeâ
is produced called eddy current.
• In induction furnace eddy current are induced in kegâC[ueer ceW ØeYeeJeer heäuekeäme hetjer lejn mes otmejer kegâC[ueer
metal and circulation of these currents produces kesâ heäuekeäme hej efveYe&j nw oesveeW kegâC[efueÙeeW keâe DevÙeesÙe
extremely high temperature which melts metal.
• Eddy currents are used in slowing or stopping of ØesjkeâlJe efkeâlevee nesiee:-
train in magnetic braking system. (a) 10 mH (b) 6 mH
• Electric heater works on the principle of Joule's (c) 4 mH (d) 16 mH
heating effect.
AIPMT-2006
28. Eddy currents are produced when
YeBJej OeejeSB GlheVe nesleer nQ peye Ans. (c) : Given
(a) A metal is kept in varying magnetic field/keâesF& L1 = 2 mH
Oeeleg efkeâmeer Demeceeve ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee peelee nw~ L2 = 8 mH
(b) A metal is kept in a steady magnetic field/keâesF& We know self inductance and mutual inductance are
Oeeleg efkeâmeer Skeâ meceeve ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee peelee nw~ both measured in Henry. They have a relation of
(c) A circular coil is placed in a magnetic M = K L1L 2 , M = Mutual inductance.
field/keâesF& Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer efkeâmeer ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW jKee
peelee nw~ Here K = 1
(d) Current is passed through a circular coil/efkeâmeer So, M = 2×8
Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer mes neskeâj Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ = 16
AIPMT-1988
M = 4 mH
Ans. (a) : Eddy current are the current induced in solid
metallic masses, when magnetic flux threading through 31. For a coil having L = 2 mh, current flow
them changes. through it is I = t2 e–t then the time at which
• Direction of eddy currents can be given by Lenz's law emf become zero : -
or by Fleming right hand rule.
L = 2 mh keâer Skeâ kegâC[ueer ceW Oeeje I = t2 e–t ØeJeeefnle

20.6 Inductance nes jner nw~ lees Øesefjle efJe. Jee. yeue efkeâme meceÙe MetvÙe
nesiee-
29. The magnetic potential energy stored in a (a) 2s (b) 1s
certain inductor is 25 mJ, when the current in
the inductor is 60 mA. This inductor is of (c) 4s (d) 3s
inductance/efkeâmeer Øesjkeâ mes 60 mA keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle AIPMT-2001
keâjves hej Gme Øesjkeâ ceW mebefÛele ÛegcyekeâerÙe efmLeeflepe Tpee& Ans. (a) : Given, Inductance (L) = 2 mh
keâe ceeve 25 mJ nw~ Fme Øesjkeâ keâe ØesjkeâlJe nw Current flowing through it I = t2 e-t
(a) 0.138 H (b) 138.88 H dI
(c) 13.89 H (d) 1.389 H Now, emf (e) = L
dt
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Ans. (c) : Given : Energy U = 25 mJ dI
For, zero emf (e) = =0
Current (I) = 60 mA dt
Energy stored in Inductor can be given by –
1 2
U = LI dt
( t e ) = 2t.e-t - t 2 e-t
d 2 -t

2
−3 dI
2U 2 × 25 ×10 Now, Put =0
L= 2 = dt
( )
2
I 60 ×10−3
⇒ 2t e -t = t 2 e -t
⇒ L = 13.89H
⇒ t2 – 2t = 0 ⇒ t (t-2) = 0 ⇒ t = 0 or 2 sec.
30. Two coils of self inductances 2 mH and 8 mH
32. If N is the number of turns in a coil, the value
are placed so close together that the effective
of self inductance varies as
flux in one coil is completely linked with the
other. The mutual inductance between these
Skeâ kegbâ[ueer ceW hesâjeW keâer mebKÙee N nw lees mJe-ØesjCe
coils is: iegCeebkeâ efkeâmekesâ meceevegheeleer nesiee?
Physics 460 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) N0 (b) N 2
N
(c) N2 (d) N–2 L1 = µ 0   × lA ....(i)
 l 
AIPMT-1993 N N
Ans. (c) : In long solenoid, if N is the no of turns in a Given that: →2
l l
coil, the value of self inductance is- 2
 2N 
µ N2A L2 = µ 0   × lA
L= 0  l 
l 2
N
⇒ L∝N 2
L 2 = 4 µ 0   lA
 l 
33. What is the self-inductance of a coil which
produces 5 V when the current changes from 3 L2 = 4L ....(ii)
n
ampere to 2 ampere in one millisecond? Form eq (ii), the self inductance of the solenoid will
Skeâ kegbâ[ueer keâe mJe-ØesjCe iegCeebkeâ keäÙee nesiee, efpemeceW become 4 times.
5V keâe efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue yevelee nes peyeefkeâ Oeeje 3 A 35. A 100 millihenry coil carries a current of 1A.
Energy stored in its magnetic field is
mes 2 A, 1 efceueer meskeâC[ ceW heefjJeefle&le nesleer nes?
Skeâ 100 mH kegbâ[ueer ceW 1A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw
(a) 5000 henry/5000 nsvejer lees Fmekesâ ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW mebefÛele Tpee& keâe ceeve nw:
(b) 5 milli-henery/5 efceueer nsvejer (a) 0.5 J (b) 1 J
(c) 50 henry/50 nsvejer (c) 0.05 J (d) 0.1 J
(d) 5 henry/5 nsvejer AIPMT-1991
AIPMT-1993 Ans. (c) : Given that:
L = 100 mH = 100×10–3 H = 0.1 H
Ans. (b) : Any change in the current set up an induced
I = 1A
e.m.f. in the coil given by-
The energy of the inductor is given as-
dφ dI
e=– = –L 1
dt dt U = L I2
2
Where, e = induced voltage
1
L = inductance = × 0.1 × (1) 2 J
2
dI = change in current
U = 0.05 Joule
dt = change in time
 2−3 36. The current in self inductance L = 40 mH is to
e = − L  –3  be increased uniformly from 1 amp to 11 amp
 10 
in 4 milliseconds. The e.m.f. induced in
 1  inductor during process is
5 = L  –3 
 10  Skeâ mJeØesjkeâ, L = 40 mH ceW Oeeje 1 A mes 11 A 4 ms
L = 5×10–3 ceWs yeÌ{leer nw~ Øesjkeâ keâe efJe.yee.ye. %eele keâjW~
L = 5mH (a) 100 volt/100Jeesuš
34. If the number of turns per unit length of a coil (b) 0.4 volt/0.4 Jeesuš
of solenoid is doubled, the self-inductance of
(c) 4.0 volt/4.0 Jeesuš
the solenoid will
Ùeefo efkeâmeer heefjveeefuekeâe ceW Øeefle Skeâebkeâ uecyeeF& ceW hesâjeW (d) 440 volt/440 Jeesuš
keâer mebKÙee oesiegveer keâj oer peeS, lees Gmekeâe mJe-ØesjCe AIPMT-1990
iegCeebkeâ nesiee Ans. (a) : Given that:
L = 40 mH
(a) Remain unchanged/henues pewmee dI = (11–1) A = 10A
(b) Be halved/DeeOee dt = 4 ms = 4×10–3 sec
(c) Be doubled/oesiegvee Any change in current set up induced e.m.f. in the coil
(d) Become four times/Ûeej iegvee given by-
dφ dI
AIPMT-1991 e=− =L
dt dt
Ans. (d) : In long solenoid, if N is the number of turns
10
in the coil, the value of self inductance is- = ( 40 × 10 –3 ) ×
4 × 10 –3
N2
L = µ 0 2 × lA e = 100 V
l
Physics 461 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
37. An inductor may store energy in 39. In a region of magnetic induction B = 10–2 tesla,
Skeâ Øesjkeâ (inductor) ceW Tpee& mebefÛele nesleer nw- a circular coil of radius 30 cm and resistance π2
(a) Its electric field/JewÅegle #es$e ceW ohm is rotated about an axis which is
perpendicular to the direction of B and which
(b) Its coils/kebgâ[ueer ceW form a diameter of the coil. If the coil rotates at
(c) Its magnetic field/ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW 200 rpm the amplitude of the alternating
(d) Both in electric and magnetic fields/JewÅegle #es$e current induced in the coil is
leLee ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e oesveeW ceW Skeâ Je=òeekeâej kegbâ[ueer efpemekeâer ef$epÙee 30 cm leLee
AIPMT-1990 ØeeflejesOe π2Ω nw, keâes Skeâ ÛebgcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = 10–2 T
Ans. (c) : An inductor also called a coil, chokes, or Jeeues #es$e ceW ÛegbcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ uecyeJele IegceeÙee peelee
reactor, is a passive two-terminal electrical component nw~ Ùeefo kegbâ[ueer IetCe&ve keâer oj 200 rpm nes, lees kegbâ[ueer
that stores energy in a magnetic field when electric ceW Øesefjle ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje keâe DeeÙeece nesiee:
current flows through it. The working principle is the
electromagnetic induction. (a) 4π2 mA (b) 30 mA
(c) 6 mA (d) 200 mA
AIPMT-1988
20.7 AC generator
Ans. (c) : r = 30 cm N=1
B = 10–2 tesla
R = π2 ohm
20.7 AC generator f=
200
60
38. A wire loop is rotated in a magnetic field. The
200
frequency of change of direction of the induced ω = 2π
e.m.f. is : 60
leej keâe Skeâ heeMe (uethe) efkeâmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e ceW So, the alternating current induced in the coil is-
ε NABω
IetCe&ve keâjlee nw~ lees Skeâ heefj›eâceCe (Ûe›eâ) ceW FmeceW i max = max =
R R
F&.Sce.Sheâ. (e.m.f.) keâer efoMee ceW heefjJele&ve keâer DeeJe=efòe
200
1 × π × ( 30 × 10 –2 ) × 10 –2 × 2π ×
2
nesleer nw-
= 60
(a) Six times per revolution/ Ú: yeej π2
(b) Once per revolution/ Skeâ yeej = 6×10–3 A
(c) twice per revolution/ oes
yeej i max = 6 mA
(d) four times per revolution/ Ûeej yeej
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 20.8 NCERT Exemplar Problems
Ans. (c) : Flux through the loop
φ = BA cos θ = BA cos ωt 40. A square of side L meters lies in the x–y plane
Where θ = ωt is the angle made by area vector with in a region, where the magnetic field is given by
magnetic field at any instant. B = B (2iˆ + 3jˆ + 4k)
0
ˆ T,
dφ where B0 is constant. The magnitude of flux
emf induced = – = BA ω sin ωt
dt passing through the square is
x–y leue kesâ efkeâmeer #es$e ceW,L ceeršj Yegpee keâe keâesF& Jeie&
jKee nw~ peneB ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = B (2iˆ + 3jˆ + 4k)
0
ˆ T
nw, (peneB B0 keâesF& efveÙeleebkeâ nw) Fme Jeie& mes iegpejves
Jeeues heäuekeäme keâe heefjceeCe nw:
(a) 2B0L2Wb (b) 3B0L2 Wb
(c) 4B0L2 Wb (d) 29 B0L2 Wb
from the above graph, we have 4 points of change of
Ans. (c) : According to the question, a square of side 'L'
direction in emf induced, in two time periods, T each.
meters lies in the x – y plane. So,
Thus, there are two changes in one time period (i.e. ur
twice per revolution). Area of vector = A = L2 k̂

Physics 462 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Which is perpendicular to x – y plane. efkeâmeer yesueveekeâej ÚÌ[ Ûegcyekeâ keâes Gmekesâ De#e kesâ heefjle:
ur
B = B (2iˆ + 3jˆ + 4k)
0
ˆ T (Given) (pewmee efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw) IetCe&ve keâjeÙee peelee nw~
So, efkeâmeer leej keâes Fmekesâ De#e mess mebÙeesefpele keâjkesâ Fmekesâ
ur ur yesueveekeâej he=‰ mes efkeâmeer mecheke&â Éeje mheMe& keâjeÙee ieÙee
Magnetic flux (φ) = B.A
nw leye
φ = B0 (2iˆ + 3jˆ + 4k).(L
ˆ 2ˆ
k)
φ = 4B0L2T = 4B0L2 Wb
41. A loop, made of straight edges has six corners
at A(0, 0, 0), B (L, 0, 0), C(L, L, 0), D(0, L, 0),
E(0,L,L) and F(0,0,L). A magnetic field
r
B = B0 (ˆi + kˆ )T is present in the region. The flux
passing through the loop ABCDEFA (in that
order) is/meerOes efkeâveejeW mes yeves efkeâmeer uethe ceW Ú: keâesves
A(0, 0, 0), B (L, 0, 0), C(L, L, 0), D(0, L, 0), E(0,
(a) a direct current flows in through the ammeter
L, L) leLee F(0, 0, L) hej nQ~ Fme #es$e ceW GheefmLele
r A./Ssceeršj A mes meerOeer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e B = B (ˆi + kˆ )T efJeÅeceeve nw~ uethe
0 (b) no current flows through the ammeter
ABCDEFA (Fme ›eâce ceW) mes iegpejves Jeeuee heäuekeäme A./Ssceeršj A mes keâesF& Oeeje ØeJeeefnle veneR nesleer nw~
nw: (c) an alternating sinusoidal current flows
(a) B0L2 Wb (b) 2 B0 L2 Wb through the ammeter A with a time period
2π
(c) 2 B0 L2Wb (d) 4B0L2 Wb T= ./Ssceeršj A mes DeeJele&keâeue T = 2π/ω keâer
ω
Ans. (b) : Given that, ØelÙeeJeleea meeFvemee@F[ue nesleer nw~
(d) a time varying non-sinusoidal current flows
through the ammeter A./Ssceeršj A mes meceÙe
heefjJeefle&le Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw pees vee@ve meeFvemees[ue
veneR nesleer~
Ans. (b) : This phenomena is based on the principle of
electromagnetic induction. Induced emf occurs when
the no of magnetic lines of forces (magnetic flux)
travelling through a circuit changes.
B = B0 (iˆ + k)T
ˆ When a cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis,
there is no change in the circuit's flux, hence no emf is
From the figure,
generated and no current flows through the ammeter A.
Area vector of part ABCD = A1 = L2 k̂ 43. There are two coils A and B as shown in the
and figure. A current start flowing in B as shown,
for Part ADEF = A2 = L2 î when A is moved towards B and stops when A
We know that, stops moving. The current in A is
ur ur counterclockwise. B is kept stationary when A
Magnetic Flux (φ) = B.A
moves. We can infer that/efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej A
Where, B is magnetic field
leLee B oes kegâC[efueÙeeB nQ~ peye A keâes B keâer Deesj ieefle
A is Area
So,
keâjeles nQ lees B ceW efÛe$e ceW oMee&S Devegmeej Oeeje ØeJeeefnle
ur ur ur nesves ueieleer nw leLee A kesâ ®keâves hej Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesvee
φ = B.(A1 + A 2 )
yevo nes peeleer nw~ B ceW Oeeje JeeceeJeleea nw~ peye A ieefle
= Bo (iˆ + k).{L
ˆ 2ˆ
k + L2 ˆi} keâjlee nw lees B efmLej jKee peelee nw~ nce Ùen efve<keâ<e&
= 2 B0 L2Wb efvekeâeue mekeâles nQ befkeâ
42. A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its
axis as shown in figure. A wire is connected
from the axis and is made to touch the
cylindrical surface through a contact. Then

Physics 463 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) there is a constant current in the clockwise Ans. (a) : According to Lenz's law an induced current
direction of A./A ceW oef#eCeeJeleea efoMee ceW efveÙele in a magnetic field will flow in a direction such that it
Oeeje nw~ opposes any occurring change in the magnetic field.
(b) there is a varying current in A./ A ceW heefjJeleea Lenz's law derives its basis from the principle of
Oeeje nw~ conservation of energy and Newton's third law.
(c) there is no current in A./ A ceW keâesF& Oeeje veneR nw~ –Ndφ
So, emf (ε) =
(d) there is a constant current in the counter dt
clockwise direction in A./ A ceW JeeceJeleea efoMee ceW Where, N is number of loops
efveÙele Oeeje nw~ dφ is change in magnetic flux
Ans. (d) : We know that, rate of change of magnetic dt is change in time.
flux is given as. From the question, when the current in B (at t = 0) is
–Ndφ counter clockwise and coil A is considered above it.
ε=
dt The counter clockwise flow of the current in coil B is
Where, dφ is change in magnetic flux equivalent to north pole of magnet and magnetic field
N is number of turns in coil lines are eliminated upward to coil A. When coil A
ε is induced emf. starts rotating at t = 0, the current in A is constant along
• When A is moved towards B, current starts flowing in a clockwise direction by Lenz's rule.
B. This is due to variation of magnetic flux (φ) in A. 45. The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l
When A stops moving, the current in B becomes zero. and area of cross-section A, with a fixed
This is possible only if the current in A is variable, there number of turns N increases as/efkeâmeer DevegØemLe
will be an induced current in B, even if A stop moving.
keâeš kesâ #es$eheâue A leLee efveÙele hesâjeW keâer mebKÙee N
• So, we can infer that there is a constant current in the
counter clockwise direction in coil A. Jeeueer l uecyeeF& keâer heefjveeefuekeâe keâe mJeØesjkeâlJe L yeÌ{
44. Same as problem 4 except the coil A is made to peelee nw :
rotate about a vertical axis. No current flows in
(a) l and A increase./ l leLee A ceW Je=efæ kesâ meeLe
B if A is at rest. The current in coil A, when the
current in B (at t = 0) is counterclockwise and (b) l decreases and A increases./ l ceW keâceer leLee A ceW
the coil A is as shown at this instant, t = 0, is/Fme Je=efæ kesâ meeLe
ØeMve ceW Yeer efmLeefle ØeMve 4 keâer YeeBefle nw~ Devlej kesâJeue (c) l increases and A decreases./ l ceW Je=efæ leLee A ceW
Ùen nw efkeâ Deye kegâC[ueer A keâes TOJee&Oej De#e kesâ heefjle: keâceer kesâ meeLe
IetCe&ve keâjeÙee ieÙee nw~ (efÛe$e ceW)~ Ùeefo A efJejece ceW nw
(d) both l and A decrease./oesveeW l leLee A ceW keâceer kesâ
lees B ceW keâesF& Oeeje ØeJeeefnle veneR nesleer~ peye B ceW (t =
meeLe
0 hej) Oeeje JeeceJeleea efoMee ceW nw leLee Fme #eCe t = 0
hej kegâC[ueer A oMee&S Devegmeej nw leye kegâC[ueer A ceW Ans. (b) : Solenoid is a long insulated wire which is
coiled into a cylinder.
ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw? The self inductance of a solenoid is given as,
µ0 N 2 A
L =
l
Where, N is number of turns of a solenoid
A is Area of each turn of coil
(a) constant current clockwise/oef#eCeeJele&
efveÙele Oeeje l is length of solenoid
(b) varying current clockwise./oef#eCeeJele& heefjJeleea µ0 is permeability constant
Oeeje • From the above expression, self inductance (L) of a
(c) varying current counterclockwise./JeeceeJele& solenoid is directly proportional to the area and
heefjJeleea Oeeje inversely proportional to length. So, self inductance of a
(d) constant current counterclockwise./JeeceeJele& solenoid (L) increases when l (length) decreases and A
efveÙele Oeeje (Area) increases.

Physics 464 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
21.
Alternating Current
As we know the maximum value of the displacement
21.1 AC Voltage Applied to a Resistor current is equal to the maximum value of the capacitor
current.
So,
1. The peak voltage of the ac source is equal to
ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje (ac) œeesle keâe efMeKej Jeesušspe kesâ ε
(id) max = (ic) max = io = o
yejeyej nesiee: z
Where, ε0 is emf when capacitor is 50% charged which
(a) 1 2 times the rms value of the ac source/ ac is equal to
œeesle kesâ rms ceeve keâe 1 2 iegvee ε0 = Vmax × 2
(b) The value of voltage supplied to the ε0 = 220 × 2
circuit/heefjheLe keâes Øeoeve efkeâS ieS Jeesušspe kesâ ceeve kesâ and Z is impedance of given circuit i.e.
(c) The rms value of the ac source/ ac œeesle kesâ z = R 2 + Xc2
rms (Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue) ceeve kesâ
220 2
(d) 2 times the rms value of the ac source/ac So, i0 =
(100 ) + (100 )
2 2

œeesle kesâ rms ceeve keâe 2 iegvee

NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 220 2
=
Ans. (d) : ⇒Peak voltage of AC source is the highest 1002 × (1 + 1)
point or highest value of the voltage in case of any
220 2
voltage waveform. = = 2.2A
⇒ Root mean square value or rms value of voltage of 100 2
an AC source is the value which is the most efficient 3. The instantaneous values of alternating current
value of the total wave form. and voltages in a circuit are given as
⇒Peak voltage = 2 × rms value of voltage efkeâmeer heefjheLe ceW ØelÙeeJeleea efJeÅegle Oeeje leLee Jeesušlee
2. A 100 Ω resistance and a capacitor of 100 Ω
kesâ leel#eefCekeâ ceeveeW keâes ›eâceMe: efvecve Øekeâej efve™efhele
reactance are connected in series across a 220V efkeâÙee peelee nw
source. When the capacitor is 50% charged, 1
the peak value of the displacement Current is i= sin (100πt ) ampere /SefcheÙej
2
100 Ω keâe Skeâ ØeeflejesOe leLee 100 Ω ØeefleIeele keâe Skeâ
1
mebOeeefj$e, efkeâmeer 220V kesâ œeesle mes ßesCeer›eâce ceW pegÌ[s e= sin (100πt + π / 3 ) volt /Jeesuš
2
nQ~ mebOeeefj$e kesâ 50% DeeJesefMele nesves hej efJemLeeheve oj
The average power in Watts consumed in the
keâe efMeKej ceeve nesiee:- circuit is/lees, Fme heefjheLe ceW #eefÙele Deewmele Meefòeâ
(a) 2.2A (b) 11A (Jee@š ceW) nesieer:–
(c) 4.4A (d) 11 2A 1 1
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II (a) (b)
2 8
Ans. (a) :
1 3
(c) (d)
4 4
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (b) : Given –
Instantaneous value of alternating current –
1
Given:- R = 100 Ω i= sin (100πt ) ...(i)
Xc = 100 Ω 2
Vmax = 220 V Standard eqn → i = i0 sin (ωt) ...(ii)

Physics 465 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
compare eqn (i) & (ii) we get 5. In an a.c. circuit the e.m.f (e) and the current
1 (i) at any instant are given respectively by :
i0 = A e = E0 sin ωt
2
i = I0 sin (ωt – φ)
Instantaneous value of alternating voltage –
The average power in the circuit over one cycle
1  π
e= sin 100πt +  of A.C. is –
2  3 Skeâ a.c. heefjheLe ceW #eefCekeâ efJe.Jee.yeue. (e.m.f) e Deewj
Standard equation, e = e0 sin(ωt + φ) Oeeje i kesâ ›eâceevegmeej ceeve efvecve Øekeâej JÙeòeâ efkeâÙes pee
Comparing with standard equation of emf – mekeâles nw :-
1 π e = E0 sin ωt
e0 = and φ=
2 3 i = I0 sin (ωt – φ)
1 a.c. keâer Skeâ meeFkeâue (DeeJele&) ceW heefjheLe ceW ceOÙeceeve
∴ irms =
i0 1
= 2 = Ampere Meefòeâ nesieer-
2 2 2 E 0 I0
(a) cos φ (b) E0I0
1 2
e 1
& erms = 0 = 2 = volt. E I
(c) 0 0
E 0 I0
sin φ(d)
2 2 2 2 2
∴ Average power consumed in the A.C. circuit, AIPMT-2008
Pavg= irms × erms × cos φ Ans. (a) : Given:- emf (e) = E0 sin ωt
1 1 π 1 1 1 current I = I0 sin (ωt–φ)
= × ×cos   = × ×
2 2 3 2 2 2 In any ac circuit, Power (P) = VI cos φ
(where cos φ = power factor)
1
Pavg = (& v, I are rms value)
8
∵ e = E0 sin ωt
4. The r.m.s. value of potential difference V E0
erms = Vrms =
shown in the figure is : 2
efÛe$eevegmeej efJeYeJeevlej V keâe Jeie&ceeOÙe cetue ceeve nw : I = I0 sin (ωt – φ)
I0
Irms =
2
So, P = E 0 . I0 cos φ
2 2
1
Pavg = E 0 I0 cos φ
(a) V0 / 3 (b) V0 2
6. In an A.C. circuit, Irms and I0 related as
(c) V0 / 2 (d) V0/2
Skeâ A.C. heefjheLe ceW Irms leLee I0 kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nw:
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
(a) Irms = πI0 (b) Irms = 2 I0
Ans. (c) : Voltage is given as V = V0 for 0 ≥ t ≤ T/2
(c) Irms = I0/π (d) Irms = I0 / 2
and V = 0 for T/2 ≥ t ≤ T
AIPMT-1994
T

r.m.s voltage Vrms =

∫0
V0 2 dT Ans. (d) : We know that
T I = I0 sinωt
T

∫ I dt
T/2 T 2

∫ ∫
2
V0 dt 0dt
Vrms = 0
+ T/2
Now I 2rms = 0
T T T

T/2 ∫ dt
Vrms =
∫0
V0 2 dt
=
V0 × T / 2
2
T
0

∫ (I sin ωt ) dt
2
T T
0
0
Vrms = V0 / 2 =
T

Physics 466 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
T

∫I sin 2 ωt dt 21.2 Representation of AC Current

2
0

= 0
and Voltage by Rotating Vectors-
T
T Phasors
I 02
(1 − cos 2ωt ) dt
2T ∫0
= 8. Given below are two statements.
T
veerÛes oes keâLeve efoS ieS nQ:
I 02  sin 2ωt  Statement I: In an ac circuit, the current
= t−
2T  2ω  0 through a capacitor leads the voltage across it.
keâLeve - I : efkeâmeer ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje (ac) heefjheLe ceW,
I 02
= [( T − 0 ) − ( 0 − 0 ) ] efkeâmeer mebOeeefj$e ceW ØeJeeefnle Oeeje, Gmekesâ efmejeW hej efJeYeJe
2T
mes De«eieeceer nesleer nw~
I 02
= ×T Statement II: In a.c. circuits containing pure
2T capacitance only, the phase difference between
the current and the voltage is π.
I02
I rms = keâLeve - II : efkeâmeer ac heefjheLe ceW efpemeceW kesâJeue Megæ
2
Oeeefjlee nw, Oeeje SJeb Jeesušspe (efJeYeJe) kesâ yeerÛe ceW
I keâuee-Devlej π neslee nw~
I rms = 0
2 In the light of the above statements, choose the
7. Two cables of copper are of equal lengths. One most appropriate answer from the options
of them has a single wire of area of cross- given below:
section A, while other has 10 wires of cross Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ DeeOeej hej, veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW
sectional area A/10 each. Give their suitability ceW mes meJee&efOekeâ GheÙegòeâ Gòej ÛegveW~
for transporting A.C. and D.C (a) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
meceeve uecyeeF& kesâ keâe@hej kesâ oes kesâyeue nQ~ GveceW mes Skeâ keâLeve - I SJeb keâLeve - II oesveeW mener nQ~
kesâyeue ceW DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue A keâe Skeâue leej nw (b) Both Statement I and Statement II are
incorrect/keâLeve - I SJeb keâLeve - II oesveeW ieuele nQ~
peyeefkeâ otmejs kesâyeue ceW DevegØemLe keâeš #es$eheâue A/10
(c) Statement I is correct but Statement II is
keâer 10 leejW nw~ A.C. Deewj D.C. kesâ ØeJeen kesâ efueS incorrect/keâLeve - I mener nw efkeâvleg keâLeve - II ieuele nw~
Fvekeâer GheÙegòeâlee yeleeFS~ (d) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is
(a) only multiple strands for A.C., either for correct/keâLeve - I ieuele nw efkeâvleg keâLeve - II mener nw~
D.C./A.C. Deewj D.C. kesâ efueS yengue leejW GheÙegòeâ nQ~ NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
(b) only multiple strands for A.C., only single Ans. (c) : AC circuit containing capacitor only –
strand for D.C/A.C. kesâ efueS yengue leejW peyeefkeâ
D.C. kesâ efueS Skeâue leej GheÙegòeâ nw~
(c) only single strand for D.C. either for
A.C./D.C. Deewj A.C. kesâ efueS Skeâue leej GheÙegòeâ nw~
(d) only multiple strand for DC, only single E = E0sin ωt ................ (i)
strand for A.C./D.C. kesâ efueS yengue leejW peyeefkeâ We know charge Q = C×V = C×E
A.C. kesâ efueS Skeâue leej GheÙegòeâ nw~ Where, C is capacitance of capacitor.
⇒ Q = CE0 sin ωt
AIPMT-1994
differentiating,
Ans. (a) : For transporting DC both wires are equally dQ
suitable because inductor works on the principle of = ωCE 0cosωt
dt
changing flux, since in DC direction of current is
Let ωCE0 = I0 = maximum current through the circuit.
constant. so magnetic flux will not change.
dQ
In an a.c wire due to inductance there occurs a skin Also, =I
effect i.e the current flowing on the outer layer of dt
conductor is more comparative to inner layer so this So, I = I0 cos ωt = I0 sin (ωt + π )
causes the reduction of current carrying capacity of line 2
so to overcome this the wires are standard but in dc due ⇒ Current leads the voltage in pure capacitive circuit
to absence of frequency there is no concept of π π
by i.e. phase difference is .
inductance. 2 2
Physics 467 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
21.3 AC Voltage Applied to an
Inductor
10. The magnetic energy stored in an inductor of
inductance 4 µH carrying a current of 2 A is :
4 µH ØesjkeâlJe kesâ Øesjkeâ ceW 2A Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw
9. The current (I) in the inductance is varying FmeceW mebefÛele ÛegbyekeâerÙe Tpee& nw :
with time according to the plot shown in figure. (a) 8 µJ (b) 4 µJ
(c) 4 mJ (d) 8 mJ
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (a) : The magnetic energy stored in an inductor is
1
Which one of the following is the correct U L = LI2
variation of voltage with time in the coil? 2
efkeâmeer Øesjkeâ ceW efJeÅegle Oeeje (I) DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes 1
= × 4 × ( 2)
2

Je›eâ kesâ Devegmeej heefjJeefle&le nesleer nw~ 2

U L = 8 µJ
11. An inductor of inductance 2 mH is connected to
a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. source. Let the inductive
reactance in the circuit is X1. If a 220 V dc
lees, efvecveebefkeâle ceW mes keâewve mee «eeheâ (DeeuesKe) meceÙe source replaces the ac source in the circuit,
then the inductive reactance in the circuit is X2.
kesâ meeLe Jeesušlee kesâ mener heefjJele&ve keâes oMee&lee nw?
X1 and X2 respectively are:
(a) (b) 2 mH ØesjkeâlJe Jeeues Skeâ Øesjkeâ keâes 220 V, 50 Hz
Jeeues ac Œeesle mes peesÌ[e peelee nw~ ceevee heefjheLe ceW
ØesjkeâerÙe ØeefleIeele X1 nw~ Ùeefo heefjheLe ceW ac Œeesle keâes
(c) (d) 220 V Jeeues dc (efo°, Oeeje) Œeesle mes yeoue efoÙee
peeS lees heefjheLe ceW ØesjkeâerÙe ØeefleIeele keâe ceeve X2 nes
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 peelee nw~ X1 SJeb X2 ›eâceMe: nQ:
AIPMT-1994 (a) 6.28 Ω, zero/MetvÙe
dI (b) 6.28 Ω, infinity/Devevle
Ans. (b) : 0 -T/2 ⇒ = + ve
dt (c) 0.628 Ω, zero/MetvÙe
Slope = constant (d) 0.628 Ω, infinity/Devevle
V = Constant (+ve) NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
dV Ans. (c) : Given that –
QV = − L
dT L = 2mH
V = 220V
dV
V = L. f = 50Hz
dt
When A.C source is applied in the circuit then inductive
And T/2→ T reactance in the circuit is X1 then–
dI X1 = ωL = 2πfL
= − ve
dt = 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 2 × 10–3
Slope = constant = 0.628Ω
V = constant (-ve) When DC source is applied in the circuit then inductive
So Graph will be reactance in the circuit is X2 –
X2 = ωL = 2πfL
(f = 0)
X2 = 0

Physics 468 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12. A coil of self-inductance L is connected in series
with a bulb B and an AC source. Brightness of 21.4 AC Voltage Applied to a
the bulb decreases when : Capacitor
Skeâ kegâC[ueer keâe mJe-ØesjkeâlJe L nw~ Ùen ßesCeer ›eâce ceW
Skeâ efJeÅegle yeuye B leLee Skeâ S.meer. (AC) Œeesle mes 14. An ac source is connected to a capacitor C. Due
to decrease in its operating frequency :
pegÌ[er nw~ Fme yeuye kesâ ØekeâeMe keâer oerhleer (leer›elee) keâce
Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea œeesle keâes Skeâ mebOeeefj$e (C) mes peesÌ[e
nes peeÙesieer, peye :
ieÙee nw~ Fmekeâer mebÛeeefuele DeeJe=efòe Iešves mes :
(a) an iron rod is inserted in the coil.
kegâC[ueer ceW ueesns keâer Skeâ ÚÌ[ [eue oer peeS~ (a) capacitive reactance remains constant/ OeeefjleerÙe
ØeefleIeele efveÙele jnlee nw~
(b) frequency of the AC source is decreased.
S.meer. (AC) Œeesle keâer DeeJe=efòe keâce nes peeS~ (b) capacitive reactance decreases./ OeeefjleerÙe ØeefleIeele
(c) number of turns in the coil is reduced.
Iešlee nw~
kegâC[ueer ceW hesâjeW keâer mebKÙee keâce nes peeS~ (c) displacement current increases./ efJemLeeheve Oeeje
(d) A capacitance of reactance XC = XL is yeÌ{leer nw~
included in the same circuit. / Fme heefjheLe ceW Skeâ (d) displacement current decreases./ efJemLeeheve Oeeje
mebOeeefj$e ØeefleIeele XC = XL peesÌ[ efoÙee peeS~ Iešleer nw~
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (a) : Ans. (d) : The displacement current in a capacitor is
B given by –
V
i D = 0 sin ωt
Xc
= V0 ωcsin ωt
On decreasing frequency displacement current
decreases.
b
15. A 40 µF capacitor is connected to a 200 V, 50
V
I= Hz ac supply. The rms value of the current in
Z the circuit is, nearly :
Where, I = Current 40 µF kesâ efkeâmeer mebOeeefj$e keâes 200 V, 50 Hz keâer ac
V = Voltage Deehetefle& mes mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme heefjheLe ceW Oeeje
Z = Resistance
keâe Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue (rms) ceeve nw, ueieYeie;
Z = R 2 + ( XC − X L )
2
(a) 2. 05 A (b) 2.5 A
X L = ωL (c) 25.1 A (d) 1.7 A
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
An iron rod is inserted in the coil self-inductance
increases and the current decrease the brightness of the Ans. (b) : Given that,
bulb decreases. Capacitor (C) = 40µF
13. For a inductor coil L = 0.04 H, then work done Frequency (f) = 50 Hz
by source to establish a current of 5A in it RMS value of applied voltage = 200V
is/ØesjkeâlJe kegâC[ueer (L = 0.04 H) ceW 5A ØeJeeefnle 1
Impedance of capacitor, Xc =
keâjves kesâ efueS m$eesle Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee keâeÙe& keäÙee nesiee- 2πfC
(a) 0.5 J (b) 1.00 J V
∴ I rms = = 200 × 2π× 50 × 40 ×10−6 = 2.51A
(c) 100 J (d) 20 J Xc
AIPMT-1999
16. A small signal voltage V(t) = V0 sin ωt is applied
Ans. (b) : Given data– across an ideal capacitor C:
Inductance, L = 0.04 H keâesF& ueIeg efmeiveue Jeesušlee V(t) = V0 sin ωt efkeâmeer
Current (I) = 5A
DeeoMe& mebOeeefj$e C kesâ efmejeW hej DevegØeÙegòeâ keâer ieÙeer nw :
 ∆φ  LI0
Work done by source = E × q = E  =E (a) Current I (t), leads voltage V(t) by 180º
 R  R Oeeje I (t), Jeesušlee V(t) mes 180º De«e nw~
E (b) Current I(t), lags voltage V(t) by 90º
  LI0 = ( I0 ) LI0 = LI0 = 0.04 × ( 5 ) = 1.0J
2 2

 
R Oeeje I(t), Jeesušlee V(t) mes 90º heMÛe nw~
Physics 469 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) Over a full cycle the capacitor C does not where,
consume any energy from the voltage 1
ω=
source./Skeâ hetCe& Ûe›eâ mes mebOeeefj$e C Jeesušlee m$eesle mes LC
keâesF& Tpee& Ghecegòeâ veneR keâjlee~
∴ cos ωt = q ,
(d) Current I(t) is in phase with voltage V(t) q0
Oeeje I(t) Jeesušlee V(t) keâer keâuee ceW nw~ CV2 V2
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 cos ωt = = (Q q = CV)
CV1 V1
Ans. (c) : For ideal capacitor circuit
If V(t) = V0 sin ωt Current through the inductor –

dV ( t )
I=
dq d
=
dt dt 0
(
q cos ωt = −q 0ω sin ωt )
i(t) = C
( )
dt 1 2 1/2
I = CV1 1 − cos ωt
i(t) = CVo ω cos ωt LC
i(t) = CVo ω sin (ωt + 900) [∴ sin ωt+cos2 ωt=1
2

Average Power over a complete cycle sin2 ωt=1–cos2ωt]

P = Vrms Irms cosϕ 1

P = Vrms Irms cos90 0   V 2

  2
sin ωt = 1 –  22  
P=0   V1  
Hence, Capacitor does not consume energy effectively 1
over full cycles.   V  2 2

= V C 1 −  2  
1
L V  
  1 
 C ( V12 − V22 ) 
1/ 2

=  
 L 
18. A capacitor has capacity C and reactance X. If
17. A condenser of capacity C is charged to a capacitance and frequency become double then
potential difference of V1. The plates of the reactance will be :/Skeâ mebOeeefj$e keâer Oeeefjlee C Deewj
condenser are then connected to an ideal
inductor of inductance L. The current through ØeefleIeele X nw Ùeefo Oeeefjlee Je DeeJe=efòe ogiegveer keâj oer
the inductor when the potential difference peeÙes lees Deye ØeefleIeele nesiee-
across the condenser reduces to V2 is X
(a) 4X (b)
C Oeeefjlee kesâ Skeâ mebOeeefj$e keâes V1 efJeYeJeevlej lekeâ 2
DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ efHeâj Fmekeâer huesšeW keâes Skeâ L X
(c) (d) 2X
ØeskeâlJe kesâ Skeâ DeeoMe& Øesjkeâ mes peesÌ[ efoÙee ieÙee nw~ peye 4
mebOeeefj$e kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej keâce neskeâj V2 nes AIPMT-2001
peeÙe lees Øesjkeâ mes yenves Jeeueer efJeÅegle Oeeje nesieer – Ans. (c) : Capacitive Resistance is given by
1 1 1
 C(V1 − V2 ) 2  2 C(V12 − V22 ) X=
= …(i)
(a)   (b) ωc 2πfc
 L  L Where, C = capacitance
1 F = frequency
C(V12 + V22 )  C(V12 − V22 )  2 Now, Since Frequency is doubled & capacitance
(c) (d)  
L  L  Doubled.
 
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 1
X' =
Ans. (d) : Given, 2π (2f) (2c)
Condenser of Capacity = C 1
X' =
Potential difference = V1 4 (2π fc)
Inductance = L ∴ From equation (i)
In case of oscillatory discharge of a capacitor through
an inductor, charge at instant 't' is given by X
X' =
q = q0 cosωt 4

Physics 470 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
V = 220 sin (100πt+φ)volt
21.5 AC Voltage Applied to a Series (a) 30º/j (b) 45º/j
LCR Circuit (c) 60º/j (d) 90º/j
19. For very high frequencies, the effective RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
impedance of the circuit (shown in the figure) Ans. (b) :
will be
Deefle GÛÛe DeeJe=efòeÙeeW kesâ efueS, heefjheLe keâe ØeYeeJeer
ØeefleyeeOee (efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw) nesiee

We know that -
XL = ωL
(a) 1Ω/j (b) 3Ω/j
(c) 4Ω/j (d) 6Ω/j 1
XL = 100π× = 100Ω
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 π
Ans. (b) :

X L 100
tan φ = = =1
R 100
φ = 45º
According to the question for very high frequency i.e 21. If Z1 and Z2 are the impedances of the given
f=∞ circuits (a) and (b) as shown in figures, then
XL = ωL choose the correct option.
XL = 2πfL
Ùeefo Z1 Deewj Z2 efoS ieS meefke&âš (a) Deewj (b) kesâ
XL = ∞
ØeefleyeeOee nw pewmee efkeâ efÛe$eeW ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw, lees
XC = 1 mener efJekeâuhe ÛegveW~
ωC
1
XC =
2πfC
XC = 0
The modified circuit is -

(a) Z1 = Z2 (b) Z1>Z2

(c) Z1< Z2 (d) Z1+Z2=20Ω
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
Ans. (c) : From figure-
Equivalent resistance = R' = (2+1) Ω In circuit (a) DC voltage is supplied therefore,
R ' = 3Ω Z1 = R = 10 Ω..........(i)
20. An ac source is connected in given circuit. The In circuit (b) AC voltage is supplied, therefore,
value of φ will be /efoS ieS heefjheLe ceW Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea Z2 = R 2 + ( X C )
2

Oeeje m$eesle pegÌ[e ngDee nw~ lees φ keâe ceeve nesiee:

2
 1 
= R2 +  
 ωc 
2
 1 
= R2 +  
 2πfc 

Physics 471 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2 The net impedance of the circuit is –
  2
 1   1 
= 10 + 
2
 Z = R 2 +  ωL − 
3
 2π × 50 × 10 ×10−6   ωC 
 
 π  2
 
Z2 = 10 2...........(ii)  50 1 
= (10 ) +  2π× 50 × ×10 −
2 −3
From equation (i) and equation (ii), we can say that- 
 π 3
×10−6 
10
Z1< Z2  2π× 50 ×
 π 
22. In a series LCR circuit, the inductance L is
10 mH, capacitance C is 1µF and resistance R Z= 100 + 25
is 100Ω . The frequency at which resonance Z= 125
occurs is :
Skeâ ßesCeeryeæ LCR heefjheLe ceW ØesjkeâlJe (L) 10 mH, Z= 5 5
Oeeefjlee (C) 1 µF leLee ØeeflejesOe (R) 100 Ω nw~ Devegveeo 24. A series LCR circuit with inductance 10H,
GlheVe nesves keâer efmLeefle ceW DeeJe=efòe nw : capacitance 10µF, resistance 50Ω is connected to
an ac source of voltage, V = 200sin (100t) volt. If
(a) 1.59 kHz (b) 15.9 rad/s
the resonant frequency of the LCR circuit is v0
(c) 15.9 kHz (d) 1.59 rad/s
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 and the frequency of the ac source is v, then/10H
Ans. (a) : Given: L =10mH = 10×10–3H (nsvejer) ØesjkeâlJe, 10µF Oeeefjlee SJeb 50Ω ØeeflejesOe Jeeuee
C = 1µF = 1×10–6F Skeâ ßesCeeryeæ LCR heefjheLe, V = 200sin (100t) volt
R = 100Ω Jeesušspe Jeeues Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje (a.c.) œeesle kesâ meeLe
The resonance frequency in LCR circuit is peg[
Ì e ngDee nw~ Ùeefo LCR heefjheLe keâer Devegveeoer DeeJe=efòe v0
f=
1 SJeb ac œeesle keâer DeeJe=efòe v nw lees:
2π LC 100
(a) ν = 100Hz; ν 0 = Hz
1 π
f=
2π 10 × 10−3 × 1× 10−6 (b) ν 0 = ν = 50Hz
1 1 1 50
f= = = × 104 (c) ν 0 = ν = Hz
2π 10 −8 2π×10 −4
2π π
f =1592Hz 50
(d) ν 0 = Hz, ν = 50Hz
f = 1.592 kHz π
23. The net impedance of circuit (as shown in NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
figure) will be:/heefjheLe (pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW ØeoefMe&le Ans. (c) : Given:-
nw) keâer heefjCeeceer ØeefleyeeOee nesieer : Inductance L = 10 H
Resistance R = 50 Ω
Capacitance C = 10 µF
Angular velocity ω = 100 rad/s
ω 100
ν= =
2π 2π
50
ν = Hz
π
(a) 25 Ω (b) 10 2 Ω Resonance frequency
(c) 15 Ω (d) 5 5 Ω 1
ν0 =
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 2π LC
Ans. (d) : 1
=
2π 10 ×10 × 10−6
1 1
=
2π 10 ×10 × 10−6
50
ν0 = Hz
π

Physics 472 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
25. An inductor of inductance L, a capacitor of (c) 50 rad/s and 25 rad/s
capacitance C and a resistor of resistance 'R' 50 jsef[Ùeve/mes., 25 jsef[Ùeve/mes.
are connected in series to an ac source of
(d) 46 rad/s and 54 rad/s
potential difference 'V' volts as shown in
figure. 46 jsef[Ùeve/mes., 54 jsef[Ùeve/mes.
Potential difference across L, C and R is 40 V, NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
10 V and 40 V, respectively. The amplitude of Ans. (d) : An electric circuit connecting Inductor (L) ,
current flowing through LCR series circuit is Capacitor (C) and Resistor (R) in series is an LCR
10 2 A . The impedance of the circuit is circuit.
efoKeeÙes ieÙes efÛe$e kesâ Devegmeej Skeâ L ØesjkeâlJe keâe Øesjkeâ, Given-
Skeâ C Oeeefjlee keâe Oeeefj$e leLee Skeâ 'R' ØeeflejesOe keâe Inductance (L) = 5H
ØeeflejesOekeâ 'V' Jeesuš efJeYeJeevlej kesâ ØelÙeeJeleea m$eesle mes Capacitance (C) = 80µF
ßesCeer ›eâce ceW pegÌ[s nQ~ Resistance (R) = 40 Ω
L, C, R hej efJeYeJeevlej ›eâceMe: 40 Jeesuš, 10 Jeesuš
leLee 40 Jeesuš nQ~ LCR ßesCeer heefjheLe ceW ØeJeeefnle Oeeje Resonance frequency of LCR series circuit, ω0
10 2 A SefcheÙej nw~ heefjheLe keâe ØeefleyeeOee nw : 1 1
ω0 = = = 50 rad/sec
LC –6
5 × 80 × 10
ω ωL
Q= =
∆ω R
R 40
∆ω = = = 8 rad/sec
L 5
∆ω
ωmin = ω0 – = 46 rad/sec
2
(a) 5 Ω/5 Deesce (b) 4 2 Ω / 4 2 Deesce ∆ω
ωmax = ω0 + = 54 rad/sec
(c) 5 2 Ω / 5 2 Deesce (d) 4 Ω/4 Deesce 2
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 27. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac
voltage source. When L is removed from the
VR2 + ( VL – VC )
2
Ans. (a) : VRMS = circuit, the phase difference between current
π
= 40 2 + ( 40 – 10 )
2
and voltage is . If instead C is removed from
3
= 50V π
the circuit, the phase difference is again
I0 10 2 3
IRMS = = = 10A
2 2 between current and voltage. The power factor
Q VRMS = IRMS × Z of the circuit is :
V 50 keâesF& ßesCeer LCR heefjheLe efkeâmeer S.meer Jeesušlee œeesle mes
∴ Z = RMS = = 5Ω mebÙeesefpele nw~ peye L keâes nše efueÙee peelee nw, lees Oeeje
I RMS 10
π
26. A series LCR circuit containing 5.0 H Inductor, Deewj Jeesušlee kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâueevlej neslee nw~ Ùeefo
80 µF Capacitor and 40 Ω Resistor is connected 3
to 230 V variable frequency ac source. The Fmekesâ mLeeve hej heefjheLe mes C keâes nšeleW nQ, lees Yeer Oeeje
Angular Frequencies of the source at which π
power transferred to the circuit is half the Deewj Jeesušlee kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej ner jnlee nw~ Fme
3
power at the Resonant Angular Frequency are
likely to be/Skeâ ßesCeer LCR heefjheLe ceW 5.0 nsvejer keâe heefjheLe keâe Meefòeâ iegCeebkeâ nw:
Øesjkeâ, 80 ceeF›eâes Hewâje[ keâe Oeeefj$e leefee 40 Deesce keâe (a) 0.5 (b) 1.0
ØeeflejesOekeâ 230 Jeesuš kesâ heefjJele&veerÙe DeeJe=efòe kesâ (c) –1.0 (d) zero
ØelÙeeJeleea œeesle mes pegÌ[e nw~ Devegveeo keâesCeerÙe DeeJe=efòe hej NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Meefòeâ keâer DeeOeer Meefòeâ mLeeveevleefjle keâjves Jeeues œeesle
keâer keâesCeerÙe DeeJe=efòeÙeeB nesieer : Ans. (b) :When L is removed
(a) 42 rad/s and 58 rad/s Xc
tan φ =
42 jsef[Ùeve/mes., 58 jsef[Ùeve/mes. R
(b) 25 rad/s and 75 rad/s π Xc
tan = − − − (i)
25 jsef[Ùeve/mes., 75 jsef[Ùeve/mes. 3 R
Physics 473 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When 'C' is removed, Ans. (a) Given:
X Vo = 10V, ω = 314 radian/sec., L = 20mH,
tan φ = L
R C =100µF, R = 50Ω
π XL
tan = − − − (ii)
3 R
From equation (i) and (ii) ,
X L = X C ( the circuit is in resonance)
Z=R
P = Vrms Irms cosφ
R 2 + ( XL − XC )
2
Where, Z =
V R  R
= Vrms × rms × Q cos φ = 
R Z Z  Z
Power factor = cos φ = =1
( Vrms )
2
Z R
= 2
28. A circuit when connected to an AC source of 12 Z
V gives a current of 0.2 A. The same circuit Inductive reactance, XL = ωL = 314 × ( 20 ×10−3 ) = 6.280
when connected to a DC source of 12 V, gives a
current of 0.4 A. The circuit is/keâesF& heefjheLe 12 V Capacitive reactance, X c = 1 = 1
= 31.84Ω
ωc 314 ×100 ×10−6
kesâ ØelÙeeJeleea œeesle mes mebÙeesefpele efkeâS peeves hej 0.2 A
Resistance, R = 50Ω
Oeeje oslee nw~ Ùener heefjheLe 12 V kesâ efo°Oeeje œeesle mes
( xc − xL )
2
mebÙeesefpele efkeâS peeves hej 0.4 A Oeeje oslee nw~ Ùen Impedance, Z = + R2
heefjheLe nw– = ( 31.84 − 6.28)
2
+ 502
(a) Series LCR/ ßesCeer LCR
⇒ Z = 56Ω
(b) Series LR/ ßesCeer LR 2
 V0 
ßesCeer RC ( Vrms ) R  2  × R
2
(c) Series RC/
P= =
(d) Series LC/ ßesCeer LC Z2 Z2
2
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)  10 
V   × 50
=
Ans. (b) : At AC IAc = 2
R 2 + ω2 L2 562
V P = 0.79W
At DC IDC =
Z 30. Which of the following combinations should be
V selected for better tuning of an L-C-R circuit
IAC = = 0.2A and IDC = 0.4A
Z used for communication?
As IAC ≠ IDC mebÛeej nsleg efkeâmeer L-C-R heefjheLe kesâ yesnlej mecemJejCe
• As the current with AC source and DC source are (šÙetefveie) kesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee
different inductor must be present with resistance. mebÙeespeve GheÙegòeâ nesiee ?
• In second case for DC source, capacitor would (a)R = 20Ω, L =1.5H, C=35µF
provide infinite resistance but current is present in (b)R = 25Ω, L =2.5H, C=45µF
circuit, it means resistor and inductor can be present (c)R = 15Ω, L =3.5H, C=30µF
in the circuit.
(d)R = 25Ω, L =1.5H, C=45µF
29. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 100 µF and a NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
resistor 50 Ω are connected in series across a Ans. (c) : For better tuning, Q-factor must be high.
source of emf, V = 10 sin 314 t. The power loss
in the circuit is / 20 mH keâe keâesF& Øesjkeâ, 100 µF Quality factor Q = ω0 L = 1  L  = 1 L
keâe keâesF& mebOeeefj$e leLee 50 Ω keâe keâesF& ØeeflejesOekeâ, efJe] R LC  R  R C
Jee] yeue (emf), V = 10 sin 314 t. kesâ efkeâmeer œeesle mes R and C should be small and L should by high.
Therefore the combination in option (c) is correct.
ßesCeer ceW mebÙeesefpele nQ~ Fme heefjheLe ceW Meefòeâ #eÙe nw 31. The potential differences across the resistance
(a) 0.79 W (b) 0.43 W capacitance and inductance are 80V, 40V and
(c) 1.13 W (d) 2.74 100 V respectively in an L-C-R circuit. The
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 power factor of this circuit is.
Physics 474 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer L-C-R heefjheLe ceW ØeeflejesOekeâ, Oeeefjlee leLee Now,
ØesjkeâlJe kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej ›eâceMe: 80V, Impedance, Z = R 2 + (X C − X L ) 2
40V Deewj 100 V nQ~ heefjheLe keâe Meeefòeâ iegCeebkeâ nesiee:-
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.5 = 40 2 + (58.8 − 6.8) 2
(c) 0.8 (d) 1.0 = 1600 + (52) 2
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
= 4304 = 65.60
Ans. (c) :
2
V 
Power, P = i 2rms R =  rms  R
 Z 
2
 10 / 2  VP 10
=   × 40 [∵Vrms = = ]
 65.6  2 2
2
 10 
=  × 40
 2 × 65.6 

Given, = 0.01161 × 40 = 0.46 Watt

VR = 80, VL = 100 V, Vc = 40 V P =0.46 ≈ 0.51 W
As we know, 33. A series R-C circuit is connected to an
V − Vc 100 − 40 3 alternating voltage source. Consider two
tan φ = L = = situations./Skeâ ßesCeer R-C heefjheLe efkeâmeer ØelÙeeJeleea
VR 80 4
Jeesušlee kesâ œeesle mes pegÌ[e nQ oes efmLeefleÙeeW (a) leLee (b)
φ = 36.86º
4 hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~
Power factor = cos φ = cos 37º = = 0.8 (A) When capcitor is air filled.
5
32. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 50µF and
peye, mebOeeefj$e JeeÙeg mebhetefjle (Yeje) nw~
resistor 40Ω are connected in series across a (B) When capacitor is mica filled./peye, mebOeeefj$e
Source of emf V = 10 sin 340t. The power loss ceeFkeâe mebhetefjle nw~
in A.C. circuit is/efkeâmeer m$eesle efpemekeâe V = 10 sin Current through resistor is i and voltage across
340t nw, mes ßesCeer ceW 20 mH keâe Øesjkeâ, 50µF keâe capacitor is V then/Fme heefjheLe ceW ØeeflejesOekeâ mes
mebIeefj$e leLee 40Ω keâe ØeeflejesOekeâ mebÙeesefpele nw~ Fme
ØeJeeefnle efJeÅegle Oeeje i nw leLee mebOeeefj$e kesâ efmejeW kesâ
ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje heefjheLe ceW Meefòeâ #eÙe nw~ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej V nw:
(a) 0.89 W (b) 0.51 W (a) Va = Vb (b) Va < Vb
(c) 0.67 W (d) 0.76 W (c) Va > Vb (d) ia = ib
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Ans. (b) : Given L = 20 mH Ans. (c) : For series C-R circuit, the impedance
C = 20 µF 1
R = 40 Ω Z = R 2 + X c 2 , where Xc = and current I = V/Z
ωc
VP = 10 V When the capacitor is filled by mica, the capacitance
will be increased. If C increased, Xc decreases, so the
current will increase and hence voltage across resistance
increases and voltage across capacitor decreases.
Thus, Va > Vb

We know
Inductive Reactance, XL = ωL = 340 × 20 × 10-3 = 6.8 Ω
1  1 
Capacitive Reactance, X C = = 
ωc  340 × 50 × 10−6 
34. A coil has resistance 30 ohm and inductive
104 1000
= = reactance 20 Ohm at 50 Hz frequency. If an ac
34 × 5 17 source, of 200 volt, 100 Hz, is connected across
= 58.82 Ω the coil, the current in the coil will be
Physics 475 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ kegâC[ueer 50 Hz DeeJe=efòe hej 30 ohm leLee 20 36. In the given circuit the reading of voltmeter V1
ohm keâe ØesjCeerÙe ØeefleIeele jKeleer nw~ Ùeefo 200 volt, and V2 are 300 volts each. The reading of the
voltmeter V3 and ammeter A are respectively –
100 Hz keâe Skeâ ac m$eesle kegâC[ueer kesâ efmejeW hej peesÌ[e
veerÛes efoÙes ieSs heefjheLe ceW Jeesušceeršj V1 Je V2 ØelÙeskeâ
peeÙes, lees kegâC[ueer ceW Oeeje nesieer-
keâe hee"dÙeebkeâ 300 nw~ Jeesušceeršj V3 Je A Deceeršj kesâ
(a) 2.0 A (b) 4.0 A
hee"Ùeebkeâ ›eâceMe: nw–
20
(c) 8.0 A (d) A
13
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
Ans. (b) : Given, Resistance, R = 30 Ω
Inductive Reactance, XL = 20 Ω
Frequency, f = 50 Hz
We know (a) 150 V, 2.2 A (b) 220 V, 2.2 A
(c) 220 V, 2.0 A (d) 100 V, 2.0 A
XL = ω L = 2πfL
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
20 = XL = 2π.50.L ......(i)
Ans. (b) : For the given series LCR circuit
When frequency of ac source is changed to 100 Hz,
then Circuit voltage, V = VR2 + (VL - VC ) 2
X 'L = ω ' L = 2π.100.L Since VL= VC
⇒ X = 2π(50 × 2)L
' So, V = VR = 220V
L
V 220
X 'L = 20 × 2Ω (from eqn (i)) also, current I = = = 2.2A
R 100
X 'L = 40 Ω I = 2.2A
So, impedance, Z = X 'L + R = 40 + 30
2 2 2 2
37. An ac voltage is applied to a resistance R and an
inductor L in series. If R and the inductive
Z = 50 Ω
reactance are both equal to 3Ω, the phase
V 200
Current I = = = 4A. difference between the applied voltage and the
z 50 current in the circuit is:/Skeâ ac Jeesušlee keâes ßesCeer›eâce
35. In an ac circuit, an alternating voltage e = ceW pegÌ[s Skeâ ØeeflejesOekeâ R Deewj Skeâ Øesjkeâ L hej DevegØeÙegòeâ
200 2 sin 100 t volts is connected to a efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo R Deewj ØesjkeâerÙe ØeefleIeele ceW ØelÙeskeâ keâe
capacitor of capacity 1 µF. The r.m.s. value of ceeve 3Ω nes, lees heefjheLe ceW DevegØeÙegòeâ Jeesušlee Deewj efJeÅegle
the current in the circuit is :/efkeâmeer ac heefjheLe ceW Oeeje kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej nesiee :
Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea Jeesušlee, e = 200 2 sin 100 t Jeesuš, (b) π/6
(a) zero
keâes 1 µF Oeeefjlee kesâ Skeâ mebOeeefj$e mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme (c) π/4(d) π/2
heefjheLe ceW efJeÅegle Oeeje keâe Jeie& ceeOÙe cetue ceeve nesiee : AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(a) 20 mA (b) 10 mA Ans. (c) : Given – XL= 3Ω= Inductive Reactance
(c) 100 mA (d) 200 mA R = 3Ω= Resistance
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 X 
As we know, Phase Difference φ = tan–1  L 
Ans. (a) : Given –  R 
Alternating voltage e = 200 2 sin100t = e0 sinωt  3 π
∴ φ = tan–1   = tan–1(1) = 45o =   .
Capacitor capacity = 1µF  3 4
So, ω = 100 rad/s 38. Power dissipated in an LCR series circuit
e0 200 2 connected to an a.c. source of emf ε is :
erms = = = 200
2 2 efJe.Jee. yeue (emf) ε kesâ a.c. Œeesle mes Ùegòeâ ßeb=Keuee yeæ
1 1 LCR heefjheLe ceW neefmele Meefòeâ nesleer nw;
Z = Xc = = = 104 Ω
ωC 100×10-6  1 
2

(a) ε 2 R R 2 +  Lω − 
e rms 200  C ω
I= = 4 = 2×10-2 = 20×10-3 A
Z 10  1  
2

I = 20mA (b) ε 2 R  R 2 +  Lω −  
  Cω  

Physics 476 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 C = 10µF
1  
2

(c) ε 2  R 2 +  Lω −   R ω = 1000 s −1
  Cω  
L=?
  1  
2
In LCR circuit current is maximum at resonant
ε 2  R 2 +  Lω −   frequency. At resonance the capacitive reactance is

  Cω  
(d) equal to inductive reactance so,
R 1
AIMPT-2009 Resonant frequency ω =
L⋅C
Ans. (b) :
1 1
ω2 = ⇒ L= 2
L⋅C ω ⋅C
1
=
(1000) × 10 ×10−6
2

= 0.1H = 100mH
The emf of an LCR circuit is ε .
40. A coil of inductive reactance 31Ω has a
The impedance of a series LCR circuit is given as,
resistance of 8Ω. It is placed in series with a
 2  1  
2
condenser of capacity reactance 25Ω. The
z=  R +  ωL -  
  ωC   combination is connected to an a.c. source of
110 volt. The power factor of the circuit is:-
The power factor in series LCR circuit is given as,
31Ω ØesCekeâlJe ØeefleIeele keâer Skeâ kegâC[ueer keâe ØeeflejesOe
R
Cosφ = 8Ω nw~ Fmes 25Ω OeeefjleerÙe ØeefleIeele kesâ mebOeeefj$e mes
z
ßeb=Keueeyeæ peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme mebÙeespeve keâes 110
The power dissipated in the circuit is given as, Jeesuš kesâ ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje Œeesle mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ heefjheLe
P = Vrms Irms cosφ keâe Meefòeâ iegCekeâ nesiee:-
ε R
P = ε× × (a) 0.56 (b) 0.64
z z (c) 0.80 (d) 0.33
ε2R AIPMT-2006
P=
 2  1  
2 Ans. (c) : Given :-
 R +  ωL -   Resistance, R = 8 Ω
  ωC  
Inductive reactance, XL = 31 Ω
39. What is the value of inductance L for which the Capacity reactance, XC = 25 Ω
current is a maximum in a series LCR circuit We know that – power factor (cosφ) is ratio of
with C = 10 μF and ω = 1000 s–1 ? resistance and impedance of AC circuit.
Skeâ ßesCeeryeæ LCR heefjheLe ceW C = 10 μF SJeb ω = R
1000 s–1 nQ~ heefjheLe ceW cenòece Oeeje kesâ efueÙes ØesjkeâlJe Power factor of AC circuit is given by cos φ = Z
L keâe ceeve efkeâlevee nesvee ÛeeefnÙes?
(a) 10 mH In series R-L-C circuit-
(b) 100 mH Z = R 2 + (X L − X C ) 2
(c) 1 mH
= ( 8) + ( 31 − 25)
2 2
(d) cannot be calculated unless R is known
R keâe ceeve %eele ve nesves mes heefjkeâueve mecYeJe veneR~
AIPMT-2007 = 64 + 36 = 100 = 10Ω
R 8
Ans. (b) : ∴ Power factor cos φ = = =0.8
Z 10
41. In a circuit L, C and R are connected in series
with an alternating voltage source of frequency
f. The current leads the voltage by 45º. The
value of C is –
Skeâ heefjheLe ceW, L, C Deewj R keâes ßeb=Keuee yeæ DeeJe=efòe
f kesâ ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje Œeesle mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nQ Oeeje
Given: LCR circuit yees ušlee mes 45º mes Deeies nesleer nw~ C keâe ceeve nesiee-
Physics 477 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 1 where, L = Inductance
(a) (b)
2πf ( 2πf L − R ) 2πf ( 2πf L + R ) R = Resistance
V = Voltage
1 1 L
(c) (d) Time constant τ =
πf ( 2πf L − R ) πf ( 2πf L + R ) R
AIPMT-2005 40
Ans. (b) : =
8
= 5 sec
43. For a series LCR circuit the power loss at
resonance is / ßesCeer LCR heefjheLe kesâ efueS Devegveeo
kesâ meceÙe Meefòeâ neefve nesleer nw-
Given, φ = 45º
V2
Since current leads the voltage so, (a) (b) I2Lω
 1 
X − XL
tan φ = c ωL − ωC 
R
V2
Xc − X L (c) I2R (d)
tan 45º = [ tan 45º = 1] Cω
R
R = Xc - X L AIPMT-2002
Xc = R + XL Ans. (c) : For a series LCR circuit,
Inductive reactance, XL = ωL= 2πfL Impedance (Z) = R 2 + (X L − X C ) 2
1 Where, XL = ωL
⇒ = XL + R
ωC 1
1 XC =
= ωL + R ωC
ωC ω = Angular frequency.
1 At Resonance, XL = XC ⇒ Z = R
C= where ω = 2πf
ω[ ωL + R ] ∴ VR = V (supply Voltage)
1 V V
⇒ C= ∴ RMS current, I = R =
2πf ( 2πfL + R ) R R
Note:- When current lags the voltage then, V2
Power loss, = I2R =
X – XC R
tan φ = L .
R 44. A series L-C-R circuit is connected to a source
42. A coil of 40 Henry inductance is connected in of A.C. current. At resonance, the phase
series with a resistance of 8 ohm and the difference between the applied voltage and the
combination is joined to the terminals of a 2 volt current in the circuit, is
battery. The time constant of the circuit is:- Skeâ ßesCeeryeæ L-C-R heefjheLe ceW Skeâ AC œeesle mes
Skeâ kegâC[ueer keâe ØesjkeâlJe 40 nwvejer nQ Fmes 8 Deesce kesâ pegÌ[e nw~ DevegveeoerÙe efmLeefle ceW Oeeje leLee Jeesušlee kesâ
ØeeflejesOe kesâ meeLe ße=bKeuee peesÌ[ keâj yeves Ùegice keâes 2 yeerÛe keâueevlej nesiee:
Jeesuš keâer yewšjer mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ Fme Øekeâej yeves (a) π (b) zero/peerjeW
heefjheLe keâe meceÙe efveÙeleebkeâ nesiee :- (c) π/4 (d) π/2
(a) 1/5 seconds/1/5 meskeâC[ AIPMT-1994
(b) 40 seconds/40 meskeâC[ Ans. (b) : The power factor of the LCR circuit is
(c) 20 seconds/20 meskeâC[ defined as the ratio of the resistance to the impendence
acted on the given circuit and is written as-
(d) 5 seconds/5 meskeâC[
R
AIPMT-2004 cos φ =
Z
Ans. (d) : L – R circuit series at resonance, XL = XC And Z = R
Z
cos φ = = 1
Z
cosφ = 1
cosφ = cos 0º
φ = 0º

Physics 478 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
45. When the key K is pressed at time t = 0, then
which of the following statements about the 21.6 Power in AC Circuit : The
current I in the resistor AB of the given circuit Power Factor
is true?
peye meceÙe t = 0 hej kegbâpeer K keâes oyeeÙee peelee nw, lees 47. The maximum power is dissipated for an ac in
a/an/Skeâ ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje (Smeer) kesâ efueS DeefOekeâlece
efoS ieS heefjheLe kesâ ØeeflejesOekeâ AB ceW Oeeje I kesâ yeejs ceW
Meefkeäle keâe #eÙe neslee nw–
efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve melÙe nw?
(a) Inductive circuit/Øesjkeâ heefjheLe
(b) Capacitive circuit/mebOeeefj$e heefjheLe
(c) Resistive circuit/ØeeflejesOekeâ heefjheLe
(d) LC circuit/Suemeer heefjheLe
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
(a) I oscillates between 1 mA and 2 mA/I 1mA Ans. (c) : The power in an AC circuit is -
Deewj 2 mA kesâ yeerÛe oesueve keâjlee nw~ P = Vrms I rms cosθ
(b) At t = 0, I = 2 mA and with time it goes to 1 For maximum power, cosθ = 1
mA/t = 0 hej, I = 2 mA nw Deewj meceÙe kesâ meeLe Ùen In purely resistive circuit, voltage and current are in
1 mA lekeâ Iešlee nw~ same phase, therefore phase difference is zero i.e θ = 0º
Pmax = Vrms Irms
(c) I = 1 mA at all t/t kesâ meYeer ceeveeW kesâ efueS I = 1 mA
48. A resistance 'R' draws power 'P' when
(d) I = 2 mA at all t/t kesâ meYeer ceeveeW kesâ efueS I = 2 mA connected to an AC source. If an inductance is
AIPMT-1995 now placed in series with the resistance, such
Ans. (b) : When the circuit is completed by pressing the that the impedance of the circuit becomes 'Z'
key at t = 0, then the current will initially pass through the power drawn will be:
the capacitor and not through the resistor which is ef keâmeer AC (S.meer.) Œeesle mes peesÌ[ves hej Skeâ ØeeflejesOe
parallel to the capacitor because capacitor will start 'R' Éeje 'P' Meefòeâ ueer peeleer nw~ Ùeefo Fme ØeeflejesOe kesâ
charging. RAB is the effective resistance of the circuit. ßesCeer ›eâce ceW, Skeâ ØesjkeâlJe peesÌ[ves mes heefjheLe keâer
Given that: R = 1000 Ω Øeef leyeeOee 'Z' nes peeleer nw, lees ueer ieF& Meefòeâ nes peeÙesieer:
2
V = 2V R R R
I=? (a) P (b) P   (c) P (d) P  
Z Z Z
by using ohm's law- AIPMT-03.05.2015
V = IR Ans. (d) : The magnitude of voltage of the AC source is
V 2 V 2 = RP
I= = = 2×10–3
R 1000 The impedance Z is given by
= 2 mA
Z = R 2 + ω2 L2
After, sometime, the capacitor will be fully charged and
R R
in its steady state. There will be no current passing cosφ = =
through the capacitor. Now effective resistance is- (R + ω L ) Z
2 2 2

Reff = 1000 + 1000 = 2000 Ω

 V  R 
2 Power drawn is VI cosφ = V   
Current, I = = 1mA  Z  Z 
2000 2
V2R R
Therefore, at t = 0, I = 2 mA and with time it goes to 1 = 2 = P   [Q V = PR ]
mA Z Z
46. The time constant of C-R circuit is 49. In an A.C. circuit with phase voltage V and
Skeâ C-R heefjheLe keâe meceÙe iegCeebkeâ nesiee: current I, the power dissipated is/Skeâ A.C. heefjheLe
(a) 1/CR (b) C/R ceW Jeesušspe V leLee Oeeje I nes, lees Meefòeâ #eÙe nesieer:
(c) CR (d) R/C (a) V.I
AIPMT-1992 (b) depends on phase angle between V and I /V
Ans. (c) : Growth of current in RC circuit is given by- Deewj I kesâ yeerÛe keâer keâuee hej efveYe&j keâjleer nw~
i = imax e –t/RC 1 1
(c) × V.I (d) × V.I
Where, RC = τ and it is known as time constant. Its unit 2 2
is second. AIPMT-1997
Physics 479 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): The power is defined as the rate at which (A) and (B)/(A) Deewj (B)
(a)
work is being done in the circuit. The average power in only (A)/kesâJeue (A)
(b)
an A.C. circuit- (c)
(A), (B), (C), (D)
Pav = Vrms I rms cos φ (A) and (D)/(A) Deewj (D)
(d)
V I NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
= 0 0 cos φ Ans. (c) : Alternating current is a type of current that
2 2
alternates its direction in a regular basis As a result all
VI of the options involve AC.
= cos φ
2 52. Figure shows a circuit contains three identical
Hence, the power dissipated is depends on phase angle resistors with resistance R = 9.0 Ω each, two
between V and I. identical inductors with inductance L = 2.0 mH
50. In an A.C. circuit, the current flowing is I = 5 each, and an ideal battery with emf ε = 18 V.
sin(100t – π/2) ampere and the potential The current 'i' through the battery just after
the switch closed is/ÙeneB oMee&Ùes ieÙes heefjheLe ces leerve
difference is V = 200 sin (100t) volts. The power
consumption is equal to meJe&mece ØeeflejesOekeâ, oes meJe&mece Øesjkeâ Deewj Skeâ DeeoMe&
Skeâ A.C. heefjheLe ceW ØeJeeefnle nes jner Oeeje I = 5 yewšjer pegÌ[s nQ~ ØelÙeskeâ ØeeflejesOekeâ keâe ØeeflejesOe
sin(100t – π/2) SsefcheÙej nw Deewj efJeYeJeeblej V = 200 R = 9.0Ω ØelÙeskeâ Øesjkeâ keâe ØesjkeâlJe L = 2.0 mH nw~
sin (100t) Jeesuš nw~ Meefòeâ #eÙe nesieer:
leLee yewšjer keâe efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue, ε = 18 V nw lees,
efmJeÛe keâes yevo keâjves kesâ legjvle he§eeled yewšjer mes efJeÅegle
(a) 20 W (b) 0 W
Oeeje 'i' keâe ceeve nesiee?
(c) 1000 W (d) 40 W
AIPMT-1995
2 3
Ans. (b) : Given that: I = 5 sin (100 t –π/2) 1
V = 200 sin (100 t)
Standard equation for voltage and current are- 1
2

I = I0 sin (ωt–φ)
(a) 2 mA (b) 0.2 A
V = V0 sin ωt (c) 2 A (d) 0 ampere/MetvÙe SefcheÙej
On comparing given equation with standard equation
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
we get-
Ans. (c) : When the switch is on i.e at t = 0. The capacitor
I0 = 5, V0 = 200, φ = 90º, ω = 100 will behave as a short circuit and also the inductor will be
P = Vrms Irms cosφ zero and only R2 will carry the resistance.
V0 I 0 Therefore,
= × cos90º
2 2
P=0

21.7 LC OScillations
ε 18
current i = = = 2A
51. The variation of EMF with time for four types R 9
of generators are shown in the figures. Which
amongst them can be called AC? 21.8 Transformers
Ûeej Øekeâej kesâ peefve$eeW kesâ efJeÅegle Jeenkeâ yeue kesâ meceÙe
kesâ meeLe efJeÛejCe DeejsKe ceW oMee&S ieS «eeheâeW kesâ Devegmeej 53. A 12 V, 60W lamp is connected to the
nQ~ FveceW mes efkeâmes ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje keâne pee mekeâlee nw? secondary of a step down transformer, whose
primary is connected to ac mains of 220V.
Assuming the transformer to be ideal, what is
(A) (B) the current in the primary winding?
Skeâ 12 V, 60 W uewche DeheÛeÙeer š^ebmeHeâe@ce&j kesâ
efÉleerÙekeâ mes pegÌ[e nw, pees ØeeLeefcekeâ 220 V kesâ ØelÙeeJeleea
œeesle mes pegÌ[e nw~ š^ebmeHeâe@ce&j keâes DeeoMe& ceevekeâj,
ØeeLeefcekeâ JeeFef[bie ceW Oeeje nw -
(C) (D)
(a) 0.37A (b) 0.27A
(c) 2.7A (d) 3.7A
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Physics 480 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : Given that : Ans. (d): Given source is direct current (DC), so no
VS = 12 V, VP = 220 V mutual induction between primary and secondary coils.
PS = 60 W Transformer cannot work on dc
We know that – Vs = 0 and Is = 0
P S = VS I S E2 = 0 and I2 = 0
60 = 12 × IS
56. A 220 volt input is supplied to a transformer.
IS = 5 A
The output circuit draws a current of 2.0
For an ideal transformer – ampere at 440 volts. If the efficiency of the
VS I P transformer is 80%, the current drawn by the
=
VP IS primary windings of the transformer is –
12 IP Skeâ 220 volt š^evmeHeâece&j keâes mehueeF& efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~
= DeeGšhegš heefjheLe 440 Jeesuš hej 2.0 Ssefche Oeeje ueslee nw~
220 5
60
Ùeefo š^evmeHeâece&j keâer o#elee 80% nw, š^evmeHeâece&j keâer
IP = ØeeLeefcekeâ yeeFefv[bie (windings) Éeje ueer ieF& Oeeje nw –
220
IP = 0.27 A (a) 3.6 ampere/3.6 Ssefche] (b) 2.8 ampere/2.8 Ssefche]
54. A transformer having efficiency of 90% is (c) 2.5 ampere/2.5 Ssefche] (d) 5.0 ampere/5.0 Ssefche]
working on 200V and 3KW power supply. If AIPMT (Screening)-2010
the current in the secondary coil is 6A, the Ans. (d) : Efficiency is defined as the ratio of output
voltage across the secondary coil and the power and input power,
current in the primary coil respectively are.
Skeâ š^ebmeheâece&j keâer o#elee 90³ nw, Ùen 200V Je 3KW output power
η=
keâer heeJej mehueeF& hej keâece keâj jne nw~ Ùeefo, efÉleerÙekeâ input power
kegbâ[ueer mes 6A keâer Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nw lees, efÉleerÙekeâ η = 80%, P = VI
kegbâ[ueer kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeeblej leLee ØeeLeefcekeâ 2× 440
80 = ×100
kegbâ[ueer ceW efJeÅegle Oeeje keâe ceeve ›eâceMe: nesiee:- 220×i p
(a) 300 V, 15 A (b) 450 V, 15 A
(c) 450 V, 13.5 A (d) 600 V, 15 A i p = 5A
AIPMT-06.05.2014 57. The primary and secondary coils of a
Ans. (b) : Efficiency of the transformer, η = 90% transformer have 50 and 1500 turns
Input power, Pin = 3KW = 3×103W respectively. If the magnetic flux φ linked with
Voltage across the primary coil, VP = 200V the primary coil is given by φ = φ0 + 4t, where
Current in the secondary coil, IS = 6A
φ is in webers, t is time in seconds and φ0 is a
As Pin = IPVP
constant, the output voltage across the
∴ Current in the primary coil.
secondary coil is:
Pin 3000W Skeâ š^e@meHeâece&j kesâ ØeeLeefcekeâ Deewj efÉleerÙekeâ leej kesâ HesâjeW
IP = = = 15A
VP 200W keâer mebKÙeeSB ›eâceevegmeej 50 Deewj 1500 nQ~ ØeeLeefcekeâ leej
Efficiency of the transformer, mes mecyeefvOele ÛegcyekeâerÙe Heäuekeäme φ = φ0 + 4t Éeje JÙeòeâ
Pout VS IS
η= = nesleer nes peyeefkeâ φ Jesyej ceW nw, meceÙe t Deewj φ0 Skeâ
Pin VP I P
efveÙeleebkeâ nw~ efÉleerÙekeâ leej mes Øeehle Jeesušlee nesieer:-
90 6VS (a) 30 volts/30 Jeesuš (b) 90 volts/90 Jeesuš
∴ =
100 3000 (c) 120 volts/120 Jeesuš (d) 220 volts/220 Jeesuš
90 × 3000
or VS = = 450V AIPMT-2007
100 × 6 Ans. (c):
55. The primary of a transformer when connected
to a dc battery of 10 volt draws a current of 1
mA. The number of turns of the primary and
secondary windings are 50 and 100
respectively. The voltage in the secondary and
the current drawn by the circuit in the NP NS
secondary are respectively
(a) 20 V and 0.5 mA
(b) 20 V and 2.0 mA
(c) 10 V and 0.5 mA Given:- N P = 50
(d) Zero volt and therefore no current
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka N S = 1500

Physics 481 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Magnetic flux φ = φ0 + 4t Ans. (a): Transformer cores are laminated in order to
φ0 = constant minimise eddy current loss. By providing laminations, the
area of each part gets reduced and hence resistance will get
t = time in sec very high which limits the eddy current to a minimum
dφ value and hence eddy current losses gets reduced.
We know induced emf =
dt 60. Turn ratio of a step-up transformer is 1 : 25. If
dφ d
Induced emf in primary coil E p = = ( φ0 + 4t ) current in load coil is 2A, then the current in
dt dt primary coil will be/efkeâmeer GÛÛeeÙeer š^e@meHeâece&j keâe
Ep = 4 Iesje-Devegheele 1:25 nw Ùeefo Yeeefjle kegâC[ueer ceW Oeeje
From transformation ratio formula we have, 2A nes lees ØeeLeefcekeâ kegâC[ueer ceW Oeeje nesieer–
Es Ns (a) 25A (b) 50A
=
Ep Np (c) 0.25A (d) 0.5A
AIPMT-1998
E s 1500 1500
= ⇒ Es = 4 × Ans. (b) : The flux per turn of primary coil must be
4 50 50 equal to flux per turn of the secondary coil–
= 120 Volt
58. A transformer is used to light a 100 W and φ p φs
=
110V lamp from a 220V mains. If the main np ns
current is 0.5 amp, the efficiency of the
transformer is approximately- 1 dφp 1 dφs
or . =
100 W Deewj 110V kesâ Skeâ yeuye keâes 220V keâer mehueeF& n p dt n s dt
mes Øeoerhle keâjves kesâ efueS Skeâ š^ebmeHeâece&j keâe ØeÙeesie es n s  dφ 
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo mehueeF& keâe Oeeje ceeve 0.5 ScheerÙej ∴ = ∴ e ∝ dt 
ep n p  
nes lees š^ebmeHeâece&j keâer o#elee nesieer ueieYeie:- For no loss of power,
(a) 10% (b) 30%
(c) 50% (d) 90% ip es n s
= =
AIPMT-2007 is ep n p
Ans. (d) : Given power of light
np 1  np 1 
Poutput = 100W Here, = , i s = 2A  Given = 
ns 25  n s 25 
Primary current I p = 0.5 amp
or, ip = 25 × 2 = 50 A
Voltage Vp = 220V
61. The primary winding of a transformer has 500 turns
Power output where as its secondary has 5000 turns. The primary
Transformer efficiency ηT = × 100 is connected to an A.C. supply of 20 V, 50 Hz. The
Power input
secondary will have an output of
100
= × 100 Skeâ š^ebmeheâe@ce&j keâer ØeeLeefcekeâ kegâC[ueer ceW 500 hesâjs nQ
Vp I p leLee efÉleerÙekeâ kegâC[ueer ceW 5000 hesâjs nQ~ ØeeLeefcekeâ
100 kegâC[ueer keâes 20 V, 50 Hz A.C. œeesle mes peesÌ[e peelee
= × 100
220 × 0.5 nw~ efÉleerÙekeâ kegbâ[ueer mes efkeâlevee efveie&le efceuesiee?
100 × 100
= = 90.9 (a) 2 V, 50 Hz (b) 2 V, 5 Hz
22 × 5 (c) 200 V, 50 Hz (d) 200 V, 500 Hz.
So approximate efficiency = 90% AIPMT-1997
59. The core of a transformer is laminated because:
Ans. (c) : Assuming ideal condition of the transformer,
Skeâ š^ebmeheâe@ce&j (heefjCeeefce$e) kesâ ›eâes[ (Yeerlejer Yeeie)
V1 N1
keâjs mleefjle yeveeÙee peelee nw keäÙeeWefkeâ Fme Øekeâej :- =
(a) Energy losses due to eddy currents may be V 2 N2
minimised/YebJej OeejeDeeW kesâ keâejCe Tpee& kesâ ùemeeW keâes Where, N1 = no. of turns of primary side
keâce efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw N2 = no. of turns of secondary side
(b) The weight of the transformer may be reduced V1 = voltages of primary side
š^ebmeheâe@ce&j kesâ Yeej keâes keâce efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw V2 = voltages of secondary side.
(c) Rusting of the core may be prevented 20 500
›eâes[ keâes pebie ueieves mes yeÛeeÙee pee mekeâlee nw =
V2 5000
(d) Ratio of voltage in primary and secondary
may be increased/ ØeeFcejer Deewj meskeâC[jer 20 × 50
V2 =
kegâC[efueÙeeW keâer JeesušleeDeeW keâe Devegheele yeÌ{eÙee pee 5
mekeâlee nw~ V2 = 200 V, f = 50 Hz
AIPMT-2006 Frequency remains constant in the transformer.
Physics 482 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
64. When a voltage measuring device is connected
21.9 NCERT Exemplar Problems to ac mains, the meter shows the steady input
voltage of 220 V. This means/efkeâmeer Jeesušlee
62. If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5A, the ceehekeâ Ùegefkeäle keâes ac ceWme mes peesÌ[ves hej Ùen Ùegefkeäle
value of the current 1/300 seconds after its value
220V efmLej efveJesMe Jeesušlee oMee&leer nw~ Fmekeâe DeLe&
becomes zero is/Ùeefo 50 nšd&pe ac heefjheLe ceW 5A keâer
Ùen nw efkeâ :
rms Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nes jner nes, lees Oeeje heefjceeCe MetvÙe nesves
(a) input voltage cannot be ac voltage, but a dc
kesâ 1/300 meskeâC[ heMÛeele Fmekeâe ceeve nesiee: voltage./efveJesMe Jeesušlee ac Jeesušlee veneR nes mekeâleer,
(a) 5 2 A (b) 5
3
A (c)
5
A (d)
5
A
hejvleg Ùen dc Jeesušlee nw~
2 6 2 (b) maximum input voltage is 220 V/DeefOekeâlece
Ans. (b) : Given that, efveJesMe Jeesušlee 220V nw~
Frequency (f) = 50Hz (c) the meter reads not V but < V2 > and is
Irms = 5A calibrated to read < V 2 > /ceehekeâ Ùegefkeäle V keâe
Time (t) =
1
sec. hee"Ÿeebkeâ veneR osleer Deefheleg <V2> keâe hee"Ÿeebkeâ osleer nw
300
Deewj Fmekeâe DebMeebkeâve < V 2 > keâe he"Ÿeebkeâ uesves kesâ
In peak value of current (Ip) = 2 × I rms
efueS efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~
= 5 2A (d) the pointer of the meter is stuck by some
Expression of sinusoidal current is (I) = Ip sinωt mechanical defect./efkeâmeer Ùeebef$ekeâ oes<e kesâ keâejCe
Where, ω = angular frequency = 2πf ceehekeâ Ùegefkeäle keâe mebkesâlekeâ Deškeâ peelee nw~
So, I = Ip sin (2πft) Ans. (c) : As the voltage in an ac circuit fluctuates, we
 1  measure it by its root mean square value. Vrms is
= 5 2 × sin  2 × π × 50 × 
 300  mathematically represented as < V 2 > . The meter
π 3 measuring ac voltage reads the rms voltage.
= 5 2 sin   (sin 600 = )
3 2 65. To reduce the resonant frequency in an LCR
series circuit with a generator/efkeâmeer peefve$e mes
3 3
=5 2× =5 A ßesCeer›eâce ceW pegÌ[s LCR heefjheLe keâer Devegveeoer DeeJe=efòe
2 2 keâce keâjves kesâ efueS :
63. An alternating current generator has an (a) the generator frequency should be
internal resistance Rg and an internal reactance reduced./peefve$e keâer DeeJe=efòe keâce keâjveer ÛeeefnS~
Xg. It is used to supply power to a passive load
consisting of a resistance Rg and a reactance (b) another capacitor should be added in parallel
XL. For maximum power to be delivered from to the first./heefjheLe ceW ueies mebOeeefj$e kesâ meeceeveeblej ceW
the generator to the load, the value of XL is Skeâ DevÙe mebOeeefj$e peesÌ[vee ÛeeefnS~
equal to/efkeâmeer ØelÙeeJeleea Oeeje peefve$e keâe Deebleefjkeâ (c) the iron core of the inductor should be
ØeeflejesOe Rg leLee Deebleefjkeâ ØeefleIeele Xg nw~ Fmes Rg removed./Øesjkeâ kesâ ueesn-›eâes[ keâes nše osvee ÛeeefnS~
ØeeflejesOe leLee XL ØeefleOeele kesâ efkeâmeer efveef<›eâÙe uees[ keâes (d) dielectric in the capacitor should be
removed./mebOeeefj$e kesâ hejeJewÅegle keâes nše osvee ÛeeefnS~
Meefkeäle Øeoeve keâjves kesâ efueS GheÙeesie ceW ueeÙee ieÙee nw~
peefve$e mes uees[ keâes DeefOekeâlece Meefkeäle Øeoeve keâjves kesâ Ans. (b) : We know that, A circuit in which inductance
(L), capacitance (C) and resistance (R) are connected in
efueS XL keâe ceeve nesvee ÛeeefnS : series and the circuit admit maximum current
(a) zero/MetvÙe (b) Xg corresponding to given frequency of a.c. is called
(c) –Xg (d) Rg resonance circuit.
Ans. (b) : We know that, At resonance, XL = XC
1
V2 So, Frequency (f) =
Power = 2π LC
Z
Where, V is voltage If we reduce resonant frequency, we have to increase
Z is impedance of the circuit. either L or to increase C. To increase capacitance (C)
another capacitor must be connected in parallel with the
Z = R 2 + (X L – X g ) 2 first.
When maximum power (Pmax) is delivered from • Resonance frequency does not depends on the
generator to the load then Z is minimum. frequency of generator with the removal of iron core
So, XL – Xg = 0 inductance will decrease. In these two above cases,
resonance frequency would increase.
XL = X g
Physics 483 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
66. Which of the following combinations should be 67. An inductor of reactance 1Ω and a resistor of 2
selected for better tuning of LCR circuit used Ω are connected in series to the terminals of a
for communication?/mebÛeej ceW ØeÙegkeäle LCR heefjheLe 6 V (rms) ac source. The power dissipated in
kesâ DeefOekeâ DeÛÚs mecemJejCe kesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele ceW the circuit is/1Ω ØeefleyeeOee kesâ efkeâmeer Øesjkeâ leLee 2Ω
efkeâme mebÙeespeve keâe ÛeÙeve keâjvee ÛeeefnS? ØeeflejesOe kesâ efkeâmeer ØeeflejesOekeâ keâes 6V (rms) kesâ ac
œeesle mes ßesCeer›eâce ceW peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ heefjheLe ceW #eeefÙele
(a) R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C = 35 µF
Meefkeäle keâe ceeve nw :
(b) R = 25 Ω, L = 2.5 H, C = 45 µF
(a) 8 W (b) 12 W
(c) R = 15 Ω, L = 3.5 H, C = 30 µF (c) 14.4 W (d) 18 W
(d) R = 25 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C = 45 µF
Ans. (c) : Given that, Reactance (XL) = 1Ω
Ans. (c) : In a ideal series LCR circuit and in a tuned Resistance (R) = 2Ω
1 L Vrms = 6V
radio frequency receiver the Q factor is, Q =
R C V
We know that, Irms = rms
Where, R is resistance of the tuned circuit Z
L is inductance of the tuned circuit Where, Z is impedance of the circuit.
C is capacitance of the tuned circuit So, Z = X L2 + R 2
Now, checking the option,
So, In option (a) R = 20Ω, L = 1.5H, C = 35 µf Z = (1) 2 + (2) 2
= 35 × 10–6F = 5Ω
1 1.5 6
So, Q1 = So, Irms = A
20 35 × 10 –6 5
1 15 Power dissipated,
= P = Vrms × Irms × cosφ
20 × 10–3 35 × 10
R
1000 3 = Vrms × I rms ×
= = 10.35 Z
20 70 6 2
= 6× ×
From option (b), R = 25Ω, L = 2.5 H and C = 45µF 5 5
= 45 × 10–6F 72
= = 14.4W
1 2.5 5
So, Q 2 =
25 45 × 10 –6 68. The output of a step-down transformer is
measured to be 24 V when connected to a 12 W
1000 25
= light bulb. The value of the peak current
25 45 ×10 is/efkeâmeer DeheÛeeÙeer š^eBmeheâece&j keâe efveie&ce 12 W kesâ
= 9.42 ØekeâeMe yeuye keâes mebÙeesefpele keâjves hej 24 V ceehee peelee
From option (c), R = 15Ω, L = 3.5 H and C = 30µF nw~ efMeKej Oeeje keâe ceeve nw :
= 30 × 10–6F 1
(a) A (b) 2A
1 3.5 2
So, Q3 =
15 30 × 10 –6 (c) 2 A (d) 2 2 A
1000 35 Ans. (a) : Given that,
= Vrms = 24V
15 30 × 10
Power = 12W
= 22.77
We know that, power = Vrms × Irms
From option (d), R = 25Ω, L = 1.5 H and C = 45µF P 12
= 45 × 10–6F I rms = =
Vrms 24
1 1.5 1
So, Q 4 = = A
25 45 × 10 –6 2
1000 15 Peak value of current, Ip = Irms × 2
=
25 45 ×10 1
= × 2
= 7.30 2
Option (c) should be selected for better tuning of LCR 1
= A
circuit used for communication. 2

Physics 484 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
22.
Electromagnetic Waves
d
22.1 Displacement Current
= C
dt
[ V0 sin ωt ]
= CV0ω cos ωt
1. To produce an instantaneous displacement Id = V0( ωC) cos ωt
current of 2 mA in the space between the
3. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 20 µF is
parallel plates of a capacitor of capacitance 4
being charged by a voltage source whose
µF, the rate of change of applied variable
potential is changing at the rate of 3 V/s. The
 dV  conduction current through the connecting
potential difference   must be.
 dT  wires, and the displacement current through the
plates of the capacitor, would be, respectively.
4 µF Oeeefjlee kesâ mebOeeefj$e keâer meceeblej huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe
20µF Oeeefjlee kesâ efkeâmeer meceevlej heefókeâe mebOeeefj$e keâes
mLeeve ceW 2 mA keâe leelkeâeefuekeâ efJemLeeheve Oeeje Glhevve
efkeâmeer Ssmes Jeesušlee Œeesle Éeje DeeJesefMele efkeâÙee pee jne
 dV  nw efpemekeâe efJeYeJe 3V/s keâer oj mes heefjJeefle&le nes jne nw~
keâjves kesâ efueS   nesveer ÛeeefnS–
 dT  mebÙeespekeâ leejeW mes ØeJeeefnle Ûeeuekeâ Oeeje, Deewj heefókeâeDeeW
(a) 200 V/s (b) 400V/s mes iegpejves Jeeueer efJemLeeheve Oeeje ›eâceMe: neWieer:
(c) 800 V/s (d) 500V/s (a) 60 µA, 60 µA (b) 60 µA, zero
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 (c) Zero, zero (d) Zero, 60 µA
Ans. (d) : Given : id = 2mA NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
C = 4 µF Ans. (a) :
dV
=?
dt
we know that displacement current is -
dV
id = C
dt
dV V
⇒ 2×10-3 = 4×10-6× V
dt
2 × 10−3 dV Capacitance of capacitor C = 20µF
⇒ =
4 × 10−6 dt = 20×10–6 F
dV  dV 
= 500 V / sec
dt Rate of change of potential   = 3V / s
 dt 
2. A capacitor of capacitance 'C' is connected Charge, q = CV
across an ac source of voltage V is given by
dq dV
V = V0 sinωt =i=C
The displacement current between the plates of dt dt
the capacitor would then be given by i c = 20 × 10 –6
×3
efoS ieÙes ØelÙeeJeleea Jeesušlee œeesle V = V0 sinωt mes i c = 60µA
'C' Oeeefjlee keâe Skeâ Oeeefj$e pegÌ[e nw~
As we know that id = ic = 60µA
Oeeefj$e kesâ huesšeW kesâ yeerÛe efJemLeeheve Oeeje nesieer :
(a) Id = V0ωCsinωt (b) Id = V0ωCcosωt 22.2 Electromagnetic Waves
V V0
(c) Id = 0 cos ωt (d) Id = sin ωt 4. In a plane electromagnetic wave travelling in
ωC ωC free space, the electric field component
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of 2.0
Ans. (b): Displacement current is given by - ×1010Hz and amplitude 48Vm–1. Then the
dV amplitude of oscillating magnetic field is :
Id = C (Speed of light in free space = 3×108 ms–1)
dt
Physics 485 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ meceleue JewÅegleÛegbyekeâerÙe lejbie cegòeâ DeekeâeMe ceW ieefle (c) 9 sin(1.6 × 103 x – 48 × 1010 t) k̂ V / m
keâj jner nw~ Ùeefo efJeÅegle #es$e 48 Vm–1 DeeÙeece leLee
(d) 9 cos(1.6 × 103 x + 48 × 1010 t) k̂ V / m
2.0×1010 Hz DeeJe=efòe hej pÙeeJe›eâ kesâ Deveg™he oesueve
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
keâjlee nw~ leye ÛegbyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ oesueve keâe DeeÙeece nw :
Ans. (d) : Given that :
(efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe keâer Ûeeue = 3 × 10 ms )
8 –1
r
(a) 1.6×10–6T (b) 1.6×10–9T B = 3 × 10 cos (1.6 × 10 x + 48 × 10 t ) ˆj
−8 3
....(i) 10

r
(c) 1.6×10–8T –7
(d) 1.6×10 T E=?
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 The general equation of electric field and magnetic field
Ans. (d) : Given that : E0 = 48 Vm–1 , c = 3 × 108 m/sec in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by –
E0 48 E = Eo cos(kx – ωt) ĵ ...(ii)
B0 = =
c 3 × 108 B = Bo cos(kx –ωt) ĵ ...(iii)
B0 = 16 × 10 −8 On comparing eqn(i) with eqn(iii) we get –
B0 = 1.6 × 10 −7 T Bo = 3 × 10–8
5. The minimum wavelength of X-rays produced K = 1.6 × 103
by an electron accelerated through a potential ω = – 48 × 1010
difference of V volts is proportional to : Relation between magnitude of electric field and
V Jeesušdme kesâ Skeâ efJeYeJeevlej mes lJeefjle efkeâmeer magnetic field is given by –
Fueskeäš^e@ve Éeje GlheVe X- efkeâjCeeW keâer vÙetvelece lejbieowOÙe& Eο
=C
Deveg›eâceevegheeleer nw : Bο
1 1 Where, C = Velocity of light.
(a) V 2 (b) V (c) (d) ⇒ Eo = Bo × C = 3 × 10–8 × 3 × 108
V V
E = 9 Vm–1
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 r ro
E and B are perpendicular to each other in EM wave.
Ans. (c) : Given: Electron (e) accelerated through
potential difference = V So, ˆ × Cˆ
Eˆ = B
The maximum kinetic energy gained by electron = eV
(e = charge of electron)
( ˆj) × ( −ˆi ) = kˆ
This energy is transferred to x-ray during emission – Put the value of Eo, K and ω in eqn(ii) we get electric
r
hc field vector E as -
Energy of x-ray = hυ = r
λ E = 9 cos (1.6 × 103 x + 48 × 1010t) k̂ V\m
As K.E of e– is maximum, thus λ is minimum. 7. The ratio of the magnitude of the magnetic
⇒ So, energy of emitted x-ray = energy of e– field and electric field intensity of a plane
electromagnetic wave in free space of
hc
= eV permeability µ0 and permittivity ε0 is (Given
λ min that c-velocity of light in free space)
hc 1 µ0 ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee SJeb ε0 hejeJewÅegleebkeâ Jeeues cegòeâ
λ min = ×
e V DeekeâeMe ceW efkeâmeer meceleue JewÅegleÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie kesâ
1 ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e kesâ heefjceeCe SJeb efJeÅegle #es$e keâer leer›elee
λ min ∝
V kesâ heefjceeCe keâe Devegheele nw:
Hence, option (c) is correct. (efoÙee nw, c - cegòeâ DeekeâeMe ceW ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie)
6. The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic 1
wave is given by (a) c (b)
r c
ˆ
B = 3×10-8 cos(1.6×103 x + 48×1010 t)j,
c µ0 ε0
then the associated electric field will be: (c) (d)
µ0 ε0 c
efkeâmeer meceleue JewÅegleÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâe ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
efvecveJele efoÙee ieÙee nw NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
r Ans. (b) : Relation between magnitude of electric field
ˆ
B = 3×10-8 cos(1.6×103 x + 48×1010 t)j,
and magnetic field in EM wave is given by–
lees FmeceW efveefnle efJeÅegle #es$e nesiee: Eo
=c
(a) 3 × 10–8 cos(1.6 × 103 x + 48 × 1010 t) î V / m Bo
(b) 3 × 10–8 sin(1.6 × 103 x + 48 × 1010 t) î V / m Where, c = speed of light

Physics 486 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ur
Hence, ratio of magnitude of magnetic field and electric
field is – ( )
E = $j + k$ and B = $j + k$ ( )
ur ur
Bo 1
= ( ) (
E × B = $j + k$ × $j + kˆ = 0 )
Eo c The propagation along x -axis is 0.
8. When light propagates through a material For option (c)
ur
medium of relative permittivity εr and relative
permeability µr , the velocity of light, v is given ( )
E = −ˆj + k$ and B = −$j − k$ ( )
ur ur
by (c-velocity of light in vacuum)
εr Deehesef#ekeâ hejeJewÅegleebkeâ SJeb µr Deehesef#ekeâ heejiecÙelee
( ) (
E × B = −$j + k$ × −$j − k$ = 2i$ )
Jeeues heoeLe& kesâ ceeOÙece mes peye ØekeâeMe iegpejlee nw lees The propagation along x -axis exist.
For option (d)
ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie v nesiee: ur ur
(c - efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie) E = ( $j + k$ ) and B = ( −$j − kˆ )
ur ur
(a) v =
c
(b) v = c E ×B = 0
εrµ r The propagation along x -axis is 0.
Hence, option (c) is the proper combination of E and B.
µr εr
(c) v = (d) v = 10. The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic
εr µr wave is given by, B = 2 × 10–7 sin(π × 103x + 3π
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 × 1011t)T. Calculate the wavelength.
Ans. (a) : Given, Relative permeability = µr efkeâmeer meceleue efJeÅegleÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e
Relative permittivity = εr keâes Fme Øekeâej efve™efhele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~
We know that B = 2 × 10–7 sin(π × 103x + 3π × 1011t)T
1 lejbieowOÙe& heefjkeâefuele keâerefpeS-
v= (a) π × 10–3 m (b) π × 103 m
µε
(c) 2 × 10 m –3
(d) 2 × 103 m
1
= NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
µ r u 0 .ε r ε0 Ans. (c) : Given Magnetic field B = 2×10-7 sin (π×103 x
 + 3π ×1011 t) T
1 1 
= Q c =  ∴ From above equation of given magnetic field.
u 0ε0 µ r ε r  u 0 ε 0  Propagation const (K) = π×103
Also,
c
V= 2π
µr εr Propagation const. (K) = where λ = wavelength
λ
9. For a plane electromagnetic wave propagating 2π
in x-direction, which one of the following λ=
combination gives the correct possible K
directions for electric field (E) and magnetic 2π
λ=
field (B) respectively? π×10
3

x-efoMee ceW mebÛeefjle Skeâ meceleue efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie

λ = 2 × 10−3 m
kesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele mebÙeespeveeW ceW mes keâewve-mee ›eâceMe:
efJeÅegle (E) leLee ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e (B) keâer mener mecYeJe 11. The ratio of contributions made by the electric
field and magnetic field components to the
efoMeeDeeW keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjlee nw? intensity of an electromagnetic wave is :
(a) −$j + k,
$ −$j + k$ (b) $j + k,
$ $j + k$ (c = speed of electromagnetic waves)
efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lebjie ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e Deewj
(c) −$j + k,
$ −$j − k$ (d) $j + k,
$ −$j − k$
efJeÅegle #es$e kesâ IeškeâeW keâer leer›eleeDeeW kesâ Ùeesieoeve keâe
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 Devegheele neslee nw:
Ans. (c):ur The
ur direction of propagation is along the x - (c = efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieeW keâe Jesie)
axis, so E × B must exist in x direction. (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : c
For option (a) (c) 1 : c 2
(d) c : 1
ur ur
( )
E = −$j + k$ and B = −$j + k$( ) NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (a) : In an electromagnetic wave, electric field &
ur ur
( ) (
E × B = −$j + k$ × −$j + k$ = 0 ) magnetic field exists mutually perpendicular to
direction of propagation of wave. The energy in an
The propagation along x -axis is 0. electromagnetic wave is divided on average equally
For option (b) between magnetic and electric fields.
Physics 487 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
r r r
The energy density of EMW is given below: Ans. (b): Let, E × B = V
1 Where, E and B are electric field and magnetic field
Ue = εo E 2
2 vector.
Where 'ε0' is the permittivity of free space ,'E' is the Given that electric field is in y - direction
r
electric field.
( ) ( )
Ejˆ × B = Viˆ
1 B2
and Um = To make LHS equal to RHS, we have to use cross
2 µ0
product rule. i.e. ˆj × kˆ = ˆi
where ' µ 0 ' is the permeability of the medium and 'B' is r
So, B = Bkˆ
the magnetic field
Hence, direction of propagation is along + z direction.
U = Ue + Um
14. In an electromagnetic wave in free space the
1 1 E2 root mean square value of the electric field is
U = ε0 E 2 +
2 2 µ0 Erms= 6 V/m. The peak value of the magnetic
field is:
E2
Ue = Um , U = ε0 E2 = cegòeâ efokeämLeeve (DeekeâeMe) ceW, efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe
µ0
lejbie ceW efJeÅegle #es$e keâe Jeie&-ceeOÙe-cetue ceeve, Erms= 6
Q Contribution of Electric field and magnetic field is V/m nw, lees ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâe efMeKej ceeve nw:
the same. So, the ratio of contributions of the
electric field and magnetic field is 1 : 1. Hence, (a) 1.41×10-8T (b) 2.83×10-8T
Option (a) is correct. (c) 0.70×10-8T (d) 4.23× 10-8T
12. For a transparent medium, relative NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
permeability and permittivity, µr and ∈r are 1.0 Ans. (b) : Given that
and 1.44 respectively. The velocity of light in Erms = 6 V/m
this medium would be,/efkeâmeer heejoMeea ceeOÙece keâer E0 = Erms × 2
Deehesef#ele heejiecÙelee (µr) 1.0 leLee efJeÅegleMeeruelee (∈r) Where E0 = peak value of electric field
1.44 nw~ Fme ceeOÙece ceW ØekeâeMe keâer Ûeeue nesieer – E0 = 6 2 V/m
(a) 4.32 × 108 m/s (b) 2.5 × 108 m/s As E0 = c B 0
8
(c) 3 × 10 m/s (d) 2.08 × 108 m/s Where c = speed of light = 3 × 108
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
E
Ans. (b) : Relative permeability µr = 1.0 ⇒ B0 = 0
c
Relative permittivity εr = 1.44
Velocity of light in the medium is 6 2
=
1 c 3 ×108
v= = Q c = 3 × 108 
µε µr εr  B0 = 2.828 ×10−8 T
3 ×108 15. An electromagnetic wave of frequency ν = 3.0
= c = speed of light
1× 1.44 MHz passes from vacuum into a dielectric
V = 2.5 × 108 m/s medium with relative permittivity ε = 4.0. Then
13. An EM wave is propagating in a medium with
DeeJe=efòe ν = 3.0 MHz keâer Skeâ efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie
ur efveJee&le mes hejeJewÅegle ceeOÙece efpemekeâer meehes#e heejiecÙelee
a velocity V = Vi$ . The instantaneous oscillating
electric field of this EM wave is along +y axis. ε = 4.0 nw mes heeme keâjleer nw lees-
Then the direction of oscillating magnetic field (a) Wavelength is doubled and frequency
of the EM wave will be along unchanged/lejbieowOÙe& oesiegvee nes peelee nw Deewj DeeJe=efòe
keâesF& efJeÅegle-ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie efkeâmeer ceeOÙece ceW DeheefjJeefle&le jnleer nw/
ur (b) Wavelength is doubled and frequency
Jesie V = Vi$ mes ieceve keâj jner nw~ efkeâmeer #eCe Fme
becomes half/lejbieowOÙe& oesiegvee nes peelee nw Deewj
efJeÅegle-ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâe efJeÅegled-#es$e oesueve +y De#e
kesâ DevegefoMe nw~ leye Fme efJeÅegdle-ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie kesâ DeeJe=efòe DeeOeer nes peeleer nw
(c) Wavelength is halved and frequency remains
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e oesueve keâer efoMee nesieer unchanged/lejbieowOÙe& DeeOee nes peelee nw Deewj DeeJe=efòe
(a) –z direction / –z efoMee DeheefjJeefle&le jnleer nw
(b) +z direction / +z efoMee (d) Wavelength and frequency both remain
(c) –x direction / –xefoMee unchanged/lejbieowOÙe& Deewj DeeJe=efòe oesveeW DeheefjJeefle&le
(d) –y direction / –y efoMee jnleer nw
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Physics 488 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given f = 3 MHz = 3 × 106 Hz • Electric fields surround an electric charge and exert
Dielectric Medium Permittivity ε = 4.0 force on the charge of electric field attracting or
Velocity of EM wave in Vacuum is given by repelling it.
• Electric field and magnetic field both are interrelated
1 to each other and both are components of
C=
µ 0 ε0 electromagnetic waves.
If f is frequency and λ is wave length c= 0
E
C=fλ B0
1 B0 1
fλ = =
µ 0 ε0 E0 c
C • Therefore, the ratio of amplitude of magnetic field to
f= -------(I)
λ the amplitude of electric field for an electromagnetic
Velocity for medium wave in a vacuum is equal to the reciprocal of speed
1 of light.
vmedium = • Hence, the correct options is (d).
µ0 ε 0µ r ε r
17. The electric field associated r with an E.M.W. in
C ˆ
vacuum is given by E = i40 cos (kz – 6 × 108t),
vmedium =
µr εr where E, z and t are in volt/m, meter and
seconds respectively. The value of wave vector
For dielectric medium µr = 1, εr = 4 k is:/efveJee&le ceW efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie mes mebyeæ
C C r
vmedium = = JewÅegle #es$e keâes, E = ˆi40 cos (kz – 6 × 108t), kesâ Éeje
1× 4 2 JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw peneB E, z leLee t ›eâceMe: volt/m
vmedium = f λ medium ceeršj (m) leLee meskebâ[ (s) ceW nw~ lees lejbie iegCeebkeâ (k) keâe
C
= f λ(medium) ⇒ f =
C
-----(II) ceeve nw~
2 2λ( medium ) (a) 6m–1 (b) 3m–1
From eqn (I) and (II) (c) 2m–1 (d) 0.5m–1
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
C C
= Ans. (c) : Given
λ 2λ( medium ) Electric field associated with an E.M.W in vacuum is
ur
λ given by E = $i40 cos ( kz − 6 ×108 t ) ––––– (1)
λ medium =
2 Q Electromagnetic wave equation is–
Frequency of wave doesn't change with medium but E = E0 cos (kz – ωt) –––– (2)
velocity & wavelength changes. Compare eqn (1) & (2)
16. The ratio of amplitude of magnetic field to the ω = 6 ×108
amplitude of electric field for an E 0 = 40i$
electromagnetic wave propagating in vacuum is Now,
equal to/efveJee&le ceW mebÛeefjle efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe
ω
lejbie kesâ efueÙes, ÛegcyekeâerÙe leLee JewÅegle #es$eeW kesâ DeeÙeeceeW Speed of electromagnetic wave, v =
k
keâe Devegheele neslee nw:-
ω
(a) The ratio of magnetic permeability to the ∴ k=
electric susceptibility of vacuum v
efveJee&le ceW ÛegcyekeâerÙe JÙeehÙelee (ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee) leLee JewÅegle k=
6 × 108
meg«eeefnlee (JewÅegle ØeJe=efle) kesâ Devegheele kesâ yejeyej 3 ×108
(b) Unity/Skeâ k = 2m–1
(c) The speed of light in vacuum 18. The electric and the magnetic field, associated
with an e.m.f wave, propagating along the +z–
efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe kesâ Jesie kesâ yejeyej axis, can be represented by :
(d) Reciprocal of speed of light in vacuum +z–De#e keâer efoMee ceW ieceve keâjleer ngF& efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe
efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe kesâ Jesie kesâ JÙegl›eâce kesâ yejeyej lejbieeW mes mecyeæ efJeÅegle Deewj ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$eeW keâes
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 efve™efhele efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw :
ur ur ur ur
Ans. (d) : (a) [E = E 0 ˆj, B = B0 kˆ ] (b) [E = E 0 ˆi, B = B0 ˆj]
• A magnetic field is a vector quantity that describes the ur ur ur ur
ˆ B = B ˆi ]
(c) [E = E 0 k, (d) [E = E 0 ˆj, B = B0 ˆi ]
magnetic influence or an electric charge of another 0

moving charge. AIPMT (Screening)-2011

Physics 489 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): efve™efhele (Øekeâš) efkeâÙee peelee nw~ peneB t meskebâ[ ceW Deewj
Y
x ceeršj ceW nQ~ Fmemes Ùen efve<keâ<e& efvekeâeuelee nw efkeâ –
(i) the wavelength λis 188.4 m.
X lejbieowOÙe& λ = 188.4 m.
Z (ii) the wave number k is 0.33 rad/m
Given- lejbie mebKÙee k = 0.33 rad/m
Electro Magnetic wave is propagating along + z axis (iii) the wave amplitude is 10 V/m
ur ur
E × B = + z .............(i) lejbie DeeÙeece = 10 V/m
Electric and Magnetic field has to be perpendicular to (iv) the wave is propagating along +x direction
the direction of propagation of e.m.f wave.
lejbie +x efoMee keâer Deesj ieceve keâj jner nw
$i × $j = k$ ...............(ii)
Which one of the following pairs of statements
Comparing equation (i) & (ii), we get the direction of is correct?efvecveefueefKele ØekeâLeveeW kesâ ÙegiceeW ceW mes keâewve
propagation of E and B mee "erkeâ nw ?
r r
E = E 0ˆi, B = B0 ˆj (a) (iii) and (iv) (b) (i) and (ii)
19. Which of the following statement is false for the (c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (i) and (iii)
properties of electromagnetic waves ? AIPMT (Mains)-2010
efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieeW kesâ iegCeOece& kesâ yeejs ceW keâewvemee Ans. (d) : As given, E = 10 Cos (107t +Kx) j V/m,
keâLeve ieuele nw ? where 'E' is electric field
(a) both electric and magnetic field vectors attain Comparing it with the standard equation of E.M.W. we get-
the maxima and minima at the same place and E= E0 Cos (ωt + kx)
same time/efJeÅegle Je ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e meefoMe Skeâ ner
⇒ E0 = 10 V/m
meceÙe Je mLeeve hej DeefOekeâlece Je vÙetvelece ceeve «enCe
and ω = 107 rad/s
keâjles nQ
c = fλ ––––––––––(i)
(b) The energy in electromagnetic wave is
divided equally between electric and where f = frequency = ω
magnetic vectors/efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieeW ceW Tpee& 2π
efJeÅegle Je ÛegcyekeâerÙe meefoMeeW ceW meceeve ™he mes efJeYeeefpele λ = wavelength
nesleer nw ωλ
c=
(c) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are 2π
parallel to each other and perpendicular to the put the value of f in eqn (i) we get-
direction of propagation of wave
efJeÅegle Je ÛegcyekeâerÙe oesveeW meefoMe Skeâ otmejs kesâ meceevlej 2πc 2π× 3 ×108
λ= =
nesles nQ Je lejbie mebÛejCe keâer efoMee kesâ uecyeJeled nesles nQ ω 107
(d) These waves do not require any material λ = 188.4 m
medium for propagation/Fve lejbieeW keâes efkeâmeer heoeLe& also, ω
c=
ceeOÙece keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee veneR nesleer k
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 7
ω 10
Ans. (c) : Electromagnetic waves do not requir any k = = 8
= 0.033
matter (medium) to propagate from one place to another c 3 × 10
as it consists of photons. The wave is Propagating along y - direction.
In an electromagnetic wave, the electric field and 21. A particle having a mass of 10-2 kg carries a
magnetic field vary continuously with maxima & charge of 5×10-8 C. The particle is given an
minima at the same place and same time. initial horizontal velocity of 105 ms-1 in the
→
The time varying electric and magnetic fields are
presence of electric field E and magnetic field
mutually perpendicular to each other and also →
perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the B . To keep the particle moving in a horizontal
wave. direction, it is necessary that
20. The electric field of an electromagnetic wave in free 10-2 kg õJÙeceeve kesâ efkeâmeer keâCe hej 5×10-8 C keâe
ur
space is given by E = 10cos(107 t + kx)ˆjV / m, →
DeeJesMe nw~ Fme keâCe keâes efJeÅegle #es$e E Deewj ÛegcyekeâerÙe
where t and x are in seconds and metres →
respectively. It can be inferred that #es$e B keâer GheefmLeefle ceW 105 ms-1 keâe #eweflepe Jesie
cegòeâ DeekeâeMe ceW efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâe efoÙee peelee nw~ keâCe kesâ #eweflepe efoMee ceW hetJe&Jele ieefle
ur
efJeÅegle #es$e, E = 10cos(107 t + kx)ˆjV / m, mes keâjles jnves kesâ efueS Ùen DeeJeMÙekeâ nw efkeâ
Physics 490 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
→ (b) Moving along y direction with frequency
(i) B should be perpendicular to the direction of 2π×106 Hz and wavelength 200m
velocity E should be along the direction of
→ → Ùen lejbie y efoMee ceW 2π × 106 Hz DeeJe=efòe mes Ûeue
velocity/ B Jesie keâer efoMee kesâ uecyeJeled Deewj E Jesie jner nw Deewj Fmekeâe lejbieowOÙe& 200 m nw~
keâer efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe nes~ (c) Moving along x direction with frequency 106
→ → Hz and wavelength 100m
(ii) Both B and E should be along the direction Ùen lejbie x efoMee ceW 106 Hz DeeJe=efòe mes Ûeue jner nw
→ →
of velocity / B leLee E oesveeW Deeheme ceW Deewj Jesie keâer Deewj Fmekeâe lejbieowOÙe& 100 m nw~
efoMee kesâ DevegefoMe nes (d) Moving along x direction with frequency 106
→ → Hz and wavelength 200m
(iii) Both B and E are mutually perpendicular Ùen lejbie x efoMee ceW 106 Hz DeeJe=efòe mes Ûeue jner nw
and perpendicular to the direction of Deewj Fmekeâe lejbieowOÙe& 200m nw~
→ →
velocity./ B Deewj E oesveeW Deeheme ceW Deewj Jesie keâer AIMPT-2009
efoMee kesâ uecyeJeled nes Ans. (d) : Given Ex = 0
(iv) B should be along the direction of velocity Ez = 0
and E should be perpendicular to the direction N  rad   -2 rad  
Ey = 2.5 cos  2π ×106  t -  π ×10 x
s  
→ →
of velocity/ B Jesie keâer efoMee keâes DevegefoMe Deewj E C  m  
Gmekesâ uecyeJeled neW~ Ey = 2.5cos (2π ×106 )t - (π ×10-2 )x 
Which one of the following pairs of As the coefficient of x is negative, it is moving along
statements is possible. +ve x-axis with y = A cos (ωt - Kx)
efvecveefueefKele ØekeâLeveeW kesâ ÙegiceeW ceW mes keâewve mee So, A = 2.5
mebYeJe nw ? ω = 2π × 106
(a) (i) and (iii)/(i) leLee (iii) ω
f= = 106 Hz
(b) (iii) and (iv)/(iii) leLee (iv) 2π
(c) (ii) and (iii)/(ii) leLee (iii) K = π × 10-2
(d) (ii) and (iv)/(ii) leLee (iv) 2π 2π
λ= = -2
= 200m
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 K π ×10
Ans. (c) : Given, m = 10 -2 kg 23. The velocity of electromagnetic radiation in a
-8 medium of permittivity ε0 and permeability µ0
q = 5×10 C is given by :
5
V = 10 m/s
efJeÅegleMeeruelee ε0 Deewj ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee µ0 kesâ ceeOÙece ceW
The formula used in solving this eqn are given by
r r efJeÅegle-ÛegcyekeâerÙe efJeefkeâjCe keâe Jesie neslee nw :-
FE = qE
r r r 1 µ0
(
FB = q V × B ) (a)
µ0 ε0
(b)
ε0
r r
B and E are mutually perpendicular and also ε0
perpendicular to the direction of velocity. (c) (d) µ 0 ε0
→ → µ 0
Both B and E should be along the direction of AIPMT-2008
velocity.
Ans. (a) : Given:- Permittivity of medium = ε0
Both cases are possible.
Permeability of medium = µ0
22. The electric field part of an electromagnetic Velocity of electromagnetic radiation is the velocity of
wave in a medium is represented by : light.
Ex = 0 i.e. c = 3 ×108 m/s
Skeâ ceeOÙece ceW efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâe JewÅegle #es$eer
Q µ0 = 4π×10−7 
Yeeie efvecve Øekeâej metefÛele nw Ex = 0 1  Nm 2 
c=  ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 2 
N  rad   −2 rad   µ 0 ε0  c 
E y = 2.5 cos  2π× 106  t −  π× 10 x  
C  m   s  
24. The electric and magnetic field of an
Ez = 0 The wave is: electromagnetic wave are/Skeâ efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe
(a) Moving along –x direction with frequency lejbie kesâ efJeÅegle Deewj ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e:
106 Hz and wavelength 200m
(a) in opposite phase and perpendicular to each
Ùen lejbie –x efoMee ceW 106 Hz DeeJe=efòe mes Ûeue jner nw
other/Skeâ ner keâuee ceW Deewj hejmhej uecye efoMeeDeeW ceW
Deewj Fmekeâe lejbieowOÙe& 200 m nw~ nesles nQ~
Physics 491 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(b) in opposite phase and parallel to each Ans. (b): Let λ be the radius of the particle then-
other/Skeâ ner keâuee ceW Deewj hejmhej meceevlej nesles nQ~ λ = 3×10–4×10–2 m = 3×10–6 m
(c) in phase and perpendicular to each other Frequency of electromagnetic wave-
/efJehejerle keâuee ceW Deewj hejmhej uecye efoMee ceW nesles nQ~
c 3 × 108
(d) in phase and parallel to each other/efJehejerle keâuee v= = = 1014
λ 3 × 10 –6
ceW Deewj hejmhej meceeblej nesles nQ~ The frequency of EM wave is of the order of 1014.
AIPMT-2007,1994
r r 27. A signal emitted by an antenna from a certain
Ans. (c) : The electric and magnetic field E and B are point can be received at another point of the
in phase and are always perpendicular to the direction in surface in the form of
which the wave is travelling and also perpendicular to efkeâmeer efveef§ele efyevog mes Skeâ SWšervee Éeje Øesef<ele Skeâ
each other.
efmeiveue he=‰ kesâ otmejs efyevog hej efkeâme lejbie kesâ ™he ceW
Øeehle efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw?
(a) sky wave/DeekeâeMe lejbie
(b) ground wave/Yet-lejbie
(c) sea wave Ùeesce lejbie
(d) both (a) and (b)/(a) Deewj (b) oesveeW
25. If ε0 and µ0 are the electric permittivity and AIPMT-1993
magnetic permeability in a free space, ε and µ Ans. (d) : Sky wave- Sky wave propagation, commonly
are the corresponding quantities in a medium, known as the skip, is a kind of radio wave propagation.
the index of refraction of the medium is It is either the reflected or refracted back waves to the
Ùeefo efveJee&le ceW efJeÅegleMeeruelee ε0 Deewj ÛegcyekeâMeeruelee µ0 earth from ionosphere.
nes leLee efkeâmeer ceeOÙece ceW Fvekeâe ceeve ε Deewj µ nes lees Ground wave- Ground waves travels from the
ceeOÙece keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ nesiee: transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna along the
surface of the earth. It is known as surface wave.
ε0µ 0 εµ Hence option (d) is correct.
(a) (b)
εµ ε0µ 0
ε0µ ε 22.3 Electromagnetic Spectrum
(c) (d)
εµ 0 ε0
28. Match List-I with List-II
AIPMT-1997 metÛeer-I keâe metÛeer-II mes efceueeve keâjW:
Ans. (b) : E.M. wave travel through the free space-
List-I/metÛeer-I List-II/metÛeer-II
1
c= .........(i) (Electromagnetic (wavelength
µ 0 ε0 waves/efJeÅegle lejbieowOÙe&)
E.M. wave travel through the medium- ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieW)
1
v= ..........(ii) (A) AM radio waves (i) 10–10m
µε /DeeÙeece cee[gefuele jsef[Ùees
The index of refraction of the medium is- lejbieW
c (ii) 102 m
µ= (B) Microwaves
v /met#ce lejbieW
1
µ= × µε (C) Infrared radiations (iii) 10–2 m
µ 0 ε0 /DeJejòeâ efJeefkeâjCe
µε (D) X-rays (iv) 10–4 m
µ= / X-efkeâjCeW
µ 0 ε0
Choose the correct answer from the options
26. The frequency of electromagnetic wave, which
given below
is best suitable to observe a particle of radius 3
× 10–4 cm is of the order of veerÛes efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW ceW mes mener Gòej ÛegveW:
Skeâ keâCe keâer ef$epÙee 3 × 10–4 mesceer nw~ Fmes osKeves nsleg (a) (A) - (ii), (B) - (iii), (C) - (iv), (D) - (i)
GefÛele JewÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâer DeeJe=efòe keâer keâesefš nw: (b) (A) - (iv), (B) - (iii), (C) - (ii), (D) - (i)
(a) 1015 (b) 1014 (c) (A) - (iii), (B) - (ii), (C) - (i), (D) - (iv)
(c) 1013 (d) 1012 (d) (A) - (iii), (B) - (iv), (C) - (ii), (D) - (i)
AIPMT-1992 NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Physics 492 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Am radiowave ≈ 102 m Here, λ is the wavelength, v is the velocity and f is the
Microwave ≈ 10–2 m frequency.
Infrared radiations ≈ 10–4 m
X-ray ≈ 10–10 m

It can be seen from electromagnetic spectrum that

wavelength increases from left to right. Therefore red
has the longest wave length among the available colours
29. The E.M. wave with shortest wavelength from VIBGYOR.
among the following is,/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes meyemes
31. The energy of the em waves is of the order of
keâce lejbieowOÙe& keâer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lebjie nw– 15 KeV. To which part of the spectrum does it
(a) Microwaves/met#ce lejbie belong?/efkeâmeer efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lebjie keâer Tpee& keâer
(b) Ultraviolet rays/hejeyeQieveer efkeâjCeW keâesefš 15 KeV nw~ Ùen mhewkeäš^ce kesâ efkeâme Yeeie keâe
(c) X-rays/ X efkeâjCeW meomÙe nw?
(d) Gamma-rays/ieecee efkeâjCeW (a) γ-rays/ieecee efkeâjCeW
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II (b) X-rays/Skeäme-efkeâjCeW
AIPMT-1994 (c) Infra-red rays/DeJejòeâ efkeâjCeW
Ans. (d) : The wavelength range of various rays are (d) Ultraviolet rays/hejeyeQieveer efkeâjCeW
given as: AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Ans. (b) The wavelength of photon energy is given by–
hc 1240
λ= =
E 15 × 103
= 0.083nm
Since, the order of wavelength is between 10nm and
0.001nm, So it belong to X-rays
32. The condition under which a microwave oven
heats up a food item containing water
molecules most efficiently is :-
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâme oMee ceW efkeâmeer ceeF›eâesJesJe
(met#ce lejbie) Dee@Jeve keâer peue DeCegÙegòeâ Yeespeve heoeLeeX
keâes iece& keâer o#elee cenòece nesieer-
(a) Infra-red waves produce heating in a
microwave oven/ ceeF›eâesJesJe Dee@Jeve ceW DeJejòeâ lejbieW
leeheve GlheVe keâjleer nw~
(b) The frequency of the microwaves must match
Hence, as we can see gamma rays have shortest the resonant frequency of the water
wavelength and highest frequency, the correct answer is molecules/ ceeF›eâesJesJe (met#ce lejbieeW) keâer DeeJe=efòe, peue
option (d). kesâ DeCegDeeW keâer Devegveeoer DeeJe=efòe kesâ meÂMe nesleer nw~
30. Which colour of the light has the longest (c) The frequency of the microwaves has no
wavelength?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes ØekeâeMe kesâ efkeâme JeCe& relation with natural frequency of water
keâer lejbieowOÙe& meyemes uecyeer nesleer nw nw? molecules/ met#celejbieeW (ceeF›eâesJesJe) keâer DeeJe=efòe keâe
(a) Blue/veeruee (b) Green/nje peue kesâ DeCegDeeW keâer Øeeke=âeflekeâ DeeJe=efòe mes keâesF& mebyebOe
(c) Violet/yeQieveer (d) Red/ueeue veneR neslee nw~
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 (d) Microwaves are heat waves, so always
Ans. (d): Distance between the two points in the wave produce heating/ met#ce lejbieW T<cee keâer lejbieW nw Dele:
having same phase of oscillation is called wavelength. meowJe T<cee GlheVe keâjWieer~
λ = v/f NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Physics 493 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): A microwave Oven: From the above table we can see that λm > λv > λx.
1. An electron tube called a magnetron is present in the • General electromagnetic spectrum has following
oven. This magnetron produces microwave. sequence of wavelength-
2. These microwave are reflected within the metal γ-rays < x - rays < uv rays < visible rays < IR< MW
interior of the oven where they are absorbed by food. <RW.
3. Microwave cause water molecules in the food to 35. Which is having minimum wavelength
vibrate, this increases their kinetic energy and hence efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekeâer lejbieowOÙe& vÙetvelece nesleer nw -
the temperature and making it cooked.
(a) X-rays / X-efkeâjCeW
⇒ The frequency of the microwave must match the
resonant frequency of water molecules. In this way (b)Ultra violet rays/hejeyeQieveer efkeâjCeW
the maximum heat can be transferred to food. In (c) γ-rays / γ- efkeâjCeW
most efficient way. (d) Cosmic rays / keâe@efmcekeâ efkeâjCeW
⇒ So the frequency of the microwave must match the AIPMT-2002
resonant frequency of the water molecules
Ans. (d) :
33. The decreasing order of wavelength of
infrared, microwave, ultraviolet and gamma Rays Wavelength Range
rays is :/DeJejòeâ efkeâjCeeW, met#ce lejbieeW, hejeyeQieveer 1. Cosmic Rays 10–14m to 10–12m
lejbieeW Deewj ieecee efkeâjCeeW keâer lejbieowOÙe& Iešles ›eâce ceW nQ- 2. γ – Rays 10–12m to 10–10m
(a) infrared, microwave, ultraviolet, gamma 3. X – Rays 10–10m to 10–9m
rays/DeJejòeâ, met#celejbieW, hejeyeQieveer, ieecee efkeâjCeW 4. UV – Rays 10–7m to 4×10–7m
(b) microwave, infrared, ultraviolet, gamma Hence, Cosmic Rays have smallest wavelength
rays/met#ce lejbieW, DeJejòeâ, hejeyeQieveer, ieecee efkeâjCeW 36. The structure of solids is investigated by using
(c) gamma rays, ultraviolet, infrared, microwaves "esmeeW keâer mebjÛevee keâes osKeves nsleg ØeÙeesie keâer peeleer nw:
ieecee efkeâjCeW, hejeyeQieveer, DeJejòeâ, met#ce lejbieW (a) cosmic rays/keâe@efmcekeâ lejbieW
(d) microwaves, gamma rays, infrared, ultraviolet (b) X-rays/X-lejbieW
met#ce lejbieW, ieecee efkeâjCeW, DeJejòeâ, hejeyeQieveer (c) γ-rays/γ-lejbieW
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(d) infra-red radiations/DeJejòeâ efJekeâerjCe
Ans. (b) : Wavelength range for different rays of the
AIPMT-1992
Electromagnetic Spectrum is as follows–
Gamma rays ( γ) = less than 1 nm Ans. (b): X-rays are used for the investigation of
structure of solids as crystalline atoms cause a beam of
Ultraviolet rays = 10nm – 400 nm
incident x-rays to diffract in many specific direction.
Visible light = 400 nm – 800 nm
37. Which of the following electromagnetic
Infrared rays = 800 nm – 105 nm
radiations have the longest wavelength?
Microwaves = 105 nm – 108 nm
The electromagnetic specturm arranged according to
efkeâme efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe efJeefkeâjCe keâer lejbieowOÙe& meyemes
decreasing wavelengths : Microwaves > Infrared > DeefOekeâ nesieer?
Visible light > UV rays > Gamma rays. (a) X-rays/X-lejbieW (b) γ-rays/γ-lejbieW
34. If λv, λx and λm represent the wavelengths of (c) Microwaves/met#ce lejbieW (d) Radiowaves jsef[Ùees lejbieW
visible light, x-rays and microwaves AIPMT-1989
respectively, then-
Ans. (d) :
Ùeefo λv, λx Deewj λm ÂMÙe ØekeâeMe, x-efkeâjCeeW Deewj Type of Rays Wavelength Range
ceeF›eâesJesJe lejbieeW kesâ ›eâceevegmeej lejbieowOÙe& nes lees - Radio Greater than 0.1 m
(a) λm > λx > λv (b) λv > λm > λx X-rays 10–2 nm to 10 nm
(c) λv > λx > λm (d) λm > λv > λx Y-rays Less than 10–3 nm
AIPMT-2005 Microwaves 1 nm to 0.1 m
Ans. (d) : Given that Hence, option (d) is correct.
λv = Wave length of visible light
λx = Wave length of X - rays
22.4 NCERT Exemplar Problems
λm = Wave length of microwaves
Type of radiation wavelength 38. One requires 11eV of energy to dissociate a
X- rays 10-8m  10-12m carbon monoxide molecule into carbon and
visible light 10-7m oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency of the
microwaves 10-1m  10-3m appropriate electromagnetic radiation to
achieve the dissociation lies in
Physics 494 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
keâeye&ve ceesveeskeämeeF[ kesâ Skeâ DeCeg keâes keâeye&ve SJeb We know the identity,
Dee@keämeerpeve hejceeCeegDeeW ceW efJeIeefšle keâjves kesâ efueS cos (π – θ) = – cosθ
11eV Tpee& keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesleer nw~ Fme efJeIešve kesâ Using this identity in the above equation we get,
^
efueS GheÙegkeäle JewÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe efJeefkeâjCe keâer vÙetvelece ∴ E r = + E0 i cos(kz + ωt)
DeeJe=efòe nesleer nw : 40. Light with an energy flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on
(a) visible region/ÂMÙe #es$e ceW a non-reflecting surface at normal incidence. If
(b) infrared region/DeJejkeäle #es$e ceW the surface has an area of 30 cm2, the total
(c) ultraviolet region/hejeyeQieveer #es$e ceW momentum delivered (from complete
(d) microwave region/ceeF›eâeslejbie #es$e ceW absorption) during 30 minutes is/Tpee& heäuekeäme
20W/cm2 keâe ØekeâeMe Skeâ DehejeJeleea he=‰ hej
Ans. (c) :We know that the energy of an
electromagnetic radiation is given by Planck's law. DeefYeuecyeJeled Deeheeflele neslee nw~ Ùeefo he=‰ keâe #es$eheâue
i.e. E = hν 30cm2 nes lees 30 efceveš ceW (hetCe& DeJeMees<eCe kesâ
Where 'h' is a Plank's constant = 6.626× 10–34 Js efueS) Øeoòe kegâue mebJesie nesiee:
and ν is Frequency. (a) 36 × 10–5 kg m/s (b) 36 × 10–4 kg m/s
E = 11 eV (Given) 4
(c) 108 × 10 kg m/s (d) 1.08 × 107 kg m/s
Since, 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19J Ans. (b) : Intensity of light = 20 W/cm2
∴ 11eV = 1.6 × 10–19×11J Area = 30 cm2
We have energy E = 1.6 × 10–19 ×11J
Time = 30 Minute = 30×60 sec
Substituting values in E = hν, we get
Energy Received = Intensity × Area × Time
E
Frequency (v) = = 20 × 30 × 30 × 60
h = 108 × 104 Joule
1.6 × 10 –19 ×11 hc h
= Now, E = and λ =
6.626 ×10 –34 λ p
= 2.656 × 1015Hz
hc
Thus, the resultant frequency belongs to ultraviolet E= = p×c
region of light (i.e. 8 × 1014Hz to 3 × 1016Hz) h
39. A linearly polarized electromagnetic wave p
r
given as E = E0 ˆi cos (kz – ωt) is incident p=
E
normally on a perfectly reflecting infinite wall c
at z = a. Assuming that the material of the wall 108 × 104
is optically inactive, the reflected wave will be Momentum, p = = 36 × 10 –4 kgm/s
3 × 108
given as/Skeâ jwefKekeâle: OegÇefJele JewÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie
r 41. The electric field intensity produced by the
pees E = E ˆi cos (kz – ωt) Éeje efve™efhele keâer pee
0 radiations coming from 100 W bulb at 3 m
mekeâleer nw, efkeâmeer Devevle efJemleej keâer hetCe& hejeJele&keâ distance is E. The electric field intensity
oerJeej hej Deeheeflele nw pees – z = a hej efmLele nw~ Ùen produced by the radiations coming from 50 W
ceeveles ngS efkeâ oerJeej ØekeâeMekeâerÙe ™he mes Deef›eâÙe nw bulb at the same distance is/100W kesâ yeuye mes
hejeJeefle&le lejbie keâes efueKe mekeâles nQ : 3 m keâer otjer hej hengBÛeves Jeeues efJeefkeâjCeeW mes Glhevve
r efJeÅegle #es$e keâer leer›elee E nw~ Gleveer ner otjer hej 50W
(a) E r = –E 0 ˆi cos(kz - ωt)
r kes â yeuye mes Deeves Jeeues ØekeâeMe kesâ efJeefkeâjCeeW kesâ keâejCe
(b) E r = E 0ˆi cos(kz + ωt)
r Glhevve efJeÅegle #es$e keâer leer›elee nesieer:
ˆ
(c) E r = –E 0 i cos(kz + ωt) E
r (a) (b) 2E
ˆ
(d) E r = –E 0 i sin(kz – ωt) 2
Ans. (b) : Given, E
(c) (d) 2E
→ ^ 2
E = E 0 i cos(kz – ωt)
Ans. (a) : Given,
For the reflected wave we have z = – z, i = – i and
Power of bulb = 100W
phase change of π in the incident wave. Therefore, we
can write the reflected wave equation as, Intensity of Electric field at a distance 3 m is E.
P
The electric field intensity is given by E =
^
E r = E 0 (i) cos [ k(–z) – ωt + ( π)] A
⇒ E r = E 0 (–i) ˆ cos [ –(kz + ωt) + π]
100 100
⇒
^
E r = –E 0 i cos( π – (kz + ωt)) E= 2 = ....(i)
πr 9π
Physics 495 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
50 Putting this value in eqn (i), we get–
and E' = 1
9π IE = ε0c 2 B02 c ... (iii)
100 2
⇒ 2E' = .....(ii) 1
9π Where speed of light, c =
Dividing first from second equation, µ0ε0
E 1 1
⇒ =1 ⇒ IE = ε0 B02 × c
2E' 2 µ0ε0
E' 1
⇒ =
⇒ IE =
1 B02
c
E 2
2 µ0
E
So, E' = ⇒ IE = IB
2 IE
r r So, = 1:1
42. If E and B represent electric and magnetic field IB
vectors of the electromagnetic wave, the
44. An electromagnetic wave radiates outwards
direction of propagation of relectromagnetic
r from a dipole antenna, with E0 as the
wave is along/Ùeefo E SJeb B ›eâceMe: JewÅegle amplitude of its electric field vector. The
ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieeW kesâ efJeÅegle SJeb ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e electric field E0 which transports significant
(meefoMe) neW lees JewÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbieeW keâer mebjÛeCe energy from the source falls off as/Skeâ efÉOegÇJe
efoMee nw : SsCšsvee mes EM lejbies yeenj keâer Deesj efJeefkeâefjle nesleer nQ
r r efpevekesâ efJeÅegle #s$e meefoMe keâe DeeÙeece E0 nw~ efJeÅegle #es$e
(a) in the direction of E / E kesâ DevegefoMe
r r E0 pees Tpee& mebÛeej keâe ØecegKe Jeenkeâ nw, œeesle mes otjer kesâ
(b) in the direction of B / B kesâ DevegefoMe meeLe Fmekeâe heefjceeCe
r r r r
(c) in the direction of B× E / B× E kesâ DevegefoMe 1 1
r r r r (a) decreases according to / kesâ Devegmeej Iešlee nw
(d) in the direction of E × B / E × B kesâ DevegefoMe r3 r3
Ans. (d) : The direction of propagation of 1 1
(b) decreases according to 2 / 2 kesâ Devegmeej Iešlee nw
electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to both electric r r
field vector E and magnetic field vector B, i.e. in the 1 1
r r (c) decreases according to / kesâ Devegmeej Iešlee nw
direction
r of E × B and the velocity of the wave is given r r
r r
by v = E × B (d) Remains constant./DeÛej yevee jnlee nw
This can be seen by the diagram given below. Ans. (c) : Given, Amplitude of electric field vector = E0
We Know that,
Intensity of radiation is given by–
W E
I= = ... (i)
At At
Where, W is the energy emitted, t is time and A is the area.
Therefore, from the eqn (i), energy and time to be constant.
The time varying electric and magnetic fields are 1
mutually perpendicular to each other and also I∝ ... (ii)
perpendicular to the direction of propagation of this A
wave. A = 4πr2 (electromagnetic wave will be
radiated in the form of sphere.)
43. The ratio of contributions made by the electric 1
field and magnetic field components to the ⇒ I∝
intensity of an electromagnetic wave is 4πr 2
ewÅegleÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie keâer leer›elee ceW efJeÅegle SJeb ÛegbyekeâerÙe Then I ∝ 1 ... (iii)
#es$e IeškeâeW kesâ ÙeesieoeveeW keâe Devegheele neslee nw: r2
(a) c : 1 (b) c2 : 1 The electric field and Average intensity are related as,
1
(c) 1 : 1 (d) c : 1 I = U av = ε0 E 20 ... (iv)
2
Ans. (c) : The intensity of the electric field is, n
From eq (iv),
1
IE = ε 0 E 0 c 2
... (i) I ∝ E 02
2
1
and magnetic field intensity, ⇒ E 02 ∝ 2
r
1 B02
IB = c ... (ii) 1
2 µ0 So, E0 ∝
r
Also E0 = cB0
Physics 496 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
23.
Ray Optics and Optical
Instruments
(a) 30 cm away from the mirror
23.1 Reflection of Light by Spherical 30 mesceer ohe&Ce mes otj
Mirrors (b) 36 cm away from the mirror
1. An object is placed on the principal axis of a 36 mesceer ohe&Ce mes otj
concave mirror at a distance of 1.5 f (f is the
(c) 36 cm towards the mirror / 36 ohe&Cekesâ heeme
focal length). The image will be at,/ efkeâmeer Jemleg
keâes efkeâmeer DeJeleue ohe&Ce kesâ cegKÙe De#e hej 1.5 f (f – (d) 30 cm towards the mirror / 30 ohe&Ce kesâ heeme
Heâeskeâme otjer nw) hej jKee ieÙee nw~ Øeefleefyecye keâer ohe&Ce NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
mes otjer nesieer- Ans. (b) : Given, object distance (u1) = – 40 cm
(a) 3f (b) –3f Focal length of the concave mirror (f) = – 15 cm
(c) 1.5f (d) –1.5f
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Ans. (b) :

1 1 1
Using mirror formula, = +
f v1 u1
1 1 1
Given − = −
Object distance, u = – 1.5 f {where f= focal length} 15 v1 40
Now, v1 = −24cm
1 1 1
+ = {v = image distance} When object is displaced by 20 cm towards mirrors
u v f
Now,
1 1 1
+ = u 2 = −20cm
−1.5f v −f
1 1 1
1
=− +
1 1 = +
v f 1.5f f v2 u 2
1 −1.5 + 1 1 1 1
= − = −
v 1.5f 15 v 2 20
1 −0.5 1 1 1
= ⇒ v = −3f = −
v 1.5 f v 2 20 15
2. An object is placed at a distance of 40 cm from
a concave mirror of focal length 15 cm. If the
v2 = −60cm
object is displaced through a distance of 20 cm So image shifts away from mirror by
towards the mirror, the displacement of the |v2| – |v1| = 60 – 24 = 36 cm
image will be/keâesF& Jemleg 15 cm Heâeskeâme otjer efkeâmeer
3. Match the corresponding entries of column- 1
DeJeleue ohe&Ce mes 40 cm otjer mLeeveevleefjle keâj efoÙee
with column-2 [where m is the magnification
peeS, lees Øeefleefyecye efkeâleveer otjer hej efJemLeeefhele nes produced by the mirror]. /keâe@uece-1 keâer mebiele
peeSiee? Ùeefo Jemleg keâes 20 mesceer keâer otjer hej
mLeeveevleefjle keâer peeleer nw lees Øeefleefyecye efkeâleveer otjer hej ØeefJeef°ÙeeW keâe efceueeve keâe@uece-2 keâer ØeefJeef°ÙeeW mes
yevesiee? keâerefpeÙes~ [ÙeneB m ohe&CeeW Éeje Glhevve DeeJeOe&ve nw]
Physics 497 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Column (1) Column (2) Ans. (b):
(A) m = –2 (a) Convex mirror/
Gòeue ohe&Ce
(B) m = – 1/2 (b) Concave mirror
/DeJeleue ohe&Ce
(C) m = +2 (c) Real image
/JeemleefJekeâ Øeefleefyecye
1 The concave mirror of focal length f = –10 cm
(D) m = + (d) Virtual image
2 Length of the rod = 10 cm
/DeeYeemeer Øeefleefyecye Closer end distance of rod (uA) = – 20 cm
(a) A – c and d B → b and d C → b and c D → a Far end distance of rod (uB) = uA + LAB
and b uB = –20 –10 = –30 cm
(b) A – b and c B → b and c C → b and d D → a By using mirror formula end (A)
and d 1 1 1
+ =
(c) A – a and c B → a and d C → a and b D → c v u f
and d 1 1 1
(d) A – a and d B → b and c C → b and d D → a − =−
v A 20 10
and d
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 vA = –20 cm
Ans. (b) : M = +ve ⇒ Virtual image 1 1 1
− =−
M = -ve ⇒ Real image v B 30 10
|M| > 1 ⇒ Magnified image 1 1
=−
|M| < 1 ⇒ Diminished image vB 15
• Convex mirror always produces virtual and
vB = –15 cm
diminished image of a real object
• For a concave mirror, a virtual and enlarged image Length of the image can be given as-
will be formed when the position of the object is in LAB = |vA| – |vB| = 20 –15 = 5 cm
between pole(p) and focus(F) and in all other cases a 5. A concave mirror of focal length 'f1' is placed at
real and inverted image is formed a distance of 'd' from a convex lens of focal
length 'f2'. A beam of light coming from infinity
and falling on this convex lens-concave mirror
combination returns to infinity. The distance
'd' must equal:/'f1' heâeskeâme otjer keâe Skeâ DeJeleue
Now, ohe&Ce 'f2' heâeskeâme otjer kesâ Skeâ Gòeue ueWme mes d otjer hej
(A) m = -2, indicates an enlarged real image formed by jKee ieÙee nw~ Devevle mes Deelee ngDee Skeâ efkeâjCe hebgpe,
a concave mirror. Gòeue ueWme leLee DeJeleue ohe&Ce kesâ Fme mebÙeespeve hej
(B) m = -1/2, indicates a diminished real image
produced by concave mirror.
škeâjelee nw Deewj Deheves ceeie& hej Devevle keâes Jeeheme nes
(C) m = +2, indicates a virtual and enlarge image peelee nw~ lees otjer 'd' keâe ceeve nesiee:
produced by concave mirror. (a) 2f1 + f2 (b) –2f1 + f2
(D) m = +1/2, indicates a diminished virtual image (c) f1 + f2 (d) –f1 + f2
produced by a convex mirror. AIPMT (Screening)-2012
4. A rod of length 10 cm lies along the principal Ans. (a) :
axis of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm
in such a way that its end closer to the pole is
20 cm away from the mirror. The length of the
image is/10 mesceer. uecyeer Skeâ ÚÌ[ keâes, 10 mesceer.
heâeskeâme otjer kesâ Skeâ DeJeleue ueWme keâer cegKÙe De#e kesâ
DevegefoMe Fme Øekeâej jKee ieÙee nw efkeâ ÚÌ[ keâe ohe&Ce kesâ
OegÇJe kesâ heeme Jeeuee efmeje, ohe&Ce mes 20 mesceer. otjer nw~ (1) Consider a ray of light coming from infinity, it will
lees, Øeefleefyecye keâer uecyeeF& nesieer:- first incident on the convex lens, get refracted and
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5 cm finally an image will be formed at the focus of
(c) 10 cm (d) 15 cm convex lens, which is at right side of pole of the
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 lens & at a distance of 'f2'

Physics 498 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(2) When object is at the centre of curvature of a Thus, sin ic ∝ λ
concave mirror, image will be real, inverted, of
same size & at the centre of curvature.
V I B G Y O R
→
λ increa sin g
(3) Now, 1st image formed by the convex lens acts as
an object for concave mirror & due to reflection at Therefore, for higher value of λ, critical angle will be
concave mirror image of object will formed at same more, Hence yellow, orange, red will come out to air.
position which is at the centre of curvature of
concave mirror. 7. A light ray falls on a glass surface of refractive
(4) Now 2nd Image formed by concave mirror (which is index 3 at an angle 60°. The angle between
at centre of curvatures of concave mirror) will act the refracted and reflected rays would be
as an object for convex lens & when an object is
placed at the focus of convex lens, the image will 3 DeheJele&veebkeâ Jeeues efkeâmeer keâeBÛe kesâ leue hej keâesF&
form at infinity. ØekeâeMe keâer efkeâjCe 60° kesâ keâesCe hej efiejleer nw~ DeheJeefle&le
(5) First image will form at f2, then concave mirror is to
be placed such that centre of curvature of mirror SJeb hejeJeefle&le efkeâjCeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâe keâesCe nesiee:
coincides with focus of the first lens, then second (a) 120o (b) 30o
image will be formed at centre of curvature & then (c) 60 o
(d) 90o
finally the third image will form at infinity.
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
(6) Centre of curvature of concave mirror is located at a
distance of R = 2f1 Ans. (d) :
From fig., distance 'a' has to be sum of radius of
curvature of concave mirror & focus of convex lens
which is f2.
d = 2f1+ f2

23.2 Refraction µ1sin i = µ2sin r

1 sin60º = µ2 sin r
6.
3
1× = 3 sin r
2
1
sin r =
2
r = 30º
Which set of colours will come out in air for a
situation shown in figure ? 60º + θ + r = 180º
efÛe$e ceW efoKeeF& ieF& efmLeefle kesâ efueS jbieeW keâe keâewve – mee θ = 180º – 60º – 30º
mecetn nJee ceW efvekeâuesiee? θ = 90º
(a) Orange, Red and Violet/veejbieer, ueeue Deewj yewieveer
8. An air bubble in a glass slab with refractive
(b) Blue, Green and Yellow/veeruee, nje Deewj heeruee index 1.5(near normal incidence) is 5 cm deep
(c) Yellow, Orange and Red/heeruee, veejbieer ueeue when viewed from one surface and 3 cm deep
(d) All/meye when from the opposite face. The thickness (in
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 cm) of the slab is
Ans. (c) : keâeBÛe keâer efkeâmeer heefókeâe, efpemekeâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 nw,
kesâ Yeerlej JeeÙeg keâe Skeâ yegueyeguee yevo nQ~ heefókeâe kesâ
Skeâ he=‰ mes ueieYeie uecyeJeled osKeves hej Fme yegueyegues keâer
ienjeF& 5 cm leLee efJehejerle he=‰ mes osKeves hej 3 cm
Øeleerle nesleer nw~ Fme heefókeâe keâer ceesšeF& (cm ceW) nesieer:-
(a) 8 (b) 10
We know that (c) 12 (d) 16
1 NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
sin ic =
µ Ans. (c) : Given:- Refractive index of glass µ = 1.5
1 actualdepth
Also, µ ∝ Apparent depth =
λ µ

Physics 499 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For total internal reflection,
sin i ≥ sin C
where i = Angle of incidence
C = Critical Angle
But
dapp1 dapp2 µ
sin C = 2
µ1
The apparent depth of bubble as seen from one surface µ 3/ 2
d1 sin i ≥ 2 ≥
d app1 = = 5 cm µ1 2
µ
⇒ Real depth of bubble from one surface 3
i ≥ sin −1  
d1 = 5×1.5 = 7.5 cm 4
The apparent depth of bubble as seen from other surface
So, the incidence angle is equal to or greater than
d
d app2 = 2 = 3 cm
µ 3
sin- 1   .
⇒ Real depth of bubble from other surface 4
d2 = 1.5 × 3 cm = 4.5 cm 10. A small coin is resting on the bottom of a
Hence the thickness of the glass is beaker filled with a liquid. A ray of light from
d1 + d2 = 7.5 + 4.5 = 12 cm. the coin travels upto the surface of the liquid
9. The speed of light in media M1 and M2 are 1.5 and moves along its surface (see figure)
× 108 m/s and 2.0 × 108 m/s respectively. A ray efkeâmeer õJe mes Yejs Skeâ yeerkeâj kesâ leue hej ueIeg efmekeäkeâe
of light enters from medium M1 to M2 at an
incidence angle i. If the ray suffers total Oeje nw~ efÛe$e kesâ Devegmeej Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe efmekeäkeWâ mes
internal reflection, the value of i is DeejcYe neskeâj õJe kesâ Thejer leue lekeâ hengBÛe keâj leue kesâ
oes ceeOÙeceeW M1 and M2 ceW ØekeâeMe keâer Ûeeue ›eâceMe: meeLe-meeLe Ûeueleer nw~
1.5 × 108 m/s leLee 2.0 × 108 m/s nw~ ØekeâeMe keâer Skeâ
efkeâjCe ceeOÙece M1 mes M2 ceW I Deeheleve keâesCe hej ØeJesMe
keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo Fme efkeâjCe keâe hetCe& Deebleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve
nes peelee nw lees I keâe ceeve nw –
2 2
(a) Equal to sin −1   / sin −1   kesâ yejeyej How fast is the light traveling in the liquid ?
3 3
Fme õJe ceW ØekeâeMe Ûeeueve keâe Jesie efkeâlevee nesiee?
3
(b) Equal toor less than sin −1   (a) 1.2 × 108 m/s (b) 1.8 × 108 m/s
5
(c) 2.4 × 108 m/s (d) 3.0 × 108 m/s
3
sin −1   kesâ yejeyej Ùee Fmemes keâce AIPMT-2007
5 Ans. (b) : As given, ray of light from coin travels upto
3 the surface of liquid and moves along its surface so it is
(c) Equal to or greater than sin −1  
4 a case of total internal reflection and angle θ will be
critical angle.
3
sin −1   kesâ yejeyej Ùee Fmemes DeefOekeâ
4
2 2
(d) Less than sin −1   / sin −1   mes keâce
3 3
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Ans. (c) : Refractive index for medium M1 is-
c 3 ×108 Let refractive index of liquid is µ and we know that
µ1 = = =2
v1 1.5 ×108 c
µ=
Refractive index for medium M2 is- v
c 3 ×108 3 Where c = Light speed in vacuum = 3 ×108 m/s and
µ2 = = =
v2 2 ×10 8
2 µ = 1/sinθ

Physics 500 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
P 3 jner nw~ Deeheeflele Je DeheJeefle&le lejbieeW kesâ efueS lejbieowOÙe&,
sin θ = =
H 5 DeeJe=efòe, Jesie Je leer›elee ›eâceMe: λ, n, v, SJeb I’ nes lees
1 1 mener keâLeve nesiee-
µ= = =5 3
sin θ 3/ 5 (a) λ = λ' (b) n = n'
c c 3 ×108 (c) v = v' (d) I = I'
µ= ⇒v= = AIPMT-2001
v µ 53
Ans. (b) : Given,
v = 1.8 ×108 m s
For ray of light,
11. A beam of light composed of red and green Wavelength = λ
rays is incident obliquely at a point on the face Frequency = n
of a rectangular glass slab. When coming out
on the opposite parallel face, the red and green Velocity = v
rays emerge from :- /Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe hegbpe ceW Intensity = I
ueeue Deewj njer efkeâjCeW nQ~ Ùen efkeâjCe hegbpe Skeâ When light travels from 1 medium to other, its velocity,
Intensity and wavelength changes but frequency
DeeÙeleekeâej keâeBÛeerÙe, muewye kesâ Skeâ heâueve efyevog hej remains the same i.e. [n = n']
eflejÚe Deeheeflele nw Deewj muewye kesâ DeefYecegKe meceevlej
13. A bubble in glass slab (µ = 1.5) when viewed
heâuekeâ mes efveie&le neslee nw~ ueeue Deewj njer efkeâjCes :- from one side appears at 5 cm and 2 cm from
(a) Two points propagating in two different other side, then thickness of slab is :
parallel directions /oes efyevogDeeW mes oes efJeefYeVe Skeâ yegueyegues keâes keâeBÛe heefókeâe (µ = 1.5) ceW osKeves hej
meceevlej efoMeeDeeW ceW efveie&le neWieer Skeâ lejheâ mes 5 cm leLee otmejer lejheâ mes 2 cm otjer hej
(b) One point propagating in two different
directions through slab efoKeeF& oslee nw lees heefókeâe keâer ceesšeF& nesieer –
Skeâ ner efyevog mes oes efJeefYeVe efoMeeDeeW ceW muewye mes efveie&le (a) 3.75 cm (b) 3 cm
neWieer (c) 10.5 cm (d) 2.5 cm
(c) One point propagating in the same direction AIPMT-2000
through slab Real depth
Ans. (c) : Refractive Index µ =
Skeâ ner efyevog mes Skeâ efoMee ceW muewye mes efveie&le neWieer Apparent depth
(d) Two points propagating in two different non Let the thickness of slab be 't' & real depth of bubble
parallel directions/oes efJeefYeVe efyevogDeeW mes oes efJeefYeVe from one side be 'x' Then-
Demeceevlej efoMeeDeeW ceW efveie&le neWieer x t−x
AIPMT-2004 µ= =
5 2
Ans. (a) : In any medium other than air or vacuum the
x t−x
velocities of different colours are different. Therefore ⇒ 1.5 = =
both red and green colours are refracted at different 5 2
angles of refraction. Hence, after emerging from glass ⇒ x = 7.5 cm
slab through opposite parallel face they appear at two t − 7.5
different points and moves in the two different parallel ∴ 1.5 =
direction. 2
1 t = 10.5 cm = Thickness of slab.
λ∝ 14. Light enters at an angle of incidence in a
ν
where, λ = wavelength transparent rod of refractive index n. For what
value of the refractive index of the material of
ν = reflective index
the rod, the light once entered into it will not
leave it through its lateral face whatsoever be
the value of angle of incidence:/ØekeâeMe n
DeheJele&veebkeâ keâer heejoMeea ÚÌ[ ceW Skeâ Deeheleve keâesCe hej
ØeJesMe keâjlee nw~ ÚÌ[ kesâ heoeLe& kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ efkeâme
Red and green rays emerge from two points propagating ceeve kesâ efueS ØekeâeMe Skeâ yeej FmeceW ØeJesMe keâjves kesâ
in two different parallel direction.
yeeo Fmekesâ heeÕe& HeâuekeâeW mes yeenj veneR efvekeâuesiee, Ûeens
12. A ray of light travelling in air haves wavelength
λ, frequency n, velocity v and intensity I. If
Deeheleve keâesCe keâe ceeve kegâÚ Yeer keäÙeeW ve nes~
this ray enters into water then these parameter (a) n > 2 (b) 1.0
are λ', n', v' and I' respectively. Which (c) 1.3 (d) 1.4
relation is correct /Skeâ efkeâjCe JeeÙeg mes heeveer ceW Dee AIPMT-1998
Physics 501 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): The first idea is that for no refraction at its
lateral face, angle of incidence should be greater than
critical angle.
⇒ Let a light ray enters at A and refracted beam is AB.
At the lateral face, the angle of incidence is θ. For no
refraction at this face, θ > C
i.e. sin θ > sin C (a) sin–1 (tanr) (b) sin–1 (sinr)
(c) cos–1 (tanr) (d) tan–1 (sinr)
AIPMT-1996
Ans. (a) :

but θ + r = 90º
θ = (90º – r)
∴ sin (90 – r) > sin C
or cos r > sin C ...(1)
Now, equation (1) substitute for cos r can be found from
snell's law,
Given, A ray of light from a denser medium strikes a
sin i sin i
n= ⇒ sin r = rarer medium. Let the angle of incident is i.
sin r n Also, it is given that the angles of reflection and
refraction are r and r', and they makes an angle of 90º
 sin 2 i 
∴ cos r = 1 − sin 2 r = 1 − 2  with each other.
 n  Now, from the figure we have
∴ equation (i) gives – r + r' + 90º = 180º
r + r' = 90º.........(i)
sin 2 i
1− > sin C Let µ1 is refractive index for denser medium & µ2 is
n2 refractive index for rarer medium.
sin 2 i 1 Then, µ1 sin c = µ2 sin90º ; where c is the critical
1– > sin2 C, Also sin C =
n 2
n angle,
µ
1−
sin 2 i 1
> 2 sin c = 2 .........(ii) ∵ sin90º = 1
n2 n µ1
1 sin 2 i Now, According to snell's law, we have
∴ 1> + 2 µ1sin i = µ2 sinr'
n2 n
µ2 sin i
1 ⇒ =
or (sin 2 i + 1) < 1 µ1 sin r'
n2
µ2 sin i
or n 2 > sin 2 i + 1 ⇒ = ∵ r' = 90º–r
The maximum value of sin i is 1. So µ1 sin ( 90º − r )
n2 > 2 ⇒
µ2 sin i
=
or n> 2 µ1 cos r
15. A ray of light from a denser medium strikes a As, we know that,
rarer medium as shown in figure. The reflected incident angle = reflection angle i.e, i = r
µ2 sin r
and refracted rays make an angle of 90º ⇒ = = tan r
with each other. The angles of reflection and µ1 cos r
refraction are r and r'. The critical angle From (ii), sin c = tan r
would be
⇒ c = sin –1 ( tan r )
Skeâ ØekeâeMe keâer efkeâjCe meIeve ceeOÙece mes efJejue ceeOÙece
ceW ieceve keâjleer nw pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ 16. A small source of light is 4 m below the surface
of water of refractive index 5/3. In order to cut
hejeJeefle&le Deewj DeheJeefle&le efkeâjCe Skeâ otmejs kesâ meeLe 90º off all the light, coming out of water surface,
keâe keâesCe yeveeleer nQ~ hejeJele&ve keâesCe Deewj DeheJele&ve minimum diameter of the disc placed on the
keâesCe ›eâceMe: r Deewj r' nw~ ›eâebeflekeâ keâesCe nesiee: surface of water is
Physics 502 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
heeveer keâer melen kesâ 4 ceeršj veerÛes Skeâ ØekeâeMe Œeesle jKee  10t  −1  t 
peelee nw~ heeveer keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 5/3 nw~ heeveer keâer melen (c) sin–1  2  (d) sin  1 
mes Deeves Jeeues meYeer ØekeâeMe keâes keâešves kesâ efueS heeveer keâer  t1   10t 2 
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
melen hej jKeer ieF& ef[mkeâ keâe vÙetvelece JÙeeme nw
Ans. (a) : Let the speed of light through vaccum be c
(a) 6 m/6 ceeršj (b) ∞ then,
(c) 3 m/3 ceeršj (d) 4 m/4 ceeršj x
AIPMT-1994 c=
t1
Ans. (a) : Given, a small source of light is 4 m below,
and let the speed of light through the medium be v then-
5
the surface of water of refractive index . 10x
3 v=
t2
So, absolute refractive index (µ) of the medium can be
calculated by –
c
µ=
v
light from the source should be totally internally x
reflected i.e. i >c t1
µ=
Now, sin i > sin c 10x
5 t2
µ=
3 t2
µ=
1 10t1
∵ sin c =
µ Now, the critical angle is given by –
3 1
⇒ sin c = sin θc =
5 µ
r 1
Now, tan c = : (from figure) sin θc =
4 t2
3 10t1
∵ sin c =
5 10t1
sin θc =
t2
10t1
θc = sin −1
t2
3
Then tan c = 18. Two transparent media A and B are separated
4 by a plane boundary. The speed of light in
3 r those media are 1.5 × 108 m/s and 2.0 × 108 m/s,
⇒ =
4 4 respectively. The critical angle for a ray of light
⇒ r = 3m for these two media is
Hence, diameter = 6 m. oes heejoMeea ceeOÙece A SJeb B, efkeâmeer meceleue meercee Éeje
Deueie-Deueie nes jns nQ~ Fve oesveeW ceeOÙeceeW ceW ØekeâeMe keâer
23.3 Total Internal Reflection Ûeeue ›eâceMe: 1.5 × 108 m/s SJeb 2.0 × 108 m/s nw~ Fve
oesveeW ceeOÙeceeW kesâ efueS ØekeâeMe keâer efkeâjCe keâe ›eâeefvlekeâ
17. Light travels a distance x in time t1 in air and keâesCe nw:
10x in time t2 in another denser medium. What (a) tan–1 (0.750) (b) sin–1 (0.500)
is the critical angle for this medium? (c) sin–1 (0.750) (d) tan–1 (0.500)
JeeÙeg ceW ØekeâeMe t1 meceÙe ceW x otjer leLee DevÙe meIeve NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
ceeOÙece ceW t2 meceÙe ceW 10x otjer leÙe keâjlee nw~ Fme Ans. (c) : Given
ceeOÙece kesâ efueS ›eâeefvlekeâ keâesCe keäÙee nesiee? VA = 1.5×108 m/s
VB = 2.0×108 m/s
−1  10t1  −1  t 2 
(a) sin   (b) sin   So first we will find refractive index of medium A
 t2   t1  and B
Physics 503 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Speed of light 20. In total internal reflection when the angle of
µA = incidence is equal to the critical angle for the
Velocity in medium A
pair of media in contact, what will be angle of
3×108 refraction?
µA =
1.5×108 hetCe& Deebleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve ceW peye mecheke&â kesâ ceeOÙeceeW kesâ
µA = 2 Ùegieue kesâ efueS Deeheleve keâesCe ›eâebeflekeâ keâesCe kesâ yejeyej
Speed of light neslee nw lees DeheJele&ve keâesCe efkeâlevee nesiee?
Now µB = (a) 0°
Velocity in medium B
(b) Equal to angle of incidence
3×108
µB = Deeheleve keâesCe kesâ yejeyej
2.0×108 (c) 90°
µB =1.5 (d) 180°
For incidence angle to become critical angle of NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
refraction should be equal to 90º. Ans. (c) : Total internal reflection occurs when a ray of
Using snell’s law light within a medium such as water or glass from the
sin i c µ B surrounding surfaces back into the medium.
=
sin r µ A
sin i c 1.5
=
sin r 2
sinic 15
=
1 20
sinic = 0.750 ic

ic = sin −1 ( 0.75)
At i = ic refracted by rarer with the surface so angle of
19. If the critical angle for total internal reflection
from a medium to vacuum is 45°, then velocity refraction is 90º.
of light in the medium is,/Ùeefo efkeâmeer ceeOÙece mes 21. Which of the following is not due to total
efveJee&le ceW hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve kesâ efueS ›eâebeflekeâ internal reflection ? /efvecveefueefKele ceW efkeâme keâe
keâesCe 45° nw, lees Fme ceeOÙece ceW ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie nw– keâejCe hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve veneR nw?
(a) 3 × 10 m/s8
(b) 1.5 × 10 m/s 8
(a) brilliance of diamond/nerjs keâer Ûecekeâ
3 (b) working of optical fibre/ØekeâeMeerÙe levlegDeeW keâe keâeÙe&
(c) ×108 m / s (d) 2 ×108 m/ s
2 (c) difference between apparent and real depth of
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II a pond/efkeâmeer leeueeye keâer JeemleefJekeâ Deewj DeeYeemeer
Ans. (c) : ienjeF& ceW Devlej
(d) mirage on hot summer days
ieceea kesâ ceewmece ceW efove ceW ceiele<Cee
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Ans. (c) : The difference between the apparent and real
depth of the pond is due to the refraction of light.
Given, Critical angle θc = 45º On the other hand, brilliance of diamond, working of
As we know Refractive Index of air medium nair = 1 optical fiber and mirage on hot summer days is due to
total internal reflection.
1
Refractive index of medium n = 22. A ray of light travelling in a transparent
sin ϑc medium of refractive index μ, falls on a
1 surface separating the medium from air at an
∴n= angle of incidence of 45º. For which of the
sin 45º
following value of μ the ray can undergo total
⇒ n= 2 internal reflection –
C Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe μDeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ heejoMeea ceeOÙece
Velocity of light in medium, v = ceW Ùee$ee keâj jner nw, Ùen efkeâjCe ceeOÙece keâes JeeÙeg mes
n
3 × 108 3
Deueie keâj jner melen hej 45º keâesCe hej Deeheeflele nes jner
v= = × 108 m / s nw~ μkesâ efkeâme ceeve kesâ efueÙes efkeâjCe hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ
2 2
hejeJele&ve kesâ DeOeerve nesieer –
Physics 504 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) μ = 1.33 (b) μ = 1.40 Ans. (c):
(c) μ = 1.50 (d) μ = 1.25
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (c) : For total internal reflection, ∠ i > ∠ C
where 'i' is incident angle and 'C' is critical angle
⇒ sin i > sin c
1
sin 45° >
µ
For critical reflection,
µ> 2
sinθc = 1
µ > 1.4 µ
23. Which one of the following bonds produces a cosθ 1
c= 1 − sin 2 θc = 1 − 2
solid that reflects light in the visible region and µ
whose electrical conductivity decreases with
temperature and has high melting point ? µ cos θc = µ 2 − 1......(i)
efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee yebOe Skeâ "esme GlheVe keâjlee nw, pees Now applying snell's law-
ÂMÙe #es$e ceW ØekeâeMe keâe hejeJele&ve keâjlee nw Je efpemekeâer µi sinθi = µr sinθr
efJeÅegle Ûeeuekeâlee leehe Jeefæ kesâ meeLe keâce neleer peeleer nw ⇒ 1×sin45º = µr sin (90 – θc)
1
leLee Ùen GÛÛe ieueveebkeâ jKelee nw ? ⇒ = µ cos θc = µ 2 − 1
2
(a) metallic bonding/OeeeflJekeâ yebOe
(b) vander Waal's bondin/Jeev[j Jee@ue ⇒ µ = 3/ 2
(c) ionic bonding/DeeÙeefvekeâ yebOe
(d) covalent bonding/ menmebÙeespekeâ yebOe 23.4 Refraction at Spherical Surfaces
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 and by Lenses
Ans. (a) : Metallic bonding is formed due to attraction
of valence (free) electrons with the positive ion cores. 25. An object is mounted on a wall. Its image of
Their conductivity decrease with rise of temperature equal size is to be obtained on a parallel wall
and has high melting point. with the help of a convex lens placed between
these walls. The lens is kept at distance x in
• When visible light fall on the metallic crystals, the
front of the second wall. The required focal
electron of atoms absorb visible light. However,
length of the lens will be.
some orbital electrons absorb energy and reach to the
excited state. Then they return to the normal state,
Skeâ Jemleg keâes Skeâ oerJeej hej ueieeÙee peelee nw~ Fve
remitting light of same frequency. oerJeejeW kesâ yeerÛe jKes Gòeue ueWme keâer meneÙelee mes Skeâ
24. For the given incident ray as shown in figure. meceeveeblej oerJeej hej Fmekeâe meceeve Deekeâej keâe
For the condition of total internal reflection of Øeefleefyecye Øeehle keâjvee nw~ ueWme keâes otmejer oerJeej kesâ
this ray, the minimum refractive index of prism meeceves x otjer hej jKee peelee nw~ ueWme keâer DeeJeMÙekeâ
will be heâeskeâme otjer nesieer;
efÛe$e ceW oer ngF& Deeheeflele efkeâjCe kesâ hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ
x
hejeJele&ve kesâ efueS efØepce keâe vÙetvelece DeheJele&veebkeâ nesiee- (a)
2
x
(b)
4
x x
(c) Less than / mes keâce
4 4
3 +1 2 +1 x x x
(a) (b) (d) More than but less than / mes DeefOekeâ
2 2 4 2 4
3 7 x
(c) (d) uesefkeâve mes keâce
2 6 2
AIPMT-2002 RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
Physics 505 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): According to the question, height of image of R1 = ∞ R1 = 20 cm R1 = –20
object is equal to height of object for convex lens. If R2 = 20 cm R2 = –20 cm R2 = ∞
object is placed at 2f then- µ = 1.6 µ = 1.5 µ = 1.6
2f = x
1 1 1 
x = (1.6 − 1)  − 
f= f1  ∞ 20 
2
−1
26. A lens is made up of 3 different transparent = 0.6 ×
media as shown in figure. A point object O is 20
placed on its axis beyond 2f. How many real 1 −3
images will be obtained on the other side? =
Skeâ uebsme 3 Deueie Deueie heejoMeea ceeref[Ùee mes yevee nw f1 100
pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ Skeâ efyebog Jemleg O 1  1 1  1
keâes Gmekesâ De#e hej 2f mes hejs jKee ieÙee nw = (1.5 − 1)  +  =
f2  20 20  20
otmejer Deesj efkeâleves JeemleefJekeâ Øeefleefyecye Øeehle neWies?
1 −3
=
f 3 100
Now, equivalent focal length of the combination of
lenses –
(a) No image will be formed/keâesF& ÚefJe vener yevesieer 1 1 1 1
= + +
(b) 3 f eq f1 f 2 f3
(c) 2
(d) 1 −3 1 3
= + −
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 100 20 100
Ans. (b) : Focal length of a lens depends on the 1 1
refractive index of the glass from which it is made. =−
According to the question, a lens is made up of 3 f eq 100
different transparent media and all three medium will feq = –100 cm
form individual real images at different points on the
other side of lens (as object distance is more than 2f). 28. Two thin lenses are of same focal lengths ( f ) ,
∴ Number of real images formed = 3. but one is convex and the other one is concave.
27. In the figure shown here, what is the equivalent When they are placed in contact with each
focal length of the combination of lenses other, the equivalent focal length of the
(Assume that all layers are thin)?
combination will be :
efoKeeS ieÙes efÛe$e ceW, ueWmeeW kesâ mebÙeespeve keâer leguÙe
Heâeskeâme otjer keäÙee nw (meYeer ueWme heleues ceevekeâj) ? Skeâ meceeve Heâeskeâme otjer (f) kesâ oes heleues ueWme nQ, efkeâvleg
n1 = 1.5 Skeâ Gòeue Je otmeje DeJeleue nw~ peye Jes Skeâ otmejs kesâ
mebheke&â ceW jKes peeles nQ, lees mebÙeespeve keâer leguÙe Heâeskeâme
R1=R2 = 20cm otjer nesieer :
R1 (a) Infinite / Deveble (b) Zero/ MetvÙe
(c) f/4 (d) f/2
n2 = 1.5 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
(a) –50 cm (b) 40 cm
Ans. (a) :
(c) – 40 cm (d) –100 cm
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (d) : By lens maker formula –
1 1 1 
= ( µ − 1)  − 
f  R1 R 2 

Focal length of the concave lens –

fconcave = –f
Focal length of the convex lens,
fconvex = f

Physics 506 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Therefore, the effective focal length of the lens (b) A large area of the objective ensures better
combination is – light gathering power.
1 1 1 Skeâ Je=nle #es$eHeâue keâe DeefYeÂMÙekeâ GheÙegòeâ ØekeâeMe
= +
f eff f concave f convex meb«enCe #ecelee keâe keâejkeâ neslee nw~
(c) A large aperture provides a better resolution.
1 1
= + Skeâ Je=nle Éejkeâ Gòece efJeYesove Øeoeve keâjlee nw~
−f f
(d) All of the above/GheÙeg&òeâ ceW meYeer~
1
=0 NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
f eff
Ans. (d) : The ratio of the angle subtended by the eye
1 to the angle subtended by unaided eye is called
f eff =
0 Magnifying Power.
feff = ∞ f
Magnifying Power = o
29. A biconvex lens has radii of curvature, 20 cm fe
each. If the refractive index of the material of f0 is the focal length of an object.
the lens is 1.5, the power of the lens is fe is the focal length of the eyepiece in the telescope.
efkeâmeer efÉGòeue uesbme kesâ ØelÙeskeâ Je›eâ keâer ef$epÙee 20 a
mesceer. nw~ Ùeefo ueWme kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 nw, Resolving power =
1.22λ
lees ueWme keâer Meefòeâ nw: Large aperture (a) of objective lens provides better
(a) Infinity/Devevle (b) + 2 D resolution. Therefore good quality of image is formed &
(c) + 20 D (d) + 5 D also gathers more light.
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 31. A convex lens 'A' of focal length 20 cm and a
Ans. (d) : concave lens 'B' of focal length 5 cm are kept
along the same axis with a distance 'd' between
them. If a parallel beam of light falling on 'A'
leaves 'B' as a parallel beam, then the distance
'd' in cm will be
meceeve De#e kesâ DevegefoMe 'd' otjer hej Skeâ 20 mes.ceer.
Given data
R1 = 20 cm Heâes k eâme otjer keâe Gòeue uesvme 'A' leLee 5 mes.ceer. Heâeskeâme
R2 = – 20 cm otjer keâe DeJeleue uesvme 'B' jKes nQ~ Ùeefo 'A' hej Deeheeflele
µ1 = 1.5 meceevlej ØekeâeMe hegvpe, 'B' Œes efvekeâueves hej Yeer meceevlej
µ2 = 1 hegvpe jnleer nQ, lees otjer 'd' mes.ceer. ceW nesieer :
Using lens maker formula (a) 30 (b) 25
1  µ1  1 1  (c) 15 (d) 50
=  − 1 − 
f  µ2  R1 R 2  NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Ans. (c) : Let f1 and f2 be focal length of convex lens A
1  20 + 20 
= 0.5  
and concave lens B.
f  400  f1 = 20 cm
1 1  40  1 f2 = –5 cm
=   = Distance between two lenses, d = f1 – f2
f 2  400  20
f = 20 cm For Emergent beam to parallel, P = 0 and F = ∞
1 1 d
1 1 100 Therefore, + – =0
Power of lens P = = = = +5D f1 f 2 f1f 2
f 20cm 20
30. A lens of large focal length and large aperture 1 1 d
– + =0
is best suited as an objective of an astronomical 20 5 100
telescope since/Skeâ Je=nle Heâeskeâme otjer leLee Je=nle d = 15 cm
Éejkeâ keâe uesvme otjoMeea kesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ kesâ efueS 32. A plano-convex lens of unknown material and
DelÙeefOekeâ GheÙeesieer neslee nw, keäÙeeWefkeâ : unknown focal length is given. With the help of
(a) A large aperture contributes to the quality and a spherometer we can measure the,
visibility of the images. De%eele heoeLe& Deewj De%eele Heâeskeâme ogjer keâes keâesF&
Skeâ Je=nle Éejkeâ iegCelee leLee ÂMÙelee kesâ efueS Ùeesieoeve meceleueesòeue uesWme efoÙee ieÙee nw~ mHesâjesceeršj keâer meneÙelee
keâjlee nw~ mes nce ceehe mekeâles nw~
Physics 507 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) refractive index of the material Equivalent focal length in air,
Fme ueWme kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1 1 1
= +
(b) focal length of the lens/ Fme ueWme keâer Heâeskeâme otjer F1 f1 f 2
(c) radius of curvature of the curved surface 1 1
= +
Fme ueWme keâer Jeef›eâle he=‰ keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee R R
(d) aperture of the lens/Fme ueWme keâe Éejkeâ 1 2
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II =
F1 R
Ans. (c) : Spherometer is a device used for measuring
radius of curvature of objects such as lenses, mirrors F1 = R / 2
and curved surfaces.
It is based on principle of micrometer screw. Sometimes
also measures a small thickness of flat materials. It
consist of 3 outer legs, central leg and a reading device.
33. Two similar thin equi-convex lenses, of focal
length f each, are kept coaxially in contact with
each other such that the focal length of the
combination is F1 . When the space between the Focal length of concave lens
two lenses is filled with glycerine (which has the
1  µL   1 1 
same refractive index (µ = 1.5) as that of glass) =  –1  – 
then the equivalent focal length is F2 . The ratio f 3 µ
 S  1R R 2 

F1 : F2 will be :  1.5  –1 1 
heâeskeâme otjer f kesâ oes meceeve heleues meceleueesòeue ueWme Skeâ- = –1 – 
 1  R R 
otmejs kesâ mecheke&â ceW mecee#e Fme Øekeâej jKes ieS nw efkeâ 1 –2 1
mebÙeespeve keâer heâeskeâme otjer F1 nw~ peye Fve oesveeW kesâ yeerÛe kesâ = × =–
2 R R
mLeeve ceW efiuemejerve (efpemekeâe DeheJele&veebkeâ keâebÛe kesâ 1 1 1 1
= + +
DeheJele&veebkeâ (µ = 1.5) kesâ yejeyej nw) Yej oer peeleer nw, lees F2 f1 f 2 f 3
leguÙe heâeskeâme otjer F2 nw~ Devegheele F1 : F2 nesiee~ 1 1 1
= + –
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3 R R R
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 2 : 1 1
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 =
R
Ans. (a) : Given that µL = 1.5
F1 R 1
= =
F2 2R 2
34. An equiconvex lens has power P. It is cut into
(µL) = 1.5 two symmetrical halves by a plane containing
the principal axis. The power of one part will
be,
efkeâmeer meceesòeue ueWme keâer #ecelee P nw~ Fmekesâ cegKÙe De#e
Focal length of a lens
kesâ DevegefoMe oes meceefcele oes YeeieeW ceW keâeše ieÙee nw~
1  µL   1 1  Fmekesâ Skeâ Yeeie keâer #ecelee nesieer–
=  –1  – 
f  µa   R1 R 2  (a) P (b) 0
1  1.5   1 1  P P
= – 1  –  [µ a = 1] (c)
2
(d)
4
f1  1  R –R 
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
1 2 1
= × = Ans. (a) :
2 R R
1  1.5   1 1 
= – 1  – 
f2  1   R –R 
1 2 1
= × =
2 R R
Physics 508 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Let radius of equiconvex lens is R keâeBÛe (µg=3/2) kesâ oes meJe&mece meceesòeue ueWmeeW ceW ØelÙeskeâ
Step (1) Applying lens maker formula of equiconvex keâer Heâeskeâme otjer f nw~ Fvekeâes mecheke&â ceW jKekeâj Fvekesâ yeerÛe
lens kesâ efjòeâ mLeeve keâes peue (µw=4/3) mes Yej efoÙee peelee nw
1
= ( µ − 1)
2 Fme Øekeâej yeves mebÙeespeve keâer Heâeskeâme otjer nesieer:-
f R (a) f/3 (b) f
The radius of curvature remains same after cut so focal 4f 3f
length does not effected (c) (d)
3 4
Step (2) Applying formula of power NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
1 Ans. (d) :
P=
f µw
f = remain unchanged
P = remains unchanged
Hence power of both will be same "P" as focal length µg µg
remains same. f2
35. A double convex lens has focal length 25 cm.
The radius of curvature of one of the surfaces
is double of the other. Find the radii if the f3
refractive index of the material of the lens is
1.5. From lens maker's formula we have,
efkeâmeer efÉ Gòeue ueWme keâer heâeskeâme otjer 25 cm nw~ Fmekesâ 1 1 1  1 1
Skeâ he=‰ keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee otmejs he=‰ keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee f1 = (µ − 1)  R1 − R 2  = f 2 = f
keâer oes iegveer nw~ Ùeefo ueWme kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 Where R2 and R2 are left and Right radius of curvature
nw, lees Fmekeâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙeeSb nesieer– of considered lens.
(a) 50 cm, 100 cm (b) 100 cm, 50 cm For convex lenses-
(c) 25 cm, 50 cm (d) 18.75 cm, 37.5 cm R1 = R
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) R2 = –R
Ans. (d) : µ = µg = 3/2
1  3   1  1 
=  − 1 −− 
f  2   R  R  
C2 C1 1 1 1
R2 = 0.5 ×  +  =
R R  R
⇒ f = R ______(i)
Given that For convave lense-
Refractive index of the material µ = 1.5 R1 = –R
Double convex lens of focal length f = 25 cm R2 = R
R1 = R, R2 = –2R µ = µw = 4/3
Using focal length of lens is 1  4   1 1  −2
=  − 1 − − =
1 1 1  f 3  3   R R  3R
= ( µ − 1)  − 
f  1
R R 2 −3
⇒ f3 = R ...... (ii)
1  1  1  2
= (1.5 − 1)  −   ⇒ from (i) & (ii)
25  R  −2R  
−3
1  2R + R  f3 = f
= 0.5   2
25  2R × R  lens combination formula
2R = 0.5 × 3 × 25 1 1 1 1
R = 18.75 cm = R1, = + +
f eq f1 f 2 f 3
R2 = 37.5cm (neglecting sign)
Two identical glass (µg=3/2) equiconvex lenses 1 1 1  −2  3 + 3 − 2 4
36. = + +  = = f
of focal length f each are kept in contact. The f eq f f  3f  3f 3
space between the two lenses is filled with 3
water (µw=4/3). The focal length of the feq = f
combination is. 4

Physics 509 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
37. Two identical thin plano-convex glass lenses Ans. (d): Magnifying power of a microscope.
(refractive index 1.5) each having radius of
 L  D 
curvature of 20 cm are placed with their convex m =   
surfaces in contact at the centre. The intervening  f 0  fe 
space is filled with oil of refractive index 1.7. The Where 'fo' and 'fe' are the focal lengths of the objective
focal length of the combination is:- and eyepiece respectively and 'L' is the distance
oes meJe&mece, heleues, meceleue-Gòeue ueWmees ceW ØelÙeskeâ keâe between their focal points and 'D' is the least distance of
DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 leLee ØelÙeskeâ keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee 20 distinct vision.
cm nw~ Fvekeâes Fme Øekeâej jKee ieÙee nw efkeâ Fvekesâ Gòeue If f0 increases, then m will decrease.
he=‰, kesâvõ Skeâ otmejs kesâ mebheke&â ceW nQ~ oesveeW ueWmeeW kesâ Magnifying power of a telescope, m = f 0
yeerÛe kesâ Keeueer (efjòeâ) mLeeve keâes 1.7 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ fe
lesue mes Yej efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme Øekeâej yeves mebÙeespeve keâer where 'fo' and 'fe' are the focal lengths of the objective
heâeskeâme otjer nesieer:- and eyepiece respectively.
If fo increases, then 'm' will increase.
(a) -25 cm (b) -50 cm
(c) 50 cm (d) -20 cm 39. A plano convex lens fits exactly into a plano
concave lens. Their plane surfaces are parallel
AIPMT-03.05.2015
to each other. If lenses are made of different
Ans. (b) : We know, materials of refractive indices µ1 and µ2 and R
Focal length of the combination is given as is the radius of curvature of the curved surface
1 1 1 1 of the lenses, then the focal length of
= + + ………. (1)
f f f f combination is/Skeâ meceleue Gòeue Deewj Skeâ meceleue
1 2 3

For the first part, refractive index is 1.5 DeJeleue ueWme Skeâ otmejs kesâ Thej hetCe&le: "erkeâ yew" peeles
1 1 1  1 nQ~ Gvekesâ meceleue he=‰ Deeheme ceW meceevlej nw~ Ùeefo Fve
= (1.5 − 1)  − = ueWmeeW kesâ heoeLeeX kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ µ1 Deewj µ2 nw leLee
f1  ∞ −20  40
For the second part, refractive index is 1.5
oesveeW kesâ Je›eâ he=‰eW (leueeW) keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee R nw lees
Fvekesâ mebÙeespeve keâer heâeskeâme otjer nesieer-
1  1 1 1
= (1.5 − 1)  − = 2R
f3  −20 ∞  40 (a) (b)
R
For the part in which oil is filled, refractive index is 1.7 ( 2 − µ1 )
µ 2 ( µ1 + µ 2 )
1  1 1  0.7 × ( −2 ) 0.7 ×1 −0.7 R R
= (1.7 − 1)  − = =− = (c)
2 ( µ1 − µ 2 )
(d)
f2  −20 20  20 10 10 ( µ1 − µ 2 )
Now putting all the values in eqn (1) NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
1 1 0.7 1 1 − 2.8 + 1 0.8 −8 −1 Ans. (d) :
= − + = =− = =
f 40 10 40 40 40 400 50 convex
f = −50cm
cancave
Hence resultant focal length is -50 cm
38. If the focal length of objective lens is increased
then magnifying power of./ Ùeefo, DeefYeÂMÙekeâ ueWme
keâer heâeskeâme otjer keâes yeÌ{e efoÙee:-
(a) microscope will increase but that of telescope Focal length of plano-convex lens, (f )
1
decrease/met#ceoMeea keâer DeeJeOe&ve #ecelee yeÌ{ peeÙesieer
1 1 1 
leLee otjoMe&keâ keâer keâce nes peeÙesieer~ = ( µ1 − 1)  − 
f1  ∞ −R 
(b) microscope and telescope both will increase
met#ceoMeea leLee otjoMe&keâ oesveeW keâer DeeJeOe&ve #ecelee yeÌ{ Power , P1 = 1 = µ1 − 1
peeÙesieer~ f1 R
(c) microscope and telescope both will decrease/ Focal length at plano concave lens, (f2)
met#ceoMeea leLee otjoMe&keâ oesveeW keâer DeeJeOe&ve #ecelee keâce 1  1
= ( µ 2 − 1) 
1
− 
nes peeÙesieer~ f2  −R ∞ 
(d) microscope will decrease but that of telescope 1  µ −1 
increase./met#ceoMeea keâer DeeJeOe&ve #ecelee keâce nesieer leLee P2 = =  2  × ( −1)
f2  R 
otjoMe&keâ keâer yeÌ{ peeÙesieer~
AIPMT-06.05.2014 Pnet = P1 + P2
Physics 510 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
µ1 − 1 µ 2 − 1 1 1 1
= − From lens formula, − =
R R v u f
µ1 − µ 2 1 1 1
Pnet = − =
R 15 10 f
R focal length, f = −30 cm
f2 = 1/Pnet =
µ1 − µ 2 42. A biconvex lens has a radius of curvature of
magnitude 20 cm. Which one of the following
40. When a biconvex lens of glass having refractive
options describe best the image formed of an
index 1.47 is dipped in a liquid, it acts as a
object of height 2 cm placed 30 cm from the
plane sheet of glass. This implies that the liquid
lens ?/efkeâmeer GYeÙeesòeue ueWme keâer Je›eâlee ef$epÙee keâe
must have refractive index.
peye 1.47 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ keâeBÛe kesâ efkeâmeer GYeÙeesòeue heefjceehe 20 cm. nw~ Fmekesâ meeceves Fmemes 30 cm otj jKeer
2 cm TBÛeer Jemleg keâe heÇefleefyecye nesiee :
ueWme keâes efkeâmeer õJe ceW [gyeeÙee peelee nw lees, Ùen Skeâ
(a) Real, inverted, height = 1 cm
meceleue Meerš (hejle) keâer YeeBefle JÙeJenej keâjlee nw~
JeemleefJekeâ, Guše, 1 cm TBÛee
Fmekeâe leelheÙe& Ùen nw efkeâ Fme õJe keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ nw~ (b) Virtual, upright, height = 1 cm
(a) Greater than that of glass DeeYeemeer, meerOee, 1 cm TBÛee
keâeBÛe kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ mes DeefOekeâ (c) Virtual, upright, height = 0.5 cm
(b) Less than that of glass DeeYeemeer, meerOee, 0.5 cm TBÛee
keâeBÛe kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ mes keâce (d) Real, inverted, height = 4 cm
(c) Equal to that of glass JeemleefJekeâ, Guše, 4 cm TBÛee
keâeBÛe kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ yejeyej AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(d) Less than one/ Skeâ mes keâce Ans. (d) : Given – Radius of curvature, R = 20cm
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 Height of object ho = 2 cm
Ans. (c): Given, Biconvex lens of glass having Object distance, u = –30cm
refractive index (µ) = 1.47. 1  1 1 
Lens maker's formula ⇒ = (µ -1)  - 
Now, If biconvex lens act as the plane sheet then the ray f  R1 R 2 
will pass unradiated through it only when medium has
same refractive index as that of biconvex lens.  3   1  1   1  2 1
=  -1  -  -   =   × = cm
41. A converging beam of rays is incident on a  2   20  20    2  20 20
diverging lens. Having passed through the lens f = 20cm.
the rays intersect at a point 15 cm from the lens Now, from the formula of lens –
on the opposite side. If the lens is removed the 1 1 1
point where the rays meet will move 5 cm = -
f v u
closer to the lens. The focal length of the lens is 1 1 1
efkeâjCeeW keâer Skeâ DeefYemeejer hegBpe Skeâ Dehemeejer uewme hej = +
20 v 30
Deeheeflele nesleer nw~ ueWme mes iegpejves kesâ heMÛeeled efkeâjCeW 1 1 1 3- 2 1
efJehejerle efoMee hej ueWme mes 15 cm hej efmLele Skeâ efyevog = - = =
v 20 30 60 60
hej ØeefleÛÚsefole nesleer nw~ Ùeefo ueWme keâes nše efoÙee peeS v = 60 cm
lees efyevog peneB efkeâjCeW efceuesieer Jen ueWme mes 5 cm efvekeâš From the formula magnification
Dee peeSiee~ ueQme keâer Heâeskeâme otjer nesieer : h v
m = i = ⇒ hi = × h0
v
(a) 5 cm (b) – 10 cm ho u u
(c) 20 cm (d) – 30 cm 60
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 ⇒ × 2 = – 4cm
–30
Ans. (d) : So, image will be real, inverted and having height of
4cm.
43. A lens having focal length f and aperture of
diameter d forms an image of intensity I.
Aperture of diameter d/2 in central region of
lens is covered by a black paper. Focal length
of lens and intensity of image now will be
respectively–

Physics 511 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ uesvme efpemekeâer Heâeskeâme uecyeeF& f Je Éejkeâ JÙeeme d Given that,
nw, I leer›elee keâe Skeâ Øeefleefyecye yeveelee nw~ uesvme kesâ Focal length (f) = 10 cm
d Image distance, v = 10 cm = 0.1m
keWâvõerÙe Yeeie ceW JÙeeme kesâ Éejkeâ keâes Skeâ keâeues Diameter of sun = O = 1.39 × 109 m
2
keâeiepe mes {keâ efoÙee ieÙee nw~ uesvme keâer Heâeskeâme uecyeeF& Diameter of image, (I) = ?
v I
Je Øeefleefyecye leer›elee ›eâceMe: nesieer – ∵ Magnification =
u O
I I
(a) f and / f leLee 0.1 I
4 4 ⇒ =
1.5 × 10 11 1.39 × 109
3f I 3f I
(b) and / leLee 1.39 ×108
4 2 4 2 ⇒ I=
1.5 ×1011
3I 3I
(c) f and / f leLee = 0.92 × 10–3m
4 4
= 9.2 × 10–4 m
f I f I
(d) and / leLee 45. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are in
4 2 4 2
contact and coaxial. The power of the
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
combination is –
Ans. (c) : Given, lens of focal length = f
f1 Deewj f2 Heâeskeâme otefjÙeeW kesâ oes heleues ueQme De#eerÙe ™he
diameter = d
image intensity = I
mes peesÌ[s ngÙes nQ~ Fme Ùegice keâer Meefòeâ (heeJej) nesieer :-
we know that I ∝ A2 f +f f +f
(a) 1 2 (b) 1 2
I2  A 2 
2 2 f1f 2
= 
I1  A1  f1 f2
(c) (d)
πr 2 f2 f1
πr 2 -
4 = 3 AIPMT-2008
=
πr 2 4 Ans. (b) : Given :- Two thin lenes of focal lengths f & f 1 2.
3 For lenses placed coaxially, P = P1+ P2 + P3 + ------
I2 = I1
4 So for given case P = P1+ P2
and focal length remains unchanged. 1 1
or P = +
44. A boy is trying to start a fire by focusing f1 f 2
Sunlight on a piece of paper using an f +f
equiconvex lens of focal length 10 cm. The P = 1 2
diameter of the sun is 1.39 × 109 m and its mean f1 f 2
11
distance from the earth is 1.5 × 10 m. What is 46. A convex lens and a concave lens, each having
the diameter of the Sun’s image on the paper ? same focal length of 25 cm, are put in contact
keâesF& ueÌ[keâe keâeiepe hej Skeâ meceGòeue ueWme Éeje metÙe& to form a combination of lenses. The power in
keâer efkeâjCeeW keâes Heâeskeâme keâj Deeie peueevee Ûeenlee nw~ dipoters of the combination is:/25 cm keâer meceeve
ueWme keâer Heâeskeâme otjer 10 cm nw~ metÙe& keâe JÙeeme 1.39 × heâeskeâme otjer kesâ Gòeue Deewj DeJeleue ueWmeeW keâe pees[ keâe
10 m nw Deewj Fmekeâe he=LJeer mes ceOÙeceeve otjer .5 × 10
9 11
Øeehle ueWme mebÙeespeve keâer Meefòeâ [eÙeeshšj ceb nesieer:-
nw~ metÙe& kesâ keâeiepe hej Øeefleefyecye keâe nesiee? (a) 25 (b) 50
(a) 6.5 × 10–5 m (b) 12.4 × 10–4 m (c) Infinite (d) Zero
(c) 9.2 × 10–4 m (d) 6.5 × 10–4 m AIPMT-2006
AIPMT-2008 Ans. (d) : Given,
Ans. (c) : Given:- Focal length of convex f1 = 25 cm
Focal length of concave f2 = –25 cm
Power of combined lenses Pc = P1 + P2
1 100
P1 → Power of convex lens = or
Mean distance from f1 f1 ( in cm )
earth u = 1.5 × 1011 m
∵ Rays are coming from sun (infinite) So, Image will 100
= =4∆
be form at focal length. +25
Physics 512 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 100 Devegmeej ØelÙeskeâ DeeOes ueWme, leLee (ii) kesâ Devegmeej ØelÙeskeâ
P2 → Power of concave lens = or
f 2 f 2 ( in cm ) DeeOes ueWme keâer Heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB nQ
100 efvecve ceW mes mener keâLeve ÛegefveS-
= = –4 ∆ (a) f ' = f, f " = 2f (b) f ' = 2f, f " = f
−25
so Pc = P1 + P2 = 4 – 4 = 0 (c) f ' = f, f " = f (d) f ' = 2f, f " = 2f
Pc = 0 AIPMT-2003
47. A convex lens is dipped in a liquid whose Ans. (a):
refractive index is equal to the refractive index
of the lens. Then its focal length will
Skeâ Gòeue ueWme keâes Skeâ õJe ceW [gyeesÙee peelee nw,
efpemekeâe DeheJele&veebkeâ ueWme kesâ DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ yejeyej nQ~
leye ueQme keâer Heâeskeâme otjer nesieer- Initially the focal length of equiconvex lens is
(a) Become zero/MetvÙe
1  1 1 
(b) Become infinite/Devevle = ( µ − 1)  − 
(c) Become small, but non-zero/keâce, efkeâvleg DeMetvÙe
f  R1 R 2 
(d) Remains unchanged/Jener jnsieer 1 1 1 
= ( µ − 1)  − 
AIPMT-2003 f  R −R 
Ans. (b): 1 2 ( µ − 1)
=
µl liquid f R
Case I
When lens is cut along XOX' then each half is
again equiconvex with
The focal length of a lens is given by- R1 = R, R2 = –R
1 1  1 1 1 
1
= ( µ − 1)  −  = ( µ − 1)  − 
f  R1 R 2 
f'  R ( −R ) 
1 µ  1 1  1 1 1
=  − 1  −  = ( µ − 1)  + 
f  µ l   R1 R 2  f' R R 
1 2
µ = µl = ( µ − 1)
f' R
1 1 1 
= (1 − 1)  −  f'=f
f  1
R R 2
Case II
1 When lens is cut along YOY' then each half
=0
f becomes planoconvex with
f =∞ R1 = R R2 = ∞
Thus
48. A equiconvex lens is cut into two halves along
1 1 1 
(i) XOX' and (ii) YOY' as shown in the figure. = ( µ − 1)  − 
Let f, f' f", be the focal lengths of the complete f"  R1 R 2 
lens, of each half in case (i), and of each half in
1  1 1
case (ii) respectively
= ( µ − 1)  − 
f"  R1 ∞ 
1 ( µ − 1) 1
= =
f" R 2f
f " = 2f
Choose the correct statement from the 49. A bulb is located on a wall. Its image is to be
following- obtained on a parallel wall with the help of
Skeâ mece-Gòeue ueWme keâes (i) XOX' Deewj (ii) YOY' kesâ convex lens. If the distance between parallel
meeLe oes YeeieeW ceW keâeše peelee nw, pewmee efkeâ efÛe$e ceW walls is 'd' then required focal length of lens
efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ f, f' f" ›eâceMe: hetCe& ueWme, (i) kesâ placed in between the walls is
Physics 513 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ oerJeej hej efmLele yeuye keâe Øeefleefyecye, Skeâ meceevlej Ans. (a):
otmejer oerJeej hej Øeehle keâjves kesâ efueS Gòeue ueQme ØeÙegòeâ (i) In a plane-convex lens, one of sides is curved while
efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo meceeveevlej oerJeejeW kesâ ceOÙe otjer d other side is flat.
(ii) If flat side is silvered, lens will act as concave
nes lees oesveeW kesâ yeerÛe ceW efmLele ueQme keâer DeeJeMÙekeâ otjer mirror.
nesieer - (iii) Radius of curvature of plane or flat surface is taken
d d as infinite.
(a) Only / kesâJeue
4 4
d d
(b) Only / kesâJeue
2 2
d d
(c) More than but less than
4 2
d d Effective focal length of this configuration is given by-
mes DeefOekeâ uesefkeâve mes keâce
4 2 1 2 1
= + ...(i)
d f fl fm
(d) Less than or equal to
4 fl = focal length of non-silvered portion (curved
d d
kesâ yejeyej Ùee mes keâce surface)
4 4 fm = focal length of mirror (silvered portion)
AIPMT-2002 R ∞
= m = = ∞ {Q for plane silvered surface, radius
Ans. (d) : Given 2 2
Distance between the parallel walls = 'd' of
∵ Lens is placed between the walls. Therefore its curvature is very high}
d Q Focal length of curved surface of lens (fs) is given by
distance from source (bulb) =
2 1 1
lens maker formula. = (µ − 1) µ = Refractive
(1) The image of bulb is to be obtained on parallel wall fl R
whose distance from lens is same as distance index & R = Radius of curvature.
between lens & the bulb. ∴ from equation (i)
d 1 2(µ − 1) 1 2(µ − 1)
∴ |v| = |u| = where, v = Image distance = + =
2 f R ∞ R
u = Object distance 1 2(1.5 − 1) 2 × 0.5
(2) Now, in case of convex lens, Image is formed when f = 10
=
10
minimum distance between source (bulb) & screen f = 10 cm
is 4f. (f = focal length of convex lens)
51. The focal length of converging lens is measured
∴4f=d for the violet, green and red colours. It is
d respectively fv, fg, fr . We will get
⇒f=
4 Skeâ Gòeue uesvme keâer yeQieveer, njs leLee ueeue jbie kesâ efueS
Thus, required focal length of lens placed in between heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB ›eâceMe: fv, fg, fr nQ, lees
d (a) fv < fr (b) fg = fr
the wall is =
4 (c) fv = fg (d) fg >fr
50. For a plane convex lens (µ = 1.5) has radius of AIPMT-1997
curvature 10 cm. It is silvered on its plane Ans. (a) : We know that for a converging lens the focal
surface. Find focal length after silvering : length of a light ray is proportional to wavelength of
10 cm Je›eâlee ef$epÙee kesâ Skeâ meceesòeue ueWme keâer meceleue that ray and the same ray will deviate less during
melen keâes jefpele keâj osles nQ, lees jefpele keâjves kesâ yeeo dispersion
ueWme keâer heâeskeâme otjer nesieer – f ∝λ
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
Here red light has highest wavelength, it deviates less so
(c) 15 cm (d) 25 cm focal length of red light will be higher then other two.
AIPMT-2000 Among the given, option (a) is correct answer.
Physics 514 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
52. If a convex lens of focal length 80 cm and a 54. A lens is placed between a source of light and a
concave lens of focal length 50cm are combined wall. It forms images of areas A1 and A2 on the
together, what will be their resulting power? wall, for its two different positions. The area of
Skeâ Gòeue ueWme f = 80 mesceer leLee DeJeleue ueWme f = 50 the source of light is
mesceer keâes peesÌ[keâj jKee peelee nw~ Ùegice keâer #ecelee nesieer: Skeâ ueWme, ØekeâeMe Œeesle leLee oerJeej kesâ yeerÛe jKee nw~
ueWme keâer oes efYeVe efmLeefleÙeeW kesâ efueS Ùen oerJeej hej A1
(a) + 7.5 D (b) –0.75 D
leLee A2 #es$eheâue kesâ oes Øeefleefyecye yeveelee nw~ ØekeâeMe
(c) + 6.5 D (d) –6.5 D
AIPMT-1996
Œeesle keâe #es$eheâue nesiee:
A1 – A2 1 1
Ans. (b) : Given, (a) (b) +
Focal length (f1) of convex lens = 80 cm 2 A1 A 2
= 0.8 m A1 + A2
(c) A1 A 2 (d)
Focal length (f2) of concave lens =50 cm 2
=0.5 m AIPMT-1995
Then, for convex- Ans. (c) : Given-
1 1 Area of image for position 1 = A1
P1 = + = = 1.25
f1 0.8 Area of image for position 2 = A2
We know that magnification is given by
For concave-
Size of image
1 1 m= ⇒ size of image = m×size of object
P2 = – = – =-2 Size of object
f2 0.5
But for two different position of lens, let the
Pnet = P1 + P2 magnification be m1 & m2 and the relation between
= 1.25 D – 2.0 D them is given as
= – 0.75 D m1×m2 = 1
53. If fv fR are focal lengths of a convex lens for Now, let sides of object be l & b, so
violet and red light respectively and FV and FR Area of image in position 1, A1 = m1l×m1b = m12lb ...(i)
are the focal lengths of a concave lens for violet Area of image in position 2, A2 = m2l×m2b = m22lb ...(ii)
and red light respectively, then we must have Multiplying (i) & (ii)
Gòeue uesvme kesâ efueS yeQieveer leLee ueeue ØekeâeMe kesâ efueS m12lb×m22lb = A1×A2
heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB fv leLee fR nQ~ DeJeleue ueWme kesâ efueS Ùener ⇒ (m1×m2) ×(lb) = A1×A2
2 2

heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB FV, FR nQ lees ⇒ 1 × (lb)2 = A1A2

(a) fV > fR and FV > FR / fV > fR leLee FV > FR ⇒ lb = A1A 2
(b) fV < fR and FV > FR / fV < fR leLee FV > FR Hence, area of source of object is A1A 2
(c) fV > fR and FV <FR/ fV > fR leLee FV <FR 55. Focal length of a convex lens of refractive index
(d) fV < fR and FV < FR/ fV < fR leLee FV < FR 1.5 is 2 cm. Focal length of lens when immersed
in a liquid of refractive index of 1.25 will be
AIPMT-1996
DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 keâer Skeâ Gòeue ueWme keâer heâeskeâme otjer 2
Ans. (d) : We already know that focal length of red
light is more than focal length of violet light since red mesceer nw~ Ùeefo ueWme keâes 1.25 DeheJele&veebkeâ Jeeues heoeLe& ceW
light has greater wavelength and follows lesser [gyees efoÙee peeS lees ueWme keâer heâeskeâme otjer nesieer:
refractive index. (a) 10 cm/10 mesceer (b) 2.5 cm/2.5 mesceer
1 (c) 5 cm/5 mesceer (d) 7.5 cm/7.5 mesceer
f ∝λ∝
µ AIPMT-1988
The same concept applies to concave lens as well hence Ans. (c) : Case(1)- lens in air:
for both the lenses the focal length of red light is more Let the focal length of lens in air be Fair
than violet i.e Given that : Fair = 2 cm, n1 = 1 (air), n2 = 1.5 (g)
f R > f v and FR > Fv 1  n2   1 1 
= –1 –
Fair  n1   R1 R 2 
1 1.5   1 1 
=  – 1  –
2  1   R1 R 2 
1 1 1 
= 0.5  –  ...(i)
2  R1 R 2 
Physics 515 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Case(2)- lens in liquid ØekeâeMe keâer Skeâ #eweflepe efkeâjCe 60efØepce keâesCe Jeeues
Fliquid = ?, n1 = 1.25, n2 = 1.5 mecekeâesCe efØepce hej Deeheeflele nesleer nw~ Ùeefo efØepce kesâ
1 n  1 1  heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 nes, lees efveie&le keâesCe nesiee
=  2 – 1  –
Fliquid  n1   R1 R 2 
1  1.5  1 1 
= –1 −
Fliquid 1.25   R1 R 2 
1 1 1 
= 0.2  −  ...(ii)
Fliquid  R1 R 2 
Dividing (i) by (ii) we get, (a) 40 (b) 60
Fliquid 0.5 (c) 90 (d) 100
= RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
2 0.2
Ans. (c) :
⇒ Fliquid = 5cm
56. The exposure time of camera lens at f/2.8
setting is 1/200 second. The correct time of
exposure at f/5.6 is
Skeâ kewâcejs kesâ ueWme keâe GÆemeve keâeue f/2.8 hej 1/200
meskeâC[ nw~ f/5.6 hej mener GÆemeve keâeue nesiee:
(a) 0.20 second/0.20 meskeâC[ Deviation produced by thin prism-
(b) 0.40 second/0.40 meskeâC[ δ = (µ − 1)A = (1.5 − 1) 6º
(c) 0.02 second/0.02 meskeâC[ = 3º
(d) 0.04 second/0.04 meskeâC[ Angle of emergence (e) = 6º+3º
AIPMT-1995 (e) = 9º
Ans. (c) : The exposure time of camera lens is given by. 58. Find the value of the Angle of Emergence from
1 the prism. Refractive index of the glass is 3.
Time of exposure ∝
(Aperture) 2
ef Øepce mes efveie&le keâesCe kesâ ceeve keâes %eele keâerefpeS~ keâeBÛe
T1 A22 keâe DeheJeòe&veebkeâ 3 nw :
Therefore, =
T2 A12
1 f f
Given: T1 = , A1 = , A2 =
200 2.8 5.6
2
1/ 200  f / 5.6 
∴ = 
T2  f / 2.8 
2 (a) 90° (b) 60°
1  2.8 
Or, =  (c) 30° (d) 45°
200T2  5.6  NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
2
 5.6  1 Ans. (b) : According to Snell's law, the ratio of the Sine
Or, T2 =   × of an angle of the Incidence to the Sine of angle of
 2.8  200
Refraction is equal to the constant.
1
⇒ T2 = 4 × sin i µ
200 = air
⇒ T2 = 0.02 second. sin r µ prism

23.5 Refraction through a Prism A

57. A Horizontal ray of light is incident on the B

right angled prism with angle 60. If the
refractive index of the material of the prism is
1.5, then the angle of emergence will be r1+r2 = θ = 30º

Physics 516 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
From Snell’s law, Ans. (b) : Given, µ1 = 1, µ2 = 2
sin r2 1
= Angle of prism, A = r = 30º
sine 3 Applying snell’s law,
3 sin 30º = sin e µ1 sin r
=
e = 60º µ 2 sin i
59. A ray is incident at an angle of incidence i on
one surface of a small angle prism (with angle
of prism A) and emerges normally from the
opposite surface. If the refractive index of the
material of the prism is µ, then the angle of
incidence is nearly equal to :
keâesF& efkeâjCe ueIeg efØepce keâesCe (efhep]ce keâesCe A) kesâ
efkeâmeer Skeâ he=‰ hej DeeÙeleve keâesCe i hej Deeheleve keâjkesâ sin i
=
2
efØep]ce kesâ efJeheefjle Heâuekeâ mes DeefYeuecyeJele efveie&le nesleer sin 30º 1
nw~ Ùeefo Fme efØep]ce kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ µ nw, lees sin i = 2 × sin30º
Deeheleve keâesCe nw, ueieYeie: 1
2A = 2×
(a) (b) µA 2
µ 1
µA sin i =
A 2
(c) (d)
2 2µ
⇒ i = 45º
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (b) : Given, Incident ray emerges normally from 61. A thin prism having refracting angle 10° is
opposite surface Hence, ∠e = 0------(i) made of glass of refractive index 1.42. This
prism is combined with another thin prism of
We know that angle of deviation (δ) is given by-
glass of refractive index 1.7. This combination
δ = (µ -1)A ----(ii)
produces dispersion without deviation. The
For prism, sum of angles of prism & angle of deviation
refracting angle of second prism should be:
is equal to sum of angle of incidence & angle of
emergence. So, 1.42 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ keâeBÛe mes yeves, Skeâ heleues efØepce
δ +A = i + e ------(iii) keâe DeheJele&keâ keâesCe 10° nw~ Fme efØepce keâes 1.7
put (i) &(ii) in (iii) we have DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ keâeBÛe mes yeves Skeâ DevÙe heleues efØepce mes
(µ −1)A + A = i + 0 peesÌ[ efoÙee peelee nQ~ Fme mebÙeespeve mes efJeÛeuevejefnle
µA = i or i = µA heefj#esheCe Øeehle neslee nw~ lees, otmejs efØepce keâe DeheJele&keâ
keâesCe nesvee ÛeeefnS:
60. The refractive index of the material of a prism
(a) 4° (b) 6°
is 2 and the angle of the prism is 30°. One of
(c) 8° (d) 10°
the two refracting surfaces of the prism is made
a mirror inwards, by silver coating. A beam of NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
monochromatic light entering the prism from Ans. (b):
the other face will retrace its path (after
reflection from the silvered surface) if its angle
of incidence on the prism is / efkeâmeer efØepce kesâ
heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 2 Deewj efØepce keâe keâesCe 300
nw~ efØepce kesâ oes DeheJele&keâ he=‰eW ceW mes Skeâ keâes ÛeeBoer
Given data
ÛeÌ{ekeâj Yeerlej keâer Deesj ohe&Ce yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ otmejs
Refracting angle A1 = 10º
Refractive index µ1 = 1.42
Heâuekeâ mes ØeJesMe keâjves Jeeues SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâe keâesF&
hegbpe (ohe&Ce Jeeues he=‰ mes hejeJeefle&le nesves kesâ he§eele) µ2 = 1.7
Gmeer heLe hej Jeeheme ueewš peeSiee, Ùeefo efØepce hej deviation for any prism is given by
Deeheleve keâesCe keâe ceeve nw δ = (µ – 1) × A
(a) 60° (b) 45° Condition for dispersion without deviation is
(c) Zero / MetvÙe (d) 30° δ1 – δ2 = 0
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 (µ1 – 1)A1 – (µ2 – 1)A2 = 0

Physics 517 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
A2 =
( µ1 − 1) A1 Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCehebgpe, ueeue, njs leLee veerues jbieeW mes
( µ 2 − 1) yevee nw~ Ùen efkeâjCehegbpe efkeâmeer mecekeâesCeerÙe efØepce hej
Deeheeflele neslee nw~ (DeejsKe osefKeÙes) efØepce kesâ heoeLe& keâe
1.42 − 1
= × 10° DeheJele&veebkeâ, ueeue, njs Je veerues jbie kesâ efueÙes ›eâceMe:
1.7 − 1
1.39, 1.44 Deewj 1.47 nw~ lees,
0.42
= × 10°
0.7
A 2 = 6°
Hence refracting angle of second prism is 6º
62. The angle of incidence for a ray of light at a
refracting surface of prism is 45º The angle of
prism is 60º If the ray suffers minimum
deviation through the prism, the angle of
minimum deviation and refractive index of the The prism will/Ùen efØepce:
material of the prism respectively, are (a) Separate the red colour part from the green
efØepce kesâ efkeâmeer DeheJele&keâ he=° hej efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe and blue colours/efkeâjCehegbpe kesâ ueeue jbie Yeeie keâes
kesâ efueS Deeheleve keâesCe keâe ceeve 45º nw~ efØepce keâesCe keâe DevÙe jbieeW mes he=Lekeâ keâj osiee~
ceeve 60º nw~ Ùeefo Ùen efkeâjCe efØepce mes vÙetvelece efJeÛeefuele (b) Separate the blue colour part from the red and
nesleer nw, lees vÙetvelece efJeÛeueve keâesCe leLee efØepce kesâ green colours/efkeâjCehebgpe kesâ veerues jbie keâes DevÙe jbieeW
heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ ›eâceMe: nw : mes he=Lekeâ keâj osiee~
1 1 (c) Separate all the three colours from one
(a) 30º ; (b) 45º ; another /efkeâjCehegbpe kesâ leerveeW jbieeW keâes Skeâ otmejs mes
2 2
he=Lekeâ keâj osiee~
(c) 30º ; 2 (d) 45º ; 2 (d) Not separate the three colours at all
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 leerveeW jbieeW keâes efyeukegâue Yeer he=Lekeâ veneR keâjsiee~
Ans. (c) : AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Ans. (a) : The relation between refractive index and
critical angle is
1
µ=
sin c
As the beam of light is incident normally on the face
AB
Angle of incidence, i = 450 of the right-angled prism ABC, So no deviation occurs
Angle of prism A = 600 at face AB and it passes straight and strikes the face AC
Angle of minimum deviation δm = 2i – A at angle of indidence, i = 45º
= 2 × 450 – 600 For total reflection to take place at face AC
= 300
i > ic or sin i > sin ic
refractive index is given by-
Where, ic is the critical angle But as here i = 45º and
 A + δm  1
sin   sin i c =
µ=  2  µ
A
sin 1
2 ∴ sin 45º >
µ
 60 + 300 
0
sin   1 1
 2  >
µ= 2 µ
600
sin µ > 2 = 1.414
2
µ= 2 • As µred (= 1.414) < µ (= 1.414) while µgreen (= 1.44)
and µblue = (= 1.47) > µ (= 1.414), So only red colour
63. A beam of light consisting of red, green and blue will transmitted through face AC while green and
colours is incident on a right angled prism. The
blue colours will suffer total internal refflection.
refractive index of the material of the prism for
the above red, green and blue wavelengths are • So, the prism will separate red colour from the green
1.39, 1.44 and 1.47, respectively and blue colours as shown in the given fig.

Physics 518 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Angle of minimum deviation is given by–
δmin = i +e –A
For minimum deviation ,δmin = A & i = e
Since, δmin = A (given)
⇒ A = 2i – A
or 2A = 2i
i=A
64. The angle of a prism is 'A'. One of its
refracting surfaces is silvered. Light rays
falling at an angle of incidence 2A on the first
surface returns back through the same path
after suffering reflection at the silvered surface.
The refractive index µ, of the prism is:-
efkeâmeer efØepce keâe keâesCe 'A' nw~ Fme efØepce kesâ Skeâ At minimum deviation,
DeheJele&keâ (heâuekeâ) keâes jpeeflele keâj hejeJele&keâ yevee efoÙee  A + δ min 
sin  
ieÙee nw, Fmekesâ he=‰ hej, 2A keâesCe hej Deeheeflele, ØekeâeMe  2 
µ=
keâer efkeâjCeW, jpeeflele mes hejeJele&ve kesâ he§eeled Deheves ceeie& A
sin  
hej Jeeheme Dee peeleeer nw~ efØepce kesâ heoeLe& keâe 2
DeheJele&veebkeâ µ nesiee:-  2A 
sin  A A
 2sin cos
(a) 2 sin A (b) 2 cos A =  2 
= 2 2
1 A sin
A
(c) cos A (d) tan A sin  
2 2 2
A
AIPMT-06.05.2014 µ = 2 cos  
Ans. (b) : On refraction from the silvered surface, the 2
incident ray will retrace its path, if it falls normally on i
µ = 2 cos  
the surface. 2
By geometry, r = A At maximum possible angle of incidence, ∠ i = 90º.
Applying Snell's law at surface PQ, i 
sini = µ×sinπ Thus, µmin = 2 cos  max 
 2 
sin i sin 2A
µ= = = 2 cos A µmin = 2 cos 45º = 2
sin r sin A
At minimum possible angle of incidence, ∠ i = 0
i 
So, µmax = 2 cos  min 
 2 
µmax = 2 cos 0 = 2
Hence, refractive index of the material of the prism lies
between 2 and 2.
66. A ray of light is incident at an angle of
incidence i, on one face of a prism of angle A
65. For the angle of minimum deviation of a prism (assumed to be small) and emerges normally
to be equal to its refracting angle, the prism from the opposite face. If the refractive index
must be made of a material whose refractive of the prism is µ, the angle of incidence i, is
index/efkeâmeer efØepce kesâ vÙetvelece efJeÛeueve keâesCe keâe nearly equal to:/ØekeâeMe keâer Skeâ efkeâjCe, efkeâmeer efØepce
ceeve Gmekesâ DeheJele&keâ keâesCe kesâ yejeyej nesiee Ùeefo, efØepce kesâ Skeâ heâuekeâ hej i keâesCe hej Deeheeflele nesleer nw leLee
kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ nes:– Gmekesâ efJehejerle heâuekeâ mes Gmekesâ uecyeJeled efveie&le nesleer nw~
(a) is less than 1/1 mes keâce Ùeefo efØepce keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ µ nw lees Deeheleve keâesCe i
keâe ceeve ueieYeie yejeyej nw :
(b) is greater than 2/2 mes DeefOekeâ
(a) A/µ (b) A/2µ
(c) lies between 2 and 1/ 2 Deewj 1 kesâ yeerÛe µA
(c) µΑ (d)
(d) lies between 2 and 2 / 2 Deewj 2 kesâ yeerÛe 2
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Physics 519 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): (a) zero/MetvÙe (b) 30°/30°
(c) 45°/45° (d) 60°/60°
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Ans. (b) : Where A is Angle of Prism

Given,
Angle of prism = A
Angle of incidence = i
Let, angle of emergence be 'e' and refractive index of
material of prism be 'µ'. Angle of prism A = r1 + r2
Now, for small angle of prism, for minimum deviation r1 = r2 = r
angle of deviation 'δ' is given by A = 2r
δ = (µ – 1)A ––––– (1) Given,
Since, ray emerges normally. Angle A = 60º
∴e=0 ⇒ 60 = 2r
Now, from relation, δ = i+e –A ⇒ r = 30º
⇒δ=i–A {Q e = 0} –––– (2) 69. The refractive index of the material of a prism is
from equation (1) & (2)
i – A = µA – A 2 and its refracting angle is 30º. One of the
⇒ i = µA refracting surfaces of the prism is made a
mirror inwards. A beam of monochromatic light
67. A thin prism of angle 15º made of glass of entering the prism from the other face will
refractive index µ1 = 1.5 is combined with retrace its path after reflection form the
another prism of glass of refractive index µ2 = mirrored surface if its angle of incidence on the
1.75. The combination of the prism produced prism is :-
dispersion without deviation. The angle of the
second prism should be/µ1 = 1.5 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ Skeâ efØe]pce kesâ õJÙe keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 2 nw Deewj Fmekeâe
keâeBÛe mes yevee 15º keâesCe kesâ Skeâ heleues efØepce keâes µ2 = DeheJele&veebkeâ keâesCe 30°keâe nw~ efØe]pce kesâ Skeâ DeheJele&ve
1.75 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ keâeBÛe kesâ DevÙe efØepce kesâ meeLe he=‰ hej ÛeeBoer ÛeÌ{e keâj Devle:cegKeer ohe&Ce yeveeÙee ieÙee
mebÙegòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw~ efØepceeW keâe mebÙeespeve yevee nw~ efØe]pce ceW ØeJesMe keâjves Jeeuee SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe
efJeÛeueve kesâ efJe#esheCe Glhevve keâjlee nw~ otmejs efØepce keâe hebgpe Deheves heLe hej hejeJeefle&le nes peeSiee~ Ùeefo Fmekeâe
keâesCe nesiee : efØe]pce hej Deeheleve keâesCe nesiee -
(a) 5° (b) 7° (a) 60º (b) 0º
(c) 10° (d) 12° (c) 30º (d) 45º
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 AIPMT-2004
Ans. (c) : For without deviation Ans. (d) : According to the given condition, the beam
A µ '2 − 1 of light will retrace its path after reflection from BC.
=
A ' µ1 − 1
Given data-
A = 15°, µ1 = 1.5, µ2 = 1.75
15° 1.75 − 1 0.75 3
= = =
A' 1.50 − 1 0.50 2
A' = 10°
68. A ray of light is incident on a 60° prism at the
minimum deviation position. The angle of
refraction at the first face (i.e., incident face) of So, ∠ CPQ = 90°
the prism is Thus, angle of refraction at surface AC
60° kesâ efkeâmeer efØepce hej ØekeâeMe keâer Skeâ efkeâjCe ∠ PQN = 30° (given)
Deuhelece efJeÛeueve keâer efmLeefle hej Deeheeflele nesleer~ henues By snell's law,
heeÕe& (Heâuekeâ) hej (DeLee&led Deeheleve heeÕe& hej) µ=
sin i
DeheJele&ve keâesCe nw – sin r

Physics 520 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
sin i Ans. (b): According to question we have,
2=
sin 30°
sin i = 2 × sin 30°
1
sin i = 2×
2
1
sin i = µ= 2
2
sin i = sin45° By snell's law; 1× sin i = µ × sin r

i = 45° 1× sin i = 2 × sin30º

1
70. For a prism its refractive index is cot A/2 then ⇒ sin i = 2 ×
minimum angle of deviation is 2
efØepce kesâ efueS DeheJele&veebkeâ cot A/2 nw, lees vÙetvelece ⇒ 1
sin i =
efJeÛeueve keâesCe keâe ceeve keäÙee nesiee : 2
(a) 180 – A (b) 180 – 2A ⇒ sin i = sin 45º
(c) 90 – A (d) A/2 ⇒ i = 45º
AIPMT-1999
Ans. (b) : Given µ = cot A/2 23.6 Some Natural Phenomena due
We know that– to Sunlight
 A + δm   A + δm 
sin   sin   72. During a cloudy day, a primary and a
µ=  2  ⇒ cot A =  2 
2 secondary rainbow may be created, then the:
sin A sin A
2 2 efkeâmeer yeeoueeW Jeeues efove, Skeâ ØeeLeefcekeâ SJeb Skeâ
 A + δm  efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e yeve mekeâles nQ, lees:
cos A sin  
⇒ 2=  2  ⇒ cos A = sin  A + δm  (a) primary rainbow is due to double internal
2  
sin A sin A  2  reflection and is formed above the secondary
2 2
one./ØeeLeefcekeâ FvõOeveg<e, oes yeej hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ
π A
⇒ sin  −  = sin
( A + δm )
hejeJele&ve kesâ keâejCe SJeb efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e kesâ Thej
 2 2  2
yevelee nw~
π A A + δm
− = ⇒ π − 2A = δm ⇒ δm = 180 – 2A (b) primary rainbow is due to double internal
2 2 2 reflection and is formed below the secondary
71. The refractive index of the material of a prism one.
is 2 and the angle of the prism is 30º. One of ØeeLeefcekeâ FvõOeveg<e, oes yeej hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve kesâ
the two refracting surfaces of the prism is made keâejCe SJeb efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e kesâ veerÛes yevelee nw~
of a mirror inwards, by silver coating. A beam (c) secondary rainbow is due to double internal
of the monochromatic light entering the prism reflection and is formed above the primary
from the other face will retrace its path (after one./efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e, oes yeej hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ
reflection from the silvered surface) if its angle
hejeJele&ve kesâ keâejCe SJeb ØeeLeefcekeâ FvõOeveg<e kesâ Thej
of incidence on the prism is?
yevelee nw~
efkeâmeer efØep]ce kesâ heoeLe& keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 2 Deewj efØepce (d) secondary rainbow is due to single internal
keâe keâesCe 30º nw~ efØepce kesâ oes DeheJele&keâ he=‰eW ceW mes Skeâ reflection and is formed above the primary
keâes ÛeeBoer ÛeÌ{ekeâj Yeerlej keâer Deesj ohe&Ce yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ one./efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e, Skeâ yeej hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ
otmejs heâuekeâ mes ØeJesMe keâjves Jeeues SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâe hejeJele&ve kesâ keâejCe SJeb ØeeLeefcekeâ FvõOeveg<e kesâ Thej
keâesF& hegbpe (oheCe& Jeeues he=‰ mes hejeJeefle&le nesves kesâ yevelee nw~
he§eeled) Gmeer heLe hej Jeeheme ueewš peeSiee, Ùeefo efØepce NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
hej Deeheleve keâesCe keâe ceeve nesiee: Ans. (c) : Rainbow:- is formed due to the dispersion
(a) 60º (b) 45º of light suffering refraction and TIR in the droplets
(c) 30º (d) zero/MetvÙe presents in the atmosphere. Observer should stand
AIPMT-2018, 2004, 1992 with its back towards sun to observe rainbow.
Physics 521 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Primary Rainbow Secondary Rainbow 75. Rainbow is formed due to :
• Primary refractions • Two refraction and FvõOeveg<e yeveves keâe keâejCe nw –
and one TIR. two TIR (a) Scattering & refraction/ØekeâerCe&ve leLee DeheJele&ve
• Innermost arc is violet • Innermost arc is red (b) Total internal reflection & dispersion
and outermost is red. and outermost is violet het Ce& Deebleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve hejeJele&ve leLee JeCe& efJe#esheCe
• Substends an angle of • It subtends and angle (c) Reflection only/kesâJeue hejeJele&ve
42º at the eye of the of 52.5º at the eye of (d) Diffraction and dispersion
observer. the observer efJeJele&ve leLee JeCe& efJe#esheCe
• More bright. • Comparatively less AIPMT-2000
bright. Ans. (b) : Dispersion of Light- Phenomenon in which
73. Pick the wrong answer in the context with a white light ray when falls on a prism get separated
rainbow./FvõOeveg<e kesâ meboYe& ceW ieuele Gòej ÛegefveS~ into its component colours is called dispersion of light.
After a rain shower, Rainbow is formed. The water
(a) The order of colours is reversed in the droplets act like a small prisms. They refract & disperse
secondary rainbow/efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e ceW JeCeeX keâe the incident sunlight, then reflect it internally, and
keâe ›eâce Gl›eâefcele nes peelee nw~ finally refract it again when it comes out of raindrop.
(b) An observer can see a rainbow when his front Due to dispersion of light & total Internal reflection,
different colours reach the observers eye.
is towards the sun/keâesF& Øes#ekeâ FvõOeveg<e leye osKee
76. The blue colour of the sky is due to the
mekeâlee nw peye metÙe& Gmekesâ meeceves neslee nw~ phenomenon of/DeekeâeMe keâe veeruee jbie efkeâme
(c) Rainbow is a combined effect of dispersion,
heefjIešvee kesâ keâejCe neslee nw?
refraction and reflection of sunlight
(a) scattering /ØekeâerCe&ve (b) dispersion/efJe#esheCe
FvõOeveg<e metÙe& kesâ ØekeâeMe kesâ efJe#esheCe, DeheJele&ve Deewj
hejeJele&ve keâe mebÙegòeâ ØeYeeJe nw~ (c) reflection/hejeJele&ve (d) refraction/DeheJele&ve
AIPMT-1994
(d) When the light rays undergo two internal
reflections in a water drop, a secondary Ans. (a) : The blue colour of the sky is due to the
phenomenon of scattering. Scattering of light is the
rainbow is formed/peye efkeâmeer peue keâer yetbo ceW
phenomenon in which path of light gets deviated by
ØekeâeMe keâer efkeâjCeW oes yeej Deebleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve keâjleer nw, striking obstacle like dust particles. The particles
lees keâesF& efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e yevelee nw~ present in our atmosphere are of very small size. Thus,
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 they can deviate only that part of light whose
wavelength is closer to their size.
Ans. (b) : The formation of rainbow is due to the
White light coming from sun is made up of seven
refraction, dispersion & reflection from the water
colours. Wavelength of red colour is the largest and that
droplets present in atmosphere. For the rainbow to be of violet and blue colour are the smallest. Thus the
observed the observers back must be facing the sun and violet and blue colour are scattered most by these
it must be raining on the opposite horizon to the sun. particles, thus the sky appears to be blue.
Secondary rainbow occurs with refraction, dispersion
77. Ray optics is valid, when characteristic
and two internal reflections with reversal of order of dimensions are/efkeâjCe ØekeâeefMekeâer ceevÙe neslee nw peye
colours.
DeefYeuee#eefCekeâ DeeÙeece nesles nw:
74. The reddish appearance of the sun at sunrise
(a) much smaller than the wavelength of light
and sunset is due to/metÙeexoÙe Deewj metÙee&mle kesâ meceÙe
/ØekeâeMe kesâ lejbieowIÙe& mes yengle Úesšer
metÙe& keâe ueeue efoKeves keâe keâejCe nw- (b) of the same order as the wavelength of light
(a) The colour of the sky/DeekeâeMe keâe jbie /ØekeâeMe kesâ lejbie kesâ meceeve keâesefš keâer
(b) The scattering of light/ØekeâeMe keâe ØekeâerCe&ve (c) of the order of one milimetre/Skeâ efceueerceeršj keâer
(c) The polarisation of light/ØekeâeMe keâe OeÇgJeerkeâjCe keâesefš keâer
(d) The colour of the sun/metÙe& keâe jbie (d) much larger than the wavelength of light
/ØekeâeMe kesâ lejbieowIÙe& mes yengle yeÌ[er
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
AIPMT-1994, 1989
Ans. (b) : During sunset or sunrise, light have to travel
longer distance to reach observer. Loss of energy due to Ans. (d): Ray optics is valid, when characteristic
dimensions are much larger than the wavelength of light.
scattering is more for high frequency wave. Longer
wave length has minimum loss due to scattering and can The size of obstacle must be much larger than the wave
travel long distance. Red colour has longer wave length. length of light. If wave length is comparable to the size
Its intensity reach to the observer is more compare to of object, then diffraction could happen, but it can not
the other colour. Hence sun appears red during sunrise be explained using ray optics, it will require wave
and sunset. theory of light.

Physics 522 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
otjer hej jKee peelee nw, lees Deefvlece Øeefleefyecye heeÙee
23.7 Optical Instruments peeÙesiee efkeâleveer otjer hej :
78. An astronomical refracting telescope is being
used by an observer to observe planets in
normal adjustment. The focal lengths of the
objective and eye piece used in the construction
of the telescope are 20 m and 2 cm respectively.
Consider the following statements about the
telescope: (a) 20 cm from the plane mirror, it would be a
Skeâ Øes#ekeâ «eneW keâes osKeves kesâ efueS meeceevÙe meceeÙeespeve virtual image/20 mes.ceer. meceleue ohe&Ce mes, Ùen
kesâ meeLe Skeâ KeieesueerÙe DeheJele&keâ otjoMeea keâe ØeÙeesie DeeYeemeer Øeefleefyecye nesiee~
keâjlee nw~ otjoMeea kesâ efvecee&Ce ceW ØeÙegòeâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ SJeb (b) 20 cm from the lens, it would be a real image
ves$ekeâ ueWmeeW keâer heâeskeâue otefjÙeeW ›eâceMe: 20 m SJeb 2 cm 20 mes.ceer. uesvme mes, Ùen JeemleefJekeâ Øeefleefyecye nesiee~
nQ~ otjoMeea kesâ mecyebOe ceW efvecve keâLeveeW keâes heefÌ{Ùes: (c) 30 cm from the lens, it would be a real image
(1) The distance between the objective and eye 30 mes.ceer. uesvme mes, Ùen JeemleefJekeâ Øeefleefyecye nesiee~
piece is 20.02 m/DeefYeÂMÙekeâ SJeb ves$ekeâ kesâ yeerÛe (d) 30 cm from the plane mirror, it would be a
keâer otjer 20.02 m nw~ virtual image/30 mes.ceer. meceleue ohe&Ce mes, Ùen
(2) The magnification of the telescope is (–)
DeeYeemeer Øeefleefyecye nesiee~
1000/otjoMeea keâe DeeJeOe&ve (–) 1000 nw~ NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
(3) The image of the planet is erect and Ans. (a) : Using lens formula for first refraction from
diminished/«en keâe Øeefleefyecye meerOee SJeb Öemeer nw~ Convex lens-
1 1 1
(4) The aperture of eye piece is smaller than − =
that of objective/ves$ekeâ keâe Éejkeâ, DeefYeÂMÙekeâ v 1 u1 f
kesâ Éejkeâ mes Úesše nw~ Given that,
The correct statements are:/mener keâLeve nQ: u1 = – 60 cm
f = 30 cm
(a) (1), (2) and (3)/(1), (2) SJeb (3)
v1 = ?
(b) (2), (3) and (4)/(2), (3) SJeb (4)
1 1 1
(c) (3), (4) and (1)/(3), (4) SJeb (1) + =
v1 60 30
(d) (1), (2) and (4)/(1), (2) SJeb (4)
v1 = 60 cm
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
The plane mirror will produce an image at distance of
Ans. (d) : Given that –
20 cm left from convex lens after second refraction
fo = 20m = focal length of objective
from lens.
fe = 0.02m = focal length of eyepiece
u = – 20 cm
• When final image is formed at infinity.
f = 30 cm
f 20
then, M = – o = − = −1000 v=?
fe 0.02
1 1 1
Length of the telescope is – + =
v 20 30
L = fo + fe
v = – 60 cm
L = 20 + 0.02
Thus the final image is virtual and at a distance.
L = 20.02m
60 – 40 = 20 cm form plane mirror.
• Aperture of eyepiece is smaller than that of objective.
80. Assume that light of wavelength 600 nm is
79. A point object is placed at a distance of 60 cm
from a convex lens of focal length 30 cm. If a coming from a star. The limit of resolution of
plane mirror were put perpendicular to the telescope whose objective has a diameter of 2 m is
principal axis of the lens and at a distance of 40 Ùen ceeefveS efkeâ efkeâmeer leejs mes 600 nm lejbieowOÙe& keâe
cm from it, the final image would be formed at ØekeâeMe Dee jne nw~ Gme otjoMe&keâ efpemekesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ
a distance of keâe JÙeeme 2 m kesâ efJeYesove keâe meercee nw:
30 mes.ceer. Heâeskeâme otjer kesâ Gòeue uesvme mes 60 mes.ceer. otjer (a) 1.83 × 10–7 rad (b) 7.32 × 10–7 rad
hej Skeâ efyevog Jemleg GheefmLele nw~ Ùeefo Skeâ meceleue (c) 6.00 × 10 rad –7
(d) 3.66 × 10–7 rad
ohe&Ce, cegKÙe De#e kesâ uecyeJeled leLee Fmemes 40 mes.ceer. NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Physics 523 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given that, n = Separation of refractive index
Diameter of objective of telescope , λ = wavelength of given rays
D =2m= 2×100cm=200cm 1
⇒ Resolving power ∝
wavelength of light, λ = 600 nm. =6×10-5 cm λ
1.22λ o
limit of resolution of telescope, dθ = R.P1 λ 2 6000 A
D ⇒ = =
−5
R.P2 λ1 o
4000 A
1.22 × 6 ×10
= R.P1 3
200 =
−7 R.P2 2
= 3.66 ×10 radian
81. An astronomical refracting telescope will have 83. A astronomical telescope has objective and
large angular magnification and high angular eyepiece of focal lengths 40 cm and 4 cm
resolution, when it has an objective lens of / respectively. To view an object 200 cm away
efkeâmeer KeieesueerÙe DeheJeleea otjoMe&keâ keâe keâesCeerÙe from the objective, the lenses must be
separated by a distance:
DeeJeOe&ve DeefOekeâ Deewj keâesCeerÙe efJeYesove GÛÛe nesiee, efkeâmeer KeieesueerÙe otjyeerve kesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ Deewj vesef$ekeâe keâer
Ùeefo Fmekesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ ueWme keâer Heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB ›eâceMe: 40 cm Deewj 4 cm nw~ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ
(a) Small focal length and large diameter mes 200 cm otj efmLele efkeâmeer efyecye keâes osKeves kesâ efueS,
Heâeskeâme otjer keâce Deewj JÙeeme yeÌ[e nw oesveeW ueWmeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer nesveer ÛeeefnS :
(b) Large focal length and small diameter
(a) 54.0 cm (b) 37.3 cm
Heâeskeâme otjer DeefOekeâ Deewj JÙeeme Úesše nw (c) 46.0 cm (d) 50.0 cm
(c) Small focal length and small diameter NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Heâeskeâme otjer keâce Deewj JÙeeme Úesše nw Ans. (a) :
(d) Large focal length and large diameter
Heâeskeâme otjer DeefOekeâ Deewj JÙeeme yeÌ[e nw
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Ans. (d) For astronomical telescope we have,
–focal length of objective lens
• Angular magnification = Applying the lens formula for the objective lens
focal length of eyepiece
1 1 1
–f = −
⇒ m= 0 f0 v0 u 0
fe
1 1 1
⇒ For high magnification high focal length of the = +
objective lens is required. ................. (i) v0 f0 u 0
d 1 1 1
• Angular resolution or resolving power R.P. = = +
1.22λ v 0 40 − 200
⇒ For large resolution high diameter of objective lens v0 = 50 cm
is required. ..................... (ii) Image is formed at focus of eyepiece so,
Hence, option (d) is correct. Total length by which lenses must be separated
82. The ratio of resolving powers of an optical L = v0 + fe
microscope for two wavelengths λ1 = 4000 Å L = 50 + 4
and λ2 = 6000 Å is/ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowOÙeeX, λ1 = 4000 L = 54 cm
Å Deewj λ2 = 6000 Å kesâ efueÙes, ØekeâeMeerÙe met#ceoMeea keâer 84. In an astronomical telescope in normal
adjustment a straight black line of length L is
efJeYesove #eceleeDeeW keâe Devegheele nw: drawn on inside part of objective lens. The
(a) 8 : 27 (b) 9 : 4 eyepiece forms a real image of this line. The
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 16 : 81 length of this image is l. The magnification of
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 the telescope is/meeceevÙe meceeÙeespeve keâer efmLeefle ceW
Ans. (c) : Resolving power of a optical microscope is efkeâmeer KeieesueerÙe otjoMe&keâ kesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ ueWme kesâ
given by- Yeerlejer Yeeie hej L uecyeeF& keâer Skeâ keâeueer mejue jsKee
1 2n sin θ KeeR Ûeer ieF& nw~ vesef$ekeâe Fme mejue jsKee keâe JeemleefJekeâ
R.P. = =
∆d λ Øeefleefyecye yeveeleer nw~ Fme Øeefleefyecye keâer uecyeeF& I nw lees,
∆d = Gap between two objects/lens otjoMe&keâ keâe DeeJeOe&ve nw~
Physics 524 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
L L where, m = magnifying power
(a) +1 (b)
l l f0 = focal length of objective lens
L L+l fe = focal length of eyepiece
(c) −1 (d) L = f0 + fe = 20 cm (given) ........... (2)
l L-l
Now,
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
f0
Ans. (a) : = 9 ⇒ f 0 = 9f e
fe
⇒ 9 fe + fe = 20 ––––– from (2)
⇒ fe = 2 ⇒ f0 = 9 × 2 = 18 cm
86. A microscope is focused on a mark on a piece
Let f0 and fe be the focal length of the objective and eye of paper and then a slab of glass of thickness 3
piece. cm and refractive index 1.5 is placed over the
For normal adjustment, the distance from the objective mark. How should the microscope be moved to
to the eye piece = f0 + fe get the mark in focus again:-
Treating the line on the objective at object and the eye Skeâ met#ceoMeea keâes keâeiepe hej yeves Skeâ efveMeeve hej
piece as lens. heâeskeâme keâjves kesâ Ghejevle Fme efveMeeve hej 1.5
u = - (f0+fe) & f = fe DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ keâeBÛe kesâ 3 cm ceesšs muewye keâes jKee
1 1 1 ieÙee nw~ Deye met#ceoMeea ceW keäÙee mLeeveevlejCe efkeâÙee peeS
Using, − = , we get
v u f efkeâ efveMeeve efheâj mes heâeskeâme ceW Dee peeS:-
1 1 1 (a) 1 cm upward/1 cm Thej keâes
+ =
v f0 + fe fe
(b) 4.5 cm downward/4.5 cm veerÛes keâes
1 1 1 f0 (c) 1 cm downward/1 cm veerÛes keâes
= − =
v fe f0 + fe ( f0 + fe ) fe (d) 2 cm upward/2 cm Thej keâes
( f0 + fe ) f e AIPMT-2006
v=
f0 Ans. (a) : Given: real depth of mark x = 3 cm
Therefore magnification for eye piece Refractive index µ = 1.5
Apparent depth of mark y = ?
v fe l
= = x x 3
u f0 L As µ = ∴y= = = 2 cm
y µ 1.5
Thus magnification of telescope in normal adjustment
Distance through which mark appears to be raised = x –
f L
= 0 = y = 3 – 2 = 1 cm
fe l ∴To get the mark in focus again, distance through
85. The magnifying power of a telescope is 9. When which microscope be moving upward = 1 cm.
it is adjusted for parallel rays the distance 87. The angular resolution of a 10cm diameter
between the objective and eyepiece is 20 cm. telescope at a wavelength of 5000Å is of the
The focal length of lenses are: order of –
Skeâ otjoMeea Ùeb$e keâe DeeJeOe&ve 9 nw~ peye Fmes meceevlej 5000Å lejbieowOÙe& hej 10cm JÙeeme keâer otjoMeea keâe
efkeâjCeeW kesâ efueS meceeÙeespele efkeâÙee peelee nw leye Fme kesâ keâesCeerÙe efJeYesove keâer keâesefš nesieer-
DeefYeÂMÙekeâ leLee vesef$ekeâe kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 20 cm nesleer (a) 10–4 rad
(b) 10–6 rad
nw~ Fve ueWmeeW keâer heâeskeâme otefjÙeeB : (c) 106 rad
(d) 10–2 rad
(a) 18 cm, 2 cm (b) 11 cm, 9 cm AIPMT-2005
(c) 10 cm, 10 cm (d) 15 cm, 5 cm Ans. (b) : Given, Wavelength λ = 5000Å
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 Diameter d = 10 cm
Ans. (a) : Magnification of a telescope is directly 1.22λ
related to the focal length of objective lens & inversely Angular resolution =
d
related to focal length of eye piece.
Sum of these focal lengths is distance between lenses 1.22 × 5000 ×10−10
=
when adjusted for parallel rays, which is denoted by 'L'. 10 ×10−2
f = 6.1×10-6
m = 0 .............(1)
fe Hence, angular resolution is of the order of 10-6 rad.

Physics 525 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
88. A telescope has an objective lens of 10 cm f0
diameter and is situated at a distance of one Net magnification [M = m0 × me] and m0 =
u 0 + f0
kilometer from two objects. The minimum
distance between these two objects, which can  f 
be resolved by the telescope, when the mean ⇒ M =  0  × me
wavelength of light is 5000 Å, is of the order of-  u + f0 
Skeâ otjyeerve kesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ ueWme keâe JÙeeme 10 cm nw 1
leLee Ùen oes efheb[eW mes Skeâ efkeâueesceeršj keâer otjer hej efmLele 95 = 4 × me
ο  1 1
nw~ Ùeefo ØekeâeMe keâe ceOÙeJeleea lejbieowOÙe& 5000 A ceevee − + 
 3.8 4 
peeS, lees Fve oes efheC[eW kesâ yeerÛe keâer keâce mes keâce otjer 76
efpeme hej otjyeerve GvnW he=Lekeâ-he=Lekeâ efoKee mekesâieer, nesieer ⇒ 95 = m e ⇒ [ m e = −5 ]
4 × ( −1)
ueieYeie -
Magnitude of magnification, |me| = 5
(a) 5 m (b) 5 mm
(c) 5 cm (d) 0.5 m 90. An astronomical telescope of ten fold angular
magnification has a length of 44 cm. The focal
AIPMT-2004
length of the objective is/Skeâ KeieesueerÙe otjoMeea keâer
Ans. (b) : Given-
ο
šŸetye keâer uecyeeF& 44 mesceer nw leLee DeeJeOe&ve 10 nw~
λ = 5000 A = 5000 × 10 m –10
Fmekesâ DeefYeÂMÙekeâ uesvme keâer heâeskeâme otjer nesieer:
D = 1km = 1000m (a) 44 cm/44 mesceer (b) 440 cm/440 mesceer
d = 10cm = 0.1m
(c) 4 cm/4 mesceer (d) 40 cm/40 mesceer
Resolving limit of telescope is given by-
AIPMT-1997
x λ
Q∝ = Ans. (d) : Given: Length of astronomical telescope
D d (f0 + fe) = 44 cm ...(i)
Where, And the ratio of focal length of the objective lens to that
λ = wave length f
d = distance of objective lens of telescope of the eye piece 0 = 10
fe
D = Distance b/w Object and telescope
λD ⇒ f0 = 10 fe
x= Put the value in eqn(i)
d
10fe + fe = 44
5000 × 10 −10 × 1000 fe = 4cm
Hence, x =
0.1 Focal length of the objective (f0)
x = 5 × 10–3m f0 + fe = 44
x = 5mm f0 = 44 – 4 = 40 cm
91. Four lenses of focal length ±15 cm and ±150 cm
89. In compound microscope the magnification is
are available for making a telescope. To
95, and the distance of object from objective lens
produce the largest magnification, the focal
1/3.8 cm and focal length of objective is ¼ cm.
What is the magnification of eye pieces when length of the eyepiece should be
final image is formed at least distance of distinct Skeâ otjoMe&keâ yeveeves kesâ efueS heâeskeâme otefjÙeeW ±15 cm
vision/Skeâ Ùeewefiekeâ met#ceoMeea keâe DeeJe&Oeve 95 nw leLee Deewj ±150 cm kesâ Ûeej ueWme GheueyOe nQ~ DeefOekeâlece
DeefYeo=MÙekeâ uesvme mes efyecye keâer otjer 1/3.8 cm nw DeeJeOe&ve GlheVe keâjves kesâ efueS vesef$ekeâe keâer heâeskeâme otjer
DeefYeo=MÙekeâ uesvme keâer Heâeskeâme otjer 1/4 cm nw lees nesveer ÛeeefnS:
DeefYeves$e keâe DeeJeOe&ve efkeâlevee nesiee Ùeefo Deefvlece (a) +15 cm
(b) +150 cm
Øeefleefyecye mhe° Âef° keâer vÙetvelece otjer hej yevelee nw : (c) –150 cm
(d) –15 cm
(a) 5 (b) 10 AIPMT-1994
(c) 100 (d) None/keâesF& veneR Ans. (a) : Given: Four lens of focal length ± 15 cm & ±
AIPMT-1999 150 cm are available for making a telescope.
Ans. (a) : Magnification of compound microscope, f
∵ Magnifying power of telescope, m = 0
M = 95 fe
1 To produce largest magnification f0 > fe and both
Distance of object (u0) = cm
3.8 should be positive (convex lens)
1 Thus, f0 = + 150 cm & fe = + 15 cm
Focal length (f0) = cm
4 Hence, focal length of eyepiece = + 15 cm.

Physics 526 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Triangle form in figure
23.8 A Plane Mirror

92. A beam of light from a source L is incident (90º-θ ) 1

normally on a plane mirror fixed at a certain α
distance x from the source. The beam is
reflected back as a spot on a scale placed just
above the source L. When the mirror is rotated
through a small angle θ, the spot of the light is (90º-θ ) 1

found to move through a distance y on the Sum of internal angle of triangle = 180
scale. The angle θ is given by: α + 70 + 90 – θ1 = 180
efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe œeesle, L mes, ØekeâeMe keâe Skeâ efkeâjCehegbpe, θ1 = α – 20
Gmemes x otjer hej efmLele Skeâ meceuele oheCe& hej uecyeJeled 90 − θ1
heÌ[lee nw~ Fme efkeâjCehegbpe kesâ Jeeheme meceleue mes, œeesle L α+ = 90
2
kesâ "erkeâ Thej efmLele Skeâ hewceeves (mkesâue) hej ØekeâeMe 90 − θ1
keâe Skeâ efyevog yevelee nw~ ohe&Ce keâes efkeâmeer Deuhe keâesCe, θ θ1 + 20 + = 90
2
mes Iegceeve hej, Ùen ØekeâeMe efyevog Gme hewceeves hej y otjer mes 2θ1 + 90 – θ1 = 2 × 70 ⇒ θ1 = 50º
efJeÛeefuele nes peelee nww~ lees, θ keâe ceeve nesiee: 94. A tall man of height 6 feet, want to see his full
y y image. Then required minimum length of the
(a) (b)
2x x mirror will be:/6 heâerš uecyee Skeâ Deeoceer Gmekeâer hetCe&

(c)
x
(d)
x Øeefleefyecye osKevee Ûeenlee nw lees ohe&Ce keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee
2y y vÙetvelece uecyeeF& nesieer –
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 (a) 12 feet/heâerš (b) 3 feet/heâerš
Ans. (a) : (c) 6 feet/heâerš
light spot
(d) Any length/keâesF& Yeer uecyeeF&
AIPMT-2000
θ Ans. (b) : A tall man of height 6 feet, want to see his
full image. The minimum required length of mirror is
half the height of an object.
6feet
∴ Minimum length of mirror =
If mirror is rotates by angle θ and angle of refraction is 2
2θ = 3 feet
y
tan2 θ =
x 23.9 The Human Eye
for small angle tan 2θ ≈ 2θ
y 95. A person can see clearly objects only when they
2θ=
x lie between 50 cm and 400 cm from his eyes. In
order to increase the maximum distance of
y
θ= distinct vision to infinity, the type and power of
2x the correcting lens, the person has to use, will be
93. Two plane mirrors are inclined at 70o. A ray Skeâ JÙeefòeâ Deheveer DeeBKe mes kesâJeue 50 cm Deewj 400
incident on one mirror at angle θ after cm otjer kesâ yeerÛe efmLele JemlegDeeW keâes megmhe° osKe mekeâlee
reflection falls on second mirror and is
nw~ megmhe° oMe&ve keâer DeefOekeâlece otjer keâes Devevle lekeâ
reflected from there parallel to first mirror.
The value of θ is/oes meceleue ohe&Ce 70 hej Pegkesâ ngS
0 keâjves kesâ efueS Gme JÙeefòeâ keâes efkeâme Øekeâej kesâ Deewj
nQ~ Skeâ ohe&Ce hej keâesCe θ hej Deeheeflele efkeâjCe hejeJele&ve efkeâleveer Meefòeâ kesâ mebMeesOekeâ ueWme keâer DeeJeMÙekeâlee nesieer?
kesâ yeeo otmejs oe&Ce hej heÌ[leer nw Deewj Jeneb mes henues ohe&Ce (a) convex, +2.25 diopter/Gòeue, + 2.25 [eÙeeshšj
kesâ meceeveeblej hejeJeefle&le nesleer nw~ θ keâe ceeve nw- (b) concave, -0.25 diopter/DeJeleue, - 0.25 [eÙeeshšj
(a) 50 o
(b) 45 o
(c) cocave-0.2 diopter/DeJeleue, - 0.2 [eÙeeshšj
(c) 30o (d) 55o (d) convex, + 0.5 diopter/Gòeue, + 0.5 [eÙeeshšj
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Physics 527 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): For maximum distance of distinct vision λ
So, image of object at infinity is to be formed at 400 cm ie, θ = ……(1)
d
or 4m. If 'y' is the minimum resolution between two objects at
Using lens formula, distance D from eye, then-
Given, v = –4m, u = – ∞ y
1 1 1 1 1 θ= …….(2)
Power, P = = − = + D
f v u −4 ∞ from (1) & (2)
1 y λ
P = = −0.25D =
f D d
negative sign implies concave mirror.
λD
96. For a normal eye, the cornea of eye provides a ⇒y= ……(3)
converging power of 40 D and the least d
converging power of the eye lens behind the Given, λ = 5000Ǻ = 5×10–7m
cornea is 20 D. Using this information, the D = 50m, d = 2 mm = 2×10–3m
distance between the retina and the cornea-eye Substitute above value in (3)
lens can be estimated to be -
5 × 10−7 × 50
meeceevÙe ves$e ceW keâe@efve&Ùee (mJeÛÚ ceb[ue) keâer DeefYemeejer y=
2 × 10 −3
Meefòeâ 40 D nw leLee keâe@efve&Ùee kesâ heerÚs ves$e ueWme keâer
= 12.5×10–3m
vÙetvelece DeefYemeejer Meefòeâ 20D nw~ Fme metÛevee mes ves$e kesâ y = 1.25 cm
jsefšvee (Âef°hešue) leLee uesvme kesâ yeerÛe keâer Devegceeefvele
otjer nesieer: 23.10 NCERT Exemplar Problems
(a) 1.5 cm (b) 5 cm
(c) 2.5 cm (d) 1.67 cm 98. A ray of light incident at an angle θ on a
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 refracting face of a prism emerges from the
Ans. (d) : Given that other face normally. If the angle of the prism is
Power of cornea, P1 = 40 D 5º and the prism is made of a material of
Power of lens, P2 = 20D refractive index 1.5, the angle of incidence
Combination of power of both lens is/efkeâmeer efØep]ce kesâ Skeâ DeheJele&keâ heâuekeâ hej keâesCe θ
P = P1 + P2 yeveeles ngS Deeheeflele nesves Jeeueer Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe otj
P=20D + 40D = 60D
heâuekeâ mes DeefYeuecyele: efveie&le nesleer nw~ Ùeefo efØep]ce keâe
Focal length f = 1/p keâesCe 5º nw leLee efØep]ce 1.5 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ heoeLe& keâe
1 yevee nw, lees Deeheleve keâesCe nw
F= = 0.0167m (a) 7.5º (b) 5º
60D
(c) 15º (d) 25º
F = 1.67cm
Ans. (a) :
97. Diameter of human eye lens is 2 mm. What will
be the minimum distance between two points to
resolve them, which are situated at a distance
of 50 meter from eye. The wavelength of light is
5000 Å / Skeâ ceeveJe ves$e kesâ ueWme keâe JÙeeme 2 efceceer nw~
ves$e mes 50 ceeršj keâer otjer hej efmLele oes efyevogDeeW keâes Given,
efJeYesefole keâjves kesâ efueÙes Gvekesâ ceOÙe keâer vÙetvelece otjer Angle of the prism, A = 5º
keäÙee nesieer, peyeefkeâ ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowOe& 5000 Å nw - Refractive index, µ = 1.5
(a) 2.32 m (b) 4.28 mm angle of emergence = i2 = r2 = 0
(c) 1.25 cm (d) 12.48 cm deviation, δ = (µ – 1)A
AIPMT-2002 ⇒ δ = (1.5 – 1)5º
Ans. (c) : ⇒ δ = 0.5 × 5
(i) Angular limit of resolution of eye is the ratio of = 2.5º
wavelength of light to diameter of eye lens. If ray emerges normally then,
(ii) Angular limit of resolution of eye i2 = r2 = 0
Wavelength of light As, A = r1 + r2
=
Diameter of eyelens ⇒ r1 = A = 5 0

Physics 528 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Applying Snell's law at point of incidence Ans. (c):
sin i1
µ=
sin r1
For small angled prism,
i When an object approaches a convergent lens from the
µ = 1 ⇒ i1 = µr1 = 1.5 × 5º
r1 left of the lens with a uniform speed of 5m/s, the image
moves away from the lens with a non-uniform
⇒ i1 = 7.5º
acceleration.
99. A short pulse of white light is incident from air The image starts at a uniform speed but gets accelerated
to a glass slab at normal incidence. After going from 2F to F, the image goes from 2F to infinity.
travelling through the slab, the first colour to When the image is at 2F, both the object and image will
emerge is/MJesle ØekeâeMe keâe Skeâ ueIeg mhebo JeeÙeg mes have the same speed.
keâeBÛe kesâ Skeâ muewye hej uecyeJeled Deeheeflele neslee nw~ 101. A passenger in an aeroplane shall/JeeÙegÙeeve ceW
muewye mes ieg]pejves kesâ heMÛeeled meyemes henues efveie&le nesves keâesF& Ùee$eer
Jeeuee JeCe& nesiee~ (a) never see a rainbow./keâYeer Yeer FvõOeveg<e veneR osKe
(a) blue/veeruee (b) green/nje heelee nw~
(c) violet/yeQieveer (d) red./ueeue (b) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow
as concentric circles./ ØeeLeefcekeâ leLee efÉleerÙekeâ
Ans. (d) : As the velocity of wave is given by relation v
FvõOeveg<e keâes mebkesâvõer Je=òeeW kesâ ™he ceW osKe heelee nw~
= νλ
(c) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow
When light ray goes from one medium to other medium, as concentric arcs./ØeeLeefcekeâ leLee efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e
the frequency of light remains unchanged.
keâes mebkesâvõer Deeke&â kesâ ™he ceW osKe heelee nw~
Hence, ν ∝ λ or greater the wavelength, greater the
(d) shall never see a secondary rainbow./keâYeer Yeer
speed.
So, The light of red colour is of the highest wave length
efÉleerÙekeâ FvõOeveg<e veneR osKe heelee nw~
and with the highest speed. Ans. (b) : The passenger in an aeroplane shall see the
Therefore, after travelling through the slab, the red primary and the secondary rainbow in the form of
colour emerges first. concentric circles. Because the rays of light will
undergo the phenomenon of total internal reflection
Key point :
from the secondary droplets also.
According to Cauchy relationship,
When the light ray will pass from water to air then it
1
µ∝ 2 gets refracted and angle is known as critical angle.
λ Since the passenger is in aeroplane and also there is no
Smaller the wave length higher the refractive index. ground ahead of him, so the passenger will see the
100. An object approaches a convergent lens from rainbow as concentric circles.
the left of the lens with a uniform speed 5 m s–1 102. You are given four sources of light each one
and stops at the focus. The image/Skeâ efyebye efkeâmeer providing a light of a single colour - red, blue,
DeefYemeejer ueWme kesâ yeeFË Deesj mes 5m/s keâer Skeâmeceeve green and yellow. Suppose the angle of
refraction for a beam of yellow light
Ûeeue mes Gheieceve keâjlee nw Deewj heâeskeâme hej peekeâj ®keâ corresponding to a particular angle of
peelee nw~ Øeefleefyebye incidence at the interface of two media is 90°.
(a) moves away from the lens with an uniform Which of the following statements is correct, if
speed 5 m s–1/5 m/s keâer Skeâmeceeve Ûeeue mes ueWme mes the source of yellow light is replaced with that
otj ieefle keâjlee nw~ of other lights without changing the angle of
(b) moves away from the lens with an uniform incidence?/Deehekeâes ØekeâeMe kesâ Ûeej œeesle efoS ieS nQ,
acceleration/Skeâmeceeve lJejCe mes ueWme mes otj ieefle ef peveceW mes ØelÙeskeâ mes Skeâue JeCe&-ueeue, veeruee, nje leLee
keâjlee nw~ heeruee ØekeâeMe efceuelee nw~ ceeve ueerefpeS heerues ØekeâeMe kesâ
(c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform Skeâ efkeâjCe hegbpe kesâ efueS oes ceeOÙeceeW kesâ Deblejehe=‰ hej
acceleration/Demeceeve lJejCe mes ueWme mes otj ieefle efkeâmeer efJeMes<e Deeheleve keâesCe kesâ efueS mebiele DeheJele&ve
keâjlee nw~ keâesCe 90º nw~ Ùeefo Deeheleve keâesCe keâes heefjJeefle&le efkeâS
(d) moves towards the lens with a non-uniform yeiewj heerues ØekeâeMe œeesle keâes otmejs ØekeâeMe œeesleeW mes
acceleration./Demeceeve lJejCe mes ueWme keâer Deesj ieefle yeoue efoÙee peeS lees efvecveefueefKele keâLeveeW ceW mes keâewve-
keâjlee nw~ mee keâLeve mener nw?
Physics 529 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) The beam of red light would undergo total If C is small, µ will be large.
internal reflection./ueeue ØekeâeMe kesâ efkeâjCe hegbpe ceW ∴ C will be smallest for this colour.
hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve nesiee~ Hence, blue colour will undergo total internal reflection.
(b) The beam of red light would bend towards 103. The radius of curvature of the curved surface
normal while it gets refracted through the of a plano-convex lens is 20 cm. If the
second medium./otmejs ceeOÙece ceW DeheJeefle&le nesves hej refractive index of the material of the lens be
ueeue ØekeâeMe keâe efkeâjCe hegbpe DeefYeuebye keâer Deesj cegÌ[ 1.5, it will/efkeâmeer meceleue-Gòeue ueWme kesâ Je›eâ he=‰ keâer
peeSiee~ Je›eâlee ef$epÙee 20 mesceer. nw~ Ùeefo ueWme kesâ heoeLe& keâe
(c) The beam of blue light would undergo total DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5 nes, lees Ùen-
internal reflection./veerues ØekeâeMe kesâ efkeâjCe hegbpe ceW (a) act as a convex lens only for the objects that
hetCe& Deevleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve nesiee~ lie on its curved side./Gve efyebyeeW kesâ efueS ner Gòeue
(d) The beam of green light would bend away ueWme keâer YeeBefle keâeÙe& keâjsiee pees Fmekesâ Jeef›eâle Yeeie keâer
from the normal as it gets refracted through Deesj efmLele nQ~
the second medium./otmejs ceeOÙece ceW DeheJeefle&le nesves (b) act as a concave lens for the objects that lie
hej njs ØekeâeMe keâe efkeâjCe hegbpe DeefYeuebye mes otj keâer Deesj on its curved side./Jeef›eâle Yeeie keâer Deesj efmLele efyebyeeW
cegÌ[ peeSiee~ kesâ efueS DeJeleue ueWme keâer YeeBefle keâeÙe& keâjsiee~
Ans. (c) : The beam of blue light would undergo total (c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on
internal reflection. which the object lies./Fme yeele keâe OÙeeve efkeâS efyevee
According to Cauchy relationship, Smaller the efkeâ efyebye Fmekesâ efkeâme Yeeie keâer Deesj efmLele nw, Gòej ueWme
wavelength higher the refractive index and keâer YeeBefle keâeÙe& keâjsiee~
consequently smaller the critical angle. (d) act as a concave lens irrespective of side on
which the object lies./Fme yeele keâe OÙeeve efkeâS efyevee
efkeâ efyebye Fmekesâ efkeâme Yeeie keâer Deesj efmLele nw, DeJeleue
ueWme keâer YeeBefle keâeÙe& keâjsiee~
Ans. (c) : Step 1: Find the focal length of the curved
side.
Focus of lens is given by,
We know that,v = fλ
1 (  1 1 
The frequency of wave remains unchanged with the = n − 1)  −  ......(i)
medium so the fλ remains unchanged also. f  1
R R 2 

The critical angle, Given: Radius of curvature of curved surface,

1 R1 = + 20 cm
sin C =
µ Radius of curvature of plane side,
1 R2 = ∞
Also, velocity of light v ∝ Consider, when the object is on the curved side,
µ
R1 = + 20 cm
According to VIBGYOR, among all the given sources
R2 = ∞
of light, the blue light will have the smallest
Substituting the values in eqn (i) we get
wavelength.
1  1 1
Thus, λblue < λyellow = (1.5 − 1)  − 
Hence f  20 ∞ 
vblue < vyellow 1 0.5 5
= =
It means, µblue > µ yellow f 20 200
The Critical angle for blue is less than yellow colour, 1 1
=
the critical angle is least which facilitates total internal f 40
reflection for the beam of blue light. ∴ f = + 40 cm
For yellow light, r = 90 As the focal length is positive, the lens acts as a convex
When, i = C lens.
Since i is kept C, which should be smaller for total Step 2: Find the focal length of the plane side.
reflection. Now,
1 Radius of curvature of curved surface,
µ∝
sin C R1 = ∞

Physics 530 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, if the object is at the plane side of the lens, (a) 1 (b) 2
R1 = ∞ (c) 3 (d) 4
R2 = – 20 cm Ans. (b) : A ray passing through the focus of a concave
By putting the values in eqn (i) we get, mirror after reflection becomes parallel to the principal
1 1 1  axis. And it is represented by ray (2) in the given figure.
= (1.5 − 1)  − 
f  ∞ − 20  106. The optical density of turpentine is higher than
1 0.5 5 that of water while its mass density is lower.
= = Figure shows a layer of turpentine floating over
f 20 200
water in a container. For which one of the four
1 1
= rays incident on turpentine in figure, the path
f 40 shown is correct?/leejheerve keâe ØekeâeefMekeâ IevelJe peue
∴ f = + 40 cm mes DeefOekeâ nw peyeefkeâ Fmekeâe õJÙeceeve IevelJe peue mes
As the focal length is positive, the lens acts as a convex
lens.
keâce nw~ efÛe$e ceW Skeâ yele&ve ceW peue kesâ Thej leejheerve keâer
104. The phenomena involved in the reflection of Skeâ hele& lewjleer oMee&F& ieF& nw~ efÛe$e ceW leejheerve kesâ Thej
radiowaves by ionosphere is similar to/DeeÙeve Deeheeflele Ûeej efkeâjCeeW ceW mes efkeâmekeâe heLe mener oMee&Ùee
ceb[ue (DeeÙeveesefm]heâÙej) Éeje jsef[Ùees lejbieeW kesâ hejeJele&ve ieÙee nw?
ceW meefcceefuele heefjIešvee
(a) reflection of light by a plane mirror./meceleue
ohe&Ce Éeje ØekeâeMe kesâ hejeJele&ve kesâ meceeve nw~
(b) total internal reflection of light in air during a
mirage./cejerefÛekeâe kesâ meceÙe JeeÙeg ceW nesves Jeeues ØekeâeMe
kesâ hetCe& Deebleefjkeâ hejeJele&ve kesâ meceeve nw~
(c) dispersion of light by water molecules during
the formation of a rainbow./FvõOeveg<e kesâ yeveles (a) 1 (b) 2
meceÙe peue kesâ DeCegDeeW Éeje ØekeâeMe kesâ heefj#esheCe (JeCe&- (c) 3 (d) 4
efJe#esheCe) kesâ meceeve nw~ Ans. (b) :
(d) scattering of light by the particles of air./JeeÙeg
kesâ keâCeeW Éeje ØekeâeMe kesâ ØekeâerCe&ve kesâ meceeve nw~
Ans. (b) : The phenomena are very similar to total
internal reflection of light in the air during a mirage.
The ionosphere layer of atmosphere around earth is
responsible for reflecting the radio waves. And as the
angle of incidence is greater than critical angle. In the fig. ,the path shown for the ray 2 is correct. The
105. The direction of a ray of light incident on a ray suffers two refractions. At A, ray goes from air to
concave mirror is shown by PQ while turpentine, bending towards normal. At B, ray goes
directions in which the ray would travel after from turpentine to water (i.e. from denser to rarer
reflection is shown by four rays marked 1, 2, 3 medium) bending away from normal.
and 4. Which of the four rays correctly shows • The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of
the direction of reflected ray?/efkeâmeer DeJeleue ohe&Ce water while its mass density is lower.
hej Deeheeflele ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe keâer efoMee PQ Éeje oMee&F& • Water has the highest optical density because the
ieF& nw peyeefkeâ hejeJele&ve kesâ heMÛeeled efpeve efoMeeDeeW ceW Ùen speed of light is less in water compared to the speed of
efkeâjCe ieceve keâj mekeâleer nw Jen 1, 2, 3 leLee 4 Éeje light in vacuum, air and glass.
efÛeefÖle Ûeej efkeâjCeeW efÛe$e Éeje oMee&F& ieF& nw~ ÛeejeW 107. A car is moving with a constant speed of 60 km
efkeâjCeeW ceW mes keâewve-meer efkeâjCe hejeJeefle&le efkeâjCe keâer h–1 on a straight road. Looking at the rear view
mirror, the driver finds that the car following
efoMee keâes mener oMee&leer nw? him is at a distance of 100 m and is
approaching with a speed of 5 km h–1. In order
to keep track of the car in the rear, the driver
begins to glance alter natively at the rear and
side mirror of his car after every 2 s till the
other car overtakes. If the two cars were
maintaining their speeds, which of the
following statement (s) is/are correct?
Physics 531 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ meerOeer meÌ[keâ hej keâesF& keâej 60 km h–1 keâer
Skeâmeceeve Ûeeue mes ieefleceeve nw~ heMÛe ÂMÙe ohe&Ce mes
osKeves hej Ûeeuekeâ heelee nw efkeâ Gmekeâe heerÚe keâj jner
Skeâ keâej 100m otjer hej nw leLee 5 km h–1 keâer Ûeeue
mes Gmekeâer Deesj Dee jner nw~ heerÚs Deeleer ngF& keâej hej Âef°
jKeves kesâ efueS Ûeeuekeâ ØelÙeskeâ 2s kesâ heMÛeele Deheveer • Object moving along the principal axis :
keâej kesâ heMÛe ÂMÙe leLee heeMJe& ÂMÙe ohe&Ce ceW yeejer-yeejer On differentiating the mirror formula with respect to
mes osKevee ØeejcYe keâjlee nw, peye lekeâ efkeâ otmejer keâej dv
2
 v  du
time, we get = –  .
Deeies veneR efvekeâue peeleer~ Ùeefo oesveeW keâejW Deheveer ÛeeueeW dt  u  dt
keâes yeveeS jKeleer nQ, lees efvecve keâLeve (keâLeveeW) ceW mes 2

= – 
f  du
keâewve-mee/mes keâLeve mener nw?  .
 u – f  dt
(a) The speed of the car in the rear is 65 km h–1./ Where dv is the velocity of image along the principal
heerÚs Deeleer ngF& keâej keâer Ûeeue 65 km h–1 nw~ dt
axis and du/dt is the velocity of object along the
(b) In the side mirror, the car in the rear would principal axis.
appear to approach with a speed of 5 km h–1
108. There are certain material developed in
to the driver of the leading car./Deeies Ûeue jner laboratories which have a negative refractive
keâej kesâ Ûeeuekeâ keâes heeMJe& ÂMÙe ohe&Ce ceW heerÚs keâer keâej index. A ray incident from air (medium 1) into
such a medium (medium 2) shall follow a path
5kmh Ûeeue mes Deeleer ngF& Øeleerle nesieer~
–1
given by/ØeÙeesieMeeuee ceW kegâÚ Ssmes heoeLe& efJekeâefmele
(c) In the rear view mirror, the speed of the efkeâS ieS nQ efpevekeâe DeheJele&veebkeâ $e+Ceelcekeâ neslee nw
approaching car would appear to decrease as efÛe$e ceW~ Ssmes (ceeOÙece 1) ceW JeeÙeg (ceeOÙece 2) ceW
the distance between the cars decreases./pewmes- Deeheeflele Skeâ efkeâjCe efvecve ceW mes efkeâme heLe keâe
pewmes keâejeW kesâ yeerÛe otjer Iešleer peeleer nw heMÛe ÂMÙe ohe&Ce DevegmejCe keâjsieer?
ceW, Gmekeâer Deesj Deeleer ngF& keâej keâer Ûeeue Iešleer ngF&
Øeleerle nesleer nw~ i
1
i
1
(a) IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
(b) IIIII IIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
(d) In the side mirror, the speed of the r
r 2 2
approaching car would appear to increase as
the distance between the cars decreases./pewmes-
pewmes keâejeW kesâ yeerÛe otjer Iešleer peeleer nw ÂMÙe ohe&Ce ceW
heeme Deeleer ngF& keâej keâer Ûeeue yeÌ{leer ngF& Øeleerle nesleer nw~ i r
1
i
1
(c) IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
(d) IIIII IIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
Ans. (d) : we know, mirror formula is given by, 2 2
1 1 1
= +
f v u Ans. (a) :
differentiating both side we get,
dv du
⇒ 2 =– 2
v u
dv –v 2
⇒ =
du u 2 Using Snell's law,
So when rear car approaches, initially it appear at rest as sin i
image is formed at focus. When car approaches nearer µ=
sin r
this speed will appear to increase. ⇒ sin i = µ sin r
Key Point : sin i
⇒ sin r =
• Object placed in front of mirror : For all positions of µ
object in front of a mirror, image is virtual erect and If µ is negative, then r will be in clock wise direction
smaller in size. from normal.
• As object moves towards the pole, magnification ∴ sin r is negative.
increases and tends to unit at pole Hence, r is negative.

Physics 532 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
24.
Wave Optics
3. Which one of the following phenomena is not
24.1 Huygens Principle explained by Huygen's construction of
wavefront?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâme heefjIešvee keâer
1. ε0 and µ0 are the electric permittivity and JÙeeKÙee neFieWme kesâ lejb«eeie efmeæeble Éeje veneR keâer peeleer nw?
magnetic permeability of free space (a) Refraction/DeheJele&ve
respectively. If the corresponding quantities of (b) Reflection/hejeJele&ve
a medium are 2 ε0 and 1.5 µ0 respectively. The (c) Diffraction/efJeJele&ve
refractive index of the medium will nearly be (d) Origin of spectra/mheskeäš^ce keâe GÆJe
ε0 Deewj µ0 ›eâceMe: cegòeâ mLeeve keâer efJeÅegle heejiecÙelee AIPMT-1988
Deewj ÛegbyekeâerÙe heejiecÙelee nQ~ Ùeefo efkeâmeer ceeOÙece keâer Ans. (d) : Origin of spectra is explained by quantum
mebiele jeefMeÙeeB ›eâceMe: 2 ε0 Deewj 1.5 µ0 nw, ceeOÙece keâe theory. A spectrum line is produced when the electron
returns to a smaller permissible orbit. Only one line is
DeheJele&veebkeâ ueieYeie nesiee produced in a single transition, and the actual spectrum
(a) 3 (b) 2 of many lines represents the integrated effect of a large
number of transitions between the different permissible
(c) 2 (d) 3
stationary states. Spectral lines are produced by
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 transitions of electron with in atoms or ions.
Ans. (d) : Given; µ = 1.5µo 4. An electromagnetic radiation of frequency n,
ε = 2εo wavelength λ, travelling with velocity v in air,
We know that the refractive index of the medium is- enters a glass slab of refractive index µ. The
µε frequency, wavelength and velocity of light in
= the glass slab will be respectively
µo εo
DeeJe=efòe n, lejbieowIÙe& λ keâe Skeâ JewÅegleÛegbyekeâerÙe
1.5µo × 2εo efJeefkeâjCe JeeÙeg ceW v Jesie mes ieceve keâjles ngS DeheJele&veebkeâ
=
µ o εo µ kesâ Skeâ keâeBÛe kesâ iegškesâ ceW ØeJesMe keâjlee nw~ keâeBÛe kesâ
iegškeâs ceW ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJe=efòe, lejbieowIÙe& Deewj Jesie
n= 3
›eâceMe: neWies:
2. The frequency of a light wave in a material is 2 × v 2n λ
1014 Hz and wavelength is 5000 Å. The refractive (a) n, 2λ and (b) , and v
index of material will be:/Skeâ ceeOÙece ceW efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe µ µ µ
lejbie keâer DeeJe=efòe 2 × 1014 Hz nw Deewj Fmekeâe lejbie owOÙe& n λ v λ v
(c) , and (d) n, and
5000 Å nw~ ceeOÙece keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ nesiee:- µ µ µ µ µ
(a) 1.33 (b) 1.40 AIPMT-1997
(c) 1.50 (d) 3.00 Ans. (d) : Given, Frequency = n
AIPMT-2007 Wave length = λ
Ans. (d) : Given frequency f = 2 × 10 Hz 14 Velocity of air = v
Wavelength λ = 5000Aº Refractive index of glass slab = µ
Refractive index µ = ? • When electromagnetic wave enters in other medium,
frequency remains unchanged while wavelength and
c velocity become change.
We know, µ =
v So, For electromagnetic wave entering from air to glass
8 slab (m)
Where, c = speed of light = 3×10 m/s)
v = f ⋅λ λ v
Wave length λ' = and velocity v ' =
c 3 ×108
3 × 108 ( µ ) µ
So, µ= = = =3
f ⋅ λ 2 ×1014 × 5000 ×10−10 108 and frequency = n

Physics 533 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
5. The refractive index of water is 1.33. What will be (a) depend on intensity of refracted light/DeheJeefle&le
the speed of light in water?/peue keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ ØekeâeMe leer›elee hej efveYe&j keâjsieer
1.33 nw~ peue ceW ØekeâeMe keâer Ûeeue keäÙee nesieer? (b) same/meceeve nesieer
(a) 4×108 m/s (b) 1.33×108 m/s (c) smaller/Úesšer nesieer
(c) 3×108 m/s (d) 2.25×108 m/s
(d) larger/yeÌ[er nesieer
AIPMT-1996
AIPMT-1992, 1991
Ans. (d) : Given, c = 3×108 m/s
Ans. (c) : Given, Refractive index = 1.5
Refractive index of water = 1.33
Mathematically, the refractive index of a medium is
We know that,
c
Speed of light in vaccum written as µ =
Refractive index = v
Speed of light in water
1
µ∝
3 × 108 v
1.33 =
Speed of light in water The speed of a light wave is given by the relation, v =
λf
3 × 108
Speed of light in water = Where λ is the wavelength and f is the frequency.
1.33
8 1 1
= 2.25×10 m/s v ∝ λ and µ ∝ ⇒ λ∝
6. Light travels through a glass plate of thickness
v µ
t and having a refractive index µ. If c is the Since, refractive index of medium is inversely
velocity of light in vacuum, the time taken by proportional to the wavelength.
light to travel this thickness of glass is Hence, wavelength of refracted light will be smaller.
ØekeâeMe DeheJele&veebkeâ µ Jeeues, t ceesšeF& kesâ Skeâ keâeBÛe kesâ 8. Green light of wavelength 5460 Å is incident on
iegškesâ mes neskeâj ieceve keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo efveJee&le ceW ØekeâeMe an air-glass interface. If the refractive index of
glass is 1.5, the wavelength of light in glass
keâe Jesie c nw, lees keâeBÛe keâer Fme ceesšeF& keâes leÙe keâjves ceW
would be (c = 3 × 108 m/s–1)
ØekeâeMe Éeje efueÙee ieÙee meceÙe nw: 5460 Å lejbieowIÙe& keâe nje ØekeâeMe JeeÙeg-keâeBÛe Deblejehe=‰
t µt hej Deeheeflele neslee nw~ Ùeefo keâeBÛe keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ 1.5
(a) (b)
µc c nw, lees keâeBÛe ceW ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowIÙe& nesieer:
tc (c = 3 × 108 m/s–1)
(c) tµc (d)
µ (a) 3640 Å (b) 5460 Å
AIPMT-1996 (c) 4861 Å
c (d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
Ans. (b) : Velocity of light in a medium, v = AIPMT-1991
µ
Ans. (a) : Given,
Where, µ is the refractive index
Refractive index (µ) = 1.5
c is the velocity of light in vacuum c = 3×108 m/s
t λa = 5460 Aº
Time taken =
v We know that,
Now we substitute the value of v from above eqn c
v= and v ∝ λ
t µ
Time taken =
c λa
µ ⇒ λg =
µ
µt where λg is wavelength in glass and λa is wavelength in
⇒ Time taken =
c air
7. A beam of monochromatic light is refracted λ 5460
⇒ λg = a = = 3640 Å
from vacuum into a medium of refractive index µ 1.5
1.5. The wavelength of refracted light will be. 9. A star, which is emitting radiation at a
Skeâ SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâer lejbie efveJee&led mes DeheJele&veebkeâ wavelength of 5000 Å, is approaching the earth
1.5 Jeeues ceeOÙece ceW DeheJeefle&le nesleer nw~ DeheJeefle&le with a velocity of 1.5 × 106 m/s. The change in
wavelength of the radiation as received on the
ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowIÙe& nessieer: earth is
Physics 534 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ leeje, pees 5000 Å lejbieowIÙe& hej efJeefkeâjCe keâes n 2 n
Glmeefpe&le keâj jne nw, 1.5 × 106 m/s kesâ Jesie mes he=LJeer (a)
n +1
(b)
n +1
keâer Deesj Dee jne nw~ efJeefkeâjCe kesâ lejbieowIÙe& ceW heefjJele&ve
n
2 n
Øeehle neslee nw, peye Jen he=LJeer hej nesiee~ (c) (d)
(n + 1)2
(n + 1)2
(a) 25Å (b) 100Å
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) 2.5Å NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
AIPMT-1995 Ans. (b) : Given the ratio of internsity of two coherent
Ans. (a) : Given, I n
sources is n i.e. 1 =
Wavelength, λ= 5000 Å I2 1
Velocity, v = 1.5×106 m/s
( )
2

The formula for fractional change in wavelength is Maximum intensity is given by Imax = I1 + I 2
given by
( )
2
∆λ v v Minimum intensity is given by Imin = I1 – I 2
= ⇒ ∆λ = λ ×
λ
( ) ( )
c c 2 2

Substituting the value in equation I max − I min I1 + I 2 − I1 − I 2

⇒ =
I max + I min
( ) ( )
2 2
1.5 ×106  I1 + I 2 + I1 − I2
∆λ= 5000 × 
 3 ×108 
4 I1I 2
5000 ×1.5 ×106 ×10–8 =
= = 25 Å 2 ( I1 + I 2 )
3
Dividing numerator and denominator by I2
24.2 Coherent and Incoherent I1
2
Addition of Waves required ratio = =
I2
2 n
 I1  n +1
10. Two coherent sources of light interfere and  + 1
produce fringe pattern on a screen. For central  I2 
maximum, the phase difference between the 12. Interference is possible in
two waves will be, JÙeeflekeâjCe mebYeJe nw:
ØekeâeMe kesâ oes keâueemebyeæ œeesle JÙeeflekeâjCe keâjkesâ heo&s (a) light waves only/kesâJeue ØekeâeMe lejbieeW kesâ efueS
hej eføebâpe hewšve& GlheVe keâjles nQ~ kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ kesâ efueS (b) sound waves only/kesâJeue OJeefve lejbieeW kesâ efueS
oesveeW lejbieeW kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej nesiee- (c) both light and sound waves/ØekeâeMe leLee OJeefve
(a) π/2 (b) Zero/MetvÙe oesveeW lejbieeW kesâ efueS
(c) π (d) 3π/2 (d) neither light nor sound waves/ØekeâeMe leLee OJeefve
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
lejbieeW ceW efkeâmeer kesâ efueS Yeer veneR~
Ans. (b) : For central maximum, path difference is zero.
AIPMT-1989
Hence phase difference for coherent sources of light
will be zero. Ans. (c) : Interference is possible in both light and
sound waves because interference is the phenomenon
2π
φ= ∆x shown by waves.
λ Conditions for interference of light waves:-
Where ∆ x is path difference & φ is phase difference. • Coherent sources of light are needed
∆ x = 0 for central maximum • Amplitudes and intensities must be nearly equal to
⇒ Phase difference φ = 0 produce sufficient contrast between maxima and
minima.
11. The Interference pattern is obtained with two
• The source must be considered as a point source of
coherent light sources of intensity ratio n. In the
light.
I max − Imin
interference pattern, the ratio will be. Condition for interference of two sound waves:-
Imax + Imin • The phase difference between the waves must remain
ØekeâeMe kesâ oes keâueemecyeæ œeesleeW keâe leer›elee Devegheele n constant.
nw~ Fvekesâ DeOÙeejesheCe mes Øeehle JÙeeflekeâjCe hewšve& ceW • The amplitudes of the waves should be nearly equal.
I −I • The displacement produced by the two waves should
Devegheele max min keâe ceeve nesiee :- be along the same straight line.
I +I
max min

Physics 535 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(b) angular separation of the fringes decreases
24.3 Interference of Light Waves and efheâÇvpeeW keâe keâesCeerÙe efJeÛÚso Iešlee nw
Young's Experiment (c) linear separation of the fringes increases
eføeâvpeeW keâe jwefKekeâ efJeÛÚso yeÌ{lee nw
13. For Young's double slit experiment, two (d) linear separation of the fringes decreases
statements are given below:
Statement I : If screen is moved away from the
eføeâvpeeW keâe jwefKekeâ efJeÛÚso Iešlee nw
plane of slits, angular separation of the fringes NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
remains constant. Ans. (c) : In young's double slit experiment, the Fringe
Statement II : If the monochromatic source is width (β) is –
replaced by another monochromatic source of λD
larger wavelength, the angular separation of β=
fringes decreases. d
In the light of the above statements, choose the Where, D = distance between slit and screen
correct answer from the options given below: d = distance between slits
Ùebie kesâ efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie kesâ efueS oes keâLeve efvecveJeled nQ ; λ = wavelength of monochromatic light emitted
keâLeve I : Ùeefo heoe& efPeefjÙeeW kesâ leue mes otj peelee nw, lees from source.
eføeâvpeeW keâe keâesCeerÙe heeLe&keäÙe efveÙele jnlee nw~ • If the screen is moved away from the plane of slits
keâLeve II : Ùeefo SkeâJeCeea œeesle keâes efkeâmeer otmejs DeefOekeâ then from the eq (i) D increases and β (fringe width or
n

linear separation) is also increases.

lejbieowOÙe& kesâ SkeâJeCeea œeesle mes yeoue efoÙee peelee nw, lees
15. In a Young’s double slit experiment, a student
eføeâvpeeW keâe keâesCeerÙe heeLe&keäÙe Iešlee nw ~ observes 8 fringes in a certain segment of
Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ meboYe& ceW, veerÛes efoÙes ieÙes efJekeâuheeW mes screen when a monochromatic light of 600 nm
mener Gòej ÛegveW : wavelength is used. If the wavelength of light is
(a) Statement I is false but Statement II is true./ changed to 400 nm, then the number of fringes
keâLeve I DemelÙe nw hejvleg keâLeve II melÙe nw~ he would observe in the same region of the
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are true./ screen is/Ùebie kesâ efÉ-efPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, peye 600 nm
oesveeW keâLeve I Je keâLeve II melÙe nQ~ lejb ieowOÙe& Jeeuee SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe ØeÙegòeâ neslee nw lees heox
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false./ kesâ efkeâmeer efJeMes<e Yeeie hej Skeâ efJeÅeeLeea 8 eføeâvpeW Øeehle
oesveeW keâLeve I Je keâLeve II DemelÙe nQ~ keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ØekeâeMe keâe lejbieowOÙe& 400 nm hej yeoue
(d) Statement I is true but Statement II is false./ peelee nw, lees Gmekesâ Éeje heox kesâ Gmeer #es$e ceW Øeehle
keâLeve I melÙe nw hejvleg keâLeve II DemelÙe nw~ eføeâvpeeW keâer mebKÙee nw:
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 (a) 12 (b) 6
Ans. (d) : Formula for the angular separation of the (c) 8 (d) 9
fringes – NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
λ Ans. (a) : Given
θ=
d λ1 = 600 nm
where, λ = wavelength of light λ2 = 400 nm
d = separation between the slits Path difference = nλ
From the expression it is clear that the angular We know that when we use fringes of different
separation does not depend on the distance between two wavelength in same path then path difference will
slits. Hence statement I is true.
remain same.
• θ∝λ
n1λ1 = n2λ2
When angular separation of fringes increases,
8×600 = n2×400
wavelength of light also increases. Hence, statement II
is false. 600
n2 = ×8
14. If the screen is moved away from the plane of 400
the slits in a Young's double slit experiment, n 2 = 12
then the:
Ùebie kesâ efÉkeâ-efPejer ØeÙeesie cesW, Ùeefo heox keâes efPeefj&ÙeeW kesâ 16. In Young’s double slit experiment, if the
separation between coherent sources is halved
leue mes otj keâj efoÙee peeS lees and the distance of the screen from the
(a) angular separation of the fringes increases coherent sources is doubled, then the fringe
eføeâvpeeW keâe keâesCeerÙe efJeÛÚso yeÌ{lee nw width becomes:
Physics 536 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ùebie kesâ efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, Ùeefo keâueemebyeæ œeesleeW kesâ Ùebie kesâ efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW Ùeefo oesveeW efPeefjÙeeW mes Deeves
yeerÛe keâe he=Lekeâve DeeOee leLee heox mes keâueemebyeæ œeesleeW Jeeues ØekeâeMe ceW DeejcYe ceW keâesF& keâueevlej veneR nw, lees
keâer otjer keâes oes iegvee keâj efoÙee peeS, lees eføebâpe ÛeewÌ[eF& heeBÛeJeW efveefcve‰ kesâ leodveg™he heox kesâ efkeâmeer efyevog hej
nes peeSieer: heLeevlej nw~
(a) half/DeeOeer (b) four times/Ûeej iegveer
λ λ
(c) one-fourth/Skeâ-ÛeewLeeF& (d) double/oes iegveer (a) 11 (b) 5
2 2
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
NEET (UG) - 18.05.2013 Karnataka λ λ
(c) 10 (d) 9
Ans. (b) : 2 2
λD NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Fringe width, β = λ
d Ans. (d) : Path difference for nth min. = ( 2n − 1)
d 2
on d' = , D ' = 2D (Given) 9λ
2 For fifth minimum path difference (n = 5) =
λD ' 2
New fringe width, β ' = = 4β 19. In Young's double slit experiment the
d'
separation d between the slits is 2 mm, the
17. In a double slit experiment, when light of
wavelength 400 nm was used, the angular wavelength λ of the light used is 5896 Å and
width of the first minima formed on a screen distance D between the screen and slits is 100
placed 1 m away, was found to be 0.2°. What cm. It is found that the angular width of the
will be the angular width of the first minima, if fringes is 0.20°. To increase the fringe angular
the entire experimental apparatus is immersed width to 0.21° (with same λ and D) the
in water? (µwater = 4/3) separation between the slits needs to be
eqkeâmeer efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, peye 400 nm lejbieowOÙe& kesâ changed to / Ùebie kesâ efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, efPeefjÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe
ØekeâeMe keâe GheÙeesie efkeâÙee ieÙee, lees 1m otjer hej efmLele he=LekeäkeâjCe d, 2 mm nw leLee efPejer mes heox keâer otjer D keâes
heox hej yeves henues efveefcve‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& 0.2° 100 cm jKeles ngS lejbieowOÙe& λ = 5896 Å kesâ ØekeâeMe keâe
heeÙeer ieÙeer~ Ùeefo mecemle GhekeâjCe keâes peue ceW [gyees GheÙeesie efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùen heeÙee ieÙee efkeâ eføebâpeeW keâer
efoÙee, lees henues efveefcve‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& efkeâleveer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& 0.20° nw~ leye (GvneR λ Deewj D) eføebâpeeW
nesieer? (µwater = 4/3)
keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& keâes yeÌ{ekeâj 0.21° keâjves kesâ efueS
(a) 0.15° (b) 0.05°
(c) 0.1° (d) 0.266° efPeefjÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe kesâ he=LekeäkeâjCe keâes keâjvee nesiee
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 (a) 1.8 mm (b) 1.9 mm
Ans. (a) : Young's double-slit experiment uses two (c) 1.7 mm (d) 2.1 mm
coherent sources of light placed at a small distance. It NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
helps to find angular fringe width. Ans. (b) In young’s double slit experiment
λ
θ= λ
d Angular width β =
d
Where θ represents angular fringe width, λ represents
wavelength and d represents distance between two slits. Given : β 1 = 0.20
Angular fringe width in air β2 = 0.21
θw µ air λ w d1 = 2mm
= = D = 100 cm
θair µ w λ air
d2 = d
θw 3
= ×1 Now,
θair 4
λ
θw 3 0.20º = ... ( i )
= 2mm
0.2 4 λ
0.21º = ... ( ii )
θw = 0.15º d
18. In a Young’s double slit experiment, if there is Dividing equation (i) by (ii) we get
no initial phase difference between the light 0.20 d
=
from the two slits, a point on the screen 0.21 2mm
corresponding to the fifth minimum has path
difference d = 1.9mm

Physics 537 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
20. Young’s double slit experiment is first Ans. (a):
performed in air and then in a medium other
than air. It is found that 8th bright fringe lies
in the medium where 5th dark fringe lies in air.
The refractive index of the medium is nearly
Ùebie kesâ efÉ efPejer ØeÙeesie keâes henues JeeÙeg ceW Deewj efheâj
efkeâmeer DevÙe ceeOÙece ceW efkeâÙee peelee nQ Ùen heeÙee peelee nw
efkeâ Fme ceeOÙece ceW 8JeeR oerhle eføebâpe leLee JeeÙeg ceW 5JeeR
Deoerhle eføebâpe Skeâ ner mLeeve hej yeveles nQ~ lees, Fme Path difference, ∆x = yd
ceeOÙece keâe DeheJele&veebkeâ nesiee ueieYeie : D
(a) 1.25 (b) 1.59 d 5λ
Here, y = =
(c) 1.69 (d) 1.78 2 2
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 and D = 10 d = 50λ (as d = 5λ)
Ans. (d) : Let y be the distance of 8th bright fringe from  5λ  5λ  λ
central maximum in medium and λ be the wavelength So, ∆x =   =
of light in that medium  2  50λ  4
We know Corresponding phase difference will be
nλD  2π  2π λ π
y= φ =   ( ∆x ) = × =
d  λ  λ 4 2
Here, n = 8 φ π
or =
8λD 2 4
y= ...(i) we know,
d
Now in air, Let wavelength be λ0 and y be distance of  φ
∴ I = I0 cos2  
5th dark fringe.  2
( 2n − 1) λ.D  π I
So, y= I = I0 cos2   = 0
2d 4 2
Here, n = 5
22. Two slits in Youngs experiment have widths in
( 2 × 5 − 1) λ.D 9λ0 D the ratio 1 : 25. The ratio of intensity of the
y= = ...(ii) maxima and minima in the interference
2d 2d
from (i) & (ii) I
pattern, max is/Ùebie kesâ efkeâmeer efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, oes
9λ0 D 8λD I min
= efPeefjÙeeW ÛeewÌ[eF&ÙeeW ceW Devegheele 1:25 nw~ lees, JÙeeflekeâjCe
2d d
hewšve& ceW GefÛÛe‰ leLee efveefcve‰ keâer leer›eleeDeeW keâe
16 λ0  λ0 
= Q µ = λ  I max
9 λ   Devegheele nesiee:
I min
16
Hence µ = = 1.78
(a)
4
(b)
9 121
(c) (d)
49
9 9 4 49 121
21. The maximum intensity in Young's double slit AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
experiment is I0 Distance between two slits is d Ans. (b) : Intensity is proportional to the square of the
= 5λ, where λ is the wavelength of light used in width of the slit thus,
the experiment. What will be the intensity in
front of one of the slits on the screen placed at a I1 1
=
distance D = 10 d?/Ùebie kesâ efkeâmeer efÉ efPeefj&ÙeeW ØeÙeesie I 2 25
ceW GefÛÛe‰ keâer leer›elee I0 nw~ oesveeW efPeefj&ÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer a1 I 1
otjer d = 5λ nw, ÙeneB λ ØeÙeesie ceW GheÙeesie efkeâS ieS or = 1 =
a2 I2 5
ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowOÙe& nw~ efkeâmeer efPejer kesâ meeceves otjer D =
10 d hej efmLele heox hej leer›elee keäÙee nesieer? a2 = 5a1
I max ( a1 + a 2 ) ( a + 5a1 ) = 36 = 9
2 2
I0
(a) (b) I 0 how = = 1
2 Imin ( a1 − a 2 )2 ( a1 − 5a1 )2 16 4
I0 3 Imax 9
(c) (d) I0 =
4 4 I min 4
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Physics 538 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
23. In a double slit experiment, the two slits are 1 2π
mm apart and the screen is placed 1 m away. Phase difference, φ = × Path difference
λ
A monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm
is used. What will be the width of each slit for when path difference is λ, then
obtaining ten maxima of double slit within the 2π
φ= × λ = 2π
central maxima of single slit pattern ? λ
efkeâmeer efÉ-efPejer ØeÙeesie ceW oes efPeefjÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer
2  2π 
1 mm nw Deewj hejoe Gvemes 1 m otj jKee ieÙee nw~ ØeÙegòeâ ∴ I = 4I0 cos   = 4I0 cos ( π ) = 4I 0 = K ......(i)
2

 2
SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowOÙe& 500 nm nw~ ØelÙeskeâ
when path difference is λ/4, then
efPejer keâer ÛeewÌ[eF& efkeâleveer nesieer, Ùeefo Skeâue efmueš
2π λ π
(efPejer) hewšve& kesâ kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ eW efÉ-efPejer kesâ ome φ= × =
λ 4 2
GefÛÛe‰ Øeehle nes mekeWâ?
2π
(a) 0.1 mm (b) 0.5 mm ∴ I = 4I0 cos   = 2I0
(c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.2 mm 4
AIPMT-03.05.2015 K = 4I0
–3 K
Ans. (d) : Distance between two slits (d)=1mm=1 × 10 m 2 I0 = {using eqn. (i)}
Distance of screen from slits (D) = 1m 2
–9
The wavelength of monocrhomatic light (λ)=500 × 10 m 25. In Young's double slit experiment, the slits are
width of each slits (a) = ? 2mm apart and are illuminated by photons of
o
The distance between two successive maxima or two two wavelengths λ1 = 12000 A and λ2 =
successive minima is o
10000 A . At what minimum distance from the
λD 5 ×10−7
= = 5 ×10−4 m = 0.5mm common central bright fringe on the screen 2m
d 10−3 from the slit will a bright fringe from one
Ten maxima are contained within a distance = interference pattern coincide with the bright
10×0.5mm = 5 mm fringe from the other?
For a single slit pattern, we have sin θ = λ a Ùebie kesâ Skeâ efÉefPejer ØeÙeesie ceW efPeefj&ÙeeW (efmuešeW) kesâ
The width of the central maxima is o
yeerÛe keâer otjer 2mm nw~ Fvekeâes λ1 = 12000 A leLee λ2
2Dλ
2Dsin θ = = 5mm = 10000 A
o
lejbieowOÙe& kesâ heâesše@veeW mes Øeoerhle
a
2Dλ 2 × 5 ×10 −7 (ØekeâeefMele) efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo efPeefjÙeeW mes heox keâer otjer
∴ a= −3
= = 2 ×10−4 m 2m nes lees, kesâvõerÙe oerhle eføebâpe kesâ efkeâleveer vÙetvelece otjer
5 ×10 5 ×10−3
hej, JÙeeflekeâjCe kesâ GlheVe oesveeW lejbieeW keâer oerhle eføebâpeW
∴ a = 0.2 mm mebheeleer (Skeâ otmejs kesâ Thej) neWieer?
24. In the Young's double-slit experiment, the (a) 3 mm (b) 8 mm
intensity of light at a point on the screen where (c) 6 mm (d) 4 mm
the path difference λ is K, (λ being the wave NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
length of light used). The intensity at a point Ans. (c) : According to question,
where the path difference is λ/4, will be.
n1λ1 = n 2 λ2
Ùebie kesâ efÉ-efPejer ØeÙeesie ceW, heox kesâ efkeâmeer efyebog hej λ
heLeeblej nesves mes, JeneB ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee K nw, (λ n1 λ 2 10000
= =
ØeÙegòeâ ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowOÙe& nw)~ lees heox kesâ Gme efyebog n 2 λ1 12000
hej peneB heLeeblej λ/4 nQ, leer›elee nesieer:- n1 5
=
(a) K (b) K/4 n2 6
(c) K/2 (d) zero 5th and 6th fringes will coincide respectively.
AIPMT-06.05.2014 The minimum distance is given as :
Ans. (c) : Intensity at any point on the screen is nλD
X min = 1 1
 φ  d
I = 4I0 cos 2  
2 Here, n1 = 5
Where 'I0' is the intensity of either wave and 'φ' is the D=2m
phase difference between two waves. d = 2 mm = 2 × 10–3m

Physics 539 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
So, 28. If yellow light emitted by sodium lamp in
−10 Young's double - slit experiment is replaced by
5 ×12000 × 2 ×10
X min = monochromatic blue light of the same intensity
2 ×10−3 then:
= 0.006 m Ùebie ØeÙeesie ceW meesef[Ùece uewche keâer heerueer jesMeveer keâes
Xmin = 6 mm SkeâJeCeea veerueer jesMeveer mes yeouee peelee nw efpemekeâer
leer›elee meceeve nw~ lees
26. In a Fresnel biprism experiment, the two
(a) fringe width will decrease/eføeâbpe keâer Ûeew[ Ì eF& Iešsieer
positions of lens give separation between the
slits as 16 cm and 9 cm respectively. What is (b) fringe width will increase/eføeâbpe keâer Ûeew[ Ì eF& yeÌ{sieer
the actual distance of separation? (c) fringe width will remain unchanged/eføeâbpe keâer
Skeâ øesâmvesue efÉefØepce ØeÙeesie ceW, ueWme keâer oes efmLeefleÙeeW kesâ ÛeewÌ[eF& meceeve jnsieer
keâejCe efPeefjÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe otjer (he=Lekeäkeâve) ›eâceMe: 16 (d) fringes will becomes less intense/ eføeâbpe keâer
cm Deewj 9 cm nw~ efPeefjÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe JeemleefJekeâ he=Lekeäkeâve ÛeewÌ[eF& henues mes keâce leer›elee keâer nesieer~
efkeâlevee nw? AIPMT-1992
(a) 13 cm Ans. (a) : From Young's double - slit experiment, the
fringe width is directly proportional to the wavelength
(b) 14 cm of the light used, the distance between the screen and
(c) 12.5 cm slits, and inversely proportional to the distance between
(d) 12 cm two slits. Since the wavelength of blue light is less than
AIPMT-1995 the yellow light the fringe width will decrease.
Ans. (d) :The seperation between the slits for position 1 29. In Young's double slit experiment carried out
of lens is d1 = 16 cm with light of wavelength (λ) = 5000 Å, the
Similarly, seperation between the slits for position 2 of distance between the slits is 0.2 mm and the
lens is d2 = 9 cm screen is at 200 cm from the slits. The central
The actual distance d is given by- maximum is at x = 0. The third maximum
(taking the central maximum as zeroth
d= ( d1 d 2 ) = 16 × 9 = 144 = 12 cm maximum) will be at x equal to
27. Interference was observed in interference lejbieowOÙe& λ = 5000 Å Jeeues ØekeâeMe kesâ meeLe efkeâS ieS
chamber when air was present. Now the Ùebie efÉ-efPejea ØeÙeesie ceW efPejeaÙeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 0.2
chamber is evacuated, and if the same light is efceceer nw, Deewj m›eâerve efPejea mes 200 mesceer otjer hej nw~
used, a careful observer will see
kesâvõerÙe DeefOekeâlece x=0 hej nw, leermeje DeefOekeâlece x kesâ
JÙeeflekeâjCe keâ#e ceW peye JeeÙeg Leer lees JÙeeflekeâjCe
yejeyej nesiee~
efoKeeÙeer efoÙee~ Ùeefo keâ#e keâes efveJee&eflele keâj efoÙee peeS (a) 1.67 cm (b) 1.5 cm
leLee ØekeâeMe Œeesle henues pewmee ner nes, lees (c) 0.5 cm (d) 5.0 cm
(a) no interference/JÙeeflekeâjCe efoKeeÙeer veneR osiee AIPMT-1992
(b) interference with brighter bands/JÙeeflekeâjCe yeQ[ Ans. (b) : Given,
DeefOekeâ Ûecekeâeruee efoKeeÙeer oWies λ = 5000 ×10–10 m
(c) interference with dark bands/JÙeeflekeâjCe yeQ[ [eke&â D = 200 ×10–2 m
d = 0.2×10–3 m
neWieW
We know that,
(d) interference with larger width/JÙeeflekeâjCe keâer Distance of third maxima from central maxima is
ÛeewÌ[eF& yeÌ{ peeSieer~ 3λD
x=
AIPMT-1993 d
Ans. (d) : As the chamber is evacuated the wavelength 3 × 5000 ×10−10 × 200 ×10–2
of the light increases slightly since wave length is x=
0.2 ×10–3
inversely proportional to refractive index. –2
= 1.5×10 m = 1.5 cm
• In vacuum, λ increases very slightly compared to that
30. In Young's experiment, two coherent sources
λD
in air. As β = are placed 0.90 mm apart and fringes are
d observed one metre away. If it produces second
∴ β∝λ dark fringe at a distance of 1 mm from central
Thus as the fringe width is directly proportional to wave fringe, the wavelength of monochromatic light
length the fringe width increases. is used would be
Physics 540 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ùebie kesâ ØeÙeesie ceW oes keâuee-mecyeæ Œeesle 0.90 mm keâer The new fringe width-
otjer hej jKes nQ Deewj eføeâbpe Skeâ ceeršj keâer otjer hej nw ~ β λ
=
Ùeefo Ùes otmejer keâeueer eføebâpe heox kesâ kesâvõ 1 mm otjer hej βw λ w
yeveeles neW, lees SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowIÙe& nesieer 0.4 λ
(a) 60×10–4 cm (b) 10×10–4 cm =
3
λ βw
(c) 10×10–5 cm (d) 6×10–5 cm
4
AIPMT-1991
βw = 0.3 mm
Ans. (d) : We know that,
Note- We can also directly answer the question as the
The distance of the second dark fringe from the central value of refractive index is increasing the value of
fringe
wavelength and fringe width will decrease. Among the
λD given option there is a single option that has lower value
Xn = (2n –1)
2d than the given value of fringe width which is option (a).
Where d = distance b/w two coherent source Hence correct answer is option (a)
D = distance b/w slit and screen 32. The Young's double slit experiment is
λ = wavelength of light performed with blue and with green light of
n is the nth fringe wavelengths 4360 Å and 5460 Å respectively.
Given, d = 0.90 mm = 0.9×10–3 m If x is the distance of 4th maxima from the
D=1m central one, then
n=2 Ùebie efÉ-efPejer keâe ØeÙeesie ›eâceMe: 4360 Å Deewj 5460 Å
For second dark, lejbieowIÙe& kesâ veerues Deewj njs ØekeâeMe kesâ meeLe ef›eâÙeebefJele
X2 = 1 mm = 1×10–3 m
efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ mes ÛeewLes GefÛÛe‰
λD
We have, X2 = (2n – 1) keâer otjer x nw, lees
2d
2 X 2d (a) x(blue) = x(green)/ x veeruee = x nje
λ= (b) x(blue) > x(green)/ x veeruee > x nje
( 2n − 1) D
Substituting all the values (c) x(blue) < x(green)/ x veeruee < x nje
We get- x(blue) 5460 x veeruee 5460
−3 −3
(d) = / =
2 ×1 ×10 × 0.9 ×10 x(green) 4360 x nje 4360
λ=
( 2 × 2 − 1) ×1 AIPMT-1990
−6
th
1.8 × 10 Ans. (c) : Distance of n maxima,
λ= D
3 ×1 x = nλ ⇒ x∝λ
∴ λ = 6 × 10 cm −5 d
As λb < λg
31. In Young's double slit experiment, the fringe
width is found to be 0.4 mm. If the whole ∴ x (blue) < x (green)
apparatus is immersed in water of refractive The fringe width is proportional to λ.
4 Hence, x(green) is greater than x(blue)
index , without disturbing the geometrical
3
arrangement, the new fringe width will be ? 24.4 Diffraction
Ùebie efÉ-efPejea keâs ØeÙeesie ceW eføebâpe keâer ÛeewÌ[eF& 0.4 efceceer
nw~ Ùeefo hetjs GhekeâjCe keâes 4/3 DeheJele&veebkeâ kesâ heeveer ceW 33. Angular width of the central maxima in the
[gyees efoÙee peeS, lees veÙeer eføebâpe ÛeewÌ[eF& nesieer ? Fraunhofer diffraction for λ = 6000 Å is β. When
(a) 0.30 mm (b) 0.40 mm the same slit is illuminated by another
(c) 0.53 mm (d) 450 micron monochromatic light, the angular width
AIPMT-1990 decreases by 30%. The wavelength of this light is
Ans. (a) : Given, λ = 6000 Å kesâ efueS ØeâeGvene@heâj efJeJele&ve ceW kesâvõerÙe
Fringe width β = 0.4 mm GefÛÛe‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& β nw~ peye Fmeer efPejer keâes
µw = 4/3 = 1.33 efkeâmeer DevÙe SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe mes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peelee nw,
Dλ lees keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& 30% Ieš peeleer nw~ Fme ØekeâeMe keâer
We know taht, β =
d lejbieowIÙe& nw–
i.e. β ∝ λ (a) 420 Å (b) 1800 Å
λ λ 3 (c) 4200 Å (d) 6000 Å
λw = air = = λ
µw 4 / 3 4 NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)

Physics 541 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given, λ = 6000 Å Ans. (a): In single slit diffraction pattern, condition for
β decrease = 30% nth minima is,
λ a sinθ = nλ
Half angular width β ' = Where, a = Slit width
d
Given that first minima corresponds to θ = 300
2λ
Full angular width β = a × sin 300 = nλ
d 1
β∝λ a × = (1)λ
2
β λ a = 2λ
=
β ' λ' nth secondary maxima occurs when
β 6000Å  1
= a sin θ =  n +  λ
70β λ1  2
100 For first secondary maxima
λ' = 4200Å  1
a sin θ = 1 +  λ
34. A linear aperture whose width is 0.02 cm is  2
placed immediately in front of a lens of focal 3λ
(2λ) sin θ =
length 60 cm. The aperture is illuminated 2
normally by a parallel beam of wavelength 3
5×10-5 cm. The distance of the first dark band sin θ =
4
of the diffraction pattern from the centre of the
screen is./0.02 cm Ûeew[eF& kesâ Skeâ jsKeerÙe Éejkeâ keâes 3
θ = sin −1  
60 cm Heâeskeâme otjer kesâ efkeâmeer ueWme kesâ meefVekeâš meeceves 4
jKee ieÙee nw~ Éejkeâ keâes 5×10-5 cm. lejbieowOÙe& kesâ 36. At the first minimum adjacent to the central
maximum of a single-slit diffraction pattern,
ØekeâeMe keâer meceevlej efkeâjCehegbpe Éeje uecyeJeled ØekeâeefMele the phase difference between the Huygen's
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Øeehle efJeJele&ve hewšve& kesâ ØeLece Deoerhle wavelet from the edge of the slit and the
yewv[ keâer heox kesâ kesâvõ mes otjer nesieer- wavelet from the mid-point of the slit is
(a) 0.10 cm (b) 0.25 cm Skeâue efPejer efJeJele&ve hewšve& ceW kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ kesâ
(c) 0.20 cm (d) 0.15 cm efvekeâšJeleea ØeLece efveefcve‰ hej, efPejer kesâ efkeâveejs leLee
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II Gmekesâ ceOÙe efyevog mes GlheVe neFiesvme lejbefiekeâeDeeW kesâ
Ans. (d) : Given, λ = 5×10–5 cm yeerÛe heLeevlej neslee nw:
d = 0.02 cm π π
radian /jsef[Ùeve
(a) (b) radian /jsef[Ùeve
f = D = 60 cm 8 4
distance of first dark band from the centre of the screen. π
(c) radian /jsef[Ùeve (d) π radian/jsef[Ùeve
λD 5 ×10−5 × 60 2
γ= = = 0.15cm AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
d 2 ×10−2
35. In a diffraction pattern due to a single slit of Ans. (d) :
width 'a' the first minimum is observed at an
angle 30º when light of wavelength 5000 Å is
incident on the slit. The first secondary
maximum is observed at an angle of :
peye ÛeewÌ[eF& 'a' keâer efkeâmeer Skeâue efPejer hej 5000 Å
lejbieowOÙe& keâe ØekeâeMe Deeheleve keâjlee nw, lees efPejer kesâ
keâejCe Glhevve efJeJele&ve hewšve& ceW 30º kesâ keâesCe hej henuee In ∆ABM,
efveefcv‰ efoKeeF& oslee nw~ henuee efÉleerÙekeâ GefÛÛ‰ efpeme ∆x
sin θ =
keâesCe hej efoKeeF& osiee, Ùen nw : b
2
 3 −1  1 
(a) Sin-1   (b) Sin   b
 4  4 ∆x = sin θ ...................(i)
2
−1  2  −1  3  For first minima (n = 1) at position P -
(c) Sin   (d) Sin  
 3  2 b sin θ = nλ
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 b sin θ = 1.λ ...............(ii)
Physics 542 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Where, b = width of the slit otj efmLele efkeâmeer Œeesle mes Deelee ngDee, λ=600 nm keâe
λ = wavelength ØekeâeMe hegbpe, 1 mm ÛeewÌ[er efPejer hej Deeheeflele neslee nw~
put the value of b sin θ in eqn (i) we get– Fmemes GlheVe efJeJele&ve hewšve& keâes efPejer mes 2 m otj efmLele
λ heox hej osKee peelee nw lees, kesâvõerÙe oerhle eføebâpe kesâ oesveeW
∆x =
2 Deesj keâer ØeLece Deoerhle eføebâpees kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer nesieer:-
Now,
(a) 1.2 cm (b) 1.2 mm
2π
Phase difference = × path difference (c) 2.4 cm (d) 2.4 mm
λ AIPMT-06.05.2014
2π
∆φ = × ∆x Ans. (d) : Here, λ = 600nm = 600×10–9m
λ width of single slit (a) = 1 mm = 10–3m
2π λ
= × D = 2m
λ 2 Distance between the first dark fringes on either side of
∆φ = π radian the central bright fringe is also the width of central
maximum.
37. For a parallel beam of monochromatic light of
wavelength 'λ', diffraction is produced by a Width of central maximum =
2λ D
single slit whose width 'a' is of the order of the a
wavelength of the light. If 'D' is the distance of −9
2 × 600 ×10 × 2
the screen from the slit, the width of the central =
maxima will be : 10−3
–4
efkeâmeer Skeâue efPejer (efmueš) keâer ÛeewÌ[eF& 'a', ØekeâeMe keâer = 24×10 m
lejbieowOÙe& keâer keâesefš keâer nw~ Fme efPejer hej 'λ' lejbieowOÙe& = 2.4×10–3m
keâer SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe keâer meceevlej efkeâjCe hegbpe Deeheeflele = 2.4 mm
nesves mes efJeJele&ve GlheVe neslee nw~ Ùeefo efPejer mes heox keâer 39. A parallel beam of fast moving electrons is
incident normally on a narrow slit. A fluorescent
otjer 'D' nes lees, kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ keâer ÛeewÌ[eF& nesieer: screen is placed at a large distance from the slit. If
Dλ Da the speed of the electrons is increased, which of
(a) (b) the following statements is correct?
a λ
ogÇle Jesie mes Ûeueleer ngF& Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer Skeâ meceevlej
2Da 2Dλ
(c) (d) efkeâjCehegbpe, efkeâmeer heleueer efPejer& hej uecyeJeled Deeheeflele nw~
λ a
AIPMT-03.05.2015
Fme efPejer& mes heÙee&hle otjer hej Skeâ Øeefleoerhle heoe& jKee nw~
Ans. (d) : We know that Ùeefo, Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer Ûeeue keâes yeÌ{e efoÙee peeS lees,
λ = a sin θ efvecveebefkeâle ceW mes keâewve mee keâLeve melÙe nesiee?
λ (a) The angular width of central maximum will
sin θ ≅ θ = ……… (1) be unaffected. / kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF&
a
From geometry DeØeYeeefJele jnsieer~
y (b) Diffraction pattern is not observed on the
tan θ ≅ θ = ……. (2) screen in the case of electrons. / Fueskeäš^e@veeW kesâ
D
from eq (1) & (2) keâejCe heox hej efJeJele&ve hewšve& veneR efoKeeF& oslee~
y λ (c) The angular width of the central maximum of
= the diffraction pattern will increase.
D a
λD efJeJele&ve hewšve& kesâ kesâvõerÙe GefÛÛe‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF&
y= yeÌ{ peeÙesieer~
a
So the width of the central bright maximum is twice the (d) The angular width of the central maximum
width of the other maxima. will decrease.
2λD kesâefvõÙe GefÛÛe‰ keâer keâesCeerÙe ÛeewÌ[eF& keâce nes peeÙesieer~
Central maxima 2y = NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
a
38. A beam of light of λ=600 nm from a distance Ans. (d) : We know that λ = h
source falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the mv
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a Also for angular width
screen 2 m away. The distance between first 2λ
dark fringes on either side of the central bright ω=
fringe is. d

Physics 543 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 ØekeâeMe keâes Skeâ Gòeue ueWme kesâ Éeje Skeâ m›eâerve hej
So, we can say ω ∝ λ ∝ Skeâ$e efkeâÙee peelee nw~ ØeLece efveefcve‰ kesâ efueS efJeJele&ve
v
λ = wavelength keâesCe keâe ceeve nesiee
m = mass (a) 0º (b) 15º
v = velocity (c) 30º (d) 50º
ω = angular width AIPMT-1993
d = distance Ans. (c) : Given, λ = 5000 Aº
So if the velocity increases the angular width of the d = 0.001 mm = 0.001×10–3m
central maximum will decrease.
n=1
40. A parallel beam of light of wavelength λ is We know that,
incident normally on a narrow slit. A diffraction
pattern is formed on a screen placed d sinθ = nλ
perpendicular to the direction of the incident  nλ 
beam. At the second minimum of the diffraction θ = sin −1  
 d 
pattern, the phase difference between the rays
coming from the two edges of slit is  1 × 5000 ×10−10 
θ = sin −1  
lejbieowOÙe& λ keâer Skeâ meceeveeblej ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe Skeâ  0.001 ×10−3 
mebkeâerCe& efmueš hej meeceevÙe ™he mes Deeheeflele nesleer nw~  1 × 0.5 ×10−6 
Deeheeflele efkeâjCe keâer efoMee kesâ uecyeJeled jKes ieÙes efm›eâve hej θ = sin −1  
 10−6 
Skeâ efJeJele&ve hewšve& yevelee nw~ efJeJele&ve hewšve& kesâ otmejs
θ = sin–1 (0.5)
vÙetvelece hej efmueš kesâ oesveeW efkeâveejeW mes Deeves Jeeueer efkeâjCeeW
θ = 30º
kesâ yeerÛe keâueeblej nw-
The first minimum will be formed for the angle of
(a) πλ (b) 2π diffraction equal to 30º.
(c) 3π (d) 4π
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Ans. (d) : For second minima path difference = 2λ 24.5 Polarisation
Therefore, corresponding value of phase difference is
43. After passing through a polariser a linearly
2π
∆φ = × path difference polarised light of intensity I is incident on an
λ analyser making an angle of 30° with that of
2π the polariser. The intensity of light emitted
∴ ∆φ = × 2λ
λ from the analyser will be:
⇒∆φ = 4π I leer›elee Jeeuee mejue jsKeerÙe OeÇgefJele SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe
41. For the diffraction from a crystal with λ = 1Å efkeâmeer hee@uesjesF[ hej Fme Øekeâej Deeheeflele neslee nw efkeâ
and Bragg's angle θ = 60°, then for the second ØekeâeMe kesâ OeÇgJeCe keâer efoMee SJeb hee@uesjesF[ kesâ yeerÛe 30°
order diffraction 'd' will be:/efkeâmeer ef›eâmšue mes keâe keâesCe yeve jne nw~
efJeJele&ve kesâ efueS λ = 1Å leLee yeÇsie keâesCe θ = 60° kesâ hee@uesjesF[ mes efveie&le ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee nesieer:
efueS efÉleerÙe keâesefš kesâ efJeJele&ve ceW 'd' keâe ceeve nesiee–
I I 3I 2I
(a) 1.15 Å (b) 0.75 Å (a) (b) (c) (d)
(c) 0.55 Å (d) 2.1 Å 2 3 4 3
AIPMT-1998 NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
Ans. (a) : We know that– According to Bragg's Ans. (c) : By Malus law, intensity after analyzer is
Equation given by the formula–
nλ = 2 d sin θ ...(1)
Given, θ = 60, n = 2, λ = 1Aº
nλ 2 × 1 × 2 × 10 −10
d= = = 1.15Aº
2 sin θ 2× 3
42. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of
wavelength 5000 Å is incident normally on a
single narrow slit of width 0.001 mm. The
light is focused by a convex lens on a screen IE = I cos2θ
placed in focal plane. The first minimum will Where, I = intensity of incident light on analyzer
be formed for the angle of diffraction equal to IE = intensity of emitted light from analyzer
lejbieowOÙe& 5000 Å Jeeues meceevlej SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe 0.001 Putting the given values in formula,
efceceer ceesšeF& keâer efmueš hej uecyeJeled [euee peelee nw~
Physics 544 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
3 Ans. (b) According to Brewster law when an
IE = I cos2 30° = I × unpolarized light is incident on a reflecting surface, then
4
at some particular angle of incidence some of the light
3I is reflected back while the other gets refracted. The
⇒ IE =
4 reflected light is completely polarized and the angle
44. The Brewsters angle ib for an interface should between the reflected ray and refracted ray is 90º. When
be reflected light and refracted light are perpendicular,
reflected light is polarized with electric field vector
efkeâmeer Devlejehe=‰ kesâ efueS yeÇtmšj keâesCe ib nesvee ÛeeefnS: perpendicular to the plane of incidence.
(a) 30° < ib < 45° (b) 45° < ib < 90°
(c) ib = 90° (d) 0° < ib < 30°
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (b)

• Brewster's angle- The Brewster's angle is defined as tan i = µ

the angle in which the angle of incidence of the light Where, i = Brewster's angle or polarization angle
with a particular polarization is perfectly transmitted 46. Two Polaroids P1 and P2 are placed with their
through a dielectric surface and there is no reflection axis perpendicular to each other. Unpolarised
and when the unpolarized light is incident on the light I0 is incident on P1. A third polaroid P3 is
surface where the light will be reflected on the surface. kept in between P1 and P2 such that its axis
• In the interface of Brewster's angle written as– makes an angle 45º with that of P1. The
µ = tan ib ...............(i) intensity of transmitted light through P2 is/oes
here, µ = refractive index of the given material and ib is heesuesje@F[ P1 leLee P2 keâes Fme Øekeâej jKee ieÙee nw efkeâ,
polarization angle. Fvekeâer De#e Deeheme ceW uecyeJeled nQ~ P1 hej Deeheeflele
where, µ lies between 1 to ∞ DeOeÇgefJele DeOeÇgefJele ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee I0 nw~ P1 Deewj P2
⇒ 1 < µ< ∞ kesâ yeerÛe Skeâ DevÙe heesuesje@F[ P3 keâes Fme Øekeâej jKee
⇒ 1< tan(ib) < ∞
peelee nw efkeâ Fmekeâer De#e P1 keâer De#e mes 45º keâe keâesCe
⇒ tan-1(1) < ib < tan-1(∞)
⇒ 45º< ib < 90º
yeveeleer nw~ lees P2 mes heejiele ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee nw:
45. Unpolarised light is incident from air on a I I I I
(a) 0 (b) 0 (c) 0 (d) 0
plane surface of a material of refractive index 2 4 8 16
'µ'. At a particular angle of incidence 'i', it is NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
found that the reflected and refracted rays are Ans. (c) :
perpendicular to each other. Which of the
following options is correct for this situation? /
DeheJele&veebkeâ 'µ' Jeeues heoeLe& kesâ efkeâmeer meceleue he=‰ hej keâesF&
DeOeÇÇgefJele ØekeâeMe JeeÙeg mes Deeheleve keâjlee nw~ efkeâmeer efJeMes<e
Deeheleve keâesCe 'i' hej Ùen heeÙee ieÙee efkeâ hejeJeefle&le efkeâjCeW
Deewj DeheJeefle&le efkeâjCeW Skeâ-otmejs kesâ uecyeJeled nQ~
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee efJekeâuhe mener nw?
Given at the entry to poloroid 1 is-
(a) Reflected light is polarised with its electric
Initial intensity = I0
vector is parallel to the plane of incidence /
hejeJeefle&le ØekeâeMe OeÇgefJele nw Deewj Fmekeâe efJeÅegled meefoMe After P1 → I1 = I0
Deeheleve kesâ leue kesâ meceevlej nw 2
(b) Reflected light is polarised with its electric After P 3 → I 2 = I 2
1 cos 45°
vector is perpendicular to the plane of I 1 I
= 0× = 0
incidence/ hejeJeefle&le ØekeâeMe OegÇefJele nw Deewj Fmekeâe 2 2 4
efJeÅegled meefoMe Deeheleve kesâ leue kesâ uecyeJeled nw I 1
After P2 → I3 = I2 cos2 45° = 0 ×
−1  1  −1  1  4 2
(c) i = tan   (d) i = sin  
µ µ I
I3 = 0
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 8
Physics 545 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
47. Which of the phenomenon is not common to Ans. (c): In the given question it states that the angle of
sound and light waves?/efvecve ceW mes keâewve-meer incidence of unpolarised light is equal to Brewster's
heefjIešvee OJeefve leLee ØekeâeMe lebjieeW kesâ efueS GYeÙeefve‰ angle, therefore, polarization of refracted ray will still
veneR nesleer nw? be unpolarised in nature. Therefore, there will no
(a) Interference /JÙeeflekeâjCe (b) Diffraction/efJeJele&ve particular orientation such that there shall be complete
(c) Coherence/keâuee mebyeæ (d) Polarisation/OeÇgJeCe darkness while observing through polaroid. When a
AIPMT-1988 polaroid is held in the path of emergent light P and
rotated about an axis passing through the centre and
Ans. (d) : We know sound waves are longitudinal
waves and travel through compression and rarefactions perpendicular to the plane of polaroid, the intensity of
in the medium on the other hand light waves are light shall go through a minimum but not zero for the
transverse in nature and do not require a medium to two orientations of the polaroid. 4
travel. Polarization of light is a phenomenon of 49. Consider sunlight incident on a slit of width 10
4
transverse wave only which means the wave vibrates in Å. The image seen through the slit shall/10 Å
a single plane only. Hence, Both sound and light waves ÛeewÌ[eF& keâer Skeâ efPeje&r hej Deeheeflele nesves Jeeues metÙe& kesâ
follow the law of reflection, refraction and interference ØekeâeMe hej efJeÛeej keâjW~ efÚõ mes osKeves hej
of waves. Polarization occurs with light wave only.
(a) be a fine sharp slit, white in colour at the
centre/kesâvõ hej MJesle JeCe& keâer Skeâ heleueer leer#Ce efPejer&
24.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
efoKeeF& osieer~
48. Consider a light beam incident from air to a (b) A bright slit white at the centre diffusing to
glass slab at Brewster's angle as shown in zero intensities at the edges./kesâvõ hej oerhle MJesle
figure. A polaroid is placed in the path of the efPejer& pewmee nesiee pees keâesjeW hej MetvÙe leer›elee ceW efJemeefjle
emergent ray at point P and rotated about an nes peeSieer~
axis passing through the centre and (c) A bright slit white at the centre diffusing to
perpendicular to the plane of the polaroid./efÛe$e
regions of different colours./kesâvõ hej oerhle MJesle
ceW oMee&S ieS Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe hegbpe hej efJeÛeej keâjW efPeje&r pewmee nesiee pees efJeefYevve JeCeeX kesâ #es$eeW ceW efJemeefjle
pees JeeÙeg mes keâeBÛe keâer efPeuueer hej yetÇmšj keâesCe hej nes peeSieer~
Deeheeflele nesleer nw
(d) Only be a diffused slit white in colour./kesâJeue
efveie&le efkeâjCe kesâ ceeie& ceW efyebog P hej Skeâ heesuesje@F[ jKee
MJesle JeCe& keâer efJemeefjle efPeje&r efoKeeF& osieer~
ieÙee nw Deewj Fmes Fmekesâ leue kesâ uecyeJeled leLee Fmekesâ keWâõ
Ans. (a) : Given, the width of the slit is 104 Å i.e. 10000
mes iegpejves Jeeueer De#e kesâ heefjle: IegceeÙee peelee nw~ Å. The wavelength of sunlight varies from (4000 Å to
8000 Å), as width of slit, a > λ. Since the width of the
slit is no comparable to that of wavelength. Diffraction
will not occurs with maximum at centre. Therefore, a
fine sharp slit white in colours will be formed due to
mixing of all colours.
50. Consider a ray of light incident from air into a
slab of glass (refractive index n) of width d, at
(a) For a particular orientation there shall be an angle θ. The phase difference between the
darknees as observed through the polaroid. ray reflected by the top surface of the glass and
/Skeâ efJeefMe° DeefYeefJevÙeeme kesâ efueS heesuesje@F[ mes osKeves the bottom surface is/JeeÙeg mes keâeBÛe keâer efPeuueer
hej DebOesje efoKeeF& osiee~ (DeheJele&veebkeâ n, ceesšeF& d) hej θ keâesCe hej Deeheeflele
(b) The intensity of light as seen through the
polaroid shall be independent of the rotation.
nesves Jeeueer Skeâ ØekeâeMe efkeâjCe hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~ keâeBÛe
/heesuesje@F[ mes osKes peeves Jeeues ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee IetCe&ve kesâ Meer<e& he=‰ leLee leueer kesâ he=‰ mes hejeJeefle&le nesves Jeeueer
hej efveYe&j veneR nesleer~ efkeâjCeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej nw
(c) The intensity of light as seen through the 4πd 
1/2
1 2 
polaroid shall go through a minimum but not (a)  1 – 2 sin θ  + π
zero for two orientations of the polaroid. λ  n 
/heesuesje@F[ mes osKes peeves Jeeueer ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee 4πd  1 2 
1/2
π
heesuesje@F[ kesâ oes DeefYeefJevÙeemeeW kesâ efueS vÙetvelece nesieer (b)  1 – sin θ  +
λ  n2  4
uesefkeâve MetvÙe veneR nesieer~ 1/2
(d) The intensity of light as seen through the 4πd  1 2  π
(c) 1 – 2 sin θ  +
polaroid shall go through a minimum for four λ  n  2
orientations of the polariod./heesuesje@F[ mes osKeves 4πd 
1/2
1 2 
hej ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee heesuesje@F[ kesâ Ûeej DeefYeefJevÙeemeeW (d) 1 – sin θ  + 2π
λ  n2 
kesâ efueS vÙetvelece nesieer~
Physics 546 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : From fig, the ray P is incident at an angle θ In YDSE monochromatic light use for the formation of
and gets reflected in the P' and refracted in the direction fringes on the screen.
P". Due to reflection from the glass medium, there is a Hence, In this case there shall be no interference
phase change of π. fringes.
Time taken to travel along OP" When we use white light in place of monochromatic
light then only central fringe looks white and other
fringes of different colour are observed. Because central
fringe for all the colours are formed at central point so it
be comes white after mixing up.
52. Figure shows a standard two slit arrangement
with slits S1, S2. P1, P2 are the two minima
OP" d / cos r points on either side of P. At P2 on the screen,
∆t = =
v c/n there is a hole and behind P2 is a second 2-slit
nd arrangement with slits S3, S4 and a second
= screen behind them./efÛe$e (10.2) ceW S1, S2 efPeefjÙeeW
c cos r
sin θ kesâ meeLe Skeâ ceevekeâ efÉefPejer& JÙeJemLee keâes oMee&Ùee ieÙee
From snell's law, n =
sin r nw~ P1 leLee P2 kesâ oesveeW Deesj oes efvecve‰ efyebog nQ~
sin θ hejos hej P2 Skeâ efÚõ nw Deewj P2 kesâ heerÚs Skeâ otmejer
sin r =
n efÉefPejer& JÙeJemLee S3 leLee S4 efPeefj&ÙeeW kesâ meeLe nw Deewj
sin 2 θ Gvekesâ heerÚs Skeâ otmeje hejoe nw~
cos r = 1 − sin 2 r = 1 −
n2
2π
Phase difference, ∆φ = × ∆t
T
–1/ 2
2 πnd  sin 2 θ 
= 1 − 2 
λ  n 
So, net phase difference = ∆φ + π
4 πd  1 2 
⇒ ∆φnet =  1 − 2 sin θ  + π
λ  n 
[An additional π due to reflection at P".]
(a) There would be no interference pattern on the
51. In a Young's double slit experiment, the source
second screen but it would be lighted./otmejs
of white light. One of the holes is covered by a
red filter and another by a blue filter. In this hejos hej keâesF& JÙeeflekeâjCe hewšve& veneR nesiee efkeâvleg Jen
case/Ùebie kesâ efÉefPeje&r ØeÙeesie ceW œeesle mehesâo ØekeâeMe keâe ØekeâeefMele nesiee~
nw~ Skeâ efÚõ keâes ueeue efheâušj mes leLee otmejs keâes veerues (b) The second screen would be totally dark./otmeje
efheâušj mes {keâ efoÙee ieÙee nw~ Fme DeJemLee ceW hejoe hetCe& ™he mes Deoerhle nesiee~
(a) there shall be alternate interference patterns (c) There would be a single bright point on the
of red and blue/ueeue leLee veerues jbie kesâ Skeâevlej second screen./otmejs hejos hej Skeâ Skeâue oerhle efyevog
JÙeeflekeâjCe hewšve& neWies~ nesiee~
(b) there shall be an interference pattern for red (d) There would be a regular two slit pattern on
distinct from that for blue/ueeue leLee veerues jbie kesâ the second screen./otmejs hejos hej Skeâ efveÙeefcele
he=Lekeâ-he=Lekeâ megmhe° JÙeeflekeâjCe hewšve& neWies~ efÉefPejer hewšve& nesiee~
(c) there shall be no interference fringes./keâesF& Yeer Ans. (d) : According to the question,
JÙeefòeâkeâjCe eføepe veneR neWieer~ There is a hole at point P2, from Huygens principle,
(d) there shall be an interference pattern for red wave propagates from sources S1 and S2. Each point on
mixing with one for blue./ueeue jbie mes yevee the screen will acts as secondary sources of wavelets.
JÙeeflekeâjCe hewšve& veerues jbie mes yeves hewšve& mes efceefßele nesiee~ There is a hole at minima point P2, the hole will act as a
Ans. (c) : When one of the holes is covered by a red source of incident light for the slits S3 and S4.
filter and another by a blue filter. In this case due to Hence, there will be a regular two slit pattern on the
filtration only red and blue lights are present. second screen.
Physics 547 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
25.
Dual Nature of Radiation
and Matter
(a) 62 × 1020 (b) 3 × 1019
25.1 Electron Emission (c) 1.5 × 1020 (d) 6 × 1018
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
1. The work functions of Caesium (Cs), Potassium Ans. (c) : The number of photons per sec,
(K) and Sodium (Na) are 2.14eV, 2.30eV and n = amount of power converted into light /Energy of
2.75eV respectively. If incident electromagnetic photon
radiation has an incident energy of 2.20 eV. 25
Which of these photosensitive surfaces may Power converted into light, P1 = 200× =50W
emit photoelectrons? 100
meerefpeÙece (Cs), heesšwefMeÙece (K) leLee meesef[Ùece (Na) Energy of photon, E = hv = hc
p
keâe keâeÙe&Heâueve ›eâceMe: 2.14 eV, 2.30 eV leLee 2.75 λ
eV nw~ Ùeefo Deeheeflele JewÅegleÛegbyekeâerÙe efJeefkeâjCe keâer Tpee& −34
6.62 ×10 × 3 ×10 8
= = 33.1×10−20 J
2.20 eV nw, FveceW mes keâewve meer ØekeâeMemeg«eener melen, 0.6 ×10−6
ØekeâeMe Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le keâj mekeâlee nw : 50
(a) Na only/ kesâJeue Na Thus, n = = 1.5 × 1020 .
33.1× 10 20

(b) Cs only/ kesâJeue Cs 3. In which of the following, emission of electrons

(c) Both Na and K/ oesveeW Na Je K does not take place
(d) K only/ kesâJeue K efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmeceW Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe Glmepe&ve veneR
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 neslee nw?
Ans. (b) : Given that : φCs = 2.14 eV, φK = 2.30 eV (a) thermionic emission/leeheeÙeefvekeâ Glmepe&ve
φNa = 2.75 eV (b) X-rays emission/X-efkeâjCe Glmepe&ve
Photoelectric emission will takes place if the energy of
(c) photoelectric emission/ØekeâeMe-Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmepe&ve
incident photon is greater than the work function of
metal on which photon is falling. (d) secondary emission/efÉleerÙekeâ Glmepe&ve
i.e AIPMT-1990
hc Ans. (b) : Emission of electrons does not take place in
≥ φ0 X-rays emission.
λ
(i) Thermionic emission- When a metal is heated to a
φCs = 2.14 < 2.20 (incident energy) ... (i) high temperature, the free electron gain kinetic energy
φK = 2.30 > 2.20 (incident energy) ...(ii) and escape from surface of metal.
φNa = 2.75 > 2.20 (incident energy) ... (iii) (ii) Secondary emission- When an electron strikes the
From eqn (i), (ii) and (iii), it is clear that only Cs surface of a metallic plate, it emits other electrons from
photosensitive surface emit photoelectron. the surface.
2. 200 Watt sodium bulb emits yellow light of (iii) Photoelectric emission- Emission of electrons
wavelength 0.6µm. Considering efficiency of from metal surface on irradiation with radiation of
bulb for converting electrical energy into light suitable frequency.
is 25% , then number of photon emits per sec
(iv) X-ray emission- They are due to transitions in the
due to yellow light is-
inner energy levels of atoms
200W keâe Skeâ meesef[Ùece yeuye 0.6µm lejbieowOÙe& keâe
Thermions are/leeheeÙeve nesles nw:
heeruee ØekeâeMe Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw~ Ùen ceeveles ngS efkeâ 4.
efJeÅegle Tpee& keâes ØekeâeMe ceW heefjJele&ve keâjves ceW yeuye keâer (a) protons/Øeesše@ve (b) electrons/Fueskeäš^e@ve
o#elee 25% nw, Øeefle meskebâ[ Glmeefpe&le heerues jbie kesâ (c) photons/heâesše@ve (d) positrons/hee@efpeš^e@ve
ØekeâeMe kesâ heâesše@veeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer: AIPMT-1988
Physics 548 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : (i) Thermions are electrons 7. The threshold frequency of a photoelectric
(ii) When external heat energy falls on metal surface metal is νo. if light of frequency 4 νo is incident
free electrons are emitted. This is called thermionic on this metal, then the maximum kinetic energy
emission. The emitted free electrons are known an of emitted electrons will be:
thermions. efkeâmeer ØekeâeMeJewÅegle Oeeleg keâer osnueer DeeJe=efòe νo nw~ Ùeefo
4 νo DeeJe=efòe Jeeuee ØekeâeMe Fme Oeeleg hej efiejlee nw, lees
25.2 Photoelectric Effect Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer:
5. The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted (a) hνo (b) 2 hνo
photoelectrons in photoelectric effects is (c) 3 hνo (d) 4 hνo
independent of NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
HeâesšesFuesefkeäš^keâ ØeYeeJe ceW Glmeefpe&le heâesšesFueskeäš^e@veeW keâer
Ans. (c) : Given that – v = 4vo
DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& mJeleb$e nesleer nw: The photo electric equation is given by–
(a) Frequency of incident radiation/Deeheeflele K.Emax = hν – hν0
efJeefkeâjCe keâer DeeJe=efòe hv = hvo + K.Emax
h×4vo = hvo + K.Emax
(b) Wavelength of incident radiation/ Deeheeflele
efJeefkeâjCe keâer lejbie owOÙe& ⇒ K.E max = 3hvο
(c) Work function of material/heoeLe& keâe keâeÙe& heâueve 8. When two monochromatic lights of frequency,
(d) Intensity of incident radiation/ Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCe ν
v and are incident on a photoelectric metal,
keâer leer›elee 2
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 Vs
their stopping potential becomes and Vs
Ans. (d) : By photoelectric equation- 2
K.Emax = hv - φo respectively. The threshold frequency for this
K.Emax = hv - hvo metal is
ν
K.Emax =
hc hc
− ..........(i) peye efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe JewÅegle Oeeleg hej v SJeb DeeJe=efòeÙeeW
λ λo 2
Jeeues oes SkeâueJeCeea ØekeâeMe Deeheeflele nesles nQ, lees Gvekesâ
From equation (i) it is clear that the K.Emax is
Vs
independent of intensity of incident radiation. efvejesOeer efJeYeJe (stopping potential) keâceMe: SJeb
6. The light rays having photons of energy 4.2 eV 2
are falling on a metal surface having a work Vs nes peeles nQ~ Fme Oeeleg kesâ efueS osnueer DeeJe=efòe nesieer:
function of 2.2 eV. The stopping potential of the 3
surface is: (a) ν (b) 2v
2
2.2 eV keâeÙe&heâueve Jeeueer Oeeleg kesâ leue hej ØekeâeMe 2
Deeheeflele nes jne nw, efpemekesâ heâesše@veeW keâer Tpee& 4.2 eV (c) 3v (d) ν
3
nw~ leue keâe efvejeWOeer efJeYeJe nw: NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
(a) 2 eV (b) 2 V Vs
(c) 1.1 V (d) 6.4 V Ans. (a) : At frequency v, the stopping potential is
2
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 At frequency v/2, the stopping potential is Vs
Ans. (b) : Given that – We know that φ0 = hν0
E = 4.2 eV Where
φ = 2.2 eV φ0 = the work function = hν0
Vo = ? h = Planck’s constant
Einstein's photoelectric equation is–
ν0 = threshold frequency
E = φo + Kmax ...(i) Now for frequency v,
Where, φo = work function hv = φ0 + K.E K.E = maximum K.E of electrons
Kmax = maximum kinetic energy of photon = eVo = eV0
Where, Vo = Stopping potential
Putting the values in equation (i) we get – as stopping potential in this case is Vs so,
2
4.2 eV = 2.2 eV – eVo
Vs
Vo = 2.0V hν = φ0 + e − − − − −(i)
2
Physics 549 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
ν Ans. (a) : Given that- work function (φ) = 4eV
Now for frequency ,
2 hc
φ = energy of photon =
hν λ
= φ0 + k.E
2 Here λ = Wave length
As stopping potential in this case is Vs so, c = speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s
K.E = eVs h = planck's constant = 6.626 × 10–34m2kg/s
hν hc
= φ0 + eVs − − − − −(ii) = 4eV
2 λ
From eqn (i) ×2 – eqn (ii) hc
λ=
hν 4eV
2hν − = 2φ0 − φ0 + eVs − eVs
2 6.626 × 10−34 × 3 ×108
3hν = Q l eV = 1.6 ×10−19 
hν 0 = [Q form φ = hν o ] 4 × 1.6 × 10−19
2
19.878 × 10 −26
3ν = = 3.10 ×10–7m
νo = 4 × 1.6 × 10−19
2 = 310 ×10–9m = 310 nm
9. The number of photons per second on an 11. When the light of frequency 2ν0 (where ν0 is
average emitted by the source of threshold frequency), is incident on a metal
monochromatic light of wavelength 600 nm, plate, the maximum velocity of electrons
when it delivers the power of 3.3 × 10–3 watt emitted is v1. When the frequency of the
will be (h = 6.6 × 10–34 Js) incident radiation is increased to 5ν0, the
SkeâJeCeeA 600 vewveesceeršj lejbieowOÙe& Jeeues ØekeâeMe mes maximum velocity of electrons emitted from
the same plate is v2. The ratio of v1 to v2 is /
Deewmeleve Øeefle meskeâC[ Glmeefpe&le HeâesševeeW keâer mebKÙee peye efkeâmeer Oeeleg kesâ he=‰ hej DeeJe=efòe 2ν0 (ÙeneB ν0
nesieer peye Jen 3.3 × 10–3 Jeeš Meefòeâ Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw osnueer DeeJe=efòe nw) keâe ØekeâeMe Deeheleve keâjlee nw, lees
: (h = 6.6 × 10–34 petue × mes.) Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe DeefOekeâlece Jesie v1 nw~ peye
(a) 1015 (b) 1018 Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer DeeJe=efòe yeÌ{ekeâj 5ν0 keâj oer
(c) 1017 (d) 1016 peeleer nw, lees Gmeer he=‰ mes Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 DeefOekeâlece Jesie v2 neslee nw~ v1 Deewj v2 keâe Devegheele nw
Ans. (d) : The power of a source is given by (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
E n  hc  (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
P= =   NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
t t λ 
Where, P is power, n is number of photons, t is time, h Ans. (a) : From Eintein's equation-
is planck's constant and c & λ is speed and wavelength 1
E = Wº + mv 2
of photon respectively. 2
Number of protons delivered per sec is given by - Where, W 0 is work function.
n Pλ As per first condition,
= 1
t hc h ( 2ν º ) = hν º + mv12
2
n 3.3 ×10 –3 × 600 ×10–9
= 1
t 3 × 108 × 6.6 ×10 –34 hν º = mv1 ..................... (i)
2

2
n
= 10 photons/sec
16 When frequency of incident radiation increased to 5νº
t 1
10. The work function of a photosensitive material h(5 νº ) = h νº + mv 22
2
is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that
1
can cause photon emission from the substance 4h νº = mv2 2 ... ( ii )
is (approximately) 2
efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe meg«eener heoeLe& keâe keâeÙe&heâueve 4.0 eV nw~ Equation (i) Divided by (ii)
2
Fmeer heoeLe& mes heâesše@ve Glmepe&ve keâj mekeâves kesâ efueS 1 v1
=
ØekeâeMe keâer DeefOekeâlece lejbieowIÙe& nw (ueieYeie) 4 v 22
(a) 310 nm (b) 3100 nm v1 1
=
(c) 966 nm (d) 31 nm v2 2
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
Physics 550 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
12. The photoelectric threshold wavelength of efkeâmeer ØekeâeMeefJeÅegled mesue kesâ kewâLees[ ($e+Cee«e) C hej 5
silver is 3250 × 10–10 m. The velocity of the eV Tpee& kesâ Heâesše@ve Deeheeflele nesles nQ~ Glmeefpe&le
electron ejected from a silver surface by ØekeâeefMekeâ Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece Tpee& 2 eV nw~ 6
ultraviolet light of wavelength 2536 × 10–10 m
eV Tpee& kesâ Heâesše@veeW kesâ C hej Deeheeflele nesves hej keâesF&
is/ÛeeBoer kesâ efueÙes ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle osnueer lejbieowOÙe& 3250
Yeer ØekeâeefMekeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Ssvees[ (Oevee«e) A lekeâ veneR
× 10–10 m nw~ lees, 2536 × 10–10 m lejbieowOÙe& kesâ
hengBÛesiee, Ùeefo C kesâ meehes#e Akeâe efvejesOeer efJeYeJe nes :-
hejeyeQieveer ØekeâeMe Éeje ÛeeBoer kesâ he=‰ mes efve<keâeef<ele
(a) + 3V (b) + 4V
Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe Jesie nesiee: (c) - 1 V (d) - 3 V
(h = 4.14 × 10–15 eV and c = 3 × 108 ms–1) NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
(a) ≈ 6 × 105 ms-1 (b) ≈ 0.6 × 106 ms-1 Ans. (d) : Given:
(c) ≈ 61 × 10 ms
3 -1
(d) ≈ 0.3 × 106 ms-1 photon energy hv = 5 eV
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 maximum energy of emitted photoelectron eVs = 2 eV
Ans. (a & b) : Given data 1
eVs = mv2max = (hv)1 – φo
λ0 = 3250 × 10–10 m = 3250 A° 2
λ = 2536 × 10–10 m = 2536 A° 2 = 5 – φo
m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg φo = 3eV
h = 4.14 × 10–15 eV In second case photon energy (hv)2 = 6 eV
c = 3 × 108 m/s eVs = (hv)2 – φ0 = 6 – 3 = 3eV
So hc = (4.14 × 10–15) × (3 × 108) Vs = 3V = – VAC
= 12420 eVA° ⇒ VAC = –3V
The maximum kinetic energy is given as 14. When a metallic surface is illuminated with
Kmax = hv – φ0 = hv – hv0 radiation of wavelength λ the stopping potential
is V. If the same surface is illuminated with
hc hc
Kmax = − radiation of wavelength 2λ, the stopping
λ λ0
V
potential is . The threshold wavelength for
1 hc hc 4
or mv 2 = −
2 λ λ0 the metallic surface is:/peye efkeâmeer OeeeflJekeâ he‰ eâes
1 1 1  lejbieowOÙe& λ kesâ efJeefkeâjCeeW mes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees
mv 2 = hc  −  eV
2  λ λ0  efvejesOeer efJeYeJe V nw~ Ùeefo Fmeer he‰ eâes lejbieowOÙe& 2λ kesâ
V
2hc  1 1  efJeefkeâjCeeW mes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peeS, pees efvejesOeer efJeYeJe
V2 =  −  eV 4
m  λ λ0 
nes peelee nw~ Fme OeeeflJekeâ he<" keâer osnueer lejbieowOÙe& nw :
2 2 ×12420  1 1  (a) 3λ (b) 4λ
V = − eV
9.1×10−31  2536 3250  5
(c) 5λ (d) λ
2 × 12420 2
V2 = 8.6629 × 10−5  eV
9.1× 10−31  NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
2.15187 eV Ans. (a) : According to Einstein’s photoelectric
V2 = equation
9.1× 10−31
Kmax = eV0 = Ei – φ
2.152 × 1.6 × 10−19 Where Ei = incident energy
V=
9.1× 10−31 φ = work function
V ≈ 615120.82 hc hc
eV = − ......................... (i)
V ≈ 0.6 × 106 ms −1 λ λ0
V hc hc
13. Photons with energy 5 eV are incident on a e = − ......................... (ii)
cathode C in a photoelectric cell. The 4 2λ λ 0
maximum energy of emitted photoelectrons is 2 from equation (i) and (ii)
eV. When photons of energy 6eV are incident 1  hc hc  hc hc
on C, photoelectrons will reach the anode A, if  − = −
4  λ λ0  2λ λ0
the stopping potential of A relative to C is
Physics 551 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 1 2 4 efkeâmeer Oeeleg kesâ he=‰ (melen) keâes λ lejbieowOÙe& kesâ
− = −
λ λ0 λ λ0 SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe mes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Fme ØekeâeMe
3 1 keâe, ØekeâeMe-efJeÅegle Oeeje kesâ efueÙes, efvejesOeer efJeYeJe 3V0
= , λ 0 = 3λ
λ0 λ nw~ lees, ØekeâeMe-efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe kesâ efueÙes Fme he=‰ keâer
osnueer DeeJe=efòe nesieer:-
15. A photoelectric surface is illuminated
successively by monochromatic light of λ
(a) 4λ (b)
λ 4
wavelength λ and . If the maximum kinetic
2 λ
(c) (d) 6λ
energy of the emitted photoelectrons in the 6
second case is 3 times that in the first case, the AIPMT-03.05.2015
work function of the surface of the material is
Ans. (a) : From the formula -
(h = Planck's constant, c = speed of light)/efkeâmeer
c
λ h = W + 3eV0 ……….(1)
ØekeâeMe JewÅegle he=‰ keâes, ›eâceMe: λ leLee . lejbieowOÙe& kesâ λ
2 c
SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe mes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo h = W + eV0 ………..(2)
2λ
Glmeefpe&le ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece Multiply eqn (2) with (3) and subtracting eqn (1) from it
ieeflepe Tpee& keâe ceeve otmejer oMee ceW henueer oMee mes 3 hc  3 
iegvee nw lees, Fme he=‰ kesâ heoeLe& keâe keâeÙe& heâueve nw~ (h =  − 1  = 2W
λ 2 
hueebkeâ efmLejebkeâ, c ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie) hc 2hc
=
hc hc 2λ λ 0
(a) (b)
3λ 2λ
λ 0 = 4λ
hc 2hc
(c) (d)
λ λ 17. A radiation of energy ‘E’ falls normally on a
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 perfectly reflecting surface. The momentum
transferred to the surface is (C = Velocity of
Ans. (b) : Let φ0 be the work function of the surface of
light) :- .
material. Then,
'E' Tpee& keâe efJeefkeâjCe efkeâmeer hetCe&le: hejeJele&keâ he=‰ hej
hc
K max I = − φ0 DeefYeuecyeJeled Deeheeflele neslee nw~ Ùeefo ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie C
λ
nes lees, Fme he=‰ keâes mLeeveevleefjle mebJesie nesiee:-
hc 2hc
& K max II = − φ0 = − φ0 2E 2E
λ λ (a) (b)
2 C C2
In second case E E
KmaxII = 3KmaxI (given) (c) 2 (d)
C C
2hc  hc  AIPMT-03.05.2015
∴ − φ0 = 3  − φ0 
λ  λ  Ans. (a) : Energy of radiation
3hc 2hc hC
⇒ 3φ0 − φ0 = − E=
λ λ λ
hc Momentum of incident radiation
⇒ 2φ0 = h E
λ pi = =
λ C
hc
⇒ φ0 = Momentum of reflected radiation
2λ E
p r = −pi = −
16. A certain metallic surface is illuminated with C
monochromatic light of wavelength λ. The So, momentum transferred to the surface
stopping potential for photo-electric current E  E
for this light is 3V0. If the same surface is pi − p r = −  − 
C  C
illuminated with light of wavelength 2λ, the
stopping potential is V0. The threshold 2E
wavelength for this surface for photoelectric pi − p r =
C
effect is :-
Physics 552 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
18. When the energy of the incident radiation is 20. A source of light is placed at a distance of 50
increased by 20%, the kinetic energy of the cm from a photo cell and the stopping potential
photoelectrons emitted from a metal surface is found to be V0. If the distance between the
incerased from 0.5 eV to 0.8 eV. The work light source and photo cell is made 25 cm, the
function of the metal is:- new stopping potential will be
Oeeleg kesâ efkeâmeer he=‰ hej Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer Tpee& keâes ØekeâeMe keâe Skeâ œees$e Skeâ heâesšes mesue mes 50cm keâer
20³ yeÌ{eves hej, Gmemes Glmeefpe&le heâesšes Fueskeäš^e@veeW otjer hej jKee ieÙee nw Deewj efvejesOeer efJeYeJe V0 heeF& ieF& nw~
(ØekeâeMe keâer Fueskeäš^e@veeW) keâer ieeflepe Tpee& 0.5 eV mes
Ùeefo ØekeâeMe œees$e Deewj heâesšes mesue kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 25
cm keâj oer peeS lees veF& efvejesOeer efJeYeJe nesieer
yeÌ{keâj 0.8 eV nes peelee nw~ lees, Fme Oeeleg keâe keâeÙe&
(a) 2V0 (b) V0/2
heâueve nw:- (c) V0 (d) 4V0
(a) 0.65 eV (b) 1.0 eV NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
(c) 1.3 eV (d) 1.5 eV Ans. (c) : Changing the position of source light from
AIPMT-06.05.2014 photocell, there will be a change in intensity of light
Ans. (b) : According to Einstein's photoelectric falling on the photocell. As stopping potential is
equation, independent of the intensity of the incident light, hence
The Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons is stopping potential remains same i.e. V0 stopping
K = hv – φ0 potential is independent of distance.
Where, hv is the energy of incident radiation and φ0 is 21. The threshold frequency for a photosensitive
metal is 3.3 × 1014 Hz. If light of frequency 8.2
work function of the metal.
× 1014 Hz is incident on this metal, the cutoff
As per equation voltage for the photoelectric emission is nearly:
0.5eV = hv – φ0 –––––– (i) Skeâ ØekeâeMemeg«eener Oeeleg kesâ efueÙes osnueer DeeJe=efòe 3.3 ×
0.8eV = 1.2hv – φ0 –––– (ii) 1014 Hz nw~ Ùeefo 8.2 × 1014 Hz DeeJe=efòe keâe ØekeâeMe
on solving eqns. (i) and (ii), we get Gme Oeeleg hej Deeheeflele neslee nw, lees ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle
φ0 = 1.0eV Glmepe&ve kesâ efueÙes Devlekeâ (cut-off) Jeesušspe ueieYeie nw:
19. For photoelectric emission from certain metal (a) 1 V (b) 2 V
the cut off frequency is v. If radiation of (c) 3 V (d) 5 V
frequency 2v impinges on the metal plate, the AIPMT (Mains)-2011
maximum possible velocity of the emitted Ans. (b) : Given - Threshold frequency for a
electron will be (m is the electron mass) :- photosensitive metal (νth) = 3.3×1014 Hz
efkeâmeer Oeeleg mes ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Glmepe&ve kesâ efueÙes efvejesOeer Light frequency (ν) = 8.2×1014 Hz
(Deblekeâ) DeeJe=efòe v nw~ Ùeefo, Fme Oeeleg hej 2v DeeJe=efòe So, Cut of voltage eV0 = h ν – h ν th
h
kesâ efJeefkeâjCe Deeheeflele neW lees, Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe V0 = ( ν − ν th )
DeefOekeâlece mebYeeefJele Jesie nesiee~ (m Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe e
6.6 × 10−34
õJÙeceeve nw~) V0 = (8.2 − 3.3) ×1014
1.6 × 10−19
(a) 2 hv / m (b) hv / ( 2m ) V0 = 2 V
(c) hv / m (d) 2hv / m 22. An electron in the hydrogen atom jumps from
excited state n to the ground state. The
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
wavelength so emitted illuminates a
Ans. (d) : K max = E − φ photosensitive material having work function
Here φ = work function = hv 2.75 eV. If the stopping potential of the
photoelectron is 10V, then the value of n is :
1 2
mv = h ( 2v ) = −hv neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Gòesefpele DeJemLee
2 n mes cetue mlej ceW ketâolee nw~ lejbieowOÙe& Fme Øekeâej
1 Glmeef pe&le nesleer nw efkeâ Jen 2.75 eV keâeÙe&Heâueve Jeeues
mv = hv
2

2 Skeâ ØekeâeMe meg«eener heoeLe& keâes Øeoerhle keâjleer nw~ Ùeefo

2hv HeâesšesFueskeäš^e@veeW keâe efvejesOeer efJeYeJe 10V nw, lees n keâe
v =
2

m ceeve nw :
2hv (a) 2 (b) 3
v=
m (c) 4 (d) 5
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
Physics 553 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given, work function φ0 = 2.75eV he=‰ mes Skeâ kesâ yeeo Skeâ Øeoerhle keâjles nQ efpemekeâe keâeÙe&
Stopping potential of the photoelectron V0 = 10V Heâueve 0.5 eV nw, lees Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer
Q
hc
= eV0 + φ0 = 10eV + 2.75eV = 12.75eV DeefOekeâlece ÛeeueeW keâe Devegheele nesiee :
λ (a) 1 : 5 (b) 1 : 4
hc  1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1
But = 13.6 1 − 2  eV = 12.75eV
λ  n  AIPMT (mains)-2012
1 12.75 AIPMT (Screening)-2011
1− 2 =
n 13.6 1
1 12.75 13.6 − 12.75 Ans. (c) : We know that KEmax = mv 2max
= 1− = 2
n2 13.6 13.6
2
1 vmax = KE max
= 0.0625 m
n2
10000 2
⇒ n2 = = 16 vmax = (E photon - work function)
625 m
n=4 v1 E ph 1 – W 1 – 0.5
So, = =
23. In photoelectric emission process from a metal v2 E ph 2 – W 2.5 – 0.5
of work function 1.8 eV, the kinetic energy of v1 1
most energetic electron is 0.5 eV. The =
v2 2
corresponding stopping potential is :/efkeâmeer Oeeleg
keâe keâeÙe& Heâueve 1.8 eV nw~ Fmemes ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle v1 : v 2 = 1: 2
Glmepe&ve ceW Glhevve Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece Tpee& 0.5 25. Photoelectric emission occurs only when the
eV nw~ Fmekeâe mebiele efvejesOeer (Deblekeâ) efJeYeJe nesiee : incident light has more than a certain
(a) 2.3 V (b) 1.8 V minimum: /ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Glmepe&ve nesves kesâ efueS Ùen
(c) 1.3 V (d) 0.5 V DeeJeMÙekeâ nw efkeâ Deeheeflele ØekeâeMe keâer Skeâ efveefMÛele
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
vÙetvelece ceeve mes DeefOekeâ :
Ans. (d) : If Vs is the stopping potential, then Maximum
Kinetic Energy- (a) frequency/DeeJe=efòe nes (b) power/Meefòeâ nes
Kmax = eVs (c) wavelength/lejbieowOÙe& nes (d) intensity/leer›elee nes
→ 0.5eV = eVs AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Vs = 0.5V Ans. (a) :According to Einstein's photoelectric equation
Kmax= hv – hv0
Second Method-
Since, Kmax is positive, the photo electric emission
The relationship between kinetic energy and stopping
potential is- occurs only if
hv > hv0 or v > v0
⇒ KE = qV0
Where KE = Kinetic energy, q = charge The photo electric emission occurs only when the
V0 = Stopping potential incident light has more than a certain minimum
Given, KEmax = 0.5 eV, e = 1.6×10 C - 19 frequency, called as threshold frequency.
Stopping potential only depends on the maximum KE of 26. A source S1 is producing, 1015 photons per
an electron ejected. The stopping potential given by second of wavelength 5000 Å. Another source
KEmax = eV0 S2 is producing 1.02 × 1015 photons per second
⇒ 0.5eV = 1.6×10-19×V0 of wavelength 5100 Å. Then, (power of
−19 S2)/(power of S1) is equal to –
0.5 × 1.6 × 10
V0 = = 0.5V Skeâ Œeesle 5000 Å lejbieowOÙe& kesâ Heâesševe 1015 Øeefle
1.6 × 10 −19
meskeâC[ keâer oj mes Glmeefpe&le keâj jne nw~ Skeâ DevÙe Œeesle
24. Light of two different frequencies whose
photons have energies 1 eV and 2.5 eV S2, 5100 Å lejbieowOÙe& kesâ Heâesševe, Øeefle meskeâC[1.02 ×
respectively illuminate a metallic surface whose 1015 Heâesševe keâer oj mes Glmeefpe&le keâj jne nw~ leye (S1
work function is 0.5 eV successively. Ratio of keâer Meefòeâ)/(S2 keâer Meefòeâ) yejeyej nw –
maximum speeds of emitted electrons will be : (a) 1.00 (b) 1.02
oes efYevve-efYevve DeeJe=efòeÙeeW kesâ ØekeâeMe efpevekesâ Heâesše@veeW (c) 1.04 (d) 0.98
keâer Tpee& ›eâMece: 1eV Deewj 2.5eV nw, efkeâmeer Ssmes Oeeleg- AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Physics 554 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Number of photons emitted per second (a) N and 2T/N Deewj 2T
n=
p
(where, p = power) (b) 2N and T/2N Deewj T
hc (c) 2N and 2T/2N Deewj 2T
λ (d) N and T/ N Deewj T
nhc
p= AIPMT (Mains)-2010
λ
Ans. (b) : The number of photoelectrons depends upon
p 2 n 2 λ1 1.02×1015 ×5000 the number of photons. The number of photons is
= =
p1 n1λ 2 1015 × 5100 directly proportional to intensity for a given area.
p2 Number of electrons ∝ intensity.
=1 So, if the intensity is doubled from (I to 2I), The
p1
number of elctrons will be doubled from N to 2N.
p1 = p 2 But the energy of a single photon is independent of
27. The potential difference that must be applied to intenstiy. It will not be affected and hence the energy of
stop the fastest photo electrons emitted by a the photoelectron will remain the same.
nickel surface, having work function 5.01 eV, So, the number increased to 2N and energy reamin T.
when ultraviolet light of 200 nm falls on it, 29. The number of photoelectrons emitted for light
must be – of a frequency ν (higher than the threshold
peye efveefkeâue melen efpemekeâe keâeÙe&Heâueve 5.01 eV hej frequency ν 0 ) is proportional to:/DeJemeercee
200 nm keâer hejeyeQieveer ØekeâeMe lejbiesb Deeheeflele nesleer nQ, DeeJeòeer ( ν 0 ) mes DeefOekeâ DeeJeefòe ( ν ) kesâ ØekeâeMe Éeje
lees heefjCeecemJe™he efveefkeâue melen mes efvekeâueves Jeeues Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee Devegheeleer nesieer~
meyemes leer›eieeceer Heâesšesve keâes jeskeâves kesâ efueÙes DeeJeMÙekeâ
(a) Frequency of light ( ν )
efJeYeJeevlej keâe ceeve nesiee –
ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJeòeer ( ν ) keâer
(a) 2.4 V (b) – 1.2 V
(c) –2.4 V (d) 1.2 V (b) ν – ν 0
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 (c) Threshold frequency ( ν 0 )
DeJemeercee DeeJeòeer ( ν 0 ) keâer
o
Ans. (b) : Given, λ=200nm = 2000 A , φ0 = 5.01 eV
• Albert Einstein equation for photoelectric emission (d) Intensity of light/ ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee keâer
h ν = φ + eV0 AIMPT-2009
hc Ans. (d) :The number of photo electrons emitted is
eV0 = − φ (Q c = ν λ)
λ directly proportional to the intensity of light and
independent of frequency. Thus, with change in photo
6.33 × 10−34 × 3 × 108
eV0 = − 5.01eV electrons emitted the intensity of light changes.
2000 × 10−10 × 1.6 × 10 −19
30. The figure shows a plot of photo current versus
eV0 = 6.2 eV − 5.01eV anode potential for a photo sensitive surface for
eV0 = 1.2 eV three different radiations. Which one of the
⇒ V0 = 1.2V following is a correct statement ?
So, the negative potential difference that must be Fme efÛe$e ceW Skeâ ØekeâeMe meef›eâÙe leue kesâ efueÙes leerve
applied to stop photoelectrons from the metal surface is efJeefYeVe efJeefkeâjCeeW kesâ efueÙes ØekeâeMeerÙe Oeeje Deewj Svees[
–1.2V. efJeYeJe kesâ yeerÛe DeejsKeeW keâes efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ efvecve
28. When monochromatic radiation of intensity I keâLeveeW ceW mes efkeâmekeâes ÙeLeeLe& ceevee peeÙesiee?
falls on a metal surface, the number of
photoelectrons and their maximum kinetic
energy are N and T respectively. If the
intensity of radiation is 2I, the number of
emitted electrons and their maximum kinetic
energy are respectively
peye I leer›elee keâes SkeâJeCeea efJeefkeâjCe, efkeâmeer Oeeleg keâer
melen hej škeâjeles nQ lees, Heâesše@ve keâer mebKÙee Deewj Gvekeâer
(a) Curves (b) and (c) represent incident
DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& ›eâceMe: N Deewj T Ùeefo radiations same frequencies having same
efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer leer›elee 2I nes lees Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer intensity.
mebKÙee Deewj Gvekeâer DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& ›eâceMe: Je›eâ (b) leLee (c) meceeve DeeJeefòe Deewj meceeve leer›elee keâer
neWies– Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâes efve™efhele keâjleer nw~
Physics 555 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(b) Curves (a) and (b) represent incident 3 × 106 10−6
radiations of different frequencies and ⇒ =
different intensities v 9.1× 10 −31
Je›eâ (a) leLee (b) efJeefYeVe DeeJeefòe Deewj efJeefYeVe leer›elee 9.1 × 10 −31 × 3 × 106
⇒ v=
keâer Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâes efve™efhele keâjleer nw~ 10 −6
(c) Curves (a) and (b) represent incident = 27 .3 ×10–19
radiations of same frequencies but of different = 2.73 × 10–18 m/s
intensities
32. Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 × 1014 Hz
Je›eâ (a) leLee (b) meceeve DeeJeefòe hejvleg efJeefYeVe leer›elee is produced by a laser. The power emitted is 2
keâer Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâes efve™efhele keâjleer nw~ × 10–3W. The number of photons emitted, on
(d) Curves (b) and (c) represent incident the average, by the source per second is:-
radiations of different frequencies and
different intensities/ Je›eâ (b) leLee (c) efJeefYeVe
Skeâ uesmej Éeje 6.0 × 1014 Hz DeeJe=efòe keâe SkeâJeCeea
DeeJeefòe Deewj efJeefYeVe leer›elee keâer Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer ØekeâeMe hewoe efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Glmeefpe&le Meefòeâ 2 × 10–3W
efve™efhele keâjleer nw~ nw~ Œeesle mes Øeefle meskeâsC[ Glmeefpe&le HeâesševeeW keâer Deewmele
AIMPT-2009 mebKÙee nesieer:-
Ans. (c) : This energy is imparted on the photosensitive (a) 5 × 1014 (b) 5 × 1015
surface to cause photo ejection. The energy of the (c) 5 × 1016 (d) 5 × 1017
incident photon is E = h ν , hence frequency determines
AIPMT-2007
the energy of incident photons. At the points where
curve cuts the x-axis, the incident photon energy is Ans. (b) : Given: frequency ν = 6.0 × 1014 Hz
equal to the work potential of as material. Hence Power emitted P = 2 × 10 −3 W
frequency is same for radiation of curve a & b.
Intensity is the measure of no of photons striking per Energy of one photon = hν = 6.6 × 10 −34 × 6.0 × 1014
unit time. Thus they determine the amount of Total power emitted
Number of photons emitted =
photocurrent produced. Thus it is same for b & c. Energy of one photon
31. A particle of mass 1 mg has the same
2 × 10−3
wavelength as an electron moving with a =
velocity of 3 × 106 ms–1. The velocity of the 6.63 × 10−34 × 6.0 × 1014
particle is : = 5.05 × 1015 ≈ 5 × 1015
(mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg)
33. A photo-cell employs photoelectric effect to
Skeâ efceueer«eece õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ keâCe Glevee ner convert:-
lejiebowOÙe& jKelee nw efpelevee efkeâ 3 × 106 ms–1 Ûeeue mes heâesšes-mesue ceW ØekeâeMe-efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe keâe ØeÙeesie neslee
Ûeueves Jeeuee Fuewkeäš^e@ve~ keâCe keâer Ûeeue nesieer~
nw:-
(Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve = 9.1 × 10–31 kg)
(a) Change in the frequency of light into a
(a) 3 × 10–31 ms–1 (b) 2.7 × 10–21 ms–1 change in electric voltage
(c) 2.7 × 10–18 ms–1 (d) 9 × 10–2 ms–1 ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJe=efòe ceW yeoueeJe keâes efJeÅegle Jeesušlee ceW
AIPMT-2008
yeoueeJe ceW yeoueves kesâ efueS
Ans. (c) : Given: - Mass m = 1 mg = 1 ×10–6 kg
(b) Change in the intensity of illumination into a
Velocity, Ve=V1 = 3 ×106 m/s
change in photoelectric current
Mass of electron, me= m1 = 9.1 ×10–31kg
v2 = v
Øeoerheve keâer leer›elee ceW yeoueeJe keâes ØekeâeMe-efJeÅegle Oeeje ceW
m2 = m yeoueeJe ceW yeoueves kesâ efueS
h h (c) Change in the intensity of illumination into a
We know λ = = change in the work function of the
P mv
photocathode
h
or mv = = constant [Q λ is same] Øeoerheve keâer leer›elee ceW yeoueeJe keâes heâesšes-kewâLees[ kesâ keâeÙe&
λ
heâueve ceW yeoueeJe ceW yeoueves kesâ efueS
⇒ mv = constant (d) Change in the frequency of light into a
v1m change in the electric current
⇒ = 2
v 2 m1 ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJe=efòe ceW yeoueeJe keâes efJeÅegle Oeeje ceW
ve m yeoueeJe ceW yeoueves kesâ efueS
⇒ =
v me AIPMT-2006

Physics 556 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons.
Ek = Ei – Eo
Given case I – when incident energy of photon Ei = hv
Ek = K
∴ K = hv – Eo
we get Eo = hv – K
Case II- frequency (v) of incident photon is doubled. So
energy of incident photon also gets doubled.
Thus K' = 2hv – Eo
= 2hv – (hv – K)
In a photoelectric effect when monochromatic = hv + K
realizations of suitable frequency fall on the
35. The momentum of a photon of energy 1MeV in
photosensitive plate called cathode, the photoelectrons kg m/s, will be-
are emitted which get accelerated towards anode. These
1MeV Tpee& jKeves Jeeues heâesše@ve keâe mebJesie kg m/s ceW
electrons flow in outer circuit resulting in the
photoelectric current. Using the incident radiations of a nesiee:-
fixed frequency, it is found that the photoelectric (a) 0.33 × 106 (b) 7 × 10–24
current increases linearly with the intensity of incident (c) 10–22 (d) 5 × 10–22
light as shown in figure. Hence a photocell employs AIPMT-2006
photoelectric effect to convert change in the intensity of Ans. (d) : Given energy of photon E = 1 MeV
illumination into a change in photoelectric current. hc
34. When photons of energy hν fall on an Energy of photon is given by E =
λ
aluminum plate (of work function Eo),
h
photoelectrons of maximum kinetic energy K de-Broglie wavelength is given by λ =
are ejected. If the frequency of the radiation is p
doubled, the maximum kinetic energy of the hc
So, E = = p.c (where p is momentum of photon)
ejected photoelectrons will be h/p
peye hv Tpee& kesâ heâesše@ve mes SsuegefceefveÙece keâer huesš E 1×106 ×1.6 ×10−19
(keâeÙe& heâueve Eo) hej Deeheeflele nesles nwQ lees Glmeefpe&le or p = c = 3 × 108
ØekeâeefMekeâ Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& K –22
= 5×10 kg-m/s
nesleer nw~ Ùeefo efJeefkeâjCe keâer DeeJe=efòe keâes ogiegvee keâj efoÙee 36. A photosensitive metallic surface has work
peeS, lees Glmeefpe&le ØekeâeefMekeâ Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer DeefOekeâlece function, hν0. If photons of energy 2hν0 fall
ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer:- on this surface, the electrons come out with a
maximum velocity of 4 × 106 m/s. When the
(a) K + Eo (b) 2K
photon energy is increased to 5hν0, then
(c) K (d) K + hv
maximum velocity of photo electrons will be
AIPMT-2006
Skeâ ØekeâeMe meg«eener OeelJeer leue keâe keâeÙe&heâueve h v0 nw
Ans. (d) : In graph vertical axis represents energy of
Ùeefo Fme leue hej 2h v0 Tpee& kesâ heâesšesve Deeheeflele nes
electrons and horizontal axis represents frequency.
After frequency of f0, the kinetic energy of electrons lees Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe DeefOekeâlece Jesie 4×106 m/s
start increasing proportionally with frequency. neslee nw~ peye heâesševe Tpee& yeÌ{keâj 5 h v0 nesieer lees
ØekeâeMeerÙe Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe DeefOekeâlece Jesie nesiee:-
(a) 2 ×107 m/s (b) 2 × 106 m/s
(c) 8 × 105 m/s (d) 8 × 106 m/s
AIPMT-2005
Ans. (d) : Einstein's photoelectric equation can be
written as
(KE) = hν- W0
1
mV 2 = hν -W0
2
Where, W0 = work function = hν0
Below frequency f0 or below energy hf0 there will be no when photon of energy 2 hv0 falls then
kinetic energy i.e. no emission of electrons. This
1
( )
2
amount of energy i.e. hf0 is known as work function Eo. m × 4 × 106 = 2hν 0 − hν 0 − − − −(i)
[h = planck constant] 2
Physics 557 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When photon of energy 5hv0 falls then 38. A photoelectric cell is illuminated by a point
1 source of light 1 m away. When the source is
mV 2 = 5hν 0 − hν 0 − − − − − −(ii) shifted to 2m then –
2
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i) we get 1 m keâer otjer jKes ngS ØekeâeMe kesâ Skeâ efyevog œeesle mes
V2 4hν 0
Skeâ ØekeâeMe-efJeÅegle mesue keâes Øeoerhle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ peye
= œeesle keâes 2m keâer otjer hej jKe efoÙee peelee nw leye-
( 4 ×10 )6 2 hν 0
(a) each emitted electron carries one quarter of
V 2 = 4 × 16 × 1012 the initial energy/ØelÙeskeâ Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer
V 2 = 64 × 1012 Tpee& ØeejefcYekeâ Tpee& keâer Skeâ-ÛeewLeeF& nw
⇒ V = 8 × 10 m / s
6 (b) number of electrons emitted is half the initial
number/Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee ØeejefcYekeâ
37. According to Einstein's photoelectric equation,
the graph between the kinetic energy of mebKÙee keâer DeeOeer nw~
photoelectrons ejected and the frequency of (c) each emitted electron carries half the initial
incident radiation is :- energy/ØelÙekesâ Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer Tpee& ØeejefcYekeâ
DeeFvmšeFve kesâ ØekeâeMe-JewÅegle meceerkeâjCe kesâ Devegmeej Tpee& keâer DeeOeer nw
Glmeefpe&le ØekeâeMeerÙe Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj (d) number of electrons emitted is a quarter of the
Deeheeflele efJeefkeâjCeeW keâer DeeJe=efòe ceW mecyevOe keâes JÙeòeâ initial number/Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee
keâjves keâe DeejsKe nesiee :- ØeejefcYekeâ mebKÙee keâer Skeâ-ÛeewLeeF& nw
AIPMT-2003
(a) (b) Ans. (d): Intensity of light source is-
1
I∝ 2
d
2 2
(c) (d) I2  d1   1 
∴ =  = 
I1  d 2   2 
AIPMT-2004, 1996 I2 1
=
Ans. (c) : I1 4
I1
I2 =
4
Number of electrons emitted depends upon the intensity
and energy of the electrons emitted is independent of
the intensity.
Hence, number of electrons emitted is a quarter of the
initial number.
39. When ultraviolet rays incident on metal plate
then photoelectric effect does not occur. It
occurs by incidence of
According to Einstein's equation, peye hejeyeQieveer efkeâjCeW efkeâmeer Oeeleg keâer melen hej
hv = hv0 + Kmax Deeheeflele nesleer nw, lees ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe veneR nes
Kmax = hv – hv0... (a) heelee hejvleg efvecve kesâ Deeheeflele nesves mes Ùen nesiee -
On comparing equation (a) with y = mx + c, it is clear
to say that this is the equation of straight line having (a) Infrared rays/DeJejòeâ efkeâjCeW
positive slope (h/e) and negative intercept (hv0) on KE (b) X-rays/ X-efkeâjCeW
axis. The relationship b/w photoelectron K.E and light (c) Radio wave/ jsef[Ùees lejbieW
frequency is
(d) Light wave / ØekeâeMe lejbieW
KEmax = hv – hv0
AIPMT-2002
ev0 = hv – hv0 [Q KE max = ev0 ]
Ans. (b) :
h
v0 = ( v − v0 ) (i) When ultraviolet rays are incident on metal plate &
e photoelectric effect does not occur, it means that
The variation of cut-off potential with frequency of the threshold frequency is greater than frequency
incident radiation is shown above. of U-V rays.

Physics 558 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(ii) X- rays have extremely higher frequency I1 r22
compared to that of U-V rays. =
I 2 r12
(iii) For photoelectric effect, the frequency of incident
light must be greater than threshold frequency of I1 = 4
metal. I2 1
Hence, when X-ray are incident, photoelectric I 1
emission happens. ⇒ 2 =
I1 4
40. Which one among shows particle nature of Q Intensity is directly proportional to Number of
light./keâewvemeer Iešvee ØekeâeMe keâer keâCeerÙe Øeke=âefle keâes Photoelectrons emitted.
oMee&leer nw- ⇒ Number of electrons emitted is a quarter of initial
(a) P.E.E./ ØekeâeMe JewÅegle ØeYeeJe number.
(b) Interference/JÙeeflekeâjCe 42. By photo electric effect, Einstein proved :
ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe kesâ Éeje DeeF&vmešerve ves efmeæ
(c) Refraction/DeheJele&ve
efkeâÙee –
(d) Polirazation/OeÇgJeCe
1 2
AIPMT-2001 (a) E = hν (b) KE =
mv
2
Ans. (a) : (i) Photoelectric effect : Phenomenon in
which light energy forces a metal surface to release − Rhc 2
(c) E = mc2 (d) E =
electrons is called Photoelectric effect. n2
(ii) When the light hits, it shows the particle theory of AIPMT-2000
light & light is defined as stream of photons or Ans. (a) : Photoelectric effect- Phenomenon in which
energy packets. electrically charged particles are released from or within
(iii) The other phenomenon such as interference, a material when it absorbs electromagnetic radiation.
diffraction & polarization can only be explained The effect is often defined as ejection of electrons from
when light is treated as wave. metal plate when light falls on it.
(iv) Phenomenon like, photoelectric effect, line spectra By photoelectric effect, Einstein proved, E = hν
production & scattering of x- Rays demonstrate E = energy of photon
particle nature of light. h = Planck's constant
41. A photo-cell is illuminated by a source of light, ν = frequency
which is placed at a distance d from the cell. If 43. A light of amplitude A and wavelength λ is
the distance become d/2, then number of incident on a metallic surface, then saturation
electrons emited per second will be:/Skeâ ØekeâeMe current flows is proportional to (assume cut off
wave length = λ0)
efJeÅegle mewue keâes d otjer hej jKes ØekeâeMe œeesle mes
DeeÙeece - A SJeb lejbieowOÙe& λJeeueer ØekeâeMe lejbie
ØekeâeefMele efkeâÙee peelee nw Ùeefo otjer keâes d/2 keâj efoÙee
OeeeflJekeâ melen hej Deeheeflele nw~ leye meblehle Oeeje
peeÙes lees Øeefle mewkeâC[ Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee meceevegheeleer nw~ (ceeve uees osnueer lejbie owOÙe& λ0) nw) :-
nesieer-
(a) A2, if λ > λ0/ A2, Ùeefo λ > λ0
(a) Remain same/Gleveer ner jnsieer
(b) A2, if λ < λ0/ A2, Ùeefo λ < λ0
(b) Four times/4 iegveer (c) A, if λ > λ0/ A, Ùeefo λ > λ0
(c) Two times/2 iegveer (d) A, if λ < λ0/ A, Ùeefo λ < λ0
(d) One-fourth/ÛeewLeeF& AIPMT-1999
AIPMT-2001 Ans. (b) : Saturation current flows is proportional to
E square of amplitude (A)
Ans. (b) : Intensity I = =[i ∝ A2]
At
And energy incident, Ei > Eth or φ
E = total energy of source
hc hc 1 1
A = Area of illuminated surface > or > = λ0 > λ
t = time λ λ0 λ λ0
E 44. The K.E. of electron and photon is same then
∴ I= relation between their De-Broglie wavelength
4π r 2 t
Fueskeäš^e@ve SJeb Heâesše@ve ceW ØelÙeskeâ keâer ieeflepe Tpee& meceeve
I1 E 4πr 2 t
= 2
× 2 nw, lees Fvemes mebyebefOele [er-yeÇesieueer lejbieowOÙe& lejbieowOÙe&
I2 4πr1 t E
keâe Devegheele keäÙee nesiee :-
Physics 559 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) λp < λe (b) λp = λe 46. The total energy of an electron is 3.555 MeV,
(c) λp > λe (d) λp = 2λe then its Kinetic energy is/Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer kegâue
AIPMT-1999 Tpee& 3.555 MeV nw, lees Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe Tpee& nw:
Ans. (c) : Given– (a) 3.545 MeV (b) 3.045 MeV
Kinetic energy of electrons (KE)e = energy photon (c) 3.5 MeV (d) None
1 hc AIPMT-1999
m e ve 2 =
2 λp Ans. (b) : Total energy of electron = K.E + mec2
 ⇒ K.E = (3.555- 0.51) MeV
h h 
∴λ ∝  λe =  = 3.045 MeV
p  me ve 
47. If the light of wavelength λ is incident on
1 h  hc metal surface, the ejected fastest electron has
=   .ve =
2  λe  λ p 3λ
speed v. If the wavelength is changed to ,
h 4
me v e = the speed of the fastest emitted electron will be
λe 1 lejbieowOÙe& keâe ØekeâeMe Oeeleg hej Deeheeflele keâjves hej
ve c efvekeâueves Jeeues Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe DeefOekeâlece, Jesie v nw Ùeefo
⇒ =
2λ e λ p 3λ
keâe ØekeâeMe Oeeleg hej Deeheeflele nes lees efvekeâueves
λp C C  4
After rearranging → = ∴  > 1 Jeeues Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe DeefOekeâlece Jesie efkeâlevee nesiee–
2λ e Ve V
 e 
4 4
 λ p > λ e  (a) Smaller than v/ v mes keâce
3 3
45. Light of wavelength 3000 Å in Photoelectric
4 4
effect (PEE) gives electron of max. K.E. 0.5 eV. (b) Greater than v / v mes DeefOekeâ
If wavelength change to 2000 Å then max. K.E. 3 3
of emitted electrons will be/ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe (c) 2v/ogiegvee
ceW peye 3000Å keâe ØekeâeMe GheÙeesie ceW ueeles nQ, lees (d) Zero/MetvÙe
Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& 0.5 eV AIPMT-1998
nw~ Ùeefo lejbieowOÙe& 2000 Å keâj oW lees ØekeâeMe Fueskeäš^e@ve Ans. (b) : The kinetic energy of the emitted
keâer DeefOekeâlece ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer :- photoelectron is given by
(a) Less than 0.5 eV /0.5 eV mes keâce 1 2
mv = hν − φ0
(b) 0.5 eV 2
(c) Greater than 0.5 eV/0.5 eV mes pÙeeoe hc 1  c
= mv 2 + φ0 ----(1) Q  ν = 
(d) PEE does not occurs λ 2  λ
ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle ØeYeeJe veneR nesiee 3λ
AIPMT-1999 If λ becomes assume that the velocity changes from
4
Ans. (c) : Kinetic energy maximum – v to v' the above equation can be written as
hc hc 1
K.Emax = −φ = mv '2 + φ0
λ 3λ 2
Then kinetic energy greater than 0.5eV. 4
hc 4hc 1
(KE)1 = −φ ...(i) ⇒ − φ0 = mv '2 ------(2)
3000 3λ 2
hc ' hc '
(KE)2 = −φ ...(ii) Substituting the value of from equation (1) in the
2000 λ
Subtracting equation (i) – (ii). equation (2), we get
 hc hc  4 1 2 1
KE1 – KE2 =  − ⇒ [ KE 2 > KE1 ] × mv + φ0 − φ0 = mv '2
 3000 2000  3 2 2
From the given conditions, we can conclude that 4
1/ 2

maximum wavelength have minimum kinetic energy v' > v 

and vice -versa. 3
(KE2 > 0.5 eV) Hence option (b) is correct

Physics 560 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
48. Work function of a metal surface is φ = 1.5 eV. in intensity of light/ØekeâeMe leer›elee yeÌ{sieer
(a)
If a light of wavelength 5000Å falls on it then in wavelength of light/ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowIÙe& yeÌ{sieer
(b)
the maximum K.E. of ejected electron will be
in frequency of light/ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJe=efòe yeÌ{sieer
(c)
efkeâmeer Oeeleghe… keâe keâeÙe&Heâueve nw, Fme hej lejbieowOÙe& keâe
never./keâYeer veneR
(d)
ØekeâeMe efiejeves hej Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer DeefOekeâlece
AIPMT-1993
ieeflepe Tpee& nesieer–
Ans. (a) : Number of ejected photoelectrons increases
(a) 1.2 eV (b) 0.98 eV
with increase in intensity of light.
(c) 0.45 eV (d) 0 eV
• Number of electrons ejected can be measured as a
AIPMT-1998
function of intensity, which is equal to energy per unit
Ans. (b) : Energy of photon is given by– time per unit area.
hc 12400
E= = eV • Keeping frequency constant, increasing intensity will
λ o
λA increase energy and hence increase number of ejected
  electron.
12400 Thus, number of ejected photoelectrons will increase
∴ E= = 2.48eV
5000 with increase in intensity of light.
Einstein's photoelectric equation is– 51. The cathode of a photoelectric cell is changed
E k =E-φ ⇒ ( 2.48 − 1.5 ) eV such that the work function changes from W1 to
W2 (W2 > W1). If the current before and after
⇒ 0.98eV changes are I1 and I2, all other conditions
49. Which of the following statement is correct? remaining unchanged, then (assuming hυ > W2)
efvecve ceW mes keâewve-mee leLÙe mener nw? Skeâ ØekeâeMe JewÅegle mesue keâe kewâLees[ yeoueves mes Gmekeâe
(a) The photocurrent increases with intensity of keâeÙe& heâueve W1 mes W2 yeoue peelee nw~ (W2 > W1)~
light./ØekeâeMe leer›elee yeÌ{ves mes ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Oeeje keâe efyevee efkeâmeer heefjJele&ve kesâ Ùeefo henues Oeeje keâe ceeve I1
ceeve yeÌ{siee~ leLee yeeo ceW I2 nw, lees (ceevee hυ > W2)
(b) The stopping potential increases with increase
(a) I1 = I2 (b) I1 < I2
of incident light./ ØekeâeMe leer›elee yeÌ{eves mes mšesefhebie
(c) I1 > I2 (d) I1 < I2 < 2I1
efJeYeJe yeÌ{siee~
AIPMT-1992
(c) The current in photocell increases with
increasing frequency./DeeJe=efòe yeÌ{eves mes ØekeâeMe Ans. (a) : Given: (i) Work function changes from W1 to
W2 (W2 > W1)
efJeÅegle Oeeje keâe ceeve yeÌ{siee~
(ii) Current before and after are I1 and I2.
(d) The photocurrent is proportional to the
Now, Photocurrent is independent of value of work
applied voltage./ ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Oeeje efoÙes ieÙes function. It is independent on intensity of the incident
efJeYeJe kesâ meceevegheeleer nw~ rays.
AIPMT-1997 Current will be same after changing the value of work
Ans. (a) : (i) Correct statement is: The photocurrent function.
increases with intensity of light. ⇒ I1 = I2
(ii) Intensity (I) of photons is directly proportional to 52. When light of wavelength 300 nm (nanometer)
photoelectric current. falls on a photoelectric emitter, photoelectrons
are liberated. For another emitter, however,
light of 600 nm wavelength is sufficient for
liberating photoemission. What is the ratio of
the work functions of the two emitters?
peye 300 nm lejbieowOÙe& keâe ØekeâeMe efkeâmeer ØekeâeMe -
efJeÅegle Glmepe&keâ hej heÌ[lee nw, lees ØekeâeMe -Fueskeäš^eve
(iii) When the intensity of the incident photon increases, cegòeâ nesles nw~ Skeâ DevÙe Glmepe&keâ kesâ efueS 600nm
the number of electrons emitted from the metal surface lejbieowOÙe& keâe ØekeâeMe heâesšes Fueskeäš^eveeW keâes cegòeâ keâjves
increases due to which the photoelectric current
increase. kesâ efueS heÙee&hle nw~ oesveeW Glmepe&keâes kesâ keâeÙe& heâueve keâe
50. Number of ejected photoelectrons increase with Devegheele nw?
increase (a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
Glmeefpe&le heâesšes Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer mebKÙee efkeâmekeâer Je=efæ kesâ (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
meeLe yeÌ{sieer AIPMT-1993
Physics 561 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : Given: meesef[Ùece hej heâesšes Fuesefkeäš^keâ ØeYeeJe kesâ efueS LeÇsMeesu[
Wavelength of light 1, λ1 = 300 nm º
DeeJe=efòe, 5000 A keâer lejbieowOÙe& mes cesue Keeleer nw~
Wavelength of light 2, λ2 = 600 nm
Fmekeâe keâeÙe& heâueve nw:
hc
As we know that, work function φ = (a) 4 × 10–19 J (b) 1×10–19 J
λ (c) 2 × 10–19 J (d) 3 × 10–19 J
φ1 λ 2 600 2 AIPMT-1988
⇒ = = =
φ2 λ1 300 1 Ans. (a) : Given, wavelength λ = 5000 Aº
⇒ Ratio of work functions of two emitters = 2:1 hc 6.6 × 10 –34 × 3 × 108
Work function (W) = =
53. Photoelectric work function of a metal is 1 eV. λ 5000 ×10−10
Light of wavelength λ = 3000 A falls on it. The
º = 3.96×10 J  4 × 10 −19 J
–19

photo electrons come out with a maximum

velocity 25.3 Particle and Wave Nature of
º
efkeâmeer Oeeleg hej λ = 3000 A keâer lejbieowIÙe& Jeeuee Light
ØekeâeMe [euee peelee nw lees heâesšes Fueskeäš^e@ve efkeâme ieefle mes 56. The de Broglie wavelength associated with an
efvekeâueWies peyeefkeâ keâeÙe& heâueve 1 eV nw? electron, accelerated by a potential difference
(a) 10 metres/sec (b) 102 metres/sec of 81 V is given by:/81 V kesâ efJeYeJeeblej mes lJeefjle
(c) 104 metres/sec (d) 106 metres/sec Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve mes pegÌ[s [er yeÇesieueer lejbie owOÙe& nw
AIPMT-1991 (a) 1.36 nm (b) 0.136 nm
Ans. (d) : Work function of metal = 1eV (c) 13.6 nm (d) 136nm
Wavelength λ = 3000 Aº RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
We know, Kmax = hν – W Ans. (b) : Given : V = 81V
The debroglie wavelength associated with electron is
1 hc
⇒ mv 2 = –W given as-
2 λ 12.27 0
2 ( hc / λ − W ) λ= A
⇒ v= v
m 12.27 0
λ= A
( 8) (
2 6.62 × 10 × 3 × 10 / 3000 × 10
–34 –10 )
−1 81
⇒ v=
9.1 × 10−31 12.27 0
λ= A
⇒ v = 1.04 × 10 m / s ≈ 1 × 10 m / s
6 6
9
54. Ultraviolet radiations of 6.2 eV falls on an 0
λ = 1.36 A
aluminium surface. Kinetic energy of fastest
electron emitted is (work function = 4.2 eV) λ = 0.136 nm
6.2 eV kesâ hejeyeQieveer efJeefkeâjCe SsuÙegefceefveÙece hej efiejles 57. The graph which shows the variation of the de
nQ, lees meyemes DeefOekeâ ieefle Jeeues Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe Broglie wavelength (λ) of a particle and its
Tpee& nesieer: (W= 4.2 eV) associated momentum (p) is
(a) 3.2 × 10–21J (b) 3.2 × 10–19 J efkeâmeer keâCe kesâ [er-yeÇesieueer lejbieowOÙe& (λ) kesâ heefjJele&ve
(c) 7 × 10–25 J (d) 9 × 10–32 J SJeb FmeceW efveefnle mebJesie (p) keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjves Jeeuee
AIPMT-1989 DeefYejsKe nw:
Ans. (b) : Given:
Work function= 4.2 eV
Energy of Radiation, hν = 6.2 eV
= 6.2×1.6×10–19 J (a) (b)
KE = hν – W = 6.2×1.6×10–19 – 4.2×1.6×10–19
KE = 2×1.6×10–19
KE = 3.2×10–19 J
55. The threshold frequency for photoelectric (d)
(c)
effect on sodium corresponds to a wavelength
º NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
of 5000 A . Its work function is
AIPMT 03.05.2015
Physics 562 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) : Ans. (b): De Broglie wavelength-
V Wavelength (λ) that is associated with an object in
relation to its momentum & mass is known as De-
Broglie wavelength.
De-Broglie wavelength is given by–
p h h
λ= = - (1)
p MV
From de Broglie hypothesis, the momentum of a h = Planck's const
h
particle, p = p = Momentum
λ M = Mass
Where, V = Velocity
h = Plank’s constant 1
λ = wavelength Now, KE of body is given by, KE = MV 2
2
58. An electromagnetic wave of wavelength 'λ' is MV2 = 2KE
incident on a photosensitive surface of M2V2 = 2MKE
negligible work function. If 'm' mass is of
photoelectron emitted from the surface has de- MV = 2MKE = p (∵ p = MV)
Broglie wavelength λd, then h
From (1), λ =
veieCÙe keâeÙe& Heâueve kesâ ØekeâeMe meg«eener melen hej 'λ' 2MKE
lejbieowOÙe& keâer Skeâ efJeÅegleÛegcyekeâerÙe lejbie Deeheeflele nesleer We know, Work done = K.E. = eV
nw~ Ùeefo melen mes Glmeefpe&le 'm' õJÙeceeve kesâ where e = charge on electron
HeâesšesFueskeäš^e@ve keâer [er-yeÇeiueer lejbieowOÙe& λd nes, lees : V = voltage by which electron is escalated.
h 12.27
 2h 2   2m 2  λ= = Aº
(a) λ =  λd  (b) λ =  λd  2MeV V
 mc   hc 
Kinetic energy of 144eV represents a voltage of 144
 2mc  2  2mc  2
(c) λ d =   λ (d) λ =  λ
 d required to escalate the electrons.
 h   h  ⇒ V = 144 Volt
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 12.27
Ans. (d) : λ= Aº = 1.0225Aº = 1.02×10–10 m
144
KE of emitted electron = Energy of incident photon
= 102×10–12 m
1
mv 2 = hν = 102×10–3 nm
2
60. An electron is accelerated from rest through a
P 2 hc potential difference of V volt. If the de Broglie
or =
2m λ wavelength of the electron is 1.227 × 10–2 nm,
2mhc the potential difference is :
P= efJejeceeJemLee kesâ efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes V Jeesuš kesâ
λ
de-Broglie wavelength of emitted electrons -
efJeYeJeevlej mes lJeefjle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùeefo Fme Fueskeäš^e@ve
h h
keâer oer yeÇe@iueer lebjieowOÙe& 1.227 × 10–2 nm nw lees
λd = =
'
efJeYeJeevlej nw:
P 2mhc
(a) 102 V (b) 103 V
λ 4
(c) 10 V (d) 10 V
hλ NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
λd =
'

2mc Ans. (c) : Given that : λ = 1.227 × 10–2 nm

2mc 2 V=?
λ= λd
h The de-Broglie wavelength of e– is given as–
59. The De Broglie wavelength of an electron  h h 
moving with kinetic energy of 144 eV is nearly Q λ = mV = 
 2meV 
144 eV ieeflepe Tpee& mes ieefleceeve efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer os
1.227
yeÇeiueer lebjieowOÙe& nesleer nw, ueieYeie λ= nm
–2 –3 V
(a) 102 × 10 nm (b) 102 × 10 nm 2
(c) 102 × 10–4 nm (d) 102 × 10–5 nm  1.227 
Squaring both side, V =  
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II  λ 
Physics 563 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Substitute the wavelength in the above expression. h
2
Ans. (b) : Broglie wave length λ =
  P
1.227
V=  Where, P = mv
 (1.227 × 10 ) 
−2
  P = 2mK.E
V = 104 V
1
61. Light of frequency 1.5 times the threshold λ∝ ( K.E are same )
frequency is incident on a photosensitive
m
material. What will be the photoelectric λp mα
current if the frequency is halved and intensity =
λα mp
is doubled?
osnueer DeeJe=efòe keâer 1.5 iegveer DeeJe=efòe keâe ØekeâeMe, 4m p
ØekeâeMe meg«eener heoeLe& hej Deeheleve keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ØekeâeMe =
mp
keâer DeeJe=efòe DeeOeer leLee Gmekeâer leer›elee oes iegveer oer peeS,
pees ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle Oeeje efkeâleveer nesieer? λp 2
=
(a) four times/Ûeej iegveer (b) one-fourth/Skeâ-ÛeewLeeF& λα 1
(c) zero/MetvÙe (d) doubled/oes iegveer
64. An electron of mass m with an initial velocity
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 ur
Ans. (c) : When the frequency of incident light is V = V0 $i (V0 > 0) enters an electric field
ur
halved of its original value i.e. 1.5v0 , which is less than E = −E0 $i (E0 = constant > 0) at t = 0. If λ0 is its
1.5ν0
the threshold frequency i.e. v' = . In that case no de-Broglie wavelength initially, then its de-
2 Broglie wavelength at time t is / DeejefcYekeâ Jesie
photoelectric effect takes places. So no photoelectrons ur
would be emitted and hence the photoelectric current V = V0 $i (V0 > 0) Deewj õJÙeceeve m keâe keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve
becomes zero. ur
62. An electron is accelerated through a potential efkeâmeer efJeÅegled-#es$e E = −E0 $i (E0 = efmLejebkeâ > 0) ceW t
difference of 10,000 V. Its de Broglie =0 hej ØeJesMe keâjlee nw~ Ùeefo ØeejcYe ceW Fme Fueskeäš^e@ve
wavelength is, (nearly) : (me = 9 × 10–31 kg)
keâer os-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowOÙe& λ0 nw, lees meceÙe t hej Fmekeâer
efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes 10000 V kesâ efJeYeJeevlej Éeje
lJeefjle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ Fmekeâer os yeÇeiueer lejbieowOÙe& nw os-yeÇeiueer lejbieowOÙe& nesieer
(ueieYeie) (me = 9 × 10–31 kg) λ0  eE 0 
(a) (b) λ 0  1 + t
(a) 12.2 × 10–12 m (b) 12.2 × 10–14 m  eE 0   mV 
1 +
0
t
(c) 12.2 nm (d) 12.2 × 10–13 m  mV0 
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
(c) λ 0 (d) λ 0 t
Ans. (a) :
For an electron accelerated through a potential V. NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
150 o Ans. (a) : Initial de–Broglie wavelength
de Broglie wavelength λ = A h
V λo = ... ( i )
m.v o
150 o
= A
10000
= 1.22 × 10 –13 v0
λ = 12.2 × 10 –12 m F
63. A proton and an α–particle are accelerated
from rest to the same energy. The de Broglie
wavelengths λp and λα are in the ratio, Acceleration of electron,
efkeâmeer Øeesše@ve Deewj efkeâmeer α–keâCe keâes efJejece mes meceeve eE
a= º
Tpee& lekeâ lJeefjle efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ os yeÇeiueer lejbieowIÙeeX λp m
Deewj λα keâe Devegheele nw– Velocity after time ‘t’ using Newton's second law is
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 given by,
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 2 :1 eE
v = vº + º t
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) m

Physics 564 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
h h Ans. (a): Using de – Broglie equation,
So, λ= = h
mv  eE  λ=
m  vº + º t  P
 m 
Where h is plank's constant and p is momentum of
h
= ...( ii ) particle
 eE º  h
mv º 1 + t λ=  P = 2mE 
 mv º  2mE  
Divide (ii) by (i) Energy of the X-ray emitted,
λº E=
hc
λ=
 eE º  λ0
1 + t
h
 mv º  ⇒ λ=
65. The de-Broglie wavelength of a neutron in hc
2m ×
thermal equilibrium with heavy water at a λ0
temperature T (Kelvin) and mass m is/Skeâ
2mcλ 2
vÙetš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve m nw leLee Ùen T (kewâefuJeve) leehe λ0 =
hej ieg® peue kesâ meeLe T<ceerÙe meblegueve ceW nw~ Fmekeâer efo- h
yeÇeiueer lejbieowOÙe& nesieer: 67. An electron of mass m and a photon have same
energy E. The ratio of de-Brogli wavelengths
h h associated with them is: /õJÙeceeve m kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve
(a) (b)
mkT 3mkT leLee efkeâmeer Heâesše@ve keâer Tpee&S E Skeâmeceeve nw~ FveceW
(c)
2h
(d)
2h mebyeæ os yeÇeiueer lejbieowOÙe& keâe Devegheele nw :
3mkT mkT 1 1
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 1  2m  2 1 E 2
Ans. (b) : The de- Broglie wavelength is
(a)   (b)  
c E  c  2m 
 p  2
1
λ=
h Q E K = 
2m   E 2
(d) c ( 2mE )
1/ 2
 (c) 
p
 p = 2m(E K )  
 2m 
Where, h is planck's constant NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
p is particle momentum
hc
h Ans. (b) : Energy of Photon, E =
= λp
2m(E K )
hc
h ∴ λp = ................... (i)
 3  E
= Q E K = kT 
3   2  wavelength of electron,
2m  kT 
2  h h
λe = = .................. (ii) Q P = 2mE 
Where, k is Boltzmann constant P 2mE
h divide equation (ii) by (i)
⇒ λ=
3m kT λ e h / 2mE E E 1
= = = .
λp hc / E c 2mE 2m c
66. Electrons of mass m with de-Broglie
1
wavelength λ fall on the target in an X- ray λe 1  E  2
tube. The cut off wavelength (λ°) of the emitted =  
λ p c  2m 
X-ray is./efkeâmeer X-efkeâjCe veefuekeâe kesâ ue#Ùe hej λ os-
yeÇe@iueer lejbieowOÙe& leLee m õJeceeve kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve škeâjeles 68. Light of wavelength 500 nm is incident on a
nQ~ Glmeefpe&le X-efkeâjCe kesâ mebmleyOe (Deblekeâ) lejbieowOÙe& metal with work function 2.28 eV. The de
Broglie wavelength of the emitted electron
(λ°) keâe ceeve nesiee :- is/efkeâmeer Oeeleg keâe keâeÙe& heâueve 2.28 eV nw~ Fme hej
2mcλ 2 2h 500 efceceer. lejbieowOÙe& keâe ØekeâeMe Deeheeflele neslee nw lees,
(a) λ ° = (b) λ ° =
h mc Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer os-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowOÙe& nesieer:
2m 2c2λ3 (a) ≤ 2.8 × 10 −12 m (b) < 2.8 × 10 −10 m
(c) λ° = (d) λ° = λ
h2 (c) < 2.8 × 10 −9 m (d) ≥ 2.8 × 10 −9 m
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
Physics 565 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Given : φ = 2.28 eV, 70. The wavelength λe of an electron and λP of a
λ = 500 nm photon of same energy E are related by:
= 500 × 10 m –9
Ùeef o efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve Deewj heâesše@ve keâer Tpee& meceeve (E)
–19
q = e = 1.6 × 10 C nw Deewj Gvekeâer lejbieowOÙe& ›eâceMe: λe leLee λp neW, lees
The equation of K.E can be rewritten as Fvekesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nesiee :
hv = K.E + φ
1
Take hv = E, K.E = eV (a) λ P ∝ (b) λ P ∝ λ e2
Then Einstein's photoelectric equation can be rewritten λe
as –
E = φ + eV –––– (1) (c) λ P ∝ λ e (d) λ P ∝ λ e
Substituting the given value in the above equation, it NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
becomes.
h
hc Ans. (b) : Wavelength of electron, λ e = -----(i)
⇒ = φ + eV 2mE
λ
hc  hc 
6.6 ×10−34 × 3 ×108 −19 Wavelength of proton, λ p = ∴ E = 
⇒ = 2.28 × 1.6 × 10 + eV E  λ p 
500 ×10−9
–19
eV = 0.31 ×10 h
⇒
V = 0.2 Now, λe =
hc
Substituting the value V in the equation of de-broglie 2m
wavelength of an electron λp
12.27 o h2
⇒ λ= A λ e2 = × λp
V 2mhc
12.27 λ e2 ∝ λ p
⇒ λ= = 2.74 × 10 −9 m
0.2
⇒ λ = 2.8 × 10–9m 71. The de-Broglie wavelength of neutrons in
So, λ ≥ 2.8 × 10 m –9 thermal equilibrium at temperature T is/
leeheceeve T hej leeheerÙe meblegueve ceW vÙetš^e@ve keâer [er-
69. If the kinetic energy of the particle is increased
to 16 times its previous value, the percentage yeÇe@ieueer lejbieowOÙe& nw-
change in the de-Broglie wavelength of the 30.8 o 3.08 o
particle is. (a) A (b) A
T T
Ùeefo efkeâmeer keâCe keâer ieeflepe Tpee& keâes Gmekesâ ØeejbefYekeâ
0.308 o 0.0308 o
ceeve keâe 16 iegvee keâj efoÙee peeÙes lees, mebiele os-yeÇeiueer (c) A (d) A
lejbieeW keâer lejbie owOÙe& ceW ØeefleMele heefjJele&ve nesiee:- T T
(a) 25 (b) 75 NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
(c) 60 (d) 50 Ans. (a) : De–Broglie wavelength of neutrons in
AIPMT-06.05.2014 thermal equilibrium at temperature T is
Ans. (b) : We know that, de Broglie wavelength, h
λ=
h 2mK B T
λ=
2mK Where M is the mass of neutron
Where, 'm' is the mass and 'K' is the kinetic energy of kB is Boltzmann constant
the particle. h is the plank's constant
When kinetic energy of the particle is increased to 16 Here, m = 1.67 × 10–27 kg
times, then its de Broglie wavelength becomes, kB = 1.38 ×10–23 J/k
h 1 h λ  h  h = 6.63 × 1034 Js
λ' = = = Q λ = 
2m (16K ) 4 2mK 4  2mK  6.63 × 10−34
λ=
% change in the de Broglie wavelength 2 × 1.67 × 10−27 × 1.38 × 10−23 × T
λ −λ'  λ' 3.08 × 10−9 30.8 × 10 −10
= × 100 =  1 −  × 100 = =
λ  λ T T
 1 30.8 o
= 1 −  × 100 = 75% λ= A
 4 T

Physics 566 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
72. If the momentum of an electron is changed by ⇒ mv = qBr .................(2)
P, then the de Broglie wavelength associated
with it changes by 0.5%. The initial momentum h 6.626 × 10 −34
λ= =
of electron will be qBr 2 × 1.69 × 10−19 × 0.25 × 0.0083
efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ mebJesie keâes P mes heefjJele&ve keâjves hej o
λ = 0.01A
Gmemes mebyeæ os-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowOÙe& 0.5³ heefjJeefle&le nes
74. Electrons used in an electron microscope are
peeleer nw, lees Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe ØeejbefYekeâ mebJesie nesiee:–
accelerated by a voltage of 25 kV. If the voltage
P is increased to 100 kV then the de-Broglie
(a) (b) 100 P
200 wavelength associated with the electrons would
(c) 200 P (d) 400 P efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve met#ceoMeea ceW ØeÙegòeâ Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâes 25
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
kV keâer Jeesušlee mes lJeefjle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Jeesušlee
Ans. (c) : Given:
keâes yeÌ{ekeâj 100 kV keâj efoÙee peeS lees Fueskeäš^e@veeW mes
dλ = 0.5% P0 = initial momentum
λ = wavelength
mecyeæ os-yeÇeBiueer lejbieowOÙe& keâe ceeve :
P = new momentum corresponding to change in (a) increase by 4 times/4 iegvee yeÌ{ peeSiee
wavelength (b) increase by 2 times/2 iegvee yeÌ{ peeSiee
The change in momentum corresponding to change in
(c) decrease by 2 times/2 iegvee Ieš peeSiee
wavelength can be written as-
dλ P (d) decrease by 4 times/4 iegvee Ieš peeSiee
=
λ P0 AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Substituting the given values in the above equation, we Ans. (c) : Given– Voltage (V1) = 25 kV
get– Voltage (V2) = 100 kV
0.5 P From de– Broglie Wavelength -
= , P0 = 200P
100 P0 h
λ=
73. An α-particle moves in a circular path of 2m(qV)
radius 0.83 cm in the presence of a magnetic 1
field of 0.25Wb/m2. The de Broglie wavelength So, λ∝
V
associated with the particle will be:
0.25 Wb/m2 leer›elee kesâ ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e keâer GheefmLeefle λ1 V2 100 10
= = = =2
ceW, Skeâ Ssuheâe (α) keâCe 0.83 cm ef$epÙee kesâ Je=òeekeâej λ 2 V1 25 5
heLe ceW ieefle keâjlee nw~ lees, Fme keâCe mes mebyeæ os-yeÇe@iueer λ1
lejbieowOÙe& nesieer~ λ2 =
2
o o
(a) 10 A (b) 0.01 A So, it will be halved.
o o
(c) 1 A (d) 0.1 A 75. In the phenomenon of electric discharge
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 through gases at low pressure, the coloured
glow in the tube appears as a result of –
Ans. (b) : Given,
keâce oeye hej iewmeeW ceW efJeÅegle efJemepe&ve kesâ ØeÇ›eâce ceW šŸetye
Radius of circular path = 0.83 cm = 0.0083 m
ceW jbieoej GlheVe nesves keâs keâejCe neslee nw :-
Wb
magnetic field, B = 0.25 2 (a) collisions between the charged particles
m
emitted from the cathode and the atoms of the
De Broglie wavelength (λ) - It shows the wave nature
gas/ kewâLees[ mes Glmeefpe&le DeeJesefMele keâCeeW Deewj iewme kesâ
as well as particle nature of an object.
h hejceeCegDeesb ceW škeâjeJe~
mathematically, λ = ................... (1) (b) collision between different electrons of the
mv
atoms of the gas
Where, h = Planck's constant
v = Velocity iewme kesâ hejceeCegDeeW cebW efJeefYeVe Fueskeäš^e@veeW ceW škeâjeJe~
m = mass (c) excitation of electrons in the atoms
Now, radius of circle swept by charge particle under iewme kesâ hejceeCegDeeW ceW Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe Gòespeve~
an applied magnetic field is – (d) collision between the atoms of the gas
r=
mv iewme kesâ hejceeCegDeeW ceW škeâjeJe
qB AIPMT-2008
Physics 567 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Electric discharge– when electric current Ans. (c) : Given: Velocity of photon = c
passes through the gas the atoms get ionized this is Frequency = υ
termed electric discharge. Collison between charged hc
particles emitted from cathode and atom of the gas Energy, E = hυ =
λ
results colourless glow in the tube. Therefore correct
hc
answer is option a. ⇒ λ=
E
76. If particles are moving with same velocity, then
De-Broglie wavelength is maximum for 79. The velocity of photons is proportional to
Ùeefo efvecve keâCe meceeve Jesie mes ieefle keâj jns nQ, lees (where υ = frequency)
heâesše@ve keâe Jesie efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekesâ Deevegheeflekeâ neslee
efkeâmekeâer [er-yeÇesiueer lejbieowOÙe& DeefOekeâlece nesieer -
nw? (peneB υ = DeeJe=efòe)
(a) Proton/ Øeesše@ve (b) α-particle /α-keâCe
(a) 1/ υ (b) υ2
(c) Neutron/vÙetš^e@ve (d) β-particle/ β-keâCe
(c) υ (d) υ
AIPMT-2002
AIPMT-1996
Ans. (d) : De-Broglie wavelength for a particle is given
Ans. (c) : Let velocity of photon = c
h h
by λ = = Frequency of photon = ν
P mv
Wavelength of photon = λ
m = mass
Required relation c = νλ
v = velocity
⇒ Velocity of photon ∝ frequency
P = momentum
80. Momentum of photon of wavelength λ is
h = planck's constant
Skeâ heâesše@ve efpemekeâer lejbieowIÙe& λ nes Gmekeâe mebJesie nw:
Q All particles are moving with same velocity, the
hv
particle with least mass will have maximum de-Broglie (a) (b) zero/MetvÙe
wavelength. c
∴ Out of the given particles, β-particles has the lowest hλ hλ
(c) 2 (d)
mass & therefore it has maximum wavelength. c c
AIPMT-1993
77. The kinetic energy of an electron, which is
accelerated in the potential difference of 100 Ans. (a) : Energy of light/photon can be given as-
volts, is/100 Jeesuš kesâ efJeYeJeeblej ceW lJeefjle Skeâ E = hc ...... (i)
λ
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe Tpee& nw:
Energy of light/photon can also be given as,
(a) 416.6 cal (b) 6.636 cal E = mc2 .....(ii)
–17 4
(c) 1.602 × 10 J (d) 1.6 × 10 J From eqn (i) and (ii)
AIPMT-1997 hc
= mc2
Ans. (c) : Kinetic energy of an electron is given by: λ
KE = Q×∆V Momentum (p) = mc
Where, Q = charge of an electron = 1.6×10–19 C hc
= p.c
∆V =100V λ
∴ KE = 1.6×10–19×100 J h
p=
KE = 1.6×10 J –17 λ
c
78. If a photon has velocity c and frequency υ, then Also, λ =
which of the following represents its ν
wavelength? h ν
⇒ p=
Ùeefo Skeâ heâesše@ve keâe Jesie c Deewj DeeJe=efòe υ nw, lees c
–9
efvecve ceW mes keâewve Fmekesâ lejbieowIÙe& keâes ØeoefMe&le keâjlee nw? 81. The wavelength of a 1 keV photon is 1.24 × 10
m. What is the frequency of 1 MeV photon?
hυ 1 keV Tpee& Jeeues heâesše@ve keâer lejbieowIÙe& 1.24 × 10–9 m
(a) 2 (b) hυ
c nw, lees 1 MeV Tpee& Jeeues heâesše@ve keâer DeeJe=efòe keäÙee nw?
hc hυ (a) 1.24 × 1015 (b) 2.4 × 1020
(c) (d)
E c (c) 1.24 × 10 18
(d) 2.4 × 1023
AIPMT-1996 AIPMT-1991
Physics 568 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given, wavelength (λ1) = 1.24×10–9 m Ans. (a) : Given:
Energy of photon, E1 = 1 keV = 1×103 eV momentum of photon, p = 3.3×10–29 kg ms–1
hc h = 6.6×10–34 Js
∵ E= c = 3×108 ms–1
λ
hν
hc Now, momentum of photon p =
1 × 103 = c
1.24 × 10 –9
hc = 1.24×10–6 eVm cp 3 × 108 × 3.3 × 10–29
....(i) ⇒ ν= = = 1.5 × 1013 Hz
Energy of second particle E2 = 1 meV = 106 eV h 6.6 × 10−34
hc 84. The energy of a photon of wavelength λ is
Wavelength of 1 meV particle λ 2 = efkeâmeer heâesše@ve keâer Tpee& peyeefkeâ Gmekeâer lejbieowIÙe& λ nes
E2
lees-
1.24 × 10−6
λ2 = (a) hcλ (b)
hc
106
λ
λ2 = 1.24 × 10 −12 λ λh
(c) (d)
Frequency of photon, hc c
c 3 × 108 AIPMT-1988
f= = = 2.4 × 1020 Hz Ans. (b) : (i) Photon energy is the energy carried by a
λ 2 1.24 × 10 –12
single photon
82. A radio transmitter operates at frequency 880 (ii) Amount of energy (E) is proportional to
kHz and a power of 10 kW. The number of electromagnetic frequency (f) of photon & hence it is
photons emitted per second is inversely proportional to the wavelength (λ)
Skeâ jsef[Ùees š^ebmeceeršj 880 kHz leLee 10 kW hej (iii) Energy of photon is given by-
keâeÙe& keâjlee nw~ Øeefle meskeâC[ efkeâleves heâesše@ve efvekeâueWies? E= hf

(a) 1.72 × 1031 c hc

∴ f= ⇒ E=
(b) 1.327 × 1025 λ λ
(c) 1.327 × 1037 85. An electron beam has a kinetic energy equal to
(d) 1.327 × 1045 100 eV. Find its wavelength associated with a
AIPMT-1990 beam, if mass of electron = 9.1×10–31 kg and 1
eV = 1.6×10–19 J. (Planck's constant = 6.6×10–34
Ans. (a) : Given: Js)
Frequency = 880 kHz = 880×103 Hz efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve hegBpe keâer ieeflepe Tpee& 100 eV nw~ Ùeefo
Power = 10×103 W Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve =9.1×10–31 kg Deewj 1 eV =
P 1.6×10–19 J nw, lees hegbpe mes mebyeæ Fmekeâer lejbieowIÙe& %eele
∴Number of photons emitted per sec ⇒ N =
hν keâerefpeS~
10 × 10 3
(hueebkeâ efmLejebkeâ = 6.6×10–34 Js)
=
6.6 × 10–34 × 880 × 103 (a) 24.6 Å (b) 012 Å
N = 1.71×1031 (c) 1.2 Å (d) 6.3 Å
AIPMT-1996
83. The momentum of a photon of an Ans. (c) : Given:
electromagnetic radiation is 3.3 × 10–29 kg ms–1. Kinetic energy (KE) = 100 eV
–31
What is the frequency of the associated waves? Mass of electron = 9.1×10 kg
Skeâ efJeÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe efJeefkeâjCe kesâ heâesše@ve keâe mebJesie 1eV = 1.6×10–19 J
h = 6.6×10–34 J
3.3 × 10–29 kg ms–1 nw~ Fmemes mebyebefOele DeeJe=efòe nw:
h
[h = 6.6 × 10–34 J s ; c = 3 × 108 ms–1], ∵ Wavelength = (λ ) =
2mE k
(a) 1.5 × 1013 Hz
(b) 7.5 × 1012 Hz 6.6 × 10–34
=
(c) 6 × 103 Hz 2 × 9.1 × 10–31 × 100 × 1.6 × 10 –19
(d) 3 × 103 Hz λ = 1.2×10–10 m
AIPMT-1990 λ = 1.2 Aº

Physics 569 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
86. An electron of mass m and charge e is Now, Momentum of electron (p ) = 2meV
e
accelerated from rest through a potential
difference V in vacuum. Its final velocity will be Momentum of proton ( p ) = 2 MeV
p
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve m leLee DeeJesMe e nw, Wavelength of proton λ ' h / p p pe
keâes V efJeYeJe oskeâj lJeefjle efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Fmekeâe ∴ Wavelength of electron = λ = h / p = p
e p
Debeflece Jesie nesiee
2 meV m
2eV eV = =
(a) (b) 2 MeV M
m m
eV eV m
(c) (d) ⇒ Wavelength of proton, λ ' = λ
2m m M
AIPMT-1996 88. If we consider electrons and photons of the
Ans. (a) : Given: same wavelength, then they will have the same
Mass of electron = m Ùeefo nce meceeve lejbieowIÙe& kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Deewj heâesše@ve
Charge = e ceeves, lees Gvekesâ meceeve neWies:
Potential difference = V
(a) momentum/mebJesie
After acceleration, final velocity will be:
(b) angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie
1
∵ mv 2 = eV (c) energy/Tpee&
2
(d) velocity/Jesie
2eV
v= AIPMT-1995
m
Ans. (a) : Given:
87. An electron of mass m, when accelerated Electron and photon have same wavelength (λ)
through a potential difference V, has de Broglie
h h h
wavelength λ. The de-Broglie wavelength ∵ λ = = ⇒ p=
mv p λ
associated with a proton of mass M accelerated
through the same potential difference, wil be Where p = momentum
õJÙeceeve m keâe Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve peye efJeYeJeeblej V mes Therefore, for same wavelength of electron and photons
lJeefjle efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees os yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙe& λ neslee the momentum should be same.
nw~ peye meceeve efJeYeJeeblej mes M õJÙeceeve keâe Skeâ 89. The de-Broglie wave corresponding to a
particle of mass m and velocity v has a
Øeesše@ve lJeefjle efkeâÙee peeS lees Øeesše@ve mes mebyeæ os yeÇe@iueer wavelength associated with it
lejbieowIÙe& nesieer: Skeâ keâCe keâe õJÙeceeve m leLee Jesie v nw Fmemes mebyebefOele
M os-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙe& keâe ceeve nw:
(a) λ
m
h
m (a)
(b) λ mv
M
(b) hmv
M
(c) λ (c)
mh
m v
m m
(d) λ (d)
M hv
AIPMT-1995 AIPMT-1989
Ans. (d) : Given: Ans. (a) : Given:
For an electron, mass = m Mass of particle = m
Potential difference = V Velocity = v
De-Broglie wavelength = λ ∴ De-Broglie wavelength associated with the particle
For proton: of mass m, moving with velocity v-
De-Broglie wavelength = λ' (say)
h h
Mass = M λ= =
p mv
Potential difference = V

Physics 570 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
90. The minimum wavelength of the X-rays rays emission occur when vacancies are produced in the
produced by electrons accelerated through a n=1 or k-shell of the atom and electrons drop down
potential difference of V volts is directly from above to fill the gap. The x-rays produced by
proportional to transitions from the n=2 to n=1 levels are called k-alpha
V Jeesuš kesâ efJeYeJeeblej mes lJeefjle Fueskeäš^e@veeW Éeje GlheVe x-rays and those for the n=3 to n=1 transition are called
x-efkeâjCeeW keâer vÙetvelece lejbieowIÙe& efvecveefueefKele ceW mes k-beta x-rays.
efkeâmekesâ Deveg›eâceevegheeleer nesleer nw?
1
25.4 Davisson and Germer Experiment
(a)
V 92. In the Davisson and Germer experiment, the
1 velocity of electrons emitted from the electron
(b)
V gun can be increased by :
(c) V [sefJemeve Deewj pece&j kesâ ØeÙeesie ceW ‘Fueskeäš^e@ve ieve’ Éeje
(d) V2 Glmeefpe&le Fueskeäš^e@veeW kesâ Jesie keâes yeÌ{eÙee pee mekeâlee nw :
AIPMT-1996 (a) decreasing the potential difference between
Ans. (b) : Electron (e-) is accelerated through a the anode and filament
potential difference of V volts. Svees[ (Ievee«e) Deewj efHeâueecesvš (levleg) kesâ yeerÛe
Now, maximum kE gained by electron = eV efJeYeJeevlej keâe ceeve keâce keâjkesâ
This energy is transferred to X-ray during emission (b) increasing the potential difference between
hc the anode and filament/Svees[ Deewj efHeâueecesvš kesâ
∴ Energy of X-ray = hν =
λ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej keâe ceeve yeÌ{e keâj
As k.E. of electron is maximum thus λ is minimum so,
(c) increasing the filament current
Energy of emitted X-ray = energy of electron
hf
efHeâueecesvš-Oeeje keâe ceeve yeÌ{e keâj
= eV (d) decreasing the filament current
λ min
hc 1
efHeâueecesvš-Oeeje keâe ceeve keâce keâjkesâ
λ min = × AIPMT (Screening)-2011
e V
Ans. (b) : The energy of an electron accelerated through
1
λ min ∝ a potential V0 is given by
V
⇒ E = eV0
91. The figure represents the observed intensity of
where e = charge on an electron,
X-rays emitted by an X-ray tube, 1 as a
function of wavelength. The sharp peaks A and V0 = Applied potential.
B denote The energy of an accelerated electron through a
efÛe$e efkeâmeer X-efkeâjCe veefuekeâe Éeje Glmeefpe&le X-efkeâjCeeW potential V0 is purely kinetic in nature.
keâer Øesef#ele leer›elee keâes lejbieowIÙe& kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW Therefore, eV0 = 1 mv 2
oMee&lee nw~ leer#Ce Meer<e& A Deewj B efveefo&° keâjles nQ: 2
From the above equation, the relationship between V0
and v2 can be written as
⇒ V0 ∝ v2
So, the applied potential is directly proportional to the
(a) white radiations/Õesle efJeefkeâjCe velocity of the emitted electron.
(b) characteristic radiations/DeefYeuee#eefCekeâ efJeefkeâjCe Hence, the velocity of electrons emitted from the
electron gun can be increased by increasing the
(c) band spectrum/yewC[ mheskeäš^ce
potential difference between the anode and filament.
(d) continuous spectrum/meblele mheskeäš^ce
Hence option (b) is correct.
AIPMT-1995
93. The wave nature of electrons was
Ans. (b) : The sharp peaks are obtained in experimentally verified by,
characteristics X-Rays they are emitted from heavy
elements when their electrons make transition between
Fues keäš^e@ve keâer lejbie Øeke=âefle keâe ØeeÙeesefiekeâ melÙeeheve
the lower atomic energy levels. The characteristic x- efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmeves efkeâÙee Lee?
Physics 571 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) Davisson and Germer/[sJeermeve Deewj pece&j
Ans. (b) : Given that :
(b) de Broglie/os yeÇe@iueer The energy of photon = 1 Mev
(c) Hertz/nšdpe& = 106 × 1.6 × 10–19J
We know that–
(d) Einstein/DeeFbmšerve
hc
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II λ=
E
Ans. (a) : In 1927, C.J. Davisson and L.H Germer
6.63 × 10 –34 × 3 × 108
carried out an experiment popularly known as Davisson =
Germer's experiment to explain the wave nature of 1.6 × 10 –13
electrons through electron diffraction. It relates to de 6.63 × 3
= × 10 –26+13
Broglie relation as- 1.60

λ=
h λ = 1.24 × 10 –3 nm
P 96. Consider a beam of electrons (each electron
1.227 with energy E0) incident on a metal surface
λ= = 0.167 nm.
54 kept in an evacuated chamber. Then/efveJee&eflele
Before this experiment various models proposed by Øekeâes‰ ceW jKes Oeeleg kesâ he=‰ hej Deeheeflele Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâes
scientist couldn't explain the wave nature and wave was efkeâmeer hegbpe (efpemeceW ØelÙeskeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer Tpee& E0 nw)
limited to particle nature of electrons. hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~ Fme he=‰ mes–
(a) no electrons will be emitted as only photons
25.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems can emit electrons./keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le veneR
nesiee keäÙeeWefkeâ kesâJeue heâesše@ve ner Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le keâj
94. A particle is dropped from a height H. The de
mekeâles nQ~
Broglie wavelength of the particle as a function
(b) electrons can be emitted but all with an
of height is proportional to/efkeâmeer keâCe keâes H
energy E0./Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le nes mekeâles nQ hejvleg
TBÛeeF& mes efiejeÙee peelee nw~ TBÛeeF& kesâ heâueve kesâ ™he ceW
ØelÙeskeâ keâer Tpee& E0 nesieer~
keâCe keâer [er-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙe& efvecve ceW mes efkeâmekesâ (c) electrons can be emitted with any energy,
Deveg›eâceevegheeleer nesleer nw? with a maximum of E0 – φ (φ is the work
(a) H (b) H1/2 function).DeefOekeâlece Tpee& E0 – φ meefnle, (φ Oeeleg keâe
0
(c) H (d) H–1/2 keâeÙe&heâueve nw) efkeâmeer Yeer Tpee& kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le nes
Ans. (d) : When the body is falling freely from a height, mekeâles nQ~
the velocity is– (d) electrons can be emitted with any energy,
v = 2gH with a maximum of E0./ E0 DeefOekeâlece Tpee& meefnle
According to de-Broglie wavelength– efkeâmeer Yeer Tpee& kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve Glmeefpe&le nes mekeâles nQ~
h Ans. (d) : Mathematically,
λ=
P Einstein's photoelectric equation is-
h hν = φ + k.E
λ= Where, φ = work function
mv
h
For emission of e--
λ= hν ≥ hνo (φ = hνo)
m 2gH
i.e the energy of incident photons should be greater
–1 than or equal to the work function of the metal.
λ∝H 2
If ν < νo then no photoelectric emission.
95. The wavelength of a photon needed to remove a Hence, electron can be emitted with any energy with a
proton from a nucleus which is bound to the maximum of Eo.
nucleus with 1 MeV energy is nearly/veeefYekeâ mes 97. Consider figure. Suppose the voltage applied to
1 MeV Tpee& Éeje yeeefOele Øeesše@ve keâes veeefYekeâ mes yeenj A is increased. The diffracted beam will have
efvekeâeueves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ heâesše@ve keâer lejbieowIÙe& the maximum at a value of θ that/efÛe$e hej efJeÛeej
ueieYeie efkeâleveer nesleer nw? keâerefpeS~ ceeve ueerefpeS A hej ueieeF& ieF& Jeesušlee keâes
(a) 1.2 nm (b) 1.2 × 10 nm–3 yeÌ{eÙee peelee nw~ efJeJeefle&le efkeâjCe hegbpe ceW GefÛÛe‰ θ keâe
(c) 1.2 × 10 nm –6
(d) 1.2 × 10 nm1 ceeve efpemekesâ efueS nesiee Jen–
Physics 572 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1
K.E = K = mv2
2
2K = mv2
2mK = m2v2
P2 = 2mK
P = 2mK
h
From eqn (i) ⇒ λ d =
2mK
1
λ= ... (ii)
m
Thus, mα > mp = mn > me
By rearranging above eqn We get–
(a) will be larger than the earlier value/hetJe&Jeleea ceeve λe < λp = λn > λα
mes DeefOekeâ nesiee 99. An electron is moving with an initial velocity
(b) will be the same as the earlier value/hetJe&Jeleea ceeve r r
v = v0 iˆ and is in a magnetic field B = B0 ˆj .
kesâ yejeyej nesiee
Then it's de Broglie wavelength/keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve
(c) will be less than the earlier value/hetJe&Jeleea ceeve mes r
keâce nesiee efpemekeâe ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie v = v0 iˆ nw efkeâmeer ÛegcyekeâerÙe
r
(d) will depend on the target/ue#Ùe hej efveYe&j keâjsiee #es$e B = B0 ˆj ceW ieefleceeve nw~ Fme Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer oer-
Ans. (c) : From the Davisson - Germer experiment. We yeÇe@iueer lejbieowiÙe&–
Know that diffracted beam of electrons has the de- (a) remains constant/DeÛej jnleer nw
Broglie wavelength.
(b) increases with time/meceÙe kesâ meeLe yeÌ{leer nw
12.27 o
λd = A ... (i) (c) decreases with time/meceÙe kesâ meeLe Iešleer nw
V
(d) increases and decreases periodically/DeeJeleea ™he
Where, V = voltage applied
Also, we know that when electrons are diffracted at an mes yeÌ{leer Deewj Iešleer nw
angle θ then– Ans. (a) : Given that :
r
2d sinθ = nλ ... (ii) v = v 0 ˆi
From eqn (i), it is clear that when applied voltage r
B = B0ˆj
increases, λ decreases and when λ decreases, θ is also
decreases from eqn (ii). The force on moving electron is perpendicular to the
Thus, when the voltage applied to A is increased the magnetic field B is–
diffracted beam will have the maximum at a value of θ r r
F = –e (v × B)
that will be less than the earlier value. r
= –e(v 0 i × B0 ˆj)
98. A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-
particle have same energy. Then their de F = –ev0 B0 kˆ
Broglie wavelengths compare as/Skeâ Øeesše@ve, Skeâ
So, here, the force is perpendicular to both v and B.
vÙetš^e@ve, Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve leLee Skeâ α-keâCe keâer Tpee&
Thus, there will be no change in v. So, the de-Broglie
hejmhej yejeyej nw lees Gvekeâer [er-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙeeX ceW wavelength remains the constant.
leguevee Fme Øekeâej keâer pee mekeâleer nw– 100. An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity
r r
(a) λp = λn > λe > λα (b) λα = λp > λn > λe v = v0 iˆ (v0 > 0) is in an electric field E = –E0
(c) λe < λp = λn > λα (d) λe = λp = λn = λα
î (E0 = constant > 0). It's de Broglie wavelength
Ans. (c) : Given that : at time t is given by/keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve (õJÙeceeve m)
Ep = En = Ee = Eα r
efpemekeâe ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie v = v0 iˆ (v0 > 0) nw efkeâmeer
According to de-Broglie wavelength– r
h efJeÅegle #es$e E = –E0 î (E0 = DeÛej > 0) ceW ieefleceeve
λd = ... (i)
P nw~ #eCe hej Fme Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer oer-yeÇe@iueer lejbie owIÙe& nw–
Physics 573 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
λ0  eE t  λ0 λ0
(a) (b) λ 0 1+ 0  (c) (d)
 eE 0 t   mv0 
2
eE t 2 2  e 2 E 02 t 2 
 1+  1+ 0
2 2  1+ 2 2 
 mv 0  mv 0  m v0 
(c) λ0 (d) λ0t Ans. (c) : Given that :
Ans. (a) : Given that : r
r v = v 0 ˆi
v = v 0 ˆi r
r E = E 0 ˆj
E = –E 0ˆi
According to de-Broglie wavelength–
According to de-Broglie wavelength–
h
λ0 =
h
... (i) λ0 =
mv 0 mv 0
→
Force acting on electron is–
Force acting on moving e– due to electric field E –
F = (–e)(–E 0 ˆi)
F = qE = –eE
ma = eE 0 ˆi
⇒ F = –eE0 ˆj
eE 0 ˆi
a= ma = –eE0 ˆj
m
After time t1 velocity of e– is– –eE 0 ˆ
r a= j
v = v + at m
eE And acceleration of electron acts along y–direction, thus
v = v 0 ˆi + 0 ˆit the initial velocity of electron along y axis–
m
 eE 0  ˆ vy = 0
v =  v0 + t i
 m  and after time t, velocity of electron along x-axis is–
Now, de-Broglie wavelength is– vx = v0 î
h the velocity of electron after time t along y-axis is–
λ=
 eE t  v = u + at
m v 0 + 0 
 m 
 –eE 0 ˆ 
vy = 0 +  j t
h  m 
λ=
 eE t 
mv 0 1 + 0  After time t, magnitude of velocity of electron is–
 mv 0 
v = v 2x + v 2y
λ0 n
λ= (from eq i)
 eE 0 t   –eE 0 
2

1 + mv  v = v + 2
0 t
 0   m 
Hence, option (a) is correct.
e 2 E 02 2
101. An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v0 1 + t
r r m 2 v 02
v = v 0 ˆi is in an electric field E = E0 ˆj . If
h
λ0 =
h
it's de Broglie wavelength at time t is λ' =
mv 0 mv
given by/keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve (õJÙeceeve m) efpemekeâe h
=
ØeejbefYekeâ Jesie
r
v = v 0 ˆi nw, efkeâmeer efJeÅegle #es$e ceW e2 E 02 t 2
mv 0 1 +
r m 2 v02
h
ieefleceeve E = E0ˆj nw~ Ùeefo λ 0 = nw, lees Fme
mv 0 λ0
λ' =
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer t #eCe hej [er-yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙe& nw e 2 E 20 t 2
1+
e 2 E 02 t 2 m2 v 02
(a) λ0 (b) λ 0 1+
m 2 v02 Hence, option (c) is correct.

Physics 574 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
26.
Atoms
Ans. (a): (i) Mass spectroscopy is a technique used to
26.1 Introduction identify the ions of chemical substance by categorizing
e
1. In a discharge tube ionization of enclosed gas the ions based on m ratio under applied electric &
produced due to collisions between:
magnetic field.
Skeâ efJemepe&ve veueer ceW yebo iewme keâe DeeÙeleve efvecveeW kesâ
(ii) Mass spectrographs are used for such study
hejmhej škeâjeves mes neslee nw:-
Thomson mass spectrograph is used to measure the
(a) Positive ions and neutral atoms/molecules/
atomic masses of various isotopes.
OeveeJesefMele DeeÙeveeW leLee DeveeJesefMele hejceeCegDeeW/DeCegDeeW
(iii) Velocity of unaffected electron beam will be.
(b) Negative electrons and netural atoms/
molecules/$e+CeeJesefMele Fuekeäš^e@veeW leLee DeveeJesefMele qvB = qE
ur
hejceeCegDeeW/DeCegDeeW E
(c) Photons and neutral atoms/molecules V = ur
B
heâesše@vees leLee DeveeJesefMele hejceeCegDeeW/DeCegDeeW
(d) Neutral gas atoms/molecules 3. Who evaluated the mass of electron indirectly
DeveeJesefMele iewme kesâ hejceeCegDeeW/DeCegDeeW with help of charge :
AIPMT-2006 DeeJesMe keâer meneÙelee mes Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve meyemes
Ans. (b) : henues efkeâmeves %eele efkeâÙee –
(a) Thomson/Lee@cemeve
(b) Millikan/efceefuekeâve
(c) Rutherford/jojheâes[&
(d) Newton/vÙetšve
AIPMT-2000
A discharge tube consists of two electrodes and a
particular gas is filled in a tube at low pressure. Ans. (b) : Millikan evaluated the mass of electron
When voltage is applied across the two electrodes, an indirectly with help of charge by oil drop experiment.
electric field is created between electrodes. In this experiment, Millikan allowed charged tiny oil
In an electric field free electron will accelerate towards droplets to pass through a hole into an electric field. By
the positive electrode. varying the strength of electric field the charge over an
When such an electron collide with a gas molecule in its oil droplet was calculated, which always came as an
path, the enclosed gas is ionized when sufficient energy
integral value of 'e'.
is transferred during the collision.
4. The life span of atomic hydrogen is :
2. In Thomson mass spectrograph E ⊥ B then the
velocity of undeflected electron beam will be : hejceeCJeerÙe neF[^espeve keâe peerJevekeâeue nw –
Lee@cemeve õJÙeceeve mhesvš^es«ee@heâ ceW efJeÅegle #es$e Je (a) Fraction of one sec/Skeâ meskeâC[ kesâ DebMe kesâ yejeyej
ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e hejmhej uecyeJele nw, lees iegpejves Jeeueer (b) One year/Skeâ Je<e&
DeefJe#esefhele Fueskeäš^e@ve hebgpe keâe Jesie nesiee- (c) One hour/Skeâ IeCše

(a)
|E|
(b) E × B (d) One day/Skeâ efove
|B| AIPMT-2000
2
|B| E Ans. (a) : The life span of atomic hydrogen is fraction
(c) (d)
|E| B2 of one second (0.33 sec), because it is highly reactive in
nature. It is also known as Nascent hydrogen.
AIPMT-2001
Physics 575 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Rutherford, in his experiment, directed high
26.2 Alpha - Particle Scattering and energy streams of α - particles from a radioactive
Rutherford's Nuclear Model of source at a thin sheet (100 nm thickness) of gold. In
Atom order to study the deflection caused to the α - particles,
he placed a fluorescent zinc sulfide screen around the
gold foil. Rutherford made certain observations.
5. When an α-particle of mass 'm' moving with
velocity 'v' bombards on heavy nucleus of 1) Most of the space in atoms is empty.
charge 'Ze' its distance of closet approach from 2) Positive charge in atom is non uniformly distributed
the nucleus depends on m as: volume.
peye õJÙeceeve 'm' leLee Jesie 'v' mes ieefleceeve keâesF& α- 3) Volume occupied by positive charge is very small as
keâCe 'Ze' DeeJesMe kesâ efkeâmeer Yeejer veeefYekeâ hej yeceyeejer compared to total volume of atom.
keâjlee nw, lees Gmekeâer veeefYekeâ mes efvekeâšlece Gheieceve keâer At the distance of closest approach, the kinetic energy
otjer m hej Fme Øekeâej efveYe&j keâjleer nw : of particle is completely converted to potential energy.
1 1 1 Z1 Z2
(a) m (b) m1u 2 =
m 2 4πε o ro
1 1 so energy of particle is directly proportional to Z1Z2.
(c) (d) 2
m m
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016 26.3 Bohr Model of the Hydrogen
Ans. (b) : At closest approach
Atom
Kinetic energy of the particle = Potential energy of the
particle
7. The angular momentum of an electron moving
1 KQq
mv 2 = h
2 r in an orbit of hydrogen atom is 1.5   . The
1 K(2e)(Ze) π
mv 2 =
2 r energy in the same orbit is nearly
Where Q = 2e is charge on α−particle and r distance of neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer keâ#ee ceW ieefleceeve Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe
closest approach.
h
q = Ze is charge on nucleus keâesCeerÙe mebJesie 1.5   nw~ Gmeer keâ#e ceW Tpee& ueieYeie
1 1
π
m∝ or r ∝ nesleer nw–
r m
6. In a Rutherford scattering experiment when a (a) -1.3eV (b) -1.4eV
projectile of charge Z1 and mass M1 (c) -1.5eV (d) -1.6eV
approaches a target nucleus of charge Z2 and RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
mass M2, the distance of closest approach is r0. Ans. (c) : Angular momentum of electron moving in nth
The energy of the projectile is : orbit of hydrogen atom is-
jojheâes[& kesâ ØekeâerCe&ve ØeÙeesie ceW peye DeeJesMe Z1 Deewj nh
L= ...........(i)
õJÙeceeve M1 keâe Øe#eshÙe DeeJesMe Z2 Deewj õJÙeceeve M2 2π
kesâ ue#Ùe kesâvõkeâ lekeâ hengBÛelee nw lees efvekeâšlece hengBÛe keâer h 3h
Given that L = 1.5 = ..........(ii)
otjer r0 nesleer nw~ Øe#eshÙe keâer Tpee& : π 2π
(a) Directly proportional to mass M1 On comparing equation (i) and equation (ii) we get-
õJÙeceeve M1 keâer meceevegheeleer nesleer nw~ n=3
(b) Directly proportional to M1 × M2 Now, energy of e- in nth orbit of H-atom is-
M1 × M2 keâer meceevegheeleer nesleer nw~ 13.6
En = − 2 Z 2
(c) Directly proportional to Z1Z2 n
Z1Z2 keâer meceevegheeleer nesleer nw~ For third orbit of H-atom, Z = 1 and n = 3
(d) Inversely proportional to Z1 −13.6 ×12
E3 =
Z1 keâer Øeefleueesce Devegheeleer nesleer nw~ 32
AIMPT-2009 E3 = -1.5 eV

Physics 576 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
8. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is - yeesnj cee@[ue ceW, Ùeefo efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer efÉleerÙe
13.6eV. The energy needed to ionize hydrogen mLeeÙeer keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee R1 nw, SJeb ÛelegLe& mLeeÙeer keâ#ee
atom from its second excited state will be?
R1
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer cetue DeJemLee Tpee& - 13.6 eV nw~ keâer ef$epÙee R2 nw lees Devegheele nesiee :
R2
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâes Gmekeâer otmejer Gòesefpele DeJemLee mes
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.5
DeeÙeefvele keâjves kesâ efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ Tpee& nesieer-
(c) 2 (d) 4
(a) 1.51 eV/j (b) 3.4eV/j
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
(c) 13.6 eV/j (d) 6.8 eV/j
Ans. (a) : Radius of the atom is given by the formula
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023
n2
AIPMT-1991 is– R = 0.529 × ⇒ R ∝ n2
z
Ans. (a) :Given: E1 = -13.6 eV
R1 22 1
E3 = ? ⇒ = =
R 2 42 4
The total energy of H-atom in nth orbit is given by -
−13.6 R1 1
En = ⇒ = = 0.25
n2 R2 4
−13.6
In ground state, E1 = 11. Let T1 and T2 be the energy of an electron in
(1) 2 the first and second excited states of hydrogen
−13.6 atoms, respectively. According to the Bohr’s
In 2nd excited state, E2 = = –1.51 eV
(3)2 model of an atom, the ratio T1 : T2 is
Energy required to ionize H-atom from its 2nd excited ceevee, neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ ØeLece SJeb efÉleerÙe Gòesefpele
state is 1.51 eV. DeJemLeeDeeW ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer Tpee& ›eâceMe: T1 SJeb T2
9. The radius of inner most orbit of hydrogen nw~ hejceeCeg kesâ yeesj cee@[ue kesâ Devegmeej, Devegheele T1 : T2
atom is 5.3×10-11 m . What is the radius of nw~
third allowed orbit of hydrogen atom? (a) 9 : 4 (b) 1 : 4
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ meyemes Deevleefjkeâ keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee (c) 4 : 1 (d) 4 : 9
5.3 × 10–11 m nw~ neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer leermejer NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Devegceesefole keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee keäÙee nw ? −13.6
Ans. (a) : Energy, T = eV
o o n2
(a) 4.77 A (b) 0.53 A
o o
Ist excited state, n1 = 2
(c) 1.06 A (d) 1.59 A IInd excited state, n2 = 3
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 1
T∝ 2
Ans. (a) : The radius of inner most orbit of H-atom is – n
rl = 5.3 ×10−11 m T1  n 2 
2

∝ 
0.529 T2  n1 
r1 =
z 2
T1  3 
0.529 2 = 
r3 = ( 3) T2  2 
z
r3 = r1 × 9 T1 9
=
= 9 × 0.53 T2 4
o
r3 = 4.77 A 12. The total energy of an electron in the nth
stationary orbit of the hydrogen atom can be
10. Let R1 be the radius of the second stationary obtained by
orbit and R2 be the radius of the fourth
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer nJeeR mLeeÙeer keâ#ee ceW efkeâmeer
stationary orbit of an electron in Bohr's model.
R Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer kegâue Tpee& efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmekesâ
The ratio 1 is: Éeje Øeehle keâer pee mekeâleer nw?
R2
Physics 577 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
13.6 (a) 0.6 (b) 0.06
(a) En = –13.6 × n2 eV (b) E n =
eV
n2 (c) 0.006 (d) 6
13.6 1.36 NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
(c) E n = − 2 eV (d) E n = 2 eV
n n Ans. (b) : Energy in an electron volt is given by:
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II 1eV = 1.602×10-19 J
Ans. (c) : According to Bohr model of an atom, electron Energy required to break DNA bond is 10-20 J
revolves around nucleus in certain stable & discrete ∴ Energy in term of eV will be -
orbits without radiating energy. Energy is radiated only 1
when an electron jumps from 1 energy level to another. = × 10 −20 eV
1.602 × 10 −19
These stable orbits are known as stationary orbits & are
E = 0.062 eV
at fixed distance from Nucleus. There is no other orbit in
b/w these discrete one. The energy of each orbit is fixed. 15. The total energy of an electron in an atom in an
The energy of Hydrogen atom when its electron is in nth orbit is –3.4 eV. Its kinetic and potential
energies are, respectively:
E
orbit is, En = 20 efkeâmeer keâ#ee ceW efkeâmeer hejceeCeg kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer kegâue
n
where, E0 = -13.6 eV which represents energy in first Tpe& -3.4 eV nw~ Fmekeâer ieeflepe Deewj efmLeeflepe Tpee&SB
orbit and n represents subsequent orbits ›eâceMe: nw~
−13.6 (a) –3.4 eV, –6.8 eV
En = eV
n2 (b) 3.4 eV, –6.8 eV
(c) 3.4 eV, 3.4 eV
13. For which one of the following, Bohr model is
not valid ?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmekesâ efueS yeesj (d) –3.4 eV, –3.4 eV
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
cee@[ue JewOe veneR nw?
Ans. (b) : Given that
(a) Singly ionised helium atom (He+)
Total energy (T.E) = –3.4 eV
SkeâOee DeeÙeefvele nerefueÙece hejceeCeg (He+)
In Bohr's model of H atom, T.E = K.E + P.E
(b) Deuteron atom/[dÙetšje@ve hejceeCeg
(c) Singly ionised neon atom (Ne+) Kinetic energy = – (T.E)
SkeâOee DeeÙeefvele efveÙee@ve hejceeCeg (Ne+) = – (–3.4) eV

(d) Hydrogen atom/neF[^espeve hejceeCeg K.E = 3.4 eV

NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 Potential energy = 2(T.E)
Ans. (c) : • Bohr model– In this model, Bohr explained = 2 (–3.4) eV
the atomic structure by explaining that electrons move
P.E = –6.8eV
in fixed orbits or shells and each of the orbit is having
fixed energy. 16. Ionized hydrogen atoms and α-particles with
nh same momenta enters perpendicular to a
l=
4π constant magnetic field, B. The ratio of their
where, l is the angular momentum, radii of their paths rH : rα will be :
n is the principal quantum number DeeÙeveerke=âle neF[^espeve hejceeCeg leLee α-keâCe meceevemebJesie
and h is a Planck's constant. mes efkeâmeer efveÙele ÛegcyekeâerÙe #es$e, B uecyeJele ØeJesMe keâjles
• Bohr model is only valid for single electron species nw~ Fvekesâ heLeeW keâer ef$epÙeeDeeW keâe Devegheele rH : rα nesiee~
because it does not consider the force due to the (a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1
inter-electronic attraction in the system. (c) 1 : 4 (d) 2 : 1
• Singly ionized neon atom has more than one electron NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
in orbit. Hence, the Bohr model is not valid.
mv
14. The energy required to break one bond in DNA Ans. (d) : Radius of Hydrogen, R H =
q HB
is 10–20 J. This value in eV is nearly:
DNA ceW Skeâ yebOe keâes KeefC[le keâjves kesâ efueS Radius of α-particles, R α =
mv
DeeJeMÙekeâ Tpee& 10 J nw~ eV ceW Ùen ceeve nw, ueieYeie:
–20 q αB

Physics 578 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
mv Ans. (b): According to Bohr’s model the electrostatic
RH qH B force is balanced by the centripetal force as
=
R α mv kZe2 mv 2
qα B =
r2 r
R H qα
= kze 2
R α qH ⇒ mv 2 =
r
RH 2 Where, symbols have their usual meaning
=
Rα 1 1 kZe 2
So, K.E = .................. (i)
17. The radius of the first permitted Bohr orbit, 2 r
for the electron, in a hydrogen atom equals 0.53 kZe 2
Å and its ground state energy equals –13.6 eV. P.E = F.dr = − ................ (ii)
r
If the electron in the hydrogen atom is replaced Total energy becomes
by muon (µ–) [charge same as electron and T.E = K.E + P.E
mass 207 me], the first Bohr radius and ground
state energy will be, 1 kZe 2 kZe 2
= −
efkeâmeer neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ efueS henueer 2 r r
Devegcele yeesnj keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee 0.53 Å nw leLee Fmekeâer T.E = −
1 kZe 2
................... (iii)
efvecvelece DeJemLee Tpee& –13.6 eV nw~ Ùeefo neF[^espeve 2 r
hejceeCeg ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes cÙetDee@ve (µ–) [efpemekeâe DeeJesMe ∴ K.E 1
=
Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ DeeJesMe kesâ yejeyej leLee õJÙeceeve 207 me T.E −1
nw] mes ØeeflemLeeefhele keâj oW, lees henueer yeesnj ef$epÙee leLee ratio is 1 : –1 rd
efvecvelece DeJemLee Tpee& nesieer – 19. Consider 3 orbit of He+ (Helium), using non-
relativistic approach, the speed of electron in
(a) 2.56 × 10–13 m, –13.6 eV this orbit will be [given K=9×109 constant, Z= 2
(b) 0.53 × 10–13 m, –3.6 eV and h (Planck's Constant) = 6.6×10-34 J s]
–13
(c) 25.6 × 10 m, –2.8 eV Deveehesef#ekeâerÙe Gheieceve kesâ GheÙeesie mes, nerefueÙece (He+)
–13
(d) 2.56 × 10 m, –2.8 keV keâer le=leerÙe keâ#ee ceW, Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer Ûeeue nesieer:
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) [efoÙee nw, k = 9 × 109 efmLejebkeâ, Z = 2 leLee h (hueebkeâ
Ans. (d) : Given, Radius of the first Bohr orbit, efmLejebkeâ) = 6.6 × 10-34 J s]
re = 0.53 Å (a) 1.46×106 m/s (b) 0.73×106 m/s
Let rµ be the radius of muonic hydrogen atom. (c) 3.0×10 m/s 8
(d) 2.92×106 m/s
at equilibrium we can write the relation, AIPMT-03.05.2015
mµrµ = mere Ans. (a) : Energy of electron in the 3rd orbit of He+ is
207m e × rµ = m e re
Z2 22
–10 E 3 = −13.6 × 2 eV = −13.6 × 2 eV
0.53 × 10 m n 3
rµ = = 2.56 × 10 –13
207 4
= −13.6 × × 1.6 × 10 −19 J
Hence, the value of the first Bohr radius of a muonic 9
hydrogen atom 2.56 × 10–13m. = 9.7 × 10 J
–19

Now, we have Ee = –13.6 eV From Bohr's model

Energy of the first Bohr is written as, 1
E e me me E 3 = −K ⋅ E 3 = − m e v 2
= = 2
–31
E µ mµ 207me Where me = mass of electron = 9.1 × 10 kg
E µ = 207 × (–13.6eV) = – 2.81keV − 9.1× 10 −31
−9.7 × 10−19 = × v2
2
18. The ratio of kinetic energy to the total energy
of an electron in a Bohr orbit of the hydrogen 2 × 9.7 × 10−19
v=
atom, is / neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer efkeâmeer yeesj keâ#ee ceW 9.1× 10−31
efkeâmeer Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj Gmekeâer kegâue v = 1.46 × 106 m / s
Tpee& keâe Devegheele neslee nw
20. An electron in hydrogen atom makes a
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : –1 transition n1 → n2 where n1 and n2 are
(c) 1 : –2 (d) 2 : –1 principal quantum numbers of the two states.
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018 Assuming Bohr's model to be valid the time
Physics 579 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
period of the electron in the initial state is eight Now, Energy of emitted photon when an electron jumps
times that in the final state. The possible values form 1st excited state to ground state is–
of n1 and n2 are/ neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve hv = E2–E1
n1 → n2 meb›eâceCe keâjlee nw, peneB n1 Deewj n2 oes = – 3.4 eV – (–13.6 eV) = 10.2 eV
DeJemLeeDeeW keâer cegKÙe keäJeeCšce mebKÙeeSb nQ~ yeesj cee@[ue Maximum kinetic energy,
K
keâes JewOe ceeveles ngS ØeejefcYekeâ DeJemLee ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer max = h v – φ0 where, φ0 = work function
meceÙeeJeefOe Debeflece DeJemLee keâer leguevee ceW 8 iegvee nw~ n1 hv = Incident energy
⇒ φ0 = hv – Kmax
Deewj n2 kesâ mebYeeefJele ceeve nQ-
= 10.2eV – 3.57 eV
(a) n1 = 4 and n2 = 2 (b) n1 = 6 and n2 = 2
⇒ φ0 = 6.63 eV
(c) n1 = 8 and n2 = 1 (d) n1 = 8 and n2 = 2
Now, threshold frequency,
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
φ 6.63 ×1.6 ×10−19 J
Ans. (a) : The time period T of an electron in a Bohr v0 = 0 = = 1.6 ×1015 Hz.
orbit of principal quantum number n is h 6.63 ×10−34 Js
4ε2 h3 n3 22. Out of the following which one is not a possible
T= 0 4 energy for a photon to be emitted by hydrogen
me atom according to Bohr's atomic model ?
T∝n 3
efvecve ceW mes keâewve-meer Skeâ yeesj kesâ hejceeCeg cee@[ue kesâ
T1 n13 Devegmeej neF[^espeve hejceeCeg Éeje Glmeefpe&le Heâesše@ve kesâ
=
T2 n 3
2
efueÙes mecYeeefJele Tpee& veneR nw?
as T1 = 8T2 given relation (a) 0.65 eV (b) 1.9 eV
3 (c) 11.1 eV (d) 13.6 eV
 n1   8T2 
  =  AIPMT (Mains)-2011
 n 2   T2  th
Ans. (c) : The energy of n orbit of hydrogen atom is
n1 given by
= 2 ⇒ n1 = 2n2 13.6
n2 E n = − 2 eV
Possible Value of n1 and n2 n
Therefore, E1 = –13.6 eV
n1 = 2, n2 = 1
13.6
n1 = 4, n2 = 2 E 2 = − 2 = −3.4eV
n1 = 6, n2 = 3 2
So that option (a) is correct. 13.6
E 3 = − 2 = −1.5eV
21. Monochromatic radiation emitted when 3
electron on hydrogen atom jumps from first 13.6
excited state to the ground state irradiates a E 4 = − 2 = −0.85eV
4
photosensitive material. The stopping potential So, E3 – E2 = –1.5 – (–3.4) = 1.9 eV
is measured to be 3.57V. The threshold and E4 – E3 = –0.85 – (–1.5) = 0.65 eV
frequency of the material is:
Hence, correct option is 11.1 eV which is not possible
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve neF[^espeve keâer ØeLece Gòesefpele DeJemLee mes energy for a photon to be emitted by hydrogen.
Gmekeâer efvecvelece DeJemLee ceW meb›eâceCe keâjlee nw~ Fmemes 23. The energy of a hydrogen atom in the ground
Glmeefpe&le SkeâJeCeea efJeefkeâjCe efkeâmeer Øekeâej meg«eener heoeLe& state is – 13.6 eV. The energy of He+ ion in the
keâes efkeâjefCele keânlee nw~ Fmekeâe efvejesOeer efJeYeJe 3.57V first excited state will be – / Skeâ neF[^espeve hejceeCeg
ceehee ieÙee nw, lees Fme heoeLe& keâer osnueer DeeJe=efòe nw: keâer DeeÅe DeJemLee ceW Tpee& – 13.6 eV nw~ ØeLece
(a) 1.6 × 1015 Hz (b) 2.5 × 1015 Hz Gòeesefuele DeJemLee ceW He+ keâer Tpee& nesieer –
(c) 4 × 1015 Hz (d) 5 × 1015 Hz (a) – 13.6 eV (b) – 27.2 eV
AIPMT (Screening)-2012 (c) – 54.4 eV (d) – 6.8 eV
Ans. (a) : For hydrogen atom, AIPMT (Screening)-2010
−13.6 Ans. (a) : Energy E of an atom with principal quantum
Energy in 'n' state, En= eV number n is given by,
n2
for ground state, n =1 −13.6 2
E= z
−13.6 n2
E1 = = −13.6 eV For first excited state n = 2, He+, z= 2
12
−13.6 2
for excited state, n = 2 E=
22
(2 )
−13.6
E2 = = −3.4 eV E = -13.6 eV
22

Physics 580 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
24. The electron in the hydrogen atom jumps from 1 1 (2e)(Ze)
excited state (n = 3) to its ground state (n = 1) mv 2 =
2 4πεo ro
and the photons thus emitted irradiate a
photosensitive material. If the work function of 1 2Ze2
the material is 5.1 eV, the stopping potential is ro =
4πεo 1 mv2
estimated to be (the energy of the electron in nth 2
 13.6 
state  E n = − 2 eV  k4Ze2 1
 n  r0 = ∝
mv2 m
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve Gòesefpele DeJemLee (n =
1
3) mes efvecvelece (DeeÅe) DeJemLee (n = 1) ceW Úueebie where, k= .
4πε0
ueieeles nw leLee Fmemes Glmeefpe&le Heâesševe Skeâ ØekeâeMe
meg«eener heoeLe& hej heÌ[les nw~ Ùeefo Fme heoeLe& keâe keâeÙe& 26. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –
13.6 eV. When its electron is in the first excited
Heâueve 5.1 eV nes lees efvejesOeer efJeYeJe nesiee : n JeeR mlej state, its excitation energy is –
ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer Tpee&  E n = − 2 eV  neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer DeeÅe DeJemLee keâer – 13.6 eV
13.6
 n  nw~ peye Fmekeâe Fueskeäš^eve ØeLece Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW
(a) 5.1 V (b) 12.1 V nesiee, lees Fmekeâer Gòespeve Tpee& nesieer:-
(c) 17.2V (d) 7V (a) 10.2 eV (b) zero
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 (c) 3.4 eV (d) 6.8 eV
Ans. (d) : Energy released when electron in the atom AIPMT-2008
Jumps from excited state (n = 3) to ground state (n = 1) Ans. (a): Given:- ground state energy of hydrogen atom
then the frequency (v) of the emitted photon is = –13.6 eV
Energy of electron in Bohr's orbit of hydrogen atom is
−13.6  −13.6 
E = hv = En– E1 = E3 – E1 = − 2  z2
2
n3  1 n given by E n = –13.6
n2
–13.6 (13.6 ) (for hydrogen z = 1)
= + eV (n = energy state of electron)
( 3) (1)
2 2
E1 = – 13.6 eV (given)
1  For first excited state n = 2
= –13.6  –1 eV
9  1
E2 = −13.6 ×
13.6 × 8
= 12.1eV
( 2 )2
9 = – 3.4 eV
Therefore, stopping potential: eV0 = hv –φ0 = 12.1–5.1 Excitation energy ∆E = E2 – E1
[Q work function φ0 = 5.1] = – 3.4 – (–13.6)
⇒ V0 = 7V = 10 .2 eV
25. An alpha nucleus of energy 1/2 mv bombards 2 27. The total energy of electron in the ground state
a heavy nuclear target of charge Ze. Then the of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. The kinetic
distance of closest approach for the alpha energy of an electron in first excited state is:-
nucleus will be proportion to – neF[^ e s peve hejceeCeg keâer DeeÅe DeJemLee ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer
1 het C e& Tpee& –13.6 eV. nes l eer nw ~ ØeLece Gòesefpele DeJemLee
Skeâ DeuHeâe keâCe keâes mv 2 Tpee& kesâ meeLe Skeâ Yeejer ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe DeJemLee ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer ieeflepe
2
ue#Ùe efpeme hej Ze DeeJesMe nw, hej yeceyeejer keâer ieF& nw, Tpee& nesieer:-
lees DeuHeâe keâCe keâer veeefYekeâ kesâ efvekeâšlece hengBÛe keâer (a) 1.7 eV (b) 3.4 eV
meceevegheeleer nesieer, kesâ – (c) 6.8 eV (d) 13.6 eV
AIPMT-2007
1 1 1
(a) (b) v2 (c) (d) 4 Ans. (b) : Given: Total energy of electron in the ground
Ze m v state of hydrogen = –13.6 eV.
AIPMT (Screening)-2010 Energy of hydrogen atom when the electron revolves in
Ans. (c) : A particle of mass m possesses initial velocity z2
v, when it is at a large distance from the nucleus of an the n orbit E n = −13.6 2 eV
th
n
atom having atomic number Z, at the distance of closest
approach KE of a particle is completely converted into For ground state ( n = 1) , E1 = −13.6 = −13.6 eV (z=1)
potential energy so, 12

Physics 581 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
−13.6 13.6
For the first excited state, E 2 = × 1 = −3.4 eV Ans. (c): Given , En = − eV
22 n2
The kinetic energy of an electron in the orbit is equal to Energy of photon ejected when electron jumps from
the negative of its total energy i.e. n = 3 to n = 2 state is given by,
∴ ( K ⋅ E )2 = − E 2 = 3.4 eV Energy of third orbit,
13.6 13.6
28. Ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6eV. E3 = – eV = − eV
( 3)
2
Hydrogen atoms in the ground state are excited 9
by monochromatic radiation of photon energy Energy of second orbit,
12.1 eV. According to Bohr's theory, the spectral 13.6 13.6
lines emitted by hydrogen will be:-/neF[^espeve E2 = – eV = − eV
( 2)
2
4
hejceeCeg keâe DeeÙeveve efJeYeJe 13.6 eV nw~ vÙetvelece Tpee&
So, ∆E = E3 – E2
efmLeefle kesâ neF[^espeve hejceeCegDeeW keâes 12.1 eV Øeesševe
13.6  13.6 
Tpee& Jeeues SkeâJeCeea efJeefkeâjCe Éeje Gòesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee~ = − − − 
9  4 
yeesnj efmeæevle kesâ Devegmeej Fme Øe›eâce ceW neF[^espeve Éeje
54.4 + 122.4
Gmeefpe&le mheskeäš^ce jsKeeSb nesieer:- = −
36
(a) Two/oes
68
(b) Three/leerve = = 1.8
36
(c) Four/Ûeej ≈ 1.9eV
(d) One/Skeâ 30. The Bohr model of atoms :-
AIPMT-2006 hejceeCegDeeW kesâ yeesnj cee@[ue Devegmeej :-
−13.6 (a) Uses Einstein's photo electric equation
Ans. (b) : En = eV
n2 DeeFvmšeFve kesâ ØekeâeMe-JewÅegle meceerkeâjCe keâes DeeOeej
n = 3 ......... –1.51 eV yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~
n = 2 ......... –3.4 eV (b) Predicts continuous emission spectra for
n = 1 ......... –13.6 eV atoms/hejceeCegDeeW kesâ efueS meblele Glmepeea mhewkeäš^ce keâer
Given Ionization energy keâuhevee keâer peeleer nw~
IE = –13.6 eV (c) Predicts the same emission spectra for all
Excited photon energy = 12.1 eV types of atoms/meYeer Øekeâej kesâ hejceeCegDeeW mes Skeâ ner
Energy of atom at excited state = –13.6 + 12.1 = – 1.5 Øekeâej kesâ Glmepeea mhewkeäš^ce keâer DeeMee keâer peeleer nw~
eV (d) Assumes that the angular momentum of
so it lies in 3rd spectral line i.e. ⇒ n = 3 electrons is quantized/keâuhevee keâer peeleer nw efkeâ
n ( n − 1) Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe keâesCeerÙe mebJesie keäJeebefšle neslee nw~
and we know number of spectral lines = AIPMT-2004
2
Ans. (d) : Bhor's theory modified the atomic structure
3 ( 3 − 1) model by explaining that electrons move in fixed orbits
= =3
2 and not anywhere in between them also explained that
29. Energy E of a hydrogen atom with principal each orbit has a fixed energy.
−13.6
quantum number n is given by En = eV .
n2
The energy of a photon ejected when the
electron jumps from n = 3 state to n = 2 state of
hydrogen is approximately :-
cegKÙe keäJeeCšce Debkeâ n jKeves hej neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer
−13.6
Tpee& En = eV nesleer nw~ peye Fueskeäš^e@ve So, Assumes that the angular momentum of electrons is
quantized
n2
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer n = 3 keâ#ee mes n = 2 keâ#ee keâes 31. An electron is moving around the nucleus of a
mLeeveevleefjle neslee nw, leye Glmeefpe&le heâesše@ve keâer Tpee& hydrogen atom in a circular orbit of radius r.
The coulomb force F between the two is –
ueieYeie nesieer :-
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve, Skeâ neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ veefYekeâ kesâ
(a) 0.85 eV (b) 3.4 eV
(c) 1.9 eV (d) 1.5 eV
ÛeejeW Deesj Skeâ r ef$epÙee JeòeerÙe keâ#ee ceW Ietce jne nw
AIPMT-2004 oesveeW kesâ yeerÛe ketâuee@ce yeue F nw-
Physics 582 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
e2 e2 Thus knowing E, B and V the value of e/m electrons
(a) K rˆ (b) − K rˆ and for protons can be calculated. It is found the e/m of
r2 r3
electrons is much greater than the e/m of protons.
e2 e2 Thomson's experiment revealed that cathode rays are
(c) K 3 r (d) − K 3 r composed of negatively charged particles called
r r
electrons. He also determined that the charge to mass
1
(where/peneB K = ) ratio of electrons which was much greater (about 2000
4πε0 times) than that of protons. So (a), (c) both options are
AIPMT-2003 correct.
Ans. (d): 33. The energy of hydrogen atom in nth orbit is En
then the energy in nth orbit of singly ionised
helium atom will be:/neF[^espeve keâer nJeeR keâ#ee keâer
Tpee& En nw, lees SkeâOee DeeÙeefvele nerefueÙece hejceeCeg keâer
nJeeR keâ#ee ceW Tpee& nesieer-
(a) 4En (b) En/4
(c) 2En (d) En/2
AIPMT-2001
Ans. (a) : Energy of Hydrogen like atom when its
For Hydrogen – atom 1 proton and 1 electron. electron is in nth orbit
So, Coulomb force- 13.6
r Kq1q 2 En = - z2 × 2 eV
F= rˆ n
r2 n = orbit in which electron is revolving
r r
Kq1q 2 r  r z = atomic number of atom.
= 2  r̂ =  Now, for He+ (z = 2)
r r  r
(2) 2
Kq1q 2 r E He = –13.6 2
= r n
r3
13.6
K ( + e )( −e ) r EHe = - 4 x 2 ev ...(1)
= 3
r n
r For H (z =1)
2 r
−Ke -13.6
F= 3 r EH = ev ...(2)
r n2
From (1) & (2)
32. J.J. Thomson's cathode-ray tube experiment E = 4E = 4E
He H n
demonstrated that/pes. pes. Lee@cemeve keâe kewâLees[-
34. Maximum frequency of emission is obtained
efkeâjCe veefuekeâe ØeÙeesie oMee&lee nw, efkeâ for the transition:/Glmepe&ve keâer DeeJeefle efkeâme
(a) cathode rays are streams of negatively meb›eâceCe kesâ efueS DeefOekeâlece nesieer –
charged ions (a) n = 2 to n = 1 (b) n = 6 to n = 2
kewâLeesÌ[ efkeâjCeW $e+Ceelcekeâ DeeJesefMele DeeÙeveeW keâer OeejeSB nQ (c) n = 1 to n = 2 (d) n = 2 to n = 6
(b) all the mass of an atom is essentially in the AIPMT-2000
nucleus Ans. (a) : Relation of frequency with initial & final
hejceeCeg keâe hetje õJÙeceeve lelJele: veeefYekeâ ceW efveefnle nw number of orbital i.e., ni & nf respectively.
(c) the e/m of electrons is much greater than the  1 1 
Frequency, ν = Rc  2 − 2  where R & c are constant
e/m of protons
 nf n i 
Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe e/m Øeesše@veeW kesâ e/m mes yengle DeefOekeâ nQ
1 1 3
(d) the e/m ratio of the cathode ray particles For option A, ni = 2 & nf = 1, ν = Rc  2 − 2  = Rc
changes when a different gas is placed in the 1 2  4
discharge tube/peye efJemepe&ve veefuekeâe ceW otmejer iewme For option B, ni = 6 & nf = 2, ν = Rc 2
jKe oer peeleer nw, leye kewâLees[-efkeâjCe kesâ keâCeeW keâe e/m 9
Devegheele heefjJeefle&le nes peelee nw~ 3
For option C, ni = 1 & nf = 2, ν = − Rc
AIPMT-2003 4
Ans. (a &c): JJ Thomson's cathode-ray tube experiment For option D, ni = 2 & nf = 6, ν = − 2 Rc
demonstrated for e/m of charged particles. The relation 9
e E 2 ∴ Maximum frequency of emission is obtained for
is = 2 transition, ni = 2 & nf = 1
m 2B V
Physics 583 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
35. In the Bohr model of H-atom, an electron (e) is Ans. (b) : According to Bohr's atomic model, Radius is
revolving around a proton (p) with velocity v, if given by-
r is the radius of orbit and m is mass and ε0 is
vacuum permittivity, the value of v is : n2 o
r0 = 0.529 A
Ùeefo keâesF& Fueskeäš^e@ve (e–) neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ yeesnj (1)
cee@[ue ceW, Øeesše@ve (p) kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj, efpemekeâer Je=òeerÙe For ground state n=1
heLe keâer ef$epÙee r nw, v Jesie mes Ietcelee nw Deewj m õJÙeceeve 12 o
r0 = 0.529 A
Deewj ε0 efveJee&le keâe hejeJewÅegleebkeâ nw lees v keâe ceeve nw (1)
e 2e r0 = 0.529
(a) (b)
4πm ∈0 r πm ∈0 r For first excited state, n=2
o
e e So, r1 = 0.529 (2)2 A
(c) (d)
πm ∈0 r 4πm ∈0 r r1 = 4r0
AIPMT-1998
∴ Radius of first excited state is equal to 4 times of
Ans. (a) : Coulomb's attraction between the positive
Bohr radius
1 e2
proton and negative electron = 38. According to Bohr's principle, the relation
4πε0 r 2
between principal quantum number (n) and
mv 2 radius of orbit (r) is
Centripetal force has magnitude F =
r yeesj kesâ efmeæeble kesâ Devegmeej, cegKÙe keäJeeCšce mebKÙee (n)
mv 2 1 e2 Deewj keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee (r) kesâ yeerÛe mebyebOe nw:
So, =
r 4πε0 r 2 1 1
1 (a) r ∝ (b) r ∝ 2
v =
2 n n
4πε0 rm (c) r ∝ n (d) r ∝ n2
e AIPMT-1996
v=
4πε 0 mr Ans. (d) : As we known-
36. The energy of the ground electronic state of mv 2
Centripetal force =
hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. The energy of the r
first excited state will be
1 ze 2
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer efvecvelece DeJemLee ceW Tpee& –13.6 Electrostatic force =
4πε0 r 2
eV nw~ ØeLece Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW Tpee& nesieer:
(a) –27.2 eV (b) –52.4 eV Now, in hydrogen atom,
(c) –3.4 eV (d) –6.8 eV Electrostatic force = centrifugal force
AIPMT-1997 1 ze 2 mv 2
=
Ans. (c) : Energy of ground state = –13.6 eV 4πε0 r 2 r
Energy of H-atom in its nth state is given by-
−13.6 1 ze 2
En = eV v2 = ........(i)
n2 4πε0 mr
Now, energy of first excited state- Now, from Bohr's quantum equation
For first excited state n = 2 L = mvr = nh ........(ii)
−13.6 −13.6 h
E2 = = = −3.4 eV Where, h =
(2)2 4 2π
37. When hydrogen atom is its first excited level, nh
v=
its radius is ....... of the Bohr radius. mr
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer henueer Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW neslee Put value of v in (i)
nw lees Fmekeâer ef$epÙee yeesj ef$epÙee keâer nesleer nw~  nh 
2
1 ze 2
(a) twice /yeesj ef$epÙee mes oesiegveer   =
 m2 πr  4 πε0 mr
(b) 4 times/yeesj ef$epÙee mes Ûeej iegveer
4πε0 n 2 h 2
(c) same /yeesj ef$epÙee kesâ yejeyej r=
4π2 mze2
(d) half/yeesj ef$epÙee keâer DeeOeer
AIPMT-1997 r ∝ n2

Physics 584 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
39. When a hydrogen atom is raised from the neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer DeeÙeveerkeâjCe Tpee& 13.6 eV nw~
ground state to an excited state, yeesj efmeæeble kesâ Devegmeej leermejer keâ#ee mes ÛeewLeer keâ#ee ceW
peye Skeâ neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâes efvecvelece DeJemLee mes peeves hej mLeeveevlejCe Tpee& nesieer-
Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW Gòesefpele efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees (a) 3.40 eV (b) 1.51 eV
(a) both K.E. and P.E. increase/ieeflepe Tpee& Deewj (c) 0.85 eV (d) 0.66 eV
efmLeeflepe Tpee& oesveeW yeÌ{ peeleer nw~ AIPMT-1992
(b) both K.E. and P.E. decrease/ieeflepe Tpee& efmLeeflepe Ans. (d) : According to Bohr's theroy:-
Tpee& oesveeW Ieš peeleer nw~ –13.6
(c) the P.E. decreases and K.E. increases/efmLeeflepe En =
n2
Tpee& Iešleer nw peyeefkeâ ieeflepe Tpee& yeÌ{leer nw~ rd
Now for 3 orbit,
(d) the P.E. increases and K.E. decreases/efmLeeflepe –13.6 –13.6 –13.6
E3 = = = = –1.51 eV
Tpee& yeÌ{leer nw peyeefkeâ ieeflepe Tpee& Iešleer nw~ (3)2 (3)2 9
AIPMT-1995 –13.6 –13.6
Ans. (d) : kE for hydrogen atom is given by- Also, for 4th orbit, E 4 = = = –0.85 eV
42 16
kze 2 Now, energy corresponding to a transition between 3rd
kE =
2r and 4th orbit is-
Where, k = constant r = radius of orbit = E4 – E3
e = charge z = no of protons in nucleus = – 0.85 – ( –1.51) = 0.66 eV
Now, when a e- is excited to a higher energy level it 42. To explain his theory, Bohr used
means that it has occupied a higher orbital and as the
orbital increases the distance of e- from nucleus
yeesj ves Deheves efmeæeble keâer JÙeeKÙee nsleg efvecve keâe
increases i.e, r increases. GheÙeesie efkeâÙee:
1 (a) conservation of linear momentum/jsKeerÙe mebJesie
⇒ kE ∝
r keâe mebj#eCe
As 'r' increases or electron is excited to a higher energy (b) quantisation of angular momentum/keâesCeerÙe
level it kE decreases.
mebJesie keâe keäJeeCšceerkeâjCe
Similarly
(c) conservation of quantum frequency/keäJeeCšce
–kze 2
Formula for PE = DeeJe=efòe keâe mebj#eCe
r
(d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
–1
⇒ PE ∝ AIPMT-1989
r
Although, PE is inversely proportional to 'r' but due to Ans. (b) : (i) To explain his theory. Bohr used
negative sign, when radius is increased, potential energy quantization of Angular momentum.
is also increased. (ii) Bohr used quantization of angular momentum for
Hence, when a hydrogen atom is raised from ground nh
stationary orbits, Angular momentum (L) =
state to excited state, its PE increase where as kE 2π
decreases. Where, n = 1, 2, 3, 4 ......
40. In terms of Bohr radius a0, the radius of the 43. The ionisation energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6
second Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom is given by eV, the ionisation energy of a singly ionised
yeesj ef$epÙee keâes a0 ceevee peelee nw, lees neF[^espeve hejceeCeg helium atom would be
keâer otmejer keâ#ee keâer ef$epÙee nesieer: H-hejceeCeg keâer DeeÙeveerkeâjCe Tpee& 13.6 eV nw, lees He-
(a) 4a0 (b) 8a0 hejceeCeg keâer DeeÙeveerkeâjCe Tpee& nesieer:
(c) 2a 0 (d) 2a0 (a) 13.6 eV (b) 27.2 eV
AIPMT-1992 (c) 6.8 eV (d) 54.4 eV
Ans. (a) : Bohr radius of any orbit = n2a0 AIPMT-1988
Where n = nth orbit Ans. (d) : Given: Ionization energy of hydrogen atom =
Now, Radius of second Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom 13.6 eV
is given by = (2)2 a0 z2
= 4 a0 From Bohr's atomic Theory E n = −13.6 2
n
41. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6 2 2
eV. Following Bohr's theory, the energy Now, E He = –13.6(2) × n
corresponding to a transition between 3rd and EH n2 –13.6(1)2
4th orbit is
Physics 585 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
EHe = 4×EH 3 Paschen n2 = 144 9 16 Near
series 4,5,6,.. Infrared
= 4×13.6 ...∞ 7R R 7 region
EHe = 54.4 eV n1 = 3
44. Consider an electron in the nth orbit of a 4 Brackett n2 = 400 16 25 Far
series 5,6,7,.. Infrared
hydrogen atom in the Bohr model. The .... ∞ 9R R 9 region
circumference of the orbit can be expressed in n1 = 4
terms of de Broglie wavelength λ of that 5 P-fund n2 = 900 25 36 Far
electron as series 6,7,8,.. Infrared
...∞ 11R R 11 region
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ yeesj cee@[ue ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve n1 = 5
ceevee nJeeR keâ#ee ceW nw~ Fme keâ#ee keâer heefjefOe keâes os- 46. In hydrogen spectrum, the shortest wavelength
yeÇe@iueer lejbieowIÙe& λ kesâ heoeW ceW Fme Øekeâej JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee in the Balmer series is λ. The shortest
pee mekeâlee nw: wavelength in the Bracket series is:
neF[^espeve mheskeäš^ce ceW, yeecej ßesCeer keâer vÙetvelece
(a) (0.529)nλ (b) nλ
lejbieowOÙe& λ nw~ yeÇskesâš ßesCeer keâer vÙetvelece lejbieowOÙe& nw :
(c) (13.6)λ (d) nλ
(a) 16λ (b) 2 λ
AIPMT-1990
(c) 4 λ (d) 9 λ
Ans.(d): As per wave nature of electron, NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
circumferences of nth orbit of hydrogen is equal to 'n'
Ans. (c) : Formula for the shortest wavelength line that
times of its de-Broglie wavelength.
of Balmer series is given as
By De-Broglie hypothesis:
n1 = 2, n2 = ∞
nh
mvr = 1 1 1
2π =R 2 − 2
λ n
 1 n 2 
 h 
2πr = circumference = n   = nλ  1 1
 mv  = R 2 − 
⇒ 2πr = nλ 2 ∞
1 1
=R 
λ 4
26.4 The Line Spectra of the
4
Hydrogen Atom λ= ... (i)
R
For Bracket series –
45. The wavelength of Lyman series of hydrogen
atom appears in n1 = 4 and n2 = ∞
neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer ueeFcewve ßesCeer keâer lejbieowOÙe& 1  1 1 
= R 2 − 2 
Øekeâš nesleer nw: λ 2  4 ∞ 
(a) Ultraviolet region/hejeyeQieveer #es$e 1 R
=
(b) Infrared region/DeJejòeâ #es$e λ 2 16

(c) Visible region/oMe&veerÙe #es$e 1 4

= [from eqn (i) ]
(d) Far infrared region/megotj DeJejòeâ #es$e
λ 2 λ.16
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 λ2 = 4λ
Ans. (a) : 47. The ratio of wavelengths of the last line of
Balmer series and the last line of Lyman series
S. Spectral Transi λmax λmin λ max Region
N. series -tion is/yeecej ßesCeer keâer Deefvlece ueeFve leLee ueeFceve ßesCeer
λ min keâer Deefvlece ueeFve keâer lejbieowOÙe& keâe Devegheele nw:
1 Lyman n2 = 4 1 4 Ultraviolet
(a) 2 (b) 1
series 2,3,4... region
..∞ 3R R 3 (c) 4 (d) 0.5
n1 = 1 NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
2 Balmer n2 = 36 4 9 Visible Ans.(c) Wavelength from Rydberg formula is given by-
series 3,4,5,.. region
5R R 5 1 1 1
...∞ =R 2 − 2
n1 = 2 λ  n1 n 2 

Physics 586 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
For Balmer series, n1 = 2 and for last line n2 = ∞, so efj[yeie& efveÙeleebkeâ keâe ceeve 107 m-1, efoÙee ieÙee nw,
wavelength (λ) is- neF[^espeve mheskeäš^ce keâer yeecej ßesCeer keâer Deefvlece ueeFve
1 1 1  keâer lejbie mebKÙee nesieer :
=R 2 − 2
λb 2 ∞  (a) 2×107 m-1 (b) 0.025× 104 m-1
4 (c) 0.5×107 m-1 (d) 0.25×107 m-1
λb =
R NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
For lyman series, n1 = 1 and for last line n2 = ∞, so Ans. (d) Wavelength from Rydberg formula is given
wavelength (λ) is- by,
1 1 1  1  1 1 
=R 2 − 2 = R 2 − 2 
λl 1 ∞  λ  n1 n 2 
1
λl = We know, wave number V =
1
R λ
λb 4 / R
= For Balmer series n1 = 2 n2 = ∞
λ l 1/ R
1 1 1 
λb ⇒V= = R − 2 
=4 λ  4 (∞ ) 
λl
107 m −1
48. If an electron in a hydrogen atom jumps from Wave number =
4
the 3rd orbit to the 2nd orbit, it emits a photon
= 25000,00
of wavelength λ when it jumps from the 4th
orbit to the 3rd orbit, the corresponding = 0.25 × 107m-1
wavelength of the photon will be 50. Hydrogen atom in ground state is excited by a
efkeâmeer neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW peye Skeâ Fueskeâš^e@ve le=leerÙe monochromatic radiation of λ=975Å. Number
keâ#ee mes efÉleerÙe keâ#ee ceW meb›eâceCe keâjlee nw, lees λ of spectral lines in the resulting spectrum
lejbieowOÙe& keâe Heâesšesve Glmeefpe&le neslee nw ~ Ùeefo Fueskeäš^e@ve emitted will be
ÛelegLe& keâ#ee mes le=leerÙe keâ#ee ces meb›eâceCe keâjs, lees Heâesše@ve efvecvelece Tpee& efmLeefle ceW neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâes,
keâe mebiele lejbieowOÙe& nesiee:- λ=975Å lejbieowOÙe& kesâ SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe mes Gòesefpele
16 9 efkeâÙee peelee nw~ lees, heefjCeeceer mhewkeäš^ce ceW mhewkeäš^ceer
(a) λ λ (b) jsKeeDeeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer~
25 16
20 20 (a) 3 (b) 2
(c) λ (d) λ (c) 6 (d) 10
7 13
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II AIPMT-06.05.2014
Ans. (c) : Wavelength of emitted photon, Ans. (c) :
1  1 1  hc
= R 2 − 2  Energy of the photon, E = ,
λ  n 2 n1  λ
Transition from n1 = 3 to n2 = 2 where c = 3×108m/s, λ = 975Å
1  1 1  5R 6.63 ×10−34 × 3 ×108
∴ = R 2 − 2  = –––––(1) E= J
λ  2 3  36 975 ×10−10
Transition from n1 = 4 to n2 = 3 6.63 × 10 −34 × 3 × 108
E= eV = 12.75eV
1  1 1  7R 975 × 10 −10 × 1.6 × 10 −19
∴ = R 2 – 2  = –––––(2)
λ'  3 4  144 After absorbing a photon of energy 12.75eV, the
Dividing equation (1) by (2), we get electron will reach to third excited state of energy 0.85
λ ' 5R / 36 20 eV.
= = Since, energy difference corresponding to n = 1 and n =
λ 7R /144 7
4 is 12.75 eV.
20
λ' = λ n ( n − 1)
7 ∴ Number of spectral lines emitted =
2
49. Given the value of Rydberg constant is 107 m-1,
the wave number of the last line of the Balmer 4 ( 4 − 1)
= =6
series in hydrogen spectrum will be: 2
Physics 587 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b) : Infrared radiation found in Paschen, Brackett
& Fund series & it is obtain when "e–" transition is from
high energy level to minimum 3rd energy level.
n1 = 1, n2 = 2,3,4 ---- ultraviolet
n1 = 2, n2 = 3,4,5 ---- Visible
n1 = 3, n2 = 4,5 ---- Infrared
n1 = 4, n2 = 5,6 ---- Infrared
51. Ratio of longest wavelengths corresponding to n1 = 5, n2 = 6,7 ---- Infrared
Lyman and Balmer series in hydrogen 53. Electron in hydrogen atom first jumps from
spectrum is: third excited state to second excited state and
neF[^espeve kesâ mheskeäš^ce ceW ueeFceve leLee yeecej ßesCeer keâer then from second excited to the first excited
meJee&efOekeâ uecyeer lejbieowOÙe& keâe Devegheele neslee nw- state. The ratio of the wavelengths λ1 : λ2
emitted in the two cases:
9 5 efkeâmeer neF[^espeve hejceeCeg ceW Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve, henues le=leerÙe
(a) (b)
31 27 Gòesefpele DeJemLee mes efÉleerÙe Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW, Deesj
(c)
3
(d)
7 efheâj efÉleerÙe Gòesefpele DeJemLee ceW ØeLece Gòesefpele DeJemLee
23 29 ceW meb›eâceCe keâjlee nw~ Fve oes oMeeDeeW ceW Glmeefpe&le
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 lejbieowOÙe& keâe Devegheele λ1 : λ2 nesiee:
Ans. (b) : The transition equation for lyman series is (a) 27/5 (b) 20/7
given (c) 7/5 (d) 27/20
1 1 1  AIPMT (Screening)-2012
= R 2 − 2 
λ 1 n  Ans. (b) : As per spectral lines,
For largest wave length, n = 2 1  1 1 
Wave length = Rz 2  2 − 2 
1 1 1  λ n
 1 n 2 
∴ = R 2 − 2 
λ Bmax 1 2  for, λ1, n1 = 3 & n2 = 4
The transition equation for Balmer series is given, 1  1 1  7Rz 2
1 1 1  ∴ = Rz 2  2 − 2  =
= R 2 − 2  λ1  3 4  144
λ 2 n  for λ2, n1= 2 & n2 = 3
For largest wave length, n = 3
1  1 1  5Rz 2
1  1 1 ∴ = Rz 2  2 − 2  =
= R 2 − 2  λ2 2 3  36
λ Lmax 2 3 
Now,
 1 1 λ1 144 5Rz 2
−
λ L max  22 32  = ×
Therefore, = λ 2 7Rz 2 36
λ B max  1 1 
 2 − 2  20
1 2  =
7
5
= 36 54. An electron of stationary hydrogen atom passes
3 from the fifth energy level to the ground level.
4
The velocity that the atom acquired a result of
5 photon emission will be:/efkeâmeer DeÛeue neF[^espeve
=
27 hejceeCeg keâe Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve heeBÛeJeW Tpee&mlej mes vÙetvelece
52. The transition from the state n = 3 to n = 1 in a DeJemLee mlej keâes ieceve keâjlee nw~ lees heâesše@ve Glmepe&ve kesâ
hydrogen like atom results in ultraviolet heefjCeece mJe™he hejceeCeg Éeje Øeehle Jesie nesiee:
radiation. Infrared radiation will be obtained
in the transition from 25m 24m
(a) (b)
neF[^espeve kesâ meceeve efkeâmeer hejceeCeg ceW n = 3 DeJemLee mes 24hR 25hR
24hR 25hR
n = 1 DeJemLee ceW meb›eâceCe mes hejeyeQieveer efJeefkeâjCeeW keâe (c) (d)
25m 24m
Glmepe&ve neslee nw~ lees Fmeer hejceeCeg ceW DeJejòeâ efkeâjCeeW
(m is the mass of the electron, 'R' is
keâe Glmepe&ve nesiee, Ùeefo meb›eâceCe nes:- Rydberg constant and h is Planck's
(a) 4 → 2 (b) 4 → 3 constant/peneB h hueebkeâ efveÙeleebkeâ , 'R' efj[yeie&
(c) 2 → 1 (d) 3 → 2 efveÙeleebkeâ nw Deewj m Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe õJÙeceeve nw)
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Physics 588 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): As we know, as per spectral lens, neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer DeeÅe DeJemLee ceW Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer
Wavelength, DeeÙeveve Tpee& 13.6 eV nesleer nw~ 6 lejbie owOÙe& keâer lejbieeW
1  1 1  keâer efJeefkeâjCeeW kesâ Glmepe&ve kesâ efueÙes hejceeCegDeeW keâes
= R 2 − 2  Thejer Tpee& mlejeW lekeâ Gòesefpele efkeâÙee peelee nw~
λ  n1 n 2 
Glmeefpe&le efJeefkeâjCe keâe DeefOekeâlece lejbie owOÙe& FveceW mes
∴ n1= 1 & n2 = 5 efkeâme efmLeefle heefjJele&ve mes mecyeefvOele nesiee~
1  1 1  24 (a) n = 4 to n = 3 states
⇒ = R 2 − 2  = R
λ  1 5  25 (b) n = 3 to n = 2 states
(c) n = 3 to n = 1 states
hc  24 
Now, photon energy, E = =   hcR (d) n = 2 to n = 1 states
λ  25  AIMPT-2009
As atom of mass 'm' acquired a velocity as a result of Ans. (a) : Number of spectral lines due to transition of
photoemission. So, using momentum conservation, n ( n -1)
momentum of photon = momentum of atom = p. 'e' from nth orbit to lower orbit is N =
2
E  24 
∴ p = =   hR n ( n -1)
c  25  Number of spectral lines N =
2
P 24hR n ( n -1)
Velocity of atom, v = =
m 25m =6
2
55. The wavelength of the first line of Lyman series 2
n – n – 12 = 0
for hydrogen atom is equal to that of the (n –4) (n +3) = 0
second line of Balmer series for a hydrogen like n=4
ion. The atomic number Z of hydrogen like ion n = –3 (not possible)
is :/neF[^espeve hejceeCeg keâer ueeFceve ßesCeer keâer ØeLece Now, as first line of series has maximum wavelength
ueeFve keâer lejbieowOÙe&, efkeâmeer neF[^espeve kesâ meceeve DeeÙeve therefore 'e' jump from fourth orbit to third orbit.
keâer yeecej ßesCeer keâer efÉleerÙe ueeFve kesâ yejeyej nw, leye 57. When an electron do transition from n = 4 to n
neF[^espeve kesâ meceeve DeeÙeve keâer hejceeCeg mebKÙee Z nesieer: = 2, then emitted line in spectrum will be :
peye Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve n = 4 mes n = 2 ceW meb›eâceCe keâjlee nw
(a) 2 (b) 3
(c) 4 (d) 1
lees Glmeefpe&le mheskeäš^ce ceW jsKee nesieer –
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 (a) First line of Lyman series
ueeFceve ßesCeer keâer henueer jsKee
Ans. (a) : The wavelength of the first line of Lyman
series for hydrogen atom is (b) Second line of Balmer series
yeecej ßesCeer keâer otmejer jsKee
1 1 1 
=R  2 - 2 (c) First line of Paschen series
λ 1 2  hee§eve ßesCeer keâer ØeLece jsKee
The wavelength of the second line of Balmer series for (d) Second line of Paschen series
hydrogen like ion is
hee§eve ßesCeer keâer efÉleerÙe jsKee
1 2 1 1 AIPMT-2000
= Z R 2 - 2 
λ' 2 4  Ans. (b)
According to question λ = λ' (i) When an electron transit from n = 4 to n = 2 then
1 1  1 1 emitted line in spectrum will be second line of
R  2 - 2  = Z2 R  2 - 2  Balmer series.
1 2  2 4  (ii) Balmer series corresponds to the transition n2 → 2
3 3Z 2 (iii) First line corresponds to transition 3 → 2
or =
4 16 (iv) Second line corresponds to transition 4 → 2
Z2 = 4 58. Which source is associated with a line emission
Z=2 spectrum ?
keâewve-mee Œeesle ueeFve-Glmepe&ve mheskeäš^ce mes mebyeæ nw?
56. The ionization energy of the electron in the
(a) Electric fire/efJeÅegle pJeeuee
hydrogen atom in its grounds state is 13.6 eV.
The atoms are excited to higher energy levels to (b) Neon street sign/efveÙeesve mš^erš efÛevn
emit radiations of 6 wavelengths. Maximum (c) Red traffic light/š^wefheâkeâ keâer ueeue yeòeer
wavelength of emitted radiation corresponds to (d) Sun/metÙe&
the transition between :
AIPMT-1993
Physics 589 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): (i) Neon street sign is associated with a line 16 16 16 16
(a) (b) (c) (d)
emission spectrum due to excited electrons in Neon 4R 5R 3R 2R
atoms transitioning to lower energy states. AIPMT-1995
(ii) Line emission spectrum refers to pattern of dark & Ans. (d) : Electron makes a transition from orbit n = 4
coloured lines observed when an atoms or molecules is to orbit n = 2 of a hydrogen atom.
excited.
1  1 1 
59. Energy levels A, B and C of a certain atom Now, Wave Number = = R  2 − 2 
corresponding to increasing values of energy i.e., λ n
 1 n 2 

EA < EB < Ec. If λ1, λ2 and λ3 are wavelengths of 1  1 1  3R

radiations corresponding to transitions C to B, B =R 2 − 2=
λ  2 4  16
to A and C to A respectively, which of the
following relations is correct? 16
λ= s
Skeâ hejceeCeg efJeMes<e kesâ Tpee& mlej A, B Deewj C Tpee& kesâ 3R
yeÌ{les ngS ceeveeW ceW Fme Øekeâej mes nQ efkeâ EA < EB < Ec nw~ 61. The figure indicates the energy level diagram
Ùeefo C mes B, B mes A Deewj C mes A Tpee& mlej ceW of an atom and the origin of six spectral lines in
meb›eâceCe neslee nes, lees mecyeæ Glmeefpe&le efJeefkeâjCeeW kesâ emission (e.g., line no. 5 arises from the
transition from level B to A).
›eâceevegmeej lejbieowIÙeeX λ1, λ2 Deewj λ3 ceW mecyevOe nesiee: efÛe$e Skeâ hejceeCeg kesâ Tpee&-mlej DeejsKe Deewj Glmeefpe&le
λλ efJeefkeâjCe mes Øeehle Ú: mheskeäš^ce jsKeeDeeW keâes efveefo&° keâjlee
(a) λ3 = λ1 + λ2 (b) λ 3 = 1 2
λ1 + λ 2 nw (pewmes-mlej B mes A ceW meb›eâceCe hej jsKee mebKÙee 5
(c) λ1 + λ2 + λ3 = 0 (d) λ 32 = λ12 + λ 22 Øeehle neslee nw)
AIPMT-2005, 1990
Ans. (b) :

Which of the following spectral lines will occur

in the absorption spectrum?
oer ieF& mheskeäš^ce jsKeeDeeW ceW mes keâewve-meer jsKeeSB
λ1 = Wavelength of radiations corresponding to DeJeMees<eCe mheskeäš^ce ceW neWieer?
transition C to B
(a) 4, 5, 6 (b) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
λ2 = Wavelength of radiations corresponding to (c) 1, 2, 3 (d) 1, 4, 6
transition B to A
AIPMT-1995
λ3 = Wavelength of radiations corresponding to
transition C to A Ans. (c) : Absorption spectrum:- Any spectral line
From above fig: which transition from higher excited state to lower
excited state and lower excited state must be ground
E3 = E1 + E2
state and occur in the absorption spectrum.
hν3 = hν1 + hν2
Form the figure the lines will occur 1,2,3.
ν3 = ν1 + ν2
62. Hydrogen atoms are excited from ground state
c c c
= + of the principle quantum number 4. Then the
λ 3 λ1 λ 2 number of spectral lines observed will be
1 1 1 neF[^espeve hejceeCeg efvecve mlej mes cegKÙe keäJeeCšce mebKÙee
= +
λ 3 λ1 λ 2 4 lekeâ Gòesefpele nesles nQ, lees efkeâleveer mheskeäš^ce ueeFve
1 λ 2 + λ1 efoKeeÙeer oWieer?
=
λ3 λ1λ 2 (a) 3 (b) 6 (c) 5
(d) 2
AIPMT-1993
λλ
λ3 = 1 2 Ans. (b): Number of spectral lines can be given by eqn-
λ 2 + λ1
n(n − 1)
N=
60. An electron makes a transition from orbit n = 4 2
to the orbit n = 2 of a hydrogen atom. What is Where, N = Total no of spectral lines
the wavelength of the emitted radiations? n = Principal quantum no
(R = Rydberg's constatn)
∵ Given principal quantum no = 4
Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâ#ee n = 4 mes n = 2 ceW meb›eâceCe keâjlee
nw, lees Glmeefpe&le efJeefkeâjCe keâer lejbieowIÙe& nesieer: (R = ⇒ No of spectral lines, N = 4(4 − 1) = 12 = 6
2 2
efj[yeie& efveÙeleebkeâ)
Physics 590 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) n would not be integral/ n hetCeeËkeâ veneR nesiee~
26.5 NCERT Exemplar Problems (b) Bohr-quantisation applies only to electron/yeesj
63. Taking the Bohr radius as a0 = 53 pm, the
keäJeeCšepesbMeve kesâJeue Fueskeäš^e@veeW kesâ efueS ØeÙegkeäle neslee nw~
radius of Li++ ion in its ground state, on the (c) the frame in which the electron is at rest is not
basis of Bohr's model, will be about/yeesj ef$epÙee inertial/Jen efveoxMe øesâce efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve efJejece ceW
keâes a0 = 53 pm, uesles ngS, yeesj cee@[ue kesâ DeeOeej hej jnlee nw peÌ[lJeerÙe veneR nw~
Li++ DeeÙeve keâer, Fmekesâ efvecvelece DeJemLee ceW, ef$epÙee (d) the motion of the proton would not be in
circular orbits, even approximately/Øeesše@ve keâer
nesieer ueieYeie–
ieefle meefvvekeâš ™he mes Yeer Je=òeerÙe keâ#ee ceW veneR nesieer~
(a) 53 pm (b) 27 pm
(c) 18 pm (d) 13 pm Ans. (c): In H-atom, when e- moves around the nucleus
i.e proton, the electrostatic force provide some
Ans. (c) : The radius of the nth orbit of the hydrogen
centripetal force then-
Atom is given by
mv 2
n2h2 Fcentripetal =
rn = 2 r
4π mZe 2
Due to this centripetal force, when proton moving
n2  h2  around the e- which is at rest would not be inertial
rn = a 0 Q a 0 = 2 2 = 53pm 
z  4π me  because there is an acceleration. Therefore, given
For Li++ atom z = 3 expression is not correct.
n = 1 (for ground state) 65. This simple Bohr model cannot be directly
a0 = Bohr radius. applied to calculate the energy levels of an
1 atom with many electrons. This is because/Skeâ
r1 = 53 ×
3 meeceevÙe yeesj cee@[ue keâF& Fueskeäš^e@veeW Jeeues Skeâ hejceeCeg
r1 = 17.66 kesâ Tpee& mlejeW keâer ieCevee kesâ efueS ØelÙe#ele: ØeÙegkeäle veneR
efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee~ Ssmee FmeefueS nw keäÙeeWefkeâ–
r1 ≈ 18pm.
(a) of the electrons no being subject to a central
64. The binding energy of a H-atom, considering force/Fueskeäš^e@ve keWâõerÙe yeue kesâ DeeOeerve veneR nQ~
an electron moving around a fixed nuclei (b) of the electrons colliding with each
(proton), is/Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes, Skeâ efmLej veeefYekeâ other/Fueskeäš^e@ve Skeâ-otmejs mes škeâjeles jnles nQ~
(Øeesše@ve) kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj heefj›eâceCe keâjlee ngDee ceeveles (c) of screening effects/m›eâerve ØeYeeJe yeerÛe ceW Deeles nQ~
ngS, Skeâ neF[^espeve-hejceeCeg keâer yevOeve Tpee& nw– (d) the force between the nucleus and an electron
me4 will no longer be given by Coulomb's
B=– (m = electron mass/Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe law./veeefYekeâ leLee Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ yeerÛe yeue, Deye ketâuee@ce
8n 2 ε02h 2
õJÙeceeve) kesâ efveÙece mes efveOee&efjle veneR nesles~
If one decides to work in a frame of reference Ans. (a): The simple Bohr model cannot be directly
where the electron is at rest, the proton would applied to calculate the energy levels of multielectron
be moving around it. By similar arguments, the system because if electronic repulsions between the
electrons the net force will not be subject to the central
Me4
binding energy would be B = – 2 2 2 (M = force. Therefore, the model is only applicable to single
8n ε0h electron atoms. If applied in multiple electron atoms,
proton mass) This last expression is not correct another factor, repulsion due to the electrons need to be
because/Ùeefo keâesF& JÙeefkeäle Skeâ Ssmes efveoxMe øesâce keâes accounted for. This proves that the simple Bohr's model
GheÙeesie ceW ueeS efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve efJejece ceW nes lees can not be used to calculate the energy level of atoms
with numerous electrons.
Øeesše@ve Fmekesâ ÛeejeW Deesj heefj›eâcee keâjsiee~ meceleguÙe lekeâeX
66. For the ground state, the electron in the H-
mes Deye yevOeve Tpee& nesieer~ Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâes, Skeâ
atom has an angular momentum = – h ,
efmLej veeefYekeâ (Øeesše@ve) kesâ ÛeejeW Deesj heefj›eâceCe keâjlee
according to the simple Bohr model. Angular
ngDee ceeveles ngS, Skeâ neF[^espeve-hejceeCeg keâer yevOeve momentum is a vector and hence there will be
Tpee& nw– infinitely many orbits with the vector pointing
Me4 in all possible directions. In actuality this is not
B=– (M = Øeesše@ve õJÙeceeve) true,/meeceevÙe yeesj cee@[ue kesâ Devegmeej, efvecvelece
8n 2 ε02h 2
Ùen Deefvlece JÙebpekeâ mener veneR nw keäÙeeWefkeâ DeJemLee ceW, neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe keâesCeerÙe

Physics 591 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
mebJesie – h kesâ leguÙe nw~ keâesCeerÙe mebJesie Skeâ meefoMe nw 68. Two H atoms in the ground state collide
Dele: keâ#eeDeeW keâer mebKÙee Devevle nesieer, efpeveceW keâesCeerÙe inelastically. The maximum amount by which
their combined kinetic energy is reduced is/oes
mebJesie meefoMe ØelÙeskeâ mecYeJe efoMee keâer Deesj Fbefiele keâj
H– hejceeCegDeeW keâe Fvekesâ efvecvelece DeJemLee ceW
jne nesiee~ JeemleJe ceW Ùen mener veneR nw–
DeØelÙeemLe mebIeó neslee nw~ oesveeW keâer mebÙegkeäle ieeflepe
(a) because Bohr model gives incorrect values of
angular momentum/keäÙeeWefkeâ yeesj cee@[ue keâesCeerÙe
Tpee& ceW nesves Jeeueer DeefOekeâlece keâceer nw–
(a) 10.2 e V (b) 20.4 e V
mebJesie keâe ieuele ceeve oslee nw~
(c) 13.6 e V (d) 27.2 e V
(b) because only one of these would have a
Ans. (a) : First we calculate the total energy of the two
minimum energy/keäÙeeWefkeâ FveceW mes kesâJeue Skeâ keâer
H-atoms in the ground state.
Tpee& vÙetvelece nesieer~ The energy of the nth orbit of the hydrogen atom–
(c) angular momentum must be in the direction
z2
of spin of electron/keâesCeerÙe mebJesie Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ E n = –13.6 2 eV
n
Ûe›eâCe keâer efoMee ceW nesvee ÛeeefnS~ For ground state of H-atom, n = 1, z = 1
(d) because electrons go around only in
E1 = –13.6eV
horizontal orbits/keâesCeerÙe Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâJeue #eweflepe
keâ#eeDeeW ceW Ûekeäkeâj ueieeles nQ~ So, total energy of two H-atom in ground state is–
nd E1 = 2 (–13.6) = –27.2eV
Ans. (a) : According to Bohr's 2 postulate– ''The
i.e. the total energy of two hydrogen atoms after
orbital radius of the path of revolving electron is such
inelastic collision is–
that integral of angular momentum over the complete
–13.6
path is a some multiple of Planck's constant''. E2 = – 13.6
nh n2
∫ Pθdθ = 2π E2 = – 3.4 – 13.6 = –17eV
So, Loss in Kinetic energy due to inelastic collision is–
This assumption is related with stability of the orbit.
E2 – E1 = –17 + 27.2
Hence, Bohr's model does not give the correct value of
angular momentum. = 10.2eV

67. O2 molecule consists of two oxygen atoms. In 69. A set of atoms in an excited state decays/Gòesefpele
the molecule, nuclear force between the nuclei DeJemLee ceW hejceeCegDeeW keâe Skeâ mecetn efJeIeefšle neslee nw–
of the two atoms/ O2 DeCeg ceW Dee@keämeerpeve kesâ oes (a) in general to any of the states with lower
hejceeCeg nesles nQ~ DeCeg ceW, oes hejceeCeg-veeefYekeâeW kesâ ceOÙe energy/meeceevÙele: efvecvelej Tpee& keâer efkeâmeer Yeer DeJemLee
veeefYekeâerÙe yeue– lekeâ
(a) is not important because nuclear forces are (b) into a lower state only when excited by an
short-ranged/cenòJehetCe& veneR nw keäÙeeWefkeâ veeefYekeâerÙe external electric field/ Skeâ efvecvelej DeJemLee lekeâ
yeueeW keâe heefjmej vÙetve neslee nw~ kesâJeue leYeer peye Skeâ yeendÙe efJeÅegle #es$e Éeje Gòesefpele
(b) is as important as electrostatic force for efkeâÙee ieÙee nes~
binding the two atoms/oes hejceeCegDeeW keâes yeeBOeves kesâ (c) all together simultaneously into a lower
efueS DeeJeMÙekeâ efmLej JewÅegle yeueeW kesâ efpelevee ner state/efpeveceW meYeer Skeâ meeLe Skeâ efvecvelej DeJemLee ceW
cenòJehetCe& nQ~ Deeles nQ~
(c) cancels the repulsive electrostatic force (d) to emit photons only when they collide/lees
between the nuclei/veeefYekeâeW kesâ ceOÙe Øeeflekeâ<e&Ceelcekeâ Fvemes heâesše@ve kesâJeue leYeer Glmeefpe&le nesles nQ peye GveceW
efmLej JewÅegle yeueeW keâes efvejmle keâj osles nQ~ mebIešdš neslee nw~
(d) is not important because oxygen nucleus has Ans. (a) : Atoms are stable in ground state. When the e-
equal number of neutrons and protons/cenòJehetCe& gained energy, they get excited and jump to another
veneR nw keäÙeeWefkeâ Dee@keämeerpeve veeefYekeâ ceW vÙetš^e@veeW Deewj energy level.
Øeesše@veeW keâer mebKÙee yejeyej nesleer nw~ • When the e- loose energy, they get back to or jump to
lower energy state or ground state.
Ans. (a): The nuclear force are short range force. It's
range about 1 femtometer (10 meter). Hence, in the This shows that, a set of atoms in an excited state
-15

molecule, nuclear force between the nuclei of the atoms decays in general in any of the state. Which is more
is not important. stable than excited state.

Physics 592 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27.
Nuclei
A
3. A nucleus represented by the symbol Z
X has:-
27.1 Introduction A
Z
X ôeje veeefYekeâ ceW neWies:-
1. α-particle consists of : (a) Z protons and A –Z neutrons
α-keâCe ceW nesles nw: Z Øeesše@ve Deewj A –Z vÙetš^e@ve
(b) Z protons and A neutrons
(a) 2 electrons, 2 protons and 2 neutrons
Z Øeesše@ve Deewj A vÙetš^e@ve
2 Fueskeäš^e@ve, 2 Øeesše@ve Deewj 2 vÙetš^e@ve
(c) A protons and Z –A neutrons
(b) 2 electrons and 4 protons only A Øeesše@ve Deewj Z –A vÙetš^e@ve
kesâJeue 2 Fueskeäš^e@ve Deewj 4 Øeesše@ve (d) Z neutrons and A –Z protons
(c) 2 protons only/kesâJeue 2 Øeesše@ve Z vÙetš^e@ve Deewj Z –A Øeesše@ve
(d) 2 protons and 2 neutrons only AIPMT-2004
kesâJeue 2 Øeesše@ve Deewj 2 vÙetš^e@ve
Ans. (a) : In A
, number of protons = Z X
Z
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
and number of neutrons, N = A – Z
Ans. (d) : Alpha particles consist of 2 protons and 2 Where A is the total number of protons and neutron
neutrons only bound together into a particle identical to
i.e., A = Z + N
a 4He2. Charge on alpha particle is +2e and mass
number is 4. 4. The mass number of a nucleus is
2. The nuclei of which one of the following pairs Skeâ veeefYekeâ keâer õJÙeceeve mebKÙee nw:
of nuclei are isotones : (a) always less than its atomic number
efvecveefueefKele veeefYekeâ ÙegiceeW ceW mes efkeâme kesâ oesveeW Fmekeâer hejceeCeg mebKÙee mes ncesMee keâce
veeefYekeâ mece vÙetš^eveer nw :- (b) always more than its atomic number
(a) 34Se
74
, 31Ga71 , 38Sr86 (b) 38Sr
Fmekeâer hejceeCeg mebKÙee mes ncesMee DeefOekeâ
84
92 92 32 (c) 40
sometimes equal to its atomic number
(c) 42Mo , 40Zr 20Ca , 16S (d)
AIPMT-2005 keâYeer-keâYeer Fmeer hejceeCeg mebKÙee kesâ yejeyej
Ans. (a) : The isotones have same number of neutrons. (d) sometimes less than and sometimes more than
Number of neutrons = Mass number – Number of its atomic number
Proton Fmekeâer hejceeCeg mebKÙee mes keâYeer keâce Deewj keâYeer DeefOekeâ
Going by the option - AIPMT-2003
Option (a) Ans. (c): Difference between the Mass Number (A) and
74
has 74 - 34 = 40 neutrons the Atomic Number (Z) gives the Number of neutrons
34 Se
71
(N) in a given Nucleus : N = A – Z
31 Ga has 71 - 31= 40 neutrons Hence, the mass number of a nucleus is sometimes
Option (b) equal to its atomic number and other than Hydrogen,
38 Sr 84
has 84-38 = 46 neutrons mass number will be more than its atomic number.
Sr 86 has 86 - 38 = 48 neutrons 5. X(n, α) 37 Li, , then X will be :-
38

Option (c) X(n, α) 37 Li ØeoefMe&le nw, lees X nesiee-

92
42 Mo has 92-42 = 50 neutrons (a) 10
5 B (b) 9
4 B
92
40 Zr has 92- 40 = 52 neutrons (c) 11
4 Be (d) 4
2 He
Option (d) AIPMT-2001
40
20 Ca has 40-20 = 20 neutrons Ans. (a) : Given Nuclear transformation—
S32 has 32-16 = 16 neutrons A 1 4 7
16 x + n → He + Li
Hence, option (a) correct answer. z 0 2 3

Physics 593 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
On applying conservation of mass number & charge We know that,
Number- N1W1 + N 2 W2
Average atomic weight of Boron =
A+1 = 4+7 (mass number conservation) N1 + N 2
Z + 0 = 2 + 3 (charge number conservations)
N1 × 10 + N 2 × 11
⇒ A =10 & Z=5 ⇒ 10.81 =
N1 + N 2
10
∴ Element will be B 10.81(N1+N2) = 10 N1+11N2
5 10.81N1+10.81N2=10N1+11N2
6. The constituents of atomic nuclei are believed 10.81N1–10N1=11N2–10.81N2
to be/hejceeCeg veeefYekeâ kesâ Ieškeâ ceeves peeles nQ 0.81N1=0.19N2
(a) neutrons and protons/vÙetše@ve Deewj Øeesše@ve N1 0.19
=
(b) protons only/kesâJeue Øeesše@ve N 2 0.81
(c) electrons and protons/Fueskeäš^e@ve Deewj Øeesše@ve N1 19
=
(d) electrons, protons and neutrons /Fueskeäš^e@ve, N 2 81
Øeesše@ve Deewj vÙetš^e@ve Alternate Solution :-
AIPMT-1991 Let the percentage of 5B10 = x
Ans. (a) : and percentage of 5B11 = (100-x)
• The main components of the atomic nucleus are Average atomic coefficient =10.81
protons and neutrons and the electron revolves around 10x + 11(100 − x )
the nucleus. ⇒10.81 =
100
• Atomic nuclei consist of electrically positive protons 10.81×100 = 10x +1100 -11x
and electrically neutral neutrons. These are held
1081 = 10x -11x+1100
together by the strongest known fundamental force
x = 19
called the strong force.
% of 5B11 = 100-19 = 81
7. Solar energy is due to Ratio is = 19 : 81
meewj Tpee& keâe keâejCe nw: 9. For nuclear reaction/veeefYekeâerÙe DeefYeef›eâÙee kesâ efueS
(a) fusion reaction/mebueÙeve DeefYeef›eâÙee
92U
235
+ 0n1 → 56Ba144 + ............... + 30n1
(b) fission reaction/efJeKeb[ve DeefYeef›eâÙee (a) 26Kr89 (b) 36Kr89
(c) combustion reaction/onve DeefYeef›eâÙee (c) 26Sr 90
(d) 38Sr89
(d) chemical reaction/jemeeÙeefvekeâ DeefYeef›eâÙee AIPMT-1998
AIPMT-1992 Ans. (b) : In a nuclear reaction, atomic mass and charge
Ans. (a) : Solar energy is due to fusion reaction number remain conserved for a nuclear reaction to be
completed, the mass number and charge number on
• Solar energy is produced by the sun itself via a both sides should be same.
process of nuclear fusion where the fusion occurs in the
92U
235
+ 0n1 → 56Ba144 + ............... + 30n1
core of the sun.
Total atomic number of LHS = 92+ 0
Due to extreme temperature and pressure in the sun, the
Total atomic number of RHS = 56 +Z +0
nuclei of hydrogen atoms fuse.
92+0= 56+Z+0
Z = 92-56
27.2 Atomic Masses and Composition Z = 36
of Nucleus Total mass number of LHS = Total mass number of
RHS
8. Boron has two isotopes 5B10 and 5B11. If atomic 235 + 1 = 144 + A + 3
weight of Boron is 10.81 then ratio of 5B10 to A = 89
5B
11
in nature will be/yeesjesve kesâ oes mecemLeeefvekeâ Therefore,
5 B 10
Je 5B
11
nw Ùeefo yeesjesve keâe hejceeCeg Yeej 10.81 nw 89
→36 Kr 89
36 X
lees Øeke=âefle ceW 5B Je 5B keâe Devegheele nesiee–
10 11
10. In the nucleus of 11Na23, the number of protons,
(a) 15 : 16 (b) 19 : 81 neutrons and electrons are
(c) 81 : 19 (d) 20 : 53 11Na
23
kesâ veeefYekeâ ceW efkeâleves Øeesše@ve, vÙetš^ev@ e leLee
AIPMT-1998 Fueskeäš^e@ve nQ?
Ans. (b) : Given, from (a) 11, 12, 0 (b) 23, 12, 11
average atomic weight of Boron =10.81 (c) 12, 11, 0 (d) 23, 11, 12
W1 = 10, W2 = 11 AIPMT-1991
Physics 594 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): A chemical element is always represented R 1  125 
1/ 3

using its symbol as follows, ZX A . = 

R 2  64 
Where X is the symbol for the element, A is its mass 3× 1
R1  5  3
number and Z is the atomic number. = 
• The mass number A is the sum of the number of R2  4 
neutrons and protons present in the nucleus of the atom. R1: R2 = 5:4
• The atomic number Z is the number of protons present 13. If radius of the 27
Al nucleus is taken to be RAl
13
in the nucleus of the atom 125
then the radius of Te nucleus is nearly:
• For 11 Na 23 53

23 = Atomic mass = no.of protons + no. of neutrons

Ùeefo Al kesâ veeefYekeâ keâes ef$epÙee RAl nes lees,
27
13
125
Te
53

11 = Atomic number = no. of protons veeefYekeâ keâer ef$epÙee nesieer ueieYeie:

No. of neutrons = 23-11=12 5 3
(a) R Al (b) R Al
No. of Protons = 11 3 5
No. of electrons = 0 1/ 3 1/ 3
 13   53 
Therefore, the number of protons, neutrons and (c)   R Al (d)   R Al
electrons are 11, 12, 0  53   13 
11. The nuclei 6C13 and 7N14 can be described as AIPMT-03.05.2015
Ans. (a) : Radius of the nucleus is given by
6C leLee 7N keâes keânWies-
13 14

R = R o A1 3 where A is the mass number

(a) isotones/mecevÙetš^e@efvekeâ
(b) isobars/meceoeyeer R ∝ A1 3
13 13
(c) isotopes of carbon/keâeye&ve kesâ mecemLeeefvekeâ R A   27  3
⇒ Al =  Al  =   =
(d) isotopes of nitrogen/veeFš^espeve kesâ mecemLeeefvekeâ R Te  A Te   125  5
AIPMT-1990 5
Ans. (a) : Number of neutrons for carbon = 13-6 = 7 R Te = R Al
3
Number of neutrons for nitrogen = 14-7 = 7
Both the nuclei have equal number of neutrons. 14. If the nuclear radius of 27Al is 3.6 Fermi, the
Hence, they are isotones. approximate nuclear radius of 64Cu in Fermi is:
Ùeefo 27Al keâer veeefYekeâerÙe ef$epÙee 3.6 heâceea nes lees 64Cu
keâer ueieYeie veeefYekeâerÙe ef$epÙee nesieer (heâceea ceW) :
27.3 Size of the Nucleus
(a) 4.8 (b) 3.6
12. A nucleus of mass number 189 splits into two (c) 2.4 (d) 1.2
nuclei having mass number 125 and 64. The AIPMT (Screening)-2012
ratio of radius of two daughter nuclei Ans. (a) : Nuclear radius, R = R0A1/3
respectively is Where, R0 = constant
189 õJÙeceeve mebKÙee Jeeuee Skeâ veeefYekeâ, 125 SJeb 64 A = mass number.
õJÙeceeve mebKÙeeDeeW Jeeues oes veeefYekeâeW ceW štšlee nw~ oesveeW R Al ( 27 ) 3 3
1

veS veeefYekeâeW keâer ›eâceMe: ef$epÙeeDeeW keâe Devegheele nw: ∴ = =

R Cu ( 64 ) 13 4
(a) 24 : 16 (b) 1 : 1
(c) 4 : 5 (d) 5 : 4 4
or RCu = RAl
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022 3
Ans. (d) : For this nuclear radii are given as 4
= × 3.6 Fermi
R = R0(A)1/3...........(1) 3
Where, R = nuclear radii = 4.8 Fermi
A = Atomic mass number, 15. Two nuclei have their mass numbers in the
R0 = 1.3 Fm which is constant for every nuclei ratio of 1 : 3. The ratio of their nuclear
Atomic mass number of nuclei (A1) = 125 densities would be –
Atomic mass number of nuclei (A2) = 64 oes kesâvõkeâeW keâer õJÙeeceeve mebKÙeeDeeW keâe Devegheele 1 : 3
The ratio of the radius of two nuclei, nw~ GvekeâeW kesâvõ keâer IevelJeeW keâe Devegheele nesiee :-
R 1 R 0 (125 )
1/ 3
(a) (3)1/3 : 1 (b) 1 : 1
=
R 2 R 0 ( 64 )1/ 3 (c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
AIPMT-2008
Physics 595 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Given: nuclei mass no. ratio = 1 : 3 Ans. (d): Given Radius of Germanium rGe = 2 rBe, Mass
mass m mA of Beryllium ABe = 9
We know density d = = = and radius of nucleus is given by r = r0 A1/3
Volume V 4 πR 3
3 where A = mass number
1/ 3
 Where  r A 
mass of nucleus = m.A  A = mass no  so Ge =  Ge 
 m = mass of neutron &  rBe  A Be 
& R = R 0 A1/ 3  
 proton  1/ 3
2rBe  A Ge 
  A
=  ⇒ (2)3 = Ge
m.A mA rBe  9  9
So d = =
4
π ( R 0 A1/ 3 )
3 4
πR 30 A ⇒ AGe = 9×8 = 72
3 3 18. The mass number of He is 4 and that of
m sulphur is 32. The radius of sulphur nucleus is
⇒ d= = constant
4 3 larger than that of helium by the factor of
πR 0
3 He leLee S keâer õJÙeceeve mebKÙee ›eâceMe: 4 leLee 32 nw~ S
So density d of nucleus is independent of mass no. leLee He kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer ef$epÙee keâe Devegheele nw:
27
16. If the nucleus 13 Al has a nuclear radius of (a) 4 (b) 2
125
about 3.6 fm. The 52 Te would have its radius (c) 8 (d) 8
approximately as:- AIPMT-1995
Ùeefo 1327 Al kesâ vÙegeqkeäueÙeme keâer vÙetkeäueerÙe ef$epÙee ueieYeie Ans. (b) : We know that Interrelationship between
3.6 fm nes lees 125 52 Te keâer ef$epÙee ueieYeie nesieer:-
atomic radius and mass number.
(a) 4.8 fm (b) 6.0 fm R∝A1/3
(c) 9.6 fm (d) 12.0 fm R = R0A1/3
AIPMT-2007 Where, R = radius of an atom
A = mass number of an atom
Ans. (b) : Given nuclear radius of Al 13 = 3.6 fm 27

R0 = constant having value of (1.2 to 1.7)×10–15

i.e. R1 = 3.6 fm Thus, the radius of a nucleus varies as A1/3
A1 = 27 Given, mass number of Helium = 4
For Te ⇒ R 2 = ? mass number of sulphur = 32
A 2 = 125 R sulphur  As 1/ 3
=
Nuclear radius is given by, R = R 0 A1 3 R Helium  A He 
Where, R 0 = 1.2 × 10 −15 m  32 
1/ 3

=   =2
R 1 R 0 ( A1 )
13  4 
= The ratio of the radii of the nuclei 13Al27 and
R 2 R 0 ( A 2 )1 3 19.
125
52Te is approximately
3.6 ( 27 )
13
Al27
leLee 52Te125 keâer veeefYekeâ keâer ef$epÙeeDeeW keâe
⇒ = 13
R 2 (125 )1 3 Devegheele ueieYeie nw:
3.6 3 (a) 6 : 10 (b) 13 : 52
⇒ = (c) 40 : 177 (d) 14 : 73
R2 5
AIPMT-1990
5 × 3.6
⇒ R2 = = 6 fm Ans. (a) : Nuclear radius: Experimental results indicate
3 that volume of a nucleus is proportional to its mass
17. The radius of Germanium (Ge) nuclide is number.
measured to be twice the radius of 94 Be . The If R is the radius of the nucleus assumed to be spherical,
number of nucleons in Ge are:- then its volume
ceehe keâjves hej pecexefveÙece (Ge) veeefYekeâ keâer ef$epÙee 4 3
πr ∝ A
4 Be keâer ef$epÙee mes ogiegveer heeF& ieF&~ pecexefveÙece (Ge)
9
3
ceW vÙetefkeäueDee@veeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer:- Or R ∝ A1/3
(a) 73 (b) 74 R = R0 A1/3
(c) 75 (d) 72 Where R0 = empirical constant whose value is to be
–15
AIPMT-2006 found to be 1.2×10 m = 1.2 fm
Physics 596 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
The radius of the nucleus of an element is directly (a) 19.6 MeV (b) -2.4 MeV
proportional to the atomic mass. (c) 8.4 MeV (d) 17.3 MeV
R∝ (A)1/3 AIPMT-06.05.2014
R 1  A1 
1/ 3 Ans. (d) : Given-
= Binding energy per nucleon of 73 Li = 5.60 MeV
R 2  A 2 
1/ 3 Binding energy per nucleon of 42 He = 7.06 MeV
R A1  27  3
=  = So, Binding energy of 37 Li nucleus = 7×5.60 MeV
R Te  125  5
= 39.2 MeV
3 2 6
= × = Binding energy of 42 He nucleus = 4×7.06 MeV
5 2 10
= 28.24 MeV
The reaction is
27.4 Mass-Energy and Nuclear
Binding Energy
7
3 Li +11 H → 2 ( 4
2 He + Q)
(
∴ Q = 2 BE of 4
2 He ) − ( BE of 7
3 Li )
20. A nucleus with mass number 240 breaks into = 2×28.24 – 39.2
two fragments each of mass number 120. The
= 56.48 – 39.2
binding energy per nucleon of unfragmented
Q = 17.28 MeV
nuclei is 7.6 MeV while that of fragments is 8.5
MeV. The total gain in the Binding Energy in 22. How does the Binding Energy per nucleon vary
the process is with the increase in the number of nucleons?
Skeâ 240 õJÙeceeve mebKÙee keâe veeefYekeâ, ØelÙeskeâ vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve keâer mebKÙee ceW Je=efæ kesâ meeLe Øeefle
õJÙeceeve mebKÙee 120 kesâ oes KeC[eW ceW štšlee nw~ vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve yebOeve Tpee& kewâmes yeoueleer nw?
DeKeefv[le leLee Keefv[le veeefYekeâeW keâer yevOeve Tpee& Øeefle (a) Increases continuously with mass
number/õJÙeceeve mebKÙee kesâ meeLe ueieeleej yeÌ{lee nw~
vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve ›eâceMe: 7.6 cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš (MeV)
(b) Decrease continuously with mass
leLee 8.5 cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš (MeV) nw~ Øe›eâce ceW number/õJÙeceeve mebKÙee kesâ meeLe ueieeleej Iešlee nw~
kegâue Øeehle yevOeve Tpee& nesleer nw : (c) First decreases and then increases with
(a) 216 MeV/216 cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš increase in mass number/henues Iešlee nw Deewj efheâj
(b) 0.9 MeV/0.9 cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš õJÙeceeve mebKÙee Je=efæ kesâ meeLe yeÌ{lee nw~
(c) 9.4 MeV/ cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš (d) First increases and then decreases with
(d) 804 MeV/ cesieeFueskeäš^e@ve Jeesuš increase in mass number/õJÙeceeve mebKÙee ceW Je=efæ
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021 kesâ meeLe henues yeÌ{lee nw Deewj efheâj Iešlee nw~
Ans. (a) : Mass number of reactant = 240 NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Binding energy per Nucleon = 7.6 MeV Ans. (d) : The Binding Energy per nucleon first
Mass number of product = 120 increase up to iron (Fe) then decrease continuously as Z
increase number of nucleons in nuclei increase. Hence
Binding energy per nucleon of product = 8.5 MeV binding energy per nucleon first increase and then
X240 → Y120 + Z120 + Q decrease with increase of mass number
Here, Q is total gain in the binding energy
Total gain in Binding energy (BE) Fe
BE = (BE)product – (BE)reactants
= [120+120]×8.5–[240×7.6]
= 216 MeV
21. The Binding energy per nucleon of 7
Li and per nucleons
3
4
2 He nuclei are 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, 23. The binding energy per nucleon in deuterium
and helium nuclei are 1.1 MeV and 7.0 MeV,
respectively. In the nuclear reaction
respectively. When two deuterium nuclei fuse
7
3 Li + 1
1 H → 4
2 He + Q , the value of energy Q to form a helium nucleus the energy released in
released is. the fusion is/[dÙetefšefjÙece Deewj nerefueÙece kesâ veeefYekeâeW
7
3 Li leLee 42 He keâer Øeefle vÙetefkeäueDee@ve yebOeve Tpee&, keâer Øeefle vÙetefkeäueDeeve yebOeve Tpee& ›eâceMe: 1.1 MeV
›eâceMe: 5.60 MeV leLee 7.06 MeV nw lees, efvecveebefkeâle leLee 7.0 MeV nw~ peye oes [dÙetefšefjÙece veeefYekeâeW kesâ
veeefYekeâerÙe DeefYeef›eâÙee 73 Li + 11 H → 24 He + Q , ceW cegòeâ mebueÙeve mes nerefueÙece veeefYekeâ yevelee nw lees Fme mebueÙeve
Tpee& Q keâe ceeve nesiee:- ceW cegòeâ Tpee& nw –
Physics 597 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 23.6 MeV (b) 2.2 MeV Ans. (c): Given: Nucleus Z X A
(c) 28.0 MeV (d) 30.2 MeV
AIPMT (Mains)-2010 Mass = M (A, Z)
Mass of proton = MP
Ans. (a) : 1 H 2 +1 H 2 → 2 He 4 + ∆E
Mass of Neutron = Mn
The binding energy per nucleon of deuteron is = 1.1
Binding energy BE = ?
MeV
total binding energy of each deuteron = 2×1.1=2.2 MeV • Nuclear binding energy is the energy required to
The binding energy per nucleon of a helium nuclei spilt a nucleus of an atom in to its components part
= 7.0 MeV protons and neutrons collectively known as nucleons.
∴ Total binding energy of helium nucleus = 4×7= 28 • The binding energy of nuclei is always a positive
MeV number since all nuclei require net energy to separate
Hence energy released when two deuteron fuse to form them into individual protons and neutrons.
helium (∆E)= (28–2.2×2) • Nuclear binding energy accounts for a noticeable
= (28–4.4) = 23.6 MeV difference between the actual mass of an atoms
24. If M (A, Z), Mp and Mn denote the masses of nucleus and its expected mass based on the sum of
A
the nucleus z X , proton and neutron the masses of its non- bond components.
Binding Energy, B.E. = ∆mC2
respectively in units of u (1u = 931.5 MeV/C2) The quantity of mass disappearance ∆m is given by -
and BE represents its bonding energy in MeV,
then – ∆m = ZM p + NM n − M ( A, Z )
Where, M (A, Z) is the mass of the atom of mass
Ùeefo M (A, Z), Mp Deewj Mn ›eâceevegmeej ›eâvõkeâ A z X , number A and atomic number Z.
Øeesševe Deewj vÙetš^e@ve kesâ õJÙeceeve u Skeâkeâes ceW (1u = Hence Binding energy,
931.5 MeV/C2) JÙeòeâ keâjles neW Deewj BE DeeyevOeve BE =  ZM p + NM n − M ( A, Z )  C 2
Tpee& keâes MeV SkeâkeâeW ceW JÙeòeâ keâjs, lees nesiee :-
(a) M(A, Z) = ZMp + (A – Z) Mn – BE =  ZM p + ( A − Z ) M n − M ( A, Z )  C 2
(b) M (A, Z) = ZMp + (A – Z) Mn + BE/C2 Where N = A–Z = no of neutrons
(c) M(A, Z) = ZMp + (A – Z) Mn – BE/C2 26. The binding energy of deuteron is 2.2 MeV and
(d) M(A, Z) = ZMp + (A – Z) Mn + BE
that of 42 He is 28MeV. If two deuterons are
AIPMT-2008
Ans. (c) : Given: Mass of atom (Nucleus) = m (A, Z) fused to form one 42 He then the energy released
Mass of proton = MP is:-
Mass of Neutron = Mn [Ÿetšje@ve keâer DeeyevOeve Tpee& 2.2 MeV Deewj 42 He keâer
We Know Binding energy B.E = ∆m c2
28MeV nw~ Ùeefo oes [Ÿetšje@veeW kesâ mebueÙeve mes Skeâ Øeehle
BE = [ZMp + (A – Z)Mn – M (A, z)] C2
2 He nes lees efJecegòeâ ngF& Tpee& nesieer:-
4
BE
⇒ 2
= ZM p + (A − Z)M n − M ( A, Z )
C (a) 25.8 MeV (b) 23.6 MeV
BE (c) 19.2 MeV (d) 30.2 MeV
⇒ M ( A, Z ) = ZM p + (A − z)M n − 2
C AIPMT-2006
A
25. A nucleus Z X has mass represented by M(A,Z). Ans. (b) : Binding energy : Energy released due to
If Mp and Mn denote the mass of proton and formation of atom by constituent particle or energy
neutron respectively and B.E. the binding needed to break atom in constituent particle.
energy in MeV, then:/Skeâ vÙetefkeäueÙee AZ X õJÙeceeve keâes Energy released = Energy of Product – Energy of
M(A,Z) Éeje JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Ùeefo Mp Deewj Mn reactant
›eâceevegmeej Øeesše@ve Deewj vÙetš^e@ve kesâ õJÙeceeveeW keâes JÙeòeâ Given Binding energy of deuteron 1H2 = 2.2 MeV
keâjles neW Deewj B.E., MeV cee$ekeâeW ceW yevOekeâ Tpee& keâes Binding energy of 2He4 = 28 MeV
metefÛele keâjlee nes lees:- & 1H + 1H → 2He
2 2 4

(a) B.E. = M(A,Z) – ZMp – (A–Z) Mn So,

2
(b) B.E. = [M(A, Z) – ZMp – (A – Z) Mn]C energy released = (B.E of 2He4) – 2(B.E of 1H2)
2
(c) B.E. = [ZMp + (A – Z)Mn – M(A, Z)]C = 28 – 2×2.2
(d) B.E. = [ZMp + AMn – M(A, Z)]C2 = 28 – 4.4
AIPMT-2007 = 23.6 MeV
Physics 598 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. In the reaction 2
H +13 H 
4
→ 2 He +10 n If the (a) 0.0305 J (b) 0.0305 erg
1
(c) 28.4 MeV (d) 0.061 u
binding energies of 12 H, 13 H and 42 He are AIPMT-2003
respectively a, b and c (in MeV), then the energy Ans. (c): 2He4 contains 2 neutrons and 2 protons
(in MeV) released in this reactions is
4
So, Mass of protons = 2×1.0073 = 2.0146 U
DeefYeef›eâÙee 12 H +13 H  → 2 He +10 n ceW 12 H, 13 H Deewj Mass of neutrons = 2×1.0087
2 He keâer ›eâceevegmeej DeeyebOeve Tpee&SW (MeV ceW) a, b leLee
4 = 2.0174 U
c nes lees DeefYeef›eâÙee ceW efJecegòeâ Tpee& (MeV) nesieer- Total mass of 2 protons and 2 neutrons
= (2.0146 + 2.0174) U
(a) a + b + c (b) c + a – b
= 4.032 U
(c) c – a – b (d) a + b – c
Mass of helium nucleus = 4.0015 U
AIPMT-2005
∴ Mass Defect, ∆m = (4.032 – 4.0015 U)
Ans. (c) : Given :
= 0.0305 U
Binding energy of ( 2
1 H +13 H ) = a + b We know that 1U = 931 MeV
Binding energy 42 He = c Hence, Binding Energy
4
∆E = ∆m × 931
Binding energy of He will be more than that of
2 = 0.0305×931
( 2
1 H + H ) and is more stable.
3
1 = 28.4 MeV
Thus, energy released per nucleon = c - (a+b) = c - a - b 30. Mn and Mp represent the mass of neutron and
28. MP denotes the mass of a proton and Mn that of proton respectively. An element having mass M
a neutron. A given nucleus, of binding energy has N neutron and Z-protons, then the correct
B, contains Z protons and N neutrons. The relation will be : -
mass M(N, Z) of the nucleus is given by (c is Ùeefo Mn Je Mp ›eâceMe: vÙetš^e@ve ve Øeesš^esve kesâ õJÙeceeve
velocity of light)/Mp Skeâ Øeesše@ve keâe õJÙeceeve JÙeòeâ nw lees Skeâ lelJe efpemekeâe õJÙeceeve M nw ceW N vÙetš^e@ve Je
keâjlee nw Deewj Mn Skeâ vÙetš^e@ve keâe~ Skeâ veeefYekeâ efJeMes<e Z Øeesš^e@ve nw, lees mener mecyevOe nw
ceW Z Øeesše@ve Deewj N vÙetš^e@ve nQ Deewj Fmekeâer DeeyebOeve (a) M < {N.Mn + Z.Mp} (b) M > {N.Mn+Z.Mp}
Tpee& B nw~ Fme veeefYekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve M (N, Z) JÙeòeâ (c) M = {N.Mn+Z.Mp} (d) M=N{Mn + Mp}
nesiee (c ØekeâeMe keâe Jesie nw) AIPMT-2001
(a) M(N, Z) = NMn + ZMP + Bc2 Ans. (a) : For any atom, the mass of an atom is due to
(b) M(N, Z) = NMn + ZMP – B/c2 nucleons present in it.
(c) M(N, Z) = NMn + ZMP + B/c2 Nucleons include protons & Neutrons mass of 1Neutron
(d) M(N, Z) = NMn + ZMP – Bc2 = Mn (given)
AIPMT-2004 Total number of Neutron = N
Ans. (b) : The binding energy (B), mass of nucleus is ⇒ Total mass of Neutrons = N. Mn
slightly less than sum of masses of its constituents. This Similarly.
mass difference is equivalent to binding energy. Mass of 1 proton = Mp (given)
B = ∆Mc2 Total number of proton = Z
B =  NM n + ZM p − M ( N, Z )  c 2 ∴ total mass of Protons = Mp. Z
Total theoretical calculated mass = N. Mn + z.Mp
B
= NM n + ZM p − M ( N, Z ) Now,
c2 Some mass of nucleons gets converted into energy
B which binds all these nucleons together, that energy is
∴ M ( N, Z ) = NM n + ZM p −
c2 called binding energy & reduction in mass is called
mass defect.
29. The mass of proton is 1.0073 u and that of
neutron is 1.0087 u (u = atomic mass unit). The Total mass will be less than actual theoretical calculated
mass.
4
binding energy of He is (Given: helium ⇒ M < {N.Mn + Z.Mp}
2
31. A nucleus ruptures into two nuclear parts,
nucleus mass ≈ 4.0015 u)
which have their velocity ratio equal to 2 : 1.
Øeesše@ve keâe õJÙeceeve 1.0073 u leLee vÙetš^e@ve keâe What will be the ratio of their nuclear size
õJÙeceeve 1.0087 u (u = hejceeCeg mebnefle cee$ekeâ) nw (nuclear radius) is?
4
He keâer yebOeve Tpee& nw (efoÙee nw: nerefueÙece veeefYekeâ
Skeâ veeefYekeâ oes YeeieeW ceW efJeIeefšle neslee nw efpevekesâ JesieeW
2 keâe Devegheele 2 : 1 nw~ Gvekeâer veeefYekeâerÙe ef$epÙeeDeeW keâe
keâe õJÙeceeve ≈ 4.0015 u) Devegheele nw:
Physics 599 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 31/2 : 1 (b) 1 : 31/2 (c) 141Ba (d) 235U
(c) 21/3 : 1 (d) 1 : 21/3 56 92
AIPMT-1996 AIPMT-1993
Ans. (d) : Given, Ans. (b) : The binding energy per nucleon is practically
independent of the atomic number for nuclei of mass
Velocity ratio v1 : v2 = 2 : 1 number in the range 30 < A < 170 .
Using the principle of conservation of momentum From the given option we can say that 26Fe56 has
We get, mass ∝ volume ∝r3 maximum binding energy per nucleon.
m1 v1 + m2 (–v2) = 0 34. The energy equivalent of one atomic mass unit
⇒ m1v1 = m2v2 is
m1 v 2 1 Skeâ hejceeCeg õJÙeceeve FkeâeF& keâer Tpee& meceleguÙe nw:
∴ = = ...(i)
m 2 v1 2 (a) 1.6×10–19J
(b) 6.02×1023J
(c) 931 MeV(d) 9.31 MeV
Therefore the ratio of m1:m2 is 1:2
n AIPMT-1992
Now, the ratio of their sizes from eq (i) assuming that –27
the two nuclear parts are small spheres is, Ans. (c) : We have 1a.m.u. = 1.66×10 kg
Now, we can use the Einstein's mass energy equivalent
m1 1
= given by-
m2 2 E = mc2
4 Where, m = 1 a.m.u. = 1.66×10–27 kg
d πr13 c = 3×108 m/s
3 1
⇒ = E = (1.66×10–27)×(3×108)2
4
d πr2 3 2 E = 14.94×10–11 Joule
3
3 14.94 × 10 –11
 r1  1 E= eV
r  = 2 1.6 × 10 −19
 2 Since 1 eV = 1.6×10–19 J
r1  1 
1/ 3
We get E = 933×106 eV ∴[1 million = 106eV
∴ = 
r2  2  E = 933 MeV ≈931 MeV
Therefore the ratio of the sizes nuclear radius will be 35. The average binding energy of a nucleon inside
1:21/3 an atomic nucleus is about/ Skeâ veeefYekeâ keâer Deewmele
32. The mass density of a nucleus varies with mass
yebOeve-Tpee& Øeefle vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve nw:
number A as/Skeâ veeefYekeâ keâe IevelJe, õJÙeceeve (a) 8 MeV (b) 8 eV
(c) 8J (d) 8 erg
mebKÙee A kesâ meeLe efkeâme ™he mes heefjJeefle&le neslee nw? AIPMT-1989
(a) A2 (b) A Ans. (a) : The binding energy per nucleon of a nucleus
(c) constant/efveÙeleebkeâ (d) 1/A is the binding energy divided by the total number of
AIPMT-1992 nucleons in the nucleus Binding energy per nucleon
Ans. (c) : The nuclear radius r varies with mass number Total binding energyof nucleus
=
A according to the relation, Number of nucleon in the nucleus
r = r0A1/3 • In the case of helium,
⇒ r ∝ A1/3 Average binding energy per nucleon
or A∝ r3 28.3
Now, = = 7.1 MeV
4
mass The great of nuclides have a value of around 8 MeV per
density =
volume nucleon.
Further mass ∝ A and • In the case of Na,
volume ∝ r3 binding energy = 194 MeV
mass 194
∴ = constant Average binding energy per nucleon =
volume 24
33. The binding energy per nucleon is maximum in = 8.08 ≈ 8 MeV.
case of/yebOeve Tpee& Øeefle vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve efkeâmekesâ efueS 36. The binding energies per nucleon for a
meJee&efOekeâ nesieer? deuteron and an α-particle are x1 and x2
respectively. The energy Q released in the
(a) 4 He (b) 56 Fe reaction 2 H1 + 2 H1 → 4 He 2 + Q,
2 26
Physics 600 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ [Ÿetš^e@ve Deewj Skeâ α-keâCe kesâ efueS Øeefle vÙetefkeäueÙee@ve (c) They are short range forces/Ùes Úesšs hejeme Jeeues
yebOeve Tpee& ›eâceMe: x1 Deewj x2 nw~ DeefYeef›eâÙee : yeue nesles nQ~
2
H1 + 2 H1 → 4 He 2 + Q, ceW (d) They are equal in strength to electromagnetic
(a) 4 (x1 + x2) (b) 4(x2 – x1) forces/Ùes JewÅegle ÛegcyekeâerÙe yeueeW kesâ yejeyej Meefòeâ kesâ
(c) 2(x2 – x1) (d) 2(x1 + x2) nesles nQ~
AIPMT-1995 AIPMT-1990
Ans. (b) : Given reaction, Ans. (c) : Nuclear forces are short range attractive
2
H 1 + 2 H 1 → 4 He 2 + Q forces which balance the repulsive forces between the
We are required to find out the energy released in the protons inside the nucleus.
reaction i.e, Q value. We know that nucleus force is a strong force, They are
Number of nucleon on reactant side = 4 strongest in magnitude. They are short range because
Binding energy for one nucleon = x1 the distance between the nucleon 0.7 Fermi which is
Binding energy for 4 nucleons = 4x1 very small. They are charged independent.
Similarly on product side binding energy = 4x2
Now, Q = change in binding energy
= 4 ( x 2 – x 1) 27.6 Radioactivity

39. α-particles, β -particles and γ-rays are all

27.5 Nuclear Force having same energy. Their penetrating power
in a given medium in increasing order will be/
37. If the nuclear force between two protons, two
neutrons and between proton and neutron is α-keâCe, β-keâCe Deewj γ-efkeâjCeW meYeer keâer meceeve Tpee& nw~
denoted by Fpp, Fnn and Fpn respectively, then efkeâmeer efoS ieS ceeOÙece ceW Gvekeâer Yesove Meefkeäle yeÌ{les
Ùeefo oes Øeesše@ve, oes vÙetš^e@ve leLee Skeâ Øeesše@ve Je Skeâ ›eâce ceW nesieer
vÙetš^e@ve kesâ yeerÛe veeefYekeâerÙe yeue keâes Fpp, Fnn Deewj Fpn (a) β, γ, α (b) γ, α, β
mes efveefo&° efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees (c) α, β , γ (d) β, α, γ
(a) Fpp ≈ Fnn ≈ Fpn NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
(b) Fpp ≠ Fnn and Fpp=Fnn
Ans. (c) : α−particle, β – particle and γ – particle have
(c) Fpp = Fnn = Fpn
same energy. Then lighter mass have higher penetrating
(d) Fpp ≠ Fnn ≠ Fpn
power.
AIPMT-1991
So mass relation α > β > γ
Ans. (c) : In the nucleus, the uncharged neutrons and
positive charge protons and the positive charge protons So, α has minimum penetration power and γ has
are held together by the nuclear force in an extremely maximum penetration power.
small space in spite of strong electrostatic repulsion So increasing order of penetrating power α < β < γ
between protons. 40. The half life of a radioactive substance is 20
• They are only operative inside the nucleus of an atom. minutes. In how much time, the activity of
The nuclear forces are non electric and non- th
gravitational forces.  1 
substance drops to   of its initial value ?
Given, Fnn = Force between two neutrons  16 
Fpp = Force between two protons Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe heoeLe& keâer Deæ& DeeÙeg 20 efceveš nw~
Fpn = Force between neutron and proton
1
Since, neutron is a neutral particle between neutron- efkeâleves meceÙe ceW heoeLe& Deheveer ØeejefcYekeâ cee$ee kesâ JeW
neutron and neutron -proton is equal. 16
Since, nuclear forces are charge Independent therefore, Yeeie lekeâ efJeIeefšle nes peelee nw ?
the forces between protons-neutrons, proton-proton and (a) 80 minutes/80 efceveš (b) 20 minutes/20 efceveš
neutrons-neutrons are the same in magnitude. (c) 40 minutes/40 efceveš (d) 60 minutes/60 efceveš
Or Fpp = Fnn = Fpn
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
38. Which of the following statements is true for
Ans. (a) : We know that,
nuclear forces? t/T
keâewve-mee keâLeve veeefYekeâerÙe yeueeW kesâ efJe<eÙe ceW melÙe nw? N 1
= 
(a) They obey the inverse square law of distance N0  2 
/Ùes otjer kesâ JÙegl›eâce Jeie& efveÙece keâe DevegmejCe keâjles nQ~ Where, T = half life period
(b) They obey the inverse third power law of t/T
1 1
distance/Ùes otjer kesâ JÙegl›eâce Ieve efveÙece keâe DevegmejCe = 
16  2 
keâjles nQ~
Physics 601 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 1
4 t / 20 Hence, statement I is incorrect.
  =  • Half life is the duration in which half of the active
2 2 nuclei decayed.
On comparing both sides, we get Hence, statement II is also incorrect
t
=4 42. At any instant, two elements X1 and X2 have
20 same number of radioactive atoms. If the decay
t = 80 minutes constant of X1 and X2 are 10λ and λ
41. Given below are two statements: respectively, then the time when the ratio of
veerÛes oes keâLeve efoS ieS nQ: their atoms becomes
1
respectively will be:
Statement I: The law of radioactive decay e
states that the number of nuclei undergoing the efkeâmeer #eCe hej, DeJeÙeJe X1 SJeb X2 ceW jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe
decay per unit time is inversely proportional to hejceeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee meceeve nw~ Ùeefo X1 SJeb X2 keâe
the total number of nuclei in the sample. #eÙe efveÙeleebkeâ ›eâceeMe: 10λ SJeb λ nw, lees Jen meceÙe peye
keâLeve - I : jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe #eÙelee keâe efveÙece keânlee nw
1
efkeâ Øeefle FkeâeF& meceÙe #eÙe nesves Jeeues veeefYekeâeW keâer Gvekesâ hejceeCegDeeW keâe Devegheele ›eâceMe: nes peeSiee,
e
mebKÙee, vecetves kesâ kegâue veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee kesâ nesiee:
JÙegl›eâceevegheeleer nesleer nw~
1 1
Statement II: The half life of a radionuclide is (a) (b)
11λ 9λ
the sum of the life time of all nuclei, divided by
the initial concentration of the nuclei at time t = 1 1
(c) (d)
0./keâLeve -II : meYeer veeefYekeâeW kesâ kegâue peerJeve keâeue kesâ 6λ 5λ
Ùeesie keâes meceÙe t = 0 hej GheueyOe veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022
mes Yeeie osves hej jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe heoeLe& keâer Deæe&Ùeg Øeehle Ans. (b) : Given that –
nesleer nw~ X1 = 10λ
in the light of the above statements, choose the X2 = λ
most appropriate answer from the options From the law of radioactive decay is –
given below:/Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ DeeOeej hej, veerÛes N = N0 e–λt
efoS ieS efJekeâuheeW cesW mes meJee&efOekeâ GheÙeg&òeâ Gòej ÛegveW~ Where, N = no. of atoms remained undecayed after time
t
(a) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct/
No = no. of atoms present initially
keâLeve - I SJeb keâLeve - II oesveeW mener nQ~ For X1 atom –
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are −λ x t
incorrect/keâLeve - I SJeb keâLeve - II oesveeW ieuele nQ~ N x 1 = Nοe 1 ...(i)
(c) Statement I is correct but Statement II is For X2 atom–
incorrect/keâLeve-I mener nw efkeâvleg keâLeve - II ieuele nw~ N x2 = N οe 2
−λ x t
...(ii)
(d) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is n n
correct/keâLeve - I ieuele nw efkeâvleg keâLeve - II mener nw~ On dividing eq (i) by eq (ii) we get
−λ t
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 N x1 N οe x1
=
Ans. (b) : According to the law of radioactive decay, N x 2 N οe −λx 2 t
when any radioactive sample undergoes α, β and γ
1 −( λ x −λ x ) t
decay, the no. of nuclei undergoing the decay per unit =e 1 2
time in that radioactive sample is proportional to the e
total no. of nuclei in the sample. The law of radioactive −( λ x −λ x ) t

decay is given by formula – e −1 = e 1 2

On comparing both sides we get–
∆N
∝N
∆t ( )
λ x1 − λ x 2 t = 1
∆N 1 1
= λN t= ⇒t=
∆t λ x1 − λ x 2 10λ − λ
Where, λ = radioactive decay constant
1
N = no. of nuclei in the sample ⇒ t=
9λ
∆N = decay in time ∆t
Physics 602 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
43. In the given nuclear reaction, the element X is Ans. (c): The half life of a radioactive nuclide is
+
11 Na → X + e + ν
22
defined as the time in which half of the original number
oer ieF& veeefYekeâerÙe DeefYeef›eâÙee ceW, DeJeÙeJe X nw: of radioactive atoms has decayed.
+ We know that the activity of a radioactive substance is
11 Na → X + e + ν
22

written as-
(a) 22 Mg (b) 23 Na t
11 11
 1  t1/ 2
(c) 23 Ne
10
(d) 22 Ne
10
A = A0 ×  
2
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Where t is the time and t1/ 2 is the half-life time -
Ans. (d) : 11 N a22  → z x A + +1 e 0 + ν
t = 150 hours
z = 11, A = 22,
t1/ 2 = 100 hours
+1 e
0
or e + = Beta plus decay
Substituting the values-
11 Na
22
 →10 Ne 22 + e + + ν 150
3/ 2
A  1  100 1
44. A Radioactive nucleus A
ZX undergoes =  = 
A0  2  2
spontaneous decay in the sequence
A  1 
Z X → Z −1 B → Z − 3 C → Z − 2 D,
A
where Z is the =
atomic number of element X. The possible decay A 0  2 2 
particles in the sequence are-/Skeâ jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe Therefore, the fraction of original activity that will
veeefYekeâ ZA X mJele: efJeIeefšle neslee nw  1 
remain after 150 hours would be  
Z X → Z −1 B → Z − 3 C → Z − 2 D, ›eâce ceW Z lelJe X keâe
A
2 2
hejceeCeg mebKÙee nw~ ›eâce ceW efJeIeefšle mecYeJe keâCe nQ, ›eâceMe:
46. The half life of a radioactive sample
(a) β–, α, β+ (b) α, β–, β+
undergoing α–decay is 1.4 × 1017 s. If the
(c) α, β+,β– (d) β+, α, β–
number of nuclei in the sample is 2.0 × 1021, the
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
activity of the sample is nearly
Ans. (d) : Alpha decay- The mass number of daughter
nucleus is four less than that of the parent nucleus while α – #eefÙele nes jns efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeeSefkeäšJe vecetve keâer
the atomic number decreases by two. DeOee&Ùeg 1.4 × 1017 nw~ Ùeefo Fme vecetves ceW veeefYekeâeW keâer
A −4
Z X → Z − 2 Y + 2 He
A 4
mebKÙee 2.0 × 1021 nw, lees Fme vecetves keâer meef›eâÙelee nw,
β+ decay - A decrease in the atomic number of the ueieYeie
radio-active sample occurs to yield a neutron through
(a) 103 Bq (b) 104 Bq
proton disintegration.
p = n + e+ + v (c) 105 Bq (d) 106 Bq
β decay - An increase in the atomic number of the
– NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
radio-active sample occurs to yield a proton through Ans. (b) : Half life (T1/2) = 1.4×1017 sec
neutron transformation. Number of Nuclei in sample (N) = 2×1021
n = p + e– + ν Activity of sample, A = λN
Z X A 
→ Z–1 B (β decay )
+
0.693
Where, λ = decay const =
Z–1 B 
→Z–3 C ( α decay ) T1 2

Z–3 C 
→ Z–2 D (β decay )
–
A =
0.693
×N
45. The half-life of a radioactive nuclide is 100 T1/ 2
hours. The fraction of original activity that will 0.693
remain after 150 hours would be = × 2 × 10 21
1.4 × 1017
Skeâ jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe vÙetkeäueeF[ keâer DeOe&DeeÙeg 100 Iebšs nQ~ = 9900 ≈ 10000
150 Ievšs kesâ yeeo ØeejefcYekeâ meef›eâÙelee keâe yeÛee ngDee
= 10 4 Bq
efYeVeelcekeâ Yeeie nesiee :
2 1 47. What happens to the mass number and atomic
(a) (b) number of an element when it emits γ-
3 2 2
radiation?/peye keâesF& lelJe γ- efJeefkeâjCe Glmeefpe&le
1 2
(c) (d)
3
keâjlee nw, lees Gme lelJe keâer õJÙeceeve Deewj hejceeCeg mebKÙee
2 2
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
keâe keäÙee neslee nw?
Physics 603 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) Mass number increases by four and atomic 49. For a radioactive material, half-life is 10
number increases by two./ õJÙeceeve mebKÙee 4 Éeje minutes. If initially there are 600 number of
yeÌ{er peeleer nw Deewj hejceeCeg mebKÙee 2 Éeje yeÌ{ peeleer nw~ nuclei, the time taken (in minutes) for the
disintegration of 450 nuclei is
(b) Mass number decreases by four and atomic
number decreases by two./õJÙeceeve mebKÙee 4 Éeje
efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe heoeLe& keâer DeOe&-DeeÙeg 10 efceveš
Ieš peeleer nw Deewj hejceeCeg mebKÙee 2 Éeje Ieš peeleer nw~ nw~ Ùeefo DeejcYe ceW veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee 600 nw, lees
(c) Mass number and atomic number remain 450 veeefYekeâeW kesâ efJeIeefšle nesves ceW ueieves Jeeuee meceÙe
unchanged./õJÙeceeve mebKÙee Deewj hejceeCeg mebKÙee ceW (efceveš ceW) nw
keâesF& heefjJele&ve veneR neslee nw~ (a) 20 (b) 10
(d) Mass number remains unchanged while (c) 15 (d) 30
atomic number decreases by one. NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
õJÙeceeve mebKÙee DeheefjJeefle&le jnleer nw peyeefkeâ hejceeCeg Ans. (a) : Given, half life t ½ = 10minutes
mebKÙee ceW 1 keâer keâceer nes peeleer nw~ N 0 = 600, N ' = 450
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II Number of remaining nuclei (N) = 600 – 450 = 150
n
Ans. (c) : A gamma (γ) ray is an electromagnetic wave. N 1
= 
It is at the small wavelength end of Electromagnetic No  2 
spectrum. t / t1/ 2
• A γ-ray has no mass & no charge. 150  1 
= 
• Emitting a γ-ray make no difference to mass 600  2 
t / t1/ 2
number or atomic number but will make nucleus 1 1
more stable. = 
4 2
• During the emission of alpha particle the mass 2 t/t
1 1
1/ 2
number will be reduced by 4 units and atomic
  = 
number will be reduced by 2 units. 2 2
• During beta decay the mass number does not By composition
change but atomic number increases by 1 unit. t = 2t½ = 2 × 10
48. The rate of radioactive disintegration at an = 20 minute
instant for a radioactive sample of half life 2.2 Hence, time taken for disintegration of 450 nuclei is 20
× 109 s is 1010 s–1. The number of radioactive minutes.
atoms in that sample at that instant is, 50. Radioactive material 'A' has decay constant
DeOee&Ùeg 2.2 × 109 s kesâ efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe vecetves kesâ
'8λ' and material 'B' has decay constant 'λ'.
efueS efkeâmeer #eCe jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe efJeKeC[ve keâer oj 1010
Initially they have same number of nuclei.
s–1 nw~ Gme #eCe Gme vecetves ceW jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe hejceeCegDeeW
After what time, the ratio of number of nuclei
keâer mebKÙee nw– 1
of material 'B' to that 'A' will be ? /oes
(a) 3.17 × 10 19
(b) 3.17 × 10 20 e
(c) 3.17 × 10 17
(d) 3.17 × 10 18 js e f [ Ùees S ef k eäš Je heoeLeeX , ‘ A ’ leLee B kes â #eÙeeb k eâ ›eâceMe:
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha) '8λ' leLee 'λ' nQ~ ØeejbYe ceW oesveeW kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee
Ans. (a) : Given data meceeve nw~ efkeâleves meceÙe kesâ he§eeled 'B' ceW veeefYekeâeW keâer
t 1 = 2.2 × 10 9 s 1
2 mebKÙee mes Devegheele nesiee?
e
R = 1010 s–1
1 1
From the formula (a) (b)
λ 7λ
R = λN
1 1
Here, R = decay rate (c) (d)
8λ 9λ
λ = radioactive decay constant
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
N = radioactive nuclei at time t
Hence we can modify it as Ans. (b) : Given -
Number of nucleus of A N A 1
N= =
R R
×t1 = =
λ 0.693 2 Number of nucleus of B NB e
Using law of radioactive decays is
1010 × 2.2 ×109
N= = 3.17 × 1019 atoms N = N0e–λt
0.693
Physics 604 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Where λ = decay constant t 2 t1
−
15/100  1  T T
N0 = initial number of nuclei = 
For A NA = N0e–8λt ...(i) 60 /100  2 
t 2 − t1 t 2 − t1
For B NB = N0e–λt ...(ii) 1 1 T 1 1 T
2

On dividing eqn (i) & (ii) ⇒ =  ⇒  = 

4 2 2 2
N A N0 e−8λt
= ⇒ t2 – t1 = 2 T
N B N0 e−λt ⇒ t2 – t1 = 2×30 = 60 min.
N A −7 λt 52. A nucleus of uranium decays at rest into nuclei
=e
NB of thorium and helium. Then
efJejeceeJemLee ceW ÙetjsefveÙece keâe Skeâ veeefYekeâ LeesefjÙece
1
= e −7 λt leLee nerefueÙece kesâ veeefYekeâeW mes #eefÙele neslee nw~ lees:
e
(a) The helium nucleus has less kinetic energy
e–1 = e–7λt
than the thorium nucleus/nerefueÙece-veeefYekeâ keâer
– 1 = – 7 λt
ieeflepe Tpee& LeesefjÙece-veeefYekeâ mes keâce nesleer nw~
−1 1
t= = (b) The helium nucleus has more kinetic energy
−7 λ 7 λ than the thorium nucleus. /nerefueÙece-veeefYekeâ keâer
NB ieeflepe Tpee& LeesefjÙece -veeefYekeâ mes DeefOekeâ nesleer nw~
Note : In the question the ratio of is given and if
NA (c) The helium nucleus has less momentum than
NB 1 the thorium nucleus. /nerefueÙece-veeefYekeâ keâe mebJesie,
we consider as then the answer will come out LeesefjÙece-veeefYekeâ mes keâce neslee nw~
NA e
(d) The helium nucleus has more momentum
1
to be . Neglecting the error in the question the than the thorium nucleus. /nerefueÙece-veeefYekeâ keâe
−7 λ
best choice of answer is option (b).
meb Jesie, LeesefjÙece-veeefYekeâ mes DeefOekeâ neslee nw~
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015
51. The half-life of a radioactive substance is 30
minutes. The time (in minutes) taken between Ans. (b) : Since there is no external force acting on the
40% decay and 85% decay of the same uranium nucleus, momentum will be conserved in the
radioactive substance is reaction
efkeâmeer jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe heoeLe& keâer DeOe&-DeeÙeg 30 efceveš nw pi = 0
~ Fmeer jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe heoeLe& kesâ 40% #eÙe mes 85% lekeâ Summation of final momentum of the thorium and the
#eÙe nesves ceW ueiee meceÙe (efcevešeW ) nesiee :- nuclei will be zero.
Magnitudes of momentum of thorium and nuclei will be
(a) 15 (b) 30
equal
(c) 45 (d) 60
i.e PTh = PHe
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
2
Ans. (d) : Given half life of radioactive substance T = PTh
KETh =
30 min 2M Th
Let it takes t1 time to decay 40% 2
PHe
So remaining substance after time t1 = 60% KEHe =
t /T 2M He
1
& we know that N = N0   PTh 2
2 KE Th 2M Th
Where, N = final amount ⇒ = 2
KE He PHe
No = initial amount 2

t = time 2M He
T = Half life KE Th M He
t1 / T
⇒ =
N 60  1  KE He M Th
So = =   ________(i)
N 0 100  2  Since MHe < MTh, KEHe > KETh
Similarly when it decay upto 85% in time t2. The helium nucleus has more kinetic energy than the
So remaining substance after time t2 = 15% thorium nucleus.
N 15  1 
t2 / T 53. A radio isotope 'X' with a half life 1.4×109 years
= =   ________(ii) decays to 'Y' which is stable. A sample of the
No 100  2  rock from a cave was found to contain 'X' and
Now divide eqn (ii) by eqn (i) 'Y' in the ratio 1 : 7. The age of the rock is:
Physics 605 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe mecemLeeefvekeâ 'X' keâer DeOe&-DeeÙeg N 1
n

1.4×10 Je<e& nw~ Ùen #eefÙele neskeâj 'Y' ceW ™heebleefjle nes
9 As =   where n is the no. of half life.
N0  2 
peelee nw pees mLeeÙeer nw~ efkeâmeer iegheâe keâer Skeâ Ûeóeve ceW n 3 n
1 1 1 1
'X' leLee 'Y' keâe Devegheele 1 : 7 heeÙee ieÙee~ lees Fme ∴ =  ⇒    =
8 2 2 2
Ûeóeve keâer DeeÙeg nesieer:
n=3
(a) 1.96×109 years (b) 3.92×109 years
t
(c) 4.20×109 years (d) 8.40×109 years n= or t = n × T1
AIPMT-06.05.2014 T1/ 2 2

Ans. (c) : Number of nuclei at t = 0 = 3 × 20

Number of nuclei after time t (As per question) t = 60 years
X → Y
No 0 55. The half life of a radioactive nucleus is 50 days.
No-x x The time interval (t2 – t1) between the time t2
No − x 1 2
given- = when of it has decayed and the time t1 when
x 7 3
7No – 7x = x 1
of it had decayed is/efkeâmeer jsef[Ùees SefkeäšJe veeefYekeâ
7 3
x = No 1
8 keâer DeOe& DeeÙeg 50 efove nw, lees, Fmekesâ Yeeie kesâ #eefÙele
∴ Remaining nuclei of isotope X 2
3 1
7
No − x = No − No = No =   No
1 1 nesves kesâ meceÙe t2 leLee Yeeie kesâ #eefÙele nesves kesâ meceÙe
3
8 8 2
t1 keâes meceÙe Devlejeue (t2 – t1) nesiee–
So, three half lives would have been passed.
(a) 60 days (b) 15 days
∴ t = nT1/ 2 = 3×1.4×109 years
(c) 30 days (d) 50 days
= 4.2×109 years. AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Hence, the age of the rock is 4.2×109 years.
Ans. (d) : From radio-active decay law, N = N0 e–λt
54. The half life of a radioactive isotope 'X' is 20
Where, N0 = amount of Nuclei at t = 0.
years. It decays to another element 'Y' which is
stable. The two elements 'X' and 'Y' were N be the nuclei left under decay at any time t.
found to be in the ratio 1 : 7 in a sample of a When time is t2, Number of undecay nuclei –
given rock. The age of the rock is estimated to 2N 0
N = N0 −
be: 3
efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe (jsef[ÙeesOeceea) mecemLeeefvekeâ 'X' N 2 1
keâer DeOe& DeeÙeg 20 Je<e& nw~ efJeIeefšle neskeâj Ùen 'Y' lelJe ⇒ = 1− =
N0 3 3
ceW heefjJeefle&le nes peelee nw, pees mLeeÙeer nw~ efkeâmeer Ûeóeve ceW
1 2
'X' leLee 'Y' keâe Devegheele 1 : 7 heeÙee peelee nw~ lees When time is t1, number of undecay nuclei = 1 − =
3 3
Ûeóeve keâer Devegceeefvele DeeÙeg nesieer:
At time t2,
(a) 100 years/ 100 Je<e& (b) 40 years/ 40 Je<e& 2 t

(c) 60 years/ 60 Je<e& (d) 80 years/80 Je<e& 1  1 T

⇒ = 
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013 3 2
Ans. (c) : At time t1,
t1
Initial number of atoms = N0 . 0
2  1 T
Number of atoms after time t = N N0 –N ⇒ = 
3 2
As per question
N 1 Now equation (i) ÷ (ii), we get
= t 2 t1
−
N0 − N 7 1  1 T T
⇒ = 
7N = N 0 − N 2 2
8N=N0 t 2 − t1
⇒ =1
N 1 T
=
N0 8 t2 – t1 = T = 50 days

Physics 606 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
56. A mixture consists of two radioactive material mebKÙee 4 N0 leLee Q Øekeâej kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee N0
A1 and A2 with half lives of 20s and 10s nw~ P (R ceW heefjJeefle&le nesves kesâ efueÙes) keâer Deæ& DeeÙeg 1
respectively. Initially the mixture has 40g of A1
efceveš peyeefkeâ Q keâer 2 efceveš nw~ ØeejcYe ceW vecetves ceW R
and 160 g of A2. The amount of the two in the
mixture will becomes equal after: kesâ keâesF& veeefYekeâerÙe keâCe GheefmLele veneR nw~ peye P Je Q
Skeâ efceßeCe ceW, ›eâceMe: 20s leLee 10s DeOe& DeeÙeg kesâ oes kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee yejeyej nw, lees vecetves ceW GheefmLele
jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe heoeLe& A1 leLee A2 nw ØeejbYe ceW efceßeCe ceW R kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer :
A1 Deewj A2 keâer cee$eeÙeW ›eâceMe: 40g leLee 160g nw~ lees (a) 2 N0 (b) 3 N0
efkeâleves meceÙe kesâ heMÛeeled efceßeCe ceW oesveeW keâer cee$ee 9N 0 5N 0
(c) (d)
meceeve nes peeÙesieer? 2 2
AIPMT (Mains)-2011
(a) 20s (b) 40s
Ans. (c) : Initially, number of nuclei P = 4 N0
(c) 60s (d) 80s
Number of nuclei Q = N0
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Half life of P, TP = 1 min
Ans. (b) :(i) Half life , t1/ 2 is the time taken by Half life of Q, TQ = 2 min
radioactive material to become half of its initial N0 of nuclei of P after time t,
concentration. t / Tp t /1
1 1
(ii) If 'No' is initial concentration, then the time required n P = 4N 0   = 4N0  
2 2
No
to become be given as N0 of nuclei of Q after time t,
2 t / TQ t/2
1 1
0.693 n Q = N0   = N0  
t1 = λ = decay constants 2 2
2 λ
Suppose number of nuclei P and Q in given sample are
For material A1, (No)1= 40g , t 1 = 20 sec equal after time t, then nP = nQ
2
t /1 t/2
For material A2, (No)2 = 160g, t 1 = 10 sec 1 1
4N 0   = N0  
2 2  2
Let us say, at time = t, amount of A1 & A2 become t/2 2
1 1 1
equal.   = = 
then at t = t.  
2 4 2
t
N1 =
(N0 )1 (N )
& N2 = 0 2 ∴ =2
t t 2
2 2 t = 4 min
20 20
4 /1
np = 4N0  1  = 0
Q N1 = N2 & (N0)1= 40 & (N0)2 = 160 N
∴
40 160 2 4
⇒ = 4/ 2
t t 1 N
2 2 n Q = N0   = 0
20 10 2 4
t t t
− Deactivate nucleus or nuclei of R =
⇒ 4 = 210 20 = 2 20
 N   N 
t =  4N 0 − 0  +  N 0 − 20 
or =2`  4   2 
20
N0 N
t = 40 sec = 4N 0 − + N0 − 0
4 4
57. Two radioactive nuclei P and Q, in a given
N0
sample decay into a stable nucleus R. At time t = 5N 0 −
= 0, number of P species are 4 N0 and that of Q 2
are N0. Half-life of P (for conversion to R) is 1 9N 0
= .
minute where as that of Q is 2 minutes. Initially 2
there are no nuclei of R present in the sample. 58. A radioactive nucleus of mass M emits a
When number of nuclei of P and Q are equal, photon of frequency ν and the nucleus recoils.
the number of nuclei of R present in the sample The recoil energy will be
would be :/efoÙes ieÙes vecetves ceW oes jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe veeefYekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve M nw~ Jen ν
veeefYekeâ P Je Q Skeâ mLeeF& veeefYekeâ R kesâ Devoj #eefÙele DeeJe=efòe keâe Skeâ Heâesše@ve Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw Deewj
neslee nw~ t = 0 meceÙe hej, P Øekeâej kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer veeefYekeâ Øeefleef#ehle nes peelee nw, lees Øeefle#eshe Tpee& nesieer-
Physics 607 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) hν (b) Mc2–hν (b) nuclei break up at high temperature
(c) h2ν2/2Mc2 (d) Zero/MetvÙe veeefYekeâ GÛÛe leehe hej efJeKeefC[le nesles nQ
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 (c) atom get ionised at high temperature
Ans. (c) : Energy of emitted photon hejceeCegDeeW keâe DeeÙeveerkeâjCe GÛÛe leehe hej nes peelee nw
E = hv (d) kinetic energy is high enough to overcome the
For a photon its momentum is given as coulomb repulsion between nuclei
E hν GÛÛe leehe hej ieeflepe Tpee&, veeefYekeâeW kesâ yeerÛe ketâuee@ce
p = or
c c
Øeeflekeâ<e&Ce yeue keâes heej keâj mekeâleer nw
According to momentum conservation, value of the AIPMT (Screening)-2011
hν Ans. (d) : (i) Fusion reaction takes place at temperature
momentum of recoiled nucleus should also be but about 107 K. It requires this high temperature so that
c nucleus are moving at very high speed, by this they
in opposite direction, to make net momentum zero have high kinetic energy and can overcome the
before and after emission. repulsion between nuclei and come together.
Now Recoil Energy (ii) In nuclear fusion reaction, the lighter nuclei
p2 combine together to form heavier nuclei.
E2 =
2M (iii) Fusion reaction takes place at high temperature
Where, p is Recoil Momentum because kinetic energy is high enough to overcome
coulomb repulsion between nuclei.
hν
Putting p = , we get 61. A nucleus m
X emits one α particle and two
c n
–
β particles. The resulting nucleus is :
h 2ν 2 / c2 h 2ν 2
Recoil Energy E2 = = . keâesF& veeefYekeâ mn X , Skeâ DeuHeâe (α) keâCe Deewj oes yeerše
2M 2Mc 2
59. The half life of radioactive isotope 'X' is 50 ( β – ) keâCeeW keâe Glmepe&ve keâjlee nw~ heefjCeeceer veeefYekeâ nw:
years. It decays to another element 'Y' which is (a) m–4
Y (b) m –6
Z
n–2 n–4
stable. The two elements 'X' and 'Y' were m –6 m–4
found to be in the ratio of 1 : 15 in a sample of (c) n Z (d) n X
a given rock. The age of the rock was estimated AIPMT (Screening)-2011
to be :/efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe mecemLeeefvekeâ 'X' keâer DeOe& Ans. (d) : In alpha decay, decreases 4 unit mass number
DeeÙeg 50 Je<e& nw~ Fmekesâ #eÙe nesves mes lelJe 'Y' yevelee nw and 2 unit atomic number. In beta decay, increases one
pees mLeeÙeer nw~ efkeâmeer Ûeóeve kesâ efveoMe& (mescheue) ceW 'X' unit atomic number but mass will remain same.
Deewj 'Y' lelJeeW keâe Devegheele 1 : 15 heeÙee ieÙee lees Ûeóeve –1α m-4 –2β m-4
So, m n X → n-2 Z  →n X
keâer DeeÙeg keâe DeeBkeâueve efkeâÙee ieÙee nw :
62. The activity of a radioactive sample is
(a) 100 years/100 Je<e& (b) 150 years/150 Je<e& measured as N0 counts per minute at t = 0 and
(c) 200 years/200 Je<e& (d) 250 years/250 Je<e& N0/e counts per minute at t = 5 minutes. The
AIPMT (Screening)-2011 time (in minutes) at which the activity reduces
Nx 1 to half its value is –
Ans. (c) : Given - = Skeâ jsef[Ùees meef›eâÙe heoeLe& keâer meef›eâÙelee t = 0 hej N0
N y 15
ieCeve Øeefle efceveš Je t = 5 efceveš hej N0/e ieCeve Øeefle
Ny = 15 Nx
efceveš ceeefhele keâer peeleer nw~ Jen meceÙe (efceveš ceW) peye
⇒ Nx + Ny = 16Nx
Fmekeâer meef›eâÙelee Fmekesâ ceeve keâer DeeOeer nes peeleer nw –
Nx 1
Thus, = 5
N x + N y 16 (a) loge 2/5 (b)
log e 2
1 1 (c) 5 log102 (d) 5 loge 2
or Nx = (N x + N y ) = 4 (N x + N y )
16 2 AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Age of the rock = number of half lives of isotope Ans. (d) : Sample remain after n half life
X years passed = 4 × 50 = 200 years. n t/T
N 1 1
60. Fusion reaction takes place at high =  = 
No  2   2 
temperature because :
mebueÙeve DeefYeef›eâÙee GÛÛe leehe hej nesleer nw, keäÙeeWefkeâ : where, t = given, T = half life
5/T
(a) molecules break up at high temperature  N  N 1
if  N = o  ⇒ o =  
DeCeg GÛÛe leehe hej efJeKeefC[le nesles nQ  e  eN o  2 

Physics 608 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
1 1
5/ T 64. The decay constant of a radio isotope is λ. If A1
=  and A2 are its activities at times t1 and t2
e 2 respectively, the number of nuclei which have
Taking log on both the side above, we get decayed during the time (t1-t2)
1 1
5/ T
Skeâ jsef[Ùees mecemLeeefvekeâ keâe #eÙe–efveÙeleebkeâ λ nw~ Ùeefo
log = log  
e 2 Fmekeâer meef›eâÙelee meceÙe t1 Deewj t2 hej ›eâceMe: A1 leLee
5 A2 nw lees (t1-t2) meceÙeeJeefOe mes #eefleÙe veeefYekeâeW keâer
0-1 = ( -log2) mebKÙee nesieer –
T
T (a) A1t1- A2t2 (b) A1- A2
= log2 (c) (A1- A2)/λ (d) λ (A1- A2)
5
T = 5 log2 AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Ans. (c) : Let the number of nuclei at time t1 and at
Now T be the time often which activity reduces to half,
t'/5log2 time t2 is N1 and N2 respectively.
1 1 As we know the relation between the activity A and
= 
2 2 number of nuclei "N" at that time is given as:
t' = 5log e 2 A = λN
A1 = λN1 at time t1 ...........(i)
63. Half life period of two elements are 40 minute A2 = λ N2 at time t2 ..........(ii)
and 20 minute respectively, then after 80 Subtract equation (ii) from (i)-
minute ratio of the remaining nuclei will be
(Initially both have equal active nuclei) : [A − A2 ]
N1 − N 2 = 1
λ
oes lelJe efpevekeâer DeOe& DeeÙeg 40 efceveš Je 20 efceveš nw
Therefore number of nuclei decayed during time
lees 80 efceveš he§eele Mes<e veeefYekeâeW kesâ õJÙeceeve keâe  A1 – A 2 
Devegheele nesiee Ùeefo oesveeW kesâ ØeejbefYekeâ meef›eâÙe veeefYekeâ Internal (t1 - t2) is  λ  .
meceeve nw– 65. The number of beta particles emitted by a
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 radioactive substance is twice the number of
(c) 8 : 1 (d) 16 : 1 alpha particles emitted by it. The resulting
AIPMT-1998 daughter is an :
Ans. (a) : Total number of nuclei remained after n half- Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe heoeLe& mes Glmeefpe&le yeerše keâCeeW keâer
life's is- mebKÙee Gmekesâ Éeje Glmeefpe&le Suheâe keâCeeW keâer mebKÙee mes
n ogiegveer nw~ Øeehle ngDee heg$eer heoeLe& cetue heoeLe& keâe :
1
N = N0   , where n is the total no. of half life of an (a) Isotope of parent/ mecemLeeefvekeâ nesiee
2
element (b) Isobar of parent/ meceYeeefjkeâ nesiee
Total time given = 80min (c) Isomer of parent/ meceeJeÙeJeer nesiee
80 min (d) Isotone of parent/ mece vÙetš^e@veer nesieer
Number of half life's of A, n A = =2
40 min AIMPT-2009
Ans. (a) :
80 min
Number of half life's of B, n B = =4 A
X 
-α
→ z − 2 Y A − 4 
-2β
→ z P A −4
20 min z

Number of nuclei remained undecayed – The obtained daughter nucleus has different mass
n
number (A – 4) and same atomic no (z) as the parent
1 nucleus. Therefore the resulting daughter is an isotope
N= N0  
2 of parent.
where, Atomic No. Mass number (A)
No is initial number of nuclei (z)
n 2 Alpha Decay Z–2 A–4
1 1
A
1

NA  2     Beta Decay Z+1 No change
or   4 = 4 = ×
2 1 16
∴ =
NB  1  nB
1 1 4 1 Isotopes – Elements having different mass no and same
    16 atomic no.
2  2
Isobar – Elements having same mass no. and different
NA : NB = 4 : 1 atomic number.

Physics 609 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Isomer – same molecular formula but different structure 68. In radioactive decay process, the negatively
Isotone – same count of neutrons but different count of charged emitted β-particles are:-
protons. jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe #eÙe ceW Glmeefpe&le $e+Ce DeeJesMeer β-keâCe
66. In the nuclear decay given below :
A−4 A −4
nesles nQ:-
Z X → Z +1 Y → Z −1 B* → Z −1 B
A A
(a) the electrons orbiting around the nucleus
The particles emitted in the sequence are :
vÙetefkeäueÙeme kesâ efieo& Ietceves Jeeues Fueskeäš^e@ve
Fme vÙegkeäueF& #eÙe ceW :
(b) the electrons present inside the nucleus
A
X → ZA+1 Y → ZA−−14 B* → AZ −−14 B
Z vÙetefkeäueÙeme kesâ Yeerlej efJeÅeceeve Fueskeäš^e@ve
Glmeefpe&le keâCeeW keâe ›eâce nesiee : (c) the electrons produced as a result of the
(a) α,β,γ (b) β,α,γ decay of neutrons inside the nucleus/vÙetefkeäueÙeme
(c) γ,β,α (d) β,γ,α kesâ Yeerlej vÙetš^e@veeW kesâ #eÙe mes GlheVe Fueskeäš^e@ve
AIMPT-2009, 1993 (d) the electrons produced as a result of collisions
Ans. (b) : between atoms
Atomic Number Atomic mass hejceeCegDeeW kesâ škeâjeDeeWs ceW GlheVe Fueskeäš^e@ve~
z A AIPMT-2007
α - Decay Z-2 A–4 Ans. (c) : In radioactive decay process, Beta decay can
β - Decay Z+1 No change involve the emission of either electrons or positrons.
γ - Decay No change No change The electrons or positrons emitted in a β. decay do not
X A 
β
→Z+1 Y A 
α
→Z–1 B*A–4 
γ
→Z–1 BA–4 exist inside the nucleus.
Z
In negative β-decay a neutron in the nucleus is
67. Two radioactive materials X1 and X2 have transformed into a proton, an electron and an
decay constants 5λ and λ respectively. If antineutrino.
initially they have the same number of nuclei, Hence in radioactive decay process, the negatively
then the ratio of the number of nuclei of X1 to
charged emitted β particles are the electrons produced
1
that of X2 will be after a time – as a result of decay of neutrons present inside the
e nucleus.
oes efJeefkeâjCekeâ heoeLeex X1 Deewj X2 kesâ #eÙe efveÙeleebkeâ 69. Two radioactive substances A and B have
›eâceevegmeej 5λDeewj λnQ~ Ùeefo DeejcYe ceW Gvekesâ decay constants 5λ and λ respectively. At t =
kesâefvõkeâeW keâer mebKÙeeSB meceeve neW lees efkeâleves meceÙe he§eele 0 they have the same number of nuclei. The
1 ratio of number of nuclei of A to those of B will
X1 Deewj X2 ceW yeÛes kesâvõkeâeW keâe Devegheele nesiee? 2
e 1
be   after a time interval:-
(a)
1
(b)
e e
4λ λ oes jsef[ÙeesOeceea heoeLeeX A Deewj B kesâ #eÙe efveÙeleebkeâ
(c) λ
1
(d) λ
›eâceMe: 5λDeewj λnw~ meceÙe t = 0 hej Gvekesâ veeefYekeâeW
2 keâer mebKÙeeSb meceeve nw~ efkeâme meceÙe Devlejeue kesâ he§eele
AIPMT-2008 A Deewj B kesâ veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙeeDeeW keâe Devegheele
Ans. (a) : Given:- 2
1
  nesiee?
Two radioactive material X1 and X2
decay constant λ1 = 5λ (for X1) e
λ2 = λ (for X2) 1 1
(a) (b)
1 2λ 4λ
ratio of the no of nuclei of X1 and X2 =
e (c) 4λ (d) 2λ
Let Initial no of nuclei = N0 AIPMT-2007
Now for X1 ⇒ N1 = N0 e–5λt Ans. (a) : Given: Radioactive substance A and B have
for X2 ⇒ N2 = N0 e–λt
decay constant λ A = 5λ & λ B = λ
X1 N1 1 e −5λt
= = = Number of nuclei remained after time t
X 2 N 2 e e −λt
⇒ N = N 0 e −λt
e–1 = e–4λt
Where N0 → initial number of nuclei of both substance.
–4λt = –1
1 N A = N 0 e −5λt
t=
4λ and, N B = N 0 e - λt

Physics 610 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
2
NA  1  Half life of radioactive substance T1 = 1600yr
Given, =  2
NB  e  n
M 1
NA −4 λ t 1
2
So, = 
So, =e =  M0  2 
NB e n
−4 λt −2 25  1 
e =e = 
Comparing power of both side 100  2 
4 λt = 2 1 1
n

2 1 =  
t= = 4 2
4λ 2λ 2 n
1 1
70. In a radioactive material the activity at time t1    =
is R1 and at a later time t2, it is R2. If the decay 2 2
constant of the material is λ, then Comparing the power,
Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe heoeLe& keâer meef›eâÙelee meceÙe t1 hej R1 n=2
nw SJeb kegâÚ meceÙe he§eeled t2 hej R2 nw Ùeefo heoeLe& keâe t
=2
#eÙe efmLejebkeâ λ nes, lees T1
(a) R1 = R 2 e ( 1 2 ) (b) R1 = R 2 e ( 1 2 )
-λ t − t λ t −t 2

(c) R1 = R2 (t2/t1) (d) R1 = R2 t = 2 × T1

2
AIPMT-2006
t = 2 × 1600 = 3200 yr
Ans. (a) : The decay rate R of a radioactive material is
the number of decays per second. 72. A sample of radioactive element has a mass of
From radioactive decay law 10 gm at an instant t = 0. The approximate
−dN −dN mass of this element in the sample after two
∝ N or = λN mean lives is:
dt dt
−dN t = 0 meceÙe hej jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe lelJe kesâ Skeâ vecetves keâe
Thus R = or R = λN õJÙeceeve 10 gm nw~ oes ceeOÙe-DeeÙeg kesâ yeeo Fme vecetves
dt
or R = λ No e –λt
[Q we know N = No e ] –λt ceW lelJe keâe ueieYeie õJÙeceeve nw:
Activity of material at time t = 0 ⇒ Ro = λNo (a) 1.35 gm (b) 2.50 gm
−λt1
At time t1 ⇒ R1 = Ro e ...... (1) (c) 3.70 gm (d) 6.30 gm
−λt 2 AIPMT-2003
At time t2 ⇒ R2 = Ro e ..... (2)
n
dividing Eq (1) by (2) 1
Ans. (a): Mean life, τ = , λ being decay constant Also
R1 e −λt1 λ
= = e −λ( t1 −t 2 )
R 2 e −λt 2 time given ( t ) = 2τ = 2 × = .
1 2
λ λ
or R1 = R2 e ( 1 2 )
−λ t − t

Thus mass remained after time t is-

71. The half life of radium in about 1600 years. Of
M = M0e–λt
100g of radium existing now, 25g will remain
2
undecayed after :- −λ×
= 10e λ
jsef[Ùece keâe DeOe&DeeÙeg keâeue ueieYeie 1600 Je<e& neslee nw~
Q ( M 0 = 10g )
jsef[Ùece kesâ efpeme šgkeâÌ[s keâe õJÙeceeve 100g nw Jen efkeâleves
Je<e& he§eeled 25g Mes<e jn peeSiee :- = 10 e −2
(a) 6400 years/6400 Je<e& (b) 2400 years/2400 Je<e& 1
2

M = 10   = 1.359gm
(c) 3200 years/3200 Je<e& (d) 4800 years/4800 Je<e& e
AIPMT-2004 73. A nuclear reaction given by
Ans. (c) : Given M0 = 100g (initial mass) , M = 25g veeefYekeâ DeefYeef›eâÙee
(active mass)
A
Amount of substance remained is- ZX → Z + 1YA + –1e0 + v
1
n represents/efve™heefle keâjleer nw
M = M0   –
(a) β decay/ β #eÙe –
(b) γ-decay/ γ-#eÙe
2
Where, M = Substance remained (c) fusion/mebueÙeve (d) fission/efJeKeC[ve
M0 = initial amount AIPMT-2003
Physics 611 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): γ – decay – no change in mass and charge Ans. (a) : Consider initial number of atom = N0
β– decay – mass number is constant and atomic N
number increase by 1. At time t = T1 , atom left Nt = 0
2
So, –1e0 represents a β– decay. 2

As we know that,
74. A sample of radioactive element containing 4 ×
1016 active nuclei. Half life of element is 10 days. Nt = N0 e–λt
Then number of decayed nuclei after 30 days t = T1/2
Skeâ jsef[Ùees SsefkeäšJe lelJe keâer meef›eâÙe veeefYekeâ mebKÙee 4 × N
∴ 0 = N 0 e−λ T1/ 2
1016 nw~ Fmekeâer Deæ&DeeÙeg 10 efove nw, lees 30 efove 2
he§eele lelJe kesâ efJeIeefšle veeefYekeâeW keâer mebKÙee nesieer - 1
(a) 0.5 × 1016 (b) 2 × 1016 = e −λT1/ 2
16
2
(c) 3.5 × 10 (d) 1 × 1016 ln2 = λ T1/2 [By taking 'log' on both sides above]
AIPMT-2002
ln2
Ans. (c) : No. of active nuclei present in original sample T1/ 2 =
N0 = 4×1016 λ
Half life of element n1 = 10 days. 77. A radio-active elements emits one α and β
No of Half-life in 30 days, n2 = 30 days particles then mass number. of daughter
4 × 1016 element is
Number of nuclei present after 30 days =
23 Skeâ jsef[Ùees meef›eâÙe veeefYekeâ α-keâCe β -keâCe Glmeefpe&le
= 0.5 ×1016 keâjlee nw, lees mebleefle veeefYekeâ keâer õJÙeceeve mebKÙee :
n2
 1  n1 (a) Decreased by 4/4 mes keâce nes peeleer nw
N = N0  
2 (b) Increased by 4 /4 mes yeÌ{ peeleer nw
3 (c) Decreased by 2/2 mes keâce nes peeleer nw
1
N = 4 × 1016   (d) Increased by 2/2 mes yeÌ{ peeleer nw
2
N = 4 × 10 ×1/8 = 1016/2
16 AIPMT-1999
⇒ Decayed atom = 4 × 10 - 1/2 × 10 = 3.5 × 10 .
16 16 16 Ans. (a) :
75. Which of the following is not the property of m −α m−4 −β m − 4 
Cathode rays / efvecve ceW mes keâewve mee iegCe kewâLeesÌ[
A  → A  → A
p p−2  p −1 
efkeâjCeeW kesâ efueÙes melÙe veneR nw - (α2+ → He)
(a) It produces heating effect
When radio-active elements emits one α and β
Ùen G<ceerÙe ØeYeeJe GlheVe keâjleer nw~ particles then mass number of daughter element is
(b) It does not deflect in electric field decreased by 4.
Ùen efJeÅegle #es$e Éeje efJe#esefhele veneR nesleer nw~ 78. The half life of a radio nuclide is 77 days then
(c) It casts shadow / Ùen ÚeÙee GlheVe keâjleer nw~ its decay constant is/jsef[Ùees meef›eâÙe veeefYekeâ Skeâ
(d) It produces flurosence Deæ& DeeÙeg 77 efove nw, lees #eÙe efveÙeleebkeâ keäÙee nesiee :
Ùen Øeefleoerefhle GlheVe keâjleer nw~
(a) 0.003/day/0.003/efove
AIPMT-2002
(b) 0.006/day/0.006/efove
Ans. (b) :
(i) Cathode rays shows both particle as well as wave (c) 0.009/day/0.009/efove
nature. Thus it casts shadow, produces fluorescence (d) 0.012/day/0.012/efove
& heat effect as well. AIPMT-1999
(ii) Cathode rays consist of electrons which get
deflected in electric field, thus cathode ray gets Ans. (c) : Half life of radio nuclide = 0.693
deflected in electric field. λ
76. The relation between λ and T1/2 is : (T1/2 = half 0.693
λ= = 0.009/day
life, λ → decay constant) 77
Deæ& DeeÙeg T1/2 leLee #eÙeebkeâ λ kesâ ceOÙe mecyevOe nw – 79. Which rays contain (+ Ve) charged particle : -
(a) T1/ 2 =
ℓn2
(b) T1/ 2 ℓn2 = λ
efvecve ceW mes keâewvemee OeveeJesefMele keâCe nw-
λ (a) α-rays/ α- efkeâjCeW (b) β-rays/ β-efkeâjCeW
1 ℓn (c) γ-rays/ γ- efkeâjCeW (d) X-rays/ X- efkeâjCeW
(c) T1/ 2 = (d) ( λ + T1/ 2 ) =
λ 2 AIPMT-2001
AIPMT-2000
Physics 612 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Alpha particle: A positively charged particle Ans. (a): Half-life time = 30 minute
that consists of two protons & two neutrons bound Rate of decrease = 5 per sec
together. It is emitted by an atomic nucleus undergoing total time = 2 hours = 120 min
radioactive decay and is identical to the nucleus of a
Relation for initial and final count
helium atom.
We know that,
β - particles are fast moving electrons ⇒ e- T/t
γ - rays are electromagnetic waves ⇒ Em waves 1
A = A0  
x – rays are electromagnetic waves ⇒ Em waves 2
120 / 30
80. The most penetrating radiation out of the 1
following are 5 = A0  
2
meyemes DeefOekeâ efJeYesove #ecelee Jeeueer efJeefkeâjCe nw: 4
(a) β-rays/β-keâCe 1
5 = A0  
(b) γ-rays/γ-keâjCeW 2
(c) X-rays/X-keâjCeW A
5= 0
(d) α-rays/α-keâCe 16
AIPMT-1997 A0 = 5×16
= 80 sec–1
Ans. (b) : Gamma (γ) rays have the maximum
penetrating power. 83. The mass of α-particle is
Gamma rays have maximum penetrating power because α-keâCe keâe õJÙeceeve nw:
they are highly energetic waves. Greater the energy of a (a) less than the sum of masses of two protons
wave higher is its penetrating power.
and two neutrons/oes Øeesše@ve leLee oes vÙetš^e@ve kesâ
• γ-rays have the shortest wave length among the given
option. When the wave length is shorter the penetrating õJÙeceeve kesâ Ùeesie mes keâce
power is more. (b) equal to mass of four protons/Ûeej Øeesše@ve kesâ
81. What is the respective number of α and β õJÙeceeve kesâ yejeyej
particles emitted in the following radioactive (c) equal to mass of four neutrons/Ûeej vÙetš^e@ve kesâ
decay?/efvecve meceerkeâjCe ceW efkeâleves α-keâCe leLee β-keâCe
õJÙeceeve kesâ yejeyej
Glmeefpe&le neWies? (d) equal to sum of masses of two protons and
200
X 90 →168 Y80 two neutrons/oes Øeesše@ve leLee oes vÙetš^e@ve kesâ õJÙeceeve
(a) 8 and 8 (b) 8 and 6 kesâ Ùeesie kesâ yejeyej
(c) 6 and 8 (d) 6 and 6 AIPMT-1992
AIPMT-1995
Ans. (a) : The mass of α-particle is less than the sum of
Ans. (b) : We have, masses of two protons and two neutrons because some
90 X → 80 Y + x 2 α + y−1 β
200 168 4
mass is converted in binding energy of the nucleus.
Atomic mass:- 84. The half life of radium is 1600 years. The
200 =168 + 4 x + 0 y fraction of a sample of radium that would
32 = 4x remain after 6400 years
x=8 jsef[Ùece keâer Deæ&DeeÙeg 1600 Je<e& nw~ 6400 Je<e& yeeo
Atomic number:- Fmekeâe efkeâlevee Yeeie Mes<e yeÛesiee?
90 = 80 + 2x – y
10 = 2 × 8 – y (a) 1/4 (b) 1/2
y = 16 – 10 (c) 1/8 (d) 1/16
y=6 AIPMT-1991
82. The count rate of a Geiger Muller counter for Ans. (d) : As radioactive decay is first-order kinetic half
the radiation of a radioactive material of half- life given is 1600 years in 6400 number of half-life is
life of 30 minutes decreases to 5 second after 2 n = –1 6400
=4
hours. The initial count rate was 1600
30 efceveš Deæ&-DeeÙeg kesâ Skeâ jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙe õJÙe keâer Fraction of element remains after n half life is given by
ieeFiej cetuej keâeGvšj ceW keâeGvš oj 2 IeCšs ceW Ieškeâj = 1
5 Øeefle meskeâC[ nes peeleer nw~ DeejefcYekeâ keâeGvšj oj Leer: 2n
(a) 80 second–1 (b) 625 second–1 Hence, fraction of radium remains after 4 half-life
–1 –1 1 1
(c) 20 second (d) 25 second = 4 =
AIPMT-1995 2 16
Physics 613 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
85. The nucleus 6C12 absorbs an energetic neutron A → B + 2 He 4 ;B → C + 2e– , Then
and emits a beta particle (β). The resulting (a) A and C are isotopes
nucleus is (b) A and C are isobars
veeefYekeâ 6C12 ves Skeâ Tefpe&le vÙetš^e@ve DeJeMeesef<ele leLee (c) A and B are isobars
Skeâ β-keâCe Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw, lees veÙee veeefYekeâ nw: (d) A and B are isobars.
(a) N 14 (b) N 13 AIPMT-1989
7 7
Ans. (a) : The first process is an α-decay,
(c) 5 B13 (d) 6 C13
zA
M
→ z–2 BM–4 + 2 He 4
AIPMT-1990
Ans. (b) : The general equation for beta decay is given ∴ A losses two protons
by, A second process is β – decay
A

Z X A → Z+1 X' + −1 e0 + ve z–2 B

M–4
→ z C M–4 + 2e −
Where A and Z are the mass number and atomic ∴ C gains two protons
number X and X' are initial and final elements Hence, atomic number z is same for A and C thus they
So, the reaction equation can be written as, are isotopes.
6 C12
+ 0 n 1
→ Z X A
+ −1 e 0
88. Curie is a unit of
So, balancing mass number we get, keäÙetjer cee$ekeâ nw-
12+1 = A+0 (a) energy of gamma rays/ieecee efkeâjCeeW keâer Tpee& keâe
A = 13
Now balancing the atomic number of the equation form (b) half-life/Deæ&-DeeÙeg keâe
both sides we get- (c) radioactivity/jsef[Ùeesmeef›eâÙelee keâe
6+0 = z–1 (d) intensity of gamma rays/ieecee efkeâjCeeW keâer leer›elee
∴ z=7 keâe
So, the resulting nucleus has an atomic number 7. AIPMT-1989
Thus, the resulting nucleus will be 7 N13 Ans. (c) : Curie is a unit of radioactivity
86. A radioactive element has half life period 800 • A curie is a non-SI unit of radioactivity
years. After 6400 years what amount will • The system international of units (SI system) uses the
remain? unit of Becquerel (Bq) as its unit of radioactivity.
efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe vecetves keâer Deæ&DeeÙeg 800 Je<e& nw~ • One wire is equal to 37 billion Bq 37 billion Bq = 1
Jen 6400 Je<e& kesâ yeeo efkeâlevee Mes<e yeÛesiee? curie.
(a) 1/2 (b) 1/16 89. A radioactive sample with a half life of 1 month
(c) 1/8 (d) 1/256 has the label : 'Activity = 2 micro curies on 1–
AIPMT-1989 8–1991'. What would be its activity two months
Ans. (d) : We know that, earlier?
t Skeâ jsef[ÙeesSsefkeäšJe heoeLe& vecetves keâer Deæ&-DeeÙeg 1
Number of half-life (n) =
T cenervee nw~ Gme hej Debefkeâle nw- efleefLe 1.8.1991 hej
Given, T = 800 years meef›eâÙelee = 2 ceeF›eâes keäÙetjer oes cenerves henues meef›eâÙelee
t = 6400 years keäÙee Leer?
6400
n= (a) 1.0 micro curie/1.0 ceeF›eâes keäÙetjer
800
(b) 0.5 micro curie/0.5 ceeF›eâes keäÙetjer
n=8
n (c) 4 micro curie/4 ceeF›eâes keäÙetjer
N 1
Then, =  (d) 8 micro curie/8 ceeF›eâes keäÙetjer
N0  2 
8
AIPMT-1988
N 1
=  Ans. (d) : We know that-
N0  2  N
1 N = 0n
= (2)
256 n = no. of half lives
87. An element A decays into element C by a two So, In 2 half lives the activity becomes fourth of activity
step processes before 2 months
Skeâ lelJe A, lelJe C ceW oes ÛejCe Øe›eâceeW Éeje efJeIeefšle = 4×2
neslee nw~ lees = 8 micro curie.
Physics 614 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
90. The nucleus 115
48 Cd, after two successive β-decay also, ∑Atomic mass number on LHS = 235 + 1 = 236
will give ∑Atomic mass number on RHS = P+89+3×1 = P + 92
48 Cd
115
veeefYekeâ mes 2-›eâceeiele β- #eÙe nesiee, lees Mes<e ∴ LHS = RHS
P + 92 = 236
jnsiee: P = 144
(a) 115 46 Pa (b) 114
49 In So, element is 144 56 Ba .
113 115
(c) 50 Sn (d) 50 Sn 93. A certain mass of Hydrogen is changed to
AIPMT-1988 Helium by the process of fusion. The-mass
Ans. (d) : Emission of beta negative particle decay a defect in fusion reaction is 0.02866 U. The
neutron into a proton (increases atomic number by 1), energy liberated per U is : (given 1U = 931
MeV)
electron and electron antineutrino but mass number
remains same. So 2 beta negative particle will increase mebueÙeve Øe›eâce Éeje neF[^espeve keâer kegâÚ cee$ee keâe
nerefueÙece ceW heefjJele&ve neslee nw~ Fme Øe›eâce ceW õJÙeceeve
atomic number by 2 and 115 Cd will convert to 115 Sn
48 50 #eefle 0.02866U nw~ lees Øeefle U cegòeâ Tpee& nesieer-
2β
48 Cd
115
 →50 X115 (efoÙee nw 1U = 931 Mev)
91. Which of the following is used as a moderator (a) 13.35 MeV (b) 2.67 MeV
in nuclear reaction? (c) 26.7 MeV (d) 6.675 MeV
efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmekeâe GheÙeesie hejceeCeg Øeefleef›eâÙee NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
kesâ cebokeâ kesâ ™he ceW efkeâÙee peelee nw? Ans. (d) : Given:
(a) Cadmium/Cd Mass defect ∆m = 0.02866U
1u = 931MeV
(b) Plutonium/Pu
(c) Uranium/U Energy liberated = ∆mc 2 [(1u)c2=931 Mev]
(d) Heavy water/D2O E = 0.02866 × 931 MeV
AIPMT-1997 = 26.68 MeV
Ans. (d) : Heavy water (D2O) is used as a moderator in E
Energy liberated per U =
nuclear reactor. A
Heavy water is also known as deuterium oxide (D2O). It 26.68
is form of water that contains a large amount of =
4
hydrogen isotope i.e. deuterium (heavy hydrogen) = 6.671 MeV
 6.675 MeV
27.7 Nuclear Energy 94. The power obtained in a reactor using U235
disintegration is 1000 kW. The mass decay of
235
92. When a uranium isotopes 92 U is bombarded U235 per hour is :/ U235 efJeKeC[ve keâe GheÙeesie keâjves
with a neutron, it generates 89
36 Kr , three Jeeues Skeâ efjSkeäšj mes 1000 kW Meefòeâ keâe Glheeove
neutrons and : neslee nw, lees Øeefle Ievše #eefleÙe U235 keâe õJÙeceeve nw :
1 microgram/1 ceeF›eâes«eece
peye ÙetjsefveÙece kesâ efkeâmeer mecemLeeefvekeâ 92235 U hej vÙetš^e@ve (a)
yeceyeejer keâjlee nw, lees 8936 Kr Deewj leerve 10 microgram/10 ceeF›eâes«eece
vÙetš^e@veeW kesâ (b)
meeLe GlheVe nesves Jeeuee veeefYekeâ nw: 20 microgram/20 ceeFkeâes«eece
(c)
40 microgram/40 ceeF›eâes«eece
(d)
(a) 9140 Zr (b) 101
36 Kr
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
(c) 103
36 Kr (d) 144
56 Ba
Ans. (d) : Given – E = 1000 × 103 × 3600 J {∵E=P.t}
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 As we know, E = mc2
235
Ans. (d) Nuclear fission reaction of 92 U is, So, 1000 × 103 × 3600 = m (3× 108)2
235
+ 0 n1 → e X P + 36 Kr 89 + 30 n1 + e(energy) m = 4×10–8 kg = 4×10–5 gm
92 U
m = 40 micro gram.
∑Atomic number on LHS = 92 +0 = 92
95. The mass of a 37 Li nucleus is 0.042 u less than
∑Atomic number on RHS = Q + 36 + 3×0 = Q + 36
the sum of the masses of all its nucleons. The
∴ LHS = RHS
binding energy per nucleon of 37 Li nucleus is
Q + 36 = 92
Q = 56 nearly –

Physics 615 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
7
3 Li keâe õJÙeceeve Fmekesâ meYeer veeefYekeâerÙe keâCeeW kesâ Ans. (c):
õJÙeceeveeW kesâ Ùeesie mes 0.042 u keâce nw~ 37 Li veeefYekeâ keâer
Øeefle vÙegefkeäueDee@ve yebOeve Tpee& nesieer -
(a) 46 MeV (b) 5.6 MeV
(c) 3.9 MeV (d) 23 MeV
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (b) : m = 1u , c = 3×108 m/s As we can see from figure the binding energy per
Energy correspondence to 1 u is E = 931 MeV nucleon decreases with increase in mass number.
Given mass of nucleus is 0.042 u. Fission occurs generally for elements with high atomic
So binding energy = 0.042×931 = 39.10 MeV mass.
Therefore we can say that fission of nuclei is possible
Binding energy per nucleon of 7 Li is because the binding energy per nucleon in them
3
decreases with mass number at high mass number.
39.10
= = 5.58 ≈ 5.6 Mev 98. If in a nuclear fusion process the masses of the
7
fusing nuclei be m1 and m2 and the mass of the
96. In any fission process the ratio resultant nucleus be m3 then
mass of fission products Ùeefo efkeâmeer veeefYekeâerÙe Øeef›eâÙee ceW mebieueveer veeefYekeâeW kesâ
is-
mass of parent nucleus õJÙeceeve m1 leLee m2 neW Deewj heefjCeeceer veeefYekeâ keâe
efkeâmeer efJeKeC[ve ef›eâÙee ceW Devegheele, õJÙeceeve m3 nes, lees -
efJeKeC[ve heâueesW keâe õJÙeceeve Ùeesie (a) m3 = |m1–m2| (b) m3 < (m1 + m2)
keâe ceeve nesiee-
efJeKeC[ve hetJe& veeefYekeâ keâe õJÙeceeve (c) m3 > (m1 + m2) (d) m3 = m1 + m2
(a) Greater than 1/Skeâ mes DeefOekeâ AIPMT-2004
(b) Depends on the mass of the parent Ans. (b) : In a nuclear fusion, when two light nuclei of
nucleus/pevekeâ veeefYekeâ kesâ õJÙeceeve hej efveYe&j nesiee different masses are combined to form a stable nucleus,
then some mass is lost and appears in the form of
(c) Equal to 1/Skeâ kesâ yejeyej
energy, called the mass defect. So the mass of resultant
(d) Less than 1/Skeâ mes keâce nucleus is always less than the sum of masses of initial
AIPMT-2005 nuclei i.e. m3 < (m1 + m2)
Ans. (d) : fission → breaks → smaller 99. Solar energy is mainly caused due to:
U  n
→ kr + Ba + energy meewj Tpee& keâe cegKÙe keâejCe nw:
In fission process, when a parent nucleus breaks into (a) burning of hydrogen in the oxygen
daughter products, then some mass is lost in the form of Dee@keämeerpeve ceW neF[^espeve keâe peuevee
energy. Thus, mass of fission products < mass of parent
nucleus (b) fission of uranium present in the sun
massof fission product metÙe& ceW GheefmLele ÙetjsefveÙece keâe efJeKeC[ve
⇒ <1 (c) fusion of protons during synthesis of heavier
massof friend nucleus
elements
97. Fission of nuclei is possible because the binding Yeejer lelJeeW kesâ mebMues<eCe kesâ oewjeve Øeesše@veeW keâe mebueÙeve
energy per nucleon in them-
veeefYekeâeW keâer efJeKeC[ve ef›eâÙee mecYeJe nesleer nw~ keäÙeeWefkeâ (d) gravitational contraction/ieg™lJeerÙe mebkegâÛeve
GveceW DeeyevOekeâ Tpee& ØeeflevÙetefkeäueDee@ve- AIPMT-2003
(a) Decreases with mass number at low mass Ans. (c): Solar Energy is created by Nuclear Fusion that
numbers/vÙetve õJÙeceeve mebKÙee nesves hej õJÙeceeve takes place in the sun. Fusion occurs when protons of
mebKÙee yeÌ{ves keâs meeLe Ieš peeleer nw~ hydrogen atoms violently collide in the Sun's core and
fuse to create a Helium atom. This process known as a
(b) Increases with mass number at low mass
PPL proton -proton chain reaction, emits an enormous
numbers/vÙetve õJÙeceeve mebKÙee nesves hej õJÙeceeve
amount of energy. The energy, heat and light from the
mebKÙee yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe yeÌ{ peeleer nw~ sun, flow away in the form of electromagnetic radiation
(c) Decreases with mass number at high mass (EMR).
numbers/GÛÛe õJÙeceeve mebKÙeeDeeW hej õJÙeceeve mebKÙee
100. Which of the following are suitable for the
yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe Ieš peeleer nw~ fusion process / veeefYekeâerÙe mebueÙeve Øe›eâce kesâ efueS
(d) Increases with mass number at high mass
efvecve GheÙeg&òeâ nesles nw -
numbers/GÛÛe õJÙeceeve mebKÙeeDeeW hej õJÙeceeve mebKÙee
(a) Light nuclei / nukesâ veeefYekeâ
yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
(b) Heavy nuclei / Yeejer veeefYekeâ
AIPMT-2005
Physics 616 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) Element must be lying in the middle of the 103. Energy released in the fission of a single 235 92 U
periodic table / DeeJele& meejCeer kesâ ceOÙe kesâ lelJe nucleus is 200 MeV. The fission rate of a 92U235
(d) Middle elements, which are lying on binding fuel reactor operating at a power level of 5 W is
energy curve / yevOeve Tpee& Je›eâ kesâ ceOÙe kesâ lelJe Skeâue 92 U 235 veeefYekeâ kesâ efJeKeb[ve ceW 200 MeV Tpee&
AIPMT-2002 cegòeâ nesleer nw~ 5W Meefòeâ kesâ efueS mebÛeeefuele
Ans. (a) : nesves Jeeues 92 U 235 F&Oeve Jeeues efjSkeäšj keâer efJeKeb[ve oj
(i) Fusion process leads to increase in mass number.
keäÙee nw?
(ii) For light nuclei fusion process increase the binding
energy per nucleon which increases stability of nuclei. (a) 1.56 × 10–10 s–1 (b) 1.56 × 1011 s–1
The same is not true for heavy nuclei. (c) 1.56 × 10–16 s–1 (d) 1.56 × 10–17 s–1
∴Light nuclei are suitable for fusion process. AIPMT-1993
101. Energy is released in nuclear fission is due to Ans. (b) : Power = energy released per second
veeefYekeâ kesâ efJeKeC[ve ceW Tpee& GlheVe nesleer nw, keäÙeeWefkeâ- nE
P= 1
(a) Few mass is converted into energy t
Where, n = Number of session reaction
kegâÚ õJÙeceeve Tpee& ceW heefjJeefle&le nes peelee nw
E1 = Energy released in a single fission
(b) Total binding energy of fragements is more
n P
than the B.E. of parantel element/efJeIeefšle YeeieeW Fission rate =
t E1
keâer kegâue yebOeve Tpee& hewlekeâ veeefYekeâ mes DeefOekeâ nesleer nw
(c) Total B.E. of fragements is less than the B.E. The fission rate = 5Joule
of parantel element/efJeIeefšle YeeieesW keâer kegâue yebOeve 200 MeV
Tpee& hewlekeâ veeefYekeâ mes keâce nesleer nw 5
n=
(d) Total B.E. of fragements is equals to the B.E. 200 × 1.6 × 10 –13
of parantal element is/efJeIeefšle YeeieeW keâer kegâue yebOeve ∴ (1 Mev = 1.6×10–13J )
Tpee& hewlekeâ veeefYekeâ kesâ leguÙe nesleer nw n = 1.5×1011s–1
AIPMT-2001
Ans. (b) : (1) Energy is released in nuclear fusion is due 27.8 NCERT Exemplar Problems
to total binding energy (BE) of fragments is more than
BE of parental element. 104. Suppose we consider a large number of
(2) Nuclear fission occurs in heavy nuclei & leads to containers each containing initially 10000
formation of lighter nuclei. atoms of a radioactive material with a half life
(3) It is well known from BE curve that for heavier of 1 year. After 1 year,/ceeve ueerefpeS nce Ssmes yengle
nuclei a decrease in atomic mass lead to increase of mes hee$eeW hej efJeÛeej keâjles nQ efpeveceW ØelÙeskeâ ceW ØeejcYe ceW
binding energy per nuclear in a nucleus. 1 Je<e& DeOee&Ùeg Jeeues jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe heoeLe& kesâ 10000
102. Nuclear – Fission is best explained by : hejceeCeg nQ~ 1 Je<e& kesâ heMÛeeled
veeefYekeâerÙe efJeKeC[ve keâes efvecve ceW mes meyemes mener lejerkesâ (a) all the containers will have 5000 atoms of the
mes mecePeeÙee pee mekeâlee nw – material./meYeer hee$eeW ceW Fme heoeLe& kesâ 5000 hejceeCeg
(a) Liquid droplet theory/õJe-efyevog efmeæevle mes neWies~
(b) Yukawa π - meson theory (b) all the containers will contain the same
ÙegkeâeJee π-cesmeeve efmeæevle mes number of atoms of the material but that
(c) Independent particle model of the number will only be approximately 5000./meYeer
nucleus/veeefYekeâ keâe mJelev$e keâCe cee@[ue mes hee$eeW ceW Fme heoeLe& kesâ hejceeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee meceeve
(d) Proton-proton cycle/Øeesše@ve - Øeesše@ve Ûe›eâ mes nesieer, hejvleg Ùen ueieYeie 5000 nesieer~
AIPMT-2000 (c) the containers will in general have different
number of the atoms of the material but their
Ans. (a) : Nuclear Fission is best explained by Liquid
droplet theory. In this theory, a nucleus is compared to a average will be close to 5000./meeceevÙe leewj hej
liquid drop by assuming the nucleons to be similar to Fve hee$eeW ceW Fme heoeLe& kesâ hejceeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee efYevve
molecules of liquid. If a liquid drop is disturbed, it will nesieer, hejvleg Fvekeâe Deewmele 5000 kesâ efvekeâš nesiee~
oscillate & tend to pinch off into 2 droplets. Similarly, if (d) none of containers can have more than 5000
a nucleus is disturbed externally with neutrons, it atoms./efkeâmeer Yeer hee$e ceW Fme heoeLe& kesâ 5000
undergoes fission. hejceeCegDeeW mes DeefOekeâ veneR neWies~
Physics 617 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): We know that (a) do not change for any type of
n radioactivity./efkeâmeer Yeer Øekeâej keâer jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJelee kesâ
1
N = N0   efueS keâesF& heefjJele&ve veneR neslee~
2
Where, n = 1 (b) change for α and β radioactivity but not for γ-
N0 = 10000 radioactivity./α SJeb β jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJelee kesâ efueS
1
1
heefjJele&ve nesles nQ hejvleg γ jsef[Ùees SefkeäšJelee kesâ efueS keâesF&
N = 10000 ×  
2 heefjJele&ve veneR nesles~
N = 5000 (c) change for α-radioactivity but not for
Hence, the average number of atoms of radioactive others./α-jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJelee kesâ efueS heefjJele&ve nesles nQ,
chemical left in each container after one year is half of hejvleg DevÙe kesâ efueS veneR~
10,000 which is equal to 5000 atoms (average). (d) change for β-radioactivity but not for others.
105. The gravitational force between a H-atom and β-jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJelee kesâ efueS heefjJele&ve nesles nQ, hejvleg
another particle of mass m will be given by
DevÙe kesâ efueS veneR~
M.m
Newton's law : F = G 2 , where r is in km Ans. (b) : • α – particle has 2 unit of positive charge i.e.
r 2+
and/efkeâmeer neF[^espeve hejceeCeg leLee m õJÙeceeve kesâ He
efkeâmeer DevÙe keâCe kesâ ceOÙe ieg®lJeerÙe yeue keâes vÙetšve kesâ • β particle has either a single negative or positive
efveÙece Éeje efve™efhele efkeâÙee peeSiee– charge.
• γ particle has no charge.
M.m
F = G 2 , ÙeneB r efkeâueesceeršj ceW nw leLee Hence, the electronic energy levels of the atom, changes
r
(a) M = m +m for α and β radioactivity but not for γ-radioactivity.
proton electron
B 107. Mx and My denote the atomic masses of the
(b) M = mproton + melectron – 2
(B = 13.6 e V) parent and the daughter atom respectively in a
c
(c) M is not related to the mass of the hydrogen radioactive decay. The Q-value for a β –decay is
atom./ M neF[^espeve hejceeCeg kesâ õJÙeceeve mes mebyebefOele Q1 and that for a β+decay is Q2. If me denotes
veneR nw~ the mass of an electron, then which of the
following statements is correct?/ Mx leLee My
V
(d) M = mproton + melectron – 2
c
efkeâmeer jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe efJeIešve ceW cetue Deewj efJeIešve
(|V|) = magnitude of the potential energy of veeefYekeâeW kesâ hejceeCeg õJÙeceeveeW keâes efve™efhele keâjles nQ~ β
electron in the H-atom./ M = mproton + efJeIešve keâe Q-ceeve Q1 Deewj β+ efJeIešve keâe Q ceeve Q2
V nw~ Ùeefo me Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve kesâ õJÙeceeve keâes efve™efhele
melectron – 2 (|V|) = H-hejceeCeg ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer
c keâjlee nw lees FveceW mes keâewve7mee ØekeâLeve mener nw?
efmLeeflepe Tpee& keâe heefjceeCe
(a) Q1 = (Mx – My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My – 2me)
Ans. (b) : As we know that during the production of H-
c2
atom, some of the mass of the nucleons (n + p)
converted into energy, which is then used to bind the (b) Q1 = (Mx – My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My) c2
nucleons together with the nucleus and it is subtracted (c) Q1 = (Mx – My – 2me)c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My +
2me)c2
B.E
from actual mass of H-atom i.e. 2 (d) Q1 = (Mx – My + 2me)c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My
c +2me)c2
Where M = effective mass of H-atom
Ans. (a) : Let the parent nuclei ZXA is a radioactive
B.E atom.
M = Mass of proton + Mass of electron – 2
c Case 1 : For β– decay–
and B.E. of H-atom is 13.6 eV per atom. ZX → Z + 1Y +–Ie + ν + Q1
A A o

106. When a nucleus in an atom undergoes a Q1 = [m(ZXA) – mn(Z + 1YA) – me]c2

radioactive decay, the electronic energy levels Q1 = [mn(ZXA) + meZ – mn(Z + 1YA) – (z + 1) me]c2
of the atom/peye efkeâmeer hejceeCeg kesâ veeefYekeâ keâe
Q1 = [m (ZXA) – m(Z + 1YA)]c2
jsef[ÙeesSefkeäšJe efJeIešve neslee nw lees hejceeCeg kesâ
Fueskeäš^e@efvekeâ Tpee& mlejeW ceW Q1 = (M x – M y )c 2

Physics 618 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Case 2 : For β + decay – 109. Heavy stable nuclei have more neutrons than
A
→ z – 1Y + Ie + ν + Q2
A o protons. This is because of the fact that/mLeeÙeer
ZX

Q2 = [mn(ZX ) – mn (Z – 1YA) – 2me]c2

A Yeejer veeefYekeâeW ceW vÙetš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee Øeesše@veeW mes DeefOekeâ
Q2 = [mn(ZXA) + Zme – mn(Z – 1YA) – (z – 1) me – nesleer nw~ Fmekeâe keâejCe Ùen nw efkeâ
2me]c2 (a) neutrons are heavier than protons./vÙetš^e@ve Øeesše@ve
Q2 = [mn (ZXA) – me (Z – 1YA) – 2me]c2 mes DeefOekeâ Yeejer nesles nQ~
Q2 = (Mx – My – 2me)c2 (b) electrostatic force between protons are
108. Tritium is an isotope of hydrogen whose repulsive./Øeesše@veeW kesâ yeerÛe efmLej efJeÅegle yeue
nucleus triton contains 2 neutrons and 1 Øeeflekeâ<e&Ceelcekeâ neslee nw~
proton. Free neutrons decay into p + e– + v . If (c) neutrons decay into protons through beta
one of the neutrons in triton decays, it would decay./ β-efJeIešve Éeje vÙetš^e@ve Øeesše@veeW ceW efJeIeefšle nes
transform into He3 nucleus. This is peeles nQ~
because/š^eFefšÙece neF[^espeve keâe Skeâ mecemLeeefvekeâ nw (d) nuclear forces between neutrons are weaker
efpemekesâ veeefYekeâ š^eFše@ve ceW oes vÙetš^e@ve Deewj Skeâ Øeesše@ve than that between protons./vÙetš^e@veeW kesâ yeerÛe
nw~ cegkeäle vÙetš^e@ve p + e– + v ceW efJeIeefšle nes peeles nQ~ veeefYekeâerÙe yeue Øeesše@ve kesâ yeerÛe veeefYekeâerÙe yeue keâer Dehes#ee
Ùeefo š^eFše@ve kesâ oes vÙetš^e@veeW ceW mes efkeâmeer Skeâ vÙetš^e@ve ogye&ue neslee nw~
keâe efJeIešve neslee, lees Ùen He3 veeefYekeâ ceW ™heevleefjle Ans. (b) : Heavy nuclei which are stable contain more
neutrons than protons in their nuclei. This is because
nes peelee, Ssmee neslee keäÙeeWefkeâ
electrostatic force between protons is repulsive which
(a) Triton energy is less than that of a He3 may reduce stability.
nucleus./š^eFše@ve keâer Tpee& He3 veeefYekeâ keâer Tpee& mes 110. In a nuclear reactor, moderators slow down the
keâce nesleer nw~ neutrons which come out in a fission process.
(b) the electron created in the beta decay process The moderator used have light nuclei. Heavy
cannot remain in the nucleus./β-efJeIešve Øeef›eâÙee nuclei will not serve the purpose because/efkeâmeer
ceW Glhevve Fueskeäš^e@ve veeefYekeâ kesâ Yeerlej veneR jn mekeâlee~ veeefYekeâerÙe efjSkeäšj ceW DeJecebokeâ efJeKeb[ve Øeef›eâÙee ceW
(c) both the neutrons in triton have decay cegkeäle vÙetš^e@veeW keâer ieefle keâes cebo keâj osles nQ~ DeJecebokeâ kesâ
simultaneously resulting in a nucleus with 3 ™he ceW nukesâ veeefYekeâeW keâe ØeÙeesie efkeâÙee peelee nw~ Yeejer
protons, which is not a He3 nucleus./š^eFše@ve ceW veeefYekeâ Ùen GösMÙe hetje veneR keâj mekeâles, keäÙeeWefkeâ
oesveeW vÙetš^e@ve meeLe-meeLe efJeIeefšle nesles nQ, efpemekesâ (a) they will break up./Jes štš peeSBies~
heâuemJe™he leerve Øeesše@veeW keâe Skeâ veeefYekeâ yevelee nw pees (b) elastic collision of neutrons with heavy nuclei
He3 veeefYekeâ veneR neslee~ will not slow them down. /Yeejer veeefYekeâeW kesâ meeLe
(d) because free neutrons decay due to external vÙetš^e@veeW keâe ØelÙeemLe mebIeó GvnW Oeercee veneR keâjsiee~
perturbations which is absent in a triton (c) the net weight of the reactor would be
nucleus./keäÙeeWefkeâ cegkeäle vÙetš^e@ve yeendÙe #eesYe kesâ keâejCe unbearably high./efjSkeäšj keâe vesš Yeej DelÙeefOekeâ nes
efJeIeefšle nesles nQ Deewj š^eFše@ve veeefYekeâ ceW cegkeäle vÙetš^e@ve peeSiee~
veneR nesles~ (d) substances with heavy nuclei do not occur in
liquid or gaseous state at room temperature./
Ans. (a) : Given,
Yeejer veeefYekeâeW Jeeues heoeLe& keâ#e-leehe hej õJe DeLeJee
The nucleus of tritium (1H3) contains 1 proton & 2
neutrons. iewmeerÙe DeJemLee ceW veneR heeS peeles~
When a neutron decay as n → p + e – + ν Ans. (b) : Light nuclei such as hydrogen or deuterium,
have lower masses compared to heavy nuclei like
The nucleus of tritium may have 2 protons and one
uranium or plutonium. When a fast neutron collides
neutron i.e. tritium will transform into 2He3 (2 proton
with a light nucleus, at transfers more energy due to the
and 1 neutron).
mass difference, resulting in more significant reduction
Binding energy of 1 H 3 is much smaller than 2 He 3 in neutron speed. Heavy nuclei are less efficient at
(2 protons and 1 neutron) slowing down fast neutrons due to their larger mass.
Physics 619 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
28.
Semiconduction Electronics :
Materials, Devices and
Simple Circuits
(c) In case of C the valance band is not
28.1 Introduction completely filled at absolute zero
temperature./ C ceW, hejceMetvÙe leehe hej mebÙeespekeâlee
1. The solids which have the negative temperature
coefficient of resistance are: yeQ[ hetje Yeje veneR neslee nw~
ØeeflejesOe kesâ $e+Ceelcekeâ leehe iegCeebkeâ Jeeues "esme nesles nQ: (d) In case of C the conduction band is partly
(a) insulators only /kesâJeue jesOeer filled even at absolute zero temperature
(b) semiconductors only/kesâJeue DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ C ceW, hejceMetvÙe leehe Yeer Ûeeueve yeQ[ DeebefMekeâ ™he mes
(c) insulators and semiconductors/ Yeje neslee nw~
jesOeer Deewj DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ AIPMT (Screening)-2012
(d) metals/OeelegSB Ans. (a) : C and Si have same lattice structure having 4
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020 binding electrons each
Ans. (c) : Resistance is the ability of the material to C → Insulator
resist the current which changes as change in Si → Intrinsic Semiconductor
temperature. Insulator like wood and plastic have high Electronic configuration,
resistance when temperature is low. If temperature C12
increases the resistance coefficient decreases. Similarly, 6 = 1s 2s 2p
2 2 2

the semiconductors have resistance lower than 28

14Si = 1s 2 2s 2 2p 6 3s 2 3p 2
insulators but higher than conductors.
∆R = αR0∆T Hence, four bonding electrons close to nucleus for C &
where, away from nucleus for Si. So, effect of nucleus on
∆R = Change in resistance boundary element is low on Si & high on C.
∆T = Change in temperature 3. If a small amount of Antimony is added to
R0 = Initial resistance Germanium crystal:/Ùeefo pecexefveÙece ef›eâmšue ceW
α = Temperature coefficient of resistance Sefvšceveer keâer Deuhecee$ee efceuee oer peeS lees :
Negative temperature coefficient of resistance is only (a) its resistance is increased
present in insulator or semiconductor. In these,
resistance decrease with increase in temperature. Gmekeâe ØeeflejesOe yeÌ{ peelee nw
2. C and Si both have same lattice structure, (b) it becomes a p-type semiconductor
having 4 bonding electrons in each. However, C Jen p-Øekeâej keâe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ yeve peelee nw
is insulator whereas Si is intrinsic (c) the antimony becomes an acceptor atom
semiconductor. This is because: Sefvšceveer «eenkeâ hejceeCeg yeve peelee nw
C Deewj Si keâer Skeâ meer peeuekeâ mebjÛevee nesleer nw~ oesveeW ceW
(d) there will be more free electrons than holes in
4 DeeyebOekeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve nesles nQ~ efkeâvleg C Skeâ jesOeer nw the semiconductor/DeOe& Ûeeuekeâ ceW nesueeW keâer Dehes#ee
Deewj Si Skeâ DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ nw~ keäÙeesbefkeâ : DeefOekeâ cegòeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve neWies
(a) The four bonding electrons in the case of C lie
AIPMT (Screening)-2011
in the second orbit, whereas in the case of Si
Ans. (d) : When a small amount of Antimony is added
they lie in the third./C ceW Ûeej DeeyebOekeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve
to Germanium crystal, the crystal becomes n-type
efÉleerÙe keâ#ee ceW peyeefkeâ Si ceW Jes le=leerÙe keâ#ee ceW nesles nQ~ semiconductor because Antimony is pentavelent. It
(b) The four bonding electrons in the case of C excess free electrons. When a small amount of
lie in the third orbit, whereas for Si they lie in Antimony (pentavalent) is added to Germanium
the fourth orbit. (tetravalent) crystal, then crystal becomes n-type
C ceW DeeyebOekeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve le=leerÙe keâ#ee ceW nesles nQ peyeefkeâ semiconductor. Electrons are the majority charge
Si ceW Jes ÛeewLeer (ÛelegLe&) keâ#e ceW nesles nQ~ carriers and the holes are the minority charge carriers.

Physics 620 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
4. Sodium has body centred packing. Distance (a) a = b = c and α = β = γ = 90º
o
between two nearest atoms is 3.7 A . The (b) a ≠ b ≠ c and α ≠ β and γ ≠ 90º
lattice parameter is: (c) a ≠ b ≠ c and α = β = γ = 90º
meesef[Ùece ceW mebkegâueve keâeÙe kesâefvõle neslee nw~ oes (d) a = b = c and α ≠ β ≠ γ = 90º
o
efvekeâšlece hejceeCegDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer 3.7 A nesleer nw~ AIPMT-2007
uesefšme hewjeceeršj (peeuekeâ hejeÛeue) nesiee : Ans. (a) : For cubic crystal structure cell characteristics
o o is a = b = c and α = β = γ = 90º
(a) 8.6 A (b) 6.8 A
o o
(c) 4.3 A (d) 3.0 A
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (c) : Structure is given BCC type and we know
that 4r = 3a
• For triclinic crystal structure a ≠ b ≠ c and α ≠ β ≠ γ ≠
a = Lattice parameter 90º .
r = radius of one atom
o
∵ Given distance between two nearest atom = 3.7 A
o
2r = 3.7 A
o
r = 1.85 A
So 4r = 3 a
• For orthorhombic crystal structure a ≠ b ≠ c and α = β
4 × 1.85 = γ = 90º
a=
3
o
a = 4.3 A
5. If the lattice parameter for a crystalline
structure is 3.6 Å, then the atomic radius in fcc
crystal is–/Ùeefo efkeâmeer ef›eâmšueerÙe mebjÛevee kesâ efueS
peeuekeâ hewjeceeršj 3.6 Å nes lees fcc (Heâuekeâ kesâefvõkeâ 7. Choose the only false statement from the
Ieveekeâj) ef›eâmšue kesâ hejceeCeg keâer ef$epÙee nesieer - following-/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes Skeâ cee$e DemelÙe keâLeve
(a) 2.92 Å (b) 1. 27 Å
keâe ÛeÙeve keâerefpeÙes-
(c) 1.81 Å (d) 2.10 Å (a) The resistivity of a semiconductor increases
AIPMT-2008 with increase in temperature
Ans. (b) : Given a = 3.6 Å
DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ keâe jesOekeâlJe leehe yeÌ{ves mes yeÌ{ peelee nw~
FCC is face centre cubic structure. Let one face of (b) Substances with energy gap of the order of
FCC. 10eV are insulators.
ueieYeie 10eV Tpee& Devlejeue Jeeues heoeLe&
(c) In conductors the valence and conduction
bands may over lap/ÛeeuekeâeW ceW mebÙeespekeâlee Deewj
Ûeeuekeâlee yewC[ Skeâ otmejs kesâ efleJÙeeheer nesles nQ~
(d) The conductivity of a semiconductor
increases with increases in temperature.
Lattice parameter a =
4r DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ keâe ÛeeuekeâlJe yeÌ{ves mes yeÌ{ peelee nw~
2 AIPMT-2005
4r = 2 × a Ans. (a) : The electrical conductivity of a material depends
on number of free electrons in the conduction band. The
2×a 2 × 3.6 jumping of electrons from valence band to conduction
∴ r= = = 1.2726Å
4 4 band depends on the energy gap between them. As the
r ≈ 1.27 Å temperature of a semiconductor increases it provides
6. For a cubic crystal structure which one of the additional energy to the electrons to jump from valence to
following relations indicating the cell conduction band and reduces the energy gap between
characteristics is correct: them. Due to this more and more electrons are available in
Ieveekeâej ef›eâmšueerÙe mebjÛevee kesâ efueÙes efvecveefueefKele mesue conduction band to conduct electricity. Hence we can say
with increase in temperature the Resistivity of
efJeMes<elee metÛekeâ mecyevOeeW ceW mes keâewve mee mener nw? semiconductor decreases and conductivity increases.
Physics 621 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
10. Number of atom per unit cell in B.C.C.
B.C.C. ceW Øeefle FkeâeF& mesue hejceeCegDeeW keâer mebKÙee nw -
(a) 9 (b) 4
(c) 2 (d) 1
AIPMT-2002
Ans. (c) : In BCC, lattice atoms occupies the corners
and body center of cube.
1
Each corner has a contribution of and there are 8
8
• For the conductor the case is not same as with corners in a cube.
increase in temperature the Resistivity of conductor
1
increases due to more heavy vibration of ions. Effective number of atoms in a cube = × 8 = 1
8. Carbon, Silicon and Germanium atoms have 8
four valence electrons each. Their valence and Also, a body centre will have contribution of 1 and each
conduction bands are separated by energy cube will have 1 body centre. So effective number of
band gaps represented by (Eg)C, (Eg)Si and atoms in a cube = 1
(Eg)Ge respectively. Which one of the following So, total number of atoms in BCC = 1 + 1 = 2
relationships is true in their case 11. The interplaner distance in a crystal is
keâeye&ve,efmeefuekeâve Deewj pejcesefveÙece kesâ hejceeCegDeeW ceW 2.8 × 10–8 m. The value of maximum
Ûeej-Ûeej mebÙeespekeâlee Fueskeäš^e@ve nesles nQ~ Fvekesâ wavelength which can be diffracted : -
mebÙeespekeâlee Deewj Ûeeuekeâlee yeQ[eW keâes he=Lekeâ keâjves Jeeues efkeâmeer ef›eâmšue kesâ efueS DevlejleueerÙe otjer 2.8 × 10–8
Tpee& yewv[ Devlejeue ›eâceevegmeej : (Eg)C, (Eg)Si Deewj m.nw, lees lejbie kesâ DeefOekeâlece lejbieowOÙe& keâe ceeve pees
(Eg)Ge ceeves ieÙes neW lees efvecve mebkesâleeW ceW mes keâewve mee efJeJeefle&le nes mekeâleer nw-
"erkeâ mecePee peeÙesiee :- (a) 2.8 × 10–8 m (b) 5.6 × 10–8 m
(a) (Eg)C < (Eg)Ge (b) (Eg)C > (Eg)Si (c) 1.4 × 10–8 m (d) 7.6 × 10–8 m
(c) (Eg)C = (Eg)Si (d) (Eg)C < (Eg)Si AIPMT-2001
AIPMT-2005 Ans. (b) : According to Bragg’s law–
Ans. (b) : The energy band gap for the given elements 2 d sin θ = nλ
have following values:- Where, d = Interplanar distance of crystal
Carbon, (Eg)C = 5 eV λ = wavelength of incident wave
Silicon, (Eg)Si = 1.1 eV θ = scattering angle
Germanium, (Eg)Ge = 0.66 eV n = a positive integer
The energy band gap is maximum for carbon less for Now, for λ to be maximum, sin θ must be maximum &
silicon and least for germanium. n should be minimum.
So, (Eg)C > (Eg)Si
⇒ sin θ =1, n =1 (minimum + ve integer)
9. The volume occupied by an atom is greater ⇒ λ = 2d
max
than the volume of the nucleus by a factor of
= 2×2.8×10–8
about/Skeâ hejceeCeg keâe DeeÙeleve veeefYekeâ kesâ DeeÙeleve mes
efvecve iegCeebkeâ kesâ ueieYeie yeÌ[e neslee nw λ max = 5.6 ×10 -8 m
(a) 101 (b) 105 12. In BCC, the distance between two nearest
(c) 1010 (d) 1015 atoms will be:/BCC, kesâ efueS oes efvekeâšlece
AIPMT-2003 hejceeCegDeeW kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer nesieer-
Ans. (d): Radius of atom ≈ 10 m –10
3 3 a
Radius of nucleus ≈ 10–15 m (a) 3a (b) a (c) a (d)
2 4 2
volume of atom AIPMT-2001
Required ratio =
volume of nucleus Ans. (b) :
4 3
πr1
= 3
4 3
πr
3 2
3
 10−10 
=  −15  = 1015
 10  In BCC, there will be atoms at body centre & at corners.
Physics 622 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
So, distance between two nearest atoms is nothing but (a) 2.99 Å (b) 2.54 Å
distance b/w points O & X (c) 3.66 Å (d) 3.17 Å
XY = (XB) 2 + (YB) 2 = a 2 + (a / 2) 2 = 3a AIPMT-1995
Ans. (c) : Given, a = 4.225 Aº
3a
OX = Sodium has B.C.C cell structure so,
2
13. Copper and silicon is cooled from 300 K to 60 4r = 3 × a
K, the specific resistance : - 3
leeyeW Je efmeefuekeâe@ve keâes 300 K mes 60 K lekeâ "b[e r= ×a
4
efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees JewÅegle ØeeflejesOekeâlee- So distance between body centered atom and a corner
(a) Decrease in copper but increase in silicon atom is 2r
leeyeW keâer Iešleer nw, efmeefuekeâe@ve keâer yeÌ{leer nw
3
(b) Increase in copper but decrease in silicon Therefore, 2r = ×a ×2
leeyeW keâer yeÌ{leer nw, efmeefuekeâe@ve keâer Iešleer nw 4
(c) Increase in both/oesveeW kesâ efueS yeÌ{leer nw 3
= ×a
(d) Decrease in both/oesveeW kesâ efueS Iešleer nw 2
AIPMT-2001 1.732 × 4.225
=
Ans. (a) : Specific Resistance (or) Resistivity, ρ = ρ0 (1 2
+ α T) o

α = Temperature coefficient = 3.66 A

α = + ve for metals i.e. copper 17. Diamond is very hard because
α = – ve for Semiconductor i.e. Silicon nerje yengle keâ"esj neslee nw, keäÙeeWefkeâ
Thus, when cooling Copper from 300K, its restisivity (a) it is covalent solid/Ùen menmebÙeespekeâ "esme nw~
decreases & when Silicon is cooled from 60K, its
resistivity increases. (b) it has large cohesive energy/Fmekeâer mebmeefòeâMeerue
14. The cations and anions are arranged in (keâesnsefmeJe) Tpee& DeefOekeâ nesleer nw~
alternate form in:/OeveeÙeve Je $e+CeeÙeve Skeâevlej ›eâce (c) high melting point/Fmekeâe ieueveebkeâ DeefOekeâ nw~
ceW efkeâmeceW JÙeJeefmLele jnles nQ – (d) insoluble in all solvents/Ùen meYeer efJeueeÙekeâeW ceW
(a) Metallic crystal/OeeeflJekeâ ef›eâmšue
DeIegueMeerue nw~
(b) Ionic crystal/DeeÙeefvekeâ ef›eâmšue
AIPMT-1993
(c) Co-valent crystal/menmebÙeespekeâ ef›eâmšue
Ans. (b) : The number of valence electrons in carbon
(d) Semi-conductor crystal/Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ ef›eâmšue
atom is four. As such each carbon atom is linked with
AIPMT-2000 four neighboring carbon atoms thus forming a rigid
Ans. (b) : In an Ionic crystal, the Cations & anions are tetrahedral structure. It is the strong bonding that makes
arranged in alternate form with Cation at one position &
diamond the hardest substance. It is hardest substance
anion is placed at an alternate position. Anion form the
lattice and Cation fill the voids. on earth.
15. At absolute zero, Si acts as 18. Which one of the following is the weakest kind
hejce MetvÙe leehe hej Si efkeâmeer YeeBefle keâeÙe& keâjlee nw? of the bonding in solids?
(a) non metal/DeOeeleg "esmeeW ceW heeÙes peeves Jeeuee keâewve-mee yebOe meyemes ogye&ue
(b) metal/Oeeleg neslee nw?
(c) insulator/kegâÛeeuekeâ (a) ionic/DeeÙeefvekeâ
(d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR (b) metallic/OeeeflJekeâ
AIPMT-1988 (c) vanderWaals/JeeC[j Jee@ume
Ans. (c) : The semiconductor (Si) has negative
(d) covalent/menmebÙeespekeâ
temperature coefficient of resistivity.
At absolute zero temperature, its resistance becomes AIPMT-1992
infinite and it act like an insulator. Ans. (c) : The ionic bond is the strongest type of bond
16. Distance between body centered atom and a in solids. The covalent bond is weaker than ionic bond
corner atom in sodium (a = 4.225 Å) is and metallic bonds are weaker than covalent bond.
meesef[Ùece (a = 4.225 Å) ceW Deble: kesâefvõle hejceeCeg Deewj Hence, the weakest type of bond in the solids is vander
keâesves hej efmLele Skeâ hejceeCeg kesâ yeerÛe keâer otjer nesleer nw: walls bond.
Physics 623 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) Germanium/pecexefveÙece
28.2 Intrinsic & Extrinsic (b) Phosphorous/Heâe@mHeâesjme
Semiconductor (c) Aluminium/SsuegefceefveÙece
19. A p-type extrinsic semiconductor is obtained (d) Silver/efmeuJej
when Germanium is doped with? NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
pecexefveÙece keâes efkeâmemes Deheefceefßele efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees Ans. (b) Doping - In semiconductor, doping is the
Skeâ P-Øekeâej keâe yee¢e Deæ& Ûeeuekeâ Øeehle neslee nw- intentional introduction of impurities into an intrinsic
semiconductor for purpose of modulating its electrical,
(a) Arsenic/Deemexefvekeâ optical & structural properties.
(b) Boron/yeesje@ve • The doped material is referred to as an extrinsic
(c) Antimony/Sbšerceveer • An Intrinsic semi-conductor is converted into n-type
(d) Phosphorous/heâemheâesjme extrinsic semiconductor by doping it with
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 Phosphorous. In n-type semiconductor charge
carriers are electron (negative charge particles) so we
Ans. (b) : To make a p-type extrinsic semiconductor, an dope pentavalent atom in pure semiconductor
intrinsic semiconductor is doped with an impurity material (intrinsic) to make it n-type. Phosphorous is
which has 3 valence electrons in its outer orbit. a pentavalent atom (whose valency is 5).
For example- Gallium, Indium, Boron, Aluminium etc.
22. For a p-type semiconductor, which of the
20. The electron concentration in an n-type following statements is true?/efkeâmeer p-Øekeâej kesâ
semiconductor is the same as hole
concentration in a p-type semiconductor. An Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ kesâ efueS efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve mee keâLeve
external field (electric) is applied across each of mener nw?
them. Compare the currents in them. (a) Holes are the majority carriers and trivalent
n-šeFhe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ ceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer meebõlee Glevee ner atoms are the dopants./efJeJej yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ nw
nw efpelevee p-šeFhe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ ceW keâesšj keâer meebõlee nw~ leLee ef$ekeâmebÙeespekeâ hejceeCeg ceeokeâ ([eshewvš) nw~
oesveeW hej yee¢e efJeÅegle #es$e ueieeÙee peelee nw~ oesveeW ceW (b) Holes are the majority carriers and
OeejeDeeW kesâ Devegheele keâer leguevee keâerefpeS~ pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
(a) No current will flow in p-type, current will efJeJej yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ nw leLee hebÛemebÙeespekeâ hejceeCeg
only flow in n-type/p-šeFhe ceW keâesF& Oeeje ØeJeeefnle ceeokeâ ([eshewvš) nw~
veneR nesieer, kesâJeue n-šeFhe ceW Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesieer (c) Electrons are the majority carriers and
(b) Current in n-type = Current in p-type pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
n-šeFhe ceW Oeeje p-šeFhe ceW Oeeje
Fueskeäš^e@ve yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ nw leLee hebÛemebÙeespekeâ hejceeCeg
(c) Current in p-type > Current in n-type
ceeokeâ ([eshewvš) nw~
p-šeFhe ceW Oeeje > n-šeFhe ceW Oeeje mes (d) Electrons are the majority carriers and
trivalent atoms are the dopants.
(d) Current in n-type > Current in p-type.
Fueskeäš^e@ve yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ nQ leLee ef$ekeâmebÙeespekeâ
n-šeFhe ceW Oeeje > p-šeFhe ceW Oeeje mes
hejceeCeg ceeokeâ ([eshewvš) nw~
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019
Ans. (d) : In n- type semiconductor drifting of electrons
Ans. (a) : In a p-type semiconductor, an intrinsic
are responsible for generation of electric current while
semiconductor is doped with trivalent impurities like
in p-type semiconductor drifting of holes are
Boron (B) or Indium (In) that creates deficiencies of
responsible for generation of electric current through
valance electrons called holes which are majority
the semiconductor respectively.
charge carries. In p type semiconductor the holes are
Current through semiconductor is given by majority charge carries and electron are minority charge
I = neAvd = ne AµE (vd = µE) carries.
Where, n is no. of charge carrier concentration, e is 23. The given graph represents V-I characteristic
charge on electron, A is cross sectional area, µ is for a semiconductor device.
mobility of charge carriers and E is applied electric ÙeneB «eeheâ (DeeuesKe) ceW Skeâ DeOe&-Ûeeuekeâ Ùegefòeâ keâe
field. V-I DeefYeue#eCe oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~
Q µe > µ h
∴ In > Ip
21. An intrinsic semiconductor is converted into n-
type extrinsic semiconductor by doping it with
efkeâmeer vewpe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ keâes efvecveefueefKele ceW mes efkeâmemes
[esefhele keâjkesâ n- Øekeâej kesâ yee¢e DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ ces Which of the following statement is correct?
heefjJeefle&le efkeâÙee peelee nw? Fmekesâ efueÙes efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâewve-mee keâLeve mener nw?
Physics 624 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) It is V- I characteristic for solar cell where, 500 K hej Megæ Si Fueskeäš^e@ve (ne) Je nesue (nh) keâer
point A represents open circuit voltage and meceeve meevõlee 1.5 × 1016m–3 jKeles nw~ Fbef[Ùece DeMegefæ
point B short circuit current./Ùen ‘meewj mesue’ keâe efceueeves hej nh to 4.5 × 1022 m–3 lekeâ yeÌ{lee nw~
V-I DeefYeue#eCe nw, peneB A, Kegues heefjheLe ceWs Jeesušlee DeMegefæÙegòeâ Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ nw :
leLee B ueIeg-heefjheLeve efJeÅegle Oeeje keâes efve™efhele keâjlee nw~ (a) P-type having electron concentrations ne = 5
(b) It is for a solar cell and point A and B × 109 m–3/P-Øekeâej keâe efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer meevõlee
represent open circuit voltage and current
ne = 5 × 109 m–3
respectively /Ùen ‘meewj mesue’ kesâ efueÙes nw leLee A Deewj
(b) n-type with electron concentrations ne = 5 ×
B Kegues heefjheLe ceW ›eâceMe: Jeesušlee leLee efJeÅegle Oeeje keâes 1022 m–3/ n- Øekeâej keâe efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer meevõlee
efve™efhele keâjles nQ~ ne = 5 × 1022 m–3
(c) It is for photodiode and points A and B (c) P-type with electron concentrations ne = 2.5 ×
represent open circuit voltage and current, 1010 m–3/ P-Øekeâej keâe efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer meevõlee
respectively./Ùen ‘heâesšes [eÙees[ kesâ efueÙes nw leLee A ne = 2.5 × 1010 m–3
Deewj B’ Kegues heefjheLe ceW ›eâceMe: Jeesušlee leLee efJeÅegle (d) n-type with electron concentrations ne = 2.5 ×
Oeeje keâes efve™efhele keâjles nQ~ 1023 m–3/ n-Øekeâej keâe efpemeceW Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer meevõlee
(d) It is for a LED and points A and B represent ne = 2.5 × 1023 m–3
open circuit voltage and short circuit current, AIPMT (Mains)-2011
respectively./Ùen LED kesâ efueÙes nw Deewj A leLee B Ans. (a) : Pure silicon, T = 500K
Kegues heefjheLe ceW ›eâceMe: Jeesušlee leLee ueIeg-heefjheLe ceW ne concentration = 1.5×1016 m–3
efJeÅegle Oeeje keâes efve™efhele keâjles nQ~ nh concentration = 1.5×1016 m–3
AIPMT-06.05.2014 Doped with indium increase nh
Ans. (a) : This is voltage-current characteristic curve So, Now
for a solar cell, where A represents open circuit voltage nh = 4.5×1022 m–3
of solar cell and B represents short circuit current. Then find nc = electron concentration after doping.
n i2 = nenh

n 2 (1.5 × 10 )
16 2

ne = i =
nh 4.5 × 1022
ne = 5×109 m–3
So, nh >> ne semiconductor is p-type.
24. In a n-type semiconductor, which of the 26. Which one of the following statement is
following statement is true:/n-Øekeâej kesâ FALSE?/efvecve ceW mekeâ keâewve-mee keâLeve DemelÙe nw ?
DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ kesâ efueS keâewve mee keâLeve melÙe nw: (a) Pure Si doped with trivalent impurities gives
(a) Holes are majority carriers and trivalent a p-type semiconductor/Metæ Si ef$emebÙeespeer DeMegefæ
atoms are dopants/ nesue yengmebKÙekeâ DeeJesMe Jeenkeâ mes ceeefole keâjves hej p- Øekeâej Deæ& Ûeeuekeâ Øeehle neslee nw
nesles nw leLee ef$e-mebÙeespekeâ hejceeCeg Deheefßekeâ nesles nQ~ (b) Majority charge carriers in a n-type
(b) Electrons are majority carriers and trivalent semiconductor are holes/n- Øekeâej Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ ceW
atoms are dopants/ Fueskeäš^e@ve yengmebKÙekeâ DeeJesMe yengmebKÙekeâ DeeJesMe Jeenkeâ nesue nesles nQ
Jeenkeâ, leLee ef$emebÙeespekeâ hejceeCeg Deheefceßekeâ nesles nw~ (c) Minority charge carriers in a p-type
(c) Electron are minority carriers and pantavalent semiconductor are electrons/p- Øekeâej Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ
atoms are dopants/ Fueskeäš^e@ve DeuheebMe DeeJesMe Jeenkeâ
ceW DeuhemebKÙekeâ DeeJesMe Jeenkeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve nesles nQ
leLee hebÛemebÙeespeer hejceeCeg Deheefceßekeâ nesles nw~
(d) The resistance of intrinsic semiconductor
(d) Holes are minority carriers and pantavalent decreases with increase of temperature
atoms are dopants/ nesue DeuheebMe DeeJesMe Jeenkeâ
DeheõJÙeer Ûeeuekeâ keâe ØeeflejesOe leehe yeÌ{ves kesâ meeLe keâce
leLee hebÛemebÙeespeer hejceeCeg Deheefceßekeâ nesles nQ~
neslee peelee nw
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
Ans. (d) : In n-type conductor pentavalent atoms are
dopant. Electrons concentration in n-type conductor is Ans. (b) : p-type semiconductor obtained by adding
higher. So, electrons are the majority charge carriers trivalent impurity to a pure sample of semiconductor
and holes are minority charge carriers. (Ge). n-type semiconductor obtained by adding small
25. Pure Si at 500 K has equal number of electron amount of pentavalent impurity to pure sample of
16 semiconductor (Ge). Majority charge carriers in a n-
(ne) and hole (nh) concentrations of 1.5 × 10
m–3. Doping by indium increases nh to 4.5 × 1022 type semiconductors are electrons and in p-type
m–3. The doped semiconductor is of : semiconductors are holes.
Physics 625 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
27. In semiconductors at a room temperature Ans. (b) : p-type of semiconductor- p-type is formed by
keâ#e leehe hej DeOe&ÛeeuekeâeW ceW - doping of trivalent impurity atoms.
(a) The valence band is completely filled and the p-type semiconductor the majority charge carrier is a
conduction band is partially filled hole.
n-type of semiconductor - n type is formed by doping of
mebÙeespekeâlee yewv[ hetCe&leÙee Yeje neslee nw Deewj Ûeeueve yewv[ pentavalent impurity atoms.
DebMele: Yeje neslee nw~ n-type semiconductor the majority charge carrier is the
(b) The valence band is completely filled electron.
mebÙeespekeâlee yewv[ hetCe&leÙee Yeje neslee nw~ • The outermost shell of arsenic has five electrons and
(c) The conduction band is completely empty silicon has four electrons.
Ûeeueve yewv[ hetCe&leÙee Keeueer neslee nw~ • When silicon is doped with arsenic then four electrons
of arsenic bond with four electron of silicon and extra
(d) The valence band is partially empty and the electron of arsenic acts as a charrier.
conduction band is partially filled
30. When n type semiconductor is heated
mebÙeespekeâlee yewv[ DebMele: Keeueer neslee nw Deewj Ûeeueve Skeâ n-Øekeâej kesâ DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ keâes iece& keâjves hej
yewv[ DebMele: Yeje neslee nw~ (a) number of electrons increases while that of
AIPMT-2004 holes decreases/Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer mebKÙee yeÌ{sieer leLee
Ans. (d) : The energy band gap of semiconductors as nesue keâer mebKÙee keâce nesieer~
shown in fig. (b) number of holes increases while that of
electrons decreases/nesue keâer mebKÙee yeÌ{sieer leLee
Fueskeäš^e@ve keâer mebKÙee keâce nesieer~
(c) number of electrons and holes remain same
/Fueskeäš^e@ve leLee nesue keâer mebKÙee meceeve jnsieer~
(d) number of electrons and holes increases
equally/Fueskeäš^e@ve leLee nesue keâer mebKÙee meceeve ™he mes
yeÌ{sieer~
AIPMT-1989
In semiconductors valence gap called the forbidden Ans. (d) : Number of electrons and holes increases
energy gap. It is very small. At room temperature some equally
electrons in valence band acquire thermal energy. This • The number of electrons in the n-type th
semiconductor
energy is more than forbidden energy gap Eg. Thus, is increased due to the doped doner 5 group element.
they Jump into the conduction band and leave their The number of holes remains the same.
vacancy in the valance band which act as holes. Hence, • When a N-type semiconductor is heated, due to the
at room temperature valence band is partially empty and extra thermal energy, some of covalent bonds break
conduction band is partially filled. forming electron-holes pairs. This produces electrons
and holes are equal numeral.
28. To obtain a p-type germanium semiconductor, So, the number of electrons and holes increase equally.
it must be doped with/p-Øekeâej keâe pecexefveÙece
DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ yeveeves kesâ efueS GmeceW efceueevee nesiee:
28.3 P - N Junction & Diode
(a) indium/F[efveÙece (b) phosphorus/heâemheâesjme
(c) arsenic/Deemexefvekeâ (d) antimony/SCšerceveer 31. A full wave rectifier circuit consists of two p-n
AIPMT-1997 junction diodes, a centre-tapped transformer,
capacitor and a load resistance. Which of these
Ans. (a) : In p type germanium semiconductor it must
components remove the ac ripple from the
be doped with a trivalent impurity atom. Since indium is
rectified output?
a third group member, therefore germanium must be
doped with Indium. Skeâ hetCe&lejbie efo°keâejer heefjheLe ceW oes p-n mebefOe [eÙees[
29. When arsenic is added as an impurity to Skeâ ceOÙe efve<keâemeer š^ebmeHeâe@ce&j, mebOeeefj$e leLee Skeâ uees[
silicon, the resulting material is ØeeflejesOe ueies nQ~ FveceW mes keâewve mee Ieškeâ efo°keâeefjle
peye efmeefuekeâe@ve ceW Deemexefvekeâ keâes DeMegefæ kesâ ™he ceW efveie&le mes ØelÙeeJeleea ëe=bKeuee (efjefheue) efJeueghle keâjlee nw
efceuee efoÙee peeS, lees Ùen yevesiee: (a) Load resistance / uees[ ØeeflejesOe
(a) n-type conductor/n-Øekeâej keâe kegâÛeeuekeâ (b) A centre-tapped transformer/ Skeâ ceOÙe efve<keâemeer
(b) n-type semiconductor /n-Øekeâej keâe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ š^ebmeHeâece&j
(c) p-type semiconductor/ p-Øekeâej DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ (c) p-n junction diodes/ p-n mebefOe [eÙees[
(d) none of these/FveceW mes keâesF& veneR (d) capacitor/ mebOeeefj$e
AIPMT-1996 NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Physics 626 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d): Capacitor remove the ac ripple from the Ans. (c) : A zener diode is a special type of diode that is
rectified output. The capacitance offers low impedance designed to operate in the reverse breakdown region.
 1  Hence, option (b) is correct
to the alternating current component  x c =  and
 2πfc  • Zener diode is fabricated by heavily doping both p-
offers infinite impedance to direct current component. and n-sides of the junction. Hence, option (d) is
Therefore, the alternating current component is by correct.
passed or filtered out.
32. Given below are two statements :
Statement I : Photovoltaic devices can convert
optical radiation into electricity.
Statement II: Zener diode is designed to operate
under reverse bias in breakdown region.
In the light of the above statements, choose the
most appropriate answer from the options given
below: • Due to heavy doping depletion region formed is very
–6
veerÛes oes keâLeve efoÙes ieÙes nQ : thin (<10 m) and the electric field of the junction is
keâLeve I : HeâesšesJeesušerÙe ÙegefòeâÙeeB ØekeâeefMekeâ efJeefkeâjCe extremely high (– 5×106 V/m) even for a small
reverse bias voltage of about 5V. Hence, option (c) is
keâes efJeÅegle Oeeje ceW heefjJeefle&le keâj mekeâleer nQ~
incorrect.
keâLeve II : pesvej [eÙees[ Yebpeve ceW heMÛeefoefMekeâ yeeÙeme • It can be seen from figure that when the applied
kesâ Devleie&le keâeÙe& keâjves kesâ efueS yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ reverse bias voltage (VR) reaches the breakdown
Ghejesòeâ keâLeveeW kesâ meboYe& ceW, veerÛes efoÙes ieÙes efJekeâuheeW mes voltage (VZ) of the Zener diode, there is a large
meJee&efOekeâ GheÙeg&keäle Gòej ÛegefveS : change in the current. After the breakdown voltage
(a) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is (VZ) a large change in the current can be produced by
correct./ keâLeve I mener veneR nw, hejvleg keâLeve II mener nw~ almost insignificant change in the reverse bias
(b) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct./ voltage. In other words, Zener voltage remains
oesveeW keâLeve I Je keâLeve II mener nw~ constant. Hence, option (a) is correct.
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect./ 34. In half wave rectification, if the input
oesveeW keâLeve I Je keâLeve II mener veneR nQ~ frequency is 60 Hz, then the output frequency
(d) Statement I is correct but Statement II is would be/Deæ&lejbie efo°keâejer kesâ ØeÙeesie ceW, Ùeefo
incorrect/ keâLeve I mener nw hejvleg keâLeve II mener veneR nw~ efveJesMe (Fvehegš) DeeJe=efòe 60 Hz nw lees DeeGšhegš
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023 (efveie&le) DeeJe=efòe nesieer:
Ans. (b) : Solar photovoltaic (pv) systems convert solar (a) 120 Hz/120 nšd&pe (b) Zero/MetvÙe
energy directly into electrical energy. The basic
conversion device used is known as a solar photovoltaic (c) 30 Hz/30 nšd&pe (d) 60 Hz/60 nšd&pe
cell or solar cell. A solar cell is basically an electric NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
current source, driven by a flux of radiation as the Ans. (d) : A rectifier is a circuit that converts the AC
current output energy is dependent on solar radiation. signal into pulsating DC which can be further classified
• Zener diode is a device which is designed to operate in Full wave and Half wave rectifiers.
under reverse bias condition. In case of half wave rectification, output frequency is
33. The incorrect statement about the property of same as input frequency since input frequency = 60 Hz.
a Zener diode is:/pesvej [eÙees[ keâer efJeMes<eleeDeeW kesâ fin = fout
efJe<eÙe ceW ieuele keâLeve ÛegefveS: fout = 60 Hz
(a) Zener voltage remains constant at breakdown
Yebpeve kesâ meceÙe pesvej Jeesušspe efmLej jnlee nw~ 35. (A)
(b) It is designed to operate under reverse
bias/Fmekeâes he§eefoefMekeâ yeeÙeme efmLeefle ceW heefjkeâefuhele (B)
keâjles nQ~
(c) Depletion region formed is very wide (C)
Öemeer #es$e yengle ÛeewÌ[e yeveeÙee peelee nw~ In the given circuits (A), (B) and (C), the
(d) p and n regions of zener diode are heavily potential drop across the two p-n junctions are
doped/pesvej [eÙees[ kesâ p SJeb n Yeeie yengle pÙeeoe equal in
Deheefceefßele nesles nQ~ efoS ieS heefjheLeeW (A), (B) SJeb (C) ceW, oesveeW p-n
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 mebefOeÙeeW kesâ efmejeW hej efJeYeJeevlej yejeyej neWies:
Physics 627 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) Both circuits (A) and (C) 37. Out of the following which one is a forward
heefjheLe (A) SJeb (C) oesveeW ceW biased diode?/efvecveefueefKele ceW mes keâesvemee De«eefoefMekeâ
(b) Circuit (A) only/kesâJeue heefjheLe (A) ceW yeeÙeefmele [eÙees[ nw?
(c) Circuit (B) only/kesâJeue heefjheLe (B) ceW
(a)
(d) Circuit (C) only/kesâJeue heefjheLe (C) ceW
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
(b)
Ans. (a) : P-N Junction is defined as the boundary
between two semiconductor material types which is p
(c)
types and n-type. There are three biasing conditions and
these conditions are based on the voltage applied. The
(d)
biasing condition are given below-
1. Zero bias- Zero bias is defined as the condition in NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
which no external voltage is applied externally to the NEET (UG)-07.05.2017
P-N junction. AIPMT-2006
2. Forward bias- In the positive terminal the battery is Ans. (a) : A diode is said to be forward biased when
connected with p-type and the negative terminal of potential at A is higher (more positive) than at B. i.e VA
the battery is connected with n-type. > VB
3. Reversed bias- In the positive terminal the battery is
connected with n-type and the negative terminal of
battery is connected with p-type.
VA > VB
When we see in circuit a the currents are flowing in the
same direction. Therefore its potential drop is equal. • A diode is said to be Reverse Biased when potential
36. Consider the following statements (A) and (B) at A is lower than at B i.e. VA < VB.
and identify the correct answer.
efvecveefueefKele (A) leLee (B) hej efJeÛeej keâerefpeS leLee
VA < VB
mener Gòej keâes efÛeefvnle keâerefpeS~
(A) A zener diode is connected in reverse bias, Among the given options the option (a) satisfies the
when used as a voltage regulator. condition of forward biasing. Hence option (a) is
Skeâ pesvej [eÙees[ Gl›eâce DeefYeveefle ceW pegÌ[e nw, peye correct.
efJeYeJe efveÙev$ekeâ keâer lejn ØeÙegòeâ neslee nw~ 38. The increase in the width of the depletion
region in a p-n junction diode is due to :
(B) The potential barrier of p-n junction lies
efkeâmeer p-n mebefOe [eÙees[ ceW DeJe#eÙe–#es$e keâer ÛeewÌ[eF& ceW
between 0.1 V to 0.3 V.
p-n meefvOe keâe efJeYeJe ØeeÛeerj 0.1 Jeesuš mes 0.3 Jeesuš kesâ Je= efæ keâe keâejCe nw:
yeerÛe neslee nw~ (a) reverse bias only/kesâJeue he§eefoefMekeâ yeeÙeme
(a) (A) is incorrect but (B) is correct (b) both forward bias and reverse bias
(A) ieuele nw hejvleg (B) melÙe nw~ De«eefoefMekeâ Deewj he§eefoefMekeâ yeeÙeme oesveeW
(b) (A) and (B) both are correct. (c) increase in forward current
oesveeW (A) leLee (B) melÙe nQ~ De«eefoefMekeâ Oeeje (current) ceW Je=efæ
(c) (A) and (B) both are incorrect (d) forward bias only/kesâJeue De«eefoefMekeâ yeeÙeme
oesveeW (A) leLee (B) ieuele nQ~ NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
(d) (A) is correct and (B) is incorrect. Ans. (a)
(A) melÙe nw hejvleg (B) ieuele nw~
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Ans. (d) : When zener diode is forward biased, it
behaves like ordinary diode & when reverse biased, it
will be a voltage stabilizer regulator because reverse
biased, after breakdown voltage across the zener diode
becomes constant. When we apply a negative voltage to the diode i.e. a
Also, at room temperature, the voltage across depletion positive terminal is connected towards the N-type and
layer for Silicon is about 0.6-0.7V & for Germanium is negative terminals is towards the P-type, the junction
about 0.3-3.5V. width, or the width of the depletion layer is increased,
Hence, statement A is correct but statement B is wrong. which it is called reverse bias.

Physics 628 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Similarly when a diode is reverse biased, then the ⇒ The increase in temperature due to heating decreases
depletion layer width increases. Therefore option a is both the forward resistance and reverse resistance
correct. and in turn increases the instantaneous diode
39. An LED is constructed from a p-n junction current, which means that heating changes the entire
diode using GaAsP. The energy gap is 1.9 eV. V-I characteristics of a p - n junction.
The wavelength of the light emitted will be ⇒ Due to increases in temperature because of heating
equal to/GaAsP keâe GheÙeesie keâjkesâ efkeâmeer p-n mebefOe thermal collision between the electron and hole
[eÙees[ mes efkeâmeer keâer jÛevee keâer ieÙeer nw~ Tpee& Devlejeue increases, thus the net electron - hole pair increases.
1.9 eV nw~ Glmeefpe&le ØekeâeMe keâer lejbieowIÙe& nesieer – ⇒ This leads to increase in current in diode and overall
resistance of diode is change.
(a) 654 × 10–11 m (b) 10.4 × 10–26 m Thus the overall V - I characteristics of p - n
(c) 654 nm (d) 654 Å junction diode get affected.
NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
41. The given circuit has two ideal diodes connected
Ans. (c) : Given E = 1.9 eV as show in the figure below. The current flowing
The energy of photon is written as– through the resistance R1 will be
E = hv oes DeeoMe& [eÙees[eW keâes heefjheLe ceW veerÛes efoÙes DeejsKe ceW
=
hc oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej peessÌ[e ieÙee nw ~ R1 ØeeflejesOe mes
λ ØeJeeefnle Oeeje keâe ceeve nesiee :-
hc
λ=
E
Here,
h = plank's constant = 6.62 × 10–34 m2 kg/s
c = Speed of light in vacuum = 3 × 108 m/s
(a) 2.5 A (b) 10.0A
λ = Wave length of light
(c) 1.43 A (d) 3.12 A
6.62 × 10−34 × 3 × 108 NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
λ= Q1eV = 1.6 × 10−19 J 
1.9eV Ans. (a) :
6.62 × 10−34 × 3 ×108
=
1.9 × 1.6 × 10−19
= 6.54 × 10–7m
= 654 × 10–9m
λ = 654nm From figure, ideal diode D is reversed biased where as
1
40. In a p-n junction diode, change in temperature ideal diode D2 is forward biased. Thus D1 acts as an
due to heating / efkeâmeer p-n mebefOe [eÙees[ ceW iece& nesves open switch while D2 as a closed switch as shown in the
mes leehe ceW heefjJele&ve equivalent circuit.
(a) Affects only reverse resistance Thus current flowing through R1 is same as current flow
kesâJeue JÙegl›eâce (efjJeme&) ØeeflejesOe keâes ØeYeeefJele keâjlee nw~ through equivalent circuit.
(b) Affects only forward resistance V 10 10
I= = = = 2.5A
kesâJeue De«e ØeeflejesOe keâes ØeYeeefJele keâjlee nw~ ( R1 + R 3 ) 2 + 2 4
(c) Affects the overall V - I characteristics of p-n 42. Consider the junction diode as ideal. The value
junction / p-n mebefOe kesâ mece«e V - I DeefYeue#eCe keâes of current flowing through AB is:
ØeYeeefJele keâjlee nw~ mebefOe [eÙees[ keâes DeeoMe& ceevekeâj efJeÛeej keâerefpeS~ AB
(d) Does not affect resistance of p-n junction mes ØeJeeefnle Oeeje keâe ceeve nw :
p-n mebefOe kesâ ØeeflejesOe keâes ØeYeeefJele veneR keâjlee nw~
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Ans. (c) :
(a) 10-3A (b) 0 A
(c) 10-2 A (d) 10-1 A
NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Ans. (c) :

As we can see,
voltage at A (VA) > voltage at B (VB)

Physics 629 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
which means the diode is forward biased and in forward Ans. (d):
biasing the ideal diode offers zero resistance. So current The electric potential difference across the P-N junction
through circuit can be determined as - is called Barrier Potential.
V − VB 4 − ( −6 ) 10 • Doping: The addition of impurities in a semi
I= A = =
R 1000 1000 conductor to change its conductivity and other
⇒ I = 10–2 A properties is known as doping.
• Barrier Potential depends upon :
43. If in a p-n junction, a square input signal of
10V is applied as shown, 1. Materials use to make PN junction: For silicon, it is
ÙeneB oMee&Ùes ieÙes Devegmeej Skeâ p-n mebefOe hej 10V keâe 0.7V; for Germanium it is 0.3V at room
temperature.
Skeâ Jeie&-efveJesMe mebkesâle ueieeÙee ieÙee nw~ lees RL kesâ efmejeW
2. Amount of doping done: The amount of doping will
hej efveie&le nesiee: decide the amount of majority charge carriers in the
junction.
3. Temperature: Increase in temperature will change
the number of minority charge carriers.
So, the Barrier potential depends upon the type of
semiconductor material, doping and temperature.
then the output across RL will be: 45. In an unbiased p-n junction, holes diffuse from
the p-region to n-region because of
(a) (b) Skeâ efve<he#e p-n pebkeäMeve ceW keâesšj p-#es$e mes n-#es$e ceW
ef[heäÙetpe nes peeles nQ keäÙeeWefkeâ
(a) The potential difference across the p-n
(c) (d)
junction/ p-n pebkeäMeve hej mebYeeefJele Deblej
(b) The attraction of free electrons of n-region/ n-
AIPMT-03.05.2015
#es$e kesâ cegkeäle Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâe Deekeâ<e&Ce
Ans. (c) : ⇒ When the voltage is –5V, the diode will
(c) The higher hole concentration in p-region
be in reverse bias and the voltage drop across the
than that in n-region/ n-#es$e keâer leguevee ceW p-#es$e ceW
resistor will be zero as there is no current in the circuit.
When voltage is +5V, the diode will be in forward bias, GÛÛe keâesšj meebõlee
the voltage drop across resistor will be the same as input (d) The higher concentration of electrons in the
voltage. n-region than that in the p-region/ p-#es$e keâer
Hence option (c) is correct. leguevee ceW n-#es$e ceW Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer GÛÛe meebõlee
NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
Ans. (c) : In an unbiased p-n junction, holes diffuse
from the p region to the n region because free electrons
in 'n'- region attract them they move across the junction
44. The barrier potential of a p-n junction depends by the potential difference. Hole concentration in P
on: region is more as compared to n region.
efkeâmeer p-n mebefOe keâe jesefOekeâe efJeYeJe efveYe&j keâjlee nw: 46. Two ideal diodes are connected to a battery as
(A) type of semi conductor material shown in the circuit. The current supplied by
the battery is:
DeOe&-Ûeeuekeâ kesâ heoeLe& hej oes DeeoMe& [eÙees[eW keâes heefjheLe ceW oMee&ÙeW ieÙes Devegmeej
(B) amount of doping/DeheefceßeCe keâer cee$ee hej Skeâ yewšjer mes peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ lees yewšjer Éeje mehueeF& keâer
(C) temperature/leehe ieF& (oer ieF&) efJeÅegle Oeeje nesieer :
Which one of the following is correct?
efvecveebefkeâle ceW mes keâewve-mee mener nw?
(a) (A) and (B) only/kesâJeue (A) leLee (B)
(b) (B) only/kesâJeue (B)
(c) (B) and (C) only/kesâJeue (B) leLee (C) (a) 0.25 A (b) 0.5 A
(d) (A), (B) and (C)/ (A), (B) leLee (C) (c) 0.75 A (d) Zero
AIPMT-06.05.2014 AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Physics 630 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): From figure given in question,
(1) Diode D1 has its p-side connected to positive of
battery & n-side is connected to negative terminal
therefore, diode is forward biased & hence there will be
current flow in this branch. (a)(a), (b) and (d)/ (a), (b) Deewj (d)
(2) Diode D2, n-side connected to positive terminal & p-
side to negative terminal. This diode is reverse biased, (b)(c) only/kesâJeue (c)
therefore no current flows. (c)(c) and (a)/(c) SJeb (a)
V (d)(b) and (d)/ (b) SJeb (d)
∴ Current supplied, I =
R AIPMT (Mains)-2011
5V Ans. (c) : For forward biasing of diode, P- type of diode
= should be at higher Potential than n-type at lower
10Ω
potential.
I = 0.5 A
Hence, (c) and (a) are in forward bias.
47. A zener diode, having breakdown voltage equal
to 15 V, is used in a voltage regulator circuit 49. In forward biasing of the p-n junction :
shown in figure. The current through the diode p-n mebefOe kesâ De«eefoefMekeâ yeeÙemeve ceW :
is :/15 V kesâ yejeyej Yebpekeâ Jeesušlee Jeeues Skeâ pesvej (a) the positive terminal of the battery is
[eÙees[ keâe GheÙeesie efÛe$eevegmeej Jeesušspe jsietuesšj heefjheLe connected to p-side and the depletion region
becomes thin/yewšjer keâe Oeve šefce&veue, p-Yeeie mes
ceW efkeâÙee peelee nw~ [eÙees[ mes Oeeje nw :
mebÙeesefpele neslee nw Deewj nemeer #es$e heleuee nes peelee nw
(b) the positive terminal of the battery is
connected to p-side and the depletion region
becomes thick
yewšjer keâe Oeve šefce&veue, p-Yeeie mes mebÙeesefpele neslee nw
(a) 5 mA (b) 10 mA Deewj nemeer #es$e ceesše (Ûeew[Ì e) nes peelee nw
(c) 15 mA (d) 20 mA (c) the positive terminal of the battery is
AIPMT (Mains)-2011 connected to n-side and the depletion region
Ans. (a) : Voltage across zener diode is constant becomes thin/yewšjer keâe Oeve šefce&veue, n-Yeeie mes
mebÙeesefpele neslee nw Deewj nemeer #es$e heleuee nes peelee nw
(d) the positive terminal of the battery is
connected to n-side and the depletion region
becomes thick.
For yewšjer keâe Oeve šefce&veue, n-Yeeie mes mebÙeesefpele neslee nw
15V Deewj nemeer #es$e ceesše (Ûeew[Ì e) nes peelee nw
i1KΩ = = 15mA
1KΩ AIPMT (Screening)-2011, 1988

i 250 Ω=
( 20 − 15) V = 5V = 20 A = 20mA Ans. (a) : Forward bias or biasing is where the external
voltage is, delivered across the p-n junction diode. In
250Ω 250Ω 1000
a forward bias setup, the p-side of the diode is attached
∴ izener = (20–15) = 5mA. to the positive terminal and n-side is fixed to the
48. In the following figure, the diodes which are negative side of the battery. In forward biasing, the
forward biased are/efvecve efÛe$e ceW, keâewve-mee [eÙees[ positive terminal of the battery is connected to p-side
De«e yeeÙeefmele nw : and the negative terminal to n-side of p-n junction. The
forward bias voltage opposes the potential barrier. Due
to this, the depletion region becomes thin.
50. A p–n photodiode is fabricated from a
semiconductor with a band gap of 2.5 eV. It
can detect a signal of wavelength :
Skeâ p–n heâesšes[eÙees[ keâes yewv[ iewhe (Devlejeue) 2.5
eV kesâ DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ mes yeveeÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùen efkeâme lejbie
owOÙe& kesâ mebkesâle keâe mebmetÛeve keâj mekeâlee nw~
(a) 496 Å (b) 6000 Å
(c) 4000 nm (d) 6000 nm
AIMPT-2009
Physics 631 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (c): Given Energy band gap E = 2.5 eV (a) an n-type semiconductor/n-šeFhe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ
⇒ E = 2.5 × 1.6 × 10–19 V (b) a p-type semiconductor/ p-šeFhe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ
hc (c) an insulator/efJeÅegle jesOeer heoeLe&
And we know E =
λ (d) a metal/Skeâ Oeeleg
h.c 6.6×10-34 ×3×108 AIPMT-2007
λ= =
E 2.5×1.6×10-19 Ans. (b) : In this band diagram, number of holes in
λ = 4960 Å valence band are more as compared to number of
⇒ For the signal to be detected and the current to flow electrons in the same band.
the energy of the incident wave has to be greater than
that of the energy gap,
Eincident > Eband-gap
⇒ E is inversely proportional to λ. The wave length of
the incident wave has to be lesser than the wave length
of the band-gap.
⇒ Therefore the given photodiode can detect the
incident signal only if its wavelength is smaller than
4960 Å In P-type semiconductor the majority charge carriers are
4000 Å < 4960 Å holes. So it is P-type semiconductor.
51. A p-n photodiode is made of a material with a 53. Application of a forward bias to a p-n
band gap of 2.0 eV. The minimum frequency of junction–/p-n pebkeäMeve ceW De«e yeeÙemeve ueieeves hej-
the radiation that can be absorbed by the (a) Widens the depletion zone
material is nearly:/Skeâ p-n Heâesšes[eÙees[ 2.0 eV DeJe#eÙe peesve Ûeew[Ì e nes peelee nw
yeQ[ Devlejeue kesâ heoeLe& mes yeveer nw~ Fme heoeLe& Éeje (b) Increases the number of donors on the n
DeJeMeesef<ele efJeefkeâjCe keâer vÙetvelece DeeJe=efòe ueieYeie nesieer side/n he#e ceW ÅeeslekeâeW keâer mebKÙee yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
(a) 1 × 1014 Hz (b) 20 × 1014 Hz (c) Increases the potential difference across the
depletion zone
(c) 10 × 1014 Hz (d) 5 × 1014 Hz
DeJe#eÙe peesve kesâ Deej hej efJeYeJeevlej yeÌ{ peeleer nw~
AIPMT-2008
(d) Increases the electric field in the depletion
Ans. (d) : Given : - p – n Photodiode zone/DeJe#eÙe peesve ceW JewÅegle #es$e yeÌ{ peelee nw~
energy Band gap (E) = 2.0 eV
AIPMT-2005
We Know E = hν
Ans. (b) : When P- side of Junction diode is connected
(where h = Planck constant = 6.6 ×10–34) to positive terminal of battery and n-side to the
ν = frequency negative terminal then Junction diode is forward biased.
E 2.0 × 1.6 × 10−19
∴ ν= =
h 6.6 × 10−34
3.2 × 10−19 × 10+34
ν=
6.6
ν ≈ 5 × 10 Hz 14

52. In the energy band diagram of a material

shown below, the open circles and filled circles Battery
denote holes and electrons respectively. The In this condition, more number of electrons enter in n-
material is:-Skeâ heoeLe& keâer Fme Tpee& yewC[ Deeke=âefle ceW side from battery there, by increasing the number of
efÚõeW keâes Kegues Je=òeeW ceW Deewj Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâes keâeuee Yejs donor on n-side.
Je=òeeW mes efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw~ Ùen heoeLe& nesiee:- It also reduces the width of depletion zone.
54. Zener diode is used for:-
pesvej [eÙees[ keâe ØeÙeesie neslee nw:-
(a) Rectification/efo°keâjCe kesâ efueS
(b) Stabilisation/efmLejerkeâjCe kesâ efueS
(c) Amplification/DeeJeOe&ve kesâ efueS
(d) Producing oscillations in an oscillator
oesefue$e ceW oesueve GlheVe keâjves kesâ efueS
AIPMT-2005
Physics 632 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (b): Zener diode is a diode which is used in its Ans. (a): Forward bias or basing is where the external
reverse biased condition to be used as a voltage voltage is delivered across the p-n junction diode. In
regulator to maintain a constant DC output voltage forward bias setup, the p-side of the diode is attached
across the load. to the positive terminal and N- side is fixed to the
negative side of the battery. The applied voltage is
opposite to the junction barrier potential.

→ forward biased - P-N junction acts as a close

switch.
• Hence Zener diode is used for stabilization of voltage. When the p-type is connected to the battery's negative
terminal and the n- type is connected to positive
• A p-n junction diode is used for rectification.
terminal. the p-n junction is reverse biased . In this case,
55. The peak voltage in the output of a half wave the built in electric field and the applied electric field
diode rectifier fed with a sinusoidal signal are in the same direction.
without filter is 10V. The d. c. component of the
output voltage is :-
Skeâ DeOe&lejbieerÙe [eÙees[ efo°keâejkeâ, efpemekeâe Yejve
pÙeeJe›eâerÙe efmeiveue Éeje efkeâÙee ieÙee nw, kesâ efveie&le ceW
efyevee efheâušj efMeKej Jeesušlee keâe ceeve 10V nQ efveie&le
→ reverse biased- P-N junction acts as an open switch.
Jeesušlee keâe efo° Oeeje (D.C) DebMe nesiee :-
57. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams,
10 which one of the diode is reverse biased ?
(a) V (b) 10 V
π /efvecveefueefKele efÛe$eeW ceW oMee&S ieS [eÙees[eW ceW mes keâewvemee
20 10 he§eÂefMekeâ yeeÙeefmele nw?
(c) V (d) V
π 2
AIPMT-2004 (a) (b)
Ans. (a) : The output DC component of half wave
rectifier is given by-
Peak voltage (c) (d)
Voutput =
π
V AIPMT-2004
Voutput = 0 = Vdc
π Ans. (b) :
10
Voutput = V = Vdc
π
56. One part of a device is connected with the
negative terminal of a battery and another part
is connected with the positive terminal of a
battery. If their ends now altered, current does
not flow in circuit, then the device will be Reverse Bias :- When P-type is connected to negative
Skeâ Ssmeer Ùegefòeâ efpemekeâe Skeâ Yeeie yewšjer kesâ $e+Ce efmejs terminal and N-type to the positive terminal of the
battery then diode is said to be in reverse biased.
mes pegÌ[e nw Je otmeje Oeveelcekeâ efmejs mes pegÌ[e ngDee nw Ùeefo Earth is consider as negative terminal and here P-type is
Gvekesâ efmejeW keâes yeoue os lees heefjheLe ceW Oeeje veneR yenleer connected with earth (–ve) and N-type is connected
nw, lees Ùegefòeâ nesieer– with +5v so it will be in reverse biased.
(a) P–N Junction/P–N mebefOe 58. In a p–n junction photo cell, the value of the
photo electromotive force produced by
(b) Transistor/š^ebefpemšj
monochromatic light is proportional to: -
(c) Zener diode/pesvej [eÙees[ p-n pebkeäMeve heâesšes mesue ceW efkeâmeer SkeâJeCeea ØekeâeMe Éeje
(d) Triode/š^eÙees[ GlheVe efkeâÙee ieÙee ØekeâeMe efJeÅegle-Jeenkeâ yeue Devegheeleer
AIPMT-1998 neslee nw :-
Physics 633 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) The intensity of the light falling on the cell the way the diode is connected to the voltage source
mesue hej Deeheeflele ØekeâeMe keâer leer›elee keâe (where forward biased or reversed biased). It also
depends on temperature and the doping concentration of
(b) The frequency of the light falling on the cell
the diode. Since the barrier potential depends on the
mesue hej Deeheeflele ØekeâeMe keâer DeeJe=efòe keâe width of the depletion region, the barrier potential
(c) The voltage applied at the p–n junction depends on temperature, forward bias and the doping
p–n pebkeäMeve hej ueieeF& ieF& Jeesušlee keâe density of the diode. Therefore the barrier potential does
(d) The barrier voltage at the p–n junction not depends on the design of the diode.
p–n pebkeäMeve hej jesOeer Jeesušlee keâe 61. In a PN junction / PN mebefOe ceW efJeYeJe keâe ceeve -
AIPMT-2004 (a) High potential at N side and low potential at P
Ans. (a) : side / N keâer lejHeâ DeefOekeâ SJeb P keâer lejHeâ keâce
(b) High potential at P side and low potential at N
side / P hej DeefOekeâ Je N hej keâce
(c) P and N both are at same potential
When a light (wavelength sufficient to break the P Je N oesveeW meceeve efJeYeJe hej
covalent bond) falls on the junction, new hole-electron (d) Undetermined / DeefveOeeÙe&
pairs are created. Number of produced electron hole AIPMT-2002
pair depends upon no. of photons. So photo emf or
Ans. (a) : There is difference in concentration of charge
current is proportional to intensity of light. carriers in the two sections of p - n junction, the
The intensity of the light is defined as the power of the electrons from N-region diffuse through the junction
light incident in the unit area. We know that the power into P-region & the holes from P-region diffuse into N-
is directly proportional to current, and the current region. Now, when an electron from N-region diffuses
proportional to the electromotive force. Therefore into P-region the electron falls into the vacancy i.e, it
electromotive force is also proportional to the intensity completes the covalent bond. Due to migration of
of the light falling on the photocell. charge carriers across the junction, the N-region of
59. Reverse bias applied to a junction diode junction will have its electrons neutralized by holes
Skeâ pebkeäMeve [eÙees[ ceW he§e yeeÙeme ueieeves mes from the P-region, having only ionized donor atoms
(Positive charges) which are bound and cannot move.
(a) Lowers the potential barrier Similarly, P regions of junction will have ionized
efJeYeJe jesOe keâce neslee nw acceptor atoms (negative charges) which are immobile.
(b) raises the potential barrier The accumulation of electric charges of opposite
efJeYeJe jesOe DeefOekeâ neslee nw polarities in two regions of junction gives rise to an
(c) increases the majority carrier current electric field between these regions as if fictitious
battery is connected across the terminals. Junction
yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ Oeeje yeÌ{leer nw with its positive terminal connected to P region.
(d) increases the minority carrier current Therefore, in a p-n junction high potential is at N side &
DeuhemebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ Oeeje yeÌ{leer nw low potential is at P side.
AIPMT-2003 62. For the given circuit of P-N junction diode
Ans. (b): When a p – n junction is reversed biased, the which is correct.
negative terminal of the battery attract the free holes in P-N mebefOe [eÙees[ kesâ efoÙes ieÙes heefjheLe kesâ efueS -
the p – type towards itself whereas the positive terminal
attracts the free electrons in n type towards itself. Hence
electrons and the holes move away from the junction
which results in increasing of the depletion width as
well as the potential barrier.
(a) In forward biasing, the voltage across R is V
60. Barrier potential of a p-n junction diode does R hej efJeYeJe V nw peye [eÙees[ De«e yeeÙeefmele nw
not depend on – /Skeâ p-n pebkeäMeve [eÙees[ keâe jesOeer
(b) In reversed biasing, the voltage across R is V
efJeYeJe efvecve ceW mes efkeâme hej efveYe&j veneR keâjlee - R hej efJeYeJe V nw peye [eÙees[ he§e yeeÙeefmele nw
(a) diode design/[eÙees[ kesâ yeveeJeš hej (c) In forward biasing, the voltage across R is 2
(b) temperature/leehe hej V / R hej efJeYeJe 2V nw peye [eÙees[ De«e yeeÙeefmele nw
(c) forward bias/De«e DeefYeveefle hej (d) In reversed biasing, the voltage across R is 2
(d) doping density/DeheefceßeCe IevelJe hej V/ R hej efJeYeJe 2V nw peye [eÙees[ he§e yeeÙeefmele nw
AIPMT-2003 AIPMT-2002
Ans. (a): The barrier potential is directly proportional to Ans. (a) : In Forward biasing , the resistance of p-n
width of the depletion region. This means that larger the junction diode is ideally zero but practically is very low
width of the depletion region, greater will be the barrier to the flow of current. In forward biasing voltage
potential. The width of the depletion region depends on appears across the resistances (V).
Physics 634 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
65. Zener diode is used as
peervej [eÙees[ GheÙeesie ceW ueeles nQ -
(a) Half wave rectifier/Deæ&lejbie efo°keâejer keâer lejn
(b) Full wave rectifier/hetCe& lejbie efo°keâejer keâer lejn
(c) A.C. voltage stablizer/ØelÙeeJeleea Jeesušlee efveÙeecekeâ
(d) D.C. voltage stablizer/efo° Jeesušlee efveÙeecekeâ
63. The current (I) in the circuit will be : -
heefjheLe ceW Oeeje “I” keâe ceeve %eele keâefjS AIPMT-1999
Ans. (d) : For a wide range of values of load resistance,
the current in the zener diode may change but the
voltage across it remains unaffected thus the output
voltage across the zener diode is regulated voltage.
Hence, zener diode can be used as DC voltage stablizer.
66. Depletion layer has (for an unbiased PN junction)
5 5 DeyeeÙeefmele PN mebefOe kesâ DeJe#eÙe hejle ceW nesles nQ-
(a) A (b) A
40 50 (a) Electrons/Fueskeäš^e@ve
5 5 (b) Holes/ne@ue
(c) A (d) A
10 20 (c) Static ions/efmLej DeeÙeve
AIPMT-2001 (d) Neutral atoms/Goemeerve hejceeCeg
Ans. (b) : AIPMT-1999
Ans. (c) : In a p-n Junction diode the minority charge
carriers in the p - region and n-region are electrons and
holes respectively. The diffusion current, which flows
from the p to n region is exactly balanced by the equal
and opposite drift current in an unbiased junction due to
the diffusion of charge carriers.
67. The cause of potential barrier in a P–N
Diode 1 is forward biased, thus current will flow junction diode is
through it, whereas diode 2 is reverse biased, so no
P–N mebefOe [eÙees[ ceW efJeYeJe-jesOe keâe keâejCe nw–
current flows through it. Equivalent circuit is also
shown below. (a) Concentration of positive and negative ions
Total resistance of equivalent circuit Req = 20 + 30 we near the junction/mebefOe kesâ efvekeâš $e+Ceelcekeâ SJeb
get Req = 50Ω Oeveelcekeâ DeeÙeveeW keâer meebõlee
Thus current flowing through the circuit. (b) Concentration of positive charges near the
V junction/mebefOe kesâ vepeoerkeâ Oeveelcekeâ DeeÙeveeW keâer meebõlee
I= (c) Depletion of negative charges near the
Req
junction/mebefOe kesâ vepeoerkeâ $e+Ceelcekeâ DeeJesMeeW keâe
I=
5V
=
5
A DeJe#eÙe
( 30 + 20 ) Ω 50 (d) Increment in concentration of holes and
electrons near the junction/mebefOe kesâ vepeoerkeâ
64. From the following diode circuit. Which diode
in forward biased condition : Fueskeäš^e@ve SJeb keâesšjeW keâer meebõlee ceW Je=efæ
efvecve [eÙees[ ceW mes keâewve-mee [eÙees[ De«e yeeÙeme nesiee– AIPMT-1998
Ans. (a) :During the formation of a junction diode,
(a) holes from p-region diffuse into n-region and electrons
from n -region diffuse into p-region. In both the cases,
(b) when an electrons meets a hole, they cancel the effect at
each other and as a result, a thin layer at the junction
(c) becomes free from any of charge carriers. This is called
depletion layer. There is a potential gradient in the
(d) depletion layer, negative end on the p-side and the
AIPMT-2000 positive end on the n-side, thus the potential difference
developed across the junction is called potential barrier.
Ans. (a) : Forward Biased- In forward bias setup, the
p-side of diode is attached to positive terminal & N-side 68. When a triode is used as an amplifier the phase
is fixed to negative side of battery. From all option difference between the input signal voltage and
option A shows forward biased P-N junction. the output is/peye Skeâ š^eÙees[ keâes ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ ™he ceW
keâeÙe& ceW ueeÙee peelee nw, lees efveJesMeer efmeiveue Jeesušlee
leLee efveie&le Jeesušlee kesâ yeerÛe keâueeblej nesiee:
Physics 635 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) 0 (b) π (a) 6.76Ω (b) 20 Ω
(c) π/2 (d) π/4 (c) 5 Ω (d) 5.6 Ω
AIPMT-1990 AIPMT-1997
Ans. (b) : When a triode is used as an amplifier, the Ans. (c) : Voltage drop across diode (VD) = 0.5 V
input and output voltages are in the opposite phase. So Maximum power rating of diode (p) = 100 mW
–3
the phase difference between the input and output = 100×10 W
voltages is 180º or π Source voltage (Vs) = 1.5 V
69. The depletion layer in the p-n junction region is
caused by
p-n mebefOe #es$e ceW DeJe#eÙe hejle kesâ nesves keâe keâejCe nw:
(a) drift of holes/nesue (keâesšj) keâe DeheJeen p
(b) diffusion of charge carriers/DeeJesMe JeenkeâeW keâe The current through circuit, i = v
efJemejCe 100 × 10 –3
= = 0.2A
(c) migration of impurity ions/DeMegæ DeeÙeveeW keâe 0.5
mLeeveeblejCe ∴ Voltage drop across resistance = 1.5 – 0.5= 1.0 V
(d) drift of electrons/Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe DeheJeen 1
⇒ R= = 5Ω
AIPMT-1991 0.2
Ans. (b) : The depletion layer of a P-N junction diode is
due to doping of the materials and diffusion of charge 71. In the case of forward biasing of p-n junction,
carriers. which one of the following figures correclty
depicts the direction of flow of carriers?
• Depletion region is formed when two opposite type of
semiconductors (P and n) are in contact. p-n mebefOe kesâ De«eefoefMekeâ yeeÙemeve keâer efmLeefle ceW efvecve ceW
Due to concentration difference of carriers (electrons in mes keâewve-meer Deeke=âefle JeenkeâeW kesâ ØeJeen keâer efoMee keâes
n-type and hole in p-type) the majority carriers across mener mes ØeoefMe&le keâjleer nw?
the junction and recombine.
• Near the Junction, Which is deficient of electrons in
the n-region (generating positive charge) and deficiency (a) (b)
of holes in p-region (generating negative charge).
The charges on both sides of the junction generate an
electric field which prevents further diffusion of charge
carriers. (c) (d)

AIPMT-1995
Ans. (b) : A PN-Junction is a device which conducts
only on one direction and blocks the flow of current in
another direction.
This is true because current flows only during forward
70. The diode used in the circuit shown in the bias while during reverse bias, large current can not
flow as it can lead to break down of diode.
figure has a constant voltage drop at 0.5 V at
all currents and a maximum power rating of
100 milli watts. What should be the value of the
resistor R, connected in series with diode for
obtaining maximum current?
oMee&S ieS heefjheLe ceW ØeÙegòeâ [eÙees[ keâe meYeer OeejeDeeW
hej efveÙele efJeYeJe heele 0.5V hej neslee nw Deewj [Ùees[ keâer • In a conventional current flow in a forward Biased P–
DeefOekeâlece Meefòeâ oj 100 efceueer Jee@š nw~ DeefOekeâlece N junction Diode, the current flows from the battery
anode to the cathode.
Oeeje Øeehle keâjves kesâ efueS [eÙees[ kesâ meeLe ßesCeer›eâce ceW In P region, the direction of the conventional current is
pegÌ[s ØeeflejesOe R keâe ceeve keäÙee nesvee ÛeeefnS? the same as the flow of holes. In n region direction of
conventional current is opposite to the direction of the
flow of electrons.
So, the figure correctly showing the conventional
current inside the diode.
Physics 636 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
28.4 Digital Electronics and Logic Gates
72. The given circuit is equivalent to 74.
efoÙee ieÙee heefjheLe leguÙe nw
The truth table for the given logic circuit is
efoS ieS heefjheLe kesâ efueS melÙelee meejCeer nw:
A B C A B C
0 0 0 0 0 0
(a) (a) 0 1 1 (b) 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
(b)
1 1 1 1 1 0
(c) A B C A B C
0 0 1 0 0 1
(d) (c) 0 1 0 (d) 0 1 0
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 1 0 0 1 0 1
Ans. (b) : 1 1 1 1 1 0
NEET (UG)-17.07.2022
Ans. (d) :

Y = A + B = A.B = A.B = AND Gate

73. For the following logic circuit, the truth table is:
efoÙes ieÙes uee@efpekeâ heefjheLe keâer melÙelee meejCeer nw :
Using De-morgon theorem
C = A.B + A.B
A B Y A B Y C = B(A + A)
0 0 0 0 0 1 C=B
(a) 0 1 0 (b) 0 1 1 Therefore
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0
A B Y A B Y
0 0 0 0 0 1
(c) 0 1 1 (d) 0 1 0 75.
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0
NEET (UG)-07.05.2023
Ans. (c) :

Identify the equivalent logic gate represented

A B Y
by the given circuit:/efoS ngS heefjheLe Éeje efve™efhele
0 0 0
leguÙe uee@efpekeâ (leke&â) iesš %eele keâjW:
0 1 1 (a) OR (b) NOR
1 0 1 (c) AND (d) NAND
1 1 1 NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022

Physics 637 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Ans. (c):

Time input signal Output Signal

Case 1:- When A = 0 and B = 0 then no current flow in duration A B C AB BC Y=AB+ BC
the circuit therefore bulb will not glow i.e. Y = 0
Case 2 :- When any one input is 1 or both input are 1
then current will flow from higher potential to lower 0 - t1 0 0 1 0 1 1
potential in the circuit and bulb will glow i.e. Y = 1 ] t1 - t2 1 0 1 0 1 1
Truth Table :- t2- t3 0 1 0 0 1 1
A B Y t3- t4 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 t4- t5 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 t5- t6 1 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 1 t6- t7 0 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 1
Hence, from the truth table we can say that circuit So, the output at y is high
behaves as a OR Gate. V0 = 5
76. For the given circuit, the input digital signals 77. Which of the following gate is called universal
are applied at the terminals A, B and C. What gate?/veerÛes efoS ieS efkeâme iesš keâes meeJe&ef$ekeâ iesš keâne
would be the output at the terminal y?
efoS ieS meefke&âš kesâ efueS Fvehegš ef[efpešue efmeiveue peelee nw?
šefce&veue A, B leLee C hej DevegØeÙegòeâ efkeâÙes peeles nQ~ efmejs (a) NOT gate/ NOT iesš
y hej efveie&le efmeieveue keäÙee nesiee? (b) OR gate/ OR iesš
(c) AND gate/ AND iesš
(d) NAND gate/ NAND iesš
NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
Ans. (d) : A universal gate is one which can create any
logical Boolean expression without the use of any other
gate type. NOR gate and NAND gate are called
universal gate.
AND, NOT and OR gates are called basic gates since
we can create any Boolean expression by combining a
mixture of these gates.
Truth table for NAND gate

A B Y
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
(a) 1 1 0

78. For the logic circuit shown, the truth table is:
(b)
oMee&S ieS leke&â heefjheLe kesâ efueS, melÙeceeve meejCeer nw:
(c)
(d)
NEET (UG)-12.09.2021
Physics 638 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(a) A B Y 80. The circuit diagram shown here corresponds to
0 0 0 the logic gate,/ÙeneB oMee&Ùee ieÙee heefjheLe DeejsKe efkeâme
0 1 1 uee@efpekeâ iesš kesâ leoveg™heer nw?
1 0 1
1 1 1
(b) A B Y
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
(c) A B Y
0 0 1 (a) NAND (b) NOR
0 1 0 (c) AND (d) OR
1 0 0 NEET (UG)-20.05.2019, (Odisha)
1 1 0 Ans. (b) : Let us consider different cases.
(d) A B Y Case–1- When A = 1, B = 0 then LED will not glow i.e.
0 0 0 Y = 0 because all the current goes to the ground.
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (d) :
A B A B Y =A+B Y
0 0 1 1 1 0 Case - 2- When A = 0, B = 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 All current goes in LED
1 0 0 1 1 0 Y=1
1 1 0 0 0 1
79.

Case 3- When A = 0, B = 1 then LED will not glow ie

Y = 0 because all the current goes to the ground

The correct Boolean operation represented by

the circuit diagram drawn is:/DeejsKe kesâ heefjheLe
Éeje efve™efhele mener yetueerÙeve ØeÛeeueve nw-
(a) OR (b) NAND
(c) NOR (d) AND
NEET (UG)-05.05.2019 Case (4) When A = 1, B = 1 then LED will not glow ie
Ans. (b) : Y = 0 because all the current goes to the ground

A B C
A B Output 0 0 1
1 0 1 All current goes in LED part
0 1 0
0 1 1 All current goes in LED part
1 1 0 No current goes in LED (off) 1 0 0
0 0 1 All current goes in LED part 1 1 0
This is output of NAND gate The above truth table refers to NOR gate.

Physics 639 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
81. In the combination of the following gates the (a) 0,1 (b) 0,0
output Y can be written in terms of inputs A (c) 1,0 (d) 1,1
and B as / efÛe$e ceW efoS ieS iesšeW kesâ mebÙeespeve ceW efveie&le NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Y keâes efveJesMeeW A Deewj B kesâ heoeW ceW Fme Øekeâej JÙeòeâ Ans. (c) :
efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw YP = AB

Here, the gate P is a logic symbol of AND gate and Q is

(a) A ⋅ B (b) A ⋅ B + A ⋅ B a NAND gate.
(c) A + B (d) A ⋅ B + A ⋅ B So, the output of P is Yp = A. B and the output of Q is
NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
Y = Yp .C
Ans. (b) :
When A = 0, B = 0 , C = 0
YP = 0, Y = 0.0 . 0 = 1
When A = 1, B = 1, C = 1
YP = 1, Y = 1.1 = 0
84. To get output 1 for the following circuit, the
correct choice for the input is:/veerÛes efoS ieS
• Gate 1 and 2 are NOT gate.
heefjheLe ceW, efveie&le 1 Øeehle keâjves kesâ efueS efveJesMe keâe
So, output of gate 1 = B
mener ÛeÙeve nw :
output of gate 2 = A
• Gate 3 and 4 are AND gate
So, output of gate 3 = A ⋅ B
output of gate 4 = A ⋅ B (a) A = 1, B = 0, C = 1 (b) A = 0, B = 1 C = 0
• Gate 5 is OR gate (c) A = 1 , B = 0, C = 0 (d) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
So, output of gate 5 is NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Y = A⋅B + A⋅B Ans. (a) :
82. The given electrical network is equivalent
to/efoÙee ieÙee efJeÅegle vesšJeke&â efkeâme iesš kesâ leguÙe nw?

Going by the options-

(a) AND gate/iesš (b) OR gate/iesš option (a) A = 1, B = 0, C = 1
(c) NOR gate/iesš (d) NOT gate/iesš Y = (A + B).C
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 = (1 + 0) × 1 = 1
Ans. (c) : option (b) A = 0, B = 1, C = 0
Y = (A + B) × C
= (0 + 1) × 0 = 0
option (c) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
Y = (A + B).C
y1 = A + B
Y = (1 + 0) × 0 = 0
y2 = y1 + y1 = y1 option (d) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
= A+B Y = (A + B).C
=A+B = (1 + 1) × 0
y = y2 = A + B
Y = 0

83. What is the output Y in the following circuit,

when all the three inputs A, B and C are first 0
and then 1?/veerÛes efoÙes ieÙes heefjheLe ceW efveie&ce Y nesiee,
peyeefkeâ leerveeW efveJesMe A, B Deewj C ØeejbcYe ceW 0 (MetvÙe) Option (a) is the right answer.
leLee efHeâj 1 (Skeâ) nw ? 85. Which logic gate is represented by the
following combination of logic gates?
efvecveefueefKele iesšeW (ÉejeW) keâe mebÙeespeve efkeâme iesš keâes
efve™efhele keâjlee nw?
Physics 640 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library

(a) NAND (b) AND

(c) NOR (d) OR (a) AND gate (b) NAND gate
(c) OR gate (d) NOR gate
AIPMT-03.05.2015
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
Ans. (b) :
Ans. (c) : Output of OR gate is Sum of two inputs
A B Y1 Y2 Y = Y1 + Y2 i.e. A+B
0 0 1 1 0 A B C
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
According to the truth table, 1 1 1
Y = A ⋅ B, the given combination of logic gates So, this is the table of OR Gate.
represents AND gate. 88. Symbolic representation of four logic gates are
86. To get an output Y = 1 in given circuit which of shown as :/Ûeej leke&â iesšeW kesâ ØeleerkeâeW keâes efvecve Øekeâej
the following input will be correct/efoS ieS efve™efhele efkeâÙee peelee nw :
heefjheLe ceW efveie&leceeve Y=1 Øeehle keâjves kesâ efueS (i) (ii)
efvecveefueefKele ceW keâewve mee efveJesMeerceeve mener nesiee:-
(iii) (iv)
Pick out which ones are for AND, NAND and
NOT gates, respectively :/FveceW AND, NAND Deewj
A B C NOT iesš ›eâceMe: nQ :
(a) 1 1 0
(a) (ii), (iv) and (iii)/(ii), (iv) Deewj (iii)
(b) 0 1 0
(b) (ii), (iii) and (iv)/(ii), (iii) Deewj (iv)
(c) 1 0 0
(d) 1 0 1 (c) (iii), (ii) and (i)/(iii), (ii) Deewj (i)
AIPMT (Mains)-2012 (d) (iii), (ii) and (iv)/(iii), (ii) Deewj (iv)
Ans. (d) : AIPMT (Screening)-2011
Ans. (a) : Logic Gate- A logic gate is an idealized or
physical electronic device implementing a Boolean
function.
A logical operation performed on one or more binary
For about circuit, inputs that produces a singal binary output.
output (y) = (A + B ) C Symbolic representation of Gates-
Now check for each option, (i) OR →

(ii) AND gate →

(iii) NOT gate →

(iv) NAND gate →

∴ Option (d) is correct.
87. The figure shown a logic circuit two inputs A Hence correct option is (a).
and B and the output C. The voltage wave 89. Two following figure shows a logic gate circuit
with two inputs A and B and the output Y. The
forms across A, B and C are as given. The logic
voltage wave forms of A, B and Y are as given.
circuit gate is:/DeejsKe ceW Skeâ leke&â heefjheLe oMee&Ùee
The logic gate is
ieÙee nw, efpemeceW oes efveJesMe A leLee B Deewj Skeâ efveie&le C efÛe$e ceW Skeâ uee@efpekeâ iesš heefjheLe efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw
nw~ A, B leLee C kesâ Jeesušlee lejbie™he efoÙes ieÙes Devegmeej efpemeceW A leLee B oes efveJesMe Deewj Y Skeâ efveie&le nw~ A,
nw lees, leke&â heefjheLe iesš nw : B Deewj Y keâe Jeesušlee lejbie ™he veerÛes efoÙee ieÙee nw–
Physics 641 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
91. The output from a NAND gate is divided into
two in parallel and fed to another NAND gate.
The resulting gate is a/ Skeâ NAND iesš mes
DeeGšhegš keâes meceeveeblej ceW oes YeeieeW ceW efJeYeeefpele efkeâÙee
peelee nw Deewj otmejs NAND iesš mes peesÌ[e peelee nw~
heefjCeeceer iesš nw-

Ùen uee@efpekeâ iesš nQ–

(a) NOT gate (b) AND gate
(a) NOR gate/NOR iesš
(c) NOR gate (d) OR gate
(b) OR gate/OR iesš NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
(c) AND gate/AND iesš Ans. (b) : Output of given logic gate is
(d) NAND gate/NAND iesš
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Ans. (d) : It is clear from given logic gate circuit, the
output Y is low when both input is high, otherwise it is C = A.B = A .B
high. Thus the logic circuit is of NAND gate
It is the Boolean expression AND gate.
NAND = AND + NOT
Hence the resulting gate is a AND gate.
92. The symbolic representation of four logic gates
are given below :
Truth table. Ûeej leke&â ÉejeW kesâ mebkesâleelcekeâ heje™he ÙeneB efÛe$e nw:
A B Y = A.B (i) (ii)
1 1 0
0 0 1 (iii) (iv)
0 1 1
1 0 1 The logic symbols for OR, NOT and NAND
gates are respectively :
90. The output (X) of the logic circuit shown in
OR, NOT leLee NAND ÉejeW kesâ mebkesâle ›eâceevegmeej nw:
figure will be:/DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùes ieÙes leke&â iesš (Éej)
(a) (i), (iii), (iv) (b) (iii), (iv), (ii)
keâe efveie&le (X) nesiee:
(c) (iv), (i), (iii) (d) (iv), (ii), (i)
AIMPT-2009
Ans. (d) : OR Gate – In OR gate the output attains the
(a) X = A + B (b) X = A.B
state 1 if one or more inputs attains the sate 1 Boolean
(c) X = A.B (d) X = A.B expression of OR gate Y = A + B, read as Y equals A + B
NEET (UG)-05.05.2013
Ans. (d & b) :

NOT Gate – Output of NOT gate attains the state 1 if

and only if the input does not attain the state 1.
The Boolean expression Y = Ᾱ , read as y equals NOT A
OR

NAND Gate – It is combination of AND and NOT

X = AB ⋅ AB Gate. Boolean expression = Y = A.B
X = AB + AB
X= AB+AB
X = AB
Physics 642 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a) :

AND Gate – Output of an AND gate attains the state 1 Gates-I and II are NOR and NOT gates. The output of
if and only if all the inputs are in state 1 ( )
gate I A + B will be input of gate II. The final output

Boolean expression Y =A.B is Y = A + B = A + B .

This is the Boolean expression of OR gate whose truth
table is given below-
A B Y
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
93. The circuit is equivalent to - 1 1 1
heefjheLe meceleguÙe nesiee :-
95. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit with two
inputs A and B and the output C. The voltage
waveforms of A, B and C are as shown below-
/efvecveefueefKele efÛe$e ceW Skeâ leke&â Éej heefjheLe keâes efoKeeÙee ieÙee nw
(a) NOR gate/ veeefhe iesš keâe
efpemeceW oes efveJesMe A Deewj B Deewj Skeâ efveie&le C nQ~ A, B Deewj C
(b) OR gate/ Deefhe iesš keâe kesâ Jeesušlee lejbie-™he efvecve Øekeâej nw:
(c) AND gate/ DeLe iesš keâe
(d) NAND gate/ veLe iesš keâe
AIPMT-2008
Ans. (a) : Given circuit–

Output of NOR gate – y1 = A + B

Output of NAND gate – y2 = y1.y1 = A + B ⋅ A + B The logic circuit gate is:
Ùen leke&â heefjheLe Éej nw:-
= A+B+A+B
= (A + B) + (A + B) (a) AND gate/ DeLe iesš (b) NAND gate/veLe iesš
= (A + B) (c) NOR gate/ veeefhe iesš (d) OR gate/ Deefhe iesš
Output of NOT gate y = y 2 = A + B (NOR GATE) AIPMT-2006
94. In the following circuit, the output Y for all Ans. (a) :
possible inputs A and B is expressed by the truth 0
table:/efÛe$e ceW ØeoefMe&le heefjheLe kesâ efueÙes meYeer mecYeJe A
Deewj B efveJesMeerÙeeW kesâ efueÙes efveie&le Y keâes FveceW mes efkeâme
0
melÙe meejCeer Éeje JÙeòeâ efkeâÙee pee mekeâlee nw:-
0
A B C
0 0 0
1 1 1
(a) (b)
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1
(c) (d) 0 0 0
We see it give returns output as true only and only when
both the inputs are true so it is AND gate.

Physics 643 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
96. The output of OR gate is 1 :-
Deefhe Éejkeâ keâe efveie&le Skeâ nesiee :-
(a) If either or both inputs are 1
peye Skeâ DeLeJee oesveeW efveJesMe Skeâ neW
(b) Only if both inputs are 1
99. The truth table for the following network
kesâJeue peye oesveeW efveJesMe Skeâ-Skeâ neW is/efoÙes ieÙes heefjheLe keâer melÙe meejCeer keäÙee nw-
(c) If either input is zero
peye oesveeW ceW mes Skeâ efveJesMe MetvÙe nesb
(d) If both inputs are zero/peye oesveeW efveJesMe MetvÙe neW
AIPMT-2004
Ans. (a) : The output of OR gate is 1 if either or both
inputs are 1

(a) (b)
97. Following diagram performs the logic function
of: /efvecveefueefKele efÛe$e efpeme uee@efpekeâ Heâueve keâes
efve<heeefole keâjlee nw, Jen nw:

(a) AND gate/ AND Éej (c) (d) FveceW mes keâesF& veneR
(b) NAND gate/ NAND Éej
(c) OR gate/ OR Éej
AIPMT-1999
(d) XOR gate/ XOR Éej
Ans. (b) : Truth table for the given logic circuit–
AIPMT-2003
A B A B A.B AB Y = AB + AB
Ans. (a): X = A.B
0 0 1 1 0 0 0
∴ Y = X = A.B = A.B 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Y = A.B by De Morgan theorem 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Therefore the given diagram performs the functions of 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
AND gate.
Y = AB + AB = A ⊕ B
98. Given Truth table is correct for :
oer ieF& melÙe meejCeer efkeâme kesâ efueS mener nw – It represents XOR Gate.
100. Following logic gate is/efvecve leke&â Éej nw–

(a) AND (b) NAND

(c) EX-OR (d) OR
(a) NAND (b) AND AIPMT-1998, 1996
(c) NOR (d) OR Ans. (b):
AIPMT-2000
Ans. (b) :

(i) In AND gate, high output results only if all INPUT

to AND gate are High
(ii) If not all inputs to the AND gate are High, Low
output results.
Given Truth Table corresponds to AND gate, where
NAND gate- The combination of two basic gates, the
Y = A.B AND gate and NOT gate connected in Series. The

Physics 644 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
NAND gate and NOR gate can be called the universal y = A+B
gate since the combination of these gates can be used to
accomplish any of the basic operations. A B A+B y=A+B
The output of a NAND gate is high when either of the 0 0 0 1
inputs is high or if both the input are low. In other
words the output is always high and goes low only 0 1 1 0
when both the input are high. 1 0 1 0
The Boolean expression of NAND gate = Y = A.B 1 1 1 0
101. The given truth table is for which logic gate? 103. The following truth table corresponds to the
oer ieF& melÙe meejCeer efkeâme leke&â iesš mes mecyeefvOele nw? logical gate
oer ieÙeer melÙe meejCeer efkeâme iesš mes ØeoefMe&le keâjleer nw?

(a) NAND (b) OR

(a) NAND (b) XOR (c) AND (d) XOR
(c) NOR (d) OR AIPMT-1991
AIPMT-2002, 2001, 1998, 1994 Ans. (b) : OR gate
Ans. (a) : NAND GATE:-
A NAND gate is a two -input signal and output device.
The number of inputs can be two or more according to
the need
• A NAND gate means it is a combination logic circuit Y = A+B
and a NAND gate is formed by combining an AND gate A B Y =A+B
followed by a NOT gate. 0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Y = A.B
A B A.B y = A.B 28.5 A Junction Transistor
0 0 0 1
104.
0 1 0 1
1 0 0
1
1 1 1 0
102. The following truth-table belongs to which one
of the following four gates?
oer ieÙeer melÙe meejCeer efkeâme iesš mes meyebefOele nw?
The above figure shows the circuit symbol of a
transistor. Select the correct statement given
below.
Ghejesòeâ efÛe$e š^ebefpemšj kesâ heefjheLe efÛevn keâes oMee&lee nw~
veerÛes efoS ieS mener keâLeveeW keâe ÛeÙeve keâjss :
(A) The transistor has two segments of p-type
(a) XOR (b) NOR semiconductor separated by a segment of n-
(c) OR (d) NAND type semiconductor./ š^ebefpemšj ceW heer –Øekeâej
AIPMT-1997, 1995 DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ kesâ oes Keb[ nw pees Sve-Øekeâej Deæ&Ûeeuekeâ
Ans. (b) : kesâ Keb[ mes Deueie nesles nQ~ ~
(B) The emitter is of moderate size and heavily
doped./ Sefcešj ceOÙece Deekeâej keâe nw Deewj Yeejer cee$ee
ceW [eshe efkeâÙee ieÙee nw ~
Physics 645 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(C) The Central segment is thin and lightly doped./ Ans. (c): Given that –
keWâõerÙe Keb[ heleuee Deewj nukeâs cee$ee ceW [eshe efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ 80% of IE = IC = 24 mA
(D) The emitter base junction is reverse biased in
common emitter amplifier circuit./ Sefcešj yesme
pebkeäMeve keâe@ceve Sefcešj ScheueerheâeÙej meefke&âš ceW efjJeme&
yeeÙem[ nw~
(a) (A) and (B)/(A) Deewj (B) From the formula–
(b) (B) and (C)/(B) Deewj (C) IE = IC + Ib ...(i)
(c) (C) and (D)/(C) Deewj (D) Where, I C = Collector current
(d) (A) and (D)/(A) Deewj (D) IE = Emitter current
RE NEET Manipur (UG)- 06.06.2023 Ib = Base current
Ans. (b) : From the given data –
80% of IE = IC
80
× I E = 24mA
100
24 ×100
IE =
80
IE = 30 mA
From equation (i) ⇒ Ib = IE – IC
Ib = 30 – 24
NPN transistor
⇒ A junction transistor is formed by sandwiching a thin I b = +6mA
layer of P-type semiconductor between two n-type Here, its base current will be 6mA, and entering the
semiconductor.
base.
⇒ The emitter base junction is forward biased and
collector base junction is reverse biased. 106. A n-p-n transistor is connected in common
⇒ The base region (central segment) is thin and lightly emitter configuration (see figure) in which
doped. collector voltage drop across load resistance
⇒ The emitter region is heavily doped and it provides (800 Ω) connected to the collector circuit is 0.8
majority charge carriers by which current flow in V. The collector current is
transistor. efkeâmeer n-p-n š^ebefpemšj keâes, GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ
⇒ The main purpose of collector region is to collect efJevÙeeme ceW (DeejsKe osefKeS), efpemeceW meb«eenkeâ heefjheLe
majority charge carriers from the emitter therefore, the
size of the collector is larger than the two other regions. ceW mebÙeesefpele uees[ ØeeflejesOe (800 Ω) kesâ efmejeW hej
105. The collector current in a common base efJeYeJeheele 0.8 V nw, mes mebÙeesefpele efkeâÙee ieÙee nw~ FmeceW
amplifier using n-p-n transistor is 24 mA. If me«eenkeâ Oeeje nw-
80% of the electrons released by the emitter is
accepted by the collector, then the base current
is numerically:
n-p-n š^eefvpemšj ØeÙegòeâ efkeâmeer GYeÙeefve° DeeOeej
ØeJeOe&keâ ceW meb«eenkeâ Oeeje keâe ceeve 24 mA nw~ Ùeefo
Glmepe&keâ Éeje Úes[s ieS kegâue Fueskeäš^e@veeWb kesâ 80%
Fueskeäš^e@ve meb«eenkeâ Éeje «enCe keâj efueS peeles nQ, lees
Deebefkeâkeâ ™he mes DeeOeej Oeeje nesieer:
(a) 6 mA and leaving the base
(a) 0.2 mA (b) 2 mA
6 mA SJeb DeeOeej keâes Úes[les ngS
(c) 0. mA (d) 1 mA
(b) 3 mA and leaving the base
3 mA SJeb DeeOeej keâes Úes[les ngS NEET (UG)-14.10.2020, Phase-II
(c) 6 mA and entering the base Ans. (d) : Voltage drop across load resistance
6 mA SJeb DeeOeej ceW ØeJesMe keâjles ngS VL = IC RC
(d) 3 mA and entering the base 0.8 = IC × 800
3 mA SJeb DeeOeej ceW ØeJesMe keâjles ngS I C = 1 mA
NEET (UG) Re-Exam-04.09.2022 ∴ Collector Current is IC = 1mA
Physics 646 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
107. For transistor action, which of the following 108. In the circuit shown in the figure, the input
statements is correct?/š^ebefpemšj ef›eâÙee kesâ efueS veerÛes voltage Vi is 20 V, VBE = 0 and VCE = 0. The
efoÙee ieÙee keâewvemee keâLeve mener nw? values of IB, IC and β are given by / efoS ieS
(a) Base, emitter and collector regions should heef j heLe Deejs Ke ceW, efveJesMe Jeesušlee (Vi) 20 V, VBE =
have same size./DeeOeej, Glmepe&keâ Deewj meb«eenkeâ #es$eeW 0 leLee VCE = 0 nw~ IB, IC Deewj β kesâ ceeve neWies
kesâ meeFpe meceeve nesves ÛeeefnS~
(b) Both emitter junction as well as the collector
junction are forward biased./Glmepe&keâ mebefOe Deewj
meb«eenkeâ mebefOe oesveeW ner De«eefoefMekeâ yeeÙeefmele nesleer nQ~
(c) The base region must be very thin and lightly
doped./DeeOeej #es$e yengle heleuee Deewj nukeâe [esefhele
nesvee ÛeeefnS~
IB = 40 µA, IC = 10 mA, β = 250
(a)
(d) Base, emitter and collector regions should
IB = 25 µA, IC = 5 mA, β = 200
(b)
have same doping concentrations.
IB = 40 µA, IC = 5 mA, β = 125
(c)
DeeOeej, Glmepe&keâ Deewj meb«eenkeâ #es$eeW keâer [esheve meeõbleeSB
IB = 20 µA, IC = 5 mA, β = 250
(d)
meceeve nesveer ÛeeefnS~ NEET (UG)-06.05.2018
NEET (UG)-13.09.2020
Ans. (c) : Given :
Ans. (c) : The base region must be very thin and lightly Input voltage Vi = VB = 20 V
doped. Collector voltage VC =20 V
• Transistor: Transistor is a semiconductor device that Base current, IB = ?
is used to conduct and insulate the electric field in the Collector current, IC = ?
circuit. It consists of emitter, base and collector.
I
E B C
Amplification factor β = C = ?
IB
Base resistacne, RB = 500 kΩ
Collector resistance, RC = 4 kΩ
Here, we have E as the emitter, C as the collector, and B
as the base of the transistor. VC
Option (a) :- The Emitter, Base and Collector region
have different sizes with varying concentrations. Order VB
of size of these region:-
Base < Emitter < Collector
VE
Order of the concentration of the region are:-
Base < Collector < Emitter
Hence, these region are doped differently and their
sizes are also different. Hence this option is wrong.
We know,
Option (b):- The emitter region has a high
concentration of electrons. So, connecting them across Vi = VB = IB.RB
the base will result in their movement to the base and ⇒ V 20
IB = B = = 40 µA
then to the collector, To facilitate the movement of the R B 500×10+3
charge carriers from emitter, the 'E-B' junction is kept in V 20
forward biased and the 'B-C' Junction in reverse biased VC = ICRC ⇒ IC = C =
so as to attract these charge carriers towards the RC 4×100
collector-region. So, both of the junction cannot be kept ⇒ IC = 5 mA
in forward biased. IC 5×10 –3
Option (c):- The base-region of transistor provides an β = =
I B 40×10 –6
interaction between emitter and collector of the
transistor and this region is made thin to reduce the β = 125
recombination of holes and electrons in this region, so 109. In a common emitter transistor amplifier the
that there is some collector current (Ic), Hence 'c' is audio signal voltage across the collector is 3 V.
correct. The resistance of collector is 3 kΩ. If current
Option (d):- From the answer part of option 'a' it is gain is 100 and the base resistance is 2 kΩ, the
clear that option 'd' is not correct. voltage and power gain of the amplifier is

Physics 647 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
efkeâmeer GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ š^ebefpemšj ØeJele&keâ ceW, meb«eenkeâ Given,
kesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe ßeJÙe-mebkesâle Jeesušlee 3V nw~ meb«eenkeâ Collector resistance, Rc = 2kΩ
keâe ØeeflejesOe 3 kΩ nw~ Ùeefo Oeeje ueefyOe 100 leLee Collector voltage, Vc = 2V
DeeOeej keâe ØeeflejesOe 2 kΩ nw lees, ØeJeOe&keâ keâer Jeesušlee- Base resistance, RB = 1kΩ
ueefyOe leLee Meefòeâ- ueefyOe kesâ ceeve ›eâceMe: neWies: I
Current amplification factor, β = C = 100
(a) 200 and 1000 (b) 15 and 200 IB
(c) 150 and 15000 (d) 20 and 2000 For input signal voltage
NEET (UG)-07.05.2017 Vin = IB RB
Ans. (c) : Given For base current
Collector voltage, VC = 3V I
Collector Resistance, RC = 3000 Ω = 3kΩ IB = c
β
Current gain (β) = 100
V 4
Base Resistance ,Rb = 2000Ω = 2kΩ IB = c = = 20µA.
Now, R c β ( 2000 × 100 )
V 3 Input signal voltage,
Collector Current, IC = C = = 10−3 A
R C 3000 Vin = IBRB
= 20 × 10–6 ×103
IC 10−3  Ic 
Base Current, Ib = = Q β =  = 20mV
β 100  Ib  111. A npn transistor is connected in common
= 10–5A emitter configuration in a given amplifier. A
Base Voltage, Vb = Ib Rb load resistance of 800 Ω is connected in the
= 10–5 × 2000 collector circuit and the voltage drop across it
= 2 × 10–2 V is 0.8 V. If the current amplification factor is
V 3 0.96 and the input resistance of the circuit is
Voltage gain = C = −2 192Ω, the voltage gain and the power gain of
Vb 2 × 10
the amplifier will respectively be:
= 150 efkeâmeer efoS ieS ØeJeOe&keâ ceW keâesF& npn š^ebefpemšj
Power gain = β × Voltage gain
GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ efJevÙeeme ceW mebÙeesefpele nw~ 800 Ω keâes
= 100 × 150
= 15000 keâes F& uees[ ØeeflejesOe meb«eenkeâ heefjheLe ceW mebÙeesefpele nw Deewj
110. For CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal Fmekesâ efmejeW hej 0.8 V efJeYeJeheele nw~ Ùeefo Oeeje ØeJeOe&keâ
voltage across the collector resistance of 2 kΩ is iegCeebkeâ 0.96 nw~ leLee heefjheLe keâe efveJesMe ØeeflejesOe 192Ω
4 V. If the current amplification factor of the nw~ lees Fme ØeJeOe&keâ keâer Jeesušlee ueefyOe leLee Meefòeâ
transistor is 100 and the base resistance is 1kΩ, ueefyOe ›eâceMe: nesieer :
then the input signal voltage is (a) 4,3.69 (b) 4,3.84
efkeâmeer CE š^ebefpemšj ØeJeOe&keâ ceW meb«eenkeâ ØeeflejesOe 2 kΩ (c) 3.69, 3.84 (d) 4,4
nw~ Fmekesâ efmejeW kesâ yeerÛe mebkesâle (Dee@ef[Ùees efmeiveue) NEET (UG)-01.05.2016
Jeesušlee 4 V nw~ Ùeefo š^ebefpemšj keâe Oeeje ØeJeOe&keâ Ans. (b) :
iegCeebkeâ 100 leLee DeeOeej ØeeflejesOe 1kΩ nw, lees efveJesMe
mebkesâle Jeesušlee keâe ceeve nesiee :-
(a) 10 mV (b) 20 mV
(c) 30 mV (d) 15 mV
NEET (UG)-24.07.2016, PHASE-II
Ans. (b) :

RC VC
IC Given amplification factor B = 0.96
RB
Load Resistance RL = 800Ω
Input Resistance, Rin = 192Ω
IB
Now
 load resistance 
Voltage gain A v = B  
 input resistance 

Physics 648 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
 800  (c) The emitter injects holes into the base of the
= 0.96   p-n-p and electrons into the base region of n-p-
 192  n/Glmepe&keâ p-n-p kesâ DeeOeej ceW keâesšj Deewj Fueskeäš^eveeW keâes
Av = 4 n-p-n kesâ DeeOeej #es$e ceW Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw
 load resistance  (d) The emitter injects holes into the base of n-p-n/
Power gain A p = B2  
 input resistance  Glmepe&keâ n-p-n kesâ DeeOeej ceW keâesšj Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw
 800  NEET (UG)-18.05.2013, Karnataka
= (0.96) 2   Ans. (c) : Emitter Injects holes into the base of p-n-p
 192 
and electrons into the base region of n-p-n.
Ap = 3.84 In p-n-p transistors holes are majority change carriers in
112. The input signal given to a CE amplifier having emitter hence, the emitter, inject hole into the base and
 π  in n-p-n transistors electrons are majority charge
a voltage gain of 150 is Vi = 2cos  15t +  . carriers in emitter, hence the emitter injects electrons
 3
into the base region.
The corresponding output signal will be/efkeâmeer Hence, (c) is correct answer.
CE (GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ) ØeJeOe&keâ keâer Jeesušlee ueefyOe 114. In a common emitter (CE) amplifier having a
150 nw~ Fmekeâe efveJesMe efmeiveue (mebkesâle) voltage gain G, the transistor used has
transconductance 0.03 mho and current gain
 π
Vi = 2cos  15t +  . nw, lees mebiele efveie&le efmeiveue 25. If the above transistor is replaced with
 3 another one with transconductance 0.02 mho
nesiee~ and current gain 20, the voltage gain will be :
 4π   π ef keâmeer GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ (CE) ØeJeOe&keâ keâer Jeesušlee
(a) 300cos  15t +  (b) 300cos 15t +  ueef yOe 'G' nw~ ØeÙegòeâ š^ebefpemšj keâer DevlejeÛeeuekeâlee
 3   3
(š^evmekeâv[keäšwvme) 0.03 cnes Deewj Oeeje ueefyOe 25 nw~
 2π   5π 
(c) 75cos 15t +  (d) 2cos  15t +  Ùeef o Fme š^ebefpemšj kesâ mLeeve hej Skeâ DevÙe š^ebefpemšj keâe
 3   6  GheÙeesie efkeâÙee peeS efpemekeâer DevlejeÛeeuekeâlee 0.02 cnes
AIPMT Re-Exam-25.07.2015 leLee OeejeueefyOe 20 nes lees Jeesušlee ueefyOe nesieer~
π 5 2
Ans. (a) : Vi = 2 cos(15t + ) (a) G (b) G
3 4 3
V0 1
Voltage gain : Av = where V0 is the output voltage (c) 1.5 G (d) G
Vi 3
π NEET (UG)-05.05.2013

∴ V0 = A v × Vi = 150 × 2 cos 15t +  R
 3 Ans. (b) : Av = β o
Ri
 π
= 300 cos 15t +  Here β = Current gain
 3
Av = Voltage gain
In CE amplifier, V0 and Vi have a phase difference of π Ro = Output resistance
between them.
Ri = Input resistance
 π 
∴ V0 = 300 cos 15t + + π  R
 3  G = 25 × o ................(i)
R i
 4π  Transconductance (Gm) = 0.03 mho
V0 = 300 cos 15t + 
 3  β
Gm =
113. One way in which the operation of a n-p-n RI
transistor differs from that of a p-n-p/ n-p-n kesâ β 25
mebÛeeueve keâe Skeâ lejerkeâe š^ebefpemšj p-n-p mes efYeVe Ri = =
G m 0.03
neslee nw- Use the above value in eqn (i)
(a) The emitter junction is reversed biased in n-p-
Ro
n/Sceeršj pebkeäMeve n-p-n ceW efjJeme& yeeÙeme nw G = 25 ×
 25 
(b) The emitter junction injects minority carriers  
into the base region of the p-n-p/ Sceeršj pebkeäMeve  0.03 
DeuhemebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ keâes p-n-p kesâ DeeOeej #es$e ceW 25 × R o × 0.03
= ............ (ii)
Glmeefpe&le keâjlee nw 25

Physics 649 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
β' 20 efkeâmeer CE š^ebefpemšj ØeJeOe&keâ ceW, meb«eenkeâ ØeeflejesOe 2kΩ
Now, Gm = 0.02 mho, R i = = efkeâ efmejeW hej ßeJÙe efmeiveue Jeesušlee 2V nw Ùeefo DeeOeej
G 'm 0.02
Voltage gain Av = G' ØeeflejesOe 1kΩ nw leLee š^ebefpemšj keâe Oeeje ØeJeOe& 100 nw
R Ro
lees efveJesMe efmeiveue Jeesušlee nw~
G ' = β '× o = 20 × (a) 1mV (b) 10mV
Ri  20 
  (c) 0.1 V (d) 1.0 V
 0.02  AIPMT (Screening)-2012
20 × R o × 0.02 Ans. (b) : Given, Collector Resistance, Rc = 2kΩ output
G' = ................ (iii)
20 voltage, Vo = 2V
divide eqn (ii) & (iii) Base resistance, RB = 1kΩ
R Current amplification factor, β = 100
25 × o × 0.03 For input signal, Vin = IBRB
G 25
=
G' Ro I R
20 × × 0.02 Vin = C B
20 β
G 3 I
= For base current, IB = C
G' 2 β
2 VC 2
G' = G IB = = (QVC = ICRC )
3 R Cβ ( 2000 × 100 )
115. The input resistance of a silicon transistor is IB = 10µA
100 Ω. Base current is changed by 40 µA which Input signal voltage,
results in a change in collector current by 2mA. Vin = IBRB
This transistor is used as a common emitter = 10 ×10–6 ×103
amplifier with a load resistance of 4KΩ. The Vin = 10 mv
voltage gain of the amplifier is 117. Transfer characteristics (output voltage (V0) vs
efkeâmeer efmeefuekeâve š^ebefpemšj keâe efveJesMe ØeeflejesOe 100 Ω input voltage (Vi) for a base biased transistor in
nw~ DeeOeej Oeeje ceW 40µA kesâ heefjJele&ve mes meb«eenkeâ Oeeje CE configuration is as shown in the figure. For
ceW 2mA keâe heefjJele&ve neslee nw~ Fme š^ebefpemšj keâe, using transistor as a switch, it is used.
eqkeâmeer Yeer DeeOeej yeeÙeefmele š^eBefpemšj kesâ efueÙes CE
GYeÙeefve‰- Glmepe&keâ - ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ ™he ceW, 4KΩ uees[
efJevÙeeme ceW DevlejCe DeefYeue#eCe [efveie&le Jeesušlee (V0)
ØeeflejesOe kesâ meeL%e GheÙeesie efkeâÙee ieÙee nw lees, ØeJeOe&keâ
leLee efveJesMe Jeesušlee (Vi) kesâ yeerÛe] DeejsKe ceW oMee&Ùee
keâer Jeesušlee ueefyOe nesieer:- ieÙee nw~ š^eBefpemšj keâe efmJeÛe kesâ ™he ceW GheÙeesie keâjves
(a) 4000 (b) 1000 kesâ efueÙes, Fmekeâe GheÙeesie efkeâÙee peelee nw~
(c) 2000 (d) 3000
AIPMT (Mains)-2012
Ans. (c) : • Current gain (β) = ∆IC/∆IB
where, ∆IC = change in collector current = 2 mA = 2 ×
10–3 A
∆IB = change in base current = 40 µA = 40 × 10–6A
2 × 10−3
∴β= = 50
40 × 10−6 (a) In region II/ #es$e II ceW
R  (b) In region I/#es$e I ceW
• Voltage gain = β ×  out  (c) In region III/#es$e III ceW
 R in 
(d) Both in region (I) and (III)
Where, Rout = Output Resistance = 4K Ω = 4 × 103Ω
Rin = Input Resistance = 100Ω
#es$e (I) leLee #es$e (III) oesveeW ceW
AIPMT (Screening)-2012
 4 × 103 
∴ Voltage gain = 50 ×   = 2000. Ans. (d) :
 100 
∴ Voltage gain by Amplifier is 2000
116. In a CE transistor amplifier, the audio signal
voltage across the collector resistance of 2kΩ is
2V. If the base resistance is 1kΩ and the
current amplification of the transistor is 100,
the input signal voltage is:
Physics 650 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Region I – Cut off Region Ans. (d) : Given: Voltage gain = 50
Region II – Active Region Input impedance RI/P = 100Ω
Region III – Saturation Region Output impedance RO/P = 200Ω
Transistor as switch is used in cut off or Saturation Power gain = ?
Region.  RO P   200 
Voltage gain = β  ⇒ 50 = β   ⇒ β = 25
118. For transistor action/š^ebefpemšj ef›eâÙee kesâ efueÙes–  R I P   100 
(1) Base, emitter and collector regions should  
have similar size and doping Where, β is amplification factor.
concentrations./DeeOeej, Glmepe&ve Deewj meb«eenkeâ Power gain = β × voltage gain = 25 × 50= 1250
#es$eeW keâe meceeve Deekeâej Deewj meceeve ceeove meevõlee 120. A transistor is operated in common-emitter
nesveer ÛeeefnÙes configuration at Vcb = 2V such that a change in
(2) The base region must be very thin and the base current from 100 μA to 200 μA
lightly doped./DeeOeej #es$e yengle heleuee nesvee produces a change in the collector current from
5 mA to 10 mA. The current gain is :
Deewj keâce ceeefole nesvee ÛeeefnS Skeâ š^ebefpemšj keâes VC = 2V hej GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ kesâ
(3) The emitter-base junction is forward
™he ceW keâece ueeÙee ieÙee nw~ efpeme kesâ DeeOeej ceW 100µA
biased and base-collector junction is
reverse biased/Glmepe&keâ–DeeOeej mebefOe De«e mes 200µA keâe heefjJele&ve meb«eenkeâ keâer Oeeje ceW 5mA mes
yeeÙeefmele Deewj DeeOeej meb«eenkeâ mebefOe he§e yeeÙeefmele 10 mA keâe heefjJele&ve keâj oslee nw~ Oeeje ueeYe nesiee:
nesveer ÛeeefnÙes (a) 50 (b) 75
(c) 100 (d) 150
(4) Both the emitter-base junction as well as
AIMPT-2009
the base-collector junction are forward
biased/Glmepe&keâ–DeeOeej mebefOe Deewj DeeOeej– Ans. (a) : Given Base current changes from 100 µA to
200 µA so,
meb«eenkeâ mebefOe oesveeW ner De«e yeeÙeefmele nesveer ÛeeefnÙes
∆IB = 200 – 100 = 100µ.A
efvecveefueefKele keâLeveeW kesâ ÙegiceeW ceW mes keâewve mee "erkeâ Current changes from 5 mA to 10 mA so,
nw ? ∆Ic = 10 – 5 = 5 mA
(a) (4) and (1) (b) (1) and (2)
∆I c 5×10-3
(c) (2) and (3) (d) (3) and (4) Current gain β = = = 50
∆I B 100×10-6
AIPMT (Mains)-2010
Ans. (c) : Transistor action refers to the amplifying 121. The voltage gain of an amplifier with 9%
action: negative feedback is 10. The voltage gain
without feedback will be –
1. An emitter is doped more than a collector the width
of the collector is more. 9% $e+Ceelcekeâ hegveefve&JesMe nesves hej Skeâ DeeJeOe&keâ keâe
2. Emitter-base junction is forward biased . i.e. VEB is Jees ušlee ueeYe 10 neslee nw~ efyevee hegveefve&JesMe kesâ Jeesušlee
forward bias collector-base junction is reversed bias ueeYe nesiee :-
i.e VCB is reverse bias. (a) 1.25 (b) 100
3. The base region is very thin and lightly doped to (c) 90 (d) 10
minimize the recombination of carriers injected from AIPMT-2008
the emitter. Ans. (b) : Given:- Voltage gain of an amplifier with
4. Base region can be anything n or p depending on the
9
type if it is pnp transistor or npn transistor feedback, Avf = 10 negative feedback β = 9% =
respectively. 100
Voltage gain without feedback = Av
119. A common emitter amplifier has voltage gain
of 50, an input impedance of 100Ω and an Av
Using formula A vf =
output impedance of 200Ω. The power gain of 1 + βA v
the amplifier is:- Av 9
Skeâ GYeÙeefve… ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ efueÙes Jeesušlee ueeYe 50 nw, ⇒ 10 = or 10 + A v = A v
9 10
1+ Av
efveefJe… ØeefleyeeOee 100Ω Deewj efveie&le ØeefleyeeOee 200Ω 100
nw~ ØeJeOe&keâ keâe Meefòeâ ueeYe nesiee:- ⇒ 0.1 Av = 10
(a) 100 (b) 500 ⇒ Av = 100
(c) 1000 (d) 1250 Note: Process of injecting a fraction of output energy of
AIPMT-2007 some device back to the input is known as feedback.
Physics 651 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
When the feedback energy (Voltage or current) is out of Ans. (c) : Given :-
phase with the input signal and thus opposes it, Then it Base current changes from 100 µA to 150 µA
is called negative feedback voltage gain with feedback so ∆IB = 150 – 100 = 50 µA
Av Current changes from 5 mA to 10 mA
A vf =
1 + βA v ∆IC = 10 – 5 = 5 mA
122. A transistor-oscillator using a resonant circuit ∆I 5 × 10 −3
Now current gain β = C = = 100
with an inductor L (of negligible resistance) ∆I B 50 × 10 −6
and a capacitor C in series produce oscillations
of frequency f. If L is doubled and C is changed 124. For a transistor IC = 0.96, then current gain
to 4C, the frequency will be:- IE
Skeâ š^ebefpemšj-oesuekeâ ceW Devegveeoer heefjheLe keâe ØeÙeesie for common emitter configuration
efkeâÙee ieÙee nw efpemeceW Øesjkeâ L (ØeeflejesOe ceeve veieCÙe) I
Deewj mebOeeefj$e C keâes ßeb=Keueeyeæ peesÌ[e ieÙee nw~ FmeceW efkeâmeer š^eefvpemšj kesâ efueS C = 0.96 nw, lees GYeÙeefve‰
IE
DeeJe=efòe f kesâ oesueve hewoe nesles nQ~ Ùeefo L keâes ogiegvee keâj Glmepe&keâ efJevÙeeme (CE) keâe Oeeje ueeYe nesiee -
efoÙee peeS Deewj C keâes 4C ceW yeoue efoÙee peeS, lees (a) 12 (b) 6
Øeehle DeeJe=efòe keâe ceeve nes peeSiee:- (c) 48 (d) 24
f AIPMT-2002
(a) (b) 8f
4 IC
f f = 0.96
Ans. (d) : Given-
(c) (d) IE
2 2 2 IC = Collector current, IE = Emitter current
AIPMT-2006 Current gain of a common emitter transistor (β) is
Ans. (c) : Given defined as ratio of Collector current (IC) to the Base
Case I. L1 = L, C1 = C, f1 = f current (IB).
Case II. L2 = 2L, C2 = 4C, f2 = ? Also, IE = IB + IC ⇒ IB = IE – IC
1 Now,
we know f =
2π L.C I IC
β= C =
1 1 I B IE − IC
f1 = , f2 =
2π L1C1 2π L 2 C 2 Now,
IE 1
1 1 =
⇒ f1 = , f2 = IC 0.96
2π L.C 2π 2L4C
I −I 1 0.04
f2 1 2π LC ∴ E C = −1 =
= × IC 0.96 0.96
f1 2π 2L.4C 1
IC 0.96
f2 L.C 1 1 ∴β= = = 24
= = = I E − IC 0.04
f1 2L.4C 8 2 2
I
f1 f 125. For a common emitter circuit if C = 0.98 then
∴ f2 = = {Q f1 = f } IE
2 2 2 2
current gain for common emitter circuit will be:-
123. A transistor is operated in common emitter
I
configuration at constant collector voltage VC = Ùeefo Skeâ GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ heefjheLe ceW C = 0.98 lees
1.5 V such that a change in the base current IE
from 100 μA to 150 μA produces a change in GYeÙeefve‰ Glmepe&keâ kesâ efueS Oeeje ueeYe nesiee-
the collector current from 5 mA to 10 mA. The (a) 49 (b) 98
current gain (β) is:-/Skeâ š^ebefpemšj keâes efmLej (c) 4.9 (d) 25.9
Jeesušlee VC = 1.5 V hej meeJe& Glmepe&keâ efJevÙeeme ceW AIPMT-2001
ÛeueeÙee pee jne nw efpememes DeeOeej Oeeje ceW 100 µA mes I
Ans. (a) : Given, C = 0.98 IC = collector current
150 µA hejefJele&ve mes meb«eener Oeeje 5 mA mes 10 mA IE
ceW yeoue peeleer nw~ Oeeje ueefyOe (β) nesieer:- IE = emitter current
(a) 67 (b) 75 IB = Base current
(c) 100 (d) 50 ⇒ I c = 0.98I E
AIPMT-2006
Physics 652 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Now, base current IB = IE – IC = IE – 0.98 IE 128. For amplification by a triode, the signal to be
= 0.02IE amplified is given to/efkeâmeer š^eÙees[ Éeje efmeiveue keâes
I 0.98 ØeJeefOe&le keâjves kesâ efueS, Gmes efoÙee peelee nw:
Therefore, current gain = C = = 49
I B 0.02 (a) the cathode/kewâLees[ hej
∴ Current gain for common emitter circuit will be = 49 (b) the grid/ef«e[ hej
126. When using a triode, as an amplifier, the (c) the glass envelope/keâeBÛe SvJesuehe hej
electrons are emitted by (d) the anode/Svees[ hej
peye Skeâ š^eÙees[ keâe GheÙeesie ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ ™he ceW efkeâÙee AIPMT-1992
peelee nw, lees Fueskeäš^e@ve Ans. (b) : The amplifying action of a triode is based on
(a) grid and collected by cathode only/ef«e[ Éeje the fact that a small change in grid voltage, causes a
large change in plate current.
Glmeefpe&le Deewj kewâLees[ Éeje meb«eefnle efkeâS peeles nQ~
The AC input signal which is to be amplified is
(b) cathode and collected by the anode only/kewâLees[ superimposed on the grid potential.
Éeje Glmeefpe&le Deewj Svees[ Éeje meb«eefnle efkeâS peeles nQ~ 129. The part of the transistor which is heavily
(c) anode and collected by cathode only/Svees[ Éeje doped to produce large number of majority
Glmeefpe&le Deewj kewâLees[ Éeje meb«eefnle efkeâS peeles nQ~ carriers is/š^ebefpemšj keâe Jen efnmmee efpemes DeefOekeâ
(d) anode and collected by the grid and by mebKÙee ceW yengmebKÙekeâ Jeenkeâ GlheVe keâjves kesâ efueS
cathode/Svees[ Éeje Glmeefpe&le Deewj ef«e[ Je kewâLees[ Éeje DelÙeefOekeâ Deheefceefßele efkeâÙee peelee nw:
meb«eefnle efkeâS peeles nQ~ (a) emitter/Glmepe&keâ (b) base/DeeOeej
AIPMT-1996 (c) collector/meb«eenkeâ
Ans. (b): When using a triode, as an amplifier, the (d) any of the above depending upon the nature
electrons are emitted by cathode and collected by the of transistor/š^ebefpemšj keâer Øeke=âefle hej efveYe&j keâjles ngS
anode only.
• In electrolysis of water, hydrogen is collected at
Ghejesòeâ ceW mes keâesF& Yeer
cathode and oxygen is collected at the anode. AIPMT-1993
• Triodes are used for amplifiers and oscillators. Ans. (a) : The emitter is heavily doped, so that it can
The unit of mutual conductance of a triode value is inject a large number of charge carriers (electrons or
siemen. holes) into the base on the other hand, the base is
always lightly doped and very thin so that it always
• When a triode is used as an amplifier; the input and lightly doped and very thin so that it can pass most of
output voltages are in the opposite phase. So the phase the emitter injected charge carriers to the collector.
difference between the input and output voltages is 180º
130. Radiowaves of constant amplitude can be
or π
generated with/efveÙele DeeÙeece keâer jsef[Ùees lejbieW
• Triode: A triode is a vacuum tube with three
electrodes which are a cathode Anode and a control
efkeâmemes GlheVe keâer pee mekeâleer nw?
grid. (a) FET (b) filter/efheâušj
Vacuum triodes were used for amplification purposes (c) rectifier/efo°keâejer (d) oscillator/oesuekeâ
before the discovery of transistors. AIPMT-1989
127. When n-p-n transistor is used as an amplifier, Ans. (d) : Radio waves of constant amplitude can be
then/peye Skeâ n-p-n š^ebefpemšj keâes ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ ™he ceW produced by using oscillator with proper feedback.
GheÙeesie efkeâÙee peelee nw, lees Radio waves are electromagnetic radiation. An
oscillator can be used to produce electromagnetic
(a) electrons move from collector to base/Fueskeäš^e@ve
waves. An oscillator operates on the oscillation
meb«eenkeâ mes DeeOeej keâer Deesj ØeJeeefnle nesles nQ~ principle. It converts DC signal to AC signal.
(b) holes move from base to emitter/nesue DeeOeej mes 131. For an electronic valve, the plate current I and
Glmepe&keâ keâer Deesj ØeJeeefnle nesles nQ~ plate voltage V in the space charge limited
(c) electrons move from base to collector/Fueskeäš^e@ve region are related as/Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@efvekeâ JeeuJe ceW
DeeOeej mes meb«eenkeâ keâer Deesj ØeJeeefnle nesles nQ~ huesš Oeeje I leLee huesš Jeesušlee V nw, lees V leLee I
(d) electrons move from emitter to base/Fueskeäš^e@ve mebyebefOele nQ:
Glmepe&keâ mes DeeOeej keâer Deesj ØeJeeefnle nesles nQ~ (a) I is proportional to V3/2/I,V3/2 kesâ meceevegheeleer nw~
AIPMT-1996 (b) I is proportional to V2/3/I,V2/3 kesâ meceevegheeleer nw~
Ans. (c) : When NPN transistor is used as an amplifier, (c) I is proportional to V/I,V kesâ meceevegheeleer nw~
majority charge carrier electrons of N-type emitter (d) I is proportional to V2/I,V2 kesâ meceevegheeleer nw~
move form emitter to base and then base to collector.
AIPMT-1992
Physics 653 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (a): Child's law (or the child - Langmuir Law or 134. The device that can act as a complete electronic
three-halves-power law) gives the maximum space- circuit is–/Jen Ùegefòeâ pees Skeâ mechetCe& efJeÅegleerÙe heefjheLe
charge - limited current in a planar diode of infinite keâer lejn JÙeJenej keâjleer nw –
radius (i.e, one-dimensional beam) as a function of the
length and potential difference between anode and (a) Junction diode/pebkeäMeve [eÙees[
cathode. (b) Integrated circuitFvšer«esšsš heefjheLe
• According to child's law (c) Junction transistor/mebefOe š^ebefpemšj
I = kV3/2 (d) Zener diode/peervej [eÙees[
Thus I ∝ V3/2
AIPMT (Screening)-2010
132. Common emitter circuit is used as an amplifier,
its current gain is 50. If input resistance is 1 Ans. (b) : Integrated circuit are miniature electronic
kΩ and input voltage is 5 volt then output circuit produced within a single crystal of semiconductors
current will be/GYeÙeefve… Glmepe&keâ heefjheLe keâes such as silicon they contain million of transistors, resistor
ØeJeOe&keâ kesâ ™he ceW keâece efueÙee peelee nw efpemekeâe Oeeje or capacitors. They widely used in memory circuit, micro
computer, pocket calculator and electronic watch on
ueeYe 50 nw Ùeefo efveJesMeer ØeeflejesOe 1 kΩ nes Je efveJesMeer account of their low cost and bulk reliability into specific
Jeesušlee 5V nes efveie&le Oeeje nesieer– regions of the semiconductor crystals.
(a) 250 mA (b) 30 mA 135. In a common base amplifier the phase
(c) 50 mA (d) 100 mA difference between the input signal voltage and
AIPMT-1998 the output voltage is
Ans. (a) : In common emitter configuration of a transistors Skeâ GYeÙeefve‰ DeeOeej ØeJeOe&keâ ceW efveJesMe efmeiveue
the input current is a base current IB Input current -
By ohm's law,
Jeesušlee Deewj efveie&le Jeesušlee kesâ yeerÛe keâueevlej neslee nw:
V = IR π π
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d) π
V 4 2
IB =
R AIPMT-1990
V 5 Ans. (a) : Phase difference = output voltage-Input
I B = = 3 = 5 × 10−3 A
R 10 voltage φ = V 0 – V i
Also current gain, Note- we know that in a common base amplifier the
I  output current  input signal is amplified but remains in phase with the
β = C = 50   output signal. We get to know that the difference of
IB  input current  output voltage and input voltage will be equal to zero
IC
⇒ 50 = φ=O
5 × 10−3 Therefore, the phase difference of input signal voltage
⇒ IC = 250 mA and output voltage is zero.
133. The correct relation for α, β for a transistor :
š^ebefpemšj kesâ efueS α, β kesâ ceOÙe mener mecyevOe nw – 28.6 NCERT Exemplar Problems
1− α α
(a) β = (b) β = 136. The conductivity of a semiconductor increases
α 1− α
with increase in temperature because/leeheceeve ceW
β −1
(c) α = (d) αβ =1 Je=efæ kesâ meeLe DeOe&Ûeeuekeâ keâer Ûeeuekeâlee yeÌ{ peeleer nw
β
AIPMT-2000 keäÙeeWefkeâ-
I (a) number density of free current carriers
Ans. (b) : α = C ...(1) IC = Collector current increases./cegòeâ Oeeje JeenkeâeW keâe mebKÙee IevelJe yeÌ{
IE
IE = Emitter current
peelee nw
I (b) relaxation time increases./efJeßeece keâeue yeÌ{ peelee nw
β= C ...(2) IB = Base current (c) both number density of carriers and relaxation
IB
time increase./Oeeje ØeJeen keâe mebKÙee IevelJe leLee
Q IE = IB + IC
Now, divide LHS & RHS by IC.
efJeßeece keâeue oesveeW yeÌ{ peeles nQ
I E I B IC (d) number density of current carries increases,
= + relaxation time decreases but effect of
IC IC IC decrease in relaxation time is much less than
1 1 increases in number density./Oeeje ØeJeen keâe
= +1 (from equation (1) & (2)
α β mebKÙee IevelJe yeÌ{ peelee nw Deewj efJeßeece keâe meceÙe keâce
α nes peelee nw uesefkeâve efJeßeece meceÙe ceW keâceer keâe ØeYeeJe
β= IevelJe ceW Je=efæ keâer leguevee ceW yengle keâce neslee nw~
1− α

Physics 654 YCT

 Join Telegram: @apna_library
Ans. (d) : The conductivity of a semiconductor increase (c) D1 and D2 are both forward biased and hence current
with increases in temperature because the number flows from A to B./D1 SJeb D2 oesveeW heMÛeyeeÙeefmele nw, Dele: A
density of current carries increases, relaxation time mes B keâer Deesj Oeeje ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~
decreases but effect of decrease in relaxation is much (d) D1 and D2 are both reverse biased and hence no
less than increase in number density. current flows from A to B and vice versa./ D1 SJeb
137. In figure, V0 is the potential barrier across a p-n D2 oesveeW heMÛeyeeÙeefmele nQ, Dele: A mes B keâer Deesj DeLeJee
junction, when no battery is connected across the B mes A keâer Deesj keâesF& Oeeje ØeJeeefnle veneR nesleer~
junction./efÛe$e ceW efkeâmeer mebefOe [eÙees[ kesâ efueS mebefOe kesâvõ mes
Ans. (b) :
otj peeves hej otjer kesâ meeLe mebefOe kesâ efmejeW hej efJeYeJe ØeeÛeerj ceW
Devlej keâes oMee&Ùee ieÙee nw~ FmeceW VO mebefOe kesâ efmejeW hej Jen
efJeYeJe ØeeÛeerj nw pees leye ØeYeeJeer nesleer nw peye mebefOe kesâ efmejeW
kesâ yeerÛe keâesF& yewšjer ve pegÌ[er nes~

When the p-type is connected to the positive terminal of

the battery and n-type to the negative terminal then the
(a) 1 and 3 both correspond to forward bias of P-N Junction is said to forward biased. Therefore D2 is
junction/1 SJeb 3 oesveeW De«eyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ mebiele nQ~ forward biased.
(b) 3 corresponds to forward bias of junction and 1 When the p-type is connected to the negative terminal of
corresponds to reverse bias of junction/3 the battery and n-type to the positive terminal then P-N
De«eyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ mebiele Deewj 1 heMÛeyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ Junction is reserves biased. Therefore D1 is reverse biased
mebiele nw~ Hence, the current flows through the junction from B to A.
Method-II,
(c) I corresponds to forward bias and 3 corresponds
For diode D1-
to reverse bias of junction/1 De«eyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ
Vp – Vn = 0 –10 = –10V
mebiele Deewj 3 heMÛeyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ mebiele nw~ So, D1 is in reverse bias.
(d) 3 and 1 both correspond to reverse bias of For diode D2,
junction /3 SJeb 1 oesveeW heMÛeyeeÙeefmele mebefOe kesâ mebiele nQ~ Vp – Vn = 0 – (–10) = 10V
Ans. (b) : When the P-n Junction is forward biased it So, D2 is in forward bias.
opposes the potential barrier and when it is in reversed 139. A 220 V ac supply is connected between points
biased it supports the potential barrier. As a result the A and B as shown in figure. What will be the
potential barrier has increased, the height of the potential difference V across the capacitor.?/
potential barrier is decreased when the pn-junction is 220 V ac efJeÅegle ØeoeÙe efyevogDeeW A SJeb B kesâ yeerÛe
forward biased. From the fig, the number 3 is forward pegÌ[e nw~ efÛe$e ceW mebOeeefj$e kesâ efmejeW hej efJeYeevlej V
biased while the number 1 is reverse biased. The efkeâlevee nesiee?
number 3 denotes the Junctions forward bias where as
(a) 220 V (b) 110 V
the number 1 denotes the junction's reverse bias.
138. In figure, assuming the diodes to be ideal,/efÛe$e (c) 0 V/MetvÙe (d) 220 2 V
ceW [eÙees[eW keâes DeeoMe& ceeveW lees– Ans. (d) : Given,

Vrms = 220V
Capacitor is charged to maximum potential difference
(a) D1 is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased V = Vmax = Vrms × 2
and hence current flows from A to B./D1
De«eyeeÙeefmele nw Deewj D2 heMÛeyeeÙeefmele nw, Dele: Oeeje A = 220 2
mes B keâer Deesj ØeJeeefnle nesleer nw~ 140. Hole is/ nes u e nes l ee nw–
(b) D2 is forward biased and D1 is reverse biased (a) an anti-particle of electron./Fueskeäš^e@ve keâe
and hence no current flows from B to A and ØeeflekeâjCe~
vice versa./D2 De«eyeeÙeefmele nw Deewj D1 heMÛeyeeÙeefmele (b) a vacancy created when an electron leaves a
nw Dele: B mes A keâer Deesj DeLeJee A mes B keâer Deesj keâesF& covalent bond./menmebÙeespeer DeeyebOe mes Skeâ Fueskeäš^e@ve
Oeeje ØeJeeefnle veneR nesleer~ otj efÚškeâ peeves hej Glhevve efjefkeäle~
Physics 655 YCT
 Join Telegram: @apna_library
(c) absence of free electrons./cegkeäle Fueskeäš^e@veeW keâer 142. In the circuit shown in figure, if the diode
DevegheefmLeefle forward voltage drop is 0.3 V, the voltage
difference between A and B is/efÛe$e ceW oMee&S
(d) an artificially created particle./ke=âeflece ™he mes
me=efpele keâesF& keâCe~ heefjheLe ceW Ùeefo [eÙees[ keâe De«eefoMe Jeesušlee heele
Ans. (b) : A hole in a material is a vacancy that is 0.3V nw, lees A SJeb B kesâ yeerÛe efJeYeJeevlej nw–
created when an electron leaves its position, thereby
creating a positive charge. This positive charge can
move through the material just like an electron and is
offer referred as a positive charge carrier.
141. The output of the given circuit in figure/efÛe$e
ceW efoS ieS heefjheLe keâe efveie&ce nesiee–
(a) 1.3 V (b) 2.3 V
(c) 0 (d) 0.5 V
Ans. (b) : Let V be the potential difference between A
and B.
(a) would be zero at all times./nj meceÙe MetvÙe~ Applying KVL across points A and B.
–3 3
(b) Would be like a half wave rectifier with VA – 0.2 ×10 ×5×10 –0.3 –0.2×5–VB= 0
positive cycles in output./efkeâmeer DeOe& lejbie VA – 0.2×5 – 0.3 – 0.2×5 –VB = 0
efo°keâejer keâer YeeBefle efveie&ce ceW Oeveelcekeâ DeOe& Ûe›eâ neWies~ VA – 1.0 – 0.3 –1.0 – VB = 0
(c) would be like a half wave rectifier with VA – 2–0.3 – VB = 0
negative cycles in output./efkeâmeer DeOe& lejbie VA – VB = 2.3 V
efo°keâejer keâer YeeBefle efveie&ce ceW $e+Ceelcekeâ DeOe&Ûe›eâ neWies~ 143. Truth table for the given circuit in figure is/
(d) would be like that of a full wave efÛe$e ceW efoS ieS heefjheLe kesâ efueS melÙeeheve meejCeer nw–
rectifier./efkeâmeer hetCe& lejbie efo°keâejer kesâ efveie&ce pewmee~
Ans. (b) : The diode is forward biased during the
positive half cycle of the AC voltage and reverse biased
during the negative half cycle.
For the +ve half cycle of the AC source voltage, diode
is forward biased and acts as a short circuit. the
equivalent circuit shown in the fig. below.

Hence, maximum potential difference will appear

across resistance.
• For a negative half cycle of the AC source voltage,
diode is reverse biased and acts as a open circuit. The
equivalent circuit shown in the fig below–
Ans. (c) :

Hence, no current can flow to the circuit and output

voltage is equal to zero.
The final output voltage waveform is as shown in fig.
A B C = A.B D = A .B E=C+D
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1
Hence, the output in the given fig would be like a half 1 0 0 0 0
wave rectifier with positive cycle in output. 1 1 1 0 1

Physics 656 YCT